2023 Division 02-16 - Standard Construction Specific

2023 Standard
Specifications
NEW IN THE 2023 REVISION
Standard Construction Specifications for Wastewater Collection Systems, Water Lines, Storm
Drainage, Street Paving, and Traffic – 2023 Revisions to the 2022 Edition
The City of Houston Standards Review Committee (SRC) was established to review, revise, and
update documents and standards for Houston Public Works. Public input and participation was
requested by the submittal of proposals for suggested changes, comments, recommendations and
other information.
The 2022-2023 City of Houston Review Cycle Committee reviewed Infrastructure Design
Manual (IDM) Chapters 15-17 along with their associated standard drawings and standard
construction specifications. Refer to the IDM Executive Summary for a summary of major
updates to the design requirements made this review cycle. Below is a list of Division 02-16
standard specifications and standard drawings that were revised during this review cycle. The
Standard Construction Specifications have change bars on the left side of the page to indicate a
major revision has taken place.
New Standard Specifications: Standard Specifications Retired/Deleted (Continued):
• 02871 – Bike Racks • 16743 – Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)

• 02890 – Pedestrian Crosswalk System Rectangular Modem Assembly
Rapid Flashing Beacon (RRFB) • 16744 – Ethernet Video MPEG-4 Encoder
• 16130 – Advanced Transportation Controller (ATC) • 16745 – Ethernet Video MPEG-4 Decoder
Cabinet Assembly • 16751 – Wireless Magnetometer Vehicle Detection
System
Standard Specifications Updated*:
• 02221 Removing Existing Pavements, Structures, New Standard Details:

Wood, and Demolition Debris • 02760-11 – Bicycle Intersection Treatments (Sheet 2)
• 02581 – Street Lighting Conduit • 02771-02 – 14” Wide Precast Curb Stop Delineator
• 02582 – Traffic Pole Assemblies - Steel for Bicycle Lanes
• 02775 – Concrete Sidewalks • 02775-09 – Perpendicular Curb Ramp
• 02893 – Traffic Signal Construction • 02775-10 - Retrofit Bikeway at Floating Bus Stop
• 02871-01 – Bicycle Rack Details
• 02921 – Hydro Mulch Seeding
• 16711 – Traffic Signal Conduit Standard Details Updated*:
• 16712 – Solar Powered School Zone Field
Equipment • 02582-02 (prev. 02583-04A) - Traffic Signal
• 16715 – Vehicle Signal Heads Structures (Sheet 1 of 2)
• 02582-03 (prev. 02893-04B) - Traffic Signal
• 16716 – Pedestrian Signal Heads
Structures (Sheet 2 of 2)
• 16718 – Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Heads –Light • 02751-01 - Concrete Pavement Details
Emitting Diode (LED) Circular Signal Supplement • 02752-01 - Pavement Expansion and Construction
• 16719 – Countdown Pedestrian Signal Module Joint Details
• 16727 – Traffic Signal Saw-Cut Loop Detector • 02752-02 - Sidewalk Expansion and Construction
• 16732 – Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) Joint Details
System for Traffic Signal Cabinets • 02754-01A - Driveway with 4"x12" Curb for Local
Residential Street
• 16733 – Field Hardened Ethernet Switch
• 02754-01B - Driveway Detail With 6" Curbed
• 16735 – Fiber Optic Splice Enclosure Streets
• 16750 – Accessible Pedestrian Push Button Station • 02754-02 - Driveways with Culverts on Open Ditch
Type Streets
Standard Specifications Retired/Deleted: • 02754-03 - Proposed Driveway Through Sidewalk
with Excessive Elevation Difference
• 16734 – WiMax • 02754-04 - Proposed Sidewalk Through Driveway
• 16738 – Wireless Communication System with Minimal Elevation Difference
RS-1
• 02775-03 - Parallel Curb Ramp
• 02775-04 - Curb Modification for Curb Ramps &
Standard Details Updated* (Cont’d): Crosswalks
• 02775-05 - Commercial & High-Density Conditions
• 02760-01 (prev. 01510-01) - Pavement Markings Curb Ramp Details
General Notes and Legends
• 02775-07 - Detectable Warning Surface (Options)
• 02760-04 (prev. 01510-04) - Standard Pavement
• 02775-08 - Sidewalks and Clear Zone Transit
Marking – Symbols
Corridor Street
• 02760-09 (prev. 01510-09) - Bicycle Lane Pavement
Markings Standard Details Retired/Deleted:
• 02760-10 (prev. 01510-09A) - Bicycle Intersection
Treatments (Sheet 1 of 2) • None
• 02760-11 (prev. 01510-09B) - Bicycle Intersection
Treatments (Sheet 2 of 2) *Only specifications and standard details with technical
• 02775-01 - Typical Sidewalk Layout and Details for changes have been included in the list.
Streets with Curbs
• 02775-02 - Typical Curb Ramp Details
RS-2
CHANGES MADE IN THE 2022 REVISION
The 2021-2022 City of Houston Review Cycle reviewed Infrastructure Design Manual (IDM)
Chapters 1-5 and 13 along with their associated standard drawings and standard construction
specifications. Below are the Division 02-16 standard specifications and standard drawings that
were revised during 2021-2022 review cycle.
New Specifications: New Standard Details:
• 02445 – Jack and Bore/Jack and Mine/Pilot Tube • None

Guided Boring Tunnels
• 02447 – Installation of Water Lines by Slurry Bore Standard Details with major updates:
Specifications with major updates: • None
• 02441 – Microtunneling Standard Details Retired/Deleted:

• 02501 – Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings
• None
• 02504 – Fiberglass Reinforced Pipe
• 02526 – Water Meters
Specifications Retired/Deleted:
• 02447 – Augering Pipe and Conduit
RS-3
Chapters 7, 8, 11 and 14 along with their associated standard drawings and standard construction
specifications. Below are the standard specifications and standard drawings that were revised
during 2020-2021 review cycle.
New Specifications: New Standard Details (Continued):
• 02614 – Large Diameter Line Stop • 16124-02 – Complete Utility Locating System Water
• 02615 – Insertion Valves and Line Stops Service Detail (Water)
• 16124 – Conductive Trace Wire for Non-Metallic • 16124-03 – Complete Utility Locating System
Water Line Pipes Hydrant Detail (Water)
Specifications with major updates: Standard Details with major updates:
• 02082 – Precast Concrete Manholes • 02091-01 – Non-Metallic Frame and Cover

• 02400 – Tunnel Shafts (Wastewater)
• 02431 – Tunnel Grout • 02082-06 – Sanitary Sewer Manhole Vent for Sealed
• 02501 – Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings Manhole (Wastewater)
• 02506 – Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe • 02082-10 – Standard LDWL Access Manhole Details
• 02507 – Prestressed Concrete Cylinder Pipe (Water)
• 02511 – Water Lines • 02317-09 – Standard LDWL Excavation and Backfill
• 02512 – Water Tap and Service Line Installation Detail (Water)
• 02513 – Wet Connections • 02517-01 – LDWL Tunnel and Casing Details for
• 02514 – Disinfection of Water Lines Water Lines 24-Inch and Larger (Water)
• 02517 – Water Line in Tunnels • 02520-01 – Standard Fire Hydrant Detail (Water)
• 02518 – Steel Pipe and Fittings for Large Diameter • 02524-03 – LDWL Air Valve Assembly in Service
Water Lines Manhole Detail (Water)
• 02520 – Fire Hydrants • 15641-01 – Standard LDWL Cathodic Protection
Details for Test Stations (Sheet 1 of 3) (Water)
• 02524 – Air Release and Vacuum Relief Valves
• 15641-02 – Standard LDWL Cathodic Protection
• 02527 – Polyurethane Coatings on Steel or Ductile
Iron Pipe
• 02528 - Polyethylene Encasement/Wrap
• 02613 - Bar-Wrapped Steel Cylinder Pipe
Details for Test Stations & Anodes (Water)
Specifications Retired/Deleted:
Standard Details Retired/Deleted:
• 16717 - Programmable Vehicle Signal Head
• 02081-01 - Storm Sewer Manhole Type "C" for 42"
New Standard Details: Diameter RCP and Smaller
• 02081-02 - Storm Sewer Manhole Type "C" for 48"
• 02082-12 – Storm Sewer Precast Box Manhole
to 72" Diameter RCP
(Storm Water)
• 02081-03 Storm Sewer Manhole Type "C" for 78"
• 02082-13 – Storm Sewer Type ‘C’ Precast Round
Diameter RCP and Greater
Manhole (Storm Water)
• 02081-04 Storm Sewer Manhole Type "C" for
• 16124-01 – Complete Utility Locating System
Proposed Concrete Box Sewer
Sample Plan (Water)
RS-4
chapters 6, 10, and 12 along with their associated standard drawings and standard construction
specifications. Below are the standard specifications and standard drawings that were revised
during the 2019-2020 review cycle.
Specifications with major updates: Standard Details with major updates:
• 02751 - Concrete Paving • 02741-01 - Hot-Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement

• 02752 - Concrete Paving Joints Details
• 02741-04 - Hot-Mix Asphalt Concrete Pavement
Details for Alleys (DELETED)
• 02751-01 - Concrete Pavement Details
• 02754-03 - Proposed Sidewalk Through Driveway
with Excessive Elevation Difference
RS-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 02-16 SPECIFICATIONS
Section Title Pages
DIVISION 2- SITE WORK
UTILITY MATERIALS
02081 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MANHOLES ......................................................................11
02082 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES...................................................................................18
02083 FIBERGLASS MANHOLES. ...................................................................................................9
02085 VALVE BOXES, METER BOXES, AND METER VAULTS ................................................7
02086 ADJUSTING MANHOLES, INLETS, AND VALVE BOXES TO GRADE ..........................4
02088 PRECAST POLYMER CONCRETE MANHOLES ..............................................................11
02090 FRAMES, GRATES, RINGS, AND COVERS.........................................................................4
02091 NON METALLIC FRAMES, GRATES, RINGS, AND COVERS ..........................................4
SITE DEMOLITION
02136 WASTE MATERIAL HANDLING, TESTING AND DISPOSAL..........................................7
02201 SITE PREPARATION, GRADING, RESTORATION AND CLEAN UP FOR
WATER STORAGE TANKS....................................................................................................3
02221 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENTS, STRUCTURES, WOOD, AND
DEMOLITION DEBRIS .........................................................................................................6
02222 ABANDONMENT OF SEWERS .............................................................................................8
02233 CLEARING AND GRUBBING ...............................................................................................2
02260 TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM ...................................................................................................4
EXCAVATION AND FILL

02315 ROADWAY EXCAVATION ...................................................................................................4
02316 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES ......................................................10
02317 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES ............................................................21
02318 EXTRA UNIT PRICE WORK FOR EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL ...............................3
02319 BORROW .................................................................................................................................2
02320 UTILITY BACKFILL MATERIALS .....................................................................................11
02321 CEMENT STABILIZED SAND. ..............................................................................................8
02322 FLOWABLE FILL. ...................................................................................................................4
EMBANKMENT
02330 EMBANKMENT .......................................................................................................................4
SUBGRADE AND ROADBED

02336 LIME STABILIZED SUBGRADE ...........................................................................................8
02337 LIME/FLY ASH STABILIZED SUBGRADE ........................................................................3
02338 PORTLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SUBGRADE .............................................................6
02340 COMPACTED SAND FILL UNDER TANK FLOOR PLATE ...............................................3
TOC-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
TUNNELING, BORING AND JACKING

02400 TUNNEL SHAFTS ....................................................................................................................7
02401 COMMON TUNNEL SHAFTS ................................................................................................6
02425 TUNNEL EXCAVATION AND PRIMARY LINER .............................................................12
02426 SEWER LINE IN TUNNELS ...................................................................................................4
02427 PLASTIC LINER FOR LARGE-DIAMETER CONCRETE SEWERS AND
STRUCTURES ........................................................................................................................13
02431 TUNNEL GROUT .....................................................................................................................8
02441 MICROTUNNELING .............................................................................................................16
02445 JACK AND BORE/JACK AND MINE/PILOT TUBE GUIDED BORING TUNNELS
..................................................................................................................................................18
02447 INSTALLATION OF WATER LINES BY SLURRY BORE ................................................10
02448 PIPE AND CASING AUGERING FOR SEWERS ..................................................................7
FOUNDATION AND LOAD BEARING ELEMENTS

02465 DRILLED SHAFT FOUNDATIONS .......................................................................................4
02476 CAISSION FOR LIFT STATION .............................................................................................6
PIPE MATERIALS
02501 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS ...............................................................................10
02502 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS ...............................................................................................11
02503 COPPER TUBING ....................................................................................................................3
02504 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PIPE ........................................................................................6
02505 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) SOLID AND PROFILE WALL PIPE............7
02506 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE ...........................................................................................12
02507 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE CYLINDER PIPE .................................................................17
02508 EXTRA STRENGTH CLAY PIPE ...........................................................................................4
02509 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PIPE FOR PRESSURE MAINS ...........................................12
02510 POLYPROPYLENE (PP) CORRUGATED WALL PIPE ........................................................5
WATER DISTRIBUTION
02511 WATER LINES .......................................................................................................................21
02512 WATER TAP AND SERVICE LINE INSTALLATION .........................................................7
02513 WET CONNECTIONS ..............................................................................................................4
02514 DISINFECTION OF WATER LINES ......................................................................................5
02515 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PIPELINES ..........................................................................3
02516 CUT, PLUG, AND ABANDONMENT OF WATER LINES ..................................................2
02517 WATER LINE IN TUNNELS ..................................................................................................7
02518 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER LINES........................31
02520 FIRE HYDRANTS ...................................................................................................................6
02521 GATE VALVES .......................................................................................................................6
02522 BUTTERFLY VALVES ............................................................................................................9
02523 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES .........................................................................................3
02524 AIR RELEASE AND VACUUM RELIEF VALVES ..............................................................4
02525 TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES .....................................................................................6
TOC-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
02526 WATER METERS...................................................................................................................13

02527 POLYURETHANE COATINGS ON STEEL OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE ...........................11
02528 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT/WRAP............................................................................9
02529 TAPE COATINGS ON STEEL PIPE .......................................................................................6
SANITARY SEWER
02531 GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS............................................................................................8
02532 SANITARY SEWER FORCE MAINS. ....................................................................................6
02533 ACCEPTANCE TESTING FOR SANITARY SEWERS .......................................................13
02534 SANITARY SEWER SERVICE STUBS OR RECONNECTIONS .......................................12
02550 SLIPLINING SANITARY SEWERS......................................................................................14
02551 SANITARY SEWER RENEWAL BY SPIN CAST PIPE LINING METHOD .....................11
02553 POINT REPAIRS AND OBSTRUCTION REMOVALS.........................................................9
02555 MANHOLE REHABILITATION ...........................................................................................13
02556 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE .......................................................................................................13
02557 FOLDED AND FORMED PIPE ...............................................................................................8
02558 CLEANING AND TELEVISION INSPECTION ...................................................................12
02571 PIPE BURSTING/CRUSHING SANITARY SEWERS .........................................................15
ELECTRICAL AND COMMUNICATION STRUCTURES

02581 STREET LIGHTING CONDUIT .........................................................................................2
02582 TRAFFIC POLE ASSEMBLIES - STEEL ...........................................................................7
02590 STREETLIGHT LUMINAIRES ..............................................................................................6
PIPE CULVERTS
02611 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE ...........................................................................................4
02612 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX SEWERS .......................................................3
02613 BAR WRAPPED STEEL CYLINDER PIPE .........................................................................17
02614 LARGE DIAMETER LINE STOP ............................................................................................6
02615 INSERTION VALVES AND LINE STOPS .............................................................................4
SUBDRAINAGE
02621 GEOTEXTILE ..........................................................................................................................3
STORM DRAINAGE
02631 STORM SEWERS .....................................................................................................................8
02632 CAST-IN-PACE INLETS, HEADWALLS, AND WINGWALLS ..........................................3
02633 PRECAST CONCRETE INLETS, HEADWALLS, AND WINGWALLS .............................4
CULVERTS AND MANUFACTURED CONSTRUCTION

02642 CORRUGATED METAL PIPE ................................................................................................7
02643 PLATE CULVERT STRUCTURES ........................................................................................7
02662 PIPING, VALVES, FITTINGS, AND ACCESSORIES FORWATER STORAGE
TANKS ....................................................................................................................................10
BOUND BASE COURSES
TOC-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
02711 HOT MIX ASPHALT BASE COURSE....................................................................................9

02712 CEMENT STABILIZED BASE COURSE ...............................................................................7
02713 RECYCLED CRUSHED CONCRETE BASE COURSE.........................................................7
02714 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE FOR TEMPORARY DRIVEWAYS .........................................5
FLEXIBLE PAVING
02741 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT. ..............................................................................10
02742 PRIME COAT. ..........................................................................................................................4
02743 TACK COAT .............................................................................................................................3
RIGID PAVING
02751 CONCRETE PAVING ............................................................................................................14
02752 CONCRETE PAVEMENT JOINTS .........................................................................................7
02753 CONCRETE PAVEMENT CURING .......................................................................................3
02754 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS .....................................................................................................2
PAVING SPECIALTIES
02761 COLORED CONCRETE FOR MEDIANS AND SIDEWALKS .............................................2
02762 BLAST CLEANING OF PAVEMENT.....................................................................................2
02764 RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS .........................................................................................3
02765 PREFORMED PAVEMENT MARKINGS ..............................................................................4
02767 THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKINGS .....................................................................7
02768 EPOXY PAVEMENT MARKINGS ........................................................................................8
CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS

02771 CURB, CURB AND GUTTER, AND HEADERS ...................................................................4
02772 CONCRETE MEDIANS AND DIRECTIONAL ISLANDS ....................................................2
02775 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS....................................................................................................6
SITE IMPROVEMENTS AND AMENITIES

02811 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION ....................................................................................................5
02871 BIKE RACKS...........................................................................................................................3
02890 PEDESTRIAN CROSSWALK SYSTEM RECTANGULAR RAPID FLASHING
BEACON (RRFB) .................................................................................................................12
02893 TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONSTRUCTION ..............................................................................21
PLANT PREPARATION
02911 TOPSOIL ..................................................................................................................................3
02912 TREE, PLANT, & HARDSCAPE PROTECTION ...................................................................6
SHRUB AND TREE TRANSPLANTING

02915 TREE PLANTING.....................................................................................................................9
LAWNS AND GRASS

02921 HYDRO MULCH SEEDING. ................................................................................................4
02922 SODDING..................................................................................................................................5
TOC-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
SITE RESTORATION AND REHABILITATION

02951 PAVEMENT REPAIR AND RESTORATION .......................................................................4
02960 MILLING PAVEMENT ............................................................................................................4
02983 REMOVAL AND RESTORATION OF BRICK PAVED STREETS ......................................4
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03315 CONCRETE FOR UTILITY CONSTRUCTION ..................................................................17
DIVISION 4 - MORTAR
04061 MORTAR. .................................................................................................................................5

04210 BRICK MASONRY FOR UTILITY CONSTRUCTION ........................................................5
DIVISION 5 – METALS
05501 METAL FABRICATIONS ........................................................................................................5
DIVISION 9 – FINISHES
09901 PROTECTIVE COATINGS ....................................................................................................32

09971 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS FOR POTABLE WATER STORAGE
TANKS ....................................................................................................................................24
DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13111 CATHODIC PROTECTION FOR WATER TANK INTERIORS ...........................................7

(SACRIFICIAL ANODE)
13112 CATHODIC PROTECTION FOR WATER TANK INTERIORS (ICCP) ............................10
13113 CATHODIC PROTECTION FOR NEW TANK BOTTOMS ................................................12
13201 WELDED STEEL WATER STORAGE TANKS ...................................................................14
13202 REHABILITATION OF WELDED STEEL WATER STORAGE TANKS ..........................11
13203 TANK CLEAN-UP AND DISINFECTION .............................................................................5
13501 SPEED CUSHIONS ..................................................................................................................4
DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL
15640 JOINT BONDING AND ELECTRICAL ISOLATION............................................................9

15641 CORROSION CONTROL TEST STATIONS ..........................................................................6
DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL
16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................................4

16124 CONDUCTIVE TRACE WIRE FOR NON-METALLIC WATER LINE PIPES ...................5
16130 ADVANCED TRANSPORTATION CONTROLLER (ATC) CABINET
TOC-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
ASSEMBLY............................................................................................................................49
16640 CATHODIC PROTECTION FOR PIPELINES......................................................................18
16641 CATHODIC PROTECTION FOR EXISTING TANK BOTTOMS.......................................13
16642 CATHODIC PROTECTION FOR PLANT PIPING ..............................................................18
16644 CATHODIC PROTECTION FOR CLARIFIERS ....................................................................3
16645 CATHODIC PROTECTION FOR WET WELLS ....................................................................3
16709 COMMUNICATIONS CONDUIT ...........................................................................................6
16710 PULL BOXES ...........................................................................................................................4
16711 TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONDUIT..............................................................................................5
16712 SOLAR POWERED SCHOOL ZONE FIELD EQUIPMENT .........................................24
16713 PRE-FORMED LOOPS.............................................................................................................4
16715 VEHICLE SIGNAL HEADS (POLYCARBONATE) (ADJUSTABLE, EXPANDABLE
TYPE)........................................................................................................................................8
16716 PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL HEADS ...........................................................................................4
16718 VEHICLE TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNAL HEADS – LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
(LED) CIRCULAR SIGNAL SUPPLEMENT ...................................................................18
16719 COUNTDOWN PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL MODULE ..........................................................9
16720 TRAFFIC SIGNAL CABLE .....................................................................................................3
16724 EMERGENCY VEHICLE PREEMPTION (EVP) ...................................................................8
16725 DYNAMIC MESSAGE SIGN (DMS) ....................................................................................23
16727 TRAFFIC SIGNAL SAW-CUT LOOP DETECTOR ........................................................20
16730 INTELLIGENT TRANSPORTATION SYSTEM (ITS) CONTROLLER CABINET
ASSEMBLY ..........................................................................................................................220
16731 MODEL 2070 CONTROLLER UNIT ....................................................................................38
16732 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) SYSTEM FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL
CABINETS .............................................................................................................................11
16733 FIELD HARDENED ETHERNET SWITCH .....................................................................10
16735 FIBER OPTIC SPLICE ENCLOSURE ................................................................................4
16736 FIBER DISTRIBUTION UNIT .................................................................................................3
16737 COMMUNICATION SERVICE BOX .....................................................................................6
16739 BLUETOOTH SPECIFICATION (ANONYMOUS WIRELESS ADDRESS MATCHING
DEVICE)....................................................................................................................................6
16740 SINGLE MODE FIBER OPTIC CABLE SYSTEM ...............................................................22
16741 VIDEO COLOR QUAD UNIT .................................................................................................4
16742 VIDEO DETECTION SYSTEM ...............................................................................................8
16746 VIDEO MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE ...................................................................................4
16747 PERMANENT COUNT STATION RADAR VEHICLE SENSING DEVICE (RVSD) .......13
16748 SYSTEM INTEGRATION........................................................................................................2
16750 ACCESSIBLE PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTON STATION ...............................................6
16780 CCTV FIELD EQUIPMENT ....................................................................................................9
16785 GPS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS .......................................................................................6
*Bold Specifications have technical revisions or are new.
TOC-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MANHOLES
SECTION 02081
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MANHOLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cast-in-place concrete manholes for sanitary sewers, water lines and storm sewers,
including box sewers.
B. Pile-supported concrete foundation used for unstable subgrade treatment for manhole
base.
1.02 REALTED SECTIONS
A. Section 01270 – Measurement and Payment
B. Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures
C. Section 02090 – Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers
D. Section 02317 – Excavation and Backfill for Utilities
E. Section 02321 – Cement Stabilized Sand
F. Section 02533 – Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers
G. Section 02911 – Topsoil
H. Section 02921 – Hydro Mulch Seeding
I. Section 02922 – Sodding
J. Section 03315 – Concrete for Utility Construction
K. Section 04061 – Mortar
1.03 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for manholes is on a unit price basis for each manhole installed.
2. Payment for Type C manhole with BB inlet top is on a unit price basis for
each.
02081-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
3. Payment for pile-supported concrete foundation used for unstable subgrade

treatment for manhole base is on a unit price basis for each foundation
installed.
4. Refer to Section 01270 - Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures.
B. Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). If Contract is Stipulated Price Contract, payment for
Work in this Section is included in total Stipulated Price.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASME B 16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and
250.
B. ASTM A 307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded
Rod 60,000 psi Tensile Strength.
C. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
D. ASTM C 923 - Standard Specifications for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced

Concrete Manhole Structures and Pipes.
E. ASTM C 990 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and
Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants.
F. ASTM C 1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic - Cement Grout
(Non-shrink).
G. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of

Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lb/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)).
H. ASTM D 2665 - Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Drain,
Waste and Vent Pipe, and Fittings.
I. ASTM D 2996 - Standard Specification for Filament-wound Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber-

Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe.
J. ASTM D 2997 - Standard Specification for Centrifugally Cast Fiberglass (Glass-

Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe.
K. ASTM F 2306 – Standard Specification for 12 to 60 in. [300 to 1500 mm] Annular
Corrugated Profile – Wall Polyethylene (PE) Pipe and Fittings for Gravity-Flow
Storm Sewer and Subsurface Drainage Applications.
L. ASTM F 2510 – Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced

Concrete Manhole Structures and Corrugated Dual- and Triple-Wall Polyethylene
and Polypropylene Pipes.
02081-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
M. AWWA C 213 - Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipe
and Fittings.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Conform to requirements of Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Submit proposed design mix and test data for each type and strength of concrete.
C. Submit manufacturer's data and details of following items for approval:
1. Frames, grates, rings, and covers.
2. Materials to be used in fabricating drop connections.
3. Materials to be used for pipe connections at manhole walls.
4. Materials to be used for stubs and stub plugs.
5. Plugs to be used for sanitary sewer hydrostatic testing.
6. Installation instructions for forms.
D. Submit structural design calculations, signed and sealed by a licensed Engineer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE
A. Conform to requirements of Section 03315 - Concrete for Utility Construction.
B. Provide Class A concrete with minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi unless
otherwise indicated on Drawings.
C. Design Loading Criteria: Manhole walls, transition slabs, cone tops, and manhole
base slab shall be designed, by manufacturer, to requirements of ASTM C 478,
ASTM C 890, and/or ASTM C 913 for depth as shown on Drawings and to resist
following loads.
1. AASHTO HL-93 design live loading loads as referred to in AASHTO LRFD

Bridge Design Specifications applied to manhole cover and transmitted down
to transition and base slabs.
2. Unit soil weight of 120 pcf located above portions of manhole, including base
slab projections.
3. Lateral soil pressure based on saturated soil conditions producing an at-rest

equivalent fluid pressure of 100 pcf.
02081-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
4. Internal liquid pressure based on unit weight of 63 pcf.
5. Dead load of manhole sections fully supported by transition and base slabs.
D. Design: Manhole walls, transition slabs, cone tops, and manhole base slab shall be
designed according to requirements of ASTM C 478, ASTM C 890 and/or ASTM C
913 and following:
1. Design additional reinforcing steel to transfer stresses at openings. Area of

steel to be no less than shown on Drawings.
2. Wall loading conditions:
a. Saturated soil pressure acting on empty manhole.
b. Manhole filled with liquid to a halfway depth as measured from invert

to cover, with no balancing external soil pressure.
3. Minimum clear distance between two wall penetrations shall be 12-inches or

half diameter of smaller penetration, whichever is greater
2.02 REINFORCING STEEL
2.03 MORTAR
A. Conform to requirements of Section 04061 - Mortar
2.04 MISCELLANEOUS METALS
A. Provide cast-iron frames, grates, rings, and covers conforming to requirements of

Section 02090 - Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers.
2.05 DROP CONNECTIONS AND STUBS
A. Provide drop connections and stubs conforming to same pipe material requirements
used in main pipe, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
2.06 PIPE CONNECTIONS
A. Sanitary Sewers.
1. Provide resilient connectors conforming to requirements of ASTM C 923.

Use the following materials for metallic mechanical devices as defined in
ASTM C 923:
a. External clamps: Type 304 stainless steel
02081-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
b. Internal, expandable clamps on Standard manholes: Type 304

stainless steel, 11 gauge minimum
c. Internal, expandable clamps on corrosion-resistant manholes:
(1) Type 316 stainless steel, 11 gauge minimum
(2) Type 304 stainless steel, 11 gauge minimum, coated with

minimum 16 mil fusion-bonded epoxy conforming to AWWA
C213
2. Where rigid joints between pipe and cast-in-place manhole base are specified
or shown on Drawings, provide polyethylene-isoprene waterstop meeting
physical property requirements of ASTM C 923, such as Pres-Seal WS Series,
or approved equal.
B. Storm Sewers: Connections of concrete pipe to manhole will be set in flexible joint
sealant conforming to ASTM C 990, placed in the middle of the manhole wall and
covering the lower 1/3rd of the opening. Use non-shrink grout for storm sewer pipe
connections to concrete manholes, unless otherwise shown on Drawings. Grout pipe
penetration in place on both inside and outside of manhole.
C. Water Lines
1. Where smooth exterior pipes, i.e., steel, ductile iron, or PVC pipes are
connected to manhole base or barrel, seal space between pipe and manhole
wall with assembly consisting of rubber gasket or links mechanically
compressed to form a watertight barrier. Assemblies: Press-Wedge, Pres-Seal,
Thunderline, Link-Seals, or approved equal. See Drawings for placement of
assembly in manhole sections.
2. When connecting concrete or cement mortar coated steel pipes, or as option

for connecting exterior pipes to manhole base or barrel, space between pipe
and manhole wall may be sealed with an assembly consisting of a stainless
steel power sleeve, stainless steel take-up clamp and a rubber gasket. Take-up
clamp: Minimum of 9/16 inch wide. Provide PSX positive seal gasket system
by Press-Seal Gasket Corporation or approved equal.
2.07 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Provide sealing materials between precast concrete adjustment ring and manhole
cover frame, such as Adeka Ultraseal P 201, or approved equal.
B. Provide external sealing material from Canusa Wrapid Seal manhole encapsulation
system, or approved equal.
C. Butyl Sealant: Provide Press-Seal EZ Stick, or equal, for HDPE rings.
2.08 CORROSION-RESISTANT MANHOLE MATERIALS
02081-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Where corrosion-resistant manholes are indicated on the Drawings, refer to City of

Houston Approved Product List for liner and/or coating materials.
2.09 BACKFILL MATERIALS
A. Conform to the requirements of Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities.
2.10 NON-SHRINK GROUT
A. Provide prepackaged, inorganic, flowable, non-gas-liberating, non-metallic, cement-

based non-shrink grout requiring only addition of water.
B. Provide grout meeting requirements of ASTM C 1107 and having minimum 28-day
compressive strength of 7,000 psi.
2.11 VENT PIPES
A. Provide external vent pipes for manholes where indicated on Drawings.
B. Buried Vent Pipes: Provide 3-inch or 4-inch PVC DWV pipe conforming to ASTM D
2665. Alternatively, provide FRP pipe as specified for vent outlet assembly.
C. Vent Outlet Assembly: Provide vent outlet assembly as shown on Drawings,

constructed of following specified materials:
1. FRP Pipe: Provide filament-wound FRP conforming to ASTM D 2996 or

centrifugally cast FRP conforming to ASTM D 2997. Seal cut ends in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Joints and Fittings: Provide epoxy- bodied fittings and join pipe to fittings
with epoxy adhesive, according to pipe manufacturer's instructions.
3. Flanges: Provide socket-flange fittings for epoxy adhesive bonding to pipe

ends where shown on Drawings. Meet bolt pattern and dimensions for ASME
B 16.1, 125-pound flanges. Use Type 304 stainless steel or hot-dip zinc
coated, conforming to ASTM A 307, Class A or B flange bolts.
4. Coating: Provide 2-component, aliphatic polyurethane coating, using primer

or tie coat recommended by manufacturer. Provide two or more coats to yield
dry film thickness of at least 3 mils. Provide Amershield, Tnemec 74, or
approved equal. Project Manager selects color from manufacturer's standard
colors.
2.12 MANHOLE LADDER FOR WATERLINE MANHOLES
A. Manhole Ladder: Fiberglass with 300-lb rating at appropriate length; conform to

requirements of Occupational Safety and Health Standards (OSHA), U.S. Department
of Labor except where shown on Drawings.
02081-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Use components, including rungs, made of fiberglass, fabricated with nylon or

aluminum rivets and/or epoxy. Apply non-skid coating to ladder rungs. Mount
ladder using manufacturer's recommended hardware.
2. Provide ladder as manufactured by Saf-Rail or approved equal. Locate ladder

as shown on Drawings.
3. Fiberglass: Premium type polyester resin, reinforced with fiberglass;

constructed to provide complete wetting of glass by resin; resistant to rot,
fungi, bacterial growth and adverse effects of acids, alkalis and residential and
industrial waste; yellow in color.
4. Provide approved petroleum-based tape encapsulating bolts in access

manhole.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify lines and grades are correct.
B. Determine if subgrade, when scarified and recompacted, can be compacted to 95

percent of maximum Standard Proctor Density at ±3 percent optimum moisture
content according to ASTM D 698 prior to placement of material and base section. If
it does not meet the moisture-density requirement, condition the subgrade until the
required moisture-density requirement is met or treat as an unstable subgrade.
C. Do not build manholes in ditches, swales, or drainage paths unless approved by

Project Manager.
3.02 MANHOLES
A. Construct manholes to dimensions shown on Drawings. Commence construction as

soon as possible after pipes are laid. On monolithic sewers, construct manholes at
same time sewer is being constructed.
B. Unstable Subgrade Treatment: When unstable subgrade is encountered, notify

Project Manager for examination of subgrade to determine if subgrade has heaved
upwards after being excavated. When heaving has not occurred, over-excavate
subgrade to allow for 24inch-thick layer of crushed stone wrapped in filter fabric as
foundation material under manhole base. When there is evidence of heaving, provide
pile-supported concrete foundation, as detailed on Drawings, under manhole base.
C. Cast manhole foundations and walls monolithically. Use cold joint with approved
waterstop when manhole flow line depth exceeds 12 feet. No other joints will be
allowed unless shown on Drawings. Wrap cold joints with external sealing material,
minimum 6-inch with.
02081-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
D. For concrete containing micro silica admixtures, place, finish, and cure concrete for
manholes following procedures in Section 03315 - Concrete for Utility Construction.
E. Top of manhole elevations shown on Drawings are approximate, based on current

pavement and natural ground conditions as determined from elevations measured on
50-foot spacing. No additional payment will be made if final elevation of manhole
ring and cover is higher or lower due to requirements of finished grade or replaced
pavement surface.
F. For water lines place concrete for manhole base on 12” thick (minimum) foundation
of cement stabilized sand. Compact cement stabilized sand in accordance with
requirements of 02321 – Cement Stabilized Sand.
G. For manholes located over large diameter water lines, place base on a foundation of
cement stabilized sand extending from bottom of manhole to bottom of trench.
Manhole base is to be a minimum of 12-inches above water line.
3.03 PIPE CONNECTIONS
A. Install approved resilient connectors at each pipe entering and exiting water line and
sanitary sewer manholes in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Storm sewer connections of concrete pipe to manhole will be set in flexible joint
sealant conforming to ASTM C 990, placed in the middle of the manhole wall and
covering the lower 1/3rd of the opening. Grout pipe penetrations both inside and
outside of manhole.
C. Ensure no concrete, cement stabilized sand, fill, or other solid material is allowed to
enter space between pipe and edge of wall opening at and around resilient connector
on interior or exterior of manhole. When necessary, fill space with compressible
material to ensure resilient connector will maintain full flexibility where evidence of
reduced flexibility is encountered.
D. Where new manhole is to be constructed on existing sewer, a rigid joint pipe may be
used. Install waterstop gasket around existing pipe at center of cast-in-place wall.
Join ends of split waterstop material at pipe spring line using adhesive recommended
and supplied by waterstop manufacturer.
E. Do not construct joints on sanitary sewer pipe within wall sections of manholes. Use
approved connection material.
F. Construct pipe stubs with resilient connectors for future connections at locations and
with material indicated on Drawings. Install approved stub plugs at interior of
manhole.
G. Test connection for watertight seal before backfilling.
3.04 INVERTS FOR SANITARY SEWERS
02081-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Construct invert channels to provide smooth flow transition waterway with no

disruption of flow at pipe-manhole connections. Conform to the following criteria:
1. Slope of invert bench: 1-inch per foot minimum; 1-1/2 inch per foot
maximum.
2. Depth of bench to invert:
a. Pipes smaller than 15-inches: one-half of largest pipe diameter.
b. Pipes 15 to 24 inches: three-fourths of largest pipe diameter.
c. Pipes larger than 24-inches: equal to largest pipe diameter.
3. Invert slope through manhole: 0.10 foot drop across manhole with smooth
transition of flow at pipe-manhole connections. Conform to following
criteria.
B. Form invert channels with Class A concrete if not integral with manhole base. For
direction changes of mains, construct channels tangent to mains with maximum
possible radius of curvature. Provide curves for side inlets and smooth invert fillets
for flow transition between pipe inverts.
3.05 INVERTS FOR STORM SEWERS
A. When precast, square or rectangular structures are used for sewer manholes, construct
invert channels to provide smooth flow transition waterway with no disruption of
flow at pipe manhole connections. Conform to following criteria:
1. Slope of invert bench: 1-inch per foot minimum; 1-½ inches per foot
maximum.
2. Depth of bench to invert: one half of largest pipe diameter.
transition of invert through manhole, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
B. Form invert channels with concrete, after all connections have been made.
1. Use 5 sack premix (bag) concrete or Class A concrete for inverts, with
minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi.
3.06 DROP CONNECTIONS FOR SANITARY SEWERS
A. Backfill drop assembly with crushed stone wrapped in filter fabric, cement-stabilized
sand, or Class A concrete to form solid mass. Extend cement stabilized sand or
concrete encasement minimum of 4-inches outside bells.
B. Install connection when sewer line enters manhole higher than 24-inches above invert
of manhole.
02081-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
3.07 STUBS FOR FUTURE CONNECTIONS
A. In manholes where future connections are indicated on Drawings, install resilient

connectors and pipe stubs with approved watertight plugs.
3.08 ADJUSTMENT RINGS AND FRAME
A. Combine precast concrete or HDPE adjustment rings so elevation of installed casting

cover matches pavement surface. Seal between concrete adjustment ring and precast
top section with non-shrink grout; do not use mortar between adjustment rings.
Apply latex-based bonding agent to precast concrete surfaces to be joined with non-
shrink grout. Set cast iron frame on adjustment ring in a bed of approved sealant
material. Install a sealant bed consisting of two beads of sealant, each bead having
minimum dimensions of 1/2-inch and 1/2-inch wide.
B. Wrap manhole frame and adjustment rings with external sealing material, minimum
3-inches beyond joint between ring and frame, and ring and precast section.
C. For manholes in unpaved areas, set top of frame minimum of 6-inches above existing
ground line unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Encase manhole frame in mortar
or non-shrink grout placed flush with face of manhole ring and top edge of frame.
Provide rounded corner around perimeter.
3.09 BACKFILL
A. After concrete obtains adequate strength, place and compact backfill materials in area
of excavation surrounding manholes in accordance with requirements of Section
02317 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. Use embedment zone backfill material
for adjacent utilities, as shown in City of Houston Standard Details over each pipe
connected to manhole. Provide trench zone backfill, as specified for adjacent utilities,
above embedment zone backfill.
B. Where rigid joints are used for connecting existing sewers to manhole, backfill under
existing sewer up to spring line of pipe with Class B concrete or flowable fill.
C. In unpaved areas, provide positive drainage away from manhole frame to natural
grade.
D. Provide minimum of 4-inches of topsoil conforming to requirements of Section

02911 - Topsoil.
E. Seed in accordance with Section 02921 - Hydro Mulch Seeding, or sod disturbed
areas in accordance with Section 02922 - Sodding.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Conduct leakage testing of Sanitary Sewer manholes in accordance with requirements

of Section 02533 - Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers.
02081-10
CITY OF HOUSTON
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Protect manholes from damage until subsequent work has been accepted. Repair or
replace damaged elements of manholes at no additional cost to City.
END OF SECTION
02081-11
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES
SECTION 02082
PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Precast concrete manholes for sanitary sewers, storm sewers, and water lines.
Manhole bases maybe round or square.
B. Precast concrete sanitary sewer manholes with PVC liner where corrosion resistant
manholes are specifically indicated in Drawings.
C. Pile-supported concrete foundation used for unstable subgrade treatment for manhole
base.
A. Section 01270 - Measurement and Payment
B. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01630 - Product Substitution Procedures
D. Section 02090 - Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers
E. Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities
F. Section 02321 - Cement Stabilized Sand
G. Section 02533 - Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers
H. Section 02911 – Topsoil
I. Section 02921 - Hydro Mulch Seeding
J. Section 02922 – Sodding
K. Section 03315 - Concrete for Utility Construction
L. Section 04061 - Mortar
A. Unit Prices
02082-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Payment for normal depth manholes, up to 8 feet deep, is on a unit price basis
for each manhole installed. Manhole depth is measured from top of cover to
sewer invert. Air release manhole depth is measured from top of cover to
inside base for air release or vacuum release manholes. Manholes for water
lines are measured from top of cover to inside base of manhole.
2. Payment for shallow depth manholes is on a unit price basis for each manhole
installed. Shallow manholes have a depth of 5 feet or less measured from top
of cover to sewer invert.
3. Payment for extra depth manholes is on a unit price basis per vertical foot for
each foot of depth greater than 8 feet. Sewer manhole depth is measured from
top of cover to sewer invert. Air release manhole depth is measured from top
of cover to inside base for air release or vacuum release manholes. Manholes
for water lines are measured from top of cover to inside base of manhole.
4. Payment for normal depth corrosion resistant manholes is on a unit price basis
for each manhole installed
5. Payment for standard manhole drops is on a unit price basis for each drop
installed. Standard manhole drops include both internal and external drops.
6. Payment for watertight manholes, including external vent pipe and/or wraps,
are on a unit price basis for each.
7. Payment for air-release manhole with valves and fittings installed is on a unit
price basis for each manhole with air-release valves and fittings installed.
8. Payment for pile-supported concrete foundation used for unstable subgrade

treatment for manhole base is on a unit price basis for each foundation
installed.
9. Pay estimates for partial payments will be made as measured above according
to the following schedule for sanitary sewer manholes:
a. Estimate for 90 percent payment will be authorized when the manhole

is completely installed and surrounding soil backfilled
b. Estimate for 100 percent payment will be authorized when manhole

has been tested as specified in Section 02533 - Acceptance Testing for
Sanitary Sewers
10. Refer to Section 01270 - Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures
1.04 REFERENCES
02082-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. ASME B 16.1 – Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and
250
Rod 60,000 psi Tensile Strength
C. ASTM A 615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement
D. ASTM C 443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes,
Using Rubber Gaskets.
E. ASTM C 478 - Standard Specification for Circular Precast Reinforced Concrete

Manhole Sections
F. ASTM C 890 - Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for
Monolithic or Sectional Precast Concrete Water and Wastewater Structures.
G. ASTM C 913 – Standard Specification for Precast Concrete Water and Wastewater
Structures.
H. ASTM C 923 - Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced

Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes, and Laterals
I. ASTM C 990 – Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and
Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants
J. ASTM C 1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout

(Nonshrink)
K. ASTM C 1821 - Standard Practice for Installation of Underground Circular Precast

Concrete Manhole Structures
L. ASTM C 1837 - Standard Specification for Production of Dry Cast Concrete Used for
Manufacturing Pipe, Box, and Precast Structures
M. ASTM C 1889 – Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for
Monolithic or Sectional Precast Concrete Utility, Water, and Wastewater Structures
Using AASHTO LRFD Design
N. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of

Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lb/ft3 (600kN-m/m3))
O. ASTM D 2665 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Drain, Waste and Vent Pipe and Fittings
P. ASTM D 2996 - Standard Specification for Filament-Wound “Fiberglass” (Glass-

Fiber- Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe
02082-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
Q. ASTM D 2997 - Standard Specification for Centrifugally Cast “Fiberglass” (Glass-

Fiber- Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe
R. ASTM F 2306 – Standard Specification for 12 to 60 in. [300 to 1500 mm] Annular
Corrugated Profile-Wall Polyethylene (PE) Pipe and Fittings for Gravity-Flow Storm
Sewer and Subsurface Drainage Applications.
S. ASTM F 2510 – Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced

T. AWWA C 213 - Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipe
and Fittings
U. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
V. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) – Item 465 “Junction Boxes,

Manholes, and Inlets”
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit manufacturer's data and details of following items for approval:
1. Shop drawings of manhole sections, base units and construction details,

including reinforcement, jointing methods, materials and dimensions.
2. Summary of criteria used in manhole design including, as minimum, material

properties, loadings, load combinations, and dimensions assumed. Include
certification from manufacturer that precast manhole design is in full
accordance with ASTM C 478 and/or ASTM C 890 and design criteria as
established in Paragraph 2.01E of this Specification.
3. Frames, grates, rings, and covers
4. Materials to be used in fabricating drop connections
5. Materials to be used for pipe connections at manhole walls
6. Materials to be used for stubs and stub plugs, if required
7. Materials and procedures for corrosion-resistant liner and coatings, if

required.
8. Plugs to be used for sanitary sewer hydrostatic testing
9. Manufacturer's data for pre-mix (bag) concrete, if used for channel inverts and
benches
02082-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Seal submittal drawings by Professional Engineer registered in State of Texas.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES
A. Provide machine-made manhole sections, base sections, and related components

conforming to ASTM C 478 and/or ASTM C 913. Provide base riser section with
integral floors, unless shown otherwise. Provide adjustment rings which are standard
components of manufacturer of manhole sections. Mark date of manufacture and
name or trademark of manufacturer on inside of barrel.
B. Construct risers and reduced risers for precast manholes from standard reinforced
concrete manhole sections of diameter indicated on Drawings. Use various lengths of
manhole sections in combination to provide correct height with fewest joints.
C. Minimum Thickness Requirements for Riser Walls and Bases:
1. Sanitary Sewer and Waterline Manholes
a. Design Wall sections for depth and loading conditions in paragraph

2.01.F, with minimum thickness of 5 inches.
b. Base sections shall have a minimum thickness of 12 inches under

invert.
2. Storm Sewer Manholes
a. Design riser sections, base and base slabs for depth and loading
conditions in Paragraph 2.01.F, with minimum thicknesses according
to precast storm water manhole standard details. Minimum base
thickness specified in the precast storm water manhole details excludes
benching and invert material thickness.
D. Provide tops to support cast iron casting meeting AASHTO M-306 Section 5 loading,
and receive manhole frame & covers, as indicated on Drawings.
E. Transition Slabs:
1. Sanitary Sewer & Waterline Manholes:
a. Where manholes larger than 48-inch diameter are indicated on

Drawings, provide precast base sections with flat slab top precast
sections used to transition to 48-inch diameter manhole access riser
sections. Transition can be concentric or eccentric unless otherwise
shown on Drawings. Locate transition to provide minimum of 7-foot
head clearance from base to underside of transition unless otherwise
approved by Project Manager.
02082-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Storm Sewer Manholes:
a. Where manholes larger than 48-inch diameter are indicated on

Drawings, provide precast base sections with flat slab top precast
sections used to transition to 48-inch or 60-inch diameter manhole
access riser sections. Transition can be concentric or eccentric unless
otherwise shown on Drawings.
F. Design Loading Criteria: Manhole walls, transition slabs, cone tops, and manhole
base slab shall be designed, by manufacturer, to requirements of ASTM C 890, and/or
ASTM C 1889 for depth as shown on Drawings and to resist following loads.
1. AASHTO HL-93 design live loading loads as referred to in AASHTO LRFD

Bridge Design Specifications applied to manhole cover and transmitted down
to transition and base slabs.
slab projections.

equivalent fluid pressure of 100 pcf.
4. Internal liquid pressure based on unit weight of 63 pcf.
5. Dead load of manhole sections fully supported by transition and base slabs.
G. Design: Manhole walls, transition slabs, cone tops, and manhole base slab shall be
designed according to requirements of ASTM C 478, and/or ASTM C 913 and
following:

a. Saturated soil pressure acting on empty manhole

to cover, with no balancing external soil pressure
3. Wall Penetrations:
a. Sanitary Sewer and Waterline Manholes:
(1) Minimum clear distance between two wall penetrations shall be

12 inches or half diameter of smaller penetration, whichever is
greater.
b. Storm Sewer Manholes:
02082-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
(1) Minimum clear distance between two wall penetrations shall be

6 inches or the base units wall thickness, whichever is greater.
Clear distance shall be measured along the inside wall arc of
manhole.
(2) When resilient connectors are specified in the contract

documents, minimum clear distance between wall penetrations
shall be 12 inches. Minimum clear distance is to be verified
with resilient connector manufacturer before fabricator’s
engineering design of manhole.
(3) All bases and risers may have cast or cored round wall
penetrations. Wall penetrations shall not extend into the slabs
or walls. Wall penetrations shall not to be within a distance less
than the wall thickness, or a minimum of 6 inches, from the
joint above or below.
(4) Only box bases and box risers may have thin wall panels (KO)
that are round and do not extend into the slab, into walls, or
within 6" of the joint above or below. KO dimensions to
conform to requirements on standard details.
(5) For box manholes, wall penetrations at corners are prohibited.
(6) For rigid pipe, cut hole in thin wall panel (KO) 4” max, 2” min
larger than pipe OD.
(7) For flexible pipe, consult boot/seal manufacturer’s

specification for placement tolerance and hole size.
H. Provide vertical joints between sections with gaskets conforming to ASTM C 443
and/or ASTM C990.
I. When base is cast monolithic with portion of vertical section, extend reinforcing in
vertical section into base.
J. Precast Concrete Base: Supply suitable cutouts, knockouts or holes to receive pipe
and connections. Lowest edge of holes or cutouts: For water line manhole, no less
than 6 inches above inside surface of floor of base. For storm sewer manholes, refer
to requirements set by standard details.
K. Lifting Hole, Marking and Storage and Shipment for Strom Water Manholes Only:
02082-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Lifting Holes: Provide no more than 4 lifting holes in each section for precast
units. Lifting holes may be cast, cut into fresh concrete after form removal, or
drilled. Provide lifting holes large enough for adequate lifting devices based
on the size and weight of the section. The maximum hole diameter is 3 in. at
the inside surface of the wall and 4 in. at the outside surface. Cut no more than
5 in. in any direction of reinforcement per layer for lifting holes. Repair
spalled areas around lifting holes.
2. Marking. Clearly mark each precast manhole with the following information:
a. Name or trademark of fabricator and plant location
b. Product designation
c. ASTM designation (if applicable)
d. Date of manufacturing; and
e. Designated fabricator’s approval stamp
3. Storage and Shipment: Store Precast units on a level surface. Do not ship
precast units until design strength requirements have been met.
2.02 CONCRETE
A. Manholes
a. Conform to requirements of Section 03315 - Concrete for Utility

Construction or ASTM C 1837.
a. Conform to concrete material requirements of TxDOT Specification

Item 465 “Junction Boxes, Manholes and Inlets”.
b. Cure precast manholes in accordance with ASTM C 478.
B. Channel Inverts
a. Use 5 sack premix (bag) concrete or Class A concrete for inverts not
integrally formed with manhole base, with minimum compressive
strength of 4,000 psi.
02082-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
a. Conform to concrete material requirements of TxDOT Specification

Item 465 “Junction Boxes, Manholes and Inlets.
C. Cement Stabilized Sand Foundation: Provide cement stabilized sand foundation under
base section in lieu of foundation slab, as shown on Drawings, conforming to
requirements of Section 02321 - Cement Stabilized Sand.
D. Concrete Foundation: Provide Class A concrete with minimum compressive strength

of 4,000 psi for concrete foundation slab under manhole base section where indicated
on Drawings.
2.04 MORTAR
A. Conform to requirements of Section 04061 - Mortar.
A. Provide cast-iron frames, rings, and covers conforming to requirements of Section

02090 - Frames, Grates, Rings and Covers.
2.07 PIPE CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLE
A. Sanitary Sewer Connections
1. Provide resilient connectors conforming to requirements of ASTM C 923. Use

the following materials for metallic mechanical devices as defined in ASTM
C 923:
b. Internal, expandable clamps on standard manholes: Type 304 stainless

steel, 11 gauge minimum.
c. Internal, expandable clamps on corrosion-resistant manholes:

C 213
02082-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
or shown on Drawings, provide polyethylene-isoprene water-stop meeting
physical property requirements of ASTM C 923, such as Press-Seal WS
Series, or approved equal.
B. Storm Sewer Connections
1. Provide watertight connections in accordance with ASTM C 923 and ASTM F

2510 as applicable for flexible pipe. Rigid (concrete) pipe to manhole
connections are to be grouted according to ASTM C 1821.
C. Water Line Connections
1. Where smooth exterior pipes, i.e., steel, ductile iron, or PVC pipes are
connected to manhole base or barrel, seal space between pipe and manhole
wall with assembly consisting of rubber gasket or links mechanically
compressed to form a watertight barrier. Assemblies: Press-Wedge, Res-Seal,
Thunderline Link-Seal, or approved equal. See Drawings for placement of
assembly in manhole sections.
2. When connecting concrete or cement mortar coated steel pipes, or as option

for connecting smooth exterior pipes to manhole base or barrel, space between
pipe and manhole wall may be sealed with an assembly consisting of a
stainless-steel power sleeve, stainless steel take-up clamp and a rubber gasket.
Take-up clamp: Minimum of 9/16 inch wide. Provide PSX positive seal
gasket system by Press-Seal Gasket Corporation or approved equal.
A. Approved products in accordance with Section 01630 - Product Substitution

Procedures.
B. Sealing material between precast concrete adjustment ring and manhole, between
each adjustment ring, and between adjustment ring and manhole cover frame shall be
a hydrophilic elastic sealant, which adheres to both concrete and metal, or approved
equal.
C. Provide approved external sealing material from Canusa Wrapid Seal manhole
encapsulation system, or approved equal.
D. Provide Butyl Sealant: Provide Press-Seal EZ Stick, or equal, for HDPE rings.
2.09 CORROSION RESISTANT MANHOLE MATERIALS
A. Where corrosion-resistant manholes are indicated on Drawings, refer to City of

Houston Approved Product List for liner and/or coating materials.
02082-10
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Conform to requirements of Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities.
A. Provide prepackaged, inorganic, flowable, non-gas-liberating, non-metallic, cement-

based grout requiring only addition of water.
B. Meet requirements of ASTM C 1107 and have minimum 28-day compressive

strength of 7,000 psi.
2.12 VENT PIPES
B. Buried Vent Pipes: Provide 3-inch or 4-inch PVC DWV pipe conforming to ASTM
D2665. Alternatively, provide FRP pipe as specified for vent outlet assembly.

1. FRP Pipe: Provide filament wound FRP conforming to ASTM D 2996 or

accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. Joints and Fittings: Provide epoxy bodied fittings and join pipe to fittings with
epoxy adhesive

B 16.l, 125- pound flanges. Flange bolts shall be Type 304 stainless steel or
hot-dip zinc coated, conforming to ASTM A 307, Class A or B.
4. Coating: Provide approved 2-component, aliphatic polyurethane coating using

primer or tie coat recommended by manufacturer. Provide two or more coats
to yield dry film thickness of at least 3 mils. Color shall be selected by Project
Manager from manufacturer’s standard colors.
2.13 PROHIBITED MATERIALS
A. Use of brick masonry is prohibited for construction of manholes, including

adjustment of manholes to grade.
B. For Storm Water manholes, use of mortar is prohibited for pipe to manhole
connections.
02082-11
CITY OF HOUSTON

of Labor except where shown on Drawings:

ladder using manufacturer’s recommended hardware.


B. Provide approved petroleum-based tape encapsulating bolts in access manhole.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that lines and grades are correct.

percent of maximum Standard Proctor Density, at ±3 percent optimum moisture
content according to ASTM D 698 prior to placement of foundation material and base
section. If it does not meet the moisture-density requirement, condition the subgrade
until the required moisture-density requirement is met or treat as an unstable
subgrade.

Project Manager.
3.02 PLACEMENT
A. Install precast manholes to conform to locations and dimensions shown on Drawings.
B. Place sanitary manholes at points of change in alignment, grade, size, pipe

intersections, and end of sewer unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
C. Place storm manholes at points of change in alignment, grade, size, pipe intersections,
and end of sewer unless otherwise shown on Drawings. Pipe connections into storm
sewer precast box manholes that exceed a 7-degree angle of entry shall use a pipe
elbow, bend, or curved approach as shown per detail 02082-13 Storm Sewer Precast
Box Manhole, Pipe Connection Detail.
3.03 MANHOLE BASE SECTIONS AND FOUNDATIONS
02082-12
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Foundation Material:
1. Sanitary Sewer and Waterlines
a. Place precast base on 12-inch thick (minimum) foundation of crushed

stone wrapped in filter fabric, cement stabilized sand, or concrete
foundation slab. Compact cement-sand in accordance with
requirements of Section 02321 - Cement Stabilized Sand.
2. Storm Sewer
a. Foundation material is to be selected based on site soil type and

bearing capacity established by the geotechnical investigation report.
Place precast base on the foundation material that is selected, by the
Engineer of Record and Geotechnical Engineer, from the options
below:
(1) 12-inch thick (minimum) foundation of crushed stone wrapped

in filter fabric, placed in maximum 6-inch compacted lift
thickness layers.
(2) Cement stabilized sand compacted in accordance with

requirements of section 02321 – Cement Stabilized Sand.
Cement stabilized sand foundations are prohibited to be placed
on fault lines.
(3) Concrete foundation slab.
B. Unstable Subgrade Treatment: When unstable subgrade is encountered, notify Project

Manager for examination of subgrade to determine if subgrade has heaved upwards
after being excavated. When heaving has not occurred, over-excavate subgrade to
allow for 24-inch-thick layer of crushed stone wrapped in filter fabric as foundation
material under manhole base. When there is evidence of heaving, provide pile-
supported concrete foundation, as detailed on Drawings, under manhole base.
C. For manholes located over large diameter water lines, place precast base on a
foundation of cement stabilized sand extending from bottom of manhole to bottom of
trench. Manhole base is to be a minimum of 12-inches above water line.
3.04 PRECAST MANHOLE SECTIONS
A. Install sections, joints, and gaskets in accordance with ASTM C 1821 and the
manufacturer's printed recommendations.
B. Install precast adjustment rings above tops of cones or flat-top sections as required to
adjust finished elevation and to support manhole frame.
C. Seal any lifting holes with non-shrink grout.
02082-13
CITY OF HOUSTON
D. Where PVC liners are required, seal joints between sections in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations.
E. Place at least two precast concrete grade rings with thickness of 12 inches or less,
under casting. Refer to standard details for additional requirements of precast
concrete grade rings.
3.05 PIPE CONNECTIONS AT MANHOLES
A. Install approved resilient connectors at each pipe entering and exiting manholes in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specifications. Resilient/flexible
connectors shall not be grouted unless allowed by the manufacturer.
a. Where smooth exterior pipes, i.e. steel, ductile iron or PVC pipes are
connected to manhole base or barrel, space between pipe and manhole
wall shall be sealed with an assembly consisting of rubber gaskets or
links mechanically compressed to form watertight. Assemblies:
“Press-Wedge,” “Res-Seal,” “Thunderline Link-Seals,” or approved
equal. See Drawings for placement of assembly in manhole sections.
b. When connecting concrete or cement mortar coated steel pipes, or as

an option for connecting smooth exterior pipes to manhole base or
barrel, space between pipe and manhole wall may be sealed with an
assembly consisting of stainless-steel power sleeve, stainless steel
take-up clamp and rubber gasket. Take-up clamp: Minimum of 9/16
inch wide. Provide PSX positive seal gasket system by Press-Seal
Gasket Corporation or approved equal.
a. Refer to 2.07.B for approved connection materials.
B. Rigid Pipe Connections
a. When making a rigid (concrete) pipe connection to a concrete manhole

the pipe is to be set in flexible joint sealant conforming to ASTM C
990. Grout pipe penetration in place on both inside and outside of
manhole.
02082-14
CITY OF HOUSTON
a. When making a rigid (concrete) pipe connection to a concrete manhole

the pipe is to be set in flexible joint sealant conforming to ASTM C
990. When pipe to manhole connections are to be grouted, grout
connections to conform to requirements in ASTM C 1821. All voids
are to be completely filled with grout and grouted on both sides inside
and outside of manhole.
C. Flexible Pipe Connections
a. Install approved resilient connectors at each flexible pipe connection

as per ASTM C 923 and/or ASTM F 2510 to a concrete manhole.
a. Install approved resilient connectors at each flexible pipe connection

per 2.07.B.1 to a concrete manhole.
D. Ensure no concrete, cement stabilized sand, fill, or other rigid material is allowed to
enter space between pipe and edge of wall opening at and around resilient connector
on either interior or exterior of manhole. If necessary, fill space with compressible
material to ensure full flexibility provided by resilient connector.
E. Where a new manhole is constructed on an existing sewer, rigid joint pipe may be
used. Install waterstop gasket around existing pipe at center of cast-in-place wall. Join
ends of split waterstop material at pipe springline using an adhesive recommended
and supplied by waterstop manufacturer.
F. Test connection for watertight seal before backfilling.

disruption of flow at pipe-manhole connections. Conform to following criteria:
1. Slope of invert bench: 1 inch per foot minimum; 1-1/2 inches per foot
maximum
2. Depth of bench to invert shall be at least equal to the largest pipe diameter.
3. Invert slope through manhole: 0.10-foot drop across manhole with smooth
transition of invert through manhole, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
B. Form invert channels with concrete if not integral with manhole base section. For
02082-15
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Backfill drop assembly with crushed stone wrapped in filter fabric, cement stabilized
concrete encasement minimum of 4 inches outside bells.
B. Install drop connection when sewer line enters manhole higher than 24 inches above
invert of manhole.
3.08 INVERTS FOR STORM SEWERS
A. When precast, square or rectangular structures are used for sewer manholes, construct
invert channels to provide smooth flow transition waterway with no disruption of
flow at pipe- manhole connections. Conform to following criteria:
maximum.
2. Depth of bench to invert: one half of largest pipe diameter.
3. Invert slope through manhole: 0.10-foot drop across manhole with smooth
transition of invert through manhole, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
B. Form invert channels with concrete, after all connections have been made
1. Refer to 2.02.B.2 for material requirements.
A. In manholes, where future connections are indicated on Drawings, install resilient

3.10 MANHOLE FRAME AND ADJUSTMENT RINGS

top section with non-shrink grout; do not use mortar between adjustment rings. Apply
latex-based bonding agent to precast concrete surfaces joined with non-shrink grout.
Set cast iron frame on adjustment ring in bed of approved sealant material. Install
sealant bed consisting of two beads of sealant, each bead having minimum
dimensions of 1/2-inch and 1/2-inch wide.
B. Wrap manhole frame and adjustment rings with external sealing material, minimum 3
inches beyond joint between ring and frame and adjustment rings and precast section.
C. Manholes in unpaved areas:
1. Sanitary Sewer and Waterlines
02082-16
CITY OF HOUSTON
a. For manholes in unpaved areas, set top of frame minimum of 6 inches

above existing ground line unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. In
unpaved areas, encase manhole frame in mortar or non-shrink grout
placed flush with face of manhole ring and top edge of frame. Provide
rounded corner around perimeter.
2. Storm Sewers
a. For manholes in unpaved areas, set top of frame minimum of 6 inches

above existing ground line unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. In
unpaved areas, where existing manholes are to be fitted with a grated
cover for the purpose of storm water drainage, it is permitted to set the
top of the frame at existing/proposed grade. In unpaved areas, encase
manhole frame in mortar or non-shrink grout placed flush with face of
manhole ring and top edge of frame. Provide rounded corner around
perimeter.
3.11 BACKFILL
A. Place and compact backfill materials in area of excavation surrounding manholes in

accordance with requirements of Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for
Utilities. Provide embedment zone backfill material, as specified for adjacent utilities,
from manhole foundation up to an elevation 12 inches over each pipe connected to
manhole. Provide trench zone backfill, as specified for adjacent utilities, above
embedment zone backfill.
existing sewer up to springline of pipe with Class B concrete or flowable fill.
grade. Provide minimum of 4 inches of topsoil conforming to requirements of Section
02911 - Topsoil. Seed in accordance with Section 02921 - Hydro Mulch Seeding.
When shown on Drawings, sod disturbed areas in accordance with Section 02922 -
Sodding.
A. Conduct leakage testing of sanitary sewer manholes in accordance with requirements

B. Before installation of storm water manholes, if the foundation’s subgrade soil

conditions are inconsistent with the contract documents, notify the Engineer of
Record and Geotechnical Engineer. Follow the Engineer of Record’s and
Geotechnical Engineer’s instructions on any additional soil testing, proper selection
of foundation materials, and soil remediation.
3.13 PROTECTION
02082-17
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Protect manholes from damage until work has been accepted. Repair damage to
manholes at no additional cost to City.
END OF SECTION
02082-18
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FIBERGLASS MANHOLES
SECTION 02083
FIBERGLASS MANHOLES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Fiberglass manholes for unpaved areas placed on top of a precast base to form a
manhole.
B. Fiberglass for construction in back lot easements placed on cast-in-place base.
C. Fiberglass manholes are not permitted underneath existing or proposed pavement.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
C. Section 02082 – Precast Concrete Manholes
D. Section 02090 – Frames, Grates, Rings, And Covers
E. Section 02317 – Excavation and Backfill for Utilities
F. Section 02321 – Cement Stabilized Sand
G. Section 02533 – Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers
H. Section 02911 – Topsoil
I. Section 02921 – Hydro Mulch Seeding
J. Section 02922 – Sodding
K. Section 03315 – Concrete for Utility Construction
L. Section 04061 – Mortar
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for fiberglass manholes is on unit price basis for each manhole
installed.
02083-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASME B 16.1 – Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and
250
D. ASTM C 1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout

(Non-shrink).
E. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of

Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lb/ft3 (600kN-m/m3).
F. ASTM D 2665 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Drain, Waste and Vent Pipe and Fittings.
G. ASTM D 2996 - Standard Specification for Filament-Wound “Fiberglass” (Glass-

Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe.
H. ASTM D 2997 - Standard Specification for Centrifugally Cast “Fiberglass” (Glass-

Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe.
I. ASTM D 3753 - Standard Specification for Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester

Manholes and Wetwells.
J. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).
1.05 SUBMITTALS
1. Design and fabrication details of fiberglass manhole components
2. Installation instruction for fiberglass manholes
02083-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
8. Manufacturer's data for pre-mix (bag) concrete if used for channel inverts and
benches
9. Manufacturer's color chart for fiberglass vent pipe coatings.
C. Submittals listed in Section 02082 – Precast Concrete Manholes, paragraph 1.05.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FIBERGLASS MANHOLES AND BASE SECTIONS
A. Provide prefabricated fiberglass manholes which conform in shape, size, dimensions,

and details shown on Drawings. Unless modified by Drawings, use manhole sections
conforming to ASTM D 3753.
B. Provide products manufactured by companies listed on the City of Houston Standard

Product List.
C. Mark date of manufacture and name or trademark of manufacturer in 1-inch high

stenciled letters on inside of barrel.
D. Unless larger size is required, provide 48-inch-diameter barrel for fiberglass

manholes. Provide wall section thickness for depth of manhole according to ASTM
D 3753, but not less than 0.48 inches in thickness.
E. Provide fabricated reducer bonded at factory to form one continuous unit at top of
manhole barrel to accept concrete grade rings and cast iron frame and cover. Reducer
design shall be of sufficient strength to safely support HL-93 loading in accordance
with AASHTO.
F. Provide manhole base of precast concrete conforming to Section 02082 - Precast

Concrete Manholes, unless cast-in-place base is indicated on Drawings. For concrete
manhole bases, use an approved steel-reinforced design of sufficient strength to
withstand imposed loads. Form cast-in-place base so that joint with fiberglass
manhole barrel is sealed against leakage, as shown on Drawings. When precast bases
are specified, it shall be the installers responsibility to ensure a sufficient seal against
leakage.
2.02 CONCRETE
B. Channel Inverts: Use 5 sack premix (bag) concrete or Class A concrete for inverts
not integrally formed with manhole base, with minimum compressive strength of
4000 psi.
02083-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Concrete Foundation: Use Class A concrete with minimum compressive strength of

4000 psi for cast-in-place base and for foundation slab under manhole base section
where indicated on Drawings.
D. Cement Stabilized Sand Foundation: In lieu of foundation slab, provide cement

stabilized sand foundation under base section, when shown on manhole Drawings,
conforming to requirements of Section 02321 - Cement Stabilized Sand.
A. Provide reinforcing steel conforming to requirements of Section 03315 - Concrete for

Utility Construction.
2.04 MORTAR
A. Conform to requirements of Section 04061 - Mortar.
A. Provide cast-iron frames, rings, and covers conforming to requirements of Section

02090 - Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers.
2.07 PIPE CONNECTIONS FOR SANITARY SEWERS
A. Provide pipe connections conforming to requirements of Section 02082 - Precast

Concrete Manholes.
B. For drop, provide manufactured connector, such as Insert-a-Tee or equal, which

provides positive seal between pipe and wall.
A. Sealing material between adjustment ring and manhole, between each adjustment
ring, and between adjustment ring and manhole cover frame shall be a hydrophilic
elastic sealant, which adheres to concrete, fiberglass and metal, or approved
substitute.
B. Butyl Sealant: Provide Press-Seal EZ Stick, or equal, for HDPE rings.
C. Fiberglass manhole barrel may be bedded in a flexible joint material laid on the
shoulder of the concrete base joint, or any other method approved by the Engineer. It
will remain the installer’s responsibility to insure the connection against leakage.
02083-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Backfill materials shall conform to requirements of Section 02317 - Excavation and

Backfill for Utilities.
A. Provide prepackaged, inorganic, flowable, non-gas-liberating, nonmetallic, cement-

based grout requiring only addition of water.
B. Grout shall meet requirements of ASTM C 1107 and shall have minimum 28-day
compressive strength of 7000 psi.
2.11 VENT PIPES
A. Provide external vent pipes for manholes, where indicated on Drawings.
B. Buried Vent Pipes: Provide 3-inch or 4-inch PVC DWV pipe conforming to ASTM
D 2655. Alternately, provide FRP pipe as specified for vent outlet assembly.

1. Provide fiberglasss reinforced pipe conforming to ASTM D 2997. Seal cut

ends in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations
2. Joints and Fittings: Provide epoxy bodied fittings and join pipe to fittings
with epoxy adhesive, according to pipe manufacturer's instructions

ends where shown on Drawings. Flanges shall meet bolt pattern and
dimensions for ANSI B16.l, 125-pound flanges. Flange bolts shall be hot-dip
zinc coated, conforming to ASTM A 307, Class A or B.
4. Coating: Provide 2-component, aliphatic polyurethane coating using primer or

tie coat recommended by manufacturer. Provide two or more coats to yield
dry film thickness of at least 3 mils. Provide Amershield, Tnemec 74, or
equal. Color shall be selected by Project Manager from manufacturer's
standard colors.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
02083-5
CITY OF HOUSTON

percent of maximum Standard Proctor Density at +- 3 percent moisture content,
according to ASTM D 698 prior to placement of foundation material and base
or treat as an unstable subgrade.

Project Manager.
3.02 PLACEMENT
A. Install fiberglass manholes to conform to locations and dimensions shown on

Drawings. Do not install underneath existing or proposed pavement.
B. Place sanitary sewer manholes at points of change of alignment, grade, size, pipe
intersections, and end of sewer.
A. Place base section and foundation as required in Section 02082 - Precast Concrete
Manholes.
3.04 CAST-IN-PLACE FOUNDATION
A. Where Drawings indicate cast-in-place manhole base, place concrete as shown on

Drawings on 4-inch (minimum) layer of either crushed stone, cement stabilized sand,
or seal slab. When unstable subgrade is identified, over-excavate subgrade to allow
for placement of 12-inch thick layer of crushed stone wrapped in filter fabric.
3.05 MANHOLE BARREL
A. Lower manhole barrel onto base section. Seal with manufacturer's gasket or
approved sealant. Wrap joint with external sealing material, minimum 12-inch width.
B. Where cast-in-place base is used, support manhole barrel in place and brace it from
sides of excavation to prevent any movement of barrel during concrete placement and
while concrete is setting. Provide minimum clearance between reinforcing steel and
manhole barrel bottom as shown on Drawings. Do not support manhole barrel on
reinforcing steel. Place bead of water swelling sealant around inside of barrel near
bottom, as shown on Drawings, to form seal.
3.06 PIPE CONNECTIONS AT PRECAST MANHOLE BASE
A. Install approved resilient connectors at each pipe entering and exiting sanitary sewer
manholes in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
02083-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Ensure that no concrete, cement stabilized sand, fill, or other solid material is allowed
to enter space between pipe and edge of wall opening at and around resilient
connector on either interior or exterior of manhole. When necessary, fill space with
compressible material to ensure full flexibility provided by resilient connector.
C. Test connection for watertight seal before backfilling.
3.07 PIPE CONNECTIONS AT CAST-IN PLACE BASE
A. Cut manhole barrel for pipe penetrations following curvature of pipe and with
maximum of 1-inch clearance. Seal cut edges with resin. Hole may be circular or
cutout with semi-circular top which extends to bottom of barrel.
B. Place continuous bead of water swelling sealant, as shown on Drawings, around pipe
penetrations on interior of manhole barrel. Roughen surface of fiberglass prior to
placement to improve bond with sealant. Allow sealant to completely cure before
placing concrete against it.
C. Extend pipe entering manhole at least 8 inches into manhole. Fit pipes with neoprene
water-stop gasket seal placed tightly around pipe using stainless steel clamp.
Alternately, pipes may have continuous bead of water swelling sealant, as detailed on
Drawings, placed around pipe circumference.
D. When forming invert surface in bottom of manhole, mound concrete around pipe
penetrations so that water swelling sealant beads and neoprene water-stop gasket have
minimum 2 inches of concrete cover.
E. Test connection for watertight seal before backfilling.
A. Construct invert channels as required in Section 02082 - Precast Concrete Manholes.
concrete outside of bells minimum 4 inches.
invert of manhole.
C. At drop pipe connections through fiberglass barrel, cut circular hole sized to
requirements of manufactured connector. Seal cut edge with resin. Install watertight
connector according to manufacturer's recommendations.
02083-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Where future connections are indicated on Drawings, install resilient connectors and
pipe stubs with approved watertight plugs in manholes.
B. At cast-in-place base, where future connections are indicated on Drawings, install

section of pipe extending no further than 12 inches from edge of foundation, ending
in bell and provided with rubber-gasket watertight plug.
3.11 ADJUSTMENT RINGS AND FRAME
A. Combine precast concrete or HDPE adjustment rings so that elevation of installed

casting cover matches pavement surface. Do not load manhole except on load
bearing shoulder of manhole. Seal between adjustment ring and fiberglass manhole
with approved sealant material. Apply a latex bonding agent to precast concrete
surface and join with non-shrink grout. Set cast iron frame on adjustment ring in bed
of approved sealant material. Install sealant bed consisting of two beads on sealant,
each bead having minimum dimensions of 1/2-inch and 1/2-inch wide.
inches beyond joint between ring and frame and ring and precast section.
C. Set cast iron frame on top of cone or adjustment rings using water swelling sealant
materials and adjust elevation of casting cover to match pavement surface. For
manholes in unpaved areas, set top frame minimum of 6 inches above existing ground
line unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
3.12 BACKFILL
A. After leakage testing, place and compact backfill material in area of excavation
surrounding manholes in accordance with requirements of Section 02317- Excavation
and Backfill for Utilities. Use embedment zone backfill material, as specified for
adjacent utilities, from manhole foundation up to elevation 12-inches over each pipe
connected to manhole. Provide trench zone backfill, as specified for adjacent
utilities, above embedment zone backfill.
B. In unpaved areas, provide positive drainage away from manhole frame to natural
grade. Provide minimum of 4-inches of topsoil conforming to requirements of
Section 02911 - Topsoil and seed in accordance with Section 02921 - Hydro Mulch
Seeding. When shown on Drawings, sod disturbed areas in accordance with Section
02922- Sodding.

3.14 PROTECTION
A. Protect manholes from damage until work has been finally accepted. Repair damage
to manholes at no additional cost to City.
02083-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
END OF SECTION
02083-9
CITY OF HOUSTON VALVE BOXES,
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION METER BOXES, AND METER VAULTS
SECTION 02085
VALVE BOXES, METER BOXES, AND METER VAULTS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Valve boxes for water service.
B. Meter boxes for water service.
C. Meter vaults for water service.
C. Section 02091 – Non-Metallic Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers
E. Section 02320 – Utility Backfill Materials
F. Section 02501 – Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings
G. Section 02506 – Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe
H. Section 02511 – Water Lines
I. Section 02512 – Water Tap and Service Line Installation
J. Section 02751 – Concrete Paving
K. Section 03315 – Concrete for Utility Construction
A. Unit Prices.
1. No separate payment will be made for valve boxes under this Section. Include
payment in unit price for Section 02511 - Water Lines.
2. No separate payment will be made for meter boxes under this Section. Include
payment in unit price for Section 02512 - Water Tap and Service Line
Installation.
02085-1
3. Payment for each size of meter vaults is on unit price basis per vault. Payment
will be made for each vault installed, regardless of depth.
work in this Section is included in total Stipulated Price.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
B. ASTM D 256 - Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact
Resistance of Plastics.
C. ASTM D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
D. ASTM D 648 - Standard Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under
Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position.
E. ASTM D 790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and
Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.
F. ASTM D 2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit manufacturers’ product data for following items for approval:
1. Each type of valve box and lid.
2. Each type of meter box and cover.
3. Each type of meter vault frame and cover.
C. Submit design calculations and shop drawings for precast vault elements, sealed by
an Engineer registered in State of Texas.
D. Submit shop drawings for cast-in-place meter vaults for approval if proposed
construction varies from City of Houston Detail Drawings.
E. Submit manufacturer's certification that plastic meter boxes meet requirements of

Paragraph 2.05, Plastic Meter Boxes.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 VALVE BOXES
02085-2
A. Provide approved Type A, cast-iron/ductile-iron, slide-type, valve boxes. Design of

valve box shall minimize stresses on valve imposed by loads on box lid.
B. Cast letter “W” into lid, 1/2 inch in height and raised 3/32 inch, for valves serving
potable water lines.
C. Unless otherwise specified, uncoated cast iron.
D. Riser Pipe.
1. Provide 6-inch PVC, DR 18, riser pipes in accordance with Section 02506 -
Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe or
2. 6-inch ductile-iron, thickness Class 51 riser pipes in accordance with Section

02501 – Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings.
3. Provide single section of pipe.
E. Concrete for valve box placement:
1. For locations in new concrete pavement, provide strength and mix design of
new pavement.
2. For other locations, provide concrete for sidewalks conforming to

requirements of Section 02751 - Concrete Paving.
2.02 METER BOXES
A. Provide meter boxes for 5/8-inch through 1-inch meters of the following materials:
1. Non-traffic bearing locations: Cast iron, concrete or plastic.
2. Traffic bearing locations: Cast iron.
B. Provide meter boxes for 1 1/2-inch and 2-inch meters of cast iron.
C. Provide meter box with reading lid. Provide lids with spring-type latching devices.
Lids shall contain sufficient metal that meter box can be easily located with metal
detector. Cast words “CITY OF HOUSTON” and "WATER METER" into lid with
letters of 1/2-inch height and raised 3/32 inch.
D. Meter box dimensions shall conform to the following approximate dimensions:
1. Length: At top – 15 1/2 inches; at bottom 20 inches
2. Width: At top – 12 1/2 inches; at bottom 14 3/4 inches
3. Height: 12 inches
02085-3
E. Extensions: Meter box extensions 3 inches and 6 inches in height shall be available
from manufacturer as standard item.
2.03 CAST-IRON METER BOXES
A. Cast-Iron Boxes: Clean and free from sand blow-holes or other defects conforming to
requirements of ASTM A 48, Class 30B. Bearing surfaces shall be machined so that
covers seat evenly in frames.
B. Boxes and lids shall have dipped, coal-tar-pitch, varnish finish.
C. Provide lock-type meter boxes when required by Drawings. Lock mechanisms shall
work with ease.
2.04 CONCRETE METER BOXES
A. Concrete Meter Boxes: Made of Class A concrete, with minimum 4000 psi
compressive strength, conforming to requirements of Section 03315 - Concrete for
Utility Construction. Construct to dimensions shown on Drawings.
B. Castings: Free from fractures, large or deep cracks, blisters or surface roughness or
any other defects that may affect serviceability.
2.05 PLASTIC METER BOXES
A. Plastic Meter Boxes: Made of high density polyethylene conforming to the following
ASTM standards:
ASTM REQUIREMENT
D 256 Impact Strength = 1.9 ft.-lb./inch (Izod, Notched)
D 256 Impact Strength = 6.4 ft.-lb./inch (Izod, Un-Notched)
D 638 Tensile Strength (2.0 min.) = 3400 psi
D 648 Deflection Temperature = 170 degrees F
Shore D, Hardness, 55-65 Impact Strength, Falling Dart Method, 160
D 2240
inch-lb.
D 790 Flexural Modulus = 90,000 psi
B. Meter boxes shall meet the following test requirements:
1. Static Load: Not less than 2500 pounds using 6-inch disc with direct
compression exerted at center of top of meter box with solid plastic lid.
2. Deflection: Not less than 1000 pounds load required to deflect top edge of
meter box 1/8- inch.
02085-4
C. Meter box body, without lid, shall weigh approximately 7 pounds.
2.06 METER VAULTS
A. Meter vaults may be constructed of precast concrete, cast-in-place concrete to the

specified dimensions in the City of Houston Detail Drawings.
B. Concrete for Meter Vaults: Class A concrete, conforming to requirements of Section

03315 - Concrete for Utility Construction with minimum compressive strength of
4000 psi at 28 days.
C. Reinforcing steel for meter vaults: Conform to requirements of Section 03315

Concrete for Utility Construction.
D. Grates and Covers: Conform to requirements of Section 02091 – Non Metallic

Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Obtain approval from Project Manager for location of meter vault.
B. Verify lines and grade are correct.
C. Verify compacted subgrade will support loads imposed by vaults.
3.02 VALVE BOXES
A. Install riser pipe with suitable length for depth of cover indicated on Drawings or to
accommodate actual finish grade.
1. Install with bell on top of valve
2. Place riser pipe in plumb, vertical position
B. Install valve box and riser piping plumbed in a vertical position. Provide 6-inches
telescoping freeboard space between riser pipe top butt end, and interior contact
flange of valve box, for vertical movement damping. End of pipe resting on valve
shall be notched out sufficiently to provide a snug fit around the valve bonnet and to
center valve inside of pipe.
C. Set, align, and adjust valve box so that lid is level with final grade.
D. Paint covers of new valve boxes in fluorescent orange when installed. After
completion and acceptance by City, repaint covers black.
3.03 METER BOXES
02085-5
A. Install cast iron or plastic boxes in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Construct concrete meter boxes to dimensions shown on City of Houston Detail

Drawings.
C. Adjust top of meter boxes to conform to cover elevations specified in Paragraph 3.05,
Frame and Cover for Meter Vaults.
D. Do not locate under paved areas unless approved by Project Manager. Use approved
traffic- type box with cast iron lid when meter must be located in paved areas.
3.04 METER VAULTS
A. Construct concrete meter vaults to dimensions shown on City of Houston Detail

Drawings. Do not cast in presence of water. Make bottom uniform. Verify lines and
grades are correct and compacted subgrade will support loads imposed by vaults.
Interior meter vault depth is not allowed to exceed more than 4 feet unless approved
by Office of the City Engineer.
B. Precast Meter Vaults:
1. Install precast vaults in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Set

level on a minimum 3-inch-thick bed of sand conforming to requirements of
Section 02320 - Utility Backfill Materials.
2. Seal lifting holes with cement-sand mortar or non-shrink grout.
C. Meter Vault Floor Slab:
1. Construct floor slabs of 6-inch-thick reinforced concrete. Slope floor 1/4 inch
per foot toward sump. Make sump 12 inches in diameter, or 12 inches square,
and 4 inches deep, unless other dimensions are required by Drawings. Install
dowels at maximum of 18 inches, center-to-center for keying walls to floor
slab.
2. Precast floor slab elements may be used for precast vault construction.
D. Cast-in-Place Meter Vault Walls:
1. Key walls to floor slab and form to dimensions shown on Drawings.

Minimum wall thickness shall be 4 inches.
2. Cast walls monolithically. One cold joint will be allowed when vault depth
exceeds 12 feet.
3. Set frame for cover in concrete.
3.05 FRAME AND COVER FOR METER VAULTS
A. Set cast iron frame in a mortar bed and adjust elevation of cover as follows:
02085-6
1. In unpaved areas, set top of meter box or meter vault cover 2 to 3 inches
above natural grade
2. In paved areas, set top of meter box or meter vault cover flush with adjacent
concrete but no higher than 1/2-inch
3.06 BACKFILL
A. Provide bank run sand in accordance with Section 02320 - Utility Backfill Materials
and backfill and compact in accordance with Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill
for Utilities.
B. In unpaved areas, slope backfill around meter boxes and vaults to provide a uniform
slope 1- to-5 slope from top to natural grade.
C. In paved areas, slope concrete down from meter box or vault to meet adjacent paved
area.
END OF SECTION
02085-7
CITY OF HOUSTON ADJUSTING MANHOLES,
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION INLETS, AND VALVE BOXES TO GRADE
SECTION 02086
ADJUSTING MANHOLES, INLETS, AND VALVE BOXES TO GRADE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Adjusting elevation of manholes, inlets, and valve boxes to new grades.
1.02 RELTATED SECTIONS
B. Section 02081 – Cast-In-Place Concrete Manholes
D. Section 02083 – Fiberglass Manholes
E. Section 02090 – Frames, Grates, Rings, And Covers
F. Section 02316 – Excavation and Backfill for Structures
G. Section 02501 – Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings
H. Section 02528 – Polyethylene Encasement-Wrap
I. Section 02632 – Cast-In-Pace Inlets, Headwalls, And Wingwalls
J. Section 02633 – Precast Concrete Inlets, Headwalls, And Wingwalls
K. Section 02911 – Topsoil
L. Section 02921 – Hydro Mulch Seeding
M. Section 02922 – Sodding
N. Section 03315 – Concrete for Utility Construction
O. Section 04061 – Mortar
P. Section 04210 – Brick Masonry for Utility Construction
A. Unit Prices.
02086-1
1. No separate payment will be made for adjusting manhole frames and covers,
inlets, valve boxes, and meter boxes to grade for new construction under this
Section. Include payment in unit price for related item.
2. Payment for adjusting existing manholes, frame and cover, inlets, valve boxes,
and meter boxes to a new grade is on a unit price basis for each.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Provide concrete, conforming to requirements of Section 03315 - Concrete for Utility

Construction.
B. Provide precast concrete manhole sections and adjustment rings conforming to

requirements of Section 02082 - Precast Concrete Manholes.
C. Provide mortar conforming to requirements of Section 04061 - Mortar.
2.02 CAST-IRON MATERIALS
A. Provide cast-iron materials conforming to requirements of Section 02090 - Frames,

Grates, Rings, and Covers.
2.03 PIPING MATERIALS
A. For riser pipes and fittings, refer to Sections 02501 - Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings
through 02528 - Polyethylene Encasement Wrap.
2.04 MASONRY MATERIALS FOR STORM SEWER MANHOLES AND INLETS
A. Provide brick masonry units conforming to the requirements of Section 04210 - Brick
Masonry for Utility Construction.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine existing structure, valve box, frame and cover or inlet box, frame and cover
or inlet, piping and connections for damage or defects affecting adjustment to grade.
Report damage or defects to Project Manager.
3.02 ESTABLISHING GRADE
02086-2
A. Coordinate grade related items with existing grade and finished grade or paving, and
relate to established bench mark or reference line.
3.03 ADJUSTING MANHOLES AND INLETS
A. Rebuild adjustment portion of manhole or inlet by adding or removing Adjustments.

Follow procedures for the type of structure being adjusted detailed in the following
Sections:
1. Section 02081 - Cast-In-Place Concrete Manholes
2. Section 02082 - Precast Concrete Manholes
3. Section 02083 - Fiberglass Manholes
4. Section 02632 - Cast-In-Place Inlets, Headwalls and Wingwalls
5. Section 02633 - Precast Concrete Inlets, Headwalls and Wingwalls
B. Salvage and reuse cast-iron frame and cover or grate.
C. Protect or block off manhole or inlet bottom using wood forms shaped to fit so that no
debris or soil falls to bottom during adjustment.
D. Verify that manholes and inlets are free of visible leaks as result of reconstruction.
Repair leaks in manner subject to Project Manger's approval.
3.04 ADJUSTING VALVE BOXES
A. Salvage and reuse valve box and surrounding concrete block as approved by Project
Manager. No separate pay.
B. Remove and replace 6 inch ductile iron riser pipe with suitable length for depth of
cover required to establish adjusted elevation to accommodate actual finish grade.
C. Reinstall valve box and riser piping plumbed in vertical position. Provide minimum 6
inches telescoping freeboard space between riser pipe top butt end and interior
contact flange of valve box for vertical movement damping.
D. After valve box has been set, aligned, and adjusted so that top lid is level with final
grade.
3.05 BACKFILL AND GRADING
A. Backfill area of excavation surrounding each adjusted manhole, inlet, and valve box
and compact according to requirements of Section 02316 - Excavation and Backfill
for Structures.
02086-3
B. Grade ground surface to drain away from each manhole and valve box. Place earth
fill around manholes to level of upper rim of manhole frame. Place earth fill around
valve box concrete slab.
C. In unpaved areas, grade surface at uniform slope of 1 to 5 from manhole frame to

natural grade. Provide minimum of 4 inches of topsoil conforming to requirements of
Section 02911 - Topsoil. Provide seeding in accordance with Section 02921 – Hydro
Mulch Seeding, or if sodding in accordance with Section 02922 - Sodding.
END OF SECTION
02086-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION PRECAST POLYMER CONCRETE MANHOLES
SECTION 02088
PRECAST POLYMER CONCRETE MANHOLES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Precast polymer concrete manholes for sanitary sewers, force mains and where
corrosion resistant manholes are specifically indicated on Drawings.
C. Section 01630 – Product Substitution Procedures
D. Section 02090 – Frames, Grates, Rings, And Covers
E. Section 02091 – Non Metallic Frames, Grates, Rings, And Covers
F. Section 02317 – Excavation and Backfill for Utilities
G. Section 02321 – Cement Stabilized Sand
H. Section 02533 – Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers
I. Section 02911 – Topsoil
J. Section 02921 – Hydro Mulch Seeding
K. Section 02922 – Sodding
L. Section 03315 – Concrete for Utility Construction
A. Unit Prices
1. Payment for normal depth manholes, up to 8 feet deep, is on a unit price basis
for each manhole installed. Manhole depth is measured from top of cover to
sewer invert. Air release manhole depth is measured from top of cover to
inside base for air release or vacuum release manholes. Manholes for water
lines are measured from top of cover to inside base of manhole.
02088-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Payment for shallow depth manholes is on a unit price basis for each manhole
installed. Shallow manholes have a depth of 5 feet or less measured from top
of cover to sewer invert.
3. Payment for extra depth manholes is on a unit price basis per vertical foot for
each foot of depth greater than 8 feet. Sewer manhole depth is measured from
top of cover to sewer invert. Air release manhole depth is measured from top
of cover to inside base for air release or vacuum release manholes. Manholes
for water lines are measured from top of cover to inside base of manhole.
4. Payment for standard manhole drops is on a unit price basis for each drop
installed. Standard manhole drops include both internal and external drops.
5. Payment for watertight manholes, including external vent pipe is on a unit

price basis for each.
6. Payment for air-release manhole with valves and fittings installed is on a unit
price basis for each manhole with air-release valves and fittings installed.
7. Pay estimates for partial payments will be made as measured above according
to the following schedule for sanitary sewer manholes:
a. Estimate for 90 percent payment will be authorized when the manhole

is completely installed and surrounding soil backfilled
b. Estimate for 100 percent payment will be authorized when manhole

has been tested as specified in Section 02533 - Acceptance Testing for
Sanitary Sewers
1.04 REFERENCES
250.
B. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
C. ASTM C 78 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple
Beam with Third-Point Loading).
D. ASTM A 307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded
Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength.
E. ASTM C 443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes,
02088-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
F. ASTM C 478 - Standard Specification for Circular Precast Reinforced Concrete

Manhole Sections.
G. ASTM C 497 - Standard Test Methods for Concrete Pipe, Concrete Box Sections,
Manhole Sections, or Tile.
H. ASTM C 890 - Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for
Monolithic or Sectional Precast Concrete Water and Wastewater Structures.
I. ASTM C 913 - Standard Specification for Precast Concrete Water and Wastewater
Structures
J. ASTM C 923 - Standard Specifications for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced

Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes, and Laterals.
K. ASTM D 6783 - Standard Specification for Polymer Concrete Pipe.
L. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of

Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lb/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3))
M. ASTM D 2665 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Drain, Waste and Vent Pipe and Fittings
N. ASTM D 2996 - Standard Specification for Filament-Wound “Fiberglass” (Glass-

Fiber- Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe
O. ASTM D 2997 - Standard Specification for Centrifugally Cast “Fiberglass” (Glass-

Fiber- Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe
P. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
Q. AWWA C 213 - Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipe
and Fittings.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop drawings of manhole sections, base units and construction details,

including reinforcement, jointing methods, materials and dimensions.
2. Summary of criteria used in manhole design including, as minimum, material

properties, loadings, load combinations, and dimensions assumed. Include
certification from manufacturer that precast manhole design is in full
accordance with ASTM C 478 and design criteria as established in Paragraph
2.01E of this Specification.
02088-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Seal submittal drawings by Professional Engineer registered in State of Texas.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PRECAST POLYMER CONCRETE MANHOLES
A. Provide manhole sections, base sections, and related components conforming to

testing and tolerance requirements of ASTM C 478. Provide adjustment rings which
are standard components of manufacturer of manhole sections. Mark date of
manufacture and name or trademark of manufacturer on inside of barrel.
B. Construct barrels for precast polymer manholes from standard reinforced polymer
manhole sections of diameter indicated on Drawings. Use various lengths of manhole
sections in combination to provide correct height with fewest joints. Design wall
sections for depth and loading conditions in Paragraph 2.01 E, with minimum
thickness of 2” for 48” diameter and 3” for 72” and larger. Base sections shall have a
minimum thickness of 6 inches under invert. Manhole components shall be dense,
non-porous, corrosion-resistant, and homogeneous. Manholes shall be reinforced per
ASTM C 478. Manholes shall have a monolithic base slab unless otherwise approved.
All manhole lifting devices shall be cast into the product during manufacturing.
C. Provide tops to support AASHTO M-306 loading, and receive manhole frame &
covers, as indicated on Drawings.
D. Where manholes larger than 48-inch diameter are indicated on Drawings, provide
precast base sections with flat slab top precast sections used to transition to 48-inch
diameter manhole access riser section s. Transition can be concentric or eccentric
unless otherwise shown on Drawings. Locate transition to provide minimum of 7-
foot head clearance from base to underside of transition unless otherwise approved by
Project Manager.
E. Design Loading Criteria: Manhole walls, transition slabs, cone tops, and manhole
base slab shall be designed, by manufacturer, to requirements of ASTM C 478 for
depth as shown on Drawings and to resist following loads.
1. AASHTO M-306 H-20 / HS-20 design live loading loads as referred to in

AASHTO M- 306 applied to manhole cover and transmitted down to
transition and base slabs
02088-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
slab projections

equivalent fluid pressure of 100 pcf
4. Internal liquid pressure based on unit weight of 63 pcf
5. Dead load of manhole sections fully supported by transition and base slabs
F. Design: Manhole walls, transition slabs, cone tops, and manhole base slab shall be
designed according to requirements of ASTM C 478, ASTM C 890 and/or ASTM C
913 and following:

a. Saturated soil pressure acting on empty manhole

to cover, with no balancing external soil pressure
3. Minimum clear distance between two wall penetrations shall be 12 inches or

half diameter of smaller penetration, whichever is greater
G. Provide joints between sections with rubber gaskets conforming to ASTM C 443.
H. Monolithic base sections shall have vertical reinforcing extend into the base slab
section.
2.02 POLYMER CONCRETE
A. Resin: The manufacturer shall use only polyester or vinyl ester resin systems
designed for use with this particular application. Resin content shall be a minimum of
7% by weight.
B. Filler: All aggregate, sand and quartz powder shall meet the requirements of ASTM C
33, where applicable.
C. Additives: Resin additives, such as curing agents, pigments, dyes, fillers and
thixotropic agents, when used, shall not be detrimental to the manhole.
D. Polymer concrete compressive strength shall be a minimum of 9000 psi per ASTM C
497
E. Flexural strength shall be a minimum of 1000 psi per ASTM C 78.
02088-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
F. No Portland cement shall be permitted in the concrete mix and all aggregates shall
have a minimum acid insoluble content of 95%
A. If reinforcing steel is used, conform to requirements of Section 03315 - Concrete for

Utility Construction.
A. Provide frames, rings, and covers conforming to requirements of Section 02090 -

Frames, Grates, Rings and Covers or Section 02091 – Non-Metallic Frames, Grates,
Rings and Covers
2.06 PIPE CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLE
A. Sanitary Sewers
1. Provide resilient connectors conforming to requirements of ASTM C 923. Use

the following materials for metallic mechanical devices as defined in ASTM
C 923:
b. Internal, expandable clamps on standard manholes: Type 304 stainless

steel, 11 gauge minimum.
c. Internal, expandable clamps where corrosion-resistance is required:

C 213
or shown on Drawings, provide polyethylene-isoprene water-stop meeting
physical property requirements of ASTM C 923, such as Press-Seal WS
Series, or approved equal.
A. Approved products in accordance with Section 01630 - Product Substitution

Procedures.
02088-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Sealing material between precast concrete adjustment ring and manhole, between
each adjustment ring, and between adjustment ring and manhole cover frame shall be
a hydrophilic elastic sealant, which adheres to both concrete and metal, or approved
substitute.
C. Provide approved external sealing material from Canusa Wrapid Seal manhole
encapsulation system, or approved equal.
D. Provide Butyl Sealant: Provide Press-Seal EZ Stick, or equal, for HDPE rings.
A. Conform to requirements of Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities.
2.09 EPOXY GROUT
A. All grout materials shall not contain any Portland cement and shall be an epoxy based
material. Grout materials shall be approved by Project Manager prior to use.
2.10 VENT PIPES
B. Buried Vent Pipes: Provide 3 inch or 4 inch PVC DWV pipe conforming to ASTM
D2665. Alternatively, provide FRP pipe as specified for vent outlet assembly.

1. FRP Pipe: Provide filament wound FRP conforming to ASTM D 2996 or

2. Joints and Fittings: Provide epoxy bodied fittings and join pipe to fittings with
epoxy adhesive

B 16.l, 125- pound flanges. Flange bolts shall be Type 304 stainless steel or
hot-dip zinc coated, conforming to ASTM A 307, Class A or B.
4. Coating: Provide approved 2-component, aliphatic polyurethane coating using

primer or tie coat recommended by manufacturer. Provide two or more coats
to yield dry film thickness of at least 3 mils. Color shall be selected by Project
Manager from manufacturer’s standard colors.
2.11 PROHIBITED MATERIALS
02088-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Do not use brick masonry for construction of sanitary storm sewer manholes,
including adjustment of manholes to grade. Use only specified materials listed above.

of Labor except where shown on Drawings:

ladder using manufacturer’s recommended hardware.


B. Provide approved petroleum-based tape encapsulating bolts in access manhole.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION

percent of maximum Standard Proctor Density, at ±3% optimum moisture content
according to ASTM D 698 prior to placement of foundation material and base
until the required moisture-density requirement is met or treat as an unstable
subgrade.
C. Do not build manholes within top banks of ditches, swales, or drainage paths unless
3.02 PLACEMENT
A. Install polymer concrete manholes to conform to locations and dimensions shown on

Drawings.
B. Place sanitary and storm manholes at points of change in alignment, grade, size, pipe
intersections, and end of sewer unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
02088-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Place precast base on 12 inch thick (minimum) foundation of crushed stone wrapped
in filter fabric, cement stabilized sand, or concrete foundation slab. Compact cement-
sand in accordance with requirements of Section 02321 - Cement Stabilized Sand.
B. Unstable Subgrade Treatment: When unstable subgrade is encountered, notify Project

Manager for examination of subgrade to determine if subgrade has heaved upwards
after being excavated. When heaving has not occurred, over-excavate subgrade to
allow for 24- inch-thick layer of crushed stone wrapped in filter fabric as foundation
material under manhole base. When there is evidence of heaving, provide pile-
supported concrete foundation, as detailed on Drawings, under manhole base.
C. For manholes located over large diameter water lines, place precast base on a
foundation of cement stabilized sand extending from bottom of manhole to bottom of
trench. Manhole base is to be a minimum of 12-inches above water line.
3.04 PRECAST MANHOLE SECTIONS
A. Install sections, joints, and gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's printed

recommendations.
B. Install adjustment rings above tops of cones or flat-top sections as required to adjust
finished elevation and to support manhole frame.
C. Place at least two corrosion resistant precast concrete or polymer concrete grade rings
with thickness of 12 inches or less, under casting.
3.05 PIPE CONNECTIONS AT MANHOLES
A. Install approved resilient connectors at each pipe entering and exiting manholes in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Where smooth exterior pipes, i.e. steel, ductile iron, or PVC pipes are
connected to manhole base or barrel, space between pipe and manhole wall
shall be sealed with an assembly consisting of rubber gaskets or links
mechanically compressed to form watertight.
2. When connecting concrete or cement mortar coated steel pipes, or as an

option for connecting smooth exterior pipes to manhole base or barrel, space
between pipe and manhole wall may be sealed with an assembly consisting of
stainless steel power sleeve, stainless steel take-up clamp. Provide PSX
positive seal or Direct Drive by Press Seal Gasket Corporation or approved
equal.
B. Ensure no concrete, cement stabilized sand, fill, or other rigid material is allowed to
enter the space between pipe and edge of wall opening at and around resilient
connector on either interior or exterior of manhole. If necessary, fill space with a
compressible material to ensure full flexibility provided by the resilient connector.
02088-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Where new manhole constructed on existing sewer, rigid pipe joint may be used.
Install waterstop gasket around existing pipe at center of cast-in-place wall. Join ends
of spilt waterstop material at pipe springline using an adhesive recommended and
supplied by waterstop manufacturer.
D. Test connection for watertight seal before backfilling.

disruption of flow at pipe-manhole connections. Conform to following criteria:
maximum
2. Depth of bench to invert shall be at least equal to the largest pipe diameter.
transition of invert through manhole, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
B. Form invert channels with concrete if not integral with manhole base section. For
concrete encasement minimum of 4 inches outside bells.
invert of manhole.
A. In manholes, where future connections are indicated on Drawings, install resilient

3.09 MANHOLE FRAME AND ADJUSTMENT RINGS

top section with non-shrink grout; do not use mortar between adjustment rings. Apply
latex-based bonding agent to precast concrete surfaces joined with non-shrink grout.
Set cast iron frame on adjustment ring in bed of approved sealant material. Install
sealant bed consisting of two beads of sealant, each bead having minimum
dimensions of 1/2-inch and 1/2-inch wide.
02088-10
CITY OF HOUSTON
inches beyond joint between ring and frame and adjustment rings and precast section.
C. For manholes in unpaved areas, set top of frame minimum of 6 inches above existing
ground line unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. In unpaved areas, encase
manhole frame in mortar or non-shrink grout placed flush with face of manhole ring
and top edge of frame. Provide rounded corner around perimeter.
3.10 BACKFILL
A. Place and compact backfill materials in area of excavation surrounding manholes in

accordance with requirements of Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for
Utilities. Provide embedment zone backfill material, as specified for adjacent utilities,
from manhole foundation up to an elevation 12 inches over each pipe connected to
manhole. Provide trench zone backfill, as specified for adjacent utilities, above
embedment zone backfill.
existing sewer up to springline of pipe with Class B concrete or flowable fill.
grade. Provide minimum of 4 inches of topsoil conforming to requirements of Section
02911 - Topsoil. Seed in accordance with Section 02921 - Hydromulch Seeding.
When shown on Drawings, sod disturbed areas in accordance with Section 02922 -
Sodding.

3.12 PROTECTION
A. Protect manholes from damage until work has been accepted. Repair damage to
manholes at no additional cost to City.
END OF SECTION
02088-11
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FRAMES, GRATES, RINGS, AND COVERS
SECTION 02090
FRAMES, GRATES, RINGS, AND COVERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Iron castings for manhole frames and covers, inlet frames and grates, catch basin
frames and grates, meter vault frames and covers, adjustment rings, and extensions.
B. Ring grates.
C. Trench Drainage
D. Tree Grates
A. Unit Prices.
1. No payment will be made for frames, grates, rings, covers, and seals under
this Section. Include payment in unit price for related item.
2. Payment to rack over existing manhole is on a unit price basis for each
manhole.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.
B. AASHTO M 306 - Standard Specification for Drainage, Sewer, Utility, and Related
Castings.
C. AASHTO M 105 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
D. ASTM A 48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
02090-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
E. ASTM A 536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
F. ASTM A 615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement.
G. AWS - D 1.4 - Structural Welding Code – Steel Reinforcing Bars.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams,

anchor details, and installation instructions.
C. Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation of casting assemblies that are
not included in Drawings or standard City of Houston details. Include plans,
elevations, sections and connection details. Show anchorage and accessory items.
Include setting drawings for location and installation of castings and anchorage
devices.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CASTINGS
A. All castings shall be made from gray cast iron conforming to the requirements of
AASHTO M 105 class 35b or ductile iron conforming to the requirements ASTM A
536 70-50-05.
B. Castings intended for traffic service shall be clean castings capable of withstanding an
application of 40,000 pound proof load as described in Section 5 of AASHTO M 306
(includes items such as frames, grates, rings, covers, trench drainage, etc.)
C. Fabricate castings to conform to shapes, dimensions, and with wording or logos

shown on Drawings.
D. All castings shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirement of Section 4 of

AASHTO M 306.
E. Unless otherwise indicated, all gray iron castings shall be provided uncoated.
02090-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
F. Each individual casting shall include all markings as shown on the specification
drawings and shall be identified by the producing foundry showing the following:
Name of producing foundry; country of manufacturer preceded by the words “Made
in,” such as “Made in USA”; material designation, heat identification and cast date
(MM/DD/YY), casting lettering as required by the purchaser. If a casting is melted
and poured at one foundry and labeled with the name of another organization,
manufacturer, or foundry the casting shall include the name of the producing foundry
and the organization the casting is produced for. The name of the producing foundry
and the organization the product is made for shall have lettering of equal size, be in
close proximity to each other, and be easily identified from the same side of the
casting. The casting shall also include any additional markings as required in Section
9 of AASHTO M 306 and Section 17 of AASHTO M 105.
2.02 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Testing shall be performed in accordance with the following inspection criteria unless
otherwise specified in the contract or purchase order. The manufacturer/supplier shall
be responsible for carrying out all of the required tests and inspections. All testing
shall be conducted in the United States using purchaser approved reliable facilities.
The manufacturer/supplier shall maintain complete records of all such tests and
inspections. All testing shall be paid for by the manufacturer/supplier.
B. The manufacturer shall report and certify material information obtained from
separately cast test bars. If there are more than three test bar failures in a calendar
year the manufacturer shall report this to the purchaser and shall discontinue
supplying product. In order to resume supplying product, documentation that a new
Quality System is in place to ensure material compliance must be submitted to and
accepted by the purchaser.
2.03 SPECIAL FRAMES AND COVERS
A. Where indicated on Drawings, provide watertight manhole frames and covers with
minimum of four bolts and gasket designed to seal cover to frame. Supply approved
watertight manhole covers and frames.
B. Where shown on Drawing, provide manhole frames and covers with 48-inch diameter
clear opening, with inner cover for 22-inch diameter clear opening. Provide approved
inner cover with pattern shown on Drawings.
C. Where indicated on Drawings provide security enabled covers or grates, to be secured

with the addition of Cam locks and lock lugs to inhibit opening and removal of cover
or grate without proper authorized tool. Supply approved security feature Frames,
Cover or Grates.
2.04 FABRICATED RING GRATES
A. Fabricate ring grates from reinforcing steel conforming to ASTM A 615.
B. Conform to welds connecting bars to AWS D 1.4.
02090-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Fabricate ring grates in accordance with City of Houston standard detail, “Ring Grate
for Open End of 18 Inch to 72 Inch RCP Stubs to Ditch”.
2.05 ADJUSTMENT RINGS FOR ASPHALT OVERLAYS
A. Use castings conforming Paragraph 2.01.
B. One piece casting with dimensions to fit frame and cover.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install castings according to approved shop drawings, instructions in related

specifications, and applicable directions from manufacturer's printed materials.
B. Set castings accurately at required locations to proper alignment and elevation. Keep
castings plumb, level, true, and free of rack. Measure location accurately from
established lines and grades. Brace or anchor frames temporarily in form work until
permanently set.
C. Set in mortar in mouth of pipe bell.
D. Install adjustment rings in existing frames with clean bearing surfaces that are free
from rocking.
END OF SECTION
02090-4
CITY OF HOUSTON NON METALLIC FRAMES,
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION GRATES, RINGS, AND COVERS
SECTION 02091
NON METALLIC FRAMES, GRATES, RINGS, AND COVERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Manhole frames and covers, inlet frames and grates, catch basin frames and grates,
meter vault frames and covers, adjustment rings, and extensions, ring grates, and
trench drainage, for application in wastewater collection system and facilities.
A. Unit Prices.
1. No payment will be made for frames, grates, rings, covers, and seals under
this Section. Include payment in unit price for related item.
2. Payment to rack over existing manhole is on a unit price basis for each
manhole.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. AASHTO M 306 – Standard Specification for Drainage, Sewer, Utility, and related
Castings
B. AASHTO - Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges
C. ASTM A 36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
D. ASTM A 615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement
E. ASTM C 501 - Standard Testing Method for Relative Resistance to Wear of

Unglazed Ceramic Tile by the Taber Abraser
F. ASTM D 2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property—Durometer Hardness
02091-1
G. ASTM G 154 - Standard Practice for Operating Fluorescent Ultraviolet (UV) Lamp
Apparatus for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials.
H. ASTM C 1028 - Standard Testing for Coefficient of Friction
I. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel
J. TCEQ Chapter 217 Design Criteria for Domestic Wastewater Systems Section 217.55
Manhole Covers
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications, testing data, certifications, load

tables, dimension diagrams, anchor details, and installation instructions.
C. Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation of casting assemblies that are
not included in Drawings or standard City of Houston details. Include plans,
elevations, sections and connection details. Show anchorage and accessory items.
Include setting drawings for location and installation of castings and anchorage
devices.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANHOLE RING AND COVER
A. All rings and covers units shall be made from high strength nonmetallic fiber
reinforced polymer /composite materials. The material shall be a resin thermoset
matrix that can be reinforced with continuous filament engineered fabrics, fiber
rovings, short fiber filaments, or equivalent nonmetallic reinforcing structure(s).
Seatings shall be encapsulated or bonded with a continuous dampener to reduce wear,
shock, noise, malodors and infiltration.
B. Rings and covers intended for traffic service shall be capable of withstanding
AASHTO M 306: Proof Testing (includes items such as frames, grates, rings, covers,
trench drainage, etc.).
C. Fabricate rings and covers to conform to shapes, dimensions, and with wording or
logos shown on Drawings.
D. All rings and covers shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirements of
AASHTO M 306.
E. Covers shall be provided with a positive lock mechanism as shown on City of

Houston Standard Detail for Non-Metallic Covers. Lock will have indicators to show
when Lock is fully engaged. Other equivalent locking mechanisms must be approved
by the City of Houston.
02091-2
2.02 TESTING AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Testing shall be performed in accordance with the following inspection criteria unless
otherwise specified in the contract or purchase order. The manufacturer/supplier shall
be responsible for carrying out all of the required tests and inspections. All testing
shall be conducted in the United States using purchaser approved reliable facilities.
The manufacturer/supplier shall maintain complete records of all such tests and
inspections. All testing shall be paid for by the manufacturer/supplier.
B. Frames and Covers shall be “Proof Tested” in accordance with AASHTO M 306.
C. Heavy Duty: A load of 40,000 lbs shall be concentrated on a 9” x 9” block with

rubber or fiber backing pad for one minute. During the load testing process visible
cracks or delamination will be cause for rejection. When load is removed, Permanent
Set (Deflection) of more than 1/8-inch (0.125-inch) measured at center of load area
will be cause for rejection. All testing shall be conducted on a NIST calibrated and
Certified load test machine.
D. Ultraviolet resistance: ASTM G 154 Cycle 1 for 1000 hrs. Specimens shall be tested
for ultimate flexural strength, retaining at least 75% of control values for load and
deflection at failure.
E. Coefficient of Friction: Shall be greater than 0.6 when tested in accordance to ASTM
C 1028.
F. Wear and Abrasion: Shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C 501, Test shall be
1000 cycles of a H22 wheel with 1000g load. Wear Index is calculated 88/ Weight
Loss (grams). The average of four test cycles shall have a calculated wear index of
>300.
G. At the request of the Project Manager, the quality process manual shall be available
for review, manufacturing facility shall also be available for inspection to ensure
quality standards are met along with EPA and OSHA standards.
2.03 FABRICATED RING GRATES
A. Fabricate ring grates from reinforcing steel conforming to ASTM A 36.
B. Conform to welds connecting bars to AWS D 1.1.
C. Fabricate ring grates in accordance with City of Houston standard detail, “Ring Grate
for Open End of 18 Inch to 72 Inch RCP Stubs to Ditch”.
2.04 GRADE ADJUSTMENT RINGS
A. Conform to Paragraph 2.01.
B. One piece unit with dimensions to fit frame and cover.
02091-3
C. Physical properties shall comply with ASTM D 2240 with a Shore Durometer of 77A
±5
D. Adjustment Risers shall be of uniform quality, free from cracks, holes, and any other
surface debris. Riser rings shall be available in ½-inch height increments. Molded
adjustment risers tolerance shall be ±1/16-inch (1.6mm) from required nominal
dimensions. Adjustment Risers shall be designed for heavy duty street traffic, and
meet or exceed minimum load capacity requirements of AASHTO M 306.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install castings according to approved shop drawings, instructions in related

specifications, and applicable directions from manufacturer's printed materials.
B. Set units accurately at required locations to proper alignment and elevation. Keep
units plumb, level, true, and free of rack. Measure location accurately from
established lines and grades. Brace or anchor frames temporarily in form work until
permanently set.
C. Set in mortar in mouth of pipe bell.
D. Install adjustment rings in existing frames with clean bearing surfaces that are free
from rocking.
END OF SECTION
02091-4
CITY OF HOUSTON WASTE MATERIAL HANDLING,
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION TESTING AND DISPOSAL
SECTION 02136
WASTE MATERIAL HANDLING, TESTING AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Handling, testing and disposal of hazardous and non-hazardous waste material.
B. Material present inside of existing tanks to be repaired or demolished, i.e., silt, sludge
and other residue deposits generated by normal water production usage of the tanks.
C. Existing coatings removed from existing tanks.
D. Spent abrasives used and debris generated in the execution of the work.
E. All spent thinners, coating materials or other products brought on site for execution of
work that require disposal as a hazardous or non-hazardous waste.
F. Soil that may be contaminated due to the execution of the work.
G. Petroleum soaked sand foundation material removed from demolished tank sites.
A. Section 01110 – Summary of Work
B. Section 01270 – Measurement and Payment
C. Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures
A. No separate measurement and payment will be made for handling, testing or disposal
of non- hazardous or hazardous material, debris or material identified as contaminated
material on the site prior to the bid date except as indicated in section 1.03 B and 1.03
C. The Contractor shall include the cost for this work in the Contract bid price for
work of which this is a component part.
B. Payment for hazardous waste material handling, removal, testing, transporting and
disposal of material identified as hazardous after the bid date will be paid for at the
unit price bid for "Hazardous Waste Handling, Removal, Transporting" if such an
item is provided in the contract.
02136-1
C. Removal and disposal of potentially petroleum soaked sand foundation material will
be measured per cubic yard which shall include testing, removing, storing,
transporting and disposing of material and will be paid for at the unit price bid for
"Removal and Disposal of Potentially Petroleum Soaked Sand". Basis of payment
will be Class I Industrial Waste having a Total Petroleum Hydrocarbon (TPH) level
greater than 1500 ppm.
D. Refer to Section 01270 – Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures.
1.04 REFERENCES
The following is a list of applicable requirements to this project. It is not intended to

be a complete listing of all laws and regulations to which the Contractor must
comply.
A. Environmental Protection Agency - Code of Federal Regulations
1. 40 CFR Part 261 - Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste
2. 40 CFR 261, Appendix II EPA - Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure
3. 40 CFR Part 262 - Standards Applicable to Generators of Hazardous Waste
4. 40 CFR Part 263 - Standards Applicable to Transporters of Hazardous Waste
5. 40 CFR Part 264 - Standards for Owner and Operators of Hazardous Waste
Treatment, Storage and Disposal Facilities
6. 40 CFR Part 265 - Interim Status for Owners and Operators of Hazardous
Waste Treatment, Storage and Disposal Facilities
7. 40 CFR 265, Subpart C EPA - Preparedness and Prevention
8. 40 CFR 265, Subpart D EPA - Contingency Plan and Emergency Procedures
9. 40 CFR 265.16 EPA - Personnel Training
10. 40 CFR Part 268 - Land Disposal Restrictions
11. 49 CFR Parts 173 – Shippers – General Requirements for Shipments and
Packaging’s
12. 49 CFR Part 178 – Specifications for Packaging’s
13. 49 CFR Part 179 – Specifications for Tank Cars
14. 40 CFR Part 355 - Emergency Planning and Notification
B. EPA Methods
02136-2
1. 3050 - Acid Digestion of Sediment, Sludge, and Soils
2. SW 846 - Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste - Physical/Chemical

Methods
C. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality
1. TAC Title 30, Chapter 305 "Consolidated Permits"
2. TAC Title 30, Chapter 335 "Industrial Solid Waste and Municipal Hazardous
Waste"
3. TAC Title 30, Chapter 343 "Oil and Hazardous Substances"
D. TWC Technical Guidelines
1. Document #1, Waste Evaluation/Classification
E. NIOSH Methods
1. 7082 LEAD by Flame AAS
F. Society for Protective Coatings
1. SSPC 91-18 - Industrial Lead Paint Removal Handbook
2. Guide 6 - Guide for Containing Surface Preparation Debris Generated During

Paint Removal Operations
3. Guide 7 - Guide for the Disposal of Lead Contaminated Surface Preparation

Debris
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall conform to requirements of Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures.
B. Submittals shall conform to appropriate codes for regulatory requirements.
C. Obtain and submit disposal permits for proposed disposal sites, if required by local
ordinances.
1.06 TESTING AND IDENTIFICATION
A. The Owner is the Generator of the debris for permitting purposes, and will obtain the
EPA Identification number, but the Contractor is responsible for assuring that all
testing, handling, storage, transportation, and disposal requirements are properly
implemented, including satisfactory training of job site personnel and the cleaning of
all reusable items and equipment prior to removal from the site.
02136-3
B. Prior to the bid date, if testing has been performed by the City and if hazardous
material has been identified in the debris material in an existing tank, the paint to be
removed from an existing tank, the work site soil, or the foundation material, the
material or test results will be indicated in Section 01110 – Summary of Work. It is
the responsibility of the Contractor to properly test and to determine if any wastes
generated as a result of this project are hazardous in accordance with 40 CFR Part
261.
1.07 DEFINITIONS
(Note Definitions applicable to this section are also presented elsewhere.)
A. Hazardous Waste (lead paint debris): Waste that is classified as hazardous due to its
concentrations of regulated hazardous substances. Paint debris is classified as
hazardous waste if, after testing by the Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure
(TCLP), the leachate contains any of the 8 metals or other substances in
concentrations at or above limits established in 40 CFR 261.
B. Lead Containing Dust and Debris: Dust and debris generated during the project which
contains lead in any amount, including but not limited to pulverized paint, spent
abrasive, filters (wet and dry), and containment materials upon which lead is still
present.
C. RCRA: Resource Conservation and Recovery Act. Federal law pertaining to

hazardous waste management. EPA implementing regulations are contained in 40
CFR 240-280.
D. TACB: Texas Air Control Board. Texas State Agency joined into the TCEQ and
responsible for writing and enforcement of rules and regulations relating to air
quality.
E. TCEQ: Texas Commission on Environmental Quality. State of Texas Commission

responsible for planning, oversight, monitoring and management of natural resources.
F. TCLP: Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure. Laboratory tests conducted on

wastes that determine the amount of hazardous materials that leach out into a test
solution. The test is intended to simulate the properties of water as it leaches through
a solid waste landfill. TCLP testing is defined in 40 CFR 261, Appendix II.
G. TWC: Texas Water Commission. Texas State Agency joined into the TCEQ and
responsible for writing and enforcement of rules and regulations relating to water
quality and solid waste programs.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
02136-4
3.01 WASTE HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. All chemicals to be brought on site by the contractor must be stored and used in a safe
and proper manner in accordance with all applicable Federal, State and local laws and
regulations as well as the manufacturers recommendations. Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDSs) shall be maintained on-site for all hazardous chemicals used.
B. Hazardous wastes are to be handled and stored according to the requirements of TAC
30 Chapter 335 "Industrial Solid Waste and Municipal Hazardous Waste" and 40CFR
Part 262, with regard to on-site storage, and 40CFR Part 264 with regard to required
notices, site security, personnel training, contingency planning and emergency
procedures, recordkeeping and reporting, time of storage, amount of material stored,
and use of proper containers. Hazardous waste will be stored in covered containers in
accordance with the requirements of 40 CFR 262 and 49 CFR 172,178 and 179.
C. The contractor shall provide proper, segregated storage for hazardous and non-
hazardous materials to be used in the work area in order to ensure safe work
conditions.
D. All material, waste and debris from removal of lead containing coatings, including
those products and materials employed for chemical paint stripping, shall be
considered hazardous waste and handled accordingly, until such time that testing and
analysis indicates otherwise.
1. Sampling of materials for TCLP testing of initial containers of debris shall be

completed prior to or during filling. Until the TCLP test results are received,
the containers shall be labeled as lead-containing debris. Hazardous waste
labels shall be applied after the test results are received, if the debris tests
hazardous.
2. Hazardous waste shall not be stored at the project site for more than 90 days.
Non- hazardous wastes shall be removed at a minimum of once per month (30
days).
3. Special attention shall be given to the time of storage, storage conditions,

amount of material stored at any one time, use of proper containers, and
personnel training.
E. Hazardous waste shall be placed on pallets over protected ground, be located in a

secure area enclosed by a fence with signs around the perimeter, and be shielded
adequately to prevent dispersion of the waste by wind or water. Under no
circumstances shall the waste be stored within a flood plain area. Any evidence of
improper storage shall be cause for immediate shutdown of the project until
corrective action is taken. The storage area shall be within a security fence with a
locked gate.
3.02 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTAMINATION
02136-5
A. The contractor shall not contaminate the air, soils or surface and ground waters with
any hazardous waste. Spills, releases and discharges of hazardous or toxic materials
which inadvertently occur shall be reported in accordance with 40 CFR 265 and TAC
30 Chapter 343.
B. Contingency Plan and Training: The Contractor shall comply with TCEQ Title 30
Regulations and EPA 40 CFR 265, Subpart C in the event of a spill or release of
waste, EPA 40 CFR 265 Subpart D, and TCEQ regulations.
C. All personnel associated with the handling of hazardous waste shall complete a
formal training program in accordance with 40 CFR 265.16 and TCEQ Title 30
Regulations. Training records of all employees must be maintained and kept on file.
3.03 WASTE CLASSIFICATION
A. Testing
1. All solid waste generated by the paint removal activities shall be tested in
accordance with 40 CFR 261, Appendix II, Method 1311 Toxicity
Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP), to determine if it is hazardous.
2. In the case of wet methods of preparation, the use of chemical strippers, or

containerized hygiene water, all liquids and sludge shall also be tested. When
chemical strippers are used, the testing shall include pH to determine
corrosivity. All waste water shall be tested for total lead.
3. Representative samples of the debris for each waste stream generated from the
work on this project shall be collected. A minimum of four of the samples
representative of each waste stream shall be analyzed to establish a waste is
non-hazardous. Note that more than four initial samples of each waste stream
shall be collected in order to obtain the four representative samples for
analysis. Results from one test sample are sufficient to identify a waste as
hazardous.
4. The collection of the initial representative samples of each waste stream and
selection of the minimum of four for testing shall be accomplished using a
random sampling technique and shall comply with the following: a minimum
of one representative sample for each 55 gallons of waste, or a minimum of
four representative samples for each gondola or roll-off box of waste. Samples
shall be collected in accordance with SW-846, "Test Methods for Evaluating
Solid Waste - Physical/ Chemical Methods".
5. Sampling and testing shall be performed by a certified laboratory acceptable

to the Owner. The name, address, and qualifications of the laboratory shall be
provided for approval. The Owner shall be provided with copies of the test
results as soon as they are received by the Contractor.
B. Classification
02136-6
1. Lead paint debris is classified as hazardous waste if, after testing by TCLP,
the leachate contains any of the 8 metals or other hazardous substances in
concentrations at or above limits established in 40 CFR 261:
Arsenic - 5.0 mg/L

Barium - 100.0 mg/L
Cadmium - 1.0 mg/L
Chromium - 5.0 mg/L
Lead - 5.0 mg/L
Mercury - 0.2 mg/L
Selenium - 1.0 mg/L
Silver - 5.0 mg/L
2. The above includes only the eight (8) characteristic metals listed by EPA
among which are elements typically associated with paints. Other substances
may be present which may cause debris to be classified as hazardous waste as
defined in 40 CFR 261 (such as a pH<=2.0 or >=12.5 resulting in corrosivity),
and must be taken into account.
3.04 DISPOSAL
A. The contractor shall arrange to have wastes and debris transported from the site in
accordance with all City Ordinances and State and Federal Laws. If wastes and/or
debris is determined to be hazardous, transporting to be in accordance with TAC 30
Chapter 335 -Industrial Solid Waste and Municipal Hazardous Waste, 40CFR Part
263 - Standards Applicable to Transporters of Hazardous Waste and the applicable
sections of 49 CFR Parts 171 through 179.
B. Manifest and Reporting: The Contractor shall comply with all of the manifesting,
certification, and reporting requirements of EPA 40 CFR 262, 40 CFR 268, and Texas
regulations, including certificates of final disposal for each shipment.
C. Copies of all records and reports, test sample chain of custody forms, TCLP and other
test results shall be provided to the Owner.
D. The contractor shall dispose of wastes and debris at a licensed site acceptable to the
Owner. Hazardous wastes and debris shall be disposed of in accordance with 40CFR
Part 265 and 40CFR Part 268 Land Disposal Restrictions. Manifesting of hazardous
wastes shall be in accordance with 40CFR Part 262, Subpart B.
E. Wastewater resulting from surface preparation, washing, personal hygiene or

decontamination shall not be discharged without testing and through arrangement
with the local Publicly Owned Treatment Works (POTW) or other approved means.
END OF SECTION
02136-7
CITY OF HOUSTON SITE PREPARATION, GRADING, RESTORATION
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION AND CLEAN UP FOR WATER STORAGE TANKS
SECTION 02201
SITE PREPARATION, GRADING, RESTORATION AND CLEAN UP FOR WATER

STORAGE TANKS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. This Section covers the clearing, grubbing, grading, final clean-up, and restoration of
the site in preparation for hydro mulch or sodding and move out.
A. Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures
A. No separate measurement and payment for worked performed under this Section. The
Contractor shall include the cost for this work in the contract bid price for work of
which this is a component part.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. Federal Seed Act Regulations (Department of Agriculture)
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Submit seed to engineer for approval. Submit certification from supplier that each
type of seed conforms to these specifications and the requirements of the Texas Seed
Law. Certification shall accompany seed delivery.
C. Submit a certificate stating that fertilizer complies with these specifications and the
requirements of the Texas Fertilizer Law.
1.06 SEQUENCE OF WORK
A. Restoration of each site shall be completed immediately after all tank work is
completed and the tank has been tested and returned to service.
B. After obtaining approval from the City Engineer of satisfactory site restoration,
Contractor shall hydro mulch all areas disturbed during construction. The hydro
mulch seeding requirements, together with other necessary related work, shall
conform to the requirements of this Section.
02201-1
C. All fences, walks, driveways or other permanent facilities are to be completed in

place before the finished hydro mulch is applied.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. All seed must meet the requirements of U.S. Department of Agriculture Rules and
Regulations as set forth in Federal Seed Act and Texas Seed Law. Type of seed,
purity and germination requirements, date of application and planting dates are as
follows:
Application Rate
Type Planting Date
Pounds per Acre
Hulled Common Bermuda 40 January 1

to Grass 98/88 April 15
Unhulled Common Bermuda 40
Grass 98/88
Annual Rye Grass (Gulf) 50
Hulled Common Bermuda 40 April 15

to Grass 98/88 October 1
Grass 98/88
Annual Rye Grass 40
B. Fertilizer:
1. Fertilizer shall be water soluble with analysis of 10% nitrogen, 20%

phosphoric acid and 10% potash. Rate of application shall be 750 pounds per
acre except during the period of April 15 through September 1, when the rate
shall be reduced to 600 pounds per acre.
C. Mulch:
1. Mulch shall be virgin wood cellulose fiber made from whole wood chips.
2. Within the fiber material at least 20% of the fibers will be 10.7 mm in length
and 0.27 mm in diameter. Rate of application shall be 2000 pounds per acre.
Soil stabilizers such as Terra type III, (or approved equal) shall be applied at a
rate of 40 pounds per acre in the flatter portions of the disturbed areas.
PART 3 EXECUTION
02201-2
3.01 DESCRIPTION
A. The work covered by this Section consists of furnishing all labor, materials,
equipment, supplies, supervision, tools, and performing all work necessary for
clearing and protection of facilities during construction and top soiling, finish
grading, seeding, fertilizing, watering, maintenance, and clean-up of disturbed areas
within the individual water plant areas at the completion of work, in accordance with
these specifications and as shown on drawings.
B. Fences shall be relocated or installed as shown on drawings. All damage to existing

fencing occurring during construction activities shall be repaired or replaced at the
Contractor's expense to a condition equal to or better than existing prior to such
damage. Fencing relocated for the convenience of accommodating construction
activities shall be returned to its original location at the completion of the work.
C. Silt fencing and four (4) foot safety fencing is to be installed as indicated on the
plans.
D. All sites shall be restored to a condition equal to or better than that existing prior to
construction activities. All holes and open excavations shall be filled and compacted
to the density of the surrounding area. Level all washes, ruts, depressions, and
mounds to provide a smooth finish with no large debris, dirt clods, or lumps of size
that would interfere with the operation of a standard rotary lawnmower.
3.02 MAINTENANCE
A. The hydro mulch seeding shall be adequately watered until established. Any areas
damaged by erosion or areas that do not have acceptable turfing shall be reapplied to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
02201-3
CITY OF HOUSTON REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENTS, STRUCTURES,
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION WOOD, AND DEMOLITION DEBRIS
SECTION 02221
REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENTS, STRUCTURES, WOOD, AND DEMOLITION

DEBRIS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Removing concrete paving, asphaltic concrete pavement, brick pavement and base
courses.
B. Removing concrete curbs, concrete curbs and gutters, sidewalks and driveways.
C. Removing pipe culverts, sewers, and sewer leads.
D. Removing waterlines and water services lines including asbestos cement pipe per
OSHA guidelines.
E. Removing existing inlets and manholes.
F. Removing and disposing of pre-stressed concrete beams and drill shafts.
G. Removing miscellaneous structures of concrete or masonry.
H. Removing existing bridge.
I. Removing existing wood and demolition debris.
B. Section 01576 – Waste Material Disposal
C. Section 02316 – Excavation and Backfill for Structures
D. Section 02960 – Milling Pavement
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for removing and disposing of asphaltic surfacing with or without

base, regardless of thickness encountered, is on square yard basis measured
between lips of gutters.
02221-1
2. Payment for removing and disposing of reinforced concrete pavement, with or

without asphalt overlay, regardless of its thickness, is on square yard basis
measured from back- to-back of curbs. Payment includes concrete pavement,
esplanade curbs, curbs and gutters, and paving headers.
3. Payment for removing and disposing of cement stabilized shell base course,
with or without asphaltic surfacing, is on square yard basis.
4. Payment for removing and disposing of concrete sidewalks and driveways is

on square yard basis. Include removal and disposal of curb ramps in the cost
for removal of sidewalks.
5. Payment for removing asphaltic pavement surface by milling shall be in

accordance with Section 02960 – Milling Pavement.
6. Payment for removing and disposing of miscellaneous concrete and masonry

is on cubic yard basis of structure in place.
7. Payment for removing and disposing of pipe culverts, sewers, and sewer
leads, is on linear foot basis for each diameter and each material type of pipe
removed.
8. Payment for removing and disposing of waterlines and water service lines
including asbestos cement pipe is on linear foot basis for each diameter pipe
and each material type of pipe removed.
9. Payment for removing and disposing of existing inlets is on unit price basis
for each inlet removed.
10. Payment for removing and disposing of prestressed concrete piles and drill
shafts is on linear foot basis.
11. Payment for removing and disposing of existing bridge, including piles and
abutments to minimum of 4 feet below ground level, is on a lump sum basis.
12. Payment for removing and disposing of existing manholes is on unit price
basis for each manhole removed.
13. Payment for removing and disposing of miscellaneous wood and demolition
debris is on cubic yard basis.
14. Payment for removing and disposing of existing wheelchair ramps, except for
concrete curb ramps, of any thickness is on square yard basis.
15. No payment for saw cutting of pavement, curbs, or curbs and gutters will be
made under this section. Include cost of such work in unit prices for items
listed in bid form requiring saw cutting.
02221-2
16. No payment will be made for work outside maximum payment limits
indicated on Drawings, or for pavements or structures removed for
Contractor's convenience.
a. For utility installations: Match actual pavement replaced but no greater

than maximum pavement replacement limits shown on Drawings.
Limits of measurement will be as shown on Street Cut Pavement
Replacement Rules.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. EPA 40 CFR 763 – Asbestos
B. EPA 40 CFR 61, Subpart M – National Emission Standard for Asbestos
C. OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101 – Asbestos
D. OSHA 29 CFR 1926.32 – General Safety and Health Provisions
E. OSHA 29 CFR 1910.134 – Respiratory Protection
F. National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH)
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable codes for disposal of debris.
B. Coordinate removal work with utility companies.
C. For removal of asbestos containing materials, or material that could potentially

contain asbestos, comply with applicable provisions of OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101 –
Asbestos, OSHA 29 CFR 1926.32 – General Safety and Health Provisions, and EPA
40 CFR 61 Subpart M – National Emission Standard for Asbestos.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Obtain advance approval from Project Manager for dimensions and limits of removal
work.
02221-3
B. Identify known utilities below grade. Stake and flag locations.
C. For removal of asbestos-containing materials, or materials that could potentially

contain asbestos, comply with the following:
1. Crew members must be trained in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101

– Asbestos.
2. Conduct negative exposure assessment to demonstrate asbestos exposure

below permissible exposure limit (PEL) in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR
1926.1101 – Asbestos and EPA 40 CFR 763 – Asbestos.
3. If negative exposure assessment not conducted, or if results are above PEL,

provide respiratory protection in accordance with Paragraph 3.02 of this
Section.
3.02 PROTECTION
A. Protect following from damage or displacement:
1. Adjacent public and private property.
2. Trees, plants, and other landscape features designated to remain.
3. Utilities designated to remain.
4. Pavement and utility structures designated to remain.
5. Bench marks, monuments, and existing structures designated to remain.
B. When required, provide respiratory protection in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR

1910.134 – Respiratory Protection, and National Institute of Occupational Safety and
Health (NIOSH).
3.03 REMOVALS
A. Remove pavements and structures by methods that will not damage underground
utilities. Do not use drop hammer near existing underground utilities.
B. Minimize amount of earth loaded during removal operations.
C. Where existing pavement is to remain, make straight saw cuts in existing pavement to
provide clean breaks prior to removal. Do not break concrete pavement or base with
drop hammer unless concrete or base has been saw cut to minimum depth of 2 inches.
D. When street and driveway saw cut location is greater than one-half of pavement lane
width, remove pavement for full lane width or to nearest longitudinal joint as directed
by Project Manager.
02221-4
E. Remove sidewalks and curbs to nearest existing dummy, expansion, or construction

joint.
F. Where existing end of pipe culvert or end of sewer is to remain, install 8-inch-thick
masonry plug in pipe end prior to backfill in accordance with requirements of Section
02316 - Excavation and Backfill for Structures.
G. Labeling of Asbestos Cement (AC) Pipe:
1. Label leak-tight container with warning statement of hazardous asbestos

content in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101 and as noted below.
2. Label waste material with following warning:
DANGER
CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS
MAY CAUSE CANCER
CAUSES DAMAGE TO LUNGS
DO NOT BREATHE DUST
AVOID CREATING DUST
3. Neatly print labels in letters of sufficient size and contrast so label is easily
visible and legible.
3.04 BACKFILL
A. Backfill of removal areas shall be in accordance with requirements of Section 02316 -

Excavation and Backfill for Structures.
3.05 DISPOSAL
A. Inlet frames, grates, and plates; and manhole frames and covers, may remain City
property. Disposal shall be in accordance with requirements of Section 01576 - Waste
Material Disposal.
B. Remove from site, debris resulting from work under this section in accordance with
requirements of Section 01576 - Waste Material Disposal.
C. For asbestos-containing materials:
1. Comply with 40 CFR Part 61 and 30 TAC Sections 330.137(b) for Industrial
Class 1 waste.
2. Inspect load to ensure correct packaging and labeling.
3. Line vehicles with two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheeting.
4. Remove asbestos-containing waste from site daily.
02221-5
END OF SECTION
02221-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION ABANDONMENT OF SEWERS
SECTION 02222
ABANDONMENT OF SEWERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Abandonment in place of existing sewers, junction structures, manholes, and force

mains.
C. Section 01576 – Waste Material Disposal
E. Section 02431 – Tunnel Grout
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for grout fill and abandonment of existing sewers, including boxes
and elliptical shaped sewers, is on linear foot basis for each diameter of sewer
being abandoned. Measurement will be along centerline of sewer from
centerline to centerline of manholes.
2. Payment for grout fill and abandonment of sewer manholes or junction

structure is by each manhole or junction structure abandoned in conformance
with this Section.
3. Payment will be full compensation for all material, equipment, and labor
required for complete abandonment grouting, including air venting, testing,
temporary plugs, fill lines, excavations, and incidentals.
4. No separate payment will be made for plugging and abandoning sewer force
mains. Include cost of such abandonment in related work.
02222-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
6. Acceptability of grout material is based on achieving average strength within

range of 75 to 150 psi as defined in Paragraph 2.01B.1. Grout that is out of
range after placement may be accepted with price adjustment of 1.0 percent
price deduction for each psi average compressive strength below 75 psi and
0.5 percent price deduction for each psi average compressive strength above
150 psi, as applicable to material volume represented by test series. Shrinkage
in grout material placements shall be remedied by Contractor according to
Paragraph 3.04H without additional compensation.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Abandonment. Sewer abandonment consists of demolition and removal of portion of

manholes existing within specified depth of surface, and abandonment in place of
sewer lines and manholes as specified in this Section.
B. Flowable Fill. Flowable fill (abandonment grout) shall be controlled low-strength

material consisting of fluid mixture of cement, fly ash, aggregate, water and with
admixtures as necessary to provide workable properties. Placement of flowable fill
may be by grouting techniques in sewer pipes or other restricted areas, or as mass
placement by chutes or tremie methods in unrestricted locations with open access.
Long-term hardened strength shall be within specified range.
C. Ballast. Large aggregate either replaced with voids subsequently filled with flowable
fill injected by grouting method; or in areas with open access, placed individually and
sequentially at same time as flowable fill placement.
D. Backgrouting. Secondary stage pressure grouting to ensure that voids have been filled
within abandoned sewer. Backgrouting will only be required at critical locations
indicated on Drawings or if there is evidence of incomplete flowable fill placements.
1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
B. ASTM C 494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
C. ASTM C 618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
Pozzolan for Use in Concrete.
D. ASTM C 937 - Standard Specification for Grout Fluidifier for Pre-placed Aggregate
Concrete.
E. ASTM C 940 - Standard Test Method for Expansion and Bleeding of Freshly Mixed
Grouts for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete in the Laboratory.
02222-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
F. ASTM C 1017 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in

Producing Flowing Concrete.
G. ASTM C 1107 - Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-

shrink)
1.06 SUBMITTALS
B. Flowable fill mix design report:
1. Flowable fill type and production method. Describe if fill will be mixed to
final proportions and consistency in batch plant or if constituents will be
added in transit mixer at placement location.
2. Use of ballast. Provide percentage of ballast of total placement and size limits
for ballast if fill is intended to be used with ballast.
3. Aggregate gradation of fill. Aggregate gradation of mix (excluding ballast)

shall be used as pilot curve for quality control during production.
4. Fill mix constituents and proportions including materials by weight and

volume, and air content but excluding ballast. Give types and amounts of
admixtures including air entrainment or air generating compounds.
5. Fill densities and viscosities, including wet density at point of placement.
6. Initial time of set.
7. Bleeding and shrinkage.
8. Compressive strength.
C. Technical information for equipment and operational procedures including projected

slurry injection rate, grout pressure, method of controlling grout pressure, bulkhead
and vent design, and number of stages of grout application.
D. Experience record for proposed crew, showing minimum of 100 cubic yards of
flowable fill placed using proposed or similar equipment and methods.
E. At least 60 days prior to commencing abandonment activities, submit plan for

abandonment, describing proposed grouting sequence, bypass pumping requirements
and plugging, if any, and other information pertinent to completion of work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FLOWABLE FILL
02222-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Design Mix Criteria. Provide design of one or more mixes to meet design criteria and
conditions for placement. Present information required by Paragraph 1.06B in mix
design report including following:
1. Cement: ASTM C 150 Type I or II. Volume and weight per cubic yard of fill.
Provide minimum cement content of 100 pounds per cubic yard.
2. Fly ash: ASTM C 618 Class C or F. Volume and weight per cubic yard of fill.
Provide minimum Fly ash content of 200 pounds per cubic yard.
3. Potable water: Volume and weight per cubic yard of fill. Amount of water
determined by mix design testing.
4. Aggregate gradation: 100 percent passing 3/8-inch sieve and not more than 10
percent passing No. 200 sieve. Mix design report shall define pilot gradation
based on following sieve sizes 3/8-inch, Nos. 4, 8, 16, 30, 50, 100, and 200.
Do not deviate from pilot gradation by more than plus or minus 10 percentage
points for any sieve for production material.
5. Aggregate source material: Screened or crushed aggregate, pit or bank run

fine gravels or sand, or crushed concrete. If crushed concrete is used, add at
least 30 percent of natural aggregate to provide workability.
6. Admixtures: Use admixtures meeting ASTM C 494 and ASTM C 1017 as

needed to improve pumpability, to control time of set, and reduce bleeding.
7. Fluidifier: Use fluidifier meeting ASTM C 937 as necessary to hold solid

constituents in suspension. Add shrinkage compensator if necessary.
8. Performance additive: Use flowable fill performance additive, such as Darafill

or approved equal, to control fill properties.
B. Flowable Fill Requirements
1. Unconfined compressive strength: minimum 75 psi and maximum 150 psi at

56 days as determined based on an average of three tests for same placement.
Present at least three acceptable strength tests for proposed mix design in mix
design report.
2. Placement characteristics: self-leveling.
3. Shrinkage characteristics: non-shrink.
4. Water bleeding for fill to be placed by grouting method in sewers: not to

exceed 2 percent according to ASTM C 940.
5. Minimum wet density: 90 pounds per cubic foot.
2.02 BALLAST
02222-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Ballast Material: Natural rock or concrete pieces with minimum size equal to at least
10 times maximum aggregate size of flowable fill and maximum size of 24 inches.
Maximum dimension shall not be more than 20 percent of minimum dimension of
space to be filled.
B. Ballast Composition: Free of regulated waste material.
2.03 PLUGS FOR FORCE MAINS
A. Grout Plugs: Cement-based dry-pack grout conforming to ASTM C 1107, Grade B or

C.
B. Manufactured Plug: Commercially available plug or cap specifically designed and

manufactured to be used with pipe being abandoned.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Have fill mix design reports and other submittals required by Paragraph 1.06 accepted
by Project Manager prior to start of placement. Notify Project Manager at least 24
hours in advance of grouting with flowable fill.
B. Select fill placement equipment and follow procedures with sufficient safety and care
to avoid damage to existing underground utilities and structures. Operate equipment
at pressure that will not distort or imperil portion of work, new or existing.
C. Clean sewer lines and video with closed circuit television to identify connections,
locate obstructions, and assess condition of pipe. Locate previously unidentified
connections, which have not been redirected and reconnected as part of this project,
and report them to Project Manager. During placement of fill, compensate for
irregularities in sewer pipe, such as obstructions, open joints, or broken pipe to ensure
no voids remain unfilled.
D. Perform demolition work prior to starting fill placement. Clean placement areas of
sewers and manholes of debris that may hinder fill placement. Remove excessive
amounts of sludge and other substances that may degrade performance of fill. Do not
leave sludge or other debris in place if filling more than 2 percent of placement
volume. Dispose of waste material in compliance with Section 01576 - Waste
Material Disposal.
E. Remove free water prior to starting fill placement.
3.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Mix flowable fill in automated batch plant and deliver it to site in ready-mix trucks.
Performance additives may be added at placement site if required by mix design.
02222-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Use concrete or grout pumps capable of continuous delivery at planned placement

rate.
3.03 DEMOLITION OF SEWER MANHOLES, PIPELINE STRUCTURES, AND

FORCE MAINS PRIOR TO ABANDONMENT
A. Remove manhole frames and covers and castings from other existing pipeline
structures. Deliver castings to nearest City of Houston maintenance facility for future
use. Alternatively, salvaged castings may be used upon approval by Project Manager,
for constructing new manholes on this project.
B. Demolish and remove precast concrete adjustment rings and corner section, or brick
and mortar corbel and chimney, or other pipeline structure, to minimum depth of 4
feet below finished grade. Structure may be removed to greater depth, but not deeper
than 18 inches above crown of abandoned sewer.
C. When adjacent sewer lines are not to be filled, place temporary plugs in each line
connecting to manhole, in preparation for filling manhole.
D. Excavate overburden from force mains to be abandoned at locations indicated on

Drawings, conforming to Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. Cut
existing force main, when necessary, to provide an end surface perpendicular to axis
of pipe and suitable for plug to be installed. Remove force main piping material
remaining outside of segment to be abandoned.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Abandon sewer lines by completely filling sewer line with flowable fill. Abandon
manholes and other structures by filling with flowable fill, together with ballast as
applicable, within depth of structures left in place.
B. Place flowable fill to fill volume between manholes. Continuously place flowable fill
from manhole to manhole with no intermediate pour points, but not exceeding 500
feet in length.
C. Have filling operation performed by experienced crews with equipment to monitor

density of flowable fill and to control pressure.
D. Temporarily plug sewer lines which are to remain in operation during

pouring/pumping to keep lines free of flowable fill.
E. Pump flowable fill through bulkheads constructed for placement of two 2-inch PVC
pipes or use other suitable construction methods to contain flowable fill in lines to be
abandoned. These pipes will act as injection points or vents for placement of flowable
fill.
02222-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
F. Place flowable fill under pressure flow conditions into properly vented open system
until flowable fill emerges from vent pipes. Pump flowable fill with sufficient
pressure to overcome friction and to fill sewer from downstream end, to discharge at
upstream end.
G. Inject flowable fill through replaced ballast using grouting equipment and series of
grout pipes discharging at bottom of placement, allowing fill to rise through ballast
effectively filling all voids. Alternatively, sequentially place individual pieces of
ballast at same time as flowable fill is placed. Do not fill with ballast more than 50
percent of volume at any level, to prevent nesting and void formation.
H. Remediate placement of flowable fill which does not fill voids in sewer, in manhole
or other structures, or where voids develop due to excessive shrinkage or bleeding of
fill, by using pressure grouting either from inside sewer or from surface. Pressure
grout shall conform to Section 02431 - Tunnel Grout.
I. Plug each end of force main being abandoned.
J. Force main abandonment
1. Clean inside surface of force main at least 12 inches from ends to achieve firm
bond and seal grout plug or manufactured plug to pipe surface. Similarly,
clean and prepare exterior pipe surface if manufactured cap is to be used.
2. When using grout plug, place temporary plug or bulkhead approximately 12

inches inside pipe. Fill pipe end completely with dry-pack grout mixture.
3. When using manufactured plug or cap, install fitting as recommended by

manufacture's instructions, to form water tight seal.
K. Backfill to surface, above pipe or structures left in place, with flowable fill in
restricted areas, compacted bank run sand in unrestricted areas to be paved or select
fill in unrestricted areas outside of pavement. Place and compact backfill, other than
flowable fill, in compliance with Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for
Utilities.
L. Collect and dispose of excess flowable fill material and other debris in accordance
with Section 01576 - Waste Material Disposal.
A. Provide batch plant tickets for each truck delivery of flowable fill. Note on tickets
addition of admixtures at site.
B. Check flow characteristics and workability of fill as placement proceeds.
C. Obtain at least three test cylinders for each placement area for determination of 56-
day compressive strength and bleeding. Acceptance of placement will be based on
average strength of three tests.
02222-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
D. Record volume of ballast together with flowable fill placement for same space to
demonstrate that voids have been filled.
3.06 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
A. Provide safe working conditions for employees throughout demolition and removal
operations. Observe safety requirements for work below grade.
B. Maintain safe access to adjacent property and buildings. Do not obstruct roadways,
sidewalks or passageways adjacent to work.
END OF SECTION
02222-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION CLEARING AND GRUBBING
SECTION 02233
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Removing surface debris and rubbish.
B. Clearing site of plant life and grass.
C. Removing trees and shrubs.
D. Removing root system of trees and shrubs.
E. Fence removal.
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for clearing and grubbing is on per acre basis.
2. No separate payment will be made for clearing and grubbing of wastewater

projects, include payment in unit prices for related items.
A. Conform to applicable codes for disposal of debris.
B. Coordinate clearing work with utility companies.
PART 3 EXECUTION
02233-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION CLEARING AND GRUBBING
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Verify that existing plant life and features designated to remain are identified and
tagged.
3.02 PROTECTION
1. Living trees located 3 feet or more outside of intersection of side slopes and
original ground line.
2. Plants other than trees and landscape features designated to remain.
3. Utilities designated to remain.
4. Bench marks, monuments, and existing structures designated to remain.
3.03 CLEARING
A. Remove stumps, main root ball, and root system to:
1. Depth of 24 inches below finished subgrade elevation in area bounded by

lines two feet behind back of curbs.
2. Depth of 24 inches below finished surface of required cross section for other
areas.
B. Clear undergrowth and deadwood without disturbing subsoil.
C. Remove vegetation from top soil scheduled for reuse.
3.04 REMOVAL
A. Remove debris, rubbish, and extracted plant material life from site in accordance with
B. Remove on site fences. Materials generated from removal of fences become property
of Contractor. Properly dispose of in accordance with applicable local, state and
federal laws.
END OF SECTION
02233-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM
SECTION 02260
TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Trench safety system for the construction of trench excavations.
B. Trench safety system for excavations which fall under provisions of State and Federal
trench safety laws.
C. This Standard Specification Section replaces previously published Section 01561-

Trench Safety System.
A. Document 00410 – Bid Form
B. Document 00830 – Trench Safety Geotechnical Information
C. Section 01270 – Measurement and Payment
D. Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures
A. Unit Prices:
1. Measurement for trench safety systems used on trench excavations is on a

linear foot basis measured along the centerline of the trench, including
manholes and other line structures.
2. No payment will be made under this section for trench safety systems for
structural excavations, tunnel shafts, auger pits, or excavation for trenchless
installations, and also for any necessary non trenchless installations included
in the aforementioned methods of construction unless included as a bid item in
Documents 00410 – Bid Form. Include payment for trench safety systems in
applicable structural or utility installation sections.
3. Refer to Section 01270 - Measurement and payment for unit price procedures.
B. Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). If the Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract, payment
for work in this Section is included in the total Stipulated Price.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
02260-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. A trench shall be defined as a narrow excavation (in relation to its depth) made below
the surface of the ground. In general, the depth is greater than the width, but the width
of a trench (measured at the bottom) is not greater than 15 feet.
B. The trench safety system requirements will apply to larger open excavations if the
erection of structures or other installations limits the space between the excavation
slope and these installation to dimensions equivalent of a trench as defined.
C. Trench Safety Systems include but are not limited to sloping, sheeting, trench boxes
or trench shields, sheet piling, cribbing, bracing, shoring, dewatering or diversion of
water to provide adequate drainage.
D. Trench Safety Program is the safety procedures governing the presence and activities
of individuals working in and around trench excavations.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall conform to requirements of Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Submit a safety program specifically for the construction of trench excavation.

Design the trench safety program to be in accordance with OSHA 29CFR standards
governing the presence and activities of individuals working in and around trench
excavations.
C. Construction and shop drawings containing deviations from OSHA standards or

special designs shall be sealed by a licensed Engineer retained and paid by
Contractor.
D. Review of the safety program by the City Engineer will only be in regard to
compliance with this specification and will not constitute approval by the City
Engineer nor relieve Contractor of obligations under State and Federal trench safety
laws.
E. Submit certification that trench safety system will not be subjected to loads exceeding
those which the system was designed to withstand according to the available
construction and geotechnical information.
A. Install and maintain trench safety systems in accordance with the detail specifications
set out in the provision of Excavations, Trenching, and Shoring, Federal Occupation
Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards, 29CFR, Part 1926, Subpart P,
as amended, including Final Rule, published in the Federal Register Vol. 54, No. 209
on Tuesday, October 31, 1989. The sections that are incorporated into these
specifications by reference include Sections 1926-650 through 1926-652.
02260-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. A reproduction of the OSHA standards included in "Subpart P - Excavations" from

the Federal Register Vol. 54, No. 209 is available upon request to Contractors bidding
on City projects. The City assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of the
reproduction. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining a copy of this section of the
Federal Register.
C. Legislation that has been enacted by the Texas Legislature with regard to Trench
Safety Systems, is hereby incorporated, by reference, into these specifications. Refer
to Texas Health and Safety Code Ann., §756.021 (Vernon 1991).
D. Reference materials, if developed for a specific project, will be issued with the Bid
Documents, including the following:
1. Document 00830 - Trench Safety Geotechnical Information: Geotechnical

information obtained for use in design of the trench safety system.
1.07 INDEMNIFICATION
A. Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the City, its employees and agents,
from any and all damages, costs (including, without limitation, legal fees, court costs,
and the cost of investigation), judgements or claims by anyone for injury or death of
persons resulting from the collapse or failure of trenches constructed under this
Contract.
B. Contractor acknowledges and agrees that this indemnity provision provides indemnity
for the City in case the City is negligent either by act or omission in providing for
trench safety, including, but not limited to safety program and design reviews,
inspections, failures to issue stop work orders, and the hiring of the Contractor.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install and maintain trench safety systems in accordance with provisions of OSHA
29CFR.
B. Install specially designed trench safety systems in accordance with the Contractor’s
trench excavation safety program for the locations and conditions identified in the
program.
C. A competent person, as identified in the Contractor’s Trench Safety Program, shall

verify that trench boxes and other premanufactured systems are certified for the actual
installation conditions.
3.02 INSPECTION
02260-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Contractor, or Contractor's independently retained consultant, shall make daily

inspections of the trench safety systems to ensure that the installed systems and
operations meet OSHA 29CFR and other personnel protection regulations
requirements.
B. If evidence of possible cave-ins or slides is apparent, Contractor shall immediately

stop work in the trench and move personnel to safe locations until the necessary
precautions have been taken by Contractor to safeguard personnel entering the trench.
C. Maintain a permanent record of daily inspections.
A. Contractor shall verify specific applicability of the selected or specially designed

trench safety systems to each field condition encountered on the project.
END OF SECTION
02260-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION ROADWAY EXCAVATION
SECTION 02315
ROADWAY EXCAVATION
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Excavation and compaction of materials for roadways and roadside ditches.
B. Section 01454 – Testing Laboratory Services
D. Section 01725 – Field Surveying
E. Section 02330 – Embankment
F. Section 02911 – Topsoil
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for roadway excavation, with or without subgrade, is on cubic yard

basis. Unless specified otherwise under the borrow (off-site) material or
embankment fill work item, measurement for payment shall be based on the
cut quantity shown on the drawing.
2. No payment will be made for material excavated under the following

conditions:
a. More than 2 feet outside of vertical planes behind back of curbs
b. For portion within limits of trench for utilities 24-inch and greater
constructed by open-cut methods
c. As indicated otherwise on Drawings.
3. Measurement for the bid item “Regrade Ditches” is on a linear foot basis. No
separate payment will be made for reshaping and regrading roadway ditch
shoulder slope and side slope adjacent to installed temporary pavement upon
removal of temporary pavement.
02315-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
4. If specified, off-site borrow material including placement and compaction will

be paid by final in-place quantity on cubic yard basis.
5. If specified and shown on the drawing, embankment fill including placement

and compaction will be paid by final in-place quantity on cubic yard basis.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of

Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)).
B. ASTM D 2216 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Determination of Water

(Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by Mass.
C. ASTM D 4318 - Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity
Index of Soils.
D. ASTM D 6938 - Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of
Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Provide topsoil conforming to requirements of Section 02911 - Topsoil.
B. Provide backfill which is excavated material, graded free of roots, lumps greater than
6 inches, rocks larger than 3 inches, organic material, and debris.
C. Provide structural backfill which is select material meeting following requirements:
1. Plasticity index: not less than 12 nor more than 20.
2. Maximum liquid limit: 45
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Identify required lines, levels, and datum. Coordinate with Section 01725 - Field
Surveying.
B. Identify and flag surface and aerial utilities.
02315-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Notify utility companies to remove or relocate utilities.
D. Identify, stake, and flag known utility locations below grade. Make temporary or
permanent relocation of underground pipes, ducts, or utilities where indicated on
Drawings.
E. Upon discovery of unknown or badly deteriorated utilities, or concealed conditions,

discontinue work. Notify Project Manager and obtain instructions before proceeding
in such areas.
F. Obtain approval of top soil quality before excavating and stockpiling.
3.02 PROTECTION
1. Trees, shrubs, lawns, existing structures, and other features outside of grading
limits.
2. Utilities either above or below grade, which are to remain.
3.03 TOPSOIL REMOVAL
A. Strip off topsoil from area to be excavated to minimum depth of 6 inches, unless
indicated otherwise on Drawings.
B. Stockpile topsoil in designated location for reuse. Stockpile topsoil to depth not
3.04 SOIL EXCAVATION
A. Excavate to lines and grades shown on Drawings.
B. Remove unsuitable material not meeting specifications. Backfill with embankment

materials and compact to requirements of Section 02330 - Embankment.
C. Record location and plug and fill inactive water and oil wells. Conform to Texas
Department of Health, Texas Natural Resource Conservation Commission, and Texas
Railroad Commission requirements. Notify Project Manager prior to plugging wells.
D. At intersections, grade back at minimum slope of one inch per foot. Produce smooth
riding junction with intersecting street. Maintain proper drainage.
E. When area is inadvertently over excavated, fill area in accordance with requirements
of Section 02330 - Embankment at no additional cost to City.
F. Remove material not qualified for use and excess soil not being reused from site in
accordance with requirements of Section 01576 - Waste Material Disposal.
3.05 COMPACTION
02315-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Maintain optimum moisture content of subgrade to attain required density.
B. Compact to following minimum densities at moisture content of optimum to 3 percent

above optimum as determined by ASTM D 698, unless otherwise indicated on
Drawings:
1. Areas under future paving and shoulders: Minimum density of 95 percent of

maximum dry density.
2. Other areas: Minimum density of 90 percent of maximum dry density.
3.06 TOLERANCES
A. Top of Compacted Surface: Plus or minus 1/2 inch in cross section, or in 16-foot
length.
A. Testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01454 - Testing Laboratory

Services.
B. Test and analysis of soil materials will be performed in accordance with ASTM D
4318, ASTM D 2216, and ASTM D 698.
C. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 698 or ASTM D

6938.
D. A minimum of three tests will be taken for each 1000 linear feet per lane of roadway.
E. When tests indicate work does not meet specified compaction requirements,
recondition, recompact, and retest at no additional cost to City.
3.08 PROTECTION
A. Prevent erosion at all times. Maintain ditches and cut temporary swales to allow
natural drainage in order to avoid damage to roadway. Do not allow water to pond.
B. Distribute construction traffic evenly over compacted areas, where practical, to aid in
obtaining uniform compaction. Protect exposed areas having high moisture content
from wheel loads that cause rutting.
C. Maintain excavation and embankment areas until start of subsequent work. Repair
and recompact slides, washouts, settlements, or areas with loss of density.
END OF SECTION
02315-4
CITY OF HOUSTON EXCAVATION AND
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES
SECTION 02316
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Excavation, backfilling, and compaction of backfill for structures.
C. Section 01454 – Testing Laboratory Services
D. Section 01555 – Traffic Control and Regulation
E. Section 01562 – Tree and Plant Protection
F. Section 01576 – Waste Material Disposal
G. Section 01578 – Control of Ground and Surface Water
H. Section 01785 – Project Record Documents
I. Section 02221 – Removing Existing Pavements, Structures, Wood, and Demolition

Debris
J. Section 02260 – Trench Safety System
K. Section 02319 – Borrow
L. Section 02320 – Utility Backfill Materials
M. Section 02321 – Cement Stabilized Sand
N. Section 02621 – Geotextile
A. Unit Prices.
1. No payment will be made for structural excavation and backfill under this
Section. Include payment in unit price or lump sum for construction of
structures.
02316-1
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Unsuitable Material: Unsuitable soil materials are the following:
1. Materials that are classified as ML, CL-ML, MH, PT, OH, and OL according
to ASTM D 2487.
2. Materials that cannot be compacted to required density due to gradation,

plasticity, or moisture content.
3. Materials that contain large clods, aggregates, stones greater than 4 inches in
any dimension, debris, vegetation, waste or any other deleterious materials.
4. Materials that are contaminated with hydrocarbons or other chemical

contaminants.
B. Suitable Material: Suitable soil materials are those meeting specification

requirements. Unsuitable soils meeting specification requirements for suitable soils
after treatment with lime or cement shall be considered suitable, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Select Material: Material as defined in Section 02320 - Utility Backfill Materials.
D. Backfill: Material meeting specified quality requirements, placed and compacted

under controlled conditions around structures.
E. Foundation Backfill Materials: Natural soil or manufactured aggregate meeting Class

I requirements and geotextile filter fabrics as required, to control drainage and
material separation. Foundation backfill material is placed and compacted as backfill
where needed to provide stable support for structure foundation base. Foundation
backfill materials may include concrete fill and seal slabs.
F. Foundation Base: For foundation base material, use crushed stone aggregate with
filter fabric as required, cement stabilized sand, or concrete seal slab. Foundation base
provides smooth, level working surface for construction of concrete foundation.
G. Foundation Subgrade: Foundation subgrade is surface of natural soil which has been
excavated and prepared to support foundation base or foundation backfill, where
needed.
02316-2
H. Ground Water Control Systems: Installations external to excavation such as well

points, eductors, or deep wells. Ground water control includes dewatering to lower
ground water, intercepting seepage which would otherwise emerge from side or
bottom of excavation, and depressurization to prevent failure or heaving of
excavation bottom. Refer to Section 01578 - Control of Ground and Surface Water.
I. Surface Water Control: Diversion and drainage of surface water runoff and rain water
away from excavation. Remove rain water and surface water which accidentally
enters excavation as part of excavation drainage.
J. Excavation Drainage: Removal of surface and seepage water in excavation by sump

pumping and using French drains surrounding foundation to intercept water.
K. Over-Excavation and Backfill: Excavation of subgrade soils with unsatisfactory

bearing capacity or composed of otherwise unsuitable materials below foundation as
shown on Drawings, and backfilled with foundation backfill material.
L. Shoring System: Structure that supports sides of an excavation to maintain stable soil
conditions and prevent cave-ins.
1.05 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction of Soil Using
Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600kN-m/m3)).
B. ASTM D 1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit weight of Soil in Place
by Sand-Cone Method.
C. C. ASTM D 2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering

Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System).
D. ASTM D 4318 - Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity
Index of Soils.
E. ASTM D 6938 - Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of
F. TxDOT Tex-101-E - Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing.
G. TxDOT Tex-110-E - Particle Size Analysis of Soils.
H. Federal Regulations, 29 CFR, Part 1926, Standards - Excavation, Occupational Safety

and Health Administration (OSHA).
1.06 SUBMITTALS
02316-3
B. Submit work plan for excavation and backfill for each structure with complete written
description which identifies details of proposed method of construction and sequence
of operations for construction relative to excavation and backfill activities. Use
descriptions, with supporting illustrations, sufficiently detailed to demonstrate to
Project Manager that procedures meet requirements of Specifications and Drawings.
C. Submit excavation safety system plan.
1. Submit excavation safety system plan in accordance with applicable OSHA

requirements for excavations.
2. Submit excavation safety system plan in accordance with requirements of

Section 02260 - Trench Safety System, for excavations that fall under State
and Federal trench safety laws.
D. Submit ground and surface water control plan in accordance with requirements in this
Section and Section 01578 - Control of Ground and Surface Water.
E. Submit backfill material sources and product quality information in accordance with
requirements of Section 02320 - Utility Backfill Materials.
F. Submit project record documents under provisions of Section 01785 - Project Record
Documents. Record location of utilities, as installed, referenced to survey
benchmarks. Include location of utilities encountered or rerouted. Give horizontal
dimensions, elevations, inverts and gradients.
1.07 TESTS
A. Testing and analysis of backfill materials for soil classification and compaction
during construction will be performed by an independent laboratory provided by City
in accordance with requirements of Section 01454 - Testing Laboratory Services and
as specified in this Section.
B. Perform embedment and backfill material source qualification testing in accordance

with requirements of Section 02320 - Utility Backfill Materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT
A. Perform excavation with equipment suitable for achieving requirements of this

Specification.
B. Use equipment which will produce degree of compaction specified. Compact backfill
within 3 feet of walls with hand operated equipment. Do not use equipment weighing
more than 10,000 pounds closer to walls than a horizontal distance equal to depth of
fill at that time. Use hand operated power compaction equipment where use of
heavier equipment is impractical or restricted due to weight limitations.
02316-4
2.02 MATERIAL CLASSIFICATIONS
A. Use backfill materials conforming to classifications and product descriptions of

Section 02320 - Utility Backfill Materials. Use classification or product description
for backfill applications as shown on Drawings and as specified.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Conduct an inspection to determine condition of existing structures and other

permanent installations.
B. Set up necessary street detours and barricades in preparation for excavation if

construction will affect traffic. Conform to requirements of Section 01555 - Traffic
Control and Regulation. Maintain barricades and warning devices at all times for
streets and intersections where work is in progress, or where construction work is
considered hazardous to traffic movements.
C. Perform work in accordance with OSHA standards. Employ an excavation safety

system as specified in Section 02260 - Trench Safety Systems.
D. Remove existing pavements and structures, including sidewalks and driveways, in

accordance with requirements of Section 02221 - Removing Existing Pavements,
Structures, Wood, and Demolition Debris.
E. Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface water control measures in
accordance with requirements of Section 01578 - Control of Ground and Surface
Water.
3.02 PROTECTION
A. Protect trees, shrubs, lawns, existing structures, and other permanent objects outside
of grading limits and within grading limits as designated on Drawings, and in
accordance with requirements of Section 01562 - Tree and Plant Protection.
B. Protect and support above-grade and below-grade utilities which are to remain.
C. Restore damaged permanent facilities to pre-construction conditions unless

replacement or abandonment of facilities is indicated on Drawings.
D. Prevent erosion of excavations and backfill. Do not allow water to pond in

excavations.
E. Maintain excavation and backfill areas until start of subsequent work. Repair and
recompact slides, washouts, settlements, or areas with loss of density at no additional
cost to City.
02316-5
3.03 EXCAVATION
A. Perform excavation work so that underground structure can be installed to depths and
alignments shown on Drawings. Use caution during excavation work to avoid
disturbing surrounding ground and existing facilities and improvements. Keep
excavation to absolute minimum necessary. No additional payment will be made for
excess excavation not authorized by Project Manager.
B. Upon discovery of unknown utilities, badly deteriorated utilities not designated for
removal, or concealed conditions, discontinue work at that location. Notify Project
Manager and obtain instructions before proceeding in such areas.
C. Immediately notify agency or company owning any line which is damaged, broken or
disturbed. Obtain approval from Project Manager and agency for any repairs or
relocations, either temporary or permanent.
D. Avoid settlement of surrounding soil due to equipment operations, excavation

procedures, vibration, dewatering, or other construction methods.
E. Provide surface drainage during construction to protect work and to avoid nuisance to
adjoining property. Where required, provide proper dewatering and piezometric
pressure control during construction.
F. Conduct hauling operations so that trucks and other vehicles do not create dirt
nuisance in streets. Verify that truck beds are sufficiently tight and loaded in such a
manner such that objectionable materials will not spill onto streets. Promptly clear
away any dirt, mud, or other materials that spill onto streets or are deposited onto
streets by vehicle tires.
G. Maintain permanent benchmarks, monumentation, and other reference points. Unless

otherwise directed, replace those which are damaged or destroyed by Work.
H. Provide sheeting, shoring, and bracing where required to safely complete Work, to
prevent excavation from extending beyond limits indicated on Drawings, and to
protect Work and adjacent structures or improvements. Use sheeting, shoring, and
bracing to protect workmen and public conforming to requirements of Section 02260
- Trench Safety Systems.
I. Prevent voids from forming outside of sheeting. Immediately fill voids with grout,
cement stabilized sand, or other material approved by Project Manager and compact
to 95 percent standard density.
J. After completion of structure, remove sheeting, shoring, and bracing unless shown on
Drawings to remain in place or directed by Project Manager in writing that such
temporary structures may remain. Remove sheeting, shoring and bracing in such a
manner as to maintain safety during backfilling operations and to prevent damage to
Work and adjacent structures or improvements.
02316-6
K. Immediately fill and compact voids left or caused by removal of sheeting with cement
stabilized sand or other material approved by Project Manager and compact to 95
percent standard density.
3.04 HANDLING EXCAVATED MATERIALS
A. Classify excavated materials. Place material which is suitable for use as backfill in
orderly piles at sufficient distance from excavation to prevent slides or cave-ins.
B. Provide additional backfill material in accordance with requirements of Section

02319 - Borrow, if adequate quantities of suitable material are not available from
excavation and trenching operations at site.
3.05 DEWATERING
A. Provide ground water control per Section 01578 - Control of Ground and Surface
Water.
B. Keep ground water surface elevation minimum of 2 feet below bottom of foundation
base.
C. Maintain ground water control as directed by Section 01578 - Control of Ground and
Surface Water and until structure is sufficiently complete to provide required weight
to resist hydrostatic uplift with minimum safety factor of 1.2.
3.06 FOUNDATION EXCAVATION
A. Notify Project Manager at least 48 hours prior to planned completion of foundation

excavations. Do not place foundation base until excavation is accepted by Project
Manager.
B. Excavate to elevations shown on Drawings, as needed to provide space for foundation

base, forming level undisturbed surface, free of mud or soft material. Remove pockets
of soft or otherwise unstable soils and replace with foundation backfill material or
material as directed by Project Manager. Prior to placing material over it, recompact
subgrade where indicated on Drawings, scarifying as needed, to 95 percent of
maximum Standard Dry Density according to ASTM D 698. If specified level of
compaction cannot be achieved, moisture condition subgrade and recompact until 95
percent is achieved, over-excavate to provide minimum layer of 24 inches of
foundation backfill material, or other means acceptable to Project Manager.
C. Fill unauthorized excessive excavation with foundation backfill material or other

material as directed by Project Manager.
D. Protect open excavations from rainfall, runoff, freezing groundwater, or excessive

drying so as to maintain foundation subgrade in satisfactory, undisturbed condition.
Keep excavations free of standing water and completely free of water during concrete
placement.
02316-7
E. Remove soils which become unsuitable due to inadequate dewatering or other causes,
after initial excavation to required subgrade, and replace with foundation backfill
material, as directed by Project Manager, at no additional cost to City.
F. Place foundation base, or foundation backfill material where needed, over subgrade
on same day that excavation is completed to final grade. Where base of excavations
are left open for longer periods, protect them with seal slab or cement-stabilized sand.
G. Use filter fabric as specified in Section 02621 - Geotextile to separate crushed

aggregate, and other free draining Class I materials from native soils or select
material backfill. Overlap fabric minimum of 12 inches beyond where another
material stops contact with soil.
H. Place crushed aggregate, and other Class I materials, in uniform layers of 8-inch
maximum thickness. Perform compaction by means of at least two passes of vibratory
compactor.
3.07 FOUNDATION BASE.
A. Place foundation base after subgrade is properly prepared, including placement of

foundation backfill where needed. Use foundation base consisting of 12-inch layer of
crushed stone aggregate or cement stabilized sand. Alternately, seal slab with
minimum thickness of 4 inches may be placed. Extend foundation base minimum of
12 inches beyond edge of structure foundation, unless shown otherwise on Drawings.
B. Where foundation base and foundation backfill are of same material, both can be
placed in one operation.
3.08 BACKFILL
A. Complete backfill to surface of natural ground or to lines and grades shown on

Drawings. Remove forms, lumber, trash and debris from structures. Deposit backfill
in uniform layers and compact each layer as specified.
1. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, for structures under pavement or within

one foot back of curb, use cement stabilized sand up to the top of the proposed
structure. Use suitable on-site material (random backfill) up to 12 inches
below pavement base or subgrade. Place minimum of 12 inches of select
backfill below pavement base or subgrade.
2. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, for structures not under pavement, use
random backfill of suitable material up to the surface.
B. Do not place backfill against concrete walls or similar structures until laboratory test
breaks indicate that concrete has reached minimum of 85 percent of specified
compressive strength. Where walls are supported by slabs or intermediate walls, do
not begin backfill operations until slab or intermediate walls have been placed and
concrete has attained sufficient strength.
02316-8
C. Remove concrete forms before starting backfill and remove shoring and bracing as
work progresses.
D. Maintain backfill material at no less than 2 percent below nor more than 2 percent
above optimum moisture content, unless otherwise approved by Project Manager.
Place fill material in uniform 8-inch maximum loose layers. Compact fill to at least
95 percent of maximum Standard Proctor Density according to ASTM D 698 below
paved areas. Compact fill to at least 90 percent around structures below unpaved
areas.
E. Where backfill is placed against sloped excavation surface, run compaction

equipment across boundary of cut slope and backfill to form compacted slope surface
for placement of next layer of backfill.
F. Place backfill using cement stabilized sand in accordance with Section 02321 -
Cement Stabilized Sand.

Services.
B. Tests will be performed initially on minimum of one different sample of each

material type for plasticity characteristics, in accordance with ASTM D 4318, and for
gradation characteristics, in accordance with Tex-101-E and Tex-110-E. Additional
classification tests will be performed whenever there is noticeable change in material
gradation or plasticity.
C. In-place density tests of compacted subgrade and backfill will be performed

according to ASTM D 1556, or ASTM D 6938, and at following frequencies and
conditions:
1. Minimum of one test for every 50 to 100 cubic yards of compacted backfill
material as directed by Project Manager.
2. A minimum of three density tests for each full work shift.
3. Density tests will be performed in all placement areas.
4. Number of tests will be increased when inspection determines that soil types
or moisture contents are not uniform or when compacting effort is variable
and not considered sufficient to attain uniform density.
5. Identify elevation of test with respect to natural ground.
6. Record approximate depth of lift tested.
02316-9
D. At least one test for moisture-density relationships will be initially performed for each
type of backfill material in accordance with ASTM D 698. Perform additional
moisture-density relationship test once a month or whenever there is noticeable
change in material gradation or plasticity.
E. When tests indicate work does not meet specified compaction requirements,
recondition, recompact, and retest at Contractor's expense.
3.10 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS MATERIAL
A. Dispose of excess materials in accordance with requirements of Section 01576 -

Waste Material Disposal.
END OF SECTION
02316-10
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES
SECTION 02317
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Excavation, trenching, foundation, embedment, and backfill for installation of

utilities, including manholes and other pipeline structures.
D. Section 01504 – Temporary Facilities and Controls
E. Section 01555 – Traffic Control and Regulation
F. Section 01562 – Tree and Plant Protection
G. Section 01576 – Waste Material Disposal
H. Section 01578 – Control of Ground and Surface Water
I. Section 01725 – Field Surveying
J. Section 02221 – Removing Existing Pavements, Structures, Wood, and Demolition

Debris
K. Section 02260 – Trench Safety System
N. Section 02322 – Flowable Fill
O. Section 02621 – Geotextile
P. Section 03315 – Concrete for Utility Construction
A. Unit Prices
02317-1
1. No additional payment will be made for trench excavation, embedment and

backfill under this Section. Include cost in unit price for installed underground
piping, sewer, conduit, or duct work.
2. When Project Manager directs Contractor to over excavate trench bottom,

Contractor will be paid by unit price bid per linear foot under bid item - 6-
inches Over Excavation of Trench Bottom.
a. No payment will be paid if Project Manager does not direct Contractor

to over excavate trench bottom.
b. No over excavation will be measured or paid when unsuitable

conditions result from dewatering system not in conformance with
Section 01578 - Control of Ground and Surface Water.
3. No additional payment will be made for performing Critical Location

exploratory excavation. Include cost in unit price for installed underground
piping, sewer, conduit, or duct work.
Work in this Section is included in total Stipulated Price
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Pipe Foundation: Suitable and stable native soils that are exposed at trench subgrade
after excavation to depth of bottom of bedding as shown on Drawings, or foundation
backfill material placed and compacted in over-excavations.
B. Pipe Bedding: Portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from top of foundation
up to level line at bottom of pipe, and horizontally from one trench sidewall to
opposite sidewall.
C. Haunching: Material placed on either side of pipe from top of bedding up to

springline of pipe and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall.
D. Initial Backfill: Portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from springline of
pipe (top of haunching) up to level line 12-inches above top of pipe, and horizontally
from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall.
E. Pipe Embedment: Portion of trench backfill that consists of bedding, haunching and
initial backfill.
F. Trench Zone: Portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from top of pipe
embedment up to pavement subgrade or up to final grade when not beneath
pavement.
G. Unsuitable Material: Unsuitable soil materials are the following:
02317-2
1. Materials that are classified as ML, CL-ML, MH, PT, OH, and OL according
to ASTM D 2487.

3. Materials that contain large clods, aggregates, stones greater than 4-inches in
any dimension, debris, vegetation, waste or any other deleterious materials.
4. Materials that are contaminated with hydrocarbons or other chemical

contaminants.
H. Suitable Material: Suitable soil materials are those meeting specification

requirements. Materials mixed with lime, fly ash, or cement that can be compacted to
required density and meeting requirements for suitable materials may be considered
suitable materials, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Backfill: Suitable material meeting specified quality requirements placed and

compacted under controlled conditions.
J. Ground Water Control Systems: Installations external to trench, such as well points,
eductors, or deep wells. Ground water control includes dewatering to lower ground
water, intercepting seepage which would otherwise emerge from side or bottom of
trench excavation, and depressurization to prevent failure or heaving of excavation
bottom. Refer to Section 01578 - Control of Ground Water and Surface Water.
K. Surface Water Control: Diversion and drainage of surface water runoff and rain water
away from trench excavation. Rain water and surface water accidentally entering
trench shall be controlled and removed as part of excavation drainage.
L. Excavation Drainage: Removal of surface and seepage water in trench by sump

pumping and using drainage layer, as defined in ASTM D 2321, placed on foundation
beneath pipe bedding or thickened bedding layer of Class I material.
M. Trench Conditions are defined with regard to stability of trench bottom and trench
walls of pipe embedment zone. Maintain trench conditions that provide for effective
placement and compaction of embedment material directly on or against undisturbed
soils or foundation backfill, except where structural trench support is necessary.
1. Dry Stable Trench: Stable and substantially dry trench conditions exist in pipe
embedment zone as result of typically dry soils or achieved by ground water
control (dewatering or depressurization) for trenches extending below ground
water level.
2. Stable Trench with Seepage: Stable trench in which ground water seepage is
controlled by excavation drainage.
02317-3
a. Stable Trench with Seepage in Clayey Soils: Excavation drainage is

provided in lieu of or to supplement ground water control systems to
control seepage and provide stable trench subgrade in predominately
clayey soils prior to bedding placement.
b. Stable Wet Trench in Sandy Soils: Excavation drainage is provided in

embedment zone in combination with ground water control in
predominately sandy or silty soils.
3. Unstable Trench: Unstable trench conditions exist in pipe embedment zone if

ground water inflow or high water content causes soil disturbances, such as
sloughing, sliding, boiling, heaving or loss of density.
N. Sub-trench: Sub-trench is special case of benched excavation. Sub-trench excavation

below trench shields or shoring installations may be used to allow placement and
compaction of foundation or embedment materials directly against undisturbed soils.
Depth of sub-trench depends upon trench stability and safety as determined by
Contractor.
O. Trench Dam: Placement of low permeability material in pipe embedment zone or

foundation to prohibit ground water flow along trench.
P. Over-excavation and Backfill: Excavation of subgrade soils with unsatisfactory

bearing capacity or composed of otherwise unsuitable materials below top of
foundation as shown on Drawings, and backfilled with foundation bedding.
Q. Foundation Bedding: Natural soil or manufactured aggregate of controlled gradation,

and geotextile filter fabrics as required, to control drainage and material separation.
Foundation bedding is placed and compacted as backfill to provide stable support for
bedding. Foundation bedding materials may include concrete seal slabs.
R. Trench Safety Systems include both protective systems and shoring systems as
defined in Section 02260 - Trench Safety Systems.
S. Trench Shield (Trench Box): Portable worker safety structure moved along trench as
work proceeds, used as protective system and designed to withstand forces imposed
on it by cave in, thereby protecting persons within trench. Trench shields may be
stacked if so designed or placed in series depending on depth and length of
excavation to be protected.
T. Shoring System: Structure that supports sides of an excavation to maintain stable soil
conditions and prevent cave-ins, or to prevent movement of ground affecting adjacent
installations or improvements.
U. Special Shoring: Shoring system meeting special shoring as specified in Paragraph

1.08, Special Shoring Design Requirements, for locations identified on Drawings.
02317-4
V. Vacuum Excavation: An excavation technique performed by an experienced

subcontractor in which water or air jetting is used to slough off and vacuum away
soil.
W. Large Diameter Water Line (LDWL): Water line that is 24-inches in diameter or
larger. X. Emergency Action Plan (EAP): The EAP document should include a
discussion of procedures for timely and reliable detection, classification (level of
emergency) and response procedure to a potential emergency condition associated
with a large diameter water line.
X. Subsurface Utility Exploration (SUE): Non-destructive excavation, unless otherwise

approved by project manager.
1.05 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 798 – Standard Practice for Installing Factory-Made Corrugated Steel Pipe
for Sewers and Other Applications.
B. ASTM C 12 - Standard Practice for Installing Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines.
C. ASTM C 891 - Standard Practice for Installation of Underground Precast Concrete

Utility Structures
D. ASTM C 1479 - Standard Practice for Installation of Precast Concrete Sewer, Storm
Drain, and Culvert Pipe Using Standard Installations
E. ASTM C 1675 - Standard Practice for Installation of Precast Reinforced Concrete

Monolithic Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers
F. ASTM C 1821 - Standard Practice for Installation of Underground Circular Precast

Concrete Manhole Structures
G. ASTM D 558 - Standard Test Methods for Moisture-Density (Unit Weight) Relations
of Soil-Cement Mixtures.
H. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of

Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lb/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)).
I. ASTM D 1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place
J. ASTM D 2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic

Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity Flow Applications.
K. ASTM D 2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering

Purposes (Unified Soil Classifications System).
L. ASTM D 4318 - Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity
Index of Soils.
02317-5
M. ASTM D 6938 - Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of
Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
N. TxDOT Tex-101-E - Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing.
O. TxDOT Tex-110-E - Particle Size Analysis of Soils.
P. Federal Regulations, 29 CFR Part 1926, Standards-Excavation, Occupational Safety

and Health Administration (OSHA).
1.06 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule work so that pipe embedment can be completed on same day that acceptable
foundation has been achieved for each section of pipe installation, manhole, or other
structures.
B. For proposed utility adjacent to or across existing LDWL:
1. Conduct a meeting between contractor, Drinking Water Operations and Utility

Maintenance Branch prior to beginning excavation to coordinate the EAP in
the event a water line shut down becomes necessary.
2. Notify Drinking Water Operations a minimum of 1 week prior to beginning

construction activities.
3. Notify Drinking Water Operations a minimum of 48 hours prior to beginning

SUE work near LDWL.
4. Unless otherwise approved by City Engineer, perform construction activities

between 7 AM and 7 PM, Monday through Friday. No work permitted around
a LDWL on weekends or City Holiday.
5. A City Inspector must be present during SUE or construction activities

occurring within four feet or one diameter of the LDWL, whichever is greater,
from a LDWL or appurtenance.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit planned typical method of excavation, backfill placement and compaction

including:
1. Trench widths.
2. Procedures for foundation and pipe zone bedding placement, and trench
backfill compaction.
3. Procedures for assuring compaction against undisturbed soil when pre-

manufactured trench safety systems are proposed.
02317-6
C. Submit backfill material sources and product quality information in accordance with
requirements of Section 02320 - Utility Backfill Materials.
D. Submit trench excavation safety program in accordance with requirements of Section

02260 - Trench Safety System. Include designs for special shoring meeting
requirements defined in Paragraph 1.08, Special Shoring Design Requirements
contained herein.
E. Submit record of location of utilities as installed, referenced to survey control points.

Include locations of utilities encountered or rerouted. Give stations, horizontal
dimensions, elevations, inverts, and gradients.
F. Submit 11-inch by 17-inch or 12-inch by 18-inch copy of Drawing with plotted utility
or obstruction location titled "Critical Location Report" to Project Manager.
G. For installation of proposed utility adjacent to or across existing LDWL, prepare and
submit the following to Drinking Water Operations prior to beginning construction
activities. Obtain approval from Drinking Water Operations prior to commencing
prelocate or utility work near LDWL.
1. Trench details, shoring system designs, installation sequences, and flowable

fill mix designs.
2. Emergency Action Plan (EAP) to address contingency plans in the event of

damage to or failure of LDWL. Include the following:
a. Contact personnel and agencies including primary and secondary

telephone numbers.
b. Contractor’s hierarchy of responsible personnel.
c. Traffic control measures.
d. Identification of resources to be available on or near project site in

event of damage to or failure of LDWL.
1.08 TESTS
A. Testing and analysis of backfill materials for soil classification and compaction
during construction will be performed by an independent laboratory provided by City
in accordance with requirements of Section 01454 - Testing Laboratory Services and
as specified in this Section.
B. Perform backfill material source qualification testing in accordance with requirements

of Section 02320 - Utility Backfill Materials.
1.09 SPECIAL SHORING DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
02317-7
A. Have special shoring designed or selected by Contractor's Professional Engineer to

provide support for sides of excavations, including soils and hydrostatic ground water
pressures as applicable, and to prevent ground movements affecting adjacent
installations or improvements such as structures, pavements and utilities. Special
shoring may be a premanufactured system selected by Contractor's Professional
Engineer to meet project site requirements based on manufacturer's standard design.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT
A. Perform excavation with hydraulic excavator or other equipment suitable for

achieving requirements of this Section.
B. Use only hand-operated tamping equipment until minimum cover of 12-inches is

obtained over pipes, conduits, and ducts. Do not use heavy compacting equipment
until adequate cover is attained to prevent damage to pipes, conduits, or ducts.
C. Use trench shields or other protective systems or shoring systems which are designed
and operated to achieve placement and compaction of backfill directly against
undisturbed native soil.
D. Use special shoring systems where required which may consist of braced sheeting,
braced soldier piles and lagging, slide rail systems, or other systems meeting
requirements as specified in Paragraph 1.08, Special Shoring Design Requirements.
A. Embedment and Trench Zone Backfill Materials: Conform to classifications and

product descriptions of Section 02320 - Utility Backfill Materials and Section 02321
– Cement Stabilized Sand.
B. Concrete Backfill: Conform to requirements for Class B concrete as specified in

Section 03315 - Concrete for Utility Construction.
C. Geotextile (Filter Fabric): Conform to requirements of Section 02621 - Geotextile.
D. Concrete for Trench Dams: Concrete backfill or 3 sack premixed (bag) concrete.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 STANDARD PRACTICE
A. Install flexible pipe, including "semi-rigid" pipe, to conform to standard practice

described in ASTM D 2321, and as described in this Section. Where an apparent
conflict occurs between standard practice and requirements of this Section, this
Section governs.
02317-8
B. Install rigid pipe to conform to standard practice described in ASTM C 12, C 1479, or
C 1675as applicable, and as described in this Section. Where an apparent conflict
occurs between standard practice and requirements of this Section, this Section
governs.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Establish traffic control to conform to requirements of Section 01555 - Traffic

Control and Regulation. Maintain barricades and warning lights for streets and
intersections affected by Work, and are considered hazardous to traffic movements.
B. Perform work to conform to applicable safety standards and regulations. Employ

trench safety system as specified in Section 02260 - Trench Safety Systems.
C. Immediately notify agency or company owning any existing utility line which is
damaged, broken, or disturbed. Obtain approval from Project Manager and agency for
any repairs or relocations, either temporary or permanent.
D. Remove existing pavements and structures, including sidewalks and driveways, to

conform to requirements of Section 02221 - Removing Existing Pavements,
Structures, Wood and Demolition Debris, as applicable.
E. Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface-water control measures to

conform to Section 01578 - Control of Ground and Surface Water. Provide stable
trench to allow installation in accordance with Specifications.
F. Maintain permanent benchmarks, monumentation, and other reference points. Unless

otherwise directed in writing, replace those which are damaged or destroyed in
accordance with Section 01725 - Field Surveying.
3.03 CRITICAL LOCATION INVESTIGATION
A. Horizontal and vertical location of various underground lines shown on Drawings,

including but not limited to water lines, gas lines, storm sewers, sanitary sewers,
telecommunication lines, electric lines or power ducts, pipelines, concrete and debris,
are based on best information available but are only approximate locations. Unless
otherwise approved by Project Manager, at Critical Locations shown on Drawings,
perform vacuum excavation to field verify horizontal and vertical locations of such
lines within a zone 2 feet vertically and 4 feet horizontally of proposed work exclude
water jetting at PCCP water line.
1. Verify location of existing utilities minimum of 7 working days in advance of

pipe laying activities based on daily pipe laying rate or prior to beginning
installation of auger pit or tunnel shaft. Use extreme caution and care when
uncovering utilities designated by Critical Locate.
02317-9
2. Notify Project Manager in writing immediately upon identification of

obstruction. In event of failure to identify obstruction in minimum of 7 days,
Contractor will not be entitled to extra cost for downtime including, but not
limited to, payroll, equipment, overhead, demobilization and remobilization,
until 7 days has passed from time Project Manager is notified of obstruction.
B. Notify involved utility companies of date and time that investigation excavation will
occur and request that their respective utility lines be marked in field. Comply with
utility or pipeline company requirements that their representative be present during
excavation. Provide Project Manager with 48 hours notice prior to field excavation or
related work.
C. Survey vertical and horizontal locations of obstructions relative to project baseline

and datum and plot on 12-inch by 18-inch copy of Drawings. For large diameter
water lines, submit to Project Manager for approval, horizontal and vertical alignment
dimensions for connections to existing lines, tied into project baseline, signed and
sealed by R.P.L.S.
D. LDWL Prelocate Requirements:
1. Field-locate LDWL, appurtenances and laterals connected directly to LDWL

through use of non-probing method such as a vacuum truck (non-water jetting
method) at no greater than 50-foot intervals. Locate upstream and downstream
of proposed work or utility installation.
2. Record crown and side of LDWL adjacent to proposed work or utility

installation. Record LDWL locations horizontally and vertically using same
coordinate system employed on proposed utility drawings.
3. Tie horizontal and vertical coordinates into project baseline. Submit

recordings performed by R.P.L.S to City a minimum of 14 days prior to
mobilizing to site.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect trees, shrubs, lawns, existing structures, and other permanent objects outside
of grading limits and within grading limits as designated on Drawings, and in
accordance with requirements of Section 01562 - Tree and Plant Protection.
B. Protect and support above-grade and below-grade utilities which are to remain.
C. Restore damaged permanent facilities to pre-construction conditions unless

replacement or abandonment of facilities is indicated on Drawings.
D. Take measures to minimize erosion of trenches. Do not allow water to pond in

trenches. Where slides, washouts, settlements, or areas with loss of density or
pavement failures or potholes occur, repair, re-compact, and pave those areas at no
additional cost to City.
02317-10
E. Contingency plans for proposed work or utility installation adjacent to or across a

LDWL:
1. Conduct on-site emergency drill prior to commencing proposed utility

installation, and at three month intervals to assure EAP is current.
2. In the event a LDWL shut down becomes necessary, secure site and provide
assistance to City personnel to access pipe and isolation valves as needed.
3.05 EXCAVATION
A. Except as otherwise specified or shown on Drawings, install underground utilities in

open cut trenches with vertical sides.
B. Perform excavation work so that pipe, conduit, and ducts can be installed to depths
and alignments shown on Drawings. Avoid disturbing surrounding ground and
existing facilities and improvements.
C. Determine trench excavation widths using following schedule as related to pipe

outside diameter (O.D.). Excavate trench so that pipe is centered in trench.
Nominal Minimum Trench

Pipe Size, Inches Width, Inches
Less than 18 O.D. + 18
18 to 30 O.D. + 24
36 to 42 O.D. + 36
Greater than 42 O.D. + 48
D. Do not obstruct sight distance for vehicles utilizing roadway or detours with
stockpiled materials.
E. Use sufficient trench width or benches above embedment zone for installation of well
point headers or manifolds and pumps where depth of trench makes it uneconomical
or impractical to pump from surface elevation. Provide sufficient space between
shoring cross braces to permit equipment operations and handling of forms, pipe,
embedment and backfill, and other materials.
F. Upon discovery of unknown utilities, badly deteriorated utilities not designated for
removal, or concealed conditions, discontinue work at that location. Notify Project
Manager and obtain instructions before proceeding.
G. Shoring of Trench Walls.
1. Install Special Shoring in advance of trench excavation or simultaneously with

trench excavation, so that soils within full height of trench excavation walls
will remain laterally supported at all times.
02317-11
2. For all types of shoring, support trench walls in pipe embedment zone
throughout installation. Provide trench wall supports sufficiently tight to
prevent washing trench wall soil out from behind trench wall support.
3. Leave sheeting driven into or below pipe embedment zone in place to

preclude loss of support of foundation and embedment materials, unless
otherwise directed by Project Manager. Leave rangers, walers, and braces in
place as long as required to support sheeting, which has been cut off, and
trench wall in vicinity of pipe zone.
4. Employ special methods for maintaining integrity of embedment or

foundation material. Before moving supports, place and compact embedment
to sufficient depths to provide protection of pipe and stability of trench walls.
As supports are moved, finish placing and compacting embedment.
5. If sheeting or other shoring is used below top of pipe embedment zone, do not
disturb pipe foundation and embedment materials by subsequent removal.
Maximum thickness of removable sheeting extending into embedment zone
shall be equivalent of 1-inch-thick steel plate. As sheeting is removed, fill in
voids left with grouting material.
H. Use of Trench Shields. When trench shield (trench box) is used as worker safety
device, the following requirements apply:
1. Make trench excavations of sufficient width to allow shield to be lifted or

pulled freely, without damage to trench sidewalls.
2. Move trench shields so that pipe, and backfill materials, after placement and
compaction, are not damaged nor disturbed, nor degree of compaction
reduced. Re-compact after shield is moved if soil is disturbed.
3. When required, place, spread, and compact pipe foundation and bedding
materials beneath shield. For backfill above bedding, lift shield as each layer
of backfill is placed and spread. Place and compact backfill materials against
undisturbed trench walls and foundation.
4. Maintain trench shield in position to allow sampling and testing to be

performed in safe manner.
5. Conform to applicable Government regulations.
I. Voids under paving area outside shield caused by Contractor's work will require
removal of pavement, consolidation and replacement of pavement in accordance with
Contract Documents. Repair damage resulting from failure to provide adequate
supports.
J. Place sand or soil behind shoring or trench shield to prevent soil outside shoring from
collapsing and causing voids under pavement. Immediately pack suitable material in
outside voids following excavation to avoid caving of trench walls.
02317-12
K. Coordinate excavation within 15 feet of pipeline with company's representative.

Support pipeline with methods agreed to by pipeline company's representative. Use
small, rubber-tired excavator, such as backhoe, to do exploratory excavation. Bucket
that is used to dig in close proximity to pipelines shall not have teeth or shall have
guard installed over teeth to approximate bucket without teeth. Excavate by hand
within 1 foot of Pipeline Company’s line. Do not use larger excavation equipment
than normally used to dig trench in vicinity of pipeline until pipelines have been
uncovered and fully exposed. Do not place large excavation and hauling equipment
directly over pipelines unless approved by Pipeline Company’s representative.
L. When, during excavation to uncover pipeline company's pipelines, screwed collar or

an oxy- acetylene weld is exposed, immediately notify Project Manager. Provide
supports for collar or welds. Discuss with Pipeline Company’s representative and
determine methods of supporting collar or weld during excavation and later
backfilling operations. When collar is exposed, request Pipeline Company to provide
welder in a timely manner to weld ends of collar prior to backfilling of excavation.
M. Excavation and shoring requirements for proposed work or utility installation

adjacent to or across a LDWL:
1. Identify LDWL area in field and barricade off from construction activities.
Allow no construction related activities including, but not limited to, loading
of dump trucks and material staging or storage, on top of LDWL.
2. Employ a groundwater control system when performing excavation activities

within ten feet of LDWL to:
a. Effectively reduce hydrostatic pressure affecting excavations,
b. Develop substantially dry and stable subgrade for subsequent

construction operations,
c. Prevent loss of fines, seepage, boils, quick condition or softening of

foundation strata, and
d. Maintain stability of sides and bottom of excavations.
3. When edge of proposed trench or shoring is within a distance equal to one

diameter of LDWL from outside of wall of LDWL, valve or appurtenance:
a. Maintain minimum of four (4) feet horizontal clearance and minimum

of two (2) feet vertical clearance between proposed utility and LDWL.
b. Auger Construction
(1) Maintain minimum of four (4) feet horizontal clearance

between proposed utility and LDWL.
02317-13
(2) Dry auger method required when auger hole is 12-inches and
larger in diameter.
c. Open Cut Construction and Auger pits
(1) Perform hand excavation when within four (4) feet of LDWL.
(2) Employ hydraulic or pneumatic shoring system. Do not use

vibratory or impact driven shoring or piling.
(3) Expose no more than 30-feet of trench prior to backfilling.
(4) A maximum of one (1) foot of vertical trench shall be un-

braced at a time to maintain constant pressure on face of
excavated soil.
(5) Upon removal of shoring system, inject flowable fill into void
space left behind by shoring system. Comply with Standard
Specification 02322 - Flowable Fill.
d. When edge of utility excavation is greater than one diameter of LDWL

from outside wall of LDWL, use a shielding system as required by
Project Manager and proposed utility standards and practices.
3.06 HANDLING EXCAVATED MATERIALS
A. Use only excavated materials, which are suitable as defined in this Section and
conforming to Section 02320 - Utility Backfill Materials. Place material suitable for
backfilling in stockpiles at distance from trench to prevent slides or cave-ins.
B. When required, provide additional backfill material conforming to requirements of

Section 02320 - Utility Backfill Materials.
C. Do not place stockpiles of excess excavated materials on streets and adjacent

properties. Protect backfill material to be used on site. Maintain site conditions in
accordance with Section 01504 - Temporary Facilities and Controls. Excavate trench
so that pipe is centered in trench. Do not obstruct sight distance for vehicles utilizing
roadway or detours with stockpiled materials.
3.07 TRENCH FOUNDATION
A. Excavate bottom of trench to uniform grade to achieve stable trench conditions and
satisfactory compaction of foundation or bedding materials.
B. When wet soil is encountered on trench bottom and dewatering system is not
required, over excavate an additional 6-inches with approval by Project Manager.
Place non-woven geotextile fabric and then compact 12-inches of crushed stone in
one lift on top of fabric. Compact crushed stone with four passes of vibratory-type
compaction equipment.
02317-14
C. Perform over excavation, when directed by Project Manager, in accordance with

Paragraph 3.07.B above. Removal of unstable or unsuitable material may be required
if approved by Project Manager;
1. Even though Contractor has not determined material to be unsuitable, or
2. If unstable trench bottom is encountered and an adequate ground water control

system is installed and operating according to Section 01578 - Control of
Ground and Surface Water.
D. Place trench dams in Class I foundations in line segments longer than 100 feet
between manholes and not less than one in every 500 feet of pipe placed. Install
additional dams as needed to achieve workable construction conditions. Do not place
trench dams closer than 5 feet from manholes.
3.08 PIPE EMBEDMENT, PLACEMENT, AND COMPACTION
A. Remove loose, sloughing, caving, or otherwise unsuitable soil from bottoms and
sidewalls of trenches immediately prior to placement of embedment materials.
B. Place embedment including bedding, haunching, and initial backfill as shown on

Drawings.
C. For pipe installation, manually spread embedment materials around pipe to provide
uniform bearing and side support when compacted. Protect flexible pipe from damage
during placing of pipe zone bedding material. Perform placement and compaction
directly against undisturbed soils in trench sidewalls, or against sheeting which is to
remain in place.
D. Do not place trench shields or shoring within height of embedment zone unless means
to maintain density of compacted embedment material are used. If moveable supports
are used in embedment zone, lift supports incrementally to allow placement and
compaction of material against undisturbed soil.
E. Place geotextile to prevent particle migration from in-situ soil into open-graded
(Class I) embedment materials or drainage layers.
F. Do not damage coatings or wrappings of pipes during backfilling and compacting

operations. When embedding coated or wrapped pipes, do not use crushed stone or
other sharp, angular aggregates.
G. Place haunching material manually around pipe and compact it to provide uniform
bearing and side support. If necessary, hold small-diameter or lightweight pipe in
place during compaction of haunch areas and placement beside pipe with sand bags
or other suitable means.
H. Place electrical conduit, if used, directly on foundation without bedding.
02317-15
I. Shovel in-place and compact embedment material using pneumatic tampers in

restricted areas, and vibratory-plate compactors or engine-powered jumping jacks in
unrestricted areas. Compact each lift before proceeding with placement of next lift.
Water tamping is not allowed.
J. For water lines construction embedment, use bank run sand, concrete sand, gem sand,
pea gravel, or crushed limestone as specified in Section 02320 - Utility Backfill
Material. Adhere to the following subparagraph numbers 1 and 2.
1. Class I, II and III Embedment Materials:
a. Maximum 6-inches compacted lift thickness.
b. Compact to achieve minimum of 95 percent of maximum dry density

as determined according to ASTM D 698.
c. Moisture content to be within -3 percent to +5 percent of optimum as

determined according to ASTM D 698, unless otherwise approved by
Project Manager.
2. Cement Stabilized Sand (where required for special installations):
a. Maximum 6-inches compacted thickness.
b. Compact to achieve minimum of 95 percent of maximum dry density

as determined according to ASTM D 698.
c. Moisture content to be on dry side of optimum as determined

according to ASTM D 698 but sufficient for effective hydration.
K. For Sanitary Sewers adhere to subparagraph number 1 and 2. For Storm Sewers
provide cement stabilized sand per paragraph 2. This provision does not apply to
Storm Sewers constructed of HDPE pipe installed under pavement.
1. Class I Embedment Materials.
a. Maximum 6-inches compacted lift thickness.
b. Systematic compaction by at least two passes of vibrating equipment.

Increase compaction effort as necessary to effectively embed pipe to
meet deflection test criteria.
c. Moisture content as determined by Contractor for effective compaction

without softening soil of trench bottom, foundation or trench walls.
2. Class II Embedment and Cement Stabilized Sand.
a. Maximum 6-inches compacted thickness.
02317-16
b. Compaction by methods determined by Contractor to achieve

minimum of 95 percent of maximum dry density as determined
according to ASTM D 698 for Class II materials and according to
ASTM D 558 for cement stabilized materials.
c. Moisture content of Class II materials within 3 percent of optimum as

determined according to ASTM D 698. Moisture content of cement
stabilized sands on dry side of optimum as determined according to
ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration.
L. For Storm Sewers constructed of any flexible pipe product and installed under
pavement provide flowable fill pipe embedment as specified in Section 02322 -
Flowable Fill.
M. Place trench dams in Class I embedment in line segments longer than 100 feet
between manholes, and not less than one in every 500 feet of pipe placed. Install
additional dams as needed to achieve workable construction conditions. Do not place
trench dams closer than 5 feet from manholes.
3.09 TRENCH ZONE BACKFILL PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION
A. Place backfill for pipe or conduits and restore surface as soon as practicable. Leave
only minimum length of trench open as necessary for construction.
B. For water lines, under pavement and to within one foot back of curb, use backfill
materials described below:
1. For water lines 20-inches in diameter and smaller, use bank run sand or select
backfill materials up to pavement base or subgrade.
2. For water lines 24-inches in diameter and larger, backfill with suitable on-site
material (random backfill) up to 12-inches below pavement base or subgrade.
Place minimum of 12-inches of select backfill below pavement base or
subgrade.
C. For sewer pipes (Storm and Sanitary), use backfill materials described by trench
limits. For "trench zone backfill" under pavement and to within one foot back of curb,
use cement stabilized sand for pipes of nominal sizes 36-inches in diameter and
smaller to level 12 inches below the pavement. For sewer pipes 42-inches in diameter
and larger, under pavement or natural ground, backfill from 12-inches above top of
pipe to 120 inches below pavement with suitable on-site material or select backfill.
Use select backfill for rigid pavements or flexible base material for asphalt pavements
for 12-inch backfill directly under pavement. For backfill materials reference Section
02320 - Utility Backfill Materials. This provision does not apply where a Storm
Sewer is constructed of any flexible pipe product.
02317-17
D. For Storm Sewers constructed of any flexible pipe product and installed under
pavement provide flowable fill as specified in Section 02322 - Flowable Fill. For
Storm Sewers constructed of any flexible pipe product and not installed under
pavement provide cement stabilized sand.
E. Where damage to completed pipe installation work is likely to result from withdrawal
of sheeting, leave sheeting in place. Cut off sheeting 1.5-feet or more above crown of
pipe. Remove trench supports within 5-feet from ground surface.
F. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings. Use one of the following trench zone backfills
under pavement and to within one foot of edge of pavement. Place trench zone
backfill in lifts and compact. Fully compact each lift before placement of next lift.
1. Class I, II, or III or combination thereof:
a. Place in maximum 12-inch thick loose layers.
b. Compact by vibratory equipment to minimum of 95 percent of

maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698.
c. Moisture content within zero percent to 5 percent above optimum

determined according to ASTM D 698, unless otherwise approved by
Project Manager.
2. Cement-Stabilized Sand:
a. Maximum lift thickness determined by Contractor to achieve uniform

placement and required compaction, but do not exceed 12-inches.
b. Compact by vibratory equipment to minimum of 95 percent of

maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558.
c. Moisture content on dry side of optimum determined according to

ASTM D 558 but sufficient for cement hydration.
3. Class IVA and IVB (Clay Soils):
a. Place in maximum 8-inch thick loose lifts.
b. Compaction by vibratory Sheepfoot roller to minimum of 95 percent

of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698.
c. Moisture content within zero percent to 5 percent above optimum

determined according to ASTM D 698, unless approved by Project
Manager.
G. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, for trench excavations not under pavement,
random backfill of suitable material may be used in trench zone. This provision does
not apply to flexible pipe used for storm sewers.
02317-18
1. Fat clays (CH) may be used as trench zone backfill outside paved areas at
Contractor's option. When required density is not achieved, at any additional
cost to City, rework, dry out, use lime stabilization or other approved methods
to achieve compaction requirements, or use different suitable material.
2. Maximum 9-inch compacted lift thickness for clayey soils and maximum 12-
inch lift thickness for granular soils.
3. Compact to minimum of 90 percent of maximum dry density determined

according to ASTM D 698.
4. Moisture content as necessary to achieve density.
H. For electric conduits, remove form work used for construction of conduits before
placing trench zone backfill.
3.10 MANHOLES, JUNCTION BOXES AND OTHER PIPELINE STRUCTURES
A. Below paved areas or where shown on Drawings, encapsulate manhole with cement
stabilized sand; minimum of 2 foot below base, minimum 2 foot around walls, up to
pavement subgrade or natural ground. Compact in accordance with Paragraph
3.09.F.2 of this Section
B. In unpaved areas, use select fill for backfill. Existing material that qualifies as select
material may be used, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. Deposit backfill in
uniform layers and compact each layer as specified. Maintain backfill material at no
less than 2 percent below nor more than 5 percent above optimum moisture content,
unless otherwise approved by Project Manager. Place fill material in uniform 8-inch
maximum loose layers. Compact fill to at least 95 percent of maximum Standard
Proctor Density according to ASTM D 698.
C. For LDWL projects, encapsulate manhole with cement stabilized sand; minimum of 1
foot below base, minimum of 2 feet around walls, up to within 12-inches of pavement
subgrade or natural ground. For manholes over water line, extend encapsulation to
bottom of trench. Compact in accordance with Paragraph 3.09 F.2 of this Section.
A. Test for material source qualifications as defined in Section 02320 - Utility Backfill
Materials.
B. Provide excavation and trench safety systems at locations and to depths required for
testing and retesting during construction at no additional cost to City.
C. Tests will be performed on minimum of three different samples of each material type
for plasticity characteristics, in accordance with ASTM D 4318, and for gradation
characteristics, in accordance with Tex-101-E and Tex-110-E. Additional
classification tests will be performed whenever there is noticeable change in material
gradation or plasticity, or when requested by Project Manager.
02317-19
D. At least three tests for moisture-density relationships will be performed initially for
backfill materials in accordance with ASTM D 698, and for cement- stabilized sand
in accordance with ASTM D 558. Perform additional moisture-density relationship
tests once a month or whenever there is noticeable change in material gradation or
plasticity.
E. In-place density tests of compacted pipe foundation, embedment and trench zone
backfill soil materials will be performed according to ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D
6938, and at following frequencies and conditions.
1. For open cut construction projects and auger pits: Unless otherwise approved
by Project Manager, successful compaction to be measured by one test per 40
linear feet measured along pipe for compacted embedment and two tests per
40 linear feet measured along pipe for compacted trench zone backfill
material. Length of auger pits to be measured to arrive at 40 linear feet.
2. A minimum of three density tests for each full shift of Work.
3. Density tests will be distributed among placement areas. Placement areas are:
foundation, outer bedding, haunching, initial backfill and trench zone.
4. The number of tests will be increased if inspection determines that soil type or
moisture content are not uniform or if compacting effort is variable and not
considered sufficient to attain uniform density, as specified.
5. Density tests may be performed at various depths below fill surface by pit
excavation. Material in previously placed lifts may therefore be subject to
acceptance/rejection.
6. Two verification tests will be performed adjacent to in-place tests showing

density less than acceptance criteria. Placement will be rejected unless both
verification tests show acceptable results.
7. Recompacted placement will be retested at same frequency as first test series,

including verification tests.
8. Identify elevation of test with respect to natural ground or pavement.
F. Recondition, re-compact, and retest at Contractor's expense if tests indicate Work

does not meet specified compaction requirements. For hardened soil cement with
nonconforming density, core and test for compressive strength at Contractor's
expense.
G. Acceptability of crushed rock compaction will be determined by inspection.
A. Dispose of excess materials in accordance with requirements of Section 01576 –

02317-20
END OF SECTION
02317-21
CITY OF HOUSTON EXTRA UNIT PRICE WORK FOR
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
SECTION 02318
EXTRA UNIT PRICE WORK FOR EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Measurement and payment applicable to extra unit price work items for excavation
and backfill made necessary by unusual or unforeseen circumstances encountered
during utility installations.
B. Extra unit price work for excavation and backfill is paid only when authorized in
advance by Project Manager.
1.02 REALATED SECTIONS
B. Section 02316 – Excavation and Backfill for Structures
C. Section 02317 – Excavation and Backfill for Utilities
D. Section 02320 – Utility Backfill Materials
A. UNIT PRICES
1. Excavation Around Obstructions: Payment for excavation around obstructions

is on cubic yard basis, measured in place, without deduction for volume
occupied by portions of pipes, ducts, or other structures left in place across
trenches excavated under this item.
2. Extra Hand Excavation: Payment for extra hand excavation is on cubic yard
basis, measured in place.
3. Extra Machine Excavation: Payment for extra machine excavation is on cubic

yard basis, measured in place.
4. Extra Placement of Backfill Material: Payment for extra placement of backfill

material is on cubic yard basis, measured in place, for material installed as
part of Work. At discretion of Project Manager, measurement of cubic yards
may be calculated from volume of Extra Hand Excavation or Extra Machine
Excavation for which replacement is made, minus volume of any Extra
Placement of Granular Backfill authorized in conjunction with Work.
02318-1
5. Extra Placement of Granular Backfill: Payment for extra placement of

granular backfill material is on cubic yard basis, measured in place.
6. Extra Select Backfill: Payment for extra select backfill is on cubic yard basis,
measured in place for a theoretical minimum trench width. The project
Manager may authorize extra select backfill when soil from the excavation
work does not include adequate quantities for placement of suitable on-site
material (random backfill).
7. Refer to Section 01270 – Measurement and payment for unit price procedures.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Excavation Around Obstructions: Excavation necessitated by obstruction of pipes

(other than service connections 3 inches in diameter or less), ducts, or other
structures, not shown on Drawings, and of an unusual or unforeseen nature which
interfere with installation of utility piping by normal methods of excavation or
auguring.
B. Extra Hand Excavation: Excavation by manual labor made necessary by unusual or

unforeseen circumstances at locations approved in advance by Project Manager.
C. Extra Machine Excavation: Excavation by machine at or near project site to perform

related work not included in original project scope but added for convenience of City,
as approved in advance by Project Manager.
D. Extra Replacement of Backfill Material: Handling, backfill, and compaction of

excavated material authorized under extra work bid items for Extra Hand Excavation
or Extra Machine Excavation. Placement and compaction shall conform to
requirements specified for excavation and backfill in Sections 02316 – Excavation
and Backfill for Structures and 02317 – Excavation and Backfill for Utilities.
E. Extra Placement of Granular Backfill: Hauling, placing, and compacting granular

backfill materials as approved by Project Manager in conjunction with Extra
Replacement of Backfill Material. Materials placed under this item shall conform to
requirements for Bank Run Sand, Cement Stabilized Sand, Concrete Sand, Gem
Sand, Crushed Stone, or Crushed Concrete specified for backfill material in Sections
02316 – Excavation and Backfill for Structures and 02317 – Excavation and Backfill
for Utilities.
F. Extra Select Backfill: Unsuitable material removed from the project and select
backfill material hauled to the project, or conditioning unsuitable material on the site
to make it select backfill. Provide select backfill material specified in Section 02320 –
Utility Backfill Materials.
02318-2
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
02318-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION BORROW
SECTION 02319
BORROW
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Soil materials for embankment or backfill.
D. Section 01555 – Traffic Control and Regulation
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for borrow is on cubic yard basis calculated by theoretical quantities

using average end area method based on Drawings.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 2216 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Determination of Water

(Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by Mass.
B. ASTM D 4318 - Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity
Index of Soils.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit location and description of proposed borrow area for approval.
C. Submit material samples for testing.
02319-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION BORROW
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL MATERIAL
A. Grade borrow material used for embankment or backfill free of lumps greater than 6
inches, rocks larger than 3 inches, organic material, chemical waste or other
contamination, and debris. Take borrow material from sources approved by Project
Manager.
B. Use material with plasticity index not less than 12, nor more than 20 when tested in
accordance with ASTM D 4318. Maximum liquid limit shall be 45, unless approved
by Project Manager. Do not use blend of cohesive and granular soils to achieve
required plasticity index.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Notify Project Manager and testing laboratory 5 days in advance of opening borrow
source to permit obtaining samples for qualification testing. When material does not
meet specification requirements, locate another source of borrow.
B. Clear approved source area of trees, stumps, brush, roots, vegetation, organic matter,
and other unacceptable material before excavation.
3.02 TESTS
A. Test and analyze soil materials in accordance with ASTM D 4318 and ASTM D 2216
under provisions of Section 01454 - Testing Laboratory Services.
3.03 EXCAVATION
A. Provide adequate drainage of surface water so that surface water run off does not
enter borrow pit excavation.
3.04 HAULING
A. Use covered trucks. Conform to requirements of Section 01555 - Traffic Control and
Regulation.
3.05 EMBANKMENT
A. Conform to requirements of Section 02330 - Embankment.
END OF SECTION
02319-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION UTILITY BACKFILL MATERIALS
SECTION 02320
UTILITY BACKFILL MATERIALS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Material Classifications.
B. Utility Backfill Materials:
1. Concrete sand
2. Gem sand
3. Pea gravel
4. Crushed stone
5. Crushed concrete
6. Bank run sand
7. Select backfill
8. Random backfill
9. Cement stabilized sand
C. Material Handling and Quality Control Requirements.
D. Section 02316 – Excavation and Backfill for Structures
F. Section 02318 – Extra Unit Price Work Price Work for Excavation and Backfill
H. Section 02711 – Hot Mix Asphalt Base Course
02320-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
I. Section 02712 – Cement Stabilized Base Course
J. Section 02713 – Recycled Crushed Concrete Base Course
K. Section 02951 – Pavement Repair and Restoration
L. Section 03315 – Concrete for Utility Construction
A. Unit Prices.
1. No payment will be made for backfill material. Include payment in unit price
for applicable utility installation.
2. Payment for backfill material, when included as separate pay item or when
directed by Project Manager, is on cubic yard basis for material placed and
compacted within theoretical trench width limits and thickness of material
according to Drawings, or as directed by Project Manager.
3. Payment for backfill of authorized over-excavation is in accordance with

Section 02318 - Extra Unit Price Work for Excavation and Backfill.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Unsuitable Material:
1. Materials classified as ML, CL-ML, MH, PT, OH, and OL according to

ASTM D 2487.

3. Materials containing large clods, aggregates, or stones greater than 4 inches in

any dimension; debris, vegetation, or waste; or any other deleterious
materials.
4. Materials contaminated with hydrocarbons or other chemical contaminants.
B. Suitable Material:
1. Materials meeting specification requirements.
2. Unsuitable materials meeting specification requirements for suitable soils after

treatment with lime or cement.
02320-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Foundation Backfill Materials: Natural soil or manufactured aggregate meeting Class

I requirements and geotextile filter fabrics as required, to control drainage and
material separation. Foundation backfill material is placed and compacted as backfill
where needed to provide stable support for structure foundation base. Foundation
backfill materials may include concrete fill and seal slabs.
D. Foundation Base: Crushed stone aggregate with filter fabric as required, cement
stabilized sand, or concrete seal slab. Foundation base provides smooth, level
working surface for construction of concrete foundation.
E. Backfill Material: Classified soil material meeting specified quality requirements for
designated application as embedment or trench zone backfill.
F. Embedment Material: Soil material placed under controlled conditions within

embedment zone extending vertically upward from top of foundation to an elevation
12 inches above top of pipe, and including pipe bedding, haunching and initial
backfill.
G. Trench Zone Backfill: Classified soil material meeting specified quality requirements
and placed under controlled conditions in trench zone from top of embedment zone to
base course in paved areas or to surface grading material in unpaved areas.
H. Foundation: Either suitable soil of trench bottom or material placed as backfill of

over- excavation for removal and replacement of unsuitable or otherwise unstable
soils.
I. Source: Source selected by Contractor for supply of embedment or trench zone

backfill material. Selected source may be project excavation, off-site borrow pits,
commercial borrow pits, or sand and aggregate production or manufacturing plants.
J. Refer to Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities for other definitions
regarding utility installation by trench construction.
1.05 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
B. ASTM C 40 - Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for
Concrete.
C. ASTM C 123 - Standard Test Method for Lightweight Particles in Aggregate.
D. ASTM C 131 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size

Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in Los Angeles Machine.
E. ASTM C 136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates.
02320-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
F. ASTM C 142 - Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in
Aggregates.
G. ASTM D 1140 - Standard Test Methods for Determining the Amount of Material
Finer Than 75-μm (No. 200) Sieve in soils by Washing.
H. ASTM D 2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering

I. ASTM D 4318 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity
Index of Soils.
J. ASTM D 4643 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Water Content of Soil
and Rock by Microwave Oven Heating.
K. TxDOT Tex-110-E - Particle Size Analysis of Soils.
L. TxDOT Tex-460-A - Determining Crushed Face Particle count
1.06 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit description of source, material classification and product description,

production method, and application of backfill materials.
C. Submit test results for samples of off-site backfill materials. Comply with Paragraph
2.03, Material Testing.
D. Before stockpiling materials, submit copy of approval from landowner for stockpiling
backfill material on private property.
E. Provide delivery ticket which includes source location for each delivery of material
that is obtained from off-site sources or is being paid as specific bid item.
1.07 TESTS
A. Perform tests of sources for backfill material in accordance with Paragraph 2.03B.
B. Verification tests of backfill materials may be performed by City in accordance with

Section 01454 - Testing Laboratory Services and in accordance with Paragraph 3.03.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
02320-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Classify materials for backfill for purpose of quality control in accordance with
Unified Soil Classification Symbols as defined in ASTM D 2487. Material use and
application is defined in utility installation specifications and Drawings either by
class, as described in Paragraph 2.01B, or by product descriptions, as given in
Paragraph 2.02.
B. Class Designations Based on Laboratory Testing:
1. Class I: Well-graded gravels and sands, gravel-sand mixtures, crushed well-

graded rock, little or no fines (GW, SW):
a. Plasticity index: non-plastic.
b. Gradation: D60/D10 - greater than 4 percent; amount passing No. 200

sieve - less than or equal to 5 percent.
2. Class II: Poorly graded gravels and sands, silty gravels and sands, little to
moderate fines (GM, GP, SP, SM):
a. Plasticity index: non-plastic to 4.
b. Gradations:
(1) Gradation (GP, SP): amount passing No. 200 sieve - less than 5
percent.
(2) Gradation (GM, SM): amount passing No. 200 sieve - between
12 percent and 50 percent.
(3) Borderline gradations with dual classifications (e.g., SP-SM):

amount passing No. 200 sieve - between 5 percent and 12
percent.
3. Class III: Clayey gravels and sands, poorly graded mixtures of gravel, sand,
silt, and clay (GC, SC, and dual classifications, e.g., SP-SC):
a. Plasticity index: greater than 7.
b. Gradation: amount passing No. 200 sieve - between 12 percent and 50

percent.
4. Class IVA: Lean clays (CL).
a. Plasticity Indexes:
(1) Plasticity index: greater than 7, and above A line.
(2) Borderline plasticity with dual classifications (CL-ML): PI

between 4 and 7.
02320-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
b. Liquid limit: less than 50.
c. Gradation: amount passing No. 200 sieve - greater than 50 percent.
d. Inorganic.
5. Class IVB: Fat clays (CH)
a. Plasticity index: above A line.
b. Liquid limit: 50 or greater.
c. Gradation: amount passing No. 200 sieve - greater than 50 percent.
d. Inorganic.
6. Use soils with dual class designation according to ASTM D 2487, and which
are not defined above, according to more restrictive class.
2.02 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS
A. Soils classified as silt (ML) silty clay (CL-ML with PI of 4 to 7), elastic silt (MH),
organic clay and organic silt (OL, OH), and organic matter (PT) are not acceptable as
backfill materials. These soils may be used for site grading and restoration in
unimproved areas as approved by Project Manager. Soils in Class IVB, fat clay (CH)
may be used as backfill materials where allowed by applicable backfill installation
specification. Refer to Section 02316 - Excavation and Backfill for Structures and
Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities.
B. Provide backfill material that is free of stones greater than 6 inches, free of roots,
waste, debris, trash, organic material, unstable material, non-soil matter, hydrocarbon
or other contamination, conforming to following limits for deleterious materials:
1. Clay lumps: Less than 0.5 percent for Class I, and less than 2.0 percent for
Class II, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 142.
2. Lightweight pieces: Less than 5 percent when tested in accordance with

ASTM C 123.
3. Organic impurities: No color darker than standard color when tested in

accordance with ASTM C 40.
C. Manufactured materials, such as crushed concrete, may be substituted for natural soil
or rock products where indicated in product specification, and approved by Project
Manager, provided that physical property criteria are determined to be satisfactory by
testing.
D. Bank Run Sand: Durable bank run sand classified as SP, SW, or SM by Unified Soil
Classification System (ASTM D 2487) meeting following requirements:
02320-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Less than 15 percent passing number 200 sieve when tested in accordance
with ASTM D 1140. Amount of clay lumps or balls may not exceed 2 percent.
2. Material passing number 40 sieve shall meet the following requirements when
tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318: Plasticity index: not exceeding 7.
E. Concrete Sand: Natural sand, manufactured sand, or combination of natural and

manufactured sand conforming to requirements of ASTM C 33 and graded within
following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136:
Sieve Percent Passing

3/8" 100
No. 4 95 to 100
No. 8 80 to 100
No. 16 50 to 85
No. 30 25 to 60
No. 50 10 to 30
No. 100 2 to 10
F. Gem Sand: Sand conforming to requirements of ASTM C 33 for course aggregates

specified for number 8 size and graded within the following limits when tested in
accordance with ASTM C 136:

3/8” 95 to 100
No. 4 60 to 80
No. 8 15 to 40
G. Pea Gravel: Durable particles composed of small, smooth, rounded stones or pebbles
and graded within the following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136:

1/2” 100
3/8” 85 to 100
No. 4 10 to 30
No. 8 0 to 10
No. 16 0 to 5
H. Crushed Aggregates: Crushed aggregates consist of durable particles obtained from

an approved source and meeting the following requirements:
02320-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Materials of one product delivered for same construction activity from single
source, unless otherwise approved by Project Manager.
2. Non-plastic fines.
3. Los Angeles abrasion test wear not exceeding 45 percent when tested in
4. Crushed aggregate shall have minimum of 90 percent of particles retained on

No. 4 sieve with 2 or more crushed faces as determined by Tex-460-A, Part I.
5. Crushed stone: Produced from oversize plant processed stone or gravel, sized
by crushing to predominantly angular particles from naturally occurring single
source. Uncrushed gravel is not acceptable materials for embedment where
crushed stone is shown on applicable utility embedment drawing details.
6. Crushed Concrete: Crushed concrete is an acceptable substitute for crushed

stone as utility backfill. Gradation and quality control test requirements are
same as crushed stone. Provide crushed concrete produced from normal
weight concrete of uniform quality; containing particles of aggregate and
cement material, free from other substances such as asphalt, reinforcing steel
fragments, soil, waste gypsum (calcium sulfate), or debris.
7. Gradations, as determined in accordance with Tex-110-E.
Percent Passing by Weight for Pipe Embedment by

Sieve
Ranges of Nominal Pipes Sizes
>15" 15" - 8" <8"
1" 95 - 100 100 -
3/4" 60 - 90 90 - 100 100
1/2" 25 - 60 - 90 - 100
3/8" - 20 - 55 40 - 70
No. 4 0-5 0 - 10 0 - 15
No. 8 - 0-5 0-5
I. Select Backfill: Class III clayey gravel or sand or Class IV lean clay with plasticity
index between 7 and 20 or clayey soils treated with lime in accordance with Section
02951 - Pavement Repair and Restoration to meet plasticity criteria.
J. Random Backfill: Any suitable soil or mixture of soils within Classes I, II, III and IV;
or fat clay (CH) where allowed by applicable backfill installation specification. Refer
to Section 02316 - Excavation and Backfill for Structures and Section 02317 -
Excavation and Backfill for Utilities.
02320-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
K. Cement Stabilized Sand: Conform to requirements of Section 02321 - Cement

Stabilized Sand.
L. Concrete Backfill: Conform to Class B concrete as specified in Section 03315 -

M. Flexible Base Course Material: Conform to requirements of applicable portions of

Section 02711 - Hot Mix Asphaltic Base Course, Section 02712 - Cement Stabilized
Base Course, and Section 02713 - Recycled Crushed Concrete Base Course.
2.03 MATERIAL TESTING
A. Source Qualification. Perform testing to obtain tests by suppliers for selection of

material sources and products not from the project site. Test samples of processed
materials from current production representing material to be delivered. Use tests to
verify that materials meet specification requirements. Repeat qualification test
procedures each time source characteristics change or there is planned change in
source location or supplier. Include the following qualification tests, as applicable:
1. Gradation. Report complete sieve analyses regardless of specified control

sieves from largest particle through No. 200 sieve.
2. Plasticity of material passing No. 40 sieve
3. Los Angeles abrasion wear of material retained on No. 4 sieve
4. Clay lumps
5. Lightweight pieces
6. Organic impurities
B. Production Testing. Provide reports to Project Manager from an independent testing

laboratory that backfill materials to be placed in Work meet applicable specification
requirements.
C. Assist Project Manager in obtaining material samples for verification testing at source
or at production plant.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SOURCES
A. Use of existing material in trench excavations is acceptable, provided applicable

specification requirements are satisfied.
B. Identify off-site sources for backfill materials at least 14 days ahead of intended use
so that Project Manager may obtain samples for verification testing.
02320-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Materials may be subjected to inspection or additional verification testing after

delivery. Materials which do not meet requirements of specifications will be rejected.
Do not use material which, after approval, has become unsuitable for use due to
segregation, mixing with other materials, or by contamination. Once material is
approved by Project Manager, expense for sampling and testing required to change to
different material will be credited to City through change order.
D. Bank run sand, select backfill, and random backfill, if available in project excavation,
may be obtained by selective excavation and acceptance testing. Obtain additional
quantities of these materials and other materials required to complete work from off-
site sources.
E. City does not represent or guarantee that any soil found in excavation work will be
suitable and acceptable as backfill material.
3.02 MATERIAL HANDLING
A. When backfill material is obtained from either commercial or non-commercial

borrow pit, open pit to expose vertical faces of various strata for identification and
selection of approved material to be used. Excavate selected material by vertical cuts
extending through exposed strata to achieve uniformity in product.
B. Establish temporary stockpile locations for practical material handling, control, and
verification testing by Project Manager in advance of final placement. Obtain
approval from landowner for storage of backfill material on adjacent private property.
C. When stockpiling backfill material near project site, use appropriate covers to
eliminate blowing of materials into adjacent areas and prevent runoff containing
sediments from entering drainage system.
D. Place stockpiles in layers to avoid segregation of processed materials. Load material

by making successive vertical cuts through entire depth of stockpile.
A. Quality Control
1. The Project Manager may sample and test backfill at:
a. Sources including borrow pits, production plants and Contractor's

designated off-site stockpiles.
b. On-site stockpiles.
c. Materials placed in Work.
2. The Project Manager may re-sample material at any stage of work or location
if changes in characteristics are apparent.
02320-10
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Production Verification Testing: City's testing laboratory will provide verification

testing on backfill materials, as directed by Project Manager. Samples may be taken
at source or at production plant, as applicable.
END OF SECTION
02320-11
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION CEMENT STABILIZED SAND
SECTION 02321
CEMENT STABILIZED SAND
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Cement stabilized sand.
A. Unit Prices.
1. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section.
Include cost of such work in Contract unit prices for items listed in bid form
requiring cement stabilized sand.
2. Refer to Paragraph 3.04 for material credit.
1.04 REFERENCES
B. ASTM C 40 - Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for
Concrete.
C. ASTM C 42 - Standard Test Methods for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and
Sawed Beams of Concrete.
D. ASTM C 94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.
E. ASTM C 123 - Standard Test Method for Lightweight Particles in Aggregate.
02321-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
F. ASTM C 142 - Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in
Aggregates.
G. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
H. ASTM D 558 - Standard Test Method for Moisture-Density (Unit Weight) Relations
of Soil-Cement Mixtures.
I. ASTM D 1632 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Soil-Cement Compression
and Flexure Test Specimens in the Laboratory
J. ASTM D 1633 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Molded Soil-
Cement Cylinders.
K. ASTM D 2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering

L. ASTM D 3665 - Standard Practice for Random Sampling of Construction Materials.
M. ASTM D 4318 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity
Index of Soils.
N. ASTM D 6938 - Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit proposed target cement content and production data for sand-cement mixture
in accordance with requirements of Paragraph 2.03, Materials Qualifications.
1.06 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Use sand-cement mixture producing minimum unconfined compressive strength of

100 pounds per square inch (psi) in 48 hours.
1. Design will be based on strength specimens molded in accordance with

ASTM D 558 at moisture content within 3 percent of optimum and within 4
hours of batching.
2. Determine minimum cement content from production data and statistical

history. Provide no less than 1.1 sacks of cement per ton of dry sand.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Cement: Type I Portland cement conforming to ASTM C 150.
02321-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Sand: Clean, durable sand meeting grading requirements for fine aggregates of
ASTM C 33, or requirements for bank run sand of Section 02320 - Utility Backfill
Materials, and the following requirements:
1. Classified as SW, SP, SW-SM, SP-SM, or SM by Unified Soil Classification

System of ASTM D 2487.
2. Deleterious materials:
a. Clay lumps, ASTM C 142 - less than 0.5 percent.
b. Lightweight pieces, ASTM C 123; less than 5.0 percent.
c. Organic impurities, ASTM C 40, color no darker than standard color.
3. Plasticity index of 4 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318.
C. Water: Potable water, free of oils, acids, alkalies, organic matter or other deleterious
substances, meeting requirements of ASTM C 94.
2.02 MIXING MATERIALS
A. Add required amount of water and mix thoroughly in pugmill-type mixer.
B. Stamp batch ticket at plant with time of loading. Reject material not placed and
compacted within 4 hours after mixing.
2.03 MATERIAL QUALIFICATION
A. Determine target cement content of material as follows:
1. Obtain samples of sand-cement mixtures at production facility representing

range of cement content consisting of at least three points.
2. Complete molding of samples within 4 hours after addition of water.
3. Perform strength tests (average of two specimens) at 48 hours and 7 days.
4. Perform cement content tests on each sample.
5. Perform moisture content tests on each sample.
6. Plot average 48-hour strength vs. cement content.
7. Record scale calibration date, sample date, sample time, molding time, cement
feed dial settings, and silo pressure (if applicable).
B. Test raw sand for following properties at point of entry into pug-mill:
1. Gradation
02321-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Plasticity index
3. Organic impurities
4. Clay lumps and friable particles
5. Lightweight pieces
6. Moisture content
7. Classification
C. Present data obtained in format similar to that provided in sample data form attached
to this Section.
D. The target content may be adjusted when statistical history so indicates. For
determination of minimum product performance use formula:
f'c% 1/2 standard deviation
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PLACING
A. Place sand-cement mixture in maximum 12-inch-thick loose lifts and compact to 95

percent of maximum density as determined in accordance with ASTM D 558, unless
otherwise specified. Refer to related specifications for thickness of lifts in other
applications. Target moisture content during compaction is +3 percent of optimum.
Perform and complete compaction of sand-cement mixture within 4 hours after
addition of water to mix at plant.
B. Do not place or compact sand-cement mixture in standing or free water.
C. Where potable water lines cross wastewater line, embed wastewater line with cement
stabilized sand in accordance with Texas Administrative Code §290.44(e)(4)(B):
1. Provide minimum of 10% cement per cubic yard of cement stabilized sand
mixture, based on loose dry weight volume. Use at least 2.5 bags of cement
per cubic yard of mixture (2 sacks per ton of dry sand).
2. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, embed wastewater main or lateral

minimum of six inches above and below.
3. Use brown coloring in cement stabilized sand for wastewater main or lateral
bedding for identification of pressure rated wastewater mains during future
construction.
02321-4
CITY OF HOUSTON

Services.
B. One sample of cement stabilized sand shall be obtained for each 150 tons of material
placed per day with no less than one sample per day of production. Random samples
of delivered cement stabililized sand shall be taken in the field at point of delivery in
accordance with ASTM 3665. Obtain three individual samples of approximately 12
to 15 lb each from the first, middle, and last third of the truck and composite them
into one sample for test purpose.
C. Prepare and mold four specimens (for each sample obtained) in accordance with
ASTM D 558, Method A, without adjusting moisture content. Samples will be
molded at approximately same time material is being used, but no later than 4 hours
after water is added to mix.
D. After molding, specimens will be removed from molds and cured in accordance with
ASTM D 1632.
E. Specimens will be tested for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM D 1633,
Method A. Two specimens will be tested at 48 hours plus or minus 2 hours and two
specimens will be tested at 7 days plus or minus 4 hours.
F. A strength test will be average of strengths of two specimens molded from same
sample of material and tested at same age. Average daily strength will be average of
strengths of all specimens molded during one day's production and tested at same age.
G. Precision and Bias: Test results shall meet recommended guideline for precision in
ASTM D 1633 Section 9.
H. Reporting: Test reports shall contain, as a minimum, the following information:
1. Supplier and plant number
2. Time material was batched
3. Time material was sampled
4. Test age (exact hours)
5. Average 48-hour strength
6. Average 7-day strength
7. Specification section number
8. Indication of compliance / non-compliance
9. Mixture identification
10. Truck and ticket numbers
02321-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
11. The time of molding
12. Moisture content at time of molding
13. Required strength
14. Test method designations
15. Compressive strength data as required by ASTM D 1633
16. Supplier mixture identification
17. Specimen diameter and height, in.
18. Specimen cross-sectional area, sq. in.
3.03 ACCEPTANCE
A. Strength level of material will be considered satisfactory if:
1. The average 48-hour strength is greater than 100 psi with no individual
strength test below 70 psi.
2. All 7-day individual strength tests (average of two specimens) are greater than
or equal to 100 psi.
B. Material will be considered deficient when 7-day individual strength test (average of
two specimens) is less than 100 psi but greater than 70 psi. See Paragraph 3.04
Adjustment for Deficient Strength.
C. The material will be considered unacceptable and subject to removal and replacement
at Contractor’s expense when individual strength test (average of two specimens) has
7-day strength less than 70 psi.
D. When moving average of three daily 48-hour averages falls below 100 psi,
discontinue shipment to project until plant is capable of producing material, which
exceeds 100 psi at 48 hours. Five 48-hour strength tests shall be made in this
determination with no individual strength tests less than 100 psi.
E. Testing laboratory shall notify Contractor, Project Manager, and material supplier by
facsimile of tests indicating results falling below specified strength requirements
within 24 hours.
F. If any strength test of laboratory cured specimens falls below the specified strength,
Contractor may, at Contractor’s own expense, request test of cores drilled from the
area in question in accordance with ASTM C42. In such cases, three (3) cores shall
be taken for each strength test that falls below the values given in 3.03.A.
02321-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
G. Cement stabilized sand in an area represented by core tests shall be considered

satisfactory if the average of three (3) cores is equal to at least 100 psi and if no single
core is less that 70 psi. Additional testing of cores extracted from locations
represented by erratic core strength results will be permitted.
3.04 ADJUSTMENT FOR DEFICIENT STRENGTH
A. When mixture produces 7-day compressive strength greater than or equal to 100 psi,
then material will be considered satisfactory and bid price will be paid in full.
B. When mixture produces 7-day compressive strength less than 100 psi and greater than
or equal to 70 psi, material shall be accepted contingent on credit in payment.
Compute credit by the following formula:
Credit per Cubic Yard = $30.00 x 2 (100 psi - Actual psi)

100
C. When mixture produces 7-day compressive strength less than 70 pounds per square
inch, then remove and replace cement-sand mixture and paving and other necessary
work at no cost to City.
Supplier:
Plant No: 1 - Main Street Date of Tests: January 1, 1997
City Stabilized Sand
Item Raw Sand 1.1 Sack 100 psi 1.5 Sack 2.0 Sack
Moisture Content 10.9 15.7 14.0 13.8 13.7
Cement Feed Dial Setting -- 2.25 2.5 2.75 3.75
Silo Pressure (psi) -- 4 4 4 4
Batch Time 10:00 10:10 10:15 10:20 10:25
Sample Time -- 10:10 10:15 10:20 10:25
Molding Time -- 12:30 12:45 1:00 1:15
Cement Content (sacks/ton) -- 1.1 1.3 1.6 2.1
Compressive Strength at 48 hrs.
-- 80 120 160 220
(avg of 2)
Compressive Strength at 7 days
-- 135 200 265 365
(avg of 2)
02321-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
Sieve size Percent Passing COH Spec. Section 02320

3/8 Inch 100 --
No. 16 100 --
No. 40 100 --
No. 50 99 --
No. 100 41 --
No. 200 11 0 to 15
Raw Sand Tests Result City of Houston

Plasticity Index Non-Plastic 4 Maximum
Organic Impurities Passing No Darker Than
Clay Lumps & Friable Parts (%) 0.0 0.5 % Maximum
Lightweight Pieces (%) 0.0 5.0 % Maximum
Classification SP-SM SW, SP, SW-SM, SP-SM, SM
Compressive Strength vs Cement Content
400
Compressive Strength (psi)
350
300
250
48 hr Strength
200
7 day Strength
150
100
50 TARGET
0
1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2 2.2
Cement Content (Sacks/Ton)
END OF SECTION
02321-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FLOWABLE FILL
SECTION 02322
FLOWABLE FILL
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Flowable Fill for furnishing, mixing, transporting and placing flowable fill.
D. Section 02120 – Off-Site Transportation and Disposal
A. Unit Prices.
1. No separate payment will be made for flowable fill under this Section. Include
cost in unit prices for work, as specified in Section 01270 – Measurement and
Payment.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 31 – Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in
the field.
B. ASTM C 39 – Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical

Concrete Specimens.
C. ASTM C 40 – Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for
Concrete.
D. ASTM C 94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.
E. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
F. ASTM C 192 – Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in
the Laboratory.
G. ASTM C 260 – Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
H. ASTM C 494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
02322-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
I. ASTM C 618 – Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
J. ASTM D 4318 – Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity
Index of Soils.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Conform to requirements of Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures
B. Submit proposed mix design
C. Submit a copy of delivery tickets accompanied by batch tickets, providing the

information required by ASTM C 94 to Engineer in the field at time of delivery.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide material conforming to:
1. Cement- ASTM C 150, Type I.
2. Fly Ash – ASTM C 618, Class C, with a minimum CaO content of 20 percent.
3. Water- ASTM C 94.
4. Fine Aggregate – Natural or manufactured fine aggregate, or a combination

there of, free from deleterious amounts of salt, alkali, vegetable matter or
other objectionable material. The plasticity index shall be 4 or less when
tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318. Organic impurities, when tested in
accordance with ASTM C 40, shall not show a color darker than the standard
color. It is intended that the fine aggregate be fine enough to stay in
suspension in the mortar to the extent required for proper flow. The fine
aggregate shall conform to the following gradation:
Sieve Size Percent Passing

3/8 inch 100
No. 200 0-10
5. If flowable mixture cannot be produced, the fine aggregate may not be

approved.
6. Admixtures – ASTM C 260 and /or C 494.
2.02 MIX DESIGN
A. Mix design shall state the following information:
02322-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Mix design number or code designation to order the concrete from the
supplier.
2. Design strength at 7 days (unless otherwise noted on the Plans).
3. Cement type and brand.
4. Fly ash type and brand.
5. Admixtures type and brand.
6. Proportions of each material used.
B. Minimum strength requirement is 100 psi in 7 days unless otherwise noted on the
Plans.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 BATCHING, MIXING AND TRANSPORTATION
A. Batch, mix and transport flowable fill in accordance with ASTM C 94, except when
directed otherwise by the Engineer.
B. Mix flowable fill in quantities required for immediate use. Do not use portions which
have developed initial set or which are not in place within 90 minutes after the initial
water has been added.
C. Do not mix flowable fill while the air temperature is at or below 35 degrees F.
without prior approval of the Engineer.
3.02 PLACEMENT
A. Seal off the area to be repaired.
B. Monitor and control the fluid pressure during placement of flowable fill prior to set.
Take appropriate measures to avoid excessive pressure that may damage or displace
structures or cause flotation. Cease operations if flowable fill is observed leaking
from the repair area. Repair or replace damaged or displaced structures at no
additional cost.
3.03 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Refer to Section 01454 – Testing Laboratory Services.
3.04 CLEAN UP
A. Clean up excess flowable fill discharged from the work area and remove excess
flowable fill from pipes at no additional cost.
02322-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Refer to Section 02120 – Off-Site Transportation and Disposal.
END OF SECTION
02322-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION EMBANKMENT
SECTION 02330
EMBANKMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Construction of embankments with excess excavated material and borrow.
D. Section 02315 – Roadway Excavation
E. Section 02316 – Excavation and Backfill for Structures
G. Section 02319 – Borrow
H. Section 02320 – Utility Backfill Materials
I. Section 02511 – Water Lines
J. Section 02531 – Gravity Sanitary Sewers
K. Section 02532 – Sanitary Sewer Force Mains
A. Unit Prices.
1. No separate payment will be made for embankment under this section. Include
payment in unit price for excavation or borrow.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of

Soils Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)).
02330-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. ASTM D 6938 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined
Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Refer to Section 02315 - Roadway Excavation for acceptable excess materials from
roadway excavation.
B. Refer to Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities for acceptable excess
materials from utility excavation and trenching.
C. Refer to Section 02319 - Borrow for acceptable borrow materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify borrow and excess excavated materials to be reused are approved.
B. Verify removals and clearing and grubbing operations have been completed.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Backfill test pits, stump holes, small swales and other surface irregularities. Backfill
and compact in designated lift depths to requirements for embankment compaction.
B. Record location and plug and fill inactive water and oil wells. Conform to Texas State
Health Department, Texas Commission on Environmental Quality and Texas
Railroad Commission requirements. Notify City Engineer prior to plugging wells.
C. Excavate and dispose of unsuitable soil and other unsuitable materials which will not
consolidate. Backfill and compact to requirements for embankment. Unsuitable soil is
defined in Section 02316 - Excavation and Backfill for Structures and Section 02320
- Utility Backfill Materials.
D. Backfill new utilities below future grade. Conform to requirements of Sections 02317
- Excavation and Backfill For Utilities, 02511 - Water Lines, 02531 - Gravity
Sanitary Sewers, and 02532 - Sanitary Sewer Force Mains.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect trees, shrubs, lawns, existing structures, and other features outside of
embankment limits.
B. Protect utilities above and below grade, which are to remain.
02330-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Conform to protection requirements of Section 02315 - Roadway Excavation.
3.04 PLACING EMBANKMENT
A. Do not conduct placement operations during inclement weather or when existing

ground or fill materials exceed 3 percent of optimum moisture content. Contractor
may manipulate wet material to facilitate drying, by disking or windrowing.
B. Do not place embankment fill until density and moisture content of previously placed
material comply with specified requirements.
C. Scarify areas to be filled to minimum depth of 4 inches to bond existing and new
materials. Mix with first fill layer.
D. Spread fill material evenly, from dumped piles or windrows, into horizontal layers
approximately parallel to finished grade. Place to meet specified compacted
thickness. Break clods and lumps and mix materials by blading, harrowing, disking or
other approved method. Extend each layer across full width of fill.
E. Each layer shall be homogeneous and contain uniform moisture content before
compaction. Mix dissimilar abutting materials to prevent abrupt changes in
composition of fill.
F. Layers shall not exceed the following compacted thickness:
1. Areas indicated to be under future paving or shoulders, to be constructed

within 6 months: 6 inches when compacted with pneumatic rollers, or 8 inches
when compacted with other rollers.
2. Other areas: 12 inches
G. For steep slopes, cut benches into slope and scarify before placing fill. Place
increasingly wider horizontal layers of specified depth to level of each bench.
H. Build embankment layers on back slopes, adjacent to existing roadbeds, to level of

old roadbed. Scarify top of old roadbed to minimum depth of 4 inches and recompact
with next fill layer.
I. Construct to lines and grades shown on Drawings.
J. Remove unsuitable material and excess soil not being used for embankment from site
in accordance with requirements of Section 01576 - Waste Material Disposal.
K. Maintain moisture content of embankment materials to attain required density.
L. Compact to following minimum densities at moisture content of optimum to 3 percent

above optimum as determined by ASTM D 698, unless otherwise indicated on
Drawings:
02330-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Areas under future paving and shoulders: Minimum density of 95 percent of

maximum dry density.
2. Other areas: Minimum density of 90 percent of maximum dry density.
3.05 TOLERANCES
A. Top of compacted surface: Plus or minus 1/2 inch in cross section or 16 foot length.
A. Compaction Testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 698 or ASTM D

6938 under provisions of Section 01454 - Testing Laboratory Services.
B. A minimum of three tests will be taken for each 1000 linear feet per lane of roadway
or 500 square yards of embankment per lift.
C. If tests indicate work does not meet specified compaction requirements, recondition,
recompact, and retest at no cost to City.
END OF SECTION
02330-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION LIME STABILIZED SUBGRADE
SECTION 02336
LIME STABILIZED SUBGRADE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Foundation course of lime stabilized subgrade material.
1. Application of lime slurry to subgrade.
2. Mixing, compaction, and curing of lime slurry, water, and subgrade into a
stabilized foundation.
A. Unit Prices.
1. Measurement and payment for lime stabilized subgrade is on a square yard

basis compacted in place to proper density. Separate measurement will be
made for each required thickness of subgrade course.
a. Limits of measurement shall match actual pavement replaced, but no

greater than maximum pavement replacement limits shown on
Drawings. Limits for measurement will be extended to include
installed lime stabilized subgrade material that extends 2 foot beyond
outside edge of pavement to be replaced, except where proposed
pavement section shares common longitudinal or transverse edge with
existing pavement section. No payment will be made for lime
stabilized subgrade in areas beyond these limits.
b. Limits of measurement and payment shall match pavement

replacement limits shown on Drawings, except as noted in Paragraph
1.03.A.1.a, or as approved by Project Manager.
2. Measurement and payment for lime is by ton of 2000 pounds dry weight basis.
Calculate weight of dry solids for lime slurry based on percentage by dry
weight solids.
02336-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
1.04 DEFINITION
A. Moist Cure: Curing soil and lime to obtain optimum hydration.
B. 1000-Foot Roadway Section: 1000 feet per lane width or approximately 500 square
yards of compacted subgrade for other than full-lane-width roadway sections.
1.05 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of

Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3).
B. ASTM D 4318 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity
Index of Soils.
C. ASTM D 6938 - Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of
D. TxDOT Tex-101-E (Part III) - Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing.
E. TxDOT Tex-140-E - Measuring Thickness of Pavement Layer.
F. TxDOT Tex-600-J - Sampling and Testing Hydrated Lime, Quicklime, and

Commercial Lime Slurry.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit certification that hydrated lime, quicklime, or commercial lime slurry

complies with specifications.
C. Submit weight tickets, certified by supplier, with each bulk delivery of lime to work
site.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Bagged lime shall bear manufacturer's name, product identification, and certified
weight. Bags varying more than 5 percent of certified weight may be rejected;
average weight of 50 random bags in each shipment shall not be less than certified
weight.
B. Store lime in weatherproof enclosures. Protect lime from ground dampness.
02336-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WATER
A. Use clean, clear water, free from oil, acids, alkali, or vegetation.
2.02 LIME
A. Type A - Hydrated Lime: Dry material consisting essentially of calcium hydroxide or

mixture of calcium hydroxide and an allowable percentage of calcium oxide as listed
in chemical composition chart.
B. Type B - Commercial Lime Slurry: Liquid mixture consisting essentially of lime

solids and water in slurry form. Water or liquid portion shall not contain dissolved
material in sufficient quantity to be injurious or objectionable for purpose intended.
C. Type C - Quicklime: Dry material consisting essentially of calcium oxide. Furnish

quicklime in either of the following grades:
1. Grade DS: Pebble quicklime of gradation suitable for use in preparation of

slurry for wet placing.
2. Grade S: Finely-graded quicklime for use in preparation of slurry for wet

placing. Donor use grade S quicklime for dry placing.
D. Conform to the following requirements:
02336-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
TYPE
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION
A B C
Active lime content,
90.0 min1 87.0 min2 -
% by weight Ca(OH)2+CaO
Unhydrated lime content, % by weight CaO 5.0 max - 87.0 min
Free water content, % by weight H2O : 5.0 max - -

SIZING
Wet Sieve, as % by weight residue retained:
No. 6 0.2 max 0.2 max2 8.0 max3
No. 30 4.0 max 4.0 max2 -
Dry sieve, as % by weight residue retained:
1-inch - - 0.0
1/2-inch - - 10.0 max
Notes:
1. Maximum 5.0% by weight CaO shall be allowed in determining total active lime content.
2. Maximum solids content of slurry.
3. Total active lime content, as CaO, in material retained on No. 6 sieve shall not exceed
2.0% by weight of original Type C lime.
E. Deliver lime slurry to job site as commercial lime, or prepare at job site by using
hydrated lime or quicklime. Provide slurry free of liquids other than water and of
consistency that can be handled and uniformly applied without difficulty.
F. Lime containing magnesium hydroxide is prohibited.
2.03 SOIL
A. Soil to receive lime treatment may include borrow or existing subgrade material,
existing pavement structure, or combination of all three. Where existing pavement or
base material is encountered, pulverized or scarify material so that 100 percent of
sampled material passes 2- inch sieve.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify compacted subgrade will support imposed loads.
02336-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Verify subgrade lines and grades.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Complete backfill of utilities prior to stabilization.
B. Cut material to bottom of subgrade using an approved cutting and pulverizing

machine meeting following requirements:
1. Cutters accurately provide smooth surface over entire width of cut to plane of
secondary grade.
2. Provide cut to depth as specified or shown in the Drawings.
C. Alternatively, scarify or excavate to bottom of stabilized subgrade. Remove material

or windrow to expose secondary grade. Obtain uniform stability.
D. Correct wet or unstable material below secondary grade by scarifying, adding lime,
and compacting as directed by Project Manager.
E. Pulverize existing material so that 100 percent passes a 1-3/4-inch sieve.
3.03 LIME SLURRY APPLICATION
A. Apply slurry with distributor truck equipped with an agitator to keep lime and water
in consistent mixture. Make successive passes over measured section of roadway to
attain proper moisture and lime content. Limit spreading to an area where preliminary
mixing operations can be completed on same working day.
B. Minimum lime content shall be 5 percent of dry unit weight of subgrade as

determined by ASTM D 698
3.04 PRELIMINARY MIXING
A. Use approved single-pass or multiple-pass rotary speed mixers to mix soil, lime, and
water to required depth. Obtain homogeneous friable mixture free of clods and lumps.
B. Shape mixed subgrade to final lines and grades.
C. Eliminate following operations and final mixing if pulverization requirements of

Paragraph 3.05C can be met during preliminary mixing:
1. Seal subgrade as precaution against heavy rainfall by rolling lightly with light
pneumatic rollers.
2. Cure soil lime material for 24 to 72 hours or as required to obtain optimum

hydration. Keep subgrade moist during cure.
3.05 FINAL MIXING
02336-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Use approved single-pass or multiple-pass rotary speed mixers to uniformly mix

cured soil and lime to required depth.
B. Add water to bring moisture content of soil mixture to optimum or above.
C. Mix and pulverize until all material passes 1-3/4-inch sieve; minimum of 85 percent,
excluding non-slacking fractions, passes 3/4-inch sieve; and minimum of 60 percent
excluding non-slacking fractions passes No. 4 sieve. Test according to TxDOT Tex-
101-E, Part III using dry method.
D. Shape mixed subgrade to final lines and grades.
E. Do not expose hydrated lime to open air for 6 hours or more during interval between
application and mixing. Avoid excessive hydrated lime loss due to washing or
blowing.
3.06 COMPACTION
A. Aerate or sprinkle to attain optimum moisture content to 3 percent above optimum, as

determined by ASTM D 698 on material sample from roadway after final mix with
lime.
B. Start compaction immediately after final mixing.
C. Spread and compact in two or more equal layers where total compacted thickness is
greater than equipment manufacturer’s recommended range of mixing and
compaction.
D. Compact with approved heavy pneumatic or vibrating rollers, or combination of

tamping rollers and light pneumatic rollers. Begin compaction at bottom and continue
until entire depth is uniformly compacted.
E. Do not allow stabilized subgrade to mix with underlying material. Correct

irregularities or weak spots immediately by replacing material and recompacting.
F. Compact subgrade to minimum density of 95 percent of maximum dry density,

according to ASTM D 698, at moisture content of optimum to 3 percent above
optimum, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings:
G. Seal with approved light pneumatic tired rollers. Prevent surface hair line cracking.
Rework and recompact at areas where hairline cracking develops.
3.07 CURING
A. Moist cure for minimum of 3 days before placing base or surface course, or opening
to traffic. Subgrade may be opened to traffic after 2 days when adequate strength has
been attained to prevent damage. Restrict traffic to light pneumatic rollers or vehicles
weighing less than 10 tons.
02336-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Keep subgrade surface damp by sprinkling. Roll with light pneumatic roller to keep
surface knit together.
C. Place base or surface within 14 days after final mixing and compaction. Restart
compaction and moisture content of base material when time is exceeded.
3.08 TOLERANCES
A. Completed surface: smooth and conforming to typical section and established lines
and grades.
B. Top of compacted surface: Plus or minus 1/4 inch in cross section or in 16-foot
length.
C. Depth of lime stabilization shall be plus or minus one inch of specified depth for each
1000- foot roadway section.

Services.
B. Test soils, lime, and mixtures as follows:
1. Tests and analysis of soil materials will be performed in accordance with

ASTM D 4318, using the wet preparation method.
2. Sampling and testing of lime slurry shall be in accordance with TxDOT Tex-
600-J, except using a lime slurry cup.
3. Sample mixtures of hydrated lime or quicklime in slurry form will be tested to

establish compliance with specifications.
4. Moisture-density relationship will be established on material sampled from

roadway, after stabilization with lime and final mixing, in accordance with
ASTM 698, Moist preparation Method.
C. In-place depth will be evaluated for each 1000-foot roadway section and determined
in accordance with TxDOT Tex-140-E in hand excavated holes. For each 1000-foot
section, 3 phenolphthalein tests will be performed. Average stabilization depth for
1000-foot section will be based on average depth for three tests.
D. Perform compaction testing in accordance with ASTM D 6938. Three tests will be
performed for each 1000-foot roadway section.
E. Pulverization analysis will be performed as required by Paragraph 3.05C on material

sampled during mixing of each production area. Three tests will be performed per
1000-foot roadway section or a minimum of once daily.
02336-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
3.10 REWORK OF FAILED SECTIONS
A. Rework sections that do not meet specified thickness.
B. Perform the following steps when more than 72 hours have lapsed since completion
of compaction.
1. Moist cure for minimum of 3 days after compaction to required density.
2. Add lime at rate of 25 percent of specified rate at no additional cost to City.
3. Moisture density test of reworked material must be completed by laboratory

before field compaction testing can be completed.
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Maintain stabilized subgrade to lines and grades and in good condition until
placement of base or surface course. Protect asphalt membrane from being picked up
by traffic.
B. Repair defects immediately by replacing material to full depth.
END OF SECTION
02336-8
CITY OF HOUSTON LIME/FLY ASH
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION STABILIZED SUBGRADE
SECTION 02337
LIME/FLY ASH STABILIZED SUBGRADE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Foundation course of lime/fly ash stabilized subgrade material.
1. Application of lime slurry and fly ash to subgrade
2. Mixing, compaction, and curing of lime, slurry, fly ash, water and subgrade
into a stabilized foundation
D. Section 02336 – Lime Stabilized Subgrade
A. Unit Prices.
1. Measurement and payment for lime/fly ash stabilized subgrade is on a square

yard basis compacted in place to proper density. Separate measurement will
be made for each required thickness of subgrade course.

greater than the maximum pavement replacement limits shown on
installed lime/fly ash stabilized subgrade material that extends 2-foot
beyond outside edge of pavement to be replaced, except where
proposed pavement section shares a common longitudinal or
transverse edge with existing pavement section. No payment will be
made for lime/fly ash stabilized subgrade in areas beyond these limits.

1.03.A.1.a, or as approved by Project Manager
2. Payment for hydrated lime and quicklime is by ton of 2000 pounds dry-weight
basis
02337-1
3. Payment for commercial lime slurry is by ton of 2000 pounds of lime

calculated on percentage by weight of dry solids for grade of slurry
4. Payment for fly ash is on unit price basis per ton
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Moist Cure: Curing soil lime/fly ash material to obtain optimum hydration.
B. 1000-Foot Roadway Section: 1000 feet per lane width or approximately 500 square
yards of compacted subgrade for other than full-lane-width roadway sections.
1.05 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
1.06 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit certification that fly ash, hydrated lime, quicklime, or commercial lime slurry
complies with these specifications.
C. Submit weight tickets, certified by supplier, with each bulk delivery of materials to
work site.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Conform to requirements of Section 02336 - Lime Stabilized Subgrade.
B. Quicklime can be dangerous; exercise extreme caution if used for Work. Become
informed about recommended precautions in handling, storage and use of quicklime.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Water: clean, clear and free from oil, acids, alkali, or vegetable matter.
B. Lime: Conform to requirements of Section 02336 - Lime Stabilized Subgrade for

Type A hydrated lime, Type C quicklime, and Type B commercial lime slurry.
02337-2
C. Fly ash: Residue or ash remaining after burning finely pulverized coal at high
temperatures conforming to requirements of ASTM C 618, Type ‘C” or “F” and
following:
1. Minimum CaO content of 20 percent
2. Loss on ignition not to exceed 3 percent
3. Contain no lignite ash
D. Asphaltic Seal Cure: Conform to requirements of Section 02336 - Lime Stabilized

Subgrade.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Conform to Part 3 of Section 02336 - Lime Stabilized Subgrade with following

exceptions:
1. Include fly ash in percentage amounts in lime or lime slurry as established

from geotechnical evaluation for application, mixing, and compaction.
2. Apply lime/fly ash as single mix, single pass over lower PI soils.
3. Conduct operations to minimize elapsed time between mixing and compacting

lime/fly ash stabilized subgrade in order to take advantage of rapid initial set
characteristics. Complete compaction within 2 hours of commencing
compaction and not more than 6 hours after adding and mixing last stabilizing
agent.
3.02 QUALITY CONTROL

Services.
B. Soil will be sampled to establish percent of fly ash and hydrated lime, quicklime, or
lime slurry to be applied to subgrade material.
C. Testing will be in accordance with Part 3 of Section 02336-Lime-Stabilized

Subgrade.
END OF SECTION
02337-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION PORTLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SUBGRADE
SECTION 02338
PORTLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SUBGRADE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Foundation course of Portland cement stabilized natural subgrade material.
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for Portland cement stabilized subgrade is on a square yard basis

compacted in place to proper density. Separate measurement will be made for
each different required thickness of subgrade course.

greater than maximum pavement replacement limits shown on
installed Portland cement stabilized subgrade material that extends 2-
foot beyond outside edge of pavement to be replaced, except where
proposed pavement section shares common longitudinal or transverse
edge with existing pavement section. No payment will be made for
Portland cement stabilized subgrade in areas beyond these limits.

1.03.A.1.a, or as approved by Project Manager
2. Payment for Portland cement is by ton of 2000 pounds dry-weight basis.
1.04 REFERENCES
02338-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. ASTM D 558 - Standard Test Methods for Moisture-Density (Unit Weight) Relations
of Soil-Cement- Mixtures.
C. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of

Soil Using Standard Effort (12 400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3).
D. ASTM D 4318 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity
Index of Soils.
E. ASTM D 6938 - Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit certification that Portland cement complies with these specifications.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WATER
A. Water: clean, clear and free from oil, acids, alkali, or organic matter.
2.02 PORTLAND CEMENT
A. ASTM C 150 Type I; bulk or sacked.
2.03 SOIL
A. Provide soil consisting of approved material free from vegetation or other

objectionable matter encountered in existing roadbed.
2.04 TESTS

Services.
B. Tests and analysis of soil materials will be performed in accordance with ASTM D
4318.
C. Soil will be evaluated to establish ratio of cement to soil to obtain desired stability.
Normal range is 6 percent to 10 percent by weight.
02338-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
D. The percentage of moisture in soil, at time of cement application, will be determined

by ASTM D 558. Moisture will not be allowed to exceed quantity that will permit
uniform, complete mixture of soil and cement during dry mixing operations nor
specified optimum moisture content for soil cement mixture, as determined.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify compacted subgrade is ready to support imposed loads.
B. Verify subgrade lines and grades are correct.
3.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Apply Portland cement treatment with machine or combination of machines and

auxiliary equipment to produce specified results. Mixing may be accomplished by
multiple-pass traveling mixing plant or single-pass traveling mixing plant. Provide
sufficient equipment to enable continuous prosecution of work
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Backfill for utilities below future grade.
B. Verify subgrade is firm and able to support, without displacement, construction

equipment at specified density. Correct soft or yielding subgrade and stabilize by
scarifying and aerating or by adding cement and compacting to uniform stability.
C. Grade, shape, and compact, as required, to allow construction of Portland cement

treatment for in-place materials to lines, grades, thickness, and typical cross section
shown on Drawings. Remove unsuitable soil or material and replace with acceptable
material.
D. Pulverize soil so that at completion of moist-mixing, 100 percent by dry weight

passes 1-inch sieve, and minimum of 80 percent passes No. 4 sieve, exclusive of
gravel or stone retained on these sieves. Pulverize existing bituminous wearing
surfaces so that 100 percent will pass 2-inch sieve.
3.04 MIXING
A. Do not place and mix cement when temperature is below 40 degrees F and falling.
Place base when temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 35
degrees F and rising.
02338-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Spread cement uniformly on soil at rate specified by laboratory. When bulk cement
spreader is used, position it by string lines or other approved method to ensure
uniform distribution of cement. Apply cement only to area where operations can be
continuous and completed in daylight, within 1 hour of application. Amount of
moisture in soil at time of cement placement shall not exceed quantity that will permit
uniform mixture of soil and cement during dry mixing operations. Do not exceed
specified optimum moisture content for soil cement mixture.
C. Do not allow equipment other than that used in spreading and mixing, to pass over
freshly spread cement until it is mixed with soil.
D. Dry mix cement with soil after cement application. Continue mixing until cement has
been sufficiently blended with soil to prevent formation of cement balls when water is
applied. Mixture of soil and cement that has not been compacted and finished shall
not remain undisturbed for more than 30 minutes.
E. Immediately after dry mixing is complete, uniformly apply water as necessary and
incorporate it into mixture. Pressurized equipment must provide adequate supply to
ensure continuous application of required amount of water to sections being
processed within 3 hours of cement application. Ensure proper moisture distribution
at all times. After last increment of water has been added, continue mixing until
thorough and uniform mix has been obtained.
F. Ensure percentage of moisture in mixture, based on dry weights, is within 2

percentage points of specified optimum moisture content prior to compaction. When
uncompacted soil cement mixture is wetted by rain indicating that average moisture
content exceeds tolerance given at time of final compaction, reconstruct entire section
in accordance with this Section at no additional cost to City.
3.05 COMPACTION
A. Prior to beginning compaction, ensure mixture is in loose condition for its full depth.
Uniformly compact the loose mixture to specified density, lines, and grades.
B. After soil and cement mixture is compacted, apply water uniformly as needed and
mix thoroughly. Then reshape surface to required lines, grades, and cross section and
lightly scarify to loosen imprints left by compacting or shaping equipment.
02338-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Roll resulting surface with pneumatic-tired roller and "skin" surface with power
grader. Thoroughly compact mixture with pneumatic roller, adding small increments
of moisture, as needed. When aggregate larger than No. 4 sieve is present in mixture,
make one complete coverage of section with flat-wheel roller immediately after
skinning operation. When approved by Project Manager, surface finishing methods
may be varied from this procedure, provided dense uniform surface, free of surface
compaction planes, is produced. Maintain moisture content of surface material at its
specified optimum during finishing operations. Compact and finish surface within
period not to exceed 2 hours, to produce smooth, closely knit surface, free of cracks,
ridges, or loose material, conforming to crown, grade, and line shown on Drawings
within period not to exceed 2-hours.
3.06 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
A. At end of each day's construction, form straight transverse construction joint by

cutting back into total width of completed work to form true 2-inch depth vertical
face free of loose and shattered material. Construct cement treatment for large wide
areas in series of parallel lanes of convenient length and width approved in advance
by Project Manager.
3.07 CURING
A. Moist cure for minimum of 3 days before placing base or surface course, or opening
to traffic. When open, restrict traffic to light pneumatic rollers or vehicles weighing
less than 10 tons.
B. Keep subgrade surface damp by sprinkling. Roll with light pneumatic roller to keep
surface knit together.
C. Place base and surface within 14 days after final mixing and compaction, unless prior
approval is obtained from Project Manager.
3.08 TOLERANCES
A. Completed surface: smooth and conforming to typical section and established lines
and grades.
B. Top of compacted surface: Plus or minus 1/4 inch in cross section or in 16-foot
length.

Services.
B. In-place density will be determined in accordance with ASTM D 6938 or ASTM D

698. Minimum of three tests will be taken for each 1000 feet per lane of roadway or
500 square yards of embankment.
02338-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
3.10 PROTECTION
A. Maintain stabilized subgrade to lines and grades and in good condition until
placement of base or surface course.
B. Repair defects immediately by replacing material to full depth.
END OF SECTION
02338-6
CITY OF HOUSTON COMPACTED SAND FILL
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION UNDER TANK FLOOR PLATE
SECTION 02340
COMPACTED SAND FILL UNDER TANK FLOOR PLATE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Excavation, sand fill and compaction under structures within limits shown on plans.
B. Section 02336 – Lime Stabilized Subgrade
A. No separate measurement and payment for work performed under this Section except
as indicated in section 1.03 B and 1.03 C. The Contractor shall include the cost for
this work in the contract bid price for work of which this is a component part.
B. Extra excavation ordered by the Engineer for removing weak areas in the subgrade, as
determined by proof rolling procedures, will be measured per cubic yard and paid at
the unit price bid for "Extra Excavation".
C. Extra select fill ordered by the Engineer for replacing weak areas in the subgrade will
be measured per cubic yard and paid at the unit price bid for "Extra Select Fill".
1.04 REFERENCES
A. AWWA D 100 – Standard for Welded Steel Tank for Water Storage.
B. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
C. ASTM C 117 – Standard Test Method for Material Finer than 75-µm (No. 200) Sieve
in Mineral Aggregates by washing.
D. ASTM D 698 – Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of

Soil Using Standard Effort (12 400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)).
E. ASTM D 1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics

of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)).
F. ASTM D 4318 – Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and
Plasticity Index of Soils.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
02340-1
B. Submit proposed materials and sequence of operations for compacting sand. Describe
proposed equipment.
C. Submit sand fill to Engineer for approval.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Clean sand or clean bank sand free from clay and clay lumps, shale, loam, organic
matter, salt or chlorides, and other deleterious materials in accordance with ASTM
C33 shall be used. Water soluble ionic (salt) contamination of the sand shall be
determined and limited in accordance with AWWA D100, Section 12.6, Note 3.
Maximum chloride level not to exceed 100 ppm, maximum sulfate level not to exceed
200 ppm.
B. Sand to have a maximum plasticity index of 7 in accordance with ASTM D-4318 and
not more than 15% passing a No. 200 sieve, in accordance with ASTM C117.
C. Water, if used to obtain moisture content, to be clean and fresh.
D. Hydrated lime for soil stabilization shall comply with Section 02336 – Lime-
Stabilized Subgrade.
E. Select fill shall be silty or sandy clay with liquid limit of less than 40 and plasticity
index between 7 and 20.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION
A. Excavate or strip to depth as indicated on Drawings or as directed by the Engineer to

effectively remove all vegetation, topsoil and debris, if present.
B. Limit of excavation and stripping to be defined by a radius equal to the tank ring
foundation wall outer radius plus 5 feet.
C. Existing trees are to be grubbed to a minimum depth of 3 feet to remove stumps.
D. Following stripping, the exposed subgrades are to be proof-rolled with a minimum 20

ton pneumatic roller to detect any soft or poorly compacted areas.
02340-2
E. All weak areas in the subgrade are to be removed and replaced with select fill. Where
indicated on the Drawings, scarify upper 6-inches of soil and stabilize with 5%
hydrated lime and compact to 95% of maximum density as determined by ASTM
D698.
F. Shape surface to receive sand fill as shown on Plans.
G. Fill for grade adjustments (below clean sand) is to be select soil, free of organic and
deleterious material and have a plasticity index between 7 and 20.
H. Fill for grade adjustments is to be placed in lifts not exceeding 8 inches loose measure
and compacted to at least 95% of the standard Proctor maximum dry density within
±2 percentage points of the optimum moisture content in accordance with ASTM
D1557.
I. Place clean sand or clean bank sand base under floor plate in 4-inch maximum lifts,
measured loose, and compact with pneumatic, vibratory or mechanical tamps.
Compact to 95% standard Proctor maximum dry density with ±2 percentage points of
the optimum moisture content in accordance with ASTM D698.
J. After compaction, shape surface area to grade indicated.
K. The Owner shall provide for density testing and will be performed on each lift of fill
for grade adjustments and fill under tank floor as directed by the Engineer.
L. Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least twenty-four (24) hours prior to proof
rolling and density testing.
END OF SECTION
02340-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION TUNNEL SHAFTS
SECTION 02400
TUNNEL SHAFTS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Construction, maintenance, and backfilling requirements of tunnel shafts.
B. Section 01292 – Schedule of Values
H. Section 02081 – Cast-In-Place Concrete Manholes
I. Section 02082 – Precast Concrete Manholes
J. Section 02316 – Excavation and Backfill for Structures
K. Section 02317 – Excavation and Backfill for Utilities
L. Section 02321 – Cement Stabilized Sand
M. Section 02401 – Common Tunnel Shafts
N. Section 02431 – Tunnel Grout
A. Unit Prices.
02400-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Tunnel shafts, both those shown on Drawings and those additional ones
needed for Contractor's operations, are bid as lump sum for all shafts,
collectively. Prior to construction, provide schedule of values as specified in
Section 01292 - Schedule of Values. Itemize cost by station for each shaft
designated on Drawings and additionally required for construction operations.
Seventy five percent of itemized amount will be submitted on pay estimate
upon shaft installation; twenty five percent will be submitted on pay estimate
upon backfill and site restoration (including topsoil, sodding and hydro-
mulching). Payment will include excavation, disposal of excavated materials,
ground support systems, backfilling, and cleanup. Manholes constructed in
tunnel shafts are to be paid separately at contract unit price as specified in
Section 02081 - Cast-in-place Concrete Manholes or Section 02082 - Precast
Concrete Manholes.
2. Removal and replacement of surface improvements necessary for shaft

construction, including but not limited to sidewalks, asphaltic or concrete
pavement, base and subbase, curbs, curb and gutter, driveways, topsoil,
sodding, and hydro-mulch shall be included in lump sum for tunnel shafts.
3. Pay for relocation of City-owned utilities at contract unit price, only when
included in Document 00410 - Bid Form.
4. If Contractor’s alternative construction method or alignment is approved by

the City, the Contractor shall resubmit the schedule of values per the
alternative alignment for approval. Itemize cost by station for each shaft
designated on the revised plan and any additional shaft required for
construction operations.
C. Unit Prices for water main Projects.
1. Payment will be made for construction of tunnel shafts and related work on a
lump sum basis only if include on Document 00410 – Bid Form. If work is not
included on Document 00410 – Bid Form, include the cost for construction of
tunnel shafts in unit price for related items.
2. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings removal and replacement of surfaces

necessary for shaft construction, including but not limited to sidewalks,
asphaltic and correct pavement, base and sub-base shall be paid to limits no
further than 5 feet from shaft wall.
A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO),

AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, current edition.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
02400-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Shaft design submittals by Contractor shall be signed and sealed by Professional

Engineer registered in State of Texas. If trench box is used in tunnel shaft and such
utilization is in a manner other than what is indicated and certified in manufacturer’s
technical data, submit trench box manufacturer certification of proposed usage.
C. Submit shaft construction drawings and seal slabs. Clearly indicate allowable
surcharge loads and restrictions on surcharge capacity, including live loads, on shaft
construction drawings. Indicate thrust blocks or other reactions required for pipe
jacking, when applicable.
1. Location of shafts by station and limits of working sites.
2. Description of site security arrangements in conformance with Paragraph

3.03, Shaft Construction.
3. Description of method of extending shaft above flood level in conformance

with Paragraph 3.03, Shaft Construction.
4. Any geotechnical / boring undertaken by Contractor for whatever purpose

connected to Work.
D. Shaft Monitoring Plan: Submit for review prior to construction, shaft monitoring plan
that includes schedule of instrumentation design, layout of instrumentation parts,
equipment installation details, manufacturer's catalog literature, and monitoring report
forms.
E. Structures Assessment. Provide preconstruction and post-construction assessment

reports for critical structures located within radius of shaft center equal to shaft depth
plus shaft radius, measured in plan. Include photographs or video of any existing
damage to structures in vicinity of shafts in assessment reports.
F. Submit shaft surface settlement monitoring plan for review prior to construction.
Identify location of settlement monitoring points, reference benchmarks, survey
frequency and procedures, and reporting formats on plan.
G. Submit readings of monitoring plans to Project Manager as soon as readings have

been taken.
H. Submit shaft temporary deck drawings and calculations to Project Manager, signed
and sealed by Contractor's Professional Engineer in event that shaft is not needed for
immediate construction activity, in conformance with Paragraph 3.03, Shaft
Construction.
1.06 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
02400-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Shaft design must include allowance for contractor's equipment and stored material
and spoil stockpile as appropriate. Design must also allow for HL-93 highway
loading if located in the vicinity of a paved area.
B. Design shaft to withstand full hydrostatic head without failure. In case of common
shaft in conformance to Section 02401- Common Tunnel Shafts, design shaft with
adequate factor of safety for full hydrostatic head.
C. Design shaft located within 50-year flood plain with water retaining liner extending 2
feet above 50-year flood elevation. It is acceptable when liner is stored at site for
immediate installation in lieu of it being installed at shaft, provided that shaft liner
extends at least 2 feet above existing ground elevation.
D. Design shaft cover for minimum 25 pounds per square foot distributed load plus 300-
pound point load.
E. Design steel plate deck, if such is required, for HL-93 loading.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 LOCATION OF ACCESS SHAFTS
A. Contractor has sole responsibility for selection of shaft sites needed for construction
operations unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Location will be subject to the
approval of the Project Manager.
B. Locate shafts and associated work areas to avoid blocking driveways and cross
streets, and to minimize disruption to business and commercial interests. Avoid shaft
locations near areas identified as residential or potentially contaminated.
C. Plan shaft locations to minimize interference with storm drainage channels, ditches,
water lines, sanitary sewers, storm water sewers or culverts, which, when damaged,
could result in ground washout or flooding of shafts and tunnels.
3.02 UTILITY RELOCATION
A. Relocate utilities as shown on Drawings. Utility relocations required by Contractor

for shaft construction shall take into account zone of potential settlement in vicinity
of shaft.
B. Obtain approval from Project Manager for permanent relocations prior to relocating.
3.03 SHAFT CONSTRUCTION
A. Conform to the following for ground support systems:
02400-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Install liner elements, bracing and shoring structural members at locations and
in method sequence and tolerances defined on shaft construction drawings as
excavation progresses.
2. Ensure bracing and shoring are in contact with liner to provide full support as
shown in shaft construction drawings. Evaluate and check modifications to
liner, bracing and shoring. Obtain approval from Contractor's Professional
Engineer and submit to Project Manager.
3. Install seal slab as soon as final depth and stable bottom conditions have been
reached and accepted by Project Manager. Construct seal slab capable of
withstanding full piezometric pressure, either by pressure relief using under
drains, or in case of more permeable ground condition, by use of structural
reinforced slab. Construct seal slab in accordance with design provided by
Contractor's Professional Engineer.
4. Design and construct entire shaft to appropriate factors of safety against yield,
deformation, or instability as determined by Contractor's Professional
Engineer. Shaft must withstand full hydrostatic head without failure.
5. Special framing, bracing or shoring required around tunnel "eyes" or other

penetrations shall be in-place according to shaft construction drawings before
liner or any bracing or shoring at penetration is cut or removed.
6. Securely breast and shore face of starter or back tunnels to resist both soil and
hydrostatic pressure.
7. When applicable, pressure grout voids or seepage paths around shafts and
adjoining tunnels in accordance with Section 02431- Tunnel Grout. Pressure
grout bolted steel liner plates as they are installed, unless otherwise approved
by Project Manager. Perform secondary or 'back grouting' as ground
measurement, voids or deformation of shaft liner are detected.
B. Install suitable thrust or reaction blocks as required for pipe jacking equipment.
C. Provide drainage from shafts while work is in progress and until adjacent pipe joints
have been sealed and shaft is backfilled. Conform to requirements of Section 01578 -
Control of Ground and Surface Water.
D. Surface Water Control. Divert surface water runoff and discharge from dewatering
system away from shaft. Protect shafts from infiltration or flooding.
E. Each surface work site is to be surrounded by security fence meeting requirements of

Section 01504 - Temporary Facilities and Controls, which shall be secure any time
site is unattended by Contractor's personnel.
F. Protect shaft, when not in use by second security fence at perimeter of shaft, or
alternatively by cover designed in accordance with Paragraph 1.06, Performance
Requirements.
02400-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
G. Provide portable concrete traffic barriers at locations where work site is situated
adjacent to highway, road, driveway, or parking lot. Angle traffic barriers in direction
of lane flow. Do not place perpendicular to on-coming traffic.
H. Provide and maintain traffic control system in accordance with provision of Section
01555 - Traffic Control and Regulation.
I. Cover shaft which is constructed more than 60 days in advance of its intended use by
steel plate deck designed by Contractor's Professional Engineer, and restore surface to
permit full traffic flow during time shaft is not in use. Remove from site other
material and equipment used by Contractor including portable concrete traffic
barriers, traffic control system, fencing and reinstall at time shaft is re-opened for use.
J. Construct suitable guardrail barrier around periphery of shaft, meeting applicable

safety standards. Properly maintain barrier throughout period shaft remains open.
Repair broken boards, supports, and structural members. Provide ladder with safety
cage, when required by OSHA, in each shaft. Provide security barrier for each access
shaft in which there is no construction activity or which is unattended by Contractor's
personnel.
K. Size of Shafts: Make size adequate for construction of permanent structures indicated
on Drawings and to provide adequate room to meet operational requirements for
tunnel construction and backfill.
3.04 BACKFILL
A. Provide cement-stabilized sand to minimum depth of 10 feet above crown of sanitary

sewer, but where shaft is located in paved area, cement-stabilized sand shall be used
to within one foot of pavement subgrade elevation. Provide cement-stabilized sand in
accordance with Section 02321 - CementStabilized Sand. Compact cement stabilized
sand in accordance with Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. In
locations where backfill is not subject to traffic loading, depth above initial cement-
stabilized sand may be backfilled with select backfill in accordance with Section
02316 - Excavation and Backfill of Structures. When insufficient work space exists,
Grout manhole or structure annular space in accordance with Section 02431 - Tunnel
Grout.
B. Remove shaft liner above level of 8 feet below ground surface, unless otherwise
indicated on Drawings. Maintain sufficient ground support to meet excavation safety
requirements while removing shaft structure.
C. Where common shafts are indicated, refer to Section 02401 - Common Tunnel Shafts.
3.05 MONITORING
A. Monitoring Instrumentation. Instrumentation specified and readings shall be

accessible at all times to Project Manager.
02400-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Install and maintain instrumentation system to monitor and detect movement

of ground surface and adjacent structures. Establish vertical survey control
points at distance from construction area that avoids disturbance due to
ground settlement.
2. Project Manager may through independent contractor or consultant, from

installing instrumentation in, on, near, or adjacent to construction work.
Provide access to work for such independent installations.
3. Install instruments in accordance with Drawings and manufacturer's

recommendations.
B. Surface Settlement Monitoring
1. Establish monitoring points on all critical structures.
2. Record location of settlement monitoring points with respect to construction

baselines and elevations. Record elevations to an accuracy of 0.01 feet for
each monitoring point location. Establish monitoring points at locations and
by methods that protect them from damage by construction operations,
tampering, or other external influences.
3. Monitoring points to measure ground elevation are required at distance of 10

feet and 20 feet from perimeter of shaft on each of four radial lines, at 90
degrees to each other.
4. Railroads. Monitor ground settlement of track subbase at centerline of each

track when within zone of potential settlement.
C. Reading Frequency and Reporting. Submit to Project Manager, records of readings

from various instruments and survey points.
1. Record all shaft monitoring readings at least once per week starting prior to
shaft construction and continuing until shaft has been backfilled and until no
more detectable movement occurs.
2. Immediately report to Project Manager any movement, cracking, or settlement

which is detected.
3. Following substantial completion but prior to final completion, make final

survey of all shaft related monitoring points.
A. Remove spoil in accordance with Section 01576 - Waste Material Disposal.
END OF SECTION
02400-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION COMMON TUNNEL SHAFTS
SECTION 02401
COMMON TUNNEL SHAFTS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Requirements for design and construction of common tunnel shaft used for tunnel
construction by contractor (First Contractor) followed by transfer of shaft and work
site to separate contractor (Second Contractor) for use in completing interconnecting
tunneling operations and permanent work within shaft.
A. Document 00800 – Supplementary Conditions
B. Section 01110 – Summary of Work
C. Section 01292 – Schedule of Values
F. Section 02400 – Tunnel Shafts
A. Unit Prices.
1. Common shafts are bid as part of Work defined in Section 02400 - Tunnel
Shafts, except as modified in this Section.
2. Construction of common shaft includes installation of site security, removal of

affected site improvements, shaft excavation, disposal of excess material,
sheeting, shoring or bracing, seal slab, ground water control, and installation
of temporary plug in pipe. Payment is made in accordance with Section 02400
- Tunnel Shafts and as specified in Section 01292 - Schedule of Values.
3. Work within common shaft, previously constructed by First Contractor, and

transferred to Second Contractor includes maintaining site, security,
groundwater control, permanent backfilling, replacement of permanent site
improvements, such as sidewalks, asphaltic and concrete pavement, pavement
base and subbase, curbs, curb and gutter, driveways, topsoil, sodding, and
hydro-mulch. Payment is made in accordance with Section 02400 - Tunnel
Shafts and as specified in Section 01292 - Schedule of Values.
02401-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
4. Traffic control and regulation, including flagmen are paid under Section
5. Agreement which may be reached between two contractors involving

common tunnel shaft which results in departure from or omits element of
common shaft concept specified in this Section will not result in an
adjustment in Contract Price by City for either contractor.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Common Shaft. Shaft that First Contractor constructs under one contract and then is
transferred as responsibility of Second Contractor, under separate contract, who
completes interconnected tunneling operations, permanent work, backfill, and
restoration of site improvements.
B. First Contractor. Contractor responsible for design and construction of common shaft.
First Contractor uses shaft for tunneling and installing permanent sewer line, and then
relinquishes responsibility at time of transfer to Second Contractor.
C. Second Contractor. Contractor who takes responsibility for shaft constructed by First
Contractor and uses it to complete interconnected tunneling and to complete
permanent work at that location.
D. Starter Shaft. Generally, downstream shaft of First Contractor; shaft from which First
Contractor begins tunnel work. This shaft, when common, becomes receiving shaft
for Second Contractor.
E. Receiving Shaft. Generally, shaft at upstream end of tunnel work where tunneling
operation ends. When common, it will have been constructed by First Contractor as
starter shaft.
F. Back Tunnel. Short length of tunnel constructed at starter shaft in opposite direction
to main tunnel to facilitate construction operations.

1.06 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements. Common shaft design to be site specific with minimum clear
dimensions, depth and at location shown on Drawings. Differing dimensions may
only be used with written consent of Second Contractor, and approval of City
Engineer.
02401-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Design shaft to withstand full piezometric pressure with adequate factor of

safety, and without dependence on ground water control system.
2. Design seal slab to have sump for purposes of pumping out seepage and
surface water inflow.
3. Design shaft liner for uniformly distributed loading of 200 pounds per square
foot at surface, or HL-93 vehicle loading, as applicable.
4. Second Contractor designs shaft structural modifications required to suit his

construction needs.
5. Design common shaft using materials which minimize ground water intake
and prevent migration of fines into shaft.
6. Design shaft with liner or ground support system such that it may be readily
removed to depth of 8 feet below existing pavement or ground elevation.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. First Contractor.
1. Conform to requirements of Section 02400 - Tunnel Shafts and Section 01330

- Submittal Procedures.
2. Submit to City Engineer, two copies of record photographs showing shaft

condition immediately prior to handover.
3. Prepare record drawings for shaft and submit to City Engineer prior to Second
Contractor taking over shaft and work site.
B. Second Contractor.
1. Conform shaft modification submittals to requirements of Section 02400 -

Tunnel Shafts and Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
2. Submit monitoring results in accordance with Section 02400 - Tunnel Shafts

and Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
1.08 TRANSFER OF SHAFT RESPONSIBILITY
A. First Contractor. First Contractor relinquishes site of common shaft and transfers
responsibility to Second Contractor on date specified in Section 01110 - Summary of
Work. Date is based on specified number of days from Date of Commencement. First
Contractor may transfer responsibility of shaft prior to date specified when approved
by Second Contractor and City Engineer. Failure to transfer that responsibility by
date specified will cause assessment of liquidated damages against First Contractor in
accordance with Article 9.12 of Document 00800 - Supplementary Conditions.
02401-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Second Contractor. Second Contractor takes responsibility for common shaft site on
date First Contractor relinquishes site. Date shall occur within period specified in
Section 01110 - Summary of Work. Second Contractor is not required to take
responsibility for shaft prior to first date of period specified, but shall be prepared to
take over responsibility on date thereafter. Second Contractor shall have no claim for
delay provided First Contractor turns over shaft prior to last day of period specified.
C. Mutual Agreements on Transfer of Responsibility. Changes to date specified for

occupation of site requires written approval of both Contractors, with approvals
forwarded to City Engineer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Use equipment and materials for construction in good condition.
B. Construct permanent work as specified and as shown on Drawings.
C. Material or equipment left in shaft or at site by First Contractor, either as defined by

this Section, or otherwise, becomes property of Second Contractor.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SITE EXAMINATION
A. First Contractor: Repair damage to existing structures or facilities which has been
caused by construction activity. Leave site in clean condition.
B. Second Contractor: Inspect site and report damage observed to City Engineer
immediately prior to transfer. Site includes surrounding area insofar as it may have
been impacted by First Contractor’s construction activity.
3.02 CONSTRUCTION
A. First Contractor.
1. Construct common shaft, including utility relocations, dewatering, shaft

excavation and ground support, seal slab, traffic control, and safety and
security barriers in accordance with Section 02400 - Tunnel Shafts.
2. Do not construct back-tunnel in common shaft.
3. Repair damage to shaft liner and grout voids outside shaft ground support to
restore integrity of shaft to its original design capabilities, prior to transfer.
4. Install plug immediately upstream of shaft.
02401-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
5. Clean out shaft, including removal of construction equipment and debris prior
to transfer.
6. Monitor for settlement in conformance with Section 02400 - Tunnel Shafts.
7. Remove dewatering system, when used, including backfilling wells and

removing header pipes.
8. Repair damage to pavement outside immediate limits of shaft, such as

settlement damage to pavement resulting from shaft or tunneling operations.
9. Remove equipment from shaft including thrust blocks when used, except
access ladder, prior to handover.
10. Remove traffic control system. Coordinate with Second Contractor to

maintain continuous traffic control.
11. Repair damage to site security fencing, shaft fencing or cover, and portable
concrete traffic barriers.
12. Transfer security fencing, covers, and portable concrete traffic barriers to
Second Contractor.
13. Provide, install, and handover temporary plug at downstream end of sewer
pipe installed by First Contractor.
14. Provide and deliver to Second Contractor, two new and undamaged joints of
pipe identical to pipe installed by First Contractor immediately upstream of
common shaft.
B. Second Contractor.
1. Install traffic control system. Coordinate with First Contractor to maintain

continuous traffic control.
2. Provide necessary pumps and power source at shaft. Provide ground water
control at shaft as required to control inflow.
3. Design, fabricate, and install modification of existing shaft to suit Second

Contractor’s needs.
4. Install necessary hoisting equipment, communication system, and other safety

provisions, including ventilation and lighting.
5. Monitor for earth settlement in conformance with Section 02400 - Tunnel

Shafts.
6. Complete upstream sewer construction within shaft.
7. Complete downstream sewer construction in accordance with Drawings.
02401-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
8. Complete other permanent construction work within shaft as shown on

Drawings and in accordance with Specifications. Place backfill in accordance
with Section 02400 - Tunnel Shafts.
9. Restore permanent pavement in accordance with Drawings, including repairs

needed to existing pavement outside immediate limits of shaft, such as
settlement damage to pavement resulting from shaft or tunnel operations.
10. Clean site and restore site and surrounding area to original condition as shown
in Drawings and in accordance with Specifications.
11. Remove and dispose of temporary plug in upstream sewer pipe.
END OF SECTION
02401-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION TUNNEL EXCAVATION AND PRIMARY LINER
SECTION 02425
TUNNEL EXCAVATION AND PRIMARY LINER
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Tunnel construction by placement of primary liner for installation of pipe using a

primary tunnel liner with a carrier pipe. Placement of sewer pipe inside tunnel
constructed with primary liner shall be in accordance with Section 02426 - Sewer
Line in Tunnels.
B. Various construction methods for tunneling, including tunnel boring machine (TBM),
hand tunneling, or shield. Liners include rib and lagging, steel liner plate, bolted steel
liner, box tunnels, and segmented concrete. Liners may be expanded or grouted.
C. Install liner types as shown on Drawings. Use techniques and liner methods
appropriate for prevailing ground conditions, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Section 01578 – Control of Ground and Surface Water
E. Section 02426 – Sewer Line in Tunnels
F. Section 02431 – Tunnel Grout
A. Unit Prices.
1. Work performed under this Section such as excavation, primary liner, and
grouting will not be paid directly. Include cost of this work in unit prices for
installation of sewer line in tunnel, in accordance with Section 02426 -
Sanitary Sewer Line in Tunnels.
2. Monitoring will be paid lump sum price for installation, observation, and
reporting.
02425-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
work in this Section is included in Total Stipulated Price.

B. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association (AREMA)

Manual for Railway Engineering.
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
1. ASTM A 36 - Standard Specifications for Carbon Structural Steel.
2. ASTM A 283 - Standard Specifications for Low and Intermediate Tensile

Strength Carbon Steel Plates.
3. ASTM A 307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and
Threaded Rod 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength.
D. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
E. National Electrical Code – NFPA 70.
1.05 DEFINITION
A. Primary liner: First tunnel support installed by Contractor in 2-pass method.
B. Carrier pipe: Sewer line as specified in Section 02426 - Sewer Line in Tunnels.
C. Zone of Active Excavation. Area located within radial distance about surface point
immediately above face of excavation equal to depth to bottom of excavation.
D. Critical Structure: Building, structure, bridge, pier, or similar construction partially or

entirely located within zone of active excavation.
E. Tunnel Boring Machine (TBM): Mechanized and fully shielded excavating

equipment that is steerable, guided and articulated, with man entry.
F. Tunneling Methodology: Written description, together with supporting

documentation that defines Contractor's plans and procedures for tunneling
operations.
G. Shield: Fabricated ground support, circular in section, providing 360 degree

protection to those working in it. Shield will have cutting edge, and be equipped with
independently operated hydraulic propulsion rams, allowing it to be steered. Liner is
erected within tail attached to shield.
02425-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
H. Open Face: Face of heading or tunnel which is unsupported during excavation (e.g.,
in hand mining or shield excavation).
I. Closed Face: Face of heading or tunnel which is supported during excavation process
from TBM, where cutter head allows both partial exposure of face and full closure, by
means of hydraulically operated gates.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
B. The following submittals are required:
1. Tunneling Methodology. Provide a brief description of proposed tunnel

methodology for review. Description should be sufficient to convey
following:
a. Proposed method of tunnel construction and type of face support and

lining system.
b. Manufacturer and type of tunneling equipment proposed; type of

lighting and ventilation systems.
c. Number and duration of shifts planned to be worked each day.
d. Sequence of operations.
e. Location of access shafts and work sites.
f. Method of spoil transportation from face, surface storage, and disposal

location.
g. Method of installing pipe.
h. Identification of critical utility crossings and special precautions

proposed.
i. Manufacturer and type of chemical grout proposed.
2. Drawings and Calculations. Submit for record purposes, drawings and

calculations for tunnel support system designed by Contractor. Drawings shall
be adequate for construction, and include installation details. Documents must
be signed and sealed by Professional Engineer registered in State of Texas.
Include calculations with clear statement of criteria used for design, as
described in Paragraph 1.07, Design Criteria.
3. Quality Control. Submit for review brief description of quality control

methods including:
a. Method and frequency of survey control.
02425-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
b. Example of tunnel daily log.
c. Instrumentation plan showing location and frequency of monitoring

relative to critical structures within zone of active excavation.
d. Settlement survey plan (may be included in instrumentation plan).
4. Geotechnical Investigation. When geotechnical investigations are conducted

by Contractor, submit results to Project Manager for record purposes.
5. Monitoring Plans:
a. Instrumentation Monitoring Plan. Submit for review, prior to

construction, monitoring plan that includes schedule of
instrumentation design, layout of instrumentation points, equipment
installation details, manufacturer's catalog literature, and monitoring
report forms.
b. Surface Settlement Monitoring Plan. Submit settlement monitoring

plan for review prior to construction. Identify location of settlement
monitoring points, reference benchmarks, survey frequency and
procedures, and reporting formats on plan.
6. Structures Assessment. Submit preconstruction and post-construction

assessment reports for critical structures, namely those located within zone of
active excavation from proposed tunnel centerline. Include photographs or
video of existing damage to structures in vicinity of sewer alignment in
assessment reports.
7. Submit monitor readings to Project Manager.
8. Daily Reports. Maintain shift log as defined in Paragraph 3.04, Tunneling

Data, and make available to Project Manager on request.
1.07 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Provide primary liner designed by Contractor's Professional Engineer for appropriate

loading conditions and deflection criteria, including but not limited to: overburden
and lateral earth pressures; handling and installation stresses; loads imposed by tunnel
shield or tunnel boring machine thrust jacks; subsurface soil and water loads;
grouting; and other conditions of service. Assume responsibility for design of primary
liner to carry construction loads in combination with overburden, earth and
hydrostatic loads.
B. At railroad crossings conform to Cooper E-80 locomotive loading distributions in

accordance with AREMA specifications for culverts. In design, account for additive
loadings due to multiple tracks. Provide liner type for railroad crossings as specified
or as shown on Drawings.
02425-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. For truck loading use HL-93vehicle loading distributions in accordance with

AASHTO
D. Use liner system compatible with special requirements shown on Drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STEEL LINER PLATES
A. In locations shown on Drawings, manufacture liner plate (2-flange or 4-flange)

certified by manufacturer for compliance with Specifications.
B. Provide bolts and nuts conforming to ASTM A 307, Grade A.
C. Punch plates for bolting on both longitudinal and circumferential seams and fabricate
to permit complete erection from inside tunnel. Provide plates of uniform fabrication.
Plates intended for one size tunnel shall be interchangeable.
D. Material used for construction of liner plates shall be in good condition.
E. Provide sufficient number of bolted steel liner plates with approximately 2-inch
diameter grout holes furnished with plugs. Locate holes near plate center.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Use methods for tunneling operations that will minimize ground settlement. Select
method which will control flow of water, prevent loss of soil into tunnel, and provide
stability of face under anticipated conditions.
B. Conduct tunneling operations in accordance with applicable safety rules and

regulations, OSHA standards, and Contractor's safety plan. Use methods which
include due regard for safety of workmen, adjacent structures, utilities, and public.
C. Maintain clean working conditions inside tunnel and shafts.
D. For tunneling under railroad embankments, highways, or streets, perform installation

so as to avoid interference with operation of railroads, highways, or streets, except as
approved by owner of facility.
E. Support ground continuously in manner to prevent loss of ground and keep perimeters
and faces of tunnel stable.
02425-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
F. Completed primary tunnel lining shall have full bearing against ground. Grout
peripheral space between support elements and excavated surface or close by
expanding support elements against ground to achieve full bearing as tunnel
advances.
G. Ground Conditions. Perform additional exploration by geotechnical borings in

advance of construction to define necessary parameters for design of primary tunnel
liner, planning and designing ground water control system, and for selection of
tunneling method and equipment to successfully complete each tunnel reach.
H. Be aware that various existing soil borings, piezometers, or instrument wells, where
indicated on Drawings, may coincide with proposed tunnel alignment. These may or
may not have been backfilled with grout and, therefore, caution should be used in
tunneling through these locations. Contractor shall take mitigating measures to
counter effect these boreholes, piezometers, or instrument wells may have on
tunneling operations.
3.02 GROUND WATER CONTROL
A. Provide necessary ground water control measures to perform work and to provide
safe working conditions. Comply with provisions of Section 01578 - Control of
Ground and Surface Water.
B. Anticipate that portions of tunnel excavation may be below ground water table and in
cohesionless soils, even when not indicated on soil borings, and in conditions which
may require ground water control system for tunneling operations. Install filter
fabrics, backer rods and other means as necessary to prevent piping of fines into
tunnel.
C. When Contractor chooses pumping installations to control ground water level or

installs pervious liner through water bearing layers, install and maintain
instrumentation system to monitor water level and to detect movement in adjacent
structures and property.
D. Operate dewatering system for tunnels until carrier pipe has been installed and
annular space is fully grouted, or until watertight liner designed for hydrostatic
pressures is installed.
E. Do not proceed with tunneling for which ground water control is necessary until
monitoring data indicates that ground water control system is operating in accordance
with Contractor's plan.
3.03 EQUIPMENT
A. Assume responsibility for selection of tunneling equipment which, based on past

experience, has proven to be satisfactory for excavation of soils to be encountered.
02425-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Employ tunneling equipment that will be capable of handling various anticipated

ground conditions and which minimizes loss of soil ahead of face and allows
satisfactory support of excavated face.
C. TBM or shield shall conform to shape of tunnel with uniform perimeter that is free of
projections that could produce over excavation or voids. An appropriately sized over
cutting bead may be provided to facilitate steering. In addition it shall:
1. Be capable of full directional guidance.
2. Be capable of full face closure, or permit ready installation of breasting

boards.
3. Be equipped with appropriate tail in which liner is erected.
4. Be capable of correcting roll.
5. Be designed to handle adverse ground conditions including ground water

ingress.
6. Be equipped with visual display to show operator actual position of TBM or

shield relative to design reference.
D. Air Quality. Provide equipment to maintain proper air quality of tunnel operations
during construction in accordance with OSHA requirements.
E. Enclose light fixtures in watertight enclosures with suitable guards. Provide separate
circuits for lighting and other equipment.
F. Conform to requirements of National Electrical Code - NFPA70 for Electrical

systems.
3.04 TUNNELING DATA
A. Maintain shift logs of construction events and observations. Project Manager shall
have access to Contractor's logs with regard to the following information:
1. Location of face by station and progress of tunnel drive during shift.
2. Hours worked per shift on tunneling operations.
3. Completed field forms for checking line and grade of tunneling operation,
showing achieved tolerance relative to design alignment. Steering control logs
will generally be acceptable for shield or TBM driven tunnels.
4. Location, elevation and brief soil descriptions of soil strata and strata
boundaries.
5. Ground water control operations and piezometric levels, ground water inflow
location and rates.
02425-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
6. Observation of lost ground or other ground movement.
7. Unusual conditions or events.
8. Reasons for operational shutdown in event drive are halted.
B. Clearly mark primary liner with paint every 20 feet along tunnel with distance in feet
from centerline of preceding shaft.
3.05 TUNNEL EXCAVATION AND PRIMARY LINER INSTALLATION
A. Tunnel Excavation.
1. Conduct tunneling operations in accordance with applicable safety rules and

regulations, and Contractor's safety plan. Use methods which include due
regard for safety of workmen, adjacent structures, utilities, and public.
2. Maintain tunnel excavation within easements and rights-of-way indicated on

Drawings, to lines and grades shown on Drawings. Excavation shall be of
sufficient size to allow installation of sewer pipe to lines and grades indicated
on Drawings.
3. Open-face excavations:
a. Keep face breasted or otherwise supported and prevent falls, excessive

raveling, or erosion. Maintain standby face supports for immediate use
when needed.
b. During shut-down periods, support face of excavation by positive

means; do not rely solely on hydraulic pressure for support.
4. Closed-face excavation:
a. Control volume of spoil removed. Determine that advance rate and

excavation rate are compatible to avoid over excavation or loss of
ground.
b. When cutting head is withdrawn, keep excavated face supported and

stabilized.
c. When face of machine is open for maintenance, monitor conditions

that might threaten stability of heading. Take appropriate action to
prevent or limit influx of soils and water which would threaten
stability of heading.
5. Whenever condition is identified which could endanger tunnel excavation or

adjacent structures, operate continually for 24 hours day, including weekends
and holidays, without intermission until condition no longer exists.
02425-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Determination of primary liner size and section shall be sole responsibility of

Contractor, to match construction methods and equipment described in tunneling
methodology submittal. Provide tunnels of sufficient size to permit efficient
excavation operations, sufficient working space for placing primary tunnel liner, and
to allow for installation of sewer pipe.
C. Primary Liner Installation:
1. Provide method to ensure full bearing of soil against primary liner without
significant settlement or movement of surrounding soil. To fill void behind
primary liner, either expandable liner (e.g., ring beams and timber lagging) or
non-expandable liner (e.g., bolted steel liner plates) may be used provided
grout is placed behind non-expandable liner. Box tunnel where ground is
excavated to true shape may be ungrouted.
2. When using TBM or tunnel shield, advance equipment only far enough to
permit construction of one primary liner set, entirely within equipment shield.
3. Install filter fabric around exterior of primary liner when using steel ribs and
lagging. Install backer rods at ribs as required to control migration of fines.
Close windows in lagging.
4. After grouting, ensure deflection of liner is no more than allowable, nor liner
is distorted by excessive pressure.
D. Seal blind headings with temporary bulkhead.
E. Grouting: Requirements pertaining to grout mix design and tunnel grouting are
provided in Section 02431 - Tunnel Grout.
3.06 CONTROL OF TUNNEL LINE AND GRADE
A. Construction Control.
1. Project Manager will establish baselines and benchmarks indicated on

Drawings. Check baselines and benchmarks at beginning of Work and report
errors or discrepancies to Project Manager.
2. Use baselines and benchmarks established by Project Manager to establish

and maintain construction control points, reference lines, and grades for
locating tunnel.
3. Establish control points sufficiently far from face so as not to be affected by

tunneling operations.
02425-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Benchmark Movement. Ensure that when settlement of ground surface occurs during
construction which affects accuracy of temporary benchmarks, detect and report such
movement and reestablish temporary bench marks. Locations of permanent City of
Houston monumentation benchmarks are indicated on Drawings. Advise Project
Manager of settlement affecting permanent monumentation benchmarks. Upon
completion, submit field books pertaining to monitoring of permanent
monumentation benchmarks to Project Manager.
C. Line and Grade.
1. Maintain means sufficient to check alignment and grade continuously.
2. Check survey control for tunneling against aboveground undisturbed reference

at least once each week and once for each 250 feet of tunnel constructed.
3. When excavation is off line or grade, make alignment corrections to avoid

reverse grades in gravity sewers.
4. Construct primary liner to such tolerances that permit installation of sewer

pipe to be completed to tolerances given in Section 02426 - Sewer Line in
Tunnels.
D. Earth Movement. Assume responsibility for damages due to settlement from

construction- induced activities or occurrences.
1. Survey crown, invert, and springline on each side of primary liner at 50-foot
intervals or minimum of once per shift or more frequently when line and
grade tolerances have been exceeded, to ensure alignment is within tolerances
specified. Conduct survey immediately behind tunnel excavation to allow
immediate correction of misalignment.
3.07 MONITORING
A. Instrumentation Monitoring. Instrumentation requirements are shown on Drawings.

Ensure instrumentation specified is accessible to Project Manager. Submit readings
promptly to Project Manager.

of ground surface and adjacent structures. Establish vertical control points at
distance from construction areas that avoids disturbance due to ground
settlement.
2. Installation of instrumentation shall not preclude Project Manager, through

independent contractor or consultant, from installing instrumentation in, on,
near, or adjacent to construction work. Provide access to work for such
independent installations.
3. Install instruments in accordance with Drawings and manufacturer's

recommendations.
02425-10
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Surface Settlement Monitoring
1. Establish monitoring points on all critical structures.

baselines and elevations. Record elevations to accuracy of 0.01 feet for each
monitoring point location. Monitoring points should be established at
locations and by methods that protect them from damage by construction
operations, tampering, or other external influences.
3. Ground surface elevations must be recorded on centerline ahead of tunneling

operations at minimum of 100-foot intervals or at least three locations per
tunnel drive. For primary lined tunnels greater than 60 inches cut diameter
also record similar data at approximately 20 feet each side of centerline.
Clearly mark settlement monitoring points by studs or paint for ease of
locating.

track.
5. Utilities and Pipelines. Monitor ground settlement directly above and 10 feet
before and after utility or pipeline intersection.
C. Reading Frequency and Reporting. Submit to Project Manager, records of readings

1. Instrumentation monitoring results to be read at frequency specified, unless

otherwise specified. Start monitoring before zone of active excavation is
passed and until no further detectable movement occurs.
2. Record surface settlement monitoring readings:
a. Prior to zone of active excavation reaching that point,
b. When tunnel face reaches monitoring point (in plan), and
c. When zone of active excavation has passed and no further movement

is detected.
3. Submit monitoring readings promptly to Project Manager.
4. Immediately report to Project Manager movement, cracking, or settlement

which is detected.
5. Following substantial completion, but prior to final completion, perform final

survey of monitoring points.
02425-11
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Remove spoil from job site and dispose in accordance with Section 01576 - Waste
Material Disposal.
END OF SECTION
02425-12
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION SEWER LINE IN TUNNELS
SECTION 02426
SEWER LINE IN TUNNELS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Handling, transporting, and installing sanitary and storm sewer lines in primary lined
tunnels.
B. Section 02427 – Plastic Liner for Large-Diameter Concrete Sewers and Structures
C. Section 02431 – Tunnel Grout
D. Section 02501 – Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings
E. Section 02504 – Fiberglass Reinforced Pipe
F. Section 02505 – High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Solid and Profile Wall Pipe
H. Section 02508 – Extra Strength Clay Pipe
I. Section 02533 – Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers
J. Section 02611 – Reinforced Concrete Pipe
A. Unit Prices.
1. Length of sewer installed in primary lined tunnels will be measured by linear

foot along center line of completed sewer, center line to center line of
manholes, as designated on Drawings, and to end of stubs or termination of
pipe; and to inside face of lift stations and treatment plant works. Installation
of sewer within limits of structure other than manholes will not be considered
for measurement and payment at unit price bid.
2. Payment for installation of sewer in primary lined tunnels is on a linear foot

basis.
B. Stipulated Price (Lump Sum): If Contract is Stipulated Price Contract, payment for
work in this Section is included in Total Stipulated Price.
02426-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Provide brief description of method of transporting carrier pipe into tunnel; method of
hoisting and positioning pipe; method of jointing and aligning pipe; and blocking
plan.
C. Submit buoyant force calculations, bulkhead design, and blocking details. Include in
calculations analysis of stresses and deformation induced on carrier pipe. Submittal
must be signed and sealed by Professional Engineer registered in State of Texas.
D. Submit as-built survey as described in Document 02533 - Acceptance Testing for

Sanitary Sewers to Project Manager prior to substantial completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE MATERIAL AND FITTINGS
A. Sewer pipe may consist of fiberglass pipe (FRP), vitrified clay pipe (VCP), polyvinyl
chloride (PVC) pipe, high density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe, plastic-lined reinforced
concrete pipe (RCP), plastic-lined or epoxy lined ductile iron pipe (DIP) or
combinations of these. Storm sewers do not require lining.
B. Assume responsibility for selecting appropriate pipes and pipe joints to safely carry
loads imposed during construction.
2.02 FIBERGLASS PIPE
A. Provide fiberglass pipe, joints, and fittings in accordance with Section 02504 -
Fiberglass Reinforced Pipe.
2.03 VITRIFIED CLAY PIPE
A. Provide vitrified clay pipe, joints and fittings in accordance with Section 02508 -
Extra Strength Clay Pipe.
2.04 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE
A. Provide Polyvinyl chloride pipe, joints and fittings in accordance with Section 02506
- Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe.
2.05 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPE
A. Provide High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Solid and Profile Wall pipe, joints and
fittings in accordance with Section 02505 - High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Solid
and Profile Wall Pipe.
2.06 DUCTILE IRON PIPE
02426-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. As approved for pipe jacking applications, ductile iron pipe lined with polyethylene,
polyurethane, or ceramic epoxy, and fittings to be in accordance with Section 02501 -
Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings.
2.07 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE
A. Provide reinforced concrete pipe, joints, and fittings in accordance with Section
02611 - Reinforced Concrete Pipe.
B. Provide plastic-liner for sanitary sewers in accordance with Section 02427 - Plastic
Liner for Large-Diameter Concrete Sewers and Structures.
2.08 ANNULAR GROUT
A. Provide for grouting of annular space between pipe and tunnel liner as specified in
Section 02431 - Tunnel Grout.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Prior to installing sewer pipe, verify that primary liner has been constructed so that
sewer pipe may be placed in conformance with specified tolerances.
B. Tolerances from lines and grades shown on Drawings for sewer pipe installed in
primary liner are plus or minus 6 inches in horizontal alignment and plus or minus 1-
1/2 inches in elevation. Should misalignment of primary liner preclude installation of
sewer pipe to tolerances specified, notify Project Manager.
3.02 PIPE HANDLING
A. Handle and transport pipe into tunnel in manner that prevents damage to pipe, joints,
gaskets, and plastic liner. Do not install pipe damaged during placement operations.
Propose repair procedures for review and approval of Project Manager.
3.03 TUNNEL CLEANUP
A. Prior to pipe placement in tunnel, remove temporary tunnel utilities, such as electrical
and ventilation. Remove loose material, dirt, standing water, and debris prior to pipe
placement.
B. Temporary steel construction tracks or steel pipe skids may be left in place when they
do not interfere with alignment of sewer pipe or interfere with final placement of
annular grout.
3.04 INVERT PIPE SUPPORT
02426-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Provide support adequate to establish final pipe grade. Support may include screeded
concrete, steel beam, or other method as designated by Contractor's Engineer. Secure
pipe support to pipe or primary liner. When concrete is used for pipe support, cure it
minimum of 12 hours prior to setting pipe.
3.05 JOINING PIPE IN TUNNELS
A. Join pipe segments to properly compress gaskets and allow for correct final
positioning of pipe for line and grade. Closely align pipes by bringing them loosely
together by means of hydraulic jacks, locomotives, pipemobiles, or winches. Once
pipes have been loosely joined, pull them home by means of hydraulic tugger or other
similar method suitably protecting pipe and joints against damage. Impact jointing
such as ramming with locomotives or other mechanical equipment is not permitted.
3.06 BLOCKING PIPE IN TUNNEL AND BULKHEADS
A. Install pipe blocking system. Use pipe blocking to position sewer pipe in tunnel to
allow minimum of 4 inches of grout to be placed between sewer pipe and tunnel
primary liner or casing.
B. Secure blocking rigidly in place without dependence on wedges to prevent dislodging

during pipe placement and grouting operations.
C. Construct bulkheads to withstand imposed grout pressure without leakage. Provide

adequate venting for bulkheads.
3.07 ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A. Perform as-built survey on installed sewer pipe. Take invert elevations at each pipe
joint. Take two diameter readings, at right angles, randomly at average of 20 feet
spacing or less in non-rigid pipe.
B. Test for leakage by low pressure air methods in accordance with Section 02533 -
Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers.
END OF SECTION
02426-4
CITY OF HOUSTON PLASTIC LINER FOR LARGE-DIAMETER
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION CONCRETE SEWERS AND STRUCTURES
SECTION 02427
PLASTIC LINER FOR LARGE-DIAMETER CONCRETE SEWERS AND STRUCTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Installation of plastic liners for concrete interceptor sewers and structures. Only plastic liners
manufactured with integral locking ribs spaced at approximately 2-1/2 inches on center over
entire liner is acceptable. Liners relying on mechanically fastened batten strips as primary
means of anchorage are unacceptable.
A. Unit Prices.
1. No separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Cost is
incidental to work of large diameter sewers, precast concrete manholes, or cast- in-
place, wastewater-containing structures.
B. Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). If Contract is Stipulated Price Contract, payment for work in
this Section is included in total Stipulated Price.
A. ASTM D 412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic
Elastomers-Tension.
B. ASTM D 2440 - Standard Test Methods for Oxidation Stability of Mineral Insulating Oil.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Prior to submittal of shop drawings, manufacturer shall approve proposed panel layout and
proposed details. Contractor shall then submit shop drawings showing proposed panel layout
to cover area to be lined. Show on shop drawings proposed details for installation of liner at
seams, terminations, corners, openings, pipe penetrations, etc., and type of factory and field
welds and attachments.
02427-1
C. Provide sufficient details to permit placement of liner without use of Drawings. Reproduction
of Drawings for use as shop drawings will not be allowed. Do not begin fabrication of liner
until after shop drawings and submitted materials have been reviewed and accepted by
Project Manager.
1.06 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS
A. Applicators. Application of plastic liner to forms and other surfaces, liner finishing, repair,
and testing is considered highly specialized work and shall be performed only by firms and
individuals recommended and approved by lining manufacturer. Personnel performing such
work are to be trained in methods of installation and demonstrate their ability to Project
Manager.
B. Welders.
1. Each welder is to pass qualification welding test before doing welding.

Requalification may be required at time deemed necessary by Project Manager.
Provide at least 24 hours notice to Project Manager to schedule qualification welding
test.
2. Make test welds in presence of Project Manager. Test welds are to consist of
following:
a. Begin with two pieces of liner, at least 15 inches long and 9 inches wide. Hold
pieces in vertical position, lapped 1-1/2 inches.
b. Position weld strip over edge of lap and weld to both pieces of liner. Extend
each end of weld strip at least 2 inches beyond liner to provide tabs.
3. The weld specimen will be tested as follows:
a. Subject each weld strip tab, tested separately, to 10-pound pull normal to face
of liner with liner secured firmly in place. Weld is acceptable when there is no
separation between weld strip and liner.
b. Cut three test specimens from welded sample and tested in tension across
welds. Tensile strength measured across welded joints is to be at least 2000
psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D 412. When none of these
specimens fails when tested as indicated above, weld will be considered
satisfactory.
c. If one specimen fails to pass tension test, retest will be permitted. Retest
consists of testing three additional specimens cut from original welded
sample. When three retest specimens pass test, weld will be considered
satisfactory.
4. A disqualified welder may submit new weld sample when welder has had sufficient
off- the-job training or experience to warrant re-examination.
02427-2
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Plastic liner shall be as manufactured by Ameron Protective Linings Division; Poly-Tee, Inc.;
or approved equal.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturing.
1. Manufacture plastic liner sheet, joint, corner and weld strips from high molecular
weight thermoplastic polymer compounded to make permanently flexible material
suitable for use as protective liner in concrete pipe or other concrete structures.
Polyvinyl chloride resin is to constitute not less than 99 percent by weight of resin
used in formulation. Copolymer resins will not be permitted.
2. During manufacture or prior to final acceptance of Work, Project Manager may

sample specimens taken from sheets, strips, or welded joints for testing.
3. Changes in formulation will be permitted only after prior notice is given to Project
Manager and manufacturer demonstrates that new plastic liner will meet or exceed
requirements for chemical resistance and physical properties.
B. Properties.
1. Plastic liner sheets including locking extensions, joints, corners, and welding strips
are to be free of cracks, cleavages or other defects adversely affecting protective
characteristics of material.
2. Except at shop welds, plastic liner sheets, joint, corner, and weld strips are to have the
following properties when tested at 77 degrees F plus or minus 5 degrees F.
02427-3
CHEMICAL RESISTANCE TEST

ASTM TEST
PROPERTY AFTER CHEMICAL EXPOSURE
METHOD INITIAL
(Note 1)
Tensile strength, min. D 412, Die B 2200 psi 2100 psi

Elongation at break, 200
D 412, Die B 200 percent
min. percent
D 2240, Within 1
50-60 +5 (Note 2)
Shore durometer, Type sec.
D
D 2240, 10 sec. 35-50 +5 (Note 2)
Weight change (Note 3) ----- +1.5 % (Note 2)
Notes:
1. For 112 days in chemical solutions
2. With respect to initial test results
3. Specimen to be 1-inch x 3-inch sample sheet thickness, taken from sheet or strip prior to final
acceptance of work.
2.03 MATERIAL TESTS
A. Material Properties. Test samples taken from sheets, joints or weld strips to determine
material properties. Determine PVC tensile strength and elongation in accordance with
ASTM D 412 using Die B. Determine indentation hardness in accordance with ASTM D
2240 using Type D durometer, except that single thickness of material will be used.
Determination of change of weight and indentation hardness is to be made of 1-inch by 3-
inch specimens. Thickness of specimens shall be thickness of sheet or strip.
B. Measurement of Initial Physical Properties. Determine initial values for tensile strength,
weight, elongation and indentation hardness prior to chemical resistance tests.
C. Chemical Resistance Tests.
1. Determine physical properties of specimens after exposure to chemical solutions.

Condition test specimens to constant weight at 110 degrees F before and after
submersion in the following solutions for period of 112 days at 77 degrees F plus or
minus 5 degrees F.
02427-4
Chemical Solution Concentration

Sulfuric acid 20%*
Sodium hydroxide 5%
Ammonium hydroxide 5%*
Nitric acid 1%*
Ferric chloride 1%
Soap 0.1%
Detergent (linear alkyl
0.1%
benzyl sulfonate or LAS)
BOD not less than 700
Bacteriological
ppm
* Volumetric percentages of concentrated C.P. grade reagents.
2. At 28-day intervals, remove specimens from each chemical solution and test. When
specimen fails to meet 112-day property requirements specified in paragraph 2.02B
before completion of 112-day exposure, material will be rejected.
D. Pull Test for Locking Extensions. Liner locking extensions embedded in concrete are to
withstand test pull of at least 100 pounds per linear inch, applied perpendicularly to concrete
surface for period of 1 minute, without rupture of locking extensions or withdrawal from
embedment. Perform this test at temperature between 70 degrees F and 80 degrees F,
inclusive.
E. Shop-Welded Joints. Shop-welded joints used to fuse individual sections of liner together,
are to meet minimum requirements of liner for thickness, corrosion resistance and
impermeability. Welds shall show no cracks or separations and be tested for tensile strength.
Tensile strength, measured across welded joint in accordance with ASTM D 412 using Die
B, shall be at least 2000 psi. Test temperature is to be 77 degrees F plus or minus 5 degrees F
and use measured minimum width and thickness of reduced test specimen section.
F. Spark Test. Shop and field test liners for holidays or flaws using an approved spark tester set
to provide minimum of 20,000 volts (Tinker and Rasor Model AP-W with power pack, or
approved equal). Satisfactorily repair sheets having holes in shop prior to shipment from
manufacturer's plant. Repairs shall be made by welders qualified in accordance with these
specifications.
2.04 MATERIAL DETAILS AND DIMENSIONS
A. Approval of Details. Liner sheet, strip, and other accessory pieces are to conform to
requirements of these Specifications.
B. Thickness of Material. Minimum thickness of PVC sheet and strip shall be as follows:
02427-5
Material Thickness in Inches

Sheet, integral locking extensions 0.065
Sheet, plain 0.094
Joint strip 0.094
Weld strip 0.125
C. Material Sizes. Use pipe-size sheets for sheets of PVC liner to provide coverage required by
Drawings. Structural sheets are to be standard 48-inches by 96-inches, with special size noted
on shop drawings. Lengths specified shall include tolerance at ratio of plus or minus 1/4-inch
for each 100 inches, or 0.25 percent. Joint strips shall be 4 inches plus or minus 0.25 inch in
width and have each edge beveled prior to application. Weld strips shall be 1 inch plus or
minus 0.125 inch in width. Weld strips are to have edges beveled at time of manufacture.
D. Locking Extensions.
1. No polygrip-type holding or locking extension will be permitted.
2. PVC liner to be embedded in concrete is to have integral locking extensions. Liner

may not be bonded to concrete surfaces with adhesives except as specifically
acceptable to Project Manager.
3. PVC locking extensions are to be same material as liner, be integrally molded or

extruded with sheets, and have an approved cross section with minimum height of
0.375 inch and minimum web thickness of 0.085 inch. They are to be approximately
2.5 inches apart and be such that when extensions are embedded in concrete, liner
will be held permanently in place.
4. PVC locking extensions are to be parallel and continuous except where interrupted
for joint flaps, weep channels, strap channels and for other purposes shown on
Drawings or permitted by Project Manager.
5. The liner sheet edge which will be lower terminal edge in structure is not to extend
beyond base of final locking extension more than 0.375 inch.
E. Provisions for Strap Channels. Unless alternate methods are acceptable to Project Manager,
liner required to be secured to inner form with straps are to have strap channels at not more
than 20 inches on center perpendicular to locking extensions. Strap channels are to be
maximum of 1-inch wide and formed by removing locking extensions so that maximum of
3/16-inch remains. Channels are not to be provided in final two locking extensions adjacent
to terminal edge of liner coverage.
F. Flaps. When transverse flaps are specified or required, fabricate by removing locking
extensions so that no more than 1/32 inch of base of locking extensions remains on sheet.
02427-6
G. Adhesive Products. Adhesive products and application procedures used in installation of

liner are to be according to manufacturer's recommendations. Adhesive products intended for
use inside cast-in-place structures are to be non-flammable.
H. Cleaners. Cleaners used in installation of liner shall be reviewed by Project Manager prior to
use. Cleaners are to be nonflammable and water soluble or water dispersible and not be
detrimental to plastic liner.
I. Caulking Products. Caulking products and application procedures used in installation of liner
and appurtenances are to be as recommended by manufacturer.
J. Mechanical Anchors. When approved for use with plain sheet liner, provide anchors and
washers of Type 316 stainless steel, and as recommended by liner manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 NOTIFICATION
A. Notify Project Manager at least 24 hours before reinforcing steel placement so that lining
may be inspected and errors corrected without delaying Work.
3.02 PLACING LINER
A. Location. Place liner throughout entire length of interceptor sewer along top 300 degrees of
pipe circumference, and inside structures as indicated on Drawings. Liner is to be applied and
secured to forms and inspected by Project Manager prior to placement of reinforcing steel.
B. Coverage.
1. In cast-in-place structures, no offset of lower terminal edge is permitted. Unless

otherwise shown on Drawings, lower terminal edge is to be one foot below low water
level (“all pumps off” level for lift stations), or 6 inches below top of grout or
concrete fillet, whichever is higher.
2. At station where there is difference in pipe's circumferential liner coverage, as shown

on Drawings, and longitudinal terminal edges of liner downstream from that station
are lower than those upstream, uniformly slope terminal edges of liner installed in
section of pipe or structure immediately upstream from station for entire length of
section of pipe or structure from limits of smaller coverage to those of greater
coverage. Wherever longitudinal terminal edges of liner downstream from station are
higher than those upstream, accomplish slope uniformly throughout length of section
of pipe or structure immediately downstream from station. Provide an approved
locking extension along sloping lower terminal edges of liner plate.
C. Positioning Liner.
1. Position PVC liner installed in pipe so that locking extensions are parallel to
longitudinal axis of pipe.
02427-7
2. Position PVC liner installed in cast-in-place structures so that locking extensions are
parallel to direction of concrete placement, which is normally vertically for vertical
walls.
3. Closely fit liner to inner forms. Cut sheets to fit curved and warped surfaces using
minimum number of separate pieces.
4. The Project Manager may require use of patterns or marking of sheet layouts directly
on forms where complicated warped surfaces are involved.
5. At transverse joints between sheets of liner used in cast-in-place structures and pipe
joints, space between ends of locking extensions, measured longitudinally, shall not
exceed 4 inches. Where sheets are cut and joined for purpose of fitting irregular
surfaces, this space shall not exceed 2 inches.
D. Securing Liner in Place.
1. Liner shall be held snugly in place against inner forms. For pipes and similar circular
sections, use light steel banding straps or other approved means. Prefabricated pipe-
size tubular sheets which do not require strap channels may also be used.
2. When used, place banding straps in strap channels, as specified under provision for
strap channels, at spacing not to exceed 20 inches.
3. Any method of banding, other than in strap channels, shall be reviewed by Project
Manager prior to use.
4. On vertical surfaces where form ties or form stabilizing rods pass through liner, make
provisions to maintain liner in close contact with forms during concrete placement.
These provisions shall be reviewed by Project Manager.
5. Prevent concrete from flowing around edges of sheets at joints by sealing joint or
seam with waterproof tape recommended by manufacturer.
6. Forms in contact with plastic liner need not be oiled.
E. Weep Channels.
1. At each pipe joint and at transverse joints in cast-in-place structures, gap not less than
2 inches nor greater than 4 inches shall be left in locking extensions to provide
transverse weep channel. When locking extensions are removed to provide weep
channel at joints, base of extension left on sheet shall not exceed 3/16 inch.
2. Provide intermediate weep channels as required to maintain maximum spacing of 8

feet. Intermediate weep channels shall not be less than 2.0 inches nor greater than 4.0
inches in width. When locking extensions are removed to provide intermediate weep
channels, base of extension left on sheet shall not exceed 3/16 inch.
02427-8
3. Any area behind liner, which is not properly served by regular weep channels, shall
have additional weep channels 2 inches wide provided by cutting away locking
extensions.
4. Provide transverse weep channel approximately 12 inches away from each liner
return where surfaces lined with plastic liner join surfaces which are not so lined.
5. As part of work of installing liner, clear outlets of weep channels of obstructions

which would interfere with their proper functions.
6. Design weep channels for external hydrostatic pressures of water column equal in
height to greater of 50 feet (22 psi) or 1.1 times depth of burial.
F. Liner Returns.
1. Install liner return where shown on approved shop drawings and wherever surfaces
lined with plastic liner joins surfaces which are not so lined.
2. Unless otherwise indicated by Drawings or approved shop drawings showing liner

installation methods, make returns as follows:
a. Return liner at least 3 inches at surfaces of contact between concrete structure

and items not concrete (including access frames, gate guides and pipe
penetrations).
b. Follow the same procedure at joints where type of protective lining is

changed, or new work is built to join existing unlined concrete.
3. Provide locking extensions on returns to lock returns to concrete of plastic-lined, cast-

in- place structures.
4. Seal each liner return to adjacent construction with which it is in contact by means of
an adhesive system recommended by manufacturer and acceptable to Project
Manager. When joint space is too wide or joint surfaces too rough to permit use of
compound, fill joint space with 2 inches of densely caulked cement mortar, lead wool,
or other caulking material and finished with minimum of 1 inch depth of an approved
corrosion resistant sealant material.
3.03 CONCRETING OPERATIONS
A. Concrete Placement.
1. Carefully vibrate concrete placed against liner shall be so as to avoid damage to liner
and to produce dense concrete securely anchoring locking extensions into concrete.
Use external vibrators in addition to internal vibrators, particularly along lower
terminal edge of liner.
02427-9
2. Stiffeners, when used along locking extensions of liner installed in forms for pipe,
shall be withdrawn completely during placement of concrete in forms. Revibrate
concrete to consolidate concrete in void spaces caused by withdrawal of stiffeners.
B. Removing Forms.
1. In removing forms, take care to protect liner from damage. Do not use sharp
instruments to pry forms from lined surfaces. When forms are removed, pull nails that
remain in liner plate without tearing liner and clearly mark resulting holes. Mark form
tie holes before ties are broken off. Mark areas of abrasion of liner.
2. Following completion of form removal, clean liner in pipe and structures for
inspection.
3. Remove banding straps used in securing liner to forms for pipe and cast-in-place
structures within limits of unlined invert.
3.04 FIELD JOINTING OF LINER
A. Installation Requirements.
1. No field joint shall be made in liner until lined pipe or structure has been backfilled
and 7 days have elapsed after flooding or jetting has been completed. Where ground
water is encountered, joint shall not be made until pumping of ground water has been
discontinued for at least 7 days and no visible leakage is evident at joint. Liner at
joints shall be free of mortar and other foreign material and be clean and dry before
joints are made.
2. Hot joint compound shall not be brought in contact with liner.
3. No coating shall be applied over joint, corner or welding strip, except where nonskid
coating is applied to liner surfaces.
B. Field Joints in Pipe Installation.
1. Field joints in lining at pipe joints shall be one of the following types:
a. Type P-1. Make joint with separate 4-inch joint strip and two welding strips.
Center 4-inch joint strip over joint, heat-sealed to lining, then welded along
each edge to adjacent liner sheets with 1-inch weld strip. 4-inch joint strip
shall lap over each sheet minimum of 1/2 inch.
b. Type P-2
02427-10
(1) Make joint with joint flap with locking extensions removed as
described in paragraph 2.04 above, and extending approximately 4
inches beyond pipe end. Joint flap shall overlap lining in adjacent pipe
section minimum of 1/2 inch and be heat-sealed in place prior to
welding. Complete field joint by welding flap to lining of adjacent
pipe using 1-inch weld strip.
(2) Take care to protect flap from damage. Avoid excessive tension and
distortion in bending back flap to expose pipe joint during laying and
joint mortaring. At temperatures below 50 degrees F heating of liner
may be required to avoid damage.
2. Do not make field joints in liner at pipe joints until mortar in pipe joint, when used,
has been allowed to cure for at least 48 hours.
3. Joints between lined pipe and lined structures are to be either Type C-1 joint or Type
C-2 joint as described below.
C. Field Joints in Concrete Structures. Field joints in liner on concrete structures are to be one of
following types:
1. Type C-1. Make joint with separate 4-inch joint strip and two welding strips. Center
4- inch joint strip over joint, heat-sealed to liner, then welded along each edge to
adjacent sheets with 1-inch wide weld strip. Width of space between adjacent sheets
is not to exceed 2 inches. 4-inch joint strip is to lap over each sheet minimum of 1/2
inch. It may be used at transverse or longitudinal joint.
2. Type C-2. Make joint by lapping sheets not less than 1/2 inch. One 1-inch weld strip
is required. Upstream sheet is to overlap one downstream. Heat-seal lap into place
prior to welding on 1-inch weld strip.
3. Type C-3. Make joint by applying 2-inch wide waterproof tape or 1-inch wide
welding strip on back of maximum 1/4-inch gap butt joint or by some other method
approved by Project Manager to prevent wet concrete from getting under sheet. After
forms have been stripped, apply 1-inch weld strip over face to sheet.
D. Installation of Welding Strips.
1. All welding of joints is to be in strict conformance with specifications and

instructions of lining manufacturer.
2. Welding is to fuse both sheets and weld strip together to provide continuous joint
equal in corrosion resistance and impermeability to liner plate.
3. Hot-air welding tools shall provide effluent air to sheets to be joined at temperature
between 500 degrees F and 600 degrees F. Hold welding tools approximately 1/2 inch
from and moved back and forth over junction of two materials to be joined. Move
welding tool slowly enough as weld progresses to cause small bead of molten
material to be visible along both edges and in front of weld strip.
02427-11
4. Maintain adequate ventilation in confined spaces during welding operations.
5. After repairs have been made, defective welds will be re-inspected and re-tested.
E. Joint Reinforcement. Apply 12-inch long welding strip as reinforcement across each
transverse joint and weep channel which extends to lower terminal edge of liner. Center
reinforcement strips over joint being reinforced and located as close to lower edge of liner as
practicable. Weld in place after transverse welding strips have been installed.
F. Application of Liner to Concrete Surfaces with Adhesives. Application of liner plate to

concrete surfaces by means of adhesive is allowed only where shown on Drawings for
existing structures, or where specifically acceptable to Project Manager and called out on
approved shop drawings, and is to be accomplished by following steps:
1. Etch concrete surface by abrasive blasting to develop slightly granular surface.
2. After abrasive blasting, thoroughly clean concrete surface of dust.
3. Apply primer, adhesive and liner in strict accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations, as approved by Project Manager.
4. Place mechanical anchors at 12-inch centers each way after adherence of liner to
concrete surface has been achieved. Place anchors after adhesive system has cured for
minimum of 24 hours. Seal penetration of liner by anchor in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
G. Nonskid Surfaces. Surfaces of liner, shown on Drawings to be nonskid, treated as follows

prior to installation:
1. Liner is to be cleaned, dried, and spread with an adhesive coating recommended by

manufacturer of liner plate.
2. Liberally sprinkle surface with clean, dry, well graded sand, which will pass No. 30
sieve but be retained on No. 70 sieve.
3. After sanded surface has thoroughly dried, brush away excess sand and spray seal
coat of adhesive coating over sand in sufficient quantity to coat and bond sand to liner
plate.
4. Allow coated sand surface to dry thoroughly before handling.
H. Protection and Repair of Liner.
1. Take necessary measures and precautions to prevent damage to liner from equipment
and materials used in or taken through Work. Repair damage to installed liner plate in
accordance with requirements for repair of liner.
02427-12
2. Patch nail and tie holes and cut, torn and seriously abraded areas in liner plate.
Patches made entirely with welding strip are to be fused to liner over entire patch.
Use of this method is limited to patches which can be made with single welding strip.
Use of parallel, overlapping or adjoining welding strips will not be permitted. Larger
patches may consist of smooth liner over damaged area, with edges covered with
welding strips fused to patch and to liner adjoining damaged area. Limit size of single
patch of latter type only as to its width, which shall not exceed 4 inches.
3. Whenever liner is not properly anchored to concrete, or whenever patches larger than
those permitted above are necessary, accomplish repair of liner and restoration of
anchorage by injecting epoxy grout behind liner plate by method approved by Project
Manager. Use of adhesives will not be allowed to repair improperly anchored liner
plate.
I. Field Tests.
1. Upon completion of installation, clean surface of liner to permit visual inspection and
spark testing by Project Manager, using spark-type detector complying with
requirements for Spark Test. Properly repair and retest areas of liner failing to meet
field test.
2. Contractor is to assist in inspection and spark testing by providing adequate

ventilation, ladders for access, barricades or other traffic control devices, and is
responsible for opening and closing entrances and exits.
3. Spark testing of liner by Contractor is to be done with detector complying with these
Specifications.
END OF SECTION
02427-13
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION TUNNEL GROUT
SECTION 02431
TUNNEL GROUT
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Mix design requirements, testing, furnishing and production of grout for:
1. Pressure grouting of bolted liner plates for shafts.
2. Pressure grouting of primary tunnel liner.
3. Pressure grouting of jacked-pipe.
4. Annular grouting of cased or uncased sewer pipe.
5. Grouting of annular space between carrier pipe and primary tunnel liner.
6. Grouting voids in ground resulting from caving, loss of ground, or settlement.
7. Grouting of manholes constructed in shafts.
B. Compaction grouting is not part of this specification.
C. Section 02517 – Water Line in Tunnels
D. Section 03315 – Concrete for Utility Construction
A. Unit Prices.
Include cost of such work in contract unit prices for work of which it is
component part.
2. Refer to Section 01270 - Measurement and Payment for Unit Price

procedures.
02431-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Pressure Grouting. Filling void behind liner or pipe with grout under pressure
sufficient to ensure void is properly filled but without overstressing temporary or
permanent ground support, or causing ground heave to occur.
B. Back Grouting. Secondary pressure grouting to ensure that voids have been filled
between primary tunnel or shaft liners and surrounding ground.
C. Annular Grouting. Filling annular space between carrier pipe and primary tunnel
liner, casing, or ground, by pumping.
D. Ground Stabilization Grouting. Filling of voids, fissures, or under-slab settlement due

to caving or loss of ground by injecting grout under gravity or pressure to fill void.
E. Carrier Pipe. Sanitary or storm sewer or water line installed inside primary tunnel
support.
A. ASTM C 138 - Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air
Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete.
B. ASTM C 144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
C. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
D. ASTM C 494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixture for Concrete.
E. ASTM C 618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
F. ASTM C 869 - Standard Specification for Foaming Agents Used in Making

Preformed Foam for Cellular Concrete.
G. ASTM C 937 - Standard Specification for Grout Fluidifier for Pre-placed Aggregate
Concrete.
H. ASTM C 942 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Grouts for
Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete in the Laboratory.
I. ASTM C 1017 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixture for Use in

Producing Flowing Concrete.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
02431-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Submit description of materials, grout mix, equipment and operational procedures to

accomplish each grouting operation. Description may include sketches as appropriate,
indicating type and location of mixing equipment, pumps, injection points, venting
method, flow lines, pressure measurement, volume measurement, grouting sequence,
schedule, and stage volumes. Tests and certifications shall have been performed
within last 12 months prior to date of submittal.
C. Submit grout mix design report, including:
1. Grout type and designation
2. Grout mix constituents and proportions, including materials by weight and

volume
3. Grout densities and viscosities, including wet density at point of placement
4. Initial set time of grout
5. Bleeding, shrinkage/expansion
6. Compressive strength
7. Detailed description of grout pressure limiting equipment
8. For annular space grouting, buoyant force calculations and bulkhead designs
(See Section 02517 - Water Line in Tunnel for further requirements)
D. For cellular grout, also submit the following:
1. Foam concentrate supplier's certification of dilution ratio for foam

concentrate.
2. A description of proposed cellular grout production procedures.
E. Maintain and submit logs of grouting operations indicating pressure, density, and
volume for each grout placement.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Grouting materials: Conform to Section 03315 - Concrete for Utility Construction,

except as modified in the following paragraphs.
B. Grout Type Applications.
1. Grout for pressure grouting, backfill grouting and annular grouting: Sand-
cement mortar mix or cellular grout with minimum 1,500 psi compressive
strength and pH in alkaline region.
02431-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Grout for annular grouting of sanitary sewer: Low density (cellular) grout,
unless otherwise approved by Project Manager.
3. Grout for filling space around manholes in shafts: Sand-cement mortar mix.
4. Ground stabilization: Sand-cement mortar mix.
C. Do not include toxic or poisonous substances in grout mix or otherwise inject such
substances underground.
2.02 GROUT
A. Employ and pay for commercial testing laboratory, acceptable to Project Manager, to
prepare and test grout mix design. Develop one or more mixes based on following
criteria as applicable:
1. Size of annular void between sewer pipe and liner, or size of void between
primary liner and surrounding soil
2. Absence or presence of groundwater
3. Adequate retardation
4. Non-shrink characteristics
5. Pumping distances
B. Prepare mixes that satisfy required application. Provide materials conforming to the
following standards:
1. Cement: ASTM C 150
2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618
3. Water: Potable
4. Foam: ASTM C 869
5. Slurry: ASTM C 138
6. Cellular Grout: ASTM C 138
7. Sand for sand-cement mortar mix: ASTM C 144
C. Provide grout meeting the following minimum requirements:
1. Minimum 28-day unconfined compressive strength: 1500 psi for water lines,
1000 psi for other carrier pipes for mortar grout and 300 psi for cellular grout.
2. Determine strength by ASTM C 942.
02431-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
3. Maximum allowable density: Less than 130 pcf.
D. Fluidifier. Provide fluidifier, meeting ASTM C 937 that holds solid constituents of
grout in colloidal suspension and is compatible with cement and water used in
grouting operations.
E. Admixtures.
1. Use admixtures meeting ASTM C 494 and ASTM C 1017 as required, to

improve pump ability, control time of set, hold sand in suspension and reduce
segregation and bleeding.
2. For cellular grout, do not use foam or admixtures that promote steel corrosion
3. Ensure that admixtures used in mix are compatible. Provide written

confirmation from admixture manufacturers of their compatibility.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Notify Project Manager at least 24 hours in advance of grouting operations.
B. Select and operate grouting equipment to avoid damage to new or existing

underground utilities and structures.
C. In selection of grouting placement consider pipe flotation, length of pipe, length of

tunnel, depth from surface, and type of sewer pipe, type of pipe blocking and
bulkheading, grout volume and length of pipe to be grouted between bulkheads.
D. Operate dewatering systems until grouting operations are complete and grout has
reached initial set.
3.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Batch and mix grout in equipment of sufficient size and capacity to provide necessary
quality and quantity of grout for each placement stage.
B. Use equipment for grouting of type and size generally used for work, capable of
mixing grout to homogeneous consistency, and providing means of accurately
measuring grout component quantities and accurately measuring pumping pressures.
Use pressure grout equipment which delivers grout to injection point at steady
pressure.
3.03 PRESSURE GROUTING FOR PRIMARY TUNNEL AND SHAFT LINER
A. Perform grouting operations to fill voids outside of primary tunnel or shaft liner.
02431-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. For nonexpendable primary liners installed behind shield or tunnel boring machine
(TBM), fill voids with sand-cement grout promptly after each ring of liner is out of
shield. Keep grout pressure below value that may cause damage or distortion to
installed liner plate rings. Provide seals on tail of shield or TBM which will prevent
grout from spilling.
C. For nonexpendable primary liners installed by hand mining or in shafts, grout once
every 4 feet or more frequently when conditions dictate.
D. Control grout pressures so that tunnel or shaft liner is not overstressed, and ground
heave is avoided.
E. For liner requiring grout, perform back grouting once each shift, or more often when
required to ensure that all voids are filled.
3.04 ANNULAR GROUTING FOR SEWER LINE IN TUNNELS AND IN CASED OR

UNCASED AUGERS
A. Fill annular space between sewer pipe and tunnel primary liner, casing or ground,
with grout.
B. Placement
1. Placement Limits: Predetermine limits of each grout placement stage by size

and capacity of batching equipment and initial set time of proposed grout.
Under no circumstances shall placement continue at grout port longer than
that period of time for mix to take initial set. Locate grout hole spacing and
locations according to number of stages necessary to grout tunnel liners. Stage
or lift cannot be installed on another lift until proper set has been attained.
Have placement procedures approved by admixture or additive manufacturer.
2. Limit pressure on annular space to prevent damage or distortion to pipe or

liner. Define limiting and estimated required pressure range. Provide an open
ended, high point tap or equivalent vent and monitor it at bulkhead opposite to
point of grouting.
3. Pump grout until material discharging is similar in consistency to that at point

of injection.
4. In primary lined tunnel, limit length of pipe installed to 200 feet or less before
grouting same length of sewer line. Repeat this cycle until all pipe is installed
and grouted.
C. Remove temporary bulkheads installed for grouting.
D. Batch and mix cellular grout mechanically to ensure consistency of mix. Wet solids
thoroughly before introduction of foaming agent. Operate batching system to
maintain slurry weight within 3 percent of design density. Introduce foam into slurry
in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
02431-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
3.05 PRESSURE GROUTING FOR JACKED PIPE
A. For jacked pipe 60 inches in diameter or greater, pressure grout annulus after
installation, displacing bentonite lubrication. Jacked pipes less than 60-inch diameter
may be left ungrouted unless excavated diameter exceeds external pipe diameter by
more than one inch.
B. Inject grout through grout holes in sewer pipe. Drilling holes from surface or through
carrier pipe walls is not allowed. Perform grouting by injecting it at pipe invert with
bentonite displacement occurring through high point tap or vent.
C. Control ground water as necessary to permit completion of grouting without

separation of grout materials.
D. Limit pressures to prevent damage or distortion to pipe or to keep flexible pipe within
acceptable tolerances.
E. Pump grout until material discharging is similar in consistency to that at point of

injection.
3.06 GROUND STABILIZATION GROUTING
A. Completely fill voids outside limits of excavation caused by caving or collapse of

ground. Fill with gravity or pressure injected sand-cement grout as necessary to fill
void.
B. Take care in grouting operations to prevent damage to adjacent utilities or public or

private property. Grout at pressure that will not distort or imperil portion of work or
existing installations or structures.
C. Verify that void has been filled by volumetric comparisons and visual inspection. In
case of settlement under existing slabs, take cores as directed by Project Manager, at
no additional cost to City, to demonstrate that void has been filled.
A. Pressure Grouting for Primary Tunnel and Shaft Liners.
1. For each shaft, make one set of four compressive test specimens for each 30-
foot depth and one set for remaining portion less than 30-foot increment.
2. Make one set of four compressive test specimens for every 200 feet of
primary lined, (non-expandable) tunnel requiring grout.
B. Annular Grouting for Sewer Line in Tunnels and in Cased or Uncased Augers.
1. Make one set of four compressive test specimens for every 200 feet of sewer
pipe installed in primary lined tunnel.
02431-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. For cased or uncased augers, make one set of four compressive test specimens
for each grouting operation, or for each 100 feet of pipe installed, whichever
is more frequent.
3. For cellular grout, check slurry density both at point of batching and
placement at least twice each hour in accordance with ASTM C 138. Record
density, time, and temperature. Density must be within 3 percent of design
density at point of batching and 5 percent of design density at point of
placement.
C. Pressure Grouting for Jacked Pipe. Make one set of four compressive test specimens
for every 400 feet of jacked pipe pressure grouting.
D. Ground Stabilization Grouting. Make one set of four compressive test specimens for
every location where ground stabilization grouting is performed.
END OF SECTION
02431-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION MICROTUNNELING
Section 02441
MICROTUNNELING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Tunnel construction of pipes by Microtunneling. Construction method involves

jacking pipe following a micro-tunnel boring machine (MTBM), with jacking pipe
serving as tunnel liner.
D. Section 01578 - Control of Ground and Surface Water
E. Section 02400 – Tunnel Shafts
F. Section 02401 – Common Tunnel Shafts
G. Section 02426 – Sewer Line in Tunnels
H. Section 02427 – Plastic Liner for Large-Diameter Concrete Sewers and Structures
I. Section 02431 – Tunnel Grout
J. Section 02504 – Fiberglass Reinforced Pipe
K. Section 02508 – Extra Strength Clay Pipe
L. Section 02517 – Water Line in Tunnels
M. Section 02533 – Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers
N. Section 02611 – Reinforced Concrete Pipe
A. Unit Prices
02441-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Length of sewer installed will be measured by linear foot along center line of
completed sewer from center line to center line of manholes, as designated on
Drawings; and to end of stubs or termination of pipe; and to inside face of lift
station and treatment plant works. Installation of sewer within limits of
structure other than manholes will not be considered for measurement and
payment at unit price bid.
2. Payment will include and be full compensation for labor, equipment,

materials, and supervision for construction of sewer and excavation, complete
in place including disposal of excess materials, sheeting, shoring or bracing,
dewatering, utility adjustments, connections to existing sewers, grouting when
required, tests, backfilling, clean-up, and other related work necessary for
construction as specified or as shown on Drawings.
3. Payment for installation of sewer will be authorized by Project Manager in

two parts. Pay estimates for partial payments will be made as measured above
according to following schedule:
a. 95 percent payment will be made for jacked pipe on linear foot basis
for amount of jacked pipe installed but not yet grouted, in cases where
grouting is specified.
b. 100 percent payment will be authorized on a linear foot basis for

amount of jacked pipe installed, including grouting when specified.
4. No separate payment will be made for water lines in casing under this Section.
Refer to Section 02517 – Water Line in Tunnels for measurement and
payment.

procedures.
A. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association (AREMA)

Manual for Railway Engineering
B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
C. ASTM A 36 – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
D. ASTM A 139 – Standard Specification for Electric-Fusion (Arc)-Welded Steel Pipe

(NPS 4 and Over)
E. ASTM A 515 – Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for
Intermediate and Higher Temperature Service
02441-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
F. ASTM A 572 – Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-

Vanadium Structural Steel
G. ASTM A 1097 – Standard Specification for Steel Casing Pipe, Electric-Fusion (Arc)-
Welded (Outside Diameter of 10 in. and Larger)
H. AWWA C200 – Steel Water Pipe-6 in. and Larger
I. National Electrical Code - (NFPA 70)
J. NSF/ANSI 60 – Drinking Water Chemicals – Health Effects
K. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. Conditioners: Bentonite, foam, polymers and/or other materials added to the

excavated materials (cuttings) to modify them. Conditioners are required to form
earth paste and an appropriate support medium in the excavation chamber, and to
reduce the abrasive nature of the excavated materials.
B. Critical Structure: Building, structure, bridge, pier, or similar construction partially or

entirely located within Zone of Active Excavation, unless otherwise defined in
Contract Documents.
C. Earth Pressure Balance (EPB) MTBM System: A Microtunneling system that

incorporates a screw conveyor to facilitate forming of ground controlling plug and
removal of excavated soil into muck car. Face and ground water pressure is balanced
by pressure of excavated material held back by the plug. Earth pressure balance
systems may utilize ground Conditioners to assist in maintaining pressure balance and
enhance controllability and operation of system.
D. Intermediate Jacking Station: Supplementary jacking system installed between two

Jacking Pipe sections without use of an additional shaft.
E. Jacking Pipe: Pipe or casing installed by Microtunneling process that is capable of

carrying installation jacking loads in addition to normal pipe loads.
F. Microtunneling: Method of installing by jacking pipe or casing behind Microtunnel

Boring Machine that is connected to and jacked forward by pipe or casing being
installed, generally precluding man entry for routine operation.
G. Microtunnel Boring Machine (MTBM): Mechanized excavating equipment

incorporating Pressurized Head that is remotely-controlled, steerable, laser/gyroscope
navigational system guided, articulated, with controlled face that fully supports
excavation face with fluid and/or earth pressure balance at all times and connected to
and shoved forward by pipe or casing being installed, usually precluding man entry
for routine operation.
02441-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
H. Pressurized Head: Bulkhead within MTBM designed to be watertight.
I. Slurry Pressure Balance MTBM System: A Microtunneling system that uses a low-
pressure fluid to balance ground and water pressure at face of tunnel and to transport
excavated spoils to surface.
J. Work Plan: Written description together with supporting documentation that defines
plans and procedures for Microtunneling operations.
K. Zone of Active Excavation: Area located within radial distance centered about
surface point immediately above face of excavation and with radius equal to depth
from ground surface to bottom of excavation, or as otherwise indicated in Drawings.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
1. Work Plan: Submit brief description of proposed tunnel methodology for

record purposes. Description should be sufficient to convey the following:
a. Type of face support.
b. Manufacturer and type of tunneling equipment proposed.
c. Cutter head details.
d. Locations of access shafts and work sites.
e. Proposed method of machine launch, exit and retrieval.
f. Capacity of jacking equipment and type of cushioning.
g. Planned use of Intermediate Jacking Stations, if applicable, and

closure of Intermediate Jacking Stations upon completion of drive.
h. System of alignment monitoring and steering control and activation.
i. Lubrication system.
j. Slurry system for slurry Microtunneling.
k. Soil conditioning, if necessary, for EPB Microtunneling.
l. Number and duration of shifts planned to be worked each day.
m. Sequence of operations.
n. Spoil surface storage, separation, and disposal.
02441-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
o. Contingency plan and emergency procedures, including but not limited

to machine maintenance and/or component repair, and Jacking Pipe
failure.
p. Supplementary alignment surveying.
q. Lubrication mixing and injection.
r. Source of water used in slurry, lubricant, and grout.
2. Drawings and Calculations: Submit drawings and calculations for tunnel

support. Provide adequate drawings and installation details for construction.
Show pipe and pipe joint detail. Documents must be signed and sealed by
Professional Engineer registered in State of Texas. Calculations shall include
clear statement of criteria used for design as described in Article 1.07.A,
Design Requirements.
a. Calculations to demonstrate that the maximum jacking loads will not

exceed the maximum allowable jacking forces of the MTBM and the
Jacking Pipe selected.
b. Calculations to demonstrate pipe selected is designed to support

maximum anticipated earth loads and superimposed live loads, both
static and dynamic, which may be imposed on pipe and additional
stresses imposed on the pipe during jacking operations.
c. Calculations of estimated operating pressure at the tunnel face.
d. Calculations demonstrating that jacking shaft and backstop

arrangement can safely accommodate maximum calculated jacking
load without excessive or detrimental movement.
3. Personnel: Submit for record purposes, résumés for project manager, field
superintendent and Microtunneling machine operators.
a. Experience: Minimum of 3 previous successful Microtunneling

installations of similar size and scope.
b. Detailed descriptions of Microtunneling projects.
4. Quality Control: Description of quality control methods including:
b. Example of tunnel daily log.
5. Geotechnical Investigation: When geotechnical investigations are conducted,

submit results to Project Manager for record purposes.
02441-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
6. Monitoring Plans.
a. Instrumentation Monitoring Plan: Submit for review, prior to

construction, instrumentation monitoring plan that includes schedule
of instrumentation design, layout of instrumentation points, equipment
installation details, manufacturer’s catalog literature, and monitoring
report forms.
b. Surface Settlement Monitoring Plan: Submit surface settlement

monitoring plan for review prior to construction. Plan shall identify the
location of settlement monitoring points, reference benchmarks,
survey frequency and procedures, and reporting formats.
7. Structures Assessment: Provide preconstruction and post construction

assessment reports for Critical Structures. Include pre- and post-construction
survey and assessment (including photographs or video).
8. Monitoring readings shall be submitted to Project Manager.
9. Daily Reports: Maintain shift log as defined in Article 3.03.B, Tunneling Data
and make available to Project Manager on request.
A. Design Requirements.
1. Assume responsibility for selection of appropriate pipe and pipe joints to carry
thrust of any jacking forces or other construction loads in combination with
overburden, earth and hydrostatic loads. Design of any pipe or casing
indicated on Drawings considers in-place loads only and does not take into
account any construction loads. Criteria for longitudinal loading (jacking
forces) on pipe and joints shall be determined, based on selected method of
construction.
2. Jacking Pipe shall be designed to withstand thrust from MTBM advance

without damage or distortion. Configure main jacking frame so thrust is
uniformly distributed and will not damage or distort pipe or casing.
3. Take into account loads from handling and storing.
4. Criteria to be used at railroad crossings shall be Cooper E-80 locomotive

loading distributions in accordance with AREMA specifications for culverts.
In design, account for additive loadings due to multiple tracks.
5. Criteria to be used for truck loading shall be in accordance with the AASHTO
LRFD Bridge Design Specification.
02441-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
6. Provide pipes and casing of diameter shown on Drawings. Substitution of

larger diameter to suit MTBM equipment availability for sewer lines will only
be permitted if demonstrated to satisfaction of Project Manager that design
flows and velocities can be achieved.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 JACKING PIPE
A. Assume responsibility for selecting appropriate pipes and pipe joints to safely carry
loads imposed during construction, including jacking forces. Pipe joints shall be
flush with outside pipe face when pipes are assembled. Pipe materials shall be as
indicated on Drawings or selected from the following if not indicated on Drawings:
1. Fiberglass Reinforced pipe, joints, and fittings to be in accordance with

Section 02504 - Fiberglass Reinforced Pipe.
2. Vitrified clay pipe, joints and fittings to be in accordance with Section 02508 -
3. Plastic-lined reinforced concrete pipe with joints and fittings to be in

accordance with Section 02611 - Reinforced Concrete Pipe and Section 02427
- Plastic Liner for Large-Diameter Concrete Sewers and Structures. Plastic
liner is not required for storm sewers.
4. Steel casing pipe: Provide new, uncoated steel pipe manufactured in

accordance with ASTM A 1097 for sewer line applications and ASTM A
1097 and AWWA C200 for water line applications. Joints may be field-
welded butt joints or interlocking joints and shall be watertight.
a. For field-welded butt-joint casing, manufacture in accordance with

ASTM A 139 Grade E, or ASTM A 572 Grade 50. Provide full
circumferential welds at butt joints.
b. For steel casing pipe with interlocking joints, provide in accordance

with the following:
(1) Provide ASTM A 36, ASTM A 515, Grade 60, or ASTM A

572, Grade 42 for pipe, and provide minimum ASTM A 36 for
connections.
(2) Maintain pipe roundness to within 1 percent of specified

diameter.
(3) Maintain outside circumference to within 1% of nominal

specified circumference, or 3/4 inches, minimum.
(4) Maintain wall thickness to within 5% of specified thickness.
02441-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
(5) Provide rolled and welded cylinder method utilizing the double
submerged arc welding (DSAW) process in sections not less
than 8 feet long, except as needed to achieve the final finished
length of pipe.
(6) Provide complete penetration butt-welded connectors square to

ends of pipe sections.
(7) Perform welding in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.1.
(8) Examine connections at time of shipment. Reject sections with

defects.
(9) Mark all sections with manufacturer’s name, job number,

customer name, outside diameter, wall thickness, and weight
per foot.
(10) Ship pipe with protective wax coating over machined surfaces.
(11) Provide Permalok or approved equal.
c. Design stress in pipe wall shall be 50 percent of minimum yield point

of steel or 18,000 psi, whichever is less when subjected to loading
conditions.
d. Design deflection to be used in determining wall thickness shall not

exceed 3 percent of nominal casing pipe size.
e. Bedding constant to be used in determining wall thickness shall be

0.10. Lag factors shall be 1.0 for all live loads.
f. Casing pipe design shall also include stresses due to jacking forces.
B. Use pipe that is round with smooth, even outer surface, and has joints that allow for
easy connections between pipes. Design pipe ends so jacking loads are evenly
distributed around entire pipe joint and point loads will not occur when pipe is
installed. Pipe used for pipe jacking shall be capable of withstanding all forces
imposed by process of installation, as well as final in-place loading conditions.
Protect driving ends of pipe and joints against damage.
C. A list of approved jacking pipes is included in the City of Houston Wastewater Pre-
Approved Products List (Reference COHWW02441-). This list is not applicable for
casing pipe.
2.02 GROUT
A. Grout shall be in accordance with requirements defined in Section 02431 – Tunnel

Grout.
02441-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
2.03 ANNULAR SPACE LUBRICATION
A. Lubricants shall be NSF 60 approved.
B. Water used for pipe lubrication shall be clean, fresh, and free from oil, organic matter,
or other deleterious matter and of neutral pH.
2.04 CONDITIONERS
A. Conditioners shall be inert or biodegradable, accompanied by the manufacturers’

certificate of compliance with Safety Data Sheets (SDS).
B. Water is no acceptable as a soil conditioner.
2.05 WATER
A. Water used in slurry, lubricant, and grout shall be obtained from potable water source.
Soda ash or accepted equal, with submittal of a Safety Data Sheet (SDS), shall be
used to adjust pH of water as required in mix design.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS CRITERIA
A. Use methods for Microtunneling operations that will minimize ground settlement.
Select a method that controls flow of water, prevents loss of soil into the tunnel and
provides stability of the face under anticipated conditions.
B. Conduct tunneling operations in accordance with applicable safety rules and

regulations, OSHA standards and Contractor's safety plan. Use methods that include
due regard for safety of workmen, adjacent structures, utilities, and public and safe
means of ingress and egress.
C. Maintain clean working conditions wherever there is man access.
D. Perform installation so as to avoid interference with operation of railroads, highways,

or streets, except as approved by owner of facility.
E. Shafts required for microtunnel construction shall be in conformance with Section

02400 – Tunnel Shafts and Section 02401 – Common Tunnel Shafts.
3.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Full directional guidance of MTBM is prerequisite of this method of construction.
B. Assume responsibility for selection of tunneling equipment which, based on past

experience, has proven to be satisfactory for excavation of soils to be encountered.
02441-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Employ tunneling equipment that is capable of handling various anticipated ground

conditions, is capable of minimizing loss of soil ahead of and around machine and
provides satisfactory support of excavated face.
D. Microtunneling Equipment.
1. Slurry Pressure Balance MTBM System shall be capable of adjustments

required to maintain face stability for particular soil condition and shall
monitor and continuously balance soil and ground water pressure to prevent
loss of slurry or uncontrolled soil and ground water inflow, or, in case of
slurry spoil transportation system:
a. Provides pressure at excavation face by use of slurry pumps, pressure

control system, and flow meter.
b. Includes slurry bypass unit in system to allow direction of flow to be

changed and isolated, as necessary.
2. Earth Pressure Balance MTBM System shall be capable of adjustments

required to maintain face stability for particular soil condition to be
encountered. Monitor and continuously balance soil and ground water
pressure to prevent loss of soil or uncontrolled ground water inflow.
a. The spoil transportation system shall be capable of managing pressure

at the excavation face by controlling volume of spoil removal with
respect to advance rate. Monitor speed of rotation of screw conveyor,
and addition of water.
3. Remote Control System: Provide MTBM that includes remote control system
with following features:
a. Allows for operation of system without need for personnel to enter

tunnel for routine operations. Has display available to operator, at
remote operation console, showing position of shield in relation to
design reference together with other information such as face pressure,
roll, pitch, steering attitude, valve positions, thrust force, and cutter
head torque; rate of advance and installed length.
b. Integrates system of excavation and removal of spoil and its

simultaneous replacement by pipe. As each pipe section is jacked
forward, remote control system shall synchronize all of operational
functions of system.
4. Active Direction Control System: Provide MTBM that includes active

direction control system with the following features:
a. Controls line and grade by a guidance system that remotely relates

actual position of MTBM to design reference.
02441-10
CITY OF HOUSTON
b. Provides active steering information that is monitored and transmitted

to operating console.
c. Provides positioning and operation information to operator on control

console.
E. Pipe Jacking Equipment: Provide pipe jacking system with the following features:
1. Has main jacks mounted in jacking frame located in starting shaft.
2. Has jacking frame which successively pushes string of connected pipes

following tunneling excavation equipment towards receiving shaft.
3. Has sufficient jacking capacity to push tunneling excavation equipment and

string of pipe through ground. Incorporates Intermediate Jacking Stations, if
required.
4. Has capacity at least 20 percent greater than calculated maximum jacking

load.
5. Develops uniform distribution of jacking forces on end of pipe by use of

spreader rings and packing.
6. Provides and maintains pipe lubrication system at all times to lower friction
developed on surface of pipe during jacking.
7. Jack Thrust Reactions. Use reaction/thrust walls for pipe jacking that are
adequate to support jacking pressure developed by main jacking system.
Special care shall be taken when setting pipe guide rails in jacking shaft to
ensure correctness of alignment, grade, and stability.
F. Slurry Separation Equipment: If slurry MTBM is being used, provide a slurry

separation system meeting the following requirements:
1. Provide adequate separation of the spoil from the slurry so that slurry content
within the limits set by the Contractor’s Work Plan can be returned to the
cutting face for reuse.
2. Use a mechanical separation plant, including scalping screens, shaker screens,

de-sanding and de-silting cones, and centrifuge as deemed necessary by the
Work Plan.
3. Appropriately contain spoil at the site before disposal.
4. The type of separation process is suited to the size of the tunnel being
constructed, the ground type being excavated, the volume of expected flow
generated by the slurry circuit, and the workspace available at each jacking
shaft location for operating the plant.
02441-11
CITY OF HOUSTON
5. Monitor the composition of the slurry to maintain the slurry weight, gel
strength, and viscosity limits defined by the Contractor’s Work Plan.
G. Air Quality: Provide equipment to maintain proper air quality assuming manned
tunnel operations during construction in accordance with OSHA requirements.
H. Where used, enclose lighting fixtures in watertight enclosures with suitable guards.
Provide separate circuits for lighting, and other equipment.
I. Electrical systems shall conform to requirements of National Electrical Code -

NFPA70.
3.03 TUNNELING DATA
A. Utilize a real-time data collection system and make available to the Project Manager
on request.
B. Maintain shift logs of construction events and observations. Project Manager shall
have access to all logs containing the following required information:
1. Location of boring machine face by station and progress of tunnel drive

during shift.
3. Completed field forms, such as steering control logs, for checking line and
grade of tunneling operation, showing achieved tolerance relative to design
alignment.
4. Maximum pipe jacking pressures per drive.
5. Lubricant pressures and estimated quantities.
6. Observation of any lost ground or other ground movement.
7. Any unusual conditions or events.
8. Reasons for operational shutdown in event drive are halted.
3.04 EXCAVATION AND JACKING OF PIPE
A. Tunnel Excavation.
1. Keep tunnel excavation within easements and rights-of-way indicated on

Drawings and to lines and grades designated on Drawings.
2. Perform tunneling operations in a manner that will minimize movement of

ground in front of and surrounding tunnel. Prevent damage to structures and
utilities above and in vicinity of tunneling operations.
02441-12
CITY OF HOUSTON
3. Pressurized Head Excavation
a. Carefully control volume of spoil removed. Advance rate and

excavation rate to be compatible to avoid over excavation, loss of
ground or ground heave.
b. When cutting head is withdrawn or is open for any purpose, keep

excavated face supported and stabilized.
4. Whenever a condition is encountered which could endanger tunnel excavation

or adjacent structures, operate without intermission including 24-hour
working, weekends and holidays, until condition no longer exists. Such
conditions shall be brought to the attention of Project Manager within 24
hours.
5. Assume responsibility for damage due to settlement from any construction-

induced activities.
B. Pipe Jacking.
1. Cushion pipe joints as necessary to transmit jacking forces without damage to

pipe or pipe joints, in accordance with pipe manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. Maintain envelope of bentonite slurry around exterior of pipe during jacking

and excavation operation to reduce exterior friction and possibility of pipe
seizing in place.
3. If a recovery access shaft is needed, obtain approval from Project Manager

prior to excavation. Coordinate traffic control measures and utility
adjustments as necessary prior to commencing work.
4. If a section of pipe is damaged during jacking operation, or joint failure

occurs, as evidenced by inspection, visible ground water inflow or other
observations, submit for approval Contractor’s proposed methods for repair or
replacement of pipe. Document repairs by providing repair locations (station
numbers), pictures/videos showing condition of the pipe or joint before and
after repairs are done, and a certification from manufacturer’s representative
that repairs have been inspected and are considered acceptable.
C. Grouting: Grouting requirements are defined in Section 02431 - Tunnel Grout.
3.05 CONTROL OF LINE AND GRADE

any errors or discrepancies to Project Manager.
02441-13
CITY OF HOUSTON

and maintain construction control points, reference lines and grades for
locating tunnel, sewer pipe, and structures.
3. Establish construction control points sufficiently far from work so as not to be

affected by ground movement caused by pipe-jacked tunneling operations.
B. Benchmark Movement: If settlement of ground surface occurs during construction

which affects accuracy of temporary benchmarks, detect and report such movement
and reestablish temporary benchmarks. Locations of permanent City of Houston
monumentation benchmarks are indicated on Drawings. Advise Project Manager of
any settlement affecting permanent monumentation benchmarks.
C. Guidance System and Alignment Control.
1. Provide the Project Manager access to the guidance system readings at all
times to be able to verify alignment and grade.
2. Initial alignment of equipment and final pipe/casing alignment shall be

documented.
D. Line and Grade.
1. Check and record alignment for tunnel against above-ground undisturbed

reference after installation of each Jacking Pipe.
2. Record exact position of MTBM after each shove to ensure alignment is

within specified tolerances. Make immediate correction to alignment before
allowable tolerances are exceeded.

4. Acceptance criteria for jacking pipe shall be plus or minus 6 percent of the
MTBM diameter in horizontal alignment or 2 inches, whichever is greater,
and plus or minus 3 percent of the MTBM diameter in elevation or 1 inch,
whichever is greater, from the design line and grade, unless otherwise
indicated on the Drawings.
5. If it is determined that the pipe cannot be used, pipe installed outside

tolerances shall be fully grouted and abandoned.
3.06 MONITORING
A. Instrumentation Monitoring: Instrumentation requirements are shown on Drawings.

Instrumentation specified shall be accessible at all times to Project Manager.
02441-14
CITY OF HOUSTON

of ground surface and adjacent structures. Establish vertical control points at a
settlement.

near, or adjacent to construction work. Access shall be provided to work for
such independent installations.
3. Instruments shall be installed in accordance with Drawings and manufacturer's

recommendations.
B. Surface Settlement Monitoring.
1. Establish monitoring points on all Critical Structures.

3. Ground surface elevations shall be recorded on centerline ahead of tunneling

tunnel drive. For sewers greater than 60-inch diameter, also record similar
data at approximately 20 feet each side of centerline. Settlement monitoring
points must be clearly marked by studs or paint for ease of locating.

track. Follow American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way
Association (AREMA) crossing requirements.
5. Utilities and Pipelines. Monitor ground settlement directly above and at least
10 feet or two excavation diameter, whichever is greater, before and after
utility or pipeline intersection as shown on the Drawings.
C. Reading Frequency and Reporting: Submit to Project Manager, records of readings

1. Readings shall be taken:
a. Prior to Zone of Active Excavation reaching that point.
b. When tunnel face reaches monitoring point (in plan).
c. When Zone of Active Excavation has passed and no further movement

is detected.
02441-15
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. All monitoring readings shall be submitted daily to Project Manager.

detected.

survey of remaining monitoring points and submit to Project Manager.
3.08 ACCEPTANCE TESTING FOR SEWERS
A. Acceptance testing is to be carried out by methods described in Section 02533 -

Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewer.
END OF SECTION
02441-16
CITY OF HOUSTON JACK & BORE/JACK & MINE/
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION PILOT TUBE GUIDED BORING TUNNELS
SECTION 02445
JACK AND BORE/JACK AND MINE/PILOT TUBE GUIDED BORING TUNNELS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Furnishing and installation of pipes by Jack and Bore, Jack and Mine or Pilot Tube
Guided Boring.
C. Section 01578 - Control of Ground and Surface Water
D. Section 02400 – Tunnel Shafts
E. Section 02401 – Common Tunnel Shafts
F. Section 02426 – Sewer Line in Tunnels
G. Section 02427 – Plastic Liner for Large-Diameter Concrete Sewers and Structures
H. Section 02431 – Tunnel Grout
I. Section 02504 – Fiberglass Reinforced Pipe
J. Section 02508 – Extra Strength Clay Pipe
K. Section 02511 – Water Lines
N. Section 02611 – Reinforced Concrete Pipe
O. Section 02612 – Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sewers
A. Unit Prices.
02445-1
1. Length of sewer installed will be measured by linear foot along center line of
completed sewer from center line to center line of manholes, as designated on
Drawings; and to end of stubs or termination of pipe; and to inside face of lift
station and treatment plant works. Installation of sewer within limits of
structure other than manholes will not be considered for measurement and
payment at unit price bid.
2. Payment will include and be full compensation for labor, equipment,

materials, and supervision for construction of sewer or casing and excavation,
complete in place including disposal of excess materials, sheeting, shoring or
bracing, dewatering, utility adjustments, connections to existing sewers,
grouting when required, tests, backfilling, clean-up, and other related work
necessary for construction as specified or as shown on Drawings.
3. Payment for installation of sewer or casing will be authorized by the Project

Manager in two parts. Pay estimates for partial payments will be made as
measured above according to following schedule:
a. 95 percent payment will be made for jacked pipe on linear foot basis
for amount of jacked sewer pipe installed but not yet grouted, in cases
where grouting is specified.
b. Remaining 5 percent payment will be made for jacked pipe on linear

foot basis for amount of jacked sewer pipe installed and grouted, in
cases where grouting is specified. A 100 percent payment will be made
for jacked pipe on linear foot basis for amount of jacked sewer pipe
installed, in cases where grouting is not specified.
4. No separate payment will be paid for water lines in tunnel under this Section.
Refer to Section 02511 – Water Lines or Section 02517 – Water Line in
Tunnel for measurement and payment.

B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).
C. ASTM A 36 – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
D. ASTM A 139 – Standard Specification for Electric-Fusion (Arc)-Welded Steel Pipe

(NPS 4 and Over)
E. ASTM A 515 – Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for
Intermediate and Higher Temperature Service
02445-2
F. ASTM A 572 – Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-

G. ASTM A 1097 – Standard Specification for Steel Casing Pipe, Electric-Fusion (Arc)-
Welded (Outside Diameter of 10 in. and Larger)
H. AWWA C200 – Steel Water Pipe-6 in. and Larger
I. National Electrical Code - (NFPA 70).
J. NSF/ANSI 60 – Drinking Water Chemicals – Health Effects
K. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. Critical Structure: Buildings, structures, bridges, piers, or similar construction

partially or entirely located within Zone of Active Excavation, or otherwise identified
in Drawings.
B. Jack and Bore: Pipe or casing is installed by jacking process with system that has
limited steering capability and does not have continuous face support. Excavation is
performed using open face auger.
C. Jack and Mine: Pipe or casing is installed by jacking it into place from jacking shaft
to receiving shaft, using hydraulic jacks while excavation takes place at the face by
hand mining or mechanical excavation.
D. Jacking Pipe: Pipe or casing installed by jacking process and that is capable of
carrying installation jacking loads in addition to normal pipe loads.
E. Pilot Tube Guided Boring: Multi-stage method of installing pipe or casing to line and
grade by use of guided pilot tube and followed by enlargement to install pipe or
casing.
F. Work Plan: Written description together with supporting documentation that defines
plans and procedures for tunneling operations.
G. Zone of Active Excavation: Area located within the radial distance centered about
surface point immediately above the face of excavation and with radius equal to depth
from ground surface to bottom of excavation, or as otherwise indicated in Drawings.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
02445-3
1. Work Plan: Written description together with supporting documentation that

defines plans and procedures for tunneling operations. Description should be
sufficient to convey the following:
a. Proposed method of pipe or casing installation and type of face

support.
b. Installation of jacking or boring supports or back stop. Installation of

pipe jack or Pilot Tube Guided Boring thrust block.
c. Jack and Bore system manufacturer’s literature describing equipment

and proposed jacking system including machine:
(1) Dimensions
(2) Weight
(3) Power and torque capabilities
(4) Arrangement and position of jacks and pipe guides
(5) Cutterhead configuration details including cutterhead teeth
(6) Mucking system
(7) Auger size
d. Type of lighting and description of ventilation systems when person

entry is required.
e. Pilot Tube Guided Boring tooling and reaming equipment.
f. System of alignment monitoring and steering control and activation.
g. Number and duration of shifts planned to be worked each day.
h. Sequence of operations.
i. Locations of boring and receiving shafts.
j. Method of spoil transportation from face, surface storage and disposal

location.
k. Jacking mechanism including maximum jacking capacity.
l. Jacking force monitoring and recording details.
m. Capacity of jacking equipment and type of cushioning. Anticipated

jacking forces for each drive. Safe jacking capacity of Jacking Pipe.
02445-4
n. Identify critical utility crossings and special precautions proposed.
o. Description and details of any temporary underground facility

proposed for operation including lights, sump pits, and mud slabs.
p. If a thrust block is used, thrust block design calculations and safe

capacity.
q. Calibration table correlating jacking pressure gage readings and

applied load in tons.
r. Provisions for injecting slurry for Pilot Tube Guided Boring. Slurry
mix design, volume and measurement procedures, pumps, piping,
valve arrangements, and pressure gages.
s. Provisions for injecting pipe lubricants. Pipe jacking lubricant mix

design, including lubricant type, injection volume and measurement
procedures, pumps, piping, valve arrangements, and pressure gages.
2. Drawings and Calculations.
a. Submit drawings and calculations for tunnel support system. Provide

adequate drawings and installation details for construction. Shop
Drawings shall identify proposed Jack and Bore, Jack and Mine or
Pilot Tube Guided Boring method complete in assembled position
including locations of equipment, staging, and storage areas, and
emergency access around the construction operations. Drawings shall
show pipe seals, pipe joint, collars, cushioning materials, and
reinforcing details. Calculations shall include clear statement of
criteria used for design as described in Article 1.07.A, Design
Requirements.
b. Drawings for hydraulic jacking system, including hydraulic jack

configuration and frame dimensions.
c. Provide signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the

State of Texas the following calculations:
(1) Confirming maximum allowable loads on pipe will not be

exceeded by maximum jacking capacity of the jacking system
during Jack and Bore, Jack and Mine, or Pilot Tube Guided
Boring operations.
(2) Demonstrate pipe selected has been designed to support

maximum anticipated earth loads and superimposed live loads,
both static and dynamic, which may be imposed on pipe and
additional stresses imposed on pipe during jacking operations.
02445-5
(3) Showing maximum expected jacking loads and confirm these

are not greater than maximum jacking capacity of jacking
system. Calculations should indicate if lubrication is being
accounted for.
(4) Demonstrating that the jacking shaft and backstop arrangement

can safely accommodate the maximum calculated jacking load
without excessive or detrimental movement.
3. Personnel – Submit for record purposes, résumés for project manager, field
superintendent and tunneling machine operators.
a. Experience: Minimum of 3 previous successful pipe-jacked tunnel

installations of similar size and scope.
b. Detailed descriptions of pipe-jacked tunnel projects.
4. Quality Control: Description of quality control methods including:
b. Example of daily report.
5. Geotechnical Investigation: When geotechnical investigations are conducted,

submit results to the Project Manager for record purposes.
6. Monitoring Plans:
a. Instrumentation Monitoring Plan: Submit for review, prior to

construction, monitoring plan that includes schedule of
instrumentation design, layout of instrumentation points, equipment
installation details, manufacturer's catalog literature, and monitoring
report forms.
b. Surface Settlement Monitoring Plan. Submit surface settlement

monitoring plan for review prior to construction. Plan shall identify the
location of settlement monitoring points, reference benchmarks,
survey frequency and procedures, and reporting formats.
7. Structures Assessment. Provide preconstruction and post construction

assessment reports for Critical Structures (including photographs or video).
8. Monitoring readings shall be submitted to Project Manager at the frequency

indicated in Article 3.07.C.2.
9. Daily Reports: Maintain a shift log as defined in Article 3.04 - Tunneling Data
and make available to Project Manager on request.
02445-6
1. Assume responsibility for selection of appropriate pipe and pipe joints to carry
thrust of any jacking forces or other construction loads in combination with
overburden, earth and hydrostatic loads. Design of pipe indicated on Drawings
considers in-place loads only and does not take into account any construction
loads. Criteria for longitudinal loading (jacking forces) on pipe and joints shall
be determined, based on selected method of construction.
2. Jacking Pipe shall be designed to withstand thrust without damage or

distortion. Configure main jacking frame so thrust is uniformly distributed and
will not damage or distort pipe.
3. Take into account loads from handling and storing.
4. Criteria to be used at railroad crossings shall be Cooper E-80 locomotive

loading distributions in accordance with AREMA specifications for culverts.
Account for additive loadings due to multiple tracks.
5. Criteria for non-railroad crossings to be in accordance with the AASHTO

LRFD Bridge Design Specification.
6. Provide pipes and casing of diameter shown on Drawings. Substitution of pipe

with larger diameter to suit equipment availability for sewer lines will only be
permitted if demonstrated to satisfaction of the Project Manager that design
flows and velocities can be achieved.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 JACKING PIPE
A. Pipe joints shall be flush with outside pipe face when pipes are assembled. Pipe
materials shall be as indicated on Drawings or selected from the following if not
indicated on the Drawings:
1. Fiberglass Reinforced pipe, joints, and fittings in accordance with Section

02504 - Fiberglass Reinforced Pipe.
2. Vitrified clay pipe, joints and fittings in accordance with Section 02508 -
3. Plastic-lined reinforced concrete pipe with joints and fittings in accordance

with Section 02611 - Reinforced Concrete Pipe and Section 02427 - Plastic
Liner for Large-Diameter Concrete Sewers and Structures. Plastic liner is not
required for storm sewers.
02445-7
4. Steel casing pipe: Provide new, uncoated steel pipe manufactured in

accordance with ASTM1097 for sewer line applications and AWWA C200 for
water line applications. Joints may be field-welded butt joints or interlocking
joints and shall be watertight.
a. For field-welded butt-joint casing, manufacture in accordance with

ASTM A139 Grade E, or ASTM A572 Grade 50. Provide full
circumferential welds at butt joints.
b. For steel casing pipe with interlocking joints, provide in accordance

with the following:
(1) Provide ASTM A36, ASTM A515, Grade 60, or ASTM A572,
Grade 42 for pipe, and provide minimum ASTM A36 for
connections.
(2) Maintain pipe roundness to within 1 percent of specified

diameter.
(3) Maintain outside circumference to within 1% of nominal

specified circumference, or 3/4 inches, minimum.
(4) Maintain wall thickness to within 5% of specified thickness.
(5) Provide rolled and welded cylinder method utilizing the double
submerged arc welding (DSAW) process in sections not less
than 8 feet long, except as needed to achieve the final finished
length of pipe.
(6) Provide complete penetration butt-welded connectors square to

ends of pipe sections.
(7) Perform welding in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.1.
(8) Examine connections at time of shipment. Reject sections with

defects.
(9) Mark all sections with manufacturer’s name, job number,

customer name, outside diameter, wall thickness, and weight
per foot.
(10) Ship pipe with protective wax coating over machined surfaces.
(11) Provide Permalok joints or approved equal.
c. Design stress in pipe wall shall be 50 percent of minimum yield point

of steel or 18,000 psi, whichever is less when subjected to loading
conditions.
02445-8
d. Design deflection to be used in determining wall thickness shall not

exceed 3 percent of nominal casing pipe size.
e. Bedding constant to be used in determining wall thickness shall be

0.10. Lag factors shall be 1.0 for all live loads.
f. Casing pipe design shall also include stresses due to jacking forces
when pipe is to be installed by jacking method.
B. Use pipe that is round with smooth, even outer surface, and has joints that allow for
easy connections between pipes. Design pipe ends so jacking loads are evenly
distributed around entire pipe joint and point loads will not occur when pipe is
installed. Jacking Pipe shall be capable of withstanding all forces imposed by process
of installation, as well as final in-place loading conditions. Protect driving ends of
pipe and joints against damage.
C. Precast reinforced box with joints and fittings shall be in accordance with Section
02612– Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sewers. Precast concrete box is not
acceptable for sanitary sewers. Precast concrete box is not used for Jack and Bore or
Pilot Tube Guided Boring.
D. For sewer pipe installation, a list of approved jacking pipes is included in the City of
Houston Wastewater Pre-Approved Product List (Reference COHWW02441-). This
list is not applicable for casing pipe.
2.02 GROUT
A. Grout shall be in accordance with requirements defined in Section 02431 – Tunnel

Grout.
2.03 ANNULAR SPACE LUBRICATION
A. Lubricants shall be NSF 60 approved.
B. Water used for pipe lubrication shall be clean, fresh, and free from oil, organic matter,
or other deleterious matter and of neutral pH.
2.04 WATER
A. Water used in slurry, lubricant, and grout shall be obtained from potable water source.
Soda ash or accepted equal, with submittal of Safety Data Sheet (SDS), shall be used
to adjust pH of water as required in mix design.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS CRITERIA
02445-9
A. Use methods that minimize ground settlement. Select method that controls flow of
water and prevents loss of soil into tunnel and provides stability of face under
anticipated conditions.
B. For Jack and Bore, at minimum use a level manometer (dutch level) for guidance.
Free boring is not an acceptable method.
C. For Jack and Mine, use surveying or other means for guidance.
D. Pilot Tube Guided Boring system shall utilize a two or three phase system as
described below:
1. Three Pass System.
a. Phase 1 – Rigid steel pilot tube in approximately 3-foot lengths shall

be installed through ground from boring shaft to receiving shaft by
earth displacement with jacking frame. Alignment of pilot tube shall
be established with theodolite mounted at rear of boring shaft and set
to desired line and grade. Theodolite shall view lighted target in lead
or steering pilot tube. Camera shall be fitted to theodolite and transmit
image of crosshair and target onto monitor screen to be viewed in
boring shaft by operator. As operator advances pilot tube through
ground, center of target will drift from crosshair as a result of biased or
slanted leading tip of the pilot tube. Operator shall rotate pilot tube as
required to orient slanted steering tip toward crosshair and continue to
advance pilot tube until it reaches receiving shaft. Check line and
grade of bore at the receiving shaft.
b. Phase 2 – An enlargement casing with an outside diameter up to 1 ½”

larger than Jacking Pipe shall be rigidly connected to final pilot tube
and advanced into earth behind pilot tube. Auger shall be used inside
enlargement casing to remove material being excavated. Auger shall
be contained inside limits of enlargement casing as it progresses along
proposed alignment. A train of temporary steel casings with an
outside diameter very similar to the enlargement casing shall be used
to move enlargement casing from the boring shaft to receiving shaft.
Enlargement casing will cut bore hole from boring shaft to receiving
shaft and temporary casings will case hole as it is cut. Fit each
temporary casing with internal auger to transport excavated material to
boring shaft to be removed from shaft and disposed at an approved
location. Recover pilot tubes in receiving shaft as temporary casings
are installed.
c. Phase 3 – Jacking Pipe shall be installed directly behind final

temporary casing pipe with jacking frame. Casing pipes and augers
shall be recovered in receiving shaft as Jacking Pipe is installed.
2. Two Pass System.
02445-10
a. Phase 1 – Install pilot tube in same manner described in Phase 1 of

Three Pass System.
b. Phase 2 – Install enlargement casing in same manner described in

Phase 2 of Three Phase System. Fit each Jacking Pipe with internal
protective-casing pipe to house auger and prevent damage to Jacking
Pipe. Install Jacking Pipe directly behind enlargement casing with
internal casing rigidly connected to auger chamber of enlargement
casing. Manufacture internal casing such that excavated material does
not leak excessively into Jacking Pipe. Fit internal casing with
protective shoe to protect Jacking Pipe from damage and to support
casing and auger at centerline of pipe. Advance Jacking Pipe along
proposed alignment with jacking frame thus progressing enlargement
casing from boring shaft to receiving shaft with pilot tubes being
recovered in receiving shaft. Excavated material shall be funneled into
and conveyed through internal casing to boring shaft where it shall be
removed from shaft and disposed at approved location. Upon reaching
receiving shaft remove enlargement casing and internal casings and
augers retracted and recovered at boring shaft.
E. Conduct operations in accordance with applicable safety rules and regulations, OSHA
standards, and Contractor's safety plan. Use methods which include due regard for
safety of workmen, adjacent structures, utilities, and public and safe means of ingress
and egress.
F. Maintain clean working conditions wherever there is man access.
G. Perform installation to avoid interference with operation of railroads, highways, or

streets, except as approved by owner of facility.
3.02 GROUND WATER CONTROL
A. Provide ground water control measures in conformance with Section 01578 - Control
of Ground and Surface Water, when necessary to perform Work.
3.03 EQUIPMENT
A. Assume responsibility for selection of equipment which, based on past experience,

has proven to be satisfactory for excavation of soils to be encountered.
B. Employ equipment that will be capable of handling various anticipated ground

conditions and is capable of minimizing loss of soil and shall provide satisfactory
support of excavated face.
C. Tunnel Shield. If hand shield is used for Jack and Mine (with or without attached
mechanized excavating equipment), shield must be capable of handling various
anticipated ground conditions. In addition, shield shall:
02445-11
1. Conform to shape of tunnel with uniform perimeter that is free of projections

that could produce over-excavation or voids. Appropriately sized overcutting
bead may be provided to facilitate steering.
2. Be designed to allow face of tunnel to be closed by use of gates or breasting

boards without loss of ground.
D. The following are minimum requirements for Pilot Tube Guided Boring:
1. Line and Grade Control System: Control system shall include but not be
limited to a theodolite, lighted target, camera, and monitor screen. The
equipment must be capable of installing the pipe to the desired line and grade.
2. Jacking Frame: The jacking frame shall possess adequate strength to advance
the pilot tube, the enlargement casing and the string of Jacking Pipe from the
boring shaft to the receiving shaft. The jacking force shall be easily regulated
down to the safe working load rating of the Jacking Pipe. The frame shall
develop a uniform distribution of jacking forces on the end of the pipe. The
auger motor shall possess adequate torque to steer the pilot tube and adequate
torque and speed to effectively auger the excavated material from the face of
the bore to the boring shaft.
3. Pilot Tube: The pilot tubes shall be constructed of steel in rigid but short
sections to accommodate the boring and receiving shafts. The tubes shall
rigidly connect to each other, the steering tip and the enlargement casing and
have a clear inside diameter large enough to adequately view the lighted
target. The tubes shall withstand the torque encountered in the steering
process.
4. Enlargement Casing: The enlargement casing shall be constructed of steel to a

diameter just larger than the Jacking Pipe and have a leading connection
compatible with the pilot tube. The leading face of the enlargement casing
shall possess several large openings for the soil to enter as it advances along
the proposed alignment. An internal auger chamber shall funnel the excavated
material into the temporary full diameter casings of the Three-Phase Process
or into the internal auger casings of the Two-Phase Process. Structural
members shall connect the leading edge of the casing to the pilot tube
connections.
5. Soil Transportation System: The soil transportation system shall consist of an

auger train operating inside the full diameter temporary steel casing of the
Three-Phase System and an internal casing and auger train operating inside
the Jacking Pipe. The internal casings of the Two-Phase Process shall be
manufactured to minimize leakage of the excavated material into the Jacking
Pipe.
6. Soil Removal: A soil removal system shall be provided to safely remove the
excavated material from the boring shaft to the surface.
02445-12
7. Hydraulic Power Unit: The hydraulic power unit shall rest on the surface and
be connected to the jacking frame by hoses
8. Lubrication System: A lubrication system shall be employed to minimize pipe

friction to ensure that pipe can be installed from the boring shaft to the
receiving shaft within the shaft working load rating of the Jacking Pipe. The
system may also be required to minimize the torque required to transport the
excavated material to the boring shaft.
E. Jacking Equipment: Provide jacking system with the following features:
1. Has main jacks mounted in jacking frame located in boring shaft. Jacks shall
have individual actuation, synchronized actuation, and maximum thrust
control. Jacks shall not exert forces when idle but shall resist displacements.
2. Control gauges shall be accessible to allow the Project Manager’s

representative to check readings during excavation.
3. The maximum thrust on the jacked pipe shall not exceed the safe jacking
capacity of the pipe at any point or time.
4. Has jacking frame which successively pushes a string of connected pipes

following tunneling excavation equipment towards the receiving shaft.
5. Has sufficient jacking capacity to push the tunneling excavation equipment

and string of pipe through ground.
6. Has capacity at least 20 percent greater than calculated maximum jacking

load.
7. Develops uniform distribution of jacking forces on end of pipe by use of

spreader rings and packing.
8. Provides and maintains pipe lubrication system at all times to lower friction
developed on surface of pipe during jacking.
9. Jack Thrust Reactions: Use reaction/thrust walls for pipe jacking that are
adequate to support jacking pressure developed by main jacking system.
Special care shall be taken when setting pipe guide rails in jacking shaft to
ensure correctness of alignment, grade, and stability.
F. Air Quality: Provide equipment to maintain proper air quality of manned tunnel
operations during construction in accordance with OSHA requirements.
G. Where used, enclose lighting fixtures in watertight enclosures with suitable guards.
Provide separate circuits for lighting, and other equipment.
H. Electrical systems shall conform to requirements of National Electrical Code -

NFPA70.
02445-13
3.04 TUNNELING DATA
A. Maintain shift logs of construction events and observations. Project Manager shall
have continuous access to all logs containing the following required information:
1. Location of bore face by station and progress during shift.
3. Completed field forms, such as steering control logs, for checking line and
grade of tunneling operation, showing achieved tolerance relative to design
alignment.
4. Maximum jacking pressures per drive.
5. Lubricant pressures and estimated quantities.
6. Ground water control operations and piezometric levels.
7. Observation of any lost ground or other ground movement.
8. Any unusual conditions or events.
9. Reasons for operational shutdown in the event a drive is halted or stopped.
3.05 EXCAVATION AND JACKING OF PIPE
A. Excavate material just ahead of Jacking Pipe and remove material through Jacking
Pipe as it is forced through ground by jacking, into the space thus provided. In
general, excavated material shall be removed as jacking progresses and no
accumulation of excavated material within Jacking Pipe will be permitted. Should
appreciable loss of ground occur in installations where face of excavation is
accessible, voids shall be backpacked promptly to the extent practicable with
approved soil cement.
B. The distance that excavation shall extend beyond end of Jacking Pipe depends on
character of material encountered but shall not exceed 2 feet.
C. Boring for Jack and Bore and Pilot Tube Guided Boring.
1. Boring shall proceed from shaft provided for boring equipment and workers.
Boring shall be done mechanically using either a pilot tube or auger method.
2. For auger method, jacking pipe of appropriate diameter equipped with cutter
head to mechanically perform excavation shall be used. Augers shall be of
sufficient diameter to convey excavated material to shaft.
3. Remove excavated material from shaft and dispose of properly. Use of water
or other fluids in connection with boring operation will be permitted only to
the extent needed to lubricate cuttings. Water jetting will not be permitted.
02445-14
D. Excavation for Jack and Mine.
1. Perform excavation operations in a manner to minimize movement of ground

in front of and surrounding tunnel. Prevent damage to structures and utilities
above and in vicinity of tunneling operations.
2. Keep face breasted or otherwise supported to prevent falls, excessive raveling,

or erosion. Maintain standby face supports for immediate use when needed.
3. During shut-down periods, support face of excavation by positive means; no

support shall rely solely on hydraulic pressure.
E. Assume responsibility for damage due to settlement from any construction-induced

activities.
F. Jacking Operation.
1. Provide a suitable jacking frame or backstop.
2. Set pipe to be jacked on guides properly braced together, to support section of

pipe and to direct proper line and grade. Place complete jacking assembly to
line up with direction and grade of pipe.
3. Cushion pipe joints as necessary to transmit jacking forces without damage to

pipe or pipe joints, in accordance with pipe manufacturer’s recommendations.
For plywood cushioning material, use ½-inch minimum thickness for pipe
diameter 30 inches or less and use ¾-inch minimum thickness for pipe
diameter greater than 30 inches.
4. Maintain envelope of bentonite slurry around exterior of pipe during jacking

and excavation operation to reduce exterior friction and possibility of pipe
seizing in place.
5. If a recovery access shaft is needed, obtain approval from Project Manager

prior to excavation. Coordinate traffic control measures and utility
adjustments as necessary prior to commencing work.
6. If a section of pipe is damaged during jacking operation, or joint failure

occurs, as evidenced by inspection, visible ground water inflow or other
observations, submit for approval methods for repair or replacement of pipe.
Proposed repair methods shall follow pipe manufacturer’s recommendations.
G. Grouting: Grouting requirements are defined in Section 02431 – Tunnel Grout.
02445-15

any errors or discrepancies to Project Manager.

and maintain construction control points, reference lines and grades for
locating tunnel, sewer pipe, and structures.
3. Establish construction control points sufficiently far from work so as not to be

affected by ground movement caused by pipe-jacked tunneling operations.
B. Benchmark Movement: If settlement of ground surface occurs during construction

which affects accuracy of temporary benchmarks, detect and report such movement
and reestablish temporary benchmarks. Locations of permanent City of Houston
monumentation benchmarks are indicated on Drawings. Advise Project Manager of
any settlement affecting permanent monumentation benchmarks.
C. Guidance System and Alignment Control for Jack and Mine and Jack and Bore.
1. A laser guidance system shall be used to determine location at front of jacked

pipe relative to laser.
2. Guidance system shall include target to indicate deviations in line and grade.
3. Equip system with means by which Project Manager can verify casing
alignment and grade, such as access to laser guidance system.
4. Initial alignment of equipment and final alignment shall be documented.
D. Line and Grade.
1. Check and record alignment for tunnel against above-ground undisturbed

reference after installation of each Jacking Pipe.
2. Record exact face location after each shove to ensure alignment is within
specified tolerances. Make immediate correction to alignment before
allowable tolerances are exceeded.

4. Acceptance criteria for sewer pipe shall be plus or minus 6-inches in

horizontal alignment from theoretical at any point between manholes,
including receiving end, and plus or minus 1 1/2-inches in elevation from
theoretical, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
5. If it is determined that pipe cannot be used, pipe installed outside tolerances

shall be fully grouted and abandoned.
02445-16
3.07 MONITORING
A. Instrumentation Monitoring: Instrumentation requirements are shown on Drawings.

Instrumentation specified shall be accessible at all times to Project Manager.

of ground surface and adjacent structures. Establish vertical control points at a
settlement.

near, or adjacent to construction work. Access shall be provided to work for
such independent installations.
3. Instruments shall be installed in accordance with Drawings and manufacturer's

recommendations.
B. Surface Settlement Monitoring.
1. Establish monitoring points on all Critical Structures.

3. Ground surface elevations shall be recorded on centerline ahead of tunneling

tunnel drive. For Jacking Pipe greater than 60-inch diameter, also record
similar data at approximately 20 feet each side of centerline. Settlement
monitoring points must be clearly marked by studs or paint for ease of
locating.
4. Railroads: Monitor ground settlement of track subbase at centerline of each

track. Follow American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way
Association (AREMA) crossing requirements.
5. Utilities and Pipelines: Monitor ground settlement directly above and at least
10 feet or two excavation diameters, whichever is greater, before and after
utility or pipeline intersection as shown on the Drawings.
C. Reading Frequency and Reporting: Submit to Project Manager records of readings

1. Readings shall be taken:
a. Prior to Zone of Active Excavation reaching that point.
02445-17
b. When tunnel face reaches monitoring point (in plan).
c. When Zone of Active Excavation has passed, and no further

movement is detected.
2. All monitoring readings shall be submitted daily to Project Manager.

which is detected.

survey of remaining monitoring points and submit to Project Manager.
3.09 ACCEPTANCE TESTING FOR SEWERS
A. Acceptance testing is to be carried out by methods described in Section 02533 -

Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewer.
END OF SECTION
02445-18
CITY OF HOUSTON INSTALLATION OF WATER
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION LINES BY SLURRY BORE
SECTION 02447
INSTALLATION OF WATER LINES BY SLURRY BORE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Installing water line pipe up to 20-inches in diameter or casing pipe up to 24-inch

diameter by methods of slurry bore.
B. For pilot tube guided boring installation, refer to Section 02445 – Jack and Bore/Jack
and Mine/Pilot Tube Guided Boring Tunnels.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS:
E. Section 02260 – Trench Safety System
G. Section 02400 – Tunnel Shafts
I. Section 02445 - Jack and Bore/Jack and Mine/Pilot Tube Guided Boring Tunnels
J. Section 02502 – Steel Pipe and Fittings
K. Section 02511 – Water Lines
M. Section 15640 – Joint Bonding and Electrical Isolation
A. Unit Prices.
1. No separate payment will be made for pipe installation by slurry bore

installation under this Section. Include payment in unit price work for Section
02511 – Water Lines.
02447-1
2. Refer to Section 01270 – Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Carrier Pipe: Permanent pipe that is used to convey flows.
B. Casing: Pipe installed to support ground and provide a stable underground excavation
for installation of Carrier Pipe.
C. Obstruction: Objects located wholly or partially within cross-sectional area excavated

that prevent forward movement after all diligent efforts to advance past object have
failed.
D. Slurry Bore Method: Installation of casing or pipe by first drilling smaller pilot hole
from pit to pit, followed by removing excess soil by reaming the hole larger and
installation pipe or conduit by pull-back or jacking method.
E. Work Plan: Written description together with supporting documentation that defines
plans and procedures for slurry bore operations.
A. ASTM D256 - Standard Test Methods For Determining The Izod Pendulum Impact
Resistance Of Plastics.
B. ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method For Tensile Properties Of Plastics.
C. ASTM D648 - Standard Test Method For Deflection Temperature Of Plastics Under
Flexural Load In The Edgewise Position.
D. ASTM D695 - Standard Test Method For Compressive Properties Of Rigid Plastics.
E. ASTM D785 - Standard Test Method For Rockwell Hardness Of Plastics And
Electrical Insulating Materials.
F. ASTM D790 - Standard Test Methods For Flexural Properties Of Unreinforced And
Reinforced Plastics And Electrical Insulating Materials.
G. ISO 9001:2015: Quality Management Systems – Requirements.
H. NSF/ANSI 61: Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects.
I. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Part 1926 – Safety and
Health Regulations for Construction.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
02447-2
A. Conform to requirements of Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures.
B. Qualification Statements: Submit resumes and other evidence of qualifications and

experience for key design and field personnel, including project manager, field
superintendent and equipment operators. Minimum 5 years experience in slurry bore
methods is required.
C. Work Plan: Submit the following items, at a minimum, in the Work Plan, including
drawings:
1. Bore pit layout including locations, sizes, depths and areas for storage
material, and spoil handing.
2. Arrangement drawings and technical specifications of slurry bore machine

and boring unit and experience record with this type of machine. Include the
following information concerning the slurry bore machine: dimensions,
cutters, cutterhead position relative to pipe or casing, pipe or casing and band
diameters, torque, speed and thrust, procedure for replacing cutters, overcut,
and mucking system.
3. Method of maintaining and controlling line and grade of slurry bore operation.
4. Method and details of spoil removal, including equipment type and numbers,
processing, and disposal procedures and locations.
5. Techniques to be used for lubrication including equipment, pumping and

injection procedures, pressure grout types, and mixtures, in accordance with
6. Details of Slurry Boring Method and operation including Carrier Pipe and
Casing, if applicable.
7. Plans for storage and handling of pipe and Casing, if applicable.
8. Slurry mix design, volume and measurement procedures, pumps, piping, valve
arrangements, and pressure gauges.
D. Submit shoring system for bore pits in accordance with Section 02400 – Tunnel
Shafts.
E. For water lines in casing, submit manufacturer’s data on casing spacers.
F. Quality Control Methods: Submit description of quality control methods proposed for
slurry bore operation. Include the following:
1. Supervisory control to ensure that Work is performed in accordance with

Drawings and Specifications.
02447-3
2. Line and grade: Procedures for surveying, controlling, and checking line and
grade, including field forms.
3. Observation and Monitoring: Procedures for preparing and submitting daily

logs of operations, including field forms.
4. Disposal of surface discharge.
5. Groundwater control and drainage.
G. Contingency Plans: The following list includes problem scenarios that may be
encountered during slurry bore operations. Submit contingency plans for dealing with
each problem scenario while satisfying Specifications. Include observations and
measurements required to identify cause of problems.
1. Machine Unable to Advance:
a. Insufficient reamer torque or jacking capacity.
b. Machine malfunction.
c. Excess cutter wear or damage requiring access to replace or repair

cutters.
d. Obstruction in path of cutter head.
2. Spoil Feed Problems:
a. Strong hydrocarbon smell is detected in spoils or in shaft.
b. Obstruction jamming mucking system.
3. Jacking Forces:
a. Jacking forces increase dramatically or suddenly.
b. Jacking forces reach design capacity of casing, jacking frame, or thrust

wall (treat these scenarios as separate incidents).
4. Settlement and Subsidence:
a. Plan to manage unraveling soils.
5. Line and grade tolerances being exceeded:
a. Level system subject to physical disturbance.
6. Pipe has been damaged or has been found to be out of compliance with
Specifications during, or after installation.
02447-4
7. Thrust block (if applicable) deforms excessively under jacking loads or

provides insufficient capacity to advance casing.
1. Select slurry bore equipment suitable for and capable of efficiently advancing
through the geologic conditions anticipated by the Contractor.
2. For all bores, provide a means to measure grade during installation.
3. Methods and equipment shall control surface settlement and heave above the
pipeline to prevent damage to existing utilities, facilities, and improvements.
Limit ground movements (settlement/heave) to values that do not cause
damage or distress to surface features, utilities, or improvements. Monitor
survey control points before, during and after installation.
4. Use thrust block to transfer jacking loads to soil behind jacking shaft.
Construct thrust block face perpendicular to proposed casing alignment.
Design thrust block to withstand the maximum jacking forces developed by
main jacks, without excessive deflection or displacement. Do not exceed
allowable passive earth pressure, with a minimum factor of safety of 2.0 of
forces applied to soil.
1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform slurry bore work by an experienced subcontractor who has at least 5 years of
experience in performing slurry bore work in similar soil conditions and has
completed at least three similar projects involving at least a 250-foot slurry bore on
each project. Provide subcontractor superintendent with at least 5 years of experience
supervising slurry bore operations. Provide slurry bore machine operator(s)
technically trained in operation of proposed slurry bore equipment and having
completed, as primary operator, at least three similar slurry bore projects involving at
least 250-foot slurry bore in similar subsurface conditions on each project. Provide a
site safety representative and personnel responsible for air quality monitoring
experienced in tunnel construction and having current certification by OSHA.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Carrier Pipe: Pipes used as a carrier pipe shall conform Section 02511 – Water Lines.
B. Steel Casing Pipe: Steel Casing to serve as continuous Casing for Carrier Pipe shall
conform to Section 02502 – Steel Pipe and Fittings.
C. Grout: Refer to Section 02431 – Tunnel Grout.
02447-5
D. Casing Spacers and End Seals: Provide carbon steel, polypropylene or polyethylene
casing spacers in accordance with the following requirements. Install in accordance
with manufacturer’s recommendations. Casing Spacer manufacturer to be certified
conformance with ISO 9001:2015.
1. Carbon Steel Spacers:
a. Carbon steel spacers with thermoplastic coating may be provided for

water lines up to 20-inches in diameter.
b. Band width and spacing: For water lines up to 12-inches in diameter,

provide 8-inch wide band. For water lines larger than 12-inches in
diameter, provide 12-inch wide band. Install every 6 to 8 feet along
carrier pipe as recommended by manufacturer.
c. Band: 14 gauge, hot rolled, pickled & oiled steel.
d. Riser: 10 gauge, hot rolled, pickled and oiled steel.
e. Liner: PVC with dielectric strength 60,000 V min. Thickness 0.090-

inches, and Hardness 80 Durometer.
f. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Electro-plated.
g. Runners: Glass-filled polymer plastic with Rockwell Hardness (M)

(ASTM D785) – 101, Tensile Strength (ASTM D638) – 27,000 psi,
Flexural Strength (ASTM D790) – 38,000 psi, Deflection Temperature
at 264 psi – 480 F (ASTM D648).
h. Finish: Thermoplastic powder coating 10-16 mil thickness.
2. Polypropylene Spacers:
a. Polypropylene spacers may be provided for water lines up to 20-inches

in diameter. Install every 8 feet or less according to manufacturer’s
recommendations.
b. Provide non-metallic, UV-resistant, virgin polypropylene, molded in

segments for field assembly without any special tools. Secure
segments around carrier pipe by insertion of a slide-lock.
c. Compressive strength 4,000 psi; Dielectric Strength 365 Volts/mil;

Impact Strength 1.8 ft.-lbs/inch.
d. Skids to be integrally molded with spacer band and shall extend

beyond bell or mechanical joint of the carrier pipe to maintain
clearance.
3. Polyethylene Spacers:
02447-6
a. Polyethylene spacers may be provided for ductile iron pipe up to 12-

inches in diameter and PVC pipe up to 20-inches in diameter. Install
every five feet along carrier pipe as recommended by manufacturer.
b. Injection molded polyethylene material to provide Flexural Strength

(ASTM D790) 4,600 psi; Compressive Strength (ASTM D695) 4,600
psi; Tensile Strength (ASTM D638) 4,600 psi; and Impact Strength
(ASTM D256) 1.3 ft. lb/in.
c. Skids to be integrally molded with spacer band and shall extend

beyond bell or mechanical joint of the carrier pipe to maintain
clearance.
d. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Electro-plated.
4. Refer to City of Houston’s Pre-Approved Products List.
5. End Seals: Refer to Section 15640 – Joint Bonding and Electrical Isolation
and City of Houston’s Pre-Approved Products List.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not discharge surface water inflows into storm sewers, sanitary sewers, drainage
ditches, water bodies, or streets without an approved discharge permit.
B. Conduct operations such that trucks and other vehicles do not interfere with traffic or
create mud, dust, or noise nuisance in streets and to adjacent properties.
C. Promptly clean up, remove, and dispose of spoils spillage, and any material
discharges. Do not discharge slurry or spoils into storm sewers, sanitary sewers,
drainage ditches, water bodies or streets. Conform to Section 01576 – Waste
Material Disposal.
D. Conduct Work so as not to disturb roadways, railways, adjacent structures, private

properties, landscaped areas, or existing utilities. Repair damage immediately to
original or better condition and to the satisfaction of Project Manager.
E. Overnight staging of equipment and security: Utilize temporary fencing to secure

equipment and work zone.
3.02 BORE PITS
A. Locate bore pits within rights-of-way where there is minimum interference with
traffic or access to property.
02447-7
B. Size pits to provide adequate room to meet operational requirements for slurry bore
construction.
C. Install sheeting, lining, shoring and bracing required for protection of workmen and
public in accordance with Section 02260 – Trench Safety System.
D. Provide groundwater control and drainage from pits while work is in progress and
until pit is properly backfilled. Conform to requirements of Section 01578 – Control
of Ground and Surface Water.
E. Provide and properly maintain safety protection against traffic, and accidental or
unauthorized entry. Make provisions to include concrete traffic barrier or other
suitable barrier around periphery of pit as appropriate. Fully cover and secure pits
where no construction activity is in progress.
F. Backfill pits in accordance with Section 02317 – Excavation and Backfill for
Utilities.
3.03 JACKING OPERATIONS
A. Provide suitable jacking frame and thrust block (if required) to carry out Work.
B. Pipe or Casing used in jacking operations must be designed to withstand jacking

forces.
C. Transport pipe or Casing from storage to bore pit without damage. Utilize transport
methods acceptable to Casing manufacturer. Do not use damaged pipe or Casing in
Work. Set the Casing on properly braced and supported guide rails or jacking frame.
D. Distribute axial forces from thrust jacks to pipe or casing uniformly through thrust
ring and cushion material, if applicable, to prevent damage to ends of pipe. Do not
exceed the specified allowable compressive stresses for jacking forces applied to the
pipe or Casing.
E. Jack Casing into position following design line and grade without damaging pipe or
Casing.
3.04 SLURRY BORE METHOD
A. Complete slurry bore in accordance with approved Submittals, and applicable permit
conditions.
B. Conduct slurry bore operations to control surface settlement and heave above pipe or
casing to prevent damage to existing utilities, facilities, and improvements. Repair
damage resulting from construction activities. Pressure grout voids caused by or
encountered during the shaft construction and slurry bore. Modify equipment and
procedures as required to avoid recurrence of excessive settlements or damage.
02447-8
C. Control the advance of bore and casing so as to restrict excavation of the materials to
volume equal to pipe jacked plus allowance for allowable radial overcut, to prevent
loss of ground and settlement or possible damage to overlying structures. Control
advance rate and monitor volume of material excavated and adjust advance rate, as
required, to avoid loss of ground, over excavation, or surface heave.
D. Diameter of bore hole to not exceed outer diameter of pipe plus 2 inches.
E. Completely contain, transport, and dispose of excavated materials and fluid additives
away from construction site. Contain spoils in trucks or other containers. Dumping of
spoil on ground, discharge into sewers or ditches, or discharge into bore pits is not
permitted. Only use disposal sites identified in approved Submittals for muck and
spoil disposal.
F. Lubricants shall be NSF 61 approved. Water used for pipe lubrication shall be clean,
fresh, and free from oil, organic matter, or other deleterious matter and of neutral pH.
A. Establish and protect benchmarks as necessary prior to start of construction.
B. After establishing required benchmarks, use these benchmarks to furnish and

maintain reference lines and grades for slurry bore.
C. Control bore and pipe or Casing advancement to maintain line and grade within
tolerances specified. If the installation is off line or grade, attempt to make necessary
corrections. Mount guidance system independently from thrust block and jacking
frame to maintain alignment if there is movement of equipment during jacking. Stop
boring operations and reset guidance system, if its alignment shifts or is moved off
design alignment and grade for any reason. Check guidance system setup at least once
per shift. Guidance system should only be reset by experienced, competent surveying
personnel in accordance with approved procedures outlined in the Submittals.
D. Monitor line and grade during slurry bore operations. Record deviation with respect
to design line and grade at least once per shift and submit records to Project Manager
as requested. Control line and grade of pipe or Casing to within 6-inch tolerance of
line and grade shown on Drawings.
E. Correct installation, including any necessary redesign and acquisition of necessary

easements, if pipe or Casing installation does not meet specified tolerance.
Performance of corrective work is subject to the written approval of Project Manager.
3.06 GROUTING
A. Refer to Section 02431 – Tunnel Grout.
B. After pipe is installed, block void space around approximately the first 12 inches of
pipe with packed clay to prevent bedding or backfill from entering void around pipe
when pit is backfilled.
02447-9
3.07 INSTALLATION OF CARRIER PIPE
A. For Carrier Pipe inside Casing, follow installation guide for casing spacer installation
provided by the manufacturer. Refer to Section 02517 -Water Line in Tunnels.
3.08 CLEANUP
A. Refer to Section 01576 – Waste Material Disposal.
END OF SECTION
02447-10
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION PIPE AND CASING AUGERING FOR SEWERS
SECTION 02448
PIPE AND CASING AUGERING FOR SEWERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Installation of casing for sewer pipe by dry augering or slurry boring methods,
together with installation of sewer pipe in casing.
B. Installation of sewer pipe by slurry boring methods. Construction casing may be used
at Contractor's option.
D. Section 02260 – Trench Safety System
E. Section 02431 – Tunnel Grout
F. Section 02502 – Steel Pipe and Fittings
G. Section 02531 – Gravity Sanitary Sewers
H. Section 02533 – Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers
A. Unit Prices.
1. Casing, including sewer pipe, installed by augering methods in mid-run of

open cut segments where shown on Drawings, will be measured and paid by
linear foot from end to end of casing. Casing may be installed, at Contractor's
option, at locations other than shown on Drawings, at no additional cost to
City.
2. Sewer pipe installed by augering method in mid-run of open-cut segments

where shown on Drawings, will be measured and paid by linear foot from end
to end of augered section.
02448-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
3. Pipe or casing segments installed by augering methods in locations other than

mid-run of open cut segments and shown on Drawings, will be measured and
paid by linear foot along centerline of completed sewer from centerline to
centerline of manholes to ends of stubs or termination of pipe, and to inside
face of lift stations and other structures.
4. Payment will include and be full compensation for labor, equipment, materials
and supervision for excavation and construction of sewer, complete in place
including disposal of excess materials, shoring, dewatering, utility
adjustments, grouting, backfill, clean-up, and other related work necessary for
construction as indicated on Drawings and specified in this Section.
5. Cost for pits and other excavations are included in unit price for pipe with or
without casing.
6. Trench safety systems for pits are paid as specified in Section 02260 - Trench
Safety Systems.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Augering means either “dry augering” or “slurry augering”.
B. Dry augering is jacking casing while excavating soil at heading and transporting spoil
back through casing by otherwise uncased auger.
C. Slurry Auger Method: Installation of casing or pipe by first drilling small diameter
pilot hole from shaft to shaft, followed by removing excess soil and installing pipe or
conduit by pull back or jacking method.

B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).
A. Conform to Texas State Department of Highways and Public Transportation for

installations under state highways. City will obtain required permits for State
Highway crossings.
B. Installations under Railroads:
02448-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Secure and comply with requirements of right-of-entry for crossing railroad

company's easement or right-of-way from railroad companies affected.
Comply with railroad permit requirements.
2. Use dry auger method only.
3. Damages due to delays caused by railroad requesting work to be done at hours

which will not inconvenience the railroad will be at no additional cost to City.
4. Maintain minimum 35-foot clearance from centerline of tracks.
1.07 SUBMITTAL
B. For installation by augering, submit for review:
1. Description of mechanized excavating equipment.
2. Method of controlling line and grade.
3. Grouting techniques to be used for filling annular void between sewer pipe
and casing, and void between sewer pipe or casing and ground, including
equipment, pumping and injection procedures, pressure grout types, and
mixes.
4. Locations and dimensions of pits.
5. Pit design and construction drawings.
6. Identification of casings required and paid under Contract and casings

installed at Contractor's option.
7. Design of casings.
8. Copy of railroad company permits and right-of-entry.
C. Prepare auger pit and casing design submittals that are site specific. Have auger pit
and casing design submittals signed and sealed by qualified Professional Engineer
registered in State of Texas.
D. Include in construction phase submittals:
1. Daily logs of augering and boring operations.
2. Settlement monitoring data to meet requirements of paragraph 3.05,

Settlement Monitoring.
3. Submit daily logs and settlement monitoring data within 5 days after day of
observation.
02448-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
1.08 CRITERIA FOR DETERMINING CASING INSTALLATION LOADS
A. Select and design casing pipe and pipe joints to carry thrust of jacks or loads due to
pulling mechanism in combination with overburden, earth and hydrostatic loads.
Select casings for dry augering to withstand action of auger without damage.
B. Use Professional Engineer to determine design stresses, design deflections and factors
of safety for design of casing. Present such determination as part of design submittal.
Apply the following maximum casing pipe stresses and deflections to casings shown
on Drawings:
1. Design stress in pipe wall: 50 percent of minimum yield point of steel or

18,000 psi, whichever is less, when subjected to applicable loading conditions.
2. Wall thickness: Maximum allowable deflection which does not exceed 3

percent of nominal casing diameter.
C. Use Cooper E-80 locomotive loading distributions as criteria for railroad crossings in
accordance with AREMA specifications for culverts. In design, account for additive
loadings due to multiple tracks.
D. Use HL-93 vehicle loading distributions as criteria for truck loading in accordance
with AASHTO.
E. When not specifically indicated on Drawings, select casing diameter to permit

practical installation (including skids when applicable) and grouting.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Provide casing pipe which is straight, circular in section, uncoated, welded steel pipe,
in accordance with Section 02502 - Steel Pipe and Fittings.
B. Provide sewer pipe in accordance with Section 02531 - Gravity Sanitary Sewers. Do
not use high density polyethylene pipe for augering.
C. Provide restrained-joint sewer pipe when installing sewer pipe in slurry bored holes
by pull- back method.
D. Supply grout as specified in Section 02431 - Tunnel Grout.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 LOCATION AND SIZE OF AUGER PITS
02448-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Show location of auger pits on auger pit construction drawings. Locate auger pits for
slurry boring so that distance between pits is no greater than 80 feet; and for dry
augering not more than 120 feet apart.
B. Locate auger pits and associated work areas to avoid blocking driveways and cross
streets and to minimize disruption to business and commercial interests. Avoid auger
pit locations near areas identified as potentially contaminated.
C. Make size adequate for construction of structures indicated on Drawings. Provide

adequate room to meet Contractor's operational requirements for augering.
D. Provide portable concrete traffic barrier around periphery of pit, meeting applicable
safety standards. Properly maintain barrier throughout period pit remains open. Angle
traffic barriers in direction of lane flow; do not place barriers perpendicular to on-
coming traffic.
E. Provide full cover or other security fencing for each access pit in which there is no
construction activity or which is unattended by Contractor's personnel.
3.02 DRY AUGERING OF CASING
A. Provide jacks, mounted on frame or against backstop, of capacity suitable for forcing
excavating auger and casing through soil conditions to be encountered. Operate jacks
so that even pressure is applied to casing.
B. Provide steerable front section of casing to allow vertical grade adjustments. Provide
water level or other means to allow monitoring of grade elevation of auger casing.
C. Bentonite slurry may be used to lubricate casing during installation. Use of water to
facilitate removal of spoil is permitted; however, water jetting for excavation of soil is
not allowed when jacking casing.
D. Tolerances from lines and grades shown on Drawings for gravity sewer pipe installed
in casing are plus or minus 6 inches in horizontal alignment, and plus or minus 1-1/2
inches in elevation.
3.03 SLURRY BORING OF CASING OR PIPE
A. Drill small diameter pilot hole and check for line and grade at receiving end. Redrill
pilot hole when bored pipe does not meet specified tolerances.
B. Using pilot hole as guide bore larger diameter hole of sufficient size for pipe or
casing installation. Water jetting is not permitted.
C. Bentonite slurry may be used to maintain stable hole and furnish lubrication for pipe
or casing installation.
02448-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
D. Tolerances from lines and grades shown on Drawings for installed sewer pipe are
plus or minus 6 inches in horizontal alignment and plus or minus 1-1/2 inches in
elevation.
E. Completely fill annular space between sewer pipe and surrounding soil or casing with
grout, without displacing pipe during grouting operation.
3.04 SEWER PIPE IN CASING
A. Grout annular void between sewer pipe and casing from end to end of casing. Block
and brace sewer pipe to prevent movement during grout placement and to maintain
specified line and grade. Grout as specified in Section 02431 - Tunnel Grout.
3.05 SETTLEMENT MONITORING
A. Monitor ground surface elevation along length of augering operation. Locate and
record settlement monitoring points with respect to construction baseline and
elevations. Record elevations to accuracy of 0.01 feet for each monitoring point
location. Establish monitoring points at locations and by methods that protect them
from damage by construction operations, tampering, or other external influences. As
minimum, locate survey points as follows:
1. For road crossings: Centerline and each shoulder
2. Railroads: Track subbase at centerline of each track
3. Utilities and Pipelines: Directly above and 10 feet before and after utility or
pipeline intersection
4. Long bores under improved areas such as pavements: Ground surface

elevations must be recorded on centerline ahead of augering operations at
locations not to exceed 50 feet apart (including points located for roads,
railroads, utilities, and pipelines), or at least three locations per augering drive
B. Reading Frequency and Reporting. Take settlement survey readings:
1. Prior to auger excavation reaching point
2. After auger reaches monitoring point in plan
3. After grouting of ground supporting pipe or casing is complete
C. Immediately report to Project Manager movement, cracking, or settlement which is

detected.
D. Following substantial completion but prior to final completion, make final survey of
monitoring points.
02448-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Remove and dispose of spoil from job site in accordance with Section 01576 - Waste
Material Disposal.
3.07 LEAKAGE TESTING
A. Test sanitary sewers for leakage by low pressure air methods in accordance with
Section 02533 - Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewer.
END OF SECTION
02448-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION DRILLED SHAFT FOUNDATIONS
SECTION 02465
DRILLED SHAFT FOUNDATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Construction of foundations consisting of reinforced concrete drilled shafts.
E. Section 01576 – Waste Material Disposal
F. Section 01785 – Project Record Documents
G. Section 03211 – Reinforcing Steel
H. Section 03310 – Structural Concrete
A. Unit Prices.
1. No separate payment will be made for drilled shaft foundations under this
Section. Include cost in lump sum payment for structure requiring drilled shaft
foundations.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
02465-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Submit work plan for each structure with complete written description which
identifies details of proposed method of construction and sequence of operations for
construction relative to drilled shaft activities. Descriptions, with supporting
illustrations, shall be sufficiently detailed to demonstrate to Project Manager that
procedures meet requirements of Specifications and Drawings.
C. Submit project record documents under provisions of Section 01785 - Project Record
Documents. Record locations of drilled shafts, as installed referenced to survey
benchmarks. Include location of utilities encountered or rerouted. Give horizontal
dimensions, elevations, inverts and gradients.
A. ACI 336.1 - Standard Specification for Construction of Drilled Piers.
B. TxDOT Standard Specification Item 416 - Drilled Shaft Foundations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT
A. Perform excavation with equipment suitable for achieving requirements of this

Specification.
2.02 MATERIAL
A. For cast-in-place concrete, use Class A concrete. Refer to Section 03310 - Structural
Concrete.
B. For reinforcing steel, refer to Section 03211 - Reinforcing Steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Conduct an inspection to determine condition and locations of existing structures and

other permanent installations, prior to commencing work.
3.02 EXCAVATION
A. Perform excavation required for drilled cylindrical shafts, at locations shown on

Drawings through whatever materials encountered, to dimensions and elevations
shown or required by site conditions. When satisfactory material is not encountered at
plan depth, bottom of shaft will be adjusted or foundation altered, as determined by
Project Manager, to satisfactorily comply with design requirements.
02465-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Do not make shaft excavations within 3 shaft diameters (edge to edge) of shafts
which have been concreted within previous 24 hours.
C. Inspect drilled shaft excavations for verticality and side sloughing. Verticality is
specified at one inch in 10 feet of shaft length. Check to full depth of dry auguring
prior to introducing drilling mud. Straighten or add suitable reinforcing steel to shafts
not meeting specified tolerance.
D. Slurry is to contain 4 to 8 percent by weight of bentonite additive and satisfy slurry

specifications set forth in ACI 336.1, Section 2.3.5.2e. These requirements are more
stringent than TxDOT Standard Specification Item 416.3.1. Stricter slurry
specifications are required to assure suspension of detritus from drilling operations,
and to ensure adequate cleaning of slurry prior to concreting. Cleaning of slurry is
important to prevent deposition of detritus on reinforcement cages and ensure that
inclusions of detritus will not be formed within concrete mass.
E. At final bearing elevation, clean bottom of each shaft and remove seepage water for
examination by Project Manager before reinforcing steel and concrete is placed.
Suitable access and lighting for proper inspection of completed excavation is to be
provided. Reinforcing steel and concrete is to be placed in drilled shaft without delay
after approval of excavation by Project Manager.
3.03 DRILLED SHAFT CONSTRUCTION
A. Drilled shaft construction and installation is to follow TxDOT Standard Specification

Item 416 (with exceptions noted below) and ACI 336.1.
B. Before placing concrete, clean out shaft bottom with drilling bucket in order to
remove sediments which may not be displaced by concrete. Clean shaft bottom with
“clean-out” bucket until rotation on bottom without crowd (i.e., penetration under
force) produces little spoil. Probing after cleaning out is essential to verify condition
of base of shaft.
C. Concrete is to conform to requirements of ACI 336.1 Section 2.3.5.5.
D. Concrete is to be placed continuously in shaft to construction joint indicated on

Drawings or as directed in TxDOT Standard Specification Item 416.3.3. Concrete is
to be placed through suitable tube or tremie to prevent segregation of materials.
Tremie pipe diameter is to be at least 8 times as large as largest concrete aggregate
size.
E. Computation of final concrete volume for each shaft is to be made. Core and check
the integrity of shafts taking an unreasonably high or low volume of concrete.
F. If caving soil conditions or excessive groundwater is encountered, use of temporary

casing is permitted to prevent caving of material around shaft and to control seepage
of groundwater into excavation.
02465-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
G. Casing material is to be metal of ample strength to withstand handling stresses,

pressure of concrete and of surrounding earth or backfill materials and is to be water-
tight. Casing shall be smooth, clean and free of accumulations of hardened concrete.
Outside diameter of casing is not to be less than specified diameter of drilled shaft.
H. Elapsed time is not to exceed one hour from beginning of concrete placement in cased
portion of shaft, until extraction of casing is begun.
I. Withdraw temporary casings as shaft is filled with concrete, or immediately following

concreting operation. Bottom of casing is to always remain at least one foot below
level of concrete during placement to overcome hydrostatic pressure. Smoothly
extract casing with vibratory hammer. Casing extraction is to be at slow, uniform rate
with pull in line with vertical axis of shaft. Leave no casing in place.
J. If upward movement of concrete or reinforcing steel occurs inside casing at beginning

of pulling operation or at anytime during pulling, stop pulling immediately and leave
casing in place.
K. If casing must be left in place, Project Manager is to be informed to determine shaft

capacity calculations.

Services.
A. Dispose of excess materials in accordance with requirements of Section 01504 -

Temporary Facilities and Control or Section 01576 - Waste Material Disposal.
END OF SECTION
02465-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION CAISSON FOR LIFT STATION
SECTION 02476
CAISSON FOR LIFT STATION
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Constructing external walls of lift station wet well structures by caisson method,
including base slab and excavation cell partitions. Valve/pump chamber to be
constructed by open cut.
C. Section 01450 – Contractor's Quality Control
D. Section 01576 – Waste Material Disposal
E. Section 01578 – Control of Ground and Surface Water
F. Section 02316 – Excavation and Backfill for Structures
I. Section 03211 – Reinforcing Steel
J. Section 03310 – Structural Concrete
K. Section 15140 – Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Restraints
A. Unit Prices.
1. No separate payment will be made for lift station construction using caisson
method. Include cost for caisson construction in lump sum for lift station.
2. No separate measurement will be made for payment of concrete in wet well

caisson except listed in an approved schedule of values.
02476-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
1.04 DEFINITION
A. Caisson is defined as external walls of concrete structure, together with excavation

cell partition walls, erected at-grade or in starter pit and sunk by gravity to final
position through excavation inside structure under dry or wet conditions. Complete
caisson includes structural base slab. Caisson walls provide ground support during
construction and for permanent installation.
B. Dry construction means that Contractor operates sufficient external ground water
control system to maintain ground water level and piezometric head safely below
excavation bottom within caisson.
C. Wet construction means that external hydrostatic ground water pressure is

counteracted by water or slurry within caisson.
A. ASTM D 698 - Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lb/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)).
1.06 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit safety plan to meet OSHA requirements. These procedures will not be subject
to approval by Project Manager and are for record purposes only. Address in plan, as
minimum but not limited to the following:
1. Protection against caisson instability, soil instability, and ground water inflow.
2. Safety for caisson access and exit, including ladders, stairs, walkways, and
hoists.
3. Protection against equipment operations, and for lifting and hoisting

equipment and material.
4. Support of surcharge weights.
5. Ventilation systems.
6. Monitoring for hazardous gases.
7. Protection against flooding of caisson and inflow into sewers when connected
to caisson structure.
8. Protection of workers and public, including traffic barriers, accidental or

unauthorized entry, and falling objects.
02476-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
9. Safety supervising responsibilities.
C. Building and Structures Assessment. Submit for review prior to construction,

Building and Structures Assessment Plan. Provide preconstruction and post-
construction assessment reports for buildings and structures located within distance
equal to depth of caisson but at least 50 feet in plan from proposed caisson perimeter.
Include photographs or video of existing damage to structures in vicinity of caisson in
assessment reports.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE
A. Concrete is to be in accordance with Section 03310 - Structural Concrete.
2.02 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcement is to be in accordance with Section 03211 - Reinforcing Steel.
2.03 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Embedded items are to be in accordance with Section 15140 - Pipe Hangers,

Supports, and Restraints.
2.04 BACKFILL
A. Select material is to be in accordance with Section 02316 - Excavation and Backfill

for Structures.
B. Cement stabilized sand is to be in accordance with Section 02321 - Cement Stabilized

Sand.
2.05 GROUT
A. Use grout conforming to Section 02431 - Tunnel Grout.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SITE PREPARATION
A. Perform site preparation for site clearing and for grading of site to required elevation.
Provide for site drainage.
B. Relocate and protect utilities to remain that may be affected by caisson construction
area, including starter pit.
C. Install security fencing around caisson construction areas to prevent accidental or

unauthorized entry.
02476-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
D. Provide for control of ground water and surface water according to Section 01578 -
Control of Ground and Surface Water.
E. Compact disturbed soils to 95 percent of maximum density as determined by ASTM

D 698. Compact soil at moisture content sufficient to develop the required density.
3.02 CAISSON WALL CONSTRUCTION
A. Place concrete as specified in Section 03310 - Structural Concrete.
B. Inspect concrete surfaces after form removal and repair defects before wall section is
sunk into ground.
3.03 CAISSON CLEAN UP AND INSPECTION
A. Clean interior of caisson after seal slab has been poured. Remove soil, mud, slurries,
spilled grout or concrete, or other materials not part of structure from caisson and
clean surfaces.
B. Inspect caisson for possible structural damage or damage to embedded items

occurring during excavation and caisson sinking. Notify and allow Project Manager
to witness caisson inspection. Repair and replace damage before proceeding with
construction.
3.04 CAISSON CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum acceptable deviation of caisson from vertical is 1 inch in 5 feet.
B. Maximum acceptable horizontal deviation from design location of center of caisson at

ground surface level is 12 inches.
C. Install elevation of base of caisson structure equal to or lower than elevation shown in
Drawings. Show top of caisson structure elevation on Drawings.
D. Provide block-outs with allowance for pipe entry deviations of plus or minus 1.5
inches vertically and plus or minus 6 inches horizontally, plus caisson construction
tolerances.
E. Tolerances defined above are only acceptable provided that Contractor can adjust
sewer connections, structural, mechanical and electrical components to resolve
deviation from plumpness and horizontal or vertical location as approved by Project
Manager. Adjustments must be made without adversely affecting operation or
maintenance of lift station.
F. Monitor caisson installation to verify that no settlement or heave is observed for 10

consecutive days starting not later than 50 days after structural completion.
3.05 BACKFILL
02476-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Remove starter pit shoring to depth of at least 8 feet below ground surface and for at
least 5 feet from pipes and tunnels penetrating shoring. Remove shoring concurrent
with backfilling operations. Perform shoring removal and backfilling so that stability
of pit is maintained.
B. Compact backfill material in accordance with Sections 02316 - Excavation and

Backfill for Structures.
3.06 MONITORING
A. Settlement. Install series of settlement monitoring points on ground and structures

within area of potential influence due to soil movements at caisson, before start of
caisson or starter pit construction.
1. As minimum, equally space 4 monitoring points around caisson at distance of

15 feet and 4 more at distance 30 feet from caisson for total of 8 monitoring
points.
2. Survey monitoring point elevations before start of caisson excavation and

weekly thereafter until structure has been completed and dewatering
terminated.
B. Caisson
1. Determine plumpness of caisson at least once each shift at two locations, 90

degrees apart, during caisson sinking operations until caisson is secured by
grout and base slab hardened.
2. As soon as caisson has been secured, install 3 benchmarks, 120 degrees apart,
on top concrete placement for settlement monitoring of installed caisson.
Transfer benchmarks to higher elevation on structure as required due to
continued lift station construction. Continue weekly monitoring of settlement
points until 60 days after completed construction of structure.
3. Install and monitor borehole heave points in caisson for dry construction as
defined on Drawings. Survey heave points before excavation starts and upon
retrieval when final excavation bottom has been reached.
C. Submit monitoring results to Project Manager weekly.
3.07 CAISSON SURVEY
A. When caisson has been secured, seal slab poured, and, in case of wet construction,
when fluid has been pumped out, survey installed caisson for compliance with
tolerances defined in Paragraph 3.04, Caisson Construction Tolerances. Include in
Survey:
1. Location of center of caisson at ground level.
02476-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Elevation of top and bottom of caisson and structural slab connection.
3. Elevation and locations of penetrations and embedded items and other support
points for lift station installation completion.
4. Deviation from plumb from caisson top to structural slab at two locations 90
degrees apart.
A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 03310 - Structural
Concrete and Section 01450 - Contractor's Quality Control.
A. Remove excavated material from job site in accordance with Section 01576 - Waste
Material Disposal.
END OF SECTION
02476-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
SECTION 02501
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Ductile iron pipe and fittings for water lines, wastewater force mains, gravity sanitary
sewers, and storm sewers.
C. Section 02105 – Chemical Sampling and Analysis
D. Section 02511 – Water Lines
E. Section 02515 – Hydrostatic Testing of Pipelines
F. Section 02531 – Gravity Sanitary Sewers
G. Section 02532 – Sanitary Sewer Force Mains
H. Section 02553 – Point Repairs and Obstruction Removals
I. Section 02631 – Storm Sewers
J. Section 16640 – Cathodic Protection for Pipelines
A. Unit Prices.
1. No separate payment will be made for ductile iron pipe and fittings under this
Section, with the exception of extra fittings in place. Include cost in unit
prices for work as specified in the following Sections, as applicable:
a. Section 02511 - Water lines
b. Section 02531 - Gravity Sanitary Sewers
c. Section 02532 - Sanitary Sewer Force Mains
d. Section 02631 - Storm Sewers
02501-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Extra Ductile Iron Compact Fittings in Place shall be for additional fittings required
to complete job. This is not to exclude extension of pipe across driveway or
intersection for purpose of terminating line in more advantageous position. This
determination shall be at discretion of Project Manager. This bid item includes
additional fittings as may be necessary to complete job in conformance with intent of
Drawings.
C. Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). If Contract is Stipulated Price Contract, payment for
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A 21.4 (AWWA C 104) - Standard for Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron
Pipe and Fittings.
B. ANSI A 21.10 (AWWA C 110) - Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3-
in. through 48-in.
C. ANSI A 21.11 (AWWA C 111) - Standard for Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron
Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
D. ANSI A 21.15 (AWWA C 115) - Standard for Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe With
Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges.
E. ANSI A 21.16 (AWWA C 116) - Protective Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coating for the
Interior and Exterior Surfaces of Ductile Iron and Grey Iron Fittings.
F. ANSI A 21.50 (AWWA C 150) - Standard for Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe.
G. ANSI A 21.51 (AWWA C 151) - Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast .
H. ANSI A 21.53 (AWWA C 153) - Standard for Ductile Iron Compact Fittings, 3
inches through 24 inches and 54 inches through 64 inches for Water Service.
I. ANSI/AWS D11.2 –Guide for Welding Iron Castings.
J. ASME B 16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
K. ASTM D 1248 - Standard Specification Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion

Materials for Wire and Cable.
L. ASTM F 477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining
Plastic Pipe.
M. ASTM G 62 - Standard Test Methods for Holiday Detection in Pipeline Coatings.
N. AWWA C 104/ANSI A 21.4 - Standard for Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron

Pipe and Fittings.
02501-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
O. AWWA C 110/ANSI A 21.10 - Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3-

in. through 48-in.
P. AWWA C 111/ANSI A 21.11 - Standard for Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron
Q. AWWA C 115/ANSI A 21.15 - Standard for Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe With Ductile-
Iron or Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges.
R. AWWA C 116/ANSI A21.16 - Protective Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coating for the
Interior and Exterior Surfaces of Ductile Iron and Grey iron Fittings.
S. AWWA C 150/ANSI A 21.50 - Standard for Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe.
T. AWWA C 151/ANSI A 21.51 - Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast.
U. AWWA C 153/ANSI A 21.53 - Standard for Ductile Iron Compact Fittings, 3 inches
through 24 inches and 54 inches through 64 inches for Water Service.
V. AWWA C 105 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems.
W. AWWA C 300 - Standard for Prestressed Concrete Pressure Pipe, Steel-Cylinder

Type, for Water and other Liquids.
X. AWWA C 600 - Standard for Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their
Appurtenances.
Y. AWWA M 41 – Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings.
Z. SSPC-SP 6 - Steel Structures Painting Council, Commercial Blast Cleaning.
AA. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association (AREMA)

BB. American Association of State Highway Transportation Officials (AASHTO).
CC. DIPRA – Thrust Restraint Design for Ductile Iron Pipe.
DD. NSF/ANSI 61 – Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. For pipes 16 inches and greater submit shop drawings signed and sealed by
Professional Engineer registered in State of Texas showing the following:
1. Manufacturer's pipe design calculations.
02501-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Provide lay schedule of pictorial nature indicating alignment and grade, laying
dimensions, fitting, flange, and special details, with plan view of each pipe
segment sketched, detailing pipe invert elevations, horizontal bends,
restrained joints, and other critical features. Indicate station numbers for pipe
and fittings corresponding to Drawings. Do not start production of pipe and
fittings prior to review and approval by Project Manager. Provide final
approved lay schedule on CD-ROM in Adobe portable document format
(*.PDF).
3. Calculations and limits of thrust restraint shall be based on AWWA M41 or

DIPRA Thrust Restraint for Ductile Iron Pipe, latest edition.
4. Class and length of joint.
C. Submit manufacturer's certifications that ductile iron pipe and fittings meet provisions
of this Section and have been hydrostatically tested at factory and meet requirements
of ANSI A 21.51.
D. Submit certifications that pipe joints have been tested and meet requirements of ANSI
A 21.11.
E. Submit affidavit of compliance in accordance with ANSI A21.16 for fittings with
fusion bonded epoxy coatings or linings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Ductile Iron Pipe Barrels: Shall conform to AWWA C115, C150 and C151 and bear
mark of Underwriters’ Laboratories approval. Provide minimum thickness Class 52
for sanitary sewers. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, use a minimum Pressure
Class 250 for water lines less than or equal to 20-inch diameter. For 24-inch and
larger, design for project specific hydraulics as per AWWA C150. Use minimum
Pressure Class 350 for water lines in casing or trenchless construction and for flanged
pipe.
B. Provide pipe sections in standard lengths, not less than 18 feet long, except for special
fittings and closure sections as indicated on shop drawings.
C. For 24-inch and larger water lines, furnish and install cathodic protection in
accordance with Section 16640 - Cathodic Protection for Pipelines
D. For sanitary sewer lines, modify pipe for cathodic protection in accordance with
Section 16640 - Cathodic Protection for Pipelines. In lieu of furnishing ductile iron
pipe with cathodic protection system, furnish ductile iron pipe with polyethylene
encasement, provided the following criteria is met:
1. Provide minimum thickness class.
02501-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Provide polyethylene encasement material and installation in accordance with

AWWA C105, and backfill as specified. Minimum of two complete wraps of
8-mil-thick polyethylene.
3. Use polyethylene encasement for open cut installations only. For augered
sections or sections installed inside a casing, provide coating in accordance
with paragraph 2.05 D.1.
4. Adhere to other requirements specified herein (e.g., insulation kits, etc.).
E. For use of pressure class pipe for water lines, design pipe and fittings to withstand
most critical simultaneous application of external loads and internal pressures. Base
design on minimum of AASHTO HL-93 loading, AREMA E-80 loads and depths of
bury as indicated on Drawings. Design pipes with Marston's earth loads for a
transition width trench for zero to 16 feet of cover. Use Marston's earth loads for a
trench width of O.D. (of pipe) + 4 feet for pipe greater than 16 feet of cover. Use
Marston's equations for a trench condition in both open-cut and tunnel applications.
Design for most critical groundwater level condition. Pipe design conditions:
1. Working pressure = 150 psi.
2. Hydrostatic field test pressure = 150 psi.
3. Maximum pressure due to surge = 225 psi.
4. Minimum Pressure due to surge = -10 psi.
5. Design tensile stress due to surge or hydrostatic test pressure: No greater than
50% minimum yield.
6. Design bending stress due to combined earth loads and surge or hydrostatic
test pressure: No greater than 48,000 psi.
7. Unit weight of fill 2' 120 pcf.
8. Deflection lag factor (Dl) = 1.2.
9. Bedding constant (K) = 0.1.
10. Moment coefficient = 0.16.
11. Fully saturated soil conditions hw=h=depth of cover above top of pipe.
F. Hydrostatic Test of Pipe: AWWA C 151, Section 5.2.1, at point of manufacture. Hold
test for a minimum 2 minutes for thorough inspection of pipe. Repair or reject pipe
revealing leaks or cracks.
02501-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
G. Pipe Manufacturer for large diameter water lines: Minimum of 5 years of successful
pipe installations in continuous service. Manufacturer must maintain on site or in
plant enough fittings to satisfy the following requirements:
Line Diameter Required Bends*
20 and 24 inches Four 45° bends per 5,000 LF of water line
> 24 inches Four 22.5° bends per 10,000 LF of water line

*Based on total length of contract (minimum of four). Any combination of bends
may be substituted at manufacturer's option (i.e. two 22.5° bends are equivalent
to one 45° bend) and will be counted as one fitting.
Manufacturer or supplier must be capable of delivering bends to job site within 12

hours of notification. Use fittings at direction of Project Manager where unforeseen
obstacles are encountered during construction. These fittings are in addition to any
fittings called out in construction documents and must be available at all times.
H. Provide flange adapter with insulating kit as required when connecting new piping to
existing piping and piping of different materials, unless otherwise approved by
Project Manager.
I. Clearly mark pipe section to show location and thickness/pressure class color coded.
J. No welding will be permitted on Ductile Iron Pipe except at restrained joint spigots or
fittings as per ANSW/AWS D11.2. No field welding is allowed.
2.02 JOINTS
A. Joint Types: ANSI A 21.11 push-on; ANSI A 21.11 mechanical joint; or ANSI A
21.16 flanged end. Provide push-on joints unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings
or required by these specifications.
1. For sanitary sewer lines with bolted joints, conform to requirements of

AWWA C111; provide minimum 304 stainless steel for restraint joints.
2. For water lines with bolted joints, conform to requirements of AWWA C111;
provide Denso or approved equal petrolatum based tape coating system for
exposed portion of nuts and bolts.
B. Where required by Drawings, provide approved restrained joints for buried service.
Refer to City’s List of Approval Products for approved joint restraint mechanisms.
C. Threaded or grooved-type joints which reduce pipe wall thickness below minimum
required are not acceptable.
02501-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
D. Provide for restrained joints designed to meet test pressures required under Section
02515 - Hydrostatic Testing of Pipelines or Section 02532 - Sanitary Sewer Force
Mains, as applicable. Provide restrained joints for test pressure or maximum surge
pressure as specified, whichever is greater for water lines. Do not use passive
resistance of soil in determining minimum restraint lengths.
E. Electrical Bond Wires: Bond Wires; use stranded, copper cable furnished with high
molecular weight polyethylene insulation (HMWPE). Use wire gauge (AWG) as
shown on Drawings.
F. Make curves and bends by deflecting joints. Do not exceed maximum deflection
recommended by pipe manufacturer for pipe joints or restraint joints. Submit details
of other methods of providing curves and bends for consideration by Project
Manager. When other methods are deemed satisfactory, install at no additional cost to
City.
2.03 GASKETS
A. Furnish, when no contaminant is identified, plain rubber (SBR) gasket material in

accordance with ANSI A21.11 or ASTM F 477; for flanged joints 1/8-inch-thick
gasket in accordance with ANSI A 21.15.
B. For pipes to be installed in potentially contaminated areas, see Specification Section

02105 – Chemical Sampling and Analysis.
C. For Pipes to be installed in any other contaminated areas, use gaskets as

recommended by the Pipe Manufacturer, Engineer of the Record and approved by
City Engineer prior to installation.
2.04 FITTINGS
A. Use fittings of same size as pipe. Reducers are not permitted to facilitate an off-size
fitting. Reducing bushings are also prohibited. Make reductions in piping size by
reducing fittings. Line and coat fittings as specified for pipe they connect to.
B. Push-on Fittings: ANSI A 21.10; ductile iron ANSI A 21.11 joints, gaskets, and
lubricants; pressure rated at 250 psig.
C. Flanged Fittings: ANSI 21.10; ductile iron ANSI A 21.11 joints, gaskets, and
lubricants; pressure rated at 250 psig.
D. Mechanical Joint Fittings: ANSI A 21.11; pressure rated at 250 psi.
E. Ductile Iron Compact Fittings: Shall conform to AWWA C153 and shall be:
1. Fusion bonded epoxy lined or
2. Cement mortar lined.
02501-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
F. For tangential flanged outlets shown on Drawings, substitute with a tee with an
equivalent sized outlet unless otherwise approved by Project Manager.
2.05 COATINGS AND LININGS
A. Water line Interiors: ANSI A21.4, cement lined with seal coat; ANSI A 21.16 fusion
bonded epoxy coating for interior; comply with NSF 61.
B. Sanitary Sewer and Force Main Interiors:
1. Preparation: Commercial blast cleaning conforming to SSPC-SP6.
2. Liner thickness: Nominal 40 mils, for pipe barrel interior; minimum 6 to 10

mils at gasket groove and outside spigot end to 6-inches back from end.
3. Testing: ASTM G 62, Method B for voids and holidays; provide written
certification.
4. Acceptable Lining Materials:
a. Provide approved virgin polyethylene conforming to ASTM D 1248,

with inert fillers and carbon black to resist ultraviolet degradation
during storage; heat bonded to interior surface of pipe and fittings.
b. Ceramic Epoxy – Protecto 401 or approved equal.
C. Sanitary Sewer Point Repair Pipe: For pipes which will be lined with high density
polyethylene liner pipe or cured-in-place liner, provide cement-lined with seal coat in
accordance with ANSI A 21.4. For pipes which will not be provided with named
liner, provide pipe as specified in Paragraph 2.05B, Sanitary Sewer and Force Main
Interiors.
D. Exterior:
1. Encasement requirement for water lines.
a. Open cut construction method: Provide double wrap polyethylene

encasement in accordance with AWWA C105.
b. Auger or casing construction method:
(1) Double wrap with polyethylene encasement in accordance with

AWWA C105. Place circumferential wraps of tape or plastic
tie straps at two-foot intervals along the barrel of the pipe, and
thoroughly seal each end of the polyethylene tube.
2. Sanitary Sewers: Prime coat and outside asphaltic coating conforming to

ANSI A21.10, ANSI A21.15, or ANSI A21.51 for pipe and fittings in open
cut excavation and in casings.
02501-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
E. For buried sanitary sewer pipes not cathodically protected, provide polyethylene wrap
unless otherwise specified or shown. Conform to requirements of AWWA C105.
F. For flanged joints in buried service, provide petrolatum wrapping system, Denso, or
equal, for the complete joint and alloy steel fasteners. Alternatively, sanitary sewer
lines may use bolts made of Type 304 stainless steel.
G. Pipe to be installed in potentially contaminated areas shall have coatings and linings
recommended by the manufacturer for maximum resistance to the contaminants
identified in the Phase II Environmental Site Assessment Report. If no alternative
coating is specified for water lines, provide polyethylene wrap in potentially
contaminated areas.
2.06 MANUFACTURERS
A. Use pre-approved manufacturers listed in City of Houston approved products.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Conform to installation requirements of Sections 02511 - Water Lines, 02531 -

Gravity Sanitary Sewers, 02532 - Sanitary Sewer Force Mains 02631 - Storm Sewers
and 02553 - Point Repairs and Obstruction Removal, except as modified in this
Section.
B. Install in accordance with AWWA C 600 and manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Install double wrap polyethylene encasement in conformance with requirement of

AWWA C105.
D. Holiday Testing.
1. Fusion Bonded Epoxy: Conform to requirements for new fittings in ANSI A

21.16.
E. Provide electrical continuity bonding across buried mechanical and push-on joint
assemblies, except where insulating flanges are required by Drawings.
1. Provide minimum number of bond wires shown on Drawings. Remove one

inch of HMWPE insulation from each of bond wire prior to attaching.
2. Secure wire onto pipe using approved Thermite Welding procedures.
3. Coat bare metal and weld metal after weld is secure. Use coal-tar compound
or other compatible coating. For polyurethane coated pipe, use compatible
polyurethane coating.
02501-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
4. Visually inspect Thermite Weld connections for electrical continuity, strength

and suitable coating prior to backfilling or placing pipe in augered hole or
casing.
3.02 FIELD REPAIR OF COATINGS
A. Fusion Bonded Epoxy: Conform to requirements for new fittings in ANSI A 21.16.
END OF SECTION
02501-10
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
SECTION 02502
STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Steel pipe and fittings for water lines for aerial crossings, aboveground piping, and
encasement sleeves. Do not bury steel pipe, unless it is large diameter water line.
B. Specifications identify requirements for small-diameter less than or equal to 20

inches.
E. Section 15640 – Joint Bonding and Electrical Isolation
A. Unit Prices.
1. No payment will be made for steel pipe and fittings under this Section. Refer
to Section 02511 - Water Lines for measurement and payment.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. AASHTO - Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.
B. ASME B 16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and
250
C. ASTM A 36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
D. ASTM A 53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-
Coated Welded and Seamless.
02502-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
E. ASTM A 105 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Pipe Forgings for Piping
Applications.
F. ASTM A 106 - Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-
Temperature Service.
G. ASTM A 135 - Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe.
H. ASTM A 139 - Standard Specification for Electric-Fusion (ARC) - Welded Steel Pipe
(NPS 4 and Over).
I. ASTM A 1011 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled,
Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with
Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength.
J. ASTM D 4541 - Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using
Portable Adhesion Testers
K. AWWA C 200 - Standard for Steel Water Pipe 6 in. and Larger.
L. AWWA C 206 - Standard for Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe.
M. AWWA C 207 - Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 in.
through 144 in.
N. AWWA C 210 - Liquid-Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Steel
Water Pipelines.
O. AWWA C 604 – Installation of Buried Steel Water Pipe – 4 In. (10 mm) and Larger.
P. AWWA M 11 – Steel Pipe – A Guide for Design and Installation.
Q. SSPC Good Painting Practice, Volume 1.
R. SSPC SP 1 - Surface Preparation Specification No. 1 Solvent Cleaning.
S. SSPC SP 5 - Joint Surface Preparation Standard White Blast Cleaning.
T. SSPC SP 6 - Surface Preparation Specification No. 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning.
U. SSPC SP 10 - Surface Preparation Specification No. 10 Near-White Blast Cleaning.
V. SSPC VIS 1 - Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
02502-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Conform to requirements of Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. For aerial

crossings and above ground piping, include lay schedule of new pipe and fittings
indicating alignment and grade, laying dimensions, lining and coating systems,
proposed welding procedures, fabrication, fitting, flange, and special details. Show
station numbers for pipe and fittings corresponding to Drawings.
B. Submit manufacturer's certifications that pipe and fittings are new and unused.
C. Submit manufacturer's certifications that pipe and fittings have been hydrostatically
tested at factory in accordance with AWWA C 200.
D. Submit manufacturer's affidavits that coatings and linings comply with applicable
requirements of this Section and:
1. Polyurethane coatings were applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's

recommendation and allowed to cure at temperature 5 degrees above
dewpoint.
2. Linings were applied and allowed to cure at temperature above 32 F.
E. Submit certification from NACE Certified Coatings Inspector, having Level III
certification for coatings and linings, that steel pipe furnished on project was properly
inspected and defective coatings detected were properly repaired.
A. Prior to start of work, provide proof of certification of qualification for welders

employed for type of work, procedures and positions involved. Provide welder
qualifications in accordance with AWWA C 206.
B. Shop-applied coatings and linings; provide services of an independent coating and

lining inspection service or testing laboratory with qualified coating inspectors.
Perform inspection by NACE trained inspectors under supervision of NACE Level
III Certified Coatings Inspector verifying compliance with same requirements
specified in Paragraph 3.02.
C. Coatings: Measure temperature and dew point of ambient air before applying
coatings. Inspect physical dimensions and overall condition of coatings. Inspect for
visible surface defects, thickness, and adhesion of coating to surface and between
layers.
D. Final Inspection:
1. Before shipment, inspect each finished pipe, fitting, special and accessory for
markings, metal thickness, coating thickness, lining thickness (if shop
applied), joint dimensions, and roundness.
2. Inspect for coating placement and defects. Test exterior coating for holidays.
02502-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
a. Inspect linings for thickness, pitting, scarring, and adhesion.
E. Ensure workmen engaged in manufacturing are qualified and experienced in

performance of their specific duties.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STEEL PIPE
A. Provide steel pipe and encasement sleeves designed and manufactured in

conformance with AWWA C 200 and AWWA M 11 except as modified herein. Steel
to be minimum of ASTM A106, ASTM A 36, ASTM A 1011 Grade 36, ASTM A 53
Grade B, ASTM A 135 Grade B, or ASTM A 139 Grade B.
B. Minimum Allowable Steel-Wall Thickness:
CARRIER PIPE
Min. Wall Approx. Wt. Per
Nom.
L.F.
Pipe O.D Thick.
Uncoated
Size (In.) (In.)
(Lb.)
4 4.50 0.250 11.35
6 6.625 0.280 18.97
8 8.625 0.322 28.55
10 10.75 0.365 40.48
12 12.75 0.375 49.56
16 16.00 0.375 62.58
20 20.00 0.375 78.60
1. Notes for Carrier Pipe:
a. Review pipe and fitting design for conditions exceeding those

specified herein.
b. Provide pipe with wall thickness of no less than listed in table above.
02502-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
MINIMUM DIAMETER CASING PIPE

(ENCASEMENT SLEEVES)
Min. Wall
Corresp.
Casing Approx. Wt. Per
Pipe L.F.
Size O.D. Thick. Uncoated
(In.) (In.) (In.) (Lb.)
8 8.625 0.219 19.64
10 10.75 0.219 24.60
12 12.75 0.219 29.28
16 16.00 0.219 36.86
18 18.00 0.25 47.39
20 20.00 0.250 52.73
24 24.00 0.250 63.41
2. Notes for Casing Pipe:
a. Provide casing pipe with wall thickness of no less than listed in table
above.
b. Casing pipe: AWWA C 200 new uncoated welded steel.
c. Verify casing diameter required with dimensions of casing spacer.
C. Provide pipe sections in lengths of no less than 16 feet except as required for special
sections, and no greater than 40 feet.
D. Provide short sections of steel pipe no less than 4 feet in length unless indicated on
Drawings or specifically permitted by Project Manager.
E. Fittings: Factory forged for sizes 4 inches through 20 inches; long radius bends;
beveled ends for field butt welding; wall thickness equal to or greater than pipe to
which fitting is to be welded unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
F. Joints:
1. Standard field joint for steel pipe and encasement sleeve: AWWA C 206.
Single- welded, butt joint.
2. Electrically isolate flanged joints between steel and cast iron by using flange
isolation fittings as specified in paragraph 2.03 of Specification Section 15640
– Joint Bonding and Electrical Isolation. Use epoxy coated nuts and bolts to
assemble the fittings.
3. Elbows to be standard weight seamless elbows per ASTM A106, Grade A or

B.
02502-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
G. Flanges: Refer to Specification Section 02511 – Water Lines.
2.02 INTERNAL LINING SYSTEMS FOR STEEL PIPE, ALL INSTALLATIONS
A. Supply steel pipe with epoxy lining, capable of conveying water at temperatures not
greater than 140 degrees F. Provide linings conforming to American National
Standards Institute/National Sanitation Foundation (ANSI/NFS) Standard 61 and
certification to be from organization accredited by ANSI. Unless otherwise noted,
coat exposed (wetted) steel parts of flanges, blind flanges, bolts, access manhole
covers, etc., with epoxy lining, as specified.
B. Epoxy Lining AWWA C 210, White, or approved equal for shop and field applied,
except as modified in this Section. Provide material from same manufacturer.
Surface Preparation SSPC-10

as recommended by manufacturer Near White Blast Clean
AWWA C210. Provide Devoe Bar Rust
Finish Coat
233H or approved equal.
1. Provide dry film thickness in accordance with product manufacturer

recommendations. Do not exceed maximum DFT as recommended by
manufacturer.
2. Factory Testing: In accordance with AWWA C210.
2.03 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR STEEL PIPE INSTALLED

ABOVEGROUND AND IN VAULTS (EXPOSED)
A. Provide approved epoxy/polyurethane coating system as designated below. Provide

material from same manufacturer.
Surface Preparation SSPC SP 10

as recommended by manufacturer Near White Blast Clean
Chemical Resistant Epoxy, or approved
Intermediate Coat
equal, AWWA C210
Polyurethane, or approved equal Blue Fed
Finish Coat Std. No. 15102 color as approved by
Project Manager
B. Total Allowable Dry Film Thickness (DFT) for System: as recommended by

manufacturer.
C. Factory and field testing: in accordance with AWWA C210.
02502-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
D. Clean bare pipe free from mud, mill lacquer, oil, grease, or other contaminant. Inspect
and clean surfaces according to SSPC-SP-1 to remove oil, grease, and loosely
adhering deposits prior to blast cleaning. Remove visible oil and grease spots by
solvent wiping. Use only approved safety solvents which do not leave residue. Use
preheating to remove oil, grease, mill scale, water, and ice provided pipe is preheated
in uniform manner to avoid distortion.
E. Remove surface imperfections such as slivers, scabs, burrs, weld spatter, and gouges.
Grind weld bead for proper coating application as recommended by coating
manufacturer. Presence of metallic defects may be cause for rejection of pipe.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Conform to applicable provisions of Section 02511 - Water lines, except as modified

in this Section.
B. Comply with the following:
1. Bedding and Backfilling: Conform to requirements of Section 02317 -

2. For pipes with coating: Do not roll or drag pipe on ground, move pipe in such
a manner as not to damage pipe or coating. Carefully inspect pipe for
abrasions and repair damaged coating before pipe is installed.
C. Static Electricity:
1. Properly ground steel pipeline during construction as necessary to prevent

build-up of static electricity.
2. Electrically test where required after installation is complete.
3.02 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR STEEL PIPE INSTALLED ABOVE

GROUND AND IN VAULTS (EXPOSED) AND EPOXY INTERNAL LINING
SYSTEM.
A. Safety: Paints, coatings, and linings specified in this Section are hazardous materials.
Vapors may be toxic or explosive. Protective equipment, approved by appropriate
regulatory agency, is mandatory for personnel involved in painting, coating, and
lining operations.
B. Workmanship:
1. Application: By qualified and experienced workers who are knowledgeable in

surface preparation and application of high-performance industrial coatings.
02502-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Paint Application Procedures: SSPC Good Painting Practices, Volume 1.
C. Surface Preparation:
1. Prepare surfaces for painting by using abrasive blasting.
2. Schedule cleaning and painting so that detrimental amounts of dust or other

contaminants do not fall on wet, newly-painted surfaces. Protect surfaces not
intended to be painted from effects of cleaning and painting operations.
3. Prior to blasting, clean surfaces to be coated or lined of grease, oil and dirt by
steaming or detergent cleaning in accordance with SSPC SP 1.
4. Metal and Weld Preparation: Remove surface defects such as gouges, pits,
welding and torch-cut slag, welding flux and spatter by grinding to 1/4-inch
minimum radius.
5. Abrasive Material:
a. Blast only as much steel as can be coated same day of blasting.
b. Use sharp, angular, properly graded abrasive capable of producing

depth of profile specified herein. Transport abrasive to job site in
moisture-proof bags or airtight bulk containers. Copper slag abrasives
are not acceptable.
c. After abrasive blast cleaning, verify surface profile with replica tape
such as Tes-Tex Coarse or Extra Coarse Press-O-Film Tape, or
approved equal. Furnish tapes to Project Manager.
d. Do not blast if metal surface may become wet before priming

commences, or when metal surface is less than 5 degrees F above dew
point.
6. Evaluate degree of cleanliness for surface preparation with use of SSPC

Pictorial Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel Surfaces, SSPC-Vis
1.
7. Remove dust and abrasive residue from freshly blasted surfaces by brushing
or blowing with clean, dry air. Test cleanliness by placing 3/4-inch by 4-inch
piece of clear Scotch type tape on blasted surface, then removing and placing
tape on 3x5 white index card. Reclean areas exhibiting dust or residue.
D. Coating and Lining Application:
02502-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Environmental Conditions: Do not apply coatings or linings when metal

temperature is less than 50 degrees F; when ambient temperature is less than 5
degrees F above dew point; when expected weather conditions are such that
ambient temperature will drop below 40 degrees F within 6 hours after
application; or when relative humidity is above 85 percent. Measure relative
humidity and dew point by use of sling psychrometer in conjunction with U.S.
Department of Commerce Weather Bureau Psychometric Tables. Provide
dehumidifiers for field-applied coatings and linings to maintain proper
humidity levels.
2. Application Procedures:
a. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and

requirements of this Section. Provide finish free of runs, sags, curtains,
pinholes, orange peel, fish eyes, excessive over spray, or
delaminations.
b. Thin materials only with manufacturers recommended thinners. Thin

only amount required to adjust viscosity for temperature variations,
proper atomization and flow-out. Mix material components using
mechanical mixers.
c. Discard catalyzed materials remaining at end of day.
3. Thoroughly dry pipe before primer is applied. Apply primer immediately after
cleaning surface. Apply succeeding coats before contamination of
undersurface occurs.
4. Cure a minimum of 24 hours at 77 degrees F before successive coats are

applied. During curing process, provide force air ventilation in volume
sufficient to maintain solvent vapor levels below published threshold limit
value. Apply successive coats within recoat threshold time as recommended
by coating or lining manufacturer on printed technical data sheets or through
written communications. Brush blast joints of pipe which have been shop
primed and are to receive intermediate and finish coats in field prior to
application of additional coats. After interior coatings are applied, provide
forced air ventilation in sufficient volume and for sufficient length of time to
ensure proper curing before filling pipe with water.
E. Testing of Coatings and Linings:
1. Inspect pipe for holidays and damage to coating:
a. If test indicates no holidays and coating is damaged, remove damaged

layers of coating and repair in accordance with coating manufacturer’s
recommendations.
02502-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Perform holiday test in accordance with NACE Standard Recommended

Practice, RPO 188-90, Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Protective
Coatings.
3. Begin testing of completed coating after coating has sufficiently cured,

usually one to 5 days. Consult coating manufacturer for specific curing
schedule.
4. Perform adhesion test on pipe in accordance with ASTM D 4541.
5. For coating thickness of 20 mils or less, test with wet sponge low-voltage
holiday detector. For coating thickness in excess of 20 mils, test with high-
voltage holiday detector. Perform electrical holiday test with 60-cycle current
audio detector. Select test voltage as suggested in table below.
MINIMUM VOLTAGES FOR

HIGH VOLTAGE SPARK TESTING
Total Dry Film

Suggested Inspection
Thickness
(V)
(mils)
20 to 40 3,000
41 to 55 4,000
56 to 80 6,000
3.03 JOINTS AND JOINTING
A. Welded Joints:
1. Conform to requirements of Section 02511 - Water Lines.
2. Field weld to be full penetration butt welded joints for steel pipe and
encasement sleeves for entire circumference.
3. City will employ an independent certified testing laboratory to perform weld

acceptance tests on welded joints. Testing Laboratory will test by X-ray
methods for butt welds, for 100 percent of joint welds. Project Manager has
final decision as to suitability of welds tested.
B. Flanged Joints: Conform to requirements of Section 02511 - Water Lines.
3.04 COATINGS AND LININGS INSPECTION RESPONSIBILITIES
02502-10
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Contractor is responsible for quality control of coatings and linings applications and
testing and inspection stipulated in this Section. Project Manager is responsible for
quality assurance and reserves the right to inspect or acquire services of an
independent third-party inspector who is fully knowledgeable and qualified to inspect
surface preparation and application of high- performance coatings at all phases of
coatings and linings work, field- or shop-applied. Contractor is responsible for proper
application and performance of coatings and linings whether or not Project Manager
provides such inspection.
END OF SECTION
02502-11
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION COOPER TUBING
SECTION 02503
COPPER TUBING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Copper tubing for water service lines.
C. Section 02512 – Water Tap and Service Line Installation
A. Unit Prices.
1. No payment will be made for copper tubing under this Section. Include cost in
unit price for water taps and service lines.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM B 88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.
B. AWWA C 800 - Standard for Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit certified test results of ASTM B 88.
C. Submit manufacturer's testing certification that copper tubing conforms to

requirements of ASTM B 88. Number of samples for testing of each size of tubing is
modified as follows:
1. For each 7500 feet of tubing: 1 sample
2. For each set of tubing less than 7500 feet: 1 sample
02503-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Provide Type K annealed, seamless, copper tubing, 3/8 inch to 2 inch in diameter
conforming to requirements of ASTM B 88.
B. Provide 3/8-inch and 1-inch tubing in coils of minimum 60 feet in length, and 1-1/2-
inch and 2-inch tubing in coils 40 feet in length.
C. Provide tubing manufactured in United States of America. Tubing shall be inspected

and tested by laboratory designated by Project Manager at point of manufacture or
locally. Furnish tubing, at no additional cost to designated testing laboratory along
with mill compliance certificates.
D. Provide flared or compression-type brass fittings for use with Type K annealed
copper tubing in accordance with AWWA C 800.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Conform to installation requirements of Section 02512 - Water Tap and Service Line
Installation, except as modified in this Section.
3.02 JOINTS
A. Minimum joint spacing for 3/4-inch and 1-inch tubing shall be 60 feet and for 1-1/2-
inch and 2-inch tubing shall be 40 feet.
B. Cut copper tubing squarely by using cutting tools designed specifically for purpose
and avoid procedures that cause pipe to bend or pipe walls to flatten.
C. After tubing has been cut, but before flaring, use reamer to remove inside rolled lip
from tubing. Expand flared ends by use of flaring tool using care to avoid splitting,
crimping, or over stressing metal. Provide at least 10 inches of straight pipe adjacent
to fittings.
D. When compression fittings are used, cut copper tubing squarely prior to insertion into
fitting. Assemble in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedure.
3.03 BENDS
A. Bend tubing by using appropriate sized bending tool. No kinks, dents, flats, or crimps
shall be permitted. Cut out and replace damaged section. Install no bends with radius
smaller than radius of coil of tubing as packaged by manufacturer. Copper tubing
shipped in straight lengths conforms to the following:
02503-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. For 2-inch diameter: Maximum of one 45-degree bend per 4-foot section.
2. For 1-1/2-inch diameter: Maximum of one 45-degree bend per 3-foot section.
END OF SECTION
02503-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PIPE
SECTION 02504
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PIPE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Fiberglass reinforced (FRP) pipe for sanitary sewers.
C. Section 02081 – Cast-In-Place Concrete Manholes
D. Section 02082 – Precast Concrete Manholes
E. Section 02105 – Chemical Sampling and Analysis
G. Section 02441 – Microtunneling
H. Section 02445 – Jack and Bore/Jack and Mine/Pilot Tube Guided Boring Tunnels
I. Section 02531 – Gravity Sanitary Sewers
J. Section 02532 – Sanitary Sewer Force Mains
K. Section 02533 – Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers
L. Section 02550 – Sliplining Sanitary Sewers
A. Unit Prices.
1. No separate payment will be made for fiberglass pipe under this Section.
Include cost in unit price for Work, as specified in Section 02531 - Gravity
Sanitary Sewers, Section 02532 - Sanitary Sewer Force Mains, or Section
02550 - Sliplining Sanitary Sewers.
02504-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 3262 - Standard Specification for "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced

Thermosetting- Resin) Sewer Pipe.
B. ASTM D 3681 - Method for Determining Chemical Resistance of "Fiberglass"

(Glass-Fiber- Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin Pipe in a Deflected Condition.
C. ASTM D 3754 - Standard Specification for "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber Reinforced

Thermosetting- Resin) Sewer and Industrial Pressure Pipe.
D. ASTM D 3839 – Standard Guide for Underground Installation of “Fiberglass” (Glass-

Fiber Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe
E. ASTM D 4161 - Standard Specification for "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced

Thermosetting- Resin) Pipe Joints Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals.
F. ASTM F 477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining
Plastic Pipe.
G. AWWA Manual of Practices M45 Fiberglass Pipe Design
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Provide sufficient data for the Project Manager to properly evaluate the pipe.
C. Product data submittals shall include the following, as a minimum:
1. Details of the proposed pipe.
2. Properties and strengths of the pipe.
3. Details of pipe joint.
4. Pipe design calculations per AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications or

AWWA Manual of Practice M45 are required for each pipe location and are to
be signed and sealed by a licensed engineer.
5. Instruction on storage, handling, transporting, and installation.
6. Standard catalog sheets.
D. Test Reports: Provide test reports upon request, certifying that the pipe has been
tested in accordance with and exceeds minimum requirements of ASTM D 3262 and
ASTM D 3681.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
02504-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide fiberglass reinforced pipe per the City of Houston Pre-Approved Product
List.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Resin Systems: The manufacturer shall use only polyester resin systems with a proven
history of performance in this particular application. The historical data shall have
been collected from applications of a composite material of similar construction and
composition as the proposed product.
B. Glass Reinforcements: The reinforcing glass fibers used to manufacture the

components shall be of highest quality commercial grade glass filaments with binder
and sizing compatible with impregnating resins.
C. Fillers: Silica sand or other suitable materials may be used.
D. Additives: Resin additives, such as pigments, dyes, and other coloring agents, if used,
shall in no way be detrimental to the performance of the product nor shall they impair
visual inspection of the finished products.
E. Rubber Gaskets: Supply from an approved gasket manufacturer in accordance with

ASTM F 477, when no contaminant is identified and suitable for the service intended.
Gaskets shall either be affixed to the pipe by means of a suitable adhesive or shall be
installed in such a manner so as to prevent the gasket from rolling out of the pre-cut
groove in the pipe or sleeve coupling. When pipe is to be installed in potentially
contaminated areas, especially where free product is found near the elevation of the
proposed sewer, provide the following gasket materials for the noted contaminants.
CONTAMINANT GASKET MATERIAL REQUIRED
Petroleum (diesel, gasoline) Nitrile Rubber

As recommended by the pipe manufacturer,
Engineer of the Record and approved by City
Other Contaminants
Engineer prior to installation
1. If required gasket material is not available for use, pipe other than fiberglass
pipe must be used in potentially contaminated areas in accordance with
specification section 02105 - Chemical Sampling and Analysis in PPCA.
F. The internal liner resin shall be suitable for service as sewer pipe, and shall be highly
resistant to exposure to sulfuric acid as produced by biological activity from hydrogen
sulfide gases. Pipe shall meet or exceed requirements of ASTM D 3681.
2.03 MANUFACTURE AND CONSTRUCTION
02504-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Pipes
1. Furnish pipes in the diameters specified and within the tolerances specified
below.
2. Manufacture pipe by the centrifugal casting process or filament winding to

result in a dense, nonporous, corrosion-resistant, consistent composite
structure to meet the operating conditions as shown on the Drawings.
3. Do not use stiffening ribs or rings.
B. Couplings: Unless otherwise specified, the pipe shall be field connected with
fiberglass sleeve couplings that utilize elastomeric sealing gaskets as the sole means
to maintain joint watertightness. The joints must meet the performance requirements
of ASTM D 4161.
C. Fittings: Flanges, elbows, reducers, tees, and other fittings shall be capable of
withstanding operating conditions when installed. They may be contact molded or
manufactured from mitered sections of pipe joined by glass fiber reinforced overlays.
D. Manhole Connections: Provide a water stop flange (wall pipe) for connection to
manhole base or other structure in accordance with Section 02081 - Cast-In-Place
Concrete Manholes, or Section 02082 - Precast Concrete Manholes.
E. Grout Ports: Provide grout ports in the wall of pipe when required. Provide plugs of
316 stainless steel or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with the pipe.
Grout port plugs shall be designed and installed to meet the test pressure of the pipe.
2.04 DIMENSIONS
A. Diameters: The actual outside diameter of the pipes shall be in accordance with Table
3 of ASTM D 3262 for gravity sewers, or ASTM D 3754 for force mains.
B. Lengths: The pipe standard length will be approximately 20 feet. A maximum of 10

percent of the lengths, excluding special order pipes, may be supplied in random
lengths.
C. Wall Thickness: The minimum average wall thickness shall be the stated design
thickness. The minimum single point thickness shall not be less than 90 percent of the
stated design thickness.
D. End Squareness: Pipe ends shall be square to the pipe axis.
E. Tolerance of Fittings: The tolerance of the angle of an elbow and the angle between
the main and leg of a wye or tee shall be plus or minus 2 degrees. The tolerance on
the laying length of a fitting shall be plus or minus 2 inches.
2.05 STIFFNESS CLASSES
02504-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Stiffness class of FRP pipe shall satisfy design requirements, but shall not be less than
46 psi, when used in direct bury operation; 36 psi, when installed within a primary
tunnel liner.
B. Stiffness class of FRP in a pipe jacking operation shall be governed either by the ring
deflection limitations or by a pipe design providing longitudinal strength required by
the jacking method and shall satisfy design requirements stated below. Submit design
calculations as required in Paragraph 1.05, Submittals.
1. Pipe stress calculations based on jacking loads shall be performed to conform

to Section 02441 – Microtunneling and or Section 02445 - Jack and Bore/Jack
and Mine/Pilot Tube Guided Boring Tunnels.
2. Ring deflection calculations shall conform to design requirements of 30 TAC

Chapter 317.20 pertaining to flexible pipe used in gravity sewers. The pipe
deflection calculations shall ensure that predicted deflection will be less than 5
percent under long-term loading conditions (soil prism load) for the highest
density of soil overburden and surcharge loads. Deflection on calculations
shall be prepared using long-term (drained) values for soil parameters
contained in the geotechnical investigation report for the Project, or other site-
specific data obtained by the Contractor as approved by the Engineer.
2.06 TESTING
A. Pipes shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D 3262 or ASTM D 3754, as

applicable, except that the factory hydrostatic pressure testing is not required.
B. Joints: Coupling joints shall be qualified per the tests of Section 7 of ASTM D 4161.
2.07 INSPECTION
A. The Project Manager shall be entitled to inspect pipes or witness the pipe
manufacturing. Such inspection shall not relieve the manufacturer of the
responsibilities to provide products that comply with the applicable standards and
these Specifications.
B. Manufacturer's Notification: Should the Project Manager wish to see specific pipes
during any phase of the manufacturing process, the manufacturer must provide the
Project Manager with adequate advance notice of when and where the production of
those pipes will take place.
C. Failure to Inspect: Should the Project Manager elect not to inspect the manufacturing,
testing, or finished pipes, it in no way implies approval of products or tests.
2.08 PACKAGING, HANDLING, AND SHIPPING
A. Packing, handling, and shipping should be done in accordance with the

02504-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install pipe and fittings in accordance with requirements of Section 02531 - Gravity
Sanitary Sewers, 02532 - Sanitary Sewer Force Mains, or Section 02550 - Sliplining
Sanitary Sewers.
B. The manufacturer must supply a suitable qualified field service representative to be

present periodically during the installation of pipe.
C. Pipe Bedding and backfill: Conform to requirements of Section 02317 - Excavation

and Backfill for Utilities.
D. Pipe Handling: Use textile slings.
E. Jointing
1. Clean ends of pipe and coupling components.
2. Check pipe ends and couplings for damage. Correct any damage found.
3. Coupling grooves must be completely free of dirt.
4. Apply joint lubricant to pipe ends and rubber seals of coupling. Use only
lubricants approved by the pipe manufacturer.
5. Use suitable auxiliary equipment, such as a wire rope puller, to pull joints
together.
6. Do not exceed forces recommended by the manufacturer for coupling pipe. If

excessive force is required, remove coupling, determine source of problem,
and correct it.
7. In the process of jointing the pipe, do not allow the deflection angle to exceed
the deflection permitted by the manufacturer.
F. If pressure grouting of the pipe is conducted as part of a pipe-jacked tunnel

installation, seal the grout holes with liner resin to a thickness equal to the pipe liner
thickness or with a threaded plug for that purpose.
G. Tests: Conform to requirements of Section 02533 - Acceptance Testing for Sanitary

Sewers.
END OF SECTION
02504-6
CITY OF HOUSTON HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE)
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION SOLID AND PROFILE WALL PIPE
SECTION 02505
HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) SOLID AND PROFILE WALL PIPE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. High density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe for gravity sanitary sewers and drains,
including fittings.
B. High density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe for sanitary sewer force mains, including
fittings.
C. High density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe for gravity storm sewers and drains,
including fittings.
D. High density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe for storm sewers culverts.
D. Section 02531 – Gravity Sanitary Sewers
E. Section 02532 – Sanitary Sewer Force Mains
G. Section 02550 – Sliplining Sanitary Sewers
H. Section 02571 – Pipe Bursting/Crushing Sanitary Sewers
I. Section 02631 – Storm Sewers
A. Unit Prices.
1. No separate payment will be made for HDPE pipe under this Section. Include
cost in unit prices for work, as specified in following sections:
a. Section 02531 - Gravity Sanitary Sewers.
b. Section 02532 - Sanitary Sewer Force Mains.
02505-1
c. Section 02550 - Sliplining Sanitary Sewers.
d. Section 02571 - Pipe Bursting/Crushing Sanitary Sewers.
e. Section 02631 - Storm Sewers.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 618 - Standard Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing.
B. ASTM D 1248 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials

for Wire and Cable.
C. ASTM D 2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic

Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications.
D. ASTM D 2657 - Standard Practice for Heat Fusion Joining Polyolefin Pipe and
Fittings.
E. ASTM D 2774 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic

Pressure Piping.
F. ASTM D 2837 - Standard Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis for
Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe
Products.
G. ASTM D 3035 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-PR)
Based on Controlled Outside Diameter.
H. ASTM D 3212 - Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes
Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals.
I. ASTM D 3350 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings
Materials.
J. ASTM F 477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining
Plastic Pipe.
K. ASTM F 714 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-PR)
Based on Outside Diameter.
L. ASTM F 894 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Large-Diameter Profile

Wall Sewer and Drain Pipe.
02505-2
M. ASTM F 2306 - Standard Specification for 12 to 60 in. [300 to 1500 mm] Annular
Corrugated Profile-Wall Polyethylene (PE) Pipe and Fittings for Gravity-Flow Storm
Sewer and Subsurface Drainage Applications.
N. ASTM F 2487 - Standard Practice for Infiltration and Exfiltration Acceptance Testing
of Installed Corrugated High Density Polyethylene and Polypropylene Pipelines.
O. ASTM F 2510 - Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced

P. AWWA C 906 - Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Fittings, 4 In. Through 65 In.
(100 mm Through 1,650 mm), for Waterworks.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit shop drawings showing design of pipe and fittings indicating alignment and
grade, pipe length, laying dimensions, fabrication, fittings, flanges, gasket material,
and special details.
C. Submit detailed calculations for pipe design per AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications.
D. Submit details of Pipe Joints and jointing procedure for HDPE pipe.
A. Provide manufacturer's certificate of conformance to Specifications.
B. Furnish pipe and fittings that are homogeneous throughout and free from visible
cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or other injurious defects. Provide pipe as uniform
as commercially practical in color, opacity, density, and other physical properties.
C. Project Manager reserves right to inspect pipes or witness pipe manufacturing.

Inspection shall in no way relieve manufacturer of responsibilities to provide products
that comply with applicable standards and these Specifications.
1. Manufacturer's Notification: Should Project Manager wish to witness

manufacture of specific pipes, manufacturer shall provide Project Manager
with minimum three weeks notice of when and where production of those
specific pipes will take place.
2. Failure to Inspect. Approval of products or tests is not implied by Project

Manager’s decision not to inspect manufacturing, testing, or finished pipes.
02505-3
D. Pipe manufacturer to provide services of experienced, competent, and authorized

representative to visit site to advise and consult Contractor during jointing and
installation of pipe.
1.07 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this

section with documented experience of minimum 5 years of pipe installations that
have been in successful, continuous service for same type of service as proposed
Work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide products manufactured by companies listed on the City of Houston Standard

Product List.
B. Furnish solid wall pipe with plain end construction for heat joining (butt fusion)
conforming to ASTM D 2657. Utilize controlled temperatures and pressures for
joining to produce fused leak-free joint.
C. Furnish profile-wall gravity sanitary sewer pipe with bell-and-spigot end construction
conforming to ASTM D 3212. Joining will be accomplished with elastomeric gasket
in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Use integral bell-and-spigot
gasketed joint designed so that when assembled, elastomeric gasket, contained in
machined groove on pipe spigot, is compressed radially in pipe bell to form positive
seal. Design joint to avoid displacement of gasket when installed in accordance with
D. Furnish solid wall pipe for sanitary sewer force mains with minimum working
pressure rating of 150 psi, and with inside diameter equal to or greater than nominal
pipe size indicated on Drawings.
E. Furnish corrugated profile-wall polyethylene (CPP) pipe for gravity storm sewer and
storm sewer culvert pipe. Joints shall be installed such that connection of pipe
sections will form continuous line free from irregularities in flow line. Suitable joints
are:
1. Integral Bell and Spigot. Bell shall overlap minimum of two corrugations of
spigot end when fully engaged.
2. Exterior Bell and Spigot. Bell shall be fully welded to exterior of pipe and
overlap spigot end so that flow lines and ends match when fully engaged.
F. Jointing:
1. Gaskets:
02505-4
a. Meet requirements of ASTM F 477. Use gasket molded into circular

form or extruded to proper section and then spliced into circular form.
When no contaminant is identified, use gaskets of properly cured,
high-grade elastomeric compound. Basic polymer shall be natural
rubber, synthetic elastomer, or blend of both.
b. HDPE Pipes are Not allowed to be installed in potentially

contaminated areas, unless approved by City Engineer.

Other Contaminants As recommended by pipe manufacturer
2. Lubricant. Use lubricant for assembly of gasketed joints which has no

detrimental effect on gasket or on pipe, in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
2.02 MATERIALS FOR SANITARY SEWER
A. Pipe and Fittings: High density, high molecular weight polyethylene pipe material
meeting requirements of Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34, as defined in
ASTM D 1248. Material meeting requirements of cell classification 345434D or E, in
accordance with ASTM D 3350, are also suitable for making pipe products under
these specifications. Inner wall of pipe shall be of light color for television inspection
purposes.
B. Other Pipe Materials: Materials other than those specified in Paragraph 2.02A, Pipe
and Fittings, may be used as part of profile construction, e.g., as core tube to support
shape of profile during processing, provided that these materials are compatible with
base polyethylene material and are completely encapsulated in finished product and
in no way compromise performance of pipe products in intended use. Examples of
suitable material include polyethylene and polypropylene.
2.03 MATERIALS FOR GRAVITY STORM SEWERS AND STORM SEWER

CULVERTS
A. Pipe and Fittings: High density, high molecular weight polyethylene HDPE virgin
compound material meeting requirements of cell class outlined in ASTM D 3350.
B. Manufacturing shall meet requirements of ASTM F 2306.
2.04 TEST METHODS FOR SANITARY SEWER
02505-5
A. Conditioning. Conditioning of samples prior to and during tests is subject to approval

by Project Manager. When referee tests are required, condition specimens in
accordance with Procedure A in ASTM D 618 at 73.4 degrees F plus or minus 3.6
degrees F and 50 percent relative humidity plus or minus 5 percent relative humidity
for not less than 40 hours prior to test. Conduct tests under same conditions of
temperature and humidity unless otherwise specified.
B. Flattening. Flatten three specimens of pipe, prepared in accordance with Paragraph

2.05A, in suitable press until internal diameter has been reduced to 40 percent of
original inside diameter of pipe. Rate of loading shall be uniform and at 2 inches per
minute. Test specimens, when examined under normal light and with unaided eye,
shall show no evidence of splitting, cracking, breaking, or separation of pipe walls or
bracing profiles.
C. Joint Tightness. Test for joint tightness in accordance with ASTM D 3212, except
replace shear load transfer bars and supports with 6-inch-wide support blocks that can
be either flat or contoured to conform to pipe's outer contour.
D. Purpose of Tests. Flattening and joint tightness tests are not intended to be routine
quality control tests, but rather to qualify pipe to a specified level of performance.
2.05 TEST METHODS FOR GRAVITY STORM SEWERS AND STORM SEWER
CULVERTS
A. All testing and material requirements shall be in accordance with ASTM F 2306.
B. MANDREL TESTING: use a mandrel to test flexible pipe for deflection. Refer to
Section 02533 – Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers for a mandrel and test
requirements.
2.06 MARKING
A. Mark each standard and random length of pipe in compliance with these
Specifications with following information:
1. Pipe size.
2. Pipe class.
3. Production code.
4. Material designation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Conform to requirements of following Sections:
02505-6
1. Section 02550 - Sliplining Sanitary Sewers.
2. Section 02531 - Gravity Sanitary Sewers.
3. Section 02532 - Sanitary Sewer Force Mains.
4. Section 02533 - Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers.
5. Section 02571 - Pipe Bursting/Crushing Sanitary Sewers.
6. Section 02631 - Storm Sewers
B. Install pipe in accordance with the manufacturers recommended installation

procedures and ASTM D 2774 for pressure pipe and ASTM D 2321 for gravity flow
pipe.
C. HDPE pipe is not approved in applications requiring augering of pipe.
D. Bedding and backfill: Conform to requirements of Section 02317 - Excavation and

E. Use only workmen trained in the installation of HDPE Pipe.
F. Do not store pipe uncovered direct in direct sunlight. Allow pipe temperature to
approach ground temperature before each individual pipe section is terminally
connected.
G. Joints: Join sections of HDPE pipe into continuous lengths above ground by thermal
butt fusion method in accordance with AWWA C 906 and pipe manufacturer’s
recommendations for specified service. Fusion joints: meeting minimum
requirements of manufacturer for cool down time and other fusing requirements.
Socket fusion and extrusion welding or hot gas welding will not be accepted.
H. Cutting pipe: Comply with pipe manufacturer’s recommendations. After cutting,

leave end pipe in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
END OF SECTION
02505-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE
SECTION 02506
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pressure pipe for water distribution, in nominal diameters 4
inches through 20 inches.
B. Polyvinyl chloride sewer pipe for gravity sewers in nominal diameters 4 inches
through 60 inches.
C. Polyvinyl chloride pressure pipe for gravity sewers and force mains in nominal
diameters 4 inches through 20 inches.
D. Fusible PVC®, or FPVC®, pipe for pressure pipe in horizontal directional drilling
applications up to 20-inches in diameter.
E. Section 02511 – Water Lines
F. Section 02528 – Polyethylene Encasement/Wrap
G. Section 02531 – Gravity Sanitary Sewers
H. Section 02532 – Sanitary Sewer Force Mains
I. Section 02534 – Sanitary Sewer Service Stubs or Reconnections
J. Section 02631 – Storm Sewers
K. Section 16124 – Conductive Trace Wire for Non-Metallic Water Line Pipes
A. Unit Prices.
02506-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. No separate payment will be made for PVC pipe under this Section. Include
cost in unit price for work included as specified in the following sections:
a. Section 02511 - Water Lines
b. Section 02531 - Gravity Sanitary Sewers
c. Section 02532 - Sanitary Sewer Force Mains
d. Section 02631 - Storm Sewers
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A 21.16 (AWWA C 116) - Protective Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coatings for the
Interior and Exterior Surfaces of Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron.
B. ASTM A 240 - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless

Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.
C. ASTM C 923 - Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced

D. ASTM D 618 - Standard Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing.
E. ASTM D 1248 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials

for Wire and Cable.
F. ASTM D 1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.
G. ASTM D 2122 – Standard Test Method for Determining Dimensions of

Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings.
H. ASTM D 2241 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-
Rated Pipe (SDR Series).
I. ASTM D 2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic

J. ASTM D 2412 – Standard Test Method for Determination of External Loading

Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel Plate Loading.
K. ASTM D 2444 - Standard Practice for Determination of the Impact Resistance of

Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings by Means of a Tup (Falling Weight).
02506-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
L. ASTM D 2680 - Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) and Poly

(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Composite Sewer Piping.
M. ASTM D 3034 - Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer
Pipe and Fittings.
N. ASTM D 3139 - Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using
Flexible Elastomeric Seals.
O. ASTM D 3212 - Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes
P. ASTM F 477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining
Plastic Pipe.
Q. ASTM F 679 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-
Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
R. ASTM F 794 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Profile
Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter.
S. ASTM F 949 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Corrugated
Sewer Pipe with Smooth Interior and Fittings.
T. AWWA C 110 (ANSI A 21.10) - American National Standard for Ductile-Iron and
Gray-Iron Fittings, 3-inch Through 48-inch, for Water and Other Liquids.
U. AWWA C 111 (ANSI A 21.11) - American National Standard for Rubber-Gasket

Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
V. AWWA C 153 (ANSI A 21.53) - Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service.
W. AWWA C900 - Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated
Fittings, 4 In. Through 60 In. (100 MM Through 1,500 MM).
X. AWWA C909 - Standard for Molecularly-Oriented Polyvinyl Chloride (PVCO)

Pressure Pipe, 4 In. (100mm) and Larger.
Y. AWWA M23 – PVC Pipe – Design and Installation.
Z. PPI TR-3 - Policies and Procedures for Developing Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB),
Pressure Design Basis (PDB), Strength Design Basis (SDB), and Minimum Required
Strength (MRS) Ratings for Thermoplastic Piping Materials or Pipe.
AA. UNI-B-13 - Recommended Standard Performance Specification for Joint Restraint

Devices for Use with Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
02506-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Submit shop drawings showing design of new pipe and fittings indicating alignment
and grade, laying dimensions, fabrication, fittings, flanges, and special details.
C. Contractor to review and submit PVC pipe manufacturers recommended installation

procedures.
D. Calculations and limits of thrust restraint shall be based on AWWA M23, latest
edition.
E. For Fusible PVC® Pipe, submit qualifications of Fusion Technician to be used on the
project.
F. Provide manufacturer’s product data for bell insertion protection system.
A. Submit manufacturer's certifications that PVC pipe and fittings meet requirements of
this Section and AWWA C900, and AWWA C909 for pressure pipe applications, or
appropriate ASTM standard specified for gravity sewer pipe.
B. Submit manufacturer's certification that PVC pressure pipe for water lines and force
mains has been hydrostatically tested at factory in accordance with AWWA C900 and
AWWA C909, and this Section.
C. When foreign manufactured material is proposed for use, have material tested for
conformance to applicable ASTM requirements by certified independent testing
laboratory located in United States. Certification from other source is not acceptable.
Furnish copies of test reports to Project Manager for review. Cost of testing paid by
Contractor.
D. Fusible PVC®
1. Fusion Technician shall be fully qualified by the pipe supplier to install

type(s) and sizes(s) being used. Qualification shall be current as of the actual
date of fusion performance on the project.
2. Refer to approved product list for approved manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL
A. Use PVC compounds in manufacture of pipe that contain no ingredient in amount that
has been demonstrated to migrate into water in quantities considered to be toxic.
02506-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Furnish PVC pressure pipe manufactured from Class 12454 virgin PVC compounds
as defined in ASTM D 1784. Use compounds qualifying for rating of 4000 psi for
water at 73.4 F per requirements of PPI TR-3. Provide pipe which is homogeneous
throughout, free of voids, cracks, inclusions, and other defects, uniform as
commercially practical in color, density, and other physical properties. Deliver pipe
with surfaces free from nicks and scratches with joining surfaces of spigots and joints
free from gouges and imperfections which could cause leakage.
C. For FPVC®, pipe shall be extruded with plain ends. The ends shall be square to the
pipe and free of any bevel or chamfer. There shall be no bell or gasket of any kind
incorporated into the pipe.
D. PVC Restrained Pipe: Must be listed on City's current Product Approval List.
1. Pipe Material:
a. Pressure Class 235 psi (DR 18): For restrained joints where shown on
Drawings.
b. Pressure Class 305 psi (DR 14): For alternate to offset pipe sections
shown on Drawings. Do not use PVC for offset sections with depth of
cover greater than 20 feet or less than 4 feet. Do not use PVC in
potentially petroleum contaminated areas.
E. Water Service.
1. Provide self-extinguishing PVC pipe that bears Underwriters' Laboratories

mark of approval and is acceptable without penalty to Texas State Fire
Insurance Committee for use in fire protection lines.
2. Bear National Sanitation Foundation Seal of Approval (NSF-PW).
F. Gaskets:
1. Gasket materials shall meet requirements of ASTM F 477. Use elastomeric

factory- installed gaskets to make joints flexible and watertight.
2. Flat Face Mating Flange: Full faces 1/8-inch-thick ethylene propylene (EPR)
rubber.
3. Raised Face Mating Flange: Flat ring 1/8-inch ethylene propylene (EPR)
rubber, with filler gasket between OD of raised face and flange OD to protect
flange from bolting moment.
G. Lubricant for rubber-gasketed joints: Water soluble, non-toxic, non-objectionable in

taste and odor imparted to fluid, non-supporting of bacteria growth, having no
deteriorating effect on PVC or rubber gaskets.
H. Bell Insertion Protection System: Refer to City of Houston’s Approved Product List.
02506-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
I. Do not use PVC in potentially or known contaminated areas.
J. Do not use PVC in areas exposed to direct sunlight.
2.02 WATER SERVICE PIPE
A. Pipe 4 inch through 20-inch: AWWA C900, Pressure Class 235 psi (DR 18); AWWA
C900, Pressure Class 305 psi (DR 14) as alternate to offset pipe sections; nominal
20-foot lengths; cast-iron equivalent outside diameters.
B. Provide Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe from manufacturers listed on City of Houston’s

Approved Products List.
C. Install trace wire with PVC pipe. Refer to Section 16124 – Conductive Trace Wire for
Non-Metallic Water Line Pipes.
D. Make curves and bends by offsetting (i.e., deflecting joints). Do not exceed maximum
offset recommended by pipe manufacturer or the City, whichever is less.
E. Hydrostatic Test: AWWA C900, ANSI A 21.10 (AWWA C 110); at point of

manufacture; submit manufacturer's written certification.
2.03 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
A. PVC gravity sanitary sewer pipe shall be in accordance with provisions in following
table:
SDR (MAX.)/ DIAMETER

WALL ASTM
STIFFNESS SIZE
CONSTRUCTION DESIGNATION
(MIN.) RANGE
D3034 SDR 26 / PS 115 6" to 10"
D3034 SDR 35 / PS 46 12" & 15"
Solid F679 SDR 35 / PS 46 18" to 60"
AWWA C900 DR 18 / N/A 4" to 20"
AWWA C909 DR 18 / N/A 4" to 12"
Note: Refer to City of Houston Approved Products List for list of manufacturers.
B. PVC storm sewer pipe shall be in accordance with provisions in following table:
02506-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
SDR (MAX.)/ DIAMETER

WALL ASTM
STIFFNESS SIZE
CONSTRUCTION MANUFACTURER DESIGNATION
(MIN.) RANGE
D3034 SDR 26 / PS 115 6" to 10"
J-M Pipe D3034 SDR 35 / PS 46 12" & 15"
CertainTeed
Solid Diamond F679 SDR 35 / PS 46 18" to 27"
Uponor ETI
North American AWWA C900 DR 18 / N/A 4" to 16"
AWWA C909 DR 18 / N/A 4" to 12"
Truss (Gasketed) Contech D2680 N/A /200 psi 8" to 15"
Contech A-2000 F949 N/A / 46 psi 12" to 36"

Contech A-2026 F949 N/A / 115 psi 8" to 10"
Profile
ETI, Ultra-Rib F794 N/A / 46 psi 8" to 30"
ETI, Ultra-Corr F794 N/A / 46 psi 24" to 36"
C. When solid wall PVC pipe 18 inches to 27 inches in diameter is required in SDR 26,
provide pipe conforming to ASTM F 679, except provide wall thickness as required
for SDR 26 and pipe stiffness of 115 psi.
D. For sewers up to 12-inch diameter crossing over water lines or crossing under water
lines with less than 2-feet separation, provide minimum 150 psi pressure-rated pipe
conforming to ASTM D 2241 with suitable PVC adapter couplings.
E. Joints: Spigot and integral wall section bell with solid cross section elastomeric or
rubber ring gasket conforming to requirements of ASTM D 3212 and ASTM F 477,
or ASTM D 3139 and ASTM F 477. Gaskets shall be factory-assembled and securely
bonded or otherwise held in place to prevent displacement. Manufacturer shall test
sample from each batch conforming to requirements ASTM D 2444.
F. Fittings: Provide PVC gravity sewer sanitary bends, tee, or wye fittings for new
sanitary sewer construction. PVC pipe fittings shall be full-bodied, either injection
molded or factory fabricated. Saddle-type tee or wye fittings are not acceptable.
1. Fittings for straight through and transition connections conform to

requirements of Section 02534- Sanitary Sewer Service Stubs or
Reconnections.
02506-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
G. Conditioning. Conditioning of samples prior to and during tests is subject to approval

by Project Manager. When referee tests are required, condition specimens in
accordance with Procedure A in ASTM D 618 at 73.4 degrees F plus or minus 3.6
degrees F and 50 percent relative humidity plus or minus 5 percent relative humidity
for not less than 40 hours prior to test. Conduct tests under same conditions of
temperature and humidity unless otherwise specified. This is a brief summary of the
test method, and the full current edition of the standard must be followed.
H. Pipe Stiffness. Determine pipe stiffness at 5 percent deflection in accordance with

Test Method D 2412. Minimum pipe stiffness shall be 46 psi. For diameters 4 inches
through 18 inches, test three specimens, each a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm) in
length. For diameters 21 inch through 36-inch, test three specimens, each a minimum
of 12 inch (305 mm) in length. This is a brief summary of the test method, and the
full current edition of the standard must be followed.
I. Flattening. Flatten three specimens of pipe, prepared in accordance with Paragraph

2.03F, in suitable press until internal diameter has been reduced to 60 percent of
original inside diameter of pipe. Rate of loading shall be uniform. Test specimens,
when examined under normal light and with unaided eye, shall show no evidence of
splitting, cracking, breaking, or separation of pipe walls or bracing profiles. Perform
the flattening test in conjunction with pipe stiffness test. This is a brief summary of
the test method, and the full current edition of the standard must be followed.
J. Joint Tightness. Test for joint tightness in accordance with ASTM D 3212, except
that joint shall remain watertight at minimum deflection of 5 percent. Manufacturer
will be required to provide independent third party certification for joint testing each
diameter of storm sewer pipe. This is a brief summary of the test method, and the full
current edition of the standard must be followed
K. Purpose of Tests. Flattening and pipe stiffness tests are intended to be routine quality
control tests. Joint tightness test is intended to qualify pipe to specified level of
performance.
L. Saddle for pipe with 0.5-inch width and greater: Connect side sewer by drilling
proper size round hole in wall of the main sewer pipe, inserting an approved pipe
compression saddle. The Saddle shall meet requirements of ASTM C 923. Saddles
will accept 4”, 6”, and 8” pipe. The lateral pipe shall be held in place by one stainless
steel compression band with stainless steel nut and bolt (any AISI Series 300) type
tightening device and meeting requirements of ASTM A 240. A stainless steel shear
band shall wrap around the pipe a minimum of 380 degrees. Saddle may not protrude
into mainline pipe.
2.04 SANITARY SEWER FORCE MAIN PIPE
A. Provide approved PVC pressure pipe conforming to requirements for water service
pipe and conforming to minimum working pressure rating specified in Section 02532
- Sanitary Sewer Force Mains.
02506-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Acceptable pipe joints are integral bell-and-spigot, containing a bonded-in

elastomeric sealing ring meeting requirements of ASTM F 477. In designated areas
requiring restrained joint pipe and fittings, use approved joint restraint device
conforming to UNI-B-13, for PVC pipe 12-inch diameter and less.
C. Fittings: Provide approved ductile iron fittings as per Section 02501 - Ductile Iron
Pipe and Fittings, Paragraph 2.04, except furnish fittings with one of following
approved internal linings:
1. Nominal 40 mils (35 mils minimum) virgin polyethylene complying with

ASTM D 1248, heat fused to interior surface of fitting
2. Nominal 40 mils (35 mils minimum) polyurethane
3. Nominal 40 mils (35 mils minimum) ceramic epoxy
4. Nominal 40 mils (35 mils minimum) fusion bonded epoxy
D. Exterior Protection: Provide polyethylene wrapping of ductile-iron fittings as required

by Section 02528 - Polyethylene Encasement/Wrap.
E. Hydrostatic Tests: Hydrostatically test pressure rated pipe in accordance with

Paragraph 2.02E.
2.05 BENDS AND FITTINGS FOR PVC PRESSURE PIPE
A. Bends and Fittings: ANSI A 21.10 or ANSI A 21.53, ductile iron; ANSI A 21.11
single rubber gasket push-on type joint; minimum 150 psi pressure rating. Approved
restrained joints, 250 200 psi, may be provided for up to 12 inches in diameter (water
or sanitary).
B. Provide approved restrained joint fittings: Integral restrained joint fittings and pipe do
not require secondary restraint.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PROTECTION
A. Store pipe under cover out of direct sunlight and protect from excessive heat or
harmful chemicals in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Conform to requirements of Section 02511 - Water Lines, Section 02531 - Gravity

Sanitary Sewers, and Section 02532 - Sanitary Sewer Force Mains, as applicable.
B. Install PVC pipe in accordance with Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for
Utilities, ASTM D 2321 for Sewer Pipe, and manufacturer's recommendations.
02506-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Install PVC water service pipe to clear utility lines with minimum 6-inch separation,
unless otherwise shown on Drawings:
D. Avoid imposing strains that will overstress or buckle pipe when lowering pipe into
trench.
E. Hand shovel pipe bedding under pipe haunches and along sides of pipe barrel and
compact to eliminate voids and ensure side support. Ensure barrel is fully supported
along entire length of pipe, prior to backfilling.
F. For PVC pipe installed by trenchless methods, provide integral restrained joints and
pull pipe through hole or casing. For PVC pipe pushed through hole or casing,
provide approved bell insertion protection system.
G. Store PVC pipe under cover out of direct sunlight. Protect pipe from excessive heat or
harmful chemicals. Prevent damage by crushing or piercing.
H. Allow PVC pipe to cool to ground temperature before backfilling when assembled
out of trench to prevent pullout due to thermal contraction.
I. Pipe Assembly Procedures
1. Do not remove gasket from pipe.
2. Lay pipe by inserting spigot end into bell flush with the insertion line or as
recommended by pipe manufacturer.
3. Do not assemble joint by swinging or stabbing.
4. Do not assemble joint using machinery or equipment such as backhoe bucket.
5. At no time shall spigot go past insertion line or homing mark. Continuously

observe and check each homing mark for proper length and install pipe with
home mark visible.
3.03 INSTALLATION FOR FUSIBLE PVC® PIPE
A. General
1. Fusible PVC® pipe will be handled in a safe and non-destructive manner

before, during, and after the fusion process and in accordance with this
specification and pipe supplier’s guidelines.
2. Fusible PVC® pipe will be fused by qualified fusion technicians, as

documented by the pipe supplier.
3. Each fusion joint shall be recorded and logged by an electronic monitoring

device (data logger) connected to the fusion machine.
02506-10
CITY OF HOUSTON
4. Only appropriately sized and outfitted fusion machines that have been
approved by the pipe supplier shall be used for the fusion process. Fusion
machines must incorporate the following elements:
a. HEAT PLATE – Heat plates shall be in good condition with no deep

gouges or scratches. Plates shall be clean and free of any debris or
contamination. Heater controls shall function properly; cord and plug
shall be in good condition. The appropriately sized heat plate shall be
capable of maintaining a uniform and consistent heat profile and
temperature for the size of pipe being fused, per the pipe supplier’s
guidelines.
b. CARRIAGE – Carriage shall travel smoothly with no binding at less

than 50 psi. Jaws shall be in good condition with proper inserts for the
pipe size being fused. Inset pins shall be installed with no interference
to carriage travel.
c. GENERAL MACHINE – Overview of machine body shall yield no

obvious defects, missing parts, or potential safety issues during fusion.
d. DATA LOGGING DEVICE – An approved datalogging device with

the current version of the pipe supplier’s recommended and
compatible software shall be used. Datalogging device operations and
maintenance manual shall be with the unit at all times. If fusing for
extended periods of time, an independent 110V power source shall be
available to extend battery life.
B. Pipe rollers shall be used for support of pipe to either side of the machine:
1. A weather protection canopy that allows for full machine motion of the heat
plate, fusion assembly and carriage shall be provided for fusion in 1506-14
RSM – 50 Rev 3.5 2/12/13 inclement, extreme temperatures, and / or windy
weather, per the pipe supplier’s recommendations.
2. An infrared (IR) pyrometer for checking pipe and heat plate temperatures.
3. Fusion machine operations and maintenance manual shall be kept with the
fusion machine at all times.
4. Facing blades specifically designed for cutting Fusible PVC® pipe shall be
used.
C. Joint Recording
02506-11
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Each fusion joint shall be recorded and logged by an electronic monitoring

device (data logger) connected to the fusion machine. The fusion data logging
and join report shall be generated by software developed specifically for the
butt-fusion of Fusible PVC® pipe. The software shall register and/or record
the parameters required by the pipe supplier and these specifications. Data not
logged by the data logger shall be logged manually and be included in the
Fusion Technician’s joint report.
D. Installation
1. Installation guidelines from the pipe supplier shall be followed for all
installations.
2. The fusible PVC® pipe will be installed in a manner so as not to exceed the
recommended bending radius.
3. Where fusible PVC® pipe is installed by pulling in tension, the recommended

Safe Pulling Force established by the pipe supplier shall not be exceeded.
3.04 PVC RESTRAINED MECHANISM
A. For low-profile coupling with spline-type joints:
1. Do not apply lubricant to spline or pipe or coupling spline grooves.
2. Do not use excessive force while inserting the spline through coupling.
3. Insert spline until it is fully seated around circumference of pipe.
B. Field Cutting of Pipe Ends:
1. Perform by workers certified by manufacturer.
2. Use a PVC pipe cutter and provide square ends.
3. Follow manufacturer’s recommendation to disassemble restrained joint after it

has been locked in place.
4. For low-profile coupling with spline-type joints, use manufacturer approved

power routing and grooving tool to field fabricate required pipe groove.
END OF SECTION
02506-12
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION PRESTRESSED CONCRETE CYLINDER PIPE
SECTION 02507
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE CYLINDER PIPE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Prestressed concrete cylinder pipe (PCCP) and fittings for buried water lines sizes 20
inches in diameter and larger.
E. Section 02518 – Steel Pipe and Fittings for Large Diameter Water Lines
A. Unit Prices:
1. No separate payment will be made for PCCP under this Section. Include cost
in unit price for work in Section 02511 – Water Lines.
2. Maintain on site minimum of two 3-degree and two 5-degree grade angle
adapters. Adapters are considered “extra unit price.” When used during
construction, adapter will be paid at unit price.
1.04 REFERENCES
B. AREMA - Manual of Railway Engineering, Volume II, Chapter 15.
C. ASTM A 648 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Hard-Drawn for Prestressed
Concrete Pipe.
02507-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
D. ASTM A1032 – Standard Test Method for Hydrogen Embrittlement Resistance for
Steel Wire Hard-Drawn Used for Prestressed Concrete Pipe.
E. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
F. ASTM C 35 - Standard Specification for Inorganic Aggregates for Use in Gypsum

Plaster.
G. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
H. ASTM C 497 - Standard Test Methods for Concrete Pipe, Manhole Sections, or Tile.
I. ASTM C 1107 (CRD C-621) - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-
Cement Grout (Non-shrink).
J. ASTM D 512 - Standard Test Methods for Chloride Ion In Water.
K. ASTM D 1293 - Standard Test Methods for pH of Water.
L. ASTM E 165 - Standard Practice for Liquid Penetrant Testing for General Industry.
M. ASTM E 340 - Standard Test Methods for Macroetching Metals and Alloys.
N. ASTM E 709 - Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing.
O. ASTM E 1032 - Standard Test Methods for Radiographic Examination of

Weldments.
P. ANSI/AWS A3.0 - Standard Welding Terms and Definitions.
Q. AWWA C 200 - Standard for Steel Water Pipe 6 in. and Larger.
R. AWWA C 206 - Standard for Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe.
S. AWWA C 207 - Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 in.
through 144 in.
T. AWWA C 301 - Standard for Prestressed Concrete Pressure Pipe, Steel-Cylinder

Type.
U. AWWA C 304 - Standard for Design of Prestressed Concrete Cylinder Pipe.
V. AWWA M 9 –Concrete Pressure Pipe.
W. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.
X. SSPC SP 7 - Surface Preparation Specification No. 7 - Brush Off Blast Cleaning.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
02507-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Submit shop drawings and certification signed and sealed by Professional Engineer
registered in State of Texas showing following:
1. Manufacturer's pipe design and thrust restraint calculations in accordance with

AWWA M9, latest edition.
dimensions, welding procedures, fabrication, fitting, flange, and special
details, with plan view of each pipe segment sketched, detailing pipe invert
elevations, horizontal bends, welded joints, and other critical features. Indicate
station numbers for pipe and fittings corresponding to Drawings. Do not start
production of pipe and fittings prior to review and approval by Project
Manager. Provide final approved lay schedule on CD-ROM in Adobe portable
document format (*.PDF).
3. Include hot tapping procedure.
4. Submit certification from manufacturer that design was performed for project
in accordance with requirements of this section.
C. Within 30 calendar days following Notice to Proceed and before initiation of

manufacture of prestressing wire, submit following:
1. Name and location of prestressing wire manufacturer.
2. General description of quality control procedures used by wire manufacturer.

Include physical and chemical property tests utilized, testing frequency and
test records; and description of methods employed to assure compliance with
AWWA C301 regarding wire surface temperature, type of thermometer,
location of temperature measurement, frequency of temperature tests and test
records.
3. Approximate dates when wire will be manufactured for use in pipe.
4. Hydrogen embrittlement sensitivity test report for wire.
D. Submit inspection procedures to be used by manufacturer and for quality control and
assurance for materials and welding. Submit standard repair procedures that describe
in detail shop and field work to be performed.
E. Submit following within 45 days after manufacturing of pipe and fittings:
1. Prestressing wire records.
a. ASTM A 648 for wire.
b. Steel reports as required in AWWA C301, Section 5.2.5.
02507-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
c. Records of testing accomplished to measure wire surface temperature

as required in ASTM A648.
d. Results of other tests of steel reinforcement required in AWWA C301,

Section 4.4.7, 4.4.8, and 4.4.9.
e. Wire tension records required in AWWA C301, Section 4.6.7.1.

Indicate heat and coil of prestressing wire used.
2. Test results.
a. Hydrostatic testing, acid etching, dye penetration, magnetic particle

and x-ray weld test reports as required.
b. Compressive strength (28 day) test results for each type of coating,
lining and core mix design.
3. Pipe manufacturer's certification that PCCP:
a. Cylinder assembly has been hydrostatically tested at factory for two

(2) minutes minimum in accordance with Section 2.01 J and AWWA
C301.
b. Mortar coatings and linings were applied or allowed to cure at

temperature above 32 degrees F.
F. Submit following for non-shrink grout for special applications:
1. Manufacturer's technical literature including specifications for mixing,

placing, and curing grout.
2. Results of tests performed by certified independent testing laboratory showing

conformance to ASTM C 1107, Non-shrink Grout and requirements of this
specification.
3. Certification product is suitable for use in contact with potable water.
G. Submit proof of certification for welders. Indicate certified procedures and position
each welder is qualified to perform. Provide documentation of the most recent weld
qualification test date and continuity of use in each process for which the welder or
welding operator is required.
H. Submit certification showing calibration within last 12 months for equipment such as
scales, measuring devices, and calibration tools used in manufacture of pipe. Each
device used in manufacture of pipe is required to have tag recording date of last
calibration. Devices are subject to inspection by Project Manager.
02507-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Manufacturer to have permanent quality control department and laboratory facility

capable of performing inspection and testing required. Inspection procedures and
manufacturing process are subject to inspection by Project Manager. Perform
manufacturer tests and inspections required by AWWA C 301 as modified by these
Specifications. Repair defects when as substandard welds, excessive radial offsets
(misalignment), pitting, gouges, cracks, other nonconforming conditions.
1. Cylinder and Joint Ring Assembly:
a. Review mill certifications for conformance to requirements of

Specifications.
b. Perform physical testing of each heat of steel for conformance to

applicable ASTM standards.
c. Inspect physical dimensions and overall condition of joint rings and

cylinder/joint ring assembly to verify compliance with requirements of
AWWA C 301.
d. Test cylinder/joint ring weld for tensile strength. Test one specimen
for each 500 cylinder/joint ring assemblies in addition to those tests
required by AWWA C 301.
e. Reject dented steel cylinders.
2. Prestressing Wire:
a. Inspect wire spacing during wire placement on core.
b. Test wire splices for each production run or a minimum of once a

week, whichever is less, for conformance with minimum strength
criteria.
3. Pipe Cores and Coating:
a. Review mill certificates for each load of cement for conformance to

ASTM C 150.
b. Perform sieve analysis weekly for each source of coarse and fine
aggregate for conformance to ASTM C 33.
c. Inspect kiln recorder charts daily to confirm proper curing

environment.
d. Prior to prestressing, inspect each core for voids, chips, cracks,

deleterious surfaces and foreign matter.
e. Check mortar batch proportions, moisture content and slurry

application rate. Check coating thickness over wire on each pipe.
02507-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
f. Check physical integrity of cured mortar coating.
g. Reject pipe with cracks in mortar coating exceeding 0.01 inches wide.
4. Protective Coatings: Check daily application rate and resulting dry film
thickness.
B. Gaskets: Randomly test rubber cord for diameter, tensile strength, elongation,
compression set, hardness, and specific gravity after oven aging on one out of 100
gaskets.
C. Weld Testing:
1. Perform macroetching tests for complete -penetration production welds on

normal production weld tests. Complete joint penetration welds are defined in
ANSI/AWS A3.0. Verify complete joint penetration by means of macroetch
of joint weld cross section. Macroetch technique in accordance with ASTM E
340.
2. Perform x-ray, ultrasonic, magnetic particle, or dye penetrant testing per

AWWA C200 of manual welds on special pipe and fittings.
3. Perform minimum of one set of weld test specimens in accordance with

ANSI/AWS A3.0 on each size, grade and wall thickness at minimum of every
3,000 feet of pipe manufactured. Perform no less than one test per project by
each welding machine and each operator.
D. Cast four standard test cylinders each day for each 50 cubic yards of core concrete or
mortar coating or portion thereof for each mix placed in day. Perform compressive
strength test at 28 days. No cylinder test result shall be less than 80 percent of
specified strength.
E. Make available copy of Physical and Chemical testing reports for steel cylinders and
provide reports at request of Project Manager.
F. Check physical dimensions of pipe and fittings: Physical dimensions to include pipe
lengths, pipe LD., pipe O.D. and bend angles.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE CYLINDER PIPE
A. Furnish all concrete pressure pipe by same manufacturer.
B. Provide prestressed concrete cylinder pipe in conformance with AWWA C 301,

AWWA C 304 and AWWA M 9 except as modified in this Section. Use of pipe from
inventory is permitted only if specifications and certifications are met. Provide testing
records for pipe.
02507-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Do not use prestressed concrete cylinder pipe in aerial crossings, exposed or other
unburied areas.
D. Pipe Manufacturer:
1. Must have minimum of 5 years of manufacturer's pipe installations that have

been in successful and continuous service.
2. Must maintain on site or in plant minimum of four 22.5-degree bends per

10,000 linear feet of water line. Additionally, for 102” pipe and larger, four
bevel adaptors must be maintained on site or in the plant. Any combination of
bends may be substituted at manufacturer's option (i.e. two 11.25-degree
bends are equivalent to one 22.5-degree bend and will be counted as one
fitting). Must be capable of delivering bends or bevel adaptors to job site
within 12 hours of notification. These fittings are in addition to fittings called
out on Drawing and must be available at all times.
E. Pipe Design Conditions:
1. Working pressure: 150 psi.
2. Hydrostatic field test pressure: 150 psi.
3. Maximum pressure due to surge: 225 psi.
4. Minimum pressure due to surge: -5 psi.
5. Unit weight of soil: 120 pcf minimum, unless otherwise specified.
6. Minimum trench width: O.D. of pipe + four (4) feet.
7. Pipe and Fittings: Designed to withstand most critical simultaneous

application of external loads including construction loads and internal
pressures.
8. Design: Based on minimum of AASHTO HL-93 loading, AREMA Cooper E-

80 loads when under railroads, and depths of bury as indicated. Design pipe
with Marston's earth loads for transition width trench for all heights of cover.
a. Calculate moments and thrusts in wall based on height of earth load,

live load, water weight, and pipe weight.
b. For earth load heights up to 16 feet, use bedding sand as bedding

material and use 90-degree Olander coefficients for earth load, live
load, and water weight contained in pipe along with 15-degree Olander
coefficients for pipe weight.
02507-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
c. For earth load heights 16 feet and greater, use cement stabilized sand
as bedding material below springline of pipe, and use 150-degree
Olander coefficients for earth load, live load, and water weight
contained in pipe along with a 15-degree Olander coefficient for pipe
weight.
9. Groundwater Level: Assume below pipe for pipe design. Assume equal to
natural ground surface for other conditions.
10. Design pipe for transmitting potable water, unless otherwise shown on
Drawings.
11. Manufacture pipe for adverse environmental conditions in accordance with

Section 7.5.5 of AWWA C304.
12. Design pipe for buried conditions and kept empty for up to 365 days.
13. Tunnel and Augered Sections: Provide constant outside diameter from bell to
spigot end for pipe. Exclude structural benefits associated with primary liner.
Design pipe and pipe joints to carry loads including but not limited to:
overburden and lateral earth pressures, subsurface soil, grouting, other
conditions of service, thrust of jacks, and stress anticipated during handling
and installation.
F. Coatings and Linings:
1. Provide Portland cement; ASTM C 150, Type I or II. Provide one type of
cement for entire project.
2. Water Absorption Test: ASTM C 497, Method A; perform on samples of

cured mortar coating taken from each working shift. Cure mortar coating
samples in same manner as pipe.
a. Test Value: Average minimum of 3 samples taken from same working

shift, no greater than 9 percent for average value, 10 percent for
individual value.
b. Test Frequency: Perform tests each working shift until conformance to

absorption requirements has been established by 10 consecutive
passing test results, at which time testing may be performed weekly.
Resume testing for each working shift when absorption test results fail
until conformance to absorption requirements is reestablished by 10
consecutive passing test results.
3. Apply one coat of primer to exposed steel parts of steel bell and spigot rings.
Prior to coating, blast clean in accordance with SSPC-SP7 (Brush Off Blast
Cleaning). Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
02507-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
4. Coat and line access inlets, service outlets, test inlets and air release/vacuum
relief riser pipe with same coating and lining of water line in accordance with
AWWA C 301, Section 4, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
5. Do not exceed two hours between application of first and last course when
cement mortar is applied in more than one course; otherwise, do not defer
placing of coating of any portion of pipe length. Verify cement mortar coating
thickness on each size of pipe by nondestructive method before removing pipe
from coating machine.
6. Remove and replace disbonded lining or coating. Reject pipe requiring

patches larger than 100 square inches or 12 inches in greatest dimension.
Allow no more than one patch on either lining or coating of pipe. Provide
WELD-CRETE Probond Epoxy Bonding Agent ET-150, parts A and B;
Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod, or approved equal bonding agent for pipe patching.
G. Fittings and Specials:
1. Design fittings to same internal and external loads as straight pipe.
2. Manufacture in accordance with Section 02518 - Steel Pipe and Fittings for
Large Diameter Water Lines.
3. Provide fabricated bends or fittings with minimum radius of 2-1/2 times pipe
diameter.
4. Design test plugs to withstand forces generated by hydrostatic test and test
pressure from either side. Do not exceed 50 percent of minimum yield for
design stresses due to hydrostatic pressure. Assume opposite side of plug does
not contain water.
5. Provide no specials less than 4 feet in length unless indicated on Drawings or

6. Butt Straps for Closure Piece: Provide at locations indicated on Drawings or

authorized by Project Manager. Minimum 12-inch-wide split butt strap;
minimum plate thickness equal to thinnest member being joined; fabricated
from material equal in chemical and physical properties to thinnest member
being joined. Permit no angular deflection or joint offset at butt-strap joints.
7. Provide minimum 6-inch welded outlet for inspecting each closure section,
unless access manway is within 40 feet of closure section.
8. Provide Denso petroleum based tape or approved equal for exposed portions
of nuts and bolts.
H. Joints:
02507-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. AWWA C 301 rubber-gasketed or welded bell-and-spigot type except where

flanged joints are required for valves and fittings as shown on Drawings.
Refer to Section 02511 - Water Lines for details on joints and jointing.
2. Rubber-Gasketed Joints: Single weld bell and spigot ring onto steel cylinder.
In thrust areas, double weld bell-and-spigot onto steel cylinder. Bond as
shown on Drawings to provide electrical continuity along entire pipeline.
3. Restrained Joints: Restrain joints by welding or harnessing joints.
a. Design Pressure: 1.5 times working pressure.
b. Harnessed Joints: AWWA M 9, clamp or snap ring type, except where

prohibited. Limit maximum size of snap ring joints to 30-inch
diameter pipe.
c. Groundwater Level: Assumed to be equal to natural ground surface.
d. Provide restrained joint pipe with adequate cylinder thickness to

transmit full thrust generated by internal pressure across joints.
(1) Calculate distance of restrained joints based on resistance along

each leg of bend with thrust based on bend angle.
(2) Calculate cylinder thickness not to be less than that defined in

following table:
Inside Diameter Cylinder

(inches) Thickness
Greater than 120 0.25 inch
102 to 120 4 gauge
90 to 96 6 gauge
72 to 84 8 gauge
48 to 66 10 gauge
Less than 48 12 gauge
(3) Allow cylinder thickness to reduce linearly from maximum

calculated thickness or from minimum cylinder thickness (as
determined in Paragraph 2.01 H.3.d.1, whichever controls, to
minimum thickness required by design over required length (as
determined in Paragraph 2.01 H.3.d.1) of restrained joints.
02507-10
CITY OF HOUSTON
4. Use only fully circumferentially welded joints in areas considered potentially

petroleum contaminated, within tunnels and under foreign pipelines. Perform
welding in accordance with Section 02511 – Water Lines.
5. Pipe Flanges: AWWA C 207 for standard steel flanges of pressure class
corresponding to pipe class.
I. Pipe Lengths: Provide pipe sections in standard lengths with minimum length of 16
feet and maximum length of 25 feet, and as indicated on approved shop Drawings or
approved by Project Manager. Gasketed joints are allowed on standard lengths of
pipe. Non-standard pipe lengths must be approved by Project Manager and joints
must be welded as specified herein to achieve equal to or greater than standard pipe
length before gasketed joints can be used. Internally and externally mark pipe section
with durable marking to show location and pipe pressure.
J. Hydrostatic Test of Cylinder: AWWA C 301, Section 4.6.4.3, at point of manufac-

ture. Hold test for minimum 2 minutes for thorough inspection of cylinder. Repair or
reject cylinders revealing leaks or cracks.
K. Transport fittings 42 inches in diameter and larger with end caps and stulls. Remove
end caps just prior to installation. Remove stulls after completion of backfill
operation.
L. Provide radius of curve as indicated on Drawings unless approved by Project

Manager. Make curves and bends by deflecting joints, by use of beveled joints, or by
combination of two methods, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Do not exceed
deflection or joint offset angle recommended by pipe manufacturer. Provide beveled
pipe sections of standard length used in curved alignment, except when shorter
sections are required to limit radius of curvature. In such case, provide sections
throughout curve of substantially equal length. When manufacturing straight pipe
sections, manual welding is allowed for following:
1. Tack welding of coils and plates during continuous pipe making process.
2. Rewelding and repairing structural defects in plate and automatic machine

welds.
3. Attaching new coil of steel to previous coil.
M. Prior to arrival on project site, identify pipe sections within limits of thrust restraint
with permanent, brightly colored, and highly visible markings on outer pipe coating
as approved by Project Manager.
2.02 PRESTRESSING WIRE
A. General:
1. Conform to requirement of ASTM A 648, AWWA C 301 and this

specification.
02507-11
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Furnish test results from independent manufacturer (i.e., manufacturer with no

legal or financial ties to pipe manufacturer). Tests must have been performed
within 12 months prior to submittal or when supplier changes.
3. Test foreign manufactured wire by local independent laboratory.
4. Prestressing wire surface temperature: not more than 360 degrees at any point
in drawing process. Audit surface temperature of wire throughout length of
wire drawing process daily for each working shift producing ASTM A 648
wire.
5. Do not use wire with visible pitting or rust that cannot be wiped off.
6. Do not use wire that fails, for no observable mechanical reason other than
tension force, during circumferential wrap. Do not splice, but reject this
section of wire.
B. Perform mechanical tests per AWWA C301 - Steel Reinforcement except as modified
below:
1. Retest coil for which failed torsion test sample has radial, spiral (that is,
longitudinal) split visible to unaided eye or evidenced by abrupt offset in wire
surface detectable with fingernail.
2. Test sample, for mechanical requirements, from 1 of each 10 consecutively

produced coils or fraction thereof in each lot. Pipe manufacturer to establish
procedures so samples are randomly selected from entire length of wire coils.
C. Perform hydrogen embrittlement sensitivity testing on samples of prestressing wire in

accordance with ASTM A648 and A1032. Test one set of pre-qualified samples for
each anticipated wire manufacturing source anticipated by pipe manufacturer for
project. Perform tension, wrapping, and torsion on wire samples. Perform pre-
qualification testing prior to pipe manufacturing and for each source of supply for
wire. Do not use wire failing to conform to test requirements of specification.
Acceptance criteria are according to ASTM A648, S1, and AWWA C301, 4.4.8.1.
Utilize only wire that meets both of following:
1. Passed aforementioned test.
2. Manufactured from same source and manufacturing procedures.
2.03 GROUT FOR JOINTS AND SPECIAL APPLICATION
A. Joint Grout:
1. Cement Grout Mixture: One part cement to two parts of fine, sharp clean
sand. Mix interior joint mortar with as little water as possible until very stiff
but workable. Mix exterior joint mortar with water until it has consistency of
thick cream.
02507-12
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Water: Potable water with total dissolved solids less than 1000 mg/1; ASTM
D 512 chloride ions less than 100 mg/1 for slurry and mortar cure; ASTM D
1293 pH greater than 6.5. Use potable water with 250 ppm limit on chlorides
and sulfates.
3. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II. Provide one type of cement for
entire project.
4. Sand:
a. Interior joints: ASTM C 35 fine graded plaster sand.
b. Exterior joints: ASTM C 33 natural sand with 100 percent passing No.
16 sieve.
5. Mix cement grout to specific gravity of 19 lb/gallon or greater as measured by

grout/slurry balance. Use balance manufactured grout/slurry by Baroid or
approved equal. Perform test in presence of and at request of Project Manager.
Add additional cement grout or water to mixed cement grout to bring mix to
proper moisture content or specific gravity. Discard cement grout that has
been mixed more than 20 minutes and is not at proper specific gravity or
moisture content.
B. Provide approved Non-shrink Grout for Special Applications, Patches and Repairs.
1. Conform to requirements of ASTM C 1107, Non-shrink Grout.
2. Pre-blended factory-packaged material manufactured under rigid quality

control.
3. Contain non-metallic natural aggregate, be non-staining and non-corrosive.
4. Meeting NSF 61 Standard suitable for use in contact with potable water
supply.
5. Exterior: Highly flowable to fill joint wrapper without leaving voids or

trapped air. Interior capable of being placed with plastic consistency.
6. Non-bleeding and non-segregating at fluid consistency.
7. Contain no chlorides or additives which may contribute to corrosion of

prestressed concrete cylinder pipe.
8. Free of gas-producing, gas-releasing agents.
9. Resist attack by oil or water.
02507-13
CITY OF HOUSTON
10. Mix, place, and cure in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

Upon 72 hours notice, provide services of qualified representative of non-
shrink grout manufacturer to aid in use of product under job conditions.
11. Mix non-shrink grout to specific gravity of 17.7 lb/gallon or greater as

measured by grout/slurry balance. Use grout/slurry balance manufactured by
Baroid or approved equal. Perform test in presence of and at request of Project
Manager. Add additional cement grout or water to bring mix to proper
moisture content or specific gravity. Discard grout that has been mixed more
than 20 minutes and is not at proper specific gravity or moisture content.
12. Compressive strength: ASTM C 1107 2500 psi minimum 7-day unconfined;
5000 psi minimum 28-day unconfined.
C. Finished surface of lining and interior joint to be comparable to surface rubbed with
No. 16 carborundum stone. Rub joint mortar sufficiently to bring paste to surface, to
remove depressions and projections, and to produce smooth, dense surface. Add
cement to form surface paste as necessary. Leave interior with clean, neat and
uniform-appearing finish.
D. Joint Wrapper: Minimum width of 9 inches for 33-inch diameter and smaller;
minimum width of 12 inches for diameters greater than 33-inch hemmed at edge to
allow threading with minimum 5/8-inch-wide steel strap. Provide minimum 6-inch-
wide wire Ethafoam strip sized, positioned, and sewn circumferential in center of
wrapper.
2.04 CATHODIC PROTECTION
A. Connect each joint of pipe with bonding straps or approved devices to maintain
continuity of current. Provide bonding straps free of foreign material.
B. Electrically isolate water line from other connections. Use insulating type joints or
nonmetallic pipe unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Conform to requirements of Section 02511 - Water Lines. Do not install pipe without
approved lay schedule.
B. Manufacturer will make available services of representative, throughout project

duration when deemed necessary by Project Manager, to advise aspects of installation
including but not limited to handling, storing, cleaning and inspecting, coatings and
linings repairs, and general construction methods affecting pipe.
C. Bedding and Backfilling:
02507-14
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Conform to requirements of Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for

Utilities.
2. Align pipe at proper grade prior to joint connection and do not shift after
jointing operation has been completed.
3. Do not move trench support system (trench safety system) once bedding
material is compacted.
4. Excavate outside specified trench section for bell holes, and for spaces
sufficient to permit removal of slings. Provide bell holes at proper locations
for unrestricted access to joint. Form bell holes large enough to facilitate joint
wrapping and to permit visual examination of process. Enlargement of bell
holes as required or directed by Project Manager. Subsequent backfilling
thereof will not be considered as authorized additional excavation and
backfill. Backfill bell holes and spaces to satisfaction of Project Manager.
5. Remove blocking after placing sufficient backfill to hold pipe in position.
6. Use cement-stabilized sand in areas of trench excavation 16 feet and greater,

as bedding material up to springline of pipe.
D. Follow non-shrink grout manufacturer's specifications for non-shrink grouting.
E. Install each pipe section in sequence identified on lay schedule. Deviations from lay
schedule sequence shall be approved by Project Manager and denoted on final lay
schedule.
F. Use adequate surveying methods, procedures and employ competent surveying

personnel to ensure pipe sections are laid to line and grade and within stipulated
tolerances. Measure and record, in form approved by Project Manager, in-place
survey data for pipe laid each day and submit copy of data to Project Manager at end
of that day. Survey data to include unique pipe number, deflection or joint offset
angle at pipe joint and whether beveled ends were used, invert elevation at pipe joint,
deviation of joint from project line, deviation of joint from project grade, inside pipe
joint lap measured at top, bottom, and at springline (each side).
G. Static Electricity:

2. Electrically test where required after installation of pipeline is complete.
3.02 CLOSURES AND APPROVED PIPE MODIFICATIONS
A. No modifications of standard pipe for closures will be permitted in field. No field

cutting of pipe or exposure of prestressed wire is permitted without written approval
from Project Manager.
02507-15
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Pipe manufacturer's representative and Project Manager to entirely witness closures

and approved pipe modification efforts.
C. Provide minimum lap of 4 inches between member being joined and edge of butt
strap. Weld on both interior and exterior, unless otherwise approved by Project
Manager.
D. Provide full circumferential welds on joints required to be welded. Employ

independent certified testing laboratory, approved by Project Manager, to perform
weld tests on field welds. Include cost of testing in contract unit price for water line.
Use magnetic particle test method for lap welds or X-ray methods for butt welds, for
100 percent of joint welds. Maintain records of tests. When defective weld is
revealed, repair defective weld, and retest. Use wire and flux from same manufacturer
throughout entire project.
E. Fill wrapper in field and allow excess grout water to seep out. Refill wrapper as
necessary. When joint mortar level has stabilized and begun to mechanically stiffen,
lap Ethafoam wrapper over top of joint, and secure in place.
F. Stretch test each gasket splice to twice its unstretched length and inspect for defects.
3.03 VISIBLE CRACKS
A. No visible cracks longer than 6 inches, measured to be within 15 degrees of line

parallel to pipe longitudinal axis, are permitted except:
1. In surface laitance of centrifugally cast concrete,
2. In sections of pipe with steel reinforcing collars or wrappers, or
3. Within 12 inches of pipe ends.
B. Repair interior lining cracks that exceed 1/16-inch (0.0625 inches) wide.
C. Reject pipe with exterior coating cracks that exceed 0.01 inches wide.
D. Immediately remove pipe from site when pipe has cracks exceeding limitations and
cracks are not repairable.
3.04 FIELD REPAIR PROCEDURES FOR COATING/LINING
A. Areas less than or equal to 6 inches in diameter: Patch honeycomb and minor defects
in concrete surfaces with non-shrink grout conforming to section 2.03 B. Use only
manual or small (low pressure) air chisels to chip away mortar coating or lining. Cut
out unsatisfactory material and replace with non-shrink grout, securely bonded to
existing coating or lining. Finish junctures between patches and existing concrete as
inconspicuous as possible. Strike off non-shrink grout flush with surrounding surface
after patch has stiffened sufficiently to allow for greatest portion of shrinkage. Finish
surface in accordance with lining requirements.
02507-16
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Pipe with defective coating areas greater than 6 inches in diameter cannot be used.
Immediately remove pipe from project.
C. Reject pipe when steel cylinder is dented while making field repair. Immediately
remove pipe from project.
END OF SECTION
02507-17
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION EXTRA STRENGTH CLAY PIPE
SECTION 02508
EXTRA STRENGTH CLAY PIPE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Extra strength vitrified clay pipe for direct burial.
B. Vitrified clay pipe for jacking and microtunneling.
C. Section 02441 – Microtunneling
D. Section 02445 – Jack and Bore/Jack and Mine/Pilot Tube Guided Boring Tunnels
E. Section 02531 – Gravity Sanitary Sewers
A. Unit Prices.
1. No separate payment will be made for extra strength vitrified clay pipe under
this section. Include cost in unit price work, as specified in the following
sections:
a. Section 02441 - Microtunneling
b. Section 02445 - Jack and Bore/Jack and Mine/Pilot Tube Guided

Boring Tunnels.
c. Section 02531 - Gravity Sanitary Sewers.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 12 - Practice for Installing Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines.
02508-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. ASTM C 301 - Test Methods for Vitrified Clay Pipe.
C. ASTM C 425 - Specification for Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and
Fittings.
D. ASTM C 700 - Specification for Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard
Strength, and Perforated.
E. ASTM C 828 - Test Method for Low-Pressure Air Test of Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines.
F. ASTM C 1091 - Standard Test Method for Hydrostatic Infiltration Testing of

Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines.
G. ASTM C 1208 - Standard Specification for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Joints for Use in
Microtunneling, Sliplining, Pipe Bursting, and Tunnels.
H. ASTM D 1784 - Standard Classification System and Basis for Specification for Rigid
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Compounds.
I. National Clay Pipe Institute (NCPI) – Vitrified Clay Pipe Engineering Manual.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit complete product data for pipe, fittings, gaskets and couplings for approval.
Indicate conformance to appropriate reference standards.
C. Submit certificates by a testing laboratory, hired and paid by the manufacturer, that
clay pipes meet applicable standards when tested in accordance with ASTM C 301.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 VITRIFIED CLAY PIPE
A. Vitrified clay pipe for direct burial shall conform to ASTM C 700 requirements for
extra strength clay pipe.
B. Approved manufacturers of extra strength clay pipe are:
1. Mission Clay Products Corporation
2. Dickey Company.
2.02 JOINTS
A. Joints for extra strength vitrified clay shall conform to ASTM C 425.
02508-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. For clay pipe 21 inches in diameter and larger, conform to requirements for
compression joints for bell-and-spigot pipe.
2. For clay pipe 18 inches in diameter and smaller, conform to requirements for
compression couplings for plain-end pipe.
B. Joints for jacking, sliplining, and microtunneling pipe shall conform to ASTM C
1208.
2.03 GASKETS
A. When no contaminant is identified, furnish rubber or polyurethane elastomer gasket

material conforming to standards listed above.
B. Pipe to be installed in potentially contaminated areas, especially where free product is

found near the elevation of the proposed sewer, shall have the following gasket
material for the noted contaminants:
As recommended by the pipe manufacturer,

Other contaminants Engineer of the Record and approved by City
2.04 COMPRESSION COUPLINGS
A. The PVC collar material for compression couplings of plain-end pipe shall conform
to requirements of ASTM D 1784, Class 12454-B.
B. Couplings for microtunneling and other pipe jacking methods shall be made with
Type 316 stainless steel sleeve couplings that utilize elastomeric sealing gaskets as
the sole means to maintain joint watertightness. The joints shall have the same outside
diameter as the pipe so when the pipes are assembled, the joints are flush with the
pipe outside surface.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Conform to installation requirements of:
1. Section 02531 - Gravity Sanitary Sewers; and
02508-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Section 02441 - Microtunneling or Section 02445 - Jack and Bore/Jack and

Mine/Pilot Tube Guided Boring Tunnels
B. Install pipe in accordance with ASTM C 12, the NCPI Vitrified Clay Pipe
Engineering Manual, and manufacturer's recommendations.
3.02 ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A. Perform acceptance testing in accordance with Section 02533 - Acceptance Testing

for Sanitary Sewer, and ASTM C 1091. Do not use procedures from ASTM C 828
unless authorized by Project Manager.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The City may run tests on field samples following applicable ASTM standards at an
independent laboratory to verify the required physical properties and characteristics
of supplied materials. Provide product samples as requested by Project Manager.
END OF SECTION
02508-4
CITY OF HOUSTON FIBERGLASS REINFORCED
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION PIPE FOR PRESSURE MAINS
SECTION 02509
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PIPE FOR PRESSURE MAINS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Fiber Reinforced Pipe for buried water lines up to 30 inches in diameter, unless
otherwise approved by Project Manager.
B. Fiber Reinforced Pipe for buried sanitary sewer force mains up to 16 inches in
diameter, unless otherwise approved by Project Manager.
C. Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities
D. Section 02441 – Microtunneling
E. Section 02445 - Jack and Bore/Jack and Mine/Pilot Tube Guided Boring Tunnels
F. Section 02465 - Drilled Shaft Foundations
G. Section 02501 - Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings
H. Section 02502 - Steel Pipe and Fittings
I. Section 02511 - Water Lines
J. Section 02514 - Disinfection of Water Lines
K. Section 02515 - Hydrostatic Testing of Pipelines
L. Section 02518 - Steel Pipe and Fittings for Large Diameter Water Lines
M. Section 02532 - Sanitary Sewer Force Mains
A. Unit Prices.
1. No separate payment will be made for fiberglass pipe under this Section.
Include cost in unit price for Work, as specified in Section 02511 - Water
Lines and Section 02532 - Sanitary Sewer Force Mains.
02509-1
1.04 REFERENCES
B. AREMA - Manual of Railway Engineering, Volume B, Chapter 15.
C. ASTM D696 - Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of
Plastics Between −30°C and 30°C with a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer
D. ASTM D 2412 - Standard Test Method for Determination of External Loading

Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading.
E. ASTM D 2992 - Obtaining Hydrostatic or Pressure Design Basis for "Fiberglass"

(Glass- Fiber-Reinforced-Thermosetting) Resin Pipe and Fittings.
F. ASTM D 2996 - Standard Specification for Filament-Wound “Fiberglass” (Glass-

Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe
G. ASTM D 3262 - Standard Specification for “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced

Thermosetting-Resin) Sewer Pipe.
H. ASTM D 3681 - Standard Test Method for Chemical Resistance of “Fiberglass”

(Glass-Fiber- Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe in a Deflected Condition.
I. ASTM D 3754 - Standard Specification for “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber Reinforced

Thermosetting-Resin) Sewer and Industrial Pressure Pipe.
J. ASTM D 4161 - Standard Specification for “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced

Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe Joints Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals.
K. ASTM F 477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining
Plastic Pipe.
L. AWWA C 950 – Fiberglass Pressure Pipe
M. AWWA M 45 – Fiberglass Pipe Design
N. ISO 14692 – Petroleum and Natural Gas Industries – Glass-Reinforced Plastics

(GRP) Piping
O. NSF Standard 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
02509-2
B. Provide sufficient data for the Project Manager to properly evaluate the pipe.
C. Product data submittals shall include the following, as a minimum:
1. Details of the proposed pipe.
2. Properties and strengths of the pipe.
3. Details of pipe joint.
4. Pipe design analysis and thrust restraint calculations in accordance with

AWWA M45 – Fiberglass Pipe Design, latest edition.
5. Instruction on storage, handling, transporting, and installation.
6. Standard catalog sheets.
D. Test Reports: Provide test reports upon request, certifying that the pipe has been
tested in accordance with and exceeds minimum requirements of ASTM D 2412,
ASTM D 2992 (if applicable), D 3262 and ASTM D 3681.
E. Certification from manufacturer that fiberglass pipe was hydrostatically tested at

factory in accordance with AWWA C 950 and requirements of this section.
1. Hydrostatic Test Pressure: 150 psi
2. Test Duration: Two (2) minutes
F. An affidavit of compliance stating that all delivered materials comply with the
requirements of these specifications as well as compliance with AWWA C950.
G. For pressure mains 24-inches in diameter and larger, shop drawings signed and sealed
by Professional Engineer registered in State of Texas showing:
1. Manufacturer's pipe design calculations including thrust restraint design.
2. Details of pictorial nature of critical features and specials indicating alignment

and grade, laying dimensions, fabrication, fitting, flange, and fully
dimensioned details, with plan view detailing pipe invert elevations, bends,
and other critical features. Indicate station numbers for fittings corresponding
to Drawings. Do not start production of pipe and fittings prior to review and
approval by Project Manager. Provide final approved lay schedule on CD-
ROM in Adobe Portable Document Format (*.PDF).
3. Certification from manufacturer that design was performed for project in

accordance with requirements of this section. Certification to be signed and
sealed by Professional Engineer registered in State of Texas.
02509-3
A. Manufacturer to provide permanent quality control department and laboratory facility

capable of performing inspections and testing as required by Specifications. Material
testing, inspection procedures, and manufacturing process are subject to inspection by
Project Manager. Perform manufacturer's tests and inspections required by referenced
standards and these Specifications.
B. Calibrate within last 12 months equipment such as scales, measuring devices, and
other calibration tools used in manufacture of pipe. Affix tag recording date of last
calibration on each device used in manufacture of pipe.
1.07 TESTING
A. Joints: Coupling joints shall be qualified per the tests of Section 7 of ASTM D 4161.
B. Provide pipes tested in accordance with AWWA C950 and ASTM D 3754 as
applicable.
C. Hydrostatic Testing: AWWA C950, Section 5.1.2.1.1, at point of manufacture. Hold

test for minimum 2 minutes for thorough inspection of pipe. Reject pipe revealing
leaks or cracks.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FIBERGLASS PIPE
A. Manufacture pipe by filament winding process to result in a dense, nonporous,

corrosion- resistant, consistent composite structure to meet the operating conditions
as shown on the Drawings.
1. Do not use stiffening ribs or rings.
2. The workmanship of the pipe shall be free of defects such as delaminations,

indentations, pinholes, bubbles, cracks, pits, blisters, foreign inclusions, and
resin- reduced areas. Reasons for these defect free workmanship is because of
the serviceability and strength of the pipe could be compromised.
3. The pipe must be as uniform as commercially practicable in opacity, color,

density as well as other physical properties.
4. Centrifugally cast fiberglass pipe may be used in lieu of filament-wound for

pressure pipe with approval of Project Manager, however, this substitution
will not be approved for water lines.
B. Furnish pipes in the diameters specified and within the tolerances specified below.
1. Tolerances:
02509-4
a. Sanitary Sewer Force Mains: Diameter tolerances in accordance with

AWWA C950.
b. Water Mains: Diameter tolerances in accordance with AWWA C950

for diameters up to 30 inches.
C. Lengths: Supply at least 90 percent of total footage of each size and class of pipe,
excluding special order pipes in nominal lengths of 20 feet unless approved by
Project Manager. No nominal lengths of less than four (4) feet may be used.
D. Wall Thickness: Provide minimum average wall thickness of stated design thickness.
Provide minimum single point thickness not be less than 98 percent of stated design
thickness for sanitary sewer applications and not less than 100 percent for water
mains.
E. End Squareness: Provide pipe ends square to pipe axis with maximum tolerance of
1/8 inch.
F. Refer to list of Approved Products for acceptable manufacturers.
2.02 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Design fiberglass pressure pipe according to AWWA Manual M 45 – Fiberglass Pipe

Design, latest edition.
B. Sanitary Sewer Force Mains:
1. Provide minimum 150 psi Pressure Class. Stiffness class of FRP pipe shall
satisfy design requirements, but shall not be less than 46 psi, when used in
direct bury operation; 36 psi, when installed within a primary tunnel liner.
2. Pipe for Jacking: Govern stiffness class of FRP in a pipe jacking operation by
either ring deflection or by a pipe design providing longitudinal strength
required by the jacking method and shall satisfy design requirements stated
below. Submit design calculations as required in Paragraph 1.05, Submittals.
a. Perform pipe stress calculations based on jacking loads to conform to

Section 02441 - Microtunneling or Section 02445 - Jack and Bore/Jack
and Mine/Pilot Tube Guided Boring Tunnels
3. Calculate pipe deflection to ensure that predicted deflection will be less than 5
percent under long-term loading conditions (soil prism load) for the highest
density of soil overburden and surcharge loads. Prepare deflection on
calculations using long-term (drained) values for soil parameters contained in
the geotechnical investigation report for the Project, or other site-specific data
02509-5
4. Provide dual-angle, filament-wound fiberglass reinforced epoxy pipe with

integral epoxy liner and exterior coating in sizes from 4-inch to 16-inch
diameter. Conform to requirements of ASTM D 2996, depending on size and
class of pipe required.
5. Hydrostatic design value shall be not less than 21,000 psi when tested in
accordance with ASTM D 2992(B) and not less than 8000 psi when tested
according to ASTM D 2992(A).
6. Burial depths for pipes with standard wall thickness shall be between 3 feet
and 25 feet.
7. Joints: Heavy duty threaded coupling system with positive O-ring seals. For 4-
inch through 6-inch diameters, provide mechanical joints with fast advance,
acme-type threads. Male threaded portion of couplings shall lock the
mechanical joints for couplings for pipe diameters of 8 inches through 16
inches. Axial movement of couplings shall allow up to 2 degrees of angular
deflection without affecting O-ring seal integrity.
8. Pipes, fittings, and other components in this system shall be rated for service
to 150 psig at 120 degrees F. Components shall be rated at or above design
pressure of system.
C. Water Lines. At minimum, provide 150 psi Pressure Class and 46 psi Stiffness Class.
Manufacturer to provide calculations in accordance with AWWA M 45 to determine
the appropriate pressure class and stiffness class to withstand actual installation
conditions, based on the following Design Criteria:
1. Working Pressure: 150 psi.
2. Hydrostatic Field Test Pressure: 150 psi.
3. Maximum Pressure Due to Surge: 225 psi.
4. Minimum Pressure Due to Surge: -10 psi
5. Unit Weight of Soil: 120 pcf.
7. Deflection lag factor (Dl) = 1.3
8. Minimum Trench Width: O.D. of pipe + four (4) feet.
9. Maximum allowable long term deflection not to exceed 5 percent of original

pipe diameter.
10. Design:
02509-6
a. Design to withstand most critical simultaneous application of external

loads including construction loads and internal pressures.
b. Base on minimum of AASHTO HL-25 loading, AREMA Cooper E-80

loads when under railroads, and depths of bury as indicated.
c. Calculate earth loads and thrusts for restrained (tied) joints based on
AWWA M45.
d. Groundwater Level: Assume groundwater elevation at ground surface.
e. Design pipe for buried conditions.
D. Tunnel and Augered Sections: Exclude structural benefits associated with primary
liner. Design pipe and pipe joints to carry loads including but not limited to:
Overburden and lateral earth pressures, subsurface soil, grouting, other conditions of
service, thrust of jacks, and stress anticipated during handling and installation. Do not
create grout holes with pipe.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Resin Systems: The manufacturer shall use only polyester resin systems with a
proven history of performance in this particular application. The historical data shall
have been collected from applications of a composite material of similar construction
and composition as the proposed product.
B. Glass Reinforcements: The reinforcing glass fibers used to manufacture the

components shall be of highest quality commercial grade glass filaments with binder
and sizing compatible with impregnating resins.
C. Fillers: Silica sand or other suitable materials may be used.
D. Additives: Resin additives, such as pigments, dyes, curing agents, thixotropic agents,
and other coloring agents, if used, shall in no way be detrimental to the performance
of the product nor impair visual inspection of the finished products.
E. Internal Liner Resin:
1. Water Lines: Manufacture using materials meeting NSF 61. Any material
used within the pipe must comply with requirements of the Safe Drinking
Water Act and other federal requirements. If transporting potable water,
fiberglass pipe must be evaluated and certified for this specific use. The mark
or seal of the laboratory that is responsible for evaluating the pipe must be
included on the pipe.
2. Sanitary Sewer Force Mains: Fiberglass pipe shall have resin-rich liner of
following thickness:
02509-7
a. For nominal sizes 4 inches through 6 inches, conform to ASTM D

2996 RTRP 11CX 5430, with minimum liner thickness of 0.020 inch.
b. For nominal sizes 8 inches through 16 inches, conform to ASTM D

2996 RTRP 11FX 3210, with minimum liner thickness of 0.025 inch.
c. The coefficient of linear thermal expansion shall be 8.5 x 10-6

inch/inch/degrees F for 4-inch through 6-inch pipe and 12.0 x 16-6
inch/inch/degrees F for 8-inch through 16-inch pipe in accordance
with ASTM D 696.
2.04 JOINTS
A. Gasketed Joints: Unless otherwise specified, field connect pipe with fiberglass sleeve
couplings or confined o-ring bell-and-spigot joints that utilize elastomeric sealing
gaskets as sole means to maintain joint water tightness. Joints shall meet performance
requirements of ASTM D 4161.
1. Supply rubber gaskets from an approved gasket manufacturer in accordance

with ASTM F 477, when no contaminant is identified and suitable for the
service intended. Affix gaskets to pipe by means of a suitable adhesive, or
install in such a manner so as to prevent the gasket from rolling out of the pre-
cut groove in the pipe or sleeve coupling.
2. When pipe is to be installed in potentially contaminated areas, provide the

following gasket materials for the noted contaminants.
Nitrile Rubber (for sanitary sewers) Viton

Petroleum (diesel, gasoline)
(FKM) (for water lines)
Other Contaminants As recommended by the pipe manufacturer
3. If required gasket material is not available for use, pipe other than fiberglass
pipe must be used in potentially contaminated areas.
B. Restrained Joints: Utilize locking or butt-and-wrap (laminated) joints capable of

withstanding internal pressure and longitudinal tensile loads.
1. Design restrained joint pipe using the allowable stress for combined biaxial
loading determined in accordance with the trapezoidal design envelope design
procedure of ISO 14692, latest edition. Provide test results or other
verification of joint and thrust pipe design for approval by Project Manager
with submittal of pipeline layout drawings.
2. Provide butt-and-wrap joints where restrained joints are called out on 66-inch
diameter and larger.
02509-8
3. Butt-and-Wrap Joints: Provide fiberglass reinforced overlay build up of

minimum dimensions of 4 inches by 6 inches around circumference joints
located at thrust source and sections of pipe located within thrust restraint
limits.
4. Biaxial Lock Joint: Joints shall consist of plastic bar(s) inserted into
circumferential void(s) around rubber gasket joint. Circumferential void is
formed by matching recessed grooves on bell and spigot. Bar(s) shall fill void,
forming an interference fit with bell and spigot to prevent joint from
separating. Joint water-tightness is provided by joint gasket.
5. If centrifugally cast fiberglass pipe is provided with approval from Project

Manager, and approved restrained joints are not available, provide external
thrust restraint system in accordance with Paragraph 3.02 – External Thrust
Restraints.
2.05 FITTINGS
A. Provide fittings for water mains capable of withstanding specified test pressures.
1. Outlets and Tees. Provide fiberglass pipe, ductile iron, or steel pipe when
branch is less than 20 percent of diameter of main pipe and less than or equal
to 8 inch diameter. Attach by glass reinforced overlays as approved by Project
Manager.
2. Provide ductile iron or steel pipe bends and outlets or tees greater than eight
(8) inches in diameter or which are greater than 20 percent of diameter of
main pipe.
a. Use same materials (ductile iron or steel) throughout entire project.
b. Conform to Section 02518 - Steel Pipe and Fittings for Large Diameter
Water Lines or Section 02501 - Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings for other
fittings and bends.
B. Provide fittings for force mains capable of withstanding specified test pressures.
1. Outlets and Tees. Provide fiberglass pipe or ductile iron pipe when branch is
less than 20 percent of diameter of main pipe and less than or equal to 8-inch
diameter. Attach by glass reinforced overlays as approved by Project
Manager.
2. Provide ductile iron pipe bends and outlets or tees greater than eight (8) inches
in diameter or which are greater than 20 percent of diameter of main pipe.
a. Use same materials (ductile iron) throughout entire project.
b. Conform to Section 02501 - Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings for other
fittings and bends.
02509-9
C. Fiberglass Pipe Fittings. Created by filament-winding or cut and miter process as

described in AWWA M 45.
1. Provide tolerance of angle of elbow and angle between main and leg of wye or
tee to plus or minus 2 degrees. Provide tolerance on laying length of fitting to
plus or minus 2 inches.
2.06 INSPECTION
A. The Project Manager shall be entitled to inspect pipes or witness the pipe
manufacturing. Such inspection shall not relieve the manufacturer of the
responsibilities to provide products that comply with the applicable standards and
these Specifications.
B. Manufacturer’s Notification: Should the Project Manager wish to see specific pipes
during any phase of the manufacturing process, the manufacturer must provide the
Project Manager with adequate advance notice of when and where the production of
those pipes will take place.
C. Failure to Inspect: Should the Project Manager elect not to inspect the manufacturing,
testing, or finished pipes, it in no way implies approval of products or tests.
2.07 PACKAGING, HANDLING, AND SHIPPING
A. Packing, handling, and shipping should be done in accordance with the

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install pipe and fittings in accordance with requirements of Section 02511 – Water
Lines or 02532 - Sanitary Sewer Force Mains.
B. The manufacturer must supply a suitable qualified field service representative to be

present periodically during the installation of pipe.
C. Pipe Bedding: Conform to requirements of Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill

for Utilities.
D. Pipe Handling: Use textile slings.
E. Jointing:
1. Clean ends of pipe and coupling components.
2. Check pipe ends and couplings for damage. Correct any damage found.
3. Coupling grooves must be completely free of dirt.
02509-10
4. Apply joint lubricant to pipe ends and rubber seals of coupling. Use only
lubricants approved by the pipe manufacturer.
5. Use suitable auxiliary equipment, such as a wire rope puller, to pull joints
together.
6. Do not exceed forces recommended by the manufacturer for coupling pipe. If

excessive force is required, remove coupling, determine source of problem,
and correct it.
7. In the process of jointing the pipe, do not allow the deflection angle to exceed
the deflection permitted by the manufacturer.
F. If pressure grouting of the pipe is conducted as part of a pipe-jacked tunnel

installation, seal the grout holes with liner resin to a thickness equal to the pipe liner
thickness or with a threaded plug for that purpose.
G. Tests:
1. Water Lines: Conform to requirements of Section 02514 – Disinfection of

Water Lines and Section 02515 – Hydrostatic Testing of Pipelines.
2. Sanitary Sewer Force Mains: Conform to requirements of Section 02532 –

Sanitary Sewer Force Mains.
3.02 EXTERNAL THRUST RESTRAINT
A. In areas of thrust restraint not using an approved restrained joint, such as with
centrifugally cast fiberglass pipe, use one of three methods below. Submit system for
approval by Project Manager.
1. Encased Design: For areas with restrained joint length of less than 20 feet
from thrust source.
a. Provide thrust coupling as specified herein.
b. Use reinforced concrete to encase bend and pipe within area of thrust
restraint. Encasement shall be of enough strength to accept 125% of
designed pipe thrust.
c. Last four inches on both ends of encasement of fiberglass pipe shall be

faced with minimum 1/4 inch thick rubber padding.
d. Locate sleeve coupling outside encased area.
2. H-Pile Design: System design and construction to conform to Section 02465 -

Drilled Shaft Foundation and to be signed and sealed by Professional
Engineer in State of Texas.
02509-11
a. Provide thrust coupling as specified herein.
b. Use concrete pipe support to support entire bend. Pipe supports shall
have cradle with minimum 120 degree support arc. Support arcs shall
be faced with minimum 1/4 inch thick rubber padding.
c. Unless otherwise approved by Project Manager, install driven H-piles,

with minimum of twelve (12) piles per individual support [three (3)
piles on pipe cross-section axis by four (4) piles on pipe flow axis
configuration] under concrete pipe support. Piles shall be of enough
strength and depth to accept 125% of designed pipe thrust through
shear resistance.
d. Anchor bends to pipe support in manner to prevent over stressing

fiberglass reinforced pipe.
3. Use ductile iron or steel for fittings and pipe in thrust area, in accordance with
requirements in Section 02501 - Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings, Section 02502
- Steel Pipe and Fittings, and Section 02511 - Water Lines. Join fiberglass
reinforced pipe to steel or ductile iron pipe outside of thrust area using
fiberglass pipe manufacturer recommendation.
END OF SECTION
02509-12
CITY OF HOUSTON POLYPROPYLENE (PP)
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION CORRUGATED WALL PIPE
SECTION 02510
POLYPROPYLENE (PP) CORRUGATED WALL PIPE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Polypropylene (PP) pipe for gravity sanitary sewers and drains, including fittings.
B. Polypropylene (PP) pipe for gravity storm sewers and culverts.
D. Section 02531 – Gravity Sanitary Sewers
E. Section 02533 – Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers
F. Section 02550 – Sliplining Sanitary Sewers
G. Section 02631 – Storm Sewers
A. Unit Prices.
1. No separate payment will be made for PP pipe under this Section. Include cost
in unit prices for work, as specified in following sections:
a. Section 02531 - Gravity Sanitary Sewers
b. Section 02631 – Storm Sewers
1.04 REFERENCES
A. AASHTO M330 - Polypropylene Pipe, 300- to 1500-mm (12- to 60-in.) Diameter.
02510-1
B. ASTM D 2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic

C. ASTM D 3212 - Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes
D. ASTM F 477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining
Plastic Pipe.
E. ASTM F 2764 - Standard Specification for 6 to 60 in. [150 to 1500 mm]

Polypropylene (PP) Corrugated Double and Triple Wall Pipe and Fittings for Non-
Pressure Sanitary Sewer Applications.
F. ASTM F 2881- Standard Specification for 12 to 60 in. [300 to 1500 mm]

Polypropylene (PP) Dual Wall Pipe and Fittings for Non-Pressure Storm Sewer
Applications.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Conform to requirements of Section 01330- Submittal Procedures.
B. Submit shop drawings showing design of pipe and fittings indicating alignment and
grade, pipe length, laying dimensions, fabrication, fittings, flanges, gasket material,
and special details.
C. Submit detailed calculations for pipe design per AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications.
D. Submit details of Pipe Joints and jointing procedure for PP pipe.
A. Provide manufacturer's certificate of conformance to Specifications.
B. Furnish pipe and fittings that are homogeneous throughout and free from visible
cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or other injurious defects. Provide pipe as uniform
as commercially practical in color, opacity, density, and other physical properties.
C. Project Manager reserves right to inspect pipes or witness pipe manufacturing.

Inspection shall in no way relieve manufacturer of responsibilities to provide products
that comply with applicable standards and these Specifications.
1. Manufacturer's Notification: Should Project Manager wish to witness

manufacture of specific pipes, manufacturer shall provide Project Manager
with minimum three weeks notice of when and where production of those
specific pipes will take place.
2. Failure to Inspect. Approval of products or tests is not implied by Project

Manager's decision not to inspect manufacturing, testing, or finished pipes.
02510-2
D. Pipe manufacturer to provide services of experienced, competent, and authorized

representative to visit site to advise and consult Contractor during jointing and
installation of pipe.
1.07 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this

section with documented experience of minimum 5 years of pipe installations that
have been in successful, continuous service for same type of service as proposed
Work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide products manufactured by companies listed on the City of Houston Standard

Product List.
B. Furnish corrugated-wall gravity sanitary sewer pipe with bell-and-spigot end

construction conforming to ASTM D 3212. Joining will be accomplished with dual
elastomeric gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Use integral
bell-and-spigot gasketed joint designed so that when assembled, elastomeric gasket,
contained in machined groove on pipe spigot, is compressed radially in pipe bell to
form a positive seal. Design joint to avoid displacement of gasket when installed in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Furnish corrugated-wall polypropylene (CPP) pipe for gravity storm sewer and storm
sewer culvert pipe. Joints shall be installed such that connection of pipe sections will
form continuous line free from irregularities in flow line. Suitable joints are:
1. Integral Bell and Spigot with dual elastomeric gaskets. Bell shall overlap
minimum of two corrugations of spigot end when fully engaged.
D. Jointing:
1. Gaskets:
a. Meet requirements of ASTM F 477. Use gasket molded into circular

form or extruded to proper section and then spliced into circular form.
When no contaminant is identified, use gaskets of properly cured,
high-grade elastomeric compound. Basic polymer shall be natural
rubber, synthetic elastomer, or blend of both.
b. PP Pipes are not allowed to be installed in potentially contaminated

areas, unless approved by City Engineer.
02510-3

Other Contaminants As recommended by pipe manufacturer
2. Lubricant. Use lubricant for assembly of gasketed joints which has no

detrimental effect on gasket or on pipe, in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
3. Diameters 12- through 60-inch shall have a reinforced bell with a polymer
composite band installed by the manufacturer.
2.02 MATERIALS FOR SANITARY SEWER
A. Pipe and Fittings: Polypropylene compound for pipe and fitting production shall be
impact modified copolymer meeting the material requirements of ASTM F 2764.
2.03 MATERIALS FOR GRAVITY STORM SEWERS AND STORM SEWER

CULVERTS
A. Pipe and Fittings: Polypropylene compound for pipe and fittings production shall be
impact modified copolymer meeting the material requirements of ASTM F 2881 and
AASHTO M330.
2.04 TEST METHODS FOR SANITARY SEWER
A. Conditioning
1. Conditioning of samples prior to and during tests is subject to approval by

Project Manager. When referee tests are required, condition specimens in
accordance with ASTM F 2764, section 7.1.1.
B. Flattening
1. Flatten three specimens of pipe, prepared in accordance with ASTM F 2764,

section 7.5.
C. Joint Tightness
1. Test for joint tightness in accordance with ASTM D 3212.
D. Purpose of Tests
1. Flattening and joint tightness tests are not intended to be routine quality
control tests, but rather to qualify pipe to a specified level of performance.
2.05 TEST METHODS FOR GRAVITY STORM SEWERS AND STORM CULVERTS
02510-4
A. All testing and material requirements shall be in accordance with ASTM F 2881.
B. Mandrel Testing: Use a mandrel to test flexible pipe for deflection. Refer to Section
02533 – Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers for the mandrel and test
requirements.
2.06 MARKING
A. Mark each standard and random length of pipe in compliance with these
Specifications with following information:
1. Pipe size.
2. Pipe class.
3. Production code.
4. Material designation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Conform to requirements of following Sections:
1. Section 02550 – Slip lining Sanitary Sewers.
3. Section 02533 - Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers.
B. Install pipe in accordance with the manufacturers recommended installation

procedure and ASTM D 2321
C. PP pipe is not approved in applications requiring augering of pipe.
D. Bedding and backfill: Conform to requirements of Section 02317 - Excavation and

E. Use only workmen trained in the installation of PP Pipe.
F. Cutting pipe: Comply with pipe manufacturer's recommendations. After cutting, leave
end pipe in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
02510-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION WATER LINES
SECTION 02511
WATER LINES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Installation of water lines.
B. Specifications identify requirements for both small diameter water lines and large
diameter water lines. When specifications for large diameter water lines differ from
those for small diameter water lines, large diameter specifications will govern for
large diameter pipe.
C. Section 01321 - Construction Photographs
E. Section 01740 – Site Restoration
F. Section 02105 – Chemical Sampling and Analysis
G. Section 02221 – Removing Existing Pavements, Structures, Wood, and Demolition

Debris
H. Section 02317 – Excavation and Backfill for Utilities
I. Section 02501 – Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings
J. Section 02502 – Steel Pipe and Fittings
K. Section 02506 – Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe
L. Section 02507 – Prestressed Concrete Cylinder Pipe
M. Section 02509 – Fiberglass Reinforced Pipe for Pressure Mains
N. Section 02514 – Disinfection of Water Lines
O. Section 02515 – Hydrostatic Testing of Pipelines
P. Section 02518 – Steel Pipe and Fittings for Large Diameter Water Lines
02511-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
Q. Section 02528 – Polyethylene Encasement/Wrap
R. Section 02613 – Bar Wrapped Steel Cylinder Pipe
S. Section 03315 – Concrete for Utility Construction
T. Section 15640 – Joint Bonding and Electrical Isolation
A. Unit Prices:
1. Payment for water lines will be on a linear foot basis for each size of pipe
installed. Separate pay items will be included for water lines installed by
open-cut, by trenchless construction or by aerial crossing. No separate
payment will be made for restrained joints, welded joints, thrust blocks,
casing, bends, fittings, manways, pipe within limits of offset section, pipe
within limits of Potentially Petroleum Contaminated Area (PPCA) or within
limits of Fault Hazard Zone (FHZ).
a. Mains: Measure along axis of pipe and include fittings and valves.
b. Branch Pipe: Measure from axis of water line to end of branch.
c. Small diameter water line (20-inch diameter and smaller): No separate

payment for valves. Include in unit price work for water lines.
d. For PVC pipe, install tracer wire. Include in unit price work for water
lines.
2. Payment for interconnection is on lump sum basis for each interconnection

identified on Drawings. Payment will include tapping sleeve and valves
piping, connections and other related work necessary for construction as
shown on Drawings or specified herein.
3. Payment for removal of existing internal elliptical or dished head plug is on

unit price basis for each internal elliptical or dished head plug removed.
Payment will include deletion of plug, drainage or dewatering of water lines,
repair of damaged linings, rechlorination and items incidental to operation.
4. Payment for plug and clamp is on a unit price basis for each size of pipe.
5. Payment for drainline connection with service manhole is on unit price basis
for each drainline shown on drawings. Payment includes valve, access
manhole and connection.
6. Payment for cylindrical corrosion barriers is on a unit price basis for each pipe
fitting installed with one or more barriers.
02511-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
7. When directed by Project Manager to install extra fittings as required to avoid

unforeseen obstacles, payment will be based on the following:
a. Each extra fitting requested by Project Manager and delivered to

jobsite will be paid according to unit price for "Extra Fittings in
Place."
b. Payment will include and be full compensation for items necessary for
installation and operation of water line.
8. No separate payment will be made for installation of water line marker.

Include cost in unit price for water lines.
9. No separate payment will be made for bell protection system for PVC pipe.
Include cost in related unit price work.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
B. ASTM A 193 - Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for
High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications.
C. ASTM A 536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
D. ASTM A 126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges,
and Pipe Fittings.
E. ASTM B 21 - Standard Specification for Naval Brass Rod, Bar, and Shapes.
F. ASTM B 98 - Standard Specification for Copper-Silicon Alloy Rod, Bar, and Shapes.
G. ASTM B 301 - Standard Specification for Free-Cutting Copper Rod, Bar, Wire, and
Shapes.
H. ASTM B 584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Casting for General
Application.
I. ASTM E 165 - Standard Practice for Liquid Penetrant Testing for General Industry.
J. ASTM E 709 - Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing.
K. ASTM F 1674 - Standard Test Method for Joint Restraint Products for Use with PVC
Pipe.
02511-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
L. AWWA C 111/ANSI A 21.11 - Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron

M. AWWA C 206 - Standard for Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe.
N. AWWA C 207 - Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4
Inches through 144 Inches.
O. AWWA C 210 - Liquid Epoxy Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipe and
Fittings.
P. AWWA C 222 - Polyurethane Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipe and
Fittings.
Q. NSF/ANSI 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Components.
R. OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101 - Asbestos.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Conform to submittal requirements of applicable Section for type of pipe used.
C. Photographs: Submit photographs conforming to requirements of Section 01321 -

Construction Photographs prior to commencement of construction.
D. Submit videotapes conforming to requirements of Section 01323 - Construction

Videotapes, if applicable.
E. Submit Lone Star notification transmittal number prior to beginning excavation.
F. Submit, a minimum of 15 days before beginning pipe laying operations, layout

drawing identifying proposed sections for disinfecting, hydrostatic testing and site
restoration for entire project for review and approval. Layout drawing to identify
sequence of sections for:
1. Disinfection; not to exceed 4,000 linear feet per section.
2. Hydrostatic testing and transfer of services; to immediately follow sequence

of disinfected section.
3. Site restoration; not to exceed limits specified; sequence in order of

disturbance.
G. For water lines to be field welded, submit proof of certification of field welders per
AWWA C206. Indicate certified procedures and position each welder is qualified to
perform. Provide documentation of the most recent weld qualification test date and
continuity of use in each process for which the welder or welding operator is
required.
02511-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE MATERIALS
A. Install pipe materials which conform to following:
1. Section 02501 - Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings.
2. Section 02502 - Steel Pipe and Fittings. Water line piping within plant site and
aerial crossings to be welded joint steel pipe with flange or approved restraint
joint connections, unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
3. Section 02506 - Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe.
4. Section 02507 - Prestressed Concrete Cylinder Pipe.
5. Section 02509 – Fiberglass Reinforced Pipe for Pressure Mains
6. Section 02518 - Steel Pipe and Fittings for Large Diameter Water Lines.
7. Section 02613 - Bar Wrapped Steel Cylinder Pipe.
B. Conform to American National Standards Institute/National Sanitation Foundation

(ANSI/NSF) Standard 61 and have certified by an organization accredited by ANSI.
C. Type of pipe materials used is Contractor's option unless specifically identified on

Drawings.
D. Provide minimum of 3/8 inch inside joint recess between ends of pipe in straight pipe
sections.
2.02 WELDED JOINT PROTECTION FITTING FOR SMALL DIAMETER STEEL

PIPE
A. Cylindrical Corrosion Barrier: Provide approved cylindrical corrosion barrier.
B. O-rings: Conform to National Sanitary Foundation requirements.
2.03 RESTRAINED JOINTS
A. Ductile-Iron Pipe: See Section 02501 - Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings.
B. PVC Pipe: See Section 02506 - Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe. Perform hydrostatic testing
in accordance with ASTM F 1674.
C. Prestressed Concrete Cylinder Pipe, Bar-Wrapped Pipe and Steel Pipe: Welded joints
(see Paragraph 3.06.C).
02511-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
D. Except for trenchless installation, restrained Joints where required on DIP and PVC
pipe are allowed with the following requirements as an alternative to the pipe with an
integral restrained joint system:
1. Restraint Devices: Manufacture of high-strength ductile iron, ASTM A 536.

Working pressure rating twice that of design test pressure.
2. Bolts and Connecting Hardware: High-strength low-alloy material in

accordance with ANSI A21.11/AWWA C111.
E. For ductile iron or PVC pipes in augered holes, provide restrained joints that are
integral to both the bell and spigot ends, and do not extend beyond or increase the
outside diameter of the bell.
F. For small diameter water lines crossing under sanitary sewer lines or laterals, provide
ductile iron pipe with locking or bolted type restrained joints.
2.04 COUPLINGS AND APPURTENANCES FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATERLINE
A. Flexible (Dresser-type) Couplings:
1. Install where shown on Drawings or where allowed by Project Manager for

Contractor's convenience. Use galvanized flexible couplings when installed on
galvanized pipe which is cement lined, or when underground. Provide gaskets
manufactured from neoprene or Buna-N.
2. For steel pipe, provide approved sleeve-type flexible couplings. Thickness of

middle ring equal to or greater than thickness of pipe wall.
3. Provide approved flanged adapter couplings for steel pipe.
4. Use ASTM A193 Grade B7 high strength steel bolts and ASTM A194 heavy
hex nuts where flexible couplings are installed underground. Mark bolts and
nuts according to ASTM. Provide cadmium plated hardware. Coat entire
coupling with Denso or approved equal petrolatum-based tape.
B. Flap Valves: Provide approved flap valves on discharge of manhole drainline as

shown on Drawings.
1. Body and Flap: ASTM A 126-B cast iron.
2. Seats: ASTM B 21-CA482 or ASTM B 301-CA145 bronze.
3. Resilient Seat:
4. Hinge Arms: ASTM B 584-CA865 high tensile bronze.
5. Hinge Pins: ASTM B 98-CA655 silicon bronze.
2.05 COUPLINGS AND APPURTENANCES FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATERLINE
02511-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Install Flexible Expansion Joints at locations indicated on drawings, within limits of

Fault Hazard Zone (FHZ), in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation.
2.06 CASING FOR OPEN CUT
A. For water line by open cut in casing, casing used shall conform to Section 02502 –
Steel Pipe and Fittings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Conform to applicable installation specifications for types of pipe used.
B. Employ workmen who are skilled and experienced in laying pipe of type and joint
configuration being furnished. Provide watertight pipe and pipe joints.
C. Lay pipe to lines and grades shown on Drawings.
D. Confirm 9 feet minimum separation from gravity sanitary sewers and manholes or
separation of 4 feet minimum from force mains as specified in this Section in all
directions unless special design is provided on Drawings.
E. Where above clearances cannot be attained, and special design has not been provided
on Drawings, obtain direction from Project Manager before proceeding with
construction.
F. Inform Project Manager if unmetered sprinkler or fire line connections exist which
are not shown on Drawings. Make transfer only after approval by Project Manager.
G. For projects involving multiple subdivisions or locations, limit water line installation
to maximum of two project site locations. Maximizing two pipe installation crews
shall be permitted, unless otherwise approved by Project Manager.
H. City of Houston Drinking Water Operations will handle, at no cost to Contractor,

operations involving opening and closing valves for wet connections and for
chlorination. Contractor is responsible for handling necessary installations and
removal of blow-offs, chlorination and testing taps, and risers.
I. If asbestos-cement (A.C.) pipe is encountered, follow safety practices outlined in

OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101 – Asbestos. Refer to Section 02221 - Removing Existing
Pavements, Structures, Wood, and Demolition Debris for removing and disposing of
A.C. Pipe.
02511-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
J. For pipe diameters 36 inches and greater, clearly mark each section of pipe and fitting
with unique designation on inside of pipe along with pressure class. Locate unique
identifying mark minimum of 5 feet away from either end of each section of pipe.
Provide one unique identifying mark in middle of each fitting. Place markings at
consistent locations. Use permanent black paint and minimum letter height of 4
inches to mark designations.
K. Contractor is responsible for assuring chosen manufacturer fulfills requirements for

extra fittings and, therefore, is responsible for costs due to downtime if requirements
are not met.
L. Do not remove plugs or clamps during months of peak water demands; June, July and
August, unless otherwise approved by Project Manager.
3.02 HANDLING, CLEANING AND INSPECTION
A. Handling:
1. Place pipe along project site where storm water or other water will not enter or
pass through pipe.
2. Load, transport, unload, and otherwise handle pipe and fittings to prevent
damage of any kind. Handle and transport pipe with equipment designed,
constructed and arranged to prevent damage to pipe, lining and coating. Do
not permit bare chains, hooks, metal bars, or narrow skids or cradles to come
in contact with coatings. Where required, provide pipe fittings with sufficient
interior strutting or cross bracing to prevent deflection under their own weight.
3. Hoist pipe from trench side into trench by means of sling of smooth steel
cable, canvas, leather, nylon or similar material.
4. For large diameter water lines, handle pipe only by means of sling of canvas,
leather, nylon, or similar material. Slings shall be wide enough so as to. not
tear or wrinkle tape layers.
5. Use precautions to prevent injury to pipe, protective linings and coatings.
a. Package stacked pipe on timbers. Place protective pads under banding

straps at time of packaging.
b. Pad fork trucks with carpet or other suitable material. Use nylon straps
around pipe for lift when relocating pipe with crane or backhoe.
c. Do not lift pipe using hooks at each end of pipe.
d. Do not place debris, tools, clothing, or other materials on pipe.
e. Place pipe on timbers, tires or soil berms at the jobsite. Do not place
pipe directly on ground.
02511-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
6. Repair damage to pipe or protective lining and coating before final

acceptance.
7. For cement mortar lined and coated steel pipe and PCCP, permit no visible
cracks wider than 1/16”
a. In surface laitance of centrifugally cast mortar.
b. In sections of pipe with steel reinforcing collars or wrappers.
c. Within 12 inches of pipe ends.
8. Repair pipe with visible cracks that exceed project specifications. If cracks
cannot be repaired to specification remove from project site.
B. Cleaning: Thoroughly clean and dry interior of pipe and fittings of foreign matter
before installation, and keep interior clean until Work has been accepted. Keep joint
contact surfaces clean until jointing is completed. Do not place debris, tools, clothing
or other materials in pipe. After pipe laying and joining operations are completed,
clean inside of pipe and remove debris.
C. Inspection: Before installation, inspect each pipe and fitting for defects. Reject
defective, damaged or unsound pipe and fittings and remove them from site.
3.03 EARTHWORK
A. Conform to applicable provisions of Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for

Utilities.
3.04 PIPE CUTTING
A. Cut pipe 12 inches and smaller with standard wheel pipe cutters. Cut pipe larger than
12 inches in manner approved by Project Manager. Make cuts smooth and at right
angles to axis of pipe. Bevel plain end with heavy file or grinder to remove sharp
edges.
A. General Requirements:
1. When trench width below top of pipe becomes 4 feet wider than specified,
install higher class of pipe or improved bedding, as determined by Project
Manager. No additional payment will be made for higher class of pipe or
improved bedding.
2. Lay pipe in subgrade free of water.
3. Properly form bedding to fully support bell without wedging or blocking up

bell.
02511-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
4. Open Cut Construction: Cover or backfill laid pipe if pipe laying operations
are interrupted and during non-working hours. Place backfill carefully and
simultaneously on each side of pipe to avoid lateral displacement of pipe and
damage to joints. If adjustment of pipe is required after it has been laid,
remove and re-lay as new pipe. Lay not more than 50 feet of pipe in trench
ahead of backfilling operations.
5. Prevent damage to coating when placing backfill. Use backfill material free of
large rocks or stones, or other material which could damage coatings.
B. Install pipe continuously and uninterrupted. Obtain approval of Project Manager prior
to skipping any portion of Work.
1. Before assembling couplings, lightly coat pipe ends and outside of gaskets
with pipe lubricant, cup grease or liquid vegetable soap to facilitate
installation.
2. Prior to proceeding with critical tie-ins, submit sequence of work based on

findings from "critical location" effort.
3. Use adequate surveying methods and equipment; employ personnel competent

in use of this equipment. Horizontal and vertical deviations from alignment as
indicated on Drawings shall not exceed 0.10 feet. Measure and record "as-
built" horizontal alignment and vertical grade at maximum of every 100 feet
on record drawings.
4. For large diameter water lines, survey line and grade at each pipe joint at the
joint invert by competent personnel. Use adequate surveying methods and
equipment to record x, y, z coordinates for each joint on the As-Built
drawings and provide a list of pipe mark numbers with surveyed coordinates
in tabular format along with As-Built drawings. Line and grade shall not
deviate by more than 0.10 feet from alignment on record drawings.
C. Protection of Pipeline: Securely place stoppers or bulkheads in openings and in end of

line when construction is stopped temporarily and at end of each day's work.
D. Perform Critical Location as shown on Drawings. Refer to Section 02317 -

Excavation and Backfill for Utilities for additional requirements at critical locations.
E. Assessment of deflection may be measured by Project Manager at location along

pipe. Arithmetical averages of deflection or similar average measurements will not be
deemed as meeting intent of standard. Refer to pipe material specifications for
maximum allowable pipe deflection.
F. Perform following additional procedures when working on plant sites.
02511-10
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. At least 72 hours prior to each plant shutdown or connection, schedule

coordination meeting with Project Manager and Water Production personnel.
At this meeting, present proposed sequencing of Work and verification of
readiness to complete Work as required and within time permitted. Do not
proceed with Work until Project Manager agrees key personnel, equipment
and materials are on hand to complete Work.
2. Prior to fully excavating around existing piping, excavate as minimal as

possible to confirm type and condition of existing joints. Verify size, type, and
condition of pipe prior to ordering materials or fully mobilizing for Work.
3. Do not proceed with connections to existing piping and identified critical

stages of work unless approved by Project Manager and City's Utility
Maintenance Division operator is present to observe.
4. Coordinate with City Drinking Water Operations to obtain reduction in

operating pressures prior to performing connections to existing piping.
5. Make connections to existing piping only when two valves are closed off
between connection and source of water pressure. Do not make connection
relying solely on one valve, unless otherwise approved by Project Manager.
6. Perform critical stages of Work identified on Drawings at night or during low

water demand months as specified in Section 01110 - Summary of Work.
7. Excavation equipment used on plant sites to have smooth bucket; no teeth or

side cutters.
8. Submit to Project Manager Lone Star Notification transmittal number prior to

beginning excavation.
9. Before each "dig" with mechanical excavator, probe ground to determine

potential obstructions. Repeat procedure until existing pipe is located or
excavation reaches desired elevation. Perform excavations within one foot to
existing piping by hand methods.
10. Provide adequate notice to Project Manager and pipe manufacturer's

representative when connecting or modifying existing prestressed or
pretension concrete cylinder pipe.
11. Provide field surveyed (horizontal and vertical elevations) "as-builts" of new
construction and existing underground utilities encountered. Submit in
accordance with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
12. Prior to performing plant work to be done on weekend, provide list of sites
and contact person with phone numbers to Project Manager by noon on
Thursday of week. Contact person must be accessible during weekend, have
Houston Metro Area phone number, and be authorized to make emergency
decisions.
02511-11
CITY OF HOUSTON
13. No night work or plant shutdown will be scheduled to begin two working days
before or after designated City Holidays.
G. Maintain water services at all times to all customers, fire hydrants and
interconnections. Provide temporary connections and temporary bypass as necessary
for construction. No additional payment will be made for temporary connections
unless specified on the drawings.
H. For tie-ins to existing water lines, provide necessary material on hand to facilitate
connection prior to shutting down existing water line. Prior to requesting shut down
of existing water line connection, provide minimum two-week notice to City Project
Manager.
I. For exposed portions of piping within manholes or vaults, including outlets, flanges,
blind flanges, nuts, bolts, valves, actuators, and piping, apply finish coat after
installation is complete. Provide cycloaliphatic amine epoxy in light blue color.
Follow manufacturer’s procedures for preparing surface and applying coating. Submit
coating manufacturer’s product data sheet and color sample to Project Manager for
review.
A. Rubber Gasketed Bell-and-Spigot Joints for Concrete Cylinder Pipe, Bar Wrapped
Pipe PVC, Steel, and DIP:
1. After rubber gasket is placed in spigot groove of pipe, equalize rubber gasket
cross section by inserting tool or bar recommended by manufacturer under
rubber gasket and moving it around periphery of pipe spigot.
2. Lubricate gaskets with nontoxic water-soluble lubricant before pipe units are
joined.
3. Fit pipe units together in manner to avoid twisting or otherwise displacing or

damaging rubber gasket.
4. After pipe sections are joined, check each gasket to ensure that no
displacement of gasket has occurred. If displacement has occurred, remove
pipe section and remake joint as for new pipe. Remove old gasket, and replace
before remaking joint.
5. Provide means to prevent full engagement of spigot into bell in accordance

with Paragraph 2.01 D. For PVC pipe, means may consist of an approved bell
insertion protection system.
B. Flanged Joints where required on Concrete Cylinder Pipe, Bar Wrapped Pipe, Ductile
Iron Pipe, or Steel Pipe:
02511-12
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. AWWA C 207. Prior to installation of bolts, accurately center and align

flanged joints to prevent over stressing of flanges, pipe and equipment. Align
bolt holes to straddle vertical, horizontal or north-south center line. Do not
exceed 3/64 inch per foot inclination of flange face from true alignment.
2. Use ring type or full-face gaskets for flanged joints. Provide gasket material in
accordance with AWWA C207 . Cut gaskets at factory to proper dimensions.
In PPCA areas, provide gasket material in accordance with Section 02105 –
Chemical Sampling and Analysis.
3. Provide ASTM A193 Grade B7 high strength steel stud bolts with ASTM
A194 heavy hex nuts. Use cadmium-plated steel hardware underground. Mark
nuts and bolts according to ASTM. Tighten bolts progressively to prevent
unbalanced stress. Maintain at all times approximately same distance between
two flanges at points around flanges. Tighten bolts alternately (180˚ apart)
until all are evenly tight. Draw bolts tight to ensure proper seating of gaskets.
Provide Denso petrolatum-based tape or approved equal for all exposed
portions of nuts, bolts and pipe hardware.
4. Isolation Joints:
a. Provide full-face Type “E” gasket. For 30-inch diameter and greater,
provide Pyrox G-10 material and EPDM sealing element. For 24-inch
diameter and smaller, provide Phenolic material and EPDM sealing
element. Provide full-length bolt isolating sleeves and washers.
Provide matching steel washers on both sides of each insulating
washer on every bolt. Furnish kits in accordance with Section 15640 -
Joint Bonding and Electrical Isolation.
C. Welded Joints (Concrete Cylinder Pipe, Bar Wrapped Pipe, Steel Pipe):
1. Prior to starting work, provide certification of qualification for welders

employed on project for type of work procedures and positions involved.
2. Steel Pipe Joints: AWWA C 206. See Section 02502 - Steel Pipe and Fittings
or Section 02518 - Steel Pipe and Fittings for Large Diameter Water Lines.
Refer to Contract Drawings for joint details. For interior welded joints,
complete backfilling before welding. For exterior field-welded joints, provide
adequate working room under and beside pipe. Use exterior welds for 30-inch
and smaller.
02511-13
CITY OF HOUSTON
3. Concrete Pipe Joints: See Section 02507 – Prestressed Concrete Cylinder Pipe
or Section 02613 - Bar Wrapped Steel Cylinder Pipe. Refer to Contract
Drawings for joint details. Align piping and equipment so that no part is
offset more than 1/8 inch. Set fittings and joints square and true, and preserve
alignment during welding operation. For butt-welded joints, align abutting
ends to minimize offset between surfaces. For pipe of same nominal wall
thickness, do not exceed 1/16 inch offset. Use line-up clamps for this purpose;
however, take care to avoid damage to linings and coatings.
4. Welding Rods: Compatible with metal to be welded to obtain strongest bond,

E-70XX.
5. Deposit metal in successive layers to provide 1 to 3 passes or beads as

required to complete the structural weld or control heat in the weld after
backfill joint.
6. Deposit no more than 1/4 inch of metal on each pass. Thoroughly clean each
individual pass with wire brush or hammer to remove dirt, slag or flux.
7. Do not weld under weather condition that would impair strength of weld, such
as wet surface, rain or snow, dust or high winds, unless work is properly
protected.
8. Make tack weld of same material and by same procedure as completed weld.
Otherwise, remove tack welds during welding operation.
9. Remove dirt, scale, and other foreign matter from inside piping before tying in
sections, fittings, or valves.
10. Welded Joints for Large Diameter Water Lines:
a. Use exterior welds for 30-inch diameter and smaller.
b. Employ an independent certified testing laboratory, approved by

Project Manager, to perform weld acceptance tests on welded joints.
Include cost of such testing and associated work to accommodate
testing in contract unit price bid for water line. Furnish copies of test
reports to Project Manager for review. Project Manager has final
decision as to suitability of welds tested.
(1) Weld acceptance criteria:
(a) Conduct in accordance with ASTM E165 - Standard

Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination and
ASTM E709 - Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle
Examination. Use X-ray methods for butt welds, for
100 percent of joint welds.
(b) Examine welded surfaces for the following defects:
02511-14
CITY OF HOUSTON
I. Cracking.
II. Lack of fusion/penetration.
III. Slag which exceeds one-third (t) where (t)

equals material thickness.
IV. Porosity/Relevant rounded indications greater

than 3/16 inch; rounded indication is one of
circular or elliptical shape with length equal to
or less than three times its width.
V. Relevant linear indications in which length of

linear indication exceeds three times its width.
VI. Four or more relevant 1/16-inch rounded

indications in line separated by 1/16 inch or less
edge to edge.
11. After pipe is joined and prior to start of welding procedure, make spigot and
bell essentially concentric by jacking, shimming or tacking to obtain clearance
tolerance around periphery of joint except for deflected joints.
12. Furnish each welder employed steel stencil for marking welds, so work of
each welder can be identified. Mark pipe with assigned stencil adjacent to
weld. When welder leaves job, stencil must be voided and not duplicated.
Welder making defective welds must discontinue work and leave project site.
Welder may return to project site only after recertification.
13. Scaffolding: Do not drag scaffolding or other items along interior of pipe.
14. Provide cylindrical corrosion barriers for polyurethane or epoxy-lined steel

pipe 24-inch diameter and smaller, unless minimum wall thickness is 0.5 inch
or greater.
a. In addition to welding requirements contained here in Paragraph 3.06,

conform to protection fitting manufacturer's installation
recommendations.
b. Provide services of technical representative of manufacturer available

on site at beginning of pipe laying operations. Representative to train
welders and advise regarding installation and general construction
methods. Welders must have 12 months prior experience All steel pipe
is to have cutback 3/4 inch to no greater than 1 inch of internal
diameter coating from weld bevel.
02511-15
CITY OF HOUSTON
c. Furnish steel fittings with cylindrical corrosion barriers with shop

welded extensions to end of fittings. Extension length to measure no
less than diameter of pipe. Shop apply lining in accordance with
AWWA C 210 or AWWA C 222.
d. All steel pipe receiving field adjustments are to be cold cut using
standard practices and equipment. No cutting using torch is to be
allowed.
D. Harnessed Joints (Concrete Cylinder Pipe, Bar Wrapped Pipe or Steel Pipe):
1. Use of snap-ring type restrained joints on pipe is limited to 20-inch through

48-inch diameters.
2. Position snap-ring joint bolt on top (12 o'clock portion). Provide minimum
1/2-inch joint recess. Use joint "diapers" minimum of 12 inches wide.
3. For field adjustments with deflections or joint offsets beyond manufacturer's

recommendations:
a. Field trim spigot.
b. Do not engage ring.
4. Harnessed joints are not permitted in areas defined on Drawings as potentially

petroleum contaminated material, in tunnels, or at bend greater than 5 degrees.
5. Install harness type joints including snap rings at straight sections of pipe.
E. Restrained Joints:
1. For existing water lines and water lines less than 16 inches in diameter,
restrain pipe joints with concrete thrust blocks unless otherwise shown on
Drawings.
2. Thrust restraint lengths shown on Drawings are minimum anticipated lengths.

These lengths are based on deflections or joint offsets indicated and on use of
prestressed concrete cylinder pipe for large diameter lines and ductile iron
pipe for small diameter lines. Adjustments in deflections or joint offsets or use
of other pipe material may result in reduction or increase of thrust lengths.
3. Pipe manufacturer or representative to perform thrust restraint calculations in

accordance with latest revision of applicable standard for pipe material
chosen. Submit calculations for all pipe materials sealed by a registered
Professional Engineer in State of Texas for review by Project Manager. Make
adjustments in thrust restraint lengths at no additional cost to City.
4. Include buoyancy conditions for soil unit weight when computing thrust
restraint calculations.
02511-16
CITY OF HOUSTON
5. Passive resistance of soil will not be permitted in calculation of thrust restraint

for some pipe materials.
6. For 16-inch lines and larger use minimum 16-foot length of pipe in and out of
joints made up of beveled pipe where restraint joint lengths are not identified
on Drawings. Otherwise, provide restraint joints for a minimum length of 16
feet on each side of beveled joints.
7. Installation.
a. Install restrained joints mechanism in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations.
b. Examine and clean mechanism; remove dirt, debris and other foreign
material.
c. Apply gasket and joint NSF 61 FDA food grade approved lubricant.
d. Verify gasket is evenly seated.
e. Do not over stab pipe into mechanism.
8. Prevent any lateral movement of thrust restraints throughout pressure testing

and operation.
9. Place 2500 psi concrete conforming to Section 03315 - Concrete for Utility
Construction, for blocking at each change in direction of existing water lines,
to brace pipe against undisturbed trench walls. Finish placement of concrete
blocking, made from Type I cement, 4 days prior to hydrostatic testing of
pipeline. Test may be made 2 days after completion of blocking if Type II
cement is used.
F. Joint Grout (Concrete Cylinder Pipe, Bar Wrapped Pipe, Mortar Coated Steel Pipe):
1. Mix cement grout mixture by machine when more than 1/2 cubic yard is
required. When less than 1/2 cubic yard is required, grout may be hand mixed.
Mix grout only in quantities for immediate use. Place grout within 20 minutes
after mixing. Discard grout that has set. Retempering of grout by any means
is not permitted.
2. Prepare grout in small batches to prevent stiffening before it is used. Do not

use grout which has become so stiff that proper placement cannot be assured
without retempering. Use grout for filling grooves of such consistency that it
will adhere to ends of pipe.
3. Surface Preparation: Remove defective concrete, laitance, dirt, oil, grease and
other foreign material from concrete surfaces with wire brush or hammer to
sound, clean surface. Remove rust and foreign materials from metal surfaces
in contact with grout.
02511-17
CITY OF HOUSTON
4. Follow established procedures for hot and cold weather concrete placement.
5. Complete joint grout operations and backfilling of pipe trenches as closely as

practical to pipe laying operations. Allow grouted exterior joints to cure at
least 1 hour before compacting backfill.
6. Grouting Exterior Joint Space: Hold wrapper in place on both sides of joint
with minimum 5/8-inch-wide steel straps or bands. Place no additional
bedding or backfill material on either side of pipe until after grout band is
filled and grout has mechanically stiffened. Pull ends of wrapper together at
top of pipe to form access hole. Pour grout down one side of pipe until it rises
on other side. Rod or puddle grout to ensure complete filling of joint recess.
Agitate for 15 minutes to allow excess water to seep through joint band. When
necessary, add more grout to fill joint completely. Protect gap at top of joint
band from backfill by allowing grout to stiffen or by covering with
structurally protective material. Do not remove band from joint. Proceed with
placement of additional bedding and backfill material.
7. Interior Joints for Pipe 24 Inches and Smaller: Circumferentially butter bell
with grout prior to insertion of spigot, strike off flush surplus grout inside pipe
by pulling filled burlap bag or inflated ball through pipe with rope. After joint
is engaged, finish off joint grout smooth and clean. Use swab approved by
Project Manager for 20-inch pipe and smaller.
8. Protect exposed interior surfaces of steel joint bands by pointing with grout.
Remove and replace improperly cured or otherwise defective grout.
9. Strike off grout on interior joints and make smooth with inside diameter of
pipe.
10. When installed in tunnel or encasement pipe and clearance within casing does
not permit outside grout to be placed in normal manner, apply flexible sealer,
such as Flex Protex or equal, to outside joint prior to joint engagement. Clean
and prime surfaces receiving sealer in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Apply sufficient quantities of sealer to assure complete
protection of steel in joint area. Fill interior of joint with grout in normal
manner after joint closure.
11. Interior Joints for Water Lines 30 Inches and Larger: Clean joint space, wet
joint surfaces, fill with stiff grout and trowel smooth and flush with inside
surfaces of pipe using steel trowel so that surface is smooth. Accomplish
grouting at end of each work day. Obtain written acceptance from Project
Manager of inside joints before proceeding with next day's pipe laying
operation. During inspection, insure no delamination of joint mortar has
occurred by striking joint mortar lining with rubber mallet. Remove and
replace delaminated mortar lining.
02511-18
CITY OF HOUSTON
12. Work which requires heavy equipment to be over water line must be
completed before mortar is applied to interior joints.
G. Large Diameter Water Main Joint Testing: In addition to testing individual joints with
feeler gauge approximately 1/2 inch wide and 0.015-inch thick, use other joint testing
procedure approved or recommended by pipe manufacturer which will help ensure
watertight installation prior to backfilling. Perform tests at no additional cost to City.
H. Make curves and bends by deflecting or offsetting joints or other method as

recommended by manufacturer and approved by Project Manager. Submit details of
other methods of providing curves and bends which exceed manufacturer's
recommended deflection or joint offset prior to installation.
1. Deflection of pipe joints shall not exceed maximum deflection recommended

by pipe manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
2. If deflection exceeds that specified but is less than 5 percent, repair entire
deflected pipe section such that maximum deflection allowed is not exceeded.
3. If deflection is equal to or exceeds 5 percent from that specified, remove

entire portion of deflected pipe section and install new pipe.
4. Replace, repair, or reapply coatings and linings as required.
5. Assessment of deflection may be measured by Project Manager at location

along pipe. Arithmetical averages of deflection or similar average
measurement methods will not be deemed as meeting intent of standard.
6. When rubber gasketed pipe is laid on curve, join pipe in straight alignment
and then deflect or offset to curved alignment.
I. Closures Sections and Approved Field Modifications to Steel, Concrete Cylinder

Pipe, Bar Wrapped Pipe and Fittings:
1. For large diameter water lines, provide minimum overlap of 4 inches on each
side for butt-strap closures.
2. For pipe diameters 36 inches and greater, perform field welds on interior and
exterior of pipe.
3. Apply welded-wire fabric reinforcement to interior and exterior of exposed

interior and exterior surfaces greater than 6 inches in diameter. Welded-wire
fabric: minimum W1; maximum spacing 2 inches by 4 inches; 3/8 inch from
surface of steel plate or middle third of lining or coating thickness for mortar
thickness less than 3/4 inch.
4. Fill exposed interior and exterior surfaces with nonshrink grout.
3.07 CATHODIC PROTECTION APPURTENANCES
02511-19
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Where identified on Drawings, modify pipe for cathodic protection as detailed on

Drawings and specified. Unless otherwise noted, provide insulation kits including test
stations at connections to existing water system or at locations to isolate one type of
cathodic system from another type, between water line, access manhole piping and
other major openings in water line, or as shown on Drawings.
B. Bond joints for pipe installed in tunnel or open cut, except where insulating flanges
are provided. Weld strap, wire or clip between bell and spigot of each joint or as
shown on Drawings. No additional bonding required where joints are welded for
thrust restraint. Repair coatings as specified by appropriate AWWA standard, as
recommended by manufacturer, and as approved by Project Manager.
C. Bonding Strap or Clip: Free of foreign material that may increase contact resistance
between wire and strap or clip.
3.08 SECURING, SUPPORTING AND ANCHORING
A. Support piping, as shown on Drawings and as specified in this Section, to maintain

line and grade and prevent transfer of stress to adjacent structures.
B. Where shown on Drawings, anchor pipe fittings and bends installed on water line by
welding consecutive joints of pipe together to distance each side of fitting. Restrained
length, as shown on Drawings, assumes that installation of pipe and subsequent
hydrostatic testing begin upstream and proceed downstream, with respect to normal
flow of water in pipe. If installation and testing differs from this assumption, submit
for approval revised method of restraining pipe joints upstream and downstream of
device used to test against (block valve, blind flange or dished head plug).
C. Use adequate temporary blocking of fittings when making connections to distribution

system and during hydrostatic tests. Use sufficient anchorage and blocking to resist
stresses and forces encountered while tapping existing water line.
3.09 POLYETHYLENE WRAP FOR DUCTILE IRON PIPE
A. Conform to requirements of Section 02528 - Polyethylene Encasement/Wrap.
3.10 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION
A. Provide cleanup and restoration crews to work closely behind pipe laying crews and,
where necessary, during disinfection and hydrostatic testing, service transfers,
abandonment of old water lines, backfill and surface restoration.
B. Unless otherwise approved by Project Manager, comply with the following:
1. Once water line is installed to limits approved in layout submitted,

immediately begin preparatory work for disinfection effort.
2. No later than three days after completing disinfection preparatory work,

submit to City appropriate request for disinfection.
02511-20
CITY OF HOUSTON
3. If City fails to perform initial disinfection of lines in accordance with Section

02514 - Disinfection of Water Lines, within seven days from submission of
appropriate request, and if approved by Project Manager, pipe laying
operations may continue beyond approved limits until the City responds.
4. Immediately after transfer of services, begin abandonment of old water lines

and site restoration.
5. Do not exceed a total of 50 percent of total project linear feet of disturbed

right-of- way and easement until site is restored in accordance with Section
01740 - Site Restoration.
6. Exceeding any of the above footage limitations shall be considered a material

breach of the Contract and subject to termination in accordance with the
General Conditions.
C. For large diameter water lines, do not install more than 2,000 linear feet of water line,
without previous 2,000 linear feet being restored in accordance with Section 01740 -
Site Restoration. Schedule paving crews so repaving work will not lag behind pipe
laying work by more than 1,000 linear feet. Failure to comply with this requirement
shall be considered a material breach of the Contract and subject to termination in
accordance with the General Conditions.
3.11 CLEANING PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Remove construction debris or foreign material and thoroughly broom clean and flush
piping systems. Provide temporary connections, equipment and labor for cleaning.
City must inspect water line for cleanliness prior to filling.
3.12 DISINFECTION OF WATER LINES
A. Conform to requirements of Section 02514 - Disinfection of Water Lines.
3.13 FIELD HYDROSTATIC TESTS
A. Conform to requirements of Section 02515 - Hydrostatic Testing of Pipelines.
END OF SECTION
02511-21
CITY OF HOUSTON WATER TAP AND SERVICE
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION LINE INSTALLATION
SECTION 02512
WATER TAP AND SERVICE LINE INSTALLATION
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Tapping existing mains and furnishing and installing new service lines for water.
B. Relocation of existing small water meters.
C. Specifications identify requirements for both small-diameter (less than or equal to 20

inches) water lines and large-diameter (greater than 20 inches) water lines. When
specifications for large-diameter water lines differ from those for small- diameter
water lines, paragraphs for large-diameter water lines will govern for large-diameter
pipe.
B. Section 02085 – Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults
D. Section 02503 – Copper Tubing
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for water taps and copper service lines 3/4 inch through 1 inch is on
unit price basis for each installation. Separate measurements will be made for
"short side", "long side" and "extra-long side" connections as defined in
Paragraph 1.05, Definitions.
2. Payment for water taps and service lines 1-1/2 inch through 2-inch is on unit
price basis for each installation. Separate measurements will be made for
"short side", "long side" and "extra-long side" connections as defined in
Paragraph 1.05, Definitions.
3. Payment for "short side, "long side" and "extra-long side" includes locating
water line, tap installation and connection to meter and restoring site.
4. Payment for each small meter includes labor, materials, and equipment to
relocate existing small meter.
02512-1
5. No additional payment will be made for bedding, backfill, compaction, push

under pavement, etc.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM B 418 - Standard Specification for Cast and Wrought Galvanic Zinc Anodes.
B. AWWA C 800 - Standard for Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings.
C. AWWA C 900 - Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated
Fittings, 4 in. Through 12 in. (100 mm through 300 mm), for Water Transmission and
Distribution.
D. AWWA C 105 – Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems.
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. Short Side Connection: Service line connecting proposed curb stop, located inside
water meter box, to water line on same side of street.
B. Long Side Connection: Service line connecting proposed curb stop, located inside
water meter box, to water line on opposite side of street or from center of streets
where supply line is located in street center such as boulevards and streets with
esplanades. Distance not to exceed 60 linear feet (at right angles to water line).
C. Extra Long Side Connection: Service line connecting proposed curb stop, located
inside water meter box, to water line on opposite side of street or from center of
streets where supply line is located in street center such as boulevards and streets with
esplanades. Distance greater than 60 linear feet (at right angles to water line).
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Copper Tubing: In accordance with Section 02503 - Copper Tubing. Polybutylene

tubing is not permitted.
B. Corporation Stops: AWWA C 800 as modified in this Section:
1. Inlet End: AWWA standard thread.
2. Valve Body: Tapered plug type, O-ring seat ball type, or rubber seat ball type.
02512-2
3. Outlet End: Flared-copper connection for use with Type K, soft copper or
compression type fitting.
C. Provide taps for water line types and sizes in accordance with pipe tapping schedule
located at end of this Section.
D. Dual Strap Saddles: Red brass body and straps; ductile-iron; vinyl-coated body and
straps; or ductile-iron, vinyl-coated body and stainless-steel straps.
E. Taps for PVC Water Lines: Use dual-strap or single, wide-band strap saddles which
provide full support around circumference of pipe and bearing area of sufficient width
along axis of pipe, 2 inches minimum, ensuring that pipe will not be distorted when
saddle is tightened. Provide approved stainless-steel tapping saddle with AWWA
standard thread.
F. Taps for Steel Pipe: Not allowed, unless specifically approved by Project Manager.
Use saddle only when tap is approved on steel pipe.
G. Curb Stops and Brass Fittings: AWWA C 800 as modified in this Section.
1. Inlet End: Flared copper connection or compression-type fitting
2. Valve Body: Straight-through or angled, meter-stop design equipped with

following:
a. O-ring seal straight plug type.
b. Rubber seat ball type.
3. Outlet End: Female, iron-pipe thread or swivel-nut, meter-spud thread on 3/4-

inch and 1-inch stops and 2-hole flange on 1 1/2 and 2-inch sizes.
4. Fittings: Provide approved fittings. Use same size open end wrenches and
tapping machines as used with respective Mueller fittings.
5. Factory Testing of Brass Fittings:
a. Submerge in water for 10 seconds at 85 psi with stop in both closed

and open positions.
b. Reject fitting that shows air leakage. Project Manager may confirm
tests locally. Entire lot from which samples were taken will be rejected
when random sampling discloses unsatisfactory fittings.
H. Angle Stops: In accordance with AWWA C 800; ground-key, stop type with bronze
lock- wing head stop cap; inlet and outlet threads conform to application tables of
AWWA C 800; and inlets flared connection or compression.
1. Outlet for 3/4-inch and 1-inch size: Meter swivel nut with saddle support.
02512-3
2. Outlet for 1 1/2-inch through 2-inch size: O-ring sealed meter flange, iron
pipe threads.
I. Fittings: In accordance with AWWA C 800 and following:
1. Castings: Smooth, free from burrs, scales, blisters, sand holes, and defects
which would make them unfit for intended use.
2. Nuts: Smooth cast and has symmetrical hexagonal wrench flats.
3. Flare-Joint Fittings: Smooth cast. Machine seating surfaces for metal-to-metal

seal to proper taper or curve, free from pits or protrusions.
4. Thread fittings, of all types, shall have N.P.T. or AWWA threads, and protect
male threaded ends in shipment by plastic coating, or approved equal.
5. Compression tube fittings shall have Buna-N beveled gasket.
6. Stamp of manufacturer's name or trademark and of fitting size on body.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. For service lines and lateral connections larger than those allowed in Pipe Tapping
Schedule, branch connections and multiple taps may be used. Space corporation stops
minimum of 2 feet apart.
B. Tapped collars of appropriate sizes: Approved in new construction only provided they
are set at right angles to proposed meter location.
C. Use tapping machine manufactured for pressure tapping purposes for 2-inch and
smaller service taps on pressurized water lines.
D. For new meter or when existing meter conflicts with proposed pavement
improvements, locate water meters one foot inside street right-of-way, or when this is
not feasible, one foot on curb side of sidewalk. Contact Project Manager when major
landscaping or trees conflict with service line and meter box location. No additional
payment will be made for work on customer side of meter.
E. New location and installation of existing small meter shall conform to requirements
of this Section.
F. Successfully perform hydrostatic and disinfection testing prior to installing service

taps and lines.
3.02 SERVICE INSTALLATION
02512-4
A. Set service taps at right angles to proposed meter location and locate taps in upper
pipe segment within 45 degrees of pipe springline.
B. Install service lines in accordance with Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for
Utilities.
C. Lay service lines with minimum of 30 inches of cover as measured from top of curb
or, in absence of curbs, from centerline elevation of crowned streets or roads. Provide
minimum of 18 inches of cover below flow line of ditches to service lines.
D. Service lines across existing street (push-unders): Pull service line through prepared
hole under paving. Use only full lengths of tubing. Take care not to damage copper
tubing when pulling it through hole. Compression-type union is only permitted when
span underneath pavement cannot be accomplished with a full standard length of
tubing. Use one compression-type union for each full length of tubing.
E. Maintain service lines free of dirt and foreign matter.
F. Install service lines so that top of meter will be 4 to 6 inches below finished grade.
G. Anticipate existing sanitary sewers to have cement stabilized sand backfill to bottom
of pavement. Include cost of such crossings in unit price for services.
H. When copper line must be installed in cement stabilized sand use an 8 MIL
polyethylene encasement tubing in accordance with AWWA C105.
3.03 CURB STOP INSTALLATION
A. Set curb stops or angle stops at outer end of service line inside of meter box. Secure
opening in curb stop to prevent unwanted material from entering. In close quarters,
make S-curve in field. Do not flatten tube. In 3/4-inch and 1-inch services, install
meter coupling, swivel-nut, or curb stop ahead of meter. Install straight meter
coupling on outlet end of meter.
3.04 GALVANIC CORROSION CONTROL
A. For 1-1 /2 inch and 2 inch meters utilizing two bolt flanges, install 2.5 ounce
sacrificial zinc anode caps meeting ASTM B 418 requirements on the end of each
bolt on both outlet and inlet side of the meter connection.
3.05 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
A. Open trench for proposed service line in accordance with Section 02317 - Excavation
and Backfill for Utilities.
B. Install curb stop on meter end of service line.
02512-5
C. With curb stop open and prior to connecting service line to meter in slack position,
open corporation stop and flush service line thoroughly. Close curb stop, leaving
corporation stop in full-open position.
D. Check service line for apparent leaks. Repair leaks before proceeding.
E. Schedule inspection with Project Manager prior to backfilling. After inspection,

backfill in accordance with Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities.
F. Install meter box centered over meter with top of lid flush with finished grade. Meter
box: Refer to Section 02085 - Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults.
Table 02512-1
PIPE TAPPING SCHEDULE
WATERLINE TYPE AND SERVICE SIZE
DIAMETER 3/4" 1" 1-1/2" 2"
4" Cast Iron or Ductile Iron DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS
4" Asbestos Cement WBSS WBSS DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS

4" PVC (AWWA C900) DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS
6" and 8" Cast Iron or
DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS
Ductile Iron
6" and 8" Asbestos Cement DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS
6" and 8" Cast Iron or
Ductile Iron
6" and 8" PVC (AWWA
C900)
12" Cast Iron or Ductile Iron DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS
12" Asbestos Cement DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS
12" PVC (AWWA C900) DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS
16" and Up Cast Iron or

DWBSS DWBSS DWBSS DWBSS
Ductile Iron
16" and Up Asbestos Cement DWBSS DWBSS DWBSS DWBSS
16" and Up PVC (AWWA

DWBSS DWBSS DWBSS DWBSS
C900)
DSS - DUAL STRAP SADDLES
WBSS - WIDE BAND STRAP SADDLES DWBSS - DUAL WIDE BAND STRAP
SADDLES
02512-6
END OF SECTION
02512-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFCATION WET CONNECTIONS
SECTION 02513
WET CONNECTIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Wet connections for new water lines and service lines to existing water lines.
B. Section 02221 - Removing Existing Pavements, Structures, Wood, and Demolition

Debris
C. Section 02501 - Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings
D. Section 02502 - Steel Pipe and Fittings
E. Section 02503 - Copper Tubing
F. Section 02504 - Fiberglass Reinforced Pipe
G. Section 02505 - High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Solid and Profile Wall Pipe
H. Section 02506 - Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe
I. Section 02507 - Prestressed Concrete Cylinder Pipe
J. Section 02508 - Extra Strength Clay Pipe
K. Section 02509 - Fiberglass Reinforced Pipe for Pressure Mains
L. Section 02510 - Polypropylene (PP) Corrugated Wall Pipe
M. Section 02511 - Water Lines
N. Section 02512 - Water Tap and Service Line Installation
O. Section 02513 - Wet Connections
P. Section 02514 - Disinfection of Water Lines
Q. Section 02515 - Hydrostatic Testing of Pipelines
R. Section 02516 - Cut, Plug, and Abandonment of Water Line
02513-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
S. Section 02517 - Water Line in Tunnels
T. Section 02518 - Steel Pipe and Fittings for Large Diameter Water Lines
U. Section 02520 - Fire Hydrants
V. Section 02521 - Gate Valves
W. Section 02522 - Butterfly Valves
X. Section 02523 - Pressure Reducing Valves
Y. Section 02524 - Air Release and Vacuum Relief Valves
Z. Section 02525 - Tapping Sleeves and Valves
AA. Section 02526 - Water Meters
BB. Section 02527 - Polyurethane Coatings on Steel or Ductile Iron Pipe
CC. Section 02528 - Polyethylene Encasement/Wrap
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for wet connections shown on Drawings is on unit price basis for
each wet connection. Separate payment will be made for each size of water
line.
2. No compensation will be given for extra work or for damages occurring as

result of incomplete shutoff.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. AWWA C 800 - Standard for Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings.
B. OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101 - Asbestos.
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. Wet connections consist of isolating sections of pipe to be connected with existing

valves, draining isolated sections, and completing connections.
02513-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Connection of 2-inch or smaller lines, which may be referred to on Drawings as "2-

inch standard connections" or "gooseneck connections" will be measured as 2-inch
wet connections. This item is not to be used as part of 2-inch service line.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Pipe shall conform to requirements of applicable portions of Sections 02501 through

02528 related to piping materials and to water distribution.
B. Corporation cocks and saddles shall conform to requirements of Section 02512 -

Water Tap and Service Line Installation.
C. Valves shall conform to requirements of Section 02521 - Gate Valves.
D. Brass fittings shall conform to requirements of AWWA C 800.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONNECTION OPERATIONS
A. Plan wet connections in manner and at hours with least inconvenience public. Notify
Project Manager at least 72 hours in advance of making connections.
B. Do not operate valves on water lines in use by City. City of Houston Utility
Operations Division will handle, at no cost to Contractor, operations involving
opening and closing valves for wet connections.
C. Conduct connection operations when Inspector is at job site. Connection work shall
progress without interruption until complete once existing water lines have been cut
or plugs have been removed for making connections.
3.02 2-INCH WET CONNECTIONS
A. Use corporation cocks, saddles, copper tubing as required for line and grade
adjustment, and brass fittings necessary to adapt to existing water line. Use 2-inch
valves when indicated on Drawings for 2-inch copper gooseneck connections.
3.03 CONNECTION TO ASBESTOS-CEMENT (AC) PIPE
A. Notify Project Manager when AC pipe is encountered.
B. Refer to Section 02221 – Removing Existing Pavements and Structures for crew
training, safety precautions, and AC pipe removal requirements.
C. Protocol:
02513-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Mechanically excavate to no more than 6 in. of AC Pipe. Carefully uncover

the remainder of pipe by hand or with shovel.
2. Keep pipe adequately wet before and during work.
3. Place 2 layers of 6 mil polyethylene sheeting under the asbestos pipe to

prevent soil contamination.
4. Use hand tools to remove collars. Replace minimum 6 ft. section of pipe. Use
of power tools is prohibited.
5. Do not crush AC pipe in place. Remove waste AC pipe.
END OF SECTION
02513-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION DISINFECTION OF WATER LINES
SECTION 02514
DISINFECTION OF WATER LINES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Disinfection of new potable water lines.
B. Disinfection of repair part used in wet connection, tapping sleeve and valves, clamps,
valves and other related repairs.
A. Unit Prices.
1. No separate payment will be made for disinfection of water lines under this
Section. Include cost in unit price of water lines being disinfected.
B. Adjusting Payment for Retesting.
1. Subsequent disinfection operations which may be necessary due to

nonconforming or incomplete construction will be charged to Contractor.
Charges will be deducted from retainage amounts when construction estimates
are processed for final payment.
2. Total charge will consist of base charge of $135.00 plus footage charge based
on number of feet of specified diameter pipe in construction project. Footage
charge is as follows:
02514-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
Size of Pipe Charge per Linear Foot

2 inch to 4 inch $0.03
6 inch $0.04
8 inch $0.05
54 inch $0.20
60 inch $0.22
66 inch $0.31
108 inch $0.75
120 inch or larger $1.00
C. Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). If Contract is Stipulated Price Contract, payment for
1.04 REFERENCES
A. AWWA C 651 - Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONDUCTING DISINFECTION
A. Promptly disinfect water lines constructed before tests are conducted on water lines
and before water lines are connected to City water distribution system.
B. Water for disinfection and flushing will be furnished by City without charge.
C. Unless otherwise provided in Contract Documents, City will conduct disinfection

operations assisted by Contractor.
D. Coordinate chlorination operations through Project Manager.
E. Chlorine Disinfection for Connections and/or Repairs to Existing Mains less than or
equal to 20-feet in length. When directed by Project Manager, follow procedures for
disinfection by swabbing as listed below.
1. Comply with requirements of AWWA C 651 – Standard for Disinfecting

Water Mains.
02514-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Minimize entry of contaminants into existing pipe by using temporary caps or

other means. Dewater excavation and prevent entry of dirty water into pipe.
Examine interior of existing pipe and remove pieces of pipe, scale, and other
debris.
3. Coordinate with Project Manager for operation of valves and flushing line as
necessary to complete disinfection procedures.
4. Prior to isolation of water line, take chlorine residual test upstream of repair
location, record results.
5. Use appropriate personal protective equipment including rubber gloves and

goggles. When necessary, use respiratory protection.
6. Mix a solution of 2 oz. of calcium hypochlorite (65% available chlorine) and 1

gallons of water, or 1 gallon of 5 percent bleach and 4 gallons of water.
7. Thoroughly swab new pieces of pipe, couplings, clamps, sleeves, and other
components of pipe connection or repair using clean rags saturated with
mixture or sprayer. A clean mop saturated with mixture may be used for
longer pieces of pipe. Swab existing pipe exposed inside excavation.
8. After repair or connection is complete in place, coordinate with Project

Manager to flush area of repair until water is clear. Obtain chlorine residual
from downstream source. Compare results with previous chlorine residual
standard.
9. If downstream chlorine results are higher than the upstream results, continue
flushing until the downstream results equals the initial upstream result.
10. If downstream residuals are equal to or lower than upstream results, co-
ordinate with Project Manager to re-isolate line segment and re-swab newly
installed pipe and fittings. Return to step 8.
11. When chlorine residual downstream of repair equals the initial upstream
results, slowly and fully open all valves isolated and proceed to backfill per
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary blind flanges, cast-iron sleeves, plugs, necessary service taps,
copper service leads, risers and jumpers of sizes, location and materials, and other
items needed to facilitate disinfection of new water lines prior to connection to City
water distribution system. Normally, each valved section of water line requires two
each 3/4-inch taps. A 2-inch minimum blow-off is required for water lines up to and
including 6-inch diameter.
02514-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Use fire hydrants as blow-offs to flush newly constructed water lines 8-inch diameters
and above. Where fire hydrants are not available on water lines, install temporary
blow-off valves as approved by Project Manager and remove promptly upon
successful completion of disinfection and testing.
C. Slowly fill each section of pipe with water in manner approved by Project Manager.
Average water velocity when filling pipeline should be less than one foot per second
and shall not, under any circumstance, exceed 2 feet per second. Before beginning
disinfection operations, expel air from pipeline.
D. Backfill excavations immediately after installation of risers or blow-offs.
E. Install blow-off valves at end of water line to facilitate flushing of dead-end water
lines. Install permanent blow-off valves according to drawings.
3.03 DISINFECTION BY CITY PERSONNEL
A. Correct problems that may prevent disinfection operations prior to advising Project
Manager to perform disinfection work. When disinfection work cannot be performed
due to covered up valves, missing valve stacks, inoperative fire hydrants or other
nonconforming construction, charge will be levied against Contractor for each trip
made by City personnel.
B. Notify and coordinate with Project Manager minimum of 72 hours before disinfection
work is to be performed. Assist City personnel during disinfection operations.
3.04 DISINFECTION BY CONTRACTOR
A. The following procedure will be used when disinfection by Contractor is required by

Contract Documents:
1. Use not less than 100 parts of chlorine per million parts of water.
2. Introduce chlorinating material to water lines in accordance with AWWA C

651.
3. After contact period of not less than 24 hours, flush system with clean water
until residual chlorine is no greater than 1.0 parts per million parts of water.
4. Open and close valves in lines being sterilized several times during contact
period.
5. If chemical compound is used for sterilizing agent, place in pipes as directed

by Project Manager.
3.05 BACTERIOLOGICAL TESTING
02514-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. After disinfection and flushing of water lines, bacteriological tests will be performed
by City or testing laboratory in accordance with Section 01454 - Testing Laboratory
Services. When test results indicate need for additional disinfection of water lines
based upon Texas Department of Health requirements, assist City with additional
disinfection operations.
3.06 COMPLETION
A. Upon completion of disinfection and testing, remove risers except those approved for
use in subsequent hydrostatic testing, and backfill excavation promptly.
END OF SECTION
02514-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PIPELINES
SECTION 02515
HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PIPELINES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Field hydrostatic testing of newly installed water pipelines.
B. Section 02514 - Disinfection of Water Lines
A. Unit Prices.
1. No payment will be made for hydrostatic testing of pipelines under this

Section. Include cost in unit price of pipelines being tested.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Disinfect water system pipelines prior to hydrostatic testing.
B. Hydrostatically test newly installed water pipelines after disinfection, when required,
and before connecting to City water distribution system.
C. Water for testing will be charged to Contractor in accordance with City Ordinances.
Prior to hydrostatic testing, obtain a transient meter from the City Deposit is required
for transient meter.
D. Test pipelines with maximum lengths between valves, or plugs, according to the
following criteria.
02515-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. 2,000 linear feet for small diameter pipelines (20-inches in diameters or

smaller).
2. 4,000 linear feet for large diameter pipelines (24-inches in diameters or

larger).
E. Conduct hydrostatic tests in presence of Project Manager.
3.02 TEST PROCEDURES
A. Furnish, install, and operate connections, pump, meter and gages necessary for
hydrostatic testing.
B. Allow pipeline to sit minimum of 24 hours from time it is initially disinfected until
testing begins, to allow pipe wall or lining material to absorb water. Periods of up to 7
days may be required for mortar lining to become saturated.
C. For small diameter pipelines, expel air and apply minimum test pressure of 125 psi.
For large diameter water lines, expel air and apply minimum test pressure of 150 psi.
D. Begin test by 9:00 a.m. unless otherwise approved by Project Manager. Maintain test
pressure for 8 hours. When large quantity of water is required to maintain pressure
during test, discontinue testing until cause of water loss is identified and corrected.
E. Keep valves inside pressure reducing stations closed during hydrostatic pressure test.
3.03 ALLOWABLE LEAKAGE FOR WATERLINES
A. During hydrostatic tests, no leakage will be allowed for sections of water lines
consisting of welded joints.
B. Maximum allowable leakage for water lines with rubber gasketed joints: 3.19 gallons
per inch nominal diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours while testing.
C. For meter run installation, when work cannot be isolated and line fails pressure test,
visual inspection of work by Project Manager for leakage during pressure test may be
used to fulfill requirements of this section.
3.04 CORRECTION FOR FAILED TESTS
A. Repair joints showing visible leaks on surface regardless of total leakage shown on
test. Check valves and fittings to ensure that no leakage occurs that could affect or
invalidate test. Remove cracked or defective pipes, fittings, and valves discovered
during pressure test and replace with new items.
B. Project Manager may require failed lines to be disinfected after repair and prior to
retesting. Conduct and pay for subsequent disinfection operations in accordance with
requirements of Section 02514 - Disinfection of Water Lines. Pay for water required
for additional disinfection and retesting.
02515-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Repeat test until satisfactory results are obtained.
3.05 COMPLETION
A. Upon satisfactory completion of testing, remove risers remaining from disinfection

and hydrostatic testing, and backfill excavation promptly.
END OF SECTION
02515-3
CITY OF HOUSTON CUT, PLUG AND
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION ABANDONMENT OF WATER LINES
SECTION 02516
CUT, PLUG AND ABANDONMENT OF WATER LINES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Cut, plug and abandonment of water lines.
D. Section 02951 – Pavement Repair and Restoration
E. Section 03315 – Concrete for Utility Construction
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for cut, plug, and abandonment of water lines is on a unit price basis
for each cut, plug, and abandonment performed. Separate payment will be
made for each size of water line.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit product data for proposed plugs and clamps for approval.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Concrete for reaction blocks: Class B conforming to requirements of Section 03315 -

02516-1
CITY OF HOUSTON CUT, PLUG AND
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION ABANDONMENT OF WATER LINES
B. Plugs and clamps: Applicable for type of pipe to be plugged.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION
A. Do not begin cut, plug and abandonment operations until replacement water line has
been constructed, disinfected, tested, and service lines have been transferred to
replacement water line.
B. Install plug, clamp, and concrete reaction block and make cut at location shown on
Drawings.
C. Main to be abandoned shall not be valved off and shall not be cut or plugged other
than at supply water line or as shown on Drawings.
D. After water line to be abandoned has been cut and plugged, check for other sources
feeding abandoned water line. When sources are found, notify Project Manager
immediately. Cut and plug abandoned water line at point of other feed as directed by
Project Manager.
E. Plug or cap ends or openings in abandoned water line in manner approved by Project
Manager.
F. Remove and dispose of surface identifications such as valve boxes and fire hydrants.
Valve boxes in improved streets, other than shell, may be filled with concrete after
removing cap.
G. Backfill excavations in accordance with Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for
Utilities.
H. Repair street surfaces in accordance with Section 02951- Pavement Repair and
Restoration.
END OF SECTION
02516-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION WATER LINE IN TUNNELS
SECTION 02517
WATER LINE IN TUNNELS

PART 1 GENERAL
A. Handling, transporting, and installing water line in primary liner tunnels, including
invert cleanup and blocking and water line in casings that will be backfilled with
concrete or grout.
C. Section 02425 – Tunnel Excavation and Primary Liner
D. Section 02431 – Tunnel Grout
E. Section 02447 – Installation of Water Lines by Slurry Bore
F. Section 02511 – Water Lines
G. Section 02518 – Steel Pipe and Fittings for Large Diameter Water Lines
H. Section 03315 – Concrete for Utility Construction
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment of water line installed by tunneling is by linear foot along center line
of completed water line as designated on Drawings.
2. Payment for installation of water line in tunnel constructed according to

Section 02425 - Tunnel Excavation and Primary Liner will be authorized by
Project Manager in three parts. Pay estimates for partial payments will be
made as measured above according to following schedule:
a. 60 percent of installation will be authorized when excavation and

primary liner installation is complete.
b. 95 percent of installation will be authorized when water line

installation and grouting is complete.
c. 100 percent of installation will be authorized when section

successfully hydrostatically tested.
02517-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
work is in this Section is included in total Stipulated Price.
A. ASME B 40.1 - Pressure Gauge and Gauge Attachments.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit work plan including following information in accordance with Section 01330
- Submittals.
1. Method of transporting pipes into tunnel.
2. Method of hoisting and positioning pipe in tunnel.
3. Method of jointing and aligning pipe.
4. Method of supporting and blocking pipe.
5. Tunnel ventilation while setting pipe and completing joints, when applicable.
6. Material, equipment and procedures for grout placement and other

information required by Section 02431 - Tunnel Grout.
B. Submit results of tunnel primary liner survey in accordance with Paragraph 3.02,
Tunnel Survey.
C. Submit results of installed water line survey in accordance with Paragraph 3.10, As-
built Survey and Installation Tolerances.
1.06 PROCEDURES
A. Joints: Prepare joints as recommended by pipe manufacturer and in accordance with

Section 02511 - Water Lines.
B. Handling: Handle, store, and transport pipe in accordance with pipe manufacturer's
recommendations and to prevent damage to pipe ends, pipe barrel, steel
reinforcement, and pipe protective linings.
C. Grouting: Perform grouting of annular space between water line and tunnel liner to
fill voids with grout, without dislocating or damaging pipe.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ANNULAR GROUT
02517-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Specified in Section 02431 - Tunnel Grout
2.02 CONCRETE
A. Meeting requirement of Section 03315 - Concrete for Utility Construction, Class B

concrete.
2.03 PIPE MATERIAL AND FITTINGS
A. Manufacture and deliver pipe material and fittings as described in Section 02511 -
Water Lines.
2.04 SPACERS
A. Unless otherwise noted on Drawings, use casing spacers between water line and
casing tunnel liner for water lines less than 24 inches in diameter. Refer to Paragraph
3.01 for exception. See Section 02447 – Installation of Water Lines by Slurry Bore
for spacer requirements and installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION
A. Grout in place, tunnels for water lines with diameters of 36-inches or greater. When
tunnel liner plate is used, grout water line in place regardless of water line diameter.
3.02 TUNNEL SURVEY
A. Prior to installing water line in tunnel: Perform survey of tunnel in accordance with
Paragraph 3.10B. Verify tunnel has been constructed within specified tolerances for
line, grade, and roundness and water line to be placed in tunnel can be placed in
conformance with tolerances specified. Should misalignment of tunnel preclude
proper installation of water line, notify Project Manager of proposed correction
method. Project Manager will make final decision on acceptability of correction.
3.03 PIPE TRANSPORT
A. Transport pipe in tunnel for final placement so that no damage occurs to pipe ends or
pipe barrel and interior lining or exterior coating. Repair pipe damaged during
transport or final placement in tunnel in manner acceptable to Project Manager prior
to joining. Remove damaged pipe from tunnel and replace, when directed by Project
Manager, at no additional cost to City.
3.04 TUNNEL CLEANUP
A. Remove temporary tunnel utilities, loose material, dirt, and debris prior to pipe
placement. Broom clean concrete invert. Control seepage and remove standing water
in invert.
02517-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Temporary construction tracks or pipe skids may be left in place when they do not
interfere with alignment of water line, short circuit cathodic protection system, or
interfere with final placement of annular grout.
3.05 INVERT PIPE SUPPORT
A. Construct invert pipe support of screeded concrete, steel beam, or other method, as
approved, to final grade of outside of water line. Secure invert support to primary
liner to prevent movement. Cure concrete support minimum of 48 hours prior to
setting pipe. Maintain minimum of 4-inches clearance between outside of water line
and steel beam or steel member.
3.06 JOINING PIPE IN TUNNELS
A. Lay pipe in accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations, and as specified

in this Section. Join pipe segments so as to properly compress gaskets and allow for
correct final positioning of pipe for line and grade. Closely align pipe and bring
loosely together by means of hydraulic jacks, locomotives, pipe mobiles, or winches.
Once pipes have been loosely joined, pull home by means of hydraulic tugger or
other similar methods suitably protecting pipe and joints against damage. Impact
joining, such as ramming with locomotives or other mechanical equipment, is not
permitted.
3.07 SUPPORTING PIPE IN TUNNEL AND BULKHEADS
A. Develop and submit pipe supporting system that will prevent water line from floating
and deforming beyond specified limits. Loads imposed on pipe, primary liner and
surrounding soil during grouting shall be determined by Registered Professional
Engineer in State of Texas. Show essential details in plan for supporting system.
Position water line in tunnel to allow minimum of 4 inches of grout to be placed
between water line and tunnel primary liner or casing.
B. Wooden support blocks are not allowed.
C. Prevent pipe from floating during backfill operations by properly installed supporting.
Remove and replace segment of pipe which is distorted or moved from final line and
grade.
D. Secure supporting in place so that it cannot be dislodged during adjacent pipe laying
and during grouting operations.
E. Construct bulkheads of material, compatible with grout, to withstand imposed grout

pressure without leakage. Provide bulkheads at frequency to allow completion of
grouting in continuous operation and to permit timely removal of pipe and grout
which may be needed as result of pipe distortion or movement. Modifications to
bulkhead spacing will be reviewed by Project Manager. Provide adequate venting for
bulkheads.
02517-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
F. Contractor may use mortar bands, casing spacers or blocking to support pipe in
tunnel.
G. If mortar bands are used, mortar coating must be used. Refer to Section 02518 – Steel
Pipe and Fittings for Large Diameter Water Lines for requirements.
3.08 ANNULAR GROUT
A. Fill annular void between water line and tunnel primary liner or casing with grout, in
accordance with Section 02431 - Tunnel Grout.
B. Test annular grout material, equipment, and procedures in accordance with approved
submittal. Perform test on first 200 feet of water line to be backfilled. When grout
does not totally fill annular space or other problems occur, correct defects in first test
section and adjust method or mix and rerun test on next 200 feet. Repeat procedure as
necessary.
C. Placement:
1. Placement Limits: Predetermine limits of each grout placement stage by size

and capacity of batching equipment and initial set time of proposed grout.
Under no circumstances shall placement at grout port continue longer than
period of time for mix to take initial set. Locate grout hole spacing and
locations according to number of stages necessary to backfill tunnel liner. Do
not install another lift until proper set has been attained. Placement procedures
shall be approved by admixture or additive manufacturers.
2. Equipment - Pumps: Pumping equipment must be of sufficient size and

capacity to place grout to distances and volumes compatible with batching and
mixing equipment. Maintain equipment and clean thoroughly each day. No
hydrocarbons shall enter pumping chamber. Under no circumstances shall
grout be pumped in excess of 1000 linear feet without prior approval by
Project Manager. Pumping test and verification testing of resulting grout
quality will be required for approval.
3. Slickline: Convey grout to point of placement in clean steel or rubber hoses

designed to handle safely, pump pressure and volumes during placement. Do
not allow hardened grout or concrete to obstruct or coat steel pipe or hose
internally.
4. Grout Connections: Grout connections shall be sized minimum of 2-inch

inside diameter, consisting of grout hose attached immediately to pressure
gauge. Gauged pumping pressure shall not exceed water line manufacturer's
recommendations. Monitor grout pressure.
5. Gauges:
a. Type: Instrument oil-filled and attached to saddle-type diaphragm seal

(gauge saver) to prevent clogging with grout.
02517-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
b. Calibration: Certified and calibrated in accordance with ASME B

40.1.
c. Range: Not more than 100 percent greater than design grout pressure.
d. Accuracy: No more than one-half percent error over full range of

gauge.
e. Fitting: Attach gauge to valve immediately attached to grout port in

tunnel liner. Provide T-fitting in injection line for sampling.
6. Limit pressure on annular space to prevent damage to pipe or liner. Define

limiting and estimated required pressure range. Provide and monitor open
ended, high point tap or equivalent vent at bulkhead opposite point of
grouting.
7. Pump grout until grout within 5 percent of specified density discharges from
end opposite injection point to ensure grout is not diluted by extraneous water
in annulus.
8. Drilling of access holes from surface to facilitate grouting shall not be

allowed.
9. Communication: There shall be constant communications via telephone

between headerman at point of injection and pump, batch plant, and
supervisor. Under no circumstance shall grouting continue without continuity
of communications.
10. The headerman at point of placement shall advise batch plant of variations of
density and make corrections as necessary. Record and submit to Project
Manager for each days pour variations and corrections.
D. Delay grouting until all significant differential movement has stopped as determined
by monitoring.
E. Remove bulkheads unless constructed of masonry.
F. Repair or replace damage or distortion to water line.
3.09 GROUTING JOINTS
A. Materials and procedures for filling interior joint recesses shall conform to Section
02511 - Water Lines.
3.10 AS-BUILT SURVEY AND INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Perform as-built survey on installed water line. Determine horizontal and vertical
location for invert of each pipe joint.
02517-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Acceptable tolerances: Within plus or minus 3 inches of horizontal alignment, within

plus or minus 2 inches of vertical alignment.
END OF SECTION
02517-7
CITY OF HOUSTON STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION LARGE DIAMETER WATER LINES
SECTION 02518
STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER LINES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Large diameter (24 inches and greater) steel pipe and fittings for water lines and
pumping facilities.
D. Section 02425 – Tunnel Excavation and Primary Liner
E. Section 02502 – Steel Pipe and Fittings
G. Section 02527 – Polyurethane Coatings on Steel or Ductile Iron Pipe
H. Section 02529 – Tape Coatings on Steel Pipe
A. Unit Prices.
1. No payment will be made for steel pipe and fittings under this Section.
Include cost in unit price for water lines, pumping facilities, and encasement
sleeves.
1.04 REFERENCES
B. AREMA - Manual for Railway Engineering, Volume II, Chapter 15.
02518-1
C. ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC) Section VIII – Rules for Construction
of Pressure Vessels, Division 1
D. ASTM A 36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
E. ASTM A 53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-
Coated Welded and Seamless.
F. ASTM A 135 - Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe.
G. ASTM A 139 - Standard Specification for Electric-Fusion (ARC) - Welded Steel Pipe
(NPS 4 and Over).
H. ASTM A 1011 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled,
Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength.
I. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
J. ASTM C 35 - Standard Specification for Inorganic Aggregates for Use in Gypsum

Plaster.
K. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
L. ASTM C 494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
M. ASTM C 595 - Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements.
N. ASTM C 881 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for

Concrete.
O. ASTM C 1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout

(Non-shrink).
P. ASTM D 512 - Standard Test Methods for Chloride Ion in Water.
Q. ASTM A 1011 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled,
Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength
R. ASTM A 1018 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy-Thickness
Coils, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Commercial, Drawing, Structural, High-Strength Low-
Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High
Strength.
S. ASTM D 1293 - Standard Test Methods for pH of Water.
T. ASTM D 3363 - Standard Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test.
02518-2
U. ASTM D 4541 - Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using
Portable Adhesion Tests.
V. ASTM D 4752 - Standard Test Method for Measuring MEK Resistance of Ethyl
Silicate (Inorganic) Zinc-Rich Primers by Solvent Rub.
W. AWWA C 200 - Steel Water Pipe 6 in. and Larger.
X. AWWA C 205 - Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe4
in. (100 mm) and Larger-Shop Applied.
Y. AWWA C 206 - Standard for Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe.
Z. AWWA C 207 - Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 in.
through 144 in.
AA. AWWA C 208 - Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings; Addendum C
208A.
BB. AWWA C 210 - Liquid-Epoxy Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipe and
Fittings.
CC. AWWA C 216 – Heat-Shrinkable Cross-Linked Polyolefin Coatings for Steel Water
Pipe and Fittings.
DD. AWWA C 217 – Microcrystalline Wax and Petrolatum Tape Coating Systems for
Steel Water Pipe and Fittings.
EE. AWWA C222 – Polyurethane Coatings for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water
Pipe and Fittings.
FF. AWWA C 602 - Cement-Mortar Lining of Water Pipelines in Place - 4 in. (100 mm)
and Larger.
GG. AWWA C 604 – Installation of Buried Steel Water Pipe – 4 In. (100 mm) and Larger.
HH. AWWA M 11 - Steel Pipe-A Guide for Design and Installation.
II. ISO 9001 – International Organization for Standardization – Quality Management

Systems.
JJ. NSF/ANSI 61 – Drinking Water Systems Components Health Effects.
KK. SPFA – Steel Plate Fabricators Association
LL. SSPC Good Painting Practice, Volume 1.
MM. SSPC SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning.
NN. SSPC SP 5/NACE No. 1 - White Metal Blast Cleaning.
02518-3
OO. SSPC SP 6/NACE No. 3 - Commercial Blast Cleaning.
PP. SSPC SP 10/NACE No. 2 - Near-White Blast Cleaning.
QQ. SSPC VIS 1 - Guide and Reference Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by Dry
Abrasive Blast Cleaning:.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit shop drawings signed and sealed by Professional Engineer registered in State
of Texas showing following:
1. Manufacturer’s pipe design and thrust restraint calculations based on AWWA

M11, latest edition.
document format (*.PDF).
in accordance with requirements of this section. Certification to be signed and
sealed by professional Engineer registered in State of Texas.
C. Submit manufacturer’s certifications that pipe and fittings have been hydrostatically
tested at factory in accordance with AWWA C 200, paragraph 5.2.
D. Submit certification from NACE Certified Coatings Inspector, under supervision of

inspector having Level III certification for coatings and linings, that steel pipe
furnished on project was properly inspected and defective coatings detected properly
repaired.
E. Submit inspection procedures to be used by manufacturer and for quality control and
assurance for materials and welding. Submit, at least 30 days prior to repair work,
procedures that describe in detail shop and field work to be performed. Repair defects
such as substandard welds, excessive radial offsets (misalignment), pitting, gouges,
cracks, etc.
F. Submit following for non-shrink grout for special applications:
02518-4


specification.
G. Submit proof of certification for welders. Indicate certified procedures and position
each welder is qualified to perform. Provide documentation of the most recent weld
qualification test date and continuity of use in each process for which the welder or
welding operator is required.
H. Within 45 calendar days after manufacturing of all pipe, submit affidavit of

compliance that materials and work furnished comply with applicable requirements of
referenced standards and these specifications. Make available copy of physical and
chemical testing reports.
I. Within 45 days of manufacturing of all pipe, submit manufacturer’s affidavits that

coatings and linings comply with applicable requirements of this Section and:
1. Polyurethane coatings were applied in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendation applied and allowed to cure at temperature 5 degrees above
dew point.
2. Mortar coatings and linings were applied and allowed to cure at temperature
above 32 degrees F.
3. Test Results:
a. Compressive strength (7 and 28 day) test results for mortar coating.
b. Hydrostatic testing, magnetic particle and non-destructive weld test

reports as required.
J. Prior to start of field-applied cement mortar lining operation, submit comprehensive

plan which identifies and describes as minimum:
1. Equipment used for batching, weighing, mixing, transporting and placing

mortar.
2. Qualifications and specific experience of machine operators.
3. Source and type of cement, pozzolan, sand and admixtures used and
certifications from suppliers that materials meet specifications.
4. Mix proportions to be used and slump limits (max. and min.).
02518-5
5. A quality control plan which identifies quality control material tests and
documented inspections necessary to ensure compliance with specified
requirements.
K. Submit certification showing calibration within last 12 months for equipment such as
scales, measuring devices, and calibration tools used in manufacture of pipe. Each
device used in manufacture of pipe is required to have tag recording date of last
calibration. Devices are subject to inspection by Project Manager.
A. Provide pipe as the product from a single manufacturer who has had not less than five
(5) years successful experience manufacturing pipe, fittings and specials with
coatings and linings as specified. Pipe and fitting manufacturing operations shall be
performed at one location by the same manufacturer, unless otherwise approved by
Project Manager.
B. The manufacturer of pipe and fittings shall be certified either under SPFA or ISO
9001 quality certification program for steel pipe and accessory manufacturing.
C. Approved steel pipe manufacturers are as follows:
1. American SpiralWeld Pipe
2. Northwest Pipe
3. Thompson Pipe Group
4. Mid America Pipe
D. Manufacturer to provide permanent quality control department and laboratory facility

capable of performing inspections and testing as required by specifications. Material
testing, inspection procedures, and manufacturing process are subject to inspection by
Project Engineer. Perform manufacturer’s tests and inspections required by
referenced standards and these specifications, including the following. Correct
nonconforming conditions.
1. Steel Plate and Coils. Review mill certifications for conformance to

requirements of specifications; perform physical and chemical testing of each
heat of steel for conformance to applicable ASTM standards.
2. Pipe:
a. Inspect thickness, circumference, roundness, strength and size of seam

welds (spiral or longitudinal), and squareness of pipe ends to verify
compliance with AWWA C200.
(1) Pipe roundness to be within ± 1%.
02518-6
(2) Frequency of production weld tests in accordance with AWWA

C200 paragraph 4.10.4.6. Conduct weld tests at a maximum
interval of once per 3,000 feet of weld.
(3) Provide certified test reports for factory welds on fittings from
a certified welding inspector that may be in-house or third-
party.
b. Inspect physical dimensions and overall conditions of all joints for

compliance with AWWA C200, approved submittals, and
Specifications.
c. Hydrostatically test finished pipe section to 75 percent of specified

minimum yield strength of steel being used with zero leakage.
d. Perform Charpy V-Notch (CVN) Test in accordance with AWWA

C200.
3. Linings:
a. Inspect unlined pipe for overall condition of inside barrel. Maintain

inside barrel free of corrosive products, oil, grease, dirt, chemical, and
deleterious material.
b. Inspect lined pipe for physical dimensions and overall condition of

lining, visible surface defects, thickness of lining, and adhesion to steel
surface (for polyurethane or epoxy lining).
c. Review certifications by manufacturers of lining components for

conformance to AWWA standards and these Specifications.
4. Coatings: Measure temperature and dew point of ambient air before applying
coatings. Inspect physical dimensions and overall condition of coatings.
Inspect for visible surface defects, thickness, and adhesion of coating to
surface and between layers.
5. Gaskets: Randomly test rubber cord for diameter, tensile strength, elongation,
compression set, hardness, and specific gravity after oven aging on one out of
100 gaskets. Stretch test each gasket splice to twice its unstretched length and
inspect for defects.
6. Final Inspection:
a. Before shipment, inspect finished pipe, fittings, specials and

accessories for markings, metal, coating thickness, lining thickness (if
shop applied), joint dimensions, and roundness.
b. Inspect for coating placement and defects. Test exterior coating for
holidays.
02518-7
c. Inspect linings for thickness, pitting, scarring, and adhesion.
E. Shop-applied coatings and linings; provide services of qualified and certified coating
and lining in house inspector, outside inspection service, or testing laboratory with
qualified coating inspectors. Perform inspection by NACE trained inspectors under
supervision of NACE Level III Certified Coatings Inspector.
F. Ensure workmen engaged in manufacturing are qualified and experienced in

performance of their specific duties.
G. Cast four standard test cylinders each day for each 50 cubic yards of mortar coating
or portion thereof for each coating and lining placed in a day. Perform compressive
strength test at 28 days. No cylinder test result will be less than 80 percent of
specified strength.
H. Dented steel cylinders may result in rejection of pipe if it cannot be repaired per
AWWA C200 and to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.
I. Make available copy of physical and chemical testing reports for steel cylinders and
J. Check physical dimensions of pipe and fittings. Physical dimensions to include at

least pipe lengths, pipe I.D., pipe O.D. and bend angles.
K. Owner’s representative shall have access to the work as it is in preparation or

progress, and the pipe manufacturer shall provide proper facilities for access and for
inspection. Material, fabricated parts, and pipe, which are discovered to be defective,
or which do not conform to the requirements of this Section shall be subject to
rejection at any time prior to Owner’s representative final acceptance of the product.
L. Manufacturer’s Technician Required for Pipe Installation
1. During the construction period, the pipe manufacturer shall furnish the
services of a factory trained, qualified, job experienced technician to advise
and instruct the Contractor and Owner’s representative as necessary to assure
the proper handling, storage, joint assembly, lining and coating repair of the
pipe. The technician shall advise the Contractor in pipe laying operations and
shall instruct construction personnel in proper joint assembly and joint
inspection procedures. The technician shall be on-site full time during the first
two-weeks of pipe laying and thereafter as requested by the Owner’s
representative.
02518-8
2. The pipe manufacturer shall provide services of the coating manufacturer’s

qualified representative and a qualified representative from the heat shrink
sleeve manufacturer of a period of not less than two weeks at the beginning of
actual pipe laying operations to advise Contractor and Owner’s representative
regrading installation including handling and storage, cleaning, and
inspecting, coating repairs, field applied coating, heat shrink installation
procedures and general construction methods and how they may affect the
pipe coating.
3. The manufacturer’s representative shall be required to return if, in the opinion

of the Owner’s representative, the coating, lining, or the Contractor’s
construction methods do not comply with the Contract Documents.
A. Project Manager may witness manufacture and fabrication of pipe and appurtenances.
Independent testing laboratory under contract to Project Manager may perform tests
at direction of Project Manager to verify compliance with these specifications.
Provide assistance to accomplish such testing, including equipment and personnel, at
no additional cost to City.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STEEL PIPE
A. Furnish pipe, fittings, coating and linings all by one manufacturer and produced in
one facility. Do not ship over salt water.
B. Furnish pipe smaller than 24-inch in accordance with Section 02502 - Steel Pipe and
Fittings.
C. Fabricate and supply miscellaneous steel pipe and fittings in accordance with AWWA
C200, AWWA C207, AWWA C208, AWWA M11 and ASME BPVC except as
modified herein. Steel to be minimum of ASTM A 36, ASTM 1018 Grade 36, ASTM
A 53 Grade B, ASTM A 135 Grade B, ASTM A1011 or ASTM A 139 Grade B.
D. Provide pipe sections in lengths no greater than 50 feet and no less than 20 feet except
as required for special fittings or closure sections.
E. Provide shop-coated and shop-lined steel pipe with minimum of one coat of shop-
applied primer approved for use in potable water transmission on all exposed steel
surfaces. Provide primer compatible with coating system and in accordance with
coating manufacturer’s recommendations.
F. Provide closure sections and short sections of steel pipe not less than 4 feet in length
unless indicated on Drawings or specifically permitted by Project Manager.
02518-9
G. Square flanges with pipe with bolt holes straddling both horizontal and vertical axis.
Provide 1/2-inch gap between pipe ends to be coupled with sleeve coupling unless
1. Provide standard ring flanges, conforming to AWWA C207, Class D.
2. Apply Denso petroleum-based tape or approved equal to exposed portions of

nuts and bolts.
H. Pipe Design Conditions:
1. Design: Design pipe and fittings to withstand most critical simultaneous

application of external loads and internal pressures. Base design on minimum
of AASHTO HL-93 loading or AREMA E-80 loads as appropriate and depths
of bury as indicated on Drawings. Design pipes with Marston’s earth loads for
transition width trench for all heights of cover.
2. Groundwater Level: Design for most critical ground water level condition.
3. Working pressure = 150 psi.
4. Hydrostatic field test pressure = 150 psi.
5. Maximum total pressure due to surge = 225 psi.
6. Minimum pressure due to surge = -5 psi.
7. Modulus of elasticity (E) = 30,000,000 psi.
8. Maximum deflection from specified diameter: Two (2) percent for mortar
coating; three percent for flexible coatings and three percent for mortar lining.
9. Design stress due to working pressure to be no greater than 50 percent of

minimum yield, and stress not to exceed 18,000 psi for mortar coated pipe.
10. Design stress due to maximum hydraulic surge pressure to be no greater than
75 percent of minimum yield, and stress not to exceed 27,000 psi for mortar
coated pipe.
11. Modulus of soil reaction (E') < 1500 psi. If E' > 1000 psi, do not use silty sand
(SM) for embedment.
12. Unit weight of fill (w) > 120 pcf.
13. Deflection lag factor (D1) = 1.2.
15. Fully saturated soil conditions: hw = h = depth of cover above top of pipe.
02518-10
16. Do not allow diameter (D) over thickness (t) ratio to be greater than 230.
17. Provide minimum inside clear diameter for tunnel liners or casing in
accordance with Section 02425LD- Tunnel Excavation and Primary Liner.
18. Exclude structural benefits associated with primary liner in design of pipe in
tunnel installations.
a. Design pipe and joints to carry loads including overburden and lateral
earth pressures, subsurface soil and water loads, grouting, other
conditions of service, thrust of jacks, and stresses anticipated during
handling and construction loads during installation of pipe.
b. Do not use internal removable stiffeners for pipe in tunnel, unless

c. External welded steel stiffeners will be permitted in design

calculations for steel pipe, provided wall thickness is minimum of 1/2-
inch. Minimum clearances specified between exterior pipe wall and
tunnel liner applies to distance between outside diameter of external
welded stiffener and tunnel liner.
19. Nominal Allowable Steel-wall Thickness for Water Lines: Provide in

accordance with following table for HL-93 live loads and depths of cover of
up to 16 feet. Net internal diameter (including inside linings) to be no less
than net inside diameter listed. Contractor to review design for conditions
more extreme than those indicated by this specification and design
accordingly. Submittal of design calculations will be required for review. Pipe
wall not to be less than that defined in following table.
02518-11
Net Inside Diameter Minimum Wall Thickness (Inches)

(Inches) Flexible Coating Mortar Coating
108 0.500 N/A
102 0.500 N/A
96 0.484 0.464
90 0.454 0.430
84 0.423 0.395
78 0.393 0.359
72 0.362 0.320
66 0.333 0.295
60 0.301 0.268
54 0.271 0.250
48 0.235 0.215
42 0.207 0.189
36 0.178 0.163
30 0.149 0.136
24 0.149 0.136
I. Fittings for Water Lines: Fabricate in accordance with AWWA M11, and AWWA
C208.
1. Wall Thickness: Equal to or greater than pipe to which fitting is to be welded.
2. Elbows: 2-piece for 0 degrees to 22-1/2 degrees; 3-piece for 23 degrees to 45

degrees; 4-piece for 46 degrees to 67-1/2 degrees; and 5-piece for 68 degrees
to 90 degrees, unless otherwise shown on Drawings. Radius: Minimum radius
of two and one-half times pipe diameter unless otherwise approved by Project
Manager.
3. Outlets: Reinforced in accordance with AWWA M11, Chapter 9, AWWA

C200, and AWWA C208. Provide interior lining and exterior coating in
accordance with paragraphs on coating and lining and matching pipe to access
inlets, service outlets, test inlets, and air-vacuum valve and other outlets,
including riser pipes.
02518-12
4. Butt Straps for Closure Piece: Minimum 12-inch-wide split butt strap;
using material listed in Paragraph 2.01.C to thinnest member being joined.
Provide minimum lap of 4 inches between member being joined and edge of
butt strap, welded on both inside and outside, unless otherwise approved by
Project Manager. Provide minimum 6-inch welded outlet for inspecting each
closure section, unless access manway is within 40 feet of closure section.
5. Reducers: Provide in accordance with AWWA M11 and AWWA C208.
6. Dished Head Plugs: Design in accordance with AWWA M11, latest edition.
Design to withstand field hydrostatic test pressure from either side of plug.
The allowable design stress shall be equal to 50 percent of the minimum
specified yield strength of the head material, or 18,000 psi, whichever is less.
Pipe on opposite side of hydrostatic test may or may not contain water.
J. Joints:
1. Standard field joint for steel pipe: AWWA M11 and AWWA C200. Rubber
gasket Carnegie shape joint or rolled-groove rubber gasket and O-ring joint, in
accordance with Contract Drawings, 66-inch maximum diameter. Joints may
be lap-welded slip type in accordance with AWWA C200, except where
flanged joints or butt strap joints are required.
2. Provide welded butt joints on above-ground piping, tee fitting supported on

pier foundation, field welds for risers including vertical portion of crossover
piping, and where noted on Drawings.
3. Pipe Manufacturer: Minimum of 5 years of successful service with proposed

rubber gasket field joint and submit results from joint tests. Tests which may
be required include tensile strength or yield tests of base material and spiral
welded sections, flattening tests, chemical analysis, impact and hardness tests.
Project Manager’s decision as to acceptability of joint is final.
4. Pipe installed via tunnel to be capable of withstanding jacking forces.
5. Design restrained joints for test pressure or maximum surge pressure as

specified, whichever is greater. Only minimum restrained joint lengths for
prestressed concrete cylinder pipe are shown on Drawings.
6. Provide full circumferential welds at joints required to be welded.
7. Rubber Gasketed Bell-and-Spigot Joints.
02518-13
8. Bells: Formed by either expansion of pipe end, which stretches steel past its
elastic limit, or by attaching sized weld-on bell rings. Spigot ends: Sized prior
to rolling gasket groove. Joints: Interchangeable and match up during
installation, even if used out of sequence. Weld-on bell rings: AWWA M11;
AWWA C200; attached with single or double, full thickness fillet welds
(double weld in areas of thrust restraint).
9. Provide bells and spigots with dimensions and tolerances in accordance with
AWWA C200, as modified herein. Difference in diameter between I.D. of bell
and O.D. of spigot shoulder at point of full engagement with allowable
deflection range of 0.00 inch to 0.04 inch as measured on circumference with
diameter tape. Minimum thickness of completed bell ring is equal to thickness
of pipe wall in barrel of pipe between joint ends.
a. Furnish joint suitable for safe working pressure equal to class of pipe
and will operate satisfactorily with deflection, tangent of which is not
to exceed 3/4-inch/D where D is outside diameter of pipe in inches or
with pull-out of 3/4-inch.
b. Design clearance between bells and gasketed spigots so, when joint is
assembled, it will be self-centered and gasket will be restrained or
confined to annular space in such manner that movement of pipe or
hydrostatic pressure cannot displace it. Compression of gasket when
joint is completed will not be dependent upon water pressure in pipe
and will provide watertight joints under operating conditions when
properly installed.
c. Use of an expanded bell with a Carnegie-style spigot is not allowed.
K. Contractor must maintain on site or in plant enough fittings to satisfy the following
requirements:
Line Diameter Required Bends*

20 and 24 inches Four 45-degree bends per 5,000 LF of water line
> 24 inches Four 22.5-degree bends per 10,000 LF of water line
*Based on total length of contract (minimum of four). Any combination of bends
may be substituted at manufacturer’s option (i.e. two 22.5-degree bends are
equivalent to one 45-degree bend) and will be counted as one fitting.
L. Contractor must be capable of delivering bends to job site within 48 hours of

notification. Use fittings at direction of Project Manager where unforeseen obstacles
are encountered during construction. These fittings are in addition to fittings called
out on Drawings and must be available at all times. Use same product throughout
entire project.
02518-14
M. Perform x-ray, ultrasonic, magnetic particle, or dye penetrant testing per AWWA
C200 of manual welds on special pipe and fittings.
N. Hydrostatic Test of Pipe:
1. AWWA C200, paragraph 5.2.1, at point of manufacture. Hold test pressure for
minimum 2 minutes and conduct thorough inspection of entire weld length on
pipe. Repair or reject pipe revealing leaks or cracks.
2. Calibrate pressure gauges within one year prior to testing as specified in

Section 1.05 K.
O. Provide forged steel threaded outlets of approved design where required for use in
passing hose or lead wires into pipe. Tap plugs with standard pipe threads and weld to
pipe in approved manner and use solid forged steel plugs for closure.
P. Flanges:
1. Conform to requirements of Section 02511 – Water Lines.
Q. Make curves and bends by deflecting joints, or by using mitered joints, or by

combination of two methods, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or permitted by
Project Manager. Do not exceed deflection or joint offset angle at joint as
recommended by pipe manufacturer. Make penetration of spigot into bell at all points
of circumference at least equal to minimum required penetration shown on Drawings.
Mitered pipe sections used in curved alignment to be of standard length except when
shorter sections are required to limit radius of curvature, in which case all sections
throughout curve are to be of equal length. Do not allow miter to exceed 5 degrees.
2.02 INTERNAL LINING SYSTEMS FOR STEEL PIPE, ALL INSTALLATIONS
A. Supply steel pipe with cement-mortar lining, capable of conveying water at

temperatures up to 140 degrees F.
B. For all exposed (wetted) steel parts of flanges, blind flanges, bolts, access manhole
covers, provide epoxy or polyurethane lining, as specified, unless otherwise noted or
that may interfere with sealing surfaces.
C. Provide linings conforming to American National Standards Institute/National

Sanitation Foundation (NSF/ANSI) Standard 61, and certification to be from
organization accredited by ANSI.
D. Epoxy Lining:
1. AWWA C210, color White or Off-White, or approved equal otherwise

approved by Project Manager. To be applied in factory. Perform field repairs
in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Submit field repair
procedures to Project Manager for review. Provide materials from same
manufacturer.
02518-15
a. Protect interior surface with liquid two-part chemically cured epoxy

coating specified for interior surfaces.
Surface Preparation SSPC-SP10

Near White Blast Clean surface profile.
Finish Coat AWWA C210. Provide Devoe Bar- Rust
233H or approved equal
2. Provide dry film thicknesses (DFT) in accordance with product’s

manufacturer recommendations. Do not exceed maximum DFT as
recommended by manufacturer.
3. Factory testing: In accordance with AWWA C210.
E. Shop-applied Cement-mortar Lining (for pipe s 120 inches in diameter):
1. AWWA C205; except as specified herein: 3/4-inch minimum thickness for

pipe diameters 96-inches and larger, 1/2-inch minimum thickness for pipe
diameters 42 inches to 84-inch; 3/8-inch minimum thickness for pipe
diameters 36 inches and smaller. Cut back lining from joint ends no more than
2 inches to facilitate joining and welding of pipe.
2. Apply cement-mortar lining to inside of pipe by centrifugally spinning. For

special sections (shape of which precludes application by spinning method)
accomplish by mechanical placement or pneumatic placement and finish to
produce smooth, dense surface comparable to centrifugally spinning.
3. Use galvanized wire mesh when shop-applied mortar is not applied by

machine. Do not extend wire mesh across welded portion of mitered fittings.
Crimp mesh to provide integral “chair” so wire does not fully rest against steel
cylinder.
4. Make repairs of cement-mortar lining for widths exceeding 6 inches by

bonding to steel and adjacent faces of lining with bonding agent conforming
to ASTM C 881, Type II.
5. Restrict usage of sprinkler heads during moist curing to prevent over-spraying

onto lining. No alternative curing methods are allowed.
6. Satisfy Project Manager that above requirements can be accomplished by

manufacturer prior to shipment of pipe.
F. Field-applied Cement-mortar Lining (for pipe > 48 inches in diameter): Provide field-
applied internal cement-mortar linings in accordance with AWWA C602, latest
edition, except as modified in this Section.
02518-16
1. Lining: Applied in one-course application of cement-mortar by machine that

centrifugally places mortar against wall of pipe and mechanically trowel
lining to smooth finish.
2. Steel pipe, fittings, receive cement-mortar lining.
3. Cement-mortar for Lining.
a. Cement-mortar: Dense, smooth, and of uniform quality and

consistency to assure efficient machine operation and uniform cement-
mortar lining on pipe wall.
b. Water-cement Ratio: Kept as low as possible; consistent with proper

plasticity for application, allowing slight variations dependent upon
temperature, length of haul for mortar, and moisture condition in pipe.
c. Mortar: Mixture of one part cement with not less than one or more
than 1-1/2 parts of dry screened sand, by volume. After determining
mixture, control materials to within plus or minus 2-1/2 percent by
weight throughout entire work.
d. Comply with following materials for cement-mortar:
(1) Provide Type II low-alkali Portland cement conforming to

ASTM C 150, or Type IP (MS) Portland-Pozzolan cement
conforming to ASTM C 595, unless otherwise specified.
Conform to low alkali requirements of Table IA of ASTM C
150. Type IP (MS) cement to contain no more than 20 percent
Pozzolan, to be inter-ground with clinker.
(2) Use suitable facilities approved by Project Manager when

available for handling and weighing bulk cement. Otherwise,
deliver cement in original unopened sacks that have been filled
by manufacturer. Plainly mark sacks with manufacturer’s name
or brand, cement type lot number and weight. Discard unused
cement. Use unopened bags of cement for each new batch.
(3) Material Storage: Store cement to permit ready access for

inspection and sampling. Protect cement and sand against
contamination or moisture. Do not use and remove from site
cement delivered with evidence of contamination or otherwise
unsuitable. Store admixtures in accordance with
manufacturer’s directions.
(4) Use Portland cement of same brand and type unless otherwise
(5) Pozzolanic Material: AWWA C602, Paragraph 4.3.3.
02518-17
(6) Sand: AWWA C205, paragraph 4.2.3, except gradation of sand

to yield fineness modulus of approximately 1.7; having no
material coarser than that passing No. 16 sieve. Submit
certification for compliance of sand with these specifications at
least 10 calendar days before start of lining placement.
(7) Water: Clean; free of deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis or

organic materials; total dissolved solids less than 1000 mg/l;
ASTM D 512 chloride ions less than 100 mg/l for slurry and
mortar cure; ASTM D 1293 pH greater than 6.5.
2.03 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR STEEL PIPE INSTALLED ABOVE-

GROUND AND IN VAULTS (EXPOSED)
A. Provide approved epoxy and polyurethane coating system as designated below.

Materials provided shall be from same manufacturer.
Surface Preparation SSPC SP 10

Near White Blast Clean
surface profile as recommended by
manufacturer
Intermediate Coat Chemical Resistant Epoxy, or approved
equal
DFT as recommended by manufacturer
Finish Coat Polyurethane, or approved equal

DFT as recommended by manufacturer
B. Total Allowable Dry Film Thickness for System: as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Factory testing: In accordance with AWWA C210.
2.04 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEMS FOR BURIED STEEL PIPE
A. Supply pipe with one of the following coatings:
1. Tape Coating: Conform to requirements of Section 02529 – Tape Coatings on

Steel Pipe.
2. Cement-mortar Coating: For 84-inch diameter and smaller unless otherwise

shown on Contract Drawings. AWWA C205; shop-applied, cement-mortar
coating except as modified in this Section; 1-inch minimum thickness; cut
back coating from joint ends no more than 2 inches to facilitate joining and
welding of pipe.
3. Polyurethane Coating: See Section 02527 - Polyurethane Coatings on Steel or

Ductile Iron Pipe for requirements for use of polyurethane coating system.
02518-18
B. Heat Shrink Joint Sleeves for Tape and Polyurethane Coating: Provide heat shrink,
cross-linked polyolefin wrap or sleeve with a mastic sealant, suitable for pipeline
operating temperature, in accordance with AWWA C216. Provide Aqua-Shield by
Canusa-CPS, Covalence by Seal for Life, or approved equal. Where weld-after-
backfill procedures are used, conform to manufacturer’s recommendations for
installation.
C. Provide shop-applied primer on coating holdback areas at joint in accordance with

Article 2.03 above.
2.05 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR STEEL PIPE IN TUNNEL, CASING
A. Provide exterior coating system of pipe in tunnel, without annular grout, a minimum
of 50 mils of polyurethane coating in accordance with Section 02527 - Polyurethane
Coatings for Steel or Ductile Iron Pipe.
B. For water lines in tunnel where annular grout will be used, shop coat external surfaces
of steel pipe with epoxy in accordance with Article 2.03 of this Section, or
polyurethane in accordance with Section 02527 – Polyurethane Coatings for Steel or
Ductile Iron Pipe.
C. If mortar bands are used to support pipe inside tunnel liner or casing, provide mortar
coating with mortar bands integrated into mortar coating. If connecting pipe on each
side of tunnel has tape or polyurethane coating, provide epoxy or polyurethane under
mortar coating throughout pipe inside tunnel liner or casing.
2.06 GROUT FOR JOINTS AND SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Cement Grout Mixture: One part cement to two parts of fine, sharp, clean sand. Mix
interior joint mortar with as little water as possible until very stiff but workable. Mix
exterior joint mortar with water until it has consistency of thick cream. Mix cement
grout to specific gravity of 19 lb/gallon or greater as measured by grout/slurry
balance. Use balance manufactured grout/slurry by Baroid or approved equal.
Perform test in presence of and at request of Project Manager. Add additional cement
grout or water to mixed cement grout to bring mix to proper moisture content or
specific gravity. Discard cement grout that has been mixed more than 20 minutes and
is not at proper specific gravity or moisture content.
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. Provide one type of cement for
entire project.
2. Sand:
a. Interior Joints: ASTM C 35 fine graded plaster sand.
b. Exterior Joints: ASTM C 33; natural sand with 100 percent passing
No. 16 sieve.
3. Water:
02518-19
a. Potable water with total dissolved solids less than 1000 mg/l;
b. ASTM D 512 chloride ions less than 100 mg/l for slurry and mortar
cure;
c. ASTM D 1293 pH greater than 6.5.
d. Use potable water with 250 ppm limit on chlorides and sulfates.
B. Provide approved Non-shrink Grout for Special Applications, Patches and Repairs.

control, suitable for use in joints of prestressed concrete cylinder pipe.
3. Contain non-metallic natural aggregate and be nonstaining and noncorrosive.
4. Meeting NSF/ANSI 61 Standard suitable for use in contact with potable water
supply.
5. Compressive Strength: ASTM C 1107, 2,500 psi minimum 7-day unconfined;

5,000 psi minimum 28-day unconfined.
7. Contain no chlorides or additives which may contribute to corrosion of steel

pipe.
10. Mix, place, and cure in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and
recommendations. Upon 72 hours notice, provide services of qualified
representative of non-shrink grout manufacturer to aid in assuring proper use
of product under job conditions. Representative to be on site when product is
first used.
11. Mix cement grout to specific gravity of 17.7 lb/gallon or greater as measured
by grout/slurry balance. Use balance manufactured grout/slurry by Baroid or
approved equal. Perform test in presence of and at request of Project Manager.
Add additional cement grout to mixed cement grout or water to bring mix to
proper moisture content or specific gravity. Discard cement grout that has
been mixed more than 20 minutes and is not at proper specific gravity or
moisture content.
12. Compressive Strength: ASTM C 1107, 2,500 psi minimum 7-day unconfined;
5,000 psi minimum 28-day unconfined.
02518-20
No. 16 Carborundum stone. Rub joint mortar sufficiently to bring paste to surface, to
D. Joint Wrapper: Minimum width of 9-inches for 33-inch diameter and smaller;
minimum width of 12-inches for diameters greater than 33-inch hemmed at edge to
allow threading with minimum 5/8-inch-wide steel strap. Provide minimum 6-inch-
wide Ethafoam strip sized, positioned, and sewn such that two circumferential edges
of Ethafoam are 1-1/2-inches from outer edge of wrapper.
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Conform to applicable provisions of Section 02511 - Water Lines, except as modified

in this Section.
B. Comply with following:
1. Make available services of manufacturer’s representative when deemed

necessary by Project Manager. Representative to advise in aspects of
installation, including but not limited to handling and storing, cleaning and
inspecting, coating and lining repair, and general construction methods as
applicable to pipe.
2. Handling and Storage: Install padded struts or stulls prior to shipping,

horizontally and vertically, as proposed by manufacturer and approved by
Project Manager. Spiders: Installed in joint ends of fittings. Stulls to remain in
place, horizontally and vertically positioned under following conditions:
a. During storage and shipping.
b. Until welding is complete.
3. Install stulls prior to placement of pipe, bends, and fittings to prevent

deflection during installation. Provide stulls consisting of timber struts with
end blocks shaped to fit curvature of interior surface of pipe or other
appropriate configuration and material. Firmly edge and secure stulls to
blocks so that they will remain intact position during handling and installation.
Provide stulls adequate to resist handling loads encountered without structural
failure to stull members or damage to pipe. Repair and or reject and remove
from site pipe that arrives at site with defects in lining, including sand
pockets, voids, and oversanded areas. Repairs must be made to the satisfaction
of the Project Manager to be accepted.
02518-21
4. Store pipe at job site with securely fastened plastic endcaps to maintain moist
pipe interior. Promptly replace damaged endcaps to avoid shrinkage or
cracking of cement-mortar lining.
5. Immediately replace damaged plastic end caps. Do not leave uncapped for
more than 4 hours.
6. Bedding and Backfilling:
a. Conform to requirements of Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill

for Utilities.
b. Align pipe at proper grade prior to joint connection and do not shift
after jointing operation has been completed.
c. Take necessary precautions during bedding and backfilling operations

to prevent deformation or deflection of cylindrical shape of pipe by
more than allowable pipe deflection. Do not move trench support
system (trench safety system) once bedding material is compacted.
d. Excavate outside specified trench section for bell holes, and for spaces
sufficient to permit removal of slings. Provide bell holes at proper
locations for unrestricted access to joint. Form bell holes large enough
to facilitate joint wrapping and to permit visual examination of
process. Enlargement of bell holes as required or directed by Project
Manager. Subsequent backfilling thereof will not be considered as
authorized additional excavation and backfill. Backfill bell holes and
spaces to satisfaction of Project Manager.
e. Blocking may be removed 24 hours after placing backfill to top of

pavement or natural ground level.
7. Pipe Deflection: After backfill is complete, test pipe for excessive deflection
by measuring actual inside vertical diameter. For maximum deflection
allowable, see Article 2.01.
a. Deflection may be measured by Project Manager at location along

pipe. Arithmetical averages of deflection are not acceptable.
b. If deflection exceeds that specified, contractor shall do one of the

following:
(1) Remove backfill and side support. Reround the pipe and
properly replace compacted backfill and side support. Review
cement mortar lining to assure that no harmful damage has
occurred.
02518-22
(2) Remove entire portion of deflected pipe section and install new
pipe as directed by Project Manager at no additional cost to
City.
8. Move pipe in such manner not to damage pipe or coating. Do not roll pipe nor
drag on ground. Use a minimum of two wide non-abrasive slings or belts to
lift and lower pipe. Handle pipe using a spreader bar. Provide adequate
spacing of pipe supports to prevent cracking or damage to lining or coating.
Inspect and repair coating abrasions before pipe is lowered into trench.
9. Use of dogs, clips, lugs, or equivalent devices welded to steel pipe for purpose
of forcing it into position will not be permitted unless approved by Project
Manager. Remove foreign matter and protective material from surfaces that
are to be in contact at joints. Leave surfaces of joint areas thoroughly clean for
metal-to-metal contact of field joints.
C. Static Electricity:

D. Use adequate surveying methods, procedures and employ competent surveying

tolerances. Measure and record, in form approved by Project Manager, and submit
copy of data to Project Manager at end of that day. Survey data to include unique pipe
number, deflection or offset angle at pipe joint and whether beveled ends were used,
invert elevation at pipe joint, deviation of joint from project line, deviation of joint
from project grade, inside pipe joint lap measured at top, bottom, and at springline
(each side).
E. Any time that laying of additional pipe is stopped for more than eight hours, plug
ends of installed pipe and take proper precautions against flotation of pipe segments.
3.02 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR STEEL PIPE INSTALLED ABOVE

GROUND AND IN VAULTS (EXPOSED) AND EPOXY INTERNAL LINING
SYSTEM
A. Safety: Paints, coatings, and linings specified in this Section are hazardous materials.
Vapors may be toxic or explosive. Protective equipment, approved by appropriate
regulatory agency, is mandatory for personnel involved in painting, coating, and
lining operations.
B. Workmanship:
1. Application: By qualified and experienced workers who are knowledgeable in

surface preparation and application of high-performance industrial coatings.
02518-23
2. Paint Application Procedures: SSPC Good Painting Practices, Volume 1.
C. Surface Preparation:
1. Use abrasive blasting to prepare surfaces.
2. Schedule cleaning and painting so that detrimental amounts of dust or other

contaminants do not fall on wet, newly-painted surfaces. Protect surfaces not
intended to be painted from effects of cleaning and painting operations.
3. Prior to blasting, clean surfaces to be coated or lined of grease, oil and dirt by
steaming or detergent cleaning in accordance with SSPC SP 1.
4. Metal and Weld Preparation: Remove surface defects such as gouges, pits,
welding and torch-cut slag, welding flux and spatter by grinding to 1/4-inch
minimum radius.
5. Abrasive Material:
a. Blast only as much steel as can be coated within same day of blasting.
b. Use sharp, angular, properly graded abrasive capable of producing

depth of profile specified herein. Transport abrasive to jobsite in
moisture-proof bags or airtight bulk containers. Copper slag abrasives
are not acceptable.
c. After abrasive blast cleaning, verify surface profile with replica tape
such as Tes-Tex Coarse or Extra Coarse Press-O-Film Tape, or
approved equal. Furnish tapes to Project Manager.
d. Do not blast if metal surface may become wet before priming

commences, or when metal surface is less than 5 degrees F above dew
point.
6. Evaluate degree of cleanliness for surface preparation with use of SSPC

Pictorial Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel Surfaces, SSPC- Vis
1.
7. Remove dust and abrasive residue from freshly blasted surfaces by brushing
or blowing with clean, dry air. Test cleanliness by placing 3/4-inch by 4-inch
piece of clear Scotch-type tape on blasted surface, then removing and placing
tape on 3x5 white index card. Reclean areas exhibiting dust or residue.
D. Coating and Lining Application:
02518-24
1. Environmental Conditions: Do not apply when metal temperature is less than

50 degrees F; when ambient temperature is less than 5 degrees F above dew
point; when expected weather conditions are such that ambient temperature
will drop below 40 degrees F within 6 hours after application; or when
relative humidity is above 85 percent. Measure relative humidity and dew
point by use of sling psychrometer or similar in conjunction with U.S.
Department of Commerce Weather Bureau Psychometric Tables. Provide
dehumidifiers for field-applied coatings and linings to maintain proper
humidity levels.
2. Application Procedures:
a. Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and

requirements of this Section. Provide finish free of runs, sags, curtains,
pinholes, orange peel, fish eyes, excessive overspray, or
delaminations.
b. Thin materials only with manufacturer’s recommended thinners. Thin

only amount required to adjust viscosity for temperature variations,
proper atomization and flow-out. Mix material components using
mechanical mixers.
c. Discard catalyzed materials remaining at end of day.
3. Thoroughly dry pipe before primer is applied. Apply primer immediately after
cleaning surface. Apply succeeding coats before contamination of
undersurface occurs.
4. Cure minimum of 24 hours at 77 degrees F before successive coats are

applied. During curing process, provide forced-air ventilation in volume
sufficient to maintain solvent vapor levels below published threshold limit
value. Apply successive coats within recoat threshold time as recommended
by coating or lining manufacturer on printed technical data sheets or through
written communications. Brush blast joints of pipe which have been shop
primed and are to receive intermediate and finish coats in field prior to
application of additional coats. After interior coats are applied, provide
forced-air ventilation in sufficient volume and for sufficient length of time to
ensure proper curing before filling pipe with water.
3.03 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR BURIED STEEL PIPE
A. Polyurethane Coating System:
1. Conform to requirements of Section 02527 – Polyurethane Coatings for Steel

or Ductile Iron Pipe.
B. Tape Coating System:
02518-25
1. Conform to requirements of Specification Section 02529 – Tape Coatings on

Steel Pipe.
2. Heat Shrink Joint Sleeves:
a. Provide field-applied shrink-wrap coating system for coating field

joints, tie-ins and other field welded joints. Apply heat-shrink sleeves
prior to internal welding of pipe using approved procedure compatible
with coating system. Install heat-shrink joint sleeves in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations. Provide services of technical
representative of manufacturer available on site at beginning of pipe
laying operations. Representative to advise Contractor and Project
Manager regarding installation, repairs, and general construction
methods.
3. Do not expose tape coatings or heat-shrink joint sleeves to harmful ultraviolet

light for longer than recommended by the coating manufacturer.
4. At option of Project Manager, coating system and application may be tested

and inspected.
A. Rubber Gasketed Bell-and-Spigot Joints:
1. Use O-ring gasket with sufficient volume to approximately fill area of groove
and gasket material in accordance with AWWA C200. Check each splice in
gasket by stretching gasket to at least twice original length of gasket. Visually
check stretched splice by rotating 360 degrees. Reject splices showing visible
separation or cracks.
2. Equalize rubber gasket cross section after rubber gasket is placed in spigot
groove of pipe by inserting tool or bar such as large screwdriver under rubber
gasket and moving it around periphery of pipe spigot. Lubricate gaskets with
nontoxic water-soluble lubricant before pipe units are joined. Fit pipes
together in manner to avoid twisting or otherwise displacing or damaging
rubber gasket. Check gaskets after pipe sections are joined with feeler gauge
to ensure that no displacement of gasket has occurred at point around circum-
ference after joining. If displacement has occurred, remove pipe section and
remake joint as if for new pipe. Remove old gasket and replace before
remaking joint.
B. Welded Joints:
1. For welded lap joints, conform to requirements of Section 02511 - Water

Lines.
2. Butt joints to be complete penetration for entire circumference.
02518-26
C. Flanged Joints: Conform to requirements of Section 02511 - Water Lines.
D. Joint Grouting and Testing: Conform to requirements of Section 02511 - Water Lines.
E. Do not allow steel plugs for threaded outlets to project beyond inner surface of pipe
shell and seal weld by at least two passes. Apply weld around outside of plug after it
has been inserted in final position. Coat outlets and plugs inside and outside as
required at field joints on pipe.
3.05 FIELD-APPLIED CEMENT-MORTAR LINING
A. Entrances Into Pipeline:
1. Establish means to permit entry and exit of labor, materials and equipment
necessary for progress of work, as approved by Project Manager.
2. Provide dikes and channeling for diversion of flood and drainage waters away
from these openings in pipeline. Use temporary airtight covers over openings
to provide proper curing conditions in completed sections of lined pipe.
Where operation of equipment requires that end of pipe be left open, install
temporary bulkhead inside pipe to eliminate direct draft through pipe over
completed sections.
3. Brace closure sections of pipeline left out to facilitate field lining above
ground to conform as nearly as possible to shape of pipe in ground and then
place cement-mortar lining by machine or hand trowel to same thickness as in
adjoining machine-lined sections. Bulkhead sections immediately after being
lined to maintain proper curing conditions for period of not less than 48 hours
before sections are installed in pipeline. Install these sections of steel pipe.
4. Coat exterior surface of buttstraps and uncoated exterior surface area of steel
pipe within excavations in accordance with specifications. Place cement-
mortar lining inside areas of joints in accordance with specifications.
B. Mixing of Cement-mortar: Mix ingredients for cement-mortar for not less than 90
seconds and not more than 6 minutes; use mortar promptly after mixing for lining
pipe. Do not use mortar that has attained its initial set for lining. Do not retemper
mortar. Add water to mix last.
C. Placing Cement-mortar Lining:
1. Complete joint work, backfill and welding before cement-mortar lining

begins. After cement-mortar lining has cured, hydrostatic testing of pipe can
begin.
2. Provide provisions necessary for Project Manager to conduct inspections of

work in safe and thorough manner during and after initial application of
mortar and after necessary repairs made. Include, as minimum, space on
application machine, and adequate lighting to inspect gross surface areas.
02518-27
3. Comply with ASTM C 494 and with manufacturer’s recommendations when

using chemical admixtures, bonding agents, accelerators, and other additives.
4. Remove dirt, debris, oil, grease and loose mill scale and rust from interior
surfaces of pipe, and scrape or brush surface with stiff bristle brush and/or
water blast as may be necessary, and approved by Project Manager, to ensure
clean surfaces for successful application of cement-mortar lining. Interior
surfaces to be approved by Project Manager prior to placing lining.
5. Provide cement-mortar lining uniform in thickness along entire length of pipe.

Provide cement-mortar no less than 1/2-inch over all surfaces with tolerance
of plus 1/8-inch, and no allowance for minus tolerance.
6. Mechanically control travel of machine and rates of discharge of mortar to

produce uniform thickness of lining without segregation around perimeter and
along length of pipe.
7. Check finished surface by placing 12-inch straightedge parallel to axis of pipe

along surface of straight section of lining. At no point will space between
lined surface and straightedge be greater than 1/16-inch.
8. Provide smooth finished surface, within tolerances specified. Repair or

replace surface irregularities including corrugations, ripples, or pits in any
direction, to satisfaction of Project Manager. Remove defective lining
material, including sand pockets, voids, oversanded areas, blisters,
delaminations, or unbounded areas, cracked areas, irregular surfaces, and
unsatisfactory thin spots. Remove to pipe wall and area repaired to full
thickness of mortar lining.
9. Repair cracks 1/16-inch and larger to satisfaction of Project Manager.
10. Place cement-mortar lining by machine having following features:
a. An applicator head which can be centered within pipe and which will
centrifugally project mortar against wall of pipe at high velocity
producing dense, uniformly distributed mortar on wall of pipe.
b. Equipped with mechanically driven, rotating steel trowels that

immediately follow applicator, providing smooth, hard surface without
spiral shoulders. Compensate for torque so that machine will sit true in
pipe and trowel faces will not vary in angle with mortar face during
complete 360-degree cycle. Clean trowels at frequent intervals to
prevent accumulated mortar from obtaining initial set resulting in
sanded or unglazed finish. Continuously operate trowels during
application of cement-mortar and forward progress of lining machine.
02518-28
c. Design applicator so that nothing will come in contact with troweled

surface until it has attained final set, and so that forward progress of
machine and mechanical placing of mortar can be controlled to assure
uniform thickness of lining.
11. Immediately prior to application of cement-mortar lining, sweep and clean off
slime, dirt, loose rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign materials. Free
interior surface of pipe after cleaning of accumulated water on pipe wall or at
joints.
12. Cement-mortar Lining: Adhere to steel at all points; provide consistent

thickness except that lining of bell end of pipe where lining is to be thicker in
order to fill depression and make smooth surface.
13. After receiving its finish troweling, do not roughen lining by rebound material
or by mortar direct from machine.
14. Temporarily close outlets in pipeline with easily removable stoppers to

prevent spun mortar from being thrown into such openings. After lining is
applied, remove stoppers from outlets and repair lining damaged by removal
of stoppers. Point outlet openings up to provide smooth flow.
D. Hand Finishing:
1. Repair defective areas in machine-applied lining and unlined joints by hand

patching to yield lining equal to that required for machine-applied troweled
lining.
2. Provide non-shrink grout for patching or lining joints as specified in this

Section.
3. Clean defective areas of loose foreign material and moisten with water just
prior to application of hand-applied mortar.
4. Use steel finishing trowels for hand application of cement-mortar.
5. Complete hand finishing required in given pipe section not later than day
following machine application of mortar lining to that particular pipe section,
whether normal working day or otherwise. Slow down or stop machine
application of mortar lining to allow time for hand patching.
E. Curing of Lining: Begin curing operations immediately after completing any portion
of mortar lining. Close pipe by airtight bulkheads, and maintain moist atmosphere in
completed section of pipe to keep lining damp and to prevent evaporation of
entrained water from mortar lining. Humidify air introduced into pipe for ventilating
or curing purposes and maintain moist atmosphere inside pipe until Project Manager
accepts Work.
3.06 COATINGS AND LININGS INSPECTION RESPONSIBILITIES
02518-29
A. Contractor is responsible for quality control of coatings and linings applications and
testing and inspection stipulated in this Section. Project Manager is responsible for
quality assurance and reserves right to inspect or acquire services of independent
third-party inspector who is fully knowledgeable and qualified to inspect surface
preparation and application of high-performance coatings at phases of coatings and
linings, field- or shop-applied. Contractor is responsible for proper application and
performance of coatings and linings whether or not Project Manager provides such
inspection.
B. Cement Mortar Lining and Joint Finish: Finished surface of lining and joint to be
comparable to surface rubbed with No. 16 Carborundum stone. Rub joint mortar
sufficiently to bring paste to surface, to remove depressions and projections, and to
produce smooth, dense surface. Add cement to form surface paste as necessary.
Leave interior with clean, neat and uniform-appearing finish.
3.07 FIELD REPAIR PROCEDURES AND SPECIAL FITTINGS APPLICATION FOR

CEMENT MORTAR LINING
in concrete surfaces with non-shrink grout. Repair defects by cutting out
unsatisfactory material and replacing with non-shrink grout, securely bonded to
existing concrete. Finish to make junctures between patches and existing concrete as
inconspicuous as possible. After each patch has stiffened sufficiently to allow for
greatest portion of shrinkage, strike off grout flush with surrounding surface.
B. Areas greater than 6 inches in diameter:
1. Remove defective lining down to bare steel by chipping, making sure care is
taken to prevent further lining damage. Ends of lining where defective lining
is removed are to be left square and uniform, not feathered.
2. Clean bare steel with wire brush to remove loose or other foreign matter.
3. Remove existing wire reinforcement and replace. Overlap new reinforcement

to existing reinforcement by 1/2-inch. Secure reinforcement, against wall of
pipe, at frequent intervals, by tack welding to pipe.
4. Prepare cement mortar mixture. Mixture to compose of ASTM C 150,

Portland Type II cement, sand, and water. Proportions of sand to cement not
to exceed 3 parts sand to 1 part cement, by weight. Use only enough water to
obtain proper placement characteristics. Set-up time before mixture is to be
discarded is to be no longer than 30 minutes. Non-shrink grout may also be
used. Do not use combination of cement mortar and non-shrink grout within
same repair.
5. Apply WELD-CRETE, or approved equal, concrete bonding agent to bare

steel and interface of existing lining. After bonding agent is applied to steel
and lining, new mix must be applied within 10 minutes.
02518-30
6. Apply cement mortar to repair area 1/2-inch thick, then hand trowel to achieve
smooth dense finish, making sure wire is not left exposed. To ensure proper
thickness while placing new mortar, check thickness with 1/2-inch-long wire
gauge.
7. Curing: Place plastic sheeting over repair area; use tape to adhere plastic to
area surrounding repair area. Let cure for 4 days, then remove plastic sheeting.
END OF SECTION
02518-31
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FIRE HYDRANTS
SECTION 02520
FIRE HYDRANTS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Fire hydrants.
B. Adjustment of fire hydrants and gate valves.
F. Section 02506 – Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe
G. Section 02511 – Water Lines
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment is on a unit price basis for each fire hydrant assembly, including 6-
inch gate valve and box, installed regardless of barrel depth.
2. Payment for fire hydrant branches (leads) is on linear foot basis for each
branch installed. Separate pay items are used for open-cut and augured
branches.
3. Payment for salvaged fire hydrants is on unit price basis for each fire hydrant
removed and returned to City's Maintenance Quadrant Stock yard.
1.04 REFERENCES
02520-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. AWWA C 502 – Standard for Dry Barrel fire Hydrants (Latest Edition).
B. AWWA C 550 - Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants
C. SSPC SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning
D. SSPC SP3 - Power Tool Cleaning
E. SSPC SP10 - Near-White Metal Blast Cleaning
F. SSPC SP11 - Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal
G. SSPC Paint 42 – Epoxy Polyamide/Polyamidoamine Primer, Performance-Based
H. SSPC Paint 36 – Two-Component Weatherable Aliphatic Polyurethane Topcoat,

Performance-Based
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit name of hydrant manufacturer, type of bonnet paint, and engineering control
drawing number for hydrant proposed for use.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 HYDRANTS
A. Provide fire hydrants in conformance with AWWA C 502, Standard for Dry Barrel
Fire Hydrants (Latest Edition). Hydrants are approved by the City for issuance of a
Certificate of Responsibility. Only hydrants with current Certification of
Responsibility will be allowed in City of Houston projects. Approved fire hydrants
are listed under City’s Approved Water Product List.
https://www.houstonpermittingcenter.org/office-city-engineer/design-and-
construction-standards#agency-links-1486
B. The Project Manager may, at any time prior to or during installation of hydrants,
randomly select furnished hydrant for disassembly and laboratory inspection, at City
expense, to verify compliance with Specifications. When hydrant is found to be non-
compliant, replace, at Contractor's expense, hydrants, with hydrants that comply with
Specifications.
C. Provide lower hydrant barrel fabricated from Ductile Iron Pipe as single piece,
connected to upper hydrant barrel by means of joint coupling that will provide three
hundred sixty degree (360) rotation of upper barrel.
2.02 LEADS
02520-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Branches (Leads): Conform to requirements of Section 02501 - Ductile Iron Pipe and
Fittings, Section 02502 - Steel Pipe and Fittings, and Section 02506 - Polyvinyl
Chloride Pipe.
2.03 HYDRANT PAINTING
A. New hydrants and refurbished hydrants shall be shop coated as specified herein.
Exterior Above Traffic Flange (Including Bolts & Nuts). Bolts and nuts (both above
and below ground) shall conform to AWWA C-502 Section 4.11 and shall be
stainless steel, cadmium plated, or zinc coated.
1. Surface preparation to be in accordance with SSPC-SP 10 (NACE 2) near

white blast cleaned surface.
2. Coat with a liquid or powder epoxy primer and two part polyurethane or
TGIC polyester top coat system with total dry film thickness (DFT) of not to
exceed 20 mils as follows:
a. Prime Coat - Liquid or powder epoxy primer with a total dry film
thickness (DFT) of 4-6 mils, OR cathodic epoxy electro-coat (e-coat)
with a (DFT) of 0.5-1.0 mils.
b. Intermediate Coat – Intermediate coat not required.
c. Finish Coat - Two part polyurethane enamel to be in general

conformance with SSPC Paint Specification No. 36 or TGIC polyester
system, with a total dry film thickness (DFT) 1.5-3.0 mils. Install color
coded finish coating of bonnet in field.
d. Bonnet Paint - Field apply finish coat of Silicone Alkyd Resin Enamel
to be in general conformance with SSPC Paint Specification No. 21.
Dry film thickness of 2 - 3 mils. Bonnet colors are to be as specified in
Paragraph 3.01 to designate the appropriate size of water supply line.
3. Colors - Primer: Manufacturer’s standard color. Finish coat of hydrant body:

Federal Standard Color #15187 (Blue) or equivalent. Bonnet and Connection
caps: Finished coated white. Paint white band of finish coat two (2) inches in
width on hydrant body approximately six inches (6") above and parallel to
traffic flange.
B. Field Maintenance Painting (Exterior Above Traffic Flange)
02520-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Surface Preparation to be in accordance with SSPC - SP2, Hand Tool

Cleaning, or SSPC - SP3, Power Tool Cleaning, depending on condition of
existing paint and extent of corrosion. It is not necessary to remove tightly
adhered mill scale, rust, and paint. Mill scale, rust and paint are considered
tightly adherent when they cannot be removed with dull putty knife. In some
severe cases where it is necessary to remove majority of existing paint,
surface should be cleaned in accordance with SSPC -SP11, Power Tool
Cleaning to Bare Metal.
2. When surface is cleaned to bare metal (SSPC - SP11), coat hydrant with three
coat Alkyd/Silicone Alkyd system in accordance with Paragraph 2.03.B.2 as
for new hydrants. When surface is cleaned to SSPC - SP2 or SSPC - SP3, coat
hydrant with Silicone Alkyd Resin Enamel in general conformance with SSPC
Paint Specification No. 21. Total dry film thickness of 3-6 mils.
3. Field coating should be conducted in accordance to the individual coatings

C. Exterior Below Traffic Flange (including lower barrel extensions).
1. Surface preparation in accordance with SSPC- SP10 (NACE 2) Near White

Blast Cleaned Surface.
2. Primer: One or two coats of modified or equal polyamide epoxy primer, to be

in general conformance with SSPC Paint Specification No. 42 or approved
equal with a total dry film thickness (DFT) of 20 mils. Exterior below traffic
flange should be the same color as the above traffic flange, i.e., blue. (Federal
Standard Color #15187 (Blue) or equivalent.)
D. Interior Surfaces Above and Below Water Line Valve (including lower barrel
extensions)
1. Material used for internal coating of hydrant interior ferrous surfaces must be
NSF certified as suitable for contact with potable water as required by Chapter
290, Rules and Regulations for Public Water Systems, Texas Commission on
Environmental Quality.
2. Coating shall be liquid or powder epoxy system in accordance with AWWA

Standard C - 550 (latest revision). Coating may be applied in two or three
coats, according to manufacturer's recommendations, for total dry film
thickness not to exceed 20 mils.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
02520-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Set fire hydrant plumb and brace at locations and grades as shown on Drawings.
When barrel of hydrant passes through concrete slab, place 1-inch-thick piece of
standard sidewalk expansion joint material around section of barrel passing through
concrete.
B. Locate nozzle center line minimum 18 inches above finish grade.
C. Place 12-inch by 12-inch yellow indicators (plastic, sheet metal, plywood, or other
material approved by Project Manager) on pumper nozzles of new or relocated fire
hydrants installed on new water lines not in service. Remove indicators after new
water line is tested and approved by Project Manager. Obtain Project Manager's
approval in writing prior to installation of hydrants which require changes in bury
depth due to obstructions not shown on Drawings. Unit price adjustments will not be
allowed for changes in water line flow line or fire hydrant barrel length caused by
obstructions.
D. Plug branch lines to valves and fire hydrants shown on Drawings to be removed.
Deliver fire hydrants designated for salvage to nearest Utility Maintenance Quadrant
Facility.
E. Install branches (leads) in accordance with Section 02511 - Water Lines. Provide
fully restrained joints for branches (leads) and fittings.
F. Coating Requirements:
1. Apply coatings in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. No

requirements of this specification shall cancel or supersede written directions
and recommendations of specific manufacturer so as to jeopardize integrity of
applied system.
2. Furnish affidavit of compliance that coatings furnished complies with

requirements of this specification and referenced standards, as applicable.
G. Use following color code for field coating of hydrant bonnet to indicate size of water
line supplying hydrant:
Supply Water Line Diameter

Bonnet Color
(inches)
6 Yellow
8 White
12-20 Green
24 and larger Orange
H. Remove and dispose of unsuitable materials and debris in accordance with

02520-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
END OF SECTION
02520-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION GATE VALVES
SECTION 02521
GATE VALVES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Gate valves.
D. Section 02514 – Disinfection of Water Lines
E. Section 02515 – Hydrostatic Testing of Pipelines
A. Unit Prices.
1. No separate payment will be made for gate valves 20 inches in diameter and
smaller under this Section. Include payment in unit price for water lines.
2. Payment for gate valves 24 inches to 36 inches in diameter is on a unit price

basis. Unit price includes cost of required box for gate valves.
3. Payment for 2-inch blow-off valve with box is on a unit price basis for each
installation.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded
B. ASTM B 62 - Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal

Casting.
02521-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. ASTM D 429 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property-Adhesion to Rigid

Substrates.
D. ASTM B 763 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for Valve
Applications.
E. AWWA C 500 - Standard for Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service.
F. AWWA C 509 - Standard for Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service.
G. AWWA C 515- Standard for Reduced Wall, Resilient- Seated Gate Valves for Water
Supply Service.
H. AWWA C 550 - Standard for Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit manufacturer's product data for proposed valves for approval.
C. Provide detailed drawings of gearing mechanism for 20-inch and larger gate valves.
A. Submit manufacturer's affidavit that gate valves are manufactured in the United States
and conform to stated requirements of AWWA C 500, AWWA C 509, AWWA C
515, and this Section, and that they have been satisfactorily tested in the United States
in accordance with AWWA C 500, AWWA C 509, and AWWA C 515.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Gate Valves: AWWA C 500, AWWA C 509, AWWA C 515 and additional
requirements of this Section. Direct bury valves and those in subsurface vaults open
clockwise; aboveground and plant valves open counterclockwise.
B. If type of valve is not indicated on Drawings, use gate valves as line valves for sizes
20-inches and smaller. When type of valve is indicated, no substitute is allowed.
C. Gate Valves 1-1/2 inches in Diameter and Smaller: 125 psig; bronze; rising-stem;
single- wedge; disc type; screwed ends
D. Coatings for Gate Valves 2 inches and larger: AWWA C 550 non-toxic, imparts no
taste to water, functions as physical, chemical, and electrical barrier between base
metal and surroundings, minimum 8-mil-thick, fusion-bonded epoxy. Prior to
assembly of valve, apply protective coating to interior and exterior surfaces of body.
02521-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
E. Gate Valves 2 inches in diameter: Iron body, double disc or resilient-seated, non-
rising stem, 150-pound test, 2-inch square nut operating clockwise to open.
F. Gate Valves 3 inches to 12 inches in diameter: Non-directional, standard-wall

resilient seated (AWWA C 509), parallel seat double disc (AWWA C 500), or
reduced-wall resilient seated gate valves (AWWA C 515), 200 psig pressure rating,
bronze mounting, push-on bell ends with rubber joint rings, and nut-operated unless
otherwise specified. Provide approved standard-wall resilient seated valves. Provide
approved reduced-wall resilient seated valves. Provide approved double disc valves.
Comply with following requirements unless otherwise specified in Drawings:
1. Design: Fully encapsulated rubber wedge or rubber seat ring mechanically

attached with minimum 304 stainless-steel fasteners or screws; threaded
connection isolated from water by compressed rubber around opening.
2. Body: Cast or ductile iron, flange bonnet and stuffing box together with
ASTM A 307 Grade B bolts. Manufacturer's initials, pressure rating, and year
manufactured shall be cast in body.
3. Bronze: Valve components in waterway to contain not more than 15 percent

zinc and not more than 2 percent aluminum.
4. Stems: ASTM B 763 bronze, alloy number-995 minimum yield strength of

40,000 psi; minimum elongation in 2-inches of 12 percent, non-rising.
5. O-rings: For AWWA C 500, Section 3.12.2. For AWWA C 509, Sections
2.2.6 and 4.8.2. For AWWA C 515, Section 4.2.2.5.
6. Stem Seals Consist of three O-rings, two above and one below thrust collar
with anti- friction washer located above thrust collar for operating torque.
7. Stem Nut: Independent or integrally cast of ASTM B 62 bronze.
8. Resilient Wedge: Molded, synthetic rubber, vulcanized and bonded to cast or

ductile iron wedge or attached with 304 stainless steel screws tested to meet or
exceed ASTM D 429 Method B; seat against epoxy-coated surface in valve
body.
9. Bolts: AWWA C 500 Section 3.4, AWWA C 509 Section 4.4 or AWWA C
515 Section 4.4.4; stainless steel; cadmium plated, or zinc coated.
G. Gate valves 14 inch and larger in Diameter: AWWA C 500; parallel seat double disc
gate valves; push-on bell ends with rubber rings and nut-operated unless otherwise
specified. Provide approved double disc valves with 150 psig pressure rating. Comply
with following requirements unless otherwise specified on Drawings:
02521-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Body: Cast iron or ductile iron; flange together bonnet and stuffing box with
ASTM A 307 Grade B bolts. Cast following into valve body manufacturer's
initials, pressure rating, and year manufactured. When horizontally mounted,
equip valves greater in diameter than 12 inches with rollers, tracks, and
scrapers.
2. O rings: For AWWA C 500, Section 3.12.2. For AWWA C 515, Section
4.2.2.5.
3. Stems: ASTM B 763 bronze, alloy number-995 minimum yield strength of

40,000 psi; minimum elongation in 2-inches of 12 percent, non-rising.
4. Stem Nut: Machined from ASTM B 62 bronze rod with integral forged thrust
collar machined to size; non-rising.
5. Stem Seals: Consist of three O-rings, two above and one below thrust collar
with anti- friction washer located above thrust collar for operating torque.
6. Bolts: AWWA C 500 Section 3.4 or AWWA C 515 Section 4.4.4; stainless
steel; cadmium plated, or zinc coated.
7. Discs: Cast iron with bronze disc rings securely penned into machined
dovetailed grooves.
8. Wedging Device: Solid bronze or cast-iron, bronze-mounted wedges. Thin

plates or shapes integrally cast into cast-iron surfaces are acceptable. Other
moving surfaces integral to wedging action shall be bronze monel or nickel
alloy-to-iron.
9. Provide bypass for double-disc valves (AWWA C500).
10. Bronze Mounting: Built as integral unit mounted over, or supported on, cast-
iron base and of sufficient dimensions to be structurally sound and adequate
for imposed forces.
11. Gear Cases: Cast iron; furnished on 18-inch and larger valves and of extended
type with steel side plates, lubricated, gear case enclosed with oil seal or O-
rings at shaft openings.
12. Stuffing Boxes: Located on top of bonnet and outside gear case.
H. Gate valves 14 inches to 48 inches: Provide AWWA C 515; reduced-wall, resilient

seated gate valves with 250 psig pressure rating. Furnish with spur or bevel gearing.
1. Mount valves horizontally if proper ground clearance cannot be achieved by

normal vertical installation. For horizontally mounted gate valves, provide
bevel operation gear mounted vertically for above ground operation.
02521-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Use valve body, bonnet, wedge, and operator nut constructed of ductile iron.
Fully encapsulate exterior of ductile iron wedge with rubber.
3. Ensure wedge is symmetrical and seals equally well with flow in either
direction.
4. Provide ductile iron operator nut with four flats at stem connection to apply
even input torque to the stem.
5. Bolts: AWWA C515, Section 4.4.4, Stainless Steel; cadmium plated or zinc
coated.
6. Provide high strength bronze stem and nut.
7. O-rings: AWWA C515, Section 4.2.2.5, pressure O-rings as gaskets.
8. Provide stem sealed by three O-rings. Top two O-rings are to be replaceable
with valve fully open at full rated working pressure.
9. Provide thrust washers to the thrust collar for easy valve operation.
I. Gate Valves Extension Stem: When shown on Drawings, provide non-rising,

extension stem having coupling sufficient to attach securely to operating nut of valve.
Upper end of extension stem shall terminate in square wrench nut no deeper than 4
feet from finished grade or as shown on Drawings. Support extension stem with an
arm attached to wall of manhole or structure that loosely holds extension stem and
allows rotation in the axial direction only.
J. Gate Valves in Factory Mutual (Fire Service) Type Meter Installations: Conform to
provisions of this specification; outside screw and yoke valves; carry label of
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.; flanged, Class 125; clockwise to close.
K. Gate Valves for Tapping Steel Pipe: Provide double disc gate valve. Resilient wedge
gate valve shall only be installed in a vertical position.
L. Provide flanged joints when valve is connected to steel or PCCP.
M. Key valve stem into the operator nut.
N. Do not exceed 600 ft-lbs of torque on operator nut on gate valve.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Earthwork. Conform to applicable provisions of Section 02317 - Excavation and

B. Operation. Do not use valves for throttling without prior approval of manufacturer.
02521-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
3.02 SETTING VALVES AND VALVE BOXES
A. Remove foreign matter from within valves prior to installation. Inspect valves in open
and closed positions to verify that parts are in satisfactory working condition.
B. Install valves and valve boxes where shown on Drawings. Set valves plumb and as
detailed. Center valve boxes on valves. Carefully tamp earth around each valve box
for minimum radius of 4 feet, or to undisturbed trench face when less than 4 feet.
Install valves completely closed when placed in water line.
C. For pipe section of each riser, use only 6-inch, ductile iron Class 51, or DR18 PVC
pipe cut to proper length. Riser must be installed to allow complete access for
operation of valve. Assemble and brace box in vertical position as indicated on
Drawings.
3.03 DISINFECTION AND TESTING
A. Assist Project Manager with disinfection of valves and appurtenances as required by

Section 02514 - Disinfection of Water Lines and test as required by Section 02515 -
Hydrostatic Testing of Pipelines.
B. Double-Disc Gate Valves: Apply hydrostatic test pressure equal to twice rated
working pressure of valve between discs. Valve shall show no leakage through metal,
flanged joints, or stem seals. Test at rated working pressure, applied between discs.
Valve shall show no leakage through metal, flanged joints, or stem seals. Do not
exceed leakage rate of 1 oz per hr per inch of nominal valve size.
C. Solid-Wedge Gate Valves: Apply hydrostatic pressure equal to twice rated working
pressure of valve with both ends bulkheaded and gate open. Valve shall show no
leakage through metal, flanged joints, or stem seals. Test at rated working pressure,
applied through bulkheads alternately to each side of closed gate with opposite side
open for inspection. Valve shall show no leakage through metal, flanged joints, or
stem-seals. Do not exceed leakage rate of 1 oz per hr per inch of nominal valve size.
D. Repair or replace valves which exceed leakage rate.
3.04 PAINTING OF VALVES
A. Paint valves in vaults, stations, and above ground with approved paint.
END OF SECTION
02521-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION BUTTERFLY VALVES
SECTION 02522
BUTTERFLY VALVES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Butterfly valves.
D. Section 02085 – Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults
G. Section 02514 – Disinfection of Water Lines
H. Section 02515 – Hydrostatic Testing of Pipelines
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for butterfly valves with operator manhole or valve box is on a unit
price basis for each. Payment includes actuator, valve box or manhole (where
shown), foundation and appurtenances necessary for complete installation of
valve.
2. For butterfly valves with vault, valve and vault will be paid separately.
Butterfly Valve will be paid on a unit price basis for each and includes
hardware, actuator, testing and installation. Vault will be paid on a lump sum
basis, and includes all materials, equipment, and appurtenances necessary for
complete vault structure, foundation and supports as shown on Drawings.
1.04 REFERENCES
02522-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
250.
B. ASTM A 126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges,
and Pipe Fittings.
C. ASTM A 193 - Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for
High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications.
D. ASTM A 194 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel, Alloy Steel, and Stainless
Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both.
E. ASTM A 536 – Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
F. ASTM A 564 – Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled and Cold-Finished Age-

Hardening Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
G. AWWA C 504 - Standard for Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves.
H. AWWA C 516 – Large-Diameter Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves, Sizes 78 in. (2,000

mm) and Larger.
I. NSF/ANSI 61 – Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects.
J. AWWA C 550 - Standard for Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit manufacturer’s product data for proposed valves and actuators for approval.
C. Submit Proof-of-Design and hydrostatic testing procedures in accordance with

AWWA C504 or C516.
D. As part of initial review, submit manufacturer’s affidavits certifying the following:
1. Compliance with specifications for valves and actuators.
2. Butterfly valves were manufactured in the United States.
3. Butterfly valves conform to applicable requirements of AWWA C504 or

C516.
E. Butterfly valves have been satisfactorily tested in the United States in accordance
with AWWA C504 or AWWA C516 using test pressure of 150 psi in both directions.
F. At time of delivery, submit manufacturer’s affidavits certifying the following:
02522-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Coatings for interior surfaces of valves conform to applicable requirements of

AWWA C550. Submit results of holiday test and thickness measurements of
coatings.
2. Valves were manufactured in accordance with AWWA C504 or C516.
G. At time of delivery, furnish certified drawings and material test records by

manufacturer. Furnish certified copies of test reports for review.
H. Submit data indicating maximum torque required to open valve, maximum torsional
strength of shaft and torque output of actuator.
I. Provide submittal information on CD-ROM in Adobe portable document format

(*.PDF).
J. Include number of turns to operate valves to fully open/closed.
K. For 30-inch and larger diameters, submit procedures for complete seat replacement in
the field.
A. Perform valve leakage tests in both directions at 150 psi in factory and field.
Hydrostatic field tests of 150 psi shall be made against dished head plug or similar
arrangement.
B. When proof of design tests are performed on valve delivered to job site, replace disc,
bushing, shaft and seals with new unused items, and test and certify as described
above.
C. Hydrostatic Testing by Manufacturer:
1. Hydrostatic testing to be witnessed by Project Manager prior to shipment of

valves. Provide minimum 4 weeks notice to Project Manager to schedule
witness testing. When possible, maximize number of valves to be tested
during a plant visit; no more than two visits will be allowed per project to
witness test valves, unless otherwise approved by Project Manager. City will
pay expenses for each visit up to total of two visits incurred by Project
Manager to witness testing of each grouping of valve(s) per project. Expenses
for subsequent or extended visits by Project Manager for defective valves,
improper scheduling or valve failures are to be paid by Contractor. Witness of
hydrostatic testing by Project Manager will only be in regard to compliance
with this specification and will not constitute approval by Project Manager nor
relieve Contractor of obligations to comply with contract documents.
2. Document serial number on valve at time of testing and reflect in certified test
records furnished to Project Manager. Identification plate must be
permanently affixed to valve and actuator prior to hydrostatic testing.
02522-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
3. Hydrostatic testing to conform to AWWA C504 or C516 except as modified

below:
a. Install actuator prior to hydrostatic testing. Test actuator to verify

actual number of turns match manufacturer’s published number of
turns. Verify valve stops are in correct positions.
b. Fully open and close valve prior to performing shell test and prior to
each leakage test.
c. Perform shell test first.
d. When tested with water, adequately dry seat and disc.
e. When tested with air, fill top of valve with water to aid in viewing
possible leakage.
f. Pressure Gauges: Calibrated within past 12 months; 0-500 psi range in

increments of 5 psi; present calibration certificates prior to hydrostatic
testing.
g. If seat adjustment is required during hydrostatic testing, perform valve

leakage test again in both directions. Once seat adjustment is made,
fully open and fully close valve three (3) times, and repeat leakage
test.
4. Field Testing:
a. When valve arrives at the job site, Contractor is to operate valve fully
open and closed twice in presence of Project Manager. Document
number of turns to open and close each time.
b. Install operator nut plum.
c. After valve is installed, repeat the operation test and document number
of turns in presence of Project Manager.
d. Manufacturer’s representative must be present to witness the operation

test again at the substantial walk thru. Verify valve operate fully
open/closed twice at the appropriate number of turns.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 VALVES AND ACTUATORS
02522-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Butterfly Valves and Actuators: Provide approved butterfly valves and actuators.
Conform to AWWA C504 for 72-inch and smaller diameters. Conform to AWWA
C516 for 78-inch and larger diameters. Compliance with NSF 61 is required for all
parts in contact with finished water.
B. If type of valve is not indicated on Drawings, use butterfly valves for line valve sizes
24-inch and larger. When type of valve is specified on Drawings, no substitute will be
allowed, unless otherwise approved by Project Manager.
C. Butterfly valves shall be short-body, flanged design and installed at locations as

shown on Drawings.
D. Direct-bury valves and valves in subsurface vaults shall open clockwise. Above-
ground and plant valves shall open counterclockwise.
E. Provide flanged joints when valve is connected to steel or PCCP. Provide ASTM
A193 Grade B7 high strength steel stud bolts with ASTM A194 heavy hex nuts.
Refer to flange bolting requirements in Section 02511 – Water Lines.
F. Butterfly Valves and Actuators (Additional Requirements for Large Diameter Water
Lines):
1. Provide valves from approved manufacturer(1). Provide all valves for single
project, from same manufacturer.
(1)
as modified for seat replacement in field for City of Houston
2. Provide manual actuators for single project from same manufacturer.
3. Shaft connecting actuator to valve body must be fully enclosed. Bonnet and
extension to be fully enclosed and watertight.
2.02 VALVE CONSTRUCTION
A. Valves:
1. 72-inches and smaller diameters: AWWA C504, Class 150B. Body: Cast Iron,
ASTM A 126, Class B, or Ductile Iron. Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125.
2. 78-inches and larger diameters: AWWA C516, Class 150B. Body: ASTM
A536 Grade 65-45-12. Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125 for up to 96-inch,
AWWA C207, Class D with bolt holes ¼-inch larger than nominal bolt
diameter for larger than 96-inch diameters.
B. Discs: ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12 Ductile Iron.
02522-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Seats: Buna-N or neoprene, and may be applied to the disc or body. Mechanically
secure seat to disc or body using stainless steel retainer ring and bolts. Do not rely
solely on adhesive properties of epoxy or similar bonding agent to attach seat to body.
When seat is on disc, retain seat in position by shoulders located on both disc and
stainless steel retaining ring. Mating surfaces for seats: Type 304 or 316 stainless
steel, and secured to disc by mechanical means. Sprayed-on or plated mating surfaces
not allowed. Seat must be adjustable and replaceable in field with no special tools for
valves greater than 30-inches in diameter.
D. Coat interior wetted ferrous surfaces of valve, including disc, with epoxy or fusion
bonded epoxy suitable for potable water conditions. Epoxy, surface preparation, and
epoxy application: In accordance with AWWA C550 and coating manufacturer’s
recommendations. Provide minimum dry film thickness of 8 mils for epoxy coating
or minimum DFT of 16 mils for fusion bonded epoxy. Coatings shall be holiday
tested and measured for thickness.
E. Valve shaft and keys: 24-inches in diameter and greater require a minimum of two (2)
taper pins used for attaching valve shaft to valve disc. Use of torque plug for purposes
of attaching valve shaft is not permitted. Shaft bearings: stainless steel, bronze, nylon
or Teflon (supported by fiberglass mat or backing material with proven record of
preventing Teflon flow under load) in accordance with AWWA C504 or AWWA
C516. Sinter stainless steel bearing material. Design valve shaft to withstand 3 times
the amount of torque necessary to open valve. Shaft Material:
1. 72-inches and smaller: Type 304 stainless steel for treated (potable) water
applications. Type 316 stainless steel for raw water applications.
2. 78-inches and larger: ASTM A564, Type 630 (17-4 PH), Stainless Steel,
Condition 1150.
3. Design valve shaft to withstand 3 times the amount of torque necessary to

open valve.
F. Taper pins: Stainless Steel. Valves 24-inches in diameter and greater require a
minimum of two (2) taper pins used for attaching valve shaft to valve disc, use of
torque plug for purposes of attaching valve shaft is not permitted. Shaft Bearings:
sintered stainless steel, sintered bronze, nylon or Teflon (supported by fiberglass mat
or backing material with proven record of preventing Teflon flow under load) in
accordance with AWWA C504 or C516.
G. Packing: Self adjusting and wear compensating, full or split ring V-type, and
replaceable without removing actuator assembly.
H. Retaining Hardware for Seats: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel. Nuts and screws used
with clamps and discs for rubber seats shall be held securely with locktight, or other
approved method, to prevent loosening by vibration or cavitational effects.
02522-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
I. Valve disc shall seat in position at 90 degrees to pipe axis and shall rotate 90 degrees
between full-open and tight-closed position. Install valves with valve shafts
horizontal and convex side of disc facing anticipated direction of flow, except where
shown otherwise on Drawings.
J. For valves utilizing retaining rings, tighten bolts to a uniform torque. Measure torque
prior to testing valve.
2.03 VALVE ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide actuators for valves with size based on line velocity of 16 feet per second and
uni-directional service, and unless otherwise shown on Drawings, equip with geared
manual actuators. Provide fully enclosed and traveling-nut type, rack-and-pinion type,
or worm-gear type for valves 24-inches and smaller. For 30-inches and larger,
provide worm-gear or traveling-nut type.
B. Provide actuator designed for installation with valve shaft horizontal unless otherwise
indicated on Drawings.
C. Provide bonnet extensions, as required, between valve body and actuator. Space
between actuator housing and valve body shall be completely enclosed so that no
moving parts are exposed to soil or elements.
D. Provide oil-tight and watertight actuator housings for valves, specifically designed for
submerged service, and factory packed with suitable grease.
E. Install valve position indicator on each actuator housing located above ground or in
valve vaults. Valves shall be equipped with 2-inch actuator nut only.
F. Indicate direction of opening of valve on exposed visible part of assembly and cast
direction of open on 2-inch nut on top of valve operator extension. Paint 2-inch
actuator nut and extension shaft black when counterclockwise open and red when
clockwise to open.
G. Design worm-gear or traveling-nut actuators to be self-locking and designed to

transmit twice the required actuator torque without damage to faces of gear teeth or
contact faces of screw or nut.
H. Actuators shall be capable of withstanding minimum 450 foot-pounds of torque

against the stops without damage to any parts of the actuator or valve.
2.04 VALVE BOXES
A. Provide Standard Type "A" valve boxes conforming to requirements of Section

02085 - Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults.
2.05 VALVE SERVICE MANHOLES
02522-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. For large diameter water lines, provide manholes to dimensions shown on Drawings
conforming to requirements of Section 02082 - Precast Concrete Manholes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EARTHWORK

Utilities.
3.02 SETTING VALVES AND VALVE BOXES
A. Prior to hydrostatic testing of water line and valve:
1. Test valve by opening and closing valve a minimum of two times to verify
valve seats properly.
2. Verify number of turns from fully open to fully closed position is same as
identified in manufacturer’s submittal.
3. Adjust valve as required if number of turns do not match.
4. Remove foreign matter from within valves.
B. Install valves in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Install valves

where shown on Drawings or as located by Project Manager.
C. Use valve boxes for 16-inch and 24-inch valves unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
Set valves plumb and as detailed. Center valve boxes on valves. Carefully tamp earth
around each valve box for minimum radius of 4 feet, or to undisturbed trench face
when less than 4 feet.
D. Avoid disturbing or overstressing valve body when installing valves. Perform field
adjustment of valves under pressure to ensure shutoff occurs in number of rotations as
described in valves operation and maintenance manual.
E. Submit certification that large diameter valve was installed, adjusted, and exercised in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Manufacturer’s certification shall state
that all performance characteristics of large diameter valves, as installed, have been
met. Adjustments made to valve, for any reason, must be made by manufacturer’s
representative.
A. Assist City with disinfection of valves and appurtenances as required by Section

02514 - Disinfection of Water Lines and test as required by Section 02515 -
Hydrostatic Testing of Pipelines. Do not use valves for throttling without prior
approval of manufacturer.
02522-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
3.04 COATING OF PIPING
A. Coat valves located in vaults, stations, and above ground using approved paint.
Coating shall be 6-12 mils thick, but no more than 12 mils. Apply coating in
END OF SECTION
02522-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
SECTION 02523
PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Pressure reducing valves (PRV).
C. Section 02085 – Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults
E. Section 02514 – Disinfection of Water Lines
F. Section 02515 – Hydrostatic Testing of Pipelines
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for pressure reducing valves is on unit price basis for each valve
installed.
2. Payment includes vault, piping, manhole, fittings, and appurtenances

necessary for complete installation of valve.
B. Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). If Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract, payment for
1.04 REFERENCES
250.
B. ASTM A 48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
02523-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Submit design calculations and shop drawings for valve vaults and manholes, sealed
by Engineer registered in the State of Texas.
A. Submit manufacturer's affidavit that pressure reducing valves purchased for Work,
were manufactured and tested in the United States, and conform to requirements of
this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Provide approved PRV with basket strainer in location and arrangement as shown on
Drawings.
1. Valve body: Ductile iron with ASME B16.1, Class 125, flanges.
2. Valve cover: ASTM A 48 cast iron.
3. Valve internals:
a. Provide top and bottom single moving disc and diaphragm assembly.
b. Use flexible nylon fabric reinforced elastomer diaphragm integral with

assembly.
c. Provide valve internal trim (seat ring, disc guide, and cover bearing)
made of stainless steel.
d. Provide heat fusion bonded epoxy coating to internal and external

surfaces of valve body including disc retainer and diaphragm washer.
Holiday test coating applied to valve body.
e. Treat stem and seat with penetrative salt nitride process.
f. Use Xylan coated seat.
g. Do not use leather parts.
B. Control Tubing: Contain shutoff cocks with Y-strainer.
C. PRV: Equip with visual valve position indicator. Fit valve position indicator with air-
bleed petcock. Initially set in field by authorized manufacturer's representative with
60 psi downstream pressure.
D. Provide basket strainer upstream of PRV as shown on Drawings.
02523-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Strainer body: Quick-opening type, fabricated-steel construction with ASME

B 16.1, Class 150, flanges.
2. Basket: Type 304, stainless steel.
3. Model: Provide basket compatible with the manufacturer of the pressure

reducing valve. Hayward Model 90, or approved equal, for PRV 4 inches
through 24 inches. Provide Hayward Model 510, or approved equal, for PRV
14 inches or greater when space limitations dictate use of smaller strainer
housing.
E. Provide pressure reducing pilot that has adjustable range of 20 - 175 psi. Provide and
install pilot system components according to manufacturer’s recommendations unless
otherwise approved by Project Manager.
F. Valve Vaults: Provide as shown on Drawings and conforming to requirements of

Section 02085 - Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EARTHWORK

Utilities.
3.02 SETTING VALVES
A. Provide services of technical representative of valve manufacturer on site during

installation of valves and to serve as adviser on aspects of installation. Take necessary
precautions to protect pilot system during PRV installation.
B. Prior to installing valves, remove foreign matter from within valves. Inspect valves in
open and closed position to verify that parts are in satisfactory working condition.
A. Disinfect valves and appurtenances as required by Section 02514 - Disinfection of

Water Lines and test as required by Section 02515 - Hydrostatic Testing of Pipelines.
3.04 PAINTING OF PIPING AND VALVES
A. Paint piping and valves located in vaults, stations, and above ground using ACRO
Paint No. 2215, or approved equal.
END OF SECTION
02523-3
CITY OF HOUSTON AIR RELEASE AND
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION VACUUM RELIEF VALVES
SECTION 02524
AIR RELEASE AND VACUUM RELIEF VALVES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Air release and vacuum relief valves.
E. Section 02514 – Disinfection of Water Lines
F. Section 02515 – Hydrostatic Testing of Pipelines
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for air release and vacuum relief valves is on unit price basis for each
valve installed.
2. Payment includes manhole or vault (when required), fittings, vent piping and
bollard(s) and appurtenances necessary for complete installation of valve.
3. Payment for valve assembly on aerial crossing includes fittings, anti-

vandalism protection, freeze protection, vent piping and appurtenances
necessary for complete installation of valve.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
B. ASTM A 126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges,
and Pipe Fittings.
02524-1
C. ASTM A 240 - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless

D. ASTM A 276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
E. ASTM A 313 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Spring Wire.
F. ASTM B 584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General
Applications.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide combination air valves designed to fulfill functions of air release (permit
escape of air accumulated in line at high point of elevation while line is under
pressure) and vacuum relief.
B. Provide inlet and outlet connections, and orifice as shown on Drawings.
1. Valve exterior: Painted with shop-applied primer suitable for contact with
potable water.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Air Release Valves: Provide approved air release valves ASTM A 48, Class 30, cast
iron; float and leverage mechanism with body and cover, ASTM A 240 or ASTM A
276 stainless steel; orifice and seat, stainless steel against Buna-N or Viton
mechanically retained with hex head nut and bolt. Other valve internals shall be
stainless steel or bronze.
B. Air Release and Vacuum Relief Valves: Provide single-body, standard combination
valves or duplex-body custom combination valves as indicated on Drawings.
1. For 2-inch and 3 inch, single-body valves, provide inlet and outlet size as
shown on Drawings and orifice sized for 100 psi working pressure.
a. Valve materials: body, cover, and baffle, ASTM A 48, Class 35, or
ASTM A 126, Grade B cast iron; plug or poppet, ASTM A 276
stainless steel; float, ASTM A 240 stainless steel; seat, Buna-N; other
valve internals, stainless steel.
02524-2
2. For 3 inch and larger duplex body valves as shown on Drawings, provide
approved air release valve.
a. Air and vacuum valve materials: body and cover, ASTM A 126, Class
B, cast iron; float, ASTM A 240 stainless steel; seat, Type 304,
stainless steel and Buna-N, for sanitary sewer, Garlock #3000 (non-
asbestos),for water lines; other valve internals, stainless steel or bronze
(for sanitary sewer).
b. Air release valve: Constructed as specified in paragraph above on Air

Release Valves.
C. Vacuum Relief Valves: Provide approved air inlet vacuum relief valves with flanged
inlet and outlet connections as shown on Drawings. Provide air release valves in
combination with inlet and outlet, and orifice as shown on Drawings. Valve shall
open under pressure differential not to exceed 0.25 psi.
1. Materials for vacuum relief valves: valve body, ASTM A 48, Class 35, cast
iron; seat and plug, ASTM B 584 bronze, copper alloy 836; spring, ASTM A
313, Type 304, stainless steel; bushing, ASTM B 584 bronze, copper alloy
932; retaining screws, ASTM A 276, Type 304, stainless steel.
D. Additional Requirements for Wastewater Applications:
1. Air Release/Vacuum Relief Valves shall have a minimum seating pressure of

at most 5 psi through a maximum operating pressure of 250 psi unless
otherwise specified by the Engineer.
2. Valve bodies shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel.
3. Valves that require adjustment of a spring or nuts shall not be allowed.
4. Piping connections between dissimilar metals, e.g., ductile iron or cast iron
and stainless steel, etc., shall be provided with dielectric insulating kits
consisting of dielectric gaskets, bolt sleeves, and washers to prevent any
galvanic action between the dissimilar metals.
5. The valves shall have an internal debris shield and debris screen or an
alternative mechanism to prevent clogging of the orifice.
6. Rubber components used shall be suitable for wastewater application.
7. Float materials shall be ASTM A 240 stainless steel, polypropylene,

polyurethane, or HDPE for wastewater applications.
E. Manholes: As shown on Drawings conforming to requirements of Section 02082 -

Precast Concrete Manholes.
02524-3
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EARTHWORK

Utilities.
3.02 SETTING VALVES IN MANHOLES AND VAULTS
A. If required by Project Manager, provide services of technical representative of valve

manufacturer available on site during installation of valves.
B. Prior to installing valves, remove foreign matter from within valves. Inspect valves in
open and closed position to verify that parts are in satisfactory working condition.
C. Install valves and valve manholes and vaults where indicated on Drawings or as
located by Project Manager. Set manholes and vaults plumb and as detailed. Center
manholes on valves. Compact cement-stabilized sand around each manhole and vault
for minimum radius of 4 feet, or to undisturbed trench face when less than 4 feet.
Provide above-ground vents for manholes and vaults as indicated on Drawings.
A. Assist City with disinfection of valves and appurtenances as required by Section

02514 - Disinfection of Water Lines and test as required by Section 02515 -
Hydrostatic Testing of Pipelines.
3.04 PAINTING OF PIPING AND VALVES
A. Paint piping and valves located in manholes, stations, and above ground using
approved paint.
END OF SECTION
02524-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES
SECTION 02525
TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Tapping sleeves and valves for connections to existing water system.
D. Section 02221 – Removing Existing Pavements, Structures, Wood, and Demolition

Debris
F. Section 02521 – Gate Valves
G. Section 02528 – Polyethylene Encasement/Wrap
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment is on unit price basis for each tap installed.
3. For water lines 4-inches and greater, no payment will be made until coupon
(cut out portion of pipe tapped) is delivered to City.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A240 - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless

B. ASTM A193 - Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for
High Pressure Service and Other Special Purposed Applications.
02525-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. ASTM A194 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel, Alloy Steel, and Stainless
Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both.
D. AWWA C 110 - Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 in. through 48
in., for Water and other Liquids.
E. AWWA C 200 - Standard for Steel Water Pipe - 6 in. and Larger.
F. AWWA C 207 - Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 in.
Through 144 in.
G. AWWA C 500 - Standard for Metal Seated Gate Valves, for Water Supply Service.
H. AWWA C 223 - Fabricated Steel and Stainless Steel Tapping Sleeves.
I. OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101 – Asbestos.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit results of tapping sleeves NPT test opening.
C. Submit manufacturer's affidavit as required in Section 02521 - Gate Valves.
D. For tapping fiberglass reinforced pipe (FRP), submit tapping procedures in

accordance with FRP manufacturer’s recommendations.
A. Ship steel sleeves in wooden crates that provide protection from damage to epoxy
coating during transport and storage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Tapping Sleeves:
1. Tapping Sleeve Bodies: AWWA C 110 cast or ductile iron or AWWA C 200
carbon steel in two sections to be bolted together with high-strength,
corrosion-resistant, low-alloy steel bolts with mechanical joint ends.
2. Branch Outlet of Tapping Sleeve:
a. Flanged, machined recess, AWWA C 207, Class D, ANSI 150 pound

drilling.
02525-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
b. Gasket: Affixed around recess of tap opening to prevent rolling or

binding during installation.
3. Use cast iron split sleeve where fire service from 6-inch water line is
approved.
4. For tapping Fiberglass Reinforced Pipe (FRP), provide stainless steel tapping
sleeves. Do not use cast iron or ductile iron tapping sleeves. Comply with FRP
pipe manufacturer’s recommendations for tapping procedures.
B. Welded-steel tapping-sleeve bodies may be used in lieu of cast or ductile iron bodies
for following sizes and with following restrictions:
1. Flange: AWWA C 207, Class D, ANSI 150 pound drilling.
2. Gasket: Affixed around recess of tap opening to prevent rolling or binding

during installation.
3. Steel sleeves are restricted to use on pipe sizes 6 inches and larger.
4. Body: Heavy, welded-steel construction; top half grooved to retain neoprene

O-ring seal permanently against outside diameter of pipe.
5. Bolts: AWWA C 500 Section 3.5; coated with 100 percent vinyl resin or
corrosive resistant material.
6. Steel Sleeves Finish: Fusion-bonded epoxy coated to minimum 12 mil

thickness.
7. Finished Epoxy Coat: Free of laminations and blisters; and remain pliant and
resistant to impact with non-peel finish.
8. Provide approved steel tapping sleeves
9. Tapping Sleeves: Provide with 3/4-inch NPT test opening for testing prior to
tapping. Provide 3/4-inch bronze plug for opening.
10. Do not use steel sleeves for taps greater than 75 percent of pipe diameter.
11. Comply with AWWA C 223 - Fabricated Steel and Stainless Steel Tapping
Sleeves.
C. Stainless Steel tapping-sleeve bodies and flange may be used in lieu of cast or ductile
iron bodies for following sizes and with following restrictions:
1. Flange: ASTM A240 Stainless Steel, Type 304, ANSI 150 pound drilling.
2. Gasket: Full circumferential, affixed around recess of tap opening to prevent

rolling or binding during installation, compounded for water and sewer
service.
02525-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
3. Stainless Steel sleeves are restricted to use on pipe sizes 4 inches and larger.
4. Body: ASTM A240 Stainless Steel, Type 304.
5. Bolts: ASTM A193 Stainless Steel, Type 304.
6. Nuts: ASTM A194 Stainless Steel, Type 304.
7. Branch Outlet: Heavy Stainless Steel Pipe.
8. Provide approved stainless steel tapping sleeves.
9. Do not use stainless steel sleeves for taps greater than 75 percent of pipe
diameter.
10. Comply with AWWA C 223 - Fabricated Steel and Stainless Steel Tapping
Sleeves.
D. Tapping Valves: Meet requirements of Section 02521 - Gate Valves with following
exceptions:
1. Inlet Flanges:
a. AWWA C 110; Class 125.
b. AWWA C 110; Class 150 and higher: Minimum 8-hole flange.
2. Outlet: Standard mechanical or push-on joint to fit any standard tapping

machine.
3. Valve Seat Opening: Accommodate full-size shell cutter for nominal size tap
without contact with valve body; double disc.
E. Valve Boxes: Standard Type "A" valve boxes conforming to requirements of Section
02085 - Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION
A. Install tapping sleeves and valves at locations and of sizes shown on Drawings,
maintain 5 feet spacing from edge of tapping sleeve from any other tap or fitting.
Install sleeve so valve is in horizontally level position unless otherwise indicated on
Drawings.
B. Clean tapping sleeve, tapping valve, and pipe prior to installation and in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
02525-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Hydrostatically test installed tapping sleeve to 150 psig for minimum of 15 minutes.
Inspect sleeve for leaks, and remedy leaks prior to tapping operation.
D. When tapping concrete pressure pipe, size on size, use shell cutter one standard size
smaller than water line being tapped.
E. Do not use Large End Bell (LEB) increasers with next size tap unless existing pipe is
asbestos- cement.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Verify outside diameter of pipe to be tapped prior to ordering sleeve.
B. Verify clearance of 5 feet to maintain spacing.
C. Tighten bolts in proper sequence so that undue stress is not placed on pipe. For
installation of tapping sleeves on FRP, comply with pipe manufacturer’s
recommendations for bolt torque values.
D. Align tapping valve properly and attach to tapping sleeve. Insert insulation sleeves
into flange holes of tapping valve and pipe. Make insertions of sleeves on pipe side of
tapping valve. Do not damage insulation sleeves during bolt tightening process.
E. Make tap with sharp, shell cutter:
1. For 12-inch and smaller tap, use minimum cutter diameter one-half inch less
than nominal tap size.
2. For 16-inch and larger tap, use manufacturer's recommended cutter diameter.
3. For tapping FRP pipe, comply with pipe manufacturer’s recommendations for
forward feed rate.
F. Withdraw coupon and flush cuttings from newly-made tap.
G. Wrap:
1. For 12-inch and smaller tap, wrap completed tapping sleeve and valve in
accordance with Section 02528 - Polyethylene Encasement/Wrap.
2. For 16-inch and larger tap, apply coal tar epoxy around completed tapping
sleeve and valve. The coal tar epoxy shall be applied with minimum of two
(2) coats. Each coat of coal tar epoxy shall have minimum dry film thickness
of 16 mils.
H. Place concrete thrust block behind tapping sleeve (not over tapping sleeve and valve).
I. Request inspection of installation prior to backfilling.
J. Backfill in accordance with Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities.
02525-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
3.03 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TAPPING ASBESTOS-CEMENT (AC)

PIPE
A. Notify Project Manager when AC pipe is encountered.
B. Refer to Section 02221 – Removing Existing Pavements, Structures, Wood, and

Demolition Debris for crew training, safety precautions, and AC pipe removal
requirements.
C. Protocol:
1. Mechanically excavate to no more than 6 in. of AC pipe. Carefully uncover

the remainder of pipe by hand or with shovel.
2. Keep pipe adequately wet before and during work.
3. Locate tap a minimum of 5 ft. away from existing AC collar.
4. Use of power tools is prohibited.
5. Remove waste AC pipe coupon.
END OF SECTION
02525-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION WATER METERS
SECTION 02526
WATER METERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Water meters, submeters, and fire service meters.
F. Section 02506 – Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe
G. Section 02512 – Water Tap and Service Line Installation
H. Section 02525 – Tapping Sleeves and Valves
I. Section 02527 – Polyurethane Coatings on Steel or Ductile Iron Pipe
A. Unit Prices
1. Measurement for water meters is on unit price basis for installation of each
meter type and size.
2. Payment includes vault, piping and appurtenances necessary for complete

installation of meter.
3. Measurement for relocating and reinstalling meter with new box is on unit
price basis for each meter relocated and reinstalled.
4. No separate payment for adjustment of meter or meter box unless otherwise

shown in Drawings.
02526-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
work is in this Section is included in total Stipulated Price.
1.04 REFERENCES
250.
B. AWWA C 510 - Standard for Double Check Valve Backflow - Prevention Assembly.
C. AWWA C 700 - Standard for Cold-Water Meters - Displacement Type, Bronze Main
Case.
D. AWWA C 701 - Standard for Cold-Water Meters - Turbine Type for Customer
Service.
E. AWWA C 702 - Standard for Cold-Water Meters - Compound Type.
F. AWWA C 703 - Standard for Cold-Water Meters - Fire Service Type.
G. AWWA Manual M6 - Water Meters - Selection, Installation, Testing, and

Maintenance.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit written certification of calibration and test results.
C. Submit manufacturer's certification that meters meet applicable requirements of this

Specification Section.
D. Submit accuracy registration test certification from manufacturer for each 3-inch
through 10- inch diameter meter.
A. Submit manufacturer's warranty against defects in materials and workmanship for one
year from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Provide vendor's unconditional guarantee that performance of each meter meets

applicable AWWA standards and AWWA Manual M6 as follows:
1. Displacement type: 10 years from installation or register registration shown

below, whichever comes first.
02526-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
Size (inch) Registration (million gallons)

5/8, 3/4 1.5
1 2.5
1-1/2 5.0
2 10.5
2. Turbine type: 1 year from date of installation.
3. Compound type: 1 year from date of installation.
4. Fire service type: 1 year from date of installation.
C. Operations of hermetically sealed register, 5/8-inch to 2-inch diameter, shall be

unconditionally guaranteed for 15 years.
D. Provide manufacturer's unconditional guarantee for each sealed register against

leakage, fogging, discoloration, and stoppage for 15 years from date of installation.
E. Vendor may replace meters that become defective within guarantee period with
meters that comply with this Specification. City will return defective meters to vendor
at their expense. Meters repaired or replaced under this guarantee must meet accuracy
limits for new meters upon receipt and accuracy limits for remaining period of initial
guarantee.
1.07 EASEMENT REQUIREMENTS
A. Install 2-inch and smaller water meters and shut-off valves (stop boxes) in right-of-
way when possible. Otherwise, install in a minimum 5-foot by 5-foot separate water
meter easement contiguous with public right-of-way.
B. Install 3-inch to 6-inch water meters in a minimum of 10-foot by 20-foot separate

water meter easement contiguous with public right-of-way.
C. Install 8-inch and larger water meters in a minimum of 15-foot by 25-foot separate
water meter easement contiguous with public right-of-way.
D. Locate water meter easements contiguous with public right-of-way unless approved
by Project Manager. Provide minimum fifteen foot wide access easement when not
contiguous with public right-of-way.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide meters of type and size as indicated on Drawings, unless otherwise indicated.
02526-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Provide bolted split casings. Main casings of meters and external fasteners: Copper
alloy with minimum 75 percent copper for 5/8 inch to 2 inches, bronze or cast iron,
hot-dipped galvanized or epoxy coating for 3 inches and larger.
C. Straightening Vanes: Non-corrosive material compatible with case material.
D. Intermediate gear train shall not come into contact with water and shall operate in
suitable lubricant.
E. Registers: Automatic Meter Reading (AMR) type that provides pulse, contact closure,
piezo switch or encoder generated output signal, compatible with City's radio and
telephone AMR systems. Provide minimum 12-foot wire when permanently
connected to register. Lens: impact resistant. Register box: tamper resistant by means
of tamper screw or plug: Register: permanently sealed, straight-reading, center-sweep
test hand, magnetic driven, U.S. gallons. Digits: 6, black in color, with lowest
registering 3 digits (below 1,000-gallon registration) having contrasting digit and
background color. Register capacity of meters: 9.99 million gallons for 5/8 inch to 2
inches and 999.999 million gallons for 3 inches and larger.
F. Connections: 5/8 inch to 1 inch: threads at each end; 1-1/2 to 2 inches: 2-bolt oval
flanges each end; 3 inches and larger: flange at each end.
G. Stamp manufacturer's meter serial number on outer case. Stamp manufacturer's meter
serial number on outside of register lid when provided. Manufacturer's serial numbers
shall be individual and not duplicated.
H. Meters: Provide approved meters equip with AMR type register to connect to City of
Houston's AMR system.
I. Manufacturing Quality Control shall permit successful interchangeability from one

meter to another of same size including registers, measuring chambers and units,
discs or pistons as units, change gears, bolts, nuts, and washers without affecting
accuracy of new meter.
J. For water meter vaults provide:
1. 1/4-inch steel or aluminum with stainless steel hinge pins. Door shall open to
90 degrees and automatically lock in that position.
2. Provide approved meter vault covers.
2.02 METER APPLICATIONS
A. Meter type requirements to usage application
1. All meters must be compatible with the City of Houston automated meter
reading (AMR) System and /or automated metering infrastructure (AMI)
system
02526-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Sizes 5/8-inch to 2-inch Meters: Displacement type excluding application

exceptions notes in paragraph 2.02 A.3
3. Exceptions
a. Meter types for sizes 1-inch to 2-inch NFPA 13-D, 13-R applications
require prior approval by the City of Houston. (Displacement meters
are not allowed for these applications).
b. Applications where constant flow is required a 2-inch turbine type

meter may be substituted.
B. Sizes 3-inch and above Meters:
1. Turbines:
Processing plants
Manufacturing facilities
Lawn sprinkler systems
Effluent water in treatment plants
Booster (pump)stations
Level controlled tank filling operations
Fire hydrants (transients)
Inter-systems sale or transfer
Sewer credit/sub-meter
2. Compounds:
Multi-family dwellings
Motels and hotels
Hospitals
Schools
Restaurants
Office buildings
Dormitories, nursing homes, department stores, shopping malls, and other
commercial establishments
3. Fire Rated Turbines:
Open systems feeding directly from a tank
4. Fire Rated Compounds:
Combination domestic and fire services

Open system not feeding directly from a tank
5. Electromagnetic Meters:
Inter-system sale or transfer
02526-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
Raw water
Basement or inside structure installations
Contract water
Above ground applications in potential hazardous chemical environs Meters
larger than 10-inch.
C. Meter size requirements to flow considerations
1. Meter flow range is dependent on amount of pressure and slightly varies with
manufacture.
Flow Range Max. Continuous Flow Meter Size

¼ - 25 GPM 15 GPM 5/8” Positive Displacement
¾ - 70 GPM 50 GPM 1” Positive Displacement
1 ¼ - 120 GPM 80 GPM 1 ½” Positive Displacement
1 ½ - 170 GPM 100 GPM 2” Positive Displacement

5 – 550 GPM 450 GPM 3” Turbine
15 – 1250 GPM 1000 GPM 4” Turbine
20 – 2500 GPM 2000 GPM 6” Turbine
30 – 4500 GPM 3500 GPM 8” Turbine
50 – 7000 GPM 5500 GPM 10” Turbine

½ - 450 GPM 350 GPM 3” Domestic Compound
¾ - 1250 GPM 1000 GPM 4” Domestic Compound
1 – 2000 GPM 1400 GPM 6” Domestic Compound
3/4 - 1200 GPM 1200 GPM 4” Fire Compound
1 ½ - 2500 GPM 2500 GPM 6” Fire Compound
2 – 4000 GPM 4000 GPM 8” Fire Compound
2 – 6500 GPM 6500 GPM 10” Fire Compound
D. Meter location preference hierarchy for 3” and larger applications
1. Outline by order of preference for Meter Easement location. Any installation

other than “D1.” requires approval from the Office of the City Engineer
(OCE).
a. Adjacent to Public ROW
b. Not adjacent to Public ROW with water line easement.
c. Parking garage
d. Mechanical room area of basement
02526-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
e. Public ROW
f. Above ground meter installations are required on potential hazardous

chemical environs, and meters larger than 10”.
2. Per chapter 7 of the City of Houston Design Manual, install separate tap and
service lead for each domestic meter. Irrigation meters are to be branched off
the domestic service.
Eligibility Requirements for Meter Easement Locations
Electric Special Meter

Water Min.
Meter Meter A.D.A. and Encroachment Vault, or
line P.A.E. Utility
Location Easement Requirements Phone Permit Meter Setup
Easement Spacing
Service Requirements
Grade Level
Easement
YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
Adjacent to
ROW
Grade Level
Easement
Not YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO
Adjacent to
ROW
Parking
YES **NO YES NO YES NO* NO YES
Garage
Mechanical
Room in YES **NO NO NO YES NO* NO YES
Basement
Public
NO NO NO YES NO YES YES YES
ROW
Above
Ground YES **NO YES NO YES NO NO YES
Installations
* Provided structure does not encroach ROW

** Provided meter is set adjacent to ROW
Acronym Definition:
P.A.E.- Permanent Access Easement.
A.D.A.- Americans with Disabilities Act.
ROW- Right of Way.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Water Meters:
02526-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Displacement Type: AWWA C 700; sizes 5/8 inch up to and including 2

inches; oscillating disc or piston of magnetic drive type; bolted split-case
design, with either being removable.
2. Turbine Type: AWWA C 701; Class II; sizes 1-1/2 inches through 10 inches;
flanged; straight-through measuring chamber; rotor construction:
polypropylene or similar non-rubber material with specific gravity of
approximately 1.0, equipped with near frictionless replaceable bearings in
turbine working against rotor shaft positioned thrust bearing. Transient/Fire
Hydrant Meter Inlet: Female fitting for attachment to hose nozzle with
National Standard Fire hose thread. Outlet: 2-inch nipple with National Pipe
Thread. Include restriction plate to limit flow through meter to 400 gpm at 65
psi. 1-1/2 inches through 8 inches are to be furnished with test plugs in the
outlet port of the meter for field testing.
3. Compound Type: AWWA C 702; sizes 2 inches through 6 inches. Measuring

chambers: For use in continuous operation; separate units of copper alloy
(minimum 84 percent copper) or approved polymer material, inert in corrosive
potable water; with centering device for proper positioning. Measuring
pistons: Non-pilot type with division plates of rubber covering vulcanized to
stainless steel or other approved material of sufficient thickness to provide
minimum piston oscillation noise. Measuring discs: Flat or conical type, one
piece, mounted on monel or 316 stainless steel spindle. Measuring chamber
strainer screen area: Twice area of main case inlet.
4. Fire-Service Type: sizes 4 inches through 10 inches; turbine-type, compound

type, proportional type; AWWA C 703, with separate check valve conforming
to AWWA C 510. Determine size of fire meter by adding fire flow and
domestic flow.
2.04 STRAINERS
A. Displacement Potable Water Meters 5/8 inch through 2 inches: Self-straining by

means of annular space between measuring chamber and external case or with
strainer screens installed in meter. Provide rigid screens which fit snugly, are easy to
remove, with effective straining area at least double that of main case inlet.
B. Potable Water Meters 2-inch diameter and larger: Equip with separate external
strainer with bronze body for diameters less than 8 inches. 8-inch diameter and larger
may be cast iron, hot- dipped galvanized or epoxy coating. Strainers: Bolted to inlet
side of meter, detachable from meter, easily removable lid. Strainer screen: Made of
rounded cast bronze, stainless steel wire, having nominal screen size of 3-1/2 mesh-
per-inch (U.S. Series) not less than 45 percent clear area.
C. Provide separate approved external strainers (when required by meter manufacturer)

approved for use in fire service metered connections by Underwriters Laboratories.
Bodies: Cast iron or copper alloy. Ends: Flanged in accordance with ASME B 16.1,
Class 125. Provide stainless steel basket. Strainers shall be detachable from meter.
02526-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
2.05 CONNECTIONS AND FITTINGS
A. Provide pipe for connections in accordance with Section 02501 - Ductile Iron Pipe
and Fittings and Section 02506 - Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe. Use restrained joints and
flanged joints only.
B. Fittings:
1. For meters 2 inches and smaller: Same type of fittings as Outlet End fittings
for Curb Stop in accordance with Section 02512 - Water Tap and Service Line
Installation.
2. For meters 3 inches and larger: Restrained ductile iron; push-on bell joints or
mechanical joint fittings between water line and meter vault; Class 125
flanged inside meter vaults; cement mortar lined and sealed.
2.06 LAYING LENGTHS
A. Minimum laying lengths for meter and standard strainer shall be as shown on
Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 TAPPING AND METER SERVICE INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Section 02525 - Tapping Sleeves and Valves for tapping requirements.
B. Meter Service Line:
1. Use pipe and fittings conforming to requirements of Section 02501 - Ductile

Iron Pipe and Fittings, or Section 02506 - Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe.
2. Limit pulling and deflecting of joints to limits recommended by manufacturer.
3. Make vertical adjustments with offset bends where room will permit.
Minimize number of bends as shown on detail drawings.
4. Provide minimum of ten pipe diameters of straight pipe length upstream and
downstream of meter vault.
3.02 METER FITTING HOOKUP
A. Support meter piping and meter, level and plumb, during installation. Support meters
3 inches and larger with concrete at minimum of two locations.
B. Use round flanged fittings inside meter box or vault except for mechanical joint to
flange adapter. Provide full-face 1/8-inch black neoprene or red rubber gasket
material on flanged joints. Provide bolts and nuts made from approved corrosion-
resistant material.
02526-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Tighten bolts in proper sequence and to correct torque.
D. Visually check for leaks under normal operating pressure following installation.
Repair or replace leaking components.
3.03 METER BOX AND VAULT INSTALLATION
A. Conform to requirements of Section 02085 - Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, and Meter
Vaults.
B. Perform adjustment to existing meter in accordance with Section 02085 - Valve

Boxes, Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults.
3.04 BASEMENT INSTALLATIONS FOR METERS
A. All piping within meter easement inside the building in basement must be welded
steel to conform to Section 02502 - Steel pipe and Fittings or restrained Ductile Iron
to conform to Section 02501 - Ductile Iron pipe and Fittings. All transitions from
PVC to Steel or Ductile iron must be made on the exterior side of the basement wall.
All materials must be on the City approved list of materials.
1. The meter piping must conform to the City of Houston detail drawings for
typical meter piping arrangement.
2. All pipes must be installed straight into the building.
B. 3” and larger meter installations for basements must be the Utility Customer Service
approved for billing electromagnetic meter from the City of Houston approved
products list.
C. The customer must provide a NEMA type 4 enclosure 20”H x 16”W x 10”D for the
mounting and containment of the meter electronics. The 120AC receptacle and phone
jack must be installed in the enclosure.
D. The customer must provide and maintain 120AC power and phone line within five
feet of the meter location.
1. The 120AC power must terminate with a GFI protected receptacle and be
connected to the structure’s emergency back up power.
E. The customer must provide a phone line which can be a shared phone line.
1. Phone line must terminate with a phone jack inside the service rack enclosure.
F. The customer will be required to give the City of Houston the appropriate size meter
easement to conform to the City of Houston Design Manual, with a minimum 8 feet
clearance between floor and ceiling.
02526-10
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Meters installed in an interior room must be fitted with double doors for easy
equipment access. A floor drain must be installed within the meter easement
for water drainage.
2. The meter must be placed on the same floor level that the service line enters
the structure. The service line must enter through the wall of the building. Use
link seal method for pipe penetration thru wall as shown in City of Houston
Detail Drawing.
3. The customer or property owner shall keep the space occupied by the meter
free from rubbish or obstruction of any kind, and provide access in accordance
to City of Houston Ordinance Chapter 47.
G. No signal from the meter will be shared, duplicated, or split for the customers use.
Once the meter is installed and accepted by the City of Houston the meter,
instruments, and all attachments becomes the sole property of the City of Houston.
3.05 CONTRACT METER INSTALLATIONS
A. All contract potable water and raw water accounts are required to install the Utility
Customer Service approved for billing electromagnetic meter from the City of
Houston approved product list.
1. With exception of Emergency Backup System meters EBS which will be the
approved mechanical type meter for the application.
B. All meter vaults must be designed to the City of Houston standard detail drawings.
1. Meter installations larger than 10” that cannot be installed within the standard
City vault, or meter installations in potential hazardous chemical environs
must be installed above ground.
2. The City of Houston Engineer’s office and the Meter Shop must approve an
above ground meter installation.
3. All above ground meter installations must be painted to City of Houston

specifications Section 02527 - Polyurethane Coatings on Steel or Ductile Iron
Pipe and have freeze protection.
4. Above ground meter installations must have an 8’tall perimeter fence with a
gate when it is not inside a water plant facility.
C. All meter installations require meter easements and require a water line easement
when meter easement is not adjacent to the City of Houston Right of Way.
1. All meters that are not located adjacent to the Public Right of Way must have
an all weather hard surface road to the meter location.
02526-11
CITY OF HOUSTON
D. All contract account customers must supply 120 AC voltage with a GFI receptacle
and phone service with phone jack to be terminated in a NEMA type 4 enclosure
20”H x 16”W x 10”D at the meter location.
1. Electrical service to the City of Houston meter station must be connected to

the back up generator when installed within the districts plant facility.
2. 1” PVC electrical conduit must be installed from the enclosure to the meter
for the meter electronics.
E. No customer will be allowed to share, spilt, duplicate, or disrupt any signal generated
from the City of Houston meter.
3.06 TESTING
A. Accuracy registration tests will be conducted in accordance with latest revision of

AWWA standard for type and size of meter.
1. Tests will be run by City of Houston on meters prior to installation at City's

meter repair shop. Meters 2-inches and smaller will be tested at random at
City's discretion. All 3 inches and larger meters will be tested.
2. Accuracy of displacement meters during guarantee period shall be as follows:
a. Initial period: of 18 months from date of shipment or 12 months from

date of installation: 98.5% to 101.5% at standard and minimum flow
rates; 98% to 101% at low flow rates.
b. Second period: AWWA new meter accuracy as tested below.
GUARANTEE PERIOD TEST FLOW RATE

Age of
Meter Size Meter Million* Minimum
(inches) Years or Gallons Rate (gpm)
5/8 >1 to <5 0.5 1/4
1 >1 to <5 1.0 3/4
1-1/2 >1 to <5 2.5 1-1/2
2 >1 to <5 5.5 2
* Total registration.
c. Third period: AWWA new meter accuracy for standard flow rates and
AWWA repair meter accuracy for minimum flow rate as tested below.
02526-12
CITY OF HOUSTON
GUARANTEE PERIOD TEST FLOW RATE

Meter Age of Standard Minimum
Size Meter Million* Flow Rate Rate
(inches) Years or Gallons (gpm) and (gpm)
5/8 >5 to <10 1.5 2-15 1/4
1 >5 to <10 2.5 4-40 3/4
1-1/2 >5 to <10 5.0 8-50 1-1/2
2 >5 to <10 10.0 15-100 2
* Total registration.
3. Minimal acceptable accuracy in percent of low flow registration for turbine

meters:
Meter Size Minimum Flow

(inches) (gpm) % Accuracy Required
2 3 95
3 5 95
4 15 95
6 20 95
8 20 95
10 30 95
END OF SECTION
02526-13
CITY OF HOUSTON POLYURETHANE COATINGS ON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION STEEL OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE
SECTION 02527
POLYURETHANE COATINGS ON STEEL OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Polyurethane coating system for use as steel pipe internal lining and external
coatings, and external coating for ductile iron pipe.
C. Section 02518 – Steel Pipe and Fittings for Large Diameter Water Lines
A. Unit Prices:
Include cost of polyurethane coatings in contract unit prices for steel pipe or
ductile iron pipe.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. AWWA C 222 - Polyurethane Coatings for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water
Pipe and Fittings.
B. ASTM D 16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and

Applications.
C. ASTM D 522 - Standard Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic
Coatings.
D. ASTM D 570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
E. ASTM D 4060 - Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings
by the Taber Abraser
02527-1
F. ASTM D 4541 - Standard Test Method for Pull Off Strength of Coatings Using
Portable Adhesion Testers
G. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
H. ASTM G 14 - Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Pipeline Coatings

(Falling Weight Test)
I. ASTM G 95 - Standard Test Method for Cathodic Disbondment Test of Pipeline

Coatings (Attached Cell Method)
J. NACE SP-0188 - Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New Protective Coatings
K. NAPF 500-03 - Surface Preparation Standard for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings in
Exposed Locations Receiving Special External Coatings and/or Special Internal
Linings
L. SSPC-PA 2 - Procedure for Determining Conformance to Dry Coating Thickness

Requirements.
M. SSPC-PA Guide 10 - Guide to Safety and Health for Industrial Painting Projects .
N. SSPC-SP 1 – Solvent Cleaning
O. SSPC-SP10 - Near-White Metal Blast Cleaning
P. SSPC-SP11 – Power-Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal
1.05 SAFETY
A. Secure, from manufacturer, Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for polyurethane
coatings and repair materials listed in this Section.
B. Safety requirements stated in this specification and in related sections apply in

addition to applicable federal, state and local rules and regulations. Comply with
instructions of coating manufacturer and requirements of insurance underwriters.
C. Follow handling and application practices of SSPC-PA Guide 10, and Coating
Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit coating manufacturer's catalog sheets, product data sheets, material data
sheets and other manufacturer’s information for all material provided. Include
manufacturer’s recommendation and instructions for surface preparation, application
and curing.
C. Quality Control Submittals. Furnish the following:
02527-2
1. Shop and field applicator’s experience with list of references substantiating

compliance. Submit references of 5 successful projects completed within the
last 3 years for each applicator. Each project listed should be at least 500
linear feet in length, unless otherwise approved by Project Manager.
2. Monitoring records for shop coated pipe, including coating “affidavit of

compliance” to requirements of this Section stating that coatings were applied
in factory, in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements, and AWWA
C222.
3. Factory applied coatings: Coating manufacturer’s certification stating that the

individual coating applicators have met the qualification certification
requirements as specified in this Section.
4. Upon request by Project Manager, provide:
a. Manufacturer’s coating application Quality Control Manual
b. Coating Performance Test report with statement that no reformulations

have been made subsequent to the coating tests performed for the
report.
c. Current test equipment calibration certificates
5. Provide administrative documents showing that QA/QC personnel in both

shop and field are certified as NACE International Coating Inspector (Level
III).
6. Field applied coatings: Environmental monitoring records.
A. Shop and Field Coating Applicator’s Experience and Certification:
1. Minimum 5 years’ practical experience in application of the specified

products required for Coating Applicator and the coating application
supervisor (Certified Applicator).
2. Minimum 2 years’ practical experience in application of the specified coating

system required for Coating application personnel whom have direct coating
application responsibility.
3. Certification by coating manufacturer as an approved coating applicator

required for Coating Applicator.
02527-3
B. Shop: Unless otherwise approved by Project Manager, coating manufacturer’s

technical representative to be present for a minimum of three calendar days for
technical assistance and instruction at the start of coating operations within the shop.
During this visit, technical representative to observe surface preparation and coating
application, and conduct or observe tests of coating to ensure conformance with
application instructions, recommended methods, and conditions.
A. Use standard closed containers to prevent gelling, thickening deleteriously or forming

of gas within period of one year from date of manufacture.
B. Label each container of separately packaged component clearly and durably to

indicate date of manufacture, manufacturer's batch number, quantity, color,
component identification and designated name or formula specification, number of
coatings together with special instructions. Do not use coating components older than
one year.
C. Deliver coating materials to pipe manufacturer in sealed containers showing

designated name, batch number, color, date of manufacture and name of coating
manufacturer.
D. Store material onsite in enclosures, out of direct sunlight in warm, ventilated and dry
area. Protect from freezing.
E. Prevent puncture, inappropriate opening or other action which may lead to product
contamination.
1.09 OBSERVATION OF WORK
A. Provide minimum 14 days advance notice to Project Manager before start of coating
or lining work to allow for scheduling of shop or field observation.
B. Provide full access to Project Manager for all facilities and documentation regarding
surface preparation, environmental conditions and coating applications.
C. Observation by Project Manager or waiver of observation does not relieve Contractor

of Contractor’s responsibility to perform work in accordance with Specifications.
D. Materials are subject to testing for conformance with this specification.
E. Project Manager may retain services of independent, third-party NACE CIP Level III-
Certified Inspector for partial or full-time inspection of the work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
02527-4
A. Supply coating material in new, undamaged, labeled, unopened containers clearly and
durably displaying date of manufacture, manufacturer’s batch number, component
identification, component color, manufacturer’s name and product name. Store and
handle in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Discard coating
material that exceeds manufacturer’s recommended shelf life, or is stored improperly,
prior to usage, and replace with new material.
B. Clean, prime, and coat surfaces of pipe and fittings in accordance with referenced
standards, written instructions by coating manufacturer, and these specifications.
C. Provide coating materials from single manufacturer. Product substitutions during

project are not permitted without approval from Project Manager.
2.02 COATING MATERIAL
A. Coating System: ASTM D16 Type V thermoset, aromatic polyurethane plastic

polymer in accordance with AWWA C222 (referred to as a polyurethane system).
B. Acceptable Materials:
1. DuraShield 110, 210, 310 (External), DuraShield 110-61 NSF, 210-61 NSF,
310-61 NSF (Internal), by LifeLast Inc., Pflugerville, TX,
2. CorroPipe 3000 (External), CorroPipe II PW (Internal) by Sherwin-Williams,

Minneapolis, MN,
3. Protec II (External), Protec II PW (Internal) by ITW PolySpec/Futura

Coatings, Houston, TX,
4. Polyclad 777PL (External), Polyclad 767 (Internal) by Carboline, St. Louis,

MO,
5. or approved equal.
C. Cured Coating Properties. In accordance with AWWA C222 except as follows:
1. ASTM E 96 Permeance using Water Procedure BW (App. X1): no more than

0.16 inch-lb.
2.03 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. The requirements listed below are for surface preparation procedures in the factory.
For surface preparation in the field, refer to PART 3 – Execution.
B. Steel Pipe. In accordance with coating manufacturer’s requirements.
C. Ductile Iron Pipe. Prepare surface in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations and NAPF 500-03.
02527-5
1. Provide uncoated ductile iron pipe when polyurethane coatings are used. Do
not apply asphaltic coating to ductile iron pipe and then attempt to remove
prior to polyurethane coating application.
2. Do not apply surface preparation that is designed for steel pipe to ductile iron
pipe. Unlike steel surfaces, it is possible to over blast the external surface of
ductile iron pipe. Consult ductile iron pipe and polyurethane coating
manufacturer regarding method of application and surface preparation to be
used.
2.04 FACTORY APPLICATION OF POLYURETHANE
A. Equipment: As required by manufacturer.
B. Temperature: Minimum 5 degrees F above dew point temperature. Temperature of

surface shall not be less than 50 degrees F during application or as per manufacturers
recommendation.
C. Humidity: Heating of pipe surfaces may be required when relative humidity exceeds
80 percent.
D. Do not thin or mix resins; use as received. Store resins at temperature above 55
degrees F at all times or as manufacturers recommendation.
E. Application: Conform to coating manufacturer's recommendations. Apply directly to

substrate to achieve specified thickness. Multiple-pass, one-coat application process
is permitted provided maximum allowable recoat time specified by coating
manufacturer is not exceeded.
F. Recoat only when coating has cured less than maximum time specified by coating
manufacturer. When coating has cured for more than recoat time, follow coating
manufacturers recommendations for recoating.
G. Cure and perform cure test in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations prior
to handling, inspection, testing, and placement in service.
2.05 FACTORY INSPECTION
A. Project Manager may inspect coatings at coating applicator's facilities.
B. Inspection procedures to be in accordance with AWWA C222. Conduct inspection

any time after coating has reached initial cure. Repair in accordance with
manufacturer’s requirements and these specifications. Remove rejected coating from
the full length of pipe to bare metal and reapply using proper application methods.
2.06 HOLDBACK COATING SYSTEM
02527-6
A. Provide holding primer for corrosion protection of cutbacks or holdbacks compatible

with specified joint coating system and weld after backfill requirements, where
applicable.
B. Holdback coating to prevent corrosion of prepared pipe ends for duration of storage
and construction, and recommended for buried exposures.
C. Primer should not result in running or melting of coating and causing toxic fumes
when heated during welding on weld after backfill joints.
D. Apply holding primer in accordance with primer manufacturer’s recommendations,

but maintain clearances required for proper joint installation as recommended by pipe
manufacturer.
E. Ductile Iron Joints: Apply coating to unlined pipe surfaces including inside of bell
socket and outside of spigot. Coating thickness on sealing areas of spigot end of pipe
exterior: minimum 8 mils (0.008 inch), maximum of 10 mils (0.010 inch). Maximum
10 mils may be exceeded in spigot end provided maximum spigot diameter as
specified by pipe manufacturer is not exceeded and approved by pipe manufacturer.
F. Welded joints:
1. Field welded on the inside: Provide four-inch coating holdback on spigot end
and six-inch coating holdback on bell end.
2. Field welded on the outside: Provide six-inch coating holdback on the spigot
end, and four-inch coating holdback on the bell end.
2.07 THICKNESS
A. External Coatings: Minimum DFT of 25 mils (0.025 inch).
B. Internal Coatings (Linings): Minimum DFT of 25 mils.
C. Thickness Determinations: Use Type 1 magnetic thickness gauge as described in

SSPC-PA2. No single gauge reading may be less than specified thickness.
D. Do not accept pipe with deficient coating thickness. If pipe in field is found to have a
coating thickness as measured by SSPC PA-2 that is less than the specified thickness,
the pipe segment shall be rejected.
2.08 FACTORY REPAIR OF INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL COATINGS
A. The procedures listed below are for repairs made to internal and external coatings in
the factory. For field repairs, see Part 3 – Execution.
B. Defect size is defined as follows: Minor – less than 6 inches by greatest dimension.
Major – exceeds 6 inches by greatest dimension.
02527-7
C. General
1. Repair areas where holidays are detected or coating is visually damaged, such
as blisters, bubbles, cuts, or other defects.
2. Provide coating repair materials that are compatible with the shop-applied
coating system and approved by coating manufacturer.
3. Provide repair materials as required for the coating system and repair
classification.
D. Repair Materials:
1. Provide polyurethane, single use kits that are supplied by parent coating
manufacturer.
2. For major repairs in the shop, reapply using plural component spray
equipment by a manufacturer certified coating applicator.
E. For internal coatings, five repairs maximum allowed per 100 square feet of pipe for
internal linings. If this number is exceeded, pipe must be stripped of lining, re-
blasted, and recoated in factory.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FIELD ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
A. General
1. Do not apply coatings when:
a. Surface or ambient temperatures exceed the maximum or minimum

temperatures recommended by the coating manufacturer.
b. In dust or smoke-laden atmosphere, blowing dust or debris, or under

conditions that can cause icing on metal surface.
c. When it is expected surface temperatures may drop below 5 degrees

above dew point within 4 hours after application of coating.
d. Whenever relative humidity exceeds 85 percent or the maximum

recommended by the coating manufacturer.
2. When weather conditions dictate, provide and operate heaters and

dehumidification equipment to allow pipe surfaces to be prepared and coated
as specified and in accordance with the manufacturers coating application
recommendations.
02527-8
3. Do not proceed with surface preparation and coating application activities

until adequate temperature and humidity controls are in place and functioning
within environmental limits specified.
4. Monitor ambient temperature, relative humidity, dew point, temperature, and

pipe surface temperature (work area only) in strict conformance with
manufacturer’s requirements, but not greater than 5 hours between
measurements. Document and submit environmental monitoring records to
Project Manager upon completion, if requested.
3.02 PIPE INSTALLATION
A. When required by Project Manager, provide services of pipe manufacturer's

representative for period of not less than 2 weeks at beginning of actual pipe laying
operations to advise Contractor regarding installation including but not limited to
handling and storing, cleaning and inspecting, coatings repairs, and general
construction methods as to how they may affect pipe coatings.
B. When required by Project Manager, coating manufacturer’s technical representative

to provide a written report to the Project Manager for each visit. Include copies of test
data collected, description of observations, and all recommended corrective actions.
Submit within five working calendar days after the visit. After corrective actions are
complete, representative to certify application complies with manufacturer’s coating
application recommendations.
C. Use nylon straps, padded lifts and padded storage skids. Field cuts should be kept to
minimum. Repair damage to coating due to handling or construction practices.
D. Just before each section of pipe is to be placed into trench, conduct visual and holiday
inspection in accordance with AWWA C222. Repair defects in coating system before
pipe is installed.
E. For field-welded joints, drape minimum 18-inch wide strip of heat-resistant material
over top half of pipe on each side of the coating holdback to protect from weld
spatter.
F. Provide transition from cement mortar lining to polyurethane lining in accordance

with coating manufacturer’s recommendations and as approved by Project Manager.
3.03 FIELD REPAIR AND TOUCHUP
A. Apply repair and touchup materials in conformance with manufacturer’s

recommendations.
B. Repair Procedure – Joints:
02527-9
1. External Joints. Provide heat shrink sleeve in accordance with Section 02518
– Steel Pipe for Large Diameter Water Lines. Metal surface must be free of all
dirt, dust, and surface corrosion prior to sleeve application. Where corrosion
in the holdback area is visible, prepare surface in accordance with SSPC-
SP11, Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal for steel pipe, or NAPF 500-03-03
Power Tool Cleaning for ductile iron pipe
2. Internal Joints. Prepare surface and provide environmental controls in

a. Remove oil or grease by solvent wiping pipe and adjacent coating in

accordance with SSPC-SP1, Solvent Cleaning.
b. Clean pipe surface in accordance with SSPC-SP11, Power-Tool

Cleaning to Bare Metal or abrasively blast in the field in accordance
with SSPC-SP10, Near-White Metal Blast Cleaning. Clean the full
circumference of the pipe and feather the edges of the existing
polyurethane coating a minimum of two inches.
c. Remove loose or damaged pipe lining at joint and repair as specified

herein, or extend joint lining.
d. Apply lining material by hand or spray equipment. Provide material

that is compatible with shop lining and approved by manufacturer.
e. Provide a NACE Level II or III inspector experienced with the applied

coating system to inspect surface preparation of the joint lining and
document application conditions. Submit documentation to Project
Manager.
C. Repair Procedure – Field Defects:
1. Repair Materials (subject to Project Manager’s approval):
a. Heat-applied repair patches
b. Single use polyurethane coating kits that control mix ratios
c. Coating manufacturer’s polyurethane coating repair products
2. Repair Procedures:
a. Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC-SP1 for steel pipe or NAPF

500-03-01 for ductile iron pipe.
b. Power tool clean in accordance with SSPC-SP11 for steel pipe and
NAPF 500-03-03 for ductile iron pipe. Feather the coating and provide
overlap in accordance with a manufacturer’s recommendations.
02527-10
c. Apply repair material as described above in accordance with

d. If a heat-applied repair patch is used, do not overlap patches or use

more than one patch for a single repair. If repair area exceeds the size
of a single patch, use alternate repair method as listed above.
D. Repair Procedure - Thermite Brazed Connection Bonds:
1. Remove polyurethane coating with power wire brush from area on metal
surface which is to receive thermite brazed connection.
2. Grind metal surface to shiny metal with power grinder and coarse grit
grinding wheel.
3. Apply thermite-brazed connection using equipment, charge and procedure

recommended by manufacturer of thermite equipment.
4. Drape minimum 18-inch wide strip of heat-resistant material over top half of
pipe on all sides during welding to protect from weld spatter.
5. After welded surface has cooled to temperature below 130 degrees F, apply
protective coating repair material to weld, exposed pipe surface and damaged
areas of polyurethane coating. A heat-applied repair patch may be used as
6. Do not cover or backfill freshly repaired areas of coating at thermite-brazed

connection until repair material has completely cured. Allow material to cure
in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
02527-11
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT/WRAP
SECTION 02528
POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT/WRAP
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Polyethylene encasement that may be part of the corrosion protection system for pipe,
valves, fittings, and other appurtenances in ductile or cast iron systems.
A. Unit Prices.
1. No separate payment will be made for polyethylene wrap. Include cost of

polyethylene wrap in unit price for pipes and fittings to be wrapped.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 149 – Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and
Dielectric Strength of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials at Commercial Power
Frequencies.
B. ASTM D 882 – Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting.
C. ASTM D 1709 – Standard Test Methods for Impact Resistance of Plastic Film by the
Free- Falling Dart Method.
D. ASTM D 1922 – Standard Test Method for Propagation Tear Resistance of Plastic
Film and Thin Sheeting by Pendulum Method.
E. ASTM D 4976 – Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Molding and

Extrusion Materials.
F. AWWA C105/A21.5 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems.
02528-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
G. AWWA C600 – Standard for Installation of Ductile-Iron Mains and Their

Appurtenances.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal Procedures: Submit product data in accordance with Section 01330 -

Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit product data for proposed film, and tape or plastic tie straps for
approval. All film to be used in accordance with this standard specification will be
manufactured from virgin polyethylene, will not be recycled and shall be purchased
new for the project, clean, sound and without defects.
C. Samples: Submit samples of polyethylene tube and/or sheet for approval. Provide one
sample of tube for each pipe diameter and one sample of each sheet material to be
used. Samples will be a minimum of 40 square feet of standard production material.
D. Quality Assurance Plan: Submit quality assurance plans for film manufacturing and
field application.
1. Film Manufacturing: The manufacturer of polyethylene film for corrosion

protection encasement of ductile iron pipe will have a verifiable quality
control system to assure that film is produced from only virgin polyethylene
and that it complies with all requirements of this specification. Documentation
of Quality Control procedures and test results will be submitted and will be
made available for inspection for at least one year subsequent to delivery to
job site.
2. Field Application: The contractor will develop, and submit for approval, a
comprehensive Quality Assurance Plan for installation of polyethylene
encasement. Address all aspects of material and pipe handling, bedding,
preparation of pipe surface, film installation and anchoring, service taps and
backfill. Include written procedures to be used by installers.
E. Manufacturer’s Certification: Submit polyethylene film manufacturer's certification

of compliance with this Section. The polyethylene film manufacturer will provide a
notarized statement from an officer of the company that the film meets the inspection
and all applicable material specifications of this specification. The manufacturer’s
statement of compliance must be verifiable. Statements from distributors or
contractors will not be accepted in lieu of a statement from the original manufacturer
of the polyethylene film.
F. Installer Qualifications: Polyethylene encasement will only be installed by qualified

persons who have been trained in the proper procedures described in Part 3 of these
specifications.
02528-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Qualified Persons: Qualified persons shall be those that have had training and
experience in the installation of polyethylene encasement for corrosion
protection of ductile iron pipe. Such persons may be qualified by the Ductile
Iron Pipe Research Association, ductile iron pipe manufacturers or
engineering/inspection firms who offer training courses in the proper
method(s) of installation. Proof of qualifications shall be submitted with the
shop drawings and shall be provided to project inspectors upon request.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Polyethylene Film: Tubular or sheet form without tears, breaks or defects,

conforming to the following requirements.
1. High-Density, Cross-Laminated, Polyethylene: High–density, cross-laminated

polyethylene film manufactured from virgin polyethylene material
conforming to the following:
a. Raw Material. Raw materials to meet the requirements of ASTM D

4976:
(1) Group: 2 (Linear)
(2) High-density: 0.940 to 0.960 g/cm3
(3) Volume resistivity: 1015 ohm-cm, minimum
b. Physical Properties. Physical properties of finished film to be as

follows:
(1) Tensile Strength: 6,300 psi, minimum in machine and

transverse direction (ASTM D 882).
(2) Elongation: 100 percent, minimum in machine and transverse

direction (ASTM D 882) as measured using rubber lined grips.
(3) Dielectric Strength: 800 volts/mil thickness, minimum (ASTM

D 149)
(4) Impact Resistance: 800 grams, minimum (ASTM D 1709

Method B)
(5) Propagation Tear Resistance: 250 grams force, minimum in

machine and transverse direction (ASTM D1922)
02528-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
c. Thickness: High-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film shall have

a nominal thickness of 0.004 in. (4 mils) with a minus 10% tolerance.
Nowhere shall the film be less than 0.0036 (3.6 mils).
d. Color: Supply white or black polyethylene film with a minimum 2

percent hindered-amine ultraviolet inhibitor.
e. Polyethylene Tube and Sheet Size: For push-on joint pipe,

polyethylene tube and sheet sizes to conform to the following:
Nominal Pipe Diameter Minimum Polyethylene Width

(Inches) (Inches)
Flat Tube Sheet

3 14 28
4 14 28
6 16 32
8 20 40
10 24 48
12 27 54
14 30 60
16 34 68
18 37 74
20 41 82
24 54 108
30 67 134
36 81 162
42 81 162
48 95 190
54 108 216
60 108 216
64 121 242
2. Large Bell Circumferences: Where bell ends of the pipe are larger than the
sheet sizes listed above, use sufficiently large tubes or sheets to cover the
joints.
3. Marking: The polyethylene film will be clearly marked every two feet with
the following information. Letters and numerals used for marking items "a"
through "e" shall not be less than 1 inch in height and item "f" shall not be less
than 1 1/2 inches in height.
a. Manufacturer's name or trademark
02528-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
b. Year of manufacture
c. AWWA C105/A21.5
d. Minimum film thickness and material type (HDCLPE)
e. Applicable range of nominal pipe diameter size(s)
f. Warning – Corrosion Protection – Repair Any Damage
B. Plastic Tape: Provide 1 ½-inch wide, 6 mil thick, PVC tape with 5 mils of PVC
backing and 1 mil of rubber adhesive for fitting, anchoring and repairing the
encasement.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Remove lumps of clay, mud, and cinders from pipe surface prior to installation of
polyethylene encasement. Prevent soil or embedment material from becoming trapped
between pipe and polyethylene.
B. Fit polyethylene film to contour of pipe to effect a snug, but not tight fit; encase with
minimum space between polyethylene and pipe. Allow sufficient slack in contouring
to prevent stretching polyethylene where it bridges irregular surfaces, such as bell-
spigot interfaces, bolted joints, or fittings, and to prevent damage to polyethylene due
to backfilling operations. Secure overlaps and ends with adhesive tape to hold
polyethylene encasement in place until backfilling operations are complete.
C. For installations below water table or in areas subject to tidal actions, seal both ends
of polyethylene tube with adhesive tape at joint overlap. Circumferentially wrap with
tape, every two feet along the barrel.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Tubular Type (Method A):
1. Cut polyethylene tube to a length approximately 2 feet longer than pipe

section. Slip tube around pipe, centering tube to provide 1-foot overlap on
each adjacent pipe section. Bunch accordion-fashion lengthwise until it clears
pipe ends.
2. Make shallow bell hole at joints to facilitate installation of polyethylene tube

completely around pipe. Lower pipe into trench and make up pipe joint with
preceding section of pipe. Methods other than bell holes shall be allowed,
provided the polyethylene tube completely encases the pipe joints, including a
minimum overlap of 1-foot.
02528-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
3. After assembling pipe joint, make overlap of polyethylene tube. Pull bunched
polyethylene from preceding length of pipe, slip it over end of adjoining
length of pipe, and secure in place. Then slip end of polyethylene from
adjoining pipe section over end of first wrap until it overlaps joint at end of
preceding length of pipe. Secure overlap in place.
4. For each pipe length, take up slack width at top of pipe to make a snug, but
not tight, fit along barrel of pipe, securing fold with tape at quarter points.
Avoid a tight fit to prevent stretching the polyethylene where it bridges
irregular surfaces, such as bell and spigot joints, restrained and bolted joints,
and fittings; and to prevent damage to film during backfilling. The length of
tape to secure wrap shall be no less than 1-foot.
5. Repair cuts, tears, punctures, or other damage to polyethylene. Proceed with

installation of next section of pipe in same manner.
B. Tubular Type (Method B):
1. Cut polyethylene tube to a length approximately 1 foot shorter than pipe

section. Slip tube around pipe, centering it to provide 6 inches of bare pipe at
each end.
2. Make shallow bell hole at joints to facilitate installation of polyethylene tube

completely around pipe. Lower pipe into trench and make up pipe joint with
preceding section of pipe. Methods other than bell holes shall be allowed,
provided the polyethylene tube completely encases the pipe joints, including a
minimum overlap of 1-foot.
3. Take up slack width at top of pipe to make a snug, but not tight, fit along
barrel of pipe, securing fold with tape at quarter points. Avoid a tight fit to
prevent stretching the polyethylene where it bridges irregular surfaces, such as
bell and spigot joints, restrained and bolted joints, and fittings; and to prevent
damage to film during backfilling. The length of tape to secure wrap shall be
no less than 1-foot.
4. Before making up joint, slip 4-foot length of polyethylene tube over end of
preceding pipe section, bunching in accordion-fashion lengthwise. After
completing joint, pull 4- foot length of polyethylene over joint, overlapping
polyethylene previously placed on each adjacent section of pipe by at least 1
foot; make each end snug and secure.

C. Sheet Type (Method C) – Applicable to Valves, Tees, Elbows and Other Fittings
Only:
02528-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Cut polyethylene sheet to a length approximately 2 feet longer than pipe

section. Center length to provide 1-foot overlap on each adjacent pipe section,
bunching sheet until it clears pipe ends. Wrap polyethylene around pipe so
that sheet circumferentially overlaps top quadrant of pipe. Secure cut edge of
polyethylene sheet at intervals of approximately 3 feet.
2. Lower wrapped pipe into trench and make up pipe joint with preceding
section of pipe. Make shallow bell hole at joints to facilitate installation of
polyethylene. After completing joint, make overlap and secure ends.

D. Installation in Augured Hole or Directional Drilled Bore:
E. Install as described in 3.02A. Tubular Type (Method A) with the exception that the
polyethylene encasement overlap must face away from the pull direction to avoid the
under film accumulation of drilling mud and other foreign matter.
F. Attach pulling head to spigot end of the leading pipe length.
G. Securely anchor the polyethylene tube to the end of the barrel of the leading pipe
length by continuously taping the leading two feet of the barrel with overlapping tape
wrap. Anchor the first wraps of tape directly on to the barrel of the pipe and extend
the continuous taping on to the polyethylene encasement. For the remainder of the
leading pipe length, overlap circumferential wraps of tape every one foot.
H. The drilling fluid and cuttings shall not enter under the polyethylene tube during the
pull back or other operations. At assembled joints, the polyethylene overlap shall
always have the forward pipe’s polyethylene tube overlap the next following pipe’s
tube. The polyethylene on both sides of the joint shall be secured with circumferential
wraps of tape or plastic tie straps.
I. Continue process by wrapping tape on each side of successive joints and every two
feet along barrel.
J. Pipe-shaped Appurtenances: Cover bends, reducers, offsets, and other pipe-shaped

appurtenances with polyethylene in same manner as pipe.
K. Odd-shaped Appurtenances: When it is not practical to wrap valves, tees, crosses, and
other odd- shaped pieces in tube, wrap with flat sheet or split length of polyethylene
tube by passing sheet around appurtenance and encasing it. Make seams by bringing
edges together, folding over twice, and taping down. At valve stems and other
penetrations, secure polyethylene film with tape.
02528-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
L. Openings in Encasement: Create openings for branches, saddles, service taps,

blowoffs, air valves, and similar appurtenances by making an X-shaped cut in
polyethylene and temporarily folding back film. After appurtenance is installed, tape
slack securely to appurtenance and repair cut, as well as other damaged area in
polyethylene, with tape.
M. Hydrant Drain Relief: For hydrant relief holes and similar orifices, apply 3 wraps of
tape completely around the polyethylene encased pipe, then, with a utility knife, cut a
hole in the tape and polyethylene that is 1-inch larger in diameter than the
orifice/opening.
N. Direct Service Taps: For direct service taps, apply 3 wraps of tape completely around
the polyethylene encased pipe to cover the area where the tapping machine and chain
will be mounted. After the tapping machine is mounted, install the corporation stop
directly through the tape and polyethylene. After the direct tap is completed, the
entire circumferential area shall be closely inspected and repaired as needed.
O. Service Connections: Wrap service lines of copper and other dissimilar metals with
polyethylene or suitable dielectric tape for a minimum clear distance of 3 feet away
from the cast or ductile iron pipe. Surface preparation and method of application shall
follow tape manufacturer’s written instructions.
P. Junctions between Wrapped and Unwrapped Pipe: Where polyethylene-wrapped pipe

joins an adjacent pipe that is not wrapped, extend polyethylene wrap to cover adjacent
pipe for at least 3 feet. Secure end with circumferential turns of tape.
Q. Installation of Pipe through Casings: Polyethylene encasement shall be used for pipe
through casings. Use a single layer of polyethylene film. Casing spacers (insulated
type) and casing end seals shall be installed. Do not damage the polyethylene film
where these devices are attached to the pipe, over the encasement.
3.03 REPAIRS
A. Repair any cuts, tears, punctures, or damage to polyethylene with adhesive tape or
with short length of polyethylene sheet or cut open tube, wrapped around pipe to
cover damaged area, and secured in place.
3.04 BACKFILL
A. Use the same backfill material as that specified for pipe without polyethylene wrap.
Prevent damage to the polyethylene wrap when placing backfill. Assure backfill
material is free from cinders, refuse, boulders, rocks, stones, or other material that
could damage the polyethylene. Follow AWWA C600 for backfilling.
A. Freedom from Defects: All polyethylene film shall be clean, sound and free from
defects.
02528-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Inspection: All parts of this Section are subject to inspection by the City of Houston
or its designated representative.
C. Non-Compliance: The Contractor will correct any deficiencies in materials or

installation at Contractor’s expense, including excavating the pipe subsequent to
backfilling and re-installing the polyethylene wrap.
END OF SECTION
02528-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION TAPE COATINGS ON STEEL PIPE
SECTION 02529
TAPE COATINGS ON STEEL PIPE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Preparing surfaces, providing adequate conditions for proper workmanship,

furnishing, and applying tape coatings on external surfaces of steel pipe.
A. Unit Prices.
1. No separate payment will be made for tape coatings. Include payment in unit
prices for items to which coatings are applied.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. AWWA C 209 - Tape Coatings for Steel Water Pipe and Fittings
B. AWWA C 214 – Tape Coatings for Steel Water Pipe
C. AWWA C 216 – Heat-Shrinkable Cross-Linked Polyolefin Coatings for Steel Water

Pipe and Fittings
D. NACE Standard RP 02 74 - High Voltage Electrical inspection of Pipeline Coatings

Prior to Installation
E. SSPC SP 1 – Solvent Cleaning
F. SSPC SP 6 – Commercial Blast Cleaning
1.05 SUBMITTALS
02529-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Submit tape manufacturer’s catalog sheets, product data sheets, material data sheets
and other information for all material provided. Include manufacturer’s
recommendation and instructions for surface preparation.
C. Quality Control Submittals. Furnish the following:
1. Shop and field applicator's experience with list of references substantiating

compliance. Submit references of 5 successful projects completed within the
last 3 years for each applicator. Each project listed should be at least 500
linear feet in length, unless otherwise approved by Project Manager.
2. Shop applied coatings:
a. Coating manufacturer's certification stating that the individual coating

applicators have met the qualification certification requirements as
specified in this Section.
b. Monitoring records, including coating "affidavit of compliance" to

requirements of this Section stating that coatings were applied in
factory, in accordance with manufacturer's requirements, and AWWA
C214.
3. Upon request by Project Manager, provide:
a. Manufacturer's coating application Quality Control Manual
b. Coating Performance Test report with statement that no reformulations

have been made subsequent to the coating tests performed for the
report.
c. Current test equipment calibration certificates
4. Provide administrative documents showing that QA/QC personnel in both

shop and field are certified as NACE International Coating Inspector (Level
III).
A. Shop and Field Coating Applicator’s Experience and Certification:
1. Minimum 5 years’ practical experience in application of tape coating.
2. Certification by tape coating manufacturer as an approved applicator.
02529-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Shop: Unless otherwise approved by Project Manager, coating manufacturer’s

technical representative to be present for a minimum of three calendar days for
technical assistance and instruction at the start of tape coating application within the
shop. During this visit, technical representative to observe surface preparation and
coating application, and conduct or observe tests of coating to ensure conformance
with application instructions, recommended methods, and conditions.
C. Project Manager may retain services of independent, third-party NACE CIP Level III-
1.07 OBSERVATION OF WORK
A. Provide full access to Project Manager for all facilities and documentation regarding
surface preparation, environmental conditions and coating applications.
B. Require the protective coating manufacturer to furnish a qualified technical

representative to visit the project site for technical support as may be necessary to
resolve field problems attributable to or associated with manufacturer’s products.
C. Materials are subject to testing for conformance with this specification.
D. Project Manager may retain services of independent, third-party NACE Level III-
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SHOP-APPLIED TAPE COATING
A. Prefabricated polyolefin tape applied as a four layer system consisting of liquid

adhesive, corrosion-preventive tape (inner layer), mechanical protective tape
(intermediate layer), and mechanical-protective tape (outer layer) in accordance with
AWWA C214.
1. For steel pipe fittings, provide hand-applied tape wrap in accordance with
AWWA C209 or heat shrink sleeves in accordance with AWWA C216.
B. Acceptable Materials:
1. Polyken® YGIII by Berry Plastics,
2. or approved equal.
C. Provide one 20 mil inner layer for corrosion protection and two 30 mil layers of
intermediate and outer tape for mechanical protection. Total nominal thickness: 80
mil.
D. At outlets, prior to applying tape, provide approved filler putty to fill in gap for
smooth, sloped transition between top of reinforcing plate and pipe.
02529-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
E. Liquid Adhesive: Compatible with tape coating, supplied by coating system

manufacturer.
F. Coating holdback: 4 to 4 ½ inches from joint end to facilitate joining and welding of
pipe. Taper successive layers by 1 inch staggers to facilitate field wrapping and
welding of joints.
G. Width: 12 or 18 inches.
H. Do not expose tape coating to direct sunlight longer than recommended by the tape
coating manufacturer.
A. Expel moisture from pipe surface prior to application using pre-heating.
B. Clean bare pipe from mud, mill lacquer, wax, oil, grease, rust, mill scale or other
contaminants. Inspect and clean surfaces according to SSPC SP 1. Allow cleaning
solvent to dry prior to coating application.
C. Blast clean in accordance with SSPC SP-6. Provide anchor profile of at least 1.5 mils,
but no greater than 3.0 mils.
D. Remove surface imperfections such as slivers, scabs, burrs, weld spatter, and gouges
by hand filling or grinding. Presence of metallic defects may be cause for rejection of
pipe.
E. Before applying inner-layer tape, grind weld seams flush for a distance of 18 in. along
the length of pipe on both ends.
F. Cover weld seams with stripping tape when weld reinforcement is greater than 3/32
in. or if profile and position of weld seam prevents conformability of tape coating to
the steel surface.
2.03 SHOP APPLICATION
A. Follow procedures as recommended by tape coating manufacturer.
B. Separate tape dispensing equipment far enough apart to visually inspect continuous
steps.
C. Make cutbacks straight and for total thickness of coating.
D. State of dryness of liquid adhesive prior to application of weld strip and inner layer of
tape to be in accordance with written recommendation of manufacturer.
E. Apply weld strip tape over liquid adhesive and extend minimum of one inch on each
side of weld seam. Weld strip tape may contact rollers as long as release liner is in
place and adhesion requirements are met.
02529-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
F. Remove release liner of weld strip tape before applying inner layer of tape.
G. Spirally apply inner layer of tape in direction of pipe helix weld. Overlap each spiral
of tape 1 inch or greater with next successive spiral of tape applied.
H. Perform electrical inspection of inner layer of tape before intermediate layer of tape is
applied. If holiday is detected, repair immediately using manufacturer-approved tape
patch, prior to applying intermediate layer of tape. Patch to extend minimum 3-inches
in all directions. Perform electrical retest at repaired area, and if no holidays are
found, proceed with outer layer application.
I. Repair holidays visually or electrically discovered in completed tape coating by

peeling back and removing outer intermediate and inner layers from damaged area.
Repair exposed area by applying liquid adhesive and a layer of inner tape or inner
tape patch. Provide lap of 4-inches minimum in all directions. Re-test repaired area
with holiday detector. If no holidays are found, cover with intermediate and outer-
layer tape patches with minimum lap of 4 inches in all directions beyond inner-tape
patch.
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Inspect pipe coating for holidays and damage to coating.
B. Until final acceptance of the coatings, furnish inspection devices in good working
condition for the detection of holidays. Provide the services of a Level II or III NACE
certified coating inspector for all holiday detection work until the final acceptance of
such coatings. Operate holiday inspection devices in the presence of the Project
Manager.
C. Perform test procedure in accordance with NACE Standard RP 02 74. Perform

electrical holiday test with 60 cycle current audio detector. Use test voltage below:
Total Nominal Coating Thickness

Test Voltage (Volts)
(mils)
70 11,500
80 12,000
3.02 FIELD REPAIRS
A. If test indicates no holidays and outer or intermediate wrap is torn, remove damaged
layers of tape by carefully cutting with sharp razor-type knife. Apply holiday detector
to exposed area to confirm that no damage has been made to inner tape layer. Wash
with Xylol area to be patched and at least 4 inches of undamaged tape where hand
applied tape wrap will overlap. Replace each layer of tape with a tape patch with
minimum 4-inches overlap in all directions as specified by manufacturer.
02529-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. If test indicates holiday, remove outer and intermediate layers and expose inner wrap.
Prime exposed area and overlaps with light coat of liquid adhesive. Firmly press into
place patch of two 35 mil inner wrap tape extending 4 inches from affected area in all
directions. Second patch to overlap first patch by 4 inches. Perform holiday test of
patch to verify satisfactory installation. Wash exposed outer wrap tape with Xylol and
prime with liquid adhesive. Place outer layer patch with an overlap of 4-inches in all
directions.
C. For severe outer or intermediate wrap tape tears or damage, and holiday is not
detected, remove outer wrap to boundaries of damaged area, taking care not to
damage inner wrap coating. Before replacing outer and intermediate wraps, apply
holiday detector to exposed area to determine that no damage has been made to the
primary coating. After verification that no holidays exist in underlying tape, clean
damaged area and use repair patch. Apply as specified herein for repair of areas
where bare pipe is exposed.
D. Do not allow bubbles in tape coating regardless of holiday test results. Cut out
bubbles and patch as described above.
E. Perform surface preparation and coating applications in the presence of the Project
Manager, or Project Manager’s appointed NACE certified coating inspector, unless
Project Manager has granted prior approval to perform the work in their absence.
F. Inspection by the Project Manager or the NACE certified inspector, or the waiver of
inspection of any particular portion of the work, does not relieve the Contractor of the
Contractor’s responsibility to perform the Work in accordance with these
Specifications.
END OF SECTION
02529-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS
SECTION 02531
GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Gravity sanitary sewers and appurtenances, including stacks and service connections.
C. Section 01555 – Traffic Control and Regulation
E. Section 02081 – Cast-In-Place Concrete Manholes
F. Section 02082 – Precast Concrete Manholes
G. Section 02083 – Fiberglass Manholes
H. Section 02090 – Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers

Debris
N. Section 02427 – Plastic Liner for Large-Diameter Concrete Sewers and Structures
O. Section 02501 – Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings
P. Section 02504 – Fiberglass Reinforced Pipe
Q. Section 02505 – High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Solid and Profile Wall Pipe
R. Section 02506 – Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe
02531-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
S. Section 02508 – Extra Strength Clay Pipe
T. Section 02532 – Sanitary Sewer Force Mains
U. Section 02533 – Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers
V. Section 02534 – Sanitary Sewer Service Stubs or Reconnections
W. Section 02550 – Sliplining Sanitary Sewers
X. Section 02556 – Cured-In-Place Pipe
Y. Section 02558 – Cleaning and Television Inspection
Z. Section 02571 – Pipe Bursting/Crushing Sanitary Sewers
AA. Section 02611 – Reinforced Concrete Pipe
BB. Section 02911 – Topsoil
CC. Section 02921 – Hydro Mulch Seeding
DD. Section 02922 – Sodding
EE. Section 02951 – Pavement Repair and Restoration
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for gravity sanitary sewers by open-cut or within Potentially

Petroleum Contaminated Area (PPCA) is on linear foot basis, complete in
place, including sewer pipe, connections to existing manholes, post
installation television inspection and testing. Measurement will be taken along
centerline of pipe from centerline to centerline of manholes.
2. Payment for television inspection of existing gravity sanitary sewer will be on

a linear foot basis. Measurement will be taken along centerline of pipe from
centerline to centerline of manholes. See Section 02558 - Cleaning and
Television Inspection.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
02531-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Submit proposed methods, equipment, materials and sequence of operations for sewer
construction. Plan operations so as to minimize disruption of utilities to occupied
facilities or adjacent property.
C. Test Reports: Submit test reports and inspection videos as specified in Part 3 of this
Section. Videos become property of City.
A. Qualifications. Install sanitary sewer that is watertight both in pipe-to-pipe joints and
in pipe-to- manhole connections. Perform testing in accordance with Section 02533 -
B. Regulatory Requirements.
1. Install sewer lines to meet minimum separation distance from potable water
line, as scheduled below. Separation distance is defined as distance between
outside of water pipe and outside of sewer pipe. When possible, install new
sanitary sewers no closer to water lines than 9 feet in all directions. Where this
separation distance cannot be achieved, new sanitary sewers shall be installed
as specified in this section.
2. Make notification to Project Manager when water lines are uncovered during
sanitary sewer installation where minimum separation distance cannot be
maintained.
3. Lay gravity sewer lines in straight alignment and grade.
1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inspect pipe and fittings upon arrival of materials at job site.
B. Handle and store pipe materials and fittings to protect them from damage due to
impact, shock, shear or free fall. Do not drag pipe and fittings along ground. Do not
roll pipe unrestrained from delivery trucks.
C. Use mechanical means to move or handle pipe. Employ acceptable clamps, rope or
slings around outside barrel of pipe and fittings. Do not use hooks, bars, or other
devices in contact with interior surface of pipe to lift or move lined pipe.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE
A. Provide piping materials for gravity sanitary sewers of sizes and types indicated on
Drawings or as specified.
B. Unlined reinforced concrete pipe is not acceptable.
02531-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Pipe shall be color coded green.
2.02 PIPE MATERIAL SCHEDULE
A. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, use pipe materials that conform to

requirements specified in one or more of following Sections:
1. Section 02427 - Plastic Liner for Large-Diameter Concrete Sewers and

Structures.
2. Section 02501 - Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings.
3. Section 02504 - Fiberglass Reinforced Pipe.
4. Section 02505 - High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Solid and Profile Wall
Pipe.
5. Section 02506 - Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe.
6. Section 02508 - Extra Strength Clay Pipe.
7. Section 02611 - Reinforced Concrete Pipe.
8. Section 02532 – Sanitary Sewer Force Mains.
B. Where shown on Drawings, provide pipe meeting minimum class, dimension ratio, or
other criteria indicated.
C. Pipe materials other than those listed above shall not be used for gravity sanitary
sewers.
2.03 APPURTENANCES
A. Stacks. Conform to requirements of Section 02534 - Sanitary Sewer Service Stubs or

Reconnections.
B. Service Connections. Conform to requirements of Section 02534 - Sanitary Sewer

Service Stubs or Reconnections.
C. Roof, street or other type of surface water drains shall not be connected or
reconnected into sanitary sewer lines.
2.04 BEDDING, BACKFILL, AND TOPSOIL MATERIAL
A. Bedding and Backfill: Conform to requirements of Section 02317 - Excavation and

Backfill for Utilities, Section 02320 - Utility Backfill Materials, and Section 02321 -
B. Topsoil: Conform to requirements of Section 02911 - Topsoil.
02531-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Prepare traffic control plans and set up street detours and barricades in preparation for
excavation when construction will affect traffic. Conform to requirements of Section
B. Provide barricades, flashing warning lights, and warning signs for excavations.
Conform to requirements of Section 01555 - Traffic Control and Regulation.
Maintain barricades and warning lights where work is in progress or where traffic is
affected by work.
C. Perform work in accordance with OSHA standards. Employ trench safety system as
specified in Section 02260 - Trench Safety System for excavations over 5 feet deep.
D. Immediately notify agency or company owning utility line which is damaged, broken
or disturbed. Obtain approval from Project Manager and agency or utility company
for repairs or relocations, either temporary or permanent.
E. Remove old pavements and structures including sidewalks and driveways in

F. Install and operate dewatering and surface water control measures in accordance with
G. Do not allow sand, debris or runoff to enter sewer system.
3.02 DIVERSION PUMPING
A. Install and operate required bulkheads, plugs, piping, and diversion pumping
equipment to maintain sewage flow and to prevent backup or overflow. Obtain
approval for diversion pumping equipment and procedures from Project Manager.
B. Design piping, joints and accessories to withstand twice maximum system pressure or
50 psi, whichever is greater.
C. No sewage shall be diverted into area outside of sanitary sewer.
D. In event of accidental spill or overflow, immediately stop overflow and take action to
clean up and disinfect spillage. Promptly notify Project Manager so that required
reporting can be made to Texas Natural Resources Conservation Commission and
Environmental Protection Agency by Project Manager.
3.03 EXCAVATION
02531-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Earthwork. Conform to requirements of Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for

Utilities. Use bedding as indicated on Drawings.
B. Line and Grade. Establish required uniform line and grade in trench from benchmarks
identified by Project Manager. Maintain this control for minimum of 100 feet behind
and ahead of pipe-laying operation. Use laser beam equipment to establish and
maintain proper line and grade of work. Use of appropriately sized grade boards
which are substantially supported is also acceptable. Protect boards and location
stakes from damage or dislocation.
C. Trench Excavation. Excavate pipe trenches to depths shown on Drawings and as

specified in Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities.
3.04 PIPE INSTALLATION BY OPEN CUT
A. Install pipe in accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations and as specified

in following paragraphs.
B. Install pipe only after excavation is completed, bottom of trench fine graded, bedding
material is installed, and trench has been approved by Project Manager.
C. Install pipe to line and grade indicated. Place pipe so that it has continuous bearing of
barrel on bedding material and is laid in trench so interior surfaces of pipe follow
grades and alignment indicated. Provide bell holes where necessary.
D. Install pipe with spigot ends toward downstream end of flow such that water flows
into bell and out the spigot.
E. Form concentric joint with each section of adjoining pipe so as to prevent offsets.
F. Keep interior of pipe clean as installation progresses. Remove foreign material and
debris from pipe
G. Provide lubricant, place and drive home newly laid sections with come-a-long
winches so as to eliminate damage to sections. Install pipe to "home" mark where
provided. Use of back hoes or similar powered equipment will not be allowed unless
protective measures are provided and approved in advance by Project Manager.
H. Keep excavations free of water during construction and until final inspection.
I. When work is not in progress, cover exposed ends of pipes with approved plug to
prevent foreign material from entering pipe.
J. Where gravity sanitary sewer is to be installed under existing water line with
separation distance of at least 2 feet and less than 9 feet, install new sewer pipe so that
one full18 foot long pipe is centered on water line crossing. Embed sewer pipe in
cement stabilized sand for minimum distance of 9 feet on each side of crossing.
02531-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
K. Where gravity sanitary sewer is to be installed under existing water line with
separation distance of less than 2 feet, install new sewer using pressure-rated pipe as
shown on Drawings. Maintain minimum 1 foot separation distance.
L. Where the length of the stub is not indicated, install the stub to the right-of-way line
and seal the free end with an approved plug.
3.05 PIPE INSTALLATION OTHER THAN OPEN CUT
A. For installation of pipe by augering, jacking, or tunneling, conform to requirements of

specification sections on tunneling augering, jacking and microtunneling work as
appropriate.
B. For rehabilitation of existing sewer lines, conform to requirements of specification

Section 02550- Sliplining Sanitary Sewers, Section 02556 - Cured-In-Place Pipe or
Section 02571- Pipe Bursting/Crushing Sanitary Sewers.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF APPURTENANCES
A. Service Connections. Install service connections to conform to requirements of

Section 2534 - Sanitary Sewer Service Stubs or Reconnections.
B. Stacks. Construct stacks to conform to requirements of Section 02534 - Sanitary

Sewer Service Stubs or Reconnections.
C. Construct manholes to conform to requirements of Section 02081 - Cast-in-Place

Concrete Manholes, Section 02082 - Precast Concrete Manholes, and Section 02083 -
Fiberglass Manholes, as applicable. Install frames, rings, and covers to conform to
requirements of Section 02090 - Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers.
3.07 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Visual Inspection: Check pipe alignment in accordance with Section 02533 -

B. Mandrel Testing. Use Mandrel Test to test flexible pipe for deflection. Refer to
Section 02533 - Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers.
C. Pipe Leakage Test. After backfilling line segment and prior to tie-in of service
connections, visually inspect gravity sanitary sewers where feasible, and test for
leakage in accordance with Section 02533 - Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers.
Maintain piezometer installed to conform with Section 01578 - Control of Ground
and Surface Water, until acceptance testing is completed.
3.08 BACKFILL AND SITE CLEANUP
A. Backfill and compact soil in accordance with Section 02317 - Excavation and
02531-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Backfill trench in specified lifts only after pipe installation is approved by Project
Manager.
C. Repair and replace removed or damaged pavement, curbs, gutters, and sidewalks as
specified in Section 02951 - Pavement Repair and Restoration.
D. Provide hydro mulch seeding in areas of commercial, industrial or undeveloped land

use over surface of ground disturbed during construction and not paved or not
designated to be paved. Grade surface at uniform slope to natural grade as indicated
on Drawings. Provide minimum of 4 inches of topsoil as specified in Section 02911 -
Topsoil and apply hydro mulch according to requirements of Section 02921 – Hydro
Mulch Seeding.
E. Provide sodding in areas of residential land use over surface of ground disturbed
during construction and not paved or not designated to be paved. Grade surface at
uniform slope to natural grade as indicated on Drawings. Provide minimum of 4
inches of topsoil per Section 02911 - Topsoil. Sod disturbed areas in accordance with
Section 02922 - Sodding.
3.09 POST-INSTALLATION TELEVISION INSPECTION
A. Prior to final acceptance of newly constructed gravity sanitary sewers, perform

cleaning and closed circuit television inspection. Post installation television
inspection shall be performed in accordance with Section 02558 – Cleaning and
B. Provide TV inspection reports and video submittals in accordance with Section 02558
– Cleaning and Television Inspection for each line segment submitted.
C. Upon completion of video review, Contractor will be notified regarding final

acceptance of sewer segment.
END OF SECTION
02531-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION SANITARY SEWER FORCE MAINS
SECTION 02532
SANITARY SEWER FORCE MAINS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Sanitary sewer force mains.
E. Section 02504 – Fiberglass Reinforced Pipe
F. Section 02505 – High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Solid and Profile Wall Pipe
H. Section 02509 – Fiberglass Reinforced Pipe for Pressure Mains
I. Section 02528 – Polyethylene Encasement/Wrap
J. Section 03315 – Concrete for Utility Construction
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for installation of force main pipe by open-cut, augered with or

without casing, or within limits of Potentially Petroleum Contaminated Area
(PPCA) is on linear foot basis. Measurement will be taken along center line of
pipe from end to end. Payment will be made for each foot of force main
installed, complete in place including pipe, excavation, bedding, backfill and
special backfill, shoring, earthwork, connections to existing manholes,
acceptance testing, and pipe and accessories.
2. Payment for installation of force main pipe at a bayou crossing is on a lump

sum basis.
3. The Unit Price item identifies line segments between stations as shown on
Drawings.
02532-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary.
B. ASTM D 696 - Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion
of Plastics Between -30 C and 30 C with a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer.
C. ASTM D 2992 - Standard Practice for Obtaining Hydrostatic or Pressure Design

Basis for “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe and
Fittings.
D. ASTM D 2996 - Standard Specification for Filament-Wound “Fiberglass” (Glass-

Fiber- Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe.
E. Uni-Bell UNI-B-3 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe (complying with AWWA
C 900).
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit proposed methods, equipment, materials, and sequence of operations for force
main construction. Plan operations to minimize disruption of utilities to occupied
C. Force mains 24 inches in diameter and larger: Submit shop drawings and design
calculations for joint restraint systems using reinforced concrete encasement of
pressure pipe and fittings.
D. Submit qualifications, proposed methods, equipment, materials, and sequence for

acceptance testing of pipeline. Submit evidence of experience with pipeline proving
by pigging for at least three projects of equal or greater scope; project list shall
include dates, size and length of pipe, location, owner name, contact person, and
telephone number. Provide certificate of training by manufacturer of pigging
equipment being used.
E. Submit test reports as specified in Part 3 of this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE FITTING MATERIAL SCHEDULE
02532-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, use pipe materials that conform to

requirements specified in one or more of the following Sections:
1. Section 02501 - Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings.
2. Section 02504 - Fiberglass Reinforced Pipe.
Pipe.
4. Section 02506 - Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe. Provide Lined Ductile-Iron Fittings

in Accordance with Section 02501 - Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings.
5. Section 02509 – Fiberglass Reinforced Pipe for Pressure Mains.
B. Pipe shall be color coded green.
2.02 THRUST RESTRAINT
A. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, provide concrete thrust blocking for force
mains up to 12-inches in diameter, to prevent movement of buried lines under
pressure at bends, tees, caps, valves and hydrants. Blocking shall be Portland cement
concrete, as specified in Section 03315 - Concrete for Utility Construction. Place
concrete in accordance with details on Drawings. Place thrust blocks between
undisturbed ground and fittings. Anchor fittings to thrust blocks so that pipe and
fitting joints are accessible for repairs. Concrete shall extend from 6 inches below
pipe or fitting to 12 inches above.
B. For force mains larger than 12 inches in diameter, and where indicated on Drawings,
provide restrained joints conforming to requirements of force main pipe material
specifications. Install restrained joints for length of pipe on both sides of each bend or
fitting for full length shown on Drawings.
C. Horizontal and vertical bends between zero and 10 degrees deflection angle will not
require thrust blocks or harnessed or restrained joints.
D. Horizontal and vertical bends between 10 degrees and 90 degrees deflection angle
shall have thrust restraint as shown on Drawings.
E. Provide thrust restraint at tees, plugs, blowoff drains, valves, and caps, as indicated.
F. Reinforced concrete encasement of force main pipe and fittings may be used in lieu of
manufactured joint restraint systems. Alternate joint restraint systems using
reinforced concrete encasement shall conform to following design requirements.
1. Design calculations shall be performed and sealed by Professional Engineer

licensed in State of Texas.
02532-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Base design calculations upon soil parameters quantified in geotechnical

report for site where alternative thrust restraint system is to be installed. When
data is not available for site, use parameters recommended by geotechnical
engineer.
3. The design system pressure shall be specified test pressure.
4. The following safety factors shall be used in sizing restraint system:
a. Apply factor of safety equal to 1.5 for passive soil resistance.
b. Apply factor of safety equal to 2.0 for soil friction.
5. Contain encasement entirely within standard trench width and terminate on

both ends at pipe bell or coupling.
6. Concrete encasement reinforcement steel shall be designed for all loads,

including internal pressure and longitudinal forces. Concrete design shall be in
accordance with ACI 318.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PIPE INSTALLATION BY OPEN-CUT
A. Perform excavation, bedding, and backfill in accordance with Section 02317 -

B. Wrap ductile-iron pipe and fittings with polyethylene wrap in accordance with
requirements of Section 02528 – Polyethylene Encasement/Wrap. Do not install
polyethylene wrap on ductile iron pipe protected by cathodic protection system or
fusion bonded or polyurethane coated fittings.
C. Install pipe in accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations and as specified

in following paragraphs.
D. Install pipe only after excavation is completed, bottom of trench is fine graded,
bedding material is installed, and trench has been approved by Project Manager.
E. Install pipe to line and grade indicated. Place pipe so that it has continuous bearing of
barrel on bedding material and is laid in trench so interior surfaces of pipe follow
grades and alignment indicated. Provide bell holes where necessary.
F. Install pipe with spigot ends toward direction of flow. Form concentric joint with
each section of adjoining pipe so as to prevent offsets.
02532-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
G. Keep interior of pipe clean as installation progresses. Where cleaning after laying
pipe is difficult because of small pipe size, use suitable swab or drag in pipe and pull
it forward past each joint immediately after joint has been completed. Remove
foreign material and debris from pipe.
H. Provide lubricant, place and drive home newly-laid sections with come-a-long
winches so as to eliminate damage to sections. Install pipe to “home” mark where
provided. Use of back hoes or similar powered equipment will not be allowed unless
protective measures are provided and approved in advance by Project Manager.
I. Keep excavations free of water during construction and until final inspection.
J. When work is not in progress, cover exposed ends of pipes with approved plug to
prevent foreign material from entering pipe.
K. Where sanitary sewer force main is to be installed under existing water line with
separation distance of less than 2 feet, install one full joint length of pipe, minimum
18 foot length, centered on water line and maintain minimum 6-inch separation
distance.
3.02 PIPE INSTALLATION OTHER THAN OPEN-CUT
A. For installation of pipe by augering, jacking, or tunneling, conform to requirements of

specification section of augering or tunneling work.
3.03 HYDROSTATIC TESTING
A. After pipe and appurtenance have been installed, test line and drain. Prevent damage
to Work or adjacent areas. Use clean water to perform tests.
B. Project Manager may direct tests of relatively short sections of completed lines to
minimize traffic problems or potential public hazards.
C. Test pipe in presence of Project Manager.
D. Test pipe at 150 psig or 1.5 times design pressure of pipe, whichever is greater.
Design pressure of force main shall be rated total dynamic head of lift station pump.
E. Test pipe at required pressure for minimum of 4 hours.
F. Maximum allowable leakage shall be as calculated by following formula:
L = (S) (D) (P0.5) / 155,400
Where: L = Leakage in gallons per hour per 1,000 feet of pipe.

S = Length of pipe in feet.
D = Inside diameter of pipe in inches.
P = Test pressure in pounds per square inch.
02532-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
G. Correct defects, cracks, or leakage by replacement of defective items or by repairs as

H. Plug openings in force main after testing and flushing. Use cast iron plugs or blind
flanges to prevent debris from entering tested pipeline.
3.04 PIGGING TEST
A. After completion of hydrostatic testing and prior to final acceptance, test force mains
longer than 200 feet by pigging to ensure piping is free of obstructions.
B. Pigs: Provide proving pigs manufactured of open-cell polyurethane foam body,

without coating or abrasives which would scratch or otherwise damage interior pipe
wall surface or lining. Pigs shall be able to pass through reductions of up to 65
percent of nominal cross- sectional area of pipe. Pigs shall be able to pass through
standard fittings such as 45-degree and 90-degree elbows, crosses, tees, wyes, gate
valves, or plug valves, as applicable to force main being tested.
C. Test Execution: Conduct pigging test in presence of Project Manager. Provide at least
48- hours notice of scheduled pigging of force main prior to commencing test.
END OF SECTION
02532-6
CITY OF HOUSTON ACCEPTANCE TESTING
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR SANITARY SEWERS
SECTION 02533
ACCEPTANCE TESTING FOR SANITARY SEWERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Acceptance testing of sanitary sewers including:
1. Visual inspection of sewer pipes
2. Mandrel testing for flexible sewer pipes.
3. Leakage testing of sewer pipes.
4. Leakage testing of manholes.
5. Smoke testing of point repairs.
6. Television and Video Inspection.
B. All tests listed in this Section are not necessarily required on this Project. Required
tests are named in other Sections which refer to this Section for testing criteria and
procedures.
C. Section 01578 – Control of Ground and Surface Water
A. Unit Prices.
1. No payment will be made for acceptance testing under this Section. Include
payment in unit price for work requiring acceptance testing.
1.04 REFERENCES
02533-1
A. ASTM C 828 - Standard Test Method for Low Pressure Air Test of Vitrified Clay
Pipe Lines.
B. ASTM D 3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
C. ASTM F 794 - Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Profile Gravity Sewer
Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter.
D. ASTM F 1417 - Standard Practice for Installation Acceptance of Plastic Non-Pressure

Sewer Lines Using Low-Pressure Air.
E. ASTM C 1244 Standard Test Method for Concrete Sewer Manholes by the Negative
Air Pressure (Vacuum) Test Prior to Backfill.
A. Gravity flow sanitary sewers are required to have straight alignment and uniform
grade between manholes.
B. Flexible pipe, including "semi-rigid" pipe, is required to show no more than 5 percent
deflection. Test pipe no sooner than 30 days after backfilling of line segment but prior
to final acceptance using standard mandrel to verify that installed pipe is within
specified deflection tolerances.
C. Must meet Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) Testing

Requirements Chapter-217-57.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
B. Test Plan: Before testing begins and in adequate time to obtain approval through
submittal process, prepare and submit test plan for approval by Project Manager.
Include testing procedures, methods, equipment, and tentative schedule. Obtain
advance written approval for deviations from Drawings and Specifications.
C. Test Reports: Submit test reports for each test on each segment of sanitary sewer.
1.07 GRAVITY SANITARY SEWER QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Repair, correct, and retest manholes or sections of pipe which fail to meet specified
requirements when tested.
B. Provide testing reports and video tape of television inspection as directed by Project
Manager.
C. Upon completion of tape reviews by Project Manager, Contractor will be notified

regarding final acceptance of sewer segment.
02533-2
1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Perform testing as work progresses. Schedule testing so that no more than 1000 linear
feet of installed sewer remains untested at one time.
B. Coordinate testing schedules with Project Manager. Perform testing under

observation of Project Manager.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DEFLECTION MANDREL
A. Mandrel Sizing. Rigid mandrel shall have outside diameter (O.D.) equal to 95 percent
of inside diameter (I.D.) of pipe. Inside diameter of pipe, for purpose of determining
outside diameter of mandrel, shall be average outside diameter minus two minimum
wall thicknesses for O.D. controlled pipe and average inside diameter for I.D.
controlled pipe, dimensions shall be per appropriate standard. Statistical or other
"tolerance packages" shall not be considered in mandrel sizing.
B. Mandrel Design. Rigid mandrel shall be constructed of metal or rigid plastic material
that can withstand 200 psi without being deformed. Mandrel shall have nine or more
"runners" or "legs" as long as total number of legs is odd number. Barrel section of
mandrel shall have length of at least 75 percent of inside diameter of pipe. Rigid
mandrel shall not have adjustable or collapsible legs which would allow reduction in
mandrel diameter during testing. Provide and use proving ring for modifying each
size mandrel.
C. Proving Ring. Furnish "proving ring" with each mandrel. Fabricate ring of 1/2-inch-
thick, 3-inch-wide bar steel to diameter 0.02 inches larger than approved mandrel
diameter.
D. Mandrel Dimensions (5 percent allowance). Average inside diameter and minimum

mandrel diameter are specified in Table 02533-5, Pipe vs. Mandrel Diameter, at end
of this Section. Mandrels for higher strength, thicker wall pipe or other pipe not listed
in table may be used when approved by Project Manager.
2.02 EXFILTRATION TEST
A. Water Meter: Obtain transient water meter from City for use when water for testing
will be taken from City system. Conform to City requirements for water meter use.
B. Test Equipment:
1. Pipe plugs.
2. Pipe risers where manhole cone is less than 2 feet above highest point in pipe
or service lead.
02533-3
2.03 INFILTRATION TEST
A. Test Equipment:
1. Calibrated 90 degree V-notch weir.
2. Pipe plugs.
2.04 LOW PRESSURE AIR TEST
A. Minimum Requirement for Equipment:
1. Control panel
2. Low-pressure air supply connected to control panel.
3. Pneumatic plugs: Acceptable size for diameter of pipe to be tested; capable of

withstanding internal test pressure without leaking or requiring external
bracing.
4. Air hoses from control panel to:
a. Air supply.
b. Pneumatic plugs.
c. Sealed line for pressuring.
d. Sealed line for monitoring internal pressure.
B. Testing Pneumatic Plugs: Place pneumatic plug in each end of length of pipe on
ground. Pressurize plugs to 25 psig; then pressurize sealed pipe to 5 psig. Plugs are
acceptable when they remain in place against test pressure without external aids.
2.05 GROUND WATER DETERMINATION
A. Equipment: Pipe probe or small diameter casing for ground water elevation
determination.
2.06 SMOKE TESTING
A. Equipment:
1. Pneumatic plugs.
2. Smoke generator as supplied by Superior Signal Company, or approved equal.
3. Blowers producing 2500 scfm minimum.
02533-4
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Provide labor, equipment, tools, test plugs, risers, air compressor, air hose, pressure
meters, pipe probe, calibrated weirs, or any other device necessary for proper testing
and inspection.
B. Determine selection of test methods and pressures for gravity sanitary sewers based
on ground water elevation. Determine ground water elevation using equipment and
procedures conforming to Section 01578 - Control of Ground and Surface Water.
3.02 VISUAL INSPECTION OF GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS
A. Check pipe alignment visually by flashing light between structures. Verify if

alignment is true and no pipes are misplaced. In case of misalignment or damaged
pipe, remove and relay or replace pipe segment.
3.03 MANDREL TESTING FOR GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS
A. Perform deflection testing on flexible and semi-rigid pipe to confirm pipe has no
more than 5 percent deflection. Mandrel testing shall conform to ASTM D 3034.
Perform testing no sooner than 30 days after backfilling of line segment, but prior to
final acceptance testing of line segment.
B. Pull approved mandrel by hand through sewer sections. Replace any section of sewer
not passing mandrel. Mandrel testing is not required for stubs.
C. Retest repaired or replaced sewer sections.
3.04 LEAKAGE TESTING FOR GRAVITY COLLECTION SYSTEM PIPES
A. For a collection system pipe that will transport wastewater by gravity flow, test
gravity sanitary sewer pipes for leakage by either exfiltration or infiltration methods,
as appropriate, or with low pressure air testing.
B. Compensating for Ground Water Pressure:
1. Where ground water exists, install pipe nipple at same time sewer line is
placed. Use 1/2-inch capped pipe nipple approximately 10 inches long. Make
installation through manhole wall on top of sewer line where line enters
manhole.
2. Immediately before performing line acceptance test, remove cap, clear pipe
nipple with air pressure, and connect clear plastic tube to nipple. Support tube
vertically and allow water to rise in tube. After water stops rising, measure
height in feet of water over invert of pipe. Divide this height by 2.3 feet/psi to
determine ground water pressure to be used in line testing.
02533-5
C. Exfiltration test:
1. Determine ground water elevation.
2. Plug sewer in downstream manhole.
3. Plug incoming pipes in upstream manhole.
4. Install riser pipe in outgoing pipe of upstream manhole when highest point in
service lead (house service) is less than 2 feet below bottom of manhole cone.
5. Fill sewer pipe and manhole or pipe riser, when used, with water to point 2-
1/2 feet above highest point in sewer pipe, house lead, or ground water table,
whichever is highest.
6. Allow water to stabilize for one to two hours. Take water level reading to
determine drop of water surface, in inches, over one-hour period, and
calculate water loss (1 inch of water in 4 feet diameter manhole equals 8.22
gallons) or measure quantity of water required to keep water at same level.
Loss shall not exceed that calculated from allowable leakage according to
Table 02533-1 at end of this Section.
D. Infiltration test: Ground water elevation must be not less than 2.0 feet above highest
point of sewer pipe or service lead (house service).
1. Determine ground water elevation.
2. Plug incoming pipes in upstream manhole.
3. Insert calibrated 90 degree V-notch weir in pipe on downstream manhole.
4. Allow water to rise and flow over weir until it stabilizes.
E. Low Air Pressure Test: When using this test conform to ASTM C 828, or ASTM F
1417, as applicable, with holding time not less than that listed in Table 02533-2.
1. Low Pressure Air testing for sections of pipe shall be limited to lines less than
36- inch average inside diameter. Refer to charts 02533-2 and 02533-3.
2. Lines 36-inch average inside diameter and larger shall be tested at each joint.
Minimum time allowable for pressure to drop from 3.5 pounds per square inch
gauge to 2.5 pounds per square inch during joint test shall be 10 seconds,
regardless of pipe size.
F. Retest: Repair and retest any section of pipe which fails to meet requirements.
3.05 TEST CRITERIA TABLES
A. Exfiltration and Infiltration Water Tests: Refer to Table 02533-1, Water Test
Allowable Leakage, at end of this Section.
02533-6
B. Low Pressure Air Test:
1. Times in Table 02533-2, Time Allowed for Pressure Loss from 3.5 psig to 2.5
psig, at end of this Section, are based on equation from Texas Commission on
Environmental Quality (TCEQ) Design Criteria 217.57
T = 0.0850(D)(K)/(Q)
Where: T = time for pressure to drop 1.0 pounds per square inch
gauge in seconds
K = 0.000419 DL, but not less than 1.0
D = average inside diameter in inches
L = length of line of same pipe size in feet
Q = rate of loss, 0.0015 ft3/min./sq. ft. internal surface
2. Since K value of less than 1.0 shall not be used, there are minimum testing
times for each pipe diameter as given in Table 02533-3, Minimum Testing
Times for Low Pressure Air Test.
Notes:
1. When two sizes of pipe are involved, compute time by ratio of lengths
involved.
2. Lines with 27-inch average inside diameter and larger may be air tested at
each joint.
3. Lines with average inside diameter greater than 36 inches must be air
tested for leakage at each joint.
4. If joint test is used, perform visual inspection of joint immediately after
testing.
5. For joint test, pipe is to be pressurized to 3.5 psi greater than pressure
exerted by groundwater above pipe. Once pressure has stabilized,
minimum times allowable for pressure to drop from 3.5 pounds per square
inch gauge to 2.5 pounds per square inch gauge shall be 10 seconds.
3.06 LEAKAGE TESTING FOR MANHOLES
A. After completion of manhole construction, wall sealing, or rehabilitation, but prior to

backfilling, test manholes for water tightness using hydrostatic or vacuum testing
procedures.
B. Plug influent and effluent lines, including service lines, with suitably-sized pneumatic
or mechanical plugs. Ensure plugs are properly rated for pressures required for test;
follow manufacturer's safety and installation recommendations. Place plugs minimum
of 6 inches outside of manhole walls. Brace inverts to prevent lines from being
dislodged when lines entering manhole have not been backfilled.
02533-7
C. Vacuum testing:
1. Install vacuum tester head assembly at top access point of manhole and adjust
for proper seal on straight top section of manhole structure. Following
manufacturer's instructions and safety precautions, inflate sealing element to
recommended maximum inflation pressure; do not over-inflate.
2. Evacuate manhole with vacuum pump to 10 inches mercury (Hg), disconnect

pump, and monitor vacuum for time period specified in Table 02533-4,
Vacuum Test Time Table.
3. A manhole passes the test if after 2.0 minutes and with all valves closed, the
vacuum is at least 9.0 inches of mercury (Hg).
D. Perform hydrostatic exfiltration testing as follows:
1. Seal wastewater lines coming into manhole with internal pipe plug. Then fill
manhole with water and maintain it full for at least one hour.
2. The maximum leakage for hydrostatic testing shall be 0.025 gallons per foot
diameter per foot of manhole depth per hour.
3. If water loss exceeds amount tabulated above, locate leaks, complete repairs
necessary to seal manhole and repeat test procedure until satisfactory results
are obtained.
3.07 SMOKE TEST PROCEDURES FOR POINT REPAIRS
A. Application: Perform smoke test to:
1. Locate points of line failure for point repair.
2. Determine when point repairs are properly made.
3. Determine when service connections have been reconnected to rehabilitated

sewer.
4. Check integrity of connections to newly replaced service taps to liners and to

existing private service connections.
B. Limitations: Do not backfill service taps until completion of this test. Test only those
taps in single manhole section at one time. Keep number of open excavations to
minimum.
C. Preparation: Prior to smoke testing, give written notices to area residents no fewer
than 2 days, nor more than 7 days, prior to proposed testing. Also give notice to City
of Houston Police and Fire Departments 24 hours prior to actual smoke testing.
02533-8
D. Isolate Section: Isolate manhole section to be tested from adjacent manhole sections
to keep smoke localized. Temporarily seal annular space at manhole for sliplined
sections.
E. Smoke Introduction:
1. Operate equipment according to manufacturer's recommendation and as

2. Conduct test by forcing smoke from smoke generators through sanitary sewer
main and service connections. Operate smoke generators for minimum of 5
minutes.
3. Introduce smoke into upstream and downstream manhole as appropriate.

Monitor tap/connection for smoke leaks. Note sources of leaks.
F. Repair and Retest: Repair and replace taps or connections noted as leaking and then
retest. Taps and connections may be left exposed in only one manhole section at time.
When repair or replacement, testing or retesting, and backfilling of excavation is not
completed within one work day, properly barricade and cover each excavation as
G. Service Connections: On houses where smoke does not issue from plumbing vent
stacks to confirm reconnection of sewer service to newly installed liner pipe, perform
dye test to confirm reconnection. Introduce dye into service line through plumbing
fixture inside structure or sewer cleanout immediately outside structure and flush with
water. Observe flow at service reconnection or downstream manhole. Detection of
dye confirms reconnection.
3.08 TELEVISION AND VIDEO INSPECTION PROCEDURE
A. Refer to Document 02588- Cleaning and Television Inspection
02533-9
Table 02533-1
WATER TEST ALLOWABLE LEAKAGE
VOLUME PER INCH OF
DIAMETER OF DEPTH ALLOWANCE LEAKAGE*
RISER OR
STACK IN PIPE SIZE IN GALLONS/MINUTE
INCHES INCH GALLONS INCHES PER 100 FT.
1 0.7854 .0034 6 0.0039
2 3.1416 .0136 8 0.0053
2.5 4.9087 .0212 13 0.0066
3 7.0686 .0306 12 0.0079
4 12.5664 .0306 15 0.0099
5 19.6350 .0544 18 0.0118
6 28.2743 .1224 21 0.0138
8 50.2655 .2176 24 0.0158
27 0.0177
30 0.0197
36 0.0237
42 0.0276
For other diameters, multiply square of diameters Equivalent to 50 gallons per inch of
by value for 1" diameter. inside diameter per mile per 24 hours.
* Allowable leakage rate must not exceed 10 gallons per inch of inside diameter per mile
per 24 hours, when sewer is identified as located within 25-year flood plain.
02533-10
Table 02533-2
ACCEPTANCE TESTING FOR SANITARY SEWERS
TIME ALLOWED FOR PRESSURE LOSS FROM 3.5 PSIG TO 2.5 PSIG
Length
Min. for Time for Specification Time for Length (L) Shown (min:sec)
Pipe Time Min. Longer
Diam. (min: Time Length
100 ft 150 ft 200 ft 250 ft 300 ft 350 ft 400 ft 450 ft 500 ft 550 ft 600 ft
(in) sec) (ft) (sec)
6 5:40 398 0.8548 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:42 6:25 7:07 7:50 8:33
8 7:33 298 1.5196 7:33 7:33 7:33 7:33 7:36 8:52 10:08 11:24 12:40 13:56 15:12
10 9:27 239 2.3743 9:27 9:27 9:27 9:54 11:52 13:51 15:50 17:48 19:47 21:46 23:45
12 11:20 199 3.4190 11:20 11:20 11:20 14:15 17:06 19:57 22:48 25:39 28:30 31:20 34:11
15 14:10 159 5.3423 14:10 14:10 17:48 22:16 26:43 31:10 35:37 40:04 44:31 48:58 53:25
18 17:00 133 7.6928 17:00 19:14 25:39 32:03 38:28 44:52 51:17 57:42 64:06 70:31 76:56
21 19:50 114 10.4708 19:50 26:11 34:54 43:38 52:21 61:05 69:48 78:32 87:15 95:59 104:42
24 22:40 99 13.6762 22:48 34:11 45:35 56:59 68:23 79:47 91;10 102:34 113:58 125:22 136:46
27 25:30 88 17.3089 28:51 43:16 57:42 72:07 86:33 100:58 115:24 129:49 144:14 158:40 173:05
30 28:20 80 21.3690 35:37 53:25 71:14 89:02 106:51 124:39 142:28 160:16 178:05 195:53 213:41
33 31:10 72 25.8565 43:06 64:38 86:11 107:44 129:17 150:50 172:23 193:55 215:28 237:01 258:34
Table 02533-3
MINIMUM TESTING TIMES FOR LOW PRESSURE AIR TEST
LENGTH FOR MINIMUM TIME FOR LONGER
PIPE DIAMETER MINIMUM TIME TIME LENGTH
(INCHES) (SECONDS) (FEET) (SECONDS/FT
6 340 398 0.855
8 454 298 1.520
10 567 239 2.374
12 680 199 3.419
15 850 159 5.342
18 1020 133 7.693
21 1190 114 10.471
24 1360 100 13.676
27 1530 88 17.309
30 1700 80 21.369
33 1870 72 25.856
02533-11
Table 02533-4 VACUUM TEST TIME TABLE

TIME IN SECONDS BY PIPE DIAMETER
DEPTH IN FEET 48" 60” 72”

4 10 13 16
8 20 26 32
12 30 39 48
16 40 52 64
20 50 65 80
24 60 78 96
* 5.0 6.5 8.0
*Add T times for each additional 2-foot depth.

(The values listed above have been extrapolated from ASTM C 1244
Table 02533-5
PIPE VS. MANDREL DIAMETER
Material and Wall Nominal Size Average I.D. Minimum Mandrel
Construction (Inches) (Inches) Diameter (Inches)
PVC-Solid (SDR 26) 6 6 5.764
5.476 8 7.715 7.329
10 9.646 9.162
PVC-Solid (SDR 35) 12 12 11.737
11.150 15 14.374 13.655
18 17.629 16.748
21 20.783 19.744
24 23.381 22.120
27 26.351 25.033
PVC-Truss 8 7.750 7.363
10 9.750 9.263
12 11.790 11.201
15 14.770 14.032
PVC-Profile (ASTM F 794) 12 11.740 11.153
15 14.370 13.652
18 17.650 16.768
21 20.750 19.713
24 23.500 22.325
27 26.500 25.175
30 29.500 28.025
02533-12
Material and Wall Nominal Size Average I.D. Minimum Mandrel

Construction (Inches) (Inches) Diameter (Inches)
36 35.500 33.725
42 41.500 39.425
48 47.500 45.125
HDPE-Profile 18 18.000 17.100
21 21.000 19.950
24 24.000 22.800
27 27.000 25.650
30 30.000 28.500
36 36.000 34.200
42 42.000 39.900
48 48.000 45.600
54 54.000 51.300
60 60.000 57.000
Fiberglass 12 12.85 11.822
(Class SN 46) 18 18.66 17.727
20 20.68 19.646
24 24.72 23.484
30 30.68 29.146
36 36.74 34.903
42 42.70 40.565
48 48.76 46.322
54 54.82 50.079
60 60.38 57.361
END OF SECTION
02533-13
CITY OF HOUSTON SANITARY SEWER SERVICE
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION STUBS OR RECONNECTIONS
SECTION 02534
SANITARY SEWER SERVICE STUBS OR RECONNECTIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Installation of service stubs in sanitary sewers serving areas where sanitary sewer
service did not previously exist.
B. Reconnection of existing service connections along parallel, replacement, or

rehabilitated sanitary sewers.
C. Installation of sanitary sewer service stubs, within street right-of-way, terminating

with a clean-out and a plug at the right-of-way to allow for future connection of a
single service, on at a double-wye fitting plugged at both to allow for future
connection to two services.
F. Section 02260 – Trench Safety System
G. Section 02317 – Excavation and Backfill for Utilities
H. Section 02448 – Pipe and Casing Augering for Sewers
I. Section 02533 – Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers
J. Section 02534 – Sanitary Sewer Service Stubs or Reconnections
K. Section 02558 – Cleaning and Television Inspection
L. Section 02921 – Hydro Mulch Seeding
M. Section 02951 – Pavement Repair and Restoration
02534-1
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for sanitary sewer service stubs or service reconnections with stacks
located within 5 feet of sanitary sewer main centerline is on unit price basis
for each stub or reconnection. Payment will be made for each service stub or
reconnection installed complete in place, including service connections,
couplings, and adapters disconnecting existing services, reconnecting new
service, fittings, excavation, and backfill.
2. Payment for sanitary sewer service stubs or service reconnections without

stacks located within 5 feet of sanitary sewer main is on unit price basis for
each stub or reconnection. Payment will be made for each service stub or
reconnection installed complete in place, including service connections,
couplings, and adapters disconnecting existing services, reconnecting new
service, fittings, excavation, backfill and testing.
3. Payment for sanitary sewer service leads beyond 5 feet from the right-of-way
and clean-outs shall be paid as follows:
a. Payment for sanitary sewer service leads beyond 5 feet from the right-
of-way clean-out, connection or reconnection shall be paid for on a
linear foot basis. Measurement shall be taken along the centerline of
the pipe from the centerline of the lead connection or stack at the
sanitary sewer main and shall end 5 foot from the right-of-way.
Payment will be made for each linear foot of pipe installed, complete
in place, including sewer pipe, excavation, shoring, bedding, backfill,
and accessories. Auger pipe for service stubs will be paid as provided
in Section 02448 - Pipe and Casing Augering for Sewers.
b. Payment for standard 6-inch clean-out on service lead assembly for a

single or double future service connection installed at end of lead is on
a unit price basis for each assembly and shall include all portions of
the lead and service connection with clean-out within 5 feet of the
right-of-way. Payment will be made for each assembly installed and
complete in place, including excavation, fittings, offsets, plugs, pipe
sections, valve boxes, bedding, backfill, and testing.
4. Pay estimates for progress payments will be made as measured above

according to following schedule:
a. An estimate for 95 percent payment will be authorized when

reconnection is completely installed and backfilled.
b. An estimate for 100 percent payment will be authorized when

reconnection has been tested as specified in Section 02533-
02534-2
5. One or more connections discharging into common point are considered one
service connection. Contractor shall not add service reconnections without
approval of Project Manager. Project Manager may require connections to be
relocated to avoid having more than two service connections per reconnection.
6. Protruding service connections which must be removed to allow liner

insertion are paid as service reconnection when connected. If abandoned, they
will be paid as abandoned connection.
7. Payment for abandonment of service connection is on unit price basis for each
abandoned connection. No separate payment will be made for abandonment of
service connection unless excavation is required. No separate payment will be
made for excavation of sanitary sewer services within new or replacement
sewer trench.
8. No separate payment will be made for removal of existing sanitary sewer

service stubs. Include payment in unit price for Section 02534 - Sanitary
9. No separate payment will be made for abandoned service connection when

service to be abandoned is within 4 feet of active connection. Payment for
only one abandoned service connection will be allowed when second
abandoned connection is within 4 feet of first.
10. If faulty remote cut is later corrected using procedures specified for
reconnection by excavation, only one reconnection will be allowed for
payment.
11. Sanitary Sewer Cleanout on Service Lateral shall be provided in accordance

with detail provided. Payment is on per each basis as indicated in Document
00410B.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 240 - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless

B. ASTM C 923 - Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced

C. ASTM C 1173 - Standard Specification for Flexible Transition Couplings for

Underground Piping Systems.
D. ASTM D 395 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property-Compression Set.
02534-3
E. ASTM D 412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic
Elastomers-Tension.
F. ASTM D 543 - Standard Practices for Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics to

Chemical Reagents.
G. ASTM D 570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.
H. ASTM D 572 - Standard Test Method for Rubber-Deterioration by Heat and Oxygen.
I. ASTM D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
J. ASTM D 1149 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber Deterioration-Cracking in an

Ozone Controlled Environment
K. ASTM D 1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.
L. ASTM D 2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness
M. ASTM D 3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
N. ASTM D 3212 - Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes
O. ASTM F 477 – Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining
Plastic Pipe
A. Accurately locate in field all proposed service stubs along new sanitary sewer main.
B. Accurately locate in field existing service connections and proposed service stubs
along alignment of new parallel or replacement sewer main.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit product data for each pipe product, fitting, coupling and adapter.
C. Show reconnected services on record drawings. Give exact distance from each service
connection to nearest downstream manhole.
D. Submit Post-installation television inspection videos in accordance with Document

02558 – Cleaning and Television Inspection.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
02534-4
2.01 PVC SERVICE CONNECTION
A. As stub outs, use PVC sewer pipe of 4-inch through 10-inch diameter, conforming to
ASTM D 1784 and ASTM D 3034, with cell classification of 12454. SDR (ratio of
diameter to wall thickness) shall be 26 for pipe 10 inches in diameter or less.
B. PVC pipe shall be gasket jointed with gasket conforming to ASTM D 3212.
C. Provide service connection pipe in sizes shown on Drawings. For reconnection of

existing services, select service connection pipe diameter to match existing service
diameter. Reconnections to rehabilitated sanitary sewer mains shall be limited to
following maximum service connection diameter:
Sewer Diameter Maximum Service Connection Diameter

8" or less 4"
10" or greater 6"
D. Subject to above limits, provide 6-inch service connection when more than one
service discharges into single pipe.
E. Connect service pipes to parallel or replacement sewer mains with prefabricated, full-
bodied tee or wye fittings conforming to specifications for sewer main pipe material
as specified in other Sections for sewers up to 18 inches in diameter.
F. Where sewers are installed using pipe augering or tunneling, or where sewer is
greater than 18 inches in diameter, use three-piece service connection or pipe saddle
conforming to ASTM C-923to connect service to sewer main.
2.02 PIPE SADDLES
A. Use pipe saddles only on rehabilitated sanitary sewer mains. Comply with Paragraph
2.01E for new parallel and replacement sanitary sewer mains.
B. Supply one-piece prefabricated saddle, either polyethylene or PVC, with neoprene

gasket to accomplish complete seal. Use saddle fabricated to fit outside diameter of
connecting pipe. Protruding lip of saddle must be at least 5/8-inch long with grooves
or ridges to retain stainless steel band clamps.
C. Use 1/2-inch stainless steel band clamps for securing saddles to liner pipe.
2.03 COUPLINGS AND ADAPTERS
A. For connections between new PVC pipe stubouts and existing service, 4-, 6-, or 8-
inch diameter, use flexible adapter coupling consisting of neoprene gasket, stainless
steel shear rings with 1/2-inch stainless steel band clamps, and two nut and bolt
clamps. For connections that are 10- inches or over, use neoprene gasket, with
stainless steel shear band, and two stainless steel nut and bolt or T-Bolt clamps.
Thermalized plastics are not allowed. Refer to approved couplings and adaptors.
02534-5
1. Product characteristics, meet ASTM C1173 and requirements for neoprene

rubber and metallic components.
2. Shear Band: ½ inch 300 series stainless steel shear band with two molded on
worm gear clamps (ASTM A240)
3. Clamps: 300 Series nut and bolt clamp band fabricated from AISI Type 316
stainless steel (ASTM A240)
B. For connections between new PVC pipe stubout and new service, use approved
rubber- gasket adapter coupling conforming to requirements of 2.03A.
C. Couplings and Adaptors components will be in accordance with following

Requirements:
1. Neoprene Rubber. 100% rubber. Thermalized plastics are not allowed.
a. Compressive Strength/ Tensile Strength, psi min (ASTM D412 Die C,

ASTM D638). Initial value: 1000 min. Value after 112 days: 1000 min
b. Elongation at break, % (ASTM D412, ASTM D638). Initial value: 200

Value after 112 days: 200
c. Shore Durometer, Type A, point change max (ASTM D2240). Initial

value (1 sec. reading, min): 60. Value point change max: 15
d. Compression Set -- Chemical exposures, % max (ASTM D395

Method B). Initial Value: 20 max. Value after exposure: 20 max
e. Compression Set -- Bacteriological, unconditioned surface dry, % max

(ASTM D395 Method B): Initial value 20. Value after 112 day: 20
f. Water Absorption, % max (ASTM D570). Initial value: 4. Value after

112 days: % max 2'4
g. Aged Tensile (psi) -- Tensile strength (after exposure to 300 psi (2100
kPa) oxygen at 158° ± 1.8°F [70° ± 1°C] for 96 hours), % of initial,
min (ASTM D572). Initial: 70 min. After accelerated aging: 70 min.
h. Aged Elongation -- Elongation at break (after exposure to 300 psi

(2100 kPa) oxygen at 158° ± 1.8°F [70° ± 1°C] for 96 hours), % of
initial, min. (ASTM D572). Initial value: 70 min. Test after accelerated
aging: 70 min.
i. Ozone resistance (after exposure to 100 pphm ozone for 50 hours at

104° ± 2°F [40° ± 1°C]), (ASTM D1149). Initial value: No cracking.
After exposure: No cracking
02534-6
j. Weight Change, % max. (approx. specimen size 1.0 x 3.0 x 0.1 inch)
(25 x 75 x 2.5mm), (ASTM D543): value before and after exposure
±1.5 max
2. Stainless Steel components 300 series. (ASTM A240).
3. Components can be factory fabricated or mechanically molded
2.04 STACKS
A. Provide stacks for service connections wherever crown of sewer is 8 feet or more
below finished grade.
B. Construct stacks of same material as sanitary sewer and as shown on Drawings.
C. Provide stacks of same nominal diameter at sanitary service line.
2.05 PLUGS AND CAPS
A. Seal upstream end of unconnected sewer service stubs with rubber gasket plugs or
caps of same pipe type and size.
2.06 THREE PIECE SERVICE CONNECTION (TEE)
A. The connection is comprised of three parts; PVC hub, stainless steel band and rubber
boot.
B. PVC hub and rubber boot shall be engineered to accept the wall thickness and internal
radius of the pipe. The PVC hub and rubber boot shall protrude no more than ½" into
the sewer pipe.
C. The PVC hub shall be in accordance with ASTM D-3034.
D. The rubber boot shall be in accordance with ASTM F 477.
E. The Tee shall be sized to accept 4" or 6" service lines, as required.
F. The Tee shall only be used when approved by the Project Manager.
G. Service Connection (Tee) shall be in accordance with Section 2.03.
2.07 SANITARY SEWER STANDARD CLEANOUT ON SERVICE LATERAL:
A. Where directed, the contractor shall remove (if existing) and install new sanitary
sewer cleanout. This shall include: frame and cover, molded polyethylene, four-way
cleanout, 12” Ultra-Rib PVC or SDR35 PVC riser pipe, 2-foot square concrete pad,
cement stabilized sand backfill, and all labor, equipment, and site restoration.
B. The standard frame and cover shall be cast iron, embossed with “Sewer Cleanout”
“City of Houston”.
02534-7
C. The molded polyethylene, four-way cleanout shall be the “wastewater access

chamber” as manufactured by Uponor ETI Co. or approved equal.
D. Riser pipe shall be 12” Ultra-Rib PVC or SDR35 PVC.
E. Provide sealing material between pipe riser and cleanout cover frame that is a
hydrophilic elastic sealant, or approved equal.
2.08 SANITARY SEWER 4” OR 6” CLEANOUT ON SERVICE LATERAL
A. Where directed, the contractor shall remove (if existing) and install new sanitary
sewer cleanout. This shall include: 4” or 6” removable threaded countersunk plug, 4”
or 6” SDR 35 PVC riser pipe with 45 degree bend and wye, 3-RT Valve Box MFG by
Old Castle Precast Inc or approved equal, and all labor, equipment, and site
restoration. Payment made will be made at the unit price set in Document 00410B.
Where service lateral to an abandoned house is encountered, install 4” or 6” plug for
future house connection. All work shall be performed as per 4-Inch Cleanout Detail
on Service Lead or Drawing No. 02534-05. Cleanout box may be installed in
accordance with Drawing No. 02085-01.
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Provide minimum of 72 hours notice to customers whose sanitary sewer service will
potentially be interrupted.
B. Accurately field locate service connections, whether in service or not, along

rehabilitated sanitary sewer main. For parallel and replacement sewers, service
connections may be located as pipe laying progresses from downstream to upstream.
C. Properly disconnect existing connections from sewer and reconnect to rehabilitated

liner, as described in this Section.
D. Reconnect service connections, including those that go to unoccupied or abandoned

buildings or to vacant lots, unless directed otherwise by Project Manager. Install a
stack and cap the reconnection where the service is to a vacant lot or location where a
structure has been demolished, unless directed otherwise by Project Manager.
E. Complete reconnection of service lines within 24 hours after cured-in-place liner

installation and within 72 hours after disconnection for sliplining, parallel, or
replacement sanitary sewer mains.
F. Reconnect services on cured-in-place liner at 10 feet depth or less by excavation

method. Project Manager reserves the right to require service connections by
excavation when remote cut service connection damages lines.
02534-8
G. Reconnection by excavation method shall include stack and fittings and required pipe
length to reconnect service line.
H. Connect services 8 inches in diameter and larger to sewer by construction of manhole.

Refer to appropriate Section on manholes for construction and payment.
I. All couplings and adapters used to either connect existing or new services to new
PVC pipe stubouts shall be eccentric reducers when the coupling or adapter is used as
a reducer and when used in the horizontal or on a horizontal slope less than 1:1 or less
than a 45 angle (such that the flowline across the pipe size transition shall remain
straight; no upset). The Contractor shall properly cut the ends of the two PVC pipes
joined by a flexible coupling or adapter such that they do not extend into the
transition area of the reducer. Pipe size transitions on existing or new services to new
PVC pipe stubouts shall not be made in the vertical (in a stack or riser). Flexible
couplings or adapters shall not be allowed for use in the vertical or on a slope greater
than 1:1 or greater than a 45º angle.
3.02 PROTECTION
A. Provide barricades, warning lights, and signs for excavations created for service
connections. Conform to requirements of Section 01504 - Temporary Facilities and
Controls.
B. Do not allow sand, debris, or runoff to enter sewer system.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Determine existing sewer locations and number of existing service connections from
closed- circuit television (CCTV) inspection tapes or from field survey. Accurately
field locate existing service connections, whether in service or not. Use existing
service locations to connect or reconnect service lines or liner.
B. For rehabilitated sanitary sewer mains, allow liner to normalize to ambient

temperature and recover from imposed stretch. For cured-in-place liners, verify that
liner is completely cured.
C. For new parallel and replacement sanitary sewer mains, complete testing and
acceptance of downstream sewers as applicable. Provide for compliance with
requirements of Paragraph 3.01E.
3.04 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A. Excavate in accordance with Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities.
B. Perform work in accordance with OSHA standards. Employ Trench Safety System as
specified in Section 02260 - Trench Safety System for excavations requiring trench
safety.
02534-9
C. Install and operate necessary ground water and surface water control measures in
accordance with requirements of Section 01578 - Control of Ground and Surface
Water.
D. Determine locations where limited access, buildings or structure preclude use of

mechanical excavation equipment. Obtain approval from Project Manager for hand
excavation.
E. When the excavation shows that a service line is not connected, abandon the service
reconnection and backfill the excavation.
3.05 RECONNECTION BY EXCAVATION METHOD
A. Saddle Method
1. Remove a portion of the existing sanitary sewer main or carrier pipe to expose
the liner pipe. Provide sufficient working space for installing a pre-fabricated
pipe saddle.
2. Carefully cut a hole in the liner pipe to accept the protrusion on the underside
of the saddle. Length of protrusion shall be equal to the wall thickness of the
liner pipe.
3. Apply an approximately 1/2" diameter bead of uncured, 100% pure silicone

caulk (siliconized caulk will not be allowed), GE or approved equal, to the
surface of the gasket that contacts the bottom of the saddle. A 1/2" bead of
silicone caulk shall also be placed around the tapped hole in the polyethylene,
PVC, or cured-in-place pipe. The beads of caulk should be placed
approximately in the center of the gasket and, on the pipe, in the center of the
area covered by the gasket. The saddle shall be installed and secured while the
silicone caulk is uniformly fluid and pliable, not hardened or rubbery and with
no hardened, rubbery areas or nodules. Adequate quantities of silicone caulk
should be applied to allow it to flow or be extruded into any corrugations in
the gasket surface and into any irregularities (scratches or gouges) in the
surface of the polyethylene, PVC, or cured-in-place pipe.
4. Install the saddle with gasket using stainless steel bands on each side of the
saddle. Tighten the bands to produce a watertight seal between the saddle and
the liner pipe.
B. Three Piece Service Connection Method
1. Remove a portion of the existing sanitary sewer main or carrier pipe to expose
the liner pipe. Provide sufficient working space to install three piece service
connection.
2. Precisely cut a circular hole, per the manufactures recommendations, in the

liner pipe that will form a tight fit between the liner pipe PVC stub and rubber
boot.
02534-10
3. Install the rubber boot into the cored hole, making sure the boot is properly
oriented to the mainline. Lubricate the rubber boot with a special solution
provided by the three piece service connection manufacturer. Make sure the
upper and lower ribs of the rubber boot are correctly seated against the inside
and outside diameter of the liner pipe.
4. Insert the PVC hub into the rubber boot, per manufacturer’s recommended
instructions. Place stainless steel band around the top of the rubber boot and
tighten to form a watertight seal.
C. Service Line Connections to Saddles or Three Piece Service Connections
1. Remove and replace cracked, offset or leaking service line up to 8 feet

(measured horizontally) from the center line of the new liner.
2. Make connections between liner and existing service line using PVC sewer
pipe and approved couplings/fittings using stainless steel bands to construct
new stacks and/or service lines.
3. Test all service connections by smoke testing the sewer main and connections
before backfilling.
4. Encase the entire service connection is cement stabilized sand or crushed

stone. Place a minimum of 6 inches below and 12 inches above and on each
side of the service line and pipe connection.
3.06 RECONNECTION BY REMOTE METHOD
A. Make service reconnections using remote-operated cutting tools on cured-in-place

liners at depth greater than 10 feet.
B. Employ method and equipment that restore service connection capacity to not less
than 90 percent of original capacity.
C. Immediately open missed connections and repair holes drilled in error using method
3.07 RECONNECTION ON PARALLEL OR REPLACEMENT SEGMENTS
A. Install a full-bodied tee or wye fitting on the new sanitary sewer main for each service
connection.
B. Remove and replace cracked, offset or leaking service line for up to 5 feet, measured
horizontally, from centerline of sanitary sewer main.
C. Make up connection between main and existing service line using PVC sewer pipe
and approved couplings, as shown on Drawings.
D. Test service connections before backfilling.
02534-11
E. Embed service connection and service line as specified for sanitary sewer main as
shown on Drawings. Place and compact trench zone backfill in compliance with
3.08 INSTALLATION OF NEW SERVICE STUBS
A. Install service connections on sanitary sewer main for each service connection.
Provide length of pipe required to allow sufficient room for standard 6-inch clean-out
service lead assembly in accordance with detail 02534-05. Install plug(s) or cap on
the upstream end(s) of service stub(s) as needed.
B. Test service connections before backfilling.
C. Embed service connection and service line as specified for sanitary sewer main, and
as shown on Drawings. Place and compact trench zone backfill in compliance with
Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. Install minimum 2-foot length
of magnetic locating tape along axis of service stub and 9 inches to 12 inches above
crown of pipe, at end of stub.
3.09 TESTING
A. Test service reconnections and service stubs. Follow applicable procedures given in
Section 02533 - Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers to perform smoke testing to
confirm reconnection.
B. Perform post installation CCTV inspection as specified in Section 02558 - Cleaning

and Television Inspection to show locations of service connection.
3.10 CLEANUP
A. Backfill excavation as specified in Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for

Utilities.
B. Replace pavement or sidewalks removed or damaged by excavation in accordance

with Section 02951 - Pavement Repair and Restoration. In unpaved areas, bring
surface to grade and slope surrounding excavation. Replace minimum of 4 inches of
topsoil and seed according to requirements of Section 02921 - Hydro Mulch Seeding.
END OF SECTION
02534-12
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION SLIPLINING SANITARY SEWERS
SECTION 02550
SLIPLINING SANITARY SEWERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Sliplining existing sanitary sewers.
C. Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples
E. Section 01506 – Diversion Pumping
H. Section 01740 – Site Restoration
I. Section 02260 – Trench Safety System
J. Section 02317 – Excavation and Backfill for Utilities
K. Section 02320 – Utility Backfill Materials
M. Section 02505 – High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Solid and Profile Wall Pipe
N. Section 02506 – Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe
O. Section 02533 – Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers
P. Section 02553 – Point Repairs and Obstruction Removals
Q. Section 02555 – Manhole Rehabilitation
R. Section 02558 – Cleaning and Television Inspection
1.03 UNIT PRICES
02550-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Measurement for sliplining is on a linear foot basis for installed liner pipe, measured
from center line of upstream manhole to center line of downstream manhole.
B. Insertion pits, access pits, clamp installation, embedment (bedding, haunching and
initial backfill), field quality control (testing), sealing liner at manholes, grouting
annular space, building up, shaping and reworking manhole inverts and benches, and
pre-installation and post-installation cleaning and television inspection of completed
work are included in sliplining unit price and not paid for separately.
C. Excavations initially begun as obstruction removals or point repairs which the

Contractor later decides to use as insertion pits are considered as insertion pits and not
paid for separately.
D. Trench safety systems, well pointing and other applicable bid items associated with
insertion pits will be paid for at their respective contract unit prices.
E. Refer to Section 01270 - Measurement and Payment, for unit price procedures.
F. Payment for Item, 'Mobilization for short segment (<100')’ will be paid when the
contractor is issued a work order containing a line segment that is less than 100 feet in
length and is not adjacent to another line segment, or when the total of all adjacent
line segments is less than 100 feet.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 1784 - Standard Classification System and Basis for Specification for Rigid
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Compounds.

for Wire and Cable.
C. ASTM D 2122 - Standard Test Method for Determining Dimensions of

D. ASTM D 2412 - Standard Test Method for Determination of External Loading

E. ASTM D 2837 - Standard Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis for
Products.
F. ASTM D 2992 - Obtaining Hydrostatic or Pressure Design Basis for "Fiberglass"

(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe and Fittings.
G. ASTM D 3212 - Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes
02550-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
H. ASTM D 3262 - "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Sewer

Pipe.
I. ASTM D 3350 - Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials.
J. ASTM D 3681 - Chemical Resistance of "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced-

Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe in a Deflected Condition.
K. ASTM D 4161 - "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced-Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe

Joints Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals.
L. ASTM F 585 - Standard Guide for Insertion of Flexible Polyethylene Pipe Into
Existing Sewers.
M. ASTM F 714 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-PR)
Based on Outside Diameter.
N. ASTM F 794 - Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Profile Gravity Sewer
Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter.
O. ASTM F 894 - Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Large Diameter Profile Wall
Sewer and Drain Pipe.
P. AWWA C 151 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast.
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. Sliplining: Reconstruction of sanitary sewers by insertion of liner pipe into existing

sewers.
A. Sliplining is accomplished by pulling or pushing liner pipe into existing sewers by

use of mechanical or hydraulic equipment. Once in place, liner pipe is allowed time
to normalize and is then cut to fit between manholes. Annular spaces between liners
and existing sewers are sealed at each manhole. Manhole inverts and benches are
reworked and reshaped. Existing sewers remain in operation during sliplining
process, with sewage flow diverted around operations in progress.
A. Liner Acceptance: Provide liner material manufactured, without defects, to standards

and dimensions specified. Causes for rejection include physical defects of liner pipe,
such as concentrated ridges, chain marks, discoloration, excessive spot roughness,
pitting, visible cracks, foreign inclusions and varying wall thickness.
02550-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Prevent injury to or abrasion of pipe during loading, transportation and unloading. Do

not drop pipe from vehicles nor allow pipe to roll down skids or slopes without
proper restraining ropes. Use suitable pads, strips, skids or blocks for each pipe
during transportation and while awaiting installation.
B. Do not use, and remove from construction site, pipe with physical damage such as
cuts, gashes, nicks or abrasions, whether from manufacturing, shipping, storage or
handling, and which is deeper than 10 percent of wall thickness.
C. Use wide belly band slings for lifting and moving pipe. Do not use bare chains in
contact with pipe.
A. Maintain sewage flow by diversion pumping or other method approved by the

Engineer.
B. Clear existing sewers of debris, obstructions and other foreign material and make
point repairs to existing sewers as specified in Section 02553 - Point Repairs and
Obstruction Removals.
C. Install sliplining according to this Section.
D. Grout annular space(s).
E. Shape, refurbish or construct manhole inverts as specified in Section 02555 -Manhole

Rehabilitation.
F. Test lines as specified in Section 02533 - Acceptance Testing of Sanitary Sewers.
G. Video inspect completed lines as specified in Section 02558 - Cleaning and

1.10 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures, and 01340 - Shop Drawings,
Product Data and Samples.
B. Submit manufacturer's product data with complete information on pipeline materials,

including physical properties and dimensions pertinent to this job. Furnish
certificate(s) of compliance with specifications for materials to be supplied.
C. Submit independent laboratory test reports certifying that polyethylene pipe meets
ASTM D 1248 and ASTM D 3350, that fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) pipe
meets ASTM D 3681, or that PVC pipe meets ASTM F 794 and ASTM D 1784, as
applicable.
D. Submit grouting plan showing where grout is to be injected, materials and chemicals
to be used in grout, anchoring methods, and planned grouting pressure.
02550-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
E. Submit video inspection as specified in Section 02558 - Cleaning and Television

Inspection.
1.11 TESTING
A. The City may have tests performed on field samples by an independent laboratory
following applicable ASTM specifications to verify physical properties and
characteristics of supplied materials. Provide product samples as requested by the
Engineer.
B. The City will pay for tests on materials which meet specification requirements.
Contractor shall pay for failed tests and consequent retesting.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Liner pipe systems shall be polyethylene, fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) PVC
profile wall or polyethylene profile wall pipe, as approved by the City.
B. Refer to City of Houston Approved Products List for acceptable product

manufacturers.
2.02 POLYETHYLENE LINER PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Provide polyethylene liner pipe, manufactured of solid-wall, high-density, high-

molecular-weight polyethylene meeting ASTM D 1248, Type III, Class C, Grade P-
34, Category 5, with a PPI rating of PE 3408. Use polyethylene material with a
minimum cell classification of 3454 34D or E (inner wall of light color) under ASTM
D 3350. Higher-numbered cell classification limits giving desirable higher primary
properties, according to ASTM D 3350, are also acceptable. Provide pipe with
hydrostatic design value not less than 1600 psi when tested according to ASTM D
2837. Dimensions and workmanship shall be in accordance with ASTM F 714 and
ASTM D 2122.
B. Provide pipe with maximum Standard Dimension Ratio (SDR) and ratio of outside
pipe diameter to wall thickness as specified below. Select SDR for the deeper of two
manholes in each pipeline segment.
Maximum Liner Maximum Depth

SDR (feet)
26 10
21 15
19 20
17 Greater than 20
C. Minimum Outside Diameter of liner:
02550-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
Existing Sewer Minimum O.D.

Nominal Diameter of Liner
(Inches) (Inches)
8 7.125
10 8.625
12 10.75
15 14.00
18 16.00
21 18.00
24 22.00
27 26.00
30 28.00
2.03 FRP LINER PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Pipe, joints and fittings: ASTM D 3262, Type 1, Liner 2, Grade 3.
B. FRP Liner Pipe: Reinforced plastic mortar pipe manufactured to produce a dense,
nonporous, corrosion-resistant, consistent, composite structure. Minimum stiffness:
46 psi, measured in accordance with ASTM D 2412. Use with a stiffness of 72 psi
where specified or shown on the Drawings.
C. Resin Systems: Thermosetting polyester resin, with or without filler, meeting ASTM
D 3262.
D. Reinforcing Glass Fibers: Commercial grade E-type glass filaments, with binder and
sizing compatible with impregnating resins.
E. Filler: Sand with at least 98 percent silica content, and maximum moisture content of
0.2 percent.
F. Joints: Low-profile, fiberglass bell-spigot joints or flush fiberglass bell spigot joints.
Either joint shall utilize elastomeric sealing gaskets for watertight joints meeting
ASTM D 4161.
G. Dimensions and Tolerances:
1. Pipe outside diameters and tolerances (18” to 48”): Comply with ASTM D
3262, Cast Iron Pipe Equivalent Outside Diameters, and table below.
2. When possible, supply pipe in nominal lengths of 20 feet. Where radius

curves in existing pipe or limitations in entry pit dimensions restrict pipe
length, shorter lengths may be used.
3. FRP pipe minimum outside diameters and minimum wall thicknesses for low
profile, fiberglass bell-spigot joints:
02550-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
Minimum
Minimum Minimum Wall
Existing Sewer Wall Thickness Thickness
Nominal Liner 46 psi 72 psi
Diameter O.D. Stiffness Stiffness
(Inches) (Inches) (Inches) (Inches)
21 19.50 0.39 0.44
24 21.60 0.43 0.49
30 25.80 0.50 0.57
36 32.00 0.61 0.70
42 38.30 0.72 0.83
48 44.50 0.83 0.95
54 50.80 0.94 1.08
60 57.10 1.05 1.21
66 62.90 1.15 1.33
72 69.20 1.27 1.46
78 75.40 1.38 1.59
4. FRP pipe minimum outside diameters and minimum wall thickness for flush
fiberglass bell spigot joints:
Existing Sewer Minimum Minimum

Nominal Liner Nom. Pipe Wall
Diameter O.D. Stiffness Thickness
(Inches) (Inches) (PSI) (Inches)
21 19.50 426 0.75
24 21.60 310 0.75
30 25.80 187 0.76
36 32.00 143 0.86
42 38.30 95 0.90
48 44.50 82 0.99
54 50.80 74 1.09
60 57.10 65 1.17
66 62.90 62 1.27
72 69.20 71 1.45
78 75.40 59 1.49
5. Fabricate pipe ends square to pipe axis with a maximum tolerance of 1/8”.
H. Fittings:
1. Flanges, elbows, reducers, tees, wyes and other fittings: Capable of

withstanding operating conditions.
02550-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Fabrication: Contact-molded or manufactured from mitered sections of pipe

joined by glass-fiber-reinforced overlays.
2.04 PROFILE WALL PIPE
A. Profile wall pipe may be considered as liner pipe if appropriate submittals, including
data, specifications and sizes were made and accepted during bid phase.
B. PVC Profile Wall Pipe: Comply with Section 02506 – Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and
ASTM F 794.
1. Minimum pipe stiffness: 46 psi.
2. Pipe joints: Flush gasketed joint system meeting ASTM D 3212. Flush joints
shall not increase outside diameter or reduce inside diameter of the pipe.
3. Minimum outside diameter for liners:
Existing Sewer Minimum O.D. of

Nominal Diameter PVC Profile Wall Liner
(Inches) (Inches)
24 22.110
30 28.232
36 31.415
42 37.800
48 44.220
4. Supply pipe in nominal lengths of 15 feet.
C. Polyethylene Profile Wall Pipe:
1. Comply with ASTM F 894 and Section 02505 - High Density Polyethylene
(HDPE) Solid and Profile Wall Pipe.
2. Minimum pipe stiffness: 46 psi.
2.05 LINER PIPE SEALS AT MANHOLES
A. Sealer for annular spaces between liner pipes and host sewers at manholes: Refer to
Specification 02555 – Manhole Rehabilitation when using wall sealing material or the
Approved Product List for mechanical seals.
B. All manhole bench/invert work and annular seals shall be completed at the time of
the post-TV inspection with Post-TV inspection being verification of completion.
Failure to do so may be cause for rejection of the Post-TV inspection and require re-
inspection.
2.06 CLAMPS AND GASKETS
02550-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Clamps: Stainless steel, including bolts and lugs, as manufactured by JCM Industries,
Type 108, or equal. Furnish full circle, universal clamp couplings with at least
3/16-inch thick neoprene grid-type gaskets. Select clamps to fit outside diameter of
liner pipe as follows:
Liner Pipe O.D. Minimum Clamp Length

(Inches) (Inches)
7.125 15
8.625 18
10.750 or greater 30
2.07 BEDDING MATERIAL
A. Bedding: Comply with Section 02320 - Utility Backfill Materials and Section 02321 -
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 OBSTRUCTION REMOVAL AND POINT REPAIR
A. Make point repairs and remove obstructions, such as roots, rocks and other debris,
prior to installing liner pipe. Remove and dispose of in accordance with Section
01504 - Temporary Facilities and Controls, or Section 01576 - Waste Material
Disposal.
B. Refer to Section 02553 - Point Repairs and Obstruction Removals, for requirements
and procedures for point repairs and obstruction removals.
A. Refer to Section 01506 - Diversion Pumping.
3.03 INSERTION OR ACCESS PITS
A. Locate pits so that the total number is minimized and footage of liner pipe installed in
a single pull is maximized. Where possible, use excavations at point repair locations
for insertion pits.
B. Before excavating, locate all utilities, costs of utility repairs, temporary service and
other cost arising out of damage to or interruption of utilities, resulting from
operations under this Contract, shall be borne by Contractor at no additional cost to
City.
C. Perform excavation and backfill in accordance with Section 02317 - Excavation and
D. Perform work in accordance with OSHA standards. Comply with Section 02260 -
Trench Safety System, for excavations requiring trench safety.
02550-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
accordance with Section 01578 - Control of Ground and Surface Water.
3.04 POLYETHYLENE LINER PIPE INSTALLATION
A. Joints:
1. Assemble and join sections of polyethylene liner pipe on site, above ground.
Make joints by heating and butt-fusion method in strict conformance to
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Use operators who are experienced with butt-fusion field-jointing of pipe.

Operators shall be trained in fusing polyethylene pipe with similar equipment
using proper jigs and tools in accordance with pipe manufacturer’s standard
procedures.
3. Form joints with smooth, uniform double-rolled back beads made while
applying proper melt, pressure and alignment. Joints will be inspected by the
Engineer before insertion.
B. Preparation: After completing insertion pit excavation, remove top of existing

sanitary sewer line down to spring line. Connect power winch cable to end of liner
by use of suitable pulling head equal to outside diameter of liner. Secure pulling head
to liner and attach to power winch cable so that liner can be satisfactorily fed and
pulled through sanitary sewer line. Prevent ragged edges of existing pipe from
scarring liner pipe. Follow insertion procedures in ASTM F 585. Do not allow sand
or other debris to enter liner.
C. Pulling Liner:
1. Maximum length of continuous liner assembled above ground and pulled at

any one time: do not exceed length recommended by manufacturer's printed
instructions.
2. Limit pulling force exerted on liner to that indicated below for the appropriate
outside diameter of the polyethylene liner. Provide a suitable pulling force
measuring device connected to the winch or pulling mechanism.
02550-10
CITY OF HOUSTON
Polyethylene Liner O.D. Maximum Pulling Force

(Inches) (Tons)
7.125 3.5
8.625 5.0
10.750 8.0
12.750 12.0
14.0 14.0
16.0 19.5
20.0 29.0
28.0 52.0
D. Alternate Insertion Techniques: Pushing, or a combination of pulling and pushing,

may be used subject to the Engineer's approval. Avoid liner buckling or dimpling by
limiting stroke of pushing implement. Cut out and remove portions damaged during
insertion process.
3.05 FRP LINER PIPE INSTALLATION
A. FRP liner pipe may be pushed or pulled into existing sewers. Insert pipes, spigot end
first, with bell end trailing. Apply pushing force to pipe wall end inside bell in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not apply jacking loads to end of
bell. Maximum allowable joint angular deflection shall be one degree. Keep within
safe jacking loads as follows:
Nominal Diameter Maximum Jacking Load

(Inches) (Tons) for 46 psi Stiffness
21 22
24 30
30 42
36 50
42 65
48 80
54 100
60 120
66 140
72 160
78 180
3.06 PROFILE WALL PIPE INSTALLATION
A. PVC Profile Wall Pipe
1. Evaluation: Prior to each installation of PVC profile wall pipe, pull trail liner
approximately 15 feet long and of the same diameter proposed, to make sure
proposed pipe will completely pass through existing line.
02550-11
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Preparation:
a. After completing insertion pit excavation, remove top of existing

sanitary sewer host pipe down to spring line to expose channel for
liner placement. Prevent ragged edges of host pipe from scarring liner
pipe.
b. Regulate sewer flow so pipe is flowing approximately one-third full.

Do not allow sand or other debris to enter liner or annular space during
pipe insertion.
3. Installation:
a. Pushing Liner: Place liner pipe in channel and push forward. Use
pushing plate or insertion ring to distribute load from hydraulic or
mechanical pipe pusher to end of profile wall pipe. Attach device for
measuring jacking/pushing force to pipe pusher. Constantly monitor
jacking/pushing force. If jacking/pushing force exceeds 12 tons, stop
insertion and consult pipe manufacturer for specific instructions and
recommendations. Notify the Engineer each time there is deviation
from proposed installation plan. Maximum length of PVC profile wall
pipe inserted/pushed: Do not exceed manufacturer’s recommendations.
b. Joints: After insertion of liner pipe, lubricate gasketed couplings and

grooved spigots with special subaqueous lubricant furnished by pipe
manufacturer.
c. Closely monitor grouting pressures; not to exceed 5 psi. Remove liner

pipe collapsed by excess grouting pressure or improper procedure and
replace with undamaged liner pipe.
B. Polyethylene Profile Wall Pipe
1. Evaluation: Prior to each installation of profile wall pipe, pull trial liner
approximately 15 feet long and of the same diameter proposed, to make sure
proposed pipe will completely pass through existing line.
2. Preparation:
a. After completing insertion pit excavation, remove top of existing

sanitary sewer host pipe down to spring line to expose channel for
liner placement. Prevent ragged edges of host pipe from scarring liner
pipe.
b. Do not allow sand or other debris to enter liner or annular space during
pipe insertion.
3. Installation:
02550-12
CITY OF HOUSTON
a. Jack or push liner pipe into host pipe without obstruction such as
dropped or shifted joints. Constantly monitor jacking/pushing force
during the insertion. Place insertion ring or pushing plate between
pushing/jacking device and end of pipe. Jacking/pushing force shall
not exceed 10 tons.
b. Joints:
(1) Place gasket facing correct direction and properly seated in

spigot groove.
(2) Apply lubricant to entire spigot groove, to exposed gasket

surface and to entire inner surface of bell.
(3) Seat spigot in “home” position in bell.
c. Grout pressure: Do not exceed collapse resistance of the liner.

Remove liner pipe collapsed by excess grouting pressure or improper
procedure and replace with undamaged liner pipe.
3.07 CLAMP INSTALLATION
A. Where excavations for liner pipe insertion are made between two manholes, cut ends
of liner pipe smooth and square to pipe axis. Join liner pipes with appropriately sized
stainless steel universal clamp couplings. Butt together gap between ends of liner
pipe with space between ends not exceeding 2 inches.
B. Bedding: Install cement-stabilized sand in accordance with Section 02321 – Cement

Stabilized Sand. Extend bedding 12 inches above clamp/liner pipe.
3.08 FRP COLLAR/CLOSURE
A. Install FRP collar closure pieces in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations.
A. After liner installation, perform the following tests:
1. Low pressure air test: Perform before sealing liner in place at manholes, and
before making service reconnections to liner. Check integrity of joints made
and verify that liner has not been damaged.
2. Service lateral connection test: After all service laterals have been completed
for a particular sewer section, verify integrity of re-connections at points
where they join liners and existing service lines by performing smoke test.
3. Refer to Section 02533 - Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers, for

applicable test procedures.
02550-13
CITY OF HOUSTON
3.10 SEALING LINER IN MANHOLE
A. Allow liner pipe to normalize to ambient temperatures and recover from imposed
stretch before cutting to fit between manholes, sealing at manholes and shaping
manhole invert. Allow at least 12 hours for normalization of polyethylene.
B. Cut liner so it extends 4 inches into manholes. Make smooth, vertical cuts and slope
areas over top of exposed liner using non-shrink grout.
C. Seal annular spaces between liner and sanitary sewer main at each manhole with
chemical seal and non-shrink grout or mechanical seals.
D. Finish seal liner pipe to host pipe with non-shrink grout placed around annular space
from inside manhole. Apply grout in a band at least 6 inches wide. Obtain the
Engineer’s approval of sealing methods, including seal chemicals and materials.
E. Use cementitious grout to form smooth transitions with reshaped inverts and raised
manhole benches to eliminate sharp edges of liner pipe, concrete benches, and
channeled inverts. Build up and smooth manhole invert to match flow line of new
liner.
F. Build up the existing invert, in accordance with Document 02555 – Manhole

Rehabilitation.
3.11 GROUTING ANNULAR SPACE
A. Obtain approval of grouting plan from the Engineer before proceeding with the Work.
B. Grout annular space between the outside of liner and inside of existing pipe for sewer
pipe 18 inches in diameter and larger.
3.12 POST-INSTALLATION VIDEOTAPE RECORDING
A. Provide the Engineer with video inspection showing completed work including
condition of restored connections. Comply with Section 02533 - Acceptance Testing
for Sanitary Sewers, and Section 02558 - Cleaning and Television Inspection.
3.13 FINAL CLEANUP
A. Upon completion of installation and testing, clean and restore project area affected by
work of this Section. Restore site in accordance with Section 01740 - Site
Restoration.
END OF SECTION
02550-14
CITY OF HOUSTON SANITARY SEWER RENEWAL BY
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION SPIN CAST PIPE LINING METHOD
SECTION 02551
SANITARY SEWER RENEWAL BY SPIN CAST PIPE LINING METHOD
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Proposed methods and materials for the renewal of deteriorated gravity sewer pipes
by the Spin Cast Pipe Lining (SCPL) method.
C. Section 01506 – Diversion Pumping
D. Section 01740 – Site Restoration
E. Section 02553 – Point Repairs and Obstruction Removals
F. Section 02558 – Cleaning and Television Inspection
A. Unit Prices:
1. Measurement and payment for SCPL is on a linear foot basis, measured along
centerline of pipe from centerline to centerline of manholes or junction boxes,
and shall be considered full compensation for all labor and materials required
to install the liner to specified requirements. The depth range for payment is
based on greatest depth measured at manholes from natural ground level to
flow line of sanitary sewer for each pipeline segment.
2. No separate payment will be made for the following items of work. Include
cost in the unit price for installing SCPL:
a. Sealing the liner in manholes/services.
b. Temporary meter and municipal water obtained from a City fire

hydrant.
c. Antimicrobial System, Epoxy (only when directed by Engineer) or

approved substitute.
02551-1
3. No separate payment will be made for pre-installation and post-installation

cleaning and television inspection as specified in Section 02558 – Cleaning
and Television Inspection.
4. Where post-installation thickness measurements or physical property testing is

performed, payment for installed SCPL shall be made as follows:
a. Full payment: If thickness, compressive strength and flexural modulus

of elasticity of installed SCPL are all 95 percent or better of specified
values, full payment shall be made.
b. Adjusted payment: If thickness, compressive strength or flexural

modulus of elasticity is between 90 percent and 95 percent of specified
values, payment shall be made based on an Adjusted Unit Price, which
shall equal the Unit Price bid, multiplied by a Value Factor calculated
as follows:
actual compressive actual modulus of

actual thickness x strength x elasticity
specified specified specified modulus
thickness compressive strength of elasticity
"Value Factor" shall not exceed 100 percent.
5. Payment for point repairs and obstruction will be made according to Section
02553 – Point Repairs and Obstruction Removals.
6. Payment for repair of sags in the line will be made either according to Section
02553 – Point Repairs and Obstruction Removals, or according to the
diameter and depth of the pipe if “Remove and Replace” is the method of
repair designed by the Engineer.
7. Measurement and payment for repairs of defects to the interior surface of the
pipe due to acid erosion or abrasion is on a cubic foot basis.
8. Refer to Section 01270 – Measurement and Payment
B. Stipulated Price (Lump Sum): If the Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract, payment
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical

Concrete Specimens.
B. ASTM C 172 - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.
C. ASTM C293 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using
Simple Beam with Center-Point Loading).
02551-2
D. ASTM C 469 - Standard Test Method for Static Modulus of Elasticity and Poisson’s
Ratio of Concrete in Compression.
E. ASTM F 2414 – Standard Practice for Sealing Sewer Manholes Using Chemical
Grouting.
F. ASTM E 2149 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Antimicrobial Activity of
Immobilized Antimicrobial Agents under Dynamic Contact Conditions.
G. ACI Field Technician Certification Programs: Grade 1 Technician.
A. SCPL involves renewal of deteriorated gravity sanitary sewer pipe that is

centrifugally applied through a spin caster or hand sprayed to the interior surface of
the host pipe after it has been properly prepared and cleaned. The finished surface
shall have flow characteristics that closely match the original pipe.
B. A spin cast liner cures into a hard, impermeable, smooth, corrosion-resistant liner of
specified thickness and physical properties, with a uniform interior surface.
C. Spin Cast Material and Installation: Comply with ASTM C 39. The City reserves the
right to approve materials or installation practices which differ from these standards.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures.
B. Spin Cast Geopolymer Liner Material:
1. Submit product data with physical and chemical properties.
2. Submit results of testing performed by liner manufacturer demonstrating

compliance with specified chemical properties requirements for each product
batch.
3. Submit manufacturer-certified batch analysis for basic physical properties

performed at manufacturing facility.
C. Installed Geopolymer Liner:
1. Submit field measurements of cured liner thickness for determining payment.
2. Samples shall be obtained by ACI Certified, Grade 1 Technicians.
3. Submit representative sample(s) of the cured liner required for testing in

Accordance with ASTM C 39.
4. Submit post-installation television inspection video as specified in Section

02558-Cleaning and Television Inspection.
02551-3
A. During the course of the Work, make no substitutions of materials, design values or
Procedures for those specified without the prior written approval of the Engineer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Geopolymer Liner:
1. The geopolymer lining material shall be a micro-fiber reinforced ultra-dense

geopolymer. The material shall provide a high strength fiber reinforced mortar
specifically designed for ease of mechanical pumping, spraying and spin
casting. The geopolymer liner shall not clog spinner heads or spray
equipment.
2. The geopolymer liner shall be designed to produce a liner with improved

compressive and flexural strength, high adhesion to damp surfaces, lower
permeability and increased resistance to aggressive chemical attack.
3. The fiber reinforced formula shall be engineered to improve hydraulic

abrasion resistance, provide dimensional stability and protect against
penetration by substances such as fats, oils, gases, and where high corrosion
exists within a sanitary sewer environment.
B. Anti-Microbial System (AMS):
1. Application of Antimicrobial Liquid, or Epoxy (only when directed by

Engineer), to prevent Microbiologically Induced Corrosion (MIC). The work
consists of rolling, spraying or centrifugally applying AMS Liquid, approved
substitute, or epoxy to the inside of the newly cast pipe. Equipment required
for application can include centrifugal spray mechanisms, pneumatic spray
pumps, hand pumps or paint style roller.
2. The Antimicrobial Liquid, or Epoxy, shall be used full strength as received

from the manufacturer and shall not be diluted.
3. The Antimicrobial Liquid, shall be applied during the application of the

geopolymer liner or anytime thereafter. Epoxies shall be applied after proper
curing of the liner.
4. The Antimicrobial Liquid shall be applied adequately to achieve surface

saturation. Epoxies must be applied at a minimum thickness of 125 mils.
5. The Antimicrobial Liquid, or Epoxies, must be allowed to cure for a minimum

of 12 hours, or meet manufacturer recommended cure time, prior to releasing
bypass or opening to any traffic.
02551-4
A. Manufacturer’s Physical Properties Testing: Perform product testing according to

ASTM C-39 and ASTM C-469. Test frequency and sample preparation: Follow
ASTM C-172.
B. Test Results: Submit test results including at least the following:
1. Raw data for each test specimen for each test performed
2. Calculated average test results for each test performed
3. Using calculated averages for each test, calculate the average test result.
2.03 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
A. Minimum Geopolymer Liner Thickness after Curing: As specified in the table below,
the minimum liner thickness is based on the maximum sewer depth for the segment
being rehabilitated. The thickness installed must meet the manufacturers written
requirements. The standard conditions utilized in the table below include: a pipe in
the fully deteriorated condition, the water table is assumed to be at the surface; soil is
assumed at 130 lbs/cubic foot, and a traffic loading of HL-93. The installed liner
system, complete in place, must meet or exceed site specific conditions.
Minimum Geopolymer Liner Thickness:
Sewer Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum

Pipe Invert Depth Invert Depth Invert Depth Invert Depth
Diameter 0 to 10 feet 10-15 feet 15-20 feet 20 - 25 feet
30” 1.5 “ 1.5” 1.5” 1.5”
36” 1.5” 1.5” 1.5” 1.5”
48” 1.5” 1.5” 1.5” 1.6”
54” 1.5” 1.5” 1.6” 1.7”
60” 1.5” 1.5” 1.7” 1.8”
72” 1.5” 1.6” 1.9” 2.0”
84” 1.6” 1.8” 2.0” 2.2”
96” 1.8” 1.9” 2.1” 2.4”
108” 2.4” 2.0” 2.3” 2.5”
120” *** 2.1” 2.4” 2.6”
Note: If host pipe condition is deemed to be more severe than assumed conditions,
liner thickness may be increased upon approval by the Engineer.
B. The geopolymer liner material shall also conform to the minimum requirements
demonstrated in the following table:
02551-5
ASTM
Physical Properties Reference Requirements
Minimum 8,000 psi @ 28
Compressive Strength ASTM C 39
days
Min. 5,000,000 psi @ 28
Modulus of Elasticity ASTM C 469
days
Flexural Strength ASTM C 293 Minimum 800 psi @ 28 days
C. If different conditions are encountered in the field, design considerations may change,
if required by the Project Manager. Required thickness maybe increased or decreased
based on specific design. The thickness may be changed in increments of 0.2 inches
and payment shall be made or deducted at the rate of 7.5% of the bid item amount for
each increment. However, the Contractor shall not be allowed to change any required
thickness unilaterally or offer credits after the fact as remedy for liners not meeting
the required thickness. Prior approval shall always be required for any changes in
geopolymer liner thickness. Refer also to “Non-Confirming Work” in Section 3.10.
2.04 FIELD TESTING
A. For each section length designated by the owner in the Contract documents, the
geopolymer liner material may be collected at the mixer, immediately before
discharge into the pump, at the pump discharge, or at the end of the hose near the
discharge point. Use cylinders as in accordance with Test Method ASTM C 39, A 4-
inch by 8-inch cylinder shall be used to sample the material. ACI grade 1 certified
technicians shall be used to obtain the sample. Documentation showing the field
sample technicians ACI status shall be available onsite. Sample frequency shall not
be less than once daily.
B. Make cylinders for each contract specified section and label each with the date,
location, project, and product batch numbers. The product batch numbers are located
on each liner material bag or on the pallet. ACI technicians shall be used to properly
collect and store the samples. The 4-inch by 8-inch samples cylinders must be air mist
cured per manufacturers’ recommendation.
C. Thickness can be verified with a wet gage at any point of the new interior surface.
Thickness measurements shall be taken at the beginning and end of any section of
pipe being rehabilitated. The measurements shall be written in a daily log that
includes the date, properly identifies the section of pipe, the actual measurements
recorded (to tenths of an inch), and the name of the person taking the measurements.
02551-6
D. When requested by Project Manager, the contractor shall remove a test core from the
installed liner pipe at the contractor’s expense, at established intervals. Contractor
shall mark the core sample with the date that the liner was installed, the date that the
core was removed, and the location within the pipe segment. The inspector shall
initial the test coupon and provide it to the testing lab. A caliper or other suitable
measuring device shall be used to test liner thickness. When requested by Project
Manager, the pipe liner sample shall be cored at three different clock positions, and
the average thicknesses measured shall be taken as the actual thickness of the spin
cast liner. If a sample fails the test, additional material shall be applied to meet the
thickness requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PRE-INSTALLATION CLEANING AND TELEVISION INSPECTION
A. Perform a pre-installation television inspection in accordance with Section 02558-

Cleaning and Television Inspection. Verify that sewer is clean and pipe conditions are
suitable for installation of the geopolymer liner. Notify Project Manager if conditions
exist which will impact the installation.
3.02 OBSTRUCTION REMOVAL, POINT REPAIR AND SAG ELIMINATION
A. If pre-installation video inspection reveals an obstruction in the line segment (such as

heavy solids, dropped joints, protruding service connections or collapsed pipe) that
cannot be removed by conventional sewer cleaning equipment and the obstruction
will prevent completion of the lining process, perform point repairs or obstruction
removal prior to the geopolymer liner installation. Obtain approval of the Project
Manager before performing work. Follow Requirements in Section 02553 – Point
Repairs and Obstruction Removals.
B. If the pre-installation video inspection reveals a sag in the sewer that has a vertical
displacement greater than one-half the pipe diameter, eliminate the sag by performing
a point repair as specified in Section 02553 – Point Repairs and Obstruction
Removals, or by removal and replacement of the sewer segment. Obtain approval of
the Project Manager before performing work.
C. If the pre-installation video inspection reveals defects and failures on the interior pipe
surface, due to acid erosion or abrasion, the repairs shall be made when directed by
Project Manager. Measures shall be taken to provide a continuous slope to the pipe,
including the use of a flowable fill or the introduction of the wall lining material onto
the pipes surface.
D. If the pre-installation video inspection reveals open, separated, or offset joints, the
joints shall be sealed with the geopolymer lining material prior to the lining of the
pipe.
3.03 CLEANING
02551-7
A. All internal debris shall be removed from the original pipeline. Gravity pipes shall be
cleaned with hydraulically powered equipment, high-velocity jet cleaners, or
mechanically powered equipment. If pipe diameters allow for manned entry, the use
of high-pressure washers delivering a minimum of 3500-psi, may be utilized. The use
of higher-pressure washers may be required to achieve the desired surface condition.
In some instances, mechanical cleaning methods may be required. The surface of the
pipe to be lined shall be capable of directly receiving the lining material.
A. Maintain commercial and residential sanitary sewer service during the installation
process.
B. Install and operate diversion pumping equipment to maintain sewage flow around the
segment of pipe being rehabilitated, and to prevent backup or overflow, as specified
in Section 01506 – Diversion Pumping.
3.05 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
A. Notification: Inform the Project Manager of work schedules for SCPL.
B. Conduct operations in accordance with applicable OSHA standards, including safety

requirements involving work on elevated platforms and entry into confined spaces.
Take suitable precautions to eliminate hazards to personnel near construction
activities when pressurized air is being used.
C. Mixing: Combine all of the packaged geopolymer liner dry mix with the specified
amount of potable water while mixing until proper consistency is obtained, as
described by the manufacturer. The mixer must be capable of regulating the amount
of water added to the mix on a consistent basis. Water shall not be added by hand to
the mixing chamber. Water temperatures shall be monitored when ambient
temperatures are above 90 degrees F or below 40 degrees F. Tempering of the
material above the manufacturers published limits is not allowed. Continue to agitate
the geopolymer liner material to prevent thickening beyond the desired fluidity. The
working time shall be as per manufacturer’s recommendation.
02551-8
D. Application: Position the rotating casting applicator within the center of the sewer
pipe and commence pumping the mixed geopolymer liner material. As the
geopolymer liner begins to be centrifugally cast evenly around the interior, retrieve
the applicator head at the predetermined speed for applying the thickness that has
been selected. The geopolymer liner is installed in several stages at a predetermined
thickness per application. If flows are interrupted for any reason, arrest the retrieval
of the applicator head until flows are restored. Liner thickness shall be applied to the
thickness specified by the engineer but no less than ½ in. (1.3 cm). The retrieval
speed is varied to create different thicknesses as the condition may dictate to provide
sufficient strengths. If the measured pipe ovality is greater than five percent, a
licensed engineer must review and approve application design thickness
requirements. Retrieval speed will be calculated prior to application and will be
adjusted for conditions, pipe diameter, design thickness, and pumping rate to meet the
engineer’s specifications. The retrieval mechanism must be capable of producing a
consistent retrieval rate and be repeatable within 5 percent of the speed specified.
Where the geopolymer liner meets other pipes/liners, the joints shall be flush with no
gaps, providing a uniform surface.
E. Curing:
1. Follow manufacturer’s recommended cure schedule in curing of the

geopolymer liner.
2. Refer to ACI 305R-99 Hot Weather Concreting. Do not apply geopolymer

liner material when ambient and surface temperatures are 100°F or 35°C and
above. Shade the material and prepare the surface to keep it cool. To extend
working time, mix the material with cool water or ice-cooled water. The
substrate shall be saturated surface dry (SSD) before application begins.
Follow ACI 305R-99 guidelines for the proper use of curing agents.
3. The geopolymer liner shall not be placed when the ambient temperature is 37
degrees Fahrenheit and falling or when the temperature is anticipated to fall
below 32 degrees Fahrenheit during the next 24 hours, unless specific
precautions are employed. At temperatures near 45°F or 7°C, warm the
material, water, and substrate. Properly ventilate the area when heating.
Protect the new liner from freezing.
F. If additional thickness is desired at any section, place the spin cast applicator at that
level and recommence pumping and retrieval until that area is thickened. The
geopolymer product design and application process shall result in a monolithic liner.
G. Finished Pipe: The spin cast renewal system using the geopolymer liner material
produces a finely textured surface that requires no additional troweling or finishing.
3.06 SEALING AT MANHOLES/SERVICES
02551-9
A. Form tight seals between the geopolymer wall liner and the manhole walls at pipe
penetrations and form tight seals at service connections. Place the geopolymer
material around the pipe opening from inside the manhole in a band at least 4 inches
wide. Complete sealing procedures for each liner segment as required.
B. Reshape and smooth the manhole invert and build up the existing invert until it is full
pipe depth (equal in depth to the diameter of the largest/outgoing pipe) across the
manhole bottom up to 15” pipe diameter.
C. Build inverts for all lateral sewers entering the manhole whose flow line elevation is
between the crown and flowline elevations of the outgoing/downstream pipe.
Maximum depth of lateral invert shall be up to full pipe depth (equal in depth to the
diameter of lateral/upstream sewer when the top of the proposed sloped bench is the
same elevation as the crown of the lateral sewer) at the upstream end and full pipe
diameter of the outgoing/downstream sewer at the downstream end up to 15”
maximum pipe diameter.
A. Make and submit videos showing complete work, including condition of restored
Connections. Refer to Section 02558 – Cleaning and Television Inspection.
B. All manhole bench/invert work shall be completed at time of Post-TV, with Post-TV
being verification of completion.
3.08 FINAL CLEANUP
A. Upon completion of renewal work and testing, clean and restore project area affected
by the Work in accordance with Section 01740 – Site Restoration.
3.09 NON-CONFORMING WORK
A. If the thickness, or the compressive strength or the compressive modulus of elasticity

of the installed spin cast pipe lining is less than 90 percent of the specified values, the
product is considered unacceptable. Submit a proposed method of repair or
replacement for review and approval by the Project Manager. Work required to
remedy non-conforming work shall be at no additional cost to the City.
B. If it is determined that the geopolymer liner material did not match the submitted
manufacturers claims, the product is considered unacceptable and non-conforming.
Submit proof that the geopolymer liner meets the requirements of the specification
through the use of samples analyzed or retained at the manufacturing facility or
submit a method for replacement of the sewer segment liner for review and approval
by the City. Work required to remedy non-conforming work shall be at no additional
cost to the City.
02551-10
C. For all instances, where the geopolymer liner is deemed unacceptable, other than
thickness, or compressive strength, as described in this specification section, submit a
proposed method of repair or replacement for review and approval by the Project
Manager. Work required to remedy non-conforming work shall be at no additional
cost to the City.
END OF SECTION
02551-11
CITY OF HOUSTON POINT REPAIRS AND
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION OBSTRUCTION REMOVALS
SECTION 02553
POINT REPAIRS AND OBSTRUCTION REMOVALS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Repair of sanitary sewer lines by replacing short lengths of failed pipe with new pipe.
B. Repair of service lines located within the utility easement or street right-of-way, by
replacing short lengths of failed pipe with new pipe.
C. Obstruction removal by remote device or excavation.
F. Section 01578 – Control of Ground and Surface Water
G. Section 01740 – Site Restoration
H. Section 02260 – Trench Safety System
I. Section 02317 – Excavation and Backfill for Utilities
J. Section 02321 – Cement Stabilized Sand
K. Section 02501 – Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings
L. Section 02504 – Fiberglass Reinforced Pipe
M. Section 02506 – Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe
N. Section 02528 – Polyethylene Encasement/Wrap
O. Section 02533 – Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers
P. Section 02534 – Sanitary Sewer Service Stubs or Reconnections
02553-1
Q. Section 02558 – Cleaning and Television Inspection
R. Section 02611 – Reinforced Concrete Pipe
S. Section 03315 – Concrete for Utility Construction
A. Unit Prices:
1. Point Repair:
a. Measurement for sewer line point repair is on a unit price basis for
each point repair performed. The length of pipe to be replaced under
each point repair pay item, as determined by depth of sewer line
measured from natural ground to flowline at the location of the point
of repair, is as follows:
(1) Six (6) feet minimum length for sewers up to ten (10) feet
deep.
(2) Ten (10) feet minimum length for sewers over ten (10) feet
deep.
b. Measurement for sewer line pipe replacement beyond point repair is

on a linear foot basis in excess of minimum replacement lengths
specified above.
c. Payment for service line point repair is on a linear foot basis for all
sizes of service lines and for all depths (same unit price per linear foot,
regardless of size and depth). No separate payment will be made for
point repair done within the limits of a service line reconnection as
defined in Section 02534 - Sanitary Sewer Service Stubs or
Reconnections. Minimum length of service line point repair is 3 feet.
d. Measurement for hand excavation is on a cubic yard basis when

authorized by the Project Manager in locations where excavation by
machine is not suitable.
e. Measurement for abandonment of point repair by excavation is on a

per each basis for excavation required to expose existing pipe.
Separate measurement will be made for machine excavation and hand
excavation.
f. Measurement for abandonment of point repair by video inspection is

on a linear foot basis for TV Inspection and Cleaning.
02553-2
g. The cost of the following items of work are included in the unit prices
for point repairs unless included as a bid item in Document 00410 –
Bid Form:
(1) Excavation, embedment and backfill.
(2) Hauling away and lawful disposal of excess excavated

materials and debris.
(3) Pipe, pipe fittings, adapters and concrete collars.
(4) Smoke testing and any required testing.
(5) Restoration of site improvements, including sodding.
(6) Pre- and post-cleaning video inspection.
h. Pipe replacement required as part of a new or replacement manhole

installation, due to existing deteriorated or inadequate pipe, shall be
paid for under the Pipe Replacement Beyond Point Repair pay item
appropriate for the size and depth of the sewer. Pipe replacement
required due to damage by or for the convenience of the Contractor
shall be paid by the Contractor.
i. Storm sewer replacement required to properly rehabilitate the sanitary

sewer shall be paid under the Point Repair pay item appropriate to the
storm sewer size and depth being replaced. Additional length shall be
paid under the Pipe Replacement Beyond Point Repair pay item
appropriate to the storm sewer size and depth being replaced.
j. Point Repairs performed due to sag in the sewer line shall be paid for
under the Point Repair pay item appropriate for the size and depth of
the line.
2. Obstruction Removal:
a. Obstruction removal by excavation will be paid on a unit price basis

according to depth for each removal. Obstruction removal can be
submitted for payment when the obstruction has been cleared from the
sewer line to be lined. Liner work must proceed at least 6 feet before
payment for removal of another obstruction will be considered (i.e., all
obstruction within a distance of 6 feet is considered to be part of the
same obstruction.)
b. Depth shall be measured from natural ground level to the flow line at
the point of obstruction removal.
c. The cost of the following items of work are included in the unit prices
for obstruction removal by remote device or excavation:
02553-3
(1) Cleaning of sanitary sewers due to broken pipe, roots, dirt,

loose deposits, etc.
(2) Television inspection.
(3) Excavation, embedment and backfill.
(4) Hauling away and lawful disposal of excess excavated material

and debris.
(5) Restoration of site improvements, including sodding.
d. Payment will not be made for obstruction removal if the existing sewer
line, service line or tap is damaged, and a point repair is required.
Payment will not be made for removal of a protruding tap if the
service reconnection is performed by excavation.
e. Removal of hard deposits, concrete, debris, pipes or any other material

in a manhole, or that is accessible from the manhole wall, will be
cleared under work items for rehabilitation of sanitary sewer pipes and
manholes.
A. Point Repair:
1. Locate and replace small lengths of one or more pipe sections where isolated
line failure has occurred due to settlement, corrosion, crushing, or separation
of joints.
2. The Project Manager may identify potential locations for point repair, but the
Contractor is responsible for verifying locations. Point repairs to sewer lines
are listed in Point Repair Rehabilitation Tables. Point repairs to service lines
are listed in Lateral Line Rehabilitation Tables.
3. Determine the location of service line repairs by smoke testing the manhole
section in which the failed pipe is located. The Project Manager will authorize
the Contractor to make point repairs based on results of smoke testing.
4. Conduct all smoke testing in accordance with the City of Houston

“Procedures to Conduct Physical Inspections of the Wastewater Collection
System”. Smoke testing shall not be performed within 24 hours of a rainfall
event or if ponded or standing water is present on the ground or in the
drainage channels in the area planned for smoke testing.
02553-4
5. Smoke testing shall be accomplished utilizing two (2) minimum 1,750 CFM
blowers designed specifically for smoke testing of sewers. Place blower on the
upstream and downstream manhole of the line section to be tested. Place
sandbags in the upstream and downstream manholes to isolate the section
being tested and prevent the migration of smoke into sections not being tested.
Utilize smoke bombs as necessary to ensure a continuous supply of smoke is
provided for the entire duration of the test period.
6. Determine the location of point repairs by smoke testing or closed circuit

television inspection of the failed pipe location. The Project Manager will
authorize the Contractor to make point repairs.
7. The Project Manager will authorize each point repair after failure points are
located. Do not make point repairs without prior authorization of the Project
Manager. Perform point repairs only on those portions of service lines which
are located in an easement or right-of-way; perform no repairs to service lines
on private property.
8. Replace carrier pipe for point repairs unless otherwise directed by the Project
Manager.
B. Obstruction Removal: Remove obstructions by one of the following methods:
1. Obstruction removal by remote device:
a. Protruding taps: Service lines that protrude more than one inch into the
sewer.
b. Other obstructions: Hanging gaskets, fixed debris, stabilized sand,

hardened mineral deposits, roots, rust scale, tuberculation, etc.
2. Obstruction removal by excavation: Obstructions encountered during liner

insertion that are removed by digging and exposing the pipe.
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. Point Repair: Repair of broken or collapsed gravity sanitary sewer lines on public
property, including mains, collectors and service lines, by replacing, at the point of
failure, the length of failed pipe with new pipe.
B. Obstruction Removal: Clearing sewer mains of obstructions to allow for

rehabilitation.
C. Sewer Lines: Gravity flow pipe lines in the easement or right-of-way which collect
sanitary sewer discharges from commercial or residential service lines and discharge
into another sewer line (main or collector), or into a lift station or treatment plant.
D. Service Lines: Those gravity flow sewer lines from commercial or residential
property that discharge into a sewer line.
02553-5
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals: Comply with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Submit product data for each pipe product, fitting and jointing material.
C. Submit Pre and Post inspection videos in accordance with Section 02558- Cleaning
and Television Inspection.
1.07 SEQUENCING
A. Before rehabilitating a sewer line section between adjacent manholes, complete point
repair and obstruction removal on that section.
B. Clean the line and perform a post-installation video inspection for each point repair
on a sewer line not scheduled for additional rehabilitation.
C. Post-installation video inspection of the service line point repair is not required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PVC PIPE
A. PVC Sewer Pipe and Joints: 4-inch through 24-inch pipe complying with Section
02506 - Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe. If point repair is located at a service connection, use
a full-bodied fitting for the service connection. No field fabrication of fittings
allowed.
A. Ductile Iron Pipe: 4-inch thorough 48-inch, complying with Section 02501 – Ductile
Iron Pipe and Fittings.
B. Fittings: Push-on end-joint fittings with bell-and-spigot ends, with bells modified for
push- on joints, complying with Section 02501 - Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings.
C. Interior Coating: Comply with Section 02501 - Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings.
D. Exterior coating: 8-mil polyethylene tubular material conforming to requirements of

Section 02528 – Polyethylene Encasement/Wrap.
A. Reinforced Concrete Pipe and Joints: Comply with Section 02611 - Reinforced
Concrete Pipe. Reinforced concrete pipe may be used for sewers 21 inches in
diameter and larger.
2.04 FRP PIPE
02553-6
A. FRP Pipe: Comply with Section 02504 - Fiberglass Reinforced Pipe.
2.05 JOINTING MATERIALS
A. Use flexible adapters secured with 1/2-inch stainless steel bands, Flexible adapter
must comply with ASTM C-1173.
B. Form a concrete collar around each joint using concrete complying with Section
03315 - Concrete for Utility Construction.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PROTECTION
A. Provide barricades, warning lights and signs for excavations created by point repairs.
Comply with Section 01504 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.
B. Do not allow soil, sand, debris or runoff to enter sewer system.
A. Install and operate diversion pumping equipment as required to maintain sewage flow
and to prevent backup or overflow. Comply with Section 01506 - Diversion Pumping.
3.03 EXCAVATION
A. Excavate and backfill trenches in accordance with Section 02317 - Excavation and
B. Perform work in accordance with OSHA standards. Employ a trench safety system as
required in Section 02260 - Trench Safety System.
C. Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface water control measures as
required in Section 01578 – Control of Ground and Surface Water.
D. Remove and lawfully dispose of excess excavated material and debris from the work
site daily.
3.04 TYPICAL SEQUENCE OF POINT REPAIR
A. Perform pre-installation video inspection to verify the location of sewer line point
repairs. Perform service testing between manholes to verify location of service line
point repairs.
B. After the location of a point repair, excavate the required length for the point repair.
02553-7
C. Prior to replacing pipe, determine condition of the existing line on both sides of the
point repair by lamping the line at least 10 feet in each direction. Determine whether
additional lengths of line (beyond "minimum length" criteria) need replacement.
Report need for additional replacement to the Project Manager and obtain
authorization before proceeding.
D. Remove the damaged pipe and replace with new pipe, shaping the bottom of the
trench and placing the required pipe bedding so that the grade of the replaced pipe
matches the grade of the existing line. Establish proper grade for the pipe being
replaced using methods acceptable to the Project Manager.
E. Connect the new pipe to existing pipe using flexible adapters. If joints cannot be
made watertight using flexible adapters, place waterstop gaskets on each joint and
encase in a reinforced concrete collar as indicated on Drawing 02531-04, Sanitary
Sewer Pipe Transition for 36" Sewer and Smaller. Place concrete as specified in
Section 03315 - Concrete for Utility Construction. Reconnect affected service
connections or stacks using full-bodied fittings. No field fabrication of fittings
allowed.
F. After completion of point repair, but prior to backfill, perform a smoke test to
demonstrate the integrity of the repair, in the presence of the Project Manager. Test as
specified in Section 02533 - Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers. Repair and
retest sections that fail until repair passes test.
G. Encase exposed pipe in cement stabilized sand complying with Section 02321 –
H. Backfill the excavation as specified in Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for
Utilities.
I. Complete site restoration as specified in Section 01740 - Site Restoration.
J. Perform a post-installation video inspection as specified in Section 02558 - Cleaning

and Television Inspection. Point repairs that show offset joints, non-uniform grade,
incorrect alignment, excessive deflection or similar conditions are considered
defective work. Replace pipe and bedding as required to correct defective work.
K. Extra length of Pipe Replacement beyond the Point Repair limits may be extended to
the entire section either way, even to the next continuous section, as directed by the
Project Manager.
3.05 ABANDONMENT OF POINT REPAIR
A. If a pipe is exposed by excavation and found to be in good condition, not requiring a

point repair, the point repair shall be abandoned. Notify the Project Manager.
B. If pre-installation video inspection reveals that no point repair is required, the

Contractor shall notify the Project Manager and the point repair shall be abandoned.
02553-8
C. Backfill the excavation, replace pavement or sidewalk, and repair and seed or sod
unpaved areas, as specified in Section 01740 - Site Restoration.
3.06 OBSTRUCTION REMOVAL
A. Remote Device: Remove obstructions identified during video inspection of a sanitary

sewer line segment which could cause a non-uniform liner pipe installation or
obstruction of the liner during installation. Obtain authorization from the Project
Manager for obstruction removal with a remote device before proceeding.
1. Use a power-driven cutting device (robotic cutter) to remove protruding taps.

Cut protruding taps so that protrusions are no greater than 3/4 inch. If a
protruding tap cannot be removed by the cutting device, then a point repair
may be performed. Obtain authorization from the Project Manager before
proceeding.
2. To remove other obstructions, use a remote device. Pull or drive the device
from manhole to manhole up to a continuous length of 500 feet using a solid
steel mandrel, porcupine, root saw, bucket, robotic cutter or similar device to
remove the obstruction. Select a device that is adequately sized to remove the
obstruction.
B. Excavation: Use excavation as the method of obstruction removal when installation

of the liner in the sanitary sewer is in progress. If during the liner insertion operation,
a collapsed sewer, off-set joint or other obstruction is encountered which prevents or
blocks the passage or insertion of the liner, notify the Project Manager for
authorization to excavate. Uncover and remove the obstruction as follows:
1. Excavate at the point where there is an obstruction. Use a trench safety system
as required.
2. Break out the existing sanitary sewer pipe (carrier pipe) as directed by the
Project Manager. Remove only that amount of material which is causing the
obstruction. Remove the minimum amount of carrier pipe.
3. Under such conditions, replacement of the carrier pipe is not required. Do not
disturb the existing sewer bedding during excavation. However, if embedment
is disturbed during the obstruction removal procedure, place cement-stabilized
sand or crushed stone beneath the liner.
4. When the liner is completely in place, encase it with crushed stone or cement
stabilized sand as shown on Drawing No. 02317-01, Sanitary Sewer
Embedment and Trench Zone Backfill for Dry or Wet Stable Trench.
END OF SECTION
02553-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION MANHOLE REHABILITATION
SECTION 02555
MANHOLE REHABILITATION
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Repair, rehabilitation or replacement of deteriorated, leaking or structurally unsound

manholes and cleanouts.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS0
C. Section 01504 – Temporary Facilities and Controls
D. Section 01506 – Diversion Pumping
F. Section 01740 – Site Restoration
G. Section 02082 – Precast Concrete Manholes
H. Section 02083 – Fiberglass Manholes
I. Section 02090 – Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers
L. Section 02533 – Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers
M. Section 02911 – Topsoil
N. Section 02921 – Hydro Mulch Seeding
O. Section 02922 – Sodding
P. Section 02951 – Pavement Repair and Restoration
Q. Section 03315 – Concrete for Utility Construction
02555-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Unit Prices:
1. Rehabilitated Manholes:
a. Measurement for manhole wall lining (including bench work) is on a

vertical foot basis to the nearest tenth of a foot, measured from the
bottom of the frame to the top of the bench. If the bench is not
required, measurement will be from the bottom of the frame to the top
of the effluent pipe. (Refer to Drawing No. 02534-03A).
b. Measurement for the adjustment using a new watertight manhole

frame and cover, including raising or lowering the height of the cover
within one vertical foot, is on a unit price basis, per manhole.
c. Measurement for the adjustment of an existing manhole frame and

cover, including raising or lowering the height of the cover within one
vertical foot, is on a unit price basis, per manhole.
d. Measurement for new or existing manhole frame and cover adjustment

of over one foot is on a vertical foot basis, measured to the nearest
tenth of a foot.
e. Backfill, including cement-stabilized sand, is included in the unit

prices for rehabilitated manholes; no separate payment will be made.
f. Measurement for pavement restoration will be in accordance with

Section 02951 - Pavement Repair and Restoration.
g. Measurement for new manhole insert dishes will be on a unit price

basis, per manhole.
h. Chemical grout injection to stop water intrusion is included in the unit

prices for the rehabilitated manholes; no separate payment will be
made.
i. Manhole Benches constructed without wall lining, when directed by

the Project Manager, will be paid for separately on a unit price basis.
j. Payment for rehabilitation of manholes or junction boxes other than 4'

diameter circular manholes will be on an equivalent 4’ diameter
manhole vertical foot basis. The square feet rehabilitated shall be
converted to an equivalent vertical feet of a 4’ diameter manhole by
dividing the square feet by 12.57.
k. Refer to Section 01270 - Measurement and Payment, for unit price

procedures.
2. New/Replacement Manholes:
02555-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
a. Measurement for abandoned manholes is on a unit price basis per

manhole abandoned.
b. Measurement for new manholes is on a unit price basis, per manhole.

Price includes excavation, removal of existing manhole/cleanout/end
of line, new frame and cover, sealant and backfill materials. Price also
includes up to 6 feet of sewer pipe, in each and every direction,
measured from the outside wall of the manhole.
c. Backfill, including cement-stabilized sand, is included in the unit price

for new/replacement manholes; no separate payment will be made.
d. Measurement for pavement restoration will be in accordance with

e. Refer to Section 01270 - Measurement and Payment.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 109 – Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic

Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or [50-mm] Cube Specimens).
B. ASTM C 293 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using
Simple Beam with Center-Point Loading).
C. ASTM C 490 - Standard Practice for Use of Apparatus for the Determination of
Length Change of Hardened Cement Paste, Mortar, and Concrete.
D. ASTM C 496 – Standard Test Method for Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical
Concrete Specimens.
E. ASTM C 882 – Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems
Used With Concrete By Slant Shear.
F. ASTM C 1140 - Standard Practice for Preparing and Testing Specimens from
Shortcrete Test Panels.
A. Perform work needed to make manholes structurally sound, improve flow, prevent
entrance of inflow or groundwater, prevent entrance of soil or debris, and provide
protection against hydrogen sulfide gas attack.
B. Manufacturer's Product Support: When requested by the Project Manager, provide a

representative employed by the manufacturer having technical training in admixture
and manhole wall liner available for consultation on site with 48 hours notice.
02555-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Obtain all chemical grouting materials from a single manufacturer.
B. Installation shall be completed by firms and individuals trained in methods of

installation by the manufacturer with at least five years of experience.
C. Personnel shall have confined space entry certification, where needed.
D. Field verification shall be completed by the contractor prior to commencement of

work.
E. Contractor shall verify the finished thickness of each rehabilitation method prior to
starting the next layer and upon completion of the work. The Project Manager may
obtain core samples at the Project Manager’s discretion.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals: Comply with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit product data, including surface preparation instructions and
application instructions, from pre-approved manufacturer of wall repair materials,
hydraulic cements, quick-set mortars, specialized sealants, grouts, manhole inserts,
manhole frame covers and frame-to-manhole seals.
C. Installer Qualifications: Installers of liners and wall repair systems shall submit
qualifications to the Project Manager. List installer’s personnel who have
satisfactorily completed manufacturer’s training in product application within the
previous 2 years. Include date of certification for each person.
1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Manholes Containing Mechanical or Electrical Equipment:
1. Drawings may not show locations of flow monitoring equipment. If a manhole

contains any mechanical hardware or electrical flow monitoring equipment,
immediately notify the Project Manager. Reschedule work based on
instructions provided by the Project Manager.
2. Do not subject manholes with mechanical hardware or electrical equipment to

diversion or bypass pumping.
3. Damage to installed equipment, due to Contractor’s failure to adhere to this

instruction, will be repaired by the City and cost of repairs charged to the
Contractor.
B. Field Location of Manholes, Cleanouts and End of Lines:
02555-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Contractor is responsible for locating and uncovering all manholes, cleanouts

and ends of lines. If Contractor is unable to locate manholes, cleanouts or ends
of lines, Contractor shall notify the Project Manager in writing.
2. Manholes may be located within project limits which are not part of the
system being rehabilitated. Properly identify manholes before starting work.
1.09 SALVAGE
A. Manhole covers and frames from abandoned manholes remain the property of the
City. Unless indicated to be re-used in the work, deliver salvaged items to location(s)
designated by the Project Manager.
1.10 MATERIAL HANDLING, DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Materials shall be delivered in the original unopened containers. Each container shall
be clearly labeled with the following:
1. Product name
2. Manufacturers name
3. Component designation
4. Product mix ratio
5. Health and safety information
B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle the materials which prevent damage. The
Contractor shall promptly inspect delivered materials for damage.
C. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. High Pressure Water: 3500 psi minimum force.
B. Cleaners: Detergent or muriatic acid capable of removing dirt, grease, oil and other
matter which would interfere with bond of sealing material to wall; refer to sealing
material manufacturer's recommendations.
2.02 WALL REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Hydraulic Cements: Use a blend of cement powders or hydraulic cement to stop

active leaks in the manhole structure that meet the following:
1. Compressive strength of 5500 psi in 28-days
02555-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Tensile strength of 650 psi in 28-days
3. Bond strength of 880 psi in 28 days
B. Quick-set Mortar: Use a quick-set mortar to repair wide cracks, holes or disintegrated
mortar.
2.03 MANHOLE WALL LINERS, BENCH FORMING AND REPAIR MATERIAL
A. Sprayable Restoration Mortar: Use blend of portland cement or polymer modified

cement, micro-silica, densifiers, admixtures and other modifiers that produces a high
strength and low permeability mortar for rehabilitation of deteriorated concrete and
brick surfaces and meet the following requirements.
1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C109) of 9,000 psi (minimum) in 28 days
2. Flexural Strength (ASTM C293) of 1,000 psi (minimum) in 28 days
3. Tensile strength (ASTM C496) of 600 psi (minimum) in 28 days
4. Bond Strength (ASTM C882) of 2,000 psi (minimum) in 28 days
5. Shrinkage/ length change (ASTM C596) of less than 0.04% in 28 days
6. ‘Very Low’ Chloride Ion Penetrability at 28 days (ASTM C1202)
B. Refer to City of Houston Wastewater Approved Products List.
2.04 MANHOLES COVERS, FRAME INSERTS AND FRAME-TO-MANHOLE SEALS
A. New Covers/Frames: Comply with Section 02090 - Frames, Grates, Rings, and
Covers, and with Drawing 02090-1.
B. Watertight Covers and Frames shall each have at least three bolts and a gasket to seal
cover to frame, as manufactured by Neenah Foundry Company, Vulcan, or approved
equal. Fabricate watertight frames and covers to comply with details shown on the
Drawings and Section 02090 - Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers.
C. Provide manhole inserts including new dishes, gaskets and relief valves. Select
appropriate watertight inserts to fit walls and frames of manholes.
1. Stainless steel (18 gauge minimum) inserts; Southwestern Packing and Seals
“Rain Stopper,” or approved equal.
2. Stamp inserts with the words, "Property of City of Houston".
02555-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
3. Inserts shall have a handle of plastic-coated stainless steel installed on the

body of the insert dish. The handle shall be attached with a #6 high-grade
stainless steel rivet. Each dish shall have a factory-installed 5-foot-long, 3/16"
braided stainless steel retaining cable to connect the dish to the manhole
frame.
D. Frame-to-Manhole Seals: As manufactured by Cretex, or approved equal.
E. Sealing materials between adjustments rings and manhole frame shall be a

hydrophilic elastic sealant, which adheres to both concrete and metal, or approved
substitute.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PROTECTION
A. Provide barricades, warning lights and signs for manhole or cleanout removal
excavations. Comply with Section 01504 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.
B. Do not allow soil, sand, debris or runoff to enter sewer system.
3.02 EXCAVATION
B. Perform work in accordance with OSHA standards. Employ a trench safety system as
required in Section 02260 - Trench Safety System.
C. Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface water control measures as
required in Section 01578 - Control of Ground and Surface Water.
A. Install and operate diversion pumping equipment to maintain sewage flow and to
prevent backup or overflow as specified in Section 01506 - Diversion Pumping.
B. In the event of accidental spill or overflow, immediately stop the overflow and take
action to clean up and disinfect spillage. Promptly notify the Project Manager so that
required reporting can be made to the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality
and U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
3.04 CLEANOUT/END OF LINE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
A. Replace removed cleanouts/ends of lines with shallow manholes complying with

Drawing No. 02082-01, if the depth is less than or equal to 5 feet. For cleanouts/ends
of lines greater than 5 feet, replace with 4-foot-diameter manholes complying with
Drawing No. 02082-02.
02555-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
3.05 ABANDONMENT OF CLEANOUTS AND MANHOLES
A. Abandon manholes that are designated on Drawings or directed by the Project

Manager to be abandoned.
B. Dismantle manholes to be abandoned, including frames, to 2 feet below ground level.
C. If a manhole is to be abandoned on a rehabilitated line, install a carrier pipe through

the manhole structure and fill the manhole with cement-stabilized sand, compacted to
a level 2 feet above the top of carrier pipe.
D. If a manhole is to be abandoned on an abandoned line, plug all lines in the manhole

and backfill in accordance with Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities.
E. If a manhole to be abandoned is in a paved street, backfill manhole as described

above, but with cement-stabilized sand to underside of pavement repair in lieu of
select backfill material. Patch paving in accordance with Section 02951 - Pavement
Repair and Restoration.
F. If an abandoned manhole is not located in a paved street, fill remainder of manhole

with select backfill material to 2 feet below ground level. Restore surface in
accordance with Section 01740 - Site Restoration Provide at least 4 inches of topsoil
complying with Section 02911 - Topsoil, and either seed according to Section 02921 -
Hydro Mulch Seeding, or Sod according to Section 02922 - Sodding, as required.
3.06 MANHOLE WALL CLEANING
A. Clean bench/invert floor and interior walls of manholes by removing deleterious

material, including dirt, grease and other debris. Use high pressure water at a
minimum force of 3500 psi. If required, use detergent or muriatic acid to remove
grease, oil and other matter which would interfere with bond between existing
manhole wall and approved repair materials.
B. Prepare interior surfaces as recommended by the wall liner material manufacturer.

Remove brick steps and cast iron steps prior to wall lining.
3.07 MANHOLE WALL SEALING
A. Seal active leaks in manhole structures with a blend of cement powder or hydraulic
cement.
B. Remove loose or defective wall material. Wipe or brush surfaces clean prior to
application of hydraulic cements.
C. Stopping Leaks: Drill weep holes at bottom of manhole walls to relieve hydrostatic
pressure. Plug pressure-relief holes after leaks are stopped using hydraulic cement
materials.
02555-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
D. Repair wide cracks, holes and disintegrated mortar with quick-set mortars following
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
E. Reshape manhole inverts before wall-sealing work. Apply concrete to cleaned

manhole benches as specified in Section 03315 - Concrete for Utility Construction.
F. After active leaks have been stopped, clean and prepare walls for application of
selected liner material.
G. Properly apply sealing compound to provide the minimum required uniform coating
to the wall surface.
H. Prevent foreign material from entering adjoining pipes. Remove droppings of foreign
and wall sealant materials before they harden on the bottom of the manhole.
I. Strictly follow product manufacturers’ published instructions and recommendations

for surface preparation, application and proportioning.
3.08 MANHOLE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
A. When indicated on the Drawings or instructed by the Project Manager, excavate and
properly remove and dispose of the existing manhole, including base. Employ a
trench safety system and keep the excavation dry from sewage flow and surface or
ground water.
B. Replace manhole with a new manhole as specified in Section 02082 - Precast

Concrete Manholes or Section 02083 - Fiberglass Manholes. New manholes shall
comply with Drawings 02082-1, 02082-2, 02082N-2, 02082-3, 02083-3, New &
Replacement Pre-Cast Concrete Manhole on MRC Sanitary Sewer, or New &
Replacement Fiberglass Manhole on MRC Sanitary Sewer.
C. Construct or reconstruct drop connections whenever the flowline elevation of an

influent line is more than 24 inches above the bench elevation.
D. Sewer pipe up to 6 feet outside new manholes may be replaced with new sewer pipe
in conjunction with manhole removal and replacement.
E. Properly backfill replacement manholes as required in Section 02082 - Precast

Concrete Manholes or Section 02083 - Fiberglass Manholes.
F. Furnish replacement manholes with new 32-inch frames and covers as indicated on
Drawing 02090-1 and specified in Section 02090 - Frames, Grates, Rings and Covers.
3.09 MANHOLE BENCHES/INVERTS
A. Remove obstructions and loose materials from benches prior to shaping inverts. Form
smooth, U-shaped inverts having minimum depths of one-half the pipe diameter and
channel it across the floor of the manhole using an approved manhole rehabilitation
material. Control flow to allow sufficient setting time for material used.
02555-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. If no bench and invert exists in the manhole or if the manhole is new with a poured-
in- place base then construct invert channels to provide a smooth flow transition
waterway with no disruption of flow at pipe-manhole connections. Conform to the
following criteria:
maximum.
2. Construct full pipe depth inverts (equal in depth to the diameter of the largest
or outgoing/ downstream pipe).
3. Construct inverts for laterals (upstream) sewer(s) that enters the manhole such
that the flowline elevation of the lateral sewer is between the crown of the
outgoing/downstream pipe and manhole invert.
4. Trim all sewer pipes that enter or exit the manhole such that they have a
smooth edge and are flush with the manhole wall.
5. Begin the invert channel from where the lateral pipe enters the manhole to
where the lateral invert channel intersects the invert of the through
outgoing/downstream pipe.
6. The maximum depth of the lateral invert shall be up to full pipe (equal in
depth to the diameter of the lateral pipe when the top of the proposed sloped
bench is the same elevation as the crown of the lateral sewer) at the upstream
end and full pipe diameter of the outgoing pipe at the downstream end.
7. If no inverts exist in the manhole then inverts shall be constructed such that
the inverts for all laterals shall have a smooth, uniform curvature, with a
maximum radius of curvature that sweeps into the direction of flow (towards
the downstream/outgoing pipe.)
C. If inverts already exist in the manhole then:
1. Trim all sewer pipes that enter or exit the manhole so that they are smooth
edges and flush with the manhole wall.
2. Build up the existing invert until it is full pipe depth (equal in depth to the
diameter of the largest/outgoing pipe) across the manhole bottom.
3. Build inverts for all lateral sewers entering the manhole whose flowline
elevation is between the crown and flowline elevations of the
outgoing/downstream pipe. Maximum depth of lateral invert shall be up to full
pipe (equal in depth to the diameter of lateral/upstream sewer when the top of
the proposed sloped bench is the same elevation as the crown of the lateral
sewer) at the upstream end and full pipe diameter of the outgoing/downstream
sewer at the downstream end.
02555-10
CITY OF HOUSTON
4. Invert shall match the sweep (or curvature, if any) of the existing lateral sewer
invert.
5. If no inverts exist in the manhole then inverts shall be constructed such that
the inverts for all laterals shall have smooth, uniform curvature, with a
maximum radius of curvature that sweeps into the direction of flow (towards
the downstream/outgoing pipe).
D. All benches and invert channels shall be smooth and free of sharp edges, protrusions
and concrete droppings.
3.10 MANHOLE COVERS AND FRAMES
A. Adjust manhole frames and covers found above or below grade and reset loose
frames. Combine precast concrete adjustment rings so that the elevation of the
installed frame and cover extends 6 inches above the natural ground in unpaved areas.
In paved areas, set flush and smooth with pavement grades. An approved sealant shall
be applied between the top adjustment ring and the manhole frame. No less than two
beads shall be applied 1/2-inch wide and 3/4-inch high. An approved manhole
cementitious lining material shall be applied between the rings and no less than 1-
inch of lining material shall be applied to the inside and outside face of the
adjustment rings.
B. Install new watertight manhole covers and frames at locations shown on the Drawings
or where instructed by the Project Manager. Use new frames and covers.
3.11 MANHOLE INSERTS
A. Install stainless steel manhole inserts at locations shown on the Drawings or where
directed by the Project Manager.
B. Exercise care in selecting the proper insert dish to fit properly with the manhole frame
and cover. The insert flange should have an outside diameter 3/16 inch less than the
inside diameter of the manhole frame. Once proper fit is established, clean manhole
frame surface of all dirt, grit and debris with a wire brush. Fully seal insert on the
manhole frame, providing a watertight seal.
C. Securely attach retaining tether to the manhole frame following manufacturer’s

instructions with a tamper-proof anchoring device.
D. Replace damaged, tight-fitting or missing inserts identified prior to final inspection at

no cost to the City.
E. For new sanitary sewer manholes subject to loading or differential movement at

manhole frames, and for rehabilitated manholes, install manhole chimney seals to
prevent inflow between manhole frames and masonry chimneys. Refer to Section
02090 - Frames, Grates, Rings and Covers.
3.12 FRAME-TO-MANHOLE SEALS
02555-11
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Surfaces on which the sleeve or extension is to be compressed shall be circular, clean,

reasonably smooth and free of loose material and excessive voids. If a surface is
rough or irregular and would not provide an effective seal, smooth it with an
approved microsilica- enhanced grout. Repair flaws in manhole frames, such as
cracks, pits or protrusions, by filling with concrete or grinding smooth. This type of
surface work will need to be done on manholes that have not been lined; manholes
that have been lined should not need any surface work in order to install the seal.
B. Install seals following manufacturer’s installation instructions. Arrange for

manufacturer’s representative to train Installer’s personnel in proper methods of
installing seals and assist the Installer and Contractor with any problems they might
encounter installing the seals.
C. If internal surfaces of the chimney or corbel section of the manhole exceed a slope of
1 in 3, do not use a frame-to-manhole seal.
D. Install frame-to-manhole seals so as to prevent water migration between manhole

frames and manhole structures.
A. Inform the Project Manager immediately if materials being used are not producing
required results or need modification. The Project Manager has the right to stop the
use of any material at any time.
3.14 INSPECTION
A. After manhole wall sealing or manhole rehabilitation is complete, visually inspect

manholes in the presence of the Project Manager. Check for cleanliness and for
elimination of active leaks.
B. At completion of manhole rehabilitation, assist the Project Manager in verifying

installation of minimum coating thickness of concrete liner. Test several points on
manhole walls. Repair verification points prior to final acceptance for payment.
3.15 TESTING
A. Perform leakage testing for manholes, refer to Section 02533 - Acceptance Testing
for Sanitary Sewers.
B. Perform Testing on cementious products according to ASTM C 1140.
3.16 BACKFILL
A. Backfill and compact soil in area of excavation surrounding manholes in accordance

with Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities.
02555-12
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. In unpaved areas, grade surface at a uniform slope of 1 to 5 from the manhole frame
to natural grade. Provide at least 4 inches of topsoil complying with Section 02911 -
Topsoil, and either seed according to Section 02921 – Hydro Mulch Seeding, or sod
according to Section 02922 - Sodding, as required.
END OF SECTION
02555-13
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE
SECTION 02556
CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Approved methods and materials for the rehabilitation of deteriorated gravity sewer
lines by the Cured-In-Place Pipe (CIPP) method.
E. Section 02534 – Sanitary Sewer Service Stubs or Reconnections
F. Section 02553 – Point Repairs and Obstruction Removals
G. Section 02558 – Cleaning and Television Inspection
A. Unit Prices:
1. Measurement and payment for cured-in-place pipe is by the linear foot,

measured along centerline of pipe from centerline to centerline of manholes or
junction boxes, and shall be considered full compensation for all labor and
materials required to install the liner to specified requirements. Depth range
for payment is based on greatest depth measured at manholes from natural
ground level to flow line of sanitary sewer for each pipeline segment.
2. No separate payment will be made for the following items of work. Include
cost in the unit price for installing cured-in-place pipe:
a. Sealing the liner in manholes.
b. Reworking inverts and benches for manholes.
c. Temporary meter and municipal water obtained from a City fire

hydrant.
02556-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
3. No separate payment for pre-installation and post-installation cleaning and

television inspection as specified in Section 02558 - Cleaning and Television
Inspection.
4. Where post-installation thickness measurements or physical property testing is

performed, payment for installed cured-in-place pipe shall be made as
follows:
a. Full payment: If thickness, flexural strength and flexural modulus of

elasticity of installed CIPP are all 95 percent or better of specified
values, full payment shall be made.
b. Adjusted payment: If thickness, flexural strength or flexural modulus

of elasticity is between 90 percent and 95 percent of specified values,
payment shall be made based on an Adjusted Unit Price, which shall
equal the Unit Price bid, multiplied by a Value Factor calculated as
follows:
actual flexural actual flexural modulus

actual thickness x strength x of elasticity
specified specified flexural specified flexural
thickness strength modulus of elasticity
"Value Factor" shall not exceed 100 percent.
5. Payment for point repairs and obstruction removals will be made according to
Section 02553 - Point Repairs and Obstruction Removals.
6. Payment for repair of sags in the line will be made either according to Section
02553 - Point Repairs and Obstruction Removals, or according to the diameter
and depth of the pipe if “Remove and Replace” is the method of repair
designated by the Engineer.
7. Payment for Item, 'Mobilization for short segment (<350')’ will be paid when
the contractor is issued a work order containing a line segment that is less than
350' in length and is not adjacent to another line segment, or when the total of
all adjacent line segments is less than 350’.
8. Refer to Section 01270 - Measurement and Payment.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. AASHTO Standard Specification for Highway Bridges.
02556-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. ASTM C 581 - Standard Practice for Determining Chemical Resistance of

Thermosetting Resins Used in Glass Fiber Reinforced Structures, Intended for Liquid
Service.
C. ASTM D 543 - Test Method for Resistance of Plastics to Chemical Reagents.
D. ASTM D 790 - Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced
Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.
E. ASTM D 3567 - Standard Practice for Determining Dimensions of “Fiberglass”

(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe and Fittings.
F. ASTM D 3574-11 - Standard Test Methods for Flexible Cellular Materials—Slab,

Bonded, and Molded Urethane Foams
G. ASTM D 3681 - Standard Test Method for Chemical Resistance of “Fiberglass”

(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe in a Deflected Condition.
H. ASTM D 5035 - Test Method for Breaking and Elongation of Textile Fabrics (Strip
Method).
I. ASTM D 5199 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Nominal Thickness of

Geosynthetics.
J. ASTM D 5813- Standard Specification for Cured-In-Place Thermosetting Resin

Sewer Piping Systems.
K. ASTM E 1252 - Standard Practice for General Techniques for Obtaining Infrared
Spectra for Qualitative Analysis.
L. ASTM F 1216 - Standard Practice for Rehabilitation of Existing Pipelines and

Conduits by the Inversion and Curing of a Resin-Impregnated Tube.
M. ASTM F 1743 - Standard Practice for the Rehabilitation of Existing Pipelines and
Conduits by the Pulled-In-Place Installation of Cured-In-Place Thermosetting Resin
Pipe (CIPP).
N. ASTM F 2019 - Standard Practice for Rehabilitation of Existing Pipelines and

Conduits by the Pulled in Place Installation of Glass Reinforced Plastic (GRP) Cured-
in-Place Thermosetting Resin Pipe (CIPP).
A. Resin-impregnated flexible tubes inserted into existing sewers, expanded against the
existing sewer interior surfaces, and cured by circulating heated water, steam,
ambient temperature water or air, or ultraviolet light, throughout the tube from
manhole to manhole.
02556-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. CIPP cures into a hard, impermeable, corrosion-resistant liner of specified thickness

and physical properties, with a uniformly smooth interior surface.
C. CIPP Material and Installation: Comply with ASTM D 5813, ASTM F 1216, ASTM
F 1743 and ASTM F 2019, as modified by this specification. The City reserves the
right to approve materials or installation practices which differ from these standards.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Resin:
1. Submit product data stating physical and chemical properties.
2. Submit results of testing performed by resin manufacturer demonstrating

compliance with specified chemical resistance requirements.
3. Submit manufacturer-certified infrared spectrum analysis (chemical

fingerprint) of proposed resin system in accordance with ASTM E 1252.
C. Flexible Tube:
1. Submit product data stating physical properties meeting ASTM D 5035.
2. Submit tabular summary by sewer segment noting required CIPP thickness

specified. Provide certification that liner’s “dry” thickness meets or exceeds
the required cured laminate thickness (es). Measure thickness in accordance
with ASTM D 5199.
D. Cured-In-Place Pipe:
1. Submit field measurements of cured liner thickness for determining payment.
2. Submit representative sample(s) of the cured liner required for testing in

accordance with ASTM D 790.
3. Submit post-installation television inspection videos as specified in Section

02558 - Cleaning and Television Inspection.
E. Chemical Grout: Submit product data, including surface preparation instructions and
application instructions from the manufacturer.
A. During the course of the Work, make no substitutions of materials, design values or
procedures for those specified without the prior written approval of the Engineer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
02556-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Refer to City of Houston Approved Products List for acceptable product

manufacturers.
B. Do not use products of manufacturers not noted on this list.
C. Use current list in effect as of the specified bid date and time for this project.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Flexible Felt Tube:
1. Provide flexible tube manufactured and fabricated under manufacturer’s

quality- controlled conditions. Use tube sized so as to snugly fit the internal
circumference of the existing sewer and produce specified cured thickness and
physical properties.
2. Tube Length: Fully and continuously span the distance between manholes,
including sufficient material for sealing at manholes and product sampling
(when required).
3. Fabric tube minimum tensile strength in both longitudinal and transverse

directions, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 5035: 750 psi.
4. Identify all tubes with manufactured thickness when tested in accordance with
ASTM D 5199.
B. Fiberglass Tube (Ultraviolet Light Curing Application):
1. The fiberglass material shall be chemically resistant EC-R Glass.
2. The tube shall be homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks,

holes, foreign materials, blisters and other surface defects.
3. The glass fiber tubing shall include an exterior and interior film that protects
and contains the resin in the liner. The exterior film shall be UV resistant.
4. The tube shall be properly sized to be fitted against and in contact with the
wall of the host pipe throughout its length or remnants thereof.
5. The tube shall be constructed to withstand stretching during the pull-in

process and installation pressures as required by Manufacturer’s
recommendations.
6. The impregnated tube shall have a uniform thickness, that when compressed
at installation pressures will meet or exceed the required thickness.
02556-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
7. Use tube sized so as to snugly fit the internal circumference of the existing
sewer and produce specified cured thickness and physical properties.
8. The tube shall be sized to fit irregular pipe sections and negotiate bends of up
to 20 degrees and shall have sufficient strength to bridge missing pipe sections
with the use of canvas sleeve if necessary.
9. The wall color of the interior pipe surface of CIPP after installation shall be a
light reflective color.
10. The liner shall be seamless in its cured state to insure homogenous physical
properties around the circumference of the cured liner.
C. Resin for Tube Saturation: Liquid thermosetting polyester, vinyl ester, or epoxy resin
meeting specified requirements.
D. Chemical Grout:
1. Chemical grout shall react freely with water to form a strong polyurethane
foam.
2. Chemical grout shall be resistant to hydrogen sulfide gas.
3. Chemical grout shall meet the following criteria:
Tensile Strength: 20 psi

Elongation: 190%
Tear Strength: 4.9 lbs/in Density/Specific Gravity: 0.18
A. Manufacturer’s Chemical Resistance Testing: Perform chemical resistance testing of

resin in accordance with ASTM C 581, as modified herein. Perform testing to
demonstrate chemical resistance to a solution with a pH of 0.5 and a solution with a
pH of 10. Use reagents or solutions as required to establish and maintain the
minimum and maximum pH values specified for the duration of the testing. Exposure
to the minimum and maximum pH values shall produce an average loss of not more
than 20 percent in the initial flexural properties for each test interval, and an average
loss of not more than 15 percent for a period of one year, as determined according to
ASTM D 790. Perform testing at a temperature of 73.4 F (plus or minus 3.6 F). Test
specimens shall not have more than 1.5 percent gain or loss in weight over a period of
one year. Test frequency and sample preparation: Follow ASTM C 581.
B. Test Results - Submit test results including at least the following:
1. Raw data for each test specimen for each test interval performed
2. Calculated average test results for each test interval
02556-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
3. Using calculated averages for each test interval, calculate the average test
result for the duration of testing.
2.04 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES FOR TRADITIONAL CIPP (FELT TUBE)
A. Minimum CIPP Thickness after Curing: As specified below, based on the liner
material and the maximum sewer invert depth for the segment being rehabilitated.
MINIMUM CIPP THICKNESS (IN MILLIMETERS)

FELT
NOMINAL MAXIMUM PIPE SEGMENT INVERT DEPTH
SEWER
DIAMETER
(INCHES) Up to 10 feet 10 - 15 feet 15 - 20 feet 20-25 feet
6 4.5 4.5 4.5 6.0
8 6.0 6.0 6.0 7.5
10 6.0 6.0 7.5 9.0
12 6.0 7.5 9.0 10.5
15 7.5 9.0 10.5 12.0
18 9.0 12.0 13.5 15.0
20-21 10.5 13.5 15.0 16.5
24 12.0 15.0 16.5 19.5
30 15.0 18.0 21.0 24.0
36 16.5 21.0 24.0 28.5
42 19.5 25.5 31.5 36.0
48 22.5 28.5 34.5 40.5
54 25.5 31.5 39.0 45.0
60 27.0 34.5 42.0 48.0
66 30.0 36.0 45.0 52.5
69-72 33.0 39.0 48.0 58.5
B. CIPP minimum flexural properties after curing using steam, hot water or ambient
temperature water or air:
02556-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
PROPERTY REFERENCE MINIMUM

Flexural Strength (Modulus of Rupture) ASTM D 790 4,500 psi
Tangent Modulus of Elasticity ASTM D 790 250,000 psi
based on specific design. The thickness may be changed in increments of 1.5 mm and
payment shall be made or deducted at the rate of 2.50% of the bid item amount for
CIPP thickness. Refer also to “Non- Confirming Work” in Section 3.09.
2.05 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES FOR UV CIPP (FIBERGLASS TUBE)
A. Minimum CIPP Thickness after Curing: As specified below, based on the liner
material and the maximum sewer invert depth for the segment being rehabilitated.
MINIMUM CIPP THICKNESS (IN MILLIMETERS)

FIBERGLASS
NOMINAL MAXIMUM PIPE SEGMENT INVERT DEPTH
SEWER
DIAMETER
(INCHES) Up to 10 feet 10 - 15 feet 15 - 20 feet 20-25 feet
6 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
8 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.0
10 3.0 3.0 3.5 3.5
12 3.5 3.5 4.0 4.0
15 4.5 4.5 5.0 5.5
18 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5
20-21 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5
24 7.0 7.0 8.0 8.5
30 8.5 9.0 10.0 10.5
36 10.5 11.0 12.0 12.5
42 12.5 13.0 14.0 14.5
B. CIPP minimum flexural properties after curing using ultraviolet light:
02556-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
PROPERTY REFERENCE MINIMUM

Flexural Strength (Modulus of Rupture) ASTM D 790 6,500 psi
Tangent Modulus of Elasticity ASTM D 790 725,000 psi
based on specific design. The thickness may be changed in increments of 1.5 mm and
payment shall be made or deducted at the rate of 2.50% of the bid item amount for
CIPP thickness. Refer also to “Non- Confirming Work” in Section 3.09.
2.06 FIELD TESTING
A. Flexible Tube Thickness - Prior to wet-out; provide access to all flexible tubes
intended for the use on the project. Clearly identify flexible tubes with their
manufactured thickness. Do not use flexible tubes which fail to meet the specified
thickness. Testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 5199.
B. Infrared Spectrum Analysis (Chemical Fingerprinting) - Provide access to the resin

intended for the use on the project for sampling and chemical fingerprint testing. All
testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM E 1252. If sample fails test, work
is non-conforming. See paragraph 3.09.
C. Physical Property Testing - Post installation physical property testing of the cured
composite tube will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 790. Provide
sufficient samples for conducting the testing required under ASTM D 790. If sample
fails test, work is non-conforming. See paragraph 3.09.
D. The Contractor shall provide samples for testing from the actual installed CIPP liner.
Samples shall be provided from one location per 500 linear feet of CIPP installed or
per line section, whichever is greater. The sample shall be cut from a section of CIPP
that has been inverted or pulled through a like diameter pipe, which has been held in
place by a suitable heat sink, such as sandbags. The sample shall be marked with the
date the liner was installed, the date the sample was removed, and the upstream and
downstream manholes. The cutting of the sample shall be witnessed by the City. On
pipelines greater than 15 inches in diameter, the City may, at its discretion, require
plate samples cured with the CIPP.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PRE-INSTALLATION CLEANING AND TELEVISION INSPECTION
02556-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Perform a pre-installation television inspection in accordance with Section 02558 -

Cleaning and Television Inspection. Verify that sewer is clean and pipe conditions are
suitable for installation of the CIPP. Notify Engineer if conditions exist which will
impact the installation.
3.02 OBSTRUCTION REMOVAL, POINT REPAIR AND SAG ELIMINATION
A. If pre-installation video inspection reveals an obstruction in the line segment (such as

heavy solids, dropped joints, protruding service connections or collapsed pipe) that
cannot be removed by conventional sewer cleaning equipment and the obstruction
will prevent completion of the insertion process, perform point repairs or obstruction
removal prior to CIPP installation. Obtain approval of the Engineer before performing
work. Follow requirements in Section 02553 - Point Repairs and Obstruction
Removals.
B. If pre-installation video inspection reveals a sag in the sewer that has a vertical
displacement greater than one-half the pipe diameter, eliminate the sag by performing
a point repair as specified in Section 02553 - Point Repairs and Obstruction
Removals, or by removal and replacement of the sewer segment. Obtain approval of
the Engineer before performing work.
A. Maintain commercial and residential sanitary sewer service during the installation
process.
B. Install and operate diversion pumping equipment to maintain sewage flow around the
segment of pipe being rehabilitated, and to prevent backup or overflow, as specified
in Section 01506 - Diversion Pumping.
3.04 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
A. Notification: Inform the Engineer of work schedules for CIPP installation.
1. Provide 24-hour notice so that the Engineer may witness the “wet-out”
procedure.
2. Provide 24-hour notice so that the Engineer may witness inversion and curing
of liner.
B. Conduct operations in accordance with applicable OSHA standards, including safety

requirements involving work on elevated platforms and entry into confined spaces.
Take suitable precautions to eliminate hazards to personnel near construction
activities when pressurized air is being used.
02556-10
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Wet-out: Designate a location where the flexible tube will be impregnated with resin.
Thoroughly saturate flexible tube prior to installation. Use catalyst systems or
additives compatible with resins and flexible tubes complying with manufacturer’s
recommendations. Handle resin-impregnated flexible tubes to retard or prevent resin
setting until ready for curing.
D. Insertion: Insert flexible tubes through existing manholes or access structures by

inversion, pull-in or other approved procedure in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
E. Curing using Steam, Hot Water or Ambient Temperature Water or Air:
1. Follow manufacturer’s recommended cure schedule in curing of liner.
2. After insertion is completed, apply a suitable recirculation system capable of

delivering steam, hot water or ambient temperature water or air, uniformly
throughout the section to achieve consistent cure of the resin. Maintain curing
temperature as recommended by the resin/catalyst system manufacturer.
3. Provide suitable monitors near the heat source to gauge temperatures of

incoming and outgoing water or steam supply. Place additional temperature
sensors between the impregnated tube and invert of the original pipe at each
manhole to monitor the outside temperature of the liner while curing.
4. Continue uninterrupted heating until the required curing temperature is

achieved. Accurately measure temperatures at both ends of the CIPP. Initial
cure is considered complete when exposed portions of the flexible tube pipe
appear to be cured and the remote temperature sensors have achieved the
external temperature recommended by the resin/catalyst system manufacturer.
5. Cool Down: Initiate controlled cool-down of the hardened pipe to a

temperature below 110° F, in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommended cure schedule. Take care in releasing the water column so that a
vacuum does not develop that could damage newly-installed pipe. Do not
discharge water hotter than 110° F into the sanitary sewer system
F. Curing using Ultraviolet Light:
1. Curing shall be in accordance with ASTM F2019 and/or manufacturers

specifications.
2. The UV light source shall be assembled in accordance with the

manufacturer’s specification for the liner diameter.
3. The ultraviolet curing lamps shall operate in a sufficient frequency range to

insure proper curing of the resin.
02556-11
CITY OF HOUSTON
4. A camera shall be located on the ultraviolet light assembly to enable the video
inspection of the liner and to insure that the liner has been properly inflated
and any liner problems can be identified before curing begins.
5. During the curing process, sensors shall be used to record curing data that
shall be submitted to the Engineer upon request. The recording shall include
rate of travel of the ultraviolet light assembly, curing speed, internal
temperatures and pressures during the curing process.
G. Finished Pipe: Provide a finished CIPP which is continuous and as free as

commercially practicable from visual defects such as foreign inclusions, dry spots,
and pinholes.
H. If point repair is required after the liner has cured, use a tube segment to splice across
the point repair. Overlap on each end shall be twice the diameter, or 12 inches,
whichever is greater. Cure the segment using the same process specified for the
original liner.
3.05 SERVICE RECONNECTIONS
A. Complete service reconnections within 24 hours after completion of the cured-in-

place process.
B. Reconnect services by excavation, man-entry or remote-operated cutting tool. Follow

procedures for reconnecting sewer service specified in Section 02534 - Sanitary
3.06 SEALING AT MANHOLES
A. Form tight seals between the CIPP and the manhole walls at pipe penetrations. Do not
leave annular gaps. Seal annular spaces with Oakum bands soaked in chemical grout
following chemical grouting manufacturer’s recommendations for installation. Finish
off seals with non-shrink grout or cementitious liner materials placed around the pipe
opening from inside the manhole in a band at least 4 inches wide. Complete sealing
procedures for each liner segment immediately after the liner is cured.
B. Reshape and smooth the manhole invert and build up the existing invert until it is full
pipe depth (equal in depth to the diameter of the largest/outgoing pipe) across the
manhole bottom up to 15” maximum pipe diameter.
C. Build inverts for all lateral sewers entering the manhole whose flowline elevation is
between the crown and flowline elevations of the outgoing/downstream pipe.
Maximum depth of lateral invert shall be up to full pipe depth (equal in depth to the
diameter of lateral/upstream sewer when the top of the proposed sloped bench is the
same elevation as the crown of the lateral sewer) at the upstream end and full pipe
diameter of the outgoing/downstream sewer at the downstream end up to 15”
maximum pipe diameter.
02556-12
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Make and submit video(s) showing completed work, including condition of restored
connections. Refer to Section 02558 - Cleaning and Television Inspection.
B. All manhole bench/invert work and annular seal shall be completed at time of Post-
TV, with Post-TV being verification of completion.
3.08 FINAL CLEANUP
A. Upon completion of rehabilitation work and testing, clean and restore project area
affected by the Work in accordance with Section 01740 - Site Restoration.
3.09 NON-CONFORMING WORK
A. If the thickness, flexural strength or flexural modulus of elasticity of the installed

CIPP is less than 90 percent of the specified values, the product is considered
unacceptable. Submit a proposed method of repair or replacement for review and
approval by the Engineer. Work required to remedy non-conforming work shall be at
no additional cost to the City.
B. If it is determined that the resin utilized did not match the submitted and approved
resin via the Infrared Spectrum Analysis, the product is considered unacceptable and
nonconforming. Submit proof that the resin actually utilized meets the requirements
of the specification or submit a method for replacement of the sewer segment liner for
review and approval by the City. Work required to remedy non-conforming work
shall be at no additional cost to the City.
C. For all instances where CIPP is deemed unacceptable, other than thickness, flexural
strength, and flexural modulus of elasticity, as described in this specification section,
submit a proposed method of repair or replacement for review and approval by the
Engineer. Work required to remedy non-conforming work shall be at no additional
cost to the City.
END OF SECTION
02556-13
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOLDED AND FORMED PIPE
SECTION 02557
FOLDED AND FORMED PIPE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Rehabilitation of existing gravity sewer lines using the Folded and Formed Pipe
process.
A. Document 00200 – Instructions to Bidders
D. Section 02534 – Sanitary Sewer Service Stubs or Reconnections
E. Section 02553 – Point Repairs and Obstruction and Removals
F. Section 02555 – Manhole Rehabilitation
G. Section 02558 – Cleaning and Television Inspection
A. Unit Prices:
1. Measurement for installing folded and formed pipe is on a linear-foot basis for
actual footage of liner pipe installed from centerline to centerline of manholes.
Payment shall be based on the depth of the deeper flow line of the
rehabilitated segment.
2. Costs for the following are included in the unit price for the liner; no separate
payment for them will be made.
a. The cost of sealing the liner in the manholes and reworking the
manhole inverts and benches.
b. The cost for eliminating offset joints with greater than 90 percent
clearance.
c. The cost for testing the liner pipe after installation.
02557-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
B. ASTM D 790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and
C. ASTM D 1248 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials

for Wire and Cable.
D. ASTM D 1693 - Standard Test Method for Environmental Stress-Cracking of

Ethylene Plastics.
E. ASTM D 1784 - Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds
and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.
F. ASTM D 2837 - Standard Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis for
Products.
G. ASTM D 3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
H. ASTM D 3350 - Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Fittings Materials.
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. Folded and Formed Pipe: The Folded and Formed Pipe process is the reconstruction
of sanitary sewers by insertion of a folded liner pipe into the existing sewer and the
reformation of the folded liner pipe into a circular liner pipe. The liner is reformed by
a combination of hot water circulation and pressurization, or similar technique, to
reform the folded liner pipe into its original extruded configuration. When reformed,
the new liner pipe extends over the length of the insertion in a continuous pipe-
within-a-pipe installation.
A. Folded and formed pipe is installed by insertion within the carrier pipe to create a
continuous liner over the entire length of each pipe segment from manhole to
manhole. The liner pipe passing through or terminating in a manhole is carefully cut
to form an invert or termination as described in these Specifications and shown on the
Drawings. The invert and benches are streamlined and improved for smooth flow.
The finished liner pipe is pressure tested to meet the leakage requirements test as
specified.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals accordance with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
02557-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Submit engineering data covering design and installation. Required data includes the
following:
1. Before beginning work, submit the vendor’s specific technical data with
complete physical properties of pipe and pipe dimensions pertinent to this job.
Submit full descriptions of component materials and their properties to the
City Engineer for approval. Include a "Certificate of Compliance" with
Specification for materials to be incorporated in the work, and manufacturer’s
standard printed instructions.
2. Submit a work plan for review by the City Engineer. In the work plan address
procedures required for pre-installation and installation. Describe procedures
to be followed for installation of the Folded and Formed Pipe method
selected, even though the process is pre-approved. Before installation, submit
the standard reforming temperature/pressure/cool-down schedule. Proposed
changes in preinstallation or installation procedures require submittal of
revised procedures for review by the City Engineer.
3. Submit post-installation video inspection tapes as specified in Section 02558 -

Cleaning and Television Inspection.
A. Though the installation process is licensed and proprietary in nature, Contractor shall
not change any material, thickness, design values or installation procedure stated in
submittals without the City Engineer’s prior written approval.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PREAPPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Folded and Formed Pipe Process:
1. Pipeliners, Inc., Metairie, Louisiana.
2. AM Liner Process of American Pipe and Plastics, Binghamton, New York.
B. Other manufacturers of similar processes must be preapproved by the City. Refer to

Document 00200 - Instructions to Bidders for information regarding product
preapproval procedures.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Properties:
1. Solid Wall High-Density Polyethylene Pipe:
02557-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
a. Provide liner pipe manufactured from a high-density high-molecular-

weight polyethylene resin complying with ASTM D 1248, meeting
requirements for Type III, Class B, Grade P34, Category 5, and having
a PPI rating of PE 3408 when compounded.
b. Pipe produced from the specified resin shall have a minimum cell
classification of 345434D or E (inner wall shall be light in color) under
ASTM D 3350, and demonstrate a lone-term hydrostatic strength
rating of 1600 psi or more, in accordance with ASTM D 2837. When
the environmental stress crack resistance of the compound is measured
in accordance with ASTM D 1693, Condition C, the compound shall
withstand not less than 192 hours in 100 percent solution Igepal CO-
630 at 100 F before reaching a 20 percent failure point.
c. The liner pipe shall have the following minimum physical properties:
Flexural Stress (Yield): 3,000 psi ASTM D 638

Flexural Stress (Break): 4,500 psi ASTM D 638
Flexural Stress of Elasticity: 133,000 psi ASTM D 790
2. Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe:
a. The PVC compound used for the folded pipe shall conform to ASTM
D 1784 classification 13223-B or 12344-B. Compound that have
different cell classifications because one or more properties are
superior to those of the specified compounds are also acceptable.
b. The installed pipe shall have the following minimum physical

properties:
Flexural Modulus of Elasticity: 320,000 psi

Flexural Strength: 9,000 psi
Tensile Strength: 5,000 psi
B. Alternative Materials: Alternative materials for liner pipe shall be pre-approved.

Refer to Document 00200 - Instructions to Bidders for information regarding product
preapproval procedures.
C. Markings: Use liner pipe marked at not more than 5-foot intervals with a coded
number system to indicate manufacturer, size (diameter and SDR), material, extrusion
date and production shift that fabricated the pipe liner. Have the marking code
changed with each production shift change.
D. Dimensions:
02557-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Diameter and Wall Thickness: Select fabricated pipe with an outside diameter
and minimum wall thickness that will fit the internal circumference of the
carrier pipe with a close mechanical fit leaving a minimum annular space.
2. Standard Dimension Ratio (SDR) of liner pipe: SDR 26.
3. Length: Minimum length is that length necessary to effectively span the

distance from the inlet to the outlet of adjacent manholes, unless otherwise
specified. Verify lengths in the field before manufacturing. Individual
insertion runs may be made over more than one pipe segment through
adjacent manholes as determined in the field by the Contractor and approved
by the Project Manager.
2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test each production lot of polyethylene liner pipe at the time of
manufacture for defects in accordance with ASTM D 2837 and ASTM D 1963.
Verify that liner pipe is homogeneous, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign
materials, blisters and deleterious faults. Mark each production lot of liner pipe with
unique markings to clearly differentiate one production lot from another.
B. Inspect and test each manufactured length of PVC pipe for extrusion quality,
workmanship, impact resistance and pipe flattening in accordance with ASTM D
3034. Verify that pipe is homogeneous, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes,
foreign materials, blisters and deleterious faults.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine liner pipe for gashes, nicks, abrasions, or any such physical damage which
may have occurred during storage or handling which produced physical damage
deeper than 10 percent of the wall thickness. Inspect liner pipe to verify that it is free
from visual defects such as foreign inclusions, concentrated ridges, discoloration,
pitting, varying wall thickness and other deformities. Reject and remove from the
project site liner pipe with physical damage or visual defects. The liner pipe passing
through or terminating in a manhole shall be carefully cut out in a shape and manner
approved by the Project Manager. The invert and benches shall be streamlined and
improved for smooth flow. The installed liner pipe shall meet the leakage
requirements of the pressure test as specified.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Safety: Conduct operations in strict conformance with applicable OSHA standards

and regulations. Particular attention is drawn to those safety requirements involving
work on an elevated platform and entry into a confined space.
02557-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Cleaning: Clean the sewer to be rehabilitated and remove debris immediately before
the videotape inspection, as specified in Section 02558 - Cleaning and Television
Inspection.
C. Pre-installation Videotape Inspection: Perform a pre-installation videotape inspection

of the sewer pipe immediately before the pipe installation to ensure that pipe
conditions are acceptable to receive Folded and Formed pipe, as specified in Section
02558 - Cleaning and Television Inspection.
D. Diversion Pumping: When required for acceptable completion of the Folded and
Formed Pipe process, provide for continuous sewage flow around the sections of pipe
designated for the installation of liner pipe by use of diversion pumping. Select
pumps and bypass lines with adequate capacity and size to handle the flow in
accordance with Section 01506 - Diversion Pumping.
E. Sewer Obstructions: If pre-installation videotape inspection reveals an obstruction in

the existing sewer, such as heavy solids, dropped joints, protruding service taps or
collapsed pipe, which will prevent pipe installation, and that cannot be removed by
conventional sewer cleaning equipment, then an obstruction removal (by remote
device) or point repair may be made with the approval of the City Engineer. Refer to
Section 02553 - Point Repairs and Obstruction Removals.
F. Protruding Taps: If service reconnection is not by excavation, remove protruding taps

which will obstruct or hinder insertion of the liner pipe. Refer to Section 02553 -
Point Repairs and Obstruction Removals.
G. Offset Joints: If pre-installation videotape inspection reveals an offset joint with less
than 90 percent clearance, take the necessary steps to eliminate the offset joint as a
part of the liner installation. If pre-installation video inspection reveals an offset joint
with less than 80 percent clearance, the Contractor shall eliminate the offset joint by
use of a point repair in accordance with Section 02553 - Point Repairs and
Obstruction Removals. Percentage of clearance will be determined by the Project
Manager.
H. Sags in Sewer: If pre-installation videotape inspection reveals a sag in the existing

sewer that is greater than 30 percent of the length of the line or one-half the diameter
of the existing pipe, notify the Project Manager prior to performing any line
rehabilitation. Take necessary steps, with approval of the City Engineer, to eliminate
these sags.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Liner Insertion:
02557-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Insert liner pipe into the existing sewer with an inside diameter equal to or
greater than the formed outside diameter of the liner pipe. Use a power winch
and steel cable connected to the end of the liner using an appropriate pulling
head. A second pulling head may be attached to the trailing end of the liner for
attachment of a tag line to pull the liner back out of the sewer, if necessary.
Length of the liner pipe to be inserted is governed by the winch drum capacity
and the winching power available with consideration for the size and
condition of the sewer.
2. During insertion, provide a bumper to prevent the ragged edges of the existing
pipe from scarring the outside of the liner as it is pulled into the pipe.
3. Once insertion is initiated, continue the pull to completion without

interruption.
B. Perform liner reformation and PVC liner reformation according to manufacturer’s

printed instructions submitted to City Engineer for review.
C. Manhole Sealing and Benches:
1. Install liner pipe with tight-fitting seals at manholes with no annular gaps.
Seal annular spaces at each manhole with oakum soaked in Scotchseal 5600
gel. Finish with non-shrink grout placed from inside the manhole, covering
the a nailer space and circling the pipe penetration in a band not less than 6
inches wide.
2. Neatly cut the top half of the pipe within the manhole at least four inches
away from the manhole walls. Do not break or shear off the pipe penetration.
Form a channel in the manhole that is a smooth continuation of the pipes,
merged with other lines or channels, if any. Make the channel cross-section U-
shaped, with a minimum length of half the pipe diameter for 6-inch to 12-inch
diameter pipe, and between half the pipe diameter and three- fourths the
diameter for 15-inch and larger pipe. Build up the sides of the channels with
mortar or concrete, as specified in Section 02555 - Manhole Rehabilitation, to
provide benches at not more than 1 in 12 pitch toward the channel.
3. Seal liner pipe in the manhole as specified above before proceeding on to the
next manhole section. The Project Manager will individually inspect manholes
for liner pipe cut-offs, benches and sealing work.
D. Service Reconnection by Excavation or Remote: After the liner pipe has been
reformed and pressure tested, reconnect existing live service connections. Reconnect
services by excavation or remote cutting method in accordance with Section 02534 -
Sanitary Sewer Service Stubs or Reconnections.
02557-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Test liner pipe after it has been installed in existing pipe. Perform a low-pressure air
test of the liner pipe before it has been sealed in place at the manholes and before any
service connections to the liner pipe have been made. This test checks the integrity of
the liner pipe and verifies that the liner pipe has not been damaged during insertion.
B. Low Pressure Test:
1. After a manhole-to-manhole section of sewer pipe has been lined, plug it at

each manhole with pneumatic plugs. Use plugs designed so that they will hold
against the test pressure without requiring external blocking or bracing. One
of the plugs shall have three air hose connections, one for inflation of the plug,
one for reading of the air pressure into the sealed line, and one for introducing
air into the sealed line.
2. Pressurize the test section to 4 psi and hold it above 3.5 psi for not less than 2
minutes. Add air if necessary to keep the pressure above 3.5 psi. At the end of
this two-minute stabilization period, record the pressure (at least 3.5 psi
minimum) and start the time period. If the pressure drops 0.5 psi in less than
the time given in the table below, the section of pipe fails the test. Use a
pressure gauge having minimum divisions of 0.010 psi.
3. When the prevailing groundwater is above the sewer liner pipe being tested,
increase the test pressure 0.43 psi for each foot that the water table is above
the invert of the pipe.
SEWER SIZE MINIMUM TEST TIME

(inches) (Minutes)
8 4
10 5
12 6
15 7.5
4. If the time of the pressure to drop 0.5 psi is 125 percent or less of the time
given in the table, immediately re-pressurize the line to 3.5 psi and repeat the
test.
C. Post-installation Videotape Inspection: Provide post-installation videotape

inspections, tapes, and reports in accordance with Section 02558 - Cleaning and
END OF SECTION
02557-8
CITY OF HOUSTON CLEANING AND
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION TELEVISION INSPECTION
SECTION 02558
CLEANING AND TELEVISION INSPECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Cleaning sewer lines to remove solids, roots, soil, sand, pieces of broken pipe, bricks,
grease, grit from sewer lines and manholes and other debris, thus improving flow and
facilitating television inspection for sewer evaluation. Cleaning includes initial
manhole wall washing by high-pressure water jet.
B. Television inspecting the line to obtain quality video and Television Inspection
Reports upon which the City can make decisions regarding needed sewer
rehabilitation.
B. Section 01506 – Diversion Pumping
C. Section 02555 – Manhole Rehabilitation
A. Unit Prices:
1. Survey Normal Cleaning Equipment: Measurement for cleaning sanitary

sewer mains with normal cleaning equipment is on a linear-foot basis. The
Contract unit price for cleaning with normal equipment is full payment for
sewer line actually cleaned and accepted. Cleaning using normal cleaning
equipment includes:
a. Charges for transient water meter setup and water usage;
b. Collection, removal, transportation and legal disposal of liquid wastes,

soil, sand and other debris for lines less than or equal to 48-inches in
diameter;
c. Locating, exposing and opening manholes on sewers to be cleaned;
02558-1
d. Initial manhole wall washing with high-pressure water. Payment for

additional cleaning and scrubbing of manhole walls which may be
required for manhole rehabilitation is included in the unit price for
manhole wall sealing as specified in Section 02555 - Manhole
Rehabilitation; and
e. Reconstruction of manholes dismantled for cleaning equipment access,

and repair of damage caused by dismantling or cleaning equipment.
2. Cleaning Using Mechanical Cleaning Equipment: Measurement for cleaning

sanitary sewer mains with mechanical cleaning equipment is on a linear-foot
basis for the quantity approved by the Project Manager. The Contract unit
price for cleaning sanitary sewer mains with mechanical cleaning equipment
is paid in addition to the unit price for cleaning using normal cleaning
equipment. Mechanical cleaning is limited to locations approved by the
Project Manager on a case-by-case basis after normal cleaning methods have
failed to produce satisfactory results, as determined by viewing video.
a. Mechanical cleaning prior to normal cleaning does not relieve the

Contractor of the responsibility for fully cleaning the pipe with normal
cleaning equipment.
b. Reconstruction of manholes dismantled for cleaning equipment access,

and repair of damage caused by dismantling or cleaning equipment.
c. Unit price for cleaning using mechanical equipment is compensation

in full for all collection, removal, transportation and legal disposal of
liquid wastes, soil, sand and debris regardless of quantity of material.
3. Survey Television Inspection: Measurement of survey television inspection

for pipe segments selected by the Project Manager is on a linear-foot basis
from centerline to centerline of manholes. Payment for survey television
inspection is made for the actual lengths of television inspection footage, as
measured in the field at grade, as submitted for evaluation prior to final
recommendations of sewer rehabilitation method. No separate payment will
be made for the following:
a. Poor or unacceptable-quality video (hazy, unclear images will not

qualify for payment).
b. Re-recording of any segment without prior approval of the Project

Manager.
c. Portions of sanitary sewer not recorded (no payment will be made for
length of sewer through which the camera could not pass).
d. Reverse setups required to bracket an obstruction; or
02558-2
e. Sewer flow control.
4. Payment for video inspection by floating camera shall be made based on bid
item for TV Inspection of appropriate line size.
5. Pre-Installation Cleaning:
a. No separate payment will be made for pre-installation cleaning using

normal cleaning equipment of pipes less than or equal to 48-inches in
diameter. Include cost for pre-installation cleaning in cost of line work
for which the rehabilitation effort is performed. If a line is inspected
and, in the opinion of the Project Manager, found to require no
rehabilitation work, payment of cleaning will be made on the basis of
survey normal cleaning.
b. Payment will be made for Pre-installation cleaning of pipes greater

than 48- inches in diameter.
6. Pre-Installation Television Inspection: No separate payment will be made for

pre- installation television inspection, except for lines inspected but not
rehabilitated. Include cost for pre-installation television inspection in the cost
of line work for which the rehabilitation effort is performed. If a line is
inspected and, in the opinion of the Project Manager, found to require no
rehabilitation work, Contractor will be paid for pre-installation television
inspection on the basis of survey television inspection.
7. Post-Installation Television Inspection: No separate payment will be made for

post-installation television inspection. Include cost for post-installation
television inspection in the cost of line work for which the rehabilitation is
performed. The post-installation television inspection policy allows payment
for work based on field-measured lengths indicated on the inspector’s daily
reports, but still requires the Contractor to submit a post-installation video
within one calendar month after segment completion. If no video is received
within that period, credit for the previously paid line segment will
automatically be deducted from pay estimates in following months until the
required video is submitted.
8. Footage paid for survey cleaning, under some circumstances, may exceed the
footage paid for survey television inspection, as approved by the Project
Manager.
9. If the Contractor is unable to complete the TV inspection of a mainline section

after performing a reverse setup (i.e., obstructions are encountered from both
the upstream and downstream manhole that prevents the passage of the
camera), the Contractor shall be paid for television inspection of the actual
footage of pipe successfully televised, if the TV inspection video and report
are of acceptable quality.
02558-3
10. Payment for cleaning of siphon shall be by pipe diameter, all depths, and on a
linear foot basis measured along the centerline of the siphon pipe and from
centerline of upstream manhole or junction box to centerline of downstream
manhole or junction box. Cleaning of siphon shall include cleaning of both the
upstream and downstream manholes or junction boxes unless they are
included in the cleaning of the adjacent upstream and/or downstream gravity
sewer section. Both hydraulic cleaning and mechanical cleaning equipment
may be employed to clean a siphon using the cleaning of siphon pay item. No
separate payment for mechanical cleaning.
11. Payment for TV inspection of siphon shall be by pipe diameter, all depths, and
on a linear foot basis measured along the centerline of the siphon pipe from
centerline of the upstream manhole or junction box to centerline of
downstream manhole or junction box. Payment for TV inspection of siphon
shall include any dewatering, excluding bypass pumping, required to provide
a clear picture of the pipe in the depressed portion of the siphon, with camera
lens centered in the pipe and above water surface level such that pipe defects
and debris may be visually detected.
12. Payment for the collection, removal, transportation and legal disposal of liquid
wastes, soil, sand and other debris removed from sanitary sewer or siphon
greater than or equal to 48-inches in diameter while performing cleaning shall
be by cubic yard. Measurement shall be by properly executed waste manifest
for roll- off container. The container shall be available on site as needed. The
container shall not be loaded with material other that debris from the sanitary
sewer system, shall not contain excessive free water, and shall be filled to the
appropriate capacity for transportation.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Normal Cleaning Equipment: Cleaning devices such as rods, metal pigs, porcupines,
root saws, snakes, scooters, sewer balls, kites, and other approved equipment in
conjunction with hand-winching devices and gas or electric rod-propelled devices.
Variable-pressure water nozzles (3000 psi) are considered normal cleaning
equipment.
B. Mechanical Cleaning Equipment: Buckets, scrapers, scooters, porcupines, kites,

heavy- duty brushes, metal pigs and other debris-removing equipment and accessories
used in conjunction with approved power winching machines. High-to very-high-
pressure water nozzles (10,000 psi) are considered mechanical cleaning equipment.
C. Survey Cleaning and Television Inspection: Video inspection of existing sanitary

sewers to evaluate lines and determine whether conditions exist which would require
line rehabilitation.
02558-4
D. Pre-Installation Television Inspection: Video inspection by Contractor of sewer lines

designated for rehabilitation to confirm cleaning, location of service connections and
constructability of line rehabilitation according to Drawings and Specifications.
E. Post-Installation Television Inspection: Video inspection to determine whether

rehabilitation of a sanitary sewer has been completed according to Drawings and
Specifications.
F. Television Inspection Report: A report that is submitted in pdf format for each line
segment using NASSCO PACP codes.
G. Siphon or Inverted Siphon: A depressed section of gravity sanitary sewer that allows
a graded or sloped sewer to convey flow across a conflicting underground utility or
open drainage channel by passing under it.
A. Clean designated sanitary sewers and manholes using mechanical, hydraulically-

propelled or high-velocity sewer cleaning equipment. Select cleaning processes which
will remove grease, soil, sand, silt, solids, rags and debris from each sewer segment
and associated manholes.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Submit equipment manufacturer’s operational manuals and guidelines to the Project

Manager for review. Strictly follow such instructions unless otherwise directed by the
Project Manager.
C. Submit a list of lawful disposal sites proposed for dumping debris from cleaning
operations.
D. Submit and maintain Liquid Waste Manifests conforming to City of Houston Health
and Human Services requirements. Send the owner’s and regulator’s copies of the
completed manifests to the Project Manager within 24 hours after disposal of waste
materials.
02558-5
E. The Contractor shall provide the City with the sewer video (including audio), a hard
copy report and an electronic report in pdf format for the inspections for each line
segment. The electronic report and video shall be named by line segment. The sewer
video shall be MPEG4 format. The Contractor shall utilize the latest NASSCO PACP
codes at the time of the Contract notice to proceed. Prior to commencing the work the
NASSCO PACP codes to be utilized shall be submitted. All work on the contract
shall follow the same codes. Inspection Software must be NASSCO PACP Certified
and proof of certification of Software shall be submitted prior to commencing the
work. Contractor shall be current on NASSCO training. All electronic data shall be
submitted in MS Access. Any variation from the requirements shall be subject to
approval by the Project Manager. Submittal of the CCTV videos and the reports for
review can be submitted through a data storage device, such as a flash drive, or
through Contractor’s FTP site and will be available for download. An email of the
information availability and phone calls to the Inspector, Senior Inspector and/or
specific contact shall be made.
F. At the end of the contract, the Contractor shall submit a hard drive including all
videos and reports for the entire contract.
G. The digital information shall contain files which store each line segment as a unique
digital record.
A. Qualifications: Use experienced personnel to operate cleaning equipment and devices.
B. Acceptance of sewer cleaning work is subject to successful completion of the

television inspection. If inspection shows solids, sand, grease, grit or other debris
remaining in the line, the cleaning is considered unsatisfactory. Repeat cleaning and
video inspection of the sewer line until cleaning is acceptable by the Project Manager.
C. Unable to Penetrate: If the Contractor is unable to penetrate a line during cleaning or

CTV inspection, the Contractor will call the Houston Service Center at 311 (inside
city limits) or (713) 837-0311 (outside city limits) within 24 hours of the event.
D. The work shall comply with current NASSCO standards.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CLEANING EQUIPMENT
A. Select cleaning equipment and methods based on the condition of the sanitary sewer
mains at the time work begins. More than one method or type of equipment may be
required on a single project or at a single location.
02558-6
B. When requested by the Project Manager, demonstrate at the performance capabilities

of cleaning equipment and methods proposed for use on the project. If results
obtained by demonstration are not satisfactory, provide other equipment that will
clean the sewer line.
C. For high-velocity cleaning use a water jet capable of producing a minimum volume of
50 gpm with a pressure of 1500 psi at the pump. Install a gauge to indicate working
pressure on the discharge of high-pressure water pumps. In addition to conventional
nozzles, use a nozzle which directs the cleaning force to the bottom of the pipe for
sewers 18-inches and larger.
D. When hydraulic or high-velocity cleaning equipment is used, install a suitable sand

trap, weir, dam or suction device in the downstream manhole so that solids and debris
are trapped for removal.
E. When approved by the Project Manager, both hydraulic cleaning and mechanical
cleaning equipment (including pumps) may be employed to clean a siphon.
2.02 CLEANING ACCESSORIES
A. When an additional quantity of water from the public water supply is needed to meet
the cleaning requirements of the equipment and the sewer, obtain transient water
meters from the City for installation on trucks or at fire hydrants.
B. Obtain prior written approval when using a fire hydrant located in the Downtown
Houston area as required by Houston Fire Department Regulations. However, prior
written approval from Houston Public Works is not needed to use fire hydrants
located elsewhere within the City of Houston.
C. All cleaning equipment must be equipped with backflow preventers to prevent

contamination to the public water supply.
D. If approved by the Project Manager, pneumatic or hydraulically powered “knockers”

or chain flails may be used to remove heavy tuberculation in cast iron siphon pipes.
2.03 VIDEO EQUIPMENT
A. Video Equipment: Select and use video equipment that will produce color videos.
B. Pipe Inspection Camera: Produce a video using a pan-and-tilt radial-viewing pipe

inspection camera that pans ± 275 degrees and rotates 360 degrees. Use a camera
with an accurate footage counter, which displays on the monitor the exact distance of
the camera from the centerline of the starting manhole. Use a camera with a camera
height adjustment so that the camera lens is always centered at one-half the inside
diameter, or higher in the pipe being inspected. Provide a lighting system that allows
the features and condition of the pipe to be clearly seen. A reflector in front of the
camera may be required to enhance lighting in dark or large diameter pipe.
02558-7
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin cleaning until both upstream and downstream manholes have been
checked for flow monitors and other mechanical devices. Refer to Section 02555 -
Manhole Rehabilitation.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Take precautions to protect sanitary sewer mains and manholes from damage that
might be inflicted by the improper selection of cleaning processes or improper use of
equipment. When using hydraulically-propelled devices take precautions to ensure
that the water pressure created does not cause damage to or flooding of public or
private property. Do not surcharge any sanitary sewer to an elevation that could
cause overflow of sewage into area waterways, homes or buildings, or onto the
surface.
B. Do not use or obstruct fire hydrants when there is a fire in the area. Remove water
meters, fittings and piping from fire hydrants at the end of each working day.
C. Exercise care to prevent contamination of the potable water system. Use an

appropriately sized backflow preventer as required by the City of Houston Water
Department when drawing water from a public hydrant.
D. Where possible, use the flow of wastewater present in the sanitary sewer main to
provide fluid for hydraulic cleaning devices.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Conserve Water. Do not waste water from the public water supply through poor
connections, hydrants left open, or any other cause.
B. Collapsible Dams: Use collapsible dams for hydraulically-propelled devices which

require a head of water to operate. Dam shall be easily collapsible to prevent damage
to the sewer, public property and private property.
C. High Velocity Cleaning: Operate high-velocity cleaning equipment so that the

pressurized nozzle moves continuously. Turn off or reduce the flow to the nozzle to
prevent damage to the line any time the nozzle becomes stationary.
D. Mechanical Cleaning: In addition to normal cleaning equipment, perform mechanical

cleaning when required and approved using equipment and accessories as defined in
this Section.
02558-8
E. Debris Disposal: Remove sludge, soil, sand, rocks, grease, roots and other solid or
semi-solid material resulting from the cleaning operation at the downstream manhole
of the section being cleaned. Passing debris from any sewer section to any other
sewer section is not allowed. Load debris from the manholes into an enclosed
container permitted by the Houston Health Department for liquid waste hauling.
Remove solids and semi-solids resulting from cleaning operations from the site and
dispose them lawfully at the end of each work day. Do not accumulate debris, liquid
waste, or sludge on the site except in totally enclosed containers approved by the
Project Manager.
F. Disposal Sites: Dispose of waste at a lawfully-permitted disposal site using a

transporter having a valid City Liquid Waste Transporter Permit.
3.04 TELEVISION INSPECTION
A. Immediately after cleaning, video inspect the sanitary sewer line to document the
condition of the line and to locate existing service connections. Notify the Project
Manager 24 hours in advance of any television inspection so that the Project Manager
may observe inspection operations.
B. Perform television inspection of sanitary sewers as follows:
1. Perform a survey television inspection on sanitary sewers within the boundary

of the project, as directed by the Project Manager. After reviewing survey
video the Project Manager will determine which sanitary sewers will be
rehabilitated or need additional work.
2. Perform pre-installation television inspection immediately after cleaning and

before line rehabilitation work. Pre-installation video inspection is not
required for sewer lines designated to be removed and replaced. Verify that
the line is clean and ready to accept the line rehabilitation. Prepare Television
Inspection Report forms. Maintain copies of all video reports for reference by
the Project Manager for the duration of the project.
3. Videos shall pan all manholes showing benches, walls, annular spaces, and
debris removal. Camera operator shall slowly pan each service connection,
clamped joint and pipe material transition from one material to another.
Complete and submit a Television Inspection Report for every sewer segment
video submitted to the Project Manager.
02558-9
4. Perform post-installation television inspection to confirm completion of

rehabilitation work, including removal and replacement. Verify that
rehabilitation work conforms to the requirements of the Drawings and
Specifications. Provide a video showing the completed work including the
condition of restored service connections. Prepare and submit Television
Inspection Report forms providing the location of service connections along
with the location of any discrepancies. Post-installation video of completed
manholes may be substituted for photographic documentation, as described in
Section 02555 – Manhole Rehabilitation. Manhole work, including benches,
inverts and pipe penetrations into manhole, should be complete prior to post-
installation video work.
5. Contractor shall make actual measurement of pipe inside diameter and record
measurement to nearest tenth of one inch as “pipe size” on “Television
Inspection Report” and on “Video Header”.
C. Survey television inspection videos shall be continuous for pipe segments between
manholes. Do not leave gaps in the video recording of a segment between manholes
and do not show a single segment on more than one video, unless specifically allowed
by the Project Manager.
D. Videos shall include audio.
3.05 FLOW CONTROL
A. Perform survey television inspection on one manhole section at a time. Adequately

control the flow in the section being inspected. Do not exceed the depth of
wastewater flow shown below:
Pipe
Diameter Depth of Flow
(Inches) (Percentage of Pipe Diameter)
6 - 10 10
12 - 24 15
Over 24 20
B. If during survey television inspection of a manhole section, the wastewater flow

depth exceeds the maximum allowable, reduce the flow depth to an acceptable level
by performing the survey television inspection during minimum flow hours, by
diversion pumping or by pulling a camera with swab, high-velocity jet nozzle or other
acceptable dewatering device. Video inspections made while floating the camera is
not acceptable unless approved by the Project Manager.
C. Minimize flow in the line while performing pre-installation television inspection.

Divert the normal flow as specified in Section 01506 - Diversion Pumping and clean
the line to be inspected.
02558-10
D. No flow is allowed in the line while performing post-installation video inspection.
3.06 PASSAGE OF VIDEO CAMERA
A. Do not pull or propel the video camera through the line at a speed greater than 30 feet
per minute.
B. If during survey television inspection of a manhole section, the camera is unable to

pass an obstruction even though flow is unobstructed, televise the manhole section
from the other direction (reverse setup) in order to obtain a complete video of the line.
Whenever such a condition arises, notify the Project Manager to determine whether
an obstruction removal or point repair is necessary. If a point repair is authorized,
repair the pipe at the designated location and then re-televise the manhole section to
verify completion of the point repair, unless waived by the Project Manager.
1. When the camera is being pulled from the other direction in order to survey on
either side of an obstruction and a second obstruction or repair location is
encountered away from the first obstruction, notify the Project Manager and
request a review of the video. The Project Manager may direct the Contractor
to make one or both repairs. No downtime shall be allowed.
2. Once point repairs are completed, re-inspect the manhole section.
3. The City makes no guarantee that the sanitary sewer designated for survey
television after cleaning is clear for the passage of the camera set-up. Select
the appropriate equipment, tools and methods for securing safe passage of the
camera.
C. During pre-installation television inspection, camera passage should show the line is
ready for rehabilitation. Report to the Project Manager any variations between
previous reported (existing data) conditions and actual conditions encountered.
D. For post-installation television inspection, exercise the full capabilities of the camera
equipment to document the completion of the rehabilitation work and the
conformance of the work to the Drawings and Specifications. Provide a full 360-
degree view of pipe, joints and service connections.
3.07 TELEVISION INSPECTION REPORT
A. Provide a television inspection report in pdf format for each line segment using
NASSCO PACP codes. The electronic report shall be named by line segment.
A. Do not under any circumstances, allow sewage or solids removed in the cleaning
process to be released onto streets or into ditches, catch basins, cleanouts, storm
drains, or sanitary or storm sewer manholes.
02558-11
B. Acceptance of sewer cleaning work is subject to successful completion of the

television inspection. If the television inspection shows solids, soil, sand, grease, grit,
or other debris remaining in the line, cleaning will be considered unsatisfactory.
Repeat cleaning and inspection of the line segment until cleaning is judged
satisfactory by the Project Manager.
3.09 MANHOLE REPAIR
A. Repair manholes dismantled or damaged during the cleaning process, and replace
manhole frames and covers damaged during the cleaning process.
END OF SECTION
02558-12
CITY OF HOUSTON PIPE BURSTING/
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION CRUSHING SANITARY SEWERS
SECTION 02571
PIPE BURSTING/CRUSHING SANITARY SEWERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Pipe bursting/crushing existing sanitary sewers.
C. Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples
H. Section 01740 – Site Restoration
I. Section 02260 – Trench Safety System
N. Section 02553 – Point Repairs and Obstruction Removals
O. Section 02555 – Manhole Rehabilitation
P. Section 02558 – Cleaning and Television Inspection
1.03 UNIT PRICES
02571-1
A. Measurement for installing replacement pipe using pipe bursting/crushing method is

on a linear foot basis for installed liner pipe, measured from center line of upstream
manhole to center line of downstream manhole. Depth range for payment is based on
greatest depth measured at manholes from natural ground level to flow line of
sanitary sewer for each pipeline segment.
B. Insertion or access pits, clamp installation, embedment (bedding, haunching and

initial backfill), field quality control (testing), sealing liner at manholes, grouting
annular space, pipe connection to existing manholes using sanded manhole adapters
for 8 inch to 12 inch sewer lines, building up, shaping and reworking manhole inverts
and benches, and pre-installation and post-installation cleaning and television
inspection of completed work are included in pipe bursting/crushing unit price and
not paid for separately.
C. Measurement for removal or cutting of plastic pipe to allow for pipe bursting of the
sewer is on a linear foot basis for all diameters and depth ranges of the plastic pipe to
be removed or cut. Payment for removal or cutting of plastic pipe to allow for pipe
bursting of the sewer shall also include excavating, sheeting/shoring,
maintaining/securing, closing/backfilling and area restoration of all access pits
necessary to accomplish the removal or cutting of the plastic pipe sewer.
D. Excavations initially begun as obstruction removals or point repairs which the

Contractor later decides to use as insertion pits are considered as insertion pits and not
paid for separately.
E. Trench safety systems, well pointing, backfill with cement-stabilized sand or bank
sand and other applicable bid items associated with insertion pits will be paid for at
their respective contract unit prices.
F. Refer to Section 01270 - Measurement and Payment, for unit price procedures.
G. Payment for Item, 'Mobilization for short segment (<100 feet) will be paid when the
Contractor is issued a work order containing a line segment that is less than 100 feet
in length and is not adjacent to another line segment, or when the total of all adjacent
line segments is less than 100 feet.
H. No additional compensation will be made for slow production due to existing soil
conditions.
1.04 REFERENCES:
A. ASTM D 1248 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials

for Wire and Cable.
B. ASTM D 1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.
C. ASTM D 2122 – Standard Test Method for Determining Dimensions of

02571-2
D. ASTM D 2241 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-

E. ASTM D 2412 – Standard Test Method for Determination of External Loading

F. ASTM D 2992 – Standard Practice for Obtaining Hydrostatic or Pressure Design

Basis for "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting- Resin) Pipe and
Fittings.
G. ASTM D 3139 - Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using
Flexible Elastomeric Seals.
H. ASTM D 3262 – Standard Specification for "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced

Thermosetting-Resin) Sewer Pipe.
I. ASTM D 3350 – Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings
Materials.
J. ASTM D 3681 – Standard Test Method for Chemical Resistance of "Fiberglass"

(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe in a Deflected Condition.
K. ASTM D 4161 – Standard Specification for "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced

Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe Joints Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals.
L. ASTM F 585 - Standard Guide for Insertion of Flexible Polyethylene Pipe Into
Existing Sewers
M. ASTM F 714 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-PR)
Based on Outside Diameter
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. Pipe bursting/crushing: Reconstruction of sanitary sewers by insertion of liner pipe

within the bore of the existing pipe, enlarged by breaking and expanding the old pipe.
A. Pipe bursting/crushing involves rehabilitation of deteriorated gravity sewer pipe by

installing new pipe material within the enlarged bore created by using a static,
hydraulic, or pneumatic hammer “moling” device, suitably sized, to break old pipe, or
by using a modified boring “knife” with a flared plug that crushes existing sewer
pipe. Forward progress of the “mole” or “knife” may be aided by hydraulic
equipment or other apparatus. Replacement pipe is either pulled or pushed into the
bore.
02571-3
A. Liner Acceptance: Provide liner material manufactured without defects to standards

and dimensions specified. Causes for rejection include physical liner defects such as
concentrated ridges, discoloration, excessive spot roughness, pitting, visible cracks,
foreign inclusions and varying wall thickness.
A. Prevent injury to or abrasion of pipe during loading, transportation and unloading. Do

not drop pipe from vehicles, nor allow pipe to roll down skids or slopes without
proper restraining ropes. Use suitable pads, strips, skids or blocks for each pipe
during transportation and while awaiting installation.
B. Do not use, and remove from construction site, pipe with physical damage such as
cuts, gashes, nicks or abrasions which may have occurred during shipping, storage, or
handling, which are deeper than 10 percent of wall thickness.
C. Use wide belly band slings for lifting and moving pipe. Do not use bare chains in
contact with pipe.
A. Maintain sewage flow by diversion pumping or other method approved by the Project
Manager.
B. Clear existing sewers of debris, obstructions and other foreign material and make
point repairs to existing sewers as specified in Section 02553 - Point Repairs and
Obstruction Removals.
C. Perform pipe bursting/crushing according to this Section.
D. Shape manhole inverts as specified in Section 02555 - Manhole Rehabilitation.
E. Test lines as specified in Section 02533 - Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers.
F. Inspect lines by video inspection as specified in Section 02558 - Cleaning and

1.10 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures, and Section 01340 – Shop
Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
B. Submit manufacturer's product data with complete information on pipeline materials

including physical properties and dimensions pertinent to this job. Furnish certificates
of compliance with specifications for materials to be supplied.
C. Submit independent testing laboratory test reports certifying that specified pipe
materials conform to the requirements of the applicable ASTM.
02571-4
1. Polyethylene pipe: ASTM D 1248 and ASTM D 3350
2. Restrained Joint PVC: ASTM D 2241 and ASTM D 1784
3. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe: ASTM D 3262 and ASTM D 3681
D. Submit manufacturer’s product data on clamps and couplings.
E. Submit video inspection as specified in Section 02558 - Cleaning and Television

Inspection.
F. Submit product data for chemical grout, including surface preparation instructions
and application instructions from the manufacturer.
1.11 TESTING
A. City may have tests performed on field samples by an independent laboratory

following applicable ASTM specifications to verify physical properties and
characteristics of supplied materials. Provide product samples as requested by Project
Manager.
B. City will pay for tests on materials which meet specification requirements. Contractor
shall pay for failed tests and consequent retesting.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE BURSTING/CRUSHING SYSTEMS
A. Contractor shall be certified by the pipe bursting system manufacturer as a fully

trained user of the pipe bursting system.
2.02 POLYETHYLENE LINER PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Provide polyethylene liner pipe, manufactured of solid-wall, high-density, high-

molecular-weight polyethylene meeting ASTM D 1248, Type III, Class B, Grade P-
34, Category 5, with a PPI rating of PE 3408 or PE3608. Use polyethylene material
with a minimum cell classification of 345434D or E under ASTM D3350. Higher-
numbered cell classification limits yielding desirably higher primary properties,
according to ASTM D 3350, are also acceptable. Dimensions and workmanship:
Meet ASTM F 714 and ASTM D 2122. Inner wall of pipe shall be of light color for
television inspection purposes.
B. Provide pipe with maximum Standard Dimension Ratio (SDR), and ratio of outside
pipe diameter to wall thickness, as specified below. Select SDR for the deeper of two
manholes in each particular pipeline segment.
02571-5
Minimum Wall Thickness (Inches)

Existing Minimum
Nominal Outside ≤15' Deep >15' ≤20' Deep >20' Deep
Diameter Diameter
(Inches) (Inches) SDR 19 SDR 17 SDR 11
6-8 8.625 0.454 0.507 0.784
10 12.75 0.671 0.750 1.159
12 14.0 0.737 0.824 1.273
15 16.0 0.842 0.941 1.455
18 20.0 1.053 1.176 1.818
2.03 RESTRAINED JOINT PVC SEWER PIPE
A. Provide restrained joint PVC pipe conforming to all ASTM D 2241 wall thickness
and pressure requirements.
B. Pipe shall be restrained joint PVC pipe, where restraint is achieved using matching
precision machine grooves on the spigot and integral bell ends of the pipe, and a
locking nylon spine. Pipe, joints and all locking spline components shall be
completely non-metallic to eliminate corrosion problems. Proper assembly shall
eliminate over belling or over insertion.
C. Thrust-restrained pipe shall be furnished in sizes 6-inch, 8-inch, 10-inch and 12-inch,
and shall be furnished in standard lengths of ten (10) feet and twenty (20) feet.
Dimensions of the pipe thrust restraint grooves shall be in accordance with
manufacturer’s specifications.
D. Provide pipe with maximum Standard Dimension Ratio (SDR), and ratio of outside
pipe diameter to wall thickness, as specified below. Select SDR for the deeper of two
manholes in each particular pipeline segment.
Minimum Wall Thickness (Inches)

Existing Minimum
Nominal Outside ≤15' Deep >15' ≤20' Deep >20' Deep
Diameter Diameter
(Inches) (Inches) SDR 19 SDR 17 SDR 11
6 6.625 0.310 0.310 0.310
8 8.625 0.411 0.411 0.411
10 10.75 0.413 0.413 0.413
12 12.75 0.490 0.490 0.490
02571-6
2.04 FRP LINER PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Pipe, Joints and Fittings: ASTM D 3262, Type 1, Liner 2, Grade 3. Minimum
stiffness: 72 psi, measured according to ASTM D 2412. Pipe with a stiffness greater
than 72 psi may be used with prior approval of the Project Manager.
B. FRP Liner Pipe: Glass-fiber-reinforced aggregate-filled plastic mortar pipe

manufactured by the centrifugal casting process resulting in a dense, nonporous,
corrosion-resistant, consistent composite structure.
C. Resin systems: Thermosetting polyester epoxy resin, with or without filler, meeting
ASTM D 3262.
D. Reinforcing Glass Fibers: Commercial grade E-type glass filaments, with binder and
sizing compatible with impregnating resins.
E. Filler: Sand with at least 98 percent silica content, and maximum moisture content of
0.2 percent.
F. Joints: Low-profile FRP jacking bell-and-spigot joints with watertight elastomeric

sealing gaskets meeting ASTM D 4161.
G. Dimensions and Tolerances:
1. Pipe outside diameters and tolerances: Comply with ASTM D 3262, Cast Iron
Pipe Equivalent Outside Diameters, and the table below.
2. When possible, supply pipe in nominal lengths of 20 feet. Where radius

curves in existing pipe or limitations in entry pit dimensions restrict pipe
length, shorter lengths may be used.
3. FRP pipe minimum outside diameter and minimum wall thickness:
Existing Sewer Minimum Wall Minimum Wall

Nominal Minimum Liner Thickness, 46 psi Thickness, 72 psi
Diameter Outside Diameter Stiffness Stiffness
(Inches) (Inches) (Inches) (Inches)
12 13.45 0.34 0.48
18 19.50 0.34 0.48
4. Fabricate pipe ends square to pipe axis plus or minus 0.25 inches, or plus or
minus 0.5 percent of nominal diameter, whichever is greater.
H. Fittings:
02571-7
1. Flanges, elbows, reducers, tees, wyes and other fittings: Capable of

withstanding operating conditions.
2. Fabrication: Contact-molded, or manufactured from mitered sections of pipe

joined by glass-fiber-reinforced overlays.
2.05 LINER PIPE SEAL AT MANHOLES
A. Sealer for annular space between liner pipes and manholes for sanitary sewers 15
inches in diameter and larger: Oakum strips soaked in chemical grout.
B. Chemical grout shall react freely with water to form a strong polyurethane foam, shall
be resistant to hydrogen sulfide gas, and shall meet the following criteria:
1. Tensile strength: 20 psi
2. Elongation: 190%
3. Tear Strength: 4.9 lbs/inch
4. Density/Specific Gravity: 0.18
2.06 SANDED MANHOLE ADAPTERS
A. Pipes shall be connected to existing manholes using a sanded manhole adapter for
sanitary sewers ranging in size from 8 to 12 inches in diameter.
B. Sanded Manhole Adapters shall be fabricated by manufacturer (not field made),

exceed 10.8 psi pressure testing and withstand a vacuum of 22 in. Hg for zero
infiltration of groundwater.
2.07 CLAMPS AND GASKETS
A. Clamps: Stainless steel, including bolts and lugs; Type 108, as manufactured by JCM
Industries or approved equal. Furnish full circle, universal clamp couplings with at
least 3/16-inch thick neoprene grid-type gaskets. Select clamps to fit outside diameter
of liner pipe as follows:
Liner Pipe Minimum

Outside Diameter Clamp Length
(Inches) (Inches)
8.625 18
10.750 or greater 30
02571-8
B. Full length PVC Gasketed Repair Couplings: Couplings shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM D 3139. Full length couplings shall be furnished to fit the
outside diameter of restrained joint PVC pipe, conforming to ASTM 2241, where
restraint is achieved using matching precision machined grooves on the spigot and
integral bell ends of the pipe, and a locking nylon spline. Couplings shall be furnished
in sizes 6-inch, 8-inch, 10-inch and 12-inch nominal outside diameters and minimum
length shall be 18-inches.
2.08 BEDDING MATERIAL
A. Bedding: Comply with Section 02320 - Utility Backfill Materials, and Section 02321
- Cement Stabilized Sand.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 OBSTRUCTION REMOVAL AND POINT REPAIR
A. Make point repairs and remove obstructions, such as roots, rocks and other debris,
prior to installing liner pipe. Remove and dispose of debris in accordance with
Section 01504 - Temporary Facilities and Controls, or Section 01576 - Waste
Material Disposal.
B. Refer to Section 02553 - Point Repairs and Obstruction Removals, for requirements
and procedures for point repairs and obstruction removals.
A. Refer to Section 01506 - Diversion Pumping.
3.03 INSERTION OR ACCESS PITS
A. Locate pits so that total number is minimized and footage of liner pipe installed in a
single pull is maximized. Where possible, use excavations at point repair locations for
insertion pits.
B. Prior to excavation, the Contractor shall check with all utility providers (e.g., Reliant
Energy, SBC, City of Houston, Centerpoint Energy, etc.) and determine locations of
utilities in or near the work area. Costs of utility repairs, temporary service and other
costs arising out of damage to or interruption of utilities resulting from operations
under this contract shall be borne by Contractor at no additional cost to the City.
C. Perform excavation and backfill in accordance with requirements of Section 02317 -

D. Perform work in accordance with OSHA standards. Comply with Section 02260 -
Trench Safety System for excavations requiring trench safety.
02571-9
accordance with Section 01578 - Control of Ground and Surface Water.
3.04 REMOVAL OR CUTTING OF PLASTIC PIPE TO ALLOW FOR PIPE

BURSTING/CRUSHING OF THE SEWER
A. If a pipe that is scheduled to receive rehabilitation is found to have received sliplining

or pipe bursting on a previous occasion, the Contractor shall notify the Project
Manager immediately. The Project Manager may direct the Contractor to clean and
televise the line segment and/or cut or remove the existing liner in conjunction with
the installation of a new pipe via pipe bursting/crushing. Removal or cutting of the
existing liner shall be performed upon approval and notification from the Project
Manager.
B. The Contractor shall provide the means, method, equipment and labor to cut or
remove the plastic pipe to allow for the successful pipe bursting/crushing of the
sewer.
1. The means or method utilized by the Contractor shall not disturb the
surrounding soil or host pipe to the degree where it will effect the installation
and operation of the new pipe to be installed.
2. Cutting of the liner or removal of the existing liner shall not interfere or
damage the connections beyond the extent required to disconnect and
reconnect the service laterals to the main line.
3. Removal of the existing liner will only be allowed if cutting is not possible.
4. Liner cutting or removal shall be considered complete when the existing pipe
has been cut or removed and the new pipe has been successfully installed and
accepted.
C. During the liner removal or cutting effort the Contractor may encounter conditions
that inhibit pipe removal or the cutting of the pipe. These include, but are not limited
to obstructions, couplings, pipe clamps, or cement stabilized sand. When these
conditions stop the advancement of the head, the Contractor shall request approval for
an obstruction removal from the Project Manager. Once approved, the Contractor
shall perform all work necessary to remove the obstruction and allow for the
resumption of progress of the liner removal or cutting effort.
D. Line segments with existing conditions that prevent the successful removal or cutting
of the liner pipe by conventional methods shall be evaluated on a case by case basis.
3.05 POLYETHYLENE LINER PIPE INSTALLATION
A. Joints:
02571-10
1. Assemble and join sections of polyethylene liner pipe on site, above ground.
Make joints by heating and butt-fusion method in strict conformance to
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Use operators who are experienced with butt-fusion jointing of pipe.

Operators shall be trained in fusing polyethylene pipe with similar equipment
using proper jigs and tools in accordance with pipe manufacturer’s standard
procedures.
3. Form joints with smooth, uniform double-rolled back beads made while
applying proper melt, pressure and alignment. Joints must be inspected and
approved by the Project Manager before insertion.

sanitary sewer line down to the spring line. Connect power winch cable to end of liner
by use of suitable pulling head equal to outside diameter of liner. Secure pulling head
to liner and attach to power winch cable so that liner can be satisfactorily fed and
pulled through sanitary sewer line. Prevent ragged edges of existing pipe from
scarring liner pipe. Follow insertion procedures in ASTM F 585. Do not allow sand or
other debris to enter liner.
C. Puling Liner:
1. Maximum length of continuous liner assembled above ground and pulled at

any one time: Do not exceed length recommended by manufacturer's printed
instructions.
outside diameter of the polyethylene liner. Provide a suitable pulling force
Polyethylene Liner O.D. Maximum Pulling Force

(Inches) (Tons)
8.625 4.0
10.75 7.5
14.0 10.5
16.0 12.0
18.0 21.5

may be used subject to the Project Manager's approval. Avoid liner buckling or
dimpling by limiting stroke of pushing implement. Cut out and remove portions
damaged during insertion process.
3.06 FRP LINER PIPE INSTALLATION
02571-11
A. FRP liner pipe may be pushed or pulled into existing sewers. Insert pipes spigot end
first, with bell end trailing. Apply pushing force to pipe wall end inside bell in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not apply jacking loads to end of
bell. Keep within safe jacking loads as follows (Maximum allowable joint angular
deflection shall be one degree):
FRP Liner O.D. Maximum Jacking Load

(Inches) (Tons) for 72 psi Stiffness
13.45 22
17.40 30
B. Prior to pulling or pushing the liner, the contractor shall enlarge the pipe opening at
the wall and bench/invert of the manholes by chipping or sawing. If the contractor
fails to enlarge the opening of the manhole and the manhole is damaged, the
contractor shall replace the manhole at no cost to the City.
3.07 PVC LINER PIPE INSTALLATION
A. Joints:
1. Assemble and join sections of PVC liner pipe on site, above ground, or in
excavated insertion pit that will accommodate ten (10) foot or twenty (20) foot
pipe joints.
2. Use operators who are experienced with installation and assembly of

restrained joint PVC pipe where restraint is achieved using matching precision
machined grooves on the spigot and integral bell ends of the pipe, and a
locking spline.
3. PVC restrained joint liner pipe shall be assembled using proper tools in
accordance with pipe manufacturer’s standard procedures and written
instructions. Joints must be inspected and approved by the Project Manager
prior to insertion.

sanitary sewer line down to the spring line. PVC liner pipe shall be installed utilizing
static pipe bursting equipment. Hydraulic or pneumatic hammer bursting equipment
shall not be used. Secure pulling head to liner and attach to static pipe bursting
equipment, so that PVC liner pipe can be satisfactorily fed and pulled through the
sanitary sewer line. Prevent ragged edges of existing pipe from scarring liner pipe.
Follow insertion procedures in ASTM F 585 as applicable for PVC liner pipe. Do not
allow sand or debris to enter liner.
C. Pulling Liner:
02571-12
1. Maximum length of continuous line assembled above ground and pulled at

any one time shall not exceed length recommended by manufacturer’s printed
instructions. PVC pipe shall be installed segmentally, one joint at a time, and
pulled with a static pipe bursting machine. Do not exceed manufacturer’s
written instructions for pulling force.
outside diameter of the PVC pipe liner. Provide a suitable pulling force
PVC Liner O.D. Maximum Pulling Force

(Inches) (Tons)
6.625 4.10
8.625 7.75
10.75 9.25
12.75 11.0

may be used subject to the Project Manager’s approval. Pushing force shall not
exceed manufacturer’s data and recommendation. Avoid liner buckling or dimpling
by limiting stroke of pushing implement. Cut out and remove portions damaged
during the insertion process.
3.08 CLAMP AND COUPLING INSTALLATION
A. Where excavations for liner pipe insertion are made between two manholes, cut ends
of liner pipe smooth, square to pipe axis. Join liner pipes with appropriately sized
stainless steel universal clamp couplings for polyethylene pipe or PVC gasketed
repair couplings for restrained joint PVC pipe. Butt together gaps between ends of
liner pipe with space between ends not exceeding one inch.
B. Bedding: Install cement-stabilized sand bedding in accordance with Section 02321 -

Cement Stabilized Sand. Extend bedding 12 inches above clamp/liner pipe.
3.09 FRP COLLAR/CLOSURES
A. Install FRP collar closure pieces in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations.
A. After liner installation, perform the following tests:
1. Low pressure air test: Perform before sealing liner in place at manholes, and
before making service reconnections to liner. Check integrity of joints made,
and verify that liner has not been damaged.
02571-13
2. Refer to Section 02533 - Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers for

applicable test procedures.
3.11 SEALING LINER IN MANHOLES
A. Allow polyethylene liner pipe to normalize to ambient temperatures and recover from
imposed stretch before cutting to fit between manholes, sealing at manholes, and
shaping manhole inverts. Allow at least 12 hours for normalization of polyethylene
liners. Restrained joint PVC pipe does not require a recovery period from pulling
forces imposed during typical pipe bursting operations.
B. Cut liner so it extends 4 inches into manholes. Make smooth, vertical cuts and slope
areas over top of exposed liner using non-shrink grout.
C. For sanitary sewers 15 inches in diameter and larger, use Oakum with a chemical
grout to seal annular spaces between liner and sanitary sewer main at each manhole.
The oakum soaked in chemical grout shall form an effective water-tight gasket in the
annular space between liner and existing pipe in manhole. Follow chemical grouting
manufacturer’s recommendations for installation.
D. Finish seal of liner pipe to host pipe with non-shrink grout placed around annular
space from inside manhole. Apply grout in a band at least 6 inches wide.
E. Reshape and smooth manhole inverts as specified in Section 02555 – Manhole

Rehabilitation. Use approved manhole rehabilitation material to form smooth
transitions with reshaped inverts and raised manhole benches to eliminate sharp edges
of liner pipe, concrete benches and channeled inverts. Build up and smooth manhole
inverts to match flow line of new liner.
3.12 INSTALLATION OF SANDED MANHOLE ADAPTER
A. For sanitary sewers ranging in size from 8 to 12 inches in diameter, secure pipe to
existing manhole with specified manhole adapter in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Installation of the sanded manhole adapter shall be such that the bell portion of the
adapter is adjacent and external to the wall of the manhole, and spigot shall protrude
through and into the manhole 3-inches beyond the interior of the manhole wall.
C. The connections shall be bonded, anchored, and finished using an approved non-
shrink grout.
3.13 POST-INSTALLATION VIDEOTAPE INSPECTION OF COMPLETED WORK
A. Provide the Project Manager with video inspection showing completed work
including condition of restored connections. Comply with Section 02533 -
Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers and Section 02558 - Cleaning and Television
Inspection.
02571-14
3.14 FINAL CLEANUP
A. Upon completion of installation, testing and inspection, clean and restore project area
affected by work of this Section. Restore site in accordance with Section 01740 - Site
Restoration.
END OF SECTION
02571-15
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION STREET LIGHTING CONDUIT
SECTION 02581
STREET LIGHTING CONDUIT
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Pull box and conduit installation for electrical service to thoroughfare street lights.
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for conduit is on linear foot basis measured horizontally between

pull holes, pull boxes and terminal poles.

Procedures.
work in this section is included in total Stipulated Price.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. CenterPoint Energy Specification Number 007-371-08. Specification for Installation

of Conduit System for Thoroughfare Street Lighting.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. CenterPoint Energy furnished material:
1. Materials Specifications in Paragraph 3.0 of CenterPoint Energy

Specifications Number 007-371-08.
B. Provide following material:
1. Materials specified in Paragraphs 7, 8, and 9 of CenterPoint Energy

Specifications number 007-371-08.
PART 3 EXECUTION
02581-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION STREET LIGHTING CONDUIT
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify lines and grades are correct. Determine if existing underground utilities or
other obstructions may conflict with conduit installation shown on Drawings. Notify
Project Manager of potential conflicts.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Order pull boxes and warning tape from CenterPoint Energy Customer Relations
Representative three working days in advance of need. Verify requirements for
"driveway" pull boxes for concrete areas subject to vehicular traffic and confirm total
number of pull boxes required with CenterPoint Energy Customer Relations
Representative.
B. Obtain CenterPoint Energy furnished materials Tuesday through Friday, excluding

holidays, from Street Light Office at 4700 South Shaver St., Bldg. 1, Houston, Texas
77034.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Notify CenterPoint Energy street lighting Engineer at least 2 working days in advance
of scheduled conduit installation.
B. Install conduit in accordance with Paragraphs 7 through 9 and drawings pages 9

through 12 of CenterPoint Energy Specification Number 700-371-08.
A. Correct nonconforming conduit and pull box installations and obtain written
notification from inspector that installation meets CenterPoint Energy requirements.
B. Forward one copy of notification to CenterPoint Energy Customer Relations

Representative.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect conduits and pull holes from damage or blockage until street light and circuit
installation by CenterPoint Energy.
B. Clear blockage in conduits prior to CenterPoint Energy circuit installation.
END OF SECTION
02581-2
CITY OF HOUSTON TRAFFIC POLE
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION ASSEMBLIES – STEEL
SECTION 02582
TRAFFIC POLE ASSEMBLIES - STEEL
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Steel traffic pole assemblies, including anchor bolts and foundation.
C. Section 01554 – Traffic Control and Street Signs
D. Section 02465 – Drilled Shaft Foundations
E. Section 02893 – Traffic Signal Construction
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for Traffic Pole Assemblies will be measured by each Traffic Pole
Assembly including foundation.
2. The price shall be full compensation for Work performed and materials
furnished in accordance with this price item. Foundation is incidental to the
cost of the Work. Document 00410 - Bid Form short description includes the
type and size of the steel Traffic Pole Assembly. Payment for traffic signal
heads, pedestrian signal heads, pedestrian push button stations, and other
transportation related devices are paid for separately.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. AASHTO LTS: Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs,
Luminaires and Traffic Signals including interim revisions.
B. AISC: American Institute of Steel Construction
C. AISI: American Iron and Steel Institute
D. ASTM A36: Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
02582-1
E. ASTM A123: Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products
F. ASTM A153: Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware
G. ASTM A501: Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing
H. ASTM A563: Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts (Inch and
Metric)
I. ASTM A572: Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-

J. ASTM A595: Standard Specification for Steel Tubes, Low-Carbon or High-Strength

Low-Alloy, Tapered for Structural Use
K. ASTM A1011 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled,
Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength
L. ASTM F1554: Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi
Yield Strength
M. ASTM F3125 - Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts and
Assemblies, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, Inch Dimensions 120 ksi and 150
ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, and Metric Dimensions 830 MPa and 1040 MPa
Minimum Tensile Strength
N. AWS D1.1 – Structural Welding Code – Steel
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall furnish mill test report(s) on steel used in pole fabrication. The
mill test report(s) shall be furnished prior to or at the time of pole delivery.
B. Four (4) copies (minimum) of shop drawings shall be furnished for City of Houston
review and approval prior to pole fabrication unless otherwise requested by the City
but no more than six (6) copies.
C. Two (2) copies of shop drawings will be returned by the City of Houston to the
manufacturer for its files.
D. Conform to requirements of Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
1.06 DEFINITIONS
02582-2
A. Traffic Pole Assembly - a steel pole that supports luminaires, traffic signals,
pedestrian push button stations, and other transportation related devices. The pole
assembly may support a combination of these items.
1. Traffic Pole Assemblies include, but are not limited to:
a. Traffic signal poles;
b. Mast arms;
c. Luminaire arms;
d. Street light poles;
e. Pedestrian push button station support poles;
f. Pedestal poles; and
g. The equivalents.
2. This excludes poles use for purposes that fall outside of the scope of
AASHTO’s Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs,
Luminaires and Traffic Signals.
3. This excludes roadside sign structures. Refer to 01554 - Traffic Control and
Street Signs for specifications.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. All items shall be new materials of the latest product in production to the commercial
trade and shall be of the highest quality as to materials used and workmanship. The
manufacturer of these items shall be experienced in design and construction of such
items and shall furnish evidence of having supplied similar items, which have been in
successful operation, for not less than three (3) years.
2.02 SILENCE OF SPECIFICATION
A. The apparent silence of these specifications as to any detail, or the apparent omission
from it of a detailed description concerning any point, shall be regarded as meaning
that only the best commercial practice shall prevail and that only material and
workmanship of the finest quality shall be used. All interpretations of these
specifications shall be made on the basis of this statement.
2.03 TRAFFIC POLE ASSEMBLIES
A. The Traffic Pole Assemblies shall be designed in accordance with the latest edition of
the AASHTO standard specifications.
02582-3
B. Anchorage: Included with each pole shall be a minimum of four steel anchor bolts,
complete with double hex nuts, lock washers and flat washers. Nuts, washers and
entire length of the anchor bolts shall be hot-dip galvanized to ASTM - A153. Anchor
bolts shall meet the requirements of ASTM F1554, Gr. 55. An anchor bolt template
shall be included with each pole assembly.
C. Wind Resistance: Entire pole and arm assembly to be rated to withstand AASHTO
requirements for 90 mile per hour wind.
D. Welds: All welds shall meet the requirements of AWS D1.1
E. Material Certification: Material certifications shall be provided for all ASTM

numbers referred to in this specification.
F. Complete design drawings and complete technical data must be submitted for
approval to the City of Houston prior to starting fabrication. Shop drawings shall be
signed and sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer.
G. The pole unit and all materials used in its manufacture shall meet the requirements of
the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO),
specifically LTS: Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs,
Luminaries and Traffic Signals including interim revisions.
H. Pole shaft and arms shall be circular or octagonal in cross-section with no transverse
joints or welds and no more than one (1) longitudinal welds per pole or arm. Refer to
the standard drawings for exact sizes on the pole diameters. They shall be uniform in
cross-section and shall uniformly taper from the pole shaft to the end of the arm. The
end of the arm shall be at a height above the pavement, as detailed on the standard
drawing, with design vertical loadings, when installed on the pole.
2.04 POLE SHAFT
A. The pole shaft for the Type 1 poles shall be fabricated from a minimum of 3-gauge
(0.2391 inch) hot rolled commercial steel. The shaft shall have only one (1)
longitudinal, automatically, electrically welded joint, and shall have no intermediate
horizontal joints nor welds. After forming and welding, the tapered shaft shall be
longitudinally cold rolled over a hardened steel mandrel under sufficient hydraulic
pressure to flatten the weld and increase the physical characteristics of the shaft. The
shaft shall meet the chemical and physical properties of ASTM-A595 GR. A, having
a minimum yield strength of 55,000 psi. Only one length of steel sheet shall be used,
which shall be formed into a continuously tapered shaft, having a taper of
approximately 0.14 inch per foot.
02582-4
B. The pole shaft for the Type 2 poles shall be fabricated from a minimum 0.375 inch
hot rolled commercial steel. The shaft shall have only one (1) longitudinal,
automatically, electrically welded joint, and shall have no intermediate horizontal
joints nor welds. The shaft shall meet the chemical and physical properties of ASTM-
A572 GR. 55, having a minimum yield strength of 55,000 psi. Only one (1) length of
steel sheet shall be used, which shall be formed into a continuously tapered shaft,
having a taper of approximately 0.14 inch per foot.
C. The base plate shall conform to ASTM-A36 or ASTM A572 steel. It shall telescope
the shaft and be attached by means of two continuous welds, one on the inside of the
base at the end of the shaft, the other on the outside at the top of base. The base plate
shall be arranged to accept four (4) 2-1/4 inch diameter anchor bolts on an 18 inch
bolt circle.
D. The pole shaft shall be furnished with a reinforced handhole frame with steel cover
and a 1/2 inch - 13 UNC grounding provision. Dimensions shall be as shown on the
detail drawings.
E. Each pole shaft shall include a steel pole plate welded to shaft for the mast arm
connection. It shall be arranged to accept four (4) connecting bolts. Pole plate
material shall conform to the requirements of ASTM-A36 or ASTM A572 Grade 50
steel.
F. As required, each pole shall be provided with an ornamental pole top. The final
shaped pole top shall be mechanically attached to the top of the shaft to provide
access for wiring signals secured by a J-hook wire support; also provided. Pole top
material shall conform to the requirements of AA-319.0-F aluminum.
G. The pole shaft shall be drilled in the field at required signal locations.
2.05 MAST ARM
A. The mast arm shall be fabricated from a minimum 7-gauge (0.179 inch) hot rolled
commercial steel in accordance with ASTM A595 Grade A and shall have a yield of
not less than 55,000 psi. It shall be fabricated and formed into a round shape as
required, using the same cold rolling process as the pole shaft and shall have the same
physical properties and yield strength. Arm dimensions shall be equivalent in strength
for the loads shown in the plans.
B. Mast arm shall be a straight flange plate mounted style and shall include a steel arm
plate with four (4) connecting bolts. Arm plate material shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM-A36 or ASTM A572 Grade 42 steel. Bolts shall be internally
mounted to pole plate and meet the requirements of ASTM-F3125.
C. A slip joint shall be permissible for arms forty (40) feet and greater in length. The slip
joint shall be made in the shop but may be match marked and shipped disassembled.
An automatic submerged arc process shall weld pole shaft and arm. Pole and arm
diameters shall be uniform at any cross-section and shall be reasonably straight.
02582-5
D. Tenons for mounting the vehicle signal head assemblies shall be provided on the mast
arm at locations required. Refer to the standard drawings for tenon details.
2.06 LUMINAIRE ARM
A. The luminaire arm shall be fabricated from 2-inch Schedule 80 pipe.
B. The length of the luminaire arm shall be as shown in the standard drawings or
required in the plans.
C. The luminaire arm shall be connected to the pole shaft with simplex fittings, and in
accordance with details shown on the standard drawings.
2.07 HOT-DIP GALVANIZING
A. Surface Preparation.
1. Prior to being incorporated into an assembled product, steel plates 3/4 inch or
more in thickness may require blast cleaning to remove rolled-in mill scale,
impurities, and non-metallic foreign materials. After assembly, all weld flux
shall be mechanically removed.
2. The iron or steel product is degreased by immersion in an agitated 4.5%-6%

concentrated caustic solution elevated to a temperature ranging from 150 to
190- degrees Fahrenheit. It is then pickled by immersion in a heated sulfuric
acid solution of 6%-13% concentration, controlling the temperature between
150 and 190-degrees Fahrenheit. It is next rinsed clean from any residual
effects of the caustic or acid solutions by immersion in a circulating fresh
water bath.
3. Final preparation is done by immersion in a concentrated zinc ammonium

chloride flux solution heated to 130-degrees Fahrenheit. The solution's acidity
content is maintained between 4.5-5.0 pH. The assembly is air dried to
remove any moisture remaining in the flux coat and/or trapped within the
product.
B. Pole shaft and arm shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in conformance with
ASTM A123 requirements, with a minimum of two (2) ounces per square foot of
galvanized coating.
C. All ancillary parts for pole structures shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in
conformance with ASTM A153 requirements. The galvanized coating shall be a
minimum thickness of two (2) ounces per square foot. All threaded material shall be
brushed or retapped after galvanizing. Fabricated products shall be free and clear of
teardrop edges, flaking zinc, rough appearance, holes covered with zinc membrane,
and similar unattractive finishes. In general, the complete product shall be smooth,
clean and unscarred when delivered. Any part of the structures not meeting these
requirements shall be rejected.
02582-6
2.08 POWDER COATING OVER GALVANIZING
A. Surface Preparation. The pole shaft, arm and ancillary parts shall be prepared in
accordance with the hot-dip galvanizing requirements of Part 2.07 in this section.
B. Top Coat. All galvanized exterior surfaces visually exposed are to be coated with a
Urethane or Triglycidyl Isocyanurate (TGIC) Polyester Powder to a minimum film
thickness of 2.0 mils. The galvanized exterior should be etched, preheated, then
powder coated. The coating shall be electrostatically applied and cured in a gas-fired
convection oven by heating the steel substrate to a minimum of 350-degrees
Fahrenheit and a maximum of 400-degrees Fahrenheit.
C. Packaging. In order to protect the finish during transportation, a wrapping of 3/16"

U.V. inhibited plastic-backed packing foam must be applied prior to shipment of
small poles. Larger poles are cradled in a 1-inch rubberized foam base. A nylon
ripcord shall be placed beneath the wrapping the entire length of the pole for removal
of the wrapping without the use of knives or any other sharp instrument that may
damage the painted surface.
2.09 FOUNDATION
A. Construct foundation in accordance with Section 02465 – Drilled Shaft Foundations,

02893 – Traffic Signal Construction, and as shown on Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION – NOT USED
END OF SECTION
02582-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION STREETLIGHT LUMINAIRES
SECTION 02590
STREETLIGHT LUMINAIRES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Traffic Signal Pole Luminaire
B. Major Thoroughfare Luminaire
C. Collector Street Luminaire
D. Local Street Luminaire
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for luminaires will be measured by each luminaire type.
2. Payment for the work performed and materials furnished in accordance with
this specification will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Traffic Signal Pole
Luminaire", "Major thoroughfare Luminaire", "Collector Street Luminaire",
or "Local Street Luminaire".
1.04 REFERENCES
A. The approved luminaires shall meet the standards referenced below:
1. Publications are referenced within the text by their basic designation only.
Versions listed shall be superseded by updated versions as they become
available.
a. ANSI C78.377-2017, R2022 (or latest), American National Standard

for Electrical Lamps – Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid
State Lighting (SSL) Products
02590-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
b. ANSI C82.77-2021 (or latest), American National Standard for

Lighting Equipment - Harmonic Emission Limits - Related Power
Quality Requirements
c. ANSI C136.2-2018(or latest), American National Standard for

Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment - Dielectric Withstand and
Electrical Transient Immunity Requirements
d. ANSI C136.10-2017 (or latest), American National Standard for

Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment - Locking-Type Photocontrol
Devices and Mating Receptacles- Physical and Electrical
Interchangeability and Testing
e. ANSI C136.15-2020 (or latest), American National Standard for

Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment - Luminaire Field
Identification
f. ANSI C136.22-2019 (or latest), American National Standard for

Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment - Internal Labeling of
Luminaires
g. ANSI C136.25-2019 (or latest), American National Standard for

Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment - Ingress Protection
(Resistance to Dust, Solid Objects and Moisture) for Luminaire
Enclosures
h. ANSI C136.31-2018 (or latest), American National Standard for

Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment - Luminaire Vibration
i. ANSI C136.37-2019 (or latest), American National Standard for Solid

State Light Sources Used in Roadway and Area Lighting
j. ANSI C136.41-2021 (or latest), American National Standard for

Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment-Dimming Control Between an
External Locking Type Photocontrol and Ballast or Driver
k. ANSI/IEEE C62.45: IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testing

for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage (1000 V and less) AC
Power Circuits
l. ANSI/IEEE C62.41.2: IEEE Recommended Practice on

Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and less) AC
Power Circuits
m. ANSI/IES LM-80-21: Measuring Maintenance of Light Output

Characteristics of Solid-State Light Sources
n. ANSI/IES TM-21-21: Projecting Long-Term Luminous, Photon, and

Radiant Flux Maintenance of LED Light Sources
02590-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
o. ASTM B117: Standard Practice for Operating salt Spray (Fog)

Apparatus
p. ASTM D523: Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss
q. ASTM D1654: Standard Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or

Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments
r. ASTM G154: Standard Practice for Operating Fluorescent Ultraviolet

(UV) Lamp Apparatus for Exposure of Materials
s. ISO 17025-2017: General requirements for the competence of testing

and calibration laboratories
t. U.S. Department of Energy & Municipal Solid-State Street Lighting

Consortium model specification for LED roadway luminaires
electrical immunity requirements for High Test Level 10kV/10kA
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall furnish six (6) copies of luminaire submittal package to the
CITY OF HOUSTON. Submittal package shall include luminaire cut sheet, LED
light source cut sheet, LED driver cut sheet, surge protective device cut sheet, LM-79
luminaire photometric report with photometric file in LM-63 format, LM-80 data,
ISTMT report, energy star TM-21 calculator, 3G vibration test, UL1598 certification
and warranty.
B. Conform to requirements of Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Luminaire shall come with a 10-year warranty on product and finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. All items shall be new materials of the latest product in production to the commercial
trade, and shall be of the highest quality as to materials used and workmanship. The
manufacturer of these items shall be experienced in design and construction of such
items and shall furnish evidence of having supplied similar items, which have been in
successful operation, for not less than ten (10) years.
2.02 SILENCE OF SPECIFICATIONS
02590-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
that only the best commercial practice shall prevail and that only material and
workmanship of the finest quality shall be used. All interpretations of these
specifications shall be made on the basis of this statement.
2.03 LUMINAIRE HOUSING
A. Luminaire shall have cobra head style/shape/aesthetic. An internal bubble level shall
be provided with mounting provisions that permit ±5° leveling in 2.5° increments.
Color shall be gray.
B. Luminaire finish shall exceed a rating of 6 per ASTM D1654 after 1000 hours &
1500 hours, and shall meet or exceed a rating of 6 after 3000 hours, testing per ASTM
B117, surpasses ANSI C136.37. The coating shall exhibit no greater than 30%
reduction of gloss per ASTM D523, after 500 hours of QUV testing at ASTM G154
Cycle 6.
C. Vibration shall meet ANSI C136.31, Level 2 (bridge/overpass, 3G)
D. QR Code Label: Luminaire shall be equipped with a unique QR label that is visible
on the outside of the luminaire. The QR label shall be supported by a dedicated
smartphone app. App shall be able to access detailed product specific information as
well as mounting instructions. The QR code label app shall enable product
registration on site, after installation, and record GPS location of installed fixture,
installed location photo and provision for additional information. Additionally, app
shall provide diagnostic support and enable identification of the specific spare parts
available for repairs.
2.04 ELECTRICAL, ELECTRONIC DRIVERS AND LED MODULES
A. Luminaire shall have Luminaire Useful Life of 94,500+ hours to 100,000+ hours
based on ISMT in-situ thermal testing per UL 1598, LED driver data, LED light
source(s) LM-80 and TM-21 data, and system reliability tool data. Luminaire shall
start and operate in -40C to +40C temperature range.
B. Electronic driver must be able to dim 0-10 volts and operate per the following line
voltages noted for each application. All electrical components must be RoHS
compliant.
Traffic Signal Pole Luminaire - 120-277V

Major Thoroughfare Luminaire - 480V
Collector Street Luminaire - 120-277V
Local Street Luminaire - 120-277V
02590-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. LED module shall be composed of distinct, individual high performance LEDS, No

Chip on Board will be accepted. LED light source(s) shall have no wire bond, which
prevents open circuit failures in the LED light source(s) and enhances long-term
reliability and useful life. If individual LED(s) fail, they shall fail short keeping the
rest of the LED light source and the entire LED luminaire operating. LED light
engines must be IP66 sealed, UV stabilized surpassing ANSI C136.37. LEDs shall be
tested by ISO 17025-2017 accredited lab in accordance with ANSI/IES LM-80
guidelines in compliance with EPA ENERGY STAR, extrapolations in accordance
with ANSI/IES TM-21.
2.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:
A. Traffic Signal Pole Luminaire:
1. Luminaire shall have a maximum weight of 12.3 pounds and a maximum

effective projected area of 0.523 square feet. Light output must exceed 12,750
lumens with distribution Type III. System wattage must not exceed 106 watts.
Color temperature as per ANSI/NEMA bin Neutral White, 4000 Kelvin
nominal (3985K +/- 275K or 3710 to 4260K), CRI 70 Minimum. Lumen
maintenance shall be 94% minimum of initial output at 60,000 hours
operation. BUG Rating shall be B3-U0-G2.
B. Major Thoroughfare Luminaire:

lumens with distribution Type II. System wattage must not exceed 106 watts.
C. Collector Street Luminaire:

D. Local Street Luminaire:
02590-5
CITY OF HOUSTON

Color temperature as per ANSI/NEMA bin Warm White, 3000 Kelvin
2.06 SURGE PROTECTION:
A. Integral surge protector tested in accordance with ANSI/IEEE C62.45 per

ANSI/IEEE C62.41.2 Scenario 1 Category C High Exposure with elevated
20kV/20kA waveforms for line-ground, line neutral and neutral ground, and in
accordance with U.S. Department of Energy & Municipal Solid-State Street Lighting
Consortium model specification for LED roadway luminaires electrical immunity
requirements for High Test Level 10kV/10kA.
2.07 CONTROLS:
A. Provide 7 pin receptacle with photoelectric cell, twist-lock type, "fail on", extended
life, input voltage of 120-277 VAC or 480 VAC to match Luminaire driver voltage
rating. Operating range 50/60 Hz. Max rated load of 1000W/1800VA. Integrated
standard surge protection of 640J. Rated for operation in an ambient temperature of -
40°C/-40°F up to +70°C/+158°F. 10-year limited warranty from supplier.
END OF SECTION
02590-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE
SECTION 02611
REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Reinforced concrete pipe for sanitary sewers and storm sewers.
D. Section 02426 – Sewer Line in Tunnels
E. Section 02427 – Plastic Liner for Large-Diameter Concrete Sewers and Structures
F. Section 02431 – Tunnel Grout
G. Section 02441 – Microtunneling
H. Section 02445 – Jack and Bore/Jack and Mine/Pilot Tube Guided Boring Tunnels
I. Section 02448 – Pipe and Casing Augering for Sewers
J. Section 02531 – Gravity Sanitary Sewers
K. Section 02631 – Storm Sewers
A. Unit Prices.
1. No separate payment will be made for reinforced concrete pipe under this
Section. Include cost in unit price Work as specified in following Sections:
a. Section 02426 - Sewer Line in Tunnels.
b. Section 02531 - Gravity Sanitary Sewers.
c. Section 02631 - Storm Sewers.
2. Refer to Section 01270- Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures.
02611-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
Work in this section is included in total Stipulated Price.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 76 - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain,

and Sewer Pipe.
B. ASTM C 443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes,
C. ASTM C 497 - Standard Test Method for Concrete Pipe, Manhole Sections, or Tile.
D. ASTM C 506 - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert, Storm
Drain and Sewer Pipe
E. ASTM C 507 – Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culverts,

Storm Drains and Sewer Pipe
F. ASTM C 655 - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete D-load Culvert,

Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe.
G. ASTM C 877 - Standard Specification for External Sealing Bands for Concrete Pipe,
Manholes, and Precast Box Sections.
H. ASTM C 990 – Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes and
Precast Box Sections using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants.
I. ASTM C 1479 – Standard Practice for Installation of Precast Concrete Sewer, Storm
Drain, and Culvert Pipe Using Standard Installations.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit complete product data for pipe, fittings and gaskets for approval. Indicate
conformance to appropriate reference standards.
C. Submit manufacturer’s certificate that concrete pipes meet applicable standards.
D. For jacking pipe, submit drawings and data describing grouting port design and
closure procedures when required by Section 02431 - Tunnel Grout, including liner
repair, as applicable.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
02611-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Conform circular reinforced concrete pipe to requirements of ASTM C 76, Class III.
Conform to rubber gasket joints for sanitary sewers and storm sewers per ASTM
C443 and tongue and groove joints for roadside ditch culverts with joints per ASTM
C 990.
B. Conform reinforced concrete arch pipe to requirements of ASTM C 506 for Class A-
III. Joints shall conform to ASTM C 443 or tongue & groove joints shall conform to
ASTM C990 with external sealing bands conforming to ASTM C 877. For roadside
ditch culverts only, external sealing bands are not required.
C. Reinforced concrete elliptical pipe, either vertical or horizontal, shall conform to

requirements of ASTM C 507 for Class VE-III for vertical or Class HE-III for
horizontal. Use rubber gasket joints conforming to ASTM C 877. Rubber gasket
joints shall conform to ASTM C443. Tongue & groove joints shall conform to ASTM
C 990 with external sealing bands conforming to ASTM C 877. For roadside ditch
culverts only, external sealing bands are not required.
D. Conform reinforced concrete D-load pipe requirements of ASTM C 655.
2.02 GASKETS
A. When no contaminant is identified, furnish joints per Article 2.01
B. Use the following gasket materials for pipes to be installed in potentially

contaminated areas, especially where free product is found near elevation of proposed
sewer:

Other Contaminants As recommended by pipe manufacturer,
Engineer of the Record and approved by City
2.03 LINERS FOR SANITARY SEWER PIPE
A. Reinforced concrete pipe for sanitary sewers shall be PVC lined and conform to
Section 02427 - Plastic Liner for Large-Diameter Concrete Sewers and Structures.
B. Reinforced concrete pipes to be installed in potentially contaminated areas shall have

liners recommended by manufacturer as resistant to contaminants identified in Phase
II Environmental Site Assessment Report.
A. Representatives of City Engineer will inspect manufacturer's plant and casting

operations as deemed necessary.
02611-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Conform to requirements of following Sections, as applicable:
1. Section 02441 - Microtunneling
2. Section 02445 – Jack and Bore/Jack and Mine/Pilot Tube Guided Boring
Tunnels
3. Section 02448 - Pipe and Casing Augering for Sewers
5. Section 02631 - Storm Sewers.
B. Install reinforced concrete pipe in accordance with ASTM C 1479 and manufacturer's
recommendations.
END OF SECTION
02611-4
CITY OF HOUSTON PRECAST REINFORCED
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION CONCRETE BOX SEWERS
SECTION 02612
PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX SEWERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Precast reinforced concrete box for storm sewers.
1.02 RELATED SECIONS
C. Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities
D. Section 02631 – Storm Sewers
A. Unit Prices.
1. No payment will be made for precast reinforced concrete box sewer under this
Section. Include payment in unit price for Sections 02631 - Storm Sewers.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 1577 – Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Monolithic

Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers Designed According to
AASHTO LRFD.
B. ASTM C 990 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes and
Precast Box Sections Using Flexible Joint Sealants.
C. ASTM C 1677 – Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Box, Using Rubber
Gaskets.
D. ASTM C 1675 – Practice for Installation of Precast Reinforced Concrete Monolithic

Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains and Sewers.
E. ASTM C 1837 – Specification for Production of Dry Cast Concrete for

Manufacturing Pipe, Box and Precast Structures.
02612-1
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit shop drawings and data on box sections, fittings, gaskets, and appurtenances
for approval. Indicate conformance to reference standards.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX SEWERS
A. Conform to ASTM C 1577, as indicated on Drawings.
B. Pipe and boxes shall be machine-made or cast by process which will provide for
uniform placement of concrete in forms and compaction by mechanical devices to
produce dense, structurally sound concrete.
C. Box culverts may be supplied with a tongue and groove joint per ASTM C 990.
Rubber gaskets per ASTM C 1677 may be used if indicated on drawings.
2.02 CONCRETE
A. Conform to requirements of ASTM C 1837.
B. Use concrete mixed in central batch plant or other batching facility from which
quality and uniformity of concrete can be assured. Transit-mixed concrete is not
acceptable.
A. Representatives of City Engineer will inspect manufacturer's plant and casting

operations as deemed necessary.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 BEDDING
A. Bed box sections on foundation of firm and stable material accurately shaped to
conform to their bases. Install bedding as specified in Section 02317 - Excavation and
Backfill for Utilities. When required by Drawings, use special bedding material.
When single-cell box sections are placed in parallel for multi-cell installation, place
in conformance with details shown on Drawings.
3.02 PLACEMENT
A. Carefully lower box sections to bottom of trench and lay accurately in line and grade,
with spigot or tongue end downstream entering bell or groove end to full depth and in
such manner as not to drag foreign material into annular space.
02612-2
3.03 JOINTING
A. Join box sections together and match so that they will form continuous smooth and
uniform
3.04 BACKFILLING
A. After box has been properly jointed and bedded, commence backfilling.
B. Backfill in accordance with Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities.
END OF SECTION
02612-3
CITY OF HOUSTON BAR WRAPPED
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION STEEL CYLINDER PIPE
SECTION 02613
BAR WRAPPED STEEL CYLINDER PIPE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Furnishing and installing new bar wrapped steel cylinder pipe and fittings for buried
water lines for sizes 20 inches to 60 inches in diameter.
D. Section 02425 – Tunnel Excavation and Primary Liner
G. Section 02518 – Steel Pipe and Fittings for Large Diameter Water Lines
A. Unit Prices.
1. No separate payment will be made for bar wrapped steel cylinder pipe under
this Section. Include cost in price for water lines.
2. Maintain, on site, minimum of two 3-degree and two 5-degree grade angle
adapters. Adapters are considered “extra unit price.” When used during
construction, adapter will be paid at unit price.
1.04 REFERENCES
B. AREMA - Manual of Railway Engineering, Volume II, Chapter 15.
02613-1
C. ASTM A 615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet Carbon Steel
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
D. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
E. ASTM C 35 - Standard Specification for Inorganic Aggregates for Use in Gypsum

Plaster.
F. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
G. ASTM C 497 - Standard Test Methods for Concrete Pipe, Concrete Box Sections,
Manhole Sections, or Tile.
H. ASTM D 512 - Standard Test Methods for Chloride Ion in Water.
I. ASTM C 1107 (CRD C-621) - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-
Cement Grout (Non-shrink).
J. ASTM D 1293 - Standard Test Methods for pH of Water.
K. ASTM E 165 - Standard Practice for Liquid Penetrant Testing for General Industry.
L. ASTM E 340 - Standard Test Method for Macroetching Metals and Alloys.
M. ASTM E 709 - Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing.
N. ASTM E 1032 - Standard Test Methods for Radiographic Examination of

Weldments.
O. ANSI/AWS A3.0 - Standard Welding Terms and Definitions.
P. AWWA C 200 - Standard for Steel Water Pipe 6 in. and Larger.
Q. AWWA C 206 - Standard for Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe.
R. AWWA C 207 - Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 in.
through 144 in.
S. AWWA C 301 - Prestressed Concrete Pressure Pipe, Steel-Cylinder Type
T. AWWA C 303 - Standard for Concrete Pressure Pipe, Bar-Wrapped, Steel-Cylinder

Type.
U. AWWA C 304 - Standard for Design of Prestressed Concrete Cylinder Pipe.
V. AWWA M 9 - Concrete Pressure Pipe.
W. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.
X. SSPC SP 7 - Surface Preparation Specification No. 7 Brush Off Blast Cleaning.
02613-2
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit shop drawings and certification signed and sealed by Professional Engineer
registered in State of Texas showing following:
1. Manufacturer's pipe design calculations
document format (*PDF).
in accordance with requirements of this section.
C. Submit inspection procedures to be used by manufacturer and for quality control and
assurance for materials and welding. Submit standard repair procedures that describe
in detail shop and field work to be performed. Repair defects such as substandard
welds, excessive radial offsets (misalignment), pitting, gouges, cracks, etc.
D. Submit following within 45 days after manufacturing of pipe and fittings:
1. Steel:
a. Steel reports as required in AWWA C303, Section 5.2.5.
b. Results of other tests of steel reinforcement required in AWWA C303,

Section 5.2.
2. Test Results.
a. Hydrostatic testing, acid etching, magnetic particle and x-ray weld test
reports as required.
b. Compressive strength (7 and 28 day) test results for each type of

coating and lining mix design.
3. Submit pipe manufacturer's certification that Bar Wrapped Steel Cylinder

Pipe:
a. Cylinder assembly has been hydrostatically tested at factory.
02613-3
b. Mortar coatings and linings were applied or allowed to cure at

temperature above 32 degrees Fahrenheit.
E. Submit following for non-shrink grout for special applications:


specification.
F. Submit certification for welder and welding operator demonstrating their certification
in accordance with AWWA C 206. Indicate certified procedures and position each
welder is qualified to perform.
G. Calibrate within last 12 months for equipment such as scales, measuring devices, and
calibration tools used in manufacture of pipe. Each device used in manufacture of
pipe is required to have tag recording date of last calibration. Devices are subject to
inspection by Project Manager.
A. Manufacturer to have permanent quality control department and laboratory facility

capable of performing inspection and testing required. Inspection procedures and
manufacturing process are subject to inspection by Project Manager. Perform
manufacturer tests and inspections required by AWWA C 303 as modified by these
Specifications. Correct nonconforming conditions.
1. Cylinder and Joint Ring Assembly:

Specifications.
b. Perform physical testing of each heat of steel for conformance to

applicable ASTM standards.
c. Inspect physical dimensions and overall condition of joint rings and

cylinder/joint ring assembly to verify compliance with requirements of
AWWA C 303. Maximum allowable thickness variation of cylinder
shall not be less than determined thickness.
d. Test cylinder/joint ring weld for tensile strength. Test one specimen
for each 500 cylinder/joint ring assemblies in addition to those tests
required by AWWA C 301.
e. Reject pipe with dented steel cylinders.
02613-4
2. Bar Rod

Specifications.
b. Inspect rod spacing during placement on cylinder.
c. Test rod splices for each production run or minimum of once a week,
whichever is less, for conformance with minimum strength criteria.
3. Pipe Lining Coating:
a. Review mill certificates for each load of cement for conformance to

ASTM C 150.
b. Perform sieve analyses weekly for each source of coarse and fine
aggregate for conformance to ASTM C 33.
c. Inspect kiln recorder charts daily to confirm proper curing

environment.
d. Verify mortar thickness on each size of pipe to a tolerance of 1/16th of

an inch of required thickness.
e. Perform absorption tests in accordance with ASTM C 497, Method A,

on cured mortar samples taken from pipes.
f. Check mortar batch proportions, moisture content and slurry

application rate. Check coating thickness over wire on each pipe.
g. Check physical integrity of cured mortar coating. Check cured mortar

coating for soundness on every pipe in field in addition to
manufacturing plant.
h. Reject pipe with cracks in mortar coating exceeding 0.01 inches wide.
4. Protective Coatings: Check daily application rate and resulting dry film
thickness.
B. Gaskets:
1. Randomly test rubber cord for diameter, tensile strength, elongation,

compression set, hardness, and specific gravity after oven aging on one out of
100 gaskets.
2. Stretch test each gasket splice to twice its unstretched length and inspect for
defects.
C. Weld Testing
02613-5
1. Perform macroetching tests for complete penetration production welds on

normal production weld tests. Complete joint penetration welds are defined in
ANSI/AWS A3.0. Verify complete joint penetration by means of macroetch
of joint weld cross section. Macroetch technique in accordance with ASTM E
340.
2. Perform x-ray, ultrasonic, magnetic particle, or dye penetrant testing per

AWWA C200 of manual welds on special pipe and fittings.
3. Perform minimum of one set of weld test specimens in accordance with

ANSI/AWS A3.0 on each size, grade and wall thickness at minimum of every
3,000 feet of pipe manufactured; but perform no less than one test per project
by each welding machine and each operator.
D. Cast four standard test cylinders each day for each 50 cubic yards of concrete mortar
coating or portion thereof for each coating and lining mix design placed in day.
Perform compressive strength test at 28 days. No cylinder test result shall be less than
80 percent of specified strength. Reject pipe that does not meet minimum strength
requirements.
E. Make available copy of Physical and Chemical testing reports for steel cylinders and
F. Check physical dimensions of pipe and fittings: Physical dimensions to include at

least pipe lengths, pipe I.D., pipe O.D. and bend angles.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Furnish pipe by same manufacturer. Do not ship over salt water.
B. Provide bar wrapped steel cylinder pipe in conformance with AWWA C 303 and
AWWA M 9, except as modified herein. Produce pipe cylinder to conform to
AWWA C 303 except modify Section 4.5 to require that total cross-sectional area of
bell ring plus cross-sectional area of bar reinforcement over bell ring exceed
circumferential steel area in like length of barrel area by one-third.
C. Use of pipe from inventory is permitted only if specifications and certifications are
met. Provide testing records for such pipe.
D. Do not use bar wrapped steel cylinder pipe in aerial crossings, exposed or other
unburied areas.
E. Pipe Manufacturer.
1. Must have minimum of 5 years of manufacturer's pipe installations that have

been in successful and continuous service.
02613-6
2. Must maintain on site or in plant minimum of four 22.5 bends per 10,000
linear feet of water line. Any combination of bends may be substituted at
manufacturer's option (i.e. two 11.25 bends are equivalent to one 22.5 bend
and shall be counted as one fitting). Must be capable of delivering bends to
job site within 12 hours of notification. These fittings are in addition to any
fittings called out on Drawing and must be available at all times.
F. Pipe Design Conditions:
1. Working pressure: 150 psi.
2. Hydrostatic field test pressure: 150 psi.
3. Maximum pressure due to surge: 225 psi.
4. Minimum pressure due to surge: -10 psi.
5. Unit weight of soil: 120 pcf minimum, unless otherwise specified.
6. Minimum trench width: O.D. of pipe + 4 feet.
7. Pipe and Fittings: Designed to withstand most critical simultaneous

application of external loads including construction loads and internal
pressures.
8. Design: Design pipe and fittings to withstand most critical simultaneous

application of external loads and internal pressures. Base design on minimum
of AASHTO HL-93 loading, AREMA E-80 loads and depths of bury as
indicated on Drawings. Design pipes with Marston's earth loads for transition
width trench for all heights of cover.
a. Calculate moments and thrusts in wall based on earth load.
9. Increase longitudinal steel area (cylinder thickness) to prevent cylinder stress

from exceeding 40 percent of minimum yield point at rated working pressure
and 67 percent of minimum yield point at rated maximum surge pressure
where pipe and fittings are subjected to longitudinal stresses induced by
restrained joints or thrust blocks.
10. Groundwater Level: Design for most critical ground water level condition.
11. Modulus of elasticity (E) = 30,000,000 psi.
12. Design stress due to working pressure to be no greater than 50 percent of

minimum yield, and stress not to exceed 16,500 psi for mortar coated pipe.
13. Design stress due to maximum hydraulic surge pressure to be no greater than
75 percent of minimum yield, and stress not to exceed 24,750 psi for mortar
coated pipe.
02613-7
14. Modulus of soil reaction (E) < 1500 psi. If E > 1000 psi, do not use silty sand
(SM) for embedment.
15. Deflection lag factor (Dl) = 1.2.
17. Fully saturated soil conditions: hw = h = depth of cover above top of pipe.
18. Provide minimum inside clear diameter for tunnel liners or casing in
accordance with Section 02425 - Tunnel Excavation and Primary Liner.
19. Exclude structural benefits associated with primary liner in design of pipe in
tunnel installations.
a. Design pipe and joints to carry loads including overburden and lateral
earth pressures, subsurface soil and water loads, grouting, other
conditions of service, thrust of jacks, and stresses anticipated during
handling and construction loads during installation of pipe.
b. Do not use internal removable stiffeners for pipe in tunnel, unless

c. External welded stiffeners shall be permitted in design calculations for

pipe, provided wall thickness is minimum of 1/2 inch. Minimum
clearances specified between exterior pipe wall and tunnel liner
applies to distance between outside diameter of external welded
stiffener and tunnel liner.
20. Design pipe for transmitting potable water, unless otherwise shown on
Drawings. Tunnel and Augered Sections: Provide constant outside diameter
from bell to spigot end for pipe. Exclude structural benefits associated with
primary liner. Design pipe and pipe joints to carry loads including but not
limited to: overburden and lateral earth pressures, subsurface soil, grouting,
other conditions of service, thrust of jacks, and any stress anticipated during
handling and installation.
G. Coatings and Linings:
1. Provide Portland cement; ASTM C 150, Type I or II. Provide one type of
cement for entire project.
2. Water Absorption Test: ASTM C 497, Method A; perform on samples of

cured mortar coating taken from each working shift. Cure mortar coating
samples in same manner as pipe.
a. Test Value: Average minimum of 3 samples taken from same working

shift, no greater than 9 percent for average value, and 11 percent for
individual value.
02613-8
b. Test Frequency: Perform tests each working shift until conformance to

absorption requirements has been established by 10 consecutive
passing test results, at which time testing may be performed weekly.
Resume testing for each working shift if absorption test results fail
until conformance to absorption requirements is reestablished by 10
consecutive passing test results.
3. Apply one coat of primer to exposed steel parts of steel bell and spigot rings.
Prior to coating, blast clean in accordance with SSPC-SP7 (Brush Off Blast
Cleaning). Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
4. Coat and line access inlets, service outlets, test inlets and air release/vacuum
relief riser pipe with same coating and lining of water line pipe in accordance
with AWWA C 303, Section 4, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
5. Do not defer placing of coating of any portion of pipe length. Verify cement
mortar coating thickness on each size of pipe by nondestructive method before
removing pipe from coating machine.
6. Remove and replace disbonded lining or coating. Reject pipe requiring

patches larger than 100 square inches or 12 inches in greatest dimension.
Allow no more than one patch on either lining or coating of pipe. Provide
WELD-CRETE Probond Epoxy Bonding Agent ET-150, parts A and B;
Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod, or approved equal bonding agent for pipe patching.
H. Fittings and Specials:
1. Design fittings to same internal and external loads as straight pipe.
2. Manufacture in accordance with Section 02518 - Steel Pipe and Fittings for
Large Diameter Water Lines.
3. Provide fabricated bends or fittings with minimum radius of 2-1/2 times pipe
diameter.
4. Design test plugs to withstand forces generated by hydrostatic test and test
pressure from either side. Do not exceed 50% of minimum yield for design
stresses due to hydrostatic pressure. Assume opposite side of plug does not
contain water.
5. Provide no specials less than 4 feet in length unless indicated on Drawings or

6. Butt Straps for Closure Piece: Provide at locations indicated on Drawings or

authorized by Project Manager. Minimum 12-inch-wide split butt strap;
from material equal in chemical and physical properties to thinnest member
being joined. Permit no angular deflection at butt-strap joints.
02613-9
7. Provide minimum 6-inch welded outlet for inspecting each closure section,
unless access manway is within 40 feet of closure section.
8. Provide Densco petroleum based tape or approved equal for exposed portions
of nuts and bolts.
I. Joints:
1. AWWA C 303 rubber-gasketed or welded bell-and-spigot type except where

flanged joints are required for valves and fittings as shown on Drawings.
Refer to Section 02511 - Water Lines for details on joints and jointing.
2. Rubber-Gasketed Joints: Attach joint ring to steel cylinder with full-thickness

fillet welds, welded inside and out (double welded). Bond as shown on
Drawings to provide electrical continuity along pipeline.
3. Restrained Joints: Restrain joints by welding or harnessing joints.
a. Design Pressure: 1.5 times working pressure.
b. Harnessed Joints: AWWA M 9, clamp or snap ring type, except where

prohibited. Snap ring joints permitted up to 30-inch diameter.
c. Groundwater Level: Assumed to be equal to natural ground surface.
d. Provide restrained joint pipe with adequate cylinder thickness to

transmit full thrust generated by internal pressure across joints.
(1) Calculate distance of restrained joints based on resistance along

each leg of bend with thrust based on bend angle.
(2) Cylinder thickness not to be less than that defined in AWWA

C303, Table 2, and minimum nominal cylinder thickness.
(3) Allow cylinder thickness to reduce linearly from maximum

calculated thickness to minimum thickness required by design
over required length (as determined in Paragraph 2.01 J.3.d.1)
of restrained joints.
(4) Provide full circumferential welds at joints required to be

welded. Double weld joint rings in areas of thrust.
J. Use only fully circumferentially welded joints in areas considered potentially

petroleum contaminated, within tunnels and under foreign pipelines. Perform welding
in accordance with Section 02502 - Steel Pipe and Fittings and Section 02518 - Steel
Pipe and Fittings for Large Diameter Water Lines.
K. Pipe Flanges: AWWA C 207 for standard steel flanges of pressure class
corresponding to pipe class.
02613-10
L. Pipe lengths: Provide pipe sections in standard lengths with minimum length of 16
feet and maximum length of 25 feet, and as indicated on approved shop Drawings or
approved by Project Manager. Gasketed joints are allowed on standard lengths of
pipe. Non-standard pipe lengths must be approved by Project Manager and joints
must be welded as specified herein to achieve equal to or greater than standard pipe
length before gasketed joints can be used. Internally and externally mark pipe section
with durable marking to show location and pipe pressure.
M. Hydrostatic Test of Cylinder: In accordance with AWWA C 303, at point of

manufacture. Hold test for minimum 2 minutes for thorough inspection of cylinder.
Repair or reject cylinders revealing leaks or cracks.
N. Transport fittings with end caps. Remove end caps just prior to installation.
O. Transport fittings 36 inches in diameter and larger with stulls. Remove stulls after
completion of backfill.
P. Provide radius of curve as indicated on Drawings unless approved by Project

Manager. Make curves and bends by deflecting joints, by use of beveled joints, or by
combination of two methods, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Do not exceed
deflection angle recommended by pipe manufacturer. Provide beveled pipe sections
of standard length used in curved alignment, except when shorter sections are
required to limit radius of curvature. In such case, provide sections throughout curve
of substantially equal length.
Q. When manufacturing straight pipe sections, manual welding is allowed for following:
1. Tack welding of coils and plates during continuous pipe making process.
2. Rewelding and repairing structural defects in plate and automatic machine

welds.
3. Attaching new coil of steel to previous coil.
2.02 BAR ROD
A. Conform to requirements of ASTM A 615, AWWA C 303 and this specification.
B. Test foreign manufactured rod by local independent laboratory.
C. Rod manufacturer is responsible for performing mechanical tests required in ASTM

A 615.
D. Pipe manufacturer is responsible for requiring rod manufacturer to submit certified

results of chemical and mechanical tests, performed by rod manufacturer. Pipe
manufacturer is responsible for performing mechanical tests, and is required to attest
to such in affidavit of compliance.
E. Do not use rod with visible pitting.
02613-11
2.03 GROUT FOR JOINTS AND SPECIAL APPLICATION
A. Joint Grout:
1. Cement Grout Mixture: One part cement to two parts of fine, sharp clean
sand. Mix interior joint mortar with as little water as possible until very stiff
but workable. Mix exterior joint mortar with water until it has consistency of
thick cream.
2. Water: Potable water with total dissolved solids less than 1000 mg/l; ASTM D
512 chloride ions less than 100 mg/1 for slurry and mortar cure; ASTM D
1293 pH greater than 6.5. Use potable water with 250ppm limit on chlorides
and sulfates.
3. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II. Provide one type of cement for
entire project.
4. Sand:
a. Interior joints: ASTM C 35 fine graded plaster sand.
b. Exterior joints: ASTM C 33 natural sand with 100 percent passing No.
16 sieve.
5. Mix cement grout to specific gravity of 19 lb/gallon or greater as measured by

grout/slurry balance. Use balance manufactured grout/slurry balance
manufactured by Baroid or approved equal. Perform test in presence of and as
requested by Project Manager. Add additional cement grout or water to mixed
cement grout to bring mix to proper moisture content or specific gravity.
Discard cement grout mixed more than 20 minutes that is not at proper
moisture content or specific gravity.
B. Non-shrink Grout for Special Applications, Patches and Repairs.

control.
3. Contain non-metallic natural aggregate, be nonstaining and noncorrosive.
4. Meeting NSF 61 Standard suitable for use in contact with potable water
supply.
5. Exterior: Highly flowable to fill joint wrapper without leaving voids or

trapped air. Interior capable of being placed with plastic consistency.
02613-12
7. Contain no chlorides or additives which may contribute to corrosion of bar

wrapped steel cylinder pipe.
10. Mix, place, and cure in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

Upon 72 hours' notice, provide services of qualified representative of non-
shrink grout manufacturer to aid in use of product under job conditions.
11. Mix non-shrink grout to specific gravity of 17.7 lb/gallon or greater as

measured by grout/slurry balance. Use grout/slurry balance manufactured by
Baroid or approved equal. Perform test in presence of and as requested by
Project Manager. Add additional non-shrink grout to mixed non-shrink grout
to bring to proper moisture content or specific gravity. Discard grout mixed
more than 20 minutes that is not at proper moisture content or specific gravity.
12. Compressive strength: ASTM C 1107 2500 psi minimum 7-day unconfined;
5000 psi minimum 28-day unconfined.
No. 16 Carborundum stone. Rub joint mortar sufficiently to bring paste to surface, to
D. Joint Wrapper: Minimum width of 9 inches for 33-inch diameter and smaller;
minimum width of 12 inches for diameters greater than 33-inch hemmed at edge to
allow threading with minimum 5/8-inch wide steel strap. Provide minimum 6-inch
wide Ethafoam strip sized, positioned, and sewn such that two circumferential edges
of Ethafoam are 1-1/2-inches from outer edge of wrapper.
2.04 CATHODIC PROTECTION
A. Connect each joint of pipe with bonding straps or approved devices to maintain
continuity of current. Provide bonding straps free of foreign material.
B. Electrically isolate water line from other connections. Use insulating type joints or
non- metallic pipe unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
C. Provide flange adapter with insulating kit as required when connecting new piping to
existing piping.
2.05 INSPECTION AND SHIPPING
02613-13
A. Permit Project Manager to inspect pipes or witness pipe manufacturing. Inspection

shall not relieve manufacturer of responsibilities to provide products that comply with
applicable standards and these Specifications. Should Project Manager elect not to
inspect manufacturing, testing, or finished pipes, it in no way implies approval of
products or tests.
B. Manufacturer's Notification to Customer: Should Project Manager wish to see

specific pipes during manufacturing process, manufacturer shall provide Project
Manager with minimum of three (3) weeks advance notice of when and where
production of those pipes will take place. Repair damage to pipe or protective lining
per manufacture specifications before final acceptance.
C. Shipping: Where required, provide pipe and fittings with sufficient interior strutting
or cross bracing to prevent deflection under their own weight.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Conform to requirements of Section 02511 - Water Lines. Do not install pipe without
approved lay schedule.
B. Install pipe within six months of pipe being manufactured.
C. Manufacturer shall make available services of representative, throughout project

duration when deemed necessary by Project Manager, to advise aspects of installation
including but not limited to handling, storing, cleaning and inspecting, coatings and
linings repairs, and general construction methods affecting pipe.
D. Bedding and Backfilling
1. Conform to requirements of Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for

Utilities.
2. Take necessary precautions during bedding and backfilling operations to

prevent deformation or deflection of cylindrical shape of pipe by more than
allowable pipe deflection.
3. Do not move trench support system (trench safety system) once bedding
material is compacted.
4. Align pipe at proper grade prior to joint connection and do not shift after
jointing operation has been completed.
02613-14
5. Excavate outside specified trench section for bell holes, and for spaces
sufficient to permit removal of slings. Provide bell holes at proper locations
for unrestricted access to joint. Form bell holes large enough to facilitate joint
wrapping and to permit visual examination of process. Enlargement of bell
holes as required or directed by Project Manager. Subsequent backfilling
thereof shall not be considered as authorized additional excavation and
backfill. Backfill bell holes and spaces to satisfaction of Project Manager.
6. Remove blocking after placing sufficient backfill to hold pipe in position.
E. Follow non-shrink grout manufacturer's specifications for non-shrink grouting.
F. Store pipe at job-site with securely-fastened plastic end caps to maintain moist pipe
interior. Promptly replace damaged end caps to avoid shrinkage or cracking of
cement-mortar lining. Immediately replace damaged plastic end caps. Do not leave
uncapped for more than 4 hours.
G. Use adequate surveying methods, procedures and employ competent surveying

tolerances. Measure and record, in form approved by Project Manager, in-place
survey data for pipe laid each day and submit copy of data to Project Manager at end
of that day. Survey data to include unique pipe number, deflection angle at pipe joint
and whether beveled ends were used, invert elevation at pipe joint, deviation of joint
from project line, deviation of joint from project grade, inside pipe joint lap measured
at top, bottom, and at springline (each side).
H. Static Electricity:

3.02 DEFLECTION
A. Allowable deflection from specified diameter determined as follows:
Allowable Deflection = (D)2/4000, (D= Nominal inside pipe diameter in inches).
B. Deflection may be measured by Project Manager at location along pipe. Arithmetical

averages of deflection are not acceptable.
C. If deflection exceeds that specified, remove entire portion of deflected pipe section
and install new pipe as directed by Project Manager at no cost to City.
3.03 CLOSURES AND APPROVED PIPE MODIFICATIONS.
02613-15
A. No modifications of standard pipe for closures shall be permitted in field. No field

cutting of pipe or exposure of bar wire is permitted without written approval from
Project Manager.
B. Pipe manufacturer's representative and Project Manager to entirely witness closures

and approved pipe modification efforts.
C. Provide minimum lap of 4 inches between member being joined and edge of butt
strap. Weld on both interior and exterior, unless otherwise approved by Project
Manager.
D. Provide full circumferential welds on joints required to be welded. Employ

independent certified testing laboratory, approved by Project Manager, to perform
weld tests on field welds. Include cost of such testing in contract unit price for water
line. Use magnetic particle test method for lap welds or X-ray methods for butt welds,
for 100 percent of joint welds. Maintain records of tests. If defective weld is revealed,
repair defective weld, and retest. Use wire and flux from same manufacturer
throughout entire project.
E. Fill wrapper in field and allowing excess grout water to seep out. Refill wrapper as
necessary. When joint mortar level has stabilized and begun to mechanically stiffen,
lap Ethafoam wrapper over top of joint, and secure in place.
F. Stretch test each gasket splice to twice its unstretched length and inspect for defects.
3.04 VISIBLE CRACKS
A. No visible cracks longer than 6 inches, measured to be within 15 degrees of line

parallel to pipe longitudinal axis, are permitted except:
1. In surface laitance of centrifugally cast concrete,
2. In sections of pipe with steel reinforcing collars or wrappers, or
3. Within 12 inches of pipe ends.
B. Repair interior lining cracks that exceed 1/16-inch (0.0625 inches) wide.
C. Reject pipe with exterior coating cracks that exceed 0.01 inches wide.
D. Immediately remove pipe from site if pipe has cracks exceeding limitations and
cracks are not repairable.
3.05 FIELD REPAIR PROCEDURES FOR COATING/LINING
02613-16
in concrete surfaces with non-shrink grout conforming to section 2.03 B. Use only
manual or small (low pressure) air chisels to chip away mortar coating or lining. Cut
out unsatisfactory material and replace with non-shrink grout, securely bonded to
existing coating or lining. Finish junctures between patches and existing concrete as
inconspicuous as possible. Strike off non-shrink grout flush with surrounding surface
after patch has stiffened sufficiently to allow for greatest portion of shrinkage. Finish
surface in accordance with lining requirements.
B. Pipe with defective coating areas greater than 6 inches in diameter cannot be used.
Immediately remove pipe from project.
C. Reject pipe if steel cylinder is dented while making field repair. Immediately remove
pipe from project.
END OF SECTION
02613-17
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION LARGE DIAMETER LINE STOPS
SECTION 02614
LARGE DIAMETER LINE STOPS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Large Diameter Line Stops for isolating existing water lines ranging from 24-inch to
96-inch in diameter.
D. Section 02525 – Tapping Sleeves and Valves
A. Large Diameter Line Stop - Payment is on unit price basis for each Line Stop
installed in place for each diameter. Payment includes:
1. Procurement of materials, labor, and equipment required to install Line Stop

Sleeve for Line Stop, including all excavation and concrete foundation
required for the installation of a Line Stop.
2. Installation of secondary sleeves and taps for additional outlets required for
the tapping and line stopping process.
3. Labor, equipment and material to install Line Stop, remove the Line Stop and
complete closure after removal of Line Stop. Include adequate duration to
complete necessary work requiring line stop.
B. Payment for reinsertion of existing line stop will be on a unit price basis. Payment
includes materials, labor and equipment to reinstall Line Stop, remove Line Stop and
complete closure of Line Stop, including all excavation and backfill.
C. Refer to Section 01270 - Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures.
D. Stipulated Price (Lump Sum): If Contract is Stipulated Price Contract, payment for
1.04 REFERENCES
02614-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. ASTM A 105 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping
Applications.
C. ASTM A 181 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings, for General-
Purpose Piping.
D. ASTM A 283 - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength
Carbon Steel Plates.
E. AWWA C 111 - American National Standard for Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile-
Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water.
F. ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. Large Diameter Line Stop – Plugging mechanism used for isolating sections of
existing water line temporarily.
1. Pivot Head – To be used on a size-on-size tap. Plug head is turned once inside
existing pipe.
2. Folding Head – To be used for a reduced size tap. Plug head is unfolded
within existing pipe after being inserted.
B. Plugged – Adequate flow stoppage to permit the completion of required work.
C. Completion Plug – After Line Stop is removed completion plug seals outlet and a
blind flange is installed.
D. Line Stop Sleeve – Fitting that goes around existing pipe and to be used to hot tap
existing pipe. Line Stop Sleeve to be left in place after removal of Line Stop.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit qualifications and certificate from manufacturer certifying operators are

qualified to operate manufacturer’s tapping and Line Stop equipment.
C. Submit qualifications verifying recent successful completion of line stopping

operations on large diameter water lines, including diameters and pipe materials
required to complete work. Include list of references.
D. Submit shop drawings for approval prior to start of fabrication. Identify procedures
required during and/or after tapping procedure for the specified pipe material being
tapped.
02614-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
E. Submit detailed work plan including flow requirements for Line Stop installation and
removal. Provide contingency plan for unsuccessful line stop operation and
completion, including typical causes and proposed solutions.
F. Submit foundation design for support of Line Stop, signed and sealed by a
Professional Engineer registered in State of Texas.
G. Submit requirements for flow and pressure in line during tapping, Line Stop
installation, line stopping, and Line Stop removal stages of the work. Include
anticipated durations of each step.
H. Provide survey coordinates of Line Stop and show on record drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Selection of Line Stop Sleeve and Line Stop must take into consideration pipe
material and existing conditions for project.
2. Conduct welding in accordance with applicable codes and standards. Stress

relieve all welds.
3. Clearly mark Line Stop Sleeve and attachments to permit proper alignment in
field and to ensure ends are properly matched when installed around pipe.
B. Line Stop Sleeve:
1. Provide as a minimum sleeve and attachments fabricated in accordance with

ASTM A36 or ASTM A283 standards. Provide sleeve which conforms to and
adequately reinforces existing pipe to prevent distortion or failure of pipe.
Line Stop Sleeve to have fusion bonded epoxy or approved equal.
2. Sleeve and attachments used in hot tapping procedure are to be in compliance

with maximum working pressure of system as specified and/or shown on
Drawings.
3. Provide flanges manufactured in accordance with ASTM A-181, ASTM

A-105 grade steel, ASME B16.5 in sizes up to 24-inches and MSS-SP 44 in
sizes 26-inches and larger.
4. Provide external bolting, studs and nuts consisting of corrosion resistant, high
strength, low alloy (AWWA C 111). Denso or approved equal petroleum
based tape coating. As an option, stainless steel 18-8 type 304 bolts, studs and
nuts may be used.
02614-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Pivot Head Line Stop:
1. Pivot Head Line Stop is allowed on steel pipe only.
2. Plugging machine provided by a size-on-size tapping fitting for 36-inch

diameter and below. Tapping fittings to be in accordance with Section 02525
– Tapping Sleeves and Valves. Pivot head to include a nitrile or Buna-N O-
ring for plugging.
3. Design Line Stop system to withstand a minimum of 150 psi.
D. Folding Head Line Stop:
1. Plugging machine provided by a reduced size of tapping fitting for 42-inch

diameter and larger, in accordance with Section 02525 – Tapping Sleeves and
Valves, for steel, PCCP and bar-wrapped pipe. Folding head to include a
nitrile or Buna-N O-ring for plugging.
2. Design Line Stop system to withstand a minimum of 150 psi.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Conduct pipe excavation in accordance with Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill
for Utilities.
B. Plan Line Stop procedure to minimize impact to the public. Notify Project Manager at
least 48 hours in advance of line stopping procedure, including excavation.
C. Do not operate valves. City of Houston Drinking Water Operations (DWO) will
handle, at no cost to Contractor/subcontractors, operations involving opening and
closing valves. Provide at a minimum 2 weeks’ notice for valve operations. Indicate
the required flow needed for proper Line Stop insertion.
D. Conduct Line Stop operations in presence of Project Manager. Continue line stopping
work without interruption until Line Stop operation is complete and pipe is plugged.
E. Pipe Preparation - Follow procedures below, unless otherwise approved by Project

Manager:
1. Thoroughly clean pipe down to factory supplied outside diameter. Carefully

inspect pipe, especially at point where tap will take place. Confirm roundness
of existing pipe. Do not tap within 4 feet of an existing joint.
2. For a Folding Head Line Stop the diameter of tap should be no greater than
75% of pipe diameter.
02614-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
3. Cement mortar coating may be carefully removed within the limits of tapping
assembly prior to installing Line Stop Sleeve.
F. Line Stop Sleeve Installation - Follow procedures below, unless otherwise approved
by Project Manager:
1. Place top half of sleeve with flanged outlet at the 12 o’clock position on pipe.
2. Install sleeve and attachments in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendation. Torque bolts in accordance with the manufacturer. Any
misalignment in sleeve installation will require removal of sleeve from pipe.
3. Pour concrete foundation around Line Stop Sleeve. Foundation dimensions

and materials to be designed by contractor.
G. If existing pipe has concrete mortar coating remove the outer concrete core within
opening of Line Stop Sleeve. For PCCP, carefully cut and remove the prestressed
wires within the limits of Line Stop Sleeve once concrete foundation is in place.
Record type of coating and measured outside diameter of existing pipe on plan sheet
of record drawings where line stop is shown. Install gland with O-ring and tighten
bolts to provide compression seal between O-ring and steel cylinder.
H. Pressure Testing: After sleeve is attached and before line tapping procedure begins,
pressure test sleeve in accordance with Section 02525 - Tapping Sleeves and Valves.
I. Tap through cylinder and inner mortar lining and retrieve pipe coupon. Tap
Procedure: Perform tap in accordance with Section 02525 - Tapping Sleeves and
Valves.
J. Remove tapping assembly and mount Line Stop assembly.
K. If Line Stop is unsuccessful in adequately reducing existing water flow for purposes
of successfully completing proposed work, mechanically clean interior of pipe with
line stop head as approved by Project Manager. Do not damage pipe’s interior lining
during mechanical cleaning.
L. Anticipate water leakage from Line Stop and include cost of water removal in unit
price bid for Large Diameter Line Stop work. Coordinate with Project Manager to
reduce pressure, if needed.
M. After connection to pipe or associated work requiring installation of an isolation valve

is complete, remove Line Stop equipment from pipe and seal Line Stop Sleeve with
Completion Plug and blind flange.
N. Apply external coating to sleeve, flange and water main in accordance with
applicable specification for the host pipe material. Unless otherwise directed by
Project Manager, provide similar coating to existing pipe’s coating.
02614-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
END OF SECTION
02614-6
CITY OF HOUSTON INSERTION VALVES
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION AND LINE STOPS
SECTION 02615
INSERTION VALVES AND LINE STOPS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Insertion Valves for isolating existing water lines 12-inches in diameter and smaller.
B. Line Stops for isolating existing water lines 20-inches in diameter and smaller.
D. Section 02525 – Tapping Sleeves and Valves
A. Insertion Valve – Payment is on unit price basis for each insertion valve installed in
place for each diameter. Payment includes labor, material, excavation, and equipment
to install insertion valve, foundation, and Valve Box.
B. Line Stop – Payment is on unit price basis for each line stop installed in place for
each diameter. Payment includes:
1. Labor, materials, excavation, and equipment required to install Line Stop

Sleeve for line stop and foundation.
2. Labor, equipment, and material to install line stop, remove line stop and
complete closure. Include adequate duration to complete necessary work
requiring line stop.
C. Line Stop reinsertion on existing sleeve will be on a unit price basis for each
diameter. Payment includes labor, materials, excavation, and equipment to reinsert
line stop into existing sleeve, remove line stop and complete closure.
D. If temporary bypass is required for the project and approved by Project Manager,
payment will be on a lump sum basis.
E. Refer to Section 01270 – Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures.
F. Stipulated Price (Lump Sum): If Contract is Stipulated Price Contract, payment for
02615-1
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 36 – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
B. ASTM A 105 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping
Applications.
C. ASTM A 181 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings, for General-
Purpose Piping.
D. ASTM A 283 - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength
Carbon Steel Plates.
E. AWWA C 111 - American National Standard for Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile-
Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water.
F. AWWA C 550 - Standard for Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and
Hydrants.
G. ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. Insertion Valve – Permanent resilient seat wedge valve installed while pipe is under
pressure. Engineered reinforced composite polymer valve cartridge stops flow in
pipe. After insertion is completed, valve is permanently installed and can be operated
to open and close.
B. Line Stop – Temporary plugging of a pressurized pipe without disrupting pressure or

service upstream of the stop. After line stop is no longer needed, assembly is
removed and completion plug is installed.
C. Plugged – Adequate flow stoppage to permit the completion of required work.
D. Completion Plug – After Line Stop is removed completion plug seals outlet and a
blind flange is installed.
E. Line Stop Sleeve– Fitting that goes around existing pipe and to be used to hot tap
existing pipe. Line Stop Sleeve to be left in place after removal of line stop.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit manufacturer’s product data for the proposed items for approval; as well as
the sequence of work to have the item installed.
C. Submit qualifications and certificate from manufacturer certifying operators are

qualified to operate manufacturer’s tapping and line stop or insertion valve
equipment.
02615-2
D. Submit requirements for flow and pressure in line during tapping, line stopping or
valve insertion, and Line Stop removal stages of the work, if applicable. Include
anticipated durations of each step.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Insertion Valve:
1. Stainless Steel Body: Provide as a minimum Type 304 stainless steel saddle,
bolts/nuts/washers, and body mount with reinforced composite polymer with
EPDM cartridge seal.
2. Ductile Iron Body: A ductile iron body with fusion-bonded epoxy coating
with ductile iron wedge fully encapsulated with EPDM rubber.
3. Refer to the City of Houston Approved Products List.
B. Line Stop:
1. Pivot Head Line Stop:
a. Plugging machine provided by a size-on-size tapping fitting for pipe.

Tapping fitting to be in accordance with Section 02525 – Tapping
Sleeves and Valves. Pivot head to include a nitrile or Buna-N O-ring
for plugging.
b. Refer to the City of Houston Approved Products List.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Conduct pipe excavation in accordance with Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill
for Utilities.
B. Plan Line Stop or Insertion Valve procedure to minimize impact to local residents and
businesses. Notify Project Manager at least 48 hours in advance of beginning work.
C. Do not operate existing valves. Contact City of Houston personnel and provide at a
minimum 2 weeks’ notice for valve operations.
D. Pipe Preparation. Follow procedures below, unless otherwise approved by Project

Manager:
02615-3
1. Thoroughly clean pipe down to factory supplied outside diameter. Carefully

inspect pipe, especially at point where tap will take place. Do not tap within 4
feet of an existing joint.
E. Line Stop Sleeve Installation. Follow procedures below, unless otherwise approved
by Project Manager:
1. Place top half of sleeve with flanged outlet at the 12 o’clock position on pipe,
or where shown on the Drawings.
2. Install sleeve and attachments in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendation. Torque bolts in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations. Any misalignment in saddle installation will require
removal of sleeve from pipe.
3. Place concrete blocking underneath Line Stop Sleeve. Foundation dimensions

and materials to be designed by contractor.
F. Pressure Testing: After sleeve is attached and before line tapping procedure begins,
pressure test sleeve in accordance with Section 02525 - Tapping Sleeves and Valves.
G. Tap through pipe and retrieve pipe coupon. Tap Procedure: Perform tap in
accordance with Section 02525 - Tapping Sleeves and Valves.
H. Line Stops:
1. Remove tapping assembly and mount Line Stop assembly.
2. After connection to pipe or associated work is complete, remove the Line Stop
equipment from pipe and seal Line Stop Sleeve with Completion Plug and
blind flange.
I. Insertion Valves:
1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
END OF SECTION
02615-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION GEOTEXTILE
SECTION 02621
GEOTEXTILE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Geotextile, also called filter fabric, in applications including pipe embedment wrap,
around exterior of tunnel liner, around foundations of pipeline structures, and slope
stabilization.
D. Section 02426 – Sewer Line in Tunnels
E. Section 02517 – Water Line in Tunnels
A. Unit Prices.
1. No separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section.
Include cost of Work in unit prices for Work requiring geotextile.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. AASHTO M 288 - Standard Specification for Geotextile Specification for Highway

Applications.
B. ASTM D 3786 - Standard Test Method for Bursting Strength of Textile Fabrics—
Diaphragm Bursting Strength Tester Method
C. ASTM D 4491 - Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by

Permittivity.
D. ASTM D 4533 - Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of

Geotextiles.
02621-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
E. ASTM D 4632 - Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of
Geotextiles.
F. ASTM D 4751 - Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of
Geotextiles.
G. ASTM D 4833 - Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of

Geomembranes and Related Products.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit standard manufacturer's catalog sheets and other pertinent information, for
approval, prior to installation.
C. Submit installation methods, as part of Work plan for tunneling or for excavation and
backfill for utilities. Obtain approval from Project Manager for filter fabric material
and proposed installation method prior to use of filter fabric.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GEOTEXTILE
A. Provide geotextile (filter fabric) designed for use in geotechnical applications. Filter
fabric shall provide permeable layer or media while retaining soil matrix.
B. Use fabric which meets physical requirements for Class A subsurface drainage
installation conditions as defined in AASHTO M 288 and as specified in Paragraph
2.02, Properties.
2.02 PROPERTIES
A. Material: Nonwoven, nonbiodegradable, fabric consisting of continuous chain

polymer filaments or yarns, at least 85 percent by weight polyolefins, polyesters or
polyamide, formed into dimensionally stable network.
B. Chemical Resistance: Inert to commonly encountered chemicals and hydrocarbons

over pH range of 3 to 12.
C. Physical Resistance: Resistant to mildew and rot, ultraviolet light exposure, insects
and rodents.
D. Minimum Test Values:
02621-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
Property Value (Min.) Test Method

Grab Strength 180 lbs. ASTM D 4632
Trapezoidal Tear Strength 50 lbs. ASTM D 4533
Puncture Strength 80 lbs. ASTM D 4833
Mullen Burst Strength 290 psi. ASTM D 3786
Apparent Opening Size(1) 0.25 mm ASTM D 4751
Permittivity (sec-1) 0.2 ASTM D 4491
(1) Maximum average roll value.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 LINE WORK
A. Conform use of geotextile to backfill for utilities to Section 02317 - Excavation and
3.02 TUNNEL WORK
A. Use geotextile outside of tunnel primary liner to prevent migration of soil fines into
excavated tunnel resulting in voids or settlement. Select geotextile, subject to
minimum requirements of Paragraph 2.02, meeting tunnel liner design requirements
and installation conditions.
1. Sewers: Conform to Section 02426 - Sewer Line in Tunnels.
2. Waterlines: Conform to Section 02517 - Waterline in Tunnels.
END OF SECTION
02621-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION STORM SEWERS
SECTION 02631
STORM SEWERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. New storm sewers and appurtenances, modifications to existing storm sewer system
and installation of roadside ditch culverts.
C. Section 01555 – Traffic Control and Regulation
E. Section 02081 – Cast-In-Place Concrete Manholes
F. Section 02082 – Precast Concrete Manholes
G. Section 02086 – Adjusting Manholes, Inlets, and Valve Boxes to Grade
H. Section 02090 - Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers

Debris
M. Section 02322 – Flowable Fill
N. Section 02441 – Microtunneling
O. Section 02445 – Jack and Bore/Jack and Mine/Pilot Tube Guided Boring Tunnels
P. Section 02448 – Pipe and Casing Augering for Sewers
Q. Section 02505 – High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Solid and Profile Wall Pipe
R. Section 02506 – Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe
02631-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
S. Section 02510 – Polypropylene (PP) Corrugated Wall Pipe
T. Section 02531 – Gravity Sanitary Sewers
U. Section 02533 – Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers
V. Section 02555 – Manhole Rehabilitation
W. Section 02611 – Reinforced Concrete Pipe
X. Section 02612 – Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sewers
Y. Section 02632 – Cast-In-Pace Inlets, Headwalls, and Wingwalls
Z. Section 02633 – Precast Concrete Inlets, Headwalls, and Wingwalls
AA. Section 02642 – Corrugated Metal Pipe
BB. Section 02911 – Topsoil
CC. Section 02921 – Hydro Mulch Seeding
DD. Section 02922 – Sodding
EE. Section 02951 – Pavement Repair and Restoration
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for storm sewers, including elliptical or box storm sewer, installed
by open-cut, augered with or without casing, or tunneling is on linear foot
basis. Measurement for storm sewers and roadside ditch culverts will be taken
along center line of pipe from center line to center line of manholes or from
end to end of culverts. Measurement for storm sewer will be taken along
center line of storm sewer from inside wall of storm sewer junction box when
installed in conjunction with storm sewer junction box. Payment will be made
for each linear foot installed complete in place, including connections to
existing manholes and inlets.
2. Payment for storm sewer leads, including elliptical leads, is on a linear foot
basis.
3. Payment for corrugated metal pipe storm sewer outfall, including timber
bents, is on a linear foot basis.
02631-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Long Run Culvert: A culvert which is 40 feet or more in length.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit manufacturer's literature for product specifications and installation

instructions.
C. Submit proposed methods, equipment, materials, and sequence of operations for

sewer construction. Plan operations to minimize disruption of utilities to occupied
D. For flexible pipe products, submit detailed calculations per AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Design Specifications. Designs are required for each pipe location and are to be
signed and sealed by a licensed engineer.
A. The Condition for acceptance shall be watertight storm sewer that is watertight both
in pipe-to-pipe joints and in pipe-to-manhole connections.
B. Provide manufacturer's certification to Specifications.
1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Handle pipe, fittings, and accessories carefully with approved handling devices. Do
not drop or roll pipe off trucks or trailers. Do not use Materials cracked, gouged,
chipped, dented, or otherwise damaged shall not be use materials for installation.
C. Store pipe and fittings on heavy timbers or platforms to avoid contact with ground.
D. Unload pipe, fittings, and appurtenances as close as practical to location of

installation to avoid unnecessary handling.
E. Keep interiors of pipe and fittings free of dirt and foreign matter.
F. Store Thermoplastic (PVC, HDPE, PP) pipe out of direct sunlight.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE
A. Provide piping materials for storm sewers shall be of sizes and types specified unless
02631-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. In diameters where material alternatives are available, provide pipe from single
manufacturer for each pipe diameter, unless otherwise approved by Project Manager
or otherwise shown on Drawings.
C. Existing pipe that has been removed during construction cannot be reused.
2.02 PIPE MATERIAL SCHEDULE
A. Storm Sewer Pipe: Use pipe materials that conform to requirements specified in one
or more of the following Sections as shown on the Drawings.
1. Section 02506 - Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe. Not allowed in the following

applications:
a. Potentially Petroleum Contaminated Areas (PPCA).
b. Augering/ jacking.
Pipe and Section 02510 – Polypropylene (PP) Corrugated Wall Pipe. For use
only where Storm Sewers are associated with Local Streets, where Local
Street is defined by City of Houston Code of Ordinances 42-122.
4. Section 02612 - Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sewers.
5. Section 02642 - Corrugated Metal Pipe use only where Corrugated Metal Pipe
is shown on Drawings.
B. Driveway Culvert Pipe for Streets with Open Ditches: Use pipe materials conforming
to requirements specified in one or more of the following Sections as shown on the
Drawings.
Pipe and Section 02510 – Polypropylene (PP) Corrugated Wall Pipe. Use for
Residential Culverts only. Use Concrete Pipe for long run culverts.
3. Section 02612 - Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sewers.
C. Provide pipe meeting minimum class, dimension ratio, or other criteria indicated.
D. Pipe materials other than those listed above shall not be used for storm sewers.
2.03 BEDDING, BACKFILL, AND TOPSOIL MATERIAL
02631-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Bedding and Backfill Material: Conform to requirements of Sections 02317 -

Excavation and Backfill for Utilities, Section 02320 - Utility Backfill Materials, and
Section 2321 - Cement Stabilized Sand, and Section 02322 - Flowable Fill.
B. Topsoil: Conform to requirements of Section 02911 - Topsoil.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Prepare traffic control plans and set up street detours and barricades in preparation for
excavation when construction will affect traffic. Conform to requirements of Section
B. Provide barricades, flashing warning lights, and signs for excavations. Conform to
requirements of Section 01555 - Traffic Control and Regulation. Maintain barricades
and warning lights for streets and intersections while Work is in progress or where
traffic is affected by Work.
C. Immediately notify agency or company owning utility lines which are damaged,
broken, or disturbed. Obtain approval from Project Manager and agency for repairs or
relocations, either temporary or permanent.
D. Remove old pavements and structures, including sidewalks and driveways in

E. Install and operate dewatering and surface water control measures in accordance with
3.02 EXCAVATION
A. Earthwork. Conform to requirements of Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for

Utilities. Use bedding as indicated on Drawings.
B. Line and Grade. Establish required uniform line and grade trench from benchmarks
identified by Project Manager. Maintain this control for minimum of 100 feet behind
and ahead of pipe-laying operation. Use laser beam equipment to establish and
maintain proper line and grade of Work. Or use appropriately sized grade boards
which are substantially supported.
C. Trench Excavation. Excavate pipe trenches to level as indicated on Standard Details.

Backfill excavation with specified bedding material to level of lower one-third of pipe
barrel. Tamp and compact backfill to provide bedding at indicated grade. Form
bedding foundation to minimum depth of one-eighth of pipe diameter, but not less
than 12-inches.
3.03 PIPE INSTALLATION
02631-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Install in accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations and as specified in

this section.
B. Install pipe only after excavation is completed, bottom of trench is shaped, bedding
material is installed, and trench has been approved by Project Manager.
C. Install pipe to line and grade indicated on Drawings. Place pipe so that it has
continuous bearing of barrel on bedding material with no voids, and is laid in trench
so interior surfaces of pipe follows grades and alignments indicated.
D. Install pipe with bells of pipe facing upstream of anticipated flow.
E. Form concentric joint with each section of adjoining pipe to prevent offsets.
F. Place and drive home newly laid sections with a sling or come-a-long winches to
eliminate damage to sections. Unless otherwise approved by Project Manager,
provide end protection to prevent damage while using back hoes or similar powered
equipment to drive home newly laid sections.
G. Keep interior of pipe clean as installation progresses.
H. Keep excavations free of water during construction and until final inspection.
I. When work is not in progress, cover exposed ends of pipes with pipe plug specifically
designed to prevent foreign material from entering pipe.
J. For Flexible Pipe Products:
1. Provide a minimum cover as per City Standard detail from top of pavement to
top of pipe, but no less than 2 feet.
2. Accomplish transitions to different material of pipe in a manhole or inlet box.

No adapter, coupling for dissimilar pipe, or saddle connections allowed.
3. Provide pipe sections in standard lengths with minimum length of 13 feet.

Pipe may be field modified to shorten length no less than 4 feet, unless
otherwise approved by Project Manager. Field modify pipe per manufacturer's
recommendations.
4. No beveling at joint allowed. Cut to be perpendicular to longitudinal axis.
5. Provide gasketed bell and spigot joints installed per manufacturer's

recommendations. Gasketed pipe joints; clean and free of debris, show no
leakage after installation.
3.04 PIPE INSTALLATION OTHER THAN OPEN CUT OR TUNNELING
02631-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Conform to requirements of Section 02448 - Pipe and Casing Augering for Sewers
where required.
B. Conform to requirements of Section 02441 - Microtunneling where required.
C. Conform to requirements of Section 02445 – Jack and Bore/Jack and Mine/Pilot Tube
Guided Boring Tunnels where required.
D. Not allowed for plastic sewer pipe.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF APPURTENANCES
A. Construct manholes to conform to requirements of Sections 02081 - Cast-in-place

Concrete Manholes and Section 02082 - Precast Concrete Manholes. Install frames,
grate rings, and covers to conform to requirements of Section 02090 - Frames, Grates,
Rings, and Covers.
B. Install PVC pipe culverts with approved end treatments. Approved end treatments
include concrete headwalls, wingwalls and collars.
C. Install HDPE and PP pipe culverts with approved end treatments. Approved end
treatments include concrete headwalls, wingwalls and collars.
D. Install inlets, headwalls, and wingwalls to conform to requirements of Section 02632

- Cast-in-place Inlets, Headwalls, and Wingwalls and Section 02633 - Precast
Concrete Inlets, Headwalls, and Wingwalls.
E. Rehabilitate existing manholes to conform to requirements of Section 02555 –

Manhole Rehabilitation. Adjust manhole covers and inlets to grade conforming to
requirements of Section 02086 - Adjusting Manholes, Inlets, and Valve Boxes to
Grade.
F. Dimension for Type C and Type E manholes shall be as shown on Drawings.
3.06 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Perform post installation television inspection in accordance with Section 02531 –

Gravity Sanitary Sewers. Hand held cameras may be used in storm sewers in lieu of
requirements of Paragraph 3.09 of Section 02531 – Gravity Sanitary Sewers. Clearly
stencil distance markings on each joint of pipe to indicate distance from starting
manhole when using hand held cameras.
B. Mandrel Testing: Use a mandrel to test flexible pipe for deflection. Refer to Section
02533 – Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers for the mandrel and test
requirements.
3.07 BACKFILL AND SITE CLEANUP
A. Backfill trench after pipe installation is inspected and approved by Project Manager.
02631-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Backfill and compact soil in accordance with Section 02317 - Excavation and
C. Repair and replace removed or damaged pavement and sidewalks as specified in

D. In unpaved areas, grade surface as uniform slope to natural grade as indicated on

Drawings. Provide minimum of 4 inches of topsoil and seed according to
requirements of Section 02921 Hydro Mulch Seeding, or Section 02922 - Sodding, as
required.
END OF SECTION
02631-8
CITY OF HOUSTON CAST-IN-PLACE INLETS,
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION HEADWALLS, AND WINGWALLS
SECTION 02632
CAST-IN-PLACE INLETS, HEADWALLS AND WINGWALLS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Cast-in-place inlets for storm or sanitary sewers, including cast iron frame and plate
or grate.
B. Cast-in-place headwalls including wingwalls for storm sewers.
C. Cast-in-place junction box with lid or grate top.
F. Section 04061 – Mortar
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for cast-in-place inlets is on unit price basis for each inlet installed.
2. Payment for cast-in-place headwalls including wingwalls is on unit price basis

for each headwall including wingwall installed.
3. Payment for cast-in-place junction box with lid or grate top is on unit price
basis for each junction box installed.
4. Payment for inlets and for culvert headwalls including wingwalls and junction
boxes includes connection of lines and furnishing and installing frames,
grates, rings, and covers.
02632-1
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit shop drawings for approval of design and construction details for
cast-in-place units which differ from units shown on Drawings.
C. Submit manufacturers' data and details for frames, grates, rings, and covers.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Concrete: Class A concrete with minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi

conforming to requirements of Section 03315 - Concrete for Utility Construction,
unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
B. Reinforcing Steel: Conform to requirements of Section 03315 - Concrete for Utility

Construction.
C. Mortar and Hydraulic Cement - Conform to requirements of Section 04061 - Mortar.
D. Miscellaneous metals: Cast-iron frames, grates, rings, and covers conforming to

requirements of Section 02090 - Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
B. Verify compacted subgrade will support loads imposed by inlets.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Construct units complete in place to dimensions, lines and grades as shown on

Drawings.
B. Excavate in accordance with requirements of Section 02317 - Excavation and

C. Construct box section of inlet of Class A concrete.
D. Forms required for both outside and inside faces of concrete inlet walls, however,
when nature of material excavated for inlet can be hand trimmed to smooth vertical
face, outside forms may be omitted with approval of Project Manager.
02632-2
E. Place reinforcing steel to conform to details shown on Drawings. Provide positive

means for holding steel cages in place during concrete placement. Welding of
reinforcing steel is not permitted unless noted on Drawings. Maximum variation in
reinforcement position is plus or minus 10 percent of wall thickness or plus or minus
1/2 inch, whichever is less. Regardless of variation, maintain minimum cover of
concrete over reinforcement as shown on Drawings.
F. Chamfer exposed edges unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
3.03 FINISHES
A. Cut off inlet leads neatly at inside face of inlet wall. Point up with mortar.
B. When box section of inlet complete, shape floor of inlet with mortar to conform to
detailed Drawings.
C. Finish concrete surfaces in accordance with requirements of Section 03315 - Concrete

for Utility Construction.
A. Verify that inlets are free of leaks. Repair leaks in approved manner.
3.05 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect inlet leads to inlets.
B. Seal leads inside and outside with hydraulic cement.
3.06 BACKFILL
A. Backfill area of excavation surrounding each completed inlet according to

requirements of Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities.
END OF SECTION
02632-3
CITY OF HOUSTON PRECAST CONCRETE INLETS,
SECTION 02633
PRECAST CONCRETE INLETS, HEADWALLS, AND WINGWALLS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Precast concrete inlets for storm or sanitary sewers, including cast iron frame and
plate or grate.
B. Precast concrete headwalls and wingwalls for storm sewers.
C. Precast junction box with lid or grate top.
E. Section 04061 – Mortar
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for inlets is on unit price basis for each inlet installed.
2. Payment for headwalls and wingwalls is on unit price basis for each headwall
and wingwall installed.
3. Payment for junction box with lid or grate top is on unit price basis for each
junction box installed.
4. Payment for inlets, headwalls, wingwalls, and junction boxes includes

connection of lines and furnishing and installing frames, grates, rings, and
covers.
1.04 REFERENCES
02633-1
A. ASTM C 857 - Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for
Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures.
B. ASTM C 858 - Standard Specification for Underground Precast Concrete Utility

Structures.
C. ASTM C 891 - Standard Practice for Installation of Underground Precast Concrete

Utility Structures.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit shop drawings for approval of design and construction details for precast
concrete inlets, junction box headwalls, and wingwalls. Precast units differing from
standard designs shown on Drawings will be rejected unless shop drawing submittals
are approved. Clearly show proposed substitution is equal or superior in every aspect
to standard designs.
C. Submit manufacturers' data and details for frames, grates, rings, and covers.
1.06 STORAGE AND SHIPMENT
A. Store precast units on level blocking. Do not place loads until design strength is
reached. Shipment of acceptable units may be made when 28-day strength
requirements have been met.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Concrete: Provide concrete for precast machine-made units meeting requirements of

ASTM C 858 regarding reinforced concrete, cement, aggregate, mixture, and concrete
test. Minimum 28-day compressive strength shall be 4,000 psi.
B. Reinforcing Steel: Place reinforcing steel to conform to details shown on Drawings

and as follows:
1. Provide positive means for holding steel cages in place throughout production
of concrete units. Maximum variation in reinforcement position is plus or
minus 10 percent of wall thickness or plus or minus 1/2-inch, whichever is
less. Regardless of variation, maintain minimum cover of concrete over
reinforcement as shown on Drawings.
2. Welding of reinforcing steel is not permitted unless noted on Drawings.
C. Mortar and Hydraulic Cement: Conform to requirements of Section 04061 - Mortar.
02633-2
D. Miscellaneous Metal: Cast-iron frames and plates conforming to requirements of

Section 02090 - Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers.
A. Tolerances: Allowable casting tolerances for concrete units are plus or minus 1/4
inch from dimensions shown on Drawings. Concrete thickness in excess of that
required will not constitute cause for rejection provided that excess thickness does not
interfere with proper jointing operations.
B. Precast Unit Identification: Mark date of manufacture and name or trademark of

manufacturer clearly on inside of inlet, headwall, or wingwall.
C. Rejection: Precast units rejected for non-conformity with these specifications and for
following reasons:
1. Fractures or cracks passing through shell, except for single end crack that does
not exceed depth of joint.
2. Surface defects indicating honeycombed or open texture.
3. Damaged or misshaped ends, where damage would prevent making

satisfactory joint.
D. Replacement: Immediately remove rejected units from Work site and replace with
acceptable units.
E. Repairs: Occasional imperfections resulting from manufacture or accidental damage

may be repaired if, in opinion of Project Manager, repaired units conform to
requirements of these specifications.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
B. Verify compacted subgrade will support loads imposed by inlets.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install units complete in place to dimensions, lines, and grades as shown on

Drawings.
B. Excavate in accordance with requirements of Section 02317 - Excavation and

C. Bed precast concrete units on foundations of firm, stable material shaped to conform
to shape of unit bases.
02633-3
D. Provide adequate means to lift and place concrete units.
3.03 FINISHES
A. Use hydraulic cement to seal joints, fill lifting holes and as otherwise required.
B. When box section of inlet has been completed, shape floor of inlet with mortar to
conform to Drawing details.
C. Adjust cast iron inlet plate frames to line, grade, and slope shown on Drawings.
Grout frame in place with mortar.
A. Verify that inlets are free of leaks. Repair leaks in approved manner.
3.05 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect storm sewer leads to inlets as shown on Drawings. Seal connections inside
and outside with hydraulic cement. Make connections watertight.
3.06 BACKFILL
A. Backfill area of excavation surrounding each completed inlet, headwall, or wingwall

according to requirements of Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities.
END OF SECTION
02633-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION CORRUGATED METAL PIPE
SECTION 02642
CORRUGATED METAL PIPE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Corrugated metal pipe (CMP).
B. Corrugated metal pipe with smooth interior (CMPSI).
D. Section 02631 – Storm Sewers
A. Unit Prices.
1. No payment will be made for corrugated metal pipe in open cut under this
Section. Include payment in unit price for Section 02631 - Storm Sewers.
2. No payment will be made for corrugated metal pipe in non-open cut under this
Section. Include payment in unit price for applicable tunneling section.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. AASHTO M 36 - Corrugated Steel Pipe, Metallic-Coated, for Sewers and Drains.
B. AASHTO M 190 - Bituminous Coated Corrugated Metal Culvert Pipe and Pipe
Arches.
C. AASHTO M 196 - Corrugated Aluminum Pipe for Sewers and Drains.
D. AASHTO M 197 - Aluminum Alloy Sheet for Corrugated Aluminum Pipe.
E. AASHTO M 218 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) for Corrugated Steel Pipe.
02642-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
F. AASHTO M 232 - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
G. AASHTO M 245 - Corrugated Steel Pipe, Polymer Precoated, for Sewers and Drains.
H. AASHTO M 246 - Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated and Polymer Precoated for

Corrugated Steel Pipe.
I. AASHTO M 274 - Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Coated (Type 2) for Corrugated Steel

Pipe.
J. ASTM B 633 - Standard Specification for Electro deposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron
and Steel.
K. ASTM A 760 - Standard Specifications for Corrugated Steel Pipe, Metallic-Coated

for Sewers and Drains.
L. ASTM A 798 – Standard Practice for Installing Factory-Made Corrugated Steel Pipe
for Sewers and Other Applications
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit shop drawings and calculations with the following information:
1. Design dimensions and details for pipe and fittings indicating alignment,
grade, and laying dimensions.
2. Fabrication details, details of fittings and flanges, details of specials, and

proposed welding procedures.
3. Show station numbers for pipe and fittings corresponding to Drawings.
4. Submit detailed calculations per AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design

Specifications. Designs are required for each pipe location and are to be
signed and sealed by a licensed engineer.
A. Provide manufacturer's affidavits that pipe was manufactured in compliance with

standards referenced in this Section, and that coatings and linings were not applied or
allowed to cure in freezing temperatures.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Corrugated metal pipe may be galvanized steel, aluminized steel, aluminum or

precoated galvanized steel as indicated on Drawings and conforming to following:
02642-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
Galvanized Steel AASHTO M 218

Aluminized Steel AASHTO M 274
Aluminum AASHTO M 197
Precoated Galvanized Steel AASHTO M 246
1. Reference to gauge of metal is to U.S. Standard Gauge for uncoated sheets.

Tables in AASHTO M 218 and AASHTO M 274 list thicknesses for coated
sheets in inches. Tables in AASHTO M 197 list thicknesses in inches for clad
aluminum sheets.
B. Coupling bands and other hardware for galvanized or aluminized steel pipe shall
conform to requirements of AASHTO M 36 for steel pipe and AASHTO M 196 for
aluminum pipe.
1. Coupling bands shall be not more than 3 nominal sheet thicknesses lighter
than thickness of pipe to be connected and in no case lighter than 0.052 inch
for steel or 0.048 inch for aluminum.
2. Coupling bands shall be made of same base metal and coating (metallic or
otherwise) as pipe.
3. Minimum width of corrugated locking bands shall be as shown below for

corrugations which correspond to end circumferential corrugations on pipes
being joined:
a. 10 1/2-inches wide for 2 2/3-inch by 1/2-inch corrugations.
b. 12-inches wide for 3-inch by 1-inch corrugations.
4. Helical pipe without circumferential end corrugations will be permitted only

when it is necessary to join new pipe to existing pipe which was installed with
no circumferential end corrugations. In this event pipe furnished with helical
corrugations at ends shall be field jointed with either helically corrugated
bands or with bands with projections (dimples). Minimum width of helical
corrugated bands shall conform to following:
a. 12-inches wide for 1/2-inch deep helical end corrugations.
b. 14-inches wide for 1-inch deep helical end corrugations.
5. Bands with projections shall have circumferential rows of projections with

one projection for each corrugation. Width of bands with projections shall be
not less than following:
a. 12-inches wide for pipe diameters up to and including 72-inches.

Bands shall have two circumferential rows of projections.
02642-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
b. 16 1/4-inches wide for pipe diameters of 78-inches and greater. Bands

shall have four circumferential rows of projections.
6. Bolts for coupling bands shall be 1/2-inch diameter. Bands 12-inches wide or
less will have minimum of 2 bolts per end at each connection, and bands
greater than 12-inches wide shall have minimum of 3 bolts at each connection.
7. Galvanized bolts may be hot dip galvanized in accordance with requirements

of AASHTO M 232, mechanically galvanized to provide same requirements
as AASHTO M 232, or electro galvanized per ASTM B 633, Type RS.
C. Coat bituminous coated pipe or pipe arch inside and out with bituminous coating
which shall meet these performance requirements and requirements of AASHTO M
190.
1. Uniformly coat pipe inside and out to minimum thickness of 0.05-inch,

measured on crests of corrugations.
2. Adhere bituminous coating to metal so that it will not chip, crack, or peel
during handling and placement; and to protect pipe from corrosion and
deterioration.
3. Where paved invert is shown on Drawings, pipe or pipe arch, in addition to

fully-coated treatment described above, shall receive additional bituminous
material, same as specified above, applied to bottom quarter of circumference
to form smooth pavement. Maintain minimum thickness of 1/8-inch above
crests of corrugations.
D. Furnish fittings and specials required for bends, end sections, branches, access
manholes, and connections to other fittings. Design fittings and specials in
accordance with Drawings and ASTM A 760. Fittings and specials are subject to
same internal and external loads as straight pipe.
2.02 PIPE FABRICATION
A. Steel Pipe:
1. Galvanized or aluminized steel pipe shall be full circle or arch pipe

conforming to AASHTO M 36, Type I, Type IA, or Type II, as indicated on
Drawings.
2. Fabrication with circumferential corrugations, lap joint construction with

riveted or spot- welded seams, helical corrugations with continuous helical
lock seam, or ultra-high frequency resistance butt-welded seams is acceptable.
B. Aluminum Pipe:
1. Conform to requirements of AASHTO M 196, Type I, Type IA, circular pipe,

or Type II, pipe arch as indicated on Drawings.
02642-4
CITY OF HOUSTON

riveted or spot- welded seams, or helical corrugations with continuous helical
lock seam.
3. Portions of aluminum pipe that will be in contact with concrete or metal other
than aluminum shall be insulated from these materials with coating of
bituminous material meeting requirements of AASHTO M 190. Extend
coating minimum distance of one foot beyond area of contact.
C. Precoated Galvanized Steel Pipe:
1. Pipe shall be full circle or arch pipe conforming to AASHTO M 245, Type I,
Type IA or Type II as indicated on Drawings.

riveted seams, or helical lock seams is acceptable.
3. Inside and outside coating shall be minimum of 10 mils.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Repair damaged spelter coating by thoroughly wire brushing damaged area and
removing all loose, cracked, or weld-burned spelter coating. Paint cleaned area with
zinc dust-zinc oxide paint conforming to Federal Specifications TT-P-641G.
B. Repair damaged aluminized or polymer coating in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations.
3.02 EARTHWORK
A. Excavate in accordance with requirements of Section 02317 - Excavation and

Backfill for Utilities, except where tunneling or jacking methods are shown on
Drawings. When pipes are laid in trench, trench when completed and shaped to
receive pipe, shall be of sufficient width to provide free working space for
satisfactory bedding and jointing and thorough tamping of backfill and bedding
material under and around pipe.
B. Bed pipe in accordance with Drawings. When requested by Project Manager, furnish
simple template for each size and shape of pipe for use in checking shaping of
bedding. Template shall consist of thin plate or board cut to match lower half of cross
section.
C. Where rock in either ledge or boulder form exists below pipe, remove rock below
grade and replace with suitable materials so slightly yielding compacted earth cushion
is provided below pipe minimum of 12-inches thick.
02642-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
D. Remove and replace where soil encountered at established grade is quicksand, muck
or similar unstable materials in accordance with requirements of Section 02317 -
Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. Do not allow cement stabilized materials for
backfill to come into contact with uncoated aluminum or aluminized pipe surface.
E. After metal pipe structure has been completely assembled on proper line and grade
and headwalls constructed when required by drawing details, place selected material
from excavation or borrow along both sides of completed structures equally, in
uniform layers not exceeding 6 inches in depth (loose measurement), wetted when
required and thoroughly compacted between adjacent structures and between
structure and sides of trench, or for distance each side of structure equal to diameter
of pipe. Compact backfill material to same density requirements as specified for
adjoining sections of embankment in accordance with specifications. Above three-
fourths point of structure, place uniformly on each side of pipe in layers not to exceed
12-inches.
F. Only hand operated tamping equipment will be allowed within vertical planes 2-feet
beyond horizontal projection of outside surface of structure for backfilling, until
minimum cover of 12-inches is obtained. Remove and replace damaged pipe.
G. Do not permit heavy earth moving equipment to haul over structure until minimum of
4-feet of permanent or temporary compacted fill has been placed.
H. During backfilling, obtain uniform backfill material and uniform compacted density
throughout length of structure to avoid unequal pressure. Provide proper foundation
and bedding under the structure in accordance with ASTM A 798.
I. Prior to adding each new layer of loose backfill material, inspection will be made of
inside periphery of structure for local or unequal deformation caused by improper
construction methods. Evidence of deformation will be reason for corrective
measures as may be directed by Project Manager.
A. Place pipes on prepared foundation starting at outlet end. Join sections firmly
together, with side laps or circumferential joints pointing upstream and with
longitudinal laps on sides.
B. Coat metal in joints not protected by galvanizing or aluminizing with approved

asphaltum paint.
C. Provide proper equipment for hoisting and lowering sections of pipe into trench
without damaging pipe or disturbing prepared foundation and sides of trench. Take up
and re-lay pipe which is not in alignment or which shows undue settlement after
laying, or is damaged.
D. Lay multiple installations of corrugated metal pipe and pipe arches with center lines
of individual barrels parallel. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, maintain
following clear distances between outer surfaces of adjacent pipes:
02642-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
Diameter of Clear Distance Between Pipes Pipe Arch

Pipe Full Circle and Pipe Arch Design No.
18" 1'-2" 2
24" 1'-5" 3
30" 1'-8" 4
36" 1'-11" 5
42" 2'-2" 6
48" 2'-5" 7
54" 2'-10" 8
60"-84" 3'-2" 9
90"-120" 3'-5" 10 & Over
E. Where extensions are attached to existing structures, install proper connection

between structure and existing as indicated on Drawings, coat connection with
bituminous material when required.
F. When existing headwalls and aprons are indicated for reuse on Drawings, sever
portion to be reused from existing culvert, and relocate to prepared position. Restore
damaged headwalls, aprons or pipes attached to headwall to their original condition.
3.04 JOINTING
A. Use field joints to maintain pipe alignment during construction and prevent
infiltration of side material.
B. Lap coupling bands equally on pipes being connected to form tightly-closed joint.
C. Use corrugated locking bands to field join pipes furnished with circumferential
corrugations including pipe with helical corrugations having reformed circumferential
corrugations on ends. Fit locking bands into minimum of one full circumferential
corrugation of pipe ends being coupled.
END OF SECTION
02642-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION PLATE CULVERT STRUCTURES
SECTION 02643
PLATE CULVERT STRUCTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Structural plate culverts and special structural plate shapes.
B. Section 02317 – Excavation and Backfill for Utilities
C. Section 02320 – Utility Backfill Materials
D. Section 03315 – Concrete for Utility Construction
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for structural plate pipes, pipe arches, arches, underpasses or box
culverts is on linear foot basis for each structure, measured along flow lines
between ends of structures. Separate payment will be made for each different
required size, gage, or minimum thickness of required material.
2. For multiple structures, measured length will be sum of lengths of barrels as

prescribed above.
3. Include cost of aluminum alloy inverts, toe walls, footings, closure plates, and
stiffeners in unit price for structure.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. AASHTO M 167 - Standard Specification for Corrugated Steel Structural Plate, Zinc
Coated, for Field Bolted Pipe, Pipe Arches, and Arches.
B. AASHTO M 190 - Standard Specification for Bituminous Coated Corrugated Metal

Culvert Pipe and Pipe Arches.
02643-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. AASHTO M 219 - Standard Specification for Corrugated Aluminum Alloy Structural

Plate for Field Bolted Pipe, Pipe Arches, and Arches.
D. AASHTO M 243 - Standard Specification for Field-Applied Coating of Corrugated

Metal Structural Plate for Pipe, Pipe-Arches, and Arches.
E. ASTM A 153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
F. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum - Alloy

Extruded Bars, Rods, Wires, Profile, and Tubes.
G. ASTM B 695 - Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited

on Iron and Steel.
H. Tex-728-I-Measurement of Dry Film Coating Thickness on Steel.
1.05 ACCEPTANCE
A. Furnish itemized list of number and size of plates in each shipment to be used for
visual inspection by Project Manager. Inspection will be made of plates for deficiency
in size, radius of curvature and evidence of poor workmanship. Inspection may
include sampling for chemical analysis and determination of weight of splutter
coating. Plates failing to meet requirements of this Section will be rejected.
B. Project Manager may elect to inspect materials in rolling mill or in fabrication shop.
Project Manager will have free access to mill or shop for inspection.
C. Repair damaged areas of splutter coating. Repair may be accomplished by painting

with dust-zinc oxide paint conforming to Federal Specification TT-P-641G when
approved in advance by Project Manager.
D. The following defects are causes for rejection:
1. Uneven laps.
2. Elliptical shaping (unless specified).
3. Variation from straight center line.
4. Ragged edges.
5. Loose, unevenly lined or spaced bolts.
6. Illegible brand.
7. Bruised, scaled, or broken splutter coating.
8. Dents or bends in metal.
02643-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL PIPE AND ARCH MATERIALS
A. Conform plates and fasteners used for construction of structural plate pipes, pipe
arches, arches, underpasses, box culverts and special shapes to AASHTO M 167 for
galvanized corrugated steel structures, and to AASHTO M 219 for aluminum alloy
structures.
B. Steel fasteners shall be mechanically galvanized or hot-dip galvanized and shall

conform to ASTM A 153, Class C or D, or ASTM B 695, Class 40. Determine weight
of galvanized coating according to Test Method Tex-728-I.
C. Steel plates shall consist of structural units of corrugated galvanized metal. Furnish
single plates in standard sizes to permit structure length increments of 2 feet. Plates
shall have approximately 2 inch lip beyond each end and crest. Length of given
structure shall be approximately 4 inches longer than nominal length, except when
skewed or beveled.
D. Aluminum plate shall consist of structural units of corrugated aluminum alloy. For
aluminum alloy structures, furnish cut plates on structure ends to permit structure
length increments of one foot. Conform aluminum alloy inverts, toe walls, footings
and closure plates to material requirements for aluminum structural plate. Extruded
aluminum transverse stiffeners shall conform to ASTM B 221, Alloy 6061-T6.
E. Comply headwalls with material requirements shown on Drawings.
2.02 STRUCTURE AND MATERIAL DESIGNATION
A. The types of structures are described on Drawings as follows:
1. Structural Plate Pipe (Galvanized Steel)
2. Structural Plate Pipe (Aluminum)
3. Structural Plate Pipe Arch (Galvanized Steel)
4. Structural Plate Pipe Arch (Aluminum)
5. Structural Plate Arch (Galvanized Steel)
6. Structural Plate Arch (Aluminum)
7. Structural Plate Underpass (Galvanized Steel)
8. Structural Plate Underpass (Aluminum)
9. Structural Plate Box Culvert (Galvanized Steel)
02643-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
10. Structural Plate Box Culvert (Aluminum)
B. Either galvanized steel or aluminum may be used when no material is designated on

Drawings.
2.03 PLATE JOINTS
A. Form plates to provide bolted lap joints. Punch bolt holes so plates having like
dimensions, curvature, and same number of bolts per foot of seam are
interchangeable.
B. Curve each plate to proper radius so cross-sectional dimensions of finished structure

will be as indicated on Drawings.
C. Stagger joints so not more than three plates are jointed at any one point. Unless
otherwise specified, place bolt holes along edges of plates forming longitudinal seams
in finished structure as follows:
1. Stagger in rows 2-inches apart, with one row in valley and one in crest of
corrugations with not less than 4 bolts per foot for galvanized steel structures.
2. Stagger in rows 1 ¾-inches apart, with 2 bolts in each valley and on each crest
and not less than 16 bolts per 3 feet for aluminum alloy structures.
D. Provide for bolt spacing of not more than 12 inches for bolt holes along edges of
plates that will form circumferential seams in finished structure.
E. Keep minimum distance from center of hole to edge of plate to not less than 1 3/4
times diameter of bolt.
F. Diameter of bolt holes in longitudinal seams not to exceed diameter of bolt by more
than 1/8 inch.
G. Cut plates for forming skewed or sloped ends to give angle of skew or slope
specified.
H. Repair burned edges to eliminate oxide and burrs. Maintain legible identification
numerals on each plate to designate proper position in finished structure.
2.04 CONCRETE
A. Conform to Section 03315 - Concrete for Utility Construction. Unless otherwise

shown on Drawings, use Class A concrete for footings and headwalls. Use Class B
concrete for slope protection and for invert paving. Place reinforcement as shown on
Drawings.
02643-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PROTECTIVE COATINGS, LININGS AND PAVINGS
A. When required, protect structural plate structures with bituminous coating,

bituminous lining or have invert paved with bituminous material. Remove moisture,
dirt, oil, unbonded or incompatible paint, grease, alkalies, or other foreign matter
from surface to be coated before applying coating material.
B. Apply bituminous coatings to inside and outside of structures to minimum thickness

of 0.05-inch as provided in AASHTO M 190, Type A.
C. Apply protective coating to coupling bands for coated structures. Use coatings in
accordance with AASHTO M 190. Coupling bands may be single-dipped with
coating thickness requirement waived.
D. Apply bituminous linings, when required, over bituminous coatings, to inside bottom
portion of structure as provided in AASHTO M 190, Type C.
E. When linings and pavings are not required, asphalt mastic coating may be substituted
for bituminous coating on corrugated steel or aluminum structures on outside surface
of structure. Inside surface need not be coated.
F. Use asphalt mastic coating conforming to requirements of AASHTO M 243, except

asbestos fibers will not be used. Perform this process at fabrication plant. Apply
asphalt mastic material uniformly to outside surface with minimum thickness of 0.05-
inch. Pinholes, blisters, cracks or lack of bond are cause for rejection.
G. When protective coatings are applied to structures, clearly identify thickness of metal
on inner surface of each section with paint or other approved means. Repair damaged
protective coatings, linings, and invert paving. Use bituminous material conforming
to AASHTO M 190 or other approved materials to repair damaged asphalt mastic
coatings.
H. Coat portion of nuts and bolts projecting outside pipe after installation. Portion of
nuts and bolts projecting inside structure need not be coated.
I. When asphalt mastic is used for protective coating, surface at joints of structure need
not be coated prior to assembly. Thoroughly seal joints after assembly with asphalt
mastic on outside of structure.
3.02 CONSTRUCTION METHODS
02643-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
Make trenches for pipes, pipe arches, underpasses or box culverts of sufficient width
to provide free working space for erection and thorough tamping of backfill and
bedding material under and around structure. When quality of native soil is less than
proposed backfill material, extend excavation to each side of barrel, minimum
horizontal distance of half span or two-thirds of total rise, whichever is greater.
B. Bed foundations for structural plate structures with metal inverts in foundation of
sandy earth material as specified in Section 02320 - Utility Backfill Materials,
accurately shaped to fit lower part of pipe for at least ten percent of its overall height.
Length of bedding arch need not exceed width of bottom plate. Uniformly seat
corrugations on minimum 3-inch thick bed of sandy material. For culverts, place
bedding to full width of invert.
1. Where rock, in ledge or boulder formation, exists below pipe, remove rock
below grade and replace with compacted earth cushion having minimum
thickness of 12 inches.
2. Where soil encountered at established grade is quicksand, muck, or similar

unstable material, remove and replace material in accordance with Section
02317 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. When required, use special
bedding as shown on Drawings.
C. Form foundations for structural plate structures with reinforced concrete footings to
lines and grades shown on Drawings or as established by Project Manager.
1. Set anchors or slots for box culverts to line and grade when placing concrete
for each substructure unit. Conform to Section 03315 - Concrete for Utility
Construction for placing substructure units.
2. Place footings entirely in rock, shale or similarly hard material, or on firm soil
or compacted soil cushion. When part of founding area is rock, undercut it and
replace with minimum 12-inch thick compacted soil cushion. When thin layer
of soil is partially covering rock within bearing area and when practical to do
so, soil may be removed and footings placed directly on rock in accordance
with details shown on Drawings.
D. Erection: Install structural plate structures in accordance with Drawings.
1. Coat steel in joints not protected by galvanizing with suitable bituminous

coating.
2. Handle pipes and plates carefully to avoid damage to protective coating.

Repair damaged coatings.
3. Use anchor bolts with 3/4-inch diameter by 6-inch minimum length on not
more than 19-inch centers for anchoring plates to headwalls or other concrete
end treatment.
02643-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
4. Do not place plates for arch structures until substructure has cured for
minimum of 3 days.
5. When plates are in position, tighten nuts and bolts progressively and
uniformly, beginning at one end of structure. Tighten nuts second time to
torque of not less than 150 ft-lbs nor more than 300 ft-lbs for steel bolts and
not less than 100 ft-lbs nor more than 150 ft-lbs for aluminum bolts. When
impact wrench is used, check with long-handled, structural, socket, or torque
wrench to ensure that they are properly tightened. Replace service bolts used
in drawing plates together with standard high strength bolts.
E. Use acceptable shape control devices for monitoring horizontal and vertical shape of
structures. Maintain shape within two percent of design span or rise during erection
and backfilling.
F. Backfilling: Perform backfilling and embankment construction around pipe in

accordance with Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. Conduct
backfill operations to insure inside dimensions remain within tolerances specified in
shape control.
END OF SECTION
02643-7
CITY OF HOUSTON PIPING, VALVES, FITTINGS, AND ACCESSORIES
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR WATER STORAGE TANKS
SECTION 02662
PIPING, VALVES, FITTINGS, AND ACCESSORIES FOR WATER STORAGE TANKS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Pipe, fittings and accessories.
1.02 REALTED SECIONS
A. No separate measurement and payment for work performed under this Item.
B. The Contractor shall include the cost for this work in the contract bid price for work
of which this is a component part.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. The Standards applicable to this Item include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 - American National Standard for Ductile-Iron

and Gray- Iron Fittings, 3 in. Through 48 in., for Water (latest edition).
2. ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 - American National Standard for Rubber-

Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings (latest edition).
3. ANSI/AWWA C150/A21.50 - American National Standard for the Thickness

Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe (latest edition).
4. ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 - American National Standard for Ductile-Iron

Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water (latest edition).
5. ANSI/AWWA C200 - AWWA Standard for Steel Water Pipe 6-In. and Larger
(latest edition).
6. ANSI/AWWA C206 - AWWA Standard for Field Welding of Steel Water

Pipe (latest edition).
7. ANSI/AWWA C207 - AWWA Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for

Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 in. through 144 in. (latest edition).
8. ANSI/AWWA C208 - AWWA Standard for Dimensions for Fabricated Steel

Water Pipe Fittings (latest edition).
02662-1
9. ANSI/AWWA C209 - AWWA Standard for Cold-Applied Tape Coatings for

the Exterior of Special Sections, Connections, and Fittings for Steel Water
Pipelines (latest edition).
10. ANSI/AWWA C210 - AWWA Standard for Liquid-Epoxy Coatings and

Linings for Steel Water Pipe and Fittings (latest edition).
11. ANSI/AWWA C213 - AWWA Standard for Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coatings

for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines.
12. ANSI/AWWA C214 - AWWA Standard for Tape Coatings for Steel Water
Pipe (latest edition).
13. ANSI/AWWA C500 - AWWA Standard for Metal-Seated Gate Valves for
Water Supply Service (latest edition).
14. ANSI/AWWA C504 - AWWA Standard for Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves

(latest edition).
15. ANSI/AWWA C508 - AWWA Standard for Swing-Check Valves for

Waterworks Service, 2 in. through 24 in. (latest edition).
16. ASTM A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
17. ASTM A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves,
Flanges, and Pipe Fittings.
18. ASTM D2241 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR-
Series) (latest edition).
19. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for the Two-Step (Primer and Solvent
Cement) Method of Joining Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) or Chlorinated Poly
(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Pipe and Piping Components with Tapered Sockets.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit complete product description including dimension drawings, specifications

and materials list for all piping, fittings, joints, valves and accessories.
B. Operation and maintenance manual shall be submitted for valves in accordance with
contract document requirements.
C. Submit valve data in accordance with Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures.
D. Submit procedures for hydrostatic testing.
1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Delivery and Storage:
02662-2
1. Piping and valves shall be shipped and stored in such a manner which will
protect them from damage.
2. All containers or pallets should be clearly tagged in accordance with contract

documents.
3. All material shall be stored above ground on timbers or other suitable

cribbing, and in a position that will facilitate drainage of rain water, or be
completely covered.
A. All pipe, fittings and valves to be in accordance with the latest edition of the
applicable AWWA Standard and approved by the Texas Department of Health for use
in potable water system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING
A. Steel Pipe:
1. All new yard piping 4-inches and above shall be steel pipe in accordance with
AWWA Standards C200-latest edition, C206-latest edition, C207-latest
edition and C208-latest edition.
2. Above ground piping shall be welded, with flanged joints and fittings.
3. Underground buried piping shall be welded joints unless otherwise noted on

the drawings.
4. The interior of all new pipe and fittings (above and below ground) is to be
coated with the same coating system as the tank interior.
5. New exterior above ground piping to receive the same coating system as
specified for tank exterior.
6. External Coating Systems for Buried Steel Pipe
a. Steel pipe shall be supplied with tape coatings as specified herein. The
Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer(s) and furnish to the
Engineer an affidavit that the coating complies with the applicable
requirements of this section and that the coating was not applied and
allowed to cure in freezing temperatures.
02662-3
b. Tape Coating. Provide an 80-mil shop-applied tape coating system in

accordance with AWWA C214, latest edition, except as modified
herein. Components of this system shall include a primer, one 20-mil
layer of inner-layer tape for corrosion protection and two 30- mil
layers of outer-layer tape for mechanical protection. Inner and outer
tape widths shall be 18 inches. Tape coating system shall be Polyken
YG-III, Tek-Rap Yard-Rap, or equal. Pipe shall be provided with shop
coatings cut back from the joint ends to facilitate joining and welding
of the pipe. The successive tape layers shall be tapered by 1-inch
staggers to facilitate field wrapping of the joints. These cutbacks shall
be such that a gap of approximately 4 to 4-1/2 inches will result to
facilitate welding when the bell and spigot are engaged.
B. PVC Pipe:
1. All pipe smaller than 4-inches in diameter shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC),
Schedule 40, in accordance with ASTM D2241, with solvent welded joints
per manufacturer’s recommendation and ASTM D2855.
2.02 FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS
A. Dresser style 38, Rockwell 411, Romac 400 or approved equal.
B. Pipe end to be clean and smooth.
C. Space between pipe ends shall not be less than 1/4" or more than 1", unless otherwise
noted on the drawings.
D. Buried couplings shall be coated a minimum of 12 mils (DFT) fusion bonded epoxy
resin in accordance with AWWA C213-latest edition. Type 316 stainless steel rods,
nuts, bolts and washers shall be used.
2.03 FLAP VALVES
A. Description:
1. Valve shall swing open under direct pressure to release fluid, and close when
direct pressure is relieved.
2. Back pressure shall hold the gate against its seat.
B. Iron body, bronzed mounted, with bronze hinge pin, flap ring and seat ring.
C. Waterman Model PF25 spigot end, or equal.
D. All valves to be installed where shown on the drawings and in accordance with the
2.04 GATE VALVES
02662-4
A. Gate valves, 3-inch and larger, shall be flanged, iron body, bronze mounted, with
double disc gates having parallel seats, with the make, size, working pressure and
"AWWA" cast on the valve bodies.
B. Valves are to meet or exceed the requirements of AWWA C500-latest edition.
C. Stem movement shall be outside screw and yoke (OS&Y) with handwheels for all
above ground valves unless shown otherwise on drawings.
D. Buried valves to be non-rising stem (NRS). Buried valves shall be provided with a
cast iron valve box and valve key of sufficient length to extend three feet above
ground.
E. Valve handwheel rotation shall be counter-clockwise to open.
F. Handwheel yoke shall be aligned to 45 degrees from horizontal.
2.05 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Description:
1. Rubber seated butterfly valves shall be furnished and installed as shown on

drawings, as specified herein, and shall meet or exceed the requirements of
AWWA C504-latest edition.
B. Type:
1. Valve shall be short body type designed for a differential pressure of 150 psi
(Class 150B).
2. Above ground valves to be flanged. Buried valves to be push-on or flanged.
C. Body: Cast Iron, ASTM A126 Class B or ASTM A48 Class 40.
D. Seats: Buna-N or neoprene, and may be applied to disc or body. Seats shall be
mechanically secured and may not rely solely on adhesive properties of epoxy or
similar bonding agent to attach seat to body. Seats on disc shall be mechanically
retained by stainless steel (18-8) retaining ring held in place by stainless steel (18-8)
cap screws that pass through rubber seat for added retention. When seat is on disc,
seat shall be retained in position by shoulders located on both disc and stainless steel
retaining ring. Mating surfaces for seats: Type 316 stainless steel, secured to disc by
mechanical means. Sprayed-on or plated mating surfaces will not be allowed. Seat
must be replaceable in field for valves greater than 30 inches in diameter. Valves with
segmented retaining rings will not be accepted.
E. Disc: Cast iron or ductile iron fastened to shaft with stainless steel pins or bolts. For
30-inch and larger, disc to shaft connection to be with stainless steel tapered pins
secured with nuts.
02662-5
F. Shaft: Stainless steel, AISI Type 304 or 316.
G. Bushings: Self-lubricating bronze, Grade A, D or E; nylon; or reinforced Teflon.
H. Shaft Seals: Upper seal to consist of self-adjusting split "V" type packing or a stuffing
box with pulldown packing. Packing material to be Buna-N, TFE impregnated Teflon
or graphite asbestos. Seals to be replaceable without removing valve shaft.
I. End Cover: Cast iron, gasketed or with Buna-N O-ring.
J. Fastenings: 18-8 stainless steel, everdur or bronze.
K. Cover Plate Cap Screws for Buried Service: Stainless steel, AISI Type 316.
L. Operators:
1. Furnish handwheel operators to conform with AWWA C504-latest edition,

including Appendix A.
2. Handwheel rotation to be counterclockwise to open.
3. Provide readily visible position indicator.
4. Manual operators to be single reduction, self-locking, worm gear or traveling

nut type with side-mounted handwheel.
5. Include bolted-on spur or bevel gear assembly where necessary to develop the
maximum valve seating or unseating torque with an applied single point force
at the handwheel rim of 80 pounds or less.
6. Handwheel diameter not to exceed nominal valve diameter and in no case be

larger than 30 inches.
7. Manual operators to be Series MDT by Pratt or T-Series by Limitorque.
8. For buried valves, include extension stem, 2-inch square operating nut, and
cast iron valve box and key of sufficient length to extend three feet above
ground.
9. Gear to be grease packed, totally enclosed for buried service.
10. Handwheel yoke shall be aligned to 45 degrees from horizontal.
M. All butterfly valves shall comply with the requirements of AWWA C504-latest
edition: Section 1.5, Data to Be Furnished By Manufacturer or Fabricator.
2.06 BALL VALVES
02662-6
A. Ball valves for chlorine solution lines shall be manufactured of PVC Type 1, Grade 1
molding compound with teflon ball seals and viton stem and body seals, true union
design, Chemtrol or approved equal.
2.07 CHECK VALVES
A. Swing Check Valves
1. Swing check valves 4-inches through 14-inches having a system pressure 30

psi or less, shall be air cushioned with side mount lever and weight. The valve
shaft shall extend through both sides of the body with minimum shaft
diameters equal to APCO Series 6000. The cushion shall be totally enclosed,
swivel mounted at the bottom, and equipped with a micrometer air control
valve and air breather filters. Valves shall be similar to APCO Series 6000, or
approved equal.
2. Swing check valves 10-inches through 14-inches having a system pressure

greater than 30 psi shall be cushioned with side mount lever and weight.
Valves shall be similar to APCO Series 6100, or approved equal.
3. Swing check valves 16-inches and larger regardless of system operating

pressure shall be cushioned with side mount lever and weight. Valves shall be
similar to APCO Series 6100, or approved equal.
B. Check valves of special design utilizing controlled closing of the disc, such as APCO
Series 6000B (Bottom-Buffer) and Golden Anderson Fig. #25-DXH or approved
equal shall be used when specifically indicated on the Drawings. These valves are
special valves used to control the surge pressure in the force main upon multiple
pump shutdown during a power failure. Other surge control check valves utilizing
ball or cone valve and power cylinder operator may also be used as approved by the
City Engineer.
C. All check valves shall have 300 series stainless steel hinge shafts, stainless steel body
seats and stainless steel resilient seat retainer rings.
D. APCO Series 600 silent check valves (or approved equal) are acceptable for use in
elevated storage tanks.
2.08 FREEZE PROTECTION
A. Any valves or appurtenances requiring freeze protection shall be encased in

aluminum roll jacketing as manufactured by R P R Products, Inc., or approved equal.
2.09 ALTITUDE VALVES
02662-7
A. Altitude valves for elevated storage tanks shall be for two-way flow. Valves shall be
manufactured by Cla-Val. All associated standard hardware shall be included in valve
replacement or new installation (Main Valve, Altitude Control, Valve Position
Indicator, Bell Reducer, Check Valve, CK2 Cock, and CV Flow Control). Optional
Features to be included are Flow Clean Strainer and CK2 Cock (Isolation Valve).
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. General:
1. Where indicated on the Plans piping connections between dissimilar metals,

e.g., ductile iron or cast iron and steel, etc., shall be provided with dielectric
insulating kits consisting of dielectric gaskets, bolt sleeves, and washers to
prevent any galvanic action between the dissimilar metals.
2. All pipe installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations.
3. Watertight pipe and joints shall be provided.
4. Pipe shall be placed to the lines and grades shown on the drawings.
5. In order to make connections to existing piping it may be necessary to operate

existing yard piping valves and to shut down certain portions of the plant and
pumping facilities. All such operational activities shall be performed by
Owner personnel only.
B. Manway Flanges and Flanged Joints:
1. Prior to installation of bolts, accurately center and align flanged joints to

prevent mechanical prestressing of flanges, pipe and equipment. Align bolt
holes to straddle the vertical, horizontal or north-south center line. Do not
exceed 3/64 inch per foot inclination of the flange face from the true
alignment.
2. For flange joints 30 inches in diameter and greater at butterfly valve flanges
provide Pyrox G-10 with nitrile seal, Type "E" LineBacker gasket as
manufactured by Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc., or approved equal
conforming to ANSI 21.11 mechanical joint gaskets. For flanged joints less
than 30 inches in diameter, provide a phenolic PSI, Type "E" gasket by Pipe
Seal and Insulator, Inc.
3. Use full-face gaskets for all other flanged joints. Provide cloth inserted rubber
gasket material, 1/8-inch thick in accordance with AWWA C207-latest
edition. Gaskets shall be factory cut to proper dimensions.
02662-8
4. Use ANSI nuts and bolts, galvanized or black to match flange material. Use
cadmium- plated steel nuts and bolts underground. Tighten bolts progressively
to prevent unbalanced stress. Draw bolts tight to ensure proper seating of
gaskets.
5. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to procedures used in tightening

and torquing flanged joints. Improper methods may result in leakage and
necessitate corrective measures. The Contractor should follow recommended
industry standards and guidelines as set forth by the various fabricators and
manufacturers.
3.02 FIELD HYDROSTATIC TEST
A. All new water lines shall be field hydrostatically tested at 100 psi. Conduct
hydrostatic tests in the presence of the Engineer and in an approved manner.
B. Each valved section of pipe shall be slowly filled with water and the specified test
pressure shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe in a manner
approved by the Engineer.
C. The average water velocity when filling the pipeline should be less than 1 fps and
shall not, under any circumstance, exceed 2 feet per second.
D. The Contractor shall furnish, install and operate, at Contractor’s expense, the
necessary connections, pump, and gauges.
E. Before applying the specified pressure test, all air shall be expelled from the pipe.
F. Joint Leakage:
1. All joints showing visible leaks shall be repaired.
2. The Contractor shall check at valves and fittings to ensure that no leakage
may be occurring that could affect or invalidate the test.
3. Any cracked or defective pipes, fittings or valves discovered in consequence

of this pressure test shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor with
sound material and the test shall be repeated until satisfactory to the Engineer.
G. Allowable Leakage:
1. There should be no leakage for flanged joint steel pipe during the hydrostatic
tests.
H. Length of Test:
1. The duration of the hydrostatic test shall be a minimum 4 hours at the

specified pressure.
02662-9
2. If a large quantity of water is required to increase the pressure during testing,

entrapped air, leakage at joints, or a broken pipe can be suspected.
3. Tests should be discontinued until the source of trouble is identified and

corrected.
I. Each section of pipe shall be chlorinated as specified prior to hydrostatic testing.
J. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish all required temporary blinds
or other closures required to facilitate the chlorination and pressure testing.
K. The Contractor shall submit a plan and procedure for pressure testing for Engineer
approval prior to initiating such testing. The plan shall include a diagram of the
section (s) of pipe to be tested, isolation procedure, schematic of test set-up, and a
Step-by-Step work plan.
END OF SECTION
02662-10
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION HOT MIX ASPHALT BASE COURSE
SECTION 02711
HOT MIX ASPHALT BASE COURSE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Foundation course of compacted mixture of coarse and fine aggregates, and asphalt
binder.
F. Section 02330 – Embankment
G. Section 02336 – Lime Stabilized Subgrade
H. Section 02337 – Lime/Fly Ash Stabilized Subgrade
I. Section 02338 – Portland Cement Stabilized Subgrade
J. Section 02713 – Recycled Crushed Concrete Base Course
K. Section 02714 – Flexible Base Course for Temporary Driveways
L. Section 02741 – Asphaltic Concrete Pavement
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for hot mix asphalt base is on a per ton basis.
2. Payment for hot mix asphalt base for transitions and base repairs is on a per
ton basis.
02711-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
3. No separate payment will be made for hot mix asphaltic base for temporary
driveway, temporary detour pavement, temporary roadway shoulders, etc.
Include payment in unit price for respective driveway (Section 02714 –
Flexible Base Course for Temporary Driveways) or temporary pavement
(Section 02741 – Asphaltic Concrete Pavement) section.
4. Measurement:
a. Match actual pavement area placed or replaced but no greater than

maximum pavement replacement limits and thickness designated or
shown on Drawings.
b. Include installed hot mix asphalt base course material that extends one
foot beyond outside edge of pavement to be replaced, except where
proposed pavement section shares common edge with existing
pavement section.
c. Actual quantity for payment purpose as measured and calculated in

this section shall not exceed the maximum volume-weight conversion
rate of 105 pounds per square yard area per inch thickness.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. AASHTO T201 - Standard Specification for Kinematic Viscosity of Asphalts

(Bitumens).
B. AASHTO T202 - Standard Specification for Viscosity of Asphalt by Vacuum

Capillary Viscometer.
C. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregate.
D. ASTM C 131 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size

Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.
E. ASTM C 136 - Standard Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
F. ASTM D 4402 - Standard Test Method for Viscosity Determination of Asphalt at

Elevated Temperatures Using Rotational Viscometer.
G. TxDOT Tex-106-E - Calculating the Plasticity Index of Soils.
H. TxDOT Tex-126-E - Molding, Testing, and Evaluating Bituminous Black Base

Material.
02711-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
I. TxDOT Tex-200-F- Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
J. TxDOT Tex-203-F - Sand Equivalent Test.
K. TxDOT Tex-204-F - Design of Bituminous Mixtures.
L. TxDOT Tex-207-F - Determining Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures.
M. TxDOT Tex-208-F - Test for Stabilometer Value of Bituminous Mixtures.
N. TxDOT Tex-227-F - Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity of Bituminous Mixtures.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit certificates that asphalt materials and aggregates meet requirements of

Paragraph 2.01, Materials.
C. Submit proposed mix and test data for each type of base course in Work.
D. Submit manufacturer's description and characteristics of mixing plant for approval.
E. Submit manufacturer's description and characteristics of spreading and finishing

machine for approval.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Coarse Aggregate:
1. Use crushed gravel or crushed stone, or combination retained on No. 10 sieve,

uniform in quality throughout and free from dirt, organic, or other injurious
material occurring either free or as coating on aggregate. Conform aggregate o
ASTM C 33 except for gradation. Furnish rock or gravel with Los Angeles
abrasion loss not to exceed 40 percent by weight when tested in accordance
with ASTM C 131.
2. Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) or reclaimed Portland cement concrete

pavement (RPCCP) are permitted as aggregates for hot mix asphalt base
course if combined aggregate criteria, gradation, and mixture properties are
met.
02711-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Fine Aggregate: Sand or stone screenings, or combination thereof, passing No. 10

sieve. Conform aggregate to ASTM C 33 except for gradation. Use sand composed of
sound, durable stone particles free from loams or other deleterious foreign matter.
Furnish screenings of same or similar material as specified for coarse aggregate.
Plasticity index of that part of fine aggregate passing No. 40 sieve shall be not more
than 6 when tested by TxDOT Tex-106-E. Sand equivalent shall have minimum value
of 45 when tested by TxDOT Tex-203-F.
C. Composite Aggregate: Conform to following limits when graded in accordance with

ASTM C 136. Provide either coarse or fine aggregate where designated on the
Drawings.
GRADATION OF COMPOSITE AGGREGATE

Percent Passing by Weight or Volume
Sieve Size Type A Coarse Type B Fine Base
1 1/2" 98.0-100.0 -
1 1/4" - -
1" 78.0-94.0 98.0-100.0
3/4" 64.0-85.0 84.0-98.0
1/2” 50.0-70.0 -
3/8" - 60.0 to 80.0
#4 30.0-50.0 40.0 to 60.0
#8 22.0-36.0 29.0-43.0
#30 8.0-23.0 13.0-28.0
# 50 3.0-19.0 6.0-20.0
#200 2.0-7.0 2.0-7.0
VMA % Minimum 12.0 13.0
*2 to 8 when Test Method Tex-200-F, Part II (Washed Sieve Analysis) is
used.
D. Asphalt Binder: Moisture-free homogeneous material meeting following

requirements:
SPECIFICATION PG 64 – 22
Average 7-day Maximum Pavement Design Temperature, degrees
<64
Ca
Minimum Pavement Design Temperature, degrees Ca >-22
Original Binder
Flash Point Temperature, T48, Minimum degrees C 230
Viscosity, ASTM D 4402, b Maximum 3 Pa.s (3000cP), Test
135
Temperature, degrees C
Dynamic Shear, TP5; cG*/sine[], Minimum, 1.00kPaTest
64
Temperature @ 10rad/sec, degrees C
02711-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
Rolling Thin Film Oven (T240) or Thin Film Oven (T179) Residue
Mass Loss, Maximum, % - 1.00
Dynamic Shear, TP5; G*/sine[], Minimum, 2.20 kPa
Test Temperature @ 10rad/sec, degrees C 64
Pressure Aging Vessel Residue (PPI)
PAV Aging Temperature, degrees C d 100
Dynamic Shear, TP5; G*/sine[], Maximum, 5000 kPa Test
Temperature @ 10rad/sec, degrees C 25
Physical Hardening e Report
Creep Stiffness, TP1; f S, Maximum, 300 Mpa; m-value, Minimum,
0.300 Test Temperature @ 60 sec, degrees C -12
Direct Tension, TP3; f Failure Strain, Minimum, 1.0%; Test
Temperature @ 1.0 mm/min, degrees C -12
Notes:
a Pavement temperature can be estimated from air temperatures using algorithm
contained in TxDOT testing procedures.
b The requirement may be waived at discretion of Project Manager if supplier
warrants that asphalt
binder can be adequately pumped and mixed at temperatures that meet applicable safety
standards.
c For quality control of unmodified asphalt cement production, measurement of
viscosity of original asphalt cement may be substituted for dynamic shear measurements of
G*/sine [ ] at test temperature where asphalt is Newtonian fluid. Any suitable standard
means of viscosity measurement may be used, including capillary of rotational viscometry
(AASHTO T 201 or T202).
d The PAV aging temperature is based on simulated climatic conditions and is one of
three
temperatures: 90 C, 100 C, or 110 C. The PAV aging temperature is 100 C for PG64 and
PG70.
e Physical Hardening - TP 1 is performed on a set of asphalt beams according to
Section 13.1, except conditioning time is extended to 24 hours plus of minus 10 minutes at
10 C above minimum performance temperature. The 24-hour stiffness and m-value are
reported for information purposes only.
f If creep stiffness is below 300 MPa, the direct tension test is not required. If creep
stiffness is
between 300 and 600 MPa the direct tension failure strain requirement can be used in lieu
of creep stiffness requirement. The m-value requirement must be satisfied in both cases.
E. Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) may be used at a rate no greater than 20 percent.
2.02 EQUIPMENT
02711-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Mixing Plant: Weight-batching or drum mix plant with capacity for producing
continuous mixtures meeting specifications. With exception of a drum mix plant, the
plant shall have satisfactory conveyors, power units, aggregate handling equipment,
hot aggregate screens and bins, and dust collectors.
B. Provide equipment to supply materials adequately in accordance with rated capacity

of plant and produce finished material within specified tolerances. Following
equipment is essential:
1. Cold aggregate bins and proportioning device
2. Dryer
3. Screens
4. Aggregate weight box and batching scales
5. Mixer
6. Asphalt storage and heating devices
7. Asphalt measuring devices
8. Truck scales
C. Bins: Separate aggregate into minimum of four bins to produce consistently uniform
grading and asphalt content in completed mix. One cold feet bin per stockpile is
required.
2.03 MIXES
A. Employ certified testing laboratory to prepare design mixes.
1. Test in accordance with TxDOT Tex-126-E, TxDOT Tex-204-F, TxDOT

Tex-208-F, and TxDOT Tex-227-F.
2. Verify mixture design properties for plant-produced mixture. Demonstrate

that asphalt plant is capable of producing mixture meeting design volumetric
and stability requirements before placement begins.
B. Density, Stability, and Air Voids Requirements. Select asphalt binder content for base
courses to result in 3 to 5 percent air voids in laboratory molded specimens, while
meeting minimum VMA requirement for selected mixture classification.
Percent Density Percent HVEEM Stability Percent Percent Asphalt Content

Min Max. Optimum Not Less Than Min. Max.
94.5 97.5 96 35 3.5 7
02711-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Complete backfill of new utilities below future grade.
B. Verify lines and grades are correct.
C. Prepare subgrade in accordance with requirements of Section 02330 - Embankment

and Section 02315 - Roadway Excavation or Section 02336 - Lime Stabilized
Subgrade and Section 02337 - Lime/Fly-Ash Stabilized Subgrade, and Section 02338
- Portland Cement Stabilized Subgrade. Subgrade preparation may also refer to
Section 02321 - Cement Stabilized Sand or Section 02713 - Recycled Crushed
Concrete Base Course.
D. Correct subgrade deviations in excess of plus or minus 1/4 inch in cross section, or in
16 foot length by loosening, adding or removing material, reshaping and
recompacting by sprinkling and rolling.
3.02 PLACEMENT
A. Place base when surface temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is
above 40 degrees F and rising. Do not place asphalt base when temperature of surface
to receive base course is below 50 degrees F and falling.
B. Haul prepared and heated asphalt base mixture to project in tight vehicles previously
cleaned of foreign material. Mixture shall be at temperature between 250 degrees F
and 325 degrees F when laid.
C. Place hot mix asphalt base course in compacted lifts no greater than 4 inches thick,
unless permitted in writing by Engineer.
D. Place courses as nearly continuously as possible. Place material with approved

mechanical spreading and finishing machine of screeding or tamping type. Spread
lifts to attain smooth course of uniform density to section, line, and grades as
indicated on Drawings.
E. In areas with limited space where use of paver or front-end loader is impractical,
spread by hand and compact asphalt by mechanical means. Carefully place materials
to avoid segregation of mix; do not broadcast material. Remove lumps that do not
break down readily.
3.03 JOINTS
A. Transverse Joints. Pass roller over unprotected ends of freshly laid mixture only when
mixture has cooled. When work is resumed, cut back placed material to produce
slightly beveled edge for full thickness of course. Remove old material which has
been cut away and lay new mix against fresh cut.
02711-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Existing pavement. When new asphalt is laid against existing asphalt pavement, saw
cut existing asphalt to full depth creating vertical face. Clean joint and apply tack coat
before placement.
3.04 COMPACTION
A. Construct test strip to identify correct type, number, and sequence of rollers necessary
to obtain specified in-place density or air-voids. Prepare test strip at least 500 feet in
length, comparable to placement and compaction conditions for Project.
B. Begin rolling while pavement is still hot and as soon as it will bear roller without
undue displacement or hair line cracking. Keep wheels properly moistened with water
to prevent adhesion of surface mixture. Do not use excessive water; do not use
petroleum by-products.
C. Compact surface thoroughly and uniformly with power-driven equipment capable of

obtaining required compaction. Obtain subsequent compression by starting at side
and rolling longitudinally toward center of pavement, overlapping on successive trips
by at least one-half width of rear wheels. Make alternate trips slightly different in
length. Continue rolling until no further compression can be obtained and rolling
marks are eliminated. Complete rolling before mat temperature drops below 175
degrees F.
D. Along walls, curbs, headers, similar structures, and in locations not accessible to
rollers, compact mixture thoroughly with lightly oiled tamps.
E. Compact base course to a minimum density of 91 percent (TxDOT Tex-227-F).
3.05 TOLERANCES
A. Pavement Repairs.
1. Furnish templates for checking surface of finished sections. Maximum

deflection of templates, when supported at center, shall not exceed 1/4 inch.
2. Completed surface, when tested with 10 foot straight edge laid parallel to
center line of pavement, shall show no deviation in excess of 1/4 inch in 10
feet. Correct surface not meeting this requirement.
02711-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Perform testing under provisions of Section 01454 - Testing Laboratory Services.For

in-place depth and density, take minimum of one core at random locations for each
1000 feet of single lane pavement. On a 2-lane pavement, take samples at random
every 500 feet from alternating lanes. Take cores for parking lots every 500 square
yards of base to determine in-place depth and density. If cul-de sac or streets are less
than 500 feet, minimum of 2 cores (one per lane) will be procured. On small projects,
take a minimum of two cores for each day’s placement. For first days placement and
prior to coring, minimum of 5 nuclear gauge readings will be performed at each core
location to establish correlation between nuclear gauge (wet density reading) and core
(bulk density). This process will continue for each day’s placement until engineer
determines that a good bias has been established for that nuclear gauge.
B. Determine in-place density in accordance with TxDOT Tex-207-F and Tex-227-F

from cores or sections of asphaltic base located near each core. Other methods of
determining in-place density, which correlate satisfactorily with results obtained from
roadway specimens, may be used when approved by Project Manager.
C. Request, at option, three additional cores within a 5-foot radius of core indicating
nonconforming in-place depth at no additional cost to City. In-place depth at these
locations shall be average depth of four cores.
D. Fill cores and density test sections with new compacted asphalt base or cold patch
material.
3.07 NONCONFORMING PAVEMENT
A. Re-compact and retest nonconforming street sections not meeting surface test
requirements. Patch asphalt pavement sections in accordance with procedures
established by Asphalt Institute. Retesting is at no cost to the City.
B. Remove and replace areas of asphalt base found deficient in thickness by more than
10 percent. Remove and replace areas of asphalt base found deficient in density. Use
new asphalt base of thickness shown on Drawings.
C. Replace or correct nonconforming pavement sections at no additional cost to City.
3.08 PROTECTION
A. Do not open base to traffic until 12 hours after completion of rolling, or as shown on
Drawings.
B. Maintain asphalt base in good condition until completion of Work.
C. Repair defects immediately by replacing base to full depth.
END OF SECTION
02711-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION CEMENT STABILIZED BASE COURSE
SECTION 02712
CEMENT STABILIZED BASE COURSE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Foundation course of cement stabilized crushed stone.
B. Foundation course of cement stabilized bank run gravel.
F. Section 02742 – Prime Coat
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for cement stabilized base course is on square yard basis. Separate
pay items are used for each different required thickness of base course.
2. Payment for asphaltic seal cure is by gallon.
4. Refer to Paragraph 3.09, Unit Price Adjustment.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 131 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size

Course Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in Los Angeles Machine.
B. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
02712-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of

Soils Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600kN kN-m/m3).
D. ASTM D 1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place
by the Sand-Cone Method.
E. ASTM D 1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics

of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3))
F. ASTM D 4318 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity
Index of Soils.
G. ASTM D 6938 - Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of
H. TxDOT Tex-101-E - Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing.
I. TxDOT Tex-110-E - Particle Size Analysis of Soils.
J. TxDOT Tex-120-E - Soil-Cement Testing.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit samples of crushed stone, gravel, and soil binder for testing.
C. Submit manufacturer's description and characteristics for pug mill and associated
equipment, spreading machine, and compaction equipment for approval.
1.06 TESTS
A. Perform testing under provisions of Section 01454 - Testing Laboratory Services.
B. Perform tests and analysis of aggregate and binder materials in accordance with
ASTM D 1557 and ASTM D 4318.
A. Make stockpiles from layers of processed aggregate to eliminate segregation of

materials. Load material by making successive vertical cuts through entire depth of
stockpile.
B. Store cement in weatherproof enclosures. Protect from ground dampness.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CEMENT
02712-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. ASTM C 150 Type I; bulk or sacked.
2.02 WATER
A. Clean, clear; and free from oil, acids, alkali, or vegetable matter.
2.03 AGGREGATE
A. Crushed Stone: Material retained on No. 40 Sieve meeting following requirements:
1. Durable particles of crusher-run broken limestone, sandstone, or granite

obtained from approved source.
2. Los Angeles abrasion test percent of wear not to exceed 40 when tested in
B. Gravel: Durable particles of bank run gravel or processed material.
C. Soil Binder: Material passing No. 40 Sieve meeting following requirements when
tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318:
1. Maximum Liquid limit: 35.
2. Maximum Plasticity index: 10.
D. Mixed aggregate and soil binder shall meet the following requirements:
1. Grading in accordance with TxDOT Tex-101-E and Tex-110-E within the

following limits:
Percent Retained
Sieve
Crushed Processed Gravel Bank run
Stone G. 1 G. 2 Gravel
1 3/4 inch 0 to 10 0 to 5 - 0 to 5
1/2 inch - - 0 -
No. 4 45 to 75 30 to 75 15 to 35 30 to 75
No. 40 55 to 80 60 to 85 55 to 85 65 to 85
2. Obtain prior permission from Project Manager for use of additives to meet
above requirements.
2.04 ASPHALT SEAL CURE
A. Cutback Asphalt: MC30 conforming to requirements of Section 02742 - Prime Coat.
02712-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Emulsified Petroleum Resin: EPR-1 Prime conforming to requirements of Section

02742 - Prime Coat.
2.05 MATERIAL MIX
A. Design mix for minimum average compressive strength of 200 psi at 48 hours using
TxDOT Tex-120-E unconfined compressive strength testing procedures. Provide
minimum cement content of 1 1/2 sacks, weighing 94 pounds each, per ton of mix.
B. Increase cement content when average compressive strength of tests on field samples
fall below 200 psi. Refer to Part 3 concerning field samples and tests.
C. Mix in stationary pug mill equipped with feeding and metering devices for adding
specified quantities of base material, cement, and water into mixer. Dry mix base
material and cement sufficiently to prevent cement balls from forming when water is
added.
D. Resulting mixture shall be homogeneous and uniform in appearance.
B. Perform testing for unconfined compressive strength by TxDOT Test Method Tex-
120-E as follows:
1. Mold three samples each day or for each 300 tons of production.
2. Compressive strength shall be average of three tests for each production lot.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
3.02 PREPARATION
B. Prepare subgrade in accordance with requirements of Section 02330 - Embankment

and Section 02315 - Roadway Excavation.
C. Correct subgrade deviations in excess of plus or minus 1/4 inch in cross section or in
02712-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
D. Prepare sufficient subgrade in advance of base course for efficient operations.
3.03 PLACEMENT
A. Do not mix and place cement stabilized base when temperature is below 40 degrees F
and falling. Place base when temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat
is above 35 degrees F and rising.
B. Place material on prepared subgrade in uniform layers to produce thickness indicated

on Drawings. Depth of layers shall not exceed 6 inches.
C. Spread with approved spreading machine. Conduct spreading so as to eliminate

planes of weakness or pockets of non-uniformly graded material resulting from
hauling and dumping operations.
D. Provide construction joints between new material and stabilized base that has been in
place 4 hours or longer. Joints shall be approximately vertical. Form joint with
temporary header or make vertical cut of previous base immediately before placing
subsequent base.
E. Use only one longitudinal joint at center line under main lanes and shoulder unless
shown otherwise on Drawings. Do not use longitudinal joints under frontage roads
and ramps unless indicated on Drawings.
F. Place base so that projecting reinforcing steel from curbs remain at approximate
center of base. Secure firm bond between reinforcement and base.
3.04 COMPACTION
A. Start compaction as soon as possible but not more than 60 minutes from start of moist
mixing. Compact loose mixture with approved tamping rollers until entire depth is
uniformly compacted. Do not allow stabilized base to mix with underlying material.
B. Correct irregularities or weak spots immediately by replacing material and

recompacting.
C. Apply water to maintain moisture between optimum and 2 percent above optimum
moisture as determined by ASTM D 698. Mix in with spiked tooth harrow or equal.
Reshape surface and lightly scarify to loosen imprints made by equipment.
D. Remove and reconstruct sections where average moisture content exceeds ranges
specified at time of final compaction.
E. Finish by blading surface to final grade after compacting final course. Seal with
approved pneumatic tired rollers which are sufficiently light to prevent surface hair
line cracking. Rework and recompact at areas where hair line cracking develops.
02712-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
F. Compact to minimum density of 95 percent of maximum dry density at moisture

content of treated material between optimum and 2 percent above optimum as
determined by ASTM D 1557, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
G. Maintain surface to required lines and grades throughout operation.
3.05 CURING
A. Moist cure for minimum of 7 days before adding pavement courses. Restrict traffic on
base to local property access. Keep subgrade surface damp by sprinkling.
B. If indicated on Drawings, cover base surface with curing membrane as soon as

finishing operation is complete. Apply with approved self-propelled pressure
distributor at following rates, or as indicated on Drawings:
1. MC30: 0.1 gallon per square yard.
2. EPR-1 Prime: 0.15 gallon per square yard.
C. Do not use cutback asphalt during period of April 16 to September 15.
3.06 TOLERANCES
A. Smooth and conform completed surface to typical section and established lines and
grades.
B. Top surface of base course: Plus or minus 1 1/4 inch in cross section, or in 16 foot
length.
B. Take minimum of one core at random locations per 1000 linear feet per lane of
roadway or 500 square yards of base to determine in-place depth.
C. Request additional cores in vicinity of cores indicating nonconforming in-place

depths at no extra cost to City. When average of tests fall below required depth, place
additional material and compact at no additional cost to City.
D. Perform compaction testing in accordance with ASTM D 698 or ASTM D 6938 at

randomly selected locations. Remove and replace areas that do not conform to
compaction requirements at no additional cost to City.
E. Fill cores and density test sections with new compacted cement stabilized base.
3.08 NONCONFORMING BASE COURSE
02712-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Remove and replace areas of base course found deficient in thickness by more than
10 percent, or that fail compressive strength tests, with cement-stabilized base of
thickness shown on Drawings.
B. Replace nonconforming base course sections at no additional cost to City.
3.09 UNIT PRICE ADJUSTMENT
A. Make unit price adjustments for in-place depth determined by cores as follows:
1. Adjusted unit price shall be ratio of average thickness as determined by cores

to thickness bid upon, times unit price.
2. Apply adjustment to lower limit of 90 percent and upper limit of 100 percent
of unit price.
3.10 PROTECTION
A. Maintain stabilized base in good condition until completion of Work. Repair defects
immediately by replacing base to full depth.
B. Protect asphalt membrane, when used, from being picked up by traffic. Membrane
may remain in place when proposed surface courses or other base courses are to be
applied.
END OF SECTION
02712-7
CITY OF HOUSTON RECYCLED CRUSHED
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS CONCRETE BASE COURSE
SECTION 02713
RECYCLED CRUSHED CONCRETE BASE COURSE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Recycled crushed concrete base (RCCB) course.
C. Section 01452 – Inspection Services
D. Section 01454 – Testing Laboratory Services
E. Section 02315 – Roadway Excavation
F. Section 02330 – Embankment
H. Section 02337 – Lime/Fly Ash Stabilized Subgrade
I. Section 02338 – Portland Cement Stabilized Subgrade
J. Section 02742 – Prime Coat
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for RCCB is on per ton basis furnished and compacted in place.
2. Payment for RCCB for transitions and base repairs, if required, is on a per ton
basis.
3. No separate payment will be made for RCCB for temporary driveway,

temporary detour pavement, temporary road shoulders and etc. Include
payment in unit price for related work.
02713-1
1.04 REFERENCES
B. TxDOT Tex-101-E - Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing.
C. TxDOT Tex-106-E - Calculating the Plasticity Index of Soils.
D. TxDOT Tex-110-E - Determining Particle Size Analysis of Soils.
E. TxDOT Tex-113-E - Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and Moisture-Density

Relationship of Base Materials.
F. TxDOT Tex-115-E - Field Method for Determining In-place Density of Soils and
Base Materials.
G. TxDOT Tex-120-E - Soil-Cement Testing.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit representative samples of crushed concrete for testing.
C. Submit weight tickets, certified by supplier, for each delivery of recycled crushed
concrete, gravel, and soil binder.
D. Submit manufacturer's description and characteristics for pug mill and associated
equipment, mixer trucks, spreading and compaction equipment for approval.
A. Provide materials from stockpiles that are protected during storage from contaminates
detrimental to concrete base.
B. Load material from same area of stockpile to maintain uniformity of each successive
delivery to Project site.
C. Store cement in weatherproof enclosures. Protect from ground dampness.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Provide RCCB with following performance:
1. Minimum 7 percent cement.
02713-2
2. Minimum compressive strength: 650 psi at 14 days following TxDOT Tex-

120-E.
3. Prepare concrete product in on-site or off-site pug mill, or in on-site or off-site

portable concrete mixer.
B. Preliminary Design: Prepare preliminary mix with minimum cement to crushed

concrete ratios of 5 percent by dry mass of materials.
1. Designate source of concrete for crushing. Follow Section 01454 - Testing

Laboratory Services for tests of concrete from source.
2. Results of laboratory and compression tests will be used by Project Manager

to select final mix design.
2.02 PORTLAND CEMENT
A. ASTM C 150 Type I, II, or III; bulk or sacked.
2.03 WATER
A. Potable.
2.04 AGGREGATE
A. Recycled Crushed Concrete: Material retained on No. 40 Sieve, and durable coarse
particles of crusher-run reclaimed cured Portland cement concrete, obtained from
approved source. Organic material is prohibited. The crushed concrete shall be
substantially free of foreign matter including but not limited to asphalt, base, and dirt.
B. Soil Binder (classified below): Meeting following requirements when tested

following TxDOT Tex-106-E:
1. Maximum liquid limit: 35
2. Maximum plasticity index: 10
C. Mixed Aggregate and Soil Binder: Grading following TxDOT Tex-101-E and Tex-
110-E within following limits:
Sieve Percent Crushed Concrete Retained

1-3/4 inch 0 to 10
No. 4 45 to 75
No. 40 55 to 80; classified as Soil Binder
1. Bank sand may be added to mix at pug mill.
2.05 ASPHALTIC SEAL CURE
02713-3
A. Acquire written approval from Project Manager before curing and before proceeding
with curing.
B. Use following as option to curing by sprinkling:
1. Cut-back asphalt: MC30 following Section 02742 - Prime Coat.
2. Emulsified petroleum resin: EPR-1 Prime following Section 02742 - Prime

Coat.
2.06 MATERIAL MIX
A. Design mix for minimum compressive strength of 650 psi at 14 days following
TxDOT Tex-120-E unconfined compressive strength.
B. Cement Ratio: Follow Paragraph 2.01A. Increase cement content in two percent steps
up to 9 percent maximum when compressive strength of design mix samples fail
TxDOT Tex-120E test.
2.07 MIXING EQUIPMENT
A. Mix following Paragraph 2.01A, with metering devices adding specified quantities of
crushed concrete, cement, and water into mixer. Dry mix crushed concrete and
cement prior to adding water. Produce homogeneous and uniformly mixed product.
A. Test following Section 01454 -Testing Laboratory Services.
B. When directed by Project Manager, test for unconfined compressive strength

following Test Method TxDOT Tex-120-E as follows:
1. Mold minimum of three samples each day or for each 500 tons of production
or one for each day.
2. Compressive strength: average of 3 specimens for each sample lot.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Follow Section 01452 - Inspection Services.
B. Verify buried utility work is complete.
C. Verify lime treatment of base is complete.
D. Verify subgrade is ready to support imposed loads. Verify flatwork, foundations,

projecting reinforcement and similar Work interfacing with base is in place.
02713-4
E. Verify lines and grades are correct.
3.02 PREPARATION
B. Prepare subgrade in accordance with requirements of Section 02330 - Embankment

and Section 02315 - Roadway Excavation, or Section 02336 - Lime Stabilized
Subgrade and Section 02337 - Lime/Fly Ash Stabilized Subgrade and Section 02338 -
Portland Cement Stabilized Subgrade.
C. Correct subgrade deviations in excess of plus or minus 1/4 inch in cross section, or in
D. Prepare sufficient subgrade in advance of base course for efficient operations.
E. Have sufficient products and equipment on hand to expeditiously apply base.
3.03 MIXING
A. Maintain moisture content of between optimum and 5 percent above optimum.
3.04 PLACEMENT
A. Place mixture with approved spreading equipment. Spread to eliminate planes of

weakness or pockets of nonuniformly graded material resulting from hauling and
dumping operations.
B. Provide approximately vertical construction joints between fresh base and base-in-
place 4 hours or longer. Form joint with temporary header or make vertical cut of in-
place base immediately before placing fresh base.
C. Make cold joints at center line of head-to-head parking stalls.
D. Place base so that projecting reinforcing steel from curbs remain at approximate
center of base. Provide proper bond between reinforcement and base.
E. Transverse and longitudinal joints shall be vertical.
F. Unless noted otherwise, place recycled crushed concrete base in courses not to exceed
8 inches in depth. All courses shall be placed on same working day unless approved
by Project Manager. Construction joints between new base and base previously
placed shall be wetted and coated with dry cement prior to addition of new base.
G. Complete finishing operations within period of 6 hours after cement is added to base
materials.
3.05 COMPACTION
02713-5
A. Start compaction maximum 3 hours after start of mixing. Compact loose mixture with
approved tamping rollers until entire depth is uniformly compacted. Do not allow
base to mix with underlying material.
1. Do not rework uncompacted material that has set up for more than 30 minutes.
2. Complete placement and compaction work within 6 hours from start of moist
mixing.
B. Correct irregularities or weak spots immediately by replacing material and

recompacting.
C. Apply water to maintain moisture between optimum and 5 percent above optimum
moisture.
D. Remove and reconstruct sections where average moisture content exceeds ranges
specified at time of final compaction.
E. Finish by blading surface to final grade after compacting final course. Seal with
approved pneumatic tired rollers or flat wheel rollers which are sufficiently light to
prevent surface hair line cracking.
F. Compact to minimum density of 95 percent of dry density, following TxDOT Tex -

113-E, at moisture content of treated material between optimum and 5 percent above
optimum.
G. Test roadway base course compaction in accordance with TxDOT Tex-115-E.
H. Maintain surface to required lines and grades throughout operation.
3.06 CURING
A. Moist cure for minimum of 72 hours before adding pavement courses.
B. Use sprinkling or, at option, apply following curing membrane as soon as initial set
begins, using approved light-weight self-propelled pressure distributor:
1. MC30: 0.1 gallon per square yard.
2. EPR-1 Prime: 0.15 gallon of asphalt residual per square yard.
C. Do not use cut-back asphalt during period of April 16 through September 15.
3.07 TOLERANCES
A. Completed Surface: Smooth and conform to typical section and established lines and
grades.
B. Top Surface of Base Course: Plus or minus 1/4 inch in cross section or in 16 foot
length.
02713-6
A. Test following Section 01454 - Testing Laboratory Services.
B. Perform compaction tests following TxDOT Tex-113-E at randomly selected

locations. Remove and replace areas failing compaction requirements at no additional
cost to City.
C. Test and analyze aggregate and binder products following TxDOT Tex-110-E.
3.09 PROTECTION
A. Maintain base in proper condition until surface is placed. Surface must be placed
within 14 days after final mixing and compaction unless otherwise approved by
Project Manager. Repair unacceptable base course immediately by replacing base to
full depth.
B. Curing membrane may remain in place at areas where surface courses or other base
courses are applied.
C. Prevent construction traffic on base for minimum 3 days. Light vehicles, used to
maintain proper cure, are permitted on base after initial set or as permitted by Project
Manager.
END OF SECTION
02713-7
CITY OF HOUSTON FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE FOR
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION TEMPORARY DRIVEWAYS
SECTION 02714
FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE FOR TEMPORARY DRIVEWAYS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Foundation course of crushed concrete or stone.
E. Section 02336 – Lime Stabilized Subgrade
F. Section 02337 – Lime/Fly Ash Stabilized Subgrade
A. UNIT PRICES
1. Measurement for flexible base course payment is on each driveway basis. To

maintain access or temporary driveway, separate measurement will be made
for each different type of driveway (residential, commercial, or custom
properties) or as identified on the Drawings.
2. Payment limits for temporary driveways are based upon the width of the
driveway access (not to exceed 12-feet for residential, 24-feet for commercial,
or custom dimensioned properties) and the length from permanent or
temporary roadway to the remaining permanent driveway or street right-of-
way, as necessary to maintain access to properties.
3. No separate payment will be made for flexible base course for temporary
roads, detour pavements, and shoulder under this Section unless it is included
as an extra unit bid and as approved for payment by the project manager.
Flexible base course for temporary driveways or access if included under the
extra unit bid item is on a cubic yard basis.
4. Temporary driveways will be paid only once per driveway location shown to
be replaced on the Drawing and payment shall be made based upon actual
installation.
02714-1
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 131 – Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size

B. ASTM D 1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place
C. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of

Soil Using Standard Effort (12.44 ft-lbf/ft3).
D. ASTM D 4318 - Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of
Soils.
E. ATMD D 6938 - Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of
F. TxDOT Tex-101-E - Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing.
G. TxDOT Tex-110-E - Particle Size Analysis of Soils.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall conform to requirements of Section 01330 - Submittals Procedures.
B. Submit samples of flexible base course and soil binder for testing.
1.06 TESTS
A. Tests and analysis of soil materials will be performed in accordance with ASTM C
131, ASTM D 698, ASTM D 4318, Tex-101-E, and Tex-110-E under provisions of
Section 01454 - Testing Laboratory Services.
A. Provide materials from stockpiles that are protected during storage from contaminates
that would be detrimental to the flexible base course.
B. Load materials from same area of stockpile to maintain uniformity of each successive
delivery to the project site.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
02714-2
A. Crushed Stone or Concrete: Material retained on the No. 40 sieve meeting the
following requirements:
1. Durable particles of crusher-run broken limestone, crushed concrete, crushed

sandstone, or granite obtained from an approved source.
B. Soil Binder: Material passing the No. 40 sieve meeting the following requirements
when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318:
1. Maximum Liquid Limit: 40
2. Maximum Plasticity Index: 12
3. Maximum Lineal Shrinkage: 7 (when calculated from volumetric shrinkage at

liquid limit).
C. Mixed Materials shall meet the following requirements:
1. Minimum compressive strength of 35 psi at 0 psi lateral pressure and 175 psi
at 15 psi lateral pressure using triaxial testing procedures.
2. Grading in accordance with Tex-101-E and Tex-110-E within the following

limits:
Sieve Percent Retained
1-3/4 inch 0 to 10
No. 4 45 to 75
No. 40 60 to 85
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
3.02 PREPARATION
B. Prepare subgrade in accordance with requirements of Section 02315 - Roadway

Excavation or Sections 02336 - Lime Stabilized Subgrade and 02337 - Lime/Fly-ash
Stabilized Subgrade.
02714-3
C. Correct subgrade deviations in excess of plus or minus 1/2 inch in cross section, or in
D. Prepare sufficient subgrade in advance of base course operations.
3.03 PLACEMENT
A. Spread and shape in lifts to compacted thickness not to exceed 6 inches in depth.
Complete spreading, shaping, and compacting on same day material is deposited.
B. Place base so that projecting reinforcing steel from curbs remain at approximate
center of base. Secure a firm bond between reinforcement and base.
C. Start rolling operations as soon as possible after placement. Use sheepfoot, steel, or
pneumatic rollers as approved. Roll longitudinally with subgrade starting from sides.
Overlap successive strips by one-half width of each rear wheel.
D. Maintain moisture between optimum and 3 percent above optimum moisture.
E. Compact to 95 percent of Proctor density in accordance with ASTM D 698, unless

otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
F. Finish to grade and compact lift before placing successive lift.
G. Maintain shape by grading throughout operation.
H. Provide total thickness indicated on Drawings.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Completed surface shall be smooth and conform to typical section and established
lines and grades.

Services.
B. Compaction Testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 698 or ASTM D

6938 at a random location near each depth determination core. Rework and
recompact areas that do not conform to compaction requirements.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Sprinkle to prevent excessive loss of moisture.
B. Restrict construction traffic on finished base to equipment required to complete the

work.
02714-4
END OF SECTION
02714-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT
SECTION 02741
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Surface course of compacted mixture of coarse and fine aggregates and asphaltic binder.
D. Section 02711 – Hot Mix Asphalt Base Course
E. Section 02712 – Cement Stabilized Base Course
F. Section 02713 - Recycled Crushed Concrete Base Course
G. Section 02743 - Tack Coat
H. Section 02767 - Thermoplastic Pavement Markings
I. Section 02951 – Pavement Repair and Restoration
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for hot-mix asp halt concrete pavement is on a per ton basis. Separate pay
items are used for each different required thickness of pavement.
2. Payment for hot-mix asphalt concrete pavement includes payment for associated
work performed in accordance with Section 02743 - Tack Coat.
3. Payment for pavement repair or pavement replacement for utility projects is on a

square yard basis and includes surface and base materials in accordance with Section
02951 - Pavement Repairs and Restoration.
4. Payment for temporary detour pavement or temporary roadway and shoulder is on a

square yard basis and includes surface and base materials, associated grading,
maintenance and removal as well as restoration of ditches.
02741-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
5. Payment for speed humps is on linear foot basis, and includes milling of existing
pavement, tack coat, and placement and compaction of asphalt. Measurement of
speed hump is along length of 12 foot wide speed hump, measured transverse to
centerline of road. Separate payment is made for thermoplastic markings applied to
speed hump.
B. Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). If Contract is Stipulated Price Contract, payment for work in
1.04 REFERENCES
B. ASTM C 131 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse
Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.
C. ASTM D 4022 - Standard Test Method for Viscosity Determination of Asphalt at Elevated
Temperatures Using a Rotational Viscometer.
D. TxDOT Tex-106-E - Calculating the Plasticity Index of Soils
E. TxDOT Tex-126-E - Molding, Testing, and Evaluating Bituminous Black Base Material.
F. TxDOT Tex-200-F - Sieve Analysis of Fine and Course Aggregates.
G. TxDOT Tex-203-F - Sand Equivalent Test.
H. TxDOT Tex-204-F - Design of Bituminous Mixtures.
I. TxDOT Tex 206-F - Compacting Test Specimens of Bituminous Mixtures.
J. TxDOT Tex-207-F - Determining Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures.
K. TxDOT Tex-208-F - Test for Stabilometer Value of Bituminous Mixtures.
L. TxDOT Tex-217-F - Determining Deleterious Material and Decantation Test for Coarse
Aggregates.
M. TxDOT Tex-227-F - Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity of Bituminous Mixtures.
N. TxDOT Tex-530-C - Effect of Water on Bituminous Paving Mixtures.
O. TxDOT Tex-531-C - Prediction of Moisture Induced Damage to Bituminous Paving

Materials Using Molded Specimens.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
02741-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Submit certificates that asphalt materials and aggregates meet requirements of Paragraph
2.01, Materials.
C. Submit proposed design mix and test data for surface course.
D. Submit manufacturer's description and characteristics of spreading and finishing machine for
approval.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Coarse Aggregate:
1. Use gravel, crushed stone, or combination thereof, that is retained on No. 10 sieve,
uniform in quality throughout and free from dirt, organic or other injurious matter
occurring either free or as coating on aggregate. Use aggregate conforming to ASTM
C 33 except for gradation. Furnish rock or gravel with Los Angeles abrasion loss not
to exceed 40 percent by weight when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131.
2. Aggregate by weight shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight of fine dust,
clay- like particles, or silt when tested in accordance with Tex-217-F, Part II.
B. Fine Aggregate: Sand, stone screenings or combination of both passing No. 10 sieve. Use
aggregate conforming to ASTM C 33 except for gradation. Use sand composed of sound,
durable stone particles free from loams or other injurious foreign matter. Furnish screenings
of same or similar material as specified for coarse aggregate. Plasticity index of that part of
fine aggregate passing No. 40 sieve shall be not more than 6 when tested by TxDOT Tex-
106-E. Sand equivalent shall have minimum value of 45 when tested by TxDOT Tex-203-F.
C. Composite Aggregate: Conform to following limits when graded in accordance with TxDOT
Tex-200-F. Use type specified on Drawings:
02741-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
GRADATION OF COMPOSITE AGGREGATE

PERCENT PASSING
Course Surface Fine Surface
SIEVE SIZE (TxDOT Type C) (TxDOT Type D)
- - -
3/4 “ 95 to 100 -
1/2" - 98.0-100.0
3/8" 70.0-85.0 85.0-100.0
#4 43 to 63 50.0 to 70.0
#8 32.0-44.0 35.0-46.0
#30 14.0-28.0 15.0-29.0
# 50 7.0-21.0 7.0-20.0
#200 2.0-7.0 2.0-7.0
VMA % minimum 14.0 15.0
* 2 to 8 when Test Method Tex-200-F, Part II (Washed Sieve Analysis) is used.
D. Asphalt Binder: Moisture-free homogeneous material which will not foam when heated to
347 F, meeting the following requirements.
02741-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
PERFORMANCE GRADED BINDER

PERFORMANCE GRADE
CRITERIA / TEST
(PG64-22)
Average 7-day Maximum Pavement Design Temperature, C < 64
Minimum Pavement Design Temperature, C > -22
ORIGINAL BINDER
Flash Point Temperature, T48; Minimum C 230
Viscosity, ASTM D 4402; Maximum, 3Pa*s (3000 cP) Test
135
Temperature, C
Dynamic Shear, TP5; G*/sin[ ], Minimum, 1.00 kPa Test
64
Temperature @ 10 rad/sec., C
ROLLING THIN FILM OVEN (T240) OR THIN FILM OVEN (T179) RESIDUE
Mass Loss, Maximum , % 1.00
Dynamic Shear, TP5; G*/sin [ ], Minimum, 2.20 kPa Test
64
PRESSURE AGING VESSEL RESIDUE (PP1)
PAV Aging Temperature, C 100
Dynamic Shear, TP5; G*/sin [ ], Minimum, 5000 kPa Test
25
Physical hardening Report
Creep Stiffness, TP1; S, Maximum, 300 Mpa -value,
-12
Minimum, 0.300 Test Temperature @ 60 sec., C
Direct Tension, TP3; Failure Strain, Minimum, 1.0% Test
-12
Temperature @ 1.0 mm/min, C
E. Anti-stripping Agent:
1. Evaluate mixture of aggregate, asphalt, and additives proposed for use for moisture
susceptibility and requirement for anti-stripping agents. To substantiate mix design,
produce and test trial mixtures using proposed project materials and equipment prior
to placement. Test for susceptibility to moisture and trial mixture may be waived by
Project Manager when similar designs using same material have previously proven
satisfactory.
02741-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Liquid Anti-stripping Agent. Use anti-stripping agent with uniform liquid with no
evidence of crystallization, settling, or separation of components. Submit sample of
anti- stripping agent proposed for use and manufacturer's product data, including
recommended dosage range, handling and storage, and application instructions.
F. Pavement markings for speed humps: Conform to requirements of Section 02767 -

Thermoplastic Pavement Markings.
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Mixing Plant: Weight-batching or drum mix plant with capacity for producing continuous
mixtures meeting specifications. With exception of a drum mix plant, plant shall have
satisfactory conveyors, power units, aggregate handling equipment, hot aggregate screens
and bins, and dust collectors.
B. Provide equipment to supply materials adequately in accordance with rated capacity of plant
and produce finished material within specified tolerances. Following equipment is essential:
1. Cold aggregate bins and proportioning device
2. Dryer
3. Screens
4. Aggregate weight box and batching scales
5. Mixer
6. Asphalt storage and heating devices
7. Asphalt measuring devices
8. Truck scales
C. Bins: Separate aggregate into minimum of four bins to produce consistently uniform grading
and asphalt content in completed mix. Provide one cold feed bin per stockpile.
2.03 MIXES
A. Employ certified testing laboratory to prepare design mixes. Test in accordance with TxDOT
Tex-126-E or Tex-204-F, Tex-206-F, Tex-208-F, Tex-530-C and Tex-531-C.
B. Density, Stability and Air Void Requirements:
Percent Density Percent HVEEM Stability Percent

Min Max Optimum Not Less Than
94.5 97.5 96 35
02741-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify compacted base course is ready to support imposed loads.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Tack Coat: Conform to requirements of Section 02743 - Tack Coat. Where mixture will
adhere to surface on which it is to be placed without use of tack coat, tack coat may be
eliminated when approved by Project Manager.
B. Prepare subgrade in accordance with requirements of Section 02711 - Hot Mix Asphalt Base
Course, Section 02712 - Cement Stabilized Base Course, or Section 02713 - Recycled
Crushed Concrete Base Course.
C. Prepare subgrade in advance of asphalt concrete paving operation.
D. Perform pavement repair and resurfacing as indicated in Section 02951 - Pavement Repair
and Restoration.
E. Do not use cutback asphalt.
F. Milling of pavement for speed humps: Mill pavement (concrete or asphalt) to depth of one
inch and width between 18 and 24 inches around entire perimeter of proposed hump, as
shown in detail for speed hump design.
3.03 PLACEMENT
A. Do not place asphalt pavement less than 2 inches thick when surface temperature taken in
shade and away from artificial heat is below 50 F and falling. Asphalt may be placed when
temperature is above 40 F and rising.
B. Haul prepared and heated asphaltic concrete mixture to project in tight vehicles previously
cleaned of foreign material. Mixture temperature shall be between 250 F and 325 F when
laid.
C. Spread material into place with approved mechanical spreading and finishing machine of
screening or tamping type.
D. Surface Course Material: Surface course 2 inches or less in thickness may be spread in one
lift. Spread lifts in such a manner that, when compacted, finished course will be smooth, of
uniform density, and will be to section, line and grade as shown. Place construction joints on
surface courses to coincide with lane lines or as directed by Project Manager.
02741-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
E. Joints: Pass roller over unprotected ends of freshly laid mixture only when mixture has
cooled. When work is resumed, cut back laid material to produce slightly beveled edge for
full thickness of course. Remove old material which has been cut away and lay new mix
against fresh cut.
F. When new asphalt is laid against existing or old asphalt, saw cut existing or old asphalt to
full depth to provide straight smooth joint.
G. In smaller restricted areas where use of paver is impractical spread material by hand.
Compact asphalt by mechanical means. Carefully place materials to avoid segregation of
mix. Do not broadcast material. Remove lumps that do not break down readily.
3.04 COMPACTION
A. Construct test strip to identify correct type, number, and sequence of rollers necessary to
obtain specified in-place density or air-voids when directed by the Project Manager. Prepare
test strip at least 1,000 feet in length, comparable to placement and compaction conditions for
Project.
B. Begin rolling while pavement is still hot and as soon as it will bear roller without shoving,
displacement or hair cracking. Keep wheels properly moistened with water to prevent
adhesion of surface mixture. Do not use excessive water or petroleum by-products.
C. Compact surface thoroughly and uniformly, first with power-driven, 3-wheel, or tandem
rollers weighing a minimum of 8 tons. Obtain subsequent compression by starting at side and
rolling longitudinally toward center of pavement, overlapping on successive trips by at least
one-half width of rear wheels. Make alternate trips slightly different in length.
D. Continue rolling until no further compression can be obtained and rolling marks are
eliminated. Complete rolling before mat temperature drops below 185 F.
E. Use tandem roller for final rolling. Double coverage with approved pneumatic roller on
asphaltic concrete surface is acceptable after flat wheel and tandem rolling has been
completed.
F. Along walls, curbs, headers and similar structures, and in locations not accessible to rollers,
compact mixture thoroughly with lightly oiled tamps.
G. Compact binder course and surface course to a minimum density of 91 percent of maximum
possible density of voidless mixture composed of same materials in like proportions.
3.05 TOLERANCES
A. Furnish templates for checking surface in finished sections. Maximum deflection of

templates, when supported at center, shall not exceed 1/8 inch.
B. Completed surface, when tested with 10-foot straightedge laid parallel to center line of
pavement, shall show no deviation in excess of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. Correct surface not
meeting this requirement.
02741-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Dimensions of speed humps shall conform to details for speed hump design and speed hump
height tolerances.
A. Testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01454 - Testing Laboratory Services.
B. For in-place depth and density, take minimum of one core at random locations for each 1000
feet of single lane pavement. On a 2-lane pavement, take samples at random every 500 feet
from alternating lanes. Take cores for parking lots every 500 square yards of base to
determine in-place depth and density. If cul-de sac or streets are less than 500 feet, minimum
of 2 cores (one per lane) will be procured. On small projects, take a minimum of two cores
for each day’s placement. For first days placement and prior to coring, minimum of 5
nuclear gauge readings will be performed at each core location to establish correlation
between nuclear gauge (wet density reading) and core (bulk density). This process will
continue for each day’s placement until engineer determines that a good bias has been
established for that nuclear gauge.
C. Determine in-place density in accordance with TxDOT Tex-207-F and Tex-227-F from cores
or sections. Other methods of determining in-place density, which correlate satisfactorily
with results obtained from roadway specimens, may be used when approved by Project
Manager. Average densities for each street placed in a single day to determine compliance.
D. Contractor may request three additional cores in vicinity of cores indicating nonconforming
in-place depths or density at no additional cost to City. In-place depth and density at these
locations shall be average of four cores.
E. Fill cores and density test sections with new compacted asphaltic concrete.
F. Speed humps: Measure dimensions of completed speed hump, before applying pavement
markings, at locations shown on Speed Hump Height Measurement Worksheet. Complete
one worksheet for each speed hump, and send completed worksheets to City of Houston,
Houston Public Works, Traffic Management and Maintenance Branch, P.O. Box 1562,
Houston, Texas, 77251-1562.
A. Recompact and retest nonconforming street sections not meeting surface test requirements or
having unacceptable surface texture. Patch asphalt pavement sections in accordance with
procedures established by Asphalt Institute. Retesting is at no cost to the City.
B. Remove and replace areas of asphalt surface found deficient in thickness by more than 10
percent. Use new asphaltic surface of thickness shown on Drawings. Remove and replace
areas of asphalt surface found deficient in average density.
C. Replace speed humps which do not conform to requirements of details, or which are rejected
by Project Manager.
3.08 PROTECTION
02741-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Do not open pavement to traffic until completion of rolling and temperature has cooled to set
asphaltic concrete surface, or as shown on Drawings.
B. Maintain asphalt pavement in good condition until completion of Work.
C. Repair defects immediately by replacing asphalt pavement to full depth.
3.09 PAVEMENT MARKINGS FOR SPEED HUMPS
A. Apply pavement markings to speed humps in conformance with dimensions shown on detail
for speed hump design.
END OF SECTION
02741-10
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION PRIME COAT
SECTION 02742
PRIME COAT
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Prime coat for asphalt concrete paving
A. Unit Prices.
1. No separate payment will be made for prime coat under this Section. Include payment
in unit price for material being primed.
B. Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). If Contract is Stipulated Price Contract, payment for Work in
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit product data for proposed prime coat.
C. Submit report of recent calibration of distributor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CUTBACK ASPHALT
A. Provide moisture-free homogeneous material which will not foam when heated to 347
degrees F and which meets following requirements:
B. Asphalt material for prime coat shall be MC-30 or MC-70 and shall meet following
requirements:
02742-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
TYPE - GRADE
MC-30 MC-70
PROPERTIES MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX.
Water, Percent --- 0.2 --- 0.2
Flash Point, T.O.C., °F 100 --- 100 ---
Kinematic Viscosity at 140°F, cst 30 60 70 140
1. Distillate shall be as follows, expressed as percent by volume of total distillate to 680

degrees F:
TYPE-GRADE
MC-30 MC-70
TEMPERATURE MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX.
to 437°F --- 25 --- 20
to 500°F 40 70 20 60
to 600°F 75 93 65 90
Residue from 680°F Distillation,
50 --- 55 ---
Volume, Percent
2. Tests on Distillation Residue:
TYPE-GRADE
MC-30 MC-70
TEST MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX.
Penetration at 77°F, 100g, 5 sec. 120 250 120 250
Ductility at 77°F, 5 cm/min. cms 100* --- 100* ---
Solubility in Trichloroethylene, % 99 --- 99 ---
Spot Test All Negative
* If penetration of residue is more than 200 and ductility at 77 degrees F is less than
100 cm, material will be acceptable when its ductility at 60 degrees F is more than
100.
2.02 EMULSIFIED PETROLEUM RESIN
02742-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. EPR-1 Prime: Slow curing emulsion of petroleum resin and asphalt cement conforming to
PROPERTIES MIN. MAX.

Fural Viscosity at 77°F, Sec 14 40
Residue by Evaporation, % by Weight 60 -
Sieve Test, % - 0.1
Particle Charge Test Positive
Tests on Distillation Residue:
Flash Point, COC (F) 400 -
Kinematic Viscosity @ 140 F (cst) 190 350
B. For use, EPR-1 may be diluted with water up to maximum three parts water to one part EPR-
1 in order to achieve desired concentration of residual resin/asphalt to facilitate application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify base is ready to support imposed loads.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Thoroughly clean base course surface of loose material by brooming prior to application of
tack coat.
B. Prepare sufficient base in advance of paving for efficient operations.
3.03 APPLICATION, BASIC
A. Apply prime coat with approved type of self-propelled pressure distributor. Distribute prime
coat evenly and smoothly under pressure necessary for proper distribution.
B. Keep storage tanks, piping, retorts, booster tanks, and distributors used in handling asphalt
materials clean and in good operating condition. Conduct operations so asphalt material does
not become contaminated.
C. If yield of asphaltic material appears to be in error, recalibrate distributor prior to continuing

Work.
D. Maintain surface until Work is accepted by City.
3.04 APPLICATION, CUTBACK ASPHALT
02742-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Do not use cutback asphalt during period of April 16 through September 15.
B. Do not place prime coat when air temperature is below 60 degrees F and falling. Materials
may be placed when air temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 50
degrees F and rising.
C. Distribute at rate of 0.25 to 0.35 gallons per square yard.
D. Equipment shall accurately determine temperature of asphaltic material in heating equipment

and in distributor, for determining rate of application, and for obtaining uniformity at
junction of two distributor loads. Maintain in accurate working order, including recording
thermometer at storage heating unit.
E. Base temperature of application on temperature-viscosity relationship that will permit

application of asphalt with viscosity of 100 to 125 centistokes. Maintain asphalt within 15
degrees F of temperature required to meet viscosity. Selected temperature shall be within
following range.
Prime Coat Type Minimum (°F) Maximum (°F)

MC-30 70 150
MC-70 125 175
F. Do not allow temperature of MC-30 to exceed 175 degrees F.
G. Do not allow temperature of MC-70 to exceed 200 degrees F.
3.05 APPLICATION, EMULSIFIED PETROLEUM RESIN
A. Do not place prime coat when air temperature is below 36 degrees F and falling.
B. Distribute at rate of 0.15 to 0.25 gallons per square yard.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Prevent traffic or placement of subsequent courses over freshly applied prime coat until
authorized by Project Manager.
END OF SECTION
02742-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS TACK COAT
SECTION 02743
TACK COAT
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Tack coat for asphalt concrete paving.
A. Unit Prices.
1. No separate payment will be made for tack coat under this Section. Include
payment in unit price for asphaltic pavements.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 244 - Standard Test Methods and Practices for Emulsified Asphalts.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit product data for proposed tack coat.
C. Submit report of recent calibration of distributor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EMULSION
A. Provide homogeneous material which shows no separation of asphalt after mixing

and meets viscosity requirements within 30 days after delivery.
B. Emulsion material for tack coat.
02743-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Emulsified asphalt: SS-1 or SS-1h meeting following criteria:
SS-1 SS-1h
PROPERTIES
MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX.
Furol Viscosity at 77°F, sec. 20 100 20 100
Residue by Distillation, % 60 -- 60 --
Oil Portion of Distillate, % -- 1/2 -- 1/2
Sieve Test, % -- 0.10 -- 0.10
Miscibility (Standard Test) Passing
Cement Mixing, % -- 2.0 -- 2.0
Storage Stability, 1 Day, % -- 1 -- 1
Test on Residue:
Penetration at 77°F, 100g, 5 sec. 120 160 70 100
Solubility in Trichloroethylene, % 97.5 -- 97.5 --
Ductility at 77°F, 5 cm/min., cms 100 -- 80 --
2. Polymer Modified Emulsion, SS-1P, for use where thin overlays (less than or
equal 2 inches) are placed on collector or arterial streets and for speed humps,
especially over existing Portland cement concrete pavement.
SS-1P
PROPERTIES
MIN. MAX.
Furol Viscosity at 77°F, sec. 30 100
Residue by Distillation, % 60 --
Oil Portion of Distillate, % -- 1/2
Sieve Test, % -- 0.10
Miscibility (Standard Test) Passing
Cement Mixing, % -- 2.0
Storage Stability, 1 Day, % -- 1
Test on Residue: 100 140
Penetration at 77°F, 100g, 5 sec.; Solubility in 97 --
Trichloroethylene, %Ductility at 77°F, 5 50 --
cm/min., cms; Viscosity at 140°F, poises 1300 --
3. For emulsions used for tack coats during period of April 16 through
September 15, volatile organic compound solvents (VOC) shall not exceed 12
percent by weight when tested in accordance with ASTM D 244.
02743-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify compacted base is ready to support imposed loads.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Thoroughly clean base course or concrete surface of loose material by brooming prior
to tack coat application.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Apply tack coat uniformly by use of approved distributor at rate not to exceed 0.05
gallons per square yard of surface depending on texture of underlying surface. Select
an application rate that will provide appropriate asphalt residual.
B. Paint contact surfaces of curbs, structures, and joints with thin uniform coat of tack
coat.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Prevent traffic or placement of subsequent courses over freshly applied tack coat until
authorized by Project Manager.
END OF SECTION
02743-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION CONCRETE PAVING
SECTION 02751
CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Portland cement concrete paving.
D. Section 02751 – Concrete Paving
E. Section 02752 – Concrete Pavement Joints
F. Section 02753 – Concrete Pavement Curing
G. Section 02951 – Pavement Repair and Restoration
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for concrete paving is on square yard basis. Separate pay items are
used for each different required thickness of pavement.
2. Payment for concrete paving, high early strength, is on square yard basis.
3. Payment for pavement repair or pavement replacement for utility projects is

on a square yard basis and includes base materials in accordance with Section
02951 – Pavement Repair and Restoration.
5. Refer to Paragraph 3.15, Unit Price Adjustment.
1.04 REFERENCES
02751-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. ASTM A1064 - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete.
B. ASTM A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Carbon-Steel Bars for
C. ASTM C 31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in
the Field.
D. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregates.
E. ASTM C 39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical

Concrete Specimens.
F. ASTM C 40 - Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for
Concrete.
G. ASTM C 42 - Standard Test Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and
H. ASTM C 78 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple
Beam with Third Point Loading).
I. ASTM C 94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.
J. ASTM C 131 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size

K. ASTM C 136 - Standard Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
L. ASTM C 138 - Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air
M. ASTM C 143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.
N. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
O. ASTM C 174 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Thickness of Concrete Elements
Using Drilled Concrete Cores.
P. ASTM C 231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by
the Pressure Method.
Q. ASTM C 260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
R. ASTM C 494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
S. ASTM C 618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
Pozzolan for use in Concrete.
02751-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
T. TxDOT Tex-203-F - Sand Equivalent Test.
U. TxDOT Tex-406-A - Material Finer than 75 m (No. 200) Sieve In Mineral
Aggregates (Decantation Test for Cement Aggregates).
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit proposed mix design and test data for each type and strength of concrete in
Work. Include proportions and actual flexural strength obtained from design mixes at
required test ages.
C. Submit for approval manufacturer's description and characteristics for mixing

equipment, and for traveling form paver, when proposed for use.
D. Submit manufacturer's certificates giving properties of reinforcing steel. Include

certificate of compliance with ASTM A 1064. Provide specimens for testing when
required by Project Manager.
1.06 HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Do not mix different classes of aggregate without written permission of Project

Manager.
B. Class of aggregate being used may be changed before or during Work with written
permission of Project Manager. Comply new class with specifications.
C. Reject segregated aggregate. Before using aggregate whose particles are separated by
size, mix them uniformly to grading requirements.
D. Reject aggregates mixed with dirt, weeds, or foreign matter.
E. Do not dump or store aggregate in roadbed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement:
1. Sample and test cement to verify compliance with Standards of ASTM C 150,
Type I or Type III.
2. Bulk cement which meets referenced standards may be used when method of
handling is approved by Project Manager. When using bulk cement, provide
satisfactory weighing devices.
02751-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
3. Fly ash which meets standards of ASTM C 618 may be used as mineral fill
when method of handling is approved by Project Manager.
B. Water: Conform to requirements for water in ASTM C 94.
C. Coarse Aggregate: Crushed stone, gravel, or combination thereof, which is clean,

hard, and durable, conforms to requirements of ASTM C 33, and has abrasion loss
not more than 45 percent by weight when subjected to Los Angeles Abrasion Test
(ASTM C 131).
1. Maximum percentage by weight of deleterious substances shall not exceed

following values:
Percent by Weight
of Total Sample
Item Maximum
Clay lumps and friable particles 3.0
Material finer than 75-µm (No. 200) sieve:
Concrete subject to abrasion 3.0*
All Other concrete 5.0*
Coal and lignite:
Where surface appearance of concrete is of
0.5
importance
All other concrete 1.0
* In case of manufactured sand, when material finer than 75-µm (No. 200)
sieve consists of dust of fracture, essentially free from clay or shale, these
limits may be increased to 5 and 7 percent, respectively.
2. Conform coarse aggregate (size 1 1/2-inch to No. 4 sieve) to requirements of

ASTM C33. Use gradation within following limits when graded in accordance
with ASTM C 136:
Sieve Designation (Square Openings) Percentage by Weight

Retained on 1 3/4" sieve 0
Retained on 1 1/2"sieve 0 to 5
Retained on 3/4" sieve 30 to 65
Retained on 3/8" sieve 70 to 90
Retained on No. 4 sieve 95 to 100
Loss by Decantation Test
*Method Tex-406-A 1.0 maximum
* In case of aggregates made primarily from crushing of stone, when

material finer than 200 sieve is dust of fracture essentially free from clay
or shale as established by Part III of TxDOT Tex-406-A, percent may be
increased to 1.5.
02751-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
D. Fine Aggregate: Sand, manufactured sand, or combination thereof, composed of

clean, hard, durable, uncoated grains, free from loams or other injurious foreign
matter. Conform fine aggregate for concrete to requirements of ASTM C 33. Use
gradation within following limits when graded in accordance with ASTM C 136:
Sieve Designation (Square Openings) Percentage by Weight

Retained on 3/8" sieve 0
1. When subjected to color test for organic impurities (ASTM C 40), fine
aggregate shall not show color darker than standard color. Fine aggregate shall
be subjected to Sand Equivalent Test (Tex-203-F). Sand equivalent value shall
not be less than 80, unless higher value is shown on Drawings.
E. Mineral Filler: Type “C” or Type “F” fly ash of acceptable quality and meeting
requirements of ASTM C 618 may be used as mineral admixture in concrete mixture.
When fly ash mineral filler is used, store and inspect in accordance with ASTM C
618. Do not use fly ash in amounts to exceed 25 percent by weight of cementatious
material in mix design. Cement content may be reduced when strength requirements
can be met. Note: When fly ash is used, term "cement" is defined as cement plus fly
ash.
F. Air Entraining Agent: Furnish air entraining agent conforming to requirements of

ASTM C 260.
G. Water Reducer: Water reducing admixture conforming to requirements of ASTM C

494 may be used when required to improve workability of concrete. Amount and type
of admixture is subject to approval by Project Manager.
H. Reinforcing Steel:
1. Provide new billet steel manufactured by open hearth process and conforming
to ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Store steel to protect it from mechanical injury
and rust. At time of placement, steel shall be free from dirt, scale, rust, paint,
oil, or other injurious materials.
2. Cold bend reinforcing steel to shapes shown. Once steel has been bent, it may
not be rebent.
02751-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
3. Provide wire fabric conforming to ASTM A 1064. Use fabric in which

longitudinal and transverse wires have been electrically welded at points of
intersection. Welds shall have sufficient strength not to be broken during
handling or placing. Conform welding and fabrication of fabric sheets to
ASTM A 1064.
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Conform Equipment to requirements of ASTM C94.
2.03 MIXING
A. Flexural strength shall be as specified using test specimens prepared in accordance

with ASTM C 31 and tested in accordance with ASTM C78 (using simple beam with
third-point loading). Compressive strength shall be as specified using test specimens
prepared in accordance with ASTM C 31 and tested in accordance with ASTM C 39.
Determine and measure batch quantity of each ingredient, including water for batch
designs and all concrete produced for Work. Mix shall conform to these
specifications and other requirements indicated on Drawings.
B. Mix design to produce concrete which will have flexural strength of 500 psi at 7 days
and 600 psi at 28 days. Minimum compressive strength shall be 3,000 pounds per
square inches for 7 days and 4,000 pounds per square inches at 28 days when tested
in accordance with ASTM C39. Slump of concrete shall be at least 2-inches but no
more than 5-inches, when tested in accordance with ASTM C143.
1. Concrete pavement, including curb, curb and gutter, and saw-tooth curb, shall
contain at least 5 1/2 sacks (94 pounds per sack) of cement per cubic yard,
with not more than 6.5 gallons of water, net, per sack of cement (water-
cement ratio maximum 0.57). Determine cement content in accordance with
ASTM C 138. Addition of mineral filler may be used to improve workability
or plasticity of concrete to limits specified.
2. Coarse dry aggregate shall not exceed 85 percent of loose volume of concrete.
3. Add air-entraining admixture to ensure uniform distribution of agent

throughout batch. Base air content of freshly mixed air-entrained concrete
upon trial mixes with materials to be used in Work, adjusted to produce
concrete of required plasticity and workability. Percentage of air entrainment
in mix shall be 4 1/2 percent plus or minus 1 1/2 percent. Determine air
content by testing in accordance with ASTM C 231.
4. Use retardant when temperature exceeds 90 degrees F. Proportion as

recommended by manufacturer. Use same brand as used for air-entraining
agent. Add and batch material using same methods as used for air-entraining
agent.
C. Use high early strength concrete pavement to limits shown on Drawings. Design to
meet following:
02751-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Concrete Mix: Flexural strength greater than or equal to 500 psi at 72 hours.
2. Cement: Minimum of 7 sacks of cement per cubic yard of concrete.
3. Water-Cement Ratio maximum of 0.45. Slump of concrete shall a maximum

of 5-inches, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 143.
4. Other requirements for proportioning, mixing, execution, testing, etc., shall be

in accordance with this Section 02751 - Concrete Paving.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify compacted base is ready to support imposed loads and meets compaction
requirements.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Properly prepare, shape and compact each section of subgrade before placing forms,
reinforcing steel or concrete. After forms have been set to proper grade and
alignment, use subgrade planer to shape subgrade to its final cross section. Check
contour of subgrade with template.
B. Remove subgrade that will not support loaded form. Replace and compact subgrade
to required density.
3.03 EQUIPMENT
A. Alternate equipment and methods, other than those required by this Section, may be
used provided equal or better results will be obtained. Maintain equipment for
preparing subgrade and for finishing and compacting concrete in good working order.
B. Subgrade Planer and Template:
1. Use subgrade planer with adjustable cutting blades to trim subgrade to exact
section shown on Drawings. Select planer mounted on visible rollers which
ride on forms. Planer frame must have sufficient weight so that it will remain
on form, and have strength and rigidity that, under tests made by changing
support from wheels to center, planer will not develop deflection of more than
1/8-inch. Tractors used to pull planer shall not produce ruts or indentations in
subgrade. When slip form method of paving is used, operate subgrade planer
on prepared track grade or have it controlled by electronic sensor system
operated from string line to establish horizontal alignment and elevation of
subbase.
02751-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Provide template for checking contour of subgrade. Template shall be long

enough to rest upon side forms and have strength and rigidity that, when
supported at center, maximum deflection shall not exceed 1/8-inch. Fit
template with accurately adjustable rods projecting downward at 1-foot
intervals. Adjust these rods to gauge cross sections of slab bottom when
template is resting on side forms.
C. Machine Finisher: Provide power-driven, transverse finishing machine designed and

operated to strike off and consolidate concrete. Machine shall have two screeds
accurately adjusted to crown of pavement and with frame equipped to ride on forms.
Use finishing machine with rubber tires when it operates on concrete pavement.
D. Hand Finishing:
1. Provide mechanical strike and tamping template 2-feet longer than width of
pavement to be finished. Shape template to pavement section.
2. Provide two bridges to ride on forms and span pavement for finishing
expansion and dummy joints. Provide floats and necessary edging and
finishing tools.
E. Burlap Drag or transverse broom for Finishing Slab: Furnish four plies of 10-ounce
burlap material fastened to bridge to form continuous strip of burlap full width of
pavement. Maintain contact 3-foot width of burlap material with pavement surface.
Keep burlap drags clean and free of encrusted mortar.
F. Vibrators: Furnish mechanically-operated, synchronized vibrators mounted on

tamping bar which rides on forms and hand-manipulated mechanical vibrators.
Furnish vibrators with frequency of vibration to provide maximum consolidation of
concrete without segregation.
G. Traveling Form Paver: Approved traveling form paver may be used in lieu of
construction methods employing forms, consolidating, finishing and floating
equipment. Meet requirements of this specification for subgrade, pavement
tolerances, pavement depth, alignments, consolidation, finishing and workmanship.
When traveling form paver does not provide concrete paving that meets compaction,
finish, and tolerance requirements of this Specification, immediately discontinue its
use and use conventional methods.
1. Equip traveling paver with longitudinal transangular finishing float adjustable

to crown and grade. Use float long enough to extend across pavement to side
forms or edge of slab.
2. Ensure that continuous deposit of concrete can be made at paver to minimize

starting and stopping. Use conventional means of paving locations
inaccessible to traveling paver, or having horizontal or vertical curvature that
traveling paver cannot negotiate.
02751-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
3. Where Drawings require tie bars for adjacent paving, securely tie and support
bars to prevent displacement. Tie bars may be installed with approved
mechanical bar inserter mounted on traveling-form paver. Replace pavement
in which tie bars assume final position other than that shown on Drawings.
3.04 FORMS
A. Side Forms: Use metal forms of approved shape and section. Preferred depth of form
is equal to required edge thickness of pavement. Forms with depths greater or less
than required edge thickness of pavement will be permitted, provided difference
between form depth and edge thickness when not greater than 1-inch, and further
provided that forms of depth less than pavement edge are brought to required edge
thickness by securely attaching wood or metal strips to bottom of form, or by
grouting under form. Bottom flange of form shall be same size as thickness of
pavement. Aluminum forms are not allowed. Forms shall be approved by Project
Manager. Length of form sections shall be not less than 10-feet and each section shall
provide for staking in position with not less than 3 pins. Flexible or curved forms of
wood or metal of proper radius shall be used for curves of 200-foot radius or less.
Forms shall have ample strength and shall be provided with adequate devices for
secure setting so that when in-place they will withstand, without visible springing or
settlement, impact and vibration of finishing machine. In no case shall base width be
less than 8-inches for form 8-inches or more in height. Forms shall be free from warp,
bends or kinks and shall be sufficiently true to provide straight edge on concrete. Top
of each form section, when tested with straight edge, shall conform to requirements
specified for surface of completed pavement. Provide sufficient forms for satisfactory
placement of concrete. For short radius curves, forms less than 10-feet in length or
curved forms may be used. For curb returns at street intersections and driveways,
wood forms of good grade and quality may be used.
B. Form Setting:
1. Rest forms directly on subgrade. Do not shim with pebbles or dirt. Accurately
set forms to required grade and alignment and, during entire operation of
placing, compacting and finishing of concrete, do not deviate from this grade
and alignment more than 1/8-inch in 10-feet of length. Do not remove forms
for at least 8 hours after completion of finishing operations. Provide supply of
forms that will be adequate for orderly and continuous placing of concrete. Set
forms and check grade for at least 300-feet ahead of mixer or as approved by
Project Manager.
2. Adjacent slabs may be used instead of forms, provided that concrete is well
protected from possible damage by finishing equipment. Do not use adjacent
slabs for forms until concrete has aged at least 7 days.
02751-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
3. Prior to form setting, grade subgrade appropriately so that when the forms are
set, and the concrete is poured, finished, and cured, there is positive drainage,
free of sitting water / ponding in the gutter (“gutter ponds”) or on the
pavement area of new panels. This requirement may not be capable of being
met at the construction joint between an existing pavement panel and a new
individual pavement panel that is properly installed to match the existing
panel. However, this requirement shall be met between two new panels and
within the area of new panels.
3.05 REINFORCING STEEL AND JOINT ASSEMBLIES
A. Place reinforcing steel and joint assemblies and position securely as indicated on
Drawings. Wire reinforcing bars securely together at intersections and splices. Bars
and coatings shall be free of rust, dirt or other foreign matter when concrete is placed.
Secure reinforcing steel to chairs.
B. Position pavement joint assemblies at required locations and elevations, and rigidly
secure in position. Install dowel bars in joint assemblies, each parallel to pavement
surface and to center line of pavement, as shown.
C. Cut header boards, joint filler, and other material used for forming joints to receive
each dowel bar.
D. Secure in required position to prevent displacement during placing and finishing of

concrete.
E. Drill dowels into existing pavement, secure with epoxy, and provide paving headers
as required to provide rigid pavement sections.
F. Use sufficient number of chairs for steel reinforcement bars to maintain position of
bars within allowable tolerances. Place reinforcement as shown on Drawings. In
plane of steel parallel to nearest surface of concrete, bars shall not vary from plan
placement by more than 1/12 of spacing between bars. In plane of steel perpendicular
to nearest surface of concrete, bars shall not vary from plan placement by more than
1/4-inch.
3.06 FIBROUS REINFORCING
A. Do not use fibrous reinforcing to replace structural, load-bearing, or moment-

reinforcing steel.
3.07 PLACEMENT
A. Place concrete when air temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is
above 35 degrees F and rising. Do not place concrete when temperature is below 40
degrees F and falling.
B. Place concrete within 90 minutes after initial water had been added. Remove and
dispose of concrete not placed within this period.
02751-10
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Concrete slump during placement shall be 1 to 5-inches, except when using traveling-
form paver, slump shall be maximum of 2-inches.
D. Deposit concrete continuously in successive batches. Distribute concrete in manner

that will require as little rehandling as possible. Where hand spreading is necessary,
distribute concrete with shovels or by other approved methods. Use only concrete
rakes in handling concrete. At placement interruption of more than 30 minutes, place
transverse construction joint at stopping point. Remove and replace sections less than
10-feet long.
E. Take special care in placing and spading concrete against forms and at longitudinal
and transverse joints to prevent honeycombing. Voids in edge of finished pavement
will be cause for rejection.
3.08 COMPACTION
A. Consolidate concrete using mechanical vibrators as specified herein. Extend vibratory

unit across pavement, not quite touching side forms. Space individual vibrators at
close enough intervals to vibrate and consolidate entire width of pavement uniformly.
Mount mechanical vibrators to avoid contact with forms, reinforcement, transverse or
longitudinal joints.
B. Furnish enough hand-manipulated mechanical vibrators for proper consolidation of

concrete along forms, at joints and in areas not covered by mechanically controlled
vibrators.
3.09 FINISHING
A. Finish concrete pavement with power-driven transverse finishing machines or by

hand finishing methods.
1. Hand finish with mechanical strike and tamping template in same width as
pavement to be finished. Shape template to pavement section shown on
Drawings. Move strike template forward in direction of placement,
maintaining slight excess of material in front of cutting edge. Make minimum
of two trips over each area. Screed pavement surface to required section.
Work screed with combined transverse and longitudinal motion in direction
work is progressing. Maintain screed in contact with forms. Use longitudinal
float to level surface.
B. On narrow strips and transitions, finish concrete pavement by hand. Thoroughly work
concrete around reinforcement and embedded fixtures. Strike off concrete with strike-
off screed. Move strike-off screed forward with combined transverse and longitudinal
motion in direction work is progressing, maintaining screed in contact with forms,
and maintaining slight excess of materials in front of cutting edge. Tamp concrete
with tamping template. Use longitudinal float to level surface.
02751-11
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. After completion of straightedge operation, make first pass of burlap drag or

transverse broom as soon as construction operations permit and before water sheen
has disappeared from surface. Follow with as many passes as required to produce
desired texture depth. Permit no unnecessary delays between passes. Keep drag wet,
clean and free from encrusted mortar during use.
3.10 JOINTS AND JOINT SEALING
A. Conform to requirements of Section 02752 - Concrete Pavement Joints.
3.11 CONCRETE CURING
A. Conform to requirements of Section 02753 - Concrete Pavement Curing.
3.12 TOLERANCES
A. Test entire surface before initial set and correct irregularities or undulations. Bring
surface within requirements of following test and then finish. Place 10-foot
straightedge parallel to center of roadway to bridge depressions and touch high spots.
Do not permit ordinates measured from face of straight edge to surface of pavement
to exceed 1/16-inch per foot from nearest point of contact. Maximum ordinate with
10-foot straightedge shall not exceed 1/8-inch. Grind spots in excess of required
tolerances to meet surface test requirements. Restore texture by grooving concrete to
meet surface finishing specifications.
B. Compressive Strength Test Specimens: Make four test specimens for compressive
strength test in accordance with ASTM C 31 for each 150 cubic yards or less of
pavement that is placed in one day. Test two specimens at 7 days or at number of
hours as directed by the Project Manager for high early strength concrete. Test
remaining two specimens at 28 days. Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 39.
Minimum compressive strength shall be 3000 pounds per square inch for first two
specimens and 3500 pounds per square inch at 28 days.
C. When compressive test indicates failure, make yield test in accordance with ASTM C
138 for cement content per cubic yard of concrete. When cement content is found to
be less than that specified per cubic yard, increase batch weights until amount of
cement per cubic yard of concrete conforms to requirements.
D. Minimum of one 4-inch core will be taken at random locations per 375-feet per 12-
feet lane or 500 square yards of pavement to measure in-place depth. Measure depth
in accordance with ASTM C 174. Each core may be tested for 28 day compressive
strength according to methods of ASTM C 42. 28 day compressive strength of each
core tested shall be a minimum of 3000 pounds per square inch.
02751-12
CITY OF HOUSTON
E. Request, at option, three additional cores in vicinity of cores indicating

nonconforming in- place depths at no cost to City. In-place depth at these locations
shall be average depth of four cores.
F. Fill cores and density test sections with new concrete paving or non-shrink grout.
A. Remove and replace areas of pavement found deficient in thickness by more than 10
percent, or that fail compressive strength tests, with concrete of thickness shown on
Drawings.
B. When measurement of any core is less than specified thickness by more than 10
percent, actual thickness of pavement in this area will be determined by taking
additional cores at 10-foot intervals parallel to centerline in each direction from
deficient core until, in each direction, core is taken which is not deficient by more
than 10 percent. Exploratory cores for deficient thickness will not be used in averages
for adjusted unit price. Exploratory cores are to be used only to determine length of
pavement in unit that is to be removed and replaced. Replace nonconforming
pavement sections at no additional cost to City.
C. Remove and replace new pavement panels that do not have positive drainage and are
not free of sitting water / ponding in the gutter (“gutter ponds”) or on the pavement
area of new panels. This requirement does not apply at the construction joint between
existing pavement and a new individual panel that is properly installed to match the
existing panel. However, this requirement applies between two new panels and
within the area of new panels.
3.15 UNIT PRICE ADJUSTMENT
A. Unit price adjustments shall be made for in-place depth determined by cores as
follows:
1. Adjusted Unit Price shall be ratio of average thickness as determined by cores

to thickness bid upon, times unit price.
2. Apply adjustment to lower limit of 90 percent and upper limit of 100 percent
of unit price.
3. Average depth below 90 percent but greater than 80 percent may be accepted
by Project Manager at adjusted Unit Price of:
a. Unit Price Bid - [2 x (1-ratio) x Unit Price Bid]
b. Ratio equals average core thickness divided by thickness bid upon
c. 0.9 ratio pays 80 percent of unit price and 0.8 ratio pays 60 percent of
unit price.
02751-13
CITY OF HOUSTON
4. Average depth below 80 percent will be rejected by Project Manager.
3.16 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
A. Restore pavement markings to match those existing in accordance with City of

Houston standard specifications and details and Project Manager's requirements.
3.17 PROTECTION
A. Barricade pavement section to prevent use until concrete has attained minimum
design strength. Cure barricade pavement section for minimum 72 hours before use.
Do not open pavement to traffic until concrete is at least 10 days old. Pavement may
be open to traffic earlier provided Contractor pays for testing and additional specimen
once 7 day specified strength is obtained. Pavement may be opened when high early
strength concrete is used meeting specified 72 hour strength.
B. High early strength concrete may be used to provide access at driveways, street
intersections, esplanades and other locations approved by Project Manager.
C. On those sections of pavement to be opened to traffic, seal joints, clean pavement,

and place earth against pavement edges before permitting use by traffic. Opening of
pavement to traffic shall not relieve responsibility for Work.
D. Maintain concrete paving in good condition until completion of Work.
E. Repair defects by replacing concrete to full depth.
END OF SECTION
02751-14
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION CONCRETE PAVEMENT JOINTS
SECTION 02752
CONCRETE PAVEMENT JOINTS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Joints for concrete paving; concrete sidewalks, concrete driveways, curbs, and curb
and gutters.
B. Saw-cutting existing concrete or asphalt pavements for new joints.
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for street pavement expansion joints, with or without load transfer, is
on linear foot basis.
2. Payment for horizontal dowels is on a unit price basis for each horizontal
dowel.
3. No separate payment will be made for formed or sawed street pavement

contraction joints and longitudinal weakened plane joints. Include payment in
unit price for Concrete Paving.
4. No separate payment will be made for joints for Curb, Curb and Gutter, Saw-
tooth Curb, Concrete Sidewalks, and Concrete Driveways. Include payment in
unit price for Curb and Gutter, Concrete Sidewalks, and Concrete Driveways.
5. Payment will be made for Preformed Expansion Joints on a linear foot basis
only when field conditions require that sidewalk be moved adjacent to
existing concrete structure (i.e., street, back of curb, etc.).
1.04 REFERENCES
02752-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. ASTM A 615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement. ASTM D 994 - Standard Specification for Preformed
Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type).
B. ASTM D 1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous
Types).
C. ASTM D 6690 - Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied,
for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements.
D. TxDOT Tex-525-C - Tests for Asphalt and Concrete Joint Sealers
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit product data for joint sealing compound and proposed sealing equipment for
approval.
C. Submit samples of dowel cup, metal supports, and deformed metal strip for approval.
Submit manufacturer's recommendation for placing sealant(s).
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BOARD EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL
A. Filler board of selected stock. Use wood of density and type as follows:
1. Construction heart cypress weighing no more than 40 pounds per cubic foot,
after being oven dried to constant weight.
2. Construction heart redwood weighing no more than 30 pounds per cubic foot,
after being oven dried to constant weight.
2.02 PREFORMED EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL
A. Bituminous fiber and bituminous mastic composition material conforming to ASTM

D 994 and ASTM D 1751.
2.03 JOINT SEALING COMPOUND
A. Conform joint sealants to one of sealant classes described in this section.
B. Conform hot-poured rubber-asphalt compound to ASTM D 6690.
C. Two-component Synthetic Polymer.
02752-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Curing is to be by polymerization and not by evaporation of solvent or fluxing

of harder particles.
2. Cure sufficiently at average temperature of 25 ± 1 C (77 ± 2 F) so as not to

pick up under wheels of traffic in maximum three hours.
3. Performance requirements, when tested in accordance with TxDOT Tex-525-

C, shall meet above curing times and requirements as follows:
Cold-Extruded and Cold-Pourable (Self-Leveling) Specifications
Property Requirement
Penetration, 25°C (77°F) 150 g Cone, 5 s, 0.1 mm (in.),
130
maximum
Bond and Extension 50%, -29°C (-20°F), 3 cycles*:
• Dry Concrete Block Pass
• Steel blocks (Primed, if recommended by Pass
manufacturer)
• Steel blocks shall be used when armor joints are
specified
Flow at 70°C (158°F) None
Water content % by mass, maximum 5.0
Resilience:
• Original sample, % min. (cured) 50
• Oven-aged at 70°C (158°F), % min. 50
Cold-extruded material only - Cold Flow (10 minutes) None
* After bond and extension test, there shall be no evidence of cracking,

separation or other opening that is over 3 millimeters (1/8-inch) deep in
sealer or between sealer and test blocks.
4. Provide cold-extruded type for vertical or sloping joints.
5. Provide self-leveling type for horizontal joints.
D. Self-Leveling, Low Modulus Silicone or Polyurethane Sealant for Asphaltic Concrete

and Portland Cement Concrete Joints. This shall be a single component self-leveling
silicone or polyurethane material that is compatible with both asphalt and concrete
pavements. The sealer shall not require a primer for bond; a backer rod shall be
required which is compatible with the sealant; no reaction shall occur between rod
and sealant.
1. When tested in accordance with TxDOT Tex-525-C, self-leveling sealant shall

meet following requirements:
02752-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
Self-Leveling, Low Modulus Silicone or Polyurethane Sealant
Property Requirements
Tack Free Time, 25 ± 1°C (77 ± 2°F),
120 maximum
minutes
Nonvolatile content, % by mass 93 minimum
Tensile Strength and 24 Hour Extension
Test:
* Initial, 10-day cure, 25 ± 1°C (77 ± 2°F), * 21 to 69 (3 to 10)
kPa (psi)
* After Water Immersion, kPa (psi) * 21 to 69 (3 to 10)
* After Heat Aging, kPa (psi) * 21 to 69 (3 to 10)
* After Cycling, -29°C (-20°F), 50%, 3 * 21 to 69 (3 to 10)
cycles, kPa (psi)
* 24 Hour Extension * Pass (All Specimens)
After 24 hours, there shall be no
evidence of cracking, separation or
other opening that is over 3 mm (1/8
in.) deep at any point in the sealer or
between the sealer and test blocks.
2.04 LOAD TRANSMISSION DEVICES
A. Smooth, steel dowel bars conforming to ASTM A 615, Grade 60. When indicated on
Drawings, encase one end of dowel bar in approved cap having inside diameter 1/16-
inch greater than diameter of dowel bar.
B. Deformed steel tie bars conforming to ASTM A 615, Grade 60.
2.05 SUPPORTS FOR REINFORCING STEEL AND JOINT ASSEMBLY
A. Employ supports of approved shape and size that will secure reinforcing steel and
joint assembly in correct position during placing and finishing of concrete. Space
supports as directed by Project Manager.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PLACEMENT
A. When new Work is adjacent to existing concrete, place joints at same location as
existing joints in adjacent pavement.
B. If limit of removal of existing concrete or asphalt pavement does not fall on existing
joint, saw cut existing pavement minimum of 2-inches deep to provide straight,
smooth joint surface without chipping, spalling or cracks.
02752-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Place transverse construction joint wherever concrete placement must be stopped for
more than 30 minutes. Place longitudinal construction joints at interior edges of
pavement lanes using No. 6 deformed tie bars, 30-inches long and spaced 18-inches
on centers.
3.03 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Place 3/4-inch expansion joints at radius points of curb returns for cross street
intersections, or as located in adjacent pavement but no further than 80 feet apart.
Use no boards shorter than 6 feet. When pavement is 24 feet or narrower, use not
more than 2 lengths of board. Secure pieces to form straight joint. Shape board filler
accurately to cross section of concrete slab. Use load transmission devices of type and
size shown on Drawings unless otherwise specified or shown as "No Load Transfer
Device." Seal with joint sealing compound.
3.04 CONTRACTION JOINTS
A. Place contraction joints at same locations as in adjacent pavement or at spaces

indicated on Drawings. Place smoothed, painted and oiled dowels accurately and
normal to joint. Seal groove with joint sealing compound.
3.05 LONGITUDINAL WEAKENED PLANE JOINTS
A. Place longitudinal weakened plane joints at spaces indicated on Drawings. If more

than 15 feet in width is poured, longitudinal joint must be saw cut. Seal groove with
joint sealing compound.
3.06 SAWED JOINTS
A. Use sawed joints as alternate to contraction and weakened plane joints. Use circular
cutter capable of cutting straight line groove minimum of 1/4-inch wide. Maintain
depth of one quarter of pavement thickness. Commence sawing as soon as concrete
has hardened sufficiently to permit cutting without chipping, spalling or tearing and
prior to initiation of cracks. Once sawing has commenced, continue until completed.
Make saw cut with one pass. Complete sawing within 24 hours of concrete
placement. Saw joints at required spacing consecutively in sequence of concrete
placement.
B. Concrete Saw: Provide sawing equipment adequate in power to complete sawing to

required dimensions and within required time. Maintain ample supply of saw blades
at work site during sawing operations. Maintain sawing equipment on job during
concrete placement.
3.07 TRANSVERSE WEAKENED PLANE JOINTS
02752-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Saw cut transverse contraction joints every 20-feet (nominally) in the pavement, but
no greater than 20-feet between saw cuts. The spacing of the saw cuts shall be at
regular intervals between expansion joints. The width of the saw cuts shall be a
minimum of ¼-inch wide, and the depth of the saw cuts shall be one-quarter of the
pavement thickness. Commence saw cutting as soon as concrete has hardened
sufficiently to allow saw cutting without damage to the pavement (affecting finish,
chipping, spalling, tearing, etc.) and within 24 hours after concrete placement, but
prior to initiation of cracks. Once sawing has commenced on a cut, continue until the
cut is completed. Make each saw cut with one pass. Make saw cuts at required
spacing consecutively in sequence of concrete placement. Seal the saw cuts
(grooves) with joint sealing compound. The goal of the transverse saw cutting is to
create weakened joints that will prevent random, non-linear, surface contraction
cracking.
B. The dimension D/3 (but no less than 3-inches) on City of Houston Standard Drawing
Number 02751-01 is measured from the bottom of the concrete slab.
C. Equipment requirements shall be in accordance with paragraph 3.06.B.
3.08 JOINTS FOR CURB, CURB AND GUTTER
A. Place 3/4-inch preformed expansion joints through curb and gutters at locations of
expansion and contraction joints in pavement, at end of radius returns at street
intersections and driveways, and at curb inlets. Maximum spacing shall be 120-foot
centers.
3.09 JOINTS FOR CONCRETE SIDEWALKS
A. Provide 3/4-inch expansion joints conforming to ASTM A 1751 along and across
sidewalk at back of curbs, at intersections with driveways, steps, and walls; and
across walk at intervals not to exceed 36 feet. Provide expansion joint material
conforming to ASTM D 994 for small radius curves and around fire hydrants and
utility poles. Extend expansion joint material full depth of slab.
3.10 JOINTS FOR CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS
A. Provide 3/4-inch expansion joints conforming to ASTM D 1751 across driveway in

line with street face of sidewalks, at existing concrete driveways, and along
intersections with sidewalks and other structures. Extend expansion joint material full
depth of slab.
3.11 JOINT SEALING
A. Seal joints only when surface and joints are dry, ambient temperature is above 50
degrees F and less than 85 degrees F and weather is not foggy or rainy.
02752-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Use joint sealing equipment in like new working condition throughout joint sealing
operation, and be approved by Project Manager. Use concrete grooving machine or
power-operated wire brush and other equipment such as plow, brooms, brushes,
blowers or hydro or abrasive cleaning as required to produce satisfactory joints.
C. Clean joints of loose scale, dirt, dust and curing compound. The term joint includes
wide joint spaces, expansion joints, dummy groove joints or cracks, either preformed
or natural. Remove loose material from concrete surfaces adjacent to joints.
D. Fill joints neatly with joint sealer to depth shown. Pour sufficient joint sealer into
joints so that, upon completion, surface of sealer within joint will be 1/4-inch above
level of adjacent surface or at elevation as directed.
3.12 PROTECTION
A. Maintain joints in good condition until completion of Work.
B. Replace damaged joints material with new material as required by this Section.
END OF SECTION
02752-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION CONCRETE PAVEMENT CURING
SECTION 02753
CONCRETE PAVEMENT CURING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Curing of Portland cement concrete paving.
A. Unit Prices.
1. No separate payment will be made for concrete curing under this Section.
Include payment in unit price for Concrete Paving, Concrete Sidewalks,
Concrete Driveways, Curbs, and Curb and Gutters.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 156 - Standard Test Method for Water Loss [from a Mortar Specimen]
Through Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compounds for Concrete.
B. ASTM C 171 - Standard Specifications for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
C. ASTM C 309 - Standard Specifications for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds

for Curing Concrete.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit manufacturer's product data for cover materials and liquid membrane-forming
compounds.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
02753-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
2.01 COVER MATERIALS FOR CURING
A. Conform curing materials to one of the following:
1. Polyethylene Film: Opaque pigmented white film conforming to requirements

of ASTM C 171.
2. Waterproofed Paper: Paper conforming to requirements of ASTM C 171.
3. Cotton Mats: Single layer of cotton filler completely enclosed in cover of

cotton cloth. Mats shall contain not less than 3/4 of a pound of uniformly
distributed cotton filler per square yard of mat. Cotton cloth used for covering
materials shall weigh not less than 6 ounces per square yard. Stitch mats so
that mat will contact surface of pavement at all points when saturated with
water.
2.02 LIQUID MEMBRANE-FORMING COMPOUNDS
A. Conform liquid membrane-forming compounds to ASTM C 309. Membrane shall

restrict loss of water to not more than 0.55 kg/m2 in 72 hours using test method
ASTM C 156.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CURING REQUIREMENT
A. Cure concrete pavement by protecting against loss of moisture for period of not less
than 72 hours immediately upon completion of finishing operations. Do not use
membrane curing for concrete pavement to be overlaid by asphalt concrete.
B. Failure to provide sufficient cover material shall be cause for immediate suspension
of concreting operations.
3.02 POLYETHYLENE FILM CURING
A. Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, apply
water in form of fine spray. Cover surface with polyethylene film so film will remain
in direct contact with surface during specified curing period.
B. Cover entire surface and both edges of pavement slab. Overlap joints in film sheets
minimum of 12 inches. Immediately repair tears or holes occurring during curing
period by placing acceptable moisture-proof patches or replacing.
3.03 WATERPROOFED PAPER CURING
A. Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, apply
water in form of fine spray. Cover surface with waterproofed paper so paper will
remain in direct contact with surface during specified curing period.
02753-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Prepare waterproofed paper to form blankets of sufficient width to cover entire

surface and both edges of pavement slab, and not be more than 60 feet in length.
Overlap joints in blankets caused by joining paper sheets not less than 5 inches and
securely seal with asphalt cement having melting point of approximately 180 degrees
F. Place blankets to secure overlap of at least 12 inches. Immediately repair tears or
holes appearing in paper during curing period by cementing patches over defects.
3.04 COTTON MAT CURING
A. Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set,
completely cover surface with cotton mats, thoroughly saturated before application,
maintaining contact with surface of pavement equally at all points.
B. Keep mats on pavement for specified curing period. Keep mats saturated so that,
when lightly compressed, water will drip freely from them. Keep banked earth or
cotton mat covering edges saturated.
3.05 LIQUID MEMBRANE-FORMING COMPOUNDS
A. Immediately after free surface moisture, and after concrete has dispersed, apply liquid
membrane-forming compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Moisten concrete by water fogging prior to application of membrane when surface

has become dry.
C. Seal concrete surface with single coat at rate of coverage recommended by

manufacturer and directed by Project Manager, but not less than one gallon per 200
square feet of surface area.
3.06 TESTING MEMBRANE
A. Treated areas will be visually inspected for areas of lighter color of dry concrete as
compared to dump concrete. Test suspected areas by placing few drops of water on
surface. Membrane passes test when water stands in rounded beads or small pools
which can be blown along surface of concrete without wetting surface.
B. Reapply membrane compound immediately at no cost to City when membrane fails

above test.
END OF SECTION
02753-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS
SECTION 02754
CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Portland cement concrete driveways.
C. Section 02337 – Lime/Fly Ash Stabilized Subgrade
D. Section 02338 – Portland Cement Stabilized Subgrade
E. Section 02751 – Concrete Paving
F. Section 02752 – Concrete Pavement Joints
G. Section 02753 – Concrete Pavement Curing
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for concrete driveways is on square foot basis, including excavation.
2. No payment will be made for work in areas where driveway has been
removed or replaced for Contractor's convenience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Concrete: Conform to material and proportion requirements for concrete of Section

02751 - Concrete Paving.
02754-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS
B. Reinforcing Steel: Conform to material requirements for reinforcing steel of Section

C. Preformed Expansion Joint Material: Conform to material requirements for

preformed expansion joint material of Section 02752 - Concrete Pavement Joints.
D. Expansion Joint Filler: Conform to material requirements for expansion joint material
of Section 02752 - Concrete Pavement Joints.
E. Subgrade Materials: Conform to subgrade material requirements of Section 02336 -

Lime Stabilized Subgrade, Section 02337 - Lime/Fly-Ash Stabilized Subgrade, or
Section 02338 - Portland Cement Stabilized Subgrade.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Prepare subgrade in accordance with applicable portions of Section 02336 - Lime

Stabilized Subgrade, Section 02337 - Lime/Fly-Ash Stabilized Subgrade, and Section
02338 - Portland Cement Stabilized Subgrade.
3.02 PLACEMENT
A. Place and finish concrete in accordance with applicable portions of Section 02751 -
Concrete Paving.
3.03 JOINTS
A. Install joints in concrete driveway in accordance with Section 02752 - Concrete

Pavement Joints.
A. Cure concrete driveway in accordance with Section 02753 - Concrete Pavement

Curing.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Conform to applicable requirements of Section 02753 - Concrete Pavement Curing.
END OF SECTION
02754-2
CITY OF HOUSTON COLORED CONCRETE FOR
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION MEDIANS AND SIDEWALKS
SECTION 02761
COLORED CONCRETE FOR MEDIANS AND SIDEWALKS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Colored concrete for medians and sidewalks.
C. Section 02751 – Concrete Paving
D. Section 02772 – Concrete Medians and Directional Islands
E. Section 02775 – Concrete Sidewalks
A. Unit Prices.
1. No separate payment will be made for coloring agent under this Section.
Include payment in unit price bid for concrete sidewalks, and concrete
medians and directional islands.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit product data for proposed coloring agent.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Coloring Agent: Provide dry-shake color hardener consisting of quartz-silica mixture

of finely-graded, non-metallic aggregates, plasticizer and cement binder for
producing color as shown on Drawings.
02761-1
CITY OF HOUSTON COLORED CONCRETE FOR
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION MEDIANS AND SIDEWALKS
B. Concrete: Conform to material and proportion requirements of Section 02751 -

Concrete Paving.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONCRETE MEDIANS
A. Install concrete medians in accordance with requirements of PART 3 of Section

02772 - Concrete Medians and Directional Islands with addition of procedure for
application of coloring agent as required by Paragraph 3.03, Coloring Agent.
3.02 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS
A. Install concrete sidewalks in accordance with requirements of PART 3 of Section

02775 - Concrete Sidewalks with addition of procedure for application of coloring
agent as required by Paragraph 3.03, Coloring Agent.
3.03 COLORING AGENT
A. Apply coloring agent on newly finished concrete surface as soon as job conditions
permit, but in no event later than 2 hours after concrete is placed, at rate
recommended by manufacturer and approved by Project Manager.
B. Apply color hardener uniformly to surface by dry-shake method when no excess

moisture shows at surface of concrete substrate, but while concrete is still plastic
throughout. Do not sprinkle or otherwise add water to surface during application or
finishing. Necessary moisture for color hardener shall come from concrete substrate
in order to develop proper bond and assure adequate density for color-hardened
surface.
C. First shake shall consume two-thirds of material. Withhold one-third for second shake
and final touch-up. After first shake, float surface thoroughly by mechanical or hand
methods. Do not trowel surface between first and second shakes.
D. Apply second shake evenly, then float and trowel surface. Retain small quantity of
material from second shake for touching up nonuniform or weak-toned areas.
Minimize hard troweling and use consistent finishing practices to ensure uniformity
of color.
END OF SECTION
02761-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION BLAST CLEANING OF PAVEMENT
SECTION 02762
BLAST CLEANING OF PAVEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Removal of existing pavement markings.
B. Preparation of pavement surfaces for new pavement markings.
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for blast cleaning of roadway lanes is on linear foot basis for each
width, measured in place.
2. Payment for blast cleaning of symbols and legends is on square foot basis,
measured in place.
3. Payment for removal of raised pavement markings, all types, is on a lump sum
basis.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit description and characteristics of proposed blasting medium and equipment

for approval.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
02762-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION BLAST CLEANING OF PAVEMENT
A. Blasting Media: Quality commercial product capable of producing specified surface

cleanliness without deposition of deleterious materials on cleaned pavement surface.
Do not use high silica content sand that may result in high levels of free crystalline
silica dust particles as blasting agent.
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Equipment shall be power driven and of sufficient capacity to remove pavement

markings. Equipment shall utilize moisture and oil traps of sufficient capacity to
remove contaminants from air and prevent deposition of moisture, oil, or other
contaminants on pavement surface.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 REMOVAL OF EXISTING MARKINGS
A. Remove pavement markings where necessary to prevent driver confusion, or where

indicated on Drawings. Included are areas where it will be necessary for drivers to
cross existing markings which they would not normally cross. Remove or obliterate
markings. Do not damage pavement surface.
3.02 CLEANING FOR PLACEMENT OF MARKERS
A. Remove old pavement markings, loose material, and other contaminants deleterious
to adhesion of new pavement markings to be placed. On Portland cement concrete
pavement, minimize over blasting to prevent damage to pavement surface. Small
particles of tightly adhering existing pavement markings may remain when complete
removal will result in pavement surface damage.
B. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for proper cleaning of pavement surfaces

to receive pavement marking.
END OF SECTION
02762-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS
SECTION 02764
RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Raised pavement markers which include reflectorized and non-reflectorized traffic

buttons, pavement markers and jiggle bars all of which are capable of being attached
to a roadway surface by an adhesive.
B. Section 02762 - Blast Cleaning of Pavement
A. Unit Prices
1. Payment will be based on the number of satisfactorily installed pavement

markers.
2. Unit price bid for each item shall be full compensation for materials,
application of raised pavement markings, equipment, labor, tools, and
incidentals necessary to complete Work in accordance with the plans and
specifications.
3. Refer to Section 01270 – Measurement and Payment for unit price

procedures.
B. Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). When Contract is Stipulated Price Contract, payment
for Work in the Section is included in total Stipulated Price.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. TxDOT DMS-4200, Pavement Markers (Reflectorized)
B. TxDOT DMS-4300, Traffic Buttons
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Raised Pavement Markers shall conform to the requirements of TxDOT DMS-4200,

Pavement Markers (Reflectorized).
02764-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Traffic Buttons shall conform to the requirements of TxDOT DMS-4300, Traffic

Buttons.
C. Testing. The Engineer reserves the right to perform any or all tests required by this
item as a check on the tests reported by the manufacturer. Upon request, the
Contractor shall furnish, free of charge, samples of the material of the size and in the
amount determined by the Engineer for test purposes. In case of any variance, the
Engineer’s tests will govern.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EQUIPMENT
A. Provide the necessary equipment to conduct the work specified herein.
3.02 CONSTRUCTION
A. The Contractor shall establish guides to mark the lateral location of pavement
markings as shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. The Engineer shall
approve locations of these markings and may authorize necessary adjustments from
the plans.
B. The reflective faces of all Type II markers shall be positioned so that the direction of
reflection of one (1) face shall be directly opposite to the direction of reflection of the
other face.
C. Raised Pavement markers Type I-C shall have clear reflector face towards traffic.
Raised pavement markers Type II C-R, shall have the clear face toward the normal
traffic flow and the red face toward wrong-way traffic.
D. Unless otherwise shown on the plans or specified by the Engineer, all raised
pavement markers placed in broken lines shall be placed in line with and midway
between the stripes. The first and last raised pavement marker in a no-passing line
shall be a reflective marker. Buttons used to simulate a 10 feet skip lane lines shall be
spaced at 40 inches.
E. The pavement markers not placed in accordance with the plans or as directed by the
Engineer shall be removed by the Contractor at the Contractor’s expense.
F. Removal of existing pavement markers or residual adhesive from a missing pavement

marker prior to placement of new or replacement marker(s) shall be in conformance
with Section 02762 - Blast Cleaning of Pavement. The portion of the highway surface
to which the raised pavement marker is attached by the adhesive shall be clean and
free of dirt, grease, oil, and moisture at the time of installation. Surface preparation
for installation of raised pavement markers will not be paid for directly, but shall be
considered subsidiary to this item. Unsound pavement or other materials that would
adversely affect the bond of the adhesive shall not be an acceptable surface.
02764-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
G. The hot epoxy adhesive shall be applied so that 100 percent of the bonding area of the
raised pavement marker will be in contact and shall be of sufficient thickness so that
excess adhesive shall be forced out around the perimeter of the raised pavement
marker but without impairing the functional capability of the reflectivity of the
pavement marker. When the project is complete, the raised pavement marker shall be
firmly bonded to the pavement; lines formed by the raised pavement markers shall be
true, and the entire installation shall present a neat appearance.
H. Where required by the Engineer, pavement markings outside the limits of this project
will be removed or adjusted to provide for a proper tie into this project. The old
markings shall be removed or defaced in such a manner that they do not give the
appearance of traffic pavement markings.
END OF SECTION
02764-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION PREFORMED PAVEMENT MARKINGS
SECTION 02765
PREFORMED PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Furnish and install preformed pavement markings, a long-term tape and sheeting
pavement marking material to be used for permanent type longitudinal or transverse
lines and word/symbol legends.
C. Section 02767 – Thermoplastic Pavement Markings
A. Unit Prices
1. Payment for preformed pavement markings is on a linear foot basis.
2. Payment for words and symbols is for each word or symbol.
application of pavement markings, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals
necessary to complete Work in accordance with the plans and specifications.
4. Refer to Section 01270 – Measurement and Payment for unit price measures
for work in the Section is included in total Stipulated Price.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. TxDOT DMS-8240, Permanent Prefabricated Pavement Markings
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
02765-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. All materials shall conform to the requirements of TxDOT DMS-8240 Permanent

Prefabricated Pavement Markings as shown on the plans. Type A, B, or C
prefabricated markings shall be indicated on the plans based upon the traffic
conditions of the roadway and the placement method indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EQUIPMENT
A. Provide the necessary equipment to conduct the work specified herein.
3.02 CONSTRUCTION
A. General: All markings shall be located as shown in the plans. The contractor shall
install the preformed plastic pavement markings to newly paved hot-mix asphaltic
concrete pavements by the in-laid method unless the temperature of the pavement has
reached or fallen below the minimum allowable pavement temperature shown in
Table 1.
Table 1
Acceptable Pavement Temperatures for Application of Pavement Markings
Minimum
Surface Allowable Surface
Hot Mix Asphalt Type Upon
Temperature Pavement Temperature
Which the Performed Pavement
Range for Inlaid Temperature Range for Cold
Marking is to be Applied
Method, °F for Inlaid Laid Method, ° F
Method, °F
Open-Graded Friction Course
(OGFC)
Stone Matrix Asphalt (SMA)
160 °F to 180 °F 160 °F
Dense Graded Hot Mixed Asphalt
w/PG 60 °F to 120 °F
76- or 82-XX Asphalt Cement
Dense Graded Hot Mixed Asphalt
w/PG 120 °F to 155 °F 120 °F
70-, 64-, or 58-XX Asphalt Cement
1. All material shall be placed according to the manufacturer's instructions, and

in accordance with the surface condition, moisture and temperature
requirements listed below:
B. Inlaid Preformed Pavement Markings.
02765-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. This installation procedure shall apply to streets with newly paved asphaltic
concrete surfaces that have attained the temperature ranges shown in Table 1
from initial placement. If at any time after initial placement the pavement
cools to below the minimum allowable temperature as shown in Table 1, the
markings shall be installed as Thermoplastic Pavement Markings per Section
02767 – Thermoplastic Pavement Markings requirements. For portland
cement concrete streets, see Cold-Laid Preformed Pavement Markings (next
section) below.
2. The Contractor shall place and inlay all pavement markings on the newly
placed asphaltic concrete pavement prior to the final rolling of the asphalt.
3. The preformed pavement markings shall be applied after the newly placed
asphaltic concrete pavement has been adequately compacted and within the
temperature range specified in Table 1. The Contractor will be required to
install temporary pavement markings at no additional cost to the City if the
cold-laid method is used. Preformed pavement line markings shall be installed
with a mechanical applicator which shall be capable of placing pavement lines
in a neat, accurate and uniform manner. The mechanical applicator shall be
equipped with a film cut-off device. Word legends and arrows shall be
installed by hand and result in neat, accurate and uniform words and arrows.
The preformed pavement markings shall be inlaid into the asphaltic concrete
surface by means of a mechanical roller. The roller shall be of sufficient
weight capacity to inlay the pavement marking to a minimum depth of 65% of
the material thickness, and to not more than 80% of the material thickness
while the temperature range of the pavement surface is within the ranges
specified in Table 1. In the event the inlaid markings are distorted or
discolored to the point that cleaning does not restore its initial appearance by
the contractor's operations, fail to provide a uniform appearance, or are
installed improperly, such markings shall be removed and replaced in the
finished surface of the pavement as Thermoplastic Pavement Markings per
Section 02767 - Thermoplastic Pavement Markings requirements at no
additional expense to the City.
C. Cold-Laid Preformed Pavement Markings.
1. This installation procedure applies to all Portland cement concrete pavements,

existing asphaltic concrete pavement, and newly placed asphaltic concrete that
at any time has fallen below the minimum allowable temperature specified in
Table 1 after initial placement.
02765-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Pavement on which pavement markings are to be placed shall be cleaned and

prepared prior to placement of markings. Cleaning shall be in conformance
with Section 02762 - Blast Cleaning of Pavement such that contaminants,
loose materials, and conditions deleterious to proper adhesion are removed.
When blast cleaning is required, it shall be done to the extent that a sound
pavement surface is exposed. Surfaces shall be further prepared after cleaning
by sealing or priming, as recommended by the manufacturer. Pavement to
which materials to be applied shall be completely dry. Materials shall not be
applied until concrete pavement has appeared to be dry for a minimum of four
hours and until asphaltic concrete pavement has appeared to be dry for a
minimum of two hours.
3. Pavement and ambient air temperature requirements recommended by the

manufacturer shall be observed. If no temperature requirements are
established by the manufacturer, material shall not be placed if the surface
temperature is outside the acceptable range shown in Table 1 (see column 4 of
this table).
END OF SECTION
02765-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKINGS
SECTION 02767
THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. This item includes the application of thermoplastic pavement markings, in

conformance with the minimum optical and physical properties required for a
thermoplastic road marking compound described herein, in a molten state, onto a
pavement surface.
A. Section 01270 – Measure and Payment
A. Unit Prices
1. Payment for thermoplastic pavement markings is on a linear foot basis.
3. Payment for green colored pavement markings is on a square foot basis.
4. Payment for railroad crossing markings, to include stop line and two
transverse lines, is for each crossing marked. For multi-lane approaches to
railroad crossings, the solid 8-inch lines will be measured in linear feet,
complete in place.
6. Refer to Section 01270 – Measure and Payment for unit price procedures.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. FHWA memorandum dated 4/15/2011: "Interim Approval for Optimal Use of Green
Colored Pavement for Bike Lanes (IA-14)"
B. TxDOT DMS-8220 “Hot Applied Thermoplastic”.
02767-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices.
A. Acceptance.
1. Sampling Procedure. Random samples may be taken at the job site at the
discretion of the City Traffic Engineer for quality assurance. The City reserves
the right to conduct the tests deemed necessary to identify component
materials and verify results of specific tests indicated in conjunction with the
specification requirements.
2. The sample(s) shall be labeled as to the shipment number, lot number, date,
quantity, and any other pertinent information. At least three randomly selected
bags shall be obtained from each lot. A 10 pound) sample from the three bags
shall be submitted for testing and acceptance. The lot size shall be
approximately 44,000 pounds unless the total order is less than this amount.
B. Notification.
1. The contractor shall notify the Construction Inspector 72 hours prior to the
placement of the thermoplastic markings to enable the inspector to be present
during the application operation. At the time of notification, the Contractor
shall indicate the manufacturer and the lot numbers of the thermoplastic that
will be used.
2. A check should be made by the contractor to ensure that the approved lot
numbers appear on the material package. Failure to do so is cause for
rejection.
A. Packaging.
1. Containers. The thermoplastic material shall be delivered in 50 pound

containers or bags of sufficient strength to permit normal handling during
shipment and handling on the job without loss of material.
2. Labeling. Each container shall be clearly marked to indicate the color of the
material, the process batch number and/or manufacturer's formulation number,
the manufacturer's name and address and the date of manufacture.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Warranty or Guarantee. If the normal trade practice for manufacturers is to furnish

warranties or guarantees for the materials and equipment specified herein, the
Contractor shall turn the guarantees and warranties over to the Engineer for potential
dealing with the manufacturers. The extent of such warranties or guarantees will not
be a factor in selecting the successful bidder.
02767-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. All materials shall conform to the requirements of TxDOT DMS-8220 "Hot Applied
Thermoplastic." Thermoplastic materials shall be stored in a dry environment to
minimize the amount of moisture retained during storage.
B. Materials used for green colored pavement (bicycle green) shall be manufactured
with appropriate pigment to ensure that the resulting colors comply with the Light
Green color as specified in the FHWA memorandum dated 4/15/2011: "Interim
Approval for Optimal Use of Green Colored Pavement for Bike Lanes (IA-14)".
Green colored pavement to be defined as transverse markings.
A. Manufacturer's Responsibility.
1. Sampling and Testing. The manufacturer shall submit test results from an
approved independent laboratory. All material samples shall be obtained 20
days in advance of the pavement marking operations. The cost of testing shall
be included in the price of thermoplastic material. The approved independent
laboratory's test results shall be submitted to the City Traffic Engineer in the
form of a certified test report.
2. Bill of Lading. The manufacturer shall furnish the Material and Tests
Laboratory with copies of Bills of Lading for all materials inspected. Bill of
lading shall indicate the consignee and the destination, date of shipment, lot
numbers, quantity, type of material, and location of source.
3. Material Acceptance. Final acceptance of a particular lot of thermoplastic will

be based on the following.
a. Compliance with the specification for material composition

requirements verified by approved independent laboratory with tests
results.
b. Compliance with the specification for the physical properties required

and verified by an approved independent laboratory with test results.
c. Manufacturer's test results for each lot thermoplastic have been

received.
d. Identification requirements are satisfactory.
PART 3 EXECUTION
02767-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
3.01 EQUIPMENT
A. Provide the necessary equipment to conduct the work specified herein. All equipment
shall be maintained in good working order such that neat and clean thermoplastic
markings are applied at the proper thicknesses and glass beads are placed at the
correct rate. Equipment that is deemed deficient by the Engineer shall be replaced
immediately.
3.02 CONSTRUCTION
A. The appearance of the finished markings shall have a uniform surface, crisp edges
with a minimum over-spray, clean cut-off, meet straightness requirements and
conform to the design drawings and/or engineer instructions.
B. The contractor shall provide the Engineer with certification from the marking
manufacturer that contractor has been adequately trained and certified to apply the
manufacturer's material. This certification shall be considered current if the
certification date provided by the manufacturer is within two years of the date of
marking application.
C. All striping and pavement markings shall be placed in accordance with the
requirements of this specification, the detailed plans, and the current edition of the
Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (TMUTCD). The Contractor shall
provide all other engineering services necessary for pre-marking of all proposed
stripe within the limits of the designated work.
D. Unless authorized otherwise in writing by the Engineer, striping shall be

accomplished during daylight hours. Approved lighting arrangements will be required
for night time operations when allowed. The Contractor may be required to place
markings over existing markings, as determined by the Engineer. The Contractor
shall adjust the operation of the thermoplastic screed shoe to match the previous
lengths of stripes and skips, when necessary.
E. Failure of the striping material to adhere to the pavement surface during the life of the
contract shall be prima facie evidence that the materials, even though complying with
these specifications, or the application thereof, was inconsistent with the intent of the
requirements for the work under the latest City specifications and shall be cause for
ordering corrective action or replacement of the marking without additional cost to
the City.
F. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, permanent pavement markings on newly

constructed pavements surfaced with asphaltic concrete or bituminous seals shall not
be applied for a minimum of 14 days or a maximum 35 days. Temporary pavement
marking shall be provided during the 14 to 35-day period.
G. Surface Preparation.
02767-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Moisture. All surfaces shall be inspected for moisture content prior to

application of thermoplastic. Approximately two square feet of a clear plastic
or tar paper shall be laid on the road surface and held in place for 15 to 20
minutes. The underside of the plastic or tar paper shall then be inspected for a
buildup of condensed moisture from the road surface. Pavement is considered
dry if there is no condensation on the underside of the plastic or tarpaper. In
the event of moisture, this test shall be repeated until there is no moisture on
the underside of the plastic or tar paper.
2. Cleaning. All surfaces shall be clean and dry, before thermoplastic can be
applied. Loose dirt and debris shall be removed by thoroughly blowing
compressed air over the area to be striped. If the thermoplastic is to be applied
over existing paint lines, the paint line shall be swept with a mechanical
sweeper or wire brush to remove poorly adhered paint and dirt that would
interfere with the proper bonding or the thermoplastic. Additional cleaning
through the use of compressed air may be required to remove embedded dirt
and debris after sweeping. Latence and curing compound shall be removed
from all new Portland cement concrete surfaces in accordance with Section
02762, "Blast Cleaning of Pavement."
3. Layout. The pavement markings shall be placed in proper alignment with

guidelines established on the roadway. Deviation from the alignment
established shall not exceed 2 inches and, in addition, the deviation in
alignment of the marking being placed shall not exceed 1 inch per 200 feet of
roadway nor shall any deviation be abrupt.
a. No striping material shall be applied over a guide cord; only

longitudinal joints, existing stripes, primer, or other approved type
guides will be permitted. In the absence of a longitudinal joint or
existing stripe, the Contractor shall mark the points necessary for the
placing of the proposed stripe. Edge striping shall be adjusted as
necessary so that the edge stripe will be parallel to the centerline and
shall not be placed off the edge of the pavement.
b. Longitudinal markings shall be offset at least 2-inches from

construction joints of Portland cement concrete surfaces and joints and
shoulder breaks of asphalt surfaces.
4. Primer Sealer. Primer sealer shall be used on all Portland cement concrete
surfaces. A primer sealer shall be used on asphalt surfaces that are over two
years old and/or on asphalt surfaces that are worn or oxidized to a condition
where 50 percent or more of the wearing surface is exposed aggregate.
Existing pavement markings may act as the primer sealer if, after cleaning,
more than 70 percent of the existing pavement marking is still properly
bonded to the asphalt surface.
02767-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
5. Primer Sealer Application. When required as described, the primer-sealer

shall be applied to the road surface in a continuous film at a minimum
thickness of 3 to 5 mils. Before the Thermoplastic is applied, the primer-sealer
shall be allowed to dry to a tacky state. The thermoplastic shall be applied
within 4 hours after the primer application.
H. Temperature Requirements.
1. Ambient Conditions. The ambient air and road surface shall be 55°F and
rising before application of thermoplastic can begin.
2. Material Requirements. Unless otherwise specified by the material

manufacturer, the thermoplastic compound shall be heated from 400°F to
450°F and shall be a minimum of 400°F as it makes contact with road surface
during application. An infrared temperature gun shall be used to determine the
temperature of the thermoplastic as it is being applied to the road surface.
I. Drop-on Glass Sphere Application.
1. Application Rate. Retro-reflective glass spheres shall be applied at the rate of

10 pounds per 100 square feet of applied markings. This application rate shall
be determined by confirming the following consumption rates:
a. 200 pounds of drop on glass spheres per ton of applied thermoplastic

when the thermoplastic is being applied at 0.090 inch film thickness.
b. 150 pounds of drop on glass spheres per ton of applied thermoplastic

when the thermoplastic is being applied at 0.125 inch thickness.
2. Application Method. Retro-reflective glass spheres shall be applied by a

mechanical dispenser property calibrated and adjusted to provide proper
application rates and uniform distribution of the spheres across the cross
section of the entire width of the line. To enable the spheres to embed
themselves into the hot thermoplastic, the sphere dispenser shall be positioned
immediately behind the thermoplastic application device. This insures that the
spheres are applied to the thermoplastic material while it is still in the molten
state.
J. Application Thickness.
02767-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Longitudinal and Transverse Markings. On previously unmarked pavements

or pavements where markings have been effectively removed, all lane lines,
center lines, transverse markings and pavement markings in traffic areas with
:S 1 ,000 vehicles per day per lane shall have a minimum film thickness of
0.090 inch at the edges and a maximum of 0.145 inch at the center. A
minimum average film thickness of 0.090 inch shall be maintained. On
pavements with existing markings, meeting the traffic requirements stated
above, all lane lines, center lines, transverse markings and pavement markings
shall have a minimum film thickness of 0.060 inch for re-application over
existing strip line.
2. High Wear Longitudinal and Transverse Marking. On previously unmarked

pavements or pavements where markings have been effectively removed, all
lane lines, center lines, transverse markings and pavement markings in high
traffic areas (>1,000 vehicles per day per lane) shall have a minimum film
thickness of 0.125 inch at the edges and a maximum of 0.188 inch at the
center. A minimum average film thickness of 0.125 inch shall be maintained.
On pavements with existing markings, meeting the traffic requirements stated
above, all lane lines, center lines, transverse markings and pavement markings
shall have a minimum film thickness of 0.090 inch for re-application over
existing strip line.
END OF SECTION
02767-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION EPOXY PAVEMENT MARKINGS
SECTION 02768
EPOXY PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. This item includes the application of Epoxy pavement markings, in conformance with
the minimum optical and physical properties required for Epoxy pavement marking
compound described herein, in a molten state, onto a pavement surface.
B. Section 02136 – Waste Material Handling, Testing and Disposal
C. Section 02762 - Blast Cleaning of Pavement
A. Unit Prices
1. Payment for Epoxy pavement markings is on a linear foot basis.
1.04 REFERNCES
A. ASTM D 913 – Standard Practice for Evaluating Degree of Pavement Marking Line
Wear
B. ASTM E 1347 – Standard Test Method for Color and Color Difference Measurement
by Tristimulus Colorimetry
C. ASTM E 1348 – Standard Test Method for Transmittance and Color by

Spectrophotometry Using Hemispherical Geometry
02768-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
D. ASTM E 1349 – Standard Test Method for Reflectance Factor and Color by
Spectrophotometry Using Bidirectional Geometry
E. ASTM E 1710 – Standard Test Method for Measurement of Retroreflective Pavement

Marking Materials with CEN-Prescribed Geometry Using a Portable Retroflectometer
F. TxDOT Special Specification 6116 – Intelligent Transportation System (ITS)

Equipment
A. Acceptance.
1. Sampling Procedure. Random samples may be taken at the job site at the
discretion of the City Traffic Engineer for quality assurance. The City reserves
the right to conduct the tests deemed necessary to identify component
materials and verify results of specific tests indicated in conjunction with the
specification requirements.
2. The sample(s) shall be labeled as to the shipment number, lot number, date,
quantity, and any other pertinent information. At least three randomly selected
bags shall be obtained from each lot. A 10 pound sample from the three bags
shall be submitted for testing and acceptance. The lot size shall be
approximately 44,000 pounds unless the total order is less than this amount.
B. Notification.
1. The contractor shall notify the Construction Inspector 72 hours prior to the
placement of the epoxy markings to enable the inspector to be present during
the application operation. At the time of notification, the Contractor shall
indicate the manufacturer and the lot numbers of the thermoplastic that will be
used.
a. A check should be made by the contractor to ensure that the approved

lot numbers appear on the material package. Failure to do so is cause
for rejection.
A. Packaging.
1. Containers. The epoxy material shall be delivered in containers or bags of

sufficient strength to permit normal handling during shipment and handling on
the job without loss of material.
2. Labeling. Each container shall be clearly marked to indicate the color of the
material, the process batch number and/or manufacturer’s formulation
number, the manufacturer's name and address and the date of manufacture.
02768-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Warranty or Guarantee. If the normal trade practice for manufacturers is to furnish

warranties or guarantees for the materials and equipment specified herein, the
Contractor shall turn the guarantees and warranties over to the Engineer for potential
dealing with the manufacturers. The extent of such warranties or guarantees will not
be a factor in selecting the successful bidder.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL
A. Use materials that produce an adherent, retroreflective pavement marking system that
meets all of the performance requirements of this Specification. Use materials that do
not result in the generation of any hazardous materials/wastes, as defined Section
02136 – Waste Material Handling, Testing and Disposal during application or
removal. If requested, provide a laboratory report from a commercial laboratory
indicating material used does not result in the generation of any hazardous
materials/wastes, as defined in Article 1.58, during application or removal.
1. Use Epoxy resin material, which is:
a. 2-component (a predominantly epoxy pigmented resin component with

a curing agent component);
b. 100% solids, producing no toxic fumes when heated to application

temperature;
c. track-free in less than 40 minutes with appropriate ambient

temperature as recommended by the manufacturer;
d. formulated and tested to perform as a pavement marking material with

glass spheres applied to the surface.
B. Before work begins, provide a laboratory report from an independent testing

laboratory showing that the initial color of each material selected for use conforms to
the color limits set forth in Table 1, measured by 45°/0° geometry CIE, D65
Illuminant, 2° standard observation angle in accordance with ASTM E 1347, E 1348,
or E 1349.
A. Manufacturer’s Responsibility.
02768-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Sampling and Testing. The manufacturer shall submit test results from an
approved independent laboratory. All material samples shall be obtained 20
days in advance of the pavement marking operations. The cost of testing shall
be included in the price of epoxy material. The approved independent
laboratory's test results shall be submitted to the City Traffic Engineer in the
form of a certified test report.
2. Bill of Lading. The manufacturer shall furnish the Material and Tests
Laboratory with copies of Bills of Lading for all materials inspected. Bill of
lading shall indicate the consignee and the destination, date of shipment, lot
numbers, quantity, type of material, and location of source.
3. Material Acceptance. Final acceptance of a particular lot of epoxy will be

based on the following.
a. Compliance with the specification for material composition

requirements verified by approved independent laboratory with tests
results.
b. Compliance with the specification for the physical properties required

and verified by an approved independent laboratory with test results.
c. Manufacturer's test results for each lot thermoplastic have been

received.
d. Identification requirements are satisfactory.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EQUIPMENT
A. Preparation and Application. Use equipment designed for the pavement preparation
and application of Epoxy Pavement Markings.
B. Colorimeter. Provide a colorimeter using 45°/0° geometry CIE, D65 Illuminant, 2°

standard observation angle meeting the requirements of ASTM E 1347, E 1348, or E
1349.
C. Retroreflectometer. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, provide a portable or

mobile retroreflectometer meeting the following requirements.
1. Portable Retroreflectometer. Provide a portable retroreflectometer that meets

the requirements of ASTM E 1710.
2. Mobile Retroreflectometer. Provide a mobile retroreflectometer that:
02768-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
a. is approved by the City of Houston for project evaluation of

retroreflectivity, which will include taking a set of readings on stripes
designated by City of Houston and comparing them with the readings
of a portable retroreflectometer provided by CST that meets the
specifications indicated in this Specification;
b. is calibrated daily, before measuring retroreflectivity on any pavement

stripe, with a portable retroreflectometer meeting the following
requirements: ASTM E 1710, entrance angle of 88.76°, observation
angle of 1.05°, and an accuracy of ±15%;
c. requires no traffic control when retroreflectivity measurements are

taken and is capable of taking continuous readings; and
d. documents mobile retroreflectometer evaluations, showing average

retroreflectivity values for each 0.25-mi. section, or the area of
concern if it is less than 0.25 miles, with all deficient sections clearly
marked.
3.02 CONSTRUCTION
A. Surface Preparation.
1. General. Prepare the pavement surface using controlled techniques that

minimize pavement damage and hazards to the traveling public. Apply the
Epoxy Pavement Markings materials according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations using widths, colors, and shapes, and at locations as shown
on the plans. Use traffic control as shown on the plans or as approved.
Establish guides to mark the lateral location of pavement markings as shown
on the plans or as directed, and have guide locations verified. Use material for
guides that will not leave a permanent mark on the roadway.
2. Cleaning. All surfaces shall be clean and dry, before Epoxy can be applied.
Loose dirt and debris shall be removed by thoroughly blowing compressed air
over the area to be striped. If the Epoxy is to be applied over existing paint
lines, the paint line shall be swept with a mechanical sweeper or wirebrush to
remove poorly adhered paint and dirt that would interfere with the proper
bonding or the thermoplastic. Additional cleaning through the use of
compressed air may be required to remove embedded dirt and debris after
sweeping. Latence and curing compound shall be removed from all new
portland cement concrete surfaces in accordance with Section 02762, “Blast
Cleaning of Pavement.”
02768-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
3. Layout. The pavement markings shall be placed in proper alignment with

guidelines established on the roadway. Deviation from the alignment
established shall not exceed 2 inches and, in addition, the deviation in
alignment of the marking being placed shall not exceed 1 inch per 200 feet of
roadway nor shall any deviation be abrupt. Remove all applied markings that
are not in alignment or sequence as stated in the plans or as stated in the
specifications at the Contractor’s expense and in accordance with Section
02762, “Blast Cleaning of Pavement.”
4. No striping material shall be applied over a guide cord; only longitudinal

joints, existing stripes, primer, or other approved type guides will be
permitted. In the absence of a longitudinal joint or existing stripe, the
Contractor shall mark the points necessary for the placing of the proposed
stripe. Edge striping shall be adjusted as necessary so that the edge stripe will
be parallel to the centerline and shall not be placed off the edge of the
pavement. Longitudinal markings shall be offset at least 2-inches from
construction joints of Portland cement concrete surfaces and joints and
shoulder breaks of asphalt surfaces.
B. Initial Performance Requirements.
1. Meet the following initial performance requirements after installation.

Perform an initial performance evaluation from 7 to 15 days after Epoxy
Pavement Markings are installed to verify that the Epoxy Pavement Markings
meet the performance requirements for retroreflectivity.
2. Conduct initial retroreflectivity evaluations of placed pavement markings with

either a portable or a mobile retroreflectometer, unless otherwise shown on the
plans, according to Section 6.B, “Retroreflectivity” of TxDOT Special
Specification 6116. The Contractor is responsible for traffic control when
conducting performance evaluations.
3. The Engineer will conduct a visual evaluation for color and durability and
require testing only if Epoxy Pavement Markings do not appear to meet the
performance requirements.
4. For Epoxy Pavement Markings not meeting performance requirements, repair

or replace until re-evaluation shows the Epoxy Pavement Markings meet the
performance requirements.
a. Color. Provide Epoxy Pavement Markings consisting of pigments

blended to provide color conforming to standard highway colors as
shown in Table 1.
02768-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
Table 1
Color Requirements
Chromaticity Coordinates
Brightness
Federal 595 Color 1 2 3 4
(Y)
x y x y x y x y
White 17855 .290 .315 .310 .295 .350 .340 .330 .360 60 Min
Yellow 33538 .470 .455 .510 .489 .490 .432 .537 .462 30 Min
b. Retroreflectivity. Provide Epoxy Pavement Markings meeting the

minimum retroreflectivity values listed in Table 2.
Table 2
Minimum Retroreflectivity Requirements
Retroreflectivity,
Color
mcd/m2/lx, Min
White 250
Yellow 175
c. Durability. Provide Epoxy Pavement Markings that do not lose more

than 5% of the striping material in a 1,000-ft. section of continuous
stripe or broken stripe (25 broken stripes). Pavement markings must
remain in the proper alignment and location.
d. Performance Evaluations. Provide traffic control and conduct

evaluations of color, retroreflectivity, and durability as required or
directed.
(1) Color. Measure the color using 45°/0° geometry CIE, D65
Illuminant, 2° standard observation angle in accordance with
ASTM E 1347, E 1348, or E 1349.
(2) Retroreflectivity. Unless otherwise shown on the plans,

conduct retroreflectivity evaluations of pavement markings
with either a portable or a mobile retroreflectometer. Make all
measurements in the direction of traffic flow, except for broken
centerline on 2-way roadways, where measurements will be
made in both directions.
02768-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
(a) If using a portable retroreflectometer, take a minimum

of 1 measurement every mile on each series of
markings (i.e., edgeline, center skip line, each line of a
double line, etc.), at approved locations. If more than 1
measurement is taken, average the measurements. For
all markings measured in both directions, take a
minimum of 1 measurement in each direction. If the
measurement taken on a specific series of markings
within each mile segment falls below the minimum
retroreflectivity values, take a minimum of 5 more
measurements within that mile segment for that series
of marking. If the average of these 5 measurements falls
below the minimum retroreflectivity requirements, that
mile segment of the applied markings does not meet the
performance requirement.
(b) If using a mobile retroreflectometer, review the results

to determine deficient sections and deficient areas of
interest. These areas do not meet the performance
requirements.
(3) Durability. Measure the durability in accordance with ASTM D

913 for marking material loss and visual inspection for
alignment and location. Conduct evaluations at approved
locations.
END OF SECTION
02768-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION CURB, CURB AND GUTTER, AND HEADERS
SECTION 02771
CURB, CURB AND GUTTER, AND HEADERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Reinforced concrete curb, reinforced monolithic concrete curb and gutter, and
mountable curb.
B. Paving headers and railroad headers poured monolithically with concrete base or
pavement.
C. Section 02751 – Concrete Paving
D. Section 02752 – Concrete Pavement Joints
E. Section 02753 – Concrete Pavement Curing
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for curbs, curbs and gutter, and esplanade curbs is on linear foot
basis measured along face of curb.
2. Payment for 3-foot concrete valley gutter is on a linear foot basis.
3. Payment for mountable concrete curbs is on a square foot basis.
4. Payment for concrete paving headers and concrete railroad headers is on a

linear foot basis.
5. Payment for headers is on linear foot basis measured between lips of gutters
adjacent to concrete base and measured between backs of curbs adjacent to
concrete pavement.
02771-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit details of proposed form work for approval.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS

B. Reinforcing Steel: Conform to material requirements for welded wire fabric of

Section 02751 - Concrete Paving.
C. Grout: Nonmetallic, non-shrink grout containing no chloride producing agents

conforming to following requirements.
1. Compressive strength
a. at 7 days: 3500 psi
b. at 28 days: 8000 psi
2. Initial set time: 45 minutes
3. Final set time: 1.5 hours
D. Preformed Expansion Joint Material: Conform to material requirements for

E. Expansion Joint Filler: Conform to material requirements for expansion joint filler of
Section 02752 - Concrete Pavement Joints.
F. Mortar: Mortar finish composed of one part Portland cement and 1 1/2 parts of fine
aggregate. Use only when approved by Project Manager.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Prepare subgrade in accordance with applicable portions of sections on excavation

and fill, embankment, and subgrade and roadbed.
3.02 PLACEMENT
02771-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Guideline: Set to follow top line of curb. Attach indicator to provide constant
comparison between top of curb and guideline. Ensure flow lines for monolithic curb
and gutters conform to slopes indicated on Drawings.
B. Forms: Brace to maintain position during pour. Use metal templates cut to section
shown on Drawings.
C. Reinforcement: Secure in position so that steel will remain in place throughout

placement. Reinforcing steel shall remain at approximate center of base or pavement
as indicated on Drawings.
D. Joints: Place in accordance with Section 02752 - Concrete Pavement Joints. Place
dummy groove joints at to match concrete pavement joints at right angles to curb
lines. Cut dummy grooves 1/4-inch deep using approved edging tool.
E. Place concrete in forms to required depth. Consolidate thoroughly. Do not permit

rock pockets in form. Entirely cover top surfaces with mortar.
3.03 MANUAL FINISHING
A. After concrete is in place, remove front curb forms. Form exposed portions of curb,
and of curb and gutter, using mule which conforms to curb shape, as shown on
Drawings.
B. Thin coat of mortar may be worked into exposed face of curb using mule and two-
handled wooden darby at least 3 feet long.
C. Before applying final finish move 10 foot straightedge across gutter and up curb to
back form of curb. Repeat until curb and gutter are true to grade and section. Lap
straightedge every 5 feet.
D. Steel trowel finish surfaces to smooth, even finish. Make face of finished curb true
and straight.
E. Edge outer edge of gutter with 1/4-inch edger. Finish edges with tool having 1/4 inch
radius.
F. Finish visible surfaces and edges of finished curb and gutter free from blemishes,
form marks and tool marks. Finished curb or curb and gutter shall have uniform color,
shape and appearance.
3.04 MECHANICAL FINISHING
A. Mechanical curb forming and finishing machines may be used instead of, or in
conjunction with, previously described methods, when approved by Project Manager.
Use of mechanical methods shall provide specified curb design and finish.
3.05 CURING
02771-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Immediately after finishing operations, cure exposed surfaces of curbs and gutters in
accordance with Section 02753 - Concrete Pavement Curing.
3.06 TOLERANCES
A. Top surfaces of curb and gutter shall have uniform width and shall be free from
humps, sags or other irregularities. Surfaces of curb top, curb face and gutter shall not
vary more than 1/8 inch from edge of straightedge laid along them, except at grade
changes.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Maintain curbs and gutters in good condition until completion of Work.
B. Replace damaged curbs and gutters to comply with this Section.
END OF SECTION
02771-4
CITY OF HOUSTON CONCRETE MEDIANS AND
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION DIRECTIONAL ISLANDS
SECTION 02772
CONCRETE MEDIANS AND DIRECTIONAL ISLANDS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Portland cement concrete medians and directional islands.
C. Section 02337 – Lime/Fly Ash Stabilized Subgrade
D. Section 02338 – Portland Cement Stabilized Subgrade
E. Section 02751 – Concrete Paving
F. Section 02752 – Concrete Pavement Joints
G. Section 02753 – Concrete Pavement Curing
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for concrete medians and directional islands is on square yard basis
measured from back of curbs.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS

B. Reinforcing Steel: Conform to material requirements for welded wire fabric of

Section 02751 - Concrete Paving.
02772-1
CITY OF HOUSTON CONCRETE MEDIANS AND
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION DIRECTIONAL ISLANDS

D. Expansion Joint Filler: Conform to material requirements for expansion joint filler of
E. Subgrade Materials: Conform to subgrade material requirements of Section 02336 -

Lime Stabilized Subgrade, Section 02337 - Lime/Fly-Ash Stabilized Subgrade and
Section 02338 - Portland Cement Stabilized Subgrade.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SUBGRADE
A. Prepare subgrade in accordance with applicable portions of sections on excavation

and fill and embankment. Section 02336 - Lime Stabilized Subgrade, Section 02337 -
Lime/Fly-Ash Stabilized Subgrade and Section 02338 - Portland Cement Stabilized
Subgrade.
3.02 PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE
A. Place and finish concrete in accordance with applicable portions of Section 02751 -
Concrete Paving.
3.03 JOINTS
A. Install joints in accordance with Section 02752 - Concrete Pavement Joints.
A. Cure concrete in accordance with Section 02753 - Concrete Pavement Curing.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Maintain concrete medians and directional islands in good condition until completion
of work.
B. Replace damaged concrete medians and directional islands to comply with this
Section.
END OF SECTION
02772-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION CONCRETE SIDEWALKS
SECTION 02775
CONCRETE SIDEWALKS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Reinforced concrete sidewalks.
B. Wheelchair ramps and curb ramps.
D. Section 01576 – Waste Material Disposal
E. Section 02233 – Clearing and Grubbing
F. Section 02320 – Utility Backfill Materials
H. Section 02751 – Concrete Paving
I. Section 02752 – Concrete Pavement Joints
J. Section 02753 – Concrete Pavement Curing
K. Section 02761 – Colored Concrete for Medians and Sidewalks
L. Section 02922 – Sodding
M. Section 02951 – Pavement Repair and Restoration
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for concrete sidewalks is on square foot basis.
2. No payment will be made for work outside these limits or in areas where
driveway has been removed or replaced for Contractor's convenience.
02775-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
3. Payment for wheelchair ramps and curb ramps of each type specified is on
square foot basis. Staining of wheelchair ramps and curb ramps is included in
cost of ramp.
4. Removal and replacement of existing sidewalk, curb or curb and gutter and
saw-cutting is paid by unit cost for each item. Sodding will be paid one foot
on each side of sidewalk unless otherwise noted.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in
Field.
B. ASTM C 39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical

Concrete Specimens.
C. ASTM C 42 - Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed
Beams of Concrete.
D. ASTM C 138 - Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air
Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete
E. ASTM C 143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.
F. ASTM C 172 - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.
G. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of

Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3).
H. Texas Accessibility Standards of Architectural Barriers Act, Article 9102, Texas Civil
Statues.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit certified testing results and certificates of compliance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS

02775-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Reinforcing Steel: Conform to material requirements of Section 02751 - Concrete

Paving for reinforcing steel. Use No. 3 reinforcing bars.

D. Expansion Joint Filler: Conform to material requirements for expansion joint material
of Section 02752 - Concrete Pavement Joints.
E. Forms: Use straight, unwarped wood or metal forms with nominal depth equal to or
greater than proposed sidewalk thickness. The use of 2 inch by 4 inch lumber as
forms will not be allowed.
F. Sand Bed: Conform to material requirements for bank run sand of Section 02320 -
Utility Backfill Materials.
G. Sodding: Conform to material requirements for sodding of Section 02922 - Sodding.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 REPLACEMENT
A. Replace sidewalks and slope paving which are removed or damaged during
construction with thickness and width equivalent to one removed or damaged, unless
otherwise shown on Drawings. Finish surface (exposed aggregate, brick pavers, etc.)
to match existing sidewalk.
B. Provide replaced and new sidewalks with wheelchair ramps when sidewalk intersects
curb at street or driveway.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Identify and protect utilities which are to remain.
B. Protect living trees, other plant growth, and features designated to remain.
C. Conduct clearing and grubbing operations in accordance with Section 02233 -

Clearing and Grubbing.
D. Excavate subgrade 6 inches beyond outside lines of sidewalk. Shape to line, grade
and cross section. For soils with plasticity index above 40 percent, stabilize soil with
lime in accordance with Section 02336 – Lime-Stabilized Subgrade. Compact
subgrade to minimum of 90 percent maximum dry density at optimum to 3 percent
above optimum moisture content, as determined by ASTM D 698.
E. Immediately after subgrade is prepared, cover with compacted sand bed to depth as
shown on Drawings. Lay concrete when sand is moist but not saturated.
02775-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
3.03 PLACEMENT
A. Setting Forms: Straight, unwarped wood or metal forms with nominal depth equal to
or greater than proposed sidewalk thickness. Use of 2 by 4's as forms will not be
allowed. Securely stake forms to line and grade. Maintain position during concrete
placement.
B. Reinforcement:
1. Install reinforcing bars.
2. Install reinforcing steel as shown on the drawings. Lay longitudinal bars in

walk continuously, except through expansion joints.
3. Use sufficient number of chairs to support reinforcement in manner to

maintain reinforcement in center of slab vertically during placement.
4. Drill dowels into existing paving, sidewalk and driveways, secure with epoxy,
and provide headers as required.
5. Use sufficient number of chairs for steel reinforcement bars to maintain

position of bars within allowable tolerances. Place reinforcement as shown on
Drawings. In plane of steel parallel to nearest surface of concrete, bars shall
not vary from plan placement by more than 1/12 of spacing between bars. In
plane of steel perpendicular to nearest surface of concrete, bars shall not vary
from plan placement by more than 1/4 inch.
C. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints with load transfer units in accordance with
D. Place concrete in forms to specified depth and tamp thoroughly with "jitterbug" tamp,
or other acceptable method. Bring mortar to surface.
E. Strike off to smooth finish with wood strike board. Finish smoothly with wood hand
float. Brush across sidewalk lightly with fine-haired brush.
F. Apply coating to wheelchair ramp with contrasting color in accordance with Section
02761 - Colored Concrete for Medians and Sidewalks.
G. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, mark off sidewalk joints 1/8 inch deep, at
spacing equal to width of walk. Use joint tool equal in width to edging tool.
H. Finish edges with tool having 1/4 inch radius.
I. After concrete has set sufficiently, refill space along sides of sidewalk to one-inch
from top of walk with suitable material. Tamp until firm and solid, place sod as
applicable. Dispose of excess material in accordance with Section 01576 - Waste
Material Disposal. Repair driveways and parking lots damaged by sidewalk
excavation in accordance with Section 02951 - Pavement Repair and Restoration.
02775-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
3.04 CURING
A. Conform to requirements of Section 02753 - Concrete Pavement Curing.

Services.
B. Compressive Strength Test Specimens: Four test specimens for compressive strength
test will be made in accordance with ASTM C 31 for each 30 cubic yards or less of
sidewalk that is placed in one day. Two specimens will be tested at 7 days.
Remaining two specimens will be tested at 28 days. Specimens will be tested in
accordance with ASTM C 39. Minimum compressive strength: 3000 psi at 7 days and
3500 psi at 28 days.
C. Yield test for cement content per cubic yard of concrete will be made in accordance
with ASTM C 138. When cement content is found to be less than that specified per
cubic yard, reduce batch weights until amount of cement per cubic yard of concrete
conforms to requirements.
D. If the Contractor places concrete without notifying the laboratory, the City will have
the concrete tested by means of core test as specified in ASTM C 42. When concrete
does not meet specification, cost of test will be deducted from payment.
E. Sampling of fresh concrete shall be in accordance with ASTM C 172.
F. Take slump tests when cylinders are made and when concrete slump appears
excessive.
G. Concrete shall be acceptable when average of two 28 day compression tests is equal
to or greater than minimum 28 day strength specified.
H. If either of two tests on field samples is less than average of two tests by more than 10
percent, that entire test shall be considered erratic and not indicative of concrete
strength. Core samples will be required of in-place concrete in question.
I. If 28 day laboratory test indicates that concrete of low strength has been placed, test
concrete in question by taking cores as directed by Project Manager. Take and test at
least three representative cores as specified in ASTM C 42 and deduct cost from
payment due.
3.06 NONCONFORMING CONCRETE
A. Remove and replace areas that fail compressive strength tests, with concrete of
thickness shown on Drawings.
B. Replace nonconforming sections at no additional cost to City.
02775-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Maintain newly place concrete in good condition until completion of Work.
B. Replace damaged areas.
END OF SECTION
02775-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
SECTION 02811
LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Pipe and fittings, valves, sprinkler heads, and accessories.
B. Control system.
B. Section 01270 - Measurement and Payment
C. Section 01312 – Coordination and Meetings
D. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures
E. Section 01755 - Starting Systems
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for landscape irrigation will be made under this Section on lump sum
basis.
2. Payment for capped irrigation sleeve, for connection to future system

expansion, is on linear foot basis.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM D 2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems.
B. ASTM D 2241 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure -
1.05 SUBMITTALS
02811-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
1.06 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with

minimum three years documented experience.
A. Conform to applicable code for piping and component requirements.
1.08 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this Section.
1.09 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work with site landscape grading and delivery of plant life.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra components under provisions of Document 00410 - Bid Form.
1. Two sprinkler heads of each type and size.
2. Two valve box keys.
3. Two wrenches for each type head core and for removing and installing each
type head.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Electric solenoid controlled underground irrigation system.
B. Source Power: 120 volt.
2.02 PIPE MATERIALS
A. Pipe shall be continuously and permanently imprinted with manufacturer's name,

size, schedules, type, and working pressure.
B. PVC Pipe ASTM D 2241; 200 psi pressure rated upstream from controls, 160 psi
downstream; solvent welded sockets rubber gasket joints.
C. Fittings: Type and style of connection to match pipe.
D. Solvent Cement: ANSI/ASTM D 2564 for PVC pipe and fittings.
02811-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
E. Sleeve material: 4-inch schedule 40 PVC.
2.03 OUTLETS
A. Manufacturer's or approved equal:
1. Rainbird Model 1804.
2. Rainbird Model 1812
3. Hunter Model PGP
B. Rotary type sprinkler head: Pop-up type with screens; fully adjustable for flow and
pressure; size as indicated; with letter or symbol designating degree of arc and arrow
indicating center of spray pattern.
C. Spray Type Sprinkler Head: Pop-up head with full circle, half circle, third circle,
quarter circle, and square pattern.
2.04 VALVES
1. Rainbird Model PEB Series
B. Gate Valves: Bronze construction, non-rising stem, and sized to line.
C. Backflow Preventers: FEBCO 765 Bronze body construction, reduced pressure zone
or pressure vacuum breaker type.
D. Valve Box and Cover: rectangular 10 inches by 4 inches or 9 inches round.
2.05 CONTROLLER
1. Rainbird Model RC1260C
B. Valves: Electric solenoid wiring including required fittings and accessories.
C. Wire conductors: color coded.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01312 - Coordination and

Meetings.
02811-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Verify location of existing utilities.
C. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Piping layout indicated is diagrammatic only. Route piping to avoid plants, ground
cover, and structures.
B. Layout and stake locations of system components.
C. Review layout requirements with other affected work. Coordinate locations of sleeves
under paving to accommodate system.
3.03 TRENCHING
A. Trench and filling as required.
B. Trench size:
1. Minimum cover over installed supply piping: 18-inches.
2. Minimum cover over installed branch piping: 12-inches.
3. Minimum cover over installed outlet piping: 12-inches.
C. Trench to accommodate grade changes.
D. Maintain trenches free of debris, material, or obstructions that may damage pipe.
E. Do not leave trenches open overnight.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Install pipe, valves, controls, and outlets in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.
B. Connect to utilities.
C. Set outlets and box covers at finish grade elevations.
D. Install control wiring as required. Provide 10-inch expansion coil at each valve to
which controls are connected, and at 100-foot intervals. Bury wire beside pipe. Mark
valves with neoprene valve markers containing locking device. Set valve markers in
160 psi PVC pipe risers exiting from top of valve to finish grade.
E. After piping is installed, but before outlets are installed and filling commences, open
valves and flush system with full head of water.
F. Coordinate pipe installation with conduit installation.
02811-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed.
B. Prior to filling, test system for leakage for whole system to maintain 100 psi pressure
for one hour.
3.06 FILLING
A. Cover with 3-inches of sand over piping; fill trench and compact to subgrade
elevation. Protect piping from displacement.
3.07 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust control system to achieve time cycles required.
B. Change and adjust head types for full water coverage as directed.
3.08 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate system under provisions of Section 01755 - Starting Systems.
B. Instruct City's personnel in operation and maintenance of system, including adjusting

of sprinkler heads. Use operation and maintenance material as basis for
demonstration.
END OF SECTION
02811-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION BIKE RACKS
SECTION 02871
BIKE RACKS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Class III bike racks and associated support medium as indicated on the standard
details. A Class III bike rack shall be a rack where both one wheel and the frame can
be secured with a user supplied lock. The Class III rack shall consist of a single
U/Hoop.
C. Section 02752 – Concrete Pavement Joints
D. Section 02775 – Concrete Sidewalks
A. Unit Prices
1. Payment is on a unit price basis for each bike rack complete and in place.
2. Payment for bike parking concrete pad is on a square foot basis of surface area
for the newly installed concrete slab and shall include placing and finishing
the concrete pad and all labor, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the
work.
3. Unit price shall include the excavation, removal and disposal of existing
sidewalk, location, placement and installation of bike racks; all materials,
including all steel pipe and plate, screws, nuts and bolts and all labor, tools,
and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
1.04 REFERENCES
02871-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. ASTM A 123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit manufacturer’s product data for approval including fabrication and

installation details, color, and finish of bike racks.
C. Support medium (i.e. existing slab, new pad, etc.) and details of installation.
D. Complete manufacturer’s warranty against defects for a period of not less than one
year from date of installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Steel
1. All steel shall be ASTM A-36 1010-1018 low carbon prime steel and the
screws, nuts and bolts shall be tamper proof and plated with commercial zinc.
The bike racks shall be hot dipped galvanized (ASTM A 123).
B. Portland Concrete Cement
1. Portland cement concrete shall be Class A as specified in Section 03315 –

C. Expansion Joint Materials
1. Expansion joint materials shall conform to Section 02752 – Concrete

Pavement Joints.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION OF RACKS
A. The Class III Bike Rack shall consist of a one piece welded inverted U/Hoop
assembly of Schedule 40 steel pipe with an outside diameter (OD) of 1.9 inches
(48.26 mm) on a minimum 0.25" (6.35 mm) thick base plate.
B. Base Plates
1. All base plates will have two ½" (13 mm) diameter holes per plate for
mounting.
02871-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Rectangular - Dimensions are 6" by 2" (150 mm by 50 mm). Bolt holes will
be equidistant between the pole and edge of plate.
3. Round - Diameter must be at least 6" (150 mm) with a 4.5" (114 mm) bolt
circle. Bolt holes will be equidistant between the pole and edge of plate.
4. Oval - Length must be at least 6" (150 mm) with a width of at least 3" (76
mm). Bolt holes will be equidistant between the pole and edge of plate, with
the center of the bolt hole at least 0.75" (19 mm) from the base plate edge.
C. Each bike rack will be hot dip galvanized after fabrication, unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Bike racks will be supported as indicated on the Drawings. The bike rack shall be
supported on either existing or newly placed Portland cement concrete slabs.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF BIKE RACKS
A. Bike parking racks shall be installed in existing concrete sidewalks/pavement in

accordance with Standard Detail 02871-01.
B. Any construction of new Bike Parking Pads shall be completed in accordance with
Section 02775 – Concrete Sidewalks. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, the
pad shall be 4 inches (102 mm) in thickness.
END OF SECTION
02871-3
CITY OF HOUSTON PEDESTRIAN CROSSWALK
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION SYSTEM RRFB
SECTION 02890
PEDESTRIAN CROSSWALK SYSTEM RECTANGULAR RAPID FLASHING BEACON

(RRFB)
PART 1 GENERAL
A. This specification defines the minimum detailed requirements of a Pedestrian

Crosswalk RRFB System that has Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacons (RRFBs) and
is solar-powered for new installations and replacement parts for existing installations.
The system field equipment includes controller, cabinet, batteries, battery charger,
solar panel, static signs, mounting equipment, communication device, flashing
beacons, and other incidentals required for Pedestrian Crosswalk System.
B. The system is to provide a highly visible, enhanced warning for the purpose of
alerting road users from both traffic directions of the active pedestrian crossing.
C. Overview: Upon activation by pedestrian push button, the controllers shall activate all
RRFB light bars in the crosswalk system simultaneously. RRFB light bars shall flash
synchronously and then cease operation after a programmable timeout.
A. Unit Price
1. This Item will be measured as each system furnished or furnished and

installed complete and in place.
2. The work performed, and materials furnished shall be measured as indicated

under “Measurement” as each system furnished or furnished and installed and
made fully functional and operational and tested in accordance with the
requirements in this specification and will be paid for at the unit price bid for
each item, as specified in the bid form.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. 47 CFR Part 15 – Radio Frequency Devices
B. AASHTO Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires, and
Traffic Signals
02890-1
C. ASTM A 153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware
D. ASTM B 429 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe

and Tube
E. FHWA Memorandum IA-21 - Interim Approval for Optional Use of Pedestrian-

Actuated Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacons at Uncontrolled Marked Crosswalks
F. FHWA MUTCD – Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
G. SAE J595 - Directional Flashing Optical Warning Devices for Authorized

Emergency, Maintenance, and Service Vehicles
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Each Pedestrian Crosswalk RRFB System both complete and as parts, shall be
provided with the following documentation:
1. Complete accurate schematic diagrams
2. Complete parts list including names and part numbers for vendors, for parts
not identified by universal numbers.
3. Operating and maintenance manual including simple programming

instructions and a programming guide.
A. Certification. A Vendor Representative shall provide to the City’s Project Manager in

writing that the City’s installation Contractors have been trained to successfully
assemble, program, and operate the beacon assemblies in accordance with
manufacturer’s specifications and operating manual.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. All equipment, except batteries, shall be warranted free from defects in Material and
workmanship for minimum three (3) years from date delivered to the City of Houston
warehouse. Batteries shall be warranted as specified in the Battery for Solar Powered
Flashing Beacons section of this specification.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General Requirements
02890-2
1. The crosswalk system shall consist of two pole assemblies, or three to four if
there is a median. All pole assemblies shall contain one or more warning
RRFB light bars, a solar powered control cabinet, and a pedestrian push
button for system activation. All control cabinets in the crosswalk system shall
be synchronized by Wireless Transceivers, the communication device for the
system.
2. An optional Advance Warning RRFB assembly further increases pedestrian

safety when required. Active vehicle warning indications shall be visible in a
direct line of sight at distances over 1000 feet during the day, and over 1 mile
at night.
B. Cabinet Components
1. General: The cabinet shall be of 0.080” thick H-5052 aluminum and certified
for NEMA 3R type. All external welds shall be made using the Heliarc
method, whereas the wire welding method shall make internal welds. All
welds shall be neatly formed and free from cracks, blowholes and other
irregularities. The nominal outside dimensions shall be 15-inch (h) x 12.5-inch
(w) x 9.9-inch (d). It shall have 2 tamper-resistant stainless-steel hinges,
screened vents on cabinet side and door, screened drain holes on the bottom of
the cabinet. A UV resistant label shall be applied to the exterior of the cabinet
with the following information: model number, serial number, date of
manufacture and any applicable regulatory information. The cabinet shall
have a door mounted pouch that will store all system documentation.
2. The cabinet will be designed to protect internal equipment from rain, dust,
vandalism and other conditions found in harsh environments.
3. The cabinet door opening shall be double flanged around all sides to form a
uniform surface. This is to assure maximum contact with the door gasketing
material.
4. All inside and outside edges of the cabinet shall be free of burrs.
5. For adequate ventilation of internal components, the cabinet shall be vented

with screening included on all vents and drains to prevent insects and other
foreign matter from entering.
6. Door and Hardware:
a. The door will be a minimum of 80% of the front surface area and shall
be hinged on the right side when facing the cabinet.
b. The door gasketing shall be sprayed with silicone lubricant so that it

does not adhere to the cabinet body-sealing surface.
7. For security, the cabinet must include at least two tamper-resistant stainless-
steel hinges and a replaceable #2 traffic lock with keys.
02890-3
8. Cabinet Finish: Unless otherwise specified, the outside surface of the cabinet
shall have a smooth, uniform, polish aluminum finish. To prevent corrosion,
all materials used in the construction or mounting of the control cabinet shall
be either aluminum or stainless steel. Anti-vandal mounting hardware shall be
available as an option.
9. Cabinet Mounting: For easy installation on a wide range of pole sizes and
types, the cabinet shall utilize four 5/16"-18 stainless steel mounting studs that
mate to a range of bracket options. To ensure a secure mount to the supporting
post, two banding style brackets that fit poles with a 2-3/8” or larger diameter
shall be included as standard equipment. Mounting brackets also available for
square pole, wooden post, and wall mount applications.
C. Solar Panel
1. The photovoltaic module shall be constructed of an anodized aluminum

frame, high-transmission 1/8" tempered glass, with silicon cells encapsulated
in double-layer EVA, and with a white polymer backing. The glass shall be
high transparent, low iron and tempered. The module frame shall be made
from heavy-duty anodized aluminum and adequately sized to attach the
desired number and size of solar panels. The mounting bracket shall use
tamper proof hardware to secure the PV module to the frame and shall be
made of aluminum. The solar panel shall be affixed to a pole top bracket that
allows an adjustable angle to provide maximum insolation exposure. To
ensure maximum solar insolation regardless of installation location, the post
top mounting system shall provide 360° of rotational direction adjustment and
upon installation, must be oriented with the collector facing South.
2. The solar panel must be IEC61215 and TUV certified. The solar panel shall
operate at 12VDC nominal with a maximum output rating of 65 watts.
a. The solar panel specifications:
(1) Overall Size: 25.2" x 25.7"
(2) Maximum power voltage: 18.65 VDC
(3) Maximum power current: 3.77 A
(4) Short circuit current: 3.97 A
(5) Open circuit voltage: 22.66 VDC
(6) Operate from -40° to +194°F (-40° to +90°C)
3. All solar panel connectors shall conform to Ingress Protection, IP-67 rating,
dust proof, and protected from temporary immersion in water up to 1 meter
deep for 30 minutes. Connectors shall be Deutsch DTM series. All solar panel
fasteners shall be anti-vandal pin-type set screws. Wrench shall be provided.
02890-4
D. Battery
1. The Battery shall have a nominal output voltage of 12 VDC and a capacity of
50Ah. It shall be rechargeable type absorbent glass mat and be replaceable
independently of other components.
2. The battery shall conform to the following criteria:
a. Operating temperature range:
(1) Charge: +32 degrees F to +104 degrees F.
(2) Discharge: +5 degrees F to +113 degrees F
b. Storage temperature range of +5 degrees F to +104 degrees F.
c. Vents: Pressure relief vents permanently attached sealed construction:

Will not spill or leak.
d. Flag Terminals: Type I6, Hold clearances for ¼” bolt.
3. Battery shall be housed in the cabinet specified in the above specification. The
battery shall carry two (2) year replacement warranty from date of delivery to
the City of Houston, and a prorated warranty up to five (5) years.
E. Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacons (RRFB) Assembly
1. The Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacon (RRFB) light bars shall be low
voltage and the current controlled from the controller.
2. The RRFB light bar shall be in conformance with all applicable FHWA
MUTCD standards and guidelines and shall meet or exceed the requirements
specified in FHWA Memorandum IA-21, Interim Approval for Optional Use
of Pedestrian-Actuated Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacons at Uncontrolled
Marked Crosswalks.
3. The light LED shall consist of vehicle LED modules with 2 arrays of 8 amber
LEDs spaced 7” apart, 7 inch (w) x 3 inch (h), and be SAE J595 Class 1
Certified, and optional pedestrian LED modules that flash simultaneously with
the vehicle LED, are 0.5 inch (w) x 1.75 inch (h) side-viewable and either
placed on one or both end sides of the light bar housing. The LED arrays shall
be designed, located and operated in accordance with the detailed
requirements as specified on the plans.
4. The RRFB light bar, when activated, 75 periods of flashing per minute and
shall have alternating and simultaneous flash operations following the interim
approval compliant Wig-Wag plus Simultaneous (WW+S) flashing pattern
And it shall have a minimum life expectancy of 100,000 hours and an
operating temperature range of +40 degrees F to +122 degrees F.
02890-5
5. The light intensity of the vehicle indications shall meet the minimum
specifications of Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) standard J595
(Directional Flashing Optical Warning Devices for Authorized Emergency,
Maintenance, and Service Vehicles) dated January 2005. Manufacturer
Certification of Compliance shall be provided upon request. Active vehicle
indications shall be visible at distances over 1000 feet during the day and over
1 mile at night.
6. The housing for the light bar shall be constructed of durable, corrosion-
resistant black powder-coated aluminum with stainless steel vandal resistant
fasteners having the following dimensions: 22 inch (w) x 4 inch (h) x 1.5 inch
(d).
7. Components shall be enclosed and be modular in design whereby any

component can be easily replaced without having to uninstall the RRFB
assembly.
8. Beacon mounting hardware shall consist of a universal mounting bracket that

articulates up to 30 degrees and mounts to most common size metal or wood
posts and use a banding or u-blot to round pole or bolt to square pole.
9. Include mounting hardware for either single or back-to-back pole mounting

that is universal to the pole type.
10. Assembly shall house two rapidly and alternately flashing rectangular yellow
LED array vehicle indications and one side-mounted yellow LED array
pedestrian indication.
11. Assembly shall have two vehicle RRFB indications that are approximately 7”
wide x 2.8” high, each with 8 yellow LEDs in its array and one pedestrian
indication that is approximately 0.5” wide x 1.7” high with 8 individual
yellow LEDs in its array.
12. Assembly shall have overall dimensions of approximately 23.6” wide x 3.8”
high x 1.4” deep.
F. Controller & Charge Controller
1. The programmable flash controller shall be housed in the NEMA 3R Type

control cabinet specified. It shall include integrated constant-current LED
drivers with a minimum of two-channel output for driving one or two RRFB
units.
2. The device shall have a power indicator light, status LED lights, at minimum
1 digital input and 2 digital output lines, a micro-USB or similar port for
connection, and a backlit LCD display.
02890-6
3. The controller shall automatically adjust the LED drive current control to
optimize brightness for the ambient lighting conditions determined by the
phototransistor input.
4. It shall have the LED drive outputs reach the full output current as
programmed within the duration of the 100ms on-time and include an
integrated Real Time Clock (RTC) with on-board battery backup.
5. It shall have the capability of RS232 communication for programming with

Windows-based software.
6. The controller shall be capable of solar charging the system battery, including
a completely drained battery pack. It shall automatically provide Low Voltage
Disconnect (LVD) to protect batteries when needed, and automatically
provide load-reconnection once battery levels have been restored to an
acceptable value. It shall include a minimum of two General Purpose Inputs
and Outputs (GPIO).
7. The device shall be FCC and ISED compliant, have a range of up to 900 feet
minimum without an antenna, utilize the license free 900 MHz frequency
hopping spread spectrum with minimum 10 different RF patterns to prevent
interference between collocated radio systems. It shall be able to connect to up
to 16 devices on one network. An optional antenna may be used to increase
connection range if needed and at the City’s approval.
8. The enclosure shall be IP67 rated for protection against dust and moisture.
9. Output shall have the following “WW+S” flash pattern during each of its 800
millisecond flash periods:
a. Left LED illuminates for approximately 50 milliseconds
b. Both LEDs stay dark for approximately 50 milliseconds
c. Right LED illuminates for approximately 50 milliseconds
d. Both LEDs stay dark for approximately 50 milliseconds
e. Left LED illuminates for approximately 50 milliseconds
f. Both LEDs stay dark for approximately 50 milliseconds
g. Right LED illuminates for approximately 50 milliseconds
h. Both LEDs stay dark for approximately 50 milliseconds
i. Both LEDs illuminate for approximately 50 milliseconds
j. Both LEDs stay dark for approximately 50 milliseconds
02890-7
k. Both LEDs illuminate for approximately 50 milliseconds
l. Both LEDs stay dark for approximately 250 milliseconds
10. The controller shall be independently replaceable of other control panel

components and be able to monitor internal temperature.
G. Communication Device
1. The wireless transceiver shall operate wirelessly at 900 Mhz, utilizing

Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum (FHSS) technology to minimize the
effects of external RF interference and operate on the license-free ISM band
and comply with Part 15 of FCC rules.
2. Device shall seamlessly integrate with the controller to ensure sequential

activation of other radio- equipped devices in the system.
3. Device shall include an integrated LCD and joystick button for setup and
troubleshooting, including readouts of flash duration (timeout), battery
conditions, and LED testing functionality.
4. Device shall include two LED indicators for status and troubleshooting.
5. Device shall be capable of operating as a transmitter or receiver.
6. All receiver nodes can repeat a signal a single time.
7. Device shall be capable of providing site-survey data for verification of signal

strength between network devices.
8. Device shall include network-wide modification of sign controller settings and

output durations, using programmability from any networked transceiver
without the use of additional equipment or software.
9. Synchronize the system components to activate the indications within 120

msec of one other and remain synchronized throughout the duration of the
flash (timeout) cycle.
10. Device shall have an operating voltage range of 3.3VDC to 15VDC.
11. Device shall be replaceable independently of other components.
H. Pedestrian Push Buttons
1. The push buttons shall be ADA compliant, field adjustable directional arrow,
and be Polara iNX model or approved equal.
02890-8
2. The push button shall have an activation confirmation feature that consists of
yellow LEDs and voice confirmation that are activated when push button is
pressed with an adjustable operating force range of 0.5 to 3.5 lbs. The speaker
shall be field replaceable, weather resistant, have a 10 watt audio amplifier
and a maximum volume of 100 dB at 1 meter.
3. The push button shall have a rated power of 10 to 24 Vdc, have a maximum
idle current draw of approximately 9 mA @ 12 Vdc.
4. The operating temperature range shall be from -30 degrees to +165 degrees F.
5. All wiring shall be Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL) approved for voltages

involved.
6. The enclosure shall be a NEMA 250 Type 4X housing that is powder coated
cast aluminum cover and backplate. Yellow powder coat finish is standard.
7. An instructional sign shall be retroreflective sheeting with tamper-resistant

mounting screws and it shall be situated above the push button. The standard
size for the sign is 9-inch x 12-inch. Any variation will be at the City’s
discretion.
I. Signs
1. The Pedestrian Crosswalk RRFB System shall include a back-to-back Non-

vehicular Warning Pedestrian Crossing Traffic (W11-2) static sign with back-
to-back Supplemental Warning (W16-7P) static plaques that are MUTCD
compliant and constructed on 5052-H32 aluminum.
a. W11-2: Specifications: 36” Diamond, 2.25” Rad with two (2) 3/8”
holes 36” apart on center; Sheeting: DG3 Fluorescent Yellow-green.
b. W16-7P: Specifications: 24” x 12” 0.080 gauge, 1.5” Rad with two (2)
3/8” holes 1.5” in center, Sheeting: DG3 Fluorescent Yellow-green.
2. An alternative to the Warning Pedestrian Crossing Traffic static sign is an

integrated LED-enhanced flashing Warning Pedestrian Crossing Traffic sign
that is edge-lit such as the TAPCO Blinker Sign or City approved alternative.
a. The sign shall be constructed on 0.080” gauge aluminum, have an

enclosed aluminum channel to protect wiring against inclement
weather, tampering and vandalism, have amber environmentally-
sealed, high-power LEDs with a life expectancy of 100,000 hours and
an operating temperature range of -40 degrees to +122 degrees F.
J. Pole Assembly
02890-9
1. The pedestal pole assembly is required for support of the Pedestrian

Crosswalk RRFB System. Refer to Figure 1 and Figure 2 included in this
specification for details of assembly items.
2. Pole shaft shall be one-piece galvanized steel pipe. It shall be made of

Schedule 80 aluminum alloy 6061-T6 manufactured in accordance with
ASTM B429, threaded on one end with outside dimensions of 4.5”.
3. The pedestal base assembly shall be FHWA certified, meet AASHTO

breakaway requirements, arranged to be mounted on a concrete base, attached
by four internal galvanized anchor bolts of standard size 1” x 42”. The base
shall be made of cast aluminum and it shall include an 8.5” square handhole
cover that is also made of cast aluminum. The door shall be secured by a
5/16”-18 x 1” hex head bolt.
4. Breakaway pole shall meet the requirements shown in standard detail 02582-
04.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION
A. Cabinet Mounting
1. Cabinets shall not physically or aerially encroach sidewalks, pedestrian

walking paths, or bikeways.
2. Cabinet shall be mounted above the W11-2 sign in cases where the cabinet is
encroaching in areas where parking or pedestrian movements occur, per
MUTCD 2A.18.
3. The clearance between the base of the cabinet and the top of the push button
assembly shall be at minimum 2-inches.
4. The cabinet shall be arranged for side of pole mounting. The mounting
brackets shall be supplied as part of the complete cabinet package.
5. The pole shall be a standard specified outer diameter aluminum pedestal pole
and shall be supplied with one end threaded for easy installation into a
pedestal base.
6. The pole shall be 13’ – 15’ length Schedule 40 pipe raw aluminum as
required.
7. The pedestal base shall be TP-358 cast aluminum that mounts on a concrete
foundation attached by four internal anchor bolts imbedded in the foundation.
The pedestal base shall have a large 8.5” square hand hole cover allowing
access to the interior.
02890-10
B. Solar Panel Mounting Hardware
1. The photovoltaic (PV) module mounting assembly shall be constructed of

galvanized steel (ASTM A-153 Class A) or aluminum, of adequate design and
strength to provide a means of securely attaching the PV module frame to a
pole at a permanent angle of 45 to 50 degrees. The pole mounting hardware
shall accommodate a steel 4.5-inch O.D. pole. The bracket shall be at an
inscribed angular position about the pole. Mounting hardware may mount on
the side of the pole or on the top of the pole as long as the bracket is of
adequate strength to withstand the weight and wind stresses.
C. Physical and Electrical Interface
1. A physical and electrical interface needs to be maintained for the connection

of the controller unit. This interface will need to be a terminal strip on the rear
of the control panel. This terminal strip shall be where the harness will hook
up for the controller unit. The terminal strip will need to be clearly labeled
DC+,DC-, earth ground, relay N/O, relay common.
2. A physical and electrical interface will have to be maintained between the

solar panel, batteries, and signals; both can be utilized on (1) terminal block to
save space. All labeling shall be silk-screened.
A. Testing: Pedestrian Crosswalk RRFB System shall meet or exceed all applicable
Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices and /or Institute Transportation
Engineers standards and these specifications. In addition to testing of pre-shipment
samples, complete testing of school zone beacon assemblies may be required at any
time prior to acceptance. ITE specified signal lamp intensity shall be maintained.
3.03 TRAINING
A. Training requirements are listed below. The City shall furnish the training classroom
and the Project Manager shall schedule the training sessions.
1. Assembly. One (8) hour training class on field assembly training shall be
provided as requested by the city Project Manager, for the City’s installation
Contractors and City of Houston’s, Houston Public Works - Transportation
and Drainage Operations personnel. The instructional training shall be for up
to twenty (20) persons at the request of the Project Manager.
2. Maintenance. One training class consisting of eight (8) hours of Maintenance

training shall be provided for up to twenty (20) persons, as requested by the
City Project Manager.
02890-11
Figure 1- RRFB with W11-2 Static Sign Assembly
Figure 2- RRFB with W11-2 Blinker Sign Assembly
END OF SECTION
02890-12
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 02893
TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 GENERAL
A. This specification consists of the requirements to construct traffic signals in the City
of Houston.
C. Section 01755 - Starting Systems
D. Section 01785 – Project Record Documents
E. Section 02951 - Pavement Repair and Restoration
A. Unit Prices
1. With exception to Work described in 1.03.A.2, no separate payment shall be

made for traffic signal construction under this Section.
a. Items and work processes for traffic signal construction in this section
are incidental to furnishing and installing a functioning traffic signal,
complete and in place with all appurtenances.
b. Payment will be included under various traffic signal component unit

price items in Document 00410 – Bid Form.
(1) Payment for traffic control devices will be on the basis of each
device installed as shown on the drawings or as directed by the
City Engineer and/or the approved City of Houston
Representative.
c. Traffic control and regulation during construction will be paid

according to Section 01555 – Traffic Control and Regulation.
02893-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
d. Before doing any work or ordering any materials, the Contractor and
Subcontractors shall verify all measurements of existing and new work
and shall be responsible for their correctness. Any difference which
may be found shall be submitted to the Engineer and/or the approved
City of Houston Representative for consideration before proceeding
with the work. No extra compensation will be allowed because of
differences between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on
the drawings.
2. Remove and salvage of existing traffic signal equipment will be measured by

each traffic signal.
B. Stipulated Price per Intersection (Lump Sum) If the Contract is a Stipulated Price
Contract, payment for work in this Section is included in the total Stipulated Price.
1.04 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The requirements of this contract encompass the construction of new traffic signal
installations either installed 1.) concurrent with the street or roadway improvement
phases of the work so that the signals will be in operation at the time the intersection
is open to traffic, or 2.) as traffic signal or traffic signal related improvements.
B. The purpose and intent of this specification is for the Contractor to furnish all labor,
materials, tools, equipment, tests, adjustments and all other incidentals necessary to
install and/or modify a traffic signal system. The Contractor shall also install items
furnished by the City of Houston, specified herein. All materials and equipment
furnished for installation under this contract shall be new and unused, unless
otherwise specified. Contractor shall furnish and install or install materials as
specified herein.
C. All bidders shall visit the job site prior to bidding in order to acquaint themselves
with all job site conditions and problems, if any, and all other factors that may affect
the bid on all project specific contracts. On work order type projects, all bidders shall
thoroughly familiarize themselves with City of Houston requirements and general
field conditions. Any discrepancy between drawings and specifications shall be
resolved prior to bidding.
D. These specifications together with the reference Drawings and Contract Documents
require the furnishings of all superintendence, labor, tools, equipment and apparatus
necessary for the complete working system of the traffic signal installation(s). All
submittals need to be pre-approved prior to the job and by the inspector as directed by
the Engineer and/or the approved City of Houston Representative.
02893-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
E. Email Traffic Signal Engineering and Operations,

(citytrafficprojmgr@houstontranstar.org) for coordination and inspection of traffic
signal work. Contractor is required to notify daily activities to City Traffic Signal
Inspector via email (citytrafficinspector@houstontranstar.org) before 7:30 A.M.
F. All control equipment shall confirm to ITE and NEMA specifications and in
accordance with the drawings and specifications.
G. All construction will be in accordance with the Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic
Control Devices, latest revisions, and in accordance with the drawings and
specifications.
H. All wiring throughout each traffic signal installation shall be in strict accordance with
the National Electric Code, all local applicable codes and shall also comply with all
requirements of CenterPoint Energy, in order that service may be obtained from them.
All costs for code compliance are to be included in the bid for this contract.
1.05 REFERENCES
A. References: References to known standard specifications in the Specification shall

mean and intend latest edition of such specification adopted and published at date of
invitation to submit Proposals.
B. Reference to technical society, organization or body is made in Specifications in

accordance with the following abbreviations:
1. AASHO: American Association of State Highway Officials
2. ACI: American Concrete Institute
3. AIEE: American Institute of Electrical Engineers*
4. AISC: American Institute of Steel Construction
5. AISI: American Iron and Steel Institute
6. ASA: American Standards Association
7. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
8. AWSC: American Welding Society Code
9. FS: Federal Specification
10. IMSA: International Municipal Signal Association
11. IPCEA: Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association
12. ITE: Institute of Traffic Engineers
02893-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
13. MUTCD: Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and
Highways
14. NBFU: National Board of Fire Underwriters
15. NBS: National Bureau of Standards
16. NEC: National Electrical Code
17. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association
18. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Association
19. UL: Underwriters' Laboratories
* IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) – name changed

from AIEE & IRE (Institute of Radio Engineers)
1.06 PERMITS, LAWS, CODES, ETC.
A. The contractor and subcontractors shall comply with all Federal, State and local
Laws, Codes and Ordinances applicable to the work and all requirements of the
National board of Fire Underwriters having jurisdiction. If the above laws, codes or
ordinances conflict with specification, then the laws, codes or ordinances shall govern
except where Specification exceeds them in quality of quantity of materials or labor.
Obtain and pay for all permits required in connection with the execution of the work
as required. The Engineer and/or the approved City of Houston Representative shall
be furnished with certified copies of these permits if requested.
1.07 COOPERATION WITH BUILDING OFFICIALS
A. Cooperate with local and other governmental officials and inspectors at all times. If
such official or inspector deems special inspection necessary, provide assistance and
facilities that will expedite their inspection. Any materials and or workmanship which
are rejected by the Traffic Signal Inspector by reason of failure to conform to the
requirements of the drawings or specifications, shall be removed and replaced by the
contractor at their own expense.
1.08 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Except in special instances, the Technical Sections of these specifications list more
than one manufacturer of the products specified. Products of listed manufacturers
conform basically to design and performance requirements as indicated on the
Drawings and specified herein and Contractor in proposing their use shall indicate by
detail drawings and/or descriptive data any modifications of items or assemblies
necessary to provide the indicated and/or specified work.
02893-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Requests for substitutions of materials must be submitted in writing to the Engineer

and/or the approved City of Houston Representative by the Contractor. These
substitutions will only be considered if fewer than three manufacturers are listed in
the Specifications.
C. Under no circumstances will the Engineer and/or the approved City of Houston
Representative be required to provide that a product proposed for substitution is, or is
not, of equal quality to the product specified. It is mandatory that the Contractor
submit to the Engineer and/or the approved City of Houston Representative, in
Writing, all evidence necessary to support this contention that the item proposed for
substitution is equal to the item indicated by the Contract Documents. Items
submitted for substitution must be submitted one month prior to bid opening.
1.09 MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
A. Install all manufactured items, materials and equipment in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's recommended specifications except that the Specifications herein,
where more stringent, shall be complied with.
1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Provide and maintain in proper order and in good, clean condition at the project sites,
one complete set of prints of all project drawings in accordance with Section 01785 –
Project Record Documents. On this set of drawings, the Contractor shall neatly print
and accurately inscribe, in red pencil, any and all changes or deviations from
construction and installation as originally indicated in the plans and specifications.
This set of prints shall be delivered to City of Houston - Traffic Signal Engineering
and Operations at Houston TranStar Second Floor, 6922 Old Katy Road, at the time
of final acceptance of the work by the City in order to provide the City with an “AS
BUILT” set of plans.
1.11 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Weather Protection
1. Contractor shall at all times provide protection against weather, so as to

maintain all work, materials, apparatus, and fixtures free from injury and
damages. At the end of the day’s work, all new work likely to be damaged
shall be covered or otherwise protected.
2. Wet work shall not be performed when temperature is below 40˚ F, or is likely
to go below 40˚ F, within the ensuing 48 hours, except when sufficient
protective heat is provided and the Engineer’s and/or the approved City of
Houston Representative’s approval in writing is obtained.
3. Contractor shall construct and maintain all necessary temporary drainage and
do all pumping necessary to keep excavations, pits and trenches free of water.
B. Operation of Equipment
02893-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. When electrical or other equipment is installed, it shall be the responsibility of

the Contractor to check out same for a period of time as required by the
Engineer and/or the approved City of Houston Representative for proper
testing of the equipment. All items of equipment, testing instruments and
incidentals necessary for proper testing of equipment shall be furnished by
Contractor.
C. When any temporary facility is no longer needed for the proper conduct of the work
as determined by the Engineer and/or the approved City of Houston Representative,
the Contractor shall completely remove it from the project and shall repair or replace
all material, equipment and finished surfaces damaged in doing so.
D. Contractor shall provide a portable toilet as needed.
1.12 PROTECTION
A. Provide barricades, fences, lights, etc., for protection of property and the public as
required by local and/or State Ordinances. Contractor will be held liable for all
damage to property and/or persons.
B. All barricades and signs shall conform to Texas MUTCD. Such barricades and
protective signs shall be provided by the Contractor at their expense.
C. Flow of traffic shall not be interrupted completely without the approval of the
Engineer and/or the approved City of Houston Representative. Restriction and minor
diversion will be kept to a minimum. No work will be permitted in the traffic lanes
during peak hours from 7:00 to 9:00 AM and 4:00 to 6:00 PM Monday through
Friday. Any open cuts in the intersections during these hours will be covered with
steel plates to maintain uninterrupted traffic.
D. Flagmen shall be certified flagmen or off-duty uniformed peace officers of the law.
Contractor shall provide flagmen to direct traffic when directed by the Area Engineer
and/or the approved City of Houston Representative of the Traffic Management and
Maintenance Division. This does not relieve Contractor of responsibility of taking
other steps and providing other personnel who he may deem necessary for protection
of work and public.
E. Appropriate Personal Protective Equipment shall be worn by all contract personnel

when on the job-site.
1.13 RESTORING DAMAGED AREAS
A. For all work at identified intersections and along communication cable routing, in the
event that sidewalks, pavement, curbs, wheelchair ramps, driveways, landscaped
areas, areas with special pavement treatment, sprinkler systems, lighting systems, or
other items or properties both public and private that are damaged during this
construction, shall be restored to their prior condition without expense to the City of
Houston. No separate payment will be made for the restoration of these items.
02893-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Where signal poles are installed inside the existing 4 foot sidewalk or within 12
inches of either side of the existing sidewalk, the Contractor shall provide a minimum
of 4 foot paved sidewalk 12 inches away from edge of the signal pole. The horizontal
slope for the sidewalk shall be 2 percent.
1.14 WARRANTY
A. All items installed under this specification, having a manufacturer’s guarantee shall
be installed by or under the direction of the manufacturer or the manufacturer’s
certified agent, when so required to conform with the manufacturer’s guarantee, and
all such manufacturer’s guarantees, warranties and bonds shall be forwarded to the
City of Houston representative.
B. The Contractor, by accepting this contract, guarantees all workmanship, materials and
equipment performed or furnished and installed under this specification for a period
of one year from date of completion and shall, at their entire expense and within said
term of guarantee, repair, replace or adjust all faulty, broken, or maladjusted materials
and/or equipment furnished and installed under this specification, including lamp
replacement.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Contractor is responsible for furnishing all materials and labor for construction of
items as shown on drawings and other incidentals necessary to provide a fully
operational traffic control signal. The Contractor shall furnish and install all
materials, with exception of materials to be provided by the City of Houston.
B. Material should be installed according to the technical specifications and standard

details under the direction of the City of Houston representative assigned to the
project.
C. In addition to all items to be furnished and installed by the Contractor, the Contractor
shall furnish and install all items necessary for the complete signal system including
but not limited to the following incidental materials:
1. All conduit nipples, couplings, grounding bushings, elbows, sweeps and

service heads.
2. All reinforcing steel and ties.
3. Concrete, sand, cement, gravel, asphalt, earth fill.
4. Span guy, down guys, anchor rod assemblies.
5. Sidewalk guy assemblies (if necessary).
02893-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
6. Guy guards, three bolts clamps, lag screws.
7. 5/8” Thru-bolts, nuts, washers, thimble-eye nuts and bolts.
8. 5/16” Stranded galvanized steel cable for guys and catenaries.
9. ¼” Stranded galvanized steel cable for messengers.
10. Strand vises and links as needed.
11. Meter loop assemblies complete.
12. Signal mounting hardware.
13. Copperweld ground rods and clamps furnished and installed in all foundations
and each pullbox.
14. Flexible stainless steel cable strap ties. Cable ties shall be Panduit Part #MLT
4H-LP or equivalent.
15. #6 or #8 Soft bare copper wire for grounding poles, conduits, etc.
16. Miscellaneous hardware.
D. Interconnect cable shall be communications grades as follows:
1. Type PE-38 or PE-22 (aerial)
2. Type PE-39 (underground)
E. All proposed changes in the signalization plan must be submitted to the City of
Houston, in writing, for approval.
F. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of all present utilities that have
been located by the various utility companies. They shall also maintain and protect
the existing traffic signals and their related equipment from damage caused by
subcontractors and employees under the Contractor’s Contract but only to the extent
of the Contractor’s normal work operation, and the Contractor shall not be
responsible for routine maintenance, normal wear and tear, or an act of God, unless
otherwise specified.
G. The contractor shall bag all newly installed signal heads and/or pedestrian signal
heads with burlap until final inspection and acceptance by the City of Houston
Representative. The signal shall be wrapped with burlap at least twice so that the
entire signal head is covered, and cannot be seen until it is placed in operation. The
signal shall be de- energized while not in use. If, in the opinion of the Engineer and/or
the approved City of Houston Representative, the new heads would create a hazard
condition to motorists and/or pedestrians, the heads shall not be installed until one
hour before turning on the new equipment.
02893-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
H. All existing traffic signal equipment removed by the Contractor shall be tagged to
identify location. A representative of Traffic Signal Engineering and Operations shall
be given 24 hour notice before delivery of an approval location by the Engineer
and/or the approved City of Houston Representative. Equipment not identified will
not be accepted and equipment not returned will result in the withholding of payment
to the Contractor. Traffic Signal Engineering and Operations personnel will issue a
receipt to Contractor for returned equipment.
I. When the City Traffic Engineer and/or the approved City of Houston Representative
determines that the need for a traffic signal is critical to the public welfare, early “turn
on” of the signal shall be required before the completion of the project. If the need
arises, the City of Houston will assume the responsibility for maintenance and
liability, or negotiate with the Contractor for maintenance and liability for such a
signal.
J. The City Traffic Engineer and/or the approved City of Houston Representative may,
at any time, authorize City of Houston personnel to enter the controller cabinet in
order to restore any and all signal equipment to proper operation if the malfunction or
non- function of such equipment poses a hazard or inconvenience to motorists or
pedestrians. Such authorized entry may occur at any time within the period of the
Contract and such authorized entry shall in no way relieve the Contractor or
manufacture of their respective warranties.
K. During the burn-in period, the Contractor shall restore operation of the installation
within four (4) hours after notification of a malfunction. If the Contractor does not
respond within four (4) hours, the City of Houston shall have the option of making
the necessary repair and billing the Contractor for the actual time and materials
required.
L. When replacing sidewalks or curb and gutters, it shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor to reinstall them to match existing color and/or surface texture.
M. Materials specified herein shall be installed as per Traffic and Transportation

Construction Details drawings-02893 series and the City of Houston Traffic Signal
Standard Specifications.
N. The Contractor shall be responsible for having an authorized manufacturer

representative of traffic control equipment present as per the requirements of
Specification Section 01755, “STARTING SYSTEMS”.
O. Each work order or intersection shall be a stand alone “Turn Key Job” by the
Contractor.
P. A steel template of the proper dimensions shall be furnished and used by the
Contractor to secure anchor bolts while constructing pole foundations.
Q. Flexible stainless steel cable ties for strapping signal cable to messenger shall be min:
02893-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. 13.38-inches long, 120 lb. min. tensile holding strength, 3/16-inch to 3-1/2-
inches wire bundle range. (Panduit Part #MLT 4H-LP or approved equal).
2.02 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. The Traffic & Transportation Division for Traffic Signal Contracts shall schedule a
Preconstruction Meeting at TranStar after award of contract and prior to
commencement of construction. The Contractor or the Contractor’s authorized
representative will be required to attend.
B. For roadway contracts, the preconstruction meeting for the traffic signal work shall be
coordinated by the roadway project manager.
2.03 MATERIALS FURNISHED BY THE CITY
A. Prior to material pick up, a written notice is required sixty (60) calendar days in
advance. This letter shall be addressed to:
City of Houston - Traffic Signal Engineering & Operations Traffic & Transportation
Division
6922 Old Katy Road (Houston TranStar)
Houston, Texas 77024
B. Materials furnished by the City shall be picked up by the Contractor at the City of
Houston – Transportation and Drainage, Traffic Operation and Maintenance Center,
2200 Patterson Street, Houston, Texas 77007, after giving a minimum of two (2)
working days notice to the City of Houston by emailing to:
(citytrafficprojmgr@houstontranstar.org) . This is in addition to the written
requirements listed above. These materials will be furnished at no cost to the
Contractor.
C. Any and all material furnished by the City to the Contractor which is not used in this
contract is the property of the City of Houston and shall be returned to the locations
specified by the Traffic Signal Inspector before final payment is made to the
contractor.
2.04 PRODUCT DATA, SHOP DRAWINGS, AND SAMPLES
A. Contractor shall provide three (3) complete bound sets of Product Data, including:
illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures,
diagrams, and other information to illustrate materials or equipment for all Contractor
furnished equipment.
B. Contractor shall furnish shop drawings, as required in the standard specifications and
standard details, or as required by the Engineer and/or the approved City of Houston
02893-10
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Representative. As a minimum, Contractor shall be required to furnish shop drawings

for all structural elements, including cabinets, traffic signal poles, traffic signal arms,
luminaires, luminaire supports, vehicular traffic signal head mounts, and pedestrian
signal head mounts prior to ordering or fabricating these elements. Shop drawing
submittals are required for each of the preceding elements. Contractor is not required
to furnish shop drawings for any equipment furnished by the City of Houston.
D. Contractor shall furnish samples, or prototypes, of the following equipment within the
specified time frame.
Item Calendar Days from Bid Award

Controller Cabinet Assembly 45
Traffic Signal Controllers 60
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 OPERATION OF NEW & EXISTING TRAFFIC SIGNALS DURING CONTRACT

PERIOD
A. To facilitate construction, the Contractor shall be required to install temporary poles,

guys, cables, signals, conduits, wiring and adjustments as needed for temporary
traffic signal operation during construction. The Contractor will be responsible for
furnishing and installing all materials as directed by the City of Houston Signal
Inspector for temporary traffic signal installation. The Contractor shall contact the
signal inspector assigned to the project with a daily progress report. The Contractor
shall coordinate and obtain approval from the City of Houston signal inspector for all
material as well as the configuration of the temporary traffic signal prior to
installation. Proposed configurations and materials for the temporary traffic signal
installation shall be submitted to the City of Houston Traffic Signal Engineering and
Operations no less than five (5) working days prior to implementation. Operational
timing and phasing of the temporary traffic signal installation during construction will
be the responsibility of the City of Houston Traffic Management & Maintenance
Branch personnel. Temporary traffic signal work will not be paid for directly, but
shall be considered incidental to Traffic Control during construction. All temporary
facilities shall be removed as directed by the signal inspector and remain the property
of the Contractor upon operation of the new traffic signal construction.
02893-11
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. The Contractor shall maintain existing signal installation(s) operation during

construction of the new signal system. The Contractor may be required to photograph
the existing signal to document existing status and functionality of all signal hardware
and devices before beginning construction. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to
maintain all existing signal hardware and devices including signal heads and bulbs,
interconnect, pedestrian elements, etc. The Contractor will not be responsible for
power consumption of the signal during construction, and for work with the controller
or inside the cabinet unless a city representative is onsite or as directed otherwise by
the City of Houston. The Contractor shall submit all existing intersection
documentation to the city inspector for the project before commencing work. The
Contractor shall respond within two (2) hours after notification from appropriate City
of Houston personnel. If the Contractor does not respond, the City of Houston will
make necessary repairs and bill the contractor at an overtime rate (1.5X) for work
performed.
The Contractor shall provide a minimum of five (5) working days notice to City of
Houston representative at 713-881-3172 when seeking approval for a change in
location, method of operation of traffic signals or traffic lanes, or change in traffic
patterns or timing plans.
C. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of two (2) days notice when seeking
approval regarding the replacement of an existing traffic signal installation.
D. The Signal Contractor shall be billed for any repair work performed on overtime
(1.5X) for any repairs required because of Contractor negligence.
E. Uniformed Police Officers shall be employed by the contractor and are required to be
on the job site. It shall be mandatory to have Uniformed Police Officer(s) for traffic
signal turn-ons. Certified flagmen or Uniformed Police Officers may be used, as
needed, for lane closures. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to use the appropriate
personnel for lane closures. The Texas Manual On Uniform Traffic Control Devices
will be observed for all lane closures.
F. All work in this contract, requiring signal outages, or lane closures, shall be
performed between the hours of 9:00 A.M. and 4:00 P.M. Monday through Friday,
unless prior authorization has been obtained from the Engineer and/or the approved
City of Houston Representative.
G. Down time, if any, shall be kept to an absolute minimum. The switch over from the
old system, or signal turn-on, shall be accomplished within the six (6) hours between
9:00 A.M. and 3:00 P.M. Contractor shall furnish and install all temporary traffic
control (stop signs, flagmen, uniformed officers, etc.) during any down time, in
addition to all required construction signs. Contractor shall inform the city of Houston
to schedule a turn-on date a minimum of 72 hours in advance of need.
02893-12
CITY OF HOUSTON
H. The Contractor shall hire a traffic engineer approved by the City of Houston to
implement the traffic signal timings for the temporary signal system(s) and any
modifications to the traffic control plan.
I. The Contractor shall furnish the City of Houston with a 24-hour telephone number for
the purpose of forwarding malfunction calls. In the event that the Contractor cannot
be reached at the above mentioned number, the City of Houston will take the
necessary action to restore the traffic signal system to normal operation and all
expenses incurred will be deducted from the final payment of the work order. All City
of Houston labor expense shall be billed at overtime (1.5X) rates.
J. Contractor will be required to respond immediately and to initiate emergency

maintenance operations on the jobsite a maximum of four (4) hours after the call is
received from City of Houston. The Contractor shall pursue repairs to the traffic
signal system and have it back in normal operation within a maximum of six (6)
hours after call is received by the City of Houston, or a representative of the City of
Houston.
3.02 CHARACTER OF WORKMEN AND EQUIPMENT
A. All equipment and workmen provided by the contractor for work hereunder shall be
the best available for the kind of work being performed. Any person employed by the
Contractor whom the City of Houston may deem temporarily or permanently
incompetent or unfit to perform the work, shall under written instruction of the
Engineer and/or the approved City of Houston Representative be removed from the
job, and such person shall not again be employed on the work. Failure by the
Contractor to provide adequate equipment may result in annulment of this contract as
herein provided.
3.03 ELECTRICAL WORK
A. Electrical work is defined as installing cables, electrical terminations, and signal turn-
ons. Installation of conduits is EXCLUDED from electrical work. Installation of loop
wire in sawcut is EXCLUDED from electrical work.
B. All Contractor personnel working on City of Houston traffic signals performing

duties directly involving setting up or installing signs, signals, pushbuttons, or traffic
control shall be International Municipal Signal Association (IMSA) certified Level I,
or greater. An IMSA certified Level II technician shall be present on site during all
cabinet terminations and during the installation of all signs, pavement markings,
signals, pushbuttons, and traffic control.
3.04 SALVAGED MATERIALS
02893-13
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. At existing traffic signal installations which are to be updated or modernized by the

Contractor, all abandoned wire, cable, signals, poles, pole bases, pole tops, mast arms,
signs and other miscellaneous equipment shall be taken down and/or removed. All
equipment shall be reduced to simplest form. These salvaged materials are the
property of the City of Houston and are to be delivered and unloaded to the location
or locations designated by the City of Houston Traffic Signal Inspector assigned to
the project.
3.05 ELECTRICAL SERVICE
A. The Contractor shall notify the City of Houston Traffic Signal Inspector assigned to
the project within seven (7) days of Contractor award for power at intersection.
3.06 SUBCONTRACTING
A. If a vendor subcontracts any portion of a contract for any reason, they must include,
in writing, the name and address of the subcontractor, name of the person to be
contacted including telephone number and extent of work to be performed. This
information is to be submitted with bid proposal. In the event of a change during
construction, Contractor is required to submit new information to the Engineer and/or
the approved City of Houston Representative, for approval, five (5) days prior to
using the subcontractor on the job. City of Houston reserves the right to reject a bid of
any bidder if the bid names a subcontractor who has previously failed in the proper
performance of an award or failed to deliver on time contracts of a similar nature, or
who is not in a position to perform properly under this award. City of Houston
reserves the right to make determination as to the foregoing.
3.07 SYSTEM GROUNDING
A. All poles, cabinets, conduits, signal common, and service common shall be bonded
with a No. 8 AWG bare copper wire, or equal, to form a continuous system and
effectively grounded to 5/8-inch x 8 foot copperweld ground rods.
3.08 STRANDED GALVANIZED STEEL CABLE
A. Guy, messenger and catenary wires shall be Siemens Martin Grade, seven strand,
galvanized, high strength steel cable, 5/16 inch diameter for guy and catenary wires
and ¼ inch diameter for messenger wires.
3.09 POLE RAKING
A. Poles shall be set with a sufficient amount of rake so that they are plumb with the
signal load or slightly raked away from the signal load. Cantilever pole structures and
4-1/2” OD steel poles should be plumb; strain poles should have a slight backward
rake (1 to 2 inches); wood poles shall utilize down guys to maintain appropriate
signal height clearance during construction. The Contractor shall rake the poles to the
satisfaction of the Traffic Signal Inspector.
02893-14
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Rake is hereby defined as the inclination to the vertical measured at the top of the
structure in the opposite direction of the strain axis.
3.10 ABANDONED FOUNDATIONS
A. The tops of unused foundations shall be removed to a depth of two feet (minimum)
below grade and back-filled according to specifications.
3.11 LOADS AND STRESSES DUE TO CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS
A. Contractor shall have full responsibility for preventing over-stresses of any structure,
cables, poles or any part of them during construction. This also applies to existing
work facilities affected by Contractor’s operations. The Contractor shall fully check
the effect of Contractor’s operations in this regard and shall provide temporary
supports and connections required to assure safety and stability of both new and
existing work to prevent over-stress of any part thereof.
3.12 APPARATUS LOCATION
A. The locations of all poles, controllers, actuators and signals shown on the plans are
diagrammatic only. The specific locations of such devices shall be decided by the
appropriate design personnel and shall be staked out under their direction. Vehicular
and pedestrian traffic signals shall be placed and aligned as the City of Houston
Traffic Signal Inspector directs.
3.13 CONCRETE POUR
A. The time of day of the concrete pour shall be stipulated by the Contractor.
3.14 SEQUENCE OF WORK
A. Each new signalized intersection shall be in operable condition including electrical

service within fourteen (14) days after the first signal pole is installed, unless
conditions caused by a paving contractor or roadway construction contractor prevents
the completion of the intersection(s).
B. The order in which the intersections are to be completed may be specified by the
Engineer and/or the approved City of Houston Representative and it shall be the sole
responsibility of the Contractor to schedule and coordinate their work. All work shall
be coordinated in such a manner as to prevent delays resulting from work to be
performed by others and to complete the Contractor’s work within the specified time.
C. On the day when the intersection is to be turned on or its “Turn On” date, the
Contractor will be given a “punch list” from the Signal Inspector for any items that
need attention concerning the conditions of signal equipment. These items shall be
completed within ten (10) days of the date on the “punch list” given to the contractor.
3.15 UTILITY COORDINATION
02893-15
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. The Contractor shall contact the Lone Star Notification Center (713-223-4567, in
Houston, 800-669-8344, outside Houston) 72 hours before commencing any work to
locate any utility lines in the construction area. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to
physically locate any water and sewer lines and to adjust the location of any
foundation(s), for approval by the City of Houston Traffic Signal Engineering and
Operations.
3.16 UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
A. The exact location of underground utilities and pipelines is not certain. The
Contractor shall contact the Utility Coordinating Committee (U.C.C.) to determine
exact locations of underground utilities prior to drilling for foundations or any other
work that might interfere with or damage present facilities. Contractor shall be
responsible for keeping the transmittal number from the U.C.C. current during
construction.
3.17 LOCAL CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall make any additional investigations he deems necessary to

properly bid any and all work related thereto. No additional compensation will be
made available to the Contractor for work arising from failure to examine the site
and/or subsoil conditions. Staking of specific locations by the Engineer and/or the
approved City of Houston Representative shall not remove the Contractors
responsibility for any damage caused by the Contractor to any underground utility.
3.18 RIGHTS OF VARIOUS INTERESTS
A. Wherever work being done by the City’s forces or by any other Contractor is
contiguous to work covered by this contract, the respective rights of the various
interests involved shall be established by Engineer and/or the approved City of
Houston Representative, to secure completion of the various portions of the work in
general harmony.
3.19 TRENCHING
A. No trenching shall be allowed within five feet of a tree.
3.20 DIRECTIONAL DRILLING, BORE, AND JACK
A. No open cutting or trenching of streets, driveways and sidewalks shall be allowed

without prior approval of the Engineer and/or the approved City of Houston
Representative at each location. All conduit runs under streets, driveways or
sidewalks shall be by directional drilling, bore, or jack. Water jetting methods shall
not be accepted.
3.21 PUBLIC SAFETY AND CONVENIENCE
02893-16
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. All work done under this contract shall be done in compliance with the Texas Manual
on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (TMUTCD). Each operation shall be considered
a work zone area and shall be treated in accordance with the TMUTCD.
B. The Contractor shall have a Certified Worksite Traffic Supervisor who will be
responsible for initiating, installing, and maintaining all traffic control devices as
described in the TMUTCD. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have at least one
(1) year of experience directly related to worksite traffic control in a supervisory or
responsible capacity and shall be certified by the American Traffic Safety Services
Association or International Municipal Signal Association. The Worksite Traffic
Supervisor will be incidental to Maintenance of Traffic and will not be measured
separately for payment.
C. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a twenty-four (24) hour day
basis and shall review the project on a day to day basis as well as being involved in
all changes to traffic control. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all
equipment and materials needed to maintain traffic control and handle traffic related
situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall insure that routine deficiencies are
corrected with a twenty-four (24) hour period.
D. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within forty-five (45)
minutes after notification of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to
repair the work zone traffic control or to provide alternate traffic arrangements.
E. Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with these provisions may be
grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a
designated Worksite Traffic Signal Supervisor or failure to comply with these
provisions will result in temporary suspension of all activities except traffic and such
other activities deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety.
F. The Contractor shall at all times so conduct their work as to insure the least possible
obstruction to normal pedestrian and vehicular traffic including access to all public
and private properties during all stages of construction, and inconvenience to the
general public and the residents in the vicinity of the work, and to insure the
protection of persons and property, in a manner satisfactory to the City Engineer
and/or the approved City of Houston Representative.
G. The Contractor shall provide all barricades and take all necessary precautions to
protect buildings and personnel. All work shall be complete in every respect and
accomplished in a workmanlike manner and contractor shall provide for removal of
all debris from City of Houston property.
H. The successful bidder shall at all times guard against damage or loss to the property
of the City of Houston or of other vendors or contractors and shall be held responsible
for replacing or repairing any such loss or damage. Any damage to landscaping in the
work area, including sod shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.
02893-17
CITY OF HOUSTON
I. Prior to closing any section of the project to traffic, the Contractor shall furnish, erect
and maintain barricades and warning signs at and in the vicinity of all construction
projects at all times, both day and night, during the construction period of the
contract, and all such barricades and warning signs, shall be in conformance with the
requirements of Part 6 Temporary Traffic Control of the Texas Manual on Uniform
Traffic Control Devices and as shown on the drawings.
J. Unless otherwise set forth in these specifications, the Contractor shall receive no
direct compensation for furnishing, erecting, and maintaining the necessary
barricades, lights, flares, signs, or for any other incidentals necessary for the good and
proper safety, convenience, and direction of traffic during the period prior to final
inspection and acceptance by the City of Houston.
3.22 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. A Steel Template shall be furnished by and used by the Contractor to secure anchor
bolts while constructing pole foundations.
B. Pole Foundations shall be capped where needed, in order to provide a smooth, flat,
and level surface. Capping shall consist of a one (1) inch thick mortar cap prepared
with a 1:3 sand-cement mortar ratio. The cap shall be steel trowel finished.
C. Extra-length Concrete Pole Foundations shall be provided when required by site

conditions. Reinforcing steel shall be increased by the same length as the increase in
foundation length. Rods shown on Foundation Details shall be increased as follows:
Each extra foot of foundation shall require on additional foot of length for hooked
rods and two additional turns for helix.
D. All Special Foundations shall be designated and approved by the appropriate design
engineer and/or the approved City of Houston Representative.
E. Sono Tube shall be used when the City of Houston Traffic Signal Inspector deems it
necessary.
3.23 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. Honeycombed surfaces or other defects shall be patched with mortar of the same
consistency as the mortar from which the concrete is made. Such mortar shall be well
trowelled and then floated to remove trowel marks.
B. Finish for Formed Surfaces After patching above specified, exposed formed surfaces
shall be finished by removing form marks, fins and other projections.
C. Finish for Uniformed Surfaces
1. Patches in streets, driveways and walks shall be finished to match adjacent

surfaces.
2. Surfaces not Otherwise Specified – Steel trowel finish.
02893-18
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Immediately after placing or finishing, concrete surfaces shall be protected against

moisture loss for a minimum of seven (7) days. Wet earth, waterproof paper, vinyl
sheets or cotton mats shall be placed over concrete during curing period in order to
insure fulfillment of this requirement. Membrane curing method may be used
EXCEPT when concrete surfaces are to receive additional concrete or mortar, or are
to be painted.
3.25 CONCRETE/PAVEMENT REPAIR
A. Repairs to concrete pavement shall be in accordance with Public Works Drawing

Numbers 02951-04 and 02951-05 titled, “Pavement Repair Details for Street Cuts”,
and Specification Section 02951, “Pavement Repair and Restoration”.
3.26 FLEXIBLE BASE PAVEMENT REPAIR
A. Repairs to flexible base pavement shall be made in accordance with Public Works
Drawing Number 02951-04 titled, “Pavement Repair Details for Street Cuts”, and
Specification Section 02951, “Pavement Repair and Restoration”.
3.27 TRAFFIC SIGNAL TESTING SERVICES
A. Procedures
1. Selection:
a. City of Houston shall employ an Independent Testing Laboratory to

ensure Contract Document compliance.
2. Test Reports
a. Testing laboratory will furnish reports to the Engineer, Structural

Engineer, City of Houston and Contractor covering all of its
determinations and all of its control services. Reports will show all
data customarily listed by the laboratory in reporting such tests
including daily reports on quantities and types of materials together
with location in the project. Form of reports will be as approved by the
Engineer and/or the approved City of Houston Representative.
3. Test Methods
a. Tests and inspections will be conducted in accordance with the

requirements of these Specifications or, if not herein specified in
accordance with the latest standards of the American Society for
Testing and Materials or other recognized authorities.
4. Contractor’s Responsibility
02893-19
CITY OF HOUSTON
a. Cooperate with the testing laboratory and:
(1) Make available, without cost, samples of all materials to be

tested.
(2) Furnish such normal labor as is necessary to obtain samples at

the project and to assist in making slump tests and casting and
curing cylinders.
(3) Advise the laboratory of the identity of material sources and

instruct these suppliers to allow inspections by the laboratory,
and notify the laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations
to allow for completion of initial tests and assignment of
inspection personnel.
(4) Contractor shall provide laboratory testing for each different

concrete load.
b. Rejected Materials and/or Workmanship
(1) If, after initial tests have been performed, any materials and/or
workmanship are rejected by the testing laboratory, Contractor
shall pay for any subsequent testing required for materials
which have been rejected and/or replaced.
(2) Any materials and/or workmanship which are rejected by the

testing laboratory by reason of failure to conform to the
requirements of the Drawings and/or Specifications, shall be
removed and replaced with new acceptable materials by the
Contractor at the Contractor’s own expense.
5. Additional Responsibility
a. The testing of all cable furnished shall be properly tested by the

manufacturer and data submitted through the Contractor to the
Engineer and/or the approved City of Houston Representative.
b. All cable furnished to the job site shall be properly tested on the reel
use.
3.28 PRELIMINARY WORK
A. Procedures
1. City Requirements
02893-20
CITY OF HOUSTON
a. City requirements relating to the work of this section shall be

ascertained by the Contractor. Contractor shall comply with all such
requirements, including those relating to continued maintenance until
completion of the project.
(1) If the City should require that certain portions of the work be
performed by City personnel and equipment, all costs in
connection therewith which are chargeable against the project
shall be paid by the Contractor as an obligation of this Section.
(2) If re-routing of vehicular and/or pedestrian traffic is necessary

to complete work of this Contract, Contractor shall submit a
copy of the Contractor’s proposed re- routing plan to the City
and the Engineer and/or the approved City of Houston
Representative for approval seventy-two (72) hours before
proceeding with the work.
(3) Re-installation and restoration of use of existing public and

private installations, which are temporarily and/or permanently
removed and/or relocated for work of this Contract, shall be
performed as a part of the work of this Section
2. Existing Installations of City-Owned Property
a. Perform all work relative to removal, storage and/or protection of

existing installations of street lights and signs, fire hydrants, manholes,
and other existing installations in the way of project construction.
b. Provide and maintain approved temporary protection of existing

installations until project completion and acceptance. Remove
temporary protection when, and as, directed by the City.
c. Existing facilities which are no longer required shall be disconnected

as directed. Comply with the requirements of municipal agencies
having jurisdiction over such work.
d. Unless otherwise directed, all abandoned facilities shall be removed by

Contractor and the holes and trenches filled with approved compacted
fill.
END OF SECTION
02893-21
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION TOPSOIL
SECTION 02911
TOPSOIL
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Furnishing and placing topsoil for finish grading and for seeding, sodding, and
planting.
C. Section 02315 – Roadway Excavation
E. Section 02921 – Hydro Mulch Seeding
F. Section 02922 – Sodding
A. Unit Prices.
1. No separate payment will be made for topsoil under this Section. Include
payment in Section 02921 - Hydro Mulch Seeding or Section 02922 -
Sodding.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TOPSOIL
A. Topsoil shall be fertile, friable, natural sandy loam surface soil obtained from
excavation or borrow operations having following characteristics:
1. pH value of between 5.5 and 6.5
2. Liquid limit: 50 or less
02911-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
3. Plasticity index: 20 or less
4. Gradation: maximum of 10 percent passing No. 200 sieve
B. Topsoil shall be reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, weeds, non-soil materials, and
other litter or contamination. Topsoil shall not contain roots, stumps, and stones
larger than 2 inches.
C. Obtain topsoil from naturally well-drained areas where topsoil occurs at minimum
depth of 4 inches and has similar characteristics to that found at placement site. Do
not obtain topsoil from areas infected with growth of, or reproductive parts of nut
grass or other noxious weeds.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Excavate topsoil for esplanades and areas to receive grass or landscaping from areas
to be further excavated. Stockpile in area approved by Project Manager.
B. Stockpile topsoil to depth not exceeding 8 feet. Cover to protect from erosion.
3.02 TOPSOIL EXCAVATION
A. Conform to excavation and stockpiling requirements of Section 02315 - Roadway

Excavation.
3.03 PLACEMENT
A. Place no topsoil until subgrade has been approved. For areas to be seeded or sodded,
scarify or plow existing material to minimum depth of 4 inches, or as indicated on
Drawings. Remove vegetation and foreign inorganic material. Place 4 inches of
topsoil on loosened material and roll lightly with appropriate lawn roller to
consolidate topsoil.
B. Increase depth of topsoil to 6 inches when placed over sand bedding and backfill
materials specified in Section 02320 - Utility Backfill Material.
C. For areas to receive shrubs or trees, excavate existing material and place topsoil to
depth and dimensions shown on Drawings.
D. Remove spilled topsoil from curbs, gutters, and, paved areas and dispose of excess
topsoil in accordance with requirements of Section 01576 - Waste Material Disposal.
E. Place topsoil to promote good drainage and compact with light roller. Water topsoil
after placement until saturated for minimum depth 6 inches, fill in and recompact
areas of settlement.
02911-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect topsoil from wind and water erosion until planting is completed.
END OF SECTION
02911-3
CITY OF HOUSTON TREE, PLANT, AND
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION HARDSCAPE PROTECTION
SECTION 02912
TREE, PLANT, AND HARDSCAPE PROTECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Tree root barriers; various depths and combinations may be required.
B. Tree trunk protectors.
C. Water barriers.
D. Staking and guying materials.
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for root barrier shall be on a linear foot basis for height noted.
2. Payment for tree trunk protector, water barriers and staking material shall be
on a linear foot basis for height noted.
3. Refer to Section 01270-Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures.
for Work in this Section is included in total Stipulated Price.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 256 - Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact
Resistance of Plastics
B. ASTM D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
C. ASTM D 790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and
Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials
D. ASTM D 2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property—Durometer Hardness
1.05 DEFINITIONS
02912-1
A. Tree root barrier: Mechanical barrier and root deflector to prevent tree roots from
damaging hardscapes and landscapes.
B. Tree trunk protector: Material to protect young tree trunks from rodents, string
trimmers, and lawn mowers.
C. Water barriers:
1. Controls run-off, preventing hardscape damage.
2. Prevents irrigation water from percolating under pavement.
3. Water corral for planting areas preventing pavement damage and saves water.
4. Prevents snow, ice, and saltwater run-off from polluting planting areas
adjacent to roadways and parking areas.
5. Liner to separate golf greens and turf.
6. Bamboo control.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data: Manufacturers standard literature defining materials for use on this
Project.
1. Submit product data in accordance with Section 01330 – Submittal

Procedures.
B. Shop drawings:
1. Indicate locations and extent for tree root barrier material.
2. Indicate trees receiving tree trunk protectors.
3. Indicate locations and extent of water barriers.
4. Indicate trees and plants to be staked and guyed.
C. Samples if required by Architect:
1. Tree root barrier: One full length panel.
2. Tree trunk protector: One unit.
3. Water barrier: One lineal foot of material.
4. Staking and guying: One lineal foot.
02912-2
D. Quality control submittals; manufacturer’s instructions: Complete installation

instructions for each item specified; may be combined with product data.
A. Qualifications; manufacturer: Minimum 20 years experience in tree and plant

protection and accessories.
A. Packing and shipping: Provide materials in original unopened containers with

manufacturer's labels intact and legible.
B. Acceptance at site:
1. Damaged materials determined by visual inspection will not be accepted.
2. Remove rejected materials from Project site immediately.
C. Storage and protection: Store materials in dry area in manufacturer's protective

packaging; in original containers with labels and instruction instructions intact.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Products of manufacturers meeting indicated standards and specified material

properties are acceptable for use, subject to approval of product list and
samples.
B. Basic Material Properties of Tree Root Barriers
02912-3
Homopolymer
Material and Thickness
Polyethylene
Value Homopolymer
Properties ASTM Test Method
Polyethylene
Tensile Stress Yield D638 3800
Elongation at Break % D638 10%
Tensile Modulus D638 155,000
Notched Izod Impact D256 0.4 – 0.4
Flexural Modulus 73 PSI D790 145,000
Hardness Shore D2240 P66
2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Tree root barriers:
1. Shall be produced 12” – 48” depth.
2. Material: 0.080-inch wall thickness, nominal, injection molded 50% post-

consumer recycled polypropylene panels with UV inhibitors.
3. Panel Specifics:
a. 7/16-inch Wide integral molded 0.08-inch thickness double top edge

with stiffening ribs; bottom edge attached to vertical root deflecting
ribs.
b. Integral molded 0.080-inch thickness by 2-inch deep vertical root

directing ribs spaced at 6.0-inch O.C.
c. Integral molded 0.080-inch thickness by 2-inch long by 3/8-inch wide

horizontal anti-lift ground lock tabs; minimum three per panel.
4. Preassembled joiner system for panel connection to adjacent panel.
5. Refer to standard details for root barrier installation.
B. Tree trunk protectors:
1. Material: 0.060-inch thickness polyethylene with UV inhibitors, recyclable.
2. Size: 9-inch high by single length accommodating tree up to 4-inch dia.
3. Larger trees indicated for protection: Couple two or more sections together.
C. Water barriers:
02912-4
1. Product standard of quality: Water Barrier WB Series.
2. Material: 0.030-inch 0.040-inch thickness High Density Polyethylene

(HPDE).
3. Sizes: 24-inch, 30-inch, and 36-inch wide by 300-feet rolls.
4. Manufacturers standard sealing tape.
5. Sealant: Silicone type recommended by water barrier manufacturer for certain

applications; applications requiring sealant indicated in manufacturers product
data.
D. Staking and guying materials:
1. Material: Flat, woven polypropylene; 900 lb. break strength.
2. Size: wide by manufacturers standard roll lengths.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide related materials for complete installation of specified materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of conditions:
1. Verify other work in other sections, in, at, and around landscaping work is
complete to extent that no damage will occur to newly planted materials or,
any possible construction related damage will be minimal and replacement
plant material is readily available for planting at no additional cost.
2. Obtain verification, in writing, from work required in other Sections directly

involving work in this Section regarding correct grades have been provided,
coordination of topsoil spreading, and lawns and grasses planting.
3. The contractor shall fulfill the responsibilities below prior to beginning work.
Failure to do so will require removal or replanting work in this section.
a. Provide written notification to Architect of unacceptable conditions.
b. Receive verification of written notice.
3.02 PREPARATION
02912-5
A. Surface protection: Use methods necessary to prevent damage to completed site work
performed in other Sections. Protect access to and areas around planted materials.
Restore damaged areas to original compaction, grades, and lines; repair damaged
grassed areas.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Tree root barriers: Install in accord with manufacturers reviewed installation

instructions where indicated on reviewed shop drawings with vertical root directing
ribs facing inwards towards trees or plants; connect panels together as required.
B. Tree trunk protectors:
1. Install in accord with manufacturers reviewed installation instructions where

indicated on reviewed shop drawings.
2. Join two or more segments together for trees over 4-inch dia.
C. Water barriers:
1. Install where indicated on reviewed shop drawings in accord with

manufacturers reviewed installation instructions using material widths
required for conditions encountered.
2. Seal to hardscape surfaces with specified sealant.
3. Join material lengths with manufacturers sealing tape.
D. Staking and guying materials:
1. Immediately after planting, guy and stake designated trees and large plants.
2. Include tightening of guying materials to bring trees and plants to upright

position.
END OF SECTION
02912-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION TREE PLANTING
SECTION 02915
TREE PLANTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This section specifies the requirements and standards for planting trees using a
mechanical tree spade and container grown trees.
C. Section 01576 - Waste Material Disposal
A. Unit Price per tree.
1. Payment for tree planting is on unit price basis for each tree planted and shall
include cost of watering during maintenance period for trees not served by
irrigation system.
2. When shown on Drawings or directed by Project Manager to remove and

relocate tree affected by trench zone, work shall be paid for under one of the
following bid items.
a. Bid item "Remove and Relocate Tree" includes moving tree with truck
mounted tree spade and replanting same tree in new location. Payment
is for each tree removed and relocated.
b. Bid item "Remove, Temporary Store and Replant Tree" includes

moving tree with truck mounted tree spade and replanting tree at
temporary location, (determined by Contractor) maintaining tree until
construction is complete and replanting same tree back to its original
location. Payment is for each tree removed, stored and replanted.
1.04 REFERENCES
02915-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. ANSI Z 60.1 - Nursery Stock, most current publication.
B. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 40, Part 503 – Standards for the Use or Disposal
of Sewage Sludge
C. Texas Administrative Code, Title 30, Chapter 332 – Composting
D. United States Composting Council (USCC) Seal of Testing Assurance (STA)

program
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall conform to requirements of Section 01330-Submittal Procedures.
B. Submit physical address for location of trees. Trees shall be tagged in field for
transplanted trees, and at the nursery for container trees, for inspection by City
Engineer or City Forester. Tag shall be securely attached to branch, shall be
waterproof, and shall legibly bear designation of botanical and common name.
Submit right of entry agreement for City Engineer or City Forester to access tree farm
or nursery in order to inspect trees.
C. Submit following documentation for Compost to be utilized:
1. Feedstock by percentage in the final compost.
2. Documentation that the compost meets federal and state health and safety
regulations.
3. Documentation that the composting process has met time and temperature
requirements.
4. Copy of producer’s STA certification.
5. Copy of the current TCEQ compliance statement signed by facility manager

for any biosolids compost utilized.
A. Transplanted trees shall be planted by a contractor specializing in tree spade planted

trees. The contractor shall have a minimum of 8 years experience in planting trees
with truck mounted tree spades. The contractor shall have immediate access to
required trees in a tree farm/field located within 40 miles of project site. Container
trees shall be planted by Landscaping firm with a minimum of 3 years experience in
planting container grown trees.
1.07 WARRANTY
02915-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Contractor shall warrant trees against defects including death, unsatisfactory growth,
or loss of shape due to improper pruning, maintenance, or lack of moisture, for 2 year
after completion of construction (substantial completion). Contractor shall plumb
leaning trees during warranty period.
B. Remove and replace trees found to be dead during warranty period. Remove and
replace trees which have more than 40% twig and/or foliage dieback or are in
doubtful condition at the end of warranty period, or if approved by City Engineer,
extend warranty period for such trees for a full growing season. Any trees that are
required to be replaced under warranty shall be replaced at no addition cost to owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TREES
A. Substitutions of specified tree species and sizes, and tree spade and container size
shall not be made without written approval from City Engineer. When specified
planting material is not obtainable, submit proof on non-availability together with
proposal for use of equivalent material. Substitutions of larger size than specified will
be allowed, provided it meets requirements article 2.01.B through E of this section,
but shall be provided at no additional cost to owner.
B. Provide trees which are straight and symmetrical and have persistently preferred main
leader. Co-dominant or dual leaders will not be allowed or accepted. Trees with a
significant number of v-crotches, or trees with major branches that have v-crotches
will not be allowed or accepted. The crown shall be in good overall proportion to the
entire height of the tree. The minimum crown spread and height shall conform to the
following standards for each tree:
1. Transplant Trees:
a. 3” diameter tree shall have a minimum canopy spread of 50” diameter,

total tree height of 8 feet, and canopy height of 5 feet.
b. 4” diameter tree shall have a minimum canopy spread of 70” diameter,

overall tree height of 10 feet, and a canopy height of 6.5 feet.
c. 5” diameter tree shall have a minimum canopy spread of 90” diameter,

overall tree height of 12 feet, and a canopy height of 8 feet.
d. 7” diameter tree shall have a minimum canopy spread of 110”

diameter, overall tree height of 15 feet, and a canopy height of 10 feet.
2. Container Trees:
a. Tree diameter, overall tree height, and canopy height shall conform to
ANSI Z 60.1 (most current publication).
02915-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Tree diameter and/or container/spade size shall be as specified on the drawings. Tree
diameter to be measured 6 inches above natural grade or planting media for each tree.
D. Trees shall be healthy, vigorous, and in overall good condition. Trees shall be free of
disease, insects, eggs, larvae; and free of defects such as wasp galls, knots, trunk
wounds or scars, abrasions or disfigurement.
E. Foliage shall be dark green, as dark as is typical for the given species. The tree foliage
shall not be chlorotic, necrotic, or dying back.
2.02 SOIL CONDITIONER OR ROOT STIMULATOR
A. Root stimulator shall contain at a minimum the following ingredients:

Ectomycorrhizal Fungi, VA Mycorrhizal(VAM) Fungi, Rhizosphere Bacillus spp.,
Kelp Meal, Humic Acid, and Soluble Yucca.
2.03 SAND BACKFILL
A. Sand backfill shall be a fine sandy loam, typical of the soil at the project site, or fine
bank sand. The back fill shall be free of noxious weeds, grasses, sticks, roots or stone
and shall be consistent in texture.
2.04 COMPOST
A. Compost shall have been produced by aerobic (biological) decomposition of organic

matter. Compost feedstock may include, but is not limited to, leaves and yard
trimmings, biosolids, food scraps, food-processing residuals, manure or other
agricultural residuals, forest residues, bark, and paper. Compost and wood chips shall
not contain any visible refuse, other physical contaminants, or any substance
considered harmful to plant growth. Compost shall not contain materials that have
been treated with chemical preservatives as a compost feedstock or as a wood chip.
Compost shall not contain mixed municipal solid waste compost. Compost shall meet
all applicable 40 CFR 503 standards for Class A biosolids and TCEQ health and
safety regulations as defined in the TAC, Chapter 332, including the time and
temperature standards in Subchapter B, Part 23. Meet the requirements of the United
States Composting Council (USCC) Seal of Testing Assurance (STA) program.
2.05 MULCH
A. Mulch shall be shredded hardwood, free of noxious weed seeds.
2.06 WATER
A. Water shall be potable from municipal water supplies.
02915-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Notify City Engineer, prior to delivery and planting, with location where trees that
have been tagged for planting may be inspected. Trees will be inspected for
compliance with this specification.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EQUIPMENT (APPLIES TO TRANSPLANT TREES)
A. Tree spade shall be in good condition with minimum tolerances between digging
blades. All blades shall be true to their designed spade free of bends and deformities.
The tree spade shall be mounted on suitable, stable machines capable of supporting
the weight of all dug materials and heavy enough to force all blades into the soil to
full depth. Holes to receive machine transplanted trees shall be dug with machines of
like size and manufacture to that which is used to dig the intended tree.
B. Trees shall be transplanted with minimum tree spade sizes for maximum tree
diameter per the following standards:
1. Maximum tree diameter for 50” tree spade shall be 3”
3.02 PREPARATION FOR PLANTING
A. Schedule work so that planting can proceed as rapidly as the planting site becomes
available. Plant trees after final grades are established and prior to planting of turf,
unless otherwise approved by City Engineer in writing. If planting of trees occurs
after seeding work, protect turf areas and promptly repair damage to turf resulting
from tree planting operations.
B. Layout individual trees at locations shown on Drawings. In case of conflicts, notify

City Engineer before proceeding with work. Trees shall be laid out and approved by
City Engineer and City Forester prior to planting.
C. The contractor shall be responsible for locating and confirming underground utilities.
02915-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
D. Trees shall be pruned, at the farm, to remove dead, diseased, dying, or broken
branches that will be detrimental to the future shape or structure of the tree. Old
pruning stubs should also be removed. All pruning cuts should be made sufficiently
close to the branch collar, so as not to leave a protruding stub, without cutting into the
branch collar. Each cut shall be made with the appropriately sized pruning shear,
which should have properly matched, sharpened blades. Pruning cuts shall not be
painted or otherwise treated.
E. Trees are subject to inspection at the tree farm or location of collection. When
directed, provide and use serialized locking tags on trees.
F. Contractor shall notify City Engineer and City Forester at least 48 hours before
delivering trees to worksite. Coordinate with City for inspection and approval of
materials upon delivery. Remove rejected trees from the worksite and replace as
directed.
G. Container grown trees shall be thoroughly watered prior to leaving tree farm or
nursery.
3.03 COLLECTING, TRANSPORTING AND PLANTING
A. Transplant Trees
1. Tree shall be centered in tree spade at digging.
2. No damage to branches or trunk shall be allowed while backing onto tree at

tree farm, digging tree, or pulling away from tree after planting. Damage to
tree trunk caused by the digging or planting of the tree, will be grounds for
non-acceptance of tree under this specification.
3. Roots protruding from the digging blades shall be pruned flush with the root
ball prior to planting.
4. Contractor shall ensure tree is tied down so that the total height of the tree
spade and tree do not exceed legal height limits.
5. Tree shall be covered with an open-weave fabric tarp to minimize wind

damage and desiccation of leaves during transportation from collection site to
planting site.
6. Each tree shall be planted in its final planting site within 4 hours of being dug
from the collection site.
7. Tree shall be planted plumb and the root ball shall be set 2-3 inches above the
finished grade.
8. No staking or guying of the tree should be installed.
02915-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
9. Voids between existing grade and tree root ball shall be backfilled with sand
backfill. The sand backfill should be thoroughly watered into the voids, so that
no air packets remain.
10. A water holding basin shall be constructed around each tree. The basin should
be constructed with the sand backfill and shall be constructed directly over the
void between the existing grade and root ball, 6-8” in height, and 8-10” in
width. The top of the root ball shall not be covered with sand backfilled or any
other type of soil.
11. Prior to mulching, each tree shall be thoroughly watered 2 separate times.
Each time the watering basin should be filled with water and the water
allowed to soak the tree and force sand backfill into all voids. After the second
watering basin should be rebuilt to its original shape.
12. Each tree shall be thoroughly soaked with root stimulator, per label
instructions.
13. Mulching shall be completed within 24 hours of planting. A 4” deep layer of

mulch shall be applied to the entire water holding basin and top of root ball.
No mulch shall be applied directly against the trunk of the tree.
14. Control dust caused by planting operations. Dampen surfaces as required.

Comply with pollution control regulations of governing authorities.
B. Container Trees
1. Excavate planting pit to a depth equal to planting media height in container, or

1-2” shallower. Do not over excavate, to ensure planted root ball rest on
undisturbed sound soil. Planting pit shall have a diameter that is at least 2 feet
wider than diameter of root ball.
2. When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as

unsatisfactory soil, obstructions, or adverse drainage conditions, notify City
Engineer and/or City Forester.
3. Edges of planting pit shall be scarified with gouges a minimum of 1” deep and
1” wide spaced no wider than 8” on center.
4. Trees shall be planted within 24 hours of excavating planting pits to minimize

soil desiccation.
5. Trees shall be handled by container during transportation and planting. Trees

shall not be handled by grasping trunk only.
6. Trees shall be covered with open weave tarp in transportation from nursery to
planting site, to minimize tree and leaf desiccation.
02915-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
7. Deliver trees after preparations for planting have been completed and plant
immediately. If planting does not occur within 6 hours of delivery, set trees in
shade, protest from weather and mechanical damage, and keep root balls
moist by covering with mulch, compost, burlap, or other acceptable means of
retaining moisture. Water trees as needed to avoid root ball desiccation.
8. Each tree shall be removed from container without cracking or disturbing root
ball. The circumference of the root ball shall be scored with sharp utility knife
½” deep, from top to bottom of ball, at 8” intervals to cut any circling roots.
9. Set root ball in planting pit, on undisturbed soil, in center of pit and plumb
plant. Top of root ball shall be at same elevation of finished grade or 1-2”
above finished grade.
10. Backfill planting pit around root ball in lifts, each lift shall be 1/3 the depth of
the root ball. Pit shall be thoroughly watered after each lift to remove air
pockets. Backfill shall consist of the following materials:
a. Soil excavated from planting pit: 75 percent
b. Compost: 15 percent
c. Peat moss: 10 percent
11. Construct a plant basin at least 6 inches deep with an inside diameter equal to
the planting pit diameter and with a level top around the plant unless
otherwise indicated on plans. Use excavated soil from the planting pit,
amended backfill material, or approved material for the basin.
12. Mulching shall be completed within 24 hours of planting. A 4” deep layer of

mulch shall be applied to entire water holding basin and top of root ball. No
mulch shall be applied directly against the trunk of the tree.
13. Each tree shall be guyed and staked immediately after planting. Each tree
shall have a minimum of 2 post; more may be required depending on soil
structure. Provide adequate number of post to ensure tree stability during
establishment. Tree shall be secured by plastic tree chain, do not use wire with
plastic or rubber guards.
14. Control dust caused by planting operations. Dampen surfaces as required.

Comply with pollution control regulations of governing authorities.
A. City Engineer may reject unsatisfactory or defective material at anytime during

progress of work. Contractor shall remove rejected trees immediately from site and
replace with specified materials. Plant material not installed in accordance with these
specifications will be rejected.
02915-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. An inspection to determine final acceptance will be conducted by City Engineer and

City Forester at the end of the 24 month maintenance period. Additional inspections
will be conducted for extended warranty periods provided for in paragraph 1.07B.
3.05 MAINTENANCE PERIOD
A. Contractor shall maintain trees during planting operations and for a period of 24
months after completion of construction (substantial completion).
B. Contractor shall water trees during maintenance period to ensure tree establishment.
Trees served with bubblers or drip irrigation will not require manual watering.
C. Contractor shall apply a minimum of 25 gallons of water to each tree weekly, or more
if required to maintain healthy vigorous growth. No watering shall be required during
weeks when the planting site receives at least 1” of rainfall. Rainfall to be measured
at planting site.
3.06 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A. During planting work, keep pavement clean and work area in an orderly condition.
B. No open planting holes shall be left at planting site without immediate supervision by
planting personnel. Use plywood, or other suitable material, to cover open hole when
not under immediate supervision.
C. Protest planting work and material from damage due to planting operations. Maintain
protection during installation and maintenance period. Treat, repair, or replace
damaged planting work as directed by City Engineer.
D. Dispose of excess soil and waste in accordance with requirements of Section 01576-
Waste Material Disposal. On-site burning of combustible materials will not be
permitted.
END OF SECTION
02915-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION HYDRO MULCH SEEDING
SECTION 02921
HYDRO MULCH SEEDING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Seeding, fertilizing, mulching, and maintenance of areas indicated on Drawings.
E. Section 02911 – Topsoil
F. Section 02922 – Sodding
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for hydro mulch seeding is on an acre basis, within limits of

construction if shown on the drawings.
2. Topsoil is included in the unit price for hydro mulch seeding and is not paid
for separately.
3. No payment will be made for hydro mulch seeding under this Section if limits
of constructions are not shown on the drawings. Include payment in Section
01740 – Site Restoration.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. Federal Seed Act regulations
B. Texas Seed Law.
02921-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Texas Fertilizer Law
D. U.S. Department of Agriculture rules
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit certification from supplier that each type of seed conforms to these
specifications and requirements of Texas Seed Law. Certification shall accompany
seed delivery.
C. Submit certificate stating that fertilizer complies with these specifications and
requirements of Texas Fertilizer Law.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Topsoil: Conform to material requirements of Section 02911 - Topsoil.
B. Seed: Conform to U.S. Department of Agriculture rules and regulations of Federal

Seed Act and Texas Seed Law. Seed shall be certified 90 percent pure and furnish 80
percent germination and meet following requirements:
1. Rye: Fresh, clean, Italian rye grass seed (lollium multi-florum), mixed in
labeled proportions. As tested, minimum percentages of impurities and
germination must be labeled. Deliver in original unopened containers.
2. Bermuda: Extra-fancy, treated, lawn type common bermuda (Cynodon

dactylon). Deliver in original, unopened container showing weight, analysis,
name of vendor, and germination test results.
3. Wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged seed will not be accepted.
4. Seed requirements, application rates, and planting dates are:
02921-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
APPLICATION
TYPE PLANTING DATE
RATE POUNDS/A
Hulled Common Bermuda Grass 40

98/88 Jan 1 to Mar 31
Grass 98/88
Hulled Common Bermuda Grass 40 Apr 1 to Sep 30

98/88
Hulled Common Bermuda Grass 40

98/88 Oct 1 to Dec 31
Grass 98/88
Annual Rye Grass (Gulf) 30
C. Fertilizer: Dry and free flowing, inorganic, water soluble commercial fertilizer, which
is uniform in composition. Deliver in unopened containers which bear manufacturers
guaranteed analysis. Caked, damaged, or otherwise unsuitable fertilizer will not be
accepted. Fertilizer shall contain minimum percentages of following elements:
1. Nitrogen: 10 Percent
2. Phosphoric Acid: 20 Percent
3. Potash: 10 Percent
D. Mulch:
1. Virgin wood cellulose fibers from whole wood chips having minimum of 20
percent fibers 0.42 inches in length and 0.01 inches in diameter.
2. Cellulose fibers manufactured from recycled newspaper and meeting same

fiber content and size as for cellulose fibers from wood chips.
3. Dye mulch green for coverage verification purposes.
E. Soil Stabilizer: "Terra Tack 1" or approved equal.
F. Weed control agent: Pre-emergent herbicide for grass areas, such as "Benefin," or
approved equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
02921-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Place and compact topsoil in accordance with requirements of Section 02911 -

Topsoil.
B. Dispose of Objectionable and Waste Materials in accordance with Section 01576 -

3.02 APPLICATION
A. Seed: Apply uniformly at rates given in Paragraph 2.01 B for type of seed and
planting date.
B. Fertilizer: Apply uniformly at rate of 500 pounds per acre.
C. Mulch: Apply uniformly at rate of 50 pounds per 1000 square feet.
D. Soil Stabilizer: Apply uniformly at rate of 40 pounds per acre.
E. Weed Control Agent: Apply at manufacturer's recommended rate prior to hydro

mulching.
F. Sod: Lay single row of sod along perimeter where top soil and pavement intersect.
Apply in conformance to Section 02922 - Sodding.
G. Suspend operations under conditions of drought, excessive moisture, high winds, or

extreme or prolonged cold. Obtain Project Manager approval before resuming
operations.
3.03 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintain grassed areas minimum of 90 days, or as required to establish an acceptable

lawn. For areas seeded in fall, continue maintenance following spring until acceptable
lawn is established.
B. Maintain grassed areas by watering, fertilizing, weeding, and trimming.
C. Repair areas damaged by erosion by regrading, rolling and replanting.
D. Reseed small, sparse grass areas. When sparse areas exceed 20 percent of planted
area, reseed by hydro mulch.
E. Mow grass when height reaches 3 1/2 inches or greater on average before final
acceptance. Mow to height of 2 1/2 inches.
END OF SECTION
02921-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION SODDING
SECTION 02922
SODDING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Restoration of existing lawn areas disturbed by construction shall be by installation of

new sod.
B. Planting of sod within areas designated on Drawings for purpose of surface

stabilization, channel stabilization or vegetation buffer strips.
C. Sod is defined as blocks, squares, strips of turfgrass, and adhering soil used for
vegetative planting. To be placed edge to edge for complete coverage.
D. Lawn is defined as ground covered with fine textured grass kept neatly mowed.
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for sodding is on square yard basis.
2. For utility construction, no separate payment will be made for sodding.

Include payment in Section 01740 - Site Restoration.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
02922-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Sod only when weather and soil conditions are deemed by Project Manager to be
suitable for proper placement.
B. Water and fertilize new sod.
C. Guarantee sod to be growing 30 days after substantial completion.
D. Notify Project Manager 10 days before end of maintenance period for inspection.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SOD
A. Species: Bermuda (Cynodon Dactylon), Buffalo (Buchloe Dactyloides), or St.

Augustine (Stenotaphrum Secundatum) Gulf Coast variety to match existing sod.
B. Contents: 95 percent permanent grass suitable to climate in which it is to be placed;

not more than 5 percent weeds and undesirable grasses; good texture, free from
obnoxious grasses, roots, stones and foreign materials.
C. Size: 12 inch wide strips, uniformly 2 inches thick with clean-cut edges.
D. Sod is to be supplied and maintained in healthy condition as evidenced by grass being

normal green color.
2.02 FERTILIZER
A. Available nutrient percentage by weight: 12 percent nitrogen, 4 percent phosphoric

acid, and 8 percent potash; or 15 percent nitrogen, 5 percent phosphoric acid, and 10
percent potash.
2.03 WEED AND INSECT TREATMENT
A. Provide acceptable treatment to protect sod from weed and insect infestation. Submit
treatment method to Project Manager for approval. Install insect and disease control
within guidelines set forth by Structural Pest Control Board of the State of Texas.
2.04 WATER
A. Potable, available on-site through Contractor's water trucks. Contractor may use City
of Houston hydrants when water use is measured through Contractor's meter. Do not
use private resident's water.
2.05 BANK SAND
A. Free of clay lumps, roots, grass, salt or other foreign material.
PART 3 EXECUTION
02922-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Verify that soil placement and compaction have been satisfactorily completed. Verify
that soil is within allowable range of moisture content.
B. Top soil shall be free of weeds and foreign material immediately before sodding.
C. Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory. Do not start work during inclement
or impending inclement weather.
D. Rake areas to be sodded smooth, free from unsightly variations, bumps, ridges or
depressions.
E. Spread 2 inch layer of bank sand over areas to be sodded prior to planting of sod.
F. Apply fertilizer at rate of 25 pounds per 1000 square feet. Apply after raking soil
surface and not more than 48 hours prior to laying sod. Mix thoroughly into upper 2
inches of soil. Lightly water to aid in dissipation of fertilizer.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Full Sodding: Lay sod with closely fitted joints leaving no voids and with ends of sod
strips staggered. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting.
B. On slopes 2:1 and steeper, lay sod perpendicular to slope and secure every row with
wooden pegs at maximum 2 feet on center. Drive pegs flush with soil portion of sod.
C. Prior to placing sod, on slopes 3:1 or where indicated, place Hold/Gro or Roll Lite or
equal over topsoil. Securely anchor in place with posts sunk firmly into ground at
maximum 16 feet on center along pitch of slope and equal to width of wire mesh
horizontally across slopes.
D. After sod is laid, irrigate thoroughly to secure 6-inch minimum penetration into soil
below sod.
E. Tamp and roll sod with approved equipment to eliminate minor irregularities and to
form close contact with soil bed immediately after planting and watering. Submit type
of tamping and rolling equipment to be used to Project Manager for approval, prior to
construction.
3.03 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Period:
1. Begin maintenance immediately after each section of grass sod is installed and
continue for 30 day period from date of substantial completion.
2. Resod unacceptable areas.
02922-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
3. Water, fertilize, control disease and insect pests, mow, edge, replace
unacceptable materials, and perform other procedures consistent with good
horticultural practice to ensure normal, vigorous and healthy growth. Install
disease control within guidelines set forth by Structural Pest Control Board of
the State of Texas.
B. Watering:
1. Water lawn areas once a day with minimum 1/2 inch water for first 3 weeks
after area is sodded.
2. After 3 week period, water twice a week with 3/4 inch of water each time
unless comparable amount has been provided by rain.
3. Make weekly inspections to determine moisture content of soil unless soil is

in frozen condition.
4. Water in afternoon or at night to enable soil to absorb maximum amount of

water with minimum evaporation.
C. Mowing:
1. Mow sod at intervals which will keep grass height from exceeding 3 1/2
inches.
2. Set mower blades at 2 1/2 inches.
3. Do not remove more than one-half of grass leaf surface.
4. Mow sodded areas requiring mowing within 1 month after installation with
light-weight rotary type mower. Mow sod only when dry and not in saturated
or soft condition.
5. Remove grass clippings during or immediately after mowing.
D. Fertilizer and Pest Control:
1. Evenly spread fertilizer composite at rate of 40 pounds per 5000 square feet or
as recommended by manufacturer. Do not place fertilizer until 2 weeks after
placement of sod.
2. Restore bare or thin areas by topdressing with mix of 50 percent sharp sand
and 50 percent sphagnum peat moss.
3. Apply mixture 1/4 to 1/2 inch thick.
4. Treat areas of heavy weed and insect infestation as recommended by

treatment manufacturer.
02922-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
E. Restrict all traffic from sodded areas until sod is established or for minimum 10 days
during growing season. Use wood lath and plastic tape to cordon sodded areas.
Maintain tape and lath throughout for minimum 30 days during growing season.
3.04 CLEANUP
A. During course of planting, remove excess and waste materials; keep lawn areas clean
and take precautions to avoid damage to existing structures, plants, grass, and streets.
B. Remove barriers, signs, and other Contractor material and equipment from project
site at termination of establishment period.
C. Dispose of unused materials and rubbish in accordance with Section 01576 – Waste
Material Disposal.
END OF SECTION
02922-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION PAVEMENT REPAIR AND RESTORATION
SECTION 02951
PAVEMENT REPAIR AND RESTORATION
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Repairing and replacing streets, highways, and other pavements as required per street
cut ordinance that have been cut, broken, or damaged due to utility excavation.
C. Section 02221 – Removing Existing Pavements, Structures, Wood, and Demolition

Debris
E. Section 2316 - Excavation and Backfill for Structures
G. Section 2318 - Extra Unit Price Work for Excavation and Backfill
H. Section 02319 – Borrow
I. Section 02330 – Embankment
J. Section 02336 – Lime Stabilized Subgrade
K. Section 02337 – Lime/Fly Ash Stabilized Subgrade
L. Section 02338 – Portland Cement Stabilized Subgrade
M. Section 02711 – Hot Mix Asphalt Base
N. Section 02712 – Cement Stabilized Base Course
O. Section 02713 – Recycled Crushed Concrete Base Course
P. Section 02741 – Asphaltic Concrete Pavement
Q. Section 02751 – Concrete Paving
R. Section 02754 – Concrete Driveways
02951-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
S. Section 02771 – Curb, Curb and Gutter, and Headers
T. Section 02775 – Concrete Sidewalks
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for pavement repair and replacement for utility projects is on a

square yard basis and includes surface and base materials as required per
street cut ordinance.
2. Measurement for utility projects: Match actual pavement replaced but no

greater than maximum pavement replacement limits in accordance with the
street cut ordinance or otherwise shown on drawings.
3. Refer to Section 01270 - Measurement and Payment for other unit price
procedures.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Subgrade:
1. Provide backfill material as required by applicable excavation and fill sections

(Sections 02315 through 02319) and Section 02330 - Embankment.
2. Provide material for stabilization as required by applicable portions of Section

02336 - Lime Stabilized Subgrade, Section 02337 - Lime/Fly-Ash Stabilized
Subgrade, and Section 02338 - Portland Cement Stabilized Subgrade.
B. Base: Provide base material as required by applicable portions of Section 02711 - Hot
Mix Asphaltic Base Course, Section 02712 - Cement Stabilized Base Course, and
Section 02713 - Recycled Crushed Concrete Base Course.
C. Pavement: Provide paving materials as required by applicable portions of Section

02741 - Asphaltic Concrete Pavement, Section 02751- Concrete Paving, Section
02754 - Concrete Driveways, and Section 02771 - Curb, Curb and Gutter, and
Headers, and Section 02775 - Concrete Sidewalks.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
02951-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Notify City prior to commencement of excavation in pavement for which an

Excavation in Public Way permits has been obtained. Follow directions contained in
the permit.
B. Conform to requirement of Section 02221 - Removing Existing Pavements,

Structures, Wood, and Demolition Debris, for removals.
C. Saw cut pavement 18 inches wider than width of trench needed to install utilities
unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
D. When removing pavement to existing deformed metal strip (i.e. dummy joint), saw
cut pavement minimum 2 inches deep on opposite side of deformed metal strip. Place
saw joint far enough behind deformed metal strip to obtain continuously straight
joint. Remove damaged portion of deformed metal strip as required to provide proper
joint. Saw cut and remove metal strip before placement of new concrete pavement.
E. Protect edges of existing pavement to remain from damage during removals, utility
placement, backfill, and paving operations. For concrete pavement, protect
undisturbed subgrade that is to remain to support replacement slab.
F. Dowel in existing pavement where no reinforcement is found or is broken due to

construction activities. Unless otherwise directed by Project Manager, provide No. 6
bars 24 inches long, drilled and embedded 8 inches into center of existing slab with
'PO-ROC' epoxy grout or approved equal. Space dowels to match new pavement
reinforcement spacing.
G. Provide transitional paving and earthwork as required to tie proposed pavement to

existing pavement when unable to dowel new pavement into existing pavement.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Parking Areas, Service Drives, Driveways, and Sidewalks: Replace with material
equal to or better than existing or as indicated on Drawings. Conform to applicable
requirements of sections referenced in Paragraph 2.01, Materials.
B. Street Pavements and Curbs, Curbs and Gutters: Replace subgrade, base, and surface
course with like materials or as indicated on Drawings and City of Houston Standard
Detail 02951.01. Curbs and curbs and gutters shall match existing. Conform to
requirements of sections referenced in Paragraph 2.01, Materials.
C. For concrete pavement, install size and length of reinforcing steel and pavement
thickness indicated on Drawings and City of Houston Standard Detail 02751.01.
Place types and spacing of joints to match existing or as indicated on Drawings.
D. Where existing pavement consists of concrete pavement with asphaltic surfacing,

resurface with minimum 2-inch depth asphaltic pavement.
E. Repair state highway and county crossings in accordance with TxDOT permit or
county requirements as appropriate and within 1 week after utility work is installed.
02951-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
3.03 WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL
A. Dispose of waste material in accordance with requirements of Section 01576 - Waste

Material Disposal.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Maintain pavement in good condition until completion of Work.
B. Replace pavement damaged by Contractor's operations at no cost to City.
END OF SECTION
02951-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION MILLING PAVEMENT
SECTION 02960
MILLING PAVEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Milling of existing asphalt or concrete pavement surface as required for installation of

speed humps or pavement overlay.
B. Section 02741 – Asphaltic Concrete Pavement
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for removing existing pavement surface by milling is on a square

yard basis. Separate pay items and measurements will be made for milling of
asphalt surface or milling of concrete surface as applicable.
2. No separate payment under this section for milling associated with installation
of speed humps. Payment for installation of speed humps including cost for
milling of existing asphalt or concrete pavement shall be per Section 02741 -
Asphaltic Concrete Pavement.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT
A. For milling and installing of speed humps, the contractor shall use an appropriate type
of milling machine to remove the existing asphalt or concrete surface as shown. The
milling machine shall be capable of milling a minimum 18 inch wide path and also
shall be able to turn in tight corners.
02960-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. The teeth of the machine shall be capable of milling concrete or asphalt as

appropriate. The equipment for removing the pavement surface shall be a power
operated planing machine with a minimum six-foot cutting width. For detail work and
for cutting widths less than six feet, equipment with less than six-foot cutting widths
will be allowed. The equipment shall be self-propelled with sufficient power, traction
and stability to maintain accurate depth of cut and slope. The equipment self-
propelled with sufficient power, traction and stability to maintain accurate depth of
cut and slope. The equipment shall be capable of cutting four inches of asphaltic
concrete pavement, one inch of Portland cement concrete pavement, or a combination
of two inches of asphaltic concrete pavement and one half inch Portland concrete
pavement in one continuous operation.
C. The equipment shall be equipped with an approved automatic dual longitudinal grade
control system and a transverse control system unless otherwise directed by the
project manager. The longitudinal controls shall be capable of operating from any
longitudinal grade reference, including stringline, ski, mobile stringline, or matching
shoe. The transverse controls shall have an automatic system for controlling cross
slope at a given rate.
D. The grade reference used by the Contractor may be of any type approved by the
project manager. Control points shall be established for the finished profile. These
points shall be set at intervals not to exceed 50 feet. The Contractor shall set the grade
reference from the control points. The grade reference shall have sufficient support so
that the maximum deflection shall not exceed 1/16 inch between supports.
E. The machine shall have a manual system providing for uniformly varying the depth
of cut while the machine is in motion, thereby making it possible to cut flush to all
inlets, manholes, or other obstructions within the paved area. The speed of the
machine shall be variable in order to leave the desired grid pattern.
F. The machine shall be equipped with integral loading and reclaiming devices to
immediately remove material being cut from the surface of the roadway and
discharge the cuttings into a truck, all in one operation. The machine shall be
equipped with devices to control dust created by the cutting action.
G. Various machines may be permitted to make trail runs to demonstrate the capabilities
of that machine. Any machine that is incapable of meeting the requirements of this
Section, in the opinion of the project manager, will not be permitted.
H. A street sweeper equipped with a water tank, spray assembly to control dust, a pick-
up broom, a gutter broom, and a dirt hopper shall be provided by the Contractor. The
street sweeper shall be capable of removing cuttings and debris from the planed
pavement. Other sweeping equipment may be provided in lieu of the street sweeper
when approved by the project manager in writing.
I. The Contractor shall provide any other equipment and personnel necessary for proper
operation of the planing machine, to minimize dust and to remove cuttings.
02960-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. The Contractor shall not mill roadway more than 7 calendar days prior to
construction.
B. If Contractor does not install speed hump in the specified time, the City, without
notice to the Contractor, may effect repairs to the milled area and deduct the cost of
the expense incurred by the City for repair work from currently due or future invoiced
amounts.
3.02 MILLING
A. The existing pavement to within 1 foot of the face of the curb shall be removed for a
depth of one inch or otherwise designated or shown on drawing for milling of the
existing pavement.
B. The pavement surface shall be removed for the length, depth and width and to the
typical section shown on drawings. The planed surface shall provide a satisfactory
riding surface free from gouges, continuous longitudinal grooves, ridges, oil film and
other imperfections of workmanship and shall have a uniform textured appearance.
C. When removing an asphaltic concrete pavement from an underlying Portland cement

concrete pavement, all of the asphaltic concrete pavement shall be removed, leaving a
uniform surface of Portland cement concrete, unless otherwise directed by the project
manager.
D. Any vertical or near vertical longitudinal face exceeding 1 ¼ inches in height in the
pavement surface open to traffic at the end of a work period shall be sloped a
minimum of 1:1. Transverse faces that are present at the end of a work period shall be
tapered in a manner acceptable to the project manager.
E. Loose Portland cement concrete material from the operation shall be disposed of at
sites obtained by the Contractor or otherwise approved by the project manager. All
materials removed under this contract become the property of the Contractor.
Contractor shall legally dispose of all such removed materials.
F. Pavement that is not removed by the planing machine adjacent to steep curbs, inlets,
manholes or other obstructions shall be removed by other methods acceptable to the
project manager.
G. The pavement and curb surfaces shall be swept with a street sweeper or other
sweeping equipment to remove all debris leaving a clean and presentable condition.
H. Milling is required along the outside perimeter of the hump to the depth of one inch
on both concrete and asphalt pavement. Mill the existing pavement to within one foot
of the curb face.
02960-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Damage to water valve, water meters, manholes, curbs or other improvements shall
be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to the City.
3.04 SURFACE TEXTURE AND TESTS
A. In areas where traffic will be permitted, the texture product shall be a grid pattern or
any other pattern with discontinuous longitudinal striations that will provide, in the
opinion of the project manager, a satisfactory temporary riding surface.
B. The surface of the pavement, after planing, shall be ready for HMAC overlay and
shall be true to the established line, grade and cross section. The pavement surface,
when tested with a 10-foot straightedge placed parallel to the centerline of the
roadway or tested by other equivalent or acceptable means, shall not have any
deviation greater than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. The deviations shall be measured from the
top of the texture. Any point in the surface not meeting this requirement shall be
corrected as directed by the project manager at the Contractor’s expense.
END OF SECTION
02960-4
CITY OF HOUSTON REMOVAL AND RESTORATION
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION OF BRICK PAVED STREETS
SECTION 02983
REMOVAL AND RESTORATION OF BRICK PAVED STREETS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Brick paving work for removal and restoration of existing brick paved streets; either
exposed or overlaid is directed toward preservation of historic items.
F. Section 02951 – Pavement Repair and Restoration
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for removal and restoration of brick paved streets is on square yard
basis.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 91 - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement.
B. ASTM C 109 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
02983-1
B. Submit certification from manufacturer that bricks and masonry cement meet
applicable requirements of reference standards.
A. Take extreme care when excavating in or adjacent to brick paved surface.
B. Remove bricks by hand and clean them of mortar, grout, sand or tar.
C. Protect brick at work site from theft, breakage, and damage. Store brick on site in
secure, locked area.
D. Place cleaned brick on pallets and strap them for delivery to City's storage location at
812 Gillette Street. Place brick in area designated for historically sensitive items, as
directed by City Employee at location. Have City Employee sign delivery ticket
validating delivery, including quantity of brick stored.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BRICK MASONRY UNITS FOR PAVING
A. Reuse existing bricks in order to restore brick paved surface to its original or better
condition.
B. Replace bricks which become damaged or cracked with new paving bricks that match
existing brick. Remove damaged bricks from site.
C. Provide replacement paving bricks that match existing brick in dimension, durability,
and color. New paving bricks may be obtained from manufacturer which provides
antique brick replicas. Antique brick may be purchased from Contractor's source.
2.02 MORTAR
A. Masonry Cement: Cement manufactured in United States and conforming to

requirements of ASTM C 91.
B. Mixing Water: Clean, free from harmful amounts of acids, alkalis and organic
material.
C. Type and Strength: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 270, Type M, with
compressive strength of 2500 psi at 28 days.
D. Brick Foundation Base: Use cement-stabilized sand as specified in Section 02321 -

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 RESTORATION OF PAVEMENT FOR OVERLAID BRICK STREETS
02983-2
A. The restoration of brick pavement section which is below existing overlay is not
required. Replacement of pavement after completing utility work can be
accomplished without replacing brick. Use paving materials matching existing to
restore pavement section. Refer to Section 02951 - Pavement Repairs and
Restoration.
3.02 PREPARATION FOR RESTORATION OF EXPOSED BRICK STREET
A. Ensure that subgrade to support brickwork is at proper grades and elevation. Correct
improperly prepared surfaces. Before starting brick paving work, verify that work
surfaces and masonry are free of dirt, grease, oil, or other harmful materials.
B. Excavate and compact backfill according to Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill
for Utilities. Place 6 inches of cement stabilized sand base to elevation of brick
foundation in accordance with Section 02321 - Cement Stabilized Sand.
3.03 WEATHER REQUIREMENTS
A. Lay no masonry when temperature of outside air is below 40 degrees F, unless

satisfactory means are provided to heat materials and protect work from cold and
frost.
B. Maintain mortar at 40 degrees F or above and ensure that mortar will harden without
freezing.
3.04 MORTAR MIXING
A. Proportion mortar ingredients by methods that will ensure accurate measure. Mix in
power- driven, drum-type mixer as follows:
1. Combine 3/4 of required water and all masonry cement.
2. Mix briefly, then add water in small quantities until workability of batch is
satisfactory to masons.
3. Mix for minimum of 3 minutes and completely empty drum before recharging
for next batch.
B. Retemper mortar that has stiffened because of evaporation of water by adding water
as frequently as needed to restore desired consistency. Use and place mortar in final
position within 2 1/2 hours after initial mixing.
3.05 BRICK PLACEMENT
A. Ensure that brick foundation base is properly graded and compacted in order to match
grade of surrounding existing brick pavement. Provide for proper drainage without
ponding.
B. Place bricks level to create smooth and uniform surface for vehicles.
02983-3
C. Where fresh masonry joins partially set or totally set masonry, clean surfaces of set
masonry. Remove loose mortar and brick.
D. Wet brick to obtain best possible bond.
E. Immediately remove mortar droppings and splashing as work progresses to facilitate

final cleaning.
3.06 JOINTS
A. Completely fill joints in brick and other materials with mortar as each course is laid.
B. Make joints uniform 3/8 inch wide or match existing joint width, unless otherwise
shown on Drawings.
C. When mortar is "thumbprint" hard, tool exposed joints with round jointer that is
slightly larger than width of mortar joint. In tooling, make sure that cracks and
crevices are closed.
D. Point holes in masonry. Cut out defective joints and repoint.
A. Test under provisions of Section 01454 - Testing Laboratory Services.
B. Mold minimum of one set of mortar samples for each day's placement, or as directed
by Project Manager. Mold three 2 inch square cubes. Test one cube for compressive
strength at 7 days and test other 2 cubes for compressive strength at 28 days in
END OF SECTION
02983-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION CONCRETE FOR UTILITY CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 03315
CONCRETE FOR UTILITY CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Cast-in-place concrete work for utility construction or rehabilitation, such as slabs on

grade, small vaults, site-cast bases for precast units, and in-place liners for manhole
rehabilitation.
A. Unit Prices.
1. No payment will be made for concrete for utility construction under this
Section. Include cost in applicable utility structure.
2. Obtain services of and pay for certified testing laboratory to prepare design
mixes.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ACI 117 - Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.
B. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight
and Mass Concrete.
C. ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.
D. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete.
E. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete.
F. ACI 309R - Guide for Consolidation of Concrete.
03315-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
G. ACI 311 - Guide for Concrete Plant Inspection and Field Testing of Ready-Mix
Concrete.
H. ACI 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.
I. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary.
J. ACI 544 - Guide for Specifying, Mixing, Placing, and Finishing Steel Fiber
Reinforced Concrete.
K. ASTM A 615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon -Steel Bars for
L. ASTM A 767 - Standard Specifications for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for
M. ASTM A 775 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars.
N. ASTM A 820 - Standard Specification for Steel Fibers for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete.
O. ASTM A 884 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded
Wire Reinforcement.
P. ASTM A 1064 - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete
Q. ASTM C 31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in
the Field.
R. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
S. ASTM C 39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical

Concrete Specimens.
T. ASTM C 42 - Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and
U. ASTM C 94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.
V. ASTM C 138 - Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air
W. ASTM C 143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.
X. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
Y. ASTM C 172 - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.
Z. ASTM C 173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by
Volumetric Method.
03315-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
AA. ASTM C 231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by
the Pressure Method.
BB. ASTM C 260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
CC. ASTM C 309 - Standard Specifications for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds

for Curing Concrete.
DD. ASTM C 494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
EE. ASTM C 595 - Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements.
FF. ASTM C 685 - Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching
and Continuous Mixing.
GG. ASTM C 1064 - Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic-
Cement Concrete.
HH. ASTM C 1077 - Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete and Concrete
Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing Agency Evaluation.
II. CRSI MSP-1 - Manual of Standard Practice.
JJ. CRSI - Placing Reinforcing Bars.
KK. Federal Specification SS-S-210A - Sealing Compound, Preformed Plastic, for

Expansion Joints and Pipe Joints
LL. NRMCA - Concrete Plant Standards.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit proposed mix design and test data for each type and strength of concrete in
Work.
C. Submit laboratory reports prepared by independent testing laboratory stating that

materials used comply with requirements of this Section.
D. Submit manufacturer's mill certificates for reinforcing steel. Provide specimens for
testing when required by Project Manager.
E. Submit certification from concrete supplier that materials and equipment used to
produce and deliver concrete comply with this Specification.
F. When required on Drawings, submit shop drawings showing reinforcement type,

quantity, size, length, location, spacing, bending, splicing, support, fabrication details,
and other pertinent information.
03315-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
G. For waterstops, submit product information sufficient to indicate compliance with this
Section, including manufacturer's descriptive literature and specifications.
A. Cement: Store cement off the ground in well-ventilated, weatherproof building.
B. Aggregate: Prevent mixture of foreign materials with aggregate and preserve

gradation of aggregate.
C. Reinforcing Steel: Store reinforcing steel to protect it from mechanical injury and
formation of rust. Protect epoxy-coated steel from damage to coating.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II, unless use of Type III is authorized
by Project Manager; or ASTM C 595, Type IP. For concrete in contact with
sewage use Type II cement.
2. When aggregates are potentially reactive with alkalis in cement, use cement
not exceeding 0.6 percent alkali content in form of Na2O + 0.658K20.
B. Water: Clean, free from harmful amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, or other deleterious
substances, and meeting requirements of ASTM C 94.
C. Aggregate:
1. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33. Unless otherwise indicated, use following

ASTM standard sizes: No. 357 or No. 467; No. 57 or No. 67, No. 7.
Maximum size: Not larger than 1/5 of narrowest dimension between sides of
forms, nor larger than 3/4 of minimum clear spacing between reinforcing bars.
2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33.
3. Determine potential reactivity of fine and coarse aggregate in accordance with

Appendix to ASTM C 33.
D. Air Entraining Admixtures: ASTM C 260.
E. Chemical Admixtures:
1. Water Reducers: ASTM C 494, Type A.
2. Water Reducing Retarders: ASTM 494, Type D.
03315-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
3. High Range Water Reducers (Superplasticizers): ASTM C 494, Types F and

G.
F. Prohibited Admixtures: Admixtures containing calcium chloride, thiocyanate, or

materials that contribute free chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of
cement.
G. Reinforcing Steel:
1. Use new billet steel bars conforming to ASTM A 615, ASTM A 767, or
ASTM A 775, grade 40 or grade 60, as shown on Drawings. Use deformed
bars except where smooth bars are specified. When placed in work, keep steel
free of dirt, scale, loose or flaky rust, paint, oil or other harmful materials.
2. Where shown, use welded wire fabric with wire conforming to ASTM A 1064
or ASTM A 884. Supply gauge and spacing shown, with longitudinal and
transverse wires electrically welded together at points of intersection with
welds strong enough not to be broken during handling or placing.
3. Wire: ASTM A 1064. Use 16 1/2 gauge minimum for tie wire, unless
otherwise indicated.
H. Fiber:
1. Fibrillated Polypropylene Fiber:
a. Addition Rate: 1.5 pounds of fiber per cubic yard of concrete.
b. Physical Properties:
(1) Material: Polypropylene
(2) Length: 1/2 inch or graded
(3) Specific Gravity: 0.9l
c. Acceptable Manufacturer: W. R. Grace Company, Fibermesh, or

approved equal.
2. Steel Fiber: Comply with applicable provisions of ACI 544 and ASTM A 820.
a. Ratio: 50 to 200 pounds of fiber per cubic yard of concrete.
b. Physical Properties
(1) Material: Steel
(2) Aspect Ratio (for fiber lengths of 0.5 to 2.5 inch, length
divided by diameter or equivalent diameter): 30:1 to 100:1
03315-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
(3) Specific Gravity: 7.8
(4) Tensile Strength: 40-400 ksi.
(5) Young's Modulus: 29,000 ksi
(6) Minimum Average Tensile Strength: 50,000 psi
(7) Bending Requirements: Withstand bending around 0.125-inch

diameter mandrel to angle of 90 degrees, at temperatures not
less than 60 degrees F, without breaking
I. Curing Compounds: Type 2 white-pigmented liquid membrane-forming compounds

conforming to ASTM C 309.
2.02 FORM WORK MATERIALS
A. Lumber and Plywood: Seasoned and of good quality, free from loose or unsound
knots, knot holes, twists, shakes, decay and other imperfections which would affect
strength or impair finished surface of concrete. Use S4S lumber for facing or
sheathing. Forms for bottoms of caps: At least 2 inch (nominal) lumber or 3/4 inch
form plywood backed adequately to prevent misalignment. For general use, provide
lumber of 1-inch nominal thickness or form plywood of approved thickness.
B. Form work for Exposed Concrete Indicated to Receive Rubbed Finish: Form or form-
lining surfaces free of irregularities; plywood of 1/4 inch minimum thickness,
preferably oiled at mill.
C. Chamfer Strips and Similar Moldings: Redwood, cypress, or pine that will not split
when nailed and which can be maintained to true line. Use mill-cut molding dressed
on all faces.
D. Form Ties: Metal or fiberglass of approved type with tie holes not larger than 7/8 inch
in diameter. Do not use wire ties or snap ties.
E. Metal Forms: Clean and in good condition, free from dents and rust, grease, or other
foreign materials that tend to disfigure or discolor concrete in gauge and condition
capable of supporting concrete and construction loads without significant distortion.
Countersink bolt and rivet heads on facing sides. Use only metal forms which present
smooth surface and which line up properly.
2.03 PRODUCTION METHODS
A. Use either ready-mixed concrete conforming to requirements of ASTM C 94, or

concrete produced by volumetric batching and continuous mixing in accordance with
ASTM C 685.
2.04 MEASUREMENT OF MATERIALS
03315-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Measure dry materials by weight, except volumetric proportioning may be used when
concrete is batched and mixed in accordance with ASTM C 685.
B. Measure water and liquid admixtures by volume.
2.05 DESIGN MIX
A. Use design mixes prepared by certified testing laboratory in accordance with ASTM
C 1077 and conforming to requirements of this section.
B. Proportion concrete materials based on ACI 211.1 to comply with durability and
strength requirements of ACI 318, Chapters 4 and 5, and this specification. Prepare
mix design of Class A concrete so minimum cementitious content is 564 pounds per
cubic yard. Submit concrete mix designs to Project Manager for review.
C. Proportioning on basis of field experience or trial mixtures in accordance with

requirements at Section 5.3 of ACI 318 may be used, when approved by Project
Manager.
D. Classification:
MINIMUM
COMPRESSIVE
AIR CONSISTENCY
STRENGTH MAXIMUM
CLASS TYPE CONTENT RANGE IN
(LBS/SQ. IN.) W/C RATIO
(PERCENT) SLUMP (INCHES)
7-DAY 28-DAY
A Structural 3200 4000 0.45 4+ 1 2 to 4*
Pipe Block Fill,

B ---- 1500 ---- 4+ 1 5 to 7
Thrust Block
*When ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G admixture is used to increase workability, this range
may be 6 to 9.
E. Add steel or polypropylene fibers only when called for on Drawings or in another
section of these Specifications.
F. Determine air content in accordance with ASTM C 138, ASTM C 173 or ASTM C
231.
G. Use of Concrete Classes: Use classes of concrete as indicated on Drawings and other
Specifications. Use Class B for unreinforced concrete used for plugging pipes, seal
slabs, thrust blocks, trench dams, tunnel inverts and concrete fill unless indicated
otherwise. Use Class A for all other applications.
2.06 PVC WATERSTOPS
03315-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Extrude from virgin polyvinyl chloride elastomer. Use no reclaimed or scrap material.
Submit waterstop manufacturer's current test reports and manufacturer's written
certification that material furnished meets or exceeds Corps of Engineers
Specification CRD-C572 and other specified requirements.
B. Flat Strip and Center-Bulb Waterstops:
1. Thickness: not less than 3/8 inch
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Kirkhill Rubber Co., Brea, California
b. Water Seals, Inc., Chicago, Illinois
c. Progress Unlimited, Inc., New York, New York
d. Greenstreak Plastic Products Co., St. Louis, Missouri
e. Approved equal.
2.07 RESILIENT WATERSTOP
A. Resilient Waterstop: Where shown on Drawings; either bentonite- or adhesive-type

material.
B. Bentonite Waterstop:
1. Material: 75 percent bentonite, mixed with butyl rubber-hydrocarbon

containing less than 1.0 percent volatile matter, and free of asbestos fibers or
asphaltics.
2. Manufacturer's rated temperature ranges: For application, 5 to 125 degrees F;

in service, -40 to 212 degrees F.
3. Cross-sectional dimensions, unexpanded waterstop: 1 inch by 3/4 inch
4. Provide with adhesive backing capable of producing excellent adhesion to

concrete surfaces.
C. Adhesive Waterstop:
1. Preformed plastic adhesive waterstop at least 2 inches in diameter.
2. Meets or exceeds requirements of Federal Specification SS-S-210A.
3. Supplied wrapped completely by 2 part protective paper.
03315-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
4. Submit independent laboratory tests verifying that material seals joints in

concrete against leakage when subjected to minimum of 30 psi water pressure
for at least 72 hours.
5. Provide primer, to be used on hardened concrete surfaces, from same

manufacturer who supplies waterstop material.
6. Acceptable Manufacturer: Synko-Flex Preformed Plastic Adhesive Waterstop,

Synko- Flex Products, Inc.; or approved equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FORMS AND SHORING
A. Provide mortar-tight forms sufficient in strength to prevent bulging between supports.

Set and maintain forms to lines designated such that finished dimensions of structures
are within tolerances specified in ACI 117. Construct forms to permit removal
without damage to concrete. Forms may be given slight draft to permit ease of
removal. Provide adequate clean out openings. Before placing concrete, remove
extraneous matter from within forms.
B. Install rigid shoring having no excessive settlement or deformation. Use sound timber
in shoring centering. Shim to adjust and tighten shoring with hardwood timber
wedges.
C. Design Loads for Horizontal Surfaces of Forms and Shoring: Minimum fluid
pressure, 175 pounds per cubic foot; live load, 50 pounds per square foot. Maximum
unit stresses: 125 percent of allowable stresses used for form materials and for design
of support structures.
D. Back form work with sufficient number of studs and wales to prevent deflection.
E. Re-oil or lacquer liner on job before using. Facing may be constructed of 3/4 inch
plywood made with waterproof adhesive backed by adequate studs and wales. In such
cases, form lining will not be required.
F. Unless otherwise indicated, form outside corners and edges with triangular 3/4 inch
chamfer strips (measured on sides).
G. Remove metal form ties to depth of at least 3/4 inch from surface of concrete. Do not
burn off ties. Do not use pipe spreaders. Remove spreaders which are separate from
forms as concrete is being placed.
H. Treat facing of forms with approved form coating before concrete is placed. When
directed by Project Manager, treat both sides of face forms with coating. Apply
coating before reinforcement is placed. Immediately before concrete is placed, wet
surface of forms which will come in contact with concrete.
03315-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
3.02 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A. Place reinforcing steel accurately in accordance with approved Drawings. Secure

steel adequately in position in forms to prevent misalignment. Maintain reinforcing
steel in place using approved concrete and hot-dip galvanized metal chairs and
spacers. Place reinforcing steel in accordance with CRSI Publication "Placing
Reinforcing Bars." Request inspection of reinforcing steel by Project Manager and
obtain acceptance before concrete is placed.
B. Minimum spacing center-to-center of parallel bars: 2 1/2 times nominal bar diameter.
Minimum cover measured from surface of concrete to face of reinforcing bar unless
shown otherwise on Drawings: 3 inches for surfaces cast against soil or subgrade, 2
inches for other surfaces.
C. Detail bars in accordance with ACI 315. Fabricate reinforcing steel in accordance
with CRSI Publication MSP-1, "Manual of Standard Practice." Bend reinforcing steel
to required shape while steel is cold. Excessive irregularities in bending will be cause
for rejection.
D. Do not splice bars without written approval of Project Manager. Approved bar
bending schedules or placing drawings constitute written approval. Splice and
development length of bars shall conform to ACI 318, Chapters 7 and 12, and as
shown on Drawings. Stagger splices or locate at points of low tensile stress.
3.03 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Install conduit and piping as shown on Drawings. Accurately locate and securely
fasten conduit, piping, and other embedded items in forms.
B. Install waterstops as specified in other sections and according to manufacturer's

instructions. Securely position waterstops at joints as indicated on Drawings. Protect
waterstops from damage or displacement during concrete placing operations.
3.04 BATCHING, MIXING AND DELIVERY OF CONCRETE
A. Measure, batch, mix, and deliver ready-mixed concrete in accordance with ASTM C
94, Sections 8 through 11. Produce ready-mixed concrete using automatic batching
system as described in NRMCA Concrete Plant Standards, Part 2 - Plant Control
Systems.
B. Measure, mix and deliver concrete produced by volumetric batching and continuous
mixing in accordance with ASTM C 685, Sections 6 though 8.
C. Maintain concrete workability without segregation of material and excessive

bleeding. Obtain approval of Project Manager before adjustment and change of mix
proportions.
03315-10
CITY OF HOUSTON
D. Ready-mixed concrete delivered to site shall be accompanied by batch tickets

providing information required by ASTM C 94, Section 16. Concrete produced by
continuous mixing shall be accompanied by batch tickets providing information
required by ASTM C 685, Section 14.
E. When adverse weather conditions affect quality of concrete, postpone concrete

placement. Do not mix concrete when air temperature is at or below 40 degrees F and
falling. Concrete may be mixed when temperature is 35 degrees F and rising. Take
temperature readings in shade, away from artificial heat. Protect concrete from
temperatures below 32 degrees F until concrete has cured for minimum of 3 days at
70 degrees F or 5 days at 50 degrees F.
F. Clean, maintain and operate equipment so that it thoroughly mixes material as

required.
G. Hand-mix only when approved by Project Manager.
3.05 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Give sufficient advance notice to Project Manager (at least 24 hours prior to
commencement of operations) to permit inspection of forms, reinforcing steel,
embedded items and other preparations for placing concrete. Place no concrete prior
to Project Manager's approval.
B. Schedule concrete placing to permit completion of finishing operations in daylight

hours. However, when necessary to continue after daylight hours, light site as
required. When rainfall occurs after placing operations are started, provide covering
to protect work.
C. Use troughs, pipes and chutes lined with approved metal or synthetic material in
placing concrete so that concrete ingredients are not separated. Keep chutes, troughs
and pipes clean and free from coatings of hardened concrete. Allow no aluminum
material to be in contact with concrete.
D. Limit free fall of concrete to 4 feet. Do not deposit large quantities of concrete at one
location so that running or working concrete along forms is required. Do not jar forms
after concrete has taken initial set; do not place strain on projecting reinforcement or
anchor bolts.
E. Use tremies for placing concrete in walls and similar narrow or restricted locations.
Use tremies made in sections, or provide in several lengths, so that outlet may be
adjusted to proper height during placing operations.
F. Place concrete in continuous horizontal layers approximately 12 inches thick. Place

each layer while layer below is still plastic.
03315-11
CITY OF HOUSTON
G. Compact each layer of concrete with concrete spading implements and mechanical
vibrators of approved type and adequate number for size of placement. When
immersion vibrators cannot be used, use form vibrators. Apply vibrators to concrete
immediately after depositing. Move vibrator vertically through layer of concrete just
placed and several inches into plastic layer below. Do not penetrate or disturb layers
previously placed which have partially set. Do not use vibrators to aid lateral flow
concrete. Closely supervise consolidation to ensure uniform insertion and duration of
immersion.
H. Handling and Placing Concrete: Conform to ACI 302.1R, ACI 304R and ACI 309R.
3.06 WATERSTOPS
A. Embed waterstops in concrete across joints as shown. Waterstops shall be continuous

for extent of joint; make splices necessary to provide continuity in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Support and protect waterstops during construction
operations; repair or replace waterstops damaged during construction.
B. Install waterstops in concrete on one side of joints, leaving other side exposed until
next pour. When waterstop will remain exposed for 2 days or more, shade and protect
exposed waterstop from direct rays of sun during entire exposure and until exposed
portion of waterstop is embedded in concrete.
C. Splicing PVC Waterstops:
1. Splice waterstops by heat-sealing adjacent waterstop sections in accordance

with manufacturer’s printed instructions.
2. Butt end-to-end joints of two identical waterstop sections may be made in

forms during placement of waterstop material.
3. Prior to placement in form work, prefabricate waterstop joints involving more

than two ends to be joined together, angle cut, alignment change, or joining of
two dissimilar waterstop sections, allowing not less than 24 inch long strips of
waterstop material beyond joint. Upon inspection and approval by Project
Manager, install prefabricated waterstop joint assemblies in form work, and
butt-weld ends of 24 inch strips to straight- run portions of waterstop in forms.
D. Setting PVC Waterstops:
1. Correctly position waterstops during installation. Support and anchor

waterstops during progress of work to ensure proper embedment in concrete
and to prevent folding over of waterstop by concrete placement. Locate
symmetrical halves of waterstops equally between concrete pours at joints,
with center axis coincident with joint openings. Thoroughly work concrete in
joint vicinity for maximum density and imperviousness.
03315-12
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Where waterstop in a vertical wall joint does not connect with any other
waterstop, and is not intended to be connected to waterstop in future concrete
placement, terminate waterstop 6 inches below top of wall.
E. Replacement of Defective Field Joints: Replace waterstop field joints showing

evidence of misalignment, offset, porosity, cracks, bubbles, inadequate bond or other
defects with products and joints complying with Specifications.
F. Resilient Waterstop:
1. Install resilient waterstop in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and

recommendations.
2. When requested by Project Manager, provide technical assistance by

manufacturer's representative in field at no additional cost to City.
3. Use resilient waterstop only where complete confinement by concrete is

provided; do not use in expansion or contraction joints.
4. Where resilient waterstop is used in combination with PVC waterstop, lap

resilient waterstop over PVC waterstop minimum of 6 inches and place in
contact with PVC waterstop. Where crossing PVC at right angles, melt PVC
ribs to form smooth joining surface.
5. At free top of walls without connecting slabs, stop resilient waterstop and
grooves (where used) 6 inches from top in vertical wall joints.
6. Bentonite Waterstop:
a. Locate bentonite waterstop as near as possible to center of joint and

extend continuous around entire joint. Minimum distance from edge of
waterstop to face of member: 5 inches.
b. Where thickness of concrete member to be placed on bentonite

waterstop is less than 12 inches, place waterstop in grooves at least 3/4
inch deep and 1 1/4 inches wide formed or ground into concrete.
Minimum distance from edge of waterstop placed in groove to face of
member: 2.5 inches.
c. Do not place bentonite waterstop when waterstop material temperature

is below 40 degrees F. Waterstop material may be warmed so that it
remains above 40 degrees F during placement but means used to warm
it shall in no way harm material or its properties. Do not install
waterstop where air temperature falls outside manufacturer's
recommended range.
03315-13
CITY OF HOUSTON
d. Place bentonite waterstop only on smooth and uniform surfaces; grind

concrete smooth when necessary to produce satisfactory substrate, or
bond waterstop to irregular surfaces using epoxy grout which
completely fills voids and irregularities beneath waterstop material.
Prior to installation, wire brush concrete surface to remove laitance
and other substances that may interfere with bonding of epoxy.
e. In addition to adhesive backing provided with waterstop, secure

bentonite waterstop in place with concrete nails and washers at 12 inch
maximum spacing.
7. Adhesive Waterstop:
a. With wire brush thoroughly clean concrete surface on which waterstop

is to be placed and then coat with primer.
b. If surface is too rough to allow waterstop to form complete contact,

grind to form adequately smooth surface.
c. Install waterstop with top protective paper left in place. Overlap joints
between strips minimum of 1 inch and cover back over with protective
paper.
d. Do not remove protective paper until just before final form work
completion. Place concrete immediately. time that waterstop material
is uncovered prior to concrete placement shall be minimized and shall
not exceed 24 hours.
A. Definitions:
1. Construction joint: Contact surface between plastic (fresh) concrete and

concrete that has attained initial set.
2. Monolithic: Manner of concrete placement to reduce or eliminate construction

joints; joints other than those indicated on Drawings will not be permitted
without written approval of Project Manager. Where so approved, make
additional construction joints with details equivalent to those indicated for
joints in similar locations.
3. Preparation for Construction Joints: Roughen surface of concrete previously

placed, leaving some aggregate particles exposed. Remove laitance and loose
materials by sandblasting or high-pressure water blasting. Keep surface wet
for several hours prior to placing of plastic concrete.
3.08 CURING
03315-14
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Comply with ACI 308. Cure by preventing loss of moisture, rapid temperature change
and mechanical injury for period of 7 curing days when Type II or IP cement has
been used and for 3 curing days when Type III cement has been used. Start curing as
soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing.
A curing day is any calendar day in which temperature is above 50 degrees F for at
least 19 hours. Colder days may be counted when air temperature adjacent to concrete
is maintained above 50 degrees F. In continued cold weather, when artificial heat is
not provided, removal of forms and shoring may be permitted at end of calendar days
equal to twice required number of curing days. However, leave soffit forms and
shores in place until concrete has reached specified 28 day strength, unless directed
otherwise by Project Manager.
B. Cure formed surfaces not requiring rubbed-finished surface by leaving forms in place
for full curing period. Keep wood forms wet during curing period. Add water as
needed for other types of forms. Or, at Contractor's option, forms may be removed
after 2 days and curing compound applied.
C. Rubbed Finish:
1. At formed surfaces requiring rubbed finish, remove forms as soon as

practicable without damaging surface.
2. After rubbed-finish operations are complete, continue curing formed surfaces

by using either approved curing/sealing compounds or moist cotton mats until
normal curing period is complete.
D. Unformed Surfaces: Cure by membrane curing compound method.
1. After concrete has received final finish and surplus water sheen has
disappeared, immediately seal surface with uniform coating of approved
curing compound, applied at rate of coverage recommended by manufacturer
or as directed by Project Manager. Do not apply less than 1 gallon per 180
square feet of area. Provide satisfactory means to properly control and check
rate of application of compound.
2. Thoroughly agitate compound during use and apply by means of approved

mechanical power pressure sprayers equipped with atomizing nozzles. For
application on small miscellaneous items, hand-powered spray equipment
may be used. Prevent loss of compound between nozzle and concrete surface
during spraying operations.
3. Do not apply compound to dry surface. When concrete surface has become
dry, thoroughly moisten surface immediately prior to application. At locations
where coating shows discontinuities, pinholes or other defects, or when rain
falls on newly coated surface before film has dried sufficiently to resist
damage, apply additional coat of compound at specified rate of coverage.
3.09 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND SHORING
03315-15
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Remove forms from surfaces requiring rubbing only as rapidly as rubbing operation
progresses. Remove forms from vertical surfaces not requiring rubbed-finish when
concrete has aged for required number of curing days. When curing compound is
used, do not remove forms before 2 days after concrete placement.
B. Leave soffit forms and shores in place until concrete has reached specified 28-day
strength, unless directed otherwise by Project Manager.
3.10 DEFECTIVE WORK
A. Immediately repair defective work discovered after forms have been removed. When
concrete surface is bulged, uneven, or shows excess honeycombing or form marks
which cannot be repaired satisfactorily through patching, remove and replace entire
section.
3.11 FINISHING
A. Patch honeycomb, minor defects and form tie holes in concrete surfaces with cement
mortar mixed one part cement to two parts fine aggregate. Repair defects by cutting
out unsatisfactory material and replacing with new concrete, securely keyed and
bonded to existing concrete. Finish to make junctures between patches and existing
concrete as inconspicuous as possible. Use stiff mixture and thoroughly tamp into
place. After each patch has stiffened sufficiently to allow for greatest portion of
shrinkage, strike off mortar flush with surface.
B. Apply rubbed finish to exposed surfaces of formed concrete structures as noted on

Drawings. After pointing has set sufficiently, wet surface with brush and perform first
surface rubbing with No. 16 carborundum stone, or approved equal. Rub sufficiently
to bring surface to paste, to remove form marks and projections, and to produce
smooth, dense surface. Add cement to form surface paste as necessary. Spread or
brush material, which has been ground to paste, uniformly over surface and allow to
reset. In preparation for final acceptance, clean surfaces and perform final finish
rubbing with No. 30 carborundum stone or approved equal. After rubbing, allow
paste on surface to reset; then wash surface with clean water. Leave structure with
clean, neat and uniform-appearing finish.
C. Apply wood float finish to concrete slabs.
A. Testing shall be performed under provisions of Section 01454 - Testing Laboratory

Services.
B. Unless otherwise directed by Project Manager, following minimum testing of

concrete is required. Testing shall be performed by qualified individuals employed by
approved independent testing agency, and conform to requirements of ASTM C 1077.
1. Take concrete samples in accordance with ASTM C 172.
03315-16
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Make one set of four compression test specimens for each mix design at least
once per day and for each 150 cubic yards or fraction thereof. Make, cure and
test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 31 and ASTM C 39.
3. When taking compression test specimens, test each sample for slump
according to ASTM C 143, for temperature according to ASTM C 1064, for
air content according to ASTM C 231, and for unit weight according to
ASTM C 138.
4. Inspect, sample and test concrete in accordance with ASTM C 94, Section 13,
14, and 15, and ACI 311-5R.
C. Test Cores: Conform to ASTM C 42.
D. Testing High Early Strength Concrete: When Type III cement is used in concrete,
specified 7 day and 28 day compressive strengths shall be applicable at 3 and 7 days,
respectively.
E. If 7-day or 3-day test strengths (as applicable for type of cement being used) fail to
meet established strength requirements, extended curing or resumed curing on those
portions of structure represented by test specimens may be required. When additional
curing fails to produce required strength, strengthening or replacement of portions of
structure which fail to develop required strength may be required by Project Manager,
at no additional cost to City.
3.13 PROTECTION
A. Protect concrete against damage until final acceptance by City.
B. Protect fresh concrete from damage due to rain, hail, sleet, or snow. Provide
protection while concrete is still plastic, and whenever precipitation is imminent or
occurring.
C. Do not backfill around concrete structures or subject them to design loadings until
components of structure needed to resist loading are complete and have reached
specified 28 day compressive strength, except as authorized otherwise by Project
Manager.
END OF SECTION
03315-17
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION MORTAR
SECTION 04061
MORTAR
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Mortar and grout for masonry.
B. Section 01292 – Schedule of Values
D. Section 01450 – Contractor's Quality Control
E. Section 01454 – Testing Laboratory Services
F. Section 01610 – Basic Product Requirements
A. Unit Prices.
1. No separate payment will be made for mortar under this Section. Include
payment in Lump Sum for building or structure with price breakdown
included in Schedule of Values.
2. Refer to Section 01270 - Measurement and Payment and Section 01292-

Schedule of Values.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 143 - Standard Testing Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete
B. ASTM C 144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
C. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
D. ASTM C 207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
E. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
04061-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
F. ASTM C 404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout.
G. ASTM C 476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry.
H. ASTM C 780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction

Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry.
I. ASTM C 109 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Include design mix, indicate Property Method used, required environmental

conditions, and admixture limitations.
C. Samples: Submit two ribbons of each mortar color, illustrating color and color range.
D. Submit test reports under provisions of Section 01450 - Contractor's Quality Control.
E. Submit test reports on mortar indicating conformance to ASTM C 270.
F. Submit test reports on grout indicating conformance to ASTM C 476.
G. Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of Section 01450 - Contractor's

Quality Control, that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
A. Deliver products to site and store and protect products under provisions of Section
01610 - Basic Product Requirements.
B. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing,
and foreign matter.
1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperatures to minimum 50 degrees F prior

to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.
1.08 MIX TESTS
A. Test mortar and grout in accordance with Section 01454 - Testing Laboratory
Services.
B. Testing of Mortar Mix: Test in accordance with ASTM C 780. Test mortar mix for
compressive strength, consistency, mortar aggregate ratio, water content, air content,
and splitting tensile strength.
04061-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Testing of Grout Mix: Test in accordance with ASTM C 109. Test grout mix for
compressive strength and slump.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, white color.
B. Masonry Cement: Not permitted.
C. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C 144, standard masonry type. Grading and color suitable
for type of masonry, one source for entire project. (Not less than 5 percent shall pass
No. 100 sieve).
D. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
E. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C 404.
F. Water: Clean and potable.
2.02 MORTAR COLOR
A. Mortar Color: Mineral oxide pigment; color; to be selected by Project Manager from
manufacturer's samples.
2.03 ADMIXTURES
A. Antifreeze: Antifreeze admixtures will not be permitted.
B. Accelerator: Accelerator may be used only with approval of Project Manager.
2.04 MORTAR
A. Mortar for Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C 270, Type S utilizing
Property Method to achieve 1800 psi strength.
B. Mortar for Non-load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C 270, Type S utilizing the
Property Method to achieve 1800 psi strength.
C. Mortar for Masonry Below Grade or in Contact with Earth: ASTM C 270, Type M
utilizing the Property Method to achieve 2500 psi strength.
D. Pointing Mortar: ASTM C 270, Type N, using the Property Method to achieve 750
psi strength.
2.05 MORTAR MIXING
04061-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in

accordance with ASTM C 270 to achieve strengths noted in Paragraph 2.04.
B. Add mortar color and admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Provide uniformity of mix and coloration.
C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower freezing point of mortar.
D. If water is lost by evaporation, retemper only within 2 hours of mixing.
E. Use mortar within 2 hours after mixing at temperatures of 80 degrees F, or 2 1/2

hours at temperatures under 50 degrees F.
2.06 GROUT
A. Bond Beams, Lintels, and Other Areas to be Grouted Solid: 3000 psi strength at 28
days; 7 to 8 inches slump per ASTM C 143; mixed in accordance with ASTM C 476,
Fine Grout.
2.07 GROUT MIXING
A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in

accordance with ASTM C 476, Fine Grout.
B. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity

of mix.
C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower freezing point of grout.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Request inspection of spaces to be grouted.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Apply bonding agent to existing concrete surfaces.
B. Plug clean out holes with masonry units to prevent leakage of grout materials. Brace
masonry for wet grout pressure.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install mortar and grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids.
C. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout.
04061-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
D. Remove grout spaces of excess mortar.
END OF SECTION
04061-5
CITY OF HOUSTON BRICK MASONRY FOR
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION UTILITY CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 04210
BRICK MASONRY FOR UTILITY CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Brick masonry work in utility construction for permanent or temporary installation of

below ground structures.
B. Brick masonry in repair and rehabilitation of utility lines and associated structures.
D. Section 02086 – Adjusting Manholes, Inlets, and Valve Boxes to Grade
E. Section 02555 – Manhole Rehabilitation
F. Section 02632 – Cast-In-Pace Inlets, Headwalls, and Wingwalls
G. Section 04061 – Mortar
1.03 UNIT PRICES
A. No payment will be made for brick masonry under this Section unless specifically
noted in bid documents. Include payment in unit price for applicable utility structure
section.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 32 - Specification for Sewer and Manhole Brick (Made from Clay or
Shale).
B. ASTM C 55 - Standard Specification for Concrete Building Brick.
C. ASTM C 62 - Specification for Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay
or Shale).
D. ASTM C 67 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural
Clay Tile.
E. ASTM C 91 - Specification for Masonry Cement.
04210-1
F. ASTM C 109 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars (Using 2-in. Cube Specimens).
G. ASTM C 140 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry
Units and Related Units.
H. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit certification from the manufacturer that brick units meet applicable
requirements of reference standards.
C. As an alternate to providing certification, submit test results that show brick units
meet applicable requirements of reference standards, when tested by an approved
independent testing laboratory. Test result submittals shall be at no cost to the City.
A. Handle and store brick to prevent damage.
B. Store brick and mortar mix off the ground and in a dry place. Cover mortar mix to
protect from weather.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CLAY AND SHALE BRICK MASONRY UNITS
A. Manholes and Structures: Use brick units made from clay or shale conforming to
requirements of ASTM C 32, Grade MM, either cored or solid. Units shall have the
following physical properties:
1. Compressive Strength: 2200 psi minimum for individual brick; 2500 psi
average for five bricks.
2. Size: 2-1/4" by 7-5/8" by 3-5/8".
3. Test Procedure: ASTM C 67.
B. Sewer Brick: Use brick units made from clay or shale conforming to requirements of
ASTM C 32, Grade SM, either cored or solid. Units shall have the following physical
properties:
1. Compressive Strength: 3750 psi minimum for individual brick; 5000 psi
average for 5 bricks.
2. Size: 2-1/4" by 7-5/8" by 3-5/8".
04210-2
3. Test Procedure: ASTM C 67.
2.02 CONCRETE BRICK MASONRY UNITS
A. Manholes and Structures: Conform to requirements of ASTM C 55, grade S-1.
B. Dimensions: 2-1/4" by 7-5/8" by 3-5/8".
2.03 MORTAR
A. Provided mortar conforming to the requirements of Section 04061 - Mortar.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Ensure that foundations and other surfaces to support brickwork are at proper grades
and elevations. Correct improperly prepared surfaces. Work surfaces and masonry
shall be free of dirt, grease, oil, or other harmful materials before starting brick
masonry work.
3.02 WEATHER REQUIREMENTS
A. Lay no masonry when temperature of outside air is below 50 F, unless satisfactory

means are provided to heat materials and protect work from cold and frost.
B. Maintain mortar at 50 F or above and ensure that mortar will harden without freezing.
3.03 BRICK PLACEMENT
A. Use sewer brick where exposed to flow. Where not exposed to flow, use manhole
brick.
B. Lay sewer brick with the 2-1/4" by 7-5/8" side exposed to flow.
C. Lay manhole bricks so that in every fifth course the long axis of bricks are
perpendicular to the long axis of the four preceding courses.
D. Lay curved courses, and courses in different planes, using bonded and keyed
construction.
E. Lay brick plumb and true with courses level and uniformly spaced. Adjust the bond
of face brick so that no course will terminate with a piece less than one-half length of
brick.
F. Dampen brick prior to placement.
G. Where fresh masonry joins partially set or totally set masonry, clean surfaces of set
masonry. Remove loose mortar and brick. Wet brick to obtain the best possible bond.
04210-3
H. Immediately remove mortar droppings and splashing as work progresses to facilitate

final cleaning.
3.04 JOINTS
A. Completely fill joints in brick and other materials with mortar as each course is laid.
B. Make joints in exposed brickwork a uniform 3/8-inch wide, unless otherwise shown
on Drawings.
C. When mortar is "thumbprint" hard, tool exposed joints with a round or other suitable
jointer that is slightly larger than width of the mortar joint. In tooling, make sure that
cracks and crevices are closed.
D. Point holes in exposed masonry. Cut out defective joints and repoint.

Services.
B. A minimum of one set of mortar samples shall be molded for each day's placement as
directed by Project Manager. Mold three 2-inch cube specimens. One cube will be
tested for compressive strength at 7 days and 2 cubes will be tested for compressive
strength at 28 days in accordance with ASTM C 109.
C. Each load of bricks delivered to the jobsite shall be tested.
1. Test clay bricks in accordance with ASTM C 67.
2. Test concrete bricks in accordance with ASTM C 140.
END OF SECTION
04210-4
BRICK MASONRY FOR
Design Coordination Considerations UTILITY CONSTRUCTION
THE FOLLOWING ITEMS SHOULD BE CHECKED FOR COORDINATION DURING

DESIGN:
******************************************************************************
A. Coordinate this specification with other related specifications including the following related
Sections.
******************************************************************************
RELATED SECTIONS
Section 02087 - Brick Manholes for Storm Sewers.
Section 02632 - Cast-in-Place Inlets, Headwalls, and Wingwalls.
Section 02085 - Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults.
Section 02086 - Adjusting Manholes, Inlets, and Valve Boxes to Grade.
Section 02555 - Manhole Rehabilitation.
SWTP 04210-1
12/91 Page 1 of 1
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION METAL FABRICATIONS
SECTION 05501
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Bolts, anchors, nuts, sleeves, concrete anchors, scheduled items, and other miscellaneous metal
items not specifically included under other sections of these specifications.
A. Unit Prices
1. No separate payment will be made for metal fabrications under this section. Include
payment as part of the Work in appropriate sections.
B. Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). If the Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract, payment for work
in this Section is included in the total Stipulated Price.
1.04 REFERENCES
B. ASTM A 53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless.
C. ASTM A 123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
D. ASTM A 153 - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
E. ASTM A 276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
F. ASTM A 307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60,000
psi Tensile Strength.
G. ASTM A 500 - Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round
and Shapes.
H. ASTM A 501 - Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.
05501-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
I. ASTM F 593 - Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs.
J. ASTM F 594 - Stainless Steel Nuts.
K. AWS A 2.0 - Standard Welding Symbols.
L. AWS D 1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
M. SSPC-SP-2 Hand Tool Cleaning
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit following Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, thickness, grade class, connection attachments,
reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings,
elevations, and details where applicable.
C. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A 2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld
lengths.
D. Submit manufacturer’s technical literature and test reports showing certified capacities for
concrete anchors.
E. When foreign manufactured material is proposed for use, test material for conformance to
ASTM Standards by a certified independent testing laboratory located in the United States.
Certification from any other source outside the United States is unacceptable. Furnish copies of
test reports to Project Manager for review. Do not begin fabrication until material has been
approved. No additional payment will be made for this testing.
1.06 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Prepare shop drawings under direct supervision of a professional Structural Engineer

experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas.
B. Welders' Certificates: Submit following Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures, certifying

welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code, using
procedures, materials and equipment of type required for this work. Welder must have been
qualified or re-certified within the previous 12 months of date welding is being performed.
1.07 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Drawings.
1.08 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Materials stored at project site: Store above ground on platforms, skids, or other supports. Keep
free of dirt, mud, grease, or oil. Protect from corrosion.
05501-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Steel Shapes and Plate: ASTM A 36.
B. Stainless Steel Sections: ASTM A 276, Type 316 for non-welded items and Type 316L for
welded items.
C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 or ASTM A 501, Grade B.
D. Pipe: ASTM A 53, Grade B Schedule 40.
E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307 galvanized to ASTM A 153 for galvanized
components. Provide anchor bolts for all equipment and machinery when anchor bolts are not
furnished by manufacturer. Conform anchor size, length, projection, etc., to requirements of
equipment and machinery manufacturer. Provide templates to accurately position anchor bolts
in forms.
F. Stainless Steel Bolts and Nuts: Bolts in accordance with ASTM F 593, Type 316; nuts in
accordance with ASTM F 594, Type 316; UNC coarse threads.
G. Concrete Anchors: Concrete anchors are inserted into holes drilled in hardened concrete. Use
one of the following types:
1. Adhesive Anchors: For concrete anchors which are submerged, in splash zones, in
enclosed spaces over liquids, or anchoring vibrating equipment, use epoxy adhesive
anchors. Adhesive anchors may be used at all locations where concrete anchors are
required. Epoxy systems shall be Sika/FI System with Sikadur Injection Gel Epoxy,
Master Builders Concresive Epoxy Cartridge Dispensing System and Concresive Paste
LPL, or equal. Threaded rods shall be ASTM F 593, Type 316 studs. Where adhesive
anchors, or connected metal, are exposed to direct sunlight, the anchors shall be
certified to maintain at least 90 percent of their rated strength (tested at 73 F) when
tested at 160 F.
2. Expansion Anchors: Where concrete anchors are indicated and adhesive anchors are not
required, wedge type anchors made with ASTM A 276, Type 316 Stainless Steel shall
be used. Anchors shall be KWIK Bolt II By Hilti, Inc., or equal.
H. Welding Materials: AWS D 1.1; type required for materials being welded.
I. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: Same manufacturer as protective coating; compatible with
protective coating; applied in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fit and shop-assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site.
05501-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. Weld all shop connections except where
welding is not practical, or unless otherwise shown on Drawings. Where screw bolts cannot be
avoided, conceal fasteners where possible or countersink heads, screw up tight and nick threads
to prevent loosening. Weld joints continuously except as shown on Drawings.
C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt
tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
D. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located;

consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise.
E. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related
components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted
otherwise.
F. Welding shall conform to requirements of AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code – Steel.
Perform welding not governed by above in accordance with best modern practice for strength
and durability.
2.03 FINISHES
A. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC SP-2.
B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required.
C. Galvanize, after completion of welded fabrication, in accordance with ASTM A 123, structural
steel members. Provide minimum 1.25 ounces per square foot galvanized coating.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and ready to receive work.
B. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.
B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates,
to appropriate sections.
C. Coat stainless steel threads with an anti-seizing compound prior to installing nuts.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
05501-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until
completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.
C. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings.
D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D 1.1.
E. Obtain Project Manager approval prior to cutting or making adjustments in the field.
F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed except surfaces to be in
contact with concrete.
3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4-inch per story, non-cumulative.
B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment: 1/4-inch.
3.05 COATING REPAIRS
A. Thoroughly clean field welds, abrasions, and damaged or defective areas of galvanized surfaces
to remove all loose, cracked or bruised splatter coating. After surface is prepared, for
galvanized surfaces apply two coats of galvanizing repair coating, as approved by Project
Manager. Repair other coated surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations,
unless otherwise specified.
END OF SECTION
05501-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION PROTECTIVE COATINGS
SECTION 09901
PROTECTIVE COATINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Preparing surfaces, providing adequate conditions for proper workmanship, and

furnishing and applying the protective coating materials required for metallic,
concrete, masonry and plastic surfaces.
B. Color code painting of piping and piping identification signs and markers.
C. Refer to Section 09900 – Painting for Decorative and Protective Coatings to be used
on Interior and Exterior Architectural Surfaces, such as wood, gypsum board and
masonry.
D. Refer to Section 09971 – Painting and Protective Coatings for Potable Water Storage
Tanks for painting and protective coatings to be used on potable water storage tanks.
B. Document 00700 – General Conditions
C. Section 01270 – Measurement and Payment
E. Section 01630 – Product Substitution Procedures
F. Section 09900 – Painting for Decorative and Protective Coatings
G. Section 09971 – Painting and Protective Coatings for Potable Water Storage Tanks
A. Unit Prices
1. No separate payment will be made for protective coatings unless specifically

listed in Document 00410 – Bid Form. Include payment for protective
coatings in unit prices for items to which coatings are applied.
2. Measurement for protective coatings, when included as a separate pay item, is

on a square-foot basis for completed protective coating systems.
09901-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A13.1 – Color Schedule
B. ANSI/AWWA C213 – Fusion-bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and Exterior of
Steel Water Pipelines
C. ASTM D 412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic
Elastomers - Tension.
D. ASTM D 624 - Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized
Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers.
E. ASTM D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
F. ASTM D 695 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics.
G. ASTM D 790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and
H. ASTM D 2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property—Durometer Hardness.
I. ASTM D 2990 - Standard Test Methods for Tensile, Compressive, and Flexural
Creep and Creep-Rupture of Plastics.
J. ASTM D 3960 - Standard Practice for Determining Volatile Organic Compound

(VOC) Content of Paints and Related Coatings.
K. ASTM D 7234 - Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Adhesion Strength of Coatings
on Concrete Using Portable Pull-Off Adhesion Testers.
L. ASTM G 20 - Standard Test Method for Chemical Resistance of Pipeline Coatings.
M. Federal Specification TT-P-28 – Paint, Aluminum, Heat Resisting 1200 degrees F
N. Federal Standard 595A – Federal Standard Colors
O. Military Specification DOD-P-23236 – Paint Coating Systems, Steel Ship Tank, Fuel
and Salt Water Ballast, Class 2
P. NSF Standard 61 – Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects
Q. SSPC-PA 1 – Paint Application Specification No. 1 - Shop, Field and Maintenance

Painting
R. SSPC-PA 2 – Paint Application Specification No. 2 – Measurement of Dry Paint

Thickness with Magnetic Gages
S. SSPC-Paint 16 – Coal Tar Epoxy-Polyamide Black (or Dark Red) Paint
09901-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
T. SSPC-SP 1 – Solvent Cleaning
U. SSPC-SP 2 – Hand Tool Cleaning
V. SSPC-SP 3 – Power Tool Cleaning
W. SSPC-SP 5/NACE 1 – White Metal Blast Cleaning
X. SSPC-SP 6/ NACE 3 – Commercial Blast Cleaning
Y. SSPC-SP 7/NACE 4 - Brush-Off Blast Cleaning
Z. SSPC-SP 10/NACE 2 – Near White Metal Blast Cleaning
AA. SSPC-SP 11 – Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal
BB. SSPC-VIS 1-89 – Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel
CC. SSPC-VIS 3 – Visual Standard for Power-and Hand-Tool Cleaned Steel
DD. SSPC-QP 1 – Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Painting

Contractors
EE. SSPC-QP 2 - Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Painting

Contractors to Remove Hazardous Paint
FF. SSPC-SP12/NACE 5 – Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Steel and Other Hard
Materials by High-and Ultrahigh-Pressure Water Jetting Prior to Recoating
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. Paint, coatings, or finishes as used in this Section include surface treatments,

emulsions, enamels, paints, epoxies, polyurethanes, acrylics, zincs, and other
protective coatings with the exceptions of galvanizing or anodizing, whether used as a
pretreatment, primer, intermediate coat, or finish coat.
B. DFT means minimum dry film thickness.
C. VOC means Volatile Organic Components
A. See the Drawings and other Specifications to determine how coatings under this
Section will be applied. Paint or coat new and modified surfaces in conformance with
this Section.
B. Coating system schedules summarize surfaces to be coated, required surface

preparation, and coating systems to be applied. Coating notes on Drawings are used
to show exceptions to schedules, to show or extend limits of coating systems, or to
clarify or show details for application of coating systems.
09901-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Do not apply protective coatings to the following surfaces unless specifically named
or shown to be coated:
1. Concrete
2. Stainless steel, bronze, or brass
3. Machined surfaces
4. Grease fittings
5. Glass
6. Equipment nameplates
7. Platform gratings, stair treads, door thresholds, and other walk surfaces
8. Galvanized steel electrical conduit and associated galvanized and factory-

coated junction boxes and electrical panels
9. Galvanized surfaces inside buildings and not exposed to view
10. Manhole and valve covers and rings, storm water inlet gratings, covers, and
frames
D. Provide decorative and protective coatings for interior architectural surfaces such as
wood, gypsum board, and masonry in accordance with Section 09900 – Painting.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures.
B. Submit the following information at least 10 days prior to protective coating work:
1. Coating Materials List: Eight copies of a coating materials list naming the
manufacturer and the coating number, keyed to the coating systems described
in this Section. Submit the list prior to or at the time of sample submittal.
2. Paint Manufacturer’s Information: For each coating system to be used, submit

the following data:
a. Paint manufacturer’s Product Data Sheet for each product proposed,

including statements on the suitability of the material for the intended
use.
b. Technical and performance information that demonstrates compliance

with the system performance and material requirements.
c. Paint manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations on surface

preparation, application and curing.
09901-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
d. Colors available for each product, where applicable.
e. Compatibility of shop and field applied coatings, where applicable.
f. Material Safety Data Sheets for each product used.
g. VOC of each paint or coating proposed, stated in grams per litre.
3. Samples
a. Submit color samples of paint, finishes, and other coating materials on

8-1/2 inch by 11-inch sheet metal or heavy cardstock. Have each sheet
completely coated over its entire surface with one protective coating
material, type, and color.
b. Provide two sets of color samples to match each color selected by the
City Engineer from the manufacturer’s standard color sheets. If
custom-mixed colors are indicated, prepare color samples using color
formulations prepared to match the color samples furnished by the
City Engineer.
c. Submit one 15-pound sample of each abrasive proposed to be used for

surface preparation for submerged and severe service coating systems.
1.08 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Submit five (5) references which show that the painting Contractor has previous
successful experience with the indicated or comparable coating systems. Include the
name, address, and the telephone number for the owner of each installation for which
the painting Contractor provided the protective coating. As an alternative, submit
proof of certification in accordance with SSPC-QP 1.
B. For any project which involves removal or repair of lead based paints, submit proof
of certification in accordance with SSPC-QP 2.
1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL RESTRICTIONS
A. Ventilate area where coating is being applied. Post and enforce NO SMOKING OR
OPEN FLAME signs until coating has cured.
B. Provide lighting level of 80-foot candles (860 1x) measured mid-height at substrate
surface.
C. Restrict worker access and construction traffic from area where coating is being
applied or is curing.
D. Comply with City of Houston and all applicable OSHA confined space entry
regulations including but not limited to OSHA Permit-Required Confined Space
Standard 1910.146.
09901-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
1.10 WARRANTY INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
A. Warranty Inspection:
1. A warranty inspection may be conducted during the eleventh month following

completion of coating and painting. The Contractor and a representative of the
coating material manufacturer must attend the inspection. At the option of the
City, the City may be represented by a NACE certified coating inspector.
2. The City Engineer may, by written notice to the Contractor, reschedule the
warranty inspection to another date within the one-year correction period, or
may cancel the warranty inspection altogether. Cancellation of the warranty
inspection does not relieve the Contractor of the Contractor’s responsibilities
under the Contract Documents.
3. Repair defective work discovered during the warranty inspection in

accordance with these Specifications.
B. Extended Maintenance of Chemical Tank Lining Systems: Promptly repair defects in

the chemical resistant sheet lining system for a period of 2 years after the lining has
been placed into service. Such maintenance includes repair of the chemical tank and
any equipment or facilities damaged by the corrosive action of the chemicals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 COATINGS CRITERIA
A. Suitability: Use suitable coating materials as recommended by the manufacturer.

Recommendations must be accompanied by test methods used to determine suitability
and results of these tests.
B. Compatibility: In any coating system, use only compatible materials from a single
manufacturer. Give particular attention to compatibility of primers, intermediate coats
and finish coats. If necessary, apply a barrier coat or tie coat between existing prime
coat and subsequent field coats to ensure compatibility.
C. Containers: Supply coating materials in sealed containers that plainly show the
designated name, formula or specification number, batch number, color, date of
manufacture, and name of manufacturer, all plainly legible at the time of use.
D. Colors: Use colors and shades of colors of all coats of paint as indicated on the
coating schedules or as selected by the City Engineer. Make each coat a contrasting
shade to the previous and following coats to facilitate inspection of surface coverage
of each coat. The City Engineer will select finish colors from the manufacturer’s
standard color samples.
E. Substitute or Equal Products:
09901-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. To establish equality under Section 01630 – Product Substitution Procedures,

furnish satisfactory documentation from the manufacturer of the proposed
substitute product that the material meets the indicated requirements and is
equivalent to or better in the following properties:
a. Resistance to abrasion and physical damage.
b. Resistance to chemical attack.
c. Life expectancy.
d. Ability to recoat in the future.
e. Solids content by volume.
f. Dry film thickness per coat.
g. Compatibility with other coatings.
h. Suitability for the intended service.
i. Temperature limitations in service and during application.
j. Type and quality of recommended undercoats and topcoats.
k. Ease of application.
l. Ease of repairing damaged areas.
m. Stability of colors.
n. VOC content expressed in grams per liter.
2. For substitutions, submit protective-coating materials which are standard

products produced by recognized manufacturers who are regularly engaged in
production of such materials for essentially identical service conditions.
Where requested, provide the City Engineer with the names of not less than 10
successful applications of the proposed manufacturer’s products, which
comply with these requirements. Applications must be in similar service
environments to the job being contracted.
2.02 INDUSTRIAL COATING SYSTEMS
09901-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Material Sources: Each of the following manufacturers is capable of supplying many

of the specified industrial coating materials. Manufacturers and specific paint
designations (numbers) are listed to indicate the required type and quality of coating.
Contractors are to base their bid on the use of products supplied by one of the named
manufacturers. These named manufacturers are designated to establish a level of
acceptable product quality or manufacturing experience and are not to be construed as
the only manufacturers of products acceptable for use. Other manufacturers will be
considered on an individual basis, and may be submitted for consideration in
accordance with Document 0700 General Requirements, Article 3.8, Product Options
and Substitutions (excluding 3.8.3), Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures, Section
01630 – Products Substitution Procedures, and this Section.
1. AKZO/International Coatings
2. Ameron International
3. Carboline Coatings Company
4. Hempel Coatings USA, Inc.
5. ICI/Devoe Coatings
6. Sigma Coatings USA, Inc.
7. Tnemec Company
8. Sherwin Williams Co.
B. System 1 – Aliphatic Polyurethane Finish Coat: Use a two-component aliphatic

acrylic polyurethane coating that provides superior color and gloss retention,
resistance to splash from acid and alkaline chemicals, resistance to chemical fumes
and severe weathering, and has a minimum solids content of 58 percent by volume.
As primer, use a rust inhibitive 2- component epoxy coating with minimum solids
content of 66 percent by volume.
1. Prime Coat:
a. DFT = 4-6 mils (100-150 microns).
b. Products: Ameron 385, Carboline 893, Tnemec 69, VyGuard V75, SW

Macropoxy 646 FC Epoxy, or equal.
2. Finish Coats (one or more):
b. Products: Ameron 450 GL, Carboline 134 HG, Tnemec 74, VyGuard
V54, Sherwin Williams Hi-Solids Polyurethane, or equal.
09901-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
3. Total System = 6-10 mils (150-250 microns).
4. Apply more than one finish coat as necessary to produce a finish with uniform
color and texture.
C. System 2 – Inorganic Zinc/Epoxy Polyurethane: For prime coat, use a 2-component

water or solvent-based inorganic zinc silicate which contains at least 85 percent of
metallic zinc by weight in the dried film, and is recommended by the coating
manufacturer as a primer for this system. As intermediate coat, use a high-build, 2-
component epoxy with a solids content of at least 70 percent by volume. For finish
coat, use a 2-component aliphatic acrylic or polyester polyurethane coating material
that provides superior color and gloss retention, resistance to chemical fumes and
severe weathering, and has a minimum solids content of 58 percent by volume.
1. Prime Coat:
a. DFT = 2.5-4.0 mils (65-100 microns).
b. Products: Ameron Dimetcote 21-5 or 21-9, Carbozinc 11 or D7WB,

VyGuard 13F6 or 13F7, SW Zinc Clad II L.V. or equal.
2. Intermediate Coat:
b. Ameron 385, Carboline 893, VyGuard V75, or equal.
3. Finish Coats (one or more):
a. DFT = 2.5 to 4.0 mils (65-100 microns).
b. Ameron 450 GL, Carboline 134 HG, VyGuard V54, Sherwin Williams
Hi-Solids Polyurethane, or equal.
4. Total System DFT = 9-14 mils (225-600 microns).
5. Apply intermediate coat in excess of 4 mils (100 microns) DFT using the mist
coat/full coat technique to completely cover the inorganic zinc primer and
prevent bubbling of the epoxy or polyurethane finish coat.
6. Apply more than one finish coat as necessary to produce a finish with uniform
color and texture.
7. If inorganic zinc primer is used as a pre-construction or shop-applied primer,

and there are damaged or uncoated areas, spot blast the damaged areas with
abrasive to an SSPC-SP 10 Near White Metal Standard and then coat with the
specified material.
09901-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
D. System 3 – Inorganic Zinc: Use a 2-component water-based inorganic zinc silicate

which contains at least 85 percent of metallic zinc by weight in the dried film.
1. Prime Coat and Finish Coat (one).
a. DFT = 2.5 to 4.0 mils (65-100 microns).
b. Products: Ameron Dimetcote 21-5, Carbozinc D7WB, VyGuard 13F6

or 13F7, S.W. Zinc Clad XI, or equal.
2. Total System DFT = 2.5 to 4.0 mils (65-100 microns).
E. System 4 – Acrylic Latex: Use a single component, water-based acrylic latex with a
fungicide additive having a minimum solids content of 35 percent by volume. Apply
a prime coat as recommended by manufacturer. Select coating material, which is
available in ANSI safety colors.
1. Prime Coat
b. Products: Carboline D3358, Ameron 148, Hemucryl 1803, Sherwin

Williams DTM Primer/Finish.
2. Finish Coats (2 or more):
b. Products: Carboline D3359, Ameron 220, Hemucryl 4803, Sherwin

Williams DTM Acrylic Coating or equal.
F. System 5 – Epoxy: Use a two-component, rust inhibitive, polyamide-cured epoxy

coating material with a recoatable finish that is available in a wide selection of colors.
Use a coating with a minimum solid content of 66 percent by volume and resistant to
service conditions of condensing moisture, splash and spillage of lubricating oils, and
frequent washdown and cleaning.
1. Prime Coat:
b. Products: Ameron 385PA, Carboline 193, Tnemec 69, VyGuard V75,

Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 FC, or equal.
2. Prime Coat (where shop applied):
09901-10
CITY OF HOUSTON
b. Products: Ameron 370, Carboline 193, Tnemec 161, VyGuard V75,

Sherwin Williams Recoatable Epoxy Primer, or equal.
a. DFT = 5- 7 mils (125-175 microns).
b. Products: Ameron 385, Carboline 893, Tnemec 69, VyGuard V75,

Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 FC, or equal.
G. System 6 – Aliphatic Polyurethane, Fiberglass: Use a two-component aliphatic

polyurethane coating material with superior color and gloss retention, resistance to
splash from acid and alkaline chemicals, and resistance to chemical fumes and severe
weathering. Use a primer, tie coat, or mist coat as recommended by the manufacturer.
1. Prime Coat (Tie Coat): Ameron 385, Carboline 893, Tnemec P66, VyGuard
V75, Macropoxy 646 FC, or equal.
b. Products: Ameron Amershield, Carbothane 134 HG, Tnemec 74,

VyGuard V54, or equal.
H. Section 7 – Alkyd Enamel: Use a high quality, gloss, or semi-gloss, medium long oil
alkyd finish with a minimum solids content of 49 percent by volume. Apply primer as
recommended by manufacturer.
1. Prime Coat:
a. DFT = 2-3 mils (50 to 75 microns).
b. Products: Ameron 5105, Carboline AD29, Tnemec P4-55, VyGuard

13R29, kem Kromik Universal, or equal.
b. Products: Ameron 5401HAS, Carboline GP62, Tnemec 2H, VyGuard

V20, Sherwin Williams Indusrial Enamel, or equal.
I. System 8 – Aluminum Metal Isolation: Use one coat of a high-build polyamide epoxy
paint.
09901-11
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Products: Tnemec P66, Ameron 385, Carboline 893, Tnemec P66, VyGuard
V75, Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 FC, or equal.
J. System 9 – Aluminum Silicone Resin: Use an aluminum silicone resin material

suitable for a service temperature of up to 1000 degrees F (538 degrees C). Coating
must comply with Federal Specification DOD-P-28.
1. Prime Coat and Finish Coat (2 or more):
a. DFT = 2-4 mils (50-100 microns)
b. Products: Tnemec 39-1061, Ameron 878, Carboline 4631, VyGuard

V437A1, Sherwin Williams Steel Master 9500, or equal
c. Total System DFT = 2-4 mils (50-100 microns)
K. System 10 – Zinc Rich Epoxy: Use a polyamide Epoxy resin material that contains at
least 76 percent zinc in the dried film.
1. Prime Coat and Finish Coat (2 or more):
a. DFT = 3-5 mils (75-125 microns)
b. Products: Ameron 68HS, Carboline 858, VyGuard 13F4, Sherwin

Williams Zinc Clad III, or equal
c. Total System DFT = 3-5 mils (75-125 microns)
2.03 SUBMERGED AND SEVERE SERVICE COATING SYSTEMS
A. Material Sources: The manufacturers listed in this paragraph are materials, which
satisfy the material descriptions of this paragraph and have a documented successful
record for long- term submerged or sever service conditions. Proposed substitute
products will be considered as indicated under paragraphs 2.01.5.
B. System 100 – Amine-Cured Epoxy: Use a high-build amine-cured epoxy with a solids
content of at least 80 percent by volume. Use a coating suitable for long-term
immersion in potable water. For potable water service, select a coating material listed
in the NSF 61 Standard.
1. Prime Coat and Finish Coats (3 or more):
a. DFT = 16-19 mils (400 to 475 microns).
b. Products: Ameron Amercoat 395, Carboline 891, Tnemec 139,

Sherwin Williams Tank Clad H.S,or equal.
09901-12
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. For coating of valves and non-submerged equipment, DFT = 12-14 mils (300-
350 microns).
C. System 101 – Polyamide Cured Epoxy: Use a high-build, polyamide epoxy resin with
a solids content of at least 56 percent by volume. Use a coating suitable for long-term
immersion in potable water. For potable water service, select a coating material listed
under NSF 61 Standard.
1. Prime Coat and Finish Coats (3 or more):
b. Products: Tnemec 20, VyGuard 78PR, Sherwin Williams Macropoxy

646 NSF,or equal.
D. System 102 – Coal Tar Epoxy: Use a high-build, 2-component amine or polyamide-
cured coal tar epoxy with a solids content of at least 68 percent by volume. Use a
coating suitable for long-term immersion in wastewater or for coating of buried
surfaces. Coating must conform to Mil Spec DOD-P-23236, or to SSPC Paint 16.
Prime coats are for use as a shop primer only. Omit prime coat when both surface
preparation and coating are performed in the field.
1. Prime Coat: DFT = 1.5-2.5 mils (38-65 microns).
a. Products: Ameron Amercoat 83HS, Tnemec P66, VyGuard V75,

Sherwin Williams Copoxy Primer, or equal.
b. Products: Ameron 78HB, Carbomastic 14, Tnemec 46H413, VyGuard

64, Sherwin Williams Targuard Coal Tar Epoxy,or equal.
c. Total System DFT = 15.5-20.5 mils (387-513 microns).
E. System 103 – Fusion Bonded Epoxy: Use a 100 percent powder epoxy applied in
accordance with ANSI/AWWA C213, except prepare surface as specified in the
coating system schedule in this Section. Apply the coating using the fluidized bed
process.
1. Liquid Epoxy: For field repairs, use a 100 percent solids liquid epoxy as
recommended by the powder epoxy manufacturer to provide a DFT of 15-17
mils (375-425 microns).
2. Powder Coating:
09901-13
CITY OF HOUSTON
b. Products: Scotchkote 134 or 206N, Napgard 7-0008 or 7-2500, or

equal.
c. Total System DFT = 15-17 mils (375-425 microns).
d. For coating of valves, DFT =11-12 mils (275-300 microns).
F. System 104 – Chemical Resistant Sheet Lining:
1. Materials: Use natural rubber, chlorobutyl rubber, ethylene propylene diene

monomer (EPDM) rubber, chloroprene polymer (neoprene) rubber, or
chlorosulfonated polyethylene (Hypalon) rubber sheet lining material. Submit
shop drawings containing technical information that confirms the suitability of
the lining material system for long-term immersion in each chemical to be
stored. Service temperatures are expected to be up to 1500 F (650 C).
a. Neoprene Sheet Lining Material: Use a synthetic rubber formulated for

steam curing at atmospheric pressure. Provide a minimum lining
thickness of 3/16 inch. Supply B.F. Goodrich compound 59688, or
equal.
b. Chlorobutyl Sheet Lining Material: Use a synthetic rubber formulated

for steam curing at atmospheric pressure. Supply B.F. Goodrich
compound 60924, or equal.
c. Natural Rubber (soft) Sheet Lining Material: Use a soft natural rubber
formulated for steam curing at atmospheric pressure. Provide a
minimum lining thickness of 3/16 inch. Supply B.F. Goodrich
compound 83160, or equal.
d. Natural Rubber (hard) Sheet Lining Material: Use a hard, natural

rubber resistant to oxidizing agents and formulated for autoclave
curing. Provide a minimum lining thickness of 3/16 inch. Supply B.F.
Goodrich compound 8631, or equal.
e. EPDM Sheet Lining Material: Use synthetic rubber suitable for use as
a lining for 50 percent sulphuric acid solution and formulated for
autoclave or steam curing under pressure.
f. Hypalon Sheet Lining Material: Use synthetic rubber suitable for use
as a lining for 50 percent sulfuric acid solution.
2. Primers: Use primers, adhesives, activators, accelerators, and other necessary

materials as recommended by the sheet material manufacturer.
09901-14
CITY OF HOUSTON
3. Metal Surface Preparation: Prior to abrasive blast cleaning, prepare the base
metal as required by the sheet lining material manufacturer’s installation
instructions. If the instructions differ from these specifications, provide the
highest degree of cleaning and surface preparation required by either
instructions or specifications. Perform abrasive blast cleaning in accordance
with this section.
4. Installation: Install lining materials in accordance with the material

manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Line interior surfaces
including piping, vents, fittings, flange faces, manhole covers, and blind
flanges.
5. Testing: Test the lining system for holidays in accordance with this Section
before and after curing.
6. Curing: Cure the lining system by steam using the time and temperature as
required by the material manufacturer.
G. System 105 – Vinyl Ester: Use vinyl ester resin coating material with an inert flake
pigment that is suitable for immersion service in 30 percent hydrochloric acid and 30
percent sulfuric acid solutions.
1. Coating (2 or more coats):
b. Products: Plasite 4100, Sherwin Williams Magnalux 304 FF,or equal.
c. Prime Coat: As recommended by the material manufacturer.
H. System 106 – 100% Solids Epoxy: Use a solventless epoxy resin coating suitable for
severe service areas subject to splash, spillage or intermittent immersion in wide
range of industrial chemicals and wastewater. Coating to resist normal abrasion from
rolling vehicles.
1. Coating (2 or more coats):
b. Products: Ameron, Carboline, Sherwin CorCote HCR.
c. Prime Coat: As recommended by manufacturer.
I. System 107 – 100% solids Epoxy Sealer: Use a clear, unpigmented solventless epoxy
suitable for application over marginal surfaces, including damp surfaces, tight rust
and tight old coatings. Coating serves as primer for alkyd, acrylic, epoxy, and
polyurethane finish coats.
1. Coating (1 coat only):
09901-15
CITY OF HOUSTON
b. Products: ICI/Devoe 167 PrePrime, Carboline Rust Bond, Sherwin

Williams 920 PrePrime, or equal.
J. System 108 - 100% Solids, Isocyanate-Free, Solvent-Free, High Build Epoxy Coating
for Wastewater applications only, to be spray applied in one or more coats to all
interior surfaces of exposed concrete above the spring line or as otherwise detailed.
1. Product Characteristics:
a. Product: 100% solids, solvent-free high-build epoxy system
b. Product Type: amine cured epoxy
c. VOC Content (ASTM D3960): 0%
d. Compressive Strength, psi (ASTM D695): 10,500 (minimum)
e. Tensile Strength, psi (ASTM D638): 4,500 (minimum)
f. Flexural Strength, psi (ASTM D790): 7,500 (minimum)
g. Adhesion to Concrete, psi/mode of failure (ASTM D7234): 350

psi (minimum)/with substrate (concrete) failure
h. Chemical Resistance, pH>0.5 (ASTM G20): 60% Sulfuric Acid
2. In all cases the coating product(s) shall be applied to a minimum dry film
thickness of 80 mils to surface profiles of CSP-4 to CSP-5 or 125 mils
minimum DFT to surface profiles of CSP-6 or greater.
3. When the wall of the liner is to be structurally designed to withstand the

hydraulic load generated by the groundwater table the long-term (50yr) value
of the flexural modulus of elasticity will be utilized to calculate the thickness
of the structural line. The initial flexural modulus of elasticity (short term) of
the submitted resin material will be utilized with the long-term deformation
percentage as determined by ASTM D2990 in the design equation outlined in
ASTM 1216-09, Appendix XI. The value of the long-term flexural modulus of
the proposed product will be certified by an independent, certified, third party
testing lab, independent of the Manufacturer. [The definition of long-term
value will be identified as initial flexural modulus of elasticity less the
reduction in value caused by Creep over a fifty (50) year minimum period and
verified by third party testing (ASTM D2990).]
4. Subsequent top-coating or additional coats of the coating product(s) shall

occur within the product recoat window or 24 hours whichever is less.
Additional surface preparation procedures will be required if this recoat
window is exceeded.
09901-16
CITY OF HOUSTON
K. System 109 - 100% Solids, Solvent-Free, Multi-Layered Polymer Lining System

(Polyurea and Polyurethane) for Wastewater applications only, to be spray applied in
three layers to all interior surfaces of exposed concrete above the spring line or as
otherwise detailed.
a. Product: 100% solids, solvent-free, polyuria (two layers) and

polyurethane (one layer) system
b. Product Type: Self-curing polymer lining
d. Tensile Strength, psi (ASTM D412): 2,400 (minimum)
e. Elongation % (ASTM D412): 200 (minimum)
f. Tear Strength, pli (ASTM D624): 300 (minimum)
g. Shore D Hardness, (ASTM 2240): 45 (minimum)
h. Adhesion to Concrete, psi/mode of failure (ASTM D7234): 350 psi

(minimum)/with substrate (concrete) failure
i. Chemical Resistance, pH>0.5 (ASTM G20): 30% Sulfuric Acid
2. In all cases the coating product(s) shall be applied to a minimum thickness of

500 mils total.
3. For resistance to ground water head pressure the coating shall be a minimum
of 500 mils thick for depths up to 32 feet. For depths greater than 32 feet
consult the coating manufacturer for recommendations.
4. Subsequent top-coating or additional coats of the coating product(s) shall

occur within the product recoat window or 24 hours whichever is less.
Additional surface preparation procedures will be required if this recoat
window is exceeded.
L. System 110 – 100% Solids, High Build Polyurethane Coating for Wastewater
applications, to be spray applied in one or more coats to all interior surfaces of
exposed concrete above the spring line or as otherwise detailed.
a. Product: 100% solids, high-build polyurethane system
b. Product Type: Catalyzed, two component, polyurethane
09901-17
CITY OF HOUSTON
d. Compressive Strength, psi (ASTM D695): 18,000 (minimum)
e. Tensile Strength, psi (ASTM D638): 7,450 (minimum)
f. Flexural Strength, psi (ASTM D790): 14,000 (minimum)
g. Flexural Modulus, psi (ASTM D790): 735,000 (minimum)
h. Adhesion to Concrete, psi/mode of failure (ASTM D7234): 200 psi

(minimum) with substrate (concrete) failure
i. Chemical Resistance, pH 0.5 (ASTM G20): 20% Sulfuric Acid
2. In all cases the coating product(s) shall be applied to a minimum dry film
thickness of 80 mils to surface profiles of CSP-4 to CSP-5 or 125 mils
minimum DFT or surface profiles of CSP-6 or greater.
3. When the wall of the resin based liner is to be structurally designed to

withstand the hydraulic load generated by the groundwater table the long-term
(50yr) value of the flexural modulus of elasticity will be utilized to calculate
the thickness of the structural line. The initial flexural modulus of elasticity
(short term) of the submitted resin material will be utilized with the long-term
deformation percentage as determined by ASTM D2990 in the design
equation outlined in ASTM 1216-09, Appendix XI. The value of the long-
term flexural modulus of the proposed product will be certified by an
independent, certified, third party testing lab, independent of the
Manufacturer. [The definition of long-term value will be identified as initial
flexural modulus of elasticity less the reduction in value caused by Creep over
a fifty (50) year minimum period and verified by third party testing (ASTM
D2990).]
4. Polyurethane product characteristics allow high build thicknesses to be

achieved in one application without additional surface preparation. However,
if installation requires applications outside of the recoat window, additional
surface preparation may be necessary by using a primer or abrading the
previously coating surface area.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES
A. Require the protective coating manufacturer to furnish a qualified technical

representative to visit the project site for technical support as may be necessary to
resolve field problems attributable to or associated with manufacturer’s products.
B. For submerged and severe service coating systems, require the paint manufacturer to
furnish the following services:
09901-18
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Provide at least 6 hours of on-site instruction on the proper surface

preparation, use, mixing, application, and curing of the coating systems.
2. Observe the start of surface preparation, mixing, and application and curing of
the coating systems.
3. Provide the services of a NACE Certified Coating Inspector at all times during
the surface preparation, mixing, application, curing and testing of all coatings
applied in submerged or acid spill areas.
3.02 WORKMANSHIP
A. Use skilled craftsmen and experienced supervision. For all jobs involving lead based
paint removal or repair, require the presence of a certified Competent Person, Lead
per OSHA requirements.
B. Apply coating to produce an even film of uniform thickness. Give special attention to
edges, corners, crevices, and joints. Ensure thorough cleaning and an adequate
thickness of coating material. Apply coatings to produce finished surfaces free from
runs, drips, ridges, waves, laps, brush marks, and variations in color, texture and
finish. Effect complete hiding so that the addition of another coat would not increase
the hiding. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and
similar areas receive a film thickness equivalent to adjacent areas. Apply a brushed
stripe coat to all edges and welds after priming submerged or severe service areas.
C. Remove, mask or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switch plates,

machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, name plates on machinery, and other
surfaces not to be painted. Provide drop cloths to prevent coating materials from
falling on or marring adjacent surfaces. Protect the working parts of mechanical and
electrical equipment from damage during surface preparation and coating operations.
Mask openings in motors to prevent entry of coating or other materials.
D. Do not damage adjacent work during blast cleaning operations. Perform spray
painting under carefully controlled conditions. Promptly repair any damage to
adjacent work or adjoining property occurring from blast cleaning or coating
operations.
E. Coordinate cleaning and coating so that dust and other contaminants from the
cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly-coated surfaces.
3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION STANDARDS
A. The following referenced surface preparation standards of the Society for Protective
Coatings (SSPC) form a part of this Specification:
1. Solvent Cleaning (SSPC-SP1): Removal of oil, grease, soil, drawing and

cutting compounds, and other soluble contaminants from steel surfaces by
cleaning with solvent, vapor degreasing, emulsion or alkaline cleaners, or
steam.
09901-19
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Hand Tool Cleaning (SSPC-SP2): Removal of all loose rust, loose mill scale,
loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter by hand chipping,
scraping, sanding, and wire brushing.
3. Power Tool Cleaning (SSPC-SP3): Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale,
loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter, by rotary or impact
power tools, power wire brushing, or power abrading.
4. White Metal Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP5/NACE 1): Removal of all visible oil,
grease, soil, dust, dirt, mill scale, rust, coating, oxides, corrosion products, and
other foreign matter by blast cleaning.
5. Commercial Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP6/NACE 3): Removal of all visible oil,

grease, dust, dirt, mill scale, rust, coating, oxides, corrosion products, and
other foreign matter, except limit random staining to no more than 33 percent
of each unit area of surface.
6. Brush-Off Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP7/NACE 4): Removal of all visible oil,

grease, dirt, dust, loose mill scale, loose rust, and loose coating, all of which
are considered tightly adherent if they cannot be removed by lifting with a
dull putty knife.
7. Near-white Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP10/NACE 2): Removal of all visible oil,

grease, dirt, mill scale, rust, coating, oxides, corrosion products, and other
foreign matter, except limit random staining to no more than 5 percent of each
unit area of surface.
3.04 METAL SURFACE PREPARATION (UNGALVANIZED)
A. Provide the minimum abrasive-blasted surface preparation as indicated in the coating

system schedules at the end of this Section. Where there is a conflict between these
specifications and the coatings manufacturer’s printed recommendations for the
intended service, the higher degree of cleaning applies.
B. Perform metal surface preparation in conformance with the current SSPC/NACE

Standards and this Section. Blast cleaned surfaces must match standard samples in
SSPC-VIZ 1.
C. Remove oil, grease, welding fluxes, and other surface contaminants prior to blast
cleaning using solving cleaning as per SSPC-SP1.
D. Round or chamfer sharp edges. Grind to smooth finish burrs, surface defects, and
weld splatter prior to blast cleaning.
09901-20
CITY OF HOUSTON
E. Select the type and size of abrasive to produce a surface profile that meets the coating
manufacturer’s recommendation for the particular coating and service conditions. As
abrasives for submerged and severe service coating systems use clean, hard, sharp
cutting crushed slag. Do not use automated blasting systems and metal shot or grit for
surfaces that will be in submerged service, even if subsequent abrasive blasting is
planned with hard, sharp-cutting slag.
F. Do not reuse abrasive except when an automated blasting system is used for surfaces
that will be in non-submerged service. For automated blasting systems, use clean, oil-
free abrasives. In the abrasive mix, use at least 50 percent steel grit. Replenish
abrasive mix with new shot/grit combination as necessary to maintain the anchor
profile within ½ mil (13 microns) of the specified profile.
G. Comply with the applicable federal, state, and local air pollution control regulations
for blast cleaning.
H. For air-blast cleaning, supply compressed air at adequate pressure from well-
maintained compressors equipped with oil and a moisture separator which delivers oil
and water-free air as checked with white blotter, white cloth, or plastic sheets at the
beginning of each blasting sequence.
I. Clean surfaces of dust and residual particles of the cleaning operation using dry air-
blast cleaning, vacuuming, or another approved method prior to painting. Vacuuming
must be the final cleaning method immediately prior to painting areas that will go into
submerged service.
J. In enclosed areas and other areas where dust may settle, vacuum the surface clean and
wipe it with a tack cloth.
K. Remove damaged or defective coating by the specified blast or power tool cleaning to
meet the clean surface requirements before recoating.
L. If the specified abrasive blast cleaning will damage adjacent work, the area to be
cleaned is less than 100 square feet, and the coated surface will not be in submerged
service, then SSPC-SP2 – Hand Tool Cleaning or SSPC-SP3 – Power Tool Cleaning,
may be used. If the coated area to be cleaned is less than 100 square feet, and will be
in submerged service, then SSPC-SP11 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal may be
used.
M. Completely remove shop-applied coatings of unknown composition before the

specified coatings are applied. Examine valves, castings, ductile or cast iron pipe, and
fabricated pipe or equipment for the presence of shop-applied temporary coatings.
Completely remove temporary coatings by solvent cleaning per SSPC-SP1 method
before starting abrasive blast cleaning. Alternate cleaning methods such as Baking
Soda Blasting or Sponge Jet Blasting may be used as appropriate.
N. Use the solvent cleaning method (SSPC-SP1) to clean shop-primed equipment in the
field before finish coats are applied.
09901-21
CITY OF HOUSTON
3.05 SURFACE PREPARATION FOR GALVANIZED FERROUS METAL
A. For galvanized ferrous metal, use the alkaline cleaning method per SSPC-SP1 to
remove oil, grease, and other contaminants detrimental to adhesion of protective
coatings. Alternate methods with biodegradable surfactant type cleaners followed by
fresh water washing may be used as appropriate.
B. Apply pretreatment coatings of surfaces in accordance with the printed

recommendations of the coating manufacturer.
3.06 SURFACE PREPARATION OF FERROUS SURFACES WITH EXISTING

COATINGS
A. Remove grease, oil, heavy chalk, dirt, or other contaminants by solvent or detergent
cleaning prior to abrasive blast cleaning. Determine the generic type of the existing
coatings by laboratory testing.
B. Provide the degree of cleaning specified in the coating system schedule for the entire
surface to be coated. If the degree of cleaning is not indicated in the schedule, remove
deteriorated coatings by abrasive blast cleaning to meet the requirements of SSPC-
SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning. Clean areas of tightly adhering coatings to meet the
requirements of SSPC-SP7 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning, with the remaining thickness of
pre-existing coating not to exceed 3 mils.
C. If coatings to be applied are not compatible with existing coatings, apply intermediate
coatings conforming to the paint manufacturer’s recommendation for the indicated
coating system or completely remove the existing coating prior to abrasive blast
cleaning. Make a small trial application for compatibility prior to painting large areas.
Allow the trial application to cure for 7 days at 50º F (10º C) or higher before
determining compatibility.
D. Completely remove coatings of unknown composition prior to application of new

coatings.
E. Where specified or where job site conditions do not permit dry-abrasive blasting for
industrial coating systems due to dust or air pollution considerations, water jetting or
wet- abrasive blasting may be used. In both methods, use inhibitors approved by the
manufacturer of the coating system, which will be applied over the cleaned area.
Begin the coating application as soon as the surface has dried, and before the
formation of any flash rusting. Perform water jetting with or without abrasive
injection, as appropriate, to achieve the specified degree of surface cleanliness. Do
not use water-jetting methods for submerged or severe-service coating systems,
unless specified for that area.
3.07 PLASTIC, FIBERGLASS, AND NONFERROUS METALS SURFACE

PREPARATION
09901-22
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Unless otherwise indicated, for equipment or parts of equipment which are not
submerged in service, shop-prime, and then finish-coat in the field after installation.
For methods, materials, application equipment, and other details of shop painting,
comply with this Section. If the shop primer requires topcoating within a specified
period of time, apply the finish coating in the shop and then touch-up the paint after
installation.
B. Perform surface preparation and coating work in the field for equipment, or parts and
surfaces of equipment which are submerged or inside an enclosed hydraulic structure
when in service, with the exception of pumps and valves.
C. For certain pieces of equipment, it may be undesirable or impractical to apply finish

coatings in the field. Such equipment may include engine generator sets, equipment
such as electrical control panels, switch gear or main control boards, submerged parts
of pumps, ferrous metal passages in valves, or other items where it is not possible to
obtain the required quality in the field. For such equipment, prime and finish-coat in
the shop and touch-up in the field after installation. Use the identical material for
touch-up that was used for shop painting. Require the manufacturer of each such
piece of equipment to certify as part of its shop drawings that the surface preparation
is in accordance with these specifications. Submit the coating material product data
sheet with the shop drawings for the equipment.
D. For certain small pieces of equipment, the manufacturer will have a standard coating
system, which is suitable for the intended service conditions. In such cases, the final
determination of suitability will be made during review of the shop drawing
submittals. Equipment of this type generally includes only indoor equipment such as
instruments, small compressors, and chemical metering pumps.
E. Protect shop-painted surfaces during shipment and handling. Protect surfaces with
padding or blocking. Lift equipment with canvas or nylon slings. Before being
topcoated, do not expose primed surfaces to the weather for more than 2 months or
less when recommended by the coating manufacturer.
F. Repair damage to shop-applied coatings in accordance with this Section and the
coating manufacturer’s printed instructions.
G. Make certain that the shop primers and field topcoats are compatible and meet the
requirements of this Section. Submit copies of applicable coating manufacturer’s
product data sheets with equipment shop drawings.
3.08 APPLICATION OF COATINGS
A. Apply protective coatings to steel substrates in accordance with SSPC-PA1 – Paint

Application Specification No. 1. Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting.
B. Inspect cleaned surfaces and each coat prior to succeeding coats. Schedule
inspections with the City Engineer in advance.
09901-23
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Paint blast-cleaned ferrous metal surfaces before rusting or other deterioration of the
surface occurs. Limit blast cleaning to only those surfaces that can be coated in the
same working day unless the area to be coated is protected by humidity control
equipment set to maintain humidity below 50 percent at all times.
D. Apply coatings in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and this Section,
whichever has the most stringent requirements.
E. Give special attention to edges, angles, weld seams, flanges, nuts and bolts, and other
places where insufficient film thickness is likely to occur. Use stripe painting by
brush, after application of the primer, for these areas.
F. Give special attention to materials, which will be joined so closely that proper surface
preparation and application are not possible. Coat such contact surface prior to
assembly or installation. Use only inorganic zinc primers on faying surfaces.
G. Apply finish coats, including touch-up and damage repair coats, in a manner which
will present uniform texture and color-matched appearance.
H. Do not apply coatings under the following conditions:
1. Temperature outside of the manufacturer’s recommended minimum and

maximum range.
2. Dust or smoke laden atmosphere.
3. Substrate or air temperature less than 5º F (3º C) above the due point.
4. Air temperature is expected to drop below 40ºF (14º C) or less than 5º F (3º C)
above the dew point within 8 hours after application of the coating.
5. Wind conditions in excess of 15 MPH or dust laden.
I. Determine the dew point by use of a sling psychrometer in conjunction with the U.S.
Department of Commerce, Weather Bureau psychometric tables.
J. For steel piping which will not be buried, have the surface abrasive blast cleaned and
primed before installation.
K. Apply finish coats after concrete, masonry, and equipment installation is complete
and the work areas are clean and dust free. Concrete must have cured for a minimum
of 28 days @ 75º F (24º C) unless an approved epoxy sealer has been applied to green
concrete within 12 hours of finishing the concrete.
3.09 CURING OF COATINGS
A. Maintain curing conditions in accordance with the recommendations of the coating

material manufacturer and this Section, whichever is the most stringent. Complete
curing before placing the coating systems into service.
09901-24
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. In the case of enclosed areas, forced air ventilation using heated air may be required
until the coatings have fully cured.
C. Forced air ventilation is required for the application and curing of coatings on the
interior surfaces of enclosed hydraulic structures. During application and curing
periods, continuously exhaust air from the lowest level of the structure using portable
ducting to force air into all compartments and around baffles. After interior coating
operations have been completed, provide a final curing period that meets the
minimum temperature and time requirements of the manufacturer of the coating
system being applied, while operating the forced air ventilation system continuously.
3.10 SHOP AND FIELD INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Give the City Engineer a minimum of 3 days advance notice of the start of any field
surface preparation work or coating application work, and a minimum of 7 days
advance notice of the start of any shop surface preparation work.
B. Perform surface preparation and coating applications in the presence of the City
Engineer, or City Engineer’s appointed NACE certified coating inspector, unless the
City Engineer has granted prior approval to perform the work in their absence.
C. Inspection by the City Engineer or the NACE certified inspector, or the waiver of
inspection of any particular portion of the work, does not relieve the Contractor of the
Contractor’s responsibility to perform the Work in accordance with these
Specifications.
D. Erect and move scaffolding where requested by the City Engineer to facilitate
inspection. Provide additional illumination to light areas to be inspected. Remove or
grind smooth all scaffolding clips welded to the structure prior to surface preparation
of the structure.
E. Until final acceptance of the coatings, furnish inspection devices in good working
condition for the detection of holidays and measurement of dry-film thickness (DFT)
of protective coatings. Make DFT gauges available for the City Engineer’s use
throughout the coating process until final acceptance of the coatings. Provide the
services of a NACE certified coating inspector for all holiday detection work until the
final acceptance of the coatings. Operate holiday inspection devices in the presence of
the City Engineer.
F. Perform holiday tests on coated ferrous surfaces inside a steel reservoir, other
surfaces that will be submerged in water or other liquids, or surfaces which are
enclosed in a vapor space in such structures. Perform holiday tests on surfaces coated
with any of the submerged and severe service coating systems. Mark and repair or
recoat areas which contain holidays in accordance with the coating manufacturer’s
printed instructions and then retest. DO NOT PERFORM HOLIDAY TESTING
AFTER STRUCTURE HAS BEEN SUBMERGED.
09901-25
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Coatings with Thickness Exceeding 20 mils (500 microns): For surfaces

having a total DFT exceeding 20 mils (500 microns); use a pulse-type holiday
Detector such as Elcometer 136, or equal. Adjust and operate in accordance
with NACE RP0188.
2. Coatings with Thickness of 20 mils (500 microns) or Less: For surfaces

having a total DFT of 20 mils or less, use Elcometer 269 non-destructive type
holiday detector, or equal. Instrument must operate at less than 75 volts. For
thicknesses between 10 and 20 mils (250 and 500 microns), a non-sudsing
type wetting agent such as Kodak Photo-Flo, or equal, may be added to the
water prior to wetting the detector sponge. For submerged or severe service
areas, the residue of the wetting agent must be removed with clean, fresh
water prior to application of any additional coats.
G. On ferrous metals, measure the DFT in accordance with SSPC-PA2 Measurement of

Dry Film Thickness with magnetic gauges using either a pull-off type gauge
(Elcometer 211) or constant pressure gauge (Elcometer 345F), or equal. Test each
coat for the correct thickness. Calibrate the DFT gauge at the beginning of each
workday or shift in accordance with the directions of the manufacturer of the gauge.
Do not take measurements until at least 8 hours after coating application. On non-
ferrous metals, measure the DFT with positive pressure eddy current gages
(Elcometer 345N) or equal.
H. Evaluation of blast-cleaned surface preparation work will be based upon comparison

with photographic samples contained in SSPC-VIZ 1.
I. Evaluation of surface profile will be based upon the use of TesTex pressure sensitive
tapes.
3.11 PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING
A. Painting and Color Coding:
1. Use colors and signs to identify all piping which is exposed to view in
buildings or tunnels, above suspended ceilings or exposed above grade, and
all outdoor piping. Identify each pipe by a color complying with the following
schedule of colors and by applied markers.
2. Coat pipes with the number of coats and type of material specified. Base coats
for pipeline painting may be a neutral color. Make each succeeding base coat
a contrasting color. For the final coat, comply with the pipe identifying color
schedule.
3. Apply pipe identification markers to exposed piping, except for the following
pipe at wastewater lift stations:
a. Discharge piping for wastewater pumps.
b. Vent piping.
09901-26
CITY OF HOUSTON
c. Any piping inside wet wells.
B. Pipe Identification Markers:
1. Identify all pipes with applied signs or markers at 15-foot centers, at both
sides of penetrated walls or floors, adjacent to valves, at connected equipment,
at branch fittings, and in congested pipe layouts.
a. Apply markers consisting of signs with legends as follows:
OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF LENGTH OF SIZE OF

PIPE OR COVERING COLOR FIELD LETTERS
(INCHES) (INCHES) (INCHES)
3/4 to 1- 1/4 8 1/2
1- 1/2 to 2- 3/8 8 3/4
2- 1/2 to 5- 7/8 12 1- 1/4
6 to 7- 7/8 12 1- 1/4
8 to 10 24 2- 1/2
Over 10 32 3- 1/2
b. As pipe markers, use semi-rigid outdoor grade acrylic plastic, Seton

Name Plate Corp., SetMark, or equal. Use Type SNA for outside
diameters 3/4 through 5- 7/8 inches and Type STR for 6-inch outside
diameter or larger. For pipes less than 3/4-inch in diameter, use
applied marker of brass identification tags 1-1/2 inches square with
depressed letters 1/4-inch high, black-filled. Apply tightly to pipeline
with metal or plastic straps.
C. Pipe Identification Color Schedule:
1. For wastewater facilities refer to current version of TCEQ chapter 217. For
piping systems not found in TCEQ chapter 217, use the colors listed in the
following pipe identification color schedule for facilities:
09901-27
CITY OF HOUSTON
PIPE IDENTIFICATION COLOR SCHEDULE

PIPING SYSTEM COLOR FED. STD. NO.
Fire Mains Red 11105
Oxygen Orange 12246
Sodium Hypochlorite Yellow 13655
Raw Polymer Pink 11156
Diluted Polymer Purple 17142
Natural Gas Yellow 13655
Heating Water Pink 11158
Domestic Hot Light Pink 11668
Potable Water Blue 15102
Non-Potable Water White 17875
Instrument Air Green 14187
Plant Air Dark Green 14110
Raw Sewage Gray 16473
Grit Dark Gray 16187
Cyclone Return Gray 16473
Classifier Return Gray 16473
Heavy Solids Dark Brown 10080
Return Sludge Brown 10091
Waste Sludge Yellow-Brown 10266
Scum Light Brown 10334
Chilled Water Supply (CWS) Blue-Green 14329
Chilled Water Return (CWR) Blue-Green 14325
Condensing Water Supply (Cond-WS) Light Green 14533
Condensing Water Return (Cond-WR) Light Green 14533
Deionized Water (DW) Light Blue 15526
Vacuum (Vac) White 17875
Vent Light Gray 16492
2. For pipe identification colors not listed above, follow American National
Standard (ANSI A13.1-81) Color Schedule:
a. Materials inherently hazardous, flammable or explosive; chemically

active or toxic; extreme temperature or pressure; radioactive: Yellow
Field with Black Letters.
b. Material of inherently low hazard – liquid or liquid admixture: Green

Field with White Letters; gas or gaseous admixture: Blue Field with
White Letters.
c. Fire quenching materials, water, foam, carbon dioxide, Halon, etc.:

Red Field with White Letters.
3.12 COATING SYSTEM SCHEDULES – FERROUS METALS
A. Coating System Schedule, Ferrous Metal – Not Galvanized
09901-28
CITY OF HOUSTON
SURFACE SYSTEM NO./

SCHEDULE NO. AND APPLICATION
PREPARATION DESCRIPTION
FM-1: Surfaces indoors and outdoors, Near White Metal (2)
exposed or covered, except those listed blast cleaning SSPC- Inorganic zinc/epoxy/
below. SP10/NACE 2 polyurethane
FM-2: Surfaces in chlorination room, Near White Metal (100)
chlorine storage room, sodium hypochlorite blast cleaning SSPC- Amine-cured epoxy
storage room SP10/NACE 2
FM-3: Surfaces of pumps and equipment and White Metal Blast (100)
other ferrous surfaces submerged or Cleaning SSPC-SP5/ Amine-cured epoxy
intermittently submerged in potable water, NACE 1
utility water, and wastewater; including
surfaces lower than 2 feet above high-water
level in hydraulic structures, and surfaces
inside enclosed hydraulic structures, pump
state wet wells, and vents
(excluding shop-coated valves, couplings,
and pumps).
FM-4: Surfaces exposed to high temperature Near White Metal (3)
between 1500 and 6000 F (650 and 3150 C). blast cleaning SSPC- Inorganic Zinc, water-
SP10/NACE 2 based
FM-5: Surfaces exposed to high temperature Near White Metal (9)
between 6000 and 10000 F. blast cleaning SSPC- Aluminum silicon resin
SP10/NACE 2
FM-6: Where indicated, ferrous surfaces in White Metal Blast (101)
water passages of valves 4-inch size and Cleaning SSPC-SP5/ Polyamide-cured epoxy
larger, exterior surfaces of submerged NACE 1
valves.
FM-7: Where indicated, ferrous surfaces in White Metal Blast (101)
water passages of pumps which have Cleaning SSPC-SP5/ Polyamide-cured epoxy
discharge size of 4 inches or larger; exterior, NACE 1
submerged surfaces
of pumps.
FM-8: Ferrous surfaces of sleeve couplings. White Metal Blast (103)
Cleaning SSPC-SP5/ Fusion-bonded epoxy
NACE 1
FM-9: Ferrous surfaces of sluice gates, flap White Metal Blast (101)
gates, and shear gates, including wall Cleaning SSPC-SP5/ Polyamide-cured epoxy
thimbles. NACE 1
FM-10: Structural steel, miscellaneous metal Commercial Blast (10)
work, and supports for prefabricated metal Cleaning (SSPC- Zinc Rich Epoxy
buildings, not exposed to view in finished SP6/NACE 3
building.
FM-12: Ferrous metal exposed to view, Near White Metal (2)
inside and outside of buildings. blast cleaning SSPC- Inorganic zinc/
SP10/NACE 2 epoxy/polyurethane
09901-29
CITY OF HOUSTON
SURFACE SYSTEM NO./

SCHEDULE NO. AND APPLICATION
PREPARATION DESCRIPTION
FM-13: Surfaces of indoor equipment not Commercial Blast (5)
submerged. Cleaning SSPC-SP6/ Epoxy, equipment
NACE 3
FM14: Exterior (exposed) surfaces shop- Light abrasive blast to (6)
coated roughen surface Aliphatic polyurethane
with fusion-bonded epoxy.
B. Coating System Schedule, Ferrous Metal – Galvanized: Apply pretreatment coatings,

barrier coatings, or washes as recommended by the coating manufacturer.
SCHEDULE NO. AND APPLICATION SURFACE SYSTEM NO./

PREPARATION DESCRIPTON
FMG-1: Exposed surfaces indoors and Alkaline cleaning (1) or (4) Aliphatic
outdoors, except those listed below. SSPC-SP1 Polyurethane,
or Acrylic
FMG-2: Surfaces in chlorination room, Alkaline Cleaning (100)
chlorine storage room, and sodium SSPC-SP1 Amine-cured epoxy
hypochlorite storage room.
FMG-3: Surfaces submerged in water or Alkaline cleaning (100)
wastewater, including surfaces lower than 2SSPC-SP1 followed by Amine-cured epoxy
feet above high-water level and surfaces Brush-Off blast
inside hydraulic structures and vents cleaning SSPC-SP7/
NACE 4
FMG-4: Surface exposed to view, inside and Alkaline Cleaning (1) or (4) Aliphatic
outside of building. SSPC-SP1 polyurethane, or Acrylic
C. Coating System Schedule, Interior Surface of Welded Steel Tanks: Coat interior
surfaces, including tank nozzles, manholes, nozzle necks, and flange faces. For steel
tank exterior coating systems, see paragraph 3.15.1, Coating System Schedule,
Ferrous Metal – Not Galvanized.
09901-30
CITY OF HOUSTON
PRODUCT STORED SURFACE PREPARATION SYSTEM NO. /DESCRIPTION

Zinc Orthophosphate White metal blast cleaning (104)
SSPC-SP5/NACE1 Natural rubber (soft) or neoprene
Liquid Alum White metal blast cleaning (104)
Polymer White metal blast cleaning (104)
Sodium Bisulfite White metal blast cleaning (104)
Ferric Chloride White metal blast cleaning (104)
SSPC-SP5/NACE1 Natural rubber (hard)
Aqueous Ammonia White metal blast cleaning (104)
SSPC-SP5/NACE1 Chlorobutyl rubber
Caustic Soda Commercial Blast Cleaning No Coating
SSPC-SP6/NACE 3
Sodium Hypochlorite White metal blast cleaning (104)
SSPC-SP5/NACE1 Chlorobutyl Rubber
Sulfuric Acid (max. 45% White metal blast cleaning (107)
concentration) SSPC-SP5/NACE1 Hypalon
Sulfuric Acid (above 40% White metal blast cleaning (107)
concentration) SSPC-SP5/NACE1 Viton
Hydrofluosilicic Acid White metal blast cleaning (107)
SSPC-SP5/NACE1 Chlorobutyl Rubber
Water, Potable Water, Utility White metal blast cleaning (100)
Water SSPC-SP5/NACE1 Amine-Cured Epoxy
3.13 COATING SYSTEM SCHEDULES, NONFERROUS METAL, PLASTIC,

FIBERGLASS
A. Where isolated non-ferrous parts are associated with equipment or piping, use the
coating system for the adjacent connected surfaces. Do not coat handrails, gratings,
frames, or hatches. Use primers recommended by coating manufacturer.
09901-31
CITY OF HOUSTON
SCHEDULE NO. AND SURFACE PREPARATION SYSTEM NO./

APPLICATIONS DESCRIPTION
NFM-1: Exposed surfaces, Solvent cleaned SSPC-SP1 (1)
indoors and outdoors, except Aliphatic Polyurethane
those listed
below.
NFM-2: Chlorination room, Solvent cleaned SSPC-SP1 (100)
chlorine storage room, sodium Amine-Cured Epoxy
hypochlorite storage room.
NFM-3: Aluminum surfaces in Solvent cleaned SSPC-SP1 (8)
contact with concrete, or with any Aluminum Metal Isolation
other metal except galvanized
ferrous metal.
NFM-4: Polyvinyl chloride Solvent cleaned SSPC-SP1 (4)
plastic, indoors and outdoors, not Acrylic
submerged.
NFM-5: Fiberglass surfaces. Per paragraph 3.09, Plastic, (6)
Fiberglass, and Non-Ferrous Aliphatic Polyurethane
Metals Surface Preparation Fiberglass
END OF SECTION
09901-32
CITY OF HOUSTON PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR POTABLE WATER STORAGE TANKS
SECTION 09971
PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS FOR POTABLE WATER STORAGE TANKS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Surface preparation and application of paints and/or protective coating materials in a

safe manner with proper handling and removal and disposal of all waste materials.
A. Document 00700 – General Conditions
C. Section 01351 – Environmental Safety and Worker Protection
D. Section 02136 – Waste Material Handling, Testing and Disposal
A. There is no separate measurement and payment for work performed under this
Specification Section. Include the cost for this work in the contract bid price for work
A. American Society for Testing of Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM A 123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)

Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
2. ASTM A 153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and
Steel Hardware.
3. ASTM A 385 - Standard Practice for Providing High-Quality Zinc Coatings

(Hot-Dip)
4. ASTM E 376 - Standard Practice for Measuring Coating Thickness by

Magnetic-Field or Eddy Current (Electromagnetic) Testing Methods.
5. ASTM D 4285 - Standard Test Method for Indicating Oil or Water in

Compressed Air.
6. ASTM D 4940 - Standard Test Method for Conductimetric Analysis of Water

Soluble Ionic Contamination of Blast Cleaning Abrasives.
09971-1
7. ASTM D 4417 - Standard Test Methods for Field Measurement of Surface

Profile of Blast Cleaned Steel.
B. NACE International "Book of Standards"
1. Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel

Surfaces Using Replica Tape: RP0287-91
2. Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Protective Coatings: RP0188-90
3. Visual Standard for Surfaces of New Steel Centrifugally Blast Cleaned with
Steel Grit and Shot TM0175-75
C. NACE International Publication 6A192, "Dehumidification Equipment in Lining

Application"
D. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC), "Steel Structures Painting Manual, Vol. 1,
Good Painting Practice"
E. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC), "Steel Structures Painting Manual, Vol. 2,
Systems and Specification"
1. Solvent Cleaning: SSPC-SP-1-82
2. Hand Tool Cleaning: SSPC-SP-2-95
3. Power Tool Cleaning: SSPC-SP-3-95
4. Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal: SSPC-SP-11-95
5. White Metal Blast Cleaning: SSPC-SP-5/NACE 1-94
6. Commercial Blast Cleaning: SSPC-SP-6/NACE 3-94
7. Brush-Off Blast Cleaning: SSPC-SP-7/NACE 4-94
8. Near-White Blast Cleaning: SSPC-SP-10/NACE 2-94
9. Mineral and Slag Abrasives: SSPC-AB 1-91
10. Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel: SSPC-Guide to Vis 1-89
11. Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gages: SSPC-PA 2
F. NSF International Standard 61 - Drinking Water System Components.
G. If there is a conflict between cited reference standards and this specification, this
specification prevails unless otherwise indicated in the procurement documents.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
09971-2
A. Submittals for materials and/or systems proposed for use on this project must
conform to requirements included in Section 01330 and include, but not be limited to,
those items listedfor each product/system below. Provide submittals to the Engineer
for review.
B. Paint and Protective Coatings:
1. Manufacturer Technical Data Sheets for all paints, coatings, solvents,

detergents and degreasers proposed.
2. Manufacturer Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all paints, coating and
thinners proposed.
3. Color name and/or number with color chart for each specific coating product.
Exterior topcoat color shall be City of Houston Barr Blue.
4. Manufacturer’s statement of conformance with ANSI/NSF 61 (NSF

International) requirements for use on potable water tank interior surfaces.
5. Manufacturer's specific ventilation requirements for products used on interior

surfaces. Provide ventilation requirements to ensure adequate evacuation of
solvents to prevent solvent entrapment, worker exposure to solvents above the
OSHAPEL, and timely coating system cure.
C. Abrasive Blast Products
1. Use abrasive blast products which conform to the Society for Protective
Coatings (SSPC) Abrasive Specification No. 1. "Mineral and Slag Abrasives",
except that copper slag is not permitted. Abrasive blast product submittals to
include, but not be limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturer's certification or laboratory analysis that the product proposed

contains less than 1% free crystalline silica.
3. Laboratory analysis of blast material presenting results of blast material

testing as required in SSPC-AB 1, Table 1 requirements for Chemical and
Physical Properties of Abrasives, except that the conductivity test for water
soluble contaminants in accordance with ASTM D-4940 shall not exceed 500
microsiemens (micromhos).
4. Material Safety Data Sheets.
5. Composition, mesh size, and bulk density.
6. Recommended application nozzle, air requirements, and pressure.
D. Containment System
09971-3
1. Include a sample or samples of containment materials including screens,

tarpaulins, sheets, films and ground covers. Include manufacturer technical
data sheets for the proposed containment system. In addition, include the
following:
2. Outrigger/containment structural support system layout and details.
a. For ground storage tanks, submit proposed arrangement of scaffolds

and/or A-frames to support containment materials. Do not support
containment from existing tank handrails or ladders. The scaffolding
must be designed to support the weight of the containment materials
and provide a safe working environment for workers.
b. For elevated storage tanks, submit proposed layout of outrigger

system, containment hoisting system, details of proposed method of
connection to tank shell, list of structural members including, but not
limited to, size of member, maximum allowable wind velocity before
system must be lowered to prevent structural damage to the system
and/or tank, method of determining wind velocity and proposed
location of wind velocity measuring device. The outrigger system
layout must be reviewed and sealed by a licensed Professional
Engineer registered in the State of Texas.
3. Manufacturer’s technical data sheets for the proposed containment system.
4. Manufacturer's certification that proposed containment materials are fire

resistant.
5. Provide a minimum shade factor for proposed containment materials of 95%,

except for a minimum shade factor of containment materials used with
chemical stripping agents of 85%.
E. Chemical Stripping Agents - For Rehabilitation of an Existing Tank
1. Manufacturer's Technical Data Sheet for the materials proposed.
2. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
3. Proposed method of application.
4. Waste material containment and retrieval system.
F. Dehumidification Equipment
1. Manufacturer and Supplier
2. Support Equipment (i.e. generator)
3. Equipment capacity, sized per NACE Publication 6A192
09971-4
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 COATINGS
A. Painting and Coatings
1. The following paint/coating manufacturers are known to have products of

acceptable quality for this project: ACRO, Raven Lining Systems, Carboline,
Sherwin - Williams, Tnemec, Valspar and Devoe (for exterior wash only). Bid
based upon the use of products supplied by one of these named manufacturers.
These named manufacturersare designated to establish a level of acceptable
product quality or manufacturing experience and are not to be construed as the
only manufactures of products acceptable for use on this project. Other
manufacturers and products will be considered on an individual basis, and
may be submitted for consideration in accordance with Document 00700,
Article 3.10, Product Options and Substitutions (excluding 3.10.3), Section
01330, and this Section.
2. Specific products of the named manufacturers acceptable for use and to be bid
for this project are contained in Table 1, "Coating Product," included in this
section.
3. Use non-lead containing coatings which comply with all laws, regulations and
ordinances of the Federal, State, and Local government including V.O.C.
regulations.
4. Properly store and handle materials according to manufacturer's requirements

and in compliance with applicable government regulations.
5. Color: Generally, colors are to be as follows:
a. When multiple coats are required, use coatings alternating colors.
b. Use white for the interior final coat.
c. Use City of Houston Barr Blue for exterior final coat.
6. Obtain all coating materials and required thinners for each tank from the same
single source coating manufacturer.
7. The schedule for painting and coating for specific tanks is contained in Table
2 "Surface Preparation and Finish Schedule" included in this Section.
B. Hot Dip Galvanized Surfaces
1. If specified, hot dip galvanize in accordance with ASTM A 123, ASTM A 385
and/or ASTM A 153.
09971-5
2. The completed galvanized sections to have a minimum of 2 ounces per square

foot. Two ounces of galvanizing per square foot equals approximately 3.4
mils.
3. Estimate weight of galvanizing by use of magnetic dry film thickness gage in

accordance with ASTM E 376-89.
4. Galvanizing (zinc) in contact with potable water must be NSF classified for
contact with potable water.
2.02 EPOXY CAULKING
A. Use flexible, NSF classified epoxy caulking for use in contact with potable water and
compatible with the epoxy lining system used in the tank.
B. Caulk to be 100% solids, two component, polyamine or polyamide cured.
C. The coating manufacturer and caulk material manufacturer to confirm, in writing, that
the internal epoxy coating system is compatible with the 100% solids epoxy caulk
material.
D. Include in the written confirmation of material compatibility, any conditions for or

surface preparation requirements of the epoxy caulk material.
E. An acceptable product for this Project is "Aquatapoxy A7", manufactured by Raven

Lining Systems, Tulsa, Oklahoma.
2.03 CHEMICAL PAINT STRIPPER (FOR REHABILITATION OF AN EXISTING

TANK)
A. Use of chemical paint stripper for removal of exterior paint is allowed, if approved by
the Engineer and used in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Propose a chemical stripping system such as "Peel Away", manufactured by Dumond

Chemicals, Inc. of New York, NY, or approved equivalent.
2.04 CONTAINMENT SYSTEM
A. Provide a containment system which allows for the containment of the

environmentally sensitive waste, dust and paint over spray that will be generated
during the blasting and painting operations.
B. When a tank is to be rehabilitated and the coatings to be removed contain lead,

containment to conform at a minimum to the requirements of TNRCC Texas Air
Control Board Regulation I, 31 TAC Chapter 111 Sections 131 through 139 and
meet the performance requirements of Section 01351 "Environmental Safety and
Worker Protection" of this specification.
09971-6
C. When chemical stripping agents are used, provide for containment of debris, aerosols,
strippings and other emissions or releases. In addition, manage contained waste in
accordance with Section 02136 "Waste Material Handling, Testing and Disposal" and
Contractor waste handling procedure.
D. Determine by the Engineer, the containment system requirements, if any, for wet
abrasive blast or vacuum abrasive blast, and roller applied or brush-on coatings. Use
impervious ground coverage as noted in Item 2.04.F.6 at all times.
E. Containment system proposed by the Contractor must assure the protection of the
surrounding environment and must provide sufficient protection to meet: TNRCC
Texas Air Control Board regulations for the Control of Air Pollution and Visible
Emissions of Particulate Matter; Texas Water Commission regulations applicable to
protection of the soil and water; and Sections 01351 - "Environmental Safety and
Worker Protection" and 02136 "Waste Material Handling, Testing and Disposal" of
this Specification.
F. Construct containment system with wind screens of a minimal shade factor as

specified in section 1.05.D of this section, or as required below, with no emission
from edges, rips, or tears. The containment system must be designed for the purpose
of containing and controlling emissions, debris and protecting the air, ground and soil
from contaminants resulting from lead paint removal, surface preparation and
painting operations.
1. Containment System to provide a safe working environment and provide for

control of emissions as required in Section 01351 "Environmental Safety and
Worker Protection" of this Specification.
2. For rehabilitating an existing tank, employ a Containment System meeting the

requirements of an SSPC Class 2 containment, per SSPC Guide 6 (CON),
when lead containing paint is to be removed by abrasive blast cleaning
methods.
3. The containment materials must provide for performance which will comply
with the following:
a. Protection of the environment, including air, water and soil, from

abrasive blast media, process water, dust particles and paint debris.
b. Air movement within containment.
c. Secure edges and seams.
d. Permeable to natural lighting, unless alternate lighting is to be

provided.
e. Tarp overlap to provide for maximum containment of spent debris.
09971-7
4. Maintain the containment system free of defects through the course of the
project. In the event that emissions or releases occur which exceed the
requirements established in Section 01351, "Environmental Safety and
Worker Protection," stop work until all defects are repaired.
5. Prior to installation, the containment system design must be submitted and

reviewed by the Engineer. In addition, for work on elevated water storage
tanks, design the containment enclosure to be raised and lowered within 15
minutes to prevent damage to the enclosure, the tank, personnel, and excessive
loading to the tank and tank appurtenances in the event of high winds and foul
weather.
6. Place membranes that are impervious to the abrasive blast media, paint debris
dusts, and process water on the ground around the tank to prevent
contamination of the ground storm waters and surface waters due to run-off.
Use chemically resistant membranes when chemical stripping is employed.
Contain the debris within 30 feet of the base of the tank.
7. Prior to any changes or modifications in the containment system during the

course of the work, submit in writing and review by the Engineer, proposed
changes and modifications. Address the operational and technical reasons for
containment modifications in the submittal.
G. Eagle Industries, Reef Industries, or equivalent are acceptable suppliers.
2.05 ABRASIVE BLAST MATERIALS
A. Mineral and slag abrasive materials are to conform to the requirements of the Society
for Protective Coating’s Abrasive Specification No. 1, SSPC-AB1. Abrasives are to
be Class A, less than 1% crystalline silica. The conductivity of the abrasive
(indicative of water soluble contaminants) is not to exceed 500 microsiemen
(micromhos) when tested in accordance with ASTM-D4940. Prior to use, provide the
Engineer qualifications and conformance testing performed and documented in
accordance with Section 5 of SSPC-AB1. Abrasive materials expressly prohibited
from use include sand and copper slag.
2.06 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Delivery and Storage
1. Deliver all paints, coatings and related materials to the job site or fabrication
shop in original unopened containers with the product name, type and batch
number, color, and manufacture date clearly marked on each container.
2. Store all materials used on the job in a single place provided by the Contractor
or designated by the Engineer at the job site. Comply with OSHA
requirements, recommendations of the National Fire Protection Association,
City Fire Codes, and manufacturer recommendations for on site and
fabrication shop storage.
09971-8
3. Remove oily or solvent-soaked rags and all waste from the job site every
night, and take all necessary precautions to reduce fire hazards to a minimum.
4. If the storage space was a fixed part of the project, leave clean upon
completion of the work. Repair any damage to storage space or its
surroundings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 COATING OPERATION ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Tank Interior Humidity and Temperature
1. During abrasive blast cleaning and painting operations, the relative humidity
of the interior air is not to exceed fifty percent (50%). Measure relative
humidity by a sling psychrometer or other appropriate psychometric
measuring equipment.
2. Maintain the interior air temperature and surface temperature of surfaces to be

coated between 50˚F and 120˚F and at least 5˚F above the dew point or as
otherwise required by the manufacturer. (Note, that for use of Aquatapoxy, the
maximum surface temperature is 100˚F.)
3. Achieve the required conditions for interior air conditions through the use of
dehumidification equipment.
a. Submit for review by the Engineer, proposed dehumidification

equipment. Provide a minimum of three air changes per hour unless
dehumidification equipment manufacturer's calculations substantiate
fewer air changes.
b. Supply dry, fresh (not recirculated) air within 12 inches of the tank
bottom from a system of duct work and blowers with the
dehumidification equipment. Operate the ventilation system 24 hrs/day
throughout the entire coating cure process.
c. Maintain dehumidification until abrasive cleaning operations, coating

operations and cure are complete, but not less than ten (10) days.
B. Tank Exterior Humidity and Temperature
1. Do not apply a coating to wet or damp surfaces or in rain, snow, fog or mist.
2. Do not apply any coatings when it is expected that the ambient air temperature
will fall below 50˚F or within 5˚F of the dew point within 6 hours after
application of coatings or paints.
09971-9
3. Do not apply a coating when the relative humidity is above 85%, or as

specified in the coating manufacturer's product data sheet. Measure relative
humidity and dew point by use of a Sling Psychrometer in conjunction with
US. Department of Commerce Weather Bureau Psychometric Tables. If the
above conditions are exceeded, delay coating or painting operations until
conditions are favorable.
4. The ambient conditions and surface temperature of the surfaces being coated
must be between 50˚F and 120˚F and at least 5˚F above the dew point in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. The maximum surface
temperature during application of urethane coatings is 100˚F.
3.02 WORKMANSHIP
A. Good workmanship is required for all work as defined by the latest edition of the
"Manual of Good Painting Practices" published by the Society for Protective
Coatings (SSPC), 40 24th Street, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15222.
B. These specifications do not cancel or supersede the directions of the manufacturer

regarding the warranty or applicability of the product. In instances of variations
between manufacturer’s recommendations and this specification, the more stringent
requirement governs.
C. The Contractor to furnish trained personnel experienced in the work to be performed.

Contractor to ensure work is performed in accordance with these specification
requirements including, but not limited to: surface cleanliness; anchor profile;
ambient conditions; film thickness (wet and dry) and holiday detection. Provide and
use such inspection instruments, gauges or other equipment as may be required to
verify compliance with manufacturer's instructions and these specifications. Assure
proper operating condition and calibration of equipment and instrumentation before
and after use.
D. Provide tools and equipment in good working order including moisture traps in air
lines to pressure pot and spray gun when air atomization is used. Set moisture trap for
continuous bleed during spraying operation. Place moisture traps as close to spray
gun as practical. Process air to be free from oil and moisture when tested in
accordance with ASTM D 4285.
E. Do not apply primer closer than four inches (4") to any surface scheduled for
subsequent blasting or to be field welded.
F. Apply a brush stripe coat of primer, subsequent to surface preparation, but prior to
full primer coat application to welds, rivets, corners, crevices, and other default to
coat surfaces.
G. Apply all caulk and/or sealant materials smooth and continuous.
09971-10
A. Remove visible deposits of oil or grease prior to surface preparation in accordance

with SSPC-SP- 1 or other methods approved by the Engineer, remove visible deposits
of oil or grease.
B. Prior to abrasive blast cleaning, remove all surface imperfections such as sharp fins,
sharp edges, weld spatter, or burning slag. Grind sharp corners and edges to a smooth
round edge with a radius of not less than 1/16 inch.
C. Abrasive blast cleaned surfaces to meet the requirements of this specification when
examined in accordance with Society for Protective Coatings “Guide to SSPC-VIS 1-
89”. This applies to all exposed surfaces, including difficult to access areas (e.g.
behind stiffener rings). When a tank is to be rehabilitated and the coatings to be
removed contain lead, acceptable coating removal methods include wet abrasive blast
cleaning, water jetting with or without abrasives, vacuum abrasive blast cleaning, and
chemical stripping. Certain coating removal methods require subsequent dry abrasive
blasting to achieve the specified surface preparation. Should these methods be
selected, ensure that no fugitive dust escapes the containment system during dry
abrasive blasting. This is to be accomplished by the use of negative air and/or dust
collection systems adequately sized to effectively control dust.
D. For rehabilitation of an existing tank, Moderately Pitted Surface is defined as a

surface having pits less than 1/16-inch deep with a frequency of 4 to 5 pits per square
foot. Prior to application of the specified coating system, blast the pitted surface to
SSPC-SP10. The first coat may be thinned (not to exceed manufacturer's published
recommendations) and applied by stiff bristle brush or roller to all pitted surfaces.
E. For rehabilitation of an existing tank, Badly Pitted Surface is defined as a surface

having pits greater than 1/16-inch deep and less than 1/2 of the metal thickness with a
frequency of 8-12 pits per square foot. Prior to application of the specified coating
system, blast the pitted surface to SSPC-SP10. Prior to applying the specified system,
fill the pits with an epoxy caulk seam sealer applied by putty knife or stiff bristle
brush.
F. Prior to painting, remove dust by vacuuming from all prepared interior surfaces to be
coated.
G. Subsequent to achieving the specified surface preparation and prior to coating

application, interior wetted surfaces must be free from surface contaminants, visible
and non-visible, to a level of less than 7µg/cm2 as sodium chloride. Surfaces will be
tested by the City's laboratory for evidence of surface contaminants including soluble
iron and salts such as chlorides. A minimum of one test for every 2500 square feet of
shell and floor area will be performed. Ensure tank interior is dust free at the time of
the test and that the surfaces to be tested are clean.
H. Prepared exterior surfaces may be vacuumed or cleaned by an alternative method

acceptable to the Engineer. (For rehabilitation of an existing tank, note that use of
compressed air during lead paint removal operations is only allowable under full
containment.)
09971-11
I. Prepared and approved surfaces must be coated before contamination, including rust
bloom. Surfaces shown to be contaminated or exhibiting rust are to be recleaned to
the requirements of the specifications at Contractor's expense.
J. Repair abraded or otherwise damaged areas of existing paint using comparable

materials and procedures, as approved by the Engineer.
K. Treat areas of visible mildew with an approved mildewcide, compatible with the
coating system to be applied.
3.04 CHEMICAL STRIPPER (FOR REHABILITATION OF AN EXISTING TANK)
A. After application of chemical stripper and prior to recoating of the exterior surface of
the tank, evaluate the anchor profile and surface cleanliness. If the surface cleanliness
and anchor profile meet specification requirements, recoating of the tank can be
performed. If surface cleanliness and/or anchor profile do not meet the requirements
of this specification, prepare the surface in the manner specified to obtain the required
anchor profile and freedom from surface contaminants.
B. For caustic based strippers, use pH paper to check the tank surface after removal of
the chemical stripper and existing coating system. Failure to properly clean and
neutralize the surface can result in an alkaline residue remaining on the tank surface.
If the surface pH is not neutral (pH of 7.0 to 7.5), flush the surface with potable water
or approved neutralizing agent until a neutral surface pH is achieved.
C. Notify the Engineer a minimum of 48 hours in advance of the initiation of the

chemical stripper removal process in order for the Engineer to be present. The
manufacturer's representative is required to be on site during the initial removal
process.
D. Install tarpaulins or similar containment materials on the ground surface immediately

under and adjacent to the area of the tank where the coating system is to be removed
as described in Contractor's submittals and acceptable to the Engineer. Install the
tarps in a watertight manner so as to completely contain all materials and liquids from
chemical stripper application, removal, neutralization and rinsing of the tank surface.
Consider all resulting waste hazardous and handle as such. Extend the watertight
tarps a minimum of twenty feet beyond the outer perimeter of the tank.
E. Apply chemical strippers to the tank surface in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations for coverage, contact time, removal and surface cleaning.
F. For caustic based strippers, unless an inhibitor is recommended by the chemical

stripper manufacturer and acceptable to the coating manufacturer,
wash the surface after neutralization.
3.05 COATING APPLICATION
09971-12
A. Apply coating to the standards represented in the SSPC Painting Manual, Volume 1,
"Good Painting Practices" and manufacturer’s recommendations for paint application
procedures.
B. Use coating application equipment consistent with the coating manufacturer’s

recommendations. Supply air free from oil and moisture when tested in accordance
with ASTM D 4285.
C. All mixing and thinning of coatings to be in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations.
D. Only compatible solvents recommended by the coating manufacturer will be used for
thinning and clean up.
E. Strictly adhere to the re-coat intervals recommended and supplied by the coating
manufacturer.
F. Do not coat any cleaned surface if "rust bloom" or recontamination has occurred. The
Engineer to approve cleaned surfaces prior to application of coating.
G. The Engineer spot checks surfaces to ensure conformance. At Contractor’s expense,

re-prepare surfaces not found to meet specifications.
H. All painted surfaces to be free from all dust, dirt and contamination before succeeding
coats are applied. The Engineer to approve each coat of paint before succeeding coats
are applied.
I. All environmental (ambient) conditions to satisfy manufacturer's recommendations

before coatings are applied.
J. All coats to be free of runs, drips, sags and holidays or other discontinuities. The
finish is to be uniform.
K. Dry film thicknesses of all coats to conform to minimum and/or maximum

thicknesses required by these specifications. Measure all dry film thicknesses in strict
accordance with SSPC-PA2.
L. Interior – Prior to application of primer and prior to application of intermediate coat,

brush stripe coat all welds, rivets, corners, edges, crevices and uniformly pitted
surfaces. Brush stripe coat rough pits, depressions, and crevices to work in coatings.
Do not thin stripe coats in excess of that recommended by the manufacturer.
1. For rehabilitation of an existing tank:
a. Fill weld “deep pits” and grind flush at the direction of the Engineer.
Payment to be at the unit price bid for "Extra 6-inch Diameter Floor
Patches".
09971-13
b. Moderately and badly pitted surfaces may exceed specified limits on

the anchor profile. The primer coat dry film thickness must be
sufficient to adequately cover the anchor profile.
M. Exterior - All welds, rivets, corners, edges and irregular surfaces are to be stripe
coated as part of the first coat application. Brush stripe coat pits, depressions and
crevices to work in coating. Apply coating by brush or roller, using manufacturers’
recommended thinner (if applicable) for the application method selected. NO SPRAY
PAINTING ON EXTERIOR SURFACES AT TANK SITES WILL BE
PERMITTED WITHOUT THE USE OF CONTAINMENT SCREENS AND
APPROVAL OF ENGINEER.
N. When more than one coat is to be applied, each coat should have a distinguishable
color from the preceding and following coats. Note that stripe coating is considered to
be part of the first coat application.
O. Exterior surface preparation and priming of all metal tank appurtenances to be in

accordance with this specification. Intermediate and finish coatings to be the same as
those of adjacent surfaces.
P. Pipe and Fittings
1. For elevated tanks, prepare the external surface of new and existing piping
and fittings within the "dry" tank pedestal with the same surface preparation
and coating system as the interior of the tank pedestal.
2. Prepare new above ground piping and fittings with the same surface
preparation and coating system as specified for tank exterior.
3. Prepare existing above ground piping and fittings connected directly to the
tank with the same surface preparation and coating system as specified for
tank exterior. Limit this to exposed portions of piping at inlets/outlets and to
the nozzle of the adjacent tank on interconnect lines. Additional limits of yard
piping are indicated on the plans.
Q. Prepare and coat inaccessible interior surface of roof plate and rafters as follows:
1. For new tank construction, prepare inaccessible surfaces, such as interior

surface of roof plate and rafters, with specified surface preparation. Prime coat
prior to erection. Apply a minimum of two additional full coats prior to final
placement. Surface preparation and prime coat application may be conducted
off-site. Follow inspection of shop blasting and painting in accordance with
this specification. Follow the recoat intervals recommended by the
manufacturer.
2. For repair of existing tanks, prepare all inaccessible interior surfaces of roof
plate and rafters to be installed with specified surface preparation and a
minimum of two full coats prior to final placement.
09971-14
R. Jack the roof plate/rafter interfaces, which are not accessible for surface preparation
and coating work, off the rafters to facilitate blasting and coating the tops of rafters
and the roof plate. Move wedges used to hold the roof plate off the rafters as required
so that all areas between the rafters and roof plate are blasted and coated.
S. For wet surfaces, including immersion and condensation zones, maintain a constant
positive flow of dehumidified air, with adequate circulation across the finish coat for
a period of ten (10) days, minimum. Evacuate solvent from the bottom of the tank.
Forced or induced airflow may be required. Any accelerated curing procedure must
be recommended in writing by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.
T. Repair damaged areas in galvanized coating as follows:
1. Interior surfaces require a NSF approved cold galvanizing component.
2. Mechanical exterior damage to be prepared by hand tool (SP-2) or power tool

(SP-3) spot cleaning and to be spot coated with an organic zinc coating
approved by the Engineer.
3. Prepare damaged areas exhibiting red rust to bare metal (SP-11) and coat with
an inorganic zinc coating approved by the Engineer.
U. Coatings work will be permitted during daylight hours only unless arrangements or
permission has been granted in writing.
3.06 PROTECTION OF SURFACES
A. Unless otherwise specified, painting will not be required on the following items:
1. Exposed surfaces of Aluminum
2. Polished or finished Stainless Steel
3. Nickel, Monel, Copper, Bronze, Lead or Brass
4. Rubber and plastic including Fiberglass Reinforced Plastics
5. Chromium plated surfaces
B. If Contractor applies paint to or causes damage to surfaces to be protected or

unspecified surfaces, removal of coating, repair or replacement of item is required.
C. Protect all surfaces, which are not to be painted, from overblasting, spraying, over
spray, spatters, or spillage of paint.
3.07 PAINT SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
09971-15
A. Tank Label: Stencil (or use ready-to-apply decals) the information below to the side
of the tank near the flush clean-out door for GST and the access door for EST about 3
feet from the ground after completion of the painting operation. Letters are to be 0.75
inches in height, the color is to be black and material is to be compatible with finish
coat:
1. Date of coating application. Completion [month/year]
2. General Contractor, Painting Contractor
3. Interior coating system supplier and product number(s). Surface Preparation,

Prime Coat, Intermediate Coat, Finish Coat, Caulking
4. Exterior coating system supplier and product number(s). Surface Preparation,

Prime Coat, Intermediate Coat, Finish Coat
3.08 INSPECTION, TESTING, RECORD KEEPING
A. Schedule and coordinate work with the Engineer to allow for expeditious inspection
by the City or designated representative, including the use of ladders, scaffolds,
lighting and swingstages to provide regular access for inspections.
B. All surfaces ready to receive a coating must be approved by the Engineer before the
application of the next succeeding specified coat. If the Contractor proceeds without
such approval, he may, at the direction of the Engineer, be required to remove and/or
recoat all such work at no additional cost to the City.
C. Measure wet film thickness at least once every thirty (30) minutes to make certain
that proper film thickness is being achieved. More frequent checks may be required
by the Engineer at the Engineer’s direction.
D. Test all tank interior coated surfaces under the direction of the Engineer for nicks,
scrapes and/or pinholes in the coating film using a low voltage, wet sponge holiday
detector for thin film coating (<20 mils) and high voltage holiday detector for thick
film coating (>20 mils). Perform holiday detection in accordance with NACE
RP0188-90: "Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Protective Coatings." Correct any
deficiencies to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
E. Record temperature, humidity, and dew point on a log including date and time
reading obtained. Obtain a minimum of three such readings on days of coating
application. The format for these records is presented in Table 3, "Daily Coating
Summary Report" included in this Section. Enter the records into a Windows
compatible file such as Quatro Pro or Excel and submit a hard copy with monthly pay
requests for those months when coatings are applied. Furnish the Engineer with a 3-
1/2” disk containing the complete coating summary report for the project at the end of
the project, or in the interim, if requested.
09971-16
F. Paint films showing sags, checks, blisters, teardrops, curtains, fish eyes, or fat edges
will not be accepted. Entirely remove films exhibiting any of these defects and recoat
the surface at no additional cost to the City.
G. Inspect blasted steel surfaces by the Engineer using SSPC-Vis 1-89, "Visual Standard
for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel", or NACE TM-0175-75 for new steel.
H. Demonstrate surface profile conformance to the specifications by obtaining average

results of a minimum of ten (10) equally spaced anchor profile determinations per
1000 square feet. Employ at the discretion of the Engineer, ASTM D 4417 "Standard
Test Methods for Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Blast Cleaned Steel"
Method A, B or C. ASTM D 4417. Method C shall be employed to resolve any
dispute. The average reading to be between 2.0 mils and 3.0 mils. Any individual
profile point less than 1.5 mils or greater than 4.0 mils will be cause for rejection of
the anchor profile. Rejected areas are to be reblasted to correct profile.
3.09 FINISH SCHEDULE
A. A list of the tanks to be coated is presented in Table 2, "Surface Preparation and

Finish Schedule " at the end of this section. Table 2 contains the required pre-cleaning
procedures, the degree of surface preparation and coating system schedule for the
interior and exterior of the various tanks.
B. Utilize the following legend for TABLE 2 "Surface Preparation and Finish
Schedule":
1. Prior to abrasive blasting, degrease oily residue using steam cleaner and/or
water blaster. Check with black light and reclean if necessary. Check the pH
of the surface for neutrality if an emulsifying type degreaser is used.
2. Prior to abrasive blasting, perform Solvent Cleaning (SSPC-SP-1-82) to

remove oil, grease and other detrimental foreign contaminants for interior
and/or exterior surfaces.
3. Power Tool Clean (SSPC-SP-3-82) any new welds, flame cut surfaces,
buckshot and/or weld splatter associated with tank repairs, modifications and
other new work.
4. Perform Near White Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP10 - NACE No. 2) of all

interior tank surfaces unless otherwise noted in the Finish Schedule. Achieve
an AVERAGE of 2.0 mils to 3.0 mils with no individual reading greater than
4.0 mils or less than 1.5 mils for anchor profile on abrasive blasted surfaces.
5. Perform Near White Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP10 - NACE No. 2) to the

exterior surfaces. Achieve an AVERAGE of 2.0 mils to 3.0 mils with no
individual reading greater than 4.0 mils or less than 1.5 mils for anchor profile
on abrasive blasted surfaces.
09971-17
6. Perform Commercial Blast (SSPC-SP6 - NACE No. 3) on all exterior

surfaces. Achieve an AVERAGE of 2.0 mils to 3.0 mils with no individual
reading greater than 4.0 mils or less than 1.5 mils for anchor profile on
abrasive blasted surfaces.
7. Perform Brush-Off Blast (SSPC-SP7 - NACE No. 4) on all exterior surfaces

to remove poorly adhering coatings, mildew, dirt, soil and other detrimental
foreign contaminants. Use of TSP or equal will improve cleaning
effectiveness.
8. Spot Repair by hand sanding and/or power tool cleaning any pinholed
coatings, damaged coatings and/or rust spots. All repair areas are to be
feathered into adjacent painted areas using the appropriate paint system
specified for the applicable interior or exterior of the tank.
9. Three (3) Coat Interior Polyamide Epoxy Paint System having ANSI/NSF 61
approval for potable water service. Each coat in alternating colors.
a. The total coating system to have a nominal dry film thickness of 10

mils to 16 mils.
b. Each primer and intermediate coats to have a nominal 3 to 5 mils DFT.

Finish coat to have a nominal 4 to 6 mils DFT.
c. All DFT measurements are to be performed in accordance with SSPC-

PA2 and represent the DFT, corrected for magnetic base readings.
10. Two (2) Coat Interior Polyamide Epoxy Paint System having ANSI/NSF 61
approval for potable water service. Each coat a different color.
a. The total coating system to have a nominal dry film thickness of 7 mils
to 11 mils.
b. Primer coat to have a nominal dry film thickness of 3 to 5 mils, and for
the finish coat, 4 to 6 mils.

PA2 and represent the DFT corrected for magnetic base readings.
11. Interior Epoxy Caulk Material to be EPA and FDA approved for potable water
service such as Raven Lining Systems A-7. Apply caulk material to surfaces
which have received a Near White Metal Blast (SSPC SP-10 - NACE No. 2).
Apply caulk in a smooth and continuous manner, overlapping material at least
one inch on each side of seam to be caulked. Caulk to be at least 30 mils thick
at centerline of seam. After material has cured but prior to application of any
coating, lightly scarify the surface of the caulk material. Caulk material is not
to be applied to continuous weld seams except as required to fill deep weld
undercuts. The 1.0 inch overlap does not apply for deep pit repairs or
undercuts.
09971-18
12. Three (3) Coat Exterior Epoxy/Epoxy Urethane Paint System. Intermediate
color to compliment topcoat color selected by the City.
a. The total coating system to have a nominal dry film thickness of 9 to

12.5 mils.
b. Primer coat to have a nominal dry film thickness (DFT) of 3 to 4.5

mils. Intermediate coat to have a nominal 4.5 to 6 mils DFT. Finish
coat to have a nominal 1.5 to 2 mils DFT.
c. All field coats to be brush or roller applied. SPRAY APPLICATION

ON SITE REQUIRES APPROVAL OF CITY AND USE OF
CONTAINMENT SCREENING.
d. All DFT measurements are to be performed in accordance with SSPC-

PA2 and represent the DFT adjusted for magnetic base readings of
abrasive blast cleaned steel.
13. Two (2) Coat Exterior Epoxy /Urethane Paint System. Intermediate color to
compliment topcoat color selected by the City.
a. Total coating system to have a nominal dry film thickness of 6 to 8

mils.
b. Primer coat to have a nominal 4.5 to 6 mils DFT. Finish coat to have a
nominal 1.5 to 2 mils DFT.
c. All field coats to be brush or roller applied. SPRAY APPLICATION

d. All DFT measurements are to be performed in accordance with SSPC-

PA2 and shall represent the DFT adjusted for magnetic base readings
of abrasive blast cleaned steel.
14. Two (2) Coat Exterior Silicone Alkyd Paint System
a. Prime all blasted and repaired areas with one coat of Alkyd Primer
having a nominal DFT of 3 to 4.5 mils.
b. Apply full Silicone Alkyd Finish Coat having a nominal DFT of 2.5 to
4 mils.
c. Total coating system to have a nominal 5.5 to 8.5 mils DFT.
d. All field coats to be brush or roller applied. SPRAY APPLICATION

09971-19
e. All DFT measurements are to be performed in accordance with SSPC-

PA2 and represent the DFT adjusted for magnetic base readings for
abrasive blast cleaned steel.
15. Interior 100% Solids, Plural Component Paint System having ANSI/NSF 61
approval for potable water service.
a. Total coating system to have a minimum nominal dry film thickness of

20 to 25 mils.
b. Apply coating in one or two coats, as recommended by the

manufacturer.

PA2 and shall represent the DFT corrected for magnetic base readings.
d. Application to be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's

published requirements.
e. The use of dehumidification may be waived by the City when this

system is utilized. Maintain surface cleanliness to ensure no coatings
are applied over contaminated, rust blooms or otherwise discolored
surfaces as specified elsewhere in these documents. Use ventilation
equipment as required by the manufacturer to maintain a safe working
environment.
16. Non-Skid Walk-way
a. GST – Provide three-foot wide safety/skid resistant roof walkway.

Coating to be compatible with specified external prime coat coating
system and applied to a properly cleaned surface. Spread crushed
walnut shells or aluminum oxide on intermediate coat while still tacky
to achieve a coarse textured finish. After this coat has cured, sweep all
loose shells or grit from surface and apply finish coat. Finish coat paint
color to be a contrasting shade to the roof color. For galvanized tanks,
do not blast but clean according to SP-1. Apply one coat of wash
primer, then apply skid resistant material.
b. EST – Provide safety/skid resistant walkway, as above, inside the

handrail area on the tank roof.
17. Concrete Surfaces
a. Prior to application of specified system, pressure wash all surfaces to

remove all dirt, laitance efflorescence and other non-cementitious
material.
09971-20
b. Prepare concrete, masonry units, brick and plaster surfaces by

removing efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease and oils and by
roughening the surfaces as required to remove glaze. High pressure
water, 4,000 psi minimum at 2.5 gallons/minute minimum, with or
without abrasive injection, will be used to remove poorly adherent or
"powdery" existing paint.
c. Determine the alkalinity and moisture content of the surfaces. Where

the alkalinity exceeds the paint manufacturer's recommendations for
application of the paint, correct the condition in accordance with the
paint manufacturer's recommendations. Do not apply paint to surfaces
while the surface moisture content exceeds the paint manufacturer's
moisture content limitations
18. Continuous tank ventilation system must be able to prevent the vapor
concentration from reaching the TLV (threshold limit values) of exposure to
the solvent(s) used in accordance with the TLV values published by the
American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists, 1991-1992
edition.
19. Inspect galvanized sheets for white rust deposits prior to erection. Clean any
white rusted areas by the use of a water and scrub brush technique. Measure
the coating thickness in accordance with ASTM E 376-69. Any thickness less
than 3.0 mils may be cause for rejection of the plate.
20. On ground storage tanks with aluminum domes, apply 20 mils of Ameron 487
elastomeric polyurethane coating, or equivalent, to the top of the wind girder,
exterior shell of the tank under the aluminum flashing at the wind girder, and
lap 6" over the top edge of the shell inside the tank.
21. Apply 20 mils DFT nominal/16 mils minimum Corrocote II PW, 100% solids
as manufactured by Madison Chemical Industries. Surface preparation to be in
accordance with Manufacturer's published instructions.
3.10 SCHEDULING
A. Perform painting work according to the contract construction schedule as required in

Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Scheduling not to supersede temperature, humidity or other environmental

requirements for coatings application included in these specifications.
C. Coordinate work of other trades and provide conditions for neat, clean, dust-free
work.
3.11 SITE CLEAN-UP
A. The Contractor to maintain the construction site in a neat and orderly manner
throughout the duration of the project.
09971-21
TABLE NO. 1
COATING PRODUCTS
Coating Intermediate
Coating System Primer Coat Finish Coat
Manufacturer Coat
Tank Interior
3 Coat Polyamide/ ACRO 4460 4460 4460
CARBOLINE 891 891 891
VALSPAR 32 SERIES 32 SERIES 32 SERIES
Polyamine Epoxy TNEMEC SERIES 20 SERIES 20 SERIES 20
SHERWIN-
TANK CLAD HS TANK CLAD HS TANK CLAD HS
WILLIAMS
ACRO 4460 4460
CARBOLINE 891 891

2 Coat Polyamide
Epoxy VALSPAR 32 SERIES 32 SERIES
TNEMEC SERIES 20 SERIES 20
SHERWIN- TANK CLAD HS
TANK CLAD HS
WILLIAMS 60
2 Coat 100% Solids AQUATAPOXY
RAVEN
Plural Component A-
Tank Exterior
3 Coat Epoxy/ ACRO 4422 4460 4429
134 HS or 134
CARBOLINE 893 890 or 893
HG
Epoxy VALSPAR 32 SERIES 32 SERIES V40 SERIES
Polyurethane TNEMEC SERIES 20 SERIES 20 SERIES 74
SHERWIN- Recoatable Epoxy HI-SOLIDS
Macropoxy 646
WILLIAMS Primer Polyurethane
ACRO 1144 2214V 2215V
RUSTARMOR
CARBOLINE SUBSIL 30 HS SUBSIL 30 HS
29
3 Coat Silicone
VALSPAR U-13 F-28 20-W-9 21 SERIES
Alkyd
TNEMEC SERIES 37H SERIES 2H SERIES 82
SHERWIN- STEELMASTER STEELMASTER
KEM BOND HS
WILLIAMS 9500 9500
ACRO 1104 2215V
2 Coat Silicone
Alkyd RUSTARMOR
CARBOLINE SUBSIL 30 HS
29
09971-22
Coating Intermediate
Coating System Primer Coat Finish Coat
Manufacturer Coat
VALSPAR 13-R-89 V-20 SERIES

TNEMEC SERIES 37 H SERIES 82
SHERWIN- STEELMASTER
KEM BOND HS
WILLIAMS 9500
ACRO 4422 4460 4429
CARBOLINE 890 890 134 HS
Skid Resistant VALSPAR 32 SERIES 32-SERIES V-40
Epoxy/
SERIES 20
Polyurethane TNEMEC SERIES 20 SERIES 74
SHERWIN- Recoatable Epoxy HI-SOLIDS
Macropoxy 646
WILLIAMS Primer Polyurethane
ACRO 1104 2214V 2215V
RUSTARMOR RUSTARMOR
CARBOLINE SUBSIL 30 HS
29 29
Skid Resistant
VALSPAR V-13 F-28 20-W-9 21 SERIES
Silicone Alkyd
TNEMEC SERIES 37H SERIES 2H SERIES 82
SHERWIN- STEELMASTER STEELMASTER
KEM BOND HS
WILLIAMS 9500 9500
Special Service
RAVEN LINING AQUATAPOXY AQUATAPOXY
Pitted Surfaces A-6 A-6
Internal SHERWIN- Steel Seam
WILLIAMS Trowel Grade
Concrete Surfaces
ACRO 4460 4460 4460
CARBOLINE 891 891 891
Internal VALSPAR 32 SERIES 32-SERIES V-40
SHERWIN-
TANK CLAD HS TANK CLAD HS TANK CLAD HS
WILLIAMS
ACRO 4453 4460 4429
CARBOLINE 3359 3359 3359
Exterior Above
Grade VALSPAR CRETE/GARD II CRETE/GARD II CRETE/GARD II
SHERWIN-
METALATEX METALATEX METALATEX
WILLIAMS
Interior Flexible AQUATAPOXY
RAVEN LINING
Caulking A-7
09971-23
TABLE NO. 2
SURFACE PREPARATION AND FINISH SCHEDULE
INTERIOR EXTERIOR
Surface Paint Additional Surface Paint Additional

Tank Comments
Preparation System Work Items Preparation System Work Items
Notes:
1. See Table 1 "Coatings Products" for allowable coating manufacturers and products.
2. See Paragraph 3.09 B. "Finish Schedule" for description of items listed in this table.
END OF SECTION
09971-24
CITY OF HOUSTON CATHODIC PROTECTION FOR WATER
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION TANK INTERIORS (SACRIFICIAL ANODE)
SECTION 13111
CATHODIC PROTECTION FOR WATER TANK INTERIORS (SACRIFICIAL ANODE)
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Requirements for sacrificial anode cathodic protection systems for the interior submerged
surfaces of steel water storage tanks.
B. Specifications for anodes, wiring, test station and long life reference electrodes.
C. Requirement that all materials in contact with the water or exposed to the interior of the tank to
be classified in accordance with ANSI/NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components.
D. Reference to the National Electrical Code (latest edition) which is part of this specification.
D. Section 01351 – Environmental Safety and Worker Protection
E. Section 13113 – Cathodic Protection for New Tank Bottoms
F. Section 13201 – Welded Steel Water Storage Tanks
A. There is no separate measurement and payment for work performed under this Section. Include
the cost for this work in the contract bid price for work of which this is a component part.
B. Payment will be full compensation for all labor, equipment, materials and supervision for the
installation of the cathodic protection system, complete in place including anodes, reference
cells, wiring, and all field welding, connections, adjustments, testing, cleanup, and other related
work necessary for construction as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
C. Refer to Sections 01270 – Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects
13111-1
B. ASTM D 1248 – Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire
and Cable.
C. AWWA D 100 - Standard for Welded Steel Tanks for Water Storage
D. AWWA D 102 – Standard for Painting Steel Water-Storage Tanks
E. City of Houston Electrical Code.
F. NEC 70 - National Electrical Code (latest revision).
G. DOT 199 – Federal Substance Abuse and Testing Regulations
H. NACE International SP0196 – Galvanic Anode Cathodic Protection of Internal Submerged

Surfaces of Steel Water Storage Tanks
I. UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables.
J. UL 467 - Bonding and Grounding Equipment
K. UL 486A - Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submittals to conform to the requirements of Section 01330 - Submittals.
B. Design Drawings and Computations: Prepare all computations and drawings by or under the
direct supervision of a Corrosion Engineer who is a Professional Engineer, registered in the
State of Texas with a minimum of ten years experience in cathodic protection design for water
storage tanks. Design the system to provide effective corrosion control in accordance with the
criterion for protection which is a tank-to-water potential, IR drop free, within a range of -0.850
volts to -1.050 volts relative to copper-copper sulfate reference electrode. Measure this potential
free of the effect of voltage gradients (IR drops).
C. The Corrosion Engineer to base system capacity on:
1. Total surface area of the tank. Total surface area includes to the high water level (HWL)
in bowl and wet risers in elevated tanks, which are 30-inch diameter or larger.
2. High quality interior coating.
3. Protection of bare steel surfaces due to coating deterioration of up to 10% of the total
submerged surface area.
4. Chemical analysis of water including resistivity.
5. Minimum anode system life of twenty (20) years. Provide certificate, signed and sealed
by Professional Engineer stating that computations and Drawings are in conformance
with these design criteria.
13111-2
D. Catalog Cuts: Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts for the system which demonstrates
classification in accordance with ANSI/NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components.
E. Operating and Maintenance Manual: Submit six (6) operating, monitoring and maintenance
manuals for the cathodic protection system. Include operating instructions, maintenance data,
product data and test procedures in the manuals.
F. Drawings: Maintain as-built Drawings of the corrosion system during installation and
construction. Revise drawings to show exact locations of all wiring, connections and terminal
boxes. Properly identify all items of equipment and material. Submit the original as-built
Drawings to the City of Houston representative.
A. Certification: Provide manufacturer's certification that all components of the cathodic protection
system meet the requirements of the Drawings and specifications.
B. Drawings: The Drawings for the cathodic protection systems are diagrammatic. Do not scale
the Drawings for exact locations unless scales are explicitly stated on the specific drawing.
Determine exact locations by field conditions and non-interference with mechanical and
structural features.
C. Inspection: All materials, fabrication and installations are subject to inspection and testing by
the City of Houston or its designated representative.
1.07 QUALIFICATIONS
A. A minimum of five years experience installing and servicing the types of system described in
this specification is required of the Cathodic Protection Contractor. Install the system by
employees of the Cathodic Protection Contractor who have experience in the installation of
water tank systems. All personnel subject to Federal Substance Abuse and Testing Regulations
as required by DOT 199.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
All materials in contact with the water or exposed to the interior of the tank are to be classified
in accordance with ANSI/NSF 61 “Drinking Water System Components”.
2.01 ANODES
A. General: Anode material to be high potential magnesium, having a diameter of 2.024 ±0.024
inches, extruded on a solid, 1/8-inch steel core with nominal length of 10-feet for each anode.
13111-3
B. Composition: High potential magnesium alloy to conform to the following:
Element % by Weight
Silicon 0.05 maximum
Copper 0.01 maximum
Nickel 0.001 maximum
Iron 0.002 maximum
Aluminum 2.5 – 3.5
Zinc 0.7 – 1.3
Manganese 0.2 minimum
Other 0.3 maximum
Magnesium Remainder
C. Anode Lead Wire: Use No. 8 AWG stranded copper wire with medium density, high molecular
weight polyethylene (HMWPE) insulation. Polyethylene to conform to ASTM D 1248, Type I,
Class C, Grade 5.
D. Connection: Connect the anode-to-wire with a Thomas & Betts, C tap, crimp connector sized
for No. 8 AWG stranded copper conductor. First crimp the wire to the 1/8-inch anode core and
then silver solder to ensure electrical continuity and strength.
E. Anode Eye Ring: Drill and tap the end of the anode to a depth of 1-1/2 inches adjacent to the
core wire. Screw a 3/8-inch diameter eye ring with a 3-inch shaft and a 1-inch inside diameter
eye loop, 1-½ inches into the anode.
F. Encapsulation: Encapsulate the crimped connection and the shaft of the eye ring in epoxy. See
Drawings.
2.02 MONITORING STATION
A. Enclosure: Use a NEMA 4X enclosure for the cathodic protection system monitoring station.
B. Meter: Cathodic protection potential/anode current DC voltmeter to have a push to read button
connecting the permanent reference cell to the digital voltmeter with an internal resistance of
not less than 1,000,000 ohms/volt and a minimum full scale of 1999 mV.
C. Shunt: Place a calibrated shunt in the anode circuit wired to the DC voltmeter for measuring DC
current.
D. Resistor: Equip the monitoring station with a variable resistor (rheostat) sized not less than a
100 watt, 100 ohm, connected between the anode header cable and the tank lead wire.
E. Tank Negative Lead: Use No. 8 AWG stranded copper with THHW insulation for the system
ground.
F. Test Lead: Install independent structure test lead not smaller than No. 18 AWG stranded copper
TW or THHW insulation on the potential test circuit.
13111-4
G. Tank Connections: Space the anode system structure and test structure connections six (6) or
more inches apart on ladder stand off welded to tank shell. Connect with brass bolts as shown
on Drawings.
H. Monitoring Station Mounting: Locate the monitoring station on the exterior of the tank for
convenient operator serviceability approximately five (5) feet off the ground near the ladder.
2.03 REFERENCE ELECTRODES
A. General: Install two (2) copper-copper sulfate electrodes, manufactured with 99.99% pure
copper coiled element. Cells are to remain stable (plus or minus 10 mV) in fresh water for a
minimum of ten years.
B. Lead Wires: Use No. 14 AWG stranded copper wire with blue, medium density, high molecular
weight polyethylene (HMWPE) insulation for the reference cell lead wire. Polyethylene to
conform to ASTM D 1248, Type I, Class C, Grade 5. Terminate lead wire at monitoring station.
C. Encapsulation: Encapsulate the reference electrode to lead wire connection in epoxy to prevent
water penetration.
2.04 ANODE SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Cord: Suspend the anode from a minimum 5/16 inch diameter polyester cord, tied to the anode
eye ring and anchored to the roof of the tank as shown on the Drawings.
B. Lead Wires: Do not use the anode lead wire to support the weight of the anode.
2.05 ANODE HEADER CABLE
A. General: Use No. 8 AWG stranded copper, HMWPE insulated cable. Install header cable
without cutting any strands of copper and run from each anode completing a full 3600 circle.
Extend both ends of the anode header cable to the monitoring station where one end will
terminate on a variable resistor. Connect the other end of the resistor to the tank with a No. 8
AWG copper wire. Terminate the other end of the header cable with a wire nut.
B. Interior Wiring: Insulate all wiring within the tank to prevent copper conductor contact with the
potable water.
C. Exterior Wiring: Use stranded copper conductors, run in rigid, galvanized steel conduit for all
wiring on the exterior of the tank.
2.06 ANODE CONNECTIONS
A. Connectors: Use a Thomas & Betts, C tap, crimp connector for a No. 8 AWG stranded to No. 8
AWG stranded copper wire connection for the anode lead wire to header cable splices.
B. Sealant: Seal splices between anode lead wires and collector cable with Scotchfill Insulation
Putty, Scotch 130C Rubber Tape, and Scotch Super 88 Plastic Tape as manufactured by 3M.
Coat the completed splice with Scotchkote.
13111-5
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PERFORMANCE
Perform all work in accordance with the following requirements:
A. General: Install components of the cathodic protection system in the manner and at the
locations shown on the Drawings prepared by the Corrosion Engineer.
B. Inspection: Prior to installation, have the City of Houston or its designated representative,
inspect materials and equipment. Replace any defective materials or components that do not
satisfy the requirements of this specification.
C. Tank Attachments: All attachments to the interior, wetted surfaces of the tank should be
constructed of non-metallic materials or mild steel that is provided with the same protective
coating system as the tank shell. Where stainless steel accessories are used, such as ladders or
safety rails, the stainless steel shall be electrically isolated from the tank.
D. Welding, Cutting and Coating: Follow AWWA Standards D 100 and D 102 for welding,
cutting, and coating.
E. Electrical Continuity: Assure continuity by spot welding all sections of bolted or riveted tanks.
Tank Construction Contractor to perform the welding.
F. Wiring: Handle and install lead wires to prevent damage from abrasion.
G. Connections: Seal electrical connections within the tank to prevent water penetration.
H. Monitoring Station: Mount the monitoring station at a convenient height (eye level) above
grade for monitoring and service purposes.
I. Disinfection: The Tank Construction Contractor is responsible for disinfection.
J. Workmanship: Complete the work in a clean and safe manner.
K. Tank Closure: Security of all tank access locations (e.g. hatches) is the responsibility of the City
of Houston.
3.02 ENERGIZING SYSTEM
A. General: After the system is installed and the tank is filled, provide startup service, which
includes energizing, testing, and adjusting the system for optimum performance.
B. Prior to native state, polarized potential testing and commissioning of the system, give a
minimum of 48 hours notice to the City of Houston, Engineering Project Manager to facilitate
observation of the tests by a City Representative.
13111-6
C. Method: Record all tank-to-water potential measurements with a calibrated, portable, copper-
copper sulfate reference electrode and a portable, high impedance voltmeter. Measure native
state, current “on” and “instant off” potentials at a minimum of five locations within the tank.
Record potential and current measurements at the monitoring station.
D. Report: Review and evaluation of all test data is the responsibility of the Corrosion Engineer. In
addition to the startup service, submit “as-built” drawings and an Operations and Maintenance
Manual in accordance with Article1.05.
END OF SECTION
13111-7
CITY OF HOUSTON CATHODOC PROTECTION FOR
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION WATER TANK INTERIORS (ICCP)
SECTION 13112
CATHODIC PROTECTION FOR WATER TANK INTERIORS (ICCP)
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Requirements for impressed current cathodic protection (ICCP) systems for the
interior submerged surfaces of steel water storage tanks where AC power is available.
B. Specifications for automatically controlled transformer - rectifiers, anode ring and

long life reference electrodes.
C. Requirement that all materials in contact with the water or exposed to the interior of
the tank to be classified in accordance with ANSI/NSF 61 - Drinking Water System
Components.
D. The National Electrical Code (latest edition) is referenced and is part of this
specification.
A. Section 01110 – Summary of Work.
C. Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures.
D. Section 01351 – Environmental Safety and Worker Protection.
E. Section 13113 – Cathodic Protection for New Tank Bottoms.
F. Section 13201 – Welded Steel Water Storage Tanks.
A. There is no separate measurement and payment for work performed under this
Section. Include the cost for this work in the contract bid price for work of which this
is a component part.
B. Payment will be full compensation for all labor, equipment, materials and supervision
for the installation of the cathodic protection system, complete in place including
rectifiers, automatic controllers, anodes, reference cells, power feeds, and all field
welding, connections, adjustments, testing, cleanup, and other related work necessary
for construction as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
C. Refer to Section 01270 – Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures.
13112-1
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects
B. ANSI/AWWA D104 - Automatically Controlled, Impressed - Current Cathodic

Protection for the Interior Submerged Surfaces of Steel Water Storage Tanks
C. ASTM B 348 – Titanium and Titanium Alloy Bars and Billets
D. ASTM D 1248 – Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials

for Wire and Cable
E. ASTM D 3359 - Standard Test Methods for Rating Adhesion by Tape Test
F. AWWA D100 –Welded Carbon Steel Tanks for Water Storage
G. AWWA D102 –Coating Steel Water-Storage Tanks
H. NACE International SP0388 – Recommended Practice, Impressed Current Cathodic

Protection of Internal Submerged Surfaces of Steel Water Storage Tanks
I. NEC 70 - National Electrical Code (latest revision)
J. City of Houston Electrical Code
K. UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables
L. UL 467 - Bonding and Grounding Equipment
M. UL 486A - Wire Connectors
N. UL 506 – Specialty Transformers
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Design Drawings and Computations: Prepare all computations and drawings by or

under the direct supervision of a Corrosion Engineer who is a Professional Engineer,
registered in the State of Texas with a minimum of ten years experience in cathodic
protection design for water storage tanks. Design the system to provide effective
corrosion control in accordance with the criterion for protection which is tank-to-
water potential, IR drop free, within a range of -0.850 volts to -1.050 volts relative to
copper-copper sulfate reference electrode. Measure this potential free of the effect of
voltage gradients (IR drops).
C. The Corrosion Engineer to base system capacity upon:
1. Total surface area of the tank. Total surface area includes to high water line in
bowl and wet risers in elevated tanks, which are 30-inch diameter or larger.
13112-2
2. High quality interior coating.
3. Protection of bare steel surfaces due to coating deterioration of up to 10% of

total submerged surface area.
4. Chemical and electrical analysis of water including conductivity.
5. Minimum anode system life of twenty (20) years.
6. Provide certificate, signed and sealed by the Professional Engineer stating that
computations and Drawings are in conformance with these design criteria.
D. Catalog Cuts: Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts for the system which demonstrates
classification in accordance with ANSI/NSF 61 – Drinking Water System
Components.
E. Rectifier Operation and Maintenance Manual: The rectifier manufacturer to include a

complete operation and maintenance manual with each rectifier shipped to the job
site. In addition to operating instructions, include in the manual a circuit diagram and
spare parts list. Manufacturer to operate the rectifier under full load conditions at the
factory, and thoroughly inspect and test prior to delivery to the job site. Report results
of this testing on a manufacturer’s quality control form and include in the rectifier
operation and maintenance manual. Each operating manual to be identified by
rectifier model number and individual serial number.
F. Operating and Maintenance Manual: Submit six (6) operating, monitoring and
maintenance manuals for the cathodic protection system. Include operating
instructions, maintenance data, product data and test procedures in the manuals.
G. Drawings: Maintain as-built drawings of the corrosion control system during

installation and construction. Revise drawings to show exact locations of all wiring,
connections and terminal boxes. Properly identify all items of equipment and
material. Submit the original as-built drawings to the City of Houston representative.
A. Certification: Provide manufacturer's certification that all components of the cathodic

protection system meet the requirements of the Drawings and specifications.
B. Drawings: The Drawings for the cathodic protection systems are diagrammatic and
not scaled for exact locations unless scales are explicitly stated on the specific
drawing. Determine exact locations by field conditions and non-interference with
other mechanical and structural features.
C. Inspection: All materials, fabrication and installations are subject to inspection and
testing by the City of Houston or its designated representative.
1.07 QUALIFICATIONS
13112-3
A. A minimum of five years experience installing and servicing the types of system
described in this specification is required for the Cathodic Protection Contractor.
Install the system by employees of the Cathodic Protection Contractor who have
experience in the installation of water tank systems. All personnel subject to Federal
Substance Abuse and Testing Regulations that satisfy the requirements of DOT 199.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
All materials in contact with the water or exposed to the interior of the tank are to be
classified in accordance with ANSI/NSF 61 “Drinking Water System Components”.
2.01 TRANSFORMER-RECTIFIER
A. Use air-cooled cathodic protection transformer-rectifiers with automatic potential

control.
B. DC Output Ratings: Rate rectifiers as shown on the Drawings. Provide for

continuous, full rated output at an ambient temperature of 45° C, in full sunlight with
an expected life in excess of 10 years.
C. AC Input Ratings: Obtain full rated DC output with an AC input voltage at 5% below
the nominal value. Continuous AC input voltage at 10% above the nominal value
shall not damage the transformer, the diode bridge assembly, or exceed any
component ratings. (Note: This applies provided that the rectifier has not been
previously adjusted to exceed the maximum DC voltage or amperage rating of the
unit.)
D. Cooling: Cool units by natural air convection. Vent cabinets for natural air convection
and screen against insects.
E. Rectifying Elements: For rectifying elements, use silicon diodes sized as follows:
1. The Peak Inverse Voltage (PIV) of the diode to be 300% of the maximum
impressed voltage on the diode or 400 volts, whichever is greater.
2. Configure diodes into a full-wave bridge assembly. Size diodes to carry an

average current of no more than 55% of the manufacturer’s recommended
maximum current rating.
3. Size heat sinks to keep diode case temperatures less than 100° C at rated
rectifier output and at maximum rated ambient temperature.
4. Protect diodes against overload by means of semiconductor fuses, located in

the transformer secondary leg to the diode bridge assembly.
5. Equip diodes with supplemental Metal Oxide Varistor (M.O.V.) surge

arrestors at the diode bridge assembly sized to provide protection against
secondary over- voltage surges.
13112-4
F. AC Circuit Breakers: Provide input overload and short circuit protection by magnetic
trip circuit breakers. Size the circuit breaker to hold 100 percent of rated load. It may
trip between 101 percent and 125 percent of rated load and must trip at 125 percent
and above. This applies to all rectifiers with rated AC input currents greater than 4
amperes. For units rated below 4 amperes, use a 5 ampere rated circuit breaker.
G. Surge Protection: Provide separate AC and DC surge protection by means of high

energy Metal Oxide Varistors rated at 500 joules on DC output and 1000 joules on
the AC input.
H. Electrical Panels: Electrical panel minimum thickness is 0.187" NEMA Grade "XX"
laminated phenolic, rated for Class "B" operation (105° C maximum). Equip rectifiers
rated at 100 amperes DC or higher with panels constructed from a minimum sheet
thickness of 1/4" "UTR" fiberglass reinforced laminate rated for Class "F" operation
(155° C). Either permanently silk-screen onto the panel or use 1/16” lamicoid (plastic
laminate) adhesive labels permanently engraved with white lettering on a black
background, the rectifier instrument panel identifications. Mechanically affix the
adhesive labels to the panel via stainless steel rivets or screws.
I. Connection Hardware: For all electrical hardware, use copper or high conductivity
brass, suitably sized, and finished with electrolyses nickel plating for superior
corrosion resistance. Tightly secure all connections with lock washers and nuts
torqued to manufacturer's recommended specifications. For all electrical connections,
use the “double nut” method to ensure that any compression of the panel material will
not affect the electrical conductivity of the connection.
J. Enclosures:
1. Construct enclosures from a minimum 12 gauge, wiped coat mill galvanized

steel, finished in 3 – 5 mils of polyester fusion bonded powder coating.
2. Use stainless steel hinges and cabinet assembly bolts.
3. Equip enclosures with a pad-lockable draw latch. Latch shall be manufactured

from 12 gauge steel, finished in zinc-dichromate plating. Draw latch shall
accommodate a 3/8 inch shackle padlock.
4. Equip enclosures with a grounding lug sized to accommodate up to a No. 6

AWG conductor.
5. Provide separate conduit knockouts for AC and DC; conveniently located and
adequately sized for input and output conduit connectors.
6. Furnish cabinet with suitable channel brackets for wall or pole mounting.
7. Equip rectifier with slide-out chassis and hinged door, for access to the front
and at least one side of the cabinet.
K. Automatic Controller: Use IR Drop Free automatic controller:
13112-5
1. Automatic controller to adjust current output to compensate for changes in

water level, temperature of water, water chemistry, and cathodic polarization.
2. Control from copper/copper sulfate reference electrodes with a minimum of

two electrodes positioned in the tank. One cell is the operating cell and the
other is for a back up and testing.
3. Reference electrodes to constantly monitor the tank-to-water potential, free of

IR drop.
4. Automatic controller to automatically adjust the current output to maintain the

tank-to-water potential, free of IR drop, to a preset value.
5. Operate within 25 mV of preset value.
6. Automatically limit current to a preset value.
7. Use a digital potential meter to display tank-to-water potential, free of IR

drop.
L. Wet Riser: Provide, if shown on the Drawings, a separate automatic potential

controller for the wet riser. For the automatic controller for the wet riser, use the same
type and install in the same cabinet as the automatic potential controller for the bowl
anode system. The bowl and riser controllers to operate independently of each other
from copper/copper sulfate reference electrodes positioned to monitor the bowl area
and wet riser areas separately.
M. Transformers: Transformers to conform to UL 506, Specialty Transformers and the

following:
1. Isolation transformer designed with separate isolated primary and secondary

windings with a minimum efficiency of 95%.
2. Equip transformer secondary with a minimum of 25 steps of secondary

voltage adjustment (5-COARSE, 5-FINE). Use tap bars for tap adjustment.
3. Rate transformer materials and construction for Class "H" operation (180° C).
Further enhance insulation materials by dipping in thermosetting varnish and
baking.
4. Rate the transformer for a minimum dielectric strength of 2250 volt applied
for one minute between the windings, and between the windings and the core.
N. Miscellaneous:
1. All rectifiers to operate with either a 115 or 230-volt, single phase, 60 hertz
AC input.
13112-6
2. Cathodic Protection Rectifier to be 100% quality control tested as outlined in

this specification.
3. During manufacture, subject the rectifier to frequent visual and performance

testing to ensure a high degree of quality.
4. Subject rectifiers to 100% testing of the following rectifier electrical

parameters:
a. AC input voltage, current, apparent power and true power.
b. DC output current, voltage and power.
c. AC power factor.
d. AC to DC conversion efficiency.
e. Output ripple.
2.02 EXTERNAL DISCONNECT SWITCH
A. General: Locate an AC disconnect switch, external to the rectifier unit immediately

adjacent to the rectifier.
B. Disconnect Switch: Use a fusible, circuit breaker with rainproof enclosure and
lockable cover for incoming 120/240 volt, single phase AC power for external
disconnect. Use Square D, model Q02100NRBCP or approved equal.
C. Label: Clearly label the disconnect switch “Cathodic Protection Power Supply.”
2.03 REFERENCE ELECTRODES
A. General: Reference electrodes to consist of copper-copper sulfate electrodes,

manufactured utilizing a 99.99% pure copper coiled element. The cells are to be
manufactured to remain stable (plus or minus 10 mV) in fresh water for a minimum
of ten years.
B. Lead Wires: Reference cell lead wire to be No. 14 AWG stranded copper wire with
blue, medium density, high molecular weight polyethylene (HMWPE) insulation. The
polyethylene to conform to ASTM D 1248, Type I, Class C, Grade 5. Lead wire to be
terminated at rectifier.
C. Encapsulation: Encapsulate the reference electrode to lead wire connection to prevent

water migration.
2.04 ANODE SUSPENSION SYSTEM
13112-7
A. General: There are two anode suspension systems to be used based upon the source
water for the tank which determines the access requirements for cleaning. Use a
horizontal system for surface water tanks and a vertical system for ground water
tanks.
B. Horizontal System: Comply with ANSI/AWWA Standard D104, Section 4.2.4.2.1

Type A, Horizontal System for anode suspension. Secure a minimum 5/16 inch
diameter polyester cord to steel anchors welded to the side wall of the tank bowl, or
to the exterior of the dry access column of spheroidal type tanks. Tie and tape all cord
to cord connections. For larger capacity tanks, flotation buoys may be used to obtain
more effective patterns of protective current distribution.
C. Vertical System: Comply with ANSI/AWWA Standard D104, Section 4.2.4.2.2. Type
C, Vertical System for anode suspension. Attach the anode lead wire to coated or
stainless steal clevises which are welded or bolted to the roof or roof supports.
2.05 ANODE MATERIAL
A. For the anode, use a copper cored, mixed metal oxide coated titanium wire as
manufactured by Eltech Systems Corporation or approved equal.
B. Anode Substrate: Draw the anode wire to a diameter of 0.062 inches from Grade 1 or
Grade 2 Titanium per ASTM B 348. Clean the substrate and roughen the surface.
Remove all organic materials such as cutting oils, which could interfere with coating
adhesion by cleaning. Achieve surface roughness by chemically etching the substrate
as a minimum. Blasting the substrate may be used in addition to chemical etching, but
not as a substitute. Apply an anti-passivation layer to the substrate prior to application
of the mixed metal oxide coating.
C. Mixed Metal Oxide Coating: Apply an electrocatalytic coating to the prepared

titanium substrate. Coating composition to be iridium oxide and tantalum oxide.
Coordinate the total coating loading requirements with the manufacturer’s proprietary
information to achieve the required performance. The average gain rate for catalyst
application not to exceed 0.16 g/ft2 (1.7 g/m2) and the maximum gain rate for any
single coat not to exceed 0.25 g/ft2 (2.7 g/m2). Measure coating loading using an X-
ray gauge which is calibrated at least once per shift for the specific coating type. This
test directly measures precious metal loading. Simple weight gain is not an acceptable
measure. Test the adhesion of the catalytic coating according to ASTM D 3359. The
manufacturer to certify conformance with these requirements.
D. Connections: Seal all anode to header cable connections to prevent water penetration.
2.06 WIRING
A. Insulate all wiring within the tank as provided with the ANSI/NSF 61 classified
system to prevent copper conductor contact with the potable water. For all wiring on
the exterior of the tank, use stranded copper conductors with TW or THW insulation,
run in rigid, galvanized steel conduit.
13112-8
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PERFORMANCE
A. Perform all work in accordance with the following requirements.
B. General: Install components of the cathodic protection system in the manner and at
the locations as shown on the Drawings prepared by the Corrosion Engineer.
C. Inspection: Have the materials and equipment inspected by the City or its designated
representative prior to installation. Replace any used or defective materials, or
components that do not satisfy the requirements of this specification.
D. Rectifier Mounting: Perform welding of steel rectifier mounting bolts by the Tank
Construction Contractor prior to coating the tank. Furnish drawings and materials to
the Tank Construction Contractor prior to coating.
E. Tank Attachment: All attachments to the interior, wetted surfaces of the tank should
be constructed of non-metallic materials or mild steel that is provided with the same
protective coating system as the tank shell. Where stainless steel accessories are used,
such as ladders or safety rails, the stainless steel shall be electrically isolated from the
tank.
F. Welding, Cutting, Coating: Weld, cut and coat in accordance with AWWA Standards
D 100 and D 102.
G. Electrical Continuity: Assure electrical continuity of all sections of bolted or riveted

tanks by spot welding. Welding to be performed by the Tank Construction
Contractor.
H. Conduit and Wiring: Perform electrical work in accordance with the National
Electrical Code.
I. Lead Wires: Handle and install lead wires to prevent damage from abrasion.
J. Electrical Connections: Seal electrical connections within the tank to prevent water
penetration.
K. Transformer-Rectifier Mounting: Mount the transformer-rectifier with the indicating

meters approximately five feet above grade for monitoring and service purposes.
L. Electrical Service: Provide AC electrical service for the transformer-rectifier unit.

Furnish and install the necessary wiring, conduits, wires, external disconnect switch
and equipment to the service connection.
M. Disinfection: Disinfection is the responsibility of the Tank Construction Contractor.
N. Workmanship: Complete work in a clean and safe manner.
13112-9
O. Tank Closure: Securing of all tank access locations (e.g. hatches) is the responsibility
of the City.
3.02 ENERGIZING SYSTEM
A. General: After the system is installed and the tank is filled, provide startup service
which includes energizing, testing, and adjusting the system for optimum
performance.
B. Notice: Prior to native state, polarized potential testing and commissioning of the
system, give a minimum of 48 hours notice to the City of Houston, Engineering
Project Manager to facilitate observation of the tests by a City representative.
C. Locks: In order to maintain the set parameters for the transformer-rectifier, install a
hardened steel lock for the transformer-rectifier enclosure provided by the City of
Houston, Cathodic Protection Program Administrator. The external disconnect will be
locked by City of Houston Water Production Personnel.
D. Methods: Field test the system by conducting IR drop-free measurements. Measure

“instant off” tank-to-electrolyte potentials to determine system performance and to
adjust the system. Record all tank-to-water potential measurements with the
permanent and with a calibrated, portable, copper-copper sulfate reference electrode
and a portable high impedance voltmeter. Measure a minimum of five locations
within the tank.
E. Reports: Review and evaluation of all test data is to be performed by the Corrosion
Engineer. In addition to the startup service, submit “as-built” drawings and an
Operations and Maintenance Manual to the City of Houston in accordance with
Article 1.05.
END OF SECTION
13112-10
CITY OF HOUSTON CATHODIC PROTECTION FOR
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION NEW TANK BOTTOMS
SECTION 13113
CATHODIC PROTECTION FOR NEW TANK BOTTOMS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Requirements for impressed current cathodic protection systems for the bottom (soil
side) of steel water storage tanks that are constructed at grade level.
B. Specifications for manually controlled transformer-rectifiers, distributed anodes and

permanent reference electrodes.
C. The National Electrical Code (latest edition) is referenced and is part of this
specification.
D. Section 01351 – Environmental Safety and Worker Protection
E. Section 13111 – Cathodic Protection for Water Tank Interiors (Sacrificial Anode)
F. Section 13112 – Cathodic Protection for Water Tank Interiors (ICCP)
G. Section 13201 – Welded Steel Water Storage Tanks
A. No separate measurement and payment for work performed under this Section.
Include the cost for this work in the contract bid price for work of which this is a
component part.
rectifier systems with distributed anode ground bed under the tank. Included are
junction boxes, reference cells, wiring and all excavation, backfill, field welding,
connections, adjustments, testing, cleanup, and other related work necessary for
construction as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
1.04 REFERENCES
13113-1
A. ASTM C 94 - Ready Mixed Concrete

for Wire and Cable
C. ASTM B 348 – Titanium and Titanium Alloy Bars and Billets
D. ASTM D 3359 – Standard Test Methods for Rating Adhesion by Tape Test
E. NEC 70 - National Electrical Code
F. City of Houston Electrical Code
G. NACE International SP0193 –External Cathodic Protection of On- Grade Carbon

Steel Storage Tank Bottoms
H. NACE International SP0169 - Recommended Practice, Control of External Corrosion

on Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems
I. NEMA TC6 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground
Installations
J. NEMA TC9 - Fittings for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities Duct for
Underground Installation
K. NEMA 4 - Type 3R Enclosures
L. UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables
M. UL 467 - Bonding and Grounding Equipment
N. UL 486A-486B - Wire Connectors
O. UL 506 – Specialty Transformers
1.05 SUBMITTALS

under the direct supervision of a Corrosion Engineer who is a Professional Engineer,
registered in the State of Texas with a minimum of ten years experience in cathodic
protection design. A 50- year design life is required for the anode system.
C. Catalog Cuts: Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts for each item. Include the
manufacturer’s name and provide sufficient information to show that the materials
meet the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Where more than one item
or catalog number appears on a catalog cut, clearly identify the item proposed.
13113-2
D. Notice: Give the City of Houston Representative a minimum of 48 hours notice prior
to placing the anodes.
E. Rectifier Operation and Maintenance Manual: Include a complete operation and

maintenance manual with each rectifier shipped to the job site. In addition to
operating instructions, include a circuit diagram and spare parts list. Operate the
rectifier under full load conditions at the factory and thoroughly inspect and test
rectifier by the manufacturer prior to delivery to the job site. Report results of this
testing on a manufacturer’s quality control form and include in the operation manual.
Reference each operating manual by rectifier model number and individual serial
number.
maintenance manuals for the cathodic protection systems. Include in the manuals,
initial test data, operating instructions, maintenance data, product data and test
procedures.

installation and construction. Revise drawings to show exact locations of all anodes,
wiring, connections, terminal boxes and power supplies. Properly identify all items of
equipment and material. Submit the original as-built drawings to the City of Houston
or its designated representative.
A. Provide manufacturer’s certifications that all components of the cathodic protection

systems meet the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Reference the
applicable section of the specifications and the applicable standard details on the
certification.
B. The drawings for the cathodic protection systems are diagrammatic and do not scale
for exact locations unless scales are explicitly stated on the specific drawing. To
determine exact locations, use field conditions, non-interference with other utilities or
mechanical and structural features. Note other existing utilities in the area and during
excavation. Do not damage these utilities. Repair any damaged utilities to the
satisfaction of the City of Houston at the Contractor’s expense.
C. All materials, fabrication and installations are subject to inspection and testing by the
City of Houston or its designated representative.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 IMPRESSED CURRENT ANODES
A. Description: Use mixed metal oxide coated, titanium tubes, as manufactured by

Elgard or approved equal.
13113-3
1. Anode Substrate: Form the tubular anode substrate from Grade 1 or Grade 2
Titanium per ASTM B 348.
2. Mixed Metal Oxide Coating: Deposit an electrocatalytic coating of iridium

oxide on the titanium surface. Specifically design the coating for oxygen
evolution. Do not include ruthenium oxide as a component element of the
coating. Physical properties of the mixed metal oxide to conform to the
following:
Density 0.163 pounds/cubic inch

Melting Point 1260°F
Resistivity 1.0 X 10-5 ohm-cm
Coverage 20-30 m2/gm
3. Size: Tubular anode dimensions to be 1.25” diameter x 48” long.
B. Anode Lead Wire Connection:
1. Use No. 8 AWG, seven strand, copper conductor with HMW/PE insulation for
the anode lead wire.
2. Attach the anode lead wire internally at the longitudinal center of the tubular
anode by use of a brass wedge connector which grips firmly to the internal
circumference of the anode. Protect this connection from moisture intrusion
by filling the entire anode tube with a waterproofing sealant.
3. The resistance of the finished connection not to exceed 0.001 ohms.
4. The pull-out strength of the connection not to be less than the breaking
strength of the No.8 AWG wire or 520 pounds.
C. Anode Canister:
1. Package each anode in a 24 gauge, galvanized steel, spiral crimped canister, 6

inches in diameter by 60-inches long filled with calcined petroleum coke.
2. Place the petroleum coke around the anode and vibrate to achieve maximum
compaction.
3. Cap the cylinder at each end with a ¾ inch plywood cap affixed with sheet
metal screws. The top cap shall have a ½ inch diameter hole drilled in the
center for the anode lead wire.
D. Anode Backfill: Use SWK calcined petroleum coke, as manufactured by Loresco to

fill the canister containing the impressed current anodes. Anode backfill to conform
to the following:
1. Typical Chemical Analysis.
13113-4
Component Percent Composition

Carbon (fixed) 99.35 minimum
Ash 0.6 maximum
Volatiles 0 (950  C)
Moisture 0.05
2. Physical Properties.
a. Bulk Density, pounds/cubic foot 70 pounds/cubic foot
3. Particle Analysis.
a. Range from 0.004 to 0.50 inches.
2.02 RECTIFIERS
A. Cathodic protection rectifiers to be air-cooled, tap adjust Super Custom model as

manufactured by Corrpower, Universal Rectifiers or approved equal conforming to
NEMA MR-20-1958 and listed in the CSA File No. 45382.
B. DC Output Ratings: Rate rectifiers as shown on the drawings. Supply units that are
capable of operating at continuous, full rated output at an ambient temperature of 45°
C, in full sunlight with an expected life in excess of 10 years.
C. AC Input Ratings: Obtain full rated DC output, with an input voltage +10 percent of
the nominal rated input.
D. Cooling: Cool by natural air convection. Vent cabinets for natural air convection and
screen against insects.
E. Voltage Adjustments: Provide adjustment of the output voltage by means of not less
than 25 approximately equal steps of secondary taps from 5 percent of rated voltage
to full-rated voltage.
F. Rectifying Elements: Rectifying elements require silicon diodes sized as follows:
1. Rate diode voltage at 400 volts minimum for rectifier outputs up to 100 VDC,
and 800 volts minimum for rectifiers with outputs from 100 to 200 VDC.
2. Configure diodes into a full-wave bridge assembly. Size diodes to carry a

minimum average current of one half of rated rectifier output.
3. Size heat sinks to keep diode junction temperatures less than 100° C at rated
output and maximum ambient temperature.

13113-5

arrestors at the diode bridge assembly, sized to provide protection against
G. AC Circuit Breakers: Provide input overload and short circuit protection by magnetic
circuit breakers. Size the circuit breaker to hold 100 percent of rated load. It may trip
between 101 percent and 125 percent of rated load and must trip at 125 percent and
above.
H. Surge Protection: Provide separate AC and DC surge protection by means of high

energy Metal Oxide Varistors rated at 500 joules on the DC output and 750 joules on
the AC output.
I. Electrical Panels: Construct electrical panels from a minimum thickness of 1/4"

NEMA "XX" laminated phenolic, rated for Class "B" operation (105° C maximum).
Equip rectifiers rated at 100 amperes DC or higher with panels constructed from a
minimum sheet thickness of 1/4" "UTR" fiberglass reinforced laminate rated for
Class "F" operation (155° C). Permanently silk-screen rectifier front panel
identifications onto the panel.
J. Connection Hardware: Use only copper or high conductivity brass, suitably sized, and
finished in electroless nickel plating for superior corrosion resistance. Tightly secure
all connections with lock washers and nuts torqued to manufacturer’s recommended
specifications.
K. Enclosures:
1. Construct enclosures from a minimum 12 gauge, wiped coat mill galvanized

steel, finished in 3 - 5 mils of polyester fusion bonded powder coating.
3. Equip enclosures with a pad-lockable draw latch. Latch shall be manufactured

from 12 gauge steel, finished in zinc-dichromate plating. Draw latch shall
4. Equip enclosures with a grounding lug sized to accommodate up to a No. 6

AWG conductor.
7. Equip rectifier with slide-out chassis and hinged door, for access to the front
and at least one side of the cabinet.
L. Rectifier Instrumentation:
13113-6
1. Equip rectifier with separate analog ammeter and voltmeter.
2. Meters to be a minimum of 3-1/2" size, with a minimum scale length of 2-7/8"
3. Meters to be 0 - 50 millivolts full scale deflection, taut-band movement with

four- to-one swamping (i.e. internal meter resistance comprised of 25%
winding resistance and 75% fully temperature compensated dropping resistor
for wide temperature range performance).
4. Provide meter with accuracy of + 2% full scale deflection at 25° C.,

temperature compensated to 0.085% per degree C.
5. Scale rectifier meters to have rated output no less than 70%, or greater than
85% of full scale deflection.
6. Meter shunts shall be panel-mounted Holloway type "SW" style, with an

accuracy of +0.25%.
M. Transformers: Construct transformers to meet UL 506, Specialty Transformers and

the following:
1. Transformer designed as full isolation, with separate isolated primary and

secondary windings and a minimum efficiency of 95%.

voltage adjustment (5-COARSE, 5-FINE). Provide tap adjustment by means
of tap bars.
baking.
4. Rate transformer for a minimum dielectric strength of 2250 volts applied for
one minute between the windings, and the core.
N. Current Interrupters: Include a built-in current interrupter rated in accordance with the
capacity of the rectifier unit in the rectifier. Equip the interrupter with a solid-state
timer with independently adjustable "On" and "Off" times. Equip the interrupter with
a switch to enable the operator to operate the rectifier in an interrupt or continuous
mode of output.
O. Miscellaneous:
1. Supply rectifiers capable of operating on either 115 or 230 volt, single phase,
60 hertz AC input.
2. All cathodic protection rectifiers to be 100% quality control tested as outlined

in this specification.
13113-7

testing to assure a high degree of quality.

parameters:
c. AC power factor.
e. Output ripple.
f. Correct operation of optional features such as interrupters, filters, etc.
5. Give each rectifier a final overall visual inspection prior to packaging.
2.03 EXTERNAL DISCONNECT SWITCH
A. General: Locate an AC disconnect switch, external to the rectifier unit immediately

adjacent to the rectifier.
B. Disconnect Switch: Provide a fusible, circuit breaker with rainproof enclosure and
lockable cover for incoming 120/240 volt, single phase AC power. Use Square D,
model Q02100NRBCP or approved equal.
C. Label: Clearly label the disconnect switch “Cathodic Protection Power Supply.”
2.04 DC CABLES
A. Cables: Use seven strand, copper conductors with high molecular weight
polyethylene (HMW/PE) insulation, for rectifier positive and negative cables.
2.05 PERMANENT REFERENCE ELECTRODES
A. Type: Provide two copper/copper sulfate, double membrane, ceramic cells in a

geomembrane package, such as a Permacell Plus or approved equal.
B. Wire: Equip the electrodes with No. 14 AWG stranded copper wire with blue
HMW/PE insulation of suitable length to extend from the center of the tank to the
terminal board of the test station without splicing.
2.06 JUNCTION BOX
A. General: Terminate all wiring from within the ring wall in a junction box equipped
with a phenolic panel and hinged cover.
13113-8
B. Reference Cell: Include insulated, numbered terminal blocks for the reference cell
leads.
C. Test Lead: Include a ground lug for termination of a negative test lead from the tank.
2.07 THERMITE WELD EQUIPMENT
A. Charges and Molds: Use weld charges and mold size as specified by the manufacturer
for the specific surface configuration. Weld charges and molds to be the product of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of such materials.
B. Weld Coating: Coat all bare metal and weld with Stopaq CZ tape.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 ANODES
A. General: Install the cathodic protection system after the Tank Construction Contractor
has constructed the ring wall with the conduit penetration shown on the drawings.
B. Field Location: Contractor is responsible for verifying actual field conditions,

location of underground structures, and assuring adequate physical separation from
other structures and utilities. Determine and verify the exact placement in the field
with a representative of the City of Houston.
C. Anode Placement: Place the anode canisters inside the ring wall in contact with native
soil or fill prior to tank pad construction. Install the anodes a minimum of 24-inches
and maximum of 48-inches below the elevation of the tank bottom. Use the number
of anodes and arrange as shown on the drawings.
D. Anode Handling: Do not handle the anodes by the lead wires nor drop during
transport or placement.
3.02 PERMANENT REFERENCE CELL
A. General: Install the two permanent reference cells at the locations shown on the
drawings.
B. Installation: Install the permanent reference cells as follows:
1. Dig a hole in the soil for placement of the reference cell.
2. Install within one foot of tank bottom.
3. Backfill the cell with select granular material.
4. Compact soil around cell by hand.
5. Saturate the backfilled reference electrode with 5 gallons of water.
13113-9
6. Route the No. 14 AWG lead wire to the conduit penetration of the ring wall.
3.03 JUNCTION BOX
A. General: Route all anode lead wires and reference cell leads through the conduit
penetrating the ring wall and terminate in the junction box. Attach the ground leads to
the exterior of the tank.
B. Installation: Install the junction box as follows:
1. Mount the junction box at the ring wall.
2. Terminate the reference cell lead wires on the numbered, insulated terminal
block. Record the identification number for each cell on the as-built drawing.
3. Terminate the anode leads on the shunts connected to the copper bar.
4. Connect one ground conductor between a tank ground connection and the
ground lug in the junction box.
3.04 BACKFILL
A. Backfilling operation within the ring wall to be performed by the Tank Construction
Contractor. The Tank Construction Contractor to compact the sand while being
careful to avoid damage to the anodes, reference cells and wiring, and shall be
prepared to suspend operations for repair if damage is indicated by inspection during
pad construction.
3.05 WIRE AND CABLE
A. Depth: Install all underground wires and cables a minimum of 24 inches below final
grade with a minimum separation of 12 inches from other underground structures
B. Conduit: Place all positive and negative cables in rigid, galvanized steel conduit when
above-grade.
1. Use insulating bushings at each end of all conduit runs.
2. Extend galvanized steel, rigid conduit 12 inches below grade.
3.06 NEGATIVE CABLE ATTACHMENT
A. Attach the rectifier negative cable by thermite welding.
B. Clean and dry the tank surface to which the wires are to be attached.
C. Use a grinding wheel to remove all coating, mill scale, oxide, grease and dirt from an
area approximately 3 inches square. Clean the surface to bright metal.
13113-10
D. Remove approximately 1 inch of insulation from the end of the wire to be thermite
welded to the tank, exposing clean, oxide-free copper for welding.
E. Using the properly sized, vertical thermite weld mold as recommended by the
manufacturer, place the wire between the graphite mold and the prepared metal
surface.
F. Place the metal disk in the bottom of the mold.
G. Place the thermite weld charge in the mold. Squeeze the bottom of the weld charge
container to spread ignition powder over the charge.
H. Close the mold cover and ignite the starting powder with a flint gun.
I. After the exothermic reaction, remove the thermite weld mold and gently strike the
weld with a hammer to remove the weld slag. Pull on the wire to assure a secure
connection. If the weld is not secure or the wire breaks, repeat the procedure.
J. If the weld is secure, coat all bare metal and weld metal with Stopaq CZ tape. Cover
with a plastic weld cap.
3.07 CATHODIC PROTECTION RECTIFIER
A. Codes: Comply with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and with
all City of Houston and local codes and standards.
B. Mounting: Pole-mount all cathodic protection rectifiers. The pole may be omitted,
and the rectifier mounted on the side of the tank, if approved by the City of Houston
or its designated representative. Install rectifiers at a height of 4 feet above final
grade.
C. Identification: Equip all rectifiers with permanent engraved nameplates which

identify the units with “Cathodic Protection Rectifier, Property of City of Houston.”
D. Conduit: Place all wiring to the rectifier in rigid galvanized steel conduit when run
above grade.
2. Extend galvanized steel, rigid conduit 12 inches below grade.
E. Electrical Service: Provide AC electrical service for each rectifier unit. Furnish and
install the necessary wiring, conduits, wires, external disconnect switch and
equipment to the service connection as required by the local power company.
F. Completion: The installation is not considered complete until the AC and DC wiring
is installed, and the rectifier is capable of operating at full rated load.
3.08 SYSTEM TESTING
13113-11
A. General: After the cathodic protection equipment has been installed, inspect, test and
adjust the system as necessary to achieve compliance with cathodic protection criteria
set forth by NACE International in SP0193.
B. Energization: Initial energizing of the cathodic protection system to be performed by

a Corrosion Engineer.
C. Notice: Prior to native state, polarized potential testing, and commissioning of the
Project Manager to facilitate observation of the tests by a City Representative.
D. Method: The Corrosion Engineer to:
1. Observe native state and polarized (Instant Off) tank-to-soil potentials to

ensure that cathodic protection is being provided to the tank bottom in
accordance with the AMPP criterion.
2. Record tank-to-soil potential measurements on the permanent reference

electrodes and around the perimeter of the tank.
3. Determine if interference exists on nearby structures and, if so, take steps to

mitigate the interference.
E. Verification and Responsibilities:
1. Correct any deficiencies in materials or installation procedures discovered

during the post-installation inspection at the Contractor’s expense.
2. Corrosion Engineer to provide written documentation of any deficiencies

discovered during the post installation inspection.
F. Equipment: Use only cathodic protection testing instruments that are in proper
working order and calibrated according to factory specifications.
G. Locks: In order to maintain the set parameters for the transformer-rectifier, install a
hardened steel lock for the transformer-rectifier enclosure provided by the City of
Houston,Cathodic Protection Program Administrator. The external disconnect will
be locked by City of Houston, Water Production Personnel.
H. Report: Submit a written report in accordance with Article 1.05, Submittals.
END OF SECTION
13113-12
CITY OF HOUSTON WELDED STEEL
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION WATER STORAGE TANKS
SECTION 13201
WELDED STEEL WATER STORAGE TANKS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Design, fabrication, erection, and testing of steel ground water storage tanks, with
steel roof or aluminum geodesic domed roof including concrete ringwall and
compacted sand foundation.
B. Section 02340 – Compacted Sand Fill Under Tank Floor Plate
A. No separate measurement and payment for work performed under this Section. The
Contractor shall include the cost for this work in the contract bid price for work of
which this is a component part.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. AWWA D 100 - Welded Carbon Steel Tanks for Water Storage
B. AWWA B 300 – Hypochlorites
C. AWWA C 207 – Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 in. through 144
in. (100 mm through 3,600mm)
D. AWS B 3.0-77 – Standard for Welding Procedures and Performance Qualification
E. API 650 – Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Storage
F. ASTM A 6 – Standard for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars,
Plates, Shapes and Sheet Piling
G. ASTM A 20 – Standard for Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels
H. ASTM A 307 – Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded
I. ASTM C 509 – Standard Specifications for Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket

and Sealing Material
13201-1
J. ASTM 4940 – Standard Test Method for Conductimetric Analysis of Water Soluble
Ionic Contamination of Blasting Cleaning Abrasives
K. AISC 316 – AISC Manual of Steel Construction
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Design Drawings and Calculations:
B. Contractor shall prepare design drawings on 11-inch x 17-inch or 22-inch x 34-inch

blueline. Submit in accordance with Section 01330. All drawings shall be
dimensioned, easily readable, and adequately referenced. Drawings shall contain the
following minimum information for each tank:
1. Plan view, elevation view, and section views as necessary, drawn to a scale as
required for clarity.
2. Location, size, and type of all wall and roof penetrations.
3. Location and size of all piping, connections, and appurtenances.
4. Fabrication details and details of all connections.
5. Aluminum Dome drawings and calculations, prepared and sealed by a

Professional Engineer licensed in the state of Texas.
6. Material specifications (ASTM designation) and code or standards references.
7. Describe AWS welding procedure proposed for all welds. Indicate welding
process, degrees of bevel and root dimension.
C. Design calculations are to be submitted on 8-1/2" x 11" paper, easily readable and
suitable for easy reproduction.
D. All design drawings and calculations are to be prepared by, or under the direct
supervision of, and officially sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State
of Texas attesting to the conformance with design criteria.
E. Test Reports:
1. Furnish mill test reports.
2. Submit weld test reports prior to initiation of field painting.
F. Aluminum Dome
1. Drawings describing the completed structure and all its components shall be
submitted, complete with materials of construction and typical details, and
accompanied by a Certificate of Design.
13201-2
2. Records certifying the satisfactory inspection of all welds of aluminum

structural components shall be submitted prior to delivery of the fabricated
materials.
A. Design, fabricate, erect, and test in accordance with "AWWA Standard for Welded
Steel Tanks for Water Storage" (AWWA D100), except as modified herein and as
may be shown on plans.
B. Design in accordance with Section 14 of AWWA D100 will NOT be acceptable.
C. Comply with applicable OSHA Rules and Regulations.
D. Tank Design Loads:
1. Dead load plus 15 pounds per square foot live load for roof.
2. Wind load velocity of 110 mph from any direction.
3. No earthquake load required.
4. Design for at least the following load combinations:
a. Dead + water + live or
b. Dead + water + wind or
c. Dead + wind
5. Allowable stresses for load combinations that include wind may be increased
by 1/3 as long as specified allowable for dead load + water + live are not
exceeded.
E. Steel Roof Design:
1. Tank roof to be so supported and erected that no ponding will occur.
2. The roof will have a minimum slope of 3/4 inch per foot.
3. Do not use splices in rafters or beam spans.
4. Design rafters and beams so that
a. Bending stresses do not exceed 15,000 psi
b. Ratio of span to deflection is greater than 180
c. Depth of member is not less than .025 times the span
13201-3
5. Design columns as main members.
6. Roof plates shall be welded on the top side with a full fillet weld on all seams.
7. Roof plates shall be attached to the top angle of the tank with a continuous
fillet weld on the top side only.
8. Tank shells shall have top angles of not less than the following sizes: 35 feet
and smaller diameter - 2 x 2 x 3/16 inches, 35 feet to 60 feet diameter - 2 x 2 x
1/4 inches, larger than 60 feet diameter - 3 x 3 x 3/8 inches.
9. Roof plates of supported cone roofs shall not be attached to the supporting
members.
F. Aluminum Dome Design:
1. The dome supports are to be attached directly to the top of the tank.
Attachment points utilizing slide bearing, low friction pads are not acceptable.
2. The dome structure shall be designed to sustain the loads specified herein,
with allowable stresses as defined in AWWA D100.
3. The load cases to be considered shall be those described below unless more
severe loads are specified by the purchaser.
a. Dead Load - the dead load shall be defined as the weight of the
structure and all material permanently attached to and supported by the
structure.
b. Live Load - The uniform live load shall be 15 psf.
c. Unbalanced Live Load - An unbalanced load of one half of the

uniform load applied to one half of the roof with no live load on the
other half.
d. Wind Load - Wind pressure shall be designed for a wind load velocity
of 110 mph from any direction. Horizontal pressures shall be
considered to act concurrently with vertical pressures.
e. Load Combinations - The loads described above shall be applied to the

dome cover in the following combinations.
(1) Dead Load
(2) Dead Load and Uniform Live Load
(3) Dead Load and Unbalanced Live Load
(4) Dead Load and Wind Load
13201-4
(5) Dead Load, Uniform Live Load and Wind Load
(6) Dead Load, Unbalanced Live Load and Wind Load
f. Temperature- The load combinations listed above shall be considered

for a temperature change of 100 degrees F below the installation
temperature and 100 degrees F above the installation temperature, and
for a material temperature range of 40 degrees F below to 160 degrees
F above zero.
g. Panel Design Load - In addition to the above mentioned loads and load
combinations, the aluminum panels shall be designed for a 250 pound
load distributed over one square foot at any location and a plus or
minus 60 psf load distributed over the entire area of any given panel.
These loads are to be taken as acting separately, from one another and
not simultaneously with other design loads.
h. The tank designer shall be responsible for coordinating the design

requirements for supporting the fixed domed roof on the tank shell,
including wind girder. Consideration shall be given to vertical, radial
and lateral forces from the fixed domed roof. Load eccentricities shall
be considered. The type of connection between the roof and tank shell
shall be fixed.
i. Provide a positive seal at the roof/shell junction to close the gap at the
top of the shell.
j. The exterior wind girder shall be designed to not trap water or create
any difficulties to clean and/or coat. All welds shall be seal welded.
k. No earthquake load required.
G. Aluminum Dome Description:
1. The dome roof shall be clear-span from the periphery structure. The frame
shall consist of aluminum structural members with the joints arrayed on the
surface of a sphere. The arrangement of members shall result in a pattern of
triangular spaces. These spaces shall be closed with light gauge aluminum
panels. The members shall be joined by means of bolting their flanges to
aluminum gusset plates.
2. All metal components of the aluminum dome structure shall be aluminum or

300 series stainless steel. No galvanized, painted, or plated steel shall be used
anywhere in the dome above the mounting bracket base plates. Dissimilar
materials in the supporting structure shall be isolated from the aluminum
dome by means of a compatible elastomeric gasket.
13201-5
3. The entire structure shall be designed as a watertight system under all design
load conditions. The design shall prevent water pooling at the joints through
the use of a flanged hub cover.
4. The aluminum closure panels shall be attached continuously along their edges
to the structural members by means of clamping bars which engage the panels
in an interlocking joint. This clamping bar shall also secure an elastomeric
weather seal gasket which shall form a continuous watertight seal along the
panel edges. The use of panel attachment fasteners which penetrate both the
panel and the flange of the structural member will not be accepted.
5. The exterior finish of aluminum geodesic domes, including plates, batten bars,
hub covers, roof vents, handrails, and roof hatches, shall be "Aluminum
Association Nondirectional Textured, M42, Fine Matte Finish".
6. Acceptable aluminum dome manufacturers are:
a. Conservatek - Conroe, Texas
b. Temcor - Torrance, California
c. Ultraflote - Houston, Texas
A. Conduct performance tests to qualify welders and welding operators in accordance

with AWS B3.0-77
B. Quality control for all welding shall be in accordance with AWWA D100:
1. Field inspection by means of radiographs will be performed by the Owner at

the Owner’s direction and the Owner’s cost.
2. Contractor shall vacuum test all bottom plate welds. Test corner welds by oil
penetrate. Include costs for these tests in the cost of the tank.
3. Radiographs will be performed as recommended by AWWA D100, Section

11.
4. All areas found to be defective shall be repaired by the Contractor at the

Contractor’s expense.
5. Any retesting to check repaired areas will be paid for by the Contractor.
C. The initial supply of water required for leak test shall be supplied by the Owner.
Additional water required for subsequent leak tests shall be at the Contractor's
expense.
13201-6
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Structural and Other Metals:
1. As per AWWA D100 and the Aluminum Association "Specifications for

Aluminum Structures".
B. Accessories as shown on Plans include:
1. Exterior tank ladder, cage, roof hatch, vents, handrails, internal tank ladder,
cathodic protection, drain penetrations, overflow and drain piping.
2. Inlet, outlet, drain piping, and overflow pipe with funnels to be as shown on
plans.
3. Roof Vents:
a. Configuration and materials of construction as shown on plans. Vents

are to be located between rafters.
b. Screens (16 mesh) are to be installed on all vents. Screens for all vents
to be AISC 316 Stainless Steel with 50% opening area and stainless
steel bands.
4. Safety Handrails:
a. Provide in accordance with plans.
5. Overflow Assembly:
a. Size and configuration per plans and welded per AWWA D100.
6. Shell Clean-Out Fittings:
a. Provide flush type shell clean out fittings as shown on plans. Design
and installation to be per AWWA D100 and API 650.
7. Roof Hatches:
a. Install roof hatches as shown on plans. Roof hatches are to be located

between rafters or aluminum dome grid support beams. Hatches are to
be constructed from 0.09" aluminum.
b. All roof hatches shall be provided with a hinged cover and hasp for
locking. The hatch opening shall have a curb at least 4-inches high,
and the cover shall have a downward overlap of at least 2 inches.
8. Piping Connections, Sumps and Drains:
13201-7
a. Provide piping connections, sumps, and drains as shown on plans.
b. For shell or roof penetrations less than three (3) inches diameter, use
3000# half or full forged steel couplings for piping connections unless
shown otherwise on Plans.
c. For shell or roof penetrations three (3) inches in diameter or larger, use
flanged nozzles. Reinforce shell or roof plate as required by AWWA
D100 and API 650. All flanges to be flat face in compliance with
AWWA C207, Class D.
d. Flush type drains and openings, where shown on plans, shall be

designed and installed in accordance with API 650.
9. Personal Safety Equipment
a. For each tank constructed, provide two DBI/SALA model 2000 full-
body, buckle- type harnesses (size XL), two DBI/SALA model
L3300DP shock-absorbing lanyards, three foot length, and two safety
climb connectors.
C. Materials for Aluminum Dome:
The following is a summary of approved materials and/or materials specifications. All

aluminum alloys shall be as defined by the Aluminum Association and published in
the ALUMINUM STANDARDS AND DATA.
1. Bolts and Fasteners - All bolts and fasteners shall be 6061-T6 or 7075-T73
aluminum, or Series 300 stainless steel.
2. Plates and Sheets - Plate and sheet material shall be aluminum alloy 3003-
H16, 3105- H154, 6061.T6 or 5052-H32; Aluminum Association M42, Fine
Matte finish as fabricated. Structural gussets shall be 0.375" nominal
minimum thickness. Aluminum sheet material shall be 0.050" thickness.
3. Structural Shapes - Aluminum structural shapes shall be alloy 6061-T6. The

aluminum structural members shall be a minimum of 6" deep.
4. Miscellaneous Shapes - Miscellaneous aluminum shapes shall be allow 6061-

T6 or 6063-T5.
5. Gaskets - All gaskets shall be Neoprene conforming to ASTM C509 or

silicone, resistant to ozone and shielded from exposure to ultraviolet light.
6. Sealant - All sealants shall be resistant to ozone and ultraviolet light, and
conform with Federal Specification TT-S-00230C.
13201-8
7. Supports - The hinge pin assembly shall be constructed of 300 series stainless
steel. No coatings are required on these pieces. The top mount gusset plate
assembly shall be fabricated from normal carbon steel. All points of
connection between these plates and between the pieces and the tank shell
shall be seal welded. Coat all carbon steel with interior tank work. This
interface detail shall be coordinated between the dome manufacturer and the
tank manufacturer.
8. Safety Equipment for each dome (or approved equal):
a. Two DBI/SALA model 2000 full-body, buckle-type harnesses (size

XL).
b. Two DBI/SALA model L3300DP shock-absorbing lanyards, three foot

length.
c. Four DBI/SALA model LS1441 rope grabs for 5/8" dia. nylon rope.
d. Four lengths of 5/8" dia nylon safety rope. Two ropes to be used to
repel from center roof bollard to wind girder and two ropes 25' in
length.
e. Four DBI/SALA model L338 wire rope grabs for 3/8" dia. SST cable.
f. Three 3/8" dia. SST cables; one from platform to center bollard, two
from center bollard to roof vents (secure cable at both ends).
9. Dome Patch Kit:
a. 10- 6" x 6" patches (to be constructed from excess panel material)
b. Caulk (as required for the above patches)
c. Rivets (as required for above patches)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 JOINT FABRICATION
A. Tank Shell: Butt Welds.
B. Steel Roof and Bottom: Lap Weld.
C. Roof Framing: As specified by aluminum dome manufacturer for aluminum roof and
tank designer for steel tanks.
3.02 FIELD ERECTION
A. Tank Foundation:
13201-9
1. Tank foundations shall consist of:
a. Sand cushion within a concrete ringwall.
b. Sand cushion shall meet the requirements of Section 02340 -

Compacted Sand Fill Under Tank Floor Plate.
c. Sand shall not be saturated with oil.
d. Installation shall be as shown on Plans.
e. Install asphalt pad expansion joint material between tank bottom and
foundation for tanks with external cathodic protection. For tanks
without external cathodic protection, install pad over entire tank
foundation, including ringwall and sand cushion. Asphalt pad material
shall meet the requirements of Section 13204 - Asphaltic Fiber
Expansion Joint Filler.
f. Pad joints to be sealed as shown on plans.
2. Sitework:
a. The site should be graded such that positive surface drainage away
from the work areas is established and maintained at all times.
b. Water should not be allowed to pond on the surface during

construction.
c. The surface soils are moisture sensitive. If wet, such soils will become
unstable and unable to support construction efforts.
d. Failure to keep sandy and silty surface soils drained may necessitate
chemical stabilization at Contractor's expense.
3. Sand material under the tank floor:
a. Free of water soluble ionic contamination (salt). Salt content of the

sand shall be determined and limited in accordance with ASTM 4940-
89. Additional requirements per Section 02340 - Compacted Sand Fill
Under Tank Floor Plate.
b. Compacted to density specified and of the gradation described in

Section 02340 - Compacted Sand Fill Under Tank Floor Plate.
c. In a written report to the Engineer, Contractor to provide elevation

data to verify crown at center of tank and slope of sand cushion.
Provide report prior to installation of floor plate.
4. Cement stabilized sand:
13201-10
a. Placed as indicated on the Plans.
b. Placed and compacted within 2 hours or initial set, whichever occurs

first.
5. Concrete ringwall:
a. Installed with one (1) continuous concrete pour.
b. Formed on both sides.
c. Ringwalls and slabs after grouting or before placing the joint filler
shall be level within ∀ 1/8-inch in any 30-feet circumference under the
shell. The levelness on the circumference shall not vary by more than
∀ 1/4-inch from an established plane. The tolerance on poured
concrete before grouting shall be ∀ 1-inch Contractor to record and
furnish written report to Engineer prior to installation of floor plate.
B. Steel Reservoirs:
1. All steel reservoirs and appurtenances to be constructed per AWWA D100

and applicable portions of API 650, Section 5.5, except Contractor may elect
to suspend the requirement for rolling of shell plate provided all erection
tolerance requirements of this specification are met.
2. Square and bevel all shell plates prior to delivery to the job site.
3. Assemble and weld plates to maintain proper curvature.
4. No de-coiled steel shall be used in the tank shell construction.
5. Roll top angle to the curvature of the tank for steel roof tanks prior to
shipment to the job site.
6. The tank will be measured for conformance to the criteria stated below at
various times throughout construction. Construction of the tank may be halted
by the Engineer and corrections required prior to re-commencement of
construction should deficiencies be noted in one or more of the criteria.
7. Plumbness: The maximum out-of plumbness of the top of the shell relative to
the bottom of the shell shall not exceed 1/200 of the total tank height. The out-
of plumbness in one shell plate shall not exceed the permissible variations for
flatness and waviness as specified in ASTM A6 or ASTM A20, whichever is
applicable.
8. Roundness: Radii measured at 1 foot above the bottom corner weld shall not
exceed the following tolerances:
13201-11
Tank Diameter
(feet) Radius Tolerance
0-40 feet + 1/2 inch
40-150 feet + 3/4 inch
150-250 feet + 1 inch
250 feet and over + 1-1/4 inch
9. Peaking and Banding: Local deviations from the theoretical shape (for
example, weld discontinuities and flat spots) shall be limited as follows:
a. Peaking at vertical weld joints shall not exceed 1/2 inch. Peaking at
vertical weld joints shall be determined using a horizontal sweep board
36 inches long.
b. Banding at horizontal weld joints shall not exceed 1/2 inch. Banding at
horizontal weld joints shall be determined using a vertical sweep board
36 inches long.
c. Flat spots measured in the vertical plane shall not exceed the
appropriate plate flatness and waviness requirements given in ASTM
A6 and A20, whichever is applicable.
10. Measurements: Measurements listed in items above shall be taken as each

tank ring is completed. Contractor shall repair defects, correct alignments and
take other corrective actions as required to ensure each tank ring is
constructed in strict compliance with these specifications prior to proceeding
with additional tank rings.
C. Aluminum Dome
1. No equipment shall be supplied or installed by any manufacturer not regularly

engaged in the manufacturing and production of domes in the size and
character herein specified. The manufacturer must have installed and had in
satisfactory use for a period not less than ten (10) years at least five (5) domes
of the same type as units specified herein.
2. All work shall be executed by skilled mechanics, with supervision

experienced in the erection of domes. The dome shall be erected plumb and
level and in proper alignment. The dome erector shall provide satisfactory
evidence of the successful installation of at least five (5) domes of the same
type as specified herein.
3. The aluminum dome roof shall be leak tested utilizing a low pressure soap
bubble test procedure as follows:
a. Test Setup and Equipment
13201-12
(1) Blind or otherwise cover any vents, hatches, piping

inlets/outlets, etc. in the dome or tank.
(2) Connect a compressor to the hose bib in the tank shell.
(3) Locate a manometer near the hose bib or other convenient

location, to verify the internal pressure achieved during the
test.
(4) Pressurize the interior of the tank and maintain between 1/2-
inch and 1-inch water column positive pressure throughout the
test.
(5) Carry out the soap bubble test, described below.
b. Test Procedure
(1) Apply a soap solution to the strut caps, hub covers, and splices
between aluminum sheeting, as well as at hatch frames and
other joints that may be subject to allowing rainwater
infiltration into the tank interior.
(2) Observe the treated joints for bubble formation.
(3) If soap bubbles form at a given point, that joint will be cleaned,
prepped, repaired, and retested by applying additional soap
solution.
(4) The interface of the dome flashing with the tank windgirder
will not be tested, as rainwater will not tend to infiltrate the
tank at this location.
c. Acceptance Criteria
(1) Joints along the exterior surface of the dome which do not
evidence any soap bubble formation shall be deemed water-
tight.
D. Cleanliness:
1. Provide proper sanitary waste facilities.
2. Only healthy personnel may enter tank.
3. If necessary, Owner's physician will judge physical fitness of all persons

entering tank.
4. Keep interior of tank and accessories clean and free from foreign matter.
3.03 MONITORING TANK SETTLEMENT
13201-13
A. Tank settlement for new tanks is to be monitored by the Contractor during initial
filling of the tank. The tank monitoring program shall conform to the following
minimum requirements:
1. All survey data must be sealed and certified by a Registered Professional

Surveyor or Licensed Engineer in the State of Texas.
2. Establish eight (8) reference points at the top of the concrete ringwall
foundation, equally spaced around the periphery. One point shall be located at
or near the suction sump(s).
3. Record the initial elevation at these eight points when tank erection is
complete and before filling with water.
4. Record the elevations at the eight (8) points when tank is full to overflow.
5. Record elevations again approximately 24 hours after tank is filled.
6. Submit each set of tank readings to the City for review.
7. If the tank settles more than two inches in any location, Contractor shall at
Contractor’s expense adjust piping connections at couplings so as not to
exceed the piping alignment tolerances of the couplings.
8. Submit each set of tank readings to the City for review.
9. Elevations are to be related to benchmarks shown on the Plans.
END OF SECTION
13201-14
CITY OF HOUSTON REHABILITATION OF WELDED
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION STEEL WATER STORAGE TANKS
SECTION 13202
REHABILITATION OF WELDED STEEL WATER STORAGE TANKS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Fabricate materials and make repairs to steel water storage tanks.
A. Section 01576 – Waste Material Disposal
B. Section 02136 – Waste Material Handling, Testing and Disposal
C. Section 02662 – Piping, Valves, Fittings, and Accessories for Water Storage Tanks
A. No separate measurement and payment for work performed under this Section except
as indicated in paragraphs 1.03.B and 1.03.C. The Contractor shall include the cost
for this work in the contract bid price for work of which this is a component part.
B. Measure "extra shell plates, all sizes, all thickness, including removal and disposal of
old plates" by pounds, complete in place. Pay for "extra shell plates, all sizes, all
thickness, including removal and disposal of old plates" by unit price bid per pound.
C. Measure "extra floor plates, all sizes, all thickness, including sand fill, including
removal and disposal of old plates and underlying fill" by pounds, complete in place.
Pay for "extra floor plates, all sizes, all thickness, including sand fill, including
removal and disposal of old plates and underlying fill" by unit bid per pound.
D. Measure "extra roof plates, all sizes, all thickness, including removal and disposal of
old plates" by pounds, complete in place. Pay for "extra roof plates, all sizes, all
thickness, including removal and disposal of old plates" by unit price bid per pound.
E. Measure "extra roof rafters, and clips including removal and disposal of old
members" by pounds. Pay for "extra structural members, roof rafters, and all
supporting structures, all shapes, all sizes including removal and disposal of old
members" by unit price bid per pound.
F. Measure "extra 6-in. diameter floor patches including welding in place and grinding
smooth" by each patch. Pay for "extra 6-in. diameter floor patches including welding
in place and grinding smooth" by unit price bid per pound.
1.04 REFERENCES
13202-1
A. AWWA D 100 - Welded Carbon Steel Tanks for Water Storage
B. AWWA B 300 – Hypochlorites
C. AWWA C 207 – Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 in. through 144
in. (100 mm through 3,600mm)
D. AWS B 3.0-77 – Standard for Welding Procedures and Performance Qualification
E. API 650 –Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Storage
F. API 653 –Tank Inspection, Repair, Alteration and Reconstruction
G. ASTM A 307 – Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded
H. ASTM C 509 – Standard Specifications for Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket

and Sealing Material
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal Drawings and Calculations:
1. Dimensioned, easily readable, and adequately referenced.
2. Plan view, elevation view, and sectional views as necessary.
3. Location, size, and type of all wall and roof penetrations.
4. Location and size of all piping, connections, and appurtenances.
5. Fabrication details and details of all connections.
6. Aluminum dome drawings and calculations, prepared and sealed by a

Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Texas.
7. Material specifications (ASTM designation) and code or standards references.
8. Describe AWS welding procedure proposed for full penetration welds.

Indicate welding process, degrees of bevel and root dimension.
B. Test Reports: Furnish mill test reports.
C. Aluminum Dome
1. Drawings describing the completed structure and all its components shall be
submitted, complete with materials of construction and typical details, and
accompanied by a Certificate of Design.
13202-2
2. Records certifying the satisfactory inspection of all welds of aluminum

structural components shall be submitted prior to delivery of the fabricated
materials.
A. Design, fabricate, erect, and test in accordance with "AWWA Standard for Welded
Steel Tanks for Water Storage" (AWWA D100), except as modified herein.
Minimum plate thickness and size of structural members are shown on the drawings.
B. Design in accordance with Section 14 of AWWA D100 will not be acceptable.
C. Comply with applicable OSHA Rules and Regulations.
D. Modifications and repairs shall conform to American Petroleum Institute=s (API)

Standard 653 - Tank Inspection, Repair, Alteration, and Reconstruction, where
possible.
E. Aluminum Dome Retrofit Design:
1. The dome supports are to be attached directly to the top of the tank.
Attachment points utilizing slide bearing, low friction pads are not acceptable.
2. The entire dome structure shall be designed to sustain the loads specified
herein, with allowable stresses as defined in AWWA D100.
3. The load cases to be considered shall be those described below unless more
severe loads are specified by the purchaser.
a. Dead Load - the dead load shall be defined as the weight of the
structure and all material permanently attached to and supported by the
structure.
b. Live Load - The uniform live load shall be 15 psf.
c. Unbalanced Live Load - An unbalanced load of one half of the

uniform load applied to one half of the roof with no live load on the
other half.
d. Wind Load - Wind pressure shall be designed for a wind load velocity
of 110 mph from any direction. Horizontal pressures shall be
considered to act concurrently with vertical pressures.
e. Load Combinations - The loads described above shall be applied to the

dome cover in the following combinations.
(1) Dead Load
(2) Dead Load and Uniform Live Load
13202-3
(3) Dead Load and Unbalanced Live Load
(4) Dead Load and Wind Load
(5) Dead Load, Uniform Live Load and Wind Load
(6) Dead Load, Unbalanced Live Load and Wind Load
f. Temperature- The load combinations listed above shall be considered

for a temperature change of 100 degrees F below the installation
temperature and 100 degrees F above the installation temperature, and
for a material temperature range of 40 degrees F below to 160 degrees
F above zero.
g. Panel Design Load - In addition to the above mentioned loads and load
combinations, the aluminum panels shall be designed for a 250 pound
load distributed over one square foot an any location and a plus or
minus 60 psf load distributed over the entire area of any given panel.
These loads are to be taken as acting separately, from one another and
not simultaneously with other design loads.
h. The dome designer shall be responsible for coordinating the design

requirements for supporting the fixed domed roof on the existing tank
shell, including the wind girder to be added. Consideration shall be
given to vertical, radial and lateral forces from the fixed domed roof.
Load eccentricities shall be considered. The type of connection
between the roof and tank shell shall be fixed.
i. Provide a positive seal at the roof/shell junction to close the gap at the
top of the shell.
j. The exterior wind girder shall be designed to not trap water or create
any difficulties to clean and/or coat. All welds shall be seal welded.
k. No earthquake load required.
F. Aluminum Dome Description (for tanks to receive retrofit):
1. The dome roof shall be clear-span from the periphery structure. The frame
shall consist of aluminum structural members with the joints arrayed on the
surface of a sphere. The arrangement of members shall result in a pattern of
triangular spaces. These spaces shall be closed with light gauge aluminum
panels. The members shall be joined by means of bolting their flanges to
aluminum gusset plates.
13202-4
2. All metal components of the aluminum dome structure shall be aluminum or

300 series stainless steel. No galvanized, painted, or plated steel shall be used
anywhere in the dome above the mounting bracket base plates. Dissimilar
materials in the supporting structure shall be isolated from the aluminum
dome by means of a compatible elastomeric gasket.
3. The entire structure shall be designed as a watertight system under all design
load conditions. The design shall prevent water pooling at the joints through
the use of a flanged hub cover.
4. The aluminum closure panels shall be attached continuously along their edges
to the structural members by means of clamping bars which engage the panels
in an interlocking joint. This clamping bar shall also secure an elastomeric
weather seal gasket which shall form a continuous watertight seal along the
panel edges. The use of panel attachment fasteners which penetrate both the
panel and the flange of the structural member will not be accepted.
5. The exterior finish of aluminum geodesic domes shall be "Aluminum

Association Nondirectional Textured, M42, Fine Matte Finish".
6. Acceptable aluminum dome manufacturers are:
a. Conservatek - Conroe, Texas
b. Temcor - Torrance, California
c. Ultraflote - Houston, Texas
A. Conduct performance tests to qualify welders and welding operators in accordance

with AWS B3.0-77.
B. Quality control for all welding shall be in accordance with AWWA D100:
1. Field inspection by means of radiographs will be performed by the Owner at

Owner’s direction and Owner’s cost.
2. Radiographs will be performed as recommended by AWWA D100, Section

11.
3. All areas found to be defective shall be repaired by the Contractor at the

Contractor’s expense.
4. Any retesting to check repaired areas will be paid for by the Contractor.
C. Water required for additional leak test shall be at Contractor's expense.
13202-5
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Structural and Other Metals: As per AWWA D100 and Aluminum Association
"Specifications for Aluminum Structures".
B. Accessories as shown on Plans include:
1. Exterior tank ladder, cage, roof hatch, vents, cathodic protection, interior
ladder, handrails, drain penetrations, overflow and drain piping.
2. Inlet, outlet, drain piping, and overflow pipe with funnels to be as shown on
plans.
3. Roof Vents:
a. Configuration and materials of construction as shown on plans. Vents

are to be located between rafters.
b. Screens (16 mesh) are to be installed on all vents. Screens for all vents
to be AISI 316 Stainless Steel with 50% opening area and stainless
steel bands.
4. Safety Handrails: Provide in accordance with plans.
5. Overflow Assembly: Size and configuration per plans and welded per AWWA
D100.
6. Shell Clean Out Fittings: Provide flush type shell clean out fittings as shown
on plans. Design and installation to be per AWWA D100 and API 650.
7. Roof Hatches:
a. Install roof hatches as shown on plans. Roof hatches are to be located

between rafters or aluminum dome grid support beams. Hatches are to
be constructed from .09" aluminum.
b. All roof hatches shall be provided with a hinged cover and hasp for
locking. The hatch opening shall have a curb at least 4-inches high,
and the cover shall have a downward overlap of at least 2 inches.
8. Piping Connections, Sumps and Drains:
a. Provide piping connections, sumps, and drains as shown on plans.
b. For shell or roof penetrations less than 3 inches diameter, use 3000#
half or full forged steel couplings for piping connections unless shown
otherwise on Plans.
13202-6
c. For shell or roof penetrations 3 inches in diameter or larger, use

flanged nozzles. Reinforce shell or roof plate as required by AWWA
D100 and API 650. All flanges to be flat face in compliance with
AWWA C207, Class D.
d. Flush type drains and openings, where shown on plans, shall be

designed and installed in accordance with API 650.
9. Foundation Sealant: Pad joints to be sealed with Gulf State No. 210 Mastic
Sealant or equal.
10. Personal Safety Equipment
a. For each tank constructed, provide two DBI/SALA model 2000 full-
body, buckle- type harnesses (size XL), two DBI/SALA model
L3300DP shock-absorbing lanyards, three foot length, and two safety
climb connectors.
C. MATERIALS FOR ALUMINUM DOME:
The following is a summary of approved materials and/or materials specifications. All

aluminum alloys shall be as defined by the Aluminum Association and published in
the ALUMINUM STANDARDS AND DATA.
1. Bolts and Fasteners - All bolts and fasteners shall be 6061-T6 or 7075-T73
aluminum, or Series 300 stainless steel.
2. Plates and Sheets - Plate and sheet material shall be aluminum alloy 3003-
H16, 3105- H154, 6061.T6 or 5052-H32; Aluminum Association M42, Fine
Matte finish as fabricated. Structural gussets shall be 0.375" nominal
minimum thickness. Aluminum sheet material shall be 0.050" thickness.
3. Structural Shapes - Aluminum structural shapes shall be alloy 6061-T6. The

aluminum structural members shall be a minimum of 6" deep.
4. Miscellaneous Shapes - Miscellaneous aluminum shapes shall be allowed

6061-T6 or 6063- T5.
5. Gaskets - All gaskets shall be Neoprene conforming to ASTM C509 or

silicone, resistant to ozone and shielded from exposure to ultraviolet light.
6. Sealant - All sealants shall be resistant to ozone and ultraviolet light and
conform with Federal Specification TT-S-00230C.
13202-7
7. Supports - The hinge pin assembly shall be constructed of 300 series stainless
steel. No coatings are required on these pieces. The top mount gusset plate
assembly shall be normal carbon steel. All points of connection between these
plates and between the pieces and the tank shell shall be seal welded. This
interface detail shall be coordinated between the dome manufacturer and the
tank manufacturer.
8. Safety Equipment for each dome (or approved equal):
a. Two DBI/SALA model 2000 full-body, buckle-type harnesses (size

XL).
b. Two DBI/SALA model L3300DP shock-absorbing lanyards, three-

foot length.
c. Four DBI/SALA model LS1441 rope grabs for 5/8" dia. nylon rope.
d. Four lengths of 5/8" dia nylon safety rope. Two ropes to be used to
repel from center roof bollard to wind girder and two ropes 25' in
length.
e. Four DBI/SALA model L338 wire rope grabs for 3/8" dia. SST cable.
f. Three 3/8" dia. SST cables; one from platform to center bollard, two
from center bollard to roof vents (secure cable at both ends).
9. Dome Patch Kit:
a. 10- 6" x 6" patches (to be constructed from excess panel material)
b. Caulk (as required for the above patches)
c. Rivets (as required for above patches)
D. Temporary Closures:
1. All material required for the closure and protection of tank inlet and outlet
piping that is not to be removed shall be furnished and properly installed by
the Contractor.
2. Blind flanges for temporary closures to be per AWWA C207, Class B. Bolting
to be per ASTM A307, Grade B. Gaskets to be 1/8-inch red rubber, full face
and factory cut.
3. Disinfectant to be calcium hypochlorite meeting the requirements of the

AWWA "Standard for Hypochlorites" (AWWA B300).
4. Water for flushing or disinfection of plant piping systems to meet the Texas
Department of Health Standard for potable water.
13202-8
5. Chlorine neutralizing chemical (e.g. sulfur dioxide, sodium bisulfite, sodium

sulfite, etc.), if required for residual reduction for heavily chlorinated water,
are to be of grade and analysis approved by the City.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 JOINT FABRICATION
A. Tank Shell: Butt Welds.
B. Roof and Bottom: Lap Weld.
C. Roof Framing: As specified by aluminum dome manufacturer for aluminum roof and
tank designer for steel tanks.
3.02 FIELD ERECTION
A. Tank Rehabilitation Items:
1. Contractor shall fabricate and install ladders, cages, roof hatches, vents,
cathodic systems, level sensing equipment and other appurtenances that may
be shown on the plans.
2. Roll plates, top angle, and wind girder to curvature of tank, and handle and
deliver materials so that they maintain shape and are not crimped or have
"broken back."
3. Assemble and weld plates to maintain proper curvature.
4. Where partial replacement of roof plates is called for on the plans the
Contractor shall sweep blast the entire area. When sweep blasting is complete
the Engineer will inspect the roof and identify the areas of the roof that are to
be replaced.
5. Where partial replacement of the rafters is called for on the plans the
Contractor shall sweep blast all the rafters. When the sweep blasting is
complete the Engineer will inspect the rafters and identify which rafters are to
be replaced.
6. Where patching of floors is required, the Engineer will inspect the floor for
pitting and metal loss after the substrate has been blasted. The Engineer will
identify all pitted areas to be patched with a minimum 6" diameter steel plate
patch. The patch is to be welded all around and ground smooth prior to
application of the specified coating. If the Contractor identifies pitted or
corroded areas during the Contractor’s blasting operation, the Contractor shall
notify the Engineer immediately.
B. Aluminum Dome
13202-9
1. No equipment shall be supplied or installed by any manufacturer not regularly

engaged in the manufacturing and production of domes in the size and
character herein specified. The manufacturer must have installed and had in
satisfactory use for a period not less than ten (10) years at least five (5) domes
of the same type as units specified herein.
2. All work shall be executed by skilled mechanics, with supervision

experienced in the erection of domes. The dome shall be erected plumb and
level and in proper alignment. The dome erector shall provide satisfactory
evidence of the successful installation of at least five (5) domes of the same
type as specified herein.
3. The aluminum dome roof shall be leak tested utilizing a low-pressure soap
bubble test procedure as follows:
a. Test Setup and Equipment
(1) Blind or otherwise cover any vents, hatches, piping

inlets/outlets, etc. in the dome or tank.
(2) Connect a compressor to the hose bib in the tank shell.
(3) Locate a manometer near the hose bib or other convenient

location, to verify the internal pressure achieved during the
test.
(4) Pressurize the interior of the tank and maintain between 1/2-
inch and 1-inch water column positive pressure throughout the
test.
(5) Carry out the soap bubble test, described below.
b. Test Procedure
(1) Apply a soap solution to the strut caps, hub covers, and splices
between aluminum sheeting, as well as at hatch frames and
other joints that may be subject to allowing rainwater
infiltration into the tank interior.
(2) Observe the treated joints for bubble formation.
(3) If soap bubbles form at a given point, that joint will be cleaned,
prepped, repaired, and retested by applying additional soap
solution.
(4) The interface of the dome flashing with the tank windgirder
will not be tested, as rainwater will not tend to infiltrate the
tank at this location.
13202-10
c. Acceptance Criteria
(1) Joints along the exterior surface of the dome which do not
evidence any soap bubble formation shall be deemed water-
tight.
C. Cleanliness:
1. Provide proper sanitary waste facilities.
2. Only healthy personnel may enter tank.
3. If necessary, Owner's physician will judge physical fitness of all persons

entering tank.
4. Keep interior of tank and accessories clean and free from foreign matter.
3.03 EXTERIOR PIPING AND VALVES
A. General handling and preparation of exterior piping and valves will be done in
accordance with Section 02662 - Piping, Valves, Fittings and Accessories for Water
Storage Tanks.
3.04 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL
A. The City will remove from service and drain or cause to be drained the water from the
existing tank prior to release to the Contractor for rehabilitation. Water and deposits
left in the tank subsequent to draining are to be removed and disposed of by the
Contractor. All waste disposal to be in accordance with Section 01576 - Waste
Material Disposal and 02136 - Waste Material Handling, Testing and Disposal.
END OF SECTION
13202-11
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION TANK CLEAN-UP AND DISINFECTION
SECTION 13203
TANK CLEAN-UP AND DISINFECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Clean-up and disinfection of the rehabilitated storage tanks and/or new storage tanks
complete with all required disinfecting and neutralizing chemicals, and all equipment,
labor and superintendence.
A. No separate measurement and payment for work performed under this Item.
B. The Contractor shall include the cost for this work in the contract bid price for work
1.03 REFERENCES
A. AWWA B 300 – Standard for Hypochlorites
B. AWWA C 651 – Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains
C. AWWA C 652 – Standard for Disinfection of Water Storage Facilities
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to starting disinfection work, furnish to Engineer a detailed outline of proposed

sequence of work, manners of filling and flushing units, source and quality of water
to be used, and disposal of wastewater.
B. Submit material data sheets on all disinfectants and neutralization chemicals to be

used.
A. Bacteriological Sampling and Testing:
1. Bacteriological sampling and water quality testing of disinfected tank to be

conducted by Water Quality Control Branch, Public Utility Division of the
City of Houston, Houston Public Works.
2. Results to be acceptable to City of Houston.
3. Tank to be verified free of coliform bacteria contamination. Work to be in

accordance with AWWA C652, Disinfection of Water Storage Facilities, as
applicable.
13203-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
4. Methods of bacteriological analysis are as specified in the Standard Methods

for Examination of Water and Wastewater by the American Public Health
Association, latest edition.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DISINFECTANT
A. Disinfectant to be calcium hypochlorite meeting the requirements of the AWWA

B300 "Standard for Hypochlorites".
2.02 WATER
A. Water for the first tank washdown, disinfection, fill and testing of piping to meet the
TCEQ Standards for potable water will be provided by the City.
B. The Contractor may be required to pay for water required for refill or retesting due to
failures in workmanship caused by the Contractor discovered during initial testing.
2.03 CHLORINE NEUTRALIZING CHEMICALS
A. Chlorine neutralizing chemicals (e.g. sulfur dioxide, sodium bisulfite, sodium sulfite,
etc.), if required for residual reduction of heavily chlorinated water, are to be of grade
and analysis approved by the City. Provide the City with standard operating
procedures for neutralizing any chlorine prior to discharge. Contractor shall
determine if a TPDES permit is required for discharge. If discharging to existing
sewer, Contractor shall ensure that existing capacity is sufficient to prevent backup
from occurring. Provide the Owner with standard operating procedures neutralizing
any chlorine prior to discharge.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CLEAN-UP
A. Remove all construction equipment, scaffolding, planks, tools, rags, paint containers,
erection lugs, brackets weld burrs, weld spatter, or other materials not part of the tank
structure.
B. Clean tank of dirt, blast products, and debris by sweeping, scrubbing, vacuuming or
equally effective measures.
C. Hose down tank interior (walls, roof and floor) with potable water to remove
remaining foreign materials.
D. Collect and properly dispose of all accumulated rinse water and associated solids.
3.02 DISINFECTION
13203-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. General:
1. All inside surfaces of the tank including roof, rafters and other structural
members above the high water level but excluding the tank overflow piping
are to be disinfected. Thoroughly rinse chlorinated water from roof and rafters
prior to the filling of the tank.
B. Initial Disinfection Procedure:
1. Spray and/or brush interior of tank with chlorine solution of one pound of 65
percent calcium hypochlorite to 100 gallons of water.
2. Thoroughly coat all surfaces including inlet and outlet piping up to and
including first block valve.
3. Surfaces to be disinfected to remain in contact with disinfectant solution for a

minimum of 30 minutes.
4. After minimum contact time has elapsed, disinfected surfaces to be flushed by

hosing down with potable water.
C. Secondary Disinfection Procedure:
1. Fill tank with water, furnished by Owner, to approximately eight feet above
the tank floor.
2. Add 65% calcium hypochlorite in solution to obtain a 5 ppm residual in the

eight feet of water in the tank as follows:
3. Use the following formula to calculate weight of 65% Calcium Hypochlorite

to use to obtain 5ppm:
(Total weight of water) X (5 ppm)

(1,000,000) X (.65)
4. Fill the tank with water to top of overflow.
5. Let stand for a minimum of 24 hours or until the chlorine residual is less than
or equal to 4 ppm.
6. Tests for leakage shall be made at this time.
7. In the event leaks occur, water shall be lowered to two feet below the point the
leaks occur.
8. After repairs, the process shall be repeated.
D. Water Sampling:
13203-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Water samples are to be taken from the tank by the Owner for bacteriological
and quality analyses.
2. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when the tank is ready to be sampled.
3. All sampling to be done during normal business working hours.
E. Additional Testing Requirements:
1. Repeat disinfection procedure, if necessary, at Contractor's expense until

acceptable water samples are obtained.
2. Contractor responsible for disposing of chlorinated water.
3. Responsibility to include the obtaining of any necessary permits and all

required neutralizing chemicals.
4. After the bacteriological criteria have been satisfied, the water in the tank
must have a chlorine residual of less than 2.0 ppm before the tank is placed in
service.
5. A Partial Certificate of Substantial Completion will be issued for each tank.

The Contractor shall complete all requirements for bacteriological testing, fill
the tank for use by the City, restore tank site, and complete all other ancillary
construction to obtain the Certificate of Substantial Completion. The
Contractor shall complete all incorrect or incomplete items cited with each
Partial Certificate of Substantial Completion within 30 days.
3.03 DISINFECTION OF PLANT PIPING
A. General:
1. Furnish pump, pipe connections and necessary apparatus, gauges and meters.
2. Furnish necessary labor, assistance and chlorination agent for disinfection.
B. Contamination Control:
1. Prevent admission of contaminated water to previously disinfected units.
2. If contaminated water is admitted to previously disinfected units, disinfect

these units at no additional cost to Owner.
C. Disinfect:
1. In accordance with applicable sections of AWWA C651, Disinfecting Water

Mains and as follows:
a. Chlorine dose, 50 mg/l minimum.
13203-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
b. Retain chlorine water in system until completion of hydrostatic tests.

Minimum retention period to be 24 hours.
c. Following chlorination, flush treated water from piping until

replacement water has chlorine content not more than 0.1 mg/l in
excess of residual in water from supply line, and in any event not more
than 0.2 mg/l total.
d. If initial treatment results in an unsatisfactory bacterial test, repeat

disinfection procedures at no additional cost to Owner until
satisfactory results are obtained.
END OF SECTION
13203-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION SPEED CUSHIONS
SECTION 13501
SPEED CUSHIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Speed cushions are traffic calming devices that are installed with gaps between
cushions to allow some vehicles with wide axles (primarily emergency vehicles and
transit vehicles) and bicycles to pass by the speed cushion without any vertical
deflection.
B. The rubber speed cushions are prefabricated in one piece or in sections that, when
assembled, can meet the size and shape dimensions of a standard speed cushion
(78”x80”).
C. Asphalt speed cushions are formed in place with the Type D asphalt mix to the size
and shape dimensions of a standard speed cushion (78”x144”).
C. Section 02741 – Asphaltic Concrete Pavement
D. Section 02743 - Tack Coat
E. Section 02767 - Thermoplastic Pavement Markings
F. Section 02951 - Pavement Repair and Restoration
A. Measurement.
1. Speed cushions installed or replaced will be measured by each cushion,

complete-in-place.
2. Relocation of rubber speed cushions will be measured by each cushion

removed and re-installed.
3. Repair of rubber speed cushions will be measured by each side ramp or

entrance ramp module replaced.
13501-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
4. Removal of asphalt speed cushion will be measured by each cushion removed

and pavement within its footprint restored in accordance with Section 02951 -
Pavement Repair and Restoration.
5. Removal of rubber speed cushion will be measured by each cushion

(including installation hardware) removed. If directed by the Project Manager,
salvaged materials will be delivered to the Traffic Operations Division -
Maintenance Building at 2200 Patterson St.
B. Unit Prices.
1. Speed cushions will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Speed Cushions” of
type specified. The price shall be full compensation for labor, materials, tools,
equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment for
asphalt speed cushions includes milling of existing pavement, tack coat, and
placement and compaction of asphalt. Separate payment is made for
thermoplastic markings applied to asphalt speed cushions.
2. Payment for relocation of rubber speed cushions will be by each cushion

removed and reinstalled.
3. Payment for side ramp and entrance ramp modules of a rubber speed cushion
will be by each module furnished and installed.
4. Removal of each asphalt speed cushion will be paid for at the unit price bid.
The price shall be full compensation for labor, materials, tools, equipment and
incidentals necessary to remove and dispose the cushion as well as to restore
the pavement surface in accordance with Section 02951 - Pavement Repair
and Restoration.
5. Payment for removal of rubber speed cushions will be by each cushion

removed and disposed or salvaged.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. For rubber speed cushions, submit manufacturer’s product data and installation
instruction to the Traffic Operations Division for approval.
B. If applicable, submit completed manufacturer’s warranty documents to the Traffic

Operations Division prior to project completion and acceptance.
C. Submit product data in accordance with Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. The contractor shall provide a one year warranty on labor and material for speed
cushions. The asphalt cushion height shall remain at least 3” tall after 12 months.
13501-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Rubber speed cushions shall meet the following material specifications.
1. Recycled rubber composite
2. Tensile strength = 500 psi (minimum)
3. Shore hardness = 65A (minimum)
4. Skid resistance = 89 (dry)
5. Conformable to pavement variances without curling
B. Rubber speed cushions, complete-in-place, shall meet the following properties.
1. Height = 3”; Width = 78”; Length = 80” (along direction of travel); side ramp
module = 15”x40”, entrance ramp module = 16”x40”
2. Side slope = 1:4
3. Ramp slope = 1:10
4. Cushion color = black; marking color = white
C. Asphalt speed cushions shall be constructed with type D asphalt mix per Section
02741 – Asphaltic Concrete Pavement.
D. Striping for asphalt speed cushions shall meet the requirements of Section 02767 –
Thermoplastic Pavement Markings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION
A. Construction shall meet the following requirements.
1. Speed cushions must be placed at locations shown on the plans or approved

by the Traffic Operations Division.
2. Speed cushions shall not be placed over manholes, valves, meters, survey
monuments, or other irregularities in the roadway.
B. Rubber speed cushions shall be installed per manufacturer’s specifications.
C. Construction of asphalt speed cushions.
13501-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. A tack coat (per Section 02743 - Tack Coat) shall be applied prior to
application of asphalt material.
2. Cushions shall be compacted per City of Houston Specifications and shape

according to dimensions in Standard Detail 13501-01. Compaction shall
require utilization of all necessary sizes and types of rollers to accomplish
proper compaction and shape.
3. Striping shall meet the requirements of Section 02767 - Thermoplastic

Pavement Markings and dimensions shown in Standard Detail 13501-01.
D. Removal of asphalt speed cushions.
1. Sawcut and mill pavement to depth of at least 2 inches around entire perimeter
of the cushion.
2. Resurface the pavement in accordance with Section 02951 - Pavement Repair

and Restoration.
END OF SECTION
13501-4
CITY OF HOUSTON JOINT BONDING AND
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION ELECTRICAL ISOLATION
SECTION 15640
JOINT BONDING AND ELECTRICAL ISOLATION
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Joint bonding requirements for electrical continuity along steel, ductile iron and
concrete cylinder pipe.
B. Electrical isolation devices for installation at connections to existing piping, at

selected below grade to above ground piping transitions, at cased crossings and at
tunnels.
B. Section 15641 - Corrosion Control Test Stations
C. Section 16640 - Cathodic Protection for Pipelines
1.03 UNIT PRICES
A. No payment will be made for joint bonding and electrical isolation under this section.
Include cost in unit price for water mains or sewers.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 1248 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Material

for Wire and Cable
B. AWWA C207 - Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service -Sizes 4 in. through 144
in.
C. AWWA M9 Manual - Concrete Pressure Pipe
D. ANSI B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
E. ANSI B16.5 - Pipe Flange and Flanged Fittings
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit in accordance with the requirements of Section 01330 - Submittals.

under the direct supervision of a Professional Engineer, registered in the State of
Texas with a minimum of ten years of corrosion control experience.
15640-1
manufacturer’s name in the catalog cuts and provide sufficient information to show
that the materials meet the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Where
more than one item or catalog number appears on a catalog cut, clearly identify the
item proposed.
D. Test Results: Submit electrical continuity and flange isolation test results to the City
of Houston or its designated representative.
A. Provide manufacturer's certification that all electrical continuity bonding meets the
requirements of the drawings and specifications. Reference certification to applicable
section of specifications and applicable standard detail.
B. Provide manufacturer's certification that all isolation devices meet the published
material specifications.
C. All materials, fabrication, and installations are subject to inspection and testing by the
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DESCRIPTION OF MATERIALS
A. Joint bonding and electrical isolation materials to be incorporated into the project
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Electrical continuity bonds
2. Flange isolation assemblies
3. Casing spacers
4. End seals
2.02 ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY BONDS
A. Applications: Applications for electrical continuity bonding include the following:
1. Bonding across bolted joint assemblies
2. Bonding across gasketed joint assemblies
B. Preparation of Prestressed Concrete Pipe for Bonding:
1. General:
15640-2
a. Fabrication: Use prestressed concrete pipe for this project that has
been fabricated in such a manner as to establish electrical continuity
between metallic components of pipe and joints.
2. Acceptable Methods: Establish electrical continuity as indicated in drawings

and specifications. Criteria for Electric Continuity:
a. Tensile Wire: Pipe manufacturer to obtain a resistance no greater than

0.03 ohms between any wire and steel joint ring at end of pipe farthest
from that wire. Manufacturer to report values obtained and method of
measurement.
b. Internal Pipe Joint Components: Pipe manufacturer to obtain resistance

of less than 0.03 ohms between any component and steel pipe cylinder.
3. Tensile Wire Continuity:
a. Establish continuity between tensile wire coils and steel cylinder on

embedded cylinder type prestressed pipe by tightly wrapping tensile
wire over longitudinal mild steel straps during pipe manufacture.
(1) Use and install two continuous straps 180˚ apart longitudinally
along the pipe. These straps must maintain electrical continuity
between metallic components.
(2) Use steel straps made of mild steel and free of grease, mill
scale, or other high resistance deposits.
(3) Make longitudinal straps electrically continuous with pipe

cylinder by steel fasteners of suitable dimensions placed
between steel cylinder and longitudinal straps. Connect
fasteners so as to remain intact during pipe fabrication process.
4. Steel Cylinder Continuity:
a. Establish continuity of all joint components and steel cylinder. These

components include the following:
(1) Anchor socket brackets.
(2) Anchor socket.
(3) Spigot ring.
(4) Bell ring.
b. If mechanical contact does not provide a resistance of less than 0.03

ohms between components, tack weld component to provide electrical
continuity.
15640-3
C. Preparation of Steel Pipe for Bonding: Bonding wires are not required for welded
steel pipe
D. Preparation of Ductile Iron Pipe for Bonding: Install insulated bond wires as shown
on contract drawings.
E. Electrical Bond Wires: Electrical bond wires are to be a minimum No. 2 AWG, seven
strand, copper cable with THHN insulation. Remove one inch of THHN insulation
from each end of the bond wire. Provide the minimum number of bond wires as
shown on drawings for steel or ductile iron pipe.
F. Electrical Bond Clip: Weld three (3) ASTM 366 steel bonding clips, each
approximately 0.13 inches thick, 2.5 inches long, and 1.25 inches wide, with 1/8- inch
fillet welds to the bell and spigot of adjacent prestressed concrete cylinder pipe or
steel pipe with rubber gasketed joints. Manufacture clips to maintain continuity
regardless of small deflections of finished joints.
2.03 FLANGE ISOLATION
A. Applications: Required applications of dielectric flange isolation assemblies include

but are not limited to the following:
1. At selected locations where new piping is mechanically connected to existing

piping.
2. At selected below-grade to aboveground piping transitions.
3. At locations shown on the drawings.
B. Isolation: Provide electrical isolation through the installation of the following

materials:
1. Welded flange connections to steel pipe
2. Flange connections to bell and spigot adapters for concrete cylinder and
ductile iron pipe.
3. Flange Isolation Gasket
4. Sleeves and Washers
C. Flange Isolation Gasket: Provide type “E” gaskets with an EPDM sealing element.
1. Thickness: Gasket to be 1/8 inch thick.
2. Dimensions: Gasket to be 1/8 inch less in I.D. than the I.D. of the flange in
which it is to be installed and extend to the O.D. of the flange.
15640-4
3. Flange Face: Provide sealing element positioned to accommodate either flat or

raised face flanges.
4. Temperature Range: Temperature range of the product shall be -65°F to

+250°F.
5. Product Performance Testing: Gasket shall meet or exceed the following test
criteria:
ASTM D149 Dielectric Strength (short term) 550 Volts/mil

ASTM D695 Compressive Strength 50,000 psi minimum
ASTM D229 Water Absorption 0.15% maximum
ASTM D 790 Flexural Strength 50,000 psi minimum
ASTM D785 Hardness 110 minimum
ASTM D256 IZOID Impact Strength 12.5 ft-lbs/in minimum
ASTM D638 Tensile Strength 45,000 psi minimum
ASTM D32 Shear Strength 20,000 minimum
ASTM F-36 Compressibility 2.1% maximum
ASTM F-36 Recovery 88.9% minimum
ASTM F-38(B) Creep Relation 5.1% maximum
DIN-3535 Gas Permeability 0.43cm3/min. maximum
D. Alternate Isolation Gasket: As an alternate to the above, provide a plain-faced

phenolic gasket. Place the phenolic gasket between two full-faced gaskets. Provide
cloth-inserted rubber gasket material, 1/8 inch thick in accordance with AWWA
C207. Use factory cut gaskets of proper dimensions.
E. Sleeves and Washers:
1. Sleeve: Provide full length 1/32 inch thick, mylar sleeves for each bolt. The
length of the sleeve shall extend half way into the outside steel backup
washers.
2. Isolation Washers: Supply two, 1/8 inch thick, Pyrox G-10 isolation washers
per bolt. Isolation washers to have a compressive strength of 50,000 psi, a
dielectric strength of 550 volts/mil and maximum water absorption of 0.10%.
3. Backup Washers: Provide two, 1/8 inch thick, zinc plated, hot rolled steel
backup washers for each bolt. For pipe greater than 30 inch diameter, provide
two additional steel washers to be placed inside the isolation washers for
additional support.
4. Size: The isolation washers and the backup washers shall be of the same O.D.
and I.D., with a sufficiently large I.D. to fit over the isolation sleeve.
F. Coatings: Coat buried isolation flanges with petroleum based tape or synthetic, a-
polar polymer wrap.
15640-5
2.04 CASING SPACERS
A. For water or wastewater piping installed in tunnels or cased crossings, install casing
spacers between the piping and the casing or tunnel liner to provide electrical
isolation.
B. Inside diameter of casing or tunnel liner must be 4 inches greater in diameter than the
outside diameter of the piping. In the case of mechanically coupled piping, the casing
must be a minimum of 4 inches greater in diameter than the outside diameter of the
coupling at its largest point.
C. For welded steel pipe 12-inch diameter and smaller, use injection molded
polyethylene insulators, Model PE as manufactured by Pipeline Seal and Insulator,
Inc. or approved equal.
D. For all other pipe materials 12-inch diameter and smaller, use 8-inch wide steel
insulators with 2 inch wide glass reinforced runners, Model C8G-2 as manufactured
by Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. or approved equal.
E. For all piping greater than 12-inch diameter, use 12-inch wide steel insulators with 2
inch wide glass reinforced runners, Model C12G-2 as manufactured by Pipeline Seal
and Insulator, Inc. or approved equal.
2.05 CASING END SEALS
A. For all piping less than 24-inch diameter, use hard rubber seals, Model PL Link Seal
as manufactured by the Thunderline Corporation or approved equal.
B. For all piping 24-inch diameter and greater, use pull-on, 1/8-inch thick, synthetic
rubber end seals, Model C, as manufactured by Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. or
approved equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY BOND WIRES
A. Inspection: Use continuous bond wires with no cuts or tears in the insulation covering
the conductor.
B. General: Attach bond wires at required locations by thermite welding.
C. Thermite Welding: Perform thermite welding of bond wires to piping in the following
manner:
1. Clean and dry pipe to which wires are to be attached.
2. Use grinding wheel to remove all coating, mill scale, oxide, grease, and dirt
from an area approximately 3 inches square. Grind surface to bright metal.
15640-6
3. Remove approximately 1 inch of insulation from each end of wire to be

thermite welded to pipe, exposing clean, oxide-free copper for welding.
4. Select proper size thermite weld mold as recommended by manufacturer.

Place wire between graphite mold and the prepared metal surface. Use a
copper sleeve crimped over wire for all 12 AWG wires.
5. Place metal disk in bottom of mold.
6. Pour thermite weld charge into the mold. Squeeze bottom of cartridge to
spread ignition powder over change.
7. Close mold cover and ignite starting powder with flint gun.
8. After exothermic reaction, remove thermite weld mold and gently strike weld
with a hammer to remove weld slag. Pull on wire to assure a secure
connection. If weld is not secure or the wire breaks, repeat procedure with
new wire.
9. If weld is secure, coat all bare metal and weld metal with Kop-Coat. Cover
coated weld with a plastic weld cap.
D. Post-Installation Inspection: Make post-installation inspection of all electrical

continuity bonds through a visual examination of each thermite weld connection for
strength and suitable coating prior to backfilling. In addition, perform one or more of
the following tests:
1. Circulate current through pipe using DC power supply. Calculate resistance

through known length of pipe. Resistance must not exceed 150% of
theoretical resistance for pipe and bonds.
2. Measure resistance through select bonded joints with a digital low resistance
ohmmeter (DLRO). Resistance of 0.001 ohms or less is acceptable.
3. Position a CSE at a stationary location adjacent to bonded pipeline. Impress a

temporary current on pipe. Record static, current-applied, and instant “off”
pipe-to-soil potential readings along the pipe relative to the stationary CSE.
a. Static potential measurements referenced to stationary CSE must be

nearly identical along the pipe to indicate electrical continuity.
b. Instant “off” potentials referenced to stationary CSE must be nearly

identical along pipe to indicate electrical continuity.
c. The difference between the instant “off” and the static potential
referenced to stationary CSE must be equal at each point of contact to
pipe to indicate electrical continuity.
15640-7
4. If any of the above procedures indicates a poor quality bond connection,

rebond the joint.
5. Record results and submit to City of Houston or its designated representative

for approval prior to backfilling.
E. Backfilling of Bonded Joints:
1. Backfill bonded piping in manner that prevents damage to the bond wires and
all connections to the metallic structures.
2. If construction activity damages a bonded connection, install new bond wire.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF FLANGE ISOLATION DEVICES
A. Placement: Install above-grade dielectric insulators at a minimum 12 inches and

maximum of 48 inches above final grade.
B. Assembly: Place gasket, sleeves, and washers as shown on the drawings. Follow
manufacturer's recommendations for even tightening to proper torque. See drawings.
C. Testing: Immediately after an insulating fitting has been installed, test electrical
isolation with a Gas Electronics model, 601 meter. Fully document test results and
submit to the City of Houston or its designated representative.
D. Painting: Do not use metal base paints on insulating fittings.
E. Encapsulation: Encapsulate below-grade insulating flanges with the Carboline Densyl

tape system, or approved equal, after the insulating flange has been tested for
effectiveness.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF CASING SPACERS
A. Assemble and securely fasten casing spacers to the pipeline to be installed in casings
or tunnels.
B. Avoid inadvertent metallic contact between casing and carrier pipe. Place spacers
close enough to ensure that the pipe is adequately supported throughout its length,
particularly at the ends, to offset settling and possible electrical shorting. The end
spacer must be within 6 inches of the end of the casing pipe, regardless of size of
casing and pipe or type of spacer used. Install spacers on PVC pipe at the insertion
line to prevent over-insertion of the spigot into the bell.
C. Grade the bottom of the trench adjacent to each end of the casing to provide a firm,
uniform and continuous support for the pipe. If the trench requires some backfill to
establish the final trench bottom grade, place the backfill material in 6-inch lifts and
compact each layer.
15640-8
D. After the casing or tunnel liner has been placed, pump dry and maintain dry until the
casing spacers and end seals are installed.
E. Install casing spacers in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Correctly

assemble, evenly tighten, and prevent damage during tightening of the insulators and
pipe insertion.
F. Insulator Spacing:
1. Maximum distance between spacers to be 10 feet for pipe sizes 6 inches and
smaller, and 6 feet for pipe sizes greater than 6 inches.
2. For ductile-iron pipe, flanged pipe, or bell and spigot pipe, install spacers
within one foot on each side of the bell or flange, and one in the center of the
joint where 18 foot or 20 foot long joints are used.
3. If the casing or pipe is angled or bent, reduce the spacing.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF END SEALS
A. Assemble hard rubber Link-Seals around the pipe and slide into the annular space
between the pipe and casing. Evenly tighten the bolts to provide a positive seal.
B. Place pull-on synthetic rubber end seals on the pipe and pull over the end of the
casing. Securely fasten stainless steel bands.
3.05 ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY TESTS
A. Immediately after the pipe has been installed in the casing, but prior to connecting the
line, perform an electrical continuity test to determine whether the casing is in fact
insulated from the pipe. Have the continuity check fully documented and approved by
the City of Houston or its designated representative prior to backfilling.
B. If the electrical isolation between pipe and casing is not effective, immediately
investigate the cause and remedy the situation. Under no circumstances, backfill a
shorted casing.
END OF SECTION
15640-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION COROSION CONTROL TEST STATIONS
SECTION 15641
CORROSION CONTROL TEST STATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Test station materials and installation requirements.
B. Locations requiring test stations are adjacent to manholes, major pipeline crossings,
cased crossings and tunnels, below-grade insulated flanges and select sacrificial
anode installations.
B. Section 15640 - Joint Bonding and Electrical Isolation
C. Section 16640 - Cathodic Protection for Pipelines
1.03 UNIT PRICES
A. No payment will be made for corrosion control test stations under this section.
Include cost in unit price for water mains or sewers.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 1248 - Polyethylene Plastic Molding and Extrusion Material
B. NACE International SP0169 - Recommended Practice, Control of External Corrosion

C. AWWA M9 Manual - Concrete Pressure Pipe
D. UL 83 - Thermoplastic Insulated Wires
E. UL 486A - Wire Connectors for Use with Copper Conductors
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submittals to conform to the requirements of Section 01330 - Submittal

Procedures.

under the direct supervision of a Professional Engineer, registered in the State of
Texas with a minimum of ten years experience in corrosion control.
15641-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
manufacturer’ name on the catalog cuts and provide sufficient information to show
that the materials meet the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Where
more than one item or catalog number appears on a catalog cut, clearly identify the
item proposed.
D. Drawings: During installation and construction, maintain as-built drawings of the

corrosion control test stations. Revise drawings to show exact locations of all wiring,
connections, and terminal boxes. Properly identify all items of equipment and
material. Submit the original as-built drawings to the City of Houston or its
designated representative.
A. Provide manufacturer's certifications that all components of the corrosion control test
stations meet the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Reference the
applicable section of the specifications and the applicable standard details on the
certification.
B. The drawings for the corrosion control test stations are diagrammatic and do not scale
for exact locations, unless scales are explicitly stated on the specific drawing. Field
conditions, non-interference with other utilities or mechanical and structural features
determine exact locations. Note other existing utilities in the area and during
excavation, do not damage these utilities. Repair any damaged utilities to the
satisfaction of the City of Houston at the Contractor's expense.
C. All materials, fabrication, and installations are subject to inspection and testing by the
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FLUSH MOUNT TEST STATIONS
A. Test stations consist of test wires, a terminal box and a traffic box as shown on the
drawings.
B. For the terminal box, use a five terminal Big Fink as manufactured by Cott
Manufacturing Company or approved equal
C. For the concrete traffic box; use an 10.25-inch diameter 3-RT with a cast iron cover
marked "CP Test" as manufactured by Brooks Products, Inc or approved equal.
2.02 ABOVE-GRADE TEST STATIONS
A. At test station locations where flush mounted structures are not practical, use an
above- grade test station, and place such that possible damage from vandalism,
traffic, etc. is minimized.
15641-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. For the test station, use a five terminal Big Fink as manufactured by Cott
Manufacturing or approved equal.
C. Have a lockable, corrosion-proof plastic cover for the terminal boxes. Mount on a 5-
foot length of 3-inch diameter UV-resistant plastic conduit.
D. Install the test station adjacent to a permanent structure, if possible, for physical
protection.
A. Type: Provide a copper/copper sulfate, double membrane, ceramic cell in a

geomembrane package such as a Permacell Plus or approved equal.
B. Wire: Equip the electrode with No. 14 AWG stranded copper wire with blue
HMWPE insulation of suitable length to attach to the terminal board of the test station
without splicing.
2.04 TEST STATION LEAD WIRES
A. Test station lead wires of all sizes shall have TW, THW or THHN insulation.
B. Color code insulation based upon connection to underground structures:
1. Water piping: white
2. Foreign structures: red
3. Steel casings: yellow
C. Wire all terminal boards as shown on the drawings.
A. Charges and Molds: Select weld charges and mold size for the specific surface
configuration in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. Use Erico,
Cadweld, or Continental Industries, Thermoweld weld charges and molds.
B. Weld Coating: Coat weld with Stopaq CZ tape or approved equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATIONS
A. Required applications of corrosion control test stations include locations where future
testing is anticipated for the following reasons:
1. Testing to determine the effectiveness of the installed cathodic protection

systems and to allow for startup adjustments.
15641-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Testing to determine interference effects from and on adjacent or crossing

foreign underground structures.
3. Testing to determine sources and magnitude of stray d-c currents and required
mitigative measures.
4. Periodic monitoring to determine status of existing cathodic protection

systems, stray current, and foreign line influence.
B. Install test stations at each of the following locations:
1. On continuous pipelines adjacent to all manhole locations unless otherwise

shown or noted on the drawings.
2. At all major underground pipeline crossings.
3. At all cased crossings and tunnels (both ends).
4. At all underground isolation flanges.
5. At galvanic anode locations, where indicated.
6. At all other locations shown on the drawings.
3.02 GENERAL
A. Locate test stations adjacent to manholes where possible. If a flush mounted test
station is not feasible in a particular location, then an above-grade test station may be
used, subject to approval by the City of Houston or its designated representative.
B. Use continuous test station lead wires without cuts or tears in the insulation.
C. Locate test stations as close to directly over the pipe as possible. If the pipe is
installed under a road, place the test station at the curb for easy access.
D. Attach test lead wires to the pipe by thermite welding.
E. Use color coded test wires as indicated on the drawings.
F. Wire test station terminal board configurations as shown on the drawings.
G. At foreign pipeline crossing test stations, the owners of the pipeline must be notified
and must give permission before the test leads are connected to their pipeline. The
owner should have a representative present. If owner refuses test leads connected to
their pipeline, then document owner’s refusal and install potential test station on
water main. Document owner contact name, phone number, email address, and date
of contact. Submit documentation to City of Houston.
H. Enclose all wires in grey electrical PVC conduit.
15641-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
3.03 FLUSH-MOUNT TEST STATIONS
A. Install flush-mount test stations as shown on the drawings.
B. Coil sufficient slack beneath the test station to allow for soil settlement and to prevent
damage to the leads during backfilling. Leave additional slack to allow for
withdrawal of the terminal board a minimum of 18 inches above the top of the
concrete traffic box for test purposes.
C. Install flush-mount test stations with permanent copper/copper sulfate reference

electrodes where indicated on the drawings.
1. Install reference electrode approximately 12-inches from the pipe.
2. Compact native soil by hand around the electrode. Use select granular backfill
material for the balance of the backfill.
3. Saturate the backfilled reference electrode with 5 gallons of water.
D. Set test stations outside areas of permanent paving in a Portland cement concrete pad,
minimum of 24 inches square and no less than 4 inches thick.
3.04 ABOVE-GRADE TEST STATIONS
A. Install above-grade test stations where a flush mounted test station cannot be located.
Use and location of above-grade test stations must be approved by the City of
Houston or its designated representative.
B. Locate test station adjacent to a permanent structure (e.g. a power pole), if possible,
for physical protection.
C. Coil sufficient slack beneath the test station to allow for soil settlement. Do not
damage the leads during backfilling.
D. Set test stations in a Portland cement concrete anchor, a minimum of 12 inches in

diameter and no less than 2 feet thick.
3.05 TEST LEAD WIRE ATTACHMENT
A. Attach test leads to the pipe by thermite welding.
B. Clean and dry the pipe to which the wires are to be attached.
C. Use grinding wheel to remove all coating, mill scale, oxide, grease, and dirt from an
area approximately 3 inches square. Grind the surface to bright metal.
D. Remove approximately 1 inch of insulation from each end of the wires to be thermite
welded to the pipe, exposing clean, oxide-free copper for welding.
15641-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
E. Using the proper size thermite weld mold as recommended by the manufacturer,
place the wire between the graphite mold and the prepared metal surface. Use a
copper sleeve crimped over the wire for all No. 12 AWG wires.
G. Pour the thermite weld charge into the mold. Squeeze the bottom of the cartridge to
spread ignition powder over the charge.
H. Close the mold cover and ignite the starting powder with a flint gun.
J. If the weld is secure, coat all bare metal and weld metal with Stopaq CZ tape.
3.06 POST INSTALLATION BACKFILLING OF TEST STATION - LEAD WIRES.
A. Protect test station wires to prevent damage to the wire insulation and conductor
integrity during backfilling.
B. After completion of the backfilling of the test wires to the pipe, verify the connection
by recording a pipe-to-soil potential.
C. Replace any test wire found to have a high resistance connection.
END OF SECTION
15641-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16010
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Basic requirements specifically applicable to the work of Division 16 - Electrical

Requirements.
B. The Contractor shall furnish equipment, materials, and labor for assembly and
installation plus check-out and start-up of the complete electrical system as shown on
the Drawings and stipulated in the Specifications.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. As a minimum requirement, the electrical system shall be constructed in accordance

with:
1. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association

(ANSI/NFPA), No. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC). The contractor shall
provide all electrical work / installations based on the latest addition of the
NEC.
2. City of Houston Building Code.
3. Other applicable Codes and Standards as referenced in other Master

Specifications.
B. Comply with local, county, state and federal regulations and codes in effect as of date
of purchase.
C. Equipment of foreign manufacture must meet U.S. codes and standards.
D. Equipment and materials shall conform to requirements of specification and to the

criteria provided in data sheets for the project.
A. Product Conformance Certificate and Quality Assurance Release. Submit an overall

conformance certificate for electrical components signed by the person responsible
for product quality. Specifically identify the purchased material or equipment by
project name and location, purchase order number, supplements, and item number
where applicable, including materials and services provided by others. Indicate that
all requirements have been met and identify any approved deviations.
B. Field Inspection
16010-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Electrical work shall be inspected and approved by the local code inspectors,
the wastewater inspectors, and the Project Manager prior to starting the 7-day
test or scheduling training.
2. Contractor shall give a minimum of two days’ notice to the Inspectors that the
installation is ready for inspection and two days’ notice to the Project
Manager.
3. Concealed work shall be inspected and approved by code inspectors and

wastewater inspectors before it is covered:
a. Conduit with stub-ups, underground in duct banks before concrete is

poured. Conduit in slabs, walls and ceilings, complete with boxes.
4. Electrical equipment and materials shall be inspected upon arrival by the

Project Manager for compliance with specifications.
1.04 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Take the following site conditions into consideration when fabricating, erecting,
installing and wiring electrical equipment under this contract:
1. Plant Location
Houston, Texas
2. Plant Type and Size
3. Plant Site Elevation
4. Seismic Zone Zone 0
5. Wind Velocity 90 mph
6. Temperature, Min./Max.:
a. Coldest Winter Month High 60 degrees F Low 41 degrees F
b. Warmest Summer Month High 94 degrees F Low 73 degrees F
c. Lowest Expected 11 degrees F
d. Highest Expected 107 degrees F
7. Rainfall:
a. Annual 45 inches
b. Design 3.4 inches/hour, 8.4 inches/24 hours
16010-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
8. Design Relative Humidity: 98%
9. Station Barometric Pressure:
a. Average Annual 29.5 inches Hg Absolute.
10. Utility Water Systems: Design Pressure Design Temp.
River Water PSI degrees F

Well Water PSI degrees F
City Water PSI degrees F
11. Electric Power Supply Characteristics (Available to Contractor):
Voltage Phase Hz Wire Delta or Wye

1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 COMPONENT DESIGN
A. Components utilized in the construction of the material or equipment shall be of the

latest proven design, new and in current production. Do not use obsolete components
or components to be phased out of production.
2.02 FACTORY INSPECTION
A. Provide free access with prior notice for the Project Manager at all times to the shop
where the material or equipment is being fabricated or tested. Provide reasonable
facilities for inspection, witnessing tests, and examining records. Give 7-days notice
prior to starting tests which are scheduled for factory inspection.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Verify dimensions and ratings of equipment and materials to ensure proper fit and
performance.
16010-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment and materials in accordance with the Drawings and manufacturer's
written instructions. If field conditions necessitate changes in electrical installation,
obtain approval from the City Engineer.
B. Conductor voltage drop shall not exceed 2 percent for feeders and 3 percent for
branch circuits.
3.03 DEMONSTRATION
A. Test the electrical system to specification requirements and to demonstrate correct

installation and operation of equipment. O & M Manual shall be furnished prior to
testing for reference during testing and corrections for final O & M.
B. Before 7-days test, demonstrate the system to the wastewater inspectors and the
Project Manager. Show the system to be fully operational. All alarms, safeties, and
communication points to central and locally must operate in both full-automatic and
back-up modes. Use fresh water in the test medium.
C. Operate the system continuously for a period of 7 days in full automatic, without
failure, to qualify as acceptable. "Failure" is considered any problem that requires
correction by process control instructions, maintenance personnel, such as: high or
low water level, any motor alarm, power failure, phase failure, communication
failure, PLC failure, process control software failure, requiring rewriting or
transducer failure. This would exclude conditions not under the control of Contractor,
such as: evident lightning strikes, 25-year rains, local power utility power failure
longer than the specified duration of service. Failures due to uncontrollable situations
would allow the 7-day test to continue, as soon as test conditions are restored and the
City Engineer is notified.
D. The existing station shall remain in service during this test.
END OF SECTION
16010-4
CITY OF HOUSTON CONDUCTIVE TRACE WIRE
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR NON-METALLIC WATER LINE PIPES
SECTION 16124
CONDUCTIVE TRACE WIRE FOR NON-METALLIC WATER LINE PIPES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Requirements for the installation of the trace wire and components for the purposes of
locating non-metallic water line pipes, laterals, and appurtenances.
C. Section 02506 – Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe
D. Section 02511 - Water Lines
E. Section 02531- Gravity Sanitary Sewers
F. Section 02532 - Sanitary Sewer Force Mains.
G. Section 02631 - Storm Sewers
A. Unit Prices.
1. No separate payment will be made to provide and install trace wire and
associated components under this Section. Include payment in related unit
price work.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Access Points: Access points are designed to provide easy access and allow proper
direct connection to the trace wire equipment. Access points also allow external
connection and disconnection to trace wire.
B. AWG – American Wire Gauge is the US standard measure for the diameter of
electrical conductors.
16124-1
C. THHN – Thermoplastic high heat-resistant nylon coated wire.
D. Trace Wire – Also known as tracer wire, locating wire, is used to assist in locating
non-metallic pipes after they have been buried in the ground.
1.05 REFERENCES
A. APWA Uniform Color Code.
B. ASTM B1010/B1010M – Standard Specification for Copper-Clad Steel Electrical

Conductor for Tracer Wire Applications
C. ASTM B170 – Standard Specification for Oxygen-Free Electrolytic Copper-Refinery

Shapes.
D. ASTM B227 - Standard Specification for Hard Drawn Copper-Clad Steel Wire.
E. ASTM B910/B910M - Standard Specification for Annealed Copper-Clad Steel Wire.
F. ASTM D1248 – Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials

for Wire and Cable.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals to confirm to requirements of Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures.
B. Submit for review manufacturer’s product data sheets for the following:
1. Trace wire and insulation
2. Connectors
3. Ground rod
4. Termination and access points
C. Provide layout of trace wire, connectors, ground rods, termination and access points
for review.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide trace wire for non-metallic water lines.
B. Provide system components including trace wires, connectors, ground rods and access
points which are compatible to ensure end to end conductivity for detecting
underground utility assets.
16124-2
C. Provide high density, high molecular weight polyethylene insulation. Color code as
per APWA Uniform Color Code for specific utilities being marked.
D. Provide trace wire that is domestically manufactured in the USA.
E. Manufacture must provide 5-year warranty or provide third-party documentation of a

5-year corrosion test.
F. Trace wire manufacturer or manufacturer’s representative to provide installation

training for Contractors who have not previously received the training. Project
Manager to be notified of scheduled training prior to installation.
2.02 TRACE WIRE
A. Open Trench Installations: Provide High Strength Copper-Clad Steel (HS-CCS), fully
annealed high carbon 1055 grade steel trace wire which conforms to one of the
following:
1. 12-AWG with minimum 450lb tensile break load, and minimum 30 mil HDPE
insulation thickness, or
2. 10-AWG with minimum 680lb tensile break load, and minimum 30 mil HDPE
insulation thickness.
B. Trenchless Installations: Provide Extra-High Strength Copper-Clad Steel (EHS-CCS),

hard drawn, high carbon 1055 grade steel trace wire which conforms to one of the
following:
1. 12-AWG Extra with a minimum break load of 1,150 lb., and a minimum
HDPE insulation thickness of 45 mil, or
2. 10-AWG Extra with a minimum break load of 2,030 lb., and a minimum
HDPE insulation thickness of 45 mil, or
3. 8-AWG Extra with a minimum break load of 2,700 lb., and a minimum HDPE
insulation thickness of 45 mil.
C. THHN wire is not permitted for any trace wire installation.
D. Nylon jackets or coatings are not permitted for any trace wire installation.
2.03 CONNECTORS
A. Provide waterproof and corrosion-proof trace wire connectors. Install without cutting
or splicing the trace wire. Protect vulnerable wire splices and keep the locator signal
flowing across connections.
16124-3
B. Interconnect mainline trace wires at intersections, at mainline tees and mainline

crosses. At tees, connect the three wires using a 3-way lockable connector. At
crosses, join the four wires using a 4-way lockable connector. The use of two 3- way
lockable connectors with a short jumper wire between them is acceptable.
C. Provide dielectric silicone filled connectors, to seal out any moisture and corrosion.
Install in a manner to prevent any uninsulated wire exposure.
D. Non-locking, friction fit, or taped connectors are prohibited.
2.04 GROUNDING
A. Properly ground trace wire at dead-ends/stub and entry points.
B. Ground trace wire using a 15-lb, drive-in magnesium ground rod with minimum 20-
feet red #12 AWG Copper-Clad Steel (CCS) wire with 30 mil HDPE insulated jacket
connected to the anode specifically manufactured for grounding purpose and buried at
the same elevation as the utility.
C. Brass, steel, or copper ground rods are not accepted.
2.05 TERMINATION/ACCESS
A. At Grade level Access Point:
1. Provide with suitable cover cap identified as “Water” and color coded as per
APWA Uniform Color Code standard.
2. Set cover cap at grade level. If cover cap is within pavement, provide material
suitable for vehicular loading.
3. Allow locator to switch ground off and on from top of lid without the need to
remove lid.
4. Provide anti-corrosion wax/gel to protect wires.
5. Include encapsulated magnet molded into the top portion of the tube.
B. Above grade Level Access Point:
1. Provide at Fire Hydrants. Install with two internal wire connections to protect
wire from corrosion and color code as per APWA Uniform Color Code
standard.
C. Termination: Terminate service laterals and dead ends using two terminal external
switchable lid access point with a grounding.
PART 3 EXECUTION
16124-4
3.01 GENERAL
A. Place trace wire in same orientation as installed pipe. Using a tape or plastic tie,
secure the trace wire to the pipe every 5 feet in the three o’clock position. No looping
or coiling allowed.
B. Ground at dead ends, the beginning and end of the pipe, and at service connections.
C. Do not connect trace wire to existing conductive pipe, casing or appurtenances. Do

not connect trace wire to existing trace wire systems. Treat these locations a dead
ends.
D. Provide 1 ft excess/slack wire at access points after meeting final elevation.
E. Provide complete replacement of damaged wires, access points, or connectors with

approved products at no additional cost to the City.
F. Connecting trace wire by twisting wires and taping or brass fittings with connection
lugs is not permitted.
G. Provide waterproof/corrosion proof connectors, with need to remove jacket during

installation. All connections should have half knot tied prior to connections to prevent
wire pull out.
H. For long pipelines more than 2,500-ft without services, provide a single connection
access point and do not ground in the middle, only the end and beginning.
I. Lay mainline trace wire continuously, by passing around the outside of valves and
fittings, on the north or east side, so that there is no metallic contact.
J. Terminate trace wire on water service laterals at an access point, color coded blue for
water lines, and located directly above the service lateral or curb stop at the edge of
road right-of-way.
K. Install above-ground trace wire access points at fire hydrants. Provide two connection
points. One for ground wire connection (lowest connection point) and second for
trace wire. Affix to fire hydrant flange with HDPE bracket secured to fire hydrant
flange bolt. Operator must be able to connect at this access point without removing
the cover. Wire must not be exposed at any point to the environment.
3.02 CONDUCTIVITY TESTING
A. Provide a conductivity test for new trace wire installations using typical low
frequency (512 Hz) line tracing equipment, witnessed by the Contractor, and Project
Manager or Project Manager’s representative, prior to Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
16124-5
CITY OF HOUSTON ADVANCED TRANSPORTATION
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION CONTROLLER (ATC) CABINET ASSEMBLY
SECTION 16130
ADVANCED TRANSPORTATION CONTROLLER (ATC) CABINET ASSEMBLY
PART 1 GENERAL
A. This specification defines the minimum detailed requirements applicable to traffic

signal controller cabinets. The intent of specification is to set forth the minimum
acceptable physical, electrical and mechanical design and requirements within which
all equipment operates satisfactorily and reliably, and the means by which the
equipment shall be tested to determine whether it shall so operate.
B. These specifications describe the materials necessary to provide the 120 VAC High
Voltage (HV) Advanced Transportation Controller (ATC) traffic signal cabinets for
use with Type 2070 Advanced Transportation Controller (ATC). The Type 2070
Controller Unit to be furnished with the ATC Cabinet Assembly shall meet the
requirements of Specification Section 16731.
B. Section 16731 – Model 2070 Controller Unit
A. Unit Price
1. Each ATC Cabinet Assembly shall include a Model 2070 Controller Unit
(Section 16731) and other components as specified in Table 1 of this
specification. This Item will be measured as each controller cabinet assembly
by type furnished.
2. The materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as

provided under “Measurement” as each specified type of assembly furnished.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ATC 5201 v06.25 – Advanced Transportation Controller
B. ATC 5301 v02.02 - Advanced Transportation Controller
C. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and
Plate
16130-1
D. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic

Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar
E. ASTM B 633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron

and Steel
F. EIA-310-B – Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment
G. Federal Specification QQ-P-416C – Cadmium Plating
H. ITS Cabinet Standard v01.02.17b – Intelligent Transportation System (ITS) Standard

Specification for Roadside Cabinets
I. NFPA 70 – National Electric Code
1.05 WARRANTY
A. All materials furnished will be warranted by the supplier for a period of two (2) years
from date of delivery. Units or components that are identified as being defective
before the warranty has expired shall be replaced within thirty (30) calendar days.
The vendor shall be responsible for all costs, including shipping, incurred by City for
all units that are installed at an intersection and fail as a result of warranty covered
failure within the warranty period.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Manuals. Two copies of manual documentation must be supplied for each item
purchased. The manual must be bound in durable covers made of either 65-pound
stock paper or clear plastic. The manual must be printed on paper measuring 8-1/2 in.
by 11 in., with the exception that schematics, layouts, parts lists and plan details may
be on sheets measuring 11 in. by 17 in., with each sheet neatly folded to a size of 8-
1/2 in. by 11 in. A minimum of Times New Roman or Arial 10 point font must be
used for all manual text, excluding drawings and schematics. Drawing text may use a
smaller font size.
1. Cabinet Wiring Diagrams. Two copies of cabinet wiring diagrams must be

included in each cabinet. Cabinet wiring diagrams must be on non-fading,
minimum 22 in. x 34 in., sheets.
a. Manual Contents. Each manual must utilize the following outline, to

the extent possible:
(1) Table of Contents
(2) Glossary
(3) Manufacturer Contact Information
(a) Address
16130-2
(b) Telephone Number
(c) Fax Number
(d) General Email Address
(4) General Description
(5) General Characteristics
(6) Installation
(7) Adjustments
(8) Theory of Operation
(a) Systems Description (include block diagram).
(b) Detailed Description of Circuit Operation.
(9) Maintenance
(a) Preventive Maintenance.
(b) Trouble Analysis.
(c) Trouble Shooting Sequence Chart.
(d) Wave Forms.
(e) Voltage Measurements.
(f) Alignment Procedures.
(10) Parts List (include circuit and board designation, part type and
class, power rating, component manufacturer, mechanical part
manufacturer, data specification sheets for special design
components and original manufacturer's part number).
(11) Electrical Interconnection Details & Drawings.
(12) Schematic and Logic Diagram
(13) Assembly Drawings and a pictorial diagram showing physical

locations and identification of each component or part.
(14) The date, serial numbers, model numbers and revision numbers
of equipment covered by the manuals must be printed on the
front cover of the manuals.
16130-3
b. Manual Pouches. Manuals for the cabinet must be furnished in a

weatherproof plastic pouch placed in the cabinet.
c. Draft Manual. A preliminary draft of the manual must be submitted,

when required, to the City of Houston for approval prior to final
printing.
A. Packaging. Each item delivered must be individually packed in its own shipping
container. When loose Styrofoam is used for packing the item, the item must be
sealed in a plastic bag to prevent direct contact with the Styrofoam.
B. Delivery. Each item delivered for testing must be complete, including manuals, and
ready for testing. The cabinet shall be delivered mounted with bolts on a ply board
shipping pallet. The cabinet shall be enclosed in a slipcover cardboard packing shell.
The housing doors shall be blocked to prevent movement during transportation.
A. ATC Cabinets shall be certified by the manufacturer as conforming to the latest

national standards, currently the ATC 5301 v02.02, Advanced Transportation
Controller (ATC) Cabinet Standard Version 02, (dated March 18, 2019) for ATC
components, and the ITS Cabinet Standard v01.02.17b, Intelligent Transportation
System (ITS) Standard Specifications for Roadside Cabinets, (dated November 16,
2006) for ITS components and cabinet shell housing. The ATC Cabinets shall
conform to any exceptions and additions stated herein unless otherwise specified.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. All sharp edges and corners must be rounded and free of any burrs.
1. Aluminum. Aluminum sheets must be Type 3003-H14 or Type 5052-H32

ASTM Designation B209 aluminum alloy. Rod, Bar and Extruded must be
Type 6061-T6, or equal.
2. Stainless Steel. Stainless Steel sheets must be annealed or one-quarter-hard

complying with the ASTM Designation: A666 for Type 304, Grades A or B,
stainless steel sheet.
3. Cold Rolled Steel. Cold Rolled Steel sheet, rod, bar and extruded must be
Type 1018/1020.
16130-4
a. Plating. All cold roll steel must be plated. All plating must be either
cadmium plating meeting the requirements of Federal Specification
QQ-P-416G, Type 2 Class l or zinc plating meeting the requirements
of ASTM B633-85 Type II SC4.
B. Mechanical Hardware. All bolts, nuts, washers, screws, hinges and hinge pins must be
stainless steel unless otherwise specified.
C. Electrical Isolation. Within the circuit of any device, module, or Printed Circuit Board
(PCB), electrical isolation must be provided between DC logic ground, equipment
ground and the AC- conductor. They must be electrically isolated from each other by
500 Megohms, minimum, when tested at the input terminals with 500 VDC.
D. Daughter Boards. Keyboards and LCD/LED Displays are considered daughter

boards. Daughter boards must be mechanically secured with a minimum of four
spacers/metal screws. Connectors must be either Flat Cable or PCB Headers.
Components are allowed to be mounted under the daughter board.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A. General. All components must be second sourced and be of such design, fabrication,
nomenclature or other identification as to be purchased from a wholesale distributor
or from the component manufacturer, except as follows:
1. When component is of such special design that it precludes the purchase of

identical components from any wholesale distributor or component
manufacturer, one spare duplicate component must be furnished with each 20,
or fraction, thereof, components used.
2. The electronic circuit design must be such that all components of the same
generic type, regardless of manufacturer, function equally in accordance with
the specifications.
B. ATC Cabinet Components
1. Model 2202‐HV Universal High‐Density Switch Pack / Flasher Units (HDSP‐

FU)
a. The HDSP-FU shall comply with the ATC 5301 Standard Sec. 6.2 –
HDSP-FU.
b. When located in the Output Assembly, the Model 2202-HV HDSP-FU

shall be:
(1) Two channels per card
(a) 6 outputs rated at 5 mA to 1 Amp (1-135 watts)
(b) Over-current protected
16130-5
(c) Load current monitored for each output
(2) Modular PCB-based plug-in device containing six solid-state

switches
(3) 1.2” x 4.5” card format with DIN style connector
(4) LED compatible to <2 watts
(5) CMUip controlled output over-ride for fail-safe operation
(6) “ID” Led for each channel driven by CMUip based

troubleshooting
(7) Serial Bus #3 compatible
c. When located in the Service Assembly, the Model 2202-HV HDSP-

FU shall be:
(1) Two channels per card
(a) Four outputs rated at 5 mA to 2 Amps each
(b) Over-current protected
(c) Load current monitored for each output
(2) Modular PCB-based plug-in device containing four solid-state

switches
(3) 1.2” x 4.5” card format with DIN style connector
(4) Supports CMUip Flasher Alarm function
2. Model 2212‐HV Cabinet Monitor Unit (CMUip)
a. The CMUip-2212-HV Cabinet Monitor Unit (CMUip) shall comply

with the ATC 5301 Standard Sec. 6.3 – CMU. It shall be a compact,
pluggable and modular.
(1) 32-channel fully monitor output capability
(2) Direct SB#3 communication to each HDSP-FU for field

voltage and load current status
(3) Ethernet port for diagnostics
(4) CMUip is programmed with interchangeable DataKey
16130-6
(5) Built-in Diagnostic Wizard: The CMUip analyzes the ATC

Controller output commands and HDSP-FU field input status
(a) Isolates whether the cabinet fault was caused by an

ATC malfunction or a failure in the load bay or field
wiring
(b) Identifies the faulty channel(s) and output directly
(c) Provides guidance on how the technician should isolate

the cause of the malfunction
3. DataKey Programming Tool
a. The Programming Tool provides the capability to Read and Write data
from the CMUip DataKey device. The DataKey software shall be
compatible with the CMUip-2212-HV
4. Model 2220 Auxiliary Display Unit (ADU)
a. The ADU-2220 shall be a rack mounted display module.
(1) 32 channels of RYG status plus a Blue LED for fault status
provides a full view of the intersection signal states.
(2) The LCD menu driven display provides detailed status

information from the CMUip along with an interface to the
patented EDI SmartMonitor® technology.
(a) The built-in Diagnostic Wizard provides a concise view

of the signal states involved in the fault, pinpoints
faulty signal inputs, and provides guidance on how the
technician should isolate the cause of the malfunction.
(3) View status, configuration settings, voltages, currents, and

event logs.
5. Model 2218 Serial Interface Unit (SIU2)
a. The SIU2218 shall comply with the ATC 5301 Standard Sec. 6.1 –
SIU.
b. The Model 2218 Serial Interface Unit (SIU2) shall be modular PCB-
based plug-in device.
(1) SIU2 is housed in each Input and Output Assembly.
(a) The SIU2 converts serial data from the ATC Controller
into parallel outputs to the assembly.
16130-7
(b) The SIU2 converts parallel inputs from the assembly

into serial data to the ATC Controller.
I. 54 programmable inputs / outputs
II. 4 opto-isolated inputs
(2) Diagnostic monitoring software uses the front panel EIA-232

port
(3) 1.5 inch width faceplate
6. Model 2216 Cabinet Power Supply (CPS)
a. The PS-2216 Cabinet Power Supply (CPS) shall comply with the ATC
5301 Standard Sec. 6.4 and 6.4.11. It shall be a rack mounted and high
efficiency design and shall be either of the following:
(1) PS2216EP-24-HV Cabinet Power Supply (48v, 24v)
(2) PS2216-2412-HV Cabinet Power Supply (48v, 24v, 12v)
b. Outputs
(1) 1 Amp at 48 Vdc
(2) 5 Amps at 24 Vdc (maximum)
(3) 5 Amps at 12 Vdc (maximum) for PS-2216-2412 only
c. Power Factor corrected input
d. 1U height with Phoenix connector or equal
e. Fuse and LED indicator for each output
7. Model 2205 High‐Density Flash Transfer Relay (HDFTR)
a. The Model 2205 High-Density Flash Transfer Relay (HDFTR) shall

be:
(1) Hermetically Sealed Cover - Moisture proof, prevents contact

contamination, insect proof (fire ant, etc.)
(2) Dry Nitrogen Filled - Protects contacts from corrosion,

prevents condensation
(3) Metal Can - Robust design, shock/impact resistant
(4) Solid Pins - Robust, bend proof
16130-8
(5) Ratings: 5 Amps @ 120 Vac switching, 10 Amps surge
(6) 48 Vdc coil voltage
(7) LED indicator to display contact transfer position
8. Main Contactor
a. The Main Contactor shall be mercury free and shall be rated:
(1) Input: 48 Vdc coil voltage
(2) Output: 60 Amps @ 120Vac
(3) Contacts: SPST-NO
(4) Equipped with input indicator
(5) Operation at rated current:1,000,000
(6) Power: less than 3 Watts
(7) Located in the Output Assembly
(8) External testing terminal block for power of normal or flash

state
9. Cabinet Suppressor-Filter
a. The Cabinet Suppressor-Filter unit shall incorporate the use of

warning and failure indicators and shall have a dry relay contact
remote sensing circuit. The unit shall be modular and pluggable with a
12-position Beau 5412 connector. The unit shall be rated at continuous
service current of 15 Amp and maximum clamp voltage of 390 Vac.
The unit shall filter noise and spike from 10 KHz to 25 MHz and shall
have a peak surge current of 48 KA.
2.03 CABINET OVERVIEW
A. The ATC and ATC Cabinet is part of the ATC suite of standards published by ITE,
ASHTO, and NEMA to describe advanced traffic control products. The ATC Cabinet
includes advanced monitoring features focused on the low current signal displays,
high-density load switches, efficient power supplies, and backward compatibility for
devices such as input cards. The ATC Cabinet is designed to work with the Advanced
Transportation Controller (ATC Standard 5201) using a serial interface between the
controller and the cabinet assemblies.
16130-9
B. The cabinet utilizes concepts from both the NEMA and Model 170 traffic signal
equipment. From the Model 170 it takes the concept of rack-mounted subassemblies.
From NEMA, it borrows the basic serial connections between the controller and
subassemblies.
C. The cabinet provides the communications paths between the various subsystems, as
well as a system to monitor their operation. The cabinet provides power supplies
suitable for the various electronic subassemblies mounted throughout the cabinet.
D. Each of the subassemblies is connected to the controller using a serial bus, similar to
that used in the NEMA TS2-2003 Type 1 cabinet specification. Using a serial
interconnection between subassemblies allows for easy system expansion. The ATC
Cabinet is essentially a platform within which modular components may be added to
serve a variety of ITS applications
E. Key ATC Cabinet elements include the following: Universal High Density Switch
Pack / Flasher (HDSP-FU), Cabinet Monitor Unit (CMU), Auxiliary Display Unit
(ADU), Serial Interface Unit (SIU), Cabinet Power Supply (PS), and High-Density
Flash Transfer Relay Unit (HDFTR).
F. The cabinet is constructed in a modular manner with power distribution and serial
connectors conveniently located throughout the cabinet to facilitate a wide variety of
configurations and future expansion. Each of these subassemblies is discussed below.
A separate standard describes the controller.
2.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All furnished equipment must be new and unused. Vacuum or gaseous tubes and
electromechanical devices (unless specifically called out) will not be used.
B. All equipment such as components and assemblies, as defined in this specification, in

the cabinet shall be clearly and permanently labeled.
C. All marker strips shall be made of material that can be easily and legibly written on
using a pencil or ballpoint pen and be located immediately below the item they are to
identify and must be clearly visible with the items installed.
D. All fuses, circuit breakers, switches (except police panel switches) and indicators
shall be readily visible and accessible when the cabinet front door(s) is open.
E. All circuit breakers located on the rack shall have covers to prevent accidental
tripping.
F. Any components over 50V with exposed terminals shall be protected from incidental
contact per NEC requirements.
G. Wire raceway shall be integrated as part of the cabinet allowing for neat internal and
field wiring.
16130-10
H. All assemblies shall be modular with pluggable cabling.
I. Door switches shall be powered by 48 VDC.
J. The Cabinet shall include, but is not limited to, the following assemblies: Service
Assembly (SA), Input Assembly (IA), Output Assembly (OA), SB1/SB2 and
DC/Clean Power Bus, Field Input Termination Assembly (FITA), and Field Output
Termination Assembly (FOTA).
K. The assemblies in the cabinet shall be readily accessible and removable with simple
hand tools such as screwdriver, and without removing any other equipment.
L. The cabinet shall be capable of remaining in flashing operation with any of the
following assemblies removed: input assembly (IA), output assembly (OA), cabinet
power supply (PS), and controller.
M. Replacing the ATC Cabinet fan shall not require any tool.
N. All assemblies shall be mounted in the 19” rack and bolted securely on the right
and/or left side of the rack per cabinet version detail.
O. Nylon Guides. Guides (top and bottom) shall be provided for assembly plug-in units.
The guides shall begin 0.50 inch from the assembly front panel face.
P. All modules and assemblies shall adhere to the following ATC 5201 v6.25, sec.
9.1.5.1 requirement that “No component shall be applied contrary to its
manufacturer’s recommendations or data sheets.”
Q. All conductors, terminals, and parts which could be hazardous to maintenance

personnel shall be protected with suitable insulating material.
R. All bolts, nuts, washers, screws (size 8 or larger, hinges, and hinge pins shall be
stainless steel unless otherwise specified.
2.05 ELECTRICAL, ENVIRONMENTAL, AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. General. The requirements called out in this specification dealing with equipment
evaluation are a minimum guide. Compliance is not limited to the testing and
inspection described. The ATC Cabinet Inspection and Testing Requirements shall
comply with the Electrical, Environmental and Testing Requirements of the ITS
Cabinet Standard v01.02.17b.
B. Certification. Manufacturers will follow these test procedures and certify that they
have conducted inspection and testing in accordance with this specification.
C. Inspection. Perform a visual and physical inspection including mechanical,

dimensional and assembly conformance of all parts of this specification.
16130-11
D. Electrical, Environmental, and Testing Requirements. Meet all Electrical,

Environmental, and Testing Requirements in the latest national standard (ATC 5301,
ATC Cabinet Standard Version 02; currently v02.02 dated March 18, 2019)
specifically Section 11 – Environmental and Testing Requirements.
E. Quality Control / Final Test. A complete QC/Final Test report shall be supplied with
the ATC Cabinet. Ensure the test report indicated the name of the tester and is signed
by a responsible manager.
F. Quality Control Procedure & Test Report. Supply the quality control procedure and
test report format to the Engineer for approval within 15 days following the award of
the contract. Include the following items:
1. Acceptance testing of all supplied components,
2. Physical and functional testing of all modules and items, and
3. A minimum 100-hr burn-in of all equipment.
G. Cabinet Print. Furnish wiring diagram sheets for the cabinet in a weatherproof plastic
pouch placed in the drawer. Ensure cabinet wiring diagrams are on non-fading media.
2.06 CABINET HOUSING
A. General. The ATC Cabinet Housing shall conform to the ITS Cabinet Standard
v01.02.17b, dated November 16, 2006, Sec. 6.2 Housings, except as specified below.
B. `Standard Cabinet Housings. There are two (2) different cabinet assembly
configurations for the City of Houston, which consist of a specific collection of ATC
Cabinet assemblies described in detail in article 2.07. Each of these assemblies is
installed in a cabinet that is designed for a particular group of applications and is
sized to hold the equipment required. The cabinets have doors both on the front and
the back. The equipment is mounted on a standard EIA 19 in. rack that is fitted
inside each cabinet. Each cabinet housing includes at least the following common
features:
1. Enclosure
2. Gasketing
3. Doors
4. Police Panel
5. Latches/Locks
6. Ventilation and Air Filtration
7. Hinges and Door Catches
16130-12
8. Assembly Supports and Mounting each cabinet.
C. Housing Construction: The housing shall be rainproof. It shall have front and rear
doors, each equipped with a lock and handle. The enclosure top shall be crowned to
prevent standing water.
1. Cabinet Housing Configurations:
a. ATC Cabinet Housing 1. (Referred to as ATC Cabinet 356 version or

ATC 356)
(1) This Housing configuration shall be based on the ITS Housing

#2 type enclosure. This version very similar to the Type 336S
series of cabinet used for the Model 170 Controller system and
is meant for applications that require less space for inputs and
outputs. This cabinet might be found at small two through
eight-phase traffic signals, ramp meters, data stations and
similar less space demanding applications. Dimensions are
width 24.25 in., depth 20.25 in., and height 46.25 in.
b. ATC Cabinet Housing 2. (Referred to as ATC Cabinet 350 version or

ATC 350)
(1) This Housing configuration shall be based on the ITS Housing

#3 type enclosure. This is a large two rack, four door cabinet
with bottom details and a bolt pattern similar in size to the
NEMA P cabinet. It is meant for installations requiring a lot of
equipment. An example application may be a traffic signal
controller with a communications hub or a ramp meter, or
perhaps additional input/output assemblies. Dimensions are
width 44.50 in., depth 26.00 in., and height 66.38 in
(a) Facing the front, the left rack cage shall be the ATC
cabinet side with modular interchangeable ATC
assemblies (excluding the service assembly)
interconnected through an advanced serial data bus.
(b) The right rack cage shall include shelving for the UPS
system components, ITS devices and a power strip for
powering additional devices and equipment.
2. Material Thickness: The enclosure, doors, lifting eyes, gasket channels, police
panel door, spacer supports and all supports welded to the enclosure and doors
shall be fabricated of 0.125 inch minimum thickness aluminum sheet. The
filter shell, filter through, fan support and police panel enclosure shall be
fabricated of 0.080 inch minimum thickness aluminum sheet. The spacer
supports shall have the option to use 0.059 inch minimum stainless steel sheet.
16130-13
3. Welds: All exterior seams for enclosure and doors shall be continuously
welded and shall be smooth. All edges shall be filled to a radius of 0.03125
inch minimum. Exterior cabinet welds shall be done by gas Tungsten arc TIG
process only. ER5356 aluminum alloy bare welding electrodes conforming to
AWS A5.10 requirements shall be used for welding on aluminum. Procedures,
welders and welding operators shall conform to the requirements and practices
in AWS B3.0 and C5.6 for aluminum. Internal cabinet welds shall be done by
gas metal arc MIG or gas Tungsten arc TIG process.
4. Aluminum Surface Protection: The aluminum surface protection shall be

either MILL FINISH or ANTI-GRAFFITI Paint.
a. Anti‐Graffiti Paint: The aluminum surface shall be cleaned, etched and

rinsed. The cleaning and etching procedure shall be to immerse in
inhabited alkaline cleaner at 71 degrees C for five minutes (Oakite
61A, Diversey 909 or equivalent in mix of the 6 to 8 ounces per gallon
to distilled water). Rinse in cold water. Etch in a sodium solution at 66
degrees C for 5 minutes 90.5 ounce sodium fluoride plus 5 ounces of
sodium hydroxide mix per gallon to distilled water. Rinse in cold
water.
b. Desmut in a 50% by volume nitric acid solution at 20 degrees C for 2

minutes. Rinse in cold water. Dry surfaces by preheating in an oven
for 15 minutes at 400 degrees F. Remove and coat the surfaces using
TCI Wheel Silver # 9811- 0110 with a minimum film build of not
more than 2 mils total thickness. Place back into preheated oven for 10
minutes minimum at 360 degrees F to gel the base coat. Remove and
coat the surfaces using TCI Anti-graffiti Clear # 9810-0231. Place
back into oven and fully cure at 380 degrees F for 40 minutes.
5. Enclosure Door Frames and Door Seals: The enclosure door frames shall be
double-flanged out on all four sides and shall have strikers to hold tension on,
and to form a firm seal between, the door gasketing and the frame. The
dimension between the door edge and the enclosure external surface when the
door is closed and locked shall be 0.156 inch (+/-0.08 inches).
D. Gasketing: Gasketing shall be provided on all door openings and shall be dust-tight.
Gaskets shall be 0.25 inches minimum thickness closed cell neoprene or silicone
(BOYD R- 108480 or equal) and shall be permanently bonded to the metal. A gasket
top and side channels shall be provided to support the top gasket on the door to
prevent gasket gravitational fatigue.
E. Cage Mounting Supports: Cage mounting supports shall be provided on either side,
level with the bottom edge of the door opening, for horizontal support and bolt
attachment; side cage supports provided for the bracket cage supports; and bracket
cage support attachments.
16130-14
F. Lifting Eyes and Exterior Bolt Heads: The housing shall be provided with 2 lifting
eyes for placing the cabinet on its foundation. Each eye opening shall have a
minimum diameter of 0.75 inch. Each eye shall be able to support the weight load of
1000 lbs. All bolt heads shall be tamperproof type.
G. Door Latches and Locks: The latching handles shall have provision for padlocking in
the closed position. Each handle shall be 0.75 inch minimum diameter stainless steel
with a minimum of 0.50 inch shank. The padlocking attachment shall be placed at 4
inch from the handle shank center. An additional 4 inch minimum gripping length
shall be provided.
1. Latch/Lock Mechanism: The latching mechanism shall be a three-point draw

roller type. The pushrods shall be turned edgewise at the outward supports and
have a cross section of 0.25 inch thick by 0.75 inch wide minimum. Rollers
shall have a minimum diameter of 0.875 inch with nylon wheels and steel ball
bearings. When the door is closed and latched, the door shall be locked. The
lock and lock support shall be rigidly mounted on the door. The lock shall be
mounted in the upper quadrant, above the handle when in its fully open
position. In the locked position, the bolt throw shall extend a minimum of 0.25
inch (+/-0.03125 inches) into the latch cam area. A seal shall be provided to
prevent dust or water entry through the lock opening.
2. Lock & Keys: The locks shall be Corbin 2 type. One key shall be supplied
with each lock. The keys shall be removable in the locked position only. The
locks shall have rectangular, spacing loaded bolts.
a. The bolt shall have a 0.281 inch throw and shall be 0.75 inch wide by
0.375 inch thick.
b. Tolerance is 0.035 inch. A swing away cover shall be placed over the
key entrance to protect the lock mechanism.
3. Cam: The center latch cam shall be fabricated of a minimum thickness of

0.188 inch aluminum, or 11 gauge steel. The bolt surface shall horizontally
cover the cam thickness. The cam shall be structured to only allow the door to
open when the handle is moved toward the center of the door.
H. Housing Ventilation: Housing ventilation shall include intake, exhaust, filtration, and
continuous running fan assembly or a thermostat controlled fan.
16130-15
1. Intake & Filter: The louvered vent depth shall be a maximum of 0.25 inch. A
removable and reusable air filter shall be housed behind the door vents. The
filter filtration area shall cover the vent opening area. A filter shell shall be
provided that fits over the filter providing mechanical support for the filter.
This shell shall be louvered to direct the incoming air downward. The shell
sides and top shall be bent over a minimum of 0.25 inch to house the filter.
The filter resident in its shell shall be held firmly in place with a bottom
trough and spring-loaded upper clamp. No incoming air shall bypass the filter.
The bottom filter shall be formed into a waterproof sump with drain holes to
the outside housing. The filter shall be 16 inch wide by 12 inch high by 0.875
inch thick. The filter shall be an ECO-AIR Product E35S or equal.
a. The intake (including filter with shell) and exhaust areas shall pass a
minimum of 120 cubic feet of air per minute for Housing 2; and 26
cubic feet of air per minute for Housing 1.
2. Fan: Each electric fan shall be equipped with ball or roller bearings and shall
have a minimum capacity of 100 cubic feet of free air delivery per minute.
The fan shall be mounted within the housing and protected with a finger
guard. The fan should be powered from 120 Vac.
I. Hinges: Stainless steel hinges (two bolts per leaf) shall be provided to bolt the
enclosure to the doors. Housing 2 shall have four hinges per door, and Housing 1
shall have three hinges per door. Each hinge shall be 3.5 inch minimum length and
have a fixed pin. The pin ends shall be welded to hinge and ground smooth. The pins
and bolts shall be covered by the door edge and not accessible when the door is
closed. A ground strap between the door and the main cabinet housing shall be
required when 120 VAC components are mounted on the door.
J. Door Catches: Front and rear doors shall be provided with catches to hold the door
open at both 90 and 165 (+/- 10) Degrees. The catch minimum diameter shall be
0.375 inch aluminum rods. The catches must be capable of holding the door open at
90 degrees in a 60 mph wind acting at an angle perpendicular to the plane of the door.
K. Police Panel: A police panel assembly shall be provided to allow limited control
access. The panel door shall be equipped with a lock and master police key. The front
and back of the panel shall be enclosed with a rigid metal covering so that no parts
having live voltage are exposed. The panel assembly shall have a drain to prevent
water from collecting within the assembly. The drain shall be channeled to the
outside. The cabinets shall have one switch provided and labeled "SIGNALS ON -
OFF” and one switch provided and labeled "FLASH / AUTO". The MANUAL
CONTROL ENABLE ON-OFF switch and a receptacle for the INTERVAL
ADVANCE cord shall be provided. An INTERVAL ADVANCE cord, six feet in
length, shall be provided.
16130-16
1. The police panel switches shall be individually wired through factory molded
connectors which allow the switches to be disconnected and not usable, as
desired by the City. These connectors shall be wired in such a way to provide
full cabinet operation when any or all police panel switches are connected or
disconnected. The police door shall be a treasure type lock Cobin No.
R357SGS series, or approved equivalent.
L. Rack Cage: A standard rack cage shall be installed inside the housing for mounting of
the ATC Controller unit and cabinet assemblies. The EIA rack portion of the cage
shall consist of four continuous, adjustable equipment mounting angles. The
mounting angle nominal thickness shall be 11- gauge plated steel. The mounting
angles shall be tapped with 10-32 threads with EIA universal spacing. The mounting
angle shall comply with standard EIA-310-E and shall be supported at the top and
bottom by either welded or bolted support angles to form a cage. The mounting
angles shall provide holes to mount the side panels.
1. Clearance between Rails: Clearance between rails for mounting assemblies

shall be 17.75 inch.
2. Cage Connection: The cage shall be bolted to the cabinet at four points via the
housing cage supports and four points via associated spacer brackets (top and
bottom).
3. Cage Location: The cage(s) shall be centered within the cabinet door
opening(s).
M. Drawer Shelf Unit: A telescopic slide out drawer to storage document shall be
provided. The Drawer Shelf Unit shall be mounted across the EIA rails and shall have
a non-conductive top, locking provision when fully extended and lip or handle for
pulling.
N. Fiber Optic Termination Panel: A fiber optic termination panel shall be supplied with
each cabinet configuration. See fiber optic termination panel details. Figure 16.
O. Power Strip: Only applicable to the ATC Cabinet 350 version, 1U Rack Mounted
Power Strip, 120V, 15A, 5-15P, 6 Outlets. Locking switch cover to prevent accidental
shutoff.
P. Cabinet Light: The cabinet shall have LED cabinet lights activated by door switches
and equipped with a manual switch and fuse. ATC Cabinet Housing 1 shall have two
(2) LED cabinet lights, and ATC Cabinet Housing 2 shall have four (4) LED cabinet
lights.
Q. UPS Battery shelf: Only applicable to the ATC Cabinet 350 version, a full-depth pull-
out battery shelf shall be provided. It shall be mounted across the EIA rails and have a
minimum load capacity of 300 lbs.
2.07 ASSEMBLIES
16130-17
A. General. All ATC cabinets shall have the following equipment which shall be
completely removable from the cabinet without removing any other equipment and
using only a slotted or Phillips screwdriver: Service Assembly (SA), Input Assembly
(IA), Output Assembly (OA), SB1/SB2 and DC/Clean Power Bus, Field Input
Termination Assembly (FITA), and Field Output Termination Assembly (FOTA).
B. ATC Cabinet Assemblies
1. Output Assembly (OA) – 16-Channel or 32-Channel
a. Output Assembly - (16‐Channel Option)
(1) The Output Assembly shall be an EIA-310E rack mounted

assembly. The Output Assembly shall house eight Model 2202-
HV Universal High-Density Switch Pack / Flasher Units
(HDSP-FU) providing forty eight load circuits.
(2) One resident Model 2218 Serial Interface Unit (SIU2) shall
provide interface and control.
(3) The Output Assembly shall house a CMUip-2212-HV Cabinet

Monitor Unit (CMUip), Main Contactor, Stop Time Switch,
Flash / Auto Switch, four Circuit Breakers and Momentary
24VDC Bypass Switch.
b. Output Assembly - (32‐Channel Option)
(1) The Output Assembly shall be an EIA‐310E rack mounted

assembly. The Output Assembly shall house sixteen Model
2202‐HV Universal High‐Density Switch Pack / Flasher Units
(HDSP‐FU) providing ninety six load circuits.
(2) Two resident Model 2218 Serial Interface Units (SIU2) shall
provide interface and control.
(3) The Output Assembly shall house a CMUip-2212-HV Cabinet

Monitor Unit (CMUip), the Main Contactor, Stop Time
Switch, Flash / Auto Switch, eight Circuit Breakers and
Momentary 24VDC Bypass Switch.
2. Field Output Termination Assembly (FOTA) (16‐Channel)
a. The 16-Channel Field Output Termination Assembly shall be coupled

with the 16-Channel Output Assembly and shall house eight Model
2205 High-Density Flash Transfer Relays (HDFTR).
b. The HDFTR and Flash Program Blocks (FPB) shall be provided to

control and select the color (red, yellow, or dark) during ATC Cabinet
Flash mode.
16130-18
c. Transient Protectors shall be provided at the field terminals for the

protection of the HDSP-FU when requested.
d. Provide one Field Output Termination Assembly with a 16-Channel

Output Assembly. Provide two Feld Output Termination Assemblies
with a 32-Channel Output Assembly.
3. HDSP Suppressor
a. The HDSP Suppressor shall be modular and pluggable. The unit shall
be epoxy encapsulated and equipped with 9-position 5.08 mm Phoenix
Contact connector or approved equal. The unit shall be able to protect
6 circuits. The device operating voltage shall be 120 VAC and
clamping voltage shall be 340 VAC. The unit dimensions shall be 2”
H x 0.7” W x 2” D. The unit shall have a status indicator in the form of
a LED illuminated during normal operation.
4. Field Output Termination Assembly Breakout Panel
a. A Field Output Termination Assembly ITS style breakout panel with

terminal strips must be incorporated to support the FOTA for the
landing of field wiring in the cabinet. Shall be one panel per 16
Channels. Used only in the ATC Cabinet 350 version. See Figure 7,
ITS Style Field Output Termination Assembly.
5. Input Assembly (IA) – 24-Channel or 48-Channel
a. Input Assembly - (24‐Channel Option)
(1) The Input Assembly shall be an EIA-310E rack mounted

assembly providing twelve slots of 22/44 pin PCB sockets. A
Model 2218 Serial Interface Unit (SIU2) shall be provided in
its location mated to a DIN 96-pin connector. The SIU2 shall
provide interface and control between the ATC Controller and
the input units via system SB1/SB2. This Input Assembly shall
be wired for a mix of twelve 2-channel and 4-channel devices.
b. Input Assembly - (48‐Channel Option)
(1) The Input Assembly shall be an EIA-310E rack mounted

assembly providing twelve slots of 22/44 pin PCB sockets.
Two Model 2218 Serial Interface Units (SIU2) shall be
provided in its location mated to a DIN 96-pin connector. The
SIU2 shall provide interface and control between the ATC
Controller and the input units via system SB1/SB2. The Input
Assembly shall be capable of supporting twelve 4-channel
devices. This Input Assembly shall be wired for a mix of
twelve 2-channel and 4-channel devices.
16130-19
6. Field Input Termination Assembly (FITA) – 24 Channel
a. The 24-Channel Field Input Termination Assembly shall be coupled

with the 24-Channel Input Assembly and shall have positions for
landing 24, two-wire inputs and their associated earth ground wires.
The Field Input Termination Assembly shall have positions for 12
Detection Module Suppressors. The Detection Module Suppressors
shall be supplied with the cabinet if procurement requires. The 24-
Channel Field Input Termination Assembly shall be mounted across
the EIA rails and it shall swing down to provide access to the back of
the assemblies mounted in the opposite side. Two 24-Channel Field
Input Termination Assembly shall be coupled with the 48-Channel
Input Assembly.
7. Detection Module Suppressor
a. The Detection Module Suppressor shall be modular and pluggable.

The unit shall be epoxy encapsulated and equipped with 6-position
5.08 mm Phoenix Contact or approved equal connector. The unit shall
be able to protect 6 circuits. The device operating voltage shall be 75
Vac and clamping voltage shall be 130 Vdc. The device dimensions
shall be 2” H x 0.7” W x 1.2” D.
8. Service Assembly (SA)
a. Service Assembly - (1‐Flasher)
(1) The Service Assembly shall be modular and shall be mounted

on the lower right side of the EIA when viewed from the front.
It shall house: a Model 2202-HV Universal HDSP-FU, EDCO
SHA-1250 or approved equal, BBS landing wire terminals,
GFCI, Convenient Outlets, 4 HDFU output fuses, and Circuit
Breakers.
b. Service Assembly - (2‐Flasher)
(1) The Service Assembly shall be modular and shall be mounted

on the lower right side of the EIA when viewed from the front.
It shall house: two Model 2202-HV Universal HDSP-FU,
EDCO SHA-1250 or approved equal, BBS landing wire
terminals, GFCI, Convenient Outlets, 8 HDFU output fuses,
and Circuit Breakers.
9. SB1/SB2 and DC Power Bus
16130-20
a. SB1/SB2 and DC Power Bus shall include eight DB25 connectors to

interconnect the SB1/SB2 communication ports of the assemblies and
controller. It shall include a termination circuit at the end of the
connections (S8) to prevent radio frequency signal reflection.
Termination Circuit must be integral component in the serial bus
assembly and not removeable. SB1/SB2 and DC Power Bus shall
include one Phoenix plug block or equal to bring the DC power to the
SB1/SB2 and DC Power Bus; such power shall be distributed to the
ATC Cabinet Assemblies through seven Phoenix receptacle blocks or
equal. All unused phoenix receptacles must be populated with male
plugs for future use. The copper traces for the DC voltages shall
support at least 10 Amps.
b. The SB1/SB2 and DC Power Bus shall be mounted in the EIA rails
and it shall swing out to provide access to the back of the assemblies
mounted in the opposite side.
10. AC Clean Power Bus
a. The AC Clean Power Bus shall include eight single NEMA 5-15
receptacles, to provide AC clean power to the ATC Cabinet
Assemblies, the controller and Cabinet Power Supply. It shall be
mounted on the EIA rails and it shall swing out to provide access to
the back of the assemblies mounted in opposite side.
11. “J” Panel Assemblies
a. The “J” Panels shall be mirror images of each other when mounted in
the cabinet cage. They shall be bolted to the cage with the matching
shelf unit bolted to the panel. Two ten position minimum AC-Raw and
equipment ground copper bus bars shall be provided on the lower right
position of the J panel when viewed from the rear door for
interconnect to the service panel and provide the termination for AC-
Raw and equipment ground wiring within the cage and cabinet.
12. Auxiliary I/O Assembly
a. An optional Auxiliary Unit that provides a minimum 21 general

purpose inputs and a minimum 8 general purpose outputs, and a
connection to Logic Ground (-24 VDC). It shall be 19” Rack Mounted,
contain an integrated SIU which provides the interface to the ATC
cabinet, and a LED indication on the front panel.
16130-21
b. The Auxiliary I/O Assembly shall provide functionality similar to a

NEMA TS1 D Connector Panel allowing for 24 VDC inputs and
outputs to be available o and from the controller. It will be used to
send special function outputs from the controller to cabinet devices or
to receive inputs from cabinet devices to the controller (e.g. UPS relay
alarms, blank-out sign relay panels, or detection inputs). All necessary
serial bus and power cabling shall be provided to connect the assembly
to the cabinet busses. Used only in the ATC Cabinet 350 version
based on intersection design needs.
2.08 CABINET CONFIGURATIONS
A. General. The ATC Cabinets must consist of a package of items needed to carry out a
specific application. Cabinet Versions provided here are examples of possible cabinet
configurations.
B. Cabinet Traffic Signal Application
1. The City of Houston has two (2) different ATC Cabinet configurations based
on the ITS Housing #2 type enclosure and the ITS Housing #3 type enclosure
from the ITS Cabinet Standards, v01.02.17b, and henceforth referred to as
ATC Cabinet 356 version (or ATC 356) and ATC Cabinet 350 version (or
ATC 350), respectively. Reference article 2.06.C, Cabinet Housing
Configurations.
2. Traffic Signal Cabinet Application:
a. ATC Cabinet 356 version: 2-Door Configuration Cabinet

with”336/346” Base, Adaptor Mount
b. ATC Cabinet 350 version: 4-Door Configuration Cabinet with “P/R”

Base Ground Mount
16130-22
Table 1
Example Cabinet Configurations
Item # Package Items ATC 350 ATC 356

Housing 1 – Cage #2 - 1
Housing 2 – Two (2) Cage #1 1 -
“J” Panel Cage #1 4 -
“J” Panel Cage #2 - 2
Service Assembly – 1-Flasher - 1
Service Assembly – 2-Flasher 1 -
AC Clean Power Bus 1 1
SB1 / SB2 and DC Power Bus 1 1
Output Assembly – 16-Channel - 1
Output Assembly – 32-Channel 1 -
Field Output Termination Assembly (16 Channel) 2 1
Field Output Termination Assembly Breakout Panel (ITS Style) 2 -
Input Assembly – 24 Channel - 1
Input Assembly – 48 Channel 1 -
Field Input Termination Assembly * 1 1
Auxiliary I/O Assembly ** 1 -
Auxiliary Display Unit (ADU) 1 1
LED – Cabinet Lights 4 2
Drawer Assembly 2 1
Fiber Optic Termination Panel 1 1
Shelf Controller 1 1
Full-Depth Shelf 2 -
UPS Battery Shelf 2 -
Power Strip 1 -
* Field Wire Support Bracket required with each Assembly
** Optional, based on intersection needs at the City’s discretion
2.09 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT AND ATERIALS
A. Provide each major assembly with the following:
1. The ATC Cabinet shall also be supplied with the following components:
a. Output Assembly
(1) Output Assembly (16‐Channel):
(a) (1-8ea **) Model 2202-HV HDSP-FU
16130-23
(b) (1 ea) Model 2218 SIU2
(c) (1 ea) Model 2212-HV CMUip
(2) Output Assembly (32‐Channel):
(a) (1-16ea **) Model 2202-HV HDSP-FU
(b) (2 ea) Model 2218 SIU2
(c) (1 ea) Model 2212-HV CMUip
b. Field Output Termination Assembly (16‐Channel):
(1) (1-8 ea **) Model 2205 HDFTR
(2) (1-8 ea **) Transient Protector
(3) (16 ea) Red Flash Program Blocks
(4) (4 ea) Yellow Flash Program Blocks
(5) (4 ea) White Flash Program Blocks
c. Input Assembly
(1) Input Assembly (24‐Channel):
(a) (1 ea) Model 2218 SIU2
(2) Input Assembly (48‐Channel):
(a) (2 ea) Model 2218 SIU2
d. Service Assembly
(1) Service Assembly (1‐Flasher):
(a) (1 ea) Model 2202-HV HDSP-FU
(b) (1 ea) EDCO SHA-1250 or approved equal
(2) Service Assembly (2‐Flasher):
(a) (2 ea) Model 2202-HV HDSP-FU
(b) (1 ea) EDCO SHA-1250 or approved equal
** Quantity at the end user’s discretion.
16130-24
PART 3 EXECUTION – Not Used
16130-25
Figure 1
Cabinet Layout – ATC Cabinet 350 version (FRONT)
16130-26
Figure 2
Cabinet Layout – ATC Cabinet 350 version (REAR)
16130-27
Figure 3
Cabinet Layout – ATC Cabinet 356 version (FRONT)
16130-28
Figure 4
Cabinet Layout – ATC Cabinet 356 version (REAR)
16130-29
Figure 5
Cabinet Layout – ATC Cabinet 356 version (Left Side)
16130-30
Figure 6
Cabinet Layout – ATC Cabinet 356 version (Right Side)
16130-31
1. The terminal blocks are Magnum A48130604 or approved equal with (6) #10
feed thru brass nickel plated screw lug positions, rated 60V, 35 amperes, and
designed to prevent twisting in the housing.
2. The panel shall be made of .090, 5052 Aluminum material
3. Output panel #1 is silkscreened for phase 1 thru 16 with the terminal number
and signal head face color as per drawings.
4. Output panel #2 is silkscreened for phases 17 thru 32 with the terminal number
and signal head face color as per drawings.
5. The thumb screws that hold the panel to the angle brackets are TSD screws
#8/32
6. The cables from the Output Assemblies to the Output Panels shall be long
enough to install the output panels at the bottom of the 19” rack.
7. The cables from the Output Assemblies to the Output Panels must be labeled
with permanent markings showing phase(s) that are attached to the output
panel.
Figure 7
ITS Style Field Output Termination Assembly Breakout Panel
16130-32
Figure 8
“J” Panel – Cage 1
16130-33
Figure 9
“J” Panel – Cage 2
16130-34
Figure 10
Cabinet Housing 1 – ATC Cabinet 356 version
16130-35
Figure 11
Detail 1
16130-36
Figure 12
Detail 2
16130-37
Figure 13
Cabinet Cages #1 & #2
16130-38
Figure 14
Cabinet Cage to Housing 1 – ATC Cabinet 356 version
Support Details
16130-39
Figure 15
Cabinet Cage to Housing 2 – ATC Cabinet 350 version
Support Details
16130-40
Figure 16
Fiber Optic Termination Panel
Provide P/N 616SMSC
16130-41
Figure 17
Controller Shelf/Drawer Support Assembly
16130-42
Figure 18
ATC Cabinet 16-Channel Output Assembly (OA)
16130-43
Figure 19
ATC Cabinet 24-Channel Input Assembly (IA)
16130-44
Figure 20
Model 2218 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) Connector
16130-45
Figure 21
Model 2202-HV High-Density Switch Pack (HDSP)
& High-Density Flasher Unit (HDFU) Connectors
16130-46
Figure 22
Model 2212-HV Cabinet Monitor Unit (CMUip) Connector
16130-47
Figure 23
SB1/SB2 , SB3 , and Model 2216-24 Cabinet Power Supply (CPS)
Connectors
16130-48
END OF SECTION
16130-49
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION CATHODIC PROTCTION FOR PIPELINES
SECTION 16640
CATHODIC PROTECTION FOR PIPELINES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Requirements for cathodic protection systems on steel, ductile iron and concrete
cylinder pipe in water and sewer pipeline projects using rectifiers and deep anodes.
B. Requirements for sacrificial anode cathodic protection on steel, ductile iron and
concrete cylinder pipes and metallic fittings in plastic pipe systems using zinc and/or
magnesium anodes.
C. Section 15640 - Joint Bonding and Electrical Isolation
D. Section 15641 - Corrosion Control Test Stations
1.03 UNIT PRICES
A. This item will be measured and paid for as a lump sum item for the job.
rectifier systems with deep anode groundbed and junction boxes, sacrificial anodes,
power feed hookups, and all excavation, backfill, field welding, connections,
adjustments, testing, cleanup, and other related work necessary for construction as
shown on the drawings and specified herein.
1.04 REFERENCES
B. ASTM C 94 - Standard Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete.
C. ASTM A 518 – Standard Specification for Corrosion-Resistant High-Silicon Iron

Castings.
D. ASTM D 1248 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials

for Wire and Cable.
16640-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
E. ASTM D 4239 – Standard Test Methods for Sulfur in the Analysis Sample of Coal
and Coke using High Temperature Tube Furnace Combustion Methods.
F. ASTM D 5192 – Standard Practice for Collection of Coal Samples from Core.
G. AWWA M9 Manual - Concrete Pressure Pipe.
H. CSA – Canadian Standards Association, Standard C22.2, No. 66 and No. 107.
I. City of Houston Electrical Code.
J. NACE International SP0169 - Recommended Practice, Control of External Corrosion

on Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems.
K. NACE International SP0572 - Recommended Practice for Design, Installation,

Operation and Maintenance of Impressed Current Deep Groundbeds.
L. NEC 70 – National Electrical Code.
M. NEMA TC6 - PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation.
N. NEMA TC9 - Fittings for ABS and PVC Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground
Installation.
O. NEMA 4 – Type 3R Enclosures.
P. UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires.
Q. UL 467 - Bonding and Grounding Equipment.
R. UL 486A - Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors.
S. UL 506 – Specialty Transformers.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submittals to conform to the requirements of Section 01330 - Submittal

Procedures.
B. Design Drawings and Computations: Prepare by or under the direct supervision of a

Professional Engineer, registered in the State of Texas with a minimum of ten years
experience in cathodic protection design, all computations and drawings.
manufacturer’s name on the catalog cuts. Provide sufficient information to show that
the materials meet the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Where more
than one item or catalog number appears on a catalog cut, clearly identify the item
proposed.
16640-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
D. Logs: Give the City of Houston representative a minimum of 48 hours notice prior to
drilling the anode bore. Type and submit to the City of Houston representative, copies
of detailed geological and resistance logs of each deep anode bore.

site. In addition to operating instructions, include a circuit diagram and spare parts list
in the manual. Operate the rectifier under full load conditions at the factory and
thoroughly inspect and test by the manufacturer prior to delivery to the job site.
Report results of this testing on a manufacturer's quality control form and include in
the operation manual. The rectifier manufacturer is to reference each operating
manual by rectifier model number and individual serial number.
F. Report: Submit six (6) operating, monitoring and maintenance reports for the cathodic
protection systems. Include all test data as required by Section 3.08, paragraph H.
Include operating instructions, maintenance data, product data and test procedures in
the manuals.
G. Drawings: Maintain as-built drawings of the cathodic protection installation during

installation and construction. Revise drawings to show exact locations of all
rectifiers, anodes, wiring, connections and terminal boxes. Properly identify all items
of equipment and material. Submit the original as-built drawings to the City of
Houston representative.

protection system meet the requirements of the drawings and specifications.
Reference the applicable section of the specifications and the applicable standard
detail on the certification.
B. Drawings: The drawings for the cathodic protection system are diagrammatic and not
scaled for exact locations unless scales are explicitly stated on the specific drawing.
Determine exact locations by field conditions and non-interference with other utilities
or mechanical and structural features. Note other existing utilities in the area and do
not damage these utilities during excavation. Repair any damaged utilities to the
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SACRIFICIAL ANODES - MAGNESIUM
A. Magnesium Anodes: Use high potential magnesium anodes. Follow the metallurgical
composition of the magnesium anodes as listed below:
16640-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
Percent
Element
Composition
Aluminum 0.01 Maximum
Manganese 0.50 to 1.3
Copper 0.02 Maximum
Nickel 0.001 Maximum
Iron 0.03 Maximum
Other - (each) 0.05 Maximum
Other - (total) 0.30 Maximum
Magnesium Balance
B. Magnesium Anode Current Capacity: Magnesium anodes require a current capacity

of no less than 500 amp-hours per pound of magnesium.
C. Anode Backfill Material: Use chemical backfill material around all galvanic anodes.
Backfill provides a reduced contact resistance to earth, provides a uniform
environment surrounding the anode, retains moisture around the anode, and prevents
passivation of the anode.
1. All galvanic anodes come prepacked in a backfill material conforming to the

following composition:
a. Ground hydrated gypsum: 75 percent
b. Powdered bentonite: 20 percent
c. Anhydrous sodium sulfate: 5 percent.
2. Have a grain size backfill such that 100 percent is capable of passing through
a 20 mesh screen and 50 percent is retained by a 100 mesh screen.
3. Completely surround the anode with the backfill mixture within a cotton bag.
4. For standard cast magnesium ingots, the required weight of backfill follows:
Anode Weight Backfill Weight Total Weight

(Pounds) (Pounds) (Pounds)
9 15 24
17 25 42
20 50 70
32 38 70
48 48 96
60 70 130
D. Anode Lead Wires:
16640-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Use a 20-foot length of No. 12 AWG solid copper wire equipped with TW or
THW insulation for standard lead wires for a galvanic anode.
2. Color code all anode lead wires green when terminated in test stations.
E. Lead Wire Connection to Magnesium Anode:
1. Cast magnesium anodes with a galvanized steel core with the weight of the
core not to exceed 0.10 pounds per linear foot.
2. Recess one end of the anode to expose the core for the lead wire connection.
3. Silver-solder the lead wire to the core and fully insulate the connection by
filling the recess with an electrical potting compound.
2.02 SACRIFICIAL ANODES - ZINC
A. Zinc Anodes: Use high purity zinc anodes. The metallurgical composition of the zinc
anodes conform to ASTM B 418, Type II and the following:
Element Percent Composition

Cadmium 0.003 Maximum
Iron 0.0014 Maximum
Lead 0.003 Maximum
Zinc Balance
B. Zinc Anode Current Capacity: Zinc anodes require a current capacity of no less than
335 amp-hours per pound of zinc.
1. All galvanic anodes come prepackaged in a backfill material conforming to

the following composition:
16640-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
4. For standard cast zinc ingots, the required weight of backfill follows:

30 40 70
45 55 100
60 70 130
D. Anode Lead Wires: For the lead wire for the zinc anodes, use a 20-foot length of No.
12 AWG solid copper wire equipped with TW of THW insulation.
E. Lead Wire Connection to Zinc Anode:
1. Cast zinc anodes with a 1/4-inch diameter galvanized steel core.
2. Extend one end of the core beyond the anode for the lead wire connection.
3. Silver-solder the lead wire to the core and fully insulate the connection.
A. Description: Use high silicon-chromium-iron anode centrifugally cast in tubular form

in accordance with the following specifications.
1. Anode Alloy: The anode consists of Durichlor 51, high silicon, chromium
iron. This alloy to be made in accordance with ASTM A 518, Grade 3 with
nominal percentages as follows:
Chemical Composition
Element Composition, Weight %
Carbon 0.70 - 1.10
Manganese 1.50, max
Silicon 14.20 - 14.75
Chromium 3.25 - 5.00
Molybdenum 20, max
Copper 0.50, max
2. Mechanical and Physical Properties: The mechanical and physical properties

of the anode are as follows:
16640-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
Tensile Strength (1/2" dia. bar) psi 15,000

Compressive Strength, psi 100,000
Hardness, Brinel 520
Density, gr/ml 7.0
Melting Point, °F 2300
Specific Resistance, micro-ohms-cm
72
(20°C)
Coefficient of expansion, 32° to 212° F 7.33 X 106
3. Size: Conform to the following sizes for anode castings:
Weight O.D. Length

Type (pounds) (inches) (feet)
TA-2 46 2.19 7
TA-3 63 2.66 7
TA-4 85 3.75 7
TA-5 110 4.75 7
TA-2 anodes are required unless otherwise noted on the drawings.
1. Use a No. 8 AWG seven strand, copper conductor equipped with fluorinated
polymer insulation for the lead wire for an impressed current anode. Require
the length of the lead wire sufficient to reach the anode terminal box without
splicing additional wire.
2. Attach the anode lead wire at the center of the anode. Have minimum pull-out
strength of one and one-half times the breaking strength of the No. 8 AWG
lead wire or 788 pounds for the center connection.
3. Do not exceed 0.004 ohms for the electrical contact resistance as measured
across the lead wire-to-connector junction.
C. Impressed Current Anode Backfill: Use SC3 calcined fluid petroleum coke as
manufactured by Loresco, Inc. to backfill impressed current anodes. Anode backfill
properties to be as follows:
1. Typical Chemical Analysis:

Ash 0.6 maximum
Volatiles 0 (950° C)
Moisture 0.05
16640-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Physical Properties: Bulk density of 74 pounds/cubic foot.
3. Particle Analysis: Dust free with a maximum particle size of 1 mm.
2.04 VENT
A. Use plastic vent pipe from the bottom anode to the surface for dissipating gases to the
atmosphere.
B. Require 1-inch diameter AllVent slotted pipe or plastic vent pipe with 1/8-inch holes
drilled on 6-inch centers in the area of the anodes. Do not use slotted vent pipe or drill
holes in the vent pipe above the anodes.
C. Extend the plastic vent pipe above grade, screen the vent outlet, and install in an
inverted manner.
2.05 RECTIFIERS

manufactured by Universal Rectifiers, Corrpower or approved equal, conforming to
NEMA MR-20-1958 and listed in CSA File No. 45382.
C. AC Input Ratings: Full rated DC output shall be obtainable with an AC input voltage
at 5% below the nominal value. Continuous AC input voltage at 10% above the
nominal value shall not damage the transformer, the diode bridge assembly, or exceed
any component rates. (Note: This shall apply provided that the rectifier has not been
unit.)
F. Rectifying Elements: Rectifying elements to be silicon diodes sized as follows:
1. The Peak Inverse Voltage (PIV) of the diode shall be 300% of the maximum

16640-8
CITY OF HOUSTON


trip between 101 percent and 125 percent of rated load, and must trip at 125 percent
and above.

the AC input.

J. Connection Hardware: Use only copper or high conductivity brass electrical

hardware, suitably sized, and finished in electroless nickel plating for superior
torqued to manufacturer's recommended specifications.
K. Enclosures:
1. Mount rectifier unit and anode junction panel in a single enclosure.
2. Enclosure to be free standing, NEMA 4X, 36” wide x 48” high x 24” deep, 12
gauge, type 304 stainless steel with lifting eyes.
3. Equip with single, louvered door with pad lockable, single handle. Provide
drip shield and inside insect screen.
4. Include ground lug, sized for No. 6 AWG wire.
5. Place stickers on all four sides that read “Danger, High Voltage, Keep Out.”
6. Provide permanent engraved nameplate with black letters on white

background that reads “Cathodic Protection Cabinet, Property of the City of
Houston, In Case of Emergency, Call 311.”
16640-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
L. Rectifier Instrumentation.
2. Meters to be a minimum of 3-1/2" size, with a minimum scale length of 2-7/8"

4. Provide meters with accuracy + 2% full scale deflection at 25° C., temperature
compensated to 0.085% per degree C.
6. Meter shunts to be panel-mounted Holloway type "SW" style, with an

accuracy of +0.25%.

the following:
1. Transformer designed as full isolation with separate isolated primary and


of tap bars.
baking.
one minute between the windings and the core.
N. Potential Monitoring Connections: Provide two, machine screw, washers and hex nut
connections on the front of the rectifier instrument panel. One to be labeled
“Reference” and one to be labeled “Structure”.
O. Miscellaneous:
60 hertz AC input.

16640-10
CITY OF HOUSTON


parameters:
a. AC input voltage, current, apparent power and true power
b. DC output current, voltage and power
c. AC power factor
d. AC to DC conversion efficiency
e. Output ripple
2.06 ANODE JUNCTION PANEL
A. Enclosure: Mount the anode junction panel in the stainless steel rectifier enclosure as
shown on the Drawing. Provide positive terminal, 0.01 ohm type RS Holloway
shunts, and a minimum 3/16” thick, NEMA Grade “XX” phenolic panel. For size and
terminal configurations, see Drawings.
B. Positive Cable: Use a single conductor, seven strand, copper with THHN insulation
for the positive cable from the anode junction panel to the transformer-rectifier.
2.07 NEGATIVE CABLES
A. Cables: Use single conductor, seven-strand, copper with medium density, HMWPE
insulation for the rectifier negative cables. The polyethylene to conform to ASTM D
1248, Type I, Class C, Grade 5.
B. Test Lead: The test lead to be No. 12 AWG, solid copper wire with white, TW or
THW insulation and of sufficient length to extend from the protected structure to the
rectifier without splicing.

B. Wire: Equip with No. 14 AWG stranded copper wire with blue HMWPE insulation of
suitable length to extend from the pipeline to the rectifier without splicing.
16640-11
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Charges and Molds: Use weld charges and molds sized as specified by the
manufacturer for the specific wire size and surface configuration. Weld charges and
molds to be Cadweld by Erico or Thermoweld by Continental Industries.
B. Limitation: For high strength steel pipelines, use only 15 gram Cadweld charges.
C. Weld Coating: Coat all bare metal and weld metal with Stopaq CZ tape.
D. Weld Cap: Cover the coated weld with a plastic weld cap.
2.10 AC POWER SERVICE
A. Products: All AC power components must meet local power company requirements.
B. Meter Base: Meter base to be 120/240-volt, single phase, 100-ampere.
C. Disconnect Switch: Provide fused disconnect switch in NEMA 1 enclosure. Mount on

power pole below meter base.
D. Ground Rod: Ground rod must conform to the requirements of the utility company
having jurisdiction.
E. Ground Wire and Clamp: Ground wire to be bare, No. 6 AWG solid copper wire. Use
a bronze, bolt-on ground rod clamp.
F. Provide power pole with meter loop and meter base conforming to the requirements
of the utility company having jurisdiction.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF SACRIFICIAL ANODES
A. Location: Install sacrificial anodes at locations where the anodes will operate at
maximum effectiveness.
B. Placement: Install anodes in native soil, in a vertically augured hole as shown on the
drawings. If a vertical installation of the anodes is not feasible, the anodes may be
installed horizontally.
C. Backfilling: After the hole is augured, lower the packaged anode into the hole and
firmly tamp the soil around the package so that it is in intimate contact with the
package.
D. Lead Wire: Run lead wires from the anodes underground at a minimum depth of 36
inches. Connect the wires through a test station as indicated on the drawings.
E. Handling: Handle galvanic anodes carefully to avoid damaging anode materials and
wire connections.
16640-12
CITY OF HOUSTON
3.02 INSTALLATION OF DEEP ANODE GROUNDBEDS
A. Permits: A qualified well driller who is recognized as a fully experienced specialist in

the installation of deep anode cathodic protection systems is required to perform the
drilling and installation of the deep anode systems. The deep anode system installer is
required to have a minimum of 5 years experience installing deep anode systems with
a minimum of 10 successful deep well anode installations. The Contractor is required
to obtain and submit all applications for well drilling permits required by any City,
County or State agency.

other structures and utilities. Location of the anode wells is approximate. Determine
and verify the exact placement in the field with a representative of the City of
Houston.
C. Anode Hole Drilling: The anode hole to be 8 inches diameter by 200 feet deep unless
otherwise shown on the drawings. Perform drilling with rotary bit equipment
designed specifically for this purpose. Use standard techniques (i.e. trough and
vacuum truck) to capture and contain the drilling fluids, mud and cuttings at the top
of the hole. Select the type and consistency of drilling fluids to be consistent with soil
characteristics. Level the drilling rig to provide a round, straight and plumb anode
hole.
D. Temporary Well Casing: Drilling of the holes may require the installation of
temporary well casings. Remove all temporary casings by the end of the job.
E. Anode Hole Geological Logs: As the hole is drilled, maintain a record describing the
depth and type of the geological formations encountered. Submit typed copies of the
log as required by Section 1.05.D.
F. Anode Hole Resistance Log: Record an electric log of the hole using one of the
anodes. Previously mark the anode lead wire in five-foot increments. Mark the anode
lead wire for a distance equaling or exceeding the maximum anticipated depth of the
hole. As the anode is lowered into the hole, perform a resistance log by impressing a
minimum 12 volt DC urrent between the anode and a very well grounded structure
such as the local AC power neutral network. Do not use Nilsson type soil resistance
meters to perform this test. A recommended 12-volt DC power source is a heavy duty
lead acid automobile battery. Lower the anode into the hole at ten foot increments,
hold in place, and measure the voltage and current output of the DC current source.
Record the data, type and submit as required under Section 1.05.D.
G. Vent Pipe Installation: Install the vent pipe in the hole with the first anode. Cap the
bottom of the vent pipe. Cap the top of the vent pipe throughout the anode and coke
breeze backfill installation procedure to prevent intrusion of foreign material. Do not
allow drilling mud to enter in the vent pipe.
16640-13
CITY OF HOUSTON
H. Anode Installation: The anode well to contain ten (10) tubular cast iron anodes spaced
at 10 foot intervals on centers unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Center the
anodes in the hole using anode centralizers. Install the anodes by lowering them
individually into the hole by the lead wire. Mark the lead wires for the nominal anode
depth. Record the final depth with the first anode in the hole (i.e. the bottom anode)
identified as anode number one (1). Do not damage the anode lead during handling or
lowering into the hole. Under no circumstances, clamp or pinch the anode lead wires
around another object while lowering the anodes into the hole. If the insulation for
any anode lead wires are cut, broken, or nicked during this operation or at any other
time, reject the complete anode and remove from the job site immediately. Replace
all damaged anodes at no additional expense to the City of Houston.
I. Anode Column Coke Backfill: Slurry the coke backfill above-grade and then pump
into the hole after the anodes are installed. Pump the coke from the bottom of the hole
up using a pipe that is the length of the anode hole. Do not use the vent pipe to pump
the coke. Raise the pipe as the anode column is filled with coke. Remove the pipe
from the hole after the coke installation operation is completed. Use a sufficient
amount of backfill such that the coke breeze column extends a minimum of five feet
above the top of the uppermost anode. Install the coke backfill uniformly with no
voids around the anodes.
J. Vent Pipe: Terminate the 1-inch diameter internal vent pipe with a gooseneck fitting.
Leave the top end of the vent pipe open to allow gases from the anode hole to exit.
K. Precautions: Take all necessary precautions to avoid entrance of foreign matter into
the hole, movement of soil strata, or collapsing of the hole during the progress of the
work. Should movement of soil strata or collapse of the drilled hole interfere with
proper completion of the anode groundbed, recover the wires, anodes and vent pipe
and ream or redrill the hole at no cost to the City of Houston.
L. Mud and Cuttings: Dispose of drilling mud, cuttings and other waste in accordance
with the methods and procedures of the best recognized practices and comply with
the rules and regulations of the State, City and County.
M. Completion: Seal anode hole with bentonite environmental earth seal. Terminate vent
pipe and anode lead wires at rectifier.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF CATHODIC PROTECTION RECTIFIERS
all City of Houston, and local power company codes and standards.
B. Mounting: Mount rectifiers on reinforced concrete pad as shown on the drawings.

Place at elevation above the 100-year flood plain.
C. Identification: Equip rectifiers with permanent engraved nameplates to identify the

units as "Cathodic Protection Cabinet, Property of City of Houston, In Case of
Emergency Call 311.”
16640-14
CITY OF HOUSTON
above grade.
1. Use insulating bushings at the ends of all conduits.
2. Extend steel conduit 12 inches below grade.
install the necessary wiring, conduits, wires, meter sockets, splice boxes and
is installed and the rectifier is capable of operating at full rated load. Install AC power
such that the rectifier can be activated for test purposes.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF WIRE AND CABLE
A. Depth: Install all underground wires and cables at a minimum of 36 inches below
final grade with a minimum separation of 6 inches from other underground structures.
B. Above-grade Conduit: Enclose all positive and negative cables, and anode lead wires
in rigid galvanized steel conduit when above-grade.
2. Extend conduit 12 inches below grade.
C. Below Grade Conduit: Enclose all cables and wires in grey electrical PVC conduit
when below grade.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF ANODE LEAD JUNCTION BOXES
A. Location: Mount anode lead junction box inside cathodic protection cabinet as shown
on drawings.
B. Anode Lead Panel: Mount anode lead panel to cabinet with machine screws, washers
and hex nuts.
3.06 NEGATIVE CABLE AND TEST LEAD ATTACHMENT
A. Attach negative cables and test lead to the pipe by thermite welding.
B. Clean and dry the pipe to which the negative cables and test lead are to be attached.
C. Use a grinding wheel to remove all coating, mill scale, oxide, grease and dirt from the
pipe over an area approximately 3 inches square. Clean the surface to bright metal.
D. Remove approximately one inch of insulation from each end of the wires to be
thermite welded to the pipe, exposing clean, oxide-free copper for welding.
16640-15
CITY OF HOUSTON
copper sleeve crimped over the wire for all wires No. 12 AWG size.
G. Remove the cap from the weld charge container. Pour the contents into the mold.
Squeeze the bottom of the weld charge container and spread ignition powder over the
charge.
H. Close the mold cover and ignite the starting powder with a flint gun. Hold the mold
firmly in place until all of the charge has burned and the weld has cooled slightly.
I. Remove the thermite weld mold and gently strike the weld with a hammer to remove
the weld slag. Pull on the wire to assure a secure connection. If the weld is not secure
or the wire breaks, repeat the procedure.
A. Location: When not shown on the Drawings, locate the permanent reference cell near
the negative structure connection.
B. Placement: Remove the permanent reference cell from the shipping package and
place below the springline and one foot away from the pipeline. Make certain that the
reference electrode is completely surrounded by the special backfill material in the
geomembrane package.
C. Backfill the reference electrode with six inches of select, native soil and compact by
hand. Moisten the soil for good compaction. Saturate the backfilled reference cell
with 5 gallons of water.
D. Wiring: Run continuous lengths of the blue reference cell wiring, and the white test
lead to the rectifier unit in the same trench as the negative cable. Do not nick or
otherwise damage the wire insulation.
3.08 POST INSTALLATION TESTING OF THE CATHODIC PROTECTION

SYSTEMS
A. General: Inspect, energize, and adjust the cathodic protection as soon as possible after
the equipment has been installed.
B. Energization: Perform the energizing of the cathodic protection system by a

Corrosion Engineer to achieve compliance with the referenced corrosion control
standards set forth by AMPP and/or AWWA.
16640-16
CITY OF HOUSTON
D. Method: The Corrosion Engineer shall:
1. Measure native state pipe-to-soil potentials at all test stations, permanent

reference cells, electrical isolation devices, and locations of exposed pipe prior
to energizing the cathodic protection system.
2. Measure casing-to-soil potentials and foreign line potentials, prior to

energizing the cathodic protection system.
3. Energize the cathodic protection system and adjust the DC current output such
that the pipe-to-soil potentials near the cathodic protection current source
(either transformer-rectifier or sacrificial anodes) is approximately -1000
millivolts to a copper sulfate electrode (CSE). Record the DC voltage and
current of the power supply.
4. Allow sufficient time for the pipeline to polarize.
5. Using a current interrupter, cycle the power supply “On” and “Off”.
6. Record “On” and “Instant Off” potentials at all water pipeline test stations,
permanent reference cells, electrical isolation devices, locations of exposed
pipe, casings and foreign pipelines.
7. For steel and ductile iron pipe, adjust the cathodic protection power supplies
to satisfy the criteria of a minimum 100 millivolts of polarization or an
“Instant Off” potential at least as negative as -850 millivolts CSE.
8. For concrete cylinder pipe, adjust the cathodic protection power supplies to
achieve a minimum 100 millivolt of polarization without any “Instant Off”
potentials more negative than -1000 millivolts CSE.
9. Record all final adjustments of the DC power supplies.
10. Verify that all electrical isolation devices are operating properly including
flange isolators, and casing spacers.
11. Verify that interference does not exist with foreign pipelines. Perform joint
tests and mitigate any interference detected.
E. After initial energization and after rectifiers have been adjusted as necessary for
compliance with NACE RP-0169 (latest revision), perform a walk-through inspection
with City Engineer to verify that all corrosion control components have been installed
in accordance with project drawings and specifications.
16640-17
CITY OF HOUSTON
F. Make a punch list of outstanding work identified during walk-through inspection.

Once Contractor has completed all work on punchlist, pipeline will be allowed to
polarize for 30 days before final testing. Perform final testing and adjustment after
30-day polarization period. Repair deficiencies discovered during final testing at
Contractor’s expense and at no additional cost to City of Houston.
G. Equipment: All cathodic protection testing instruments to be in proper working order

and calibrated according to factory specifications.
H. Report: Submit a written report in accordance with Section 1.05, Submittals. Include
all test data, resistance and geologic logs, the rectifier O&M Manual and the As-Built
Drawings.
END OF SECTION
16640-18
CITY OF HOUSTON CATHODIC PROTECTION
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR EXISTING TANK BOTTOMS
SECTION 16641
CATHODIC PROTECTION FOR EXISTING TANK BOTTOMS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Requirements for impressed current cathodic protection systems for the bottom (soil
side) of steel water storage tanks that are constructed at grade level.
B. Specifications for manually controlled transformer-rectifiers and deep anodes.
C. Section 13111 – Cathodic Protection for Water Tank Interiors (Sacrificial Anode)
D. Section 13112 – Cathodic Protection for Water Tank Interiors (ICCP)
E. Section 15640 – Joint Bonding and Electrical Isolation
F. Section 16640 – Cathodic Protection for Pipelines
G. Section 16642 – Cathodic Protection for Plant Piping
1.03 UNIT PRICES
rectifier systems with deep anode groundbed and junction boxes, reference cells,
power feed hookups, and all excavation, drilling, backfill, field welding, connections,
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete

for Wire and Cable
16641-1
C. ASTM A 518 – Standard Specification for Corrosion-Resistant High-Silicon Iron

Casting
D. ASTM D 4239 – Standard Test Methods for Sulfur in the Analysis Sample of Coal
and Coke using High-Temperature Tube Furnace Combustion
E. ASTM D 5192 – Standard Practice for Collection of Coal Samples from Core
F. NEC 70 - National Electrical Code
G. City of Houston Electrical Code
H. NACE International SP0193 - External Cathodic Protection of On-Grade Metallic

Storage Tank Bottoms
I. NACE International SP0169 - Recommended Practice, Control of External Corrosion

J. NACE International SP0572 - Recommended Practice for Design, Installation,

Operation and Maintenance of Impressed Current Deep Groundbeds
K. NEMA TC6 - PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation
L. NEMA TC9 - Fittings for ABS and PVC Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground
Installation
M. NEMA 4 - Type 3R Enclosures
N. UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires
O. UL 467 - Bonding and Grounding Equipment
P. UL 486A - Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submittals to conform to the requirements of Section 01330 – Submittal

Procedures.

Corrosion Engineer who is a Professional Engineer, registered in the State of Texas
with a minimum of ten years experience in cathodic protection design.
manufacturer's name on the catalog cuts. Provide sufficient information to show that
proposed.
16641-2

Report results of this testing on a manufacturer’s quality control form and include in
the operation manual. The rectifier manufacturer to reference each operating manual
by rectifier model number and individual serial number.
maintenance manuals for the cathodic protection systems. The manuals shall include
operating instructions, maintenance data, product data and test procedures.

installation and construction. Revise drawings to show exact locations of all wiring,
connections and terminal boxes. Properly identify all items of equipment and
material. Submit the original as-built drawings to the City of Houston representative.
A. Certification: Provide manufacturer's certifications that all components of the

cathodic protection systems meet the requirements of the drawings and specifications.
details on the certification.
B. Drawings: The drawings for the cathodic protection systems are diagrammatic and
not to be scaled for exact locations unless scales are explicitly stated on the specific
drawing. Determine exact locations by field conditions and non-interference with
other utilities or mechanical and structural features. Note other existing utilities in the
area and do not damage these utilities during excavation. Repair any damaged utilities
to the satisfaction of the City of Houston at the Contractor's expense.
PART 2 PRODUCTS

16641-3
1. Anode Alloy: The anode to consist of Durichlor 51, high silicon, chromium
iron. This alloy to be made in accordance with specification ASTM A 518,
Grade 3 with nominal percentages as follows:
Carbon 0.70 - 1.10
Manganese 1.50, max
Silicon 14.20 - 14.75
Molybdenum 0.20, max
Copper 0.50, max

Tensile Strength (1/2" dia. bar) psi ...........................................................15,000

Compressive Strength, psi ......................................................................100,000
Hardness, Brinell...........................................................................................520
Density, gr/ml ................................................................................................7.0
Melting Point, °F..........................................................................................2300
Specific Resistance, micro-ohms-cm (20°C) ..................................................72
Coefficient of expansion, 32° to 212° F ............................................ 7.33 X 106
Weight O.D. Length

Type (pounds) (inches) (feet)
TA-2 46 2.19 7
TA-3 63 2.66 7
TA-4 85 3.75 7
TA-5 110 4.75 7
1. Use a No. 8 AWG seven strand, copper conductor equipped with fluorinated
2. Attach the anode lead wire at the center of the anode. Have minimum pull-out
strength of one and one-half times the breaking strength of the No. 8 AWG
lead wire or 788 pounds for the center connection.
16641-4
C. Anode Backfill: Use SC 3 calcined petroleum coke, as manufactured by Loresco Inc.,

to backfill impressed current anodes. Anode backfill shall conform to the following:
1. Typical Chemical Analysis.

Ash 0.6 maximum
Moisture 0.05
2. Physical Properties.
Bulk Density 74 pounds/cubic foot
3. Particle Analysis.
Dust free with a maximum particle size of 1 mm.
2.02 VENT
atmosphere.
drilled on 6-inch centers in the area of the anodes for the vent. Do not use slotted vent
pipe or drill holes in the vent pipe above the anodes.
inverted manner.
2.03 RECTIFIERS

manufactured by Corrpower, Universal Rectifiers or approved equal, conforming to
NEMA MR-20-1958 and listed in the CSA File No. 45382.
C. AC Input Ratings: Obtain full rated DC output, with an input voltage +10 percent of
the nominal rated input.
16641-5
to full- rated voltage.
1. Rate diode voltage at 400 volts minimum for rectifier outputs up to 100 VDC,
and 800 volts minimum for rectifiers with outputs from 100 to 200 VDC.



trip between 101 percent and 125 percent of rated load and must trip at 125 percent
and above.

energy Metal Oxide Varistors rated at 500 joules on DC output and 750 joules on the
AC output.


K. Enclosures:
16641-6
1. Construct enclosures from a minimum 12 gauge wiped coat mill galvanized

steel, finished in 3 - 5 mils polyester fusion bonded powder coating.
3. Equip enclosures with a pad-lockable draw latch manufactured from 12-gauge

steel, finished in zinc-dichromate plating. A draw latch required to
4. Equip enclosures (or rectifier frame) with a grounding lug sized to

accommodate up to a No. 6 AWG conductor.
7. Equip rectifier with slide-out chassis and hinged door for access to the front
and a minimum of one side of the cabinet.
8. Place stickers on sides that read “Danger, High Voltage, Keep out.”
2. Meters to be a minimum of 3-1/2" size, with a minimum scale length of 2-

7/8".

four-to-one swamping (i.e. internal meter resistance comprised of 25%

accuracy of +0.25%.

the following:

secondary windings with a minimum efficiency of 95%.
16641-7

of tap bars.
baking.
N. Current Interrupters: Include a built-in current interrupter rated in accordance with the
capacity of the rectifier unit. Equip the interrupter with a solid-state timer with
independently adjustable "On" and "Off" times. Equip interrupter with a switch to
enable the operator to operate the rectifier in an interrupt or continuous mode of
output.
O. Miscellaneous:
1. Supply rectifiers capable of operating either on 115 or 230 volt, single phase,
60 hertz AC input.



parameters:
a. AC input voltage, current, apparent power and true power
b. DC output current, voltage and power
c. AC power factor
d. AC to DC conversion efficiency
e. Output ripple
f. Correct operation of optional features such as interrupters, filters, etc
2.04 DC CABLES
A. Cables: Use seven strand, copper conductors with high molecular weight
polyethylene (HMWPE) insulation for the rectifier positive and negative cables.
16641-8
B. Weld Coating: Use Kop-Coat Coating as manufactured by Carboline or approved

equal.
C. Weld Cap: Cover the coated weld with a plastic weld cap.
PART 3 EXECUTION

a minimum of 10 successful deep well anode installations. The Contractor is required
to obtain and submit all applications for well drilling permits required by any City,
County, State agency.

other structures or utilities. Location of the anode wells is approximate. Determine
and verify the exact placement in the field with a representative of the City of
Houston.
C. Anode Hole Drilling: The anode hole to be 8 inches in diameter by 200 feet deep.
Perform drilling with rotary bit equipment designed specifically for this purpose. Use
standard techniques (i.e. trough and vacuum truck) to capture and contain the drilling
fluids, mud and cuttings at the top of the hole. Select the type and consistency of
drilling fluids to be consistent with soil characteristics. Level the drilling rig to
provide a round, straight and plumb anode hole.
temporary well casings. Driller to remove all temporary casings by the end of the job.
E. Anode Hole Geological Logs: As the hole is drilled, the driller to maintain a detailed,
formal record describing the depth and type of the geological formations encountered.
Submit typed copies of the log as required by 1.05.D.
16641-9
minimum 12 volt DC current between the anode and a very well grounded structure
lead acid automobile battery. Lower the anode into the water or drilling mud filled
hole at ten foot increments, hold in place, and measure the voltage and current output
of the DC current source. Record the data, type and submit as required under Section
1.05.D.
allow intrusion of drilling mud into the vent pipe.
H. Anode Installation: The anode well to contain tubular cast iron anodes spaced at 10
foot intervals on centers as shown on the drawings. Center the anodes in the hole
using anode centralizers. Install the anodes by lowering them individually into the
hole by the lead wire. Mark the lead wires for the nominal anode depth. Record the
final depth with the first anode in the hole (i.e. the bottom anode) identified as anode
number one (1). Do not damage the anode lead wires during handling or lowering
into the hole. Under no circumstances, clamp or pinch the anode lead wires around
another object while lowering the anodes into the hole. If the insulation for any anode
lead wire is cut, broken or nicked during this operation or at any other time, reject the
complete anode assembly remove from the job site immediately. Replace all damaged
anodes at no additional expense to the City of Houston.
the coke into the hole. Raise the pipe as the anode column is filled with coke. Remove
the pipe from the hole after the coke installation operation is completed. Use a
sufficient amount of backfill such that the coke breeze column extends a minimum of
five feet above the top of the uppermost anode. Use extreme care during installation
of the coke backfill so that no voids remain around the anodes.
the hole, movement of any soil strata, or collapsing of the drilled hole during the
progress of the work. Should movement of soil strata or collapse of the drilled hole
interfere with proper completion of the anode groundbed, recover the wires, anodes
and vent pipe and ream or redrill the hole at no cost to the City.
16641-10
all City of Houston, and local codes and standards.
B. Mounting: Pole mount cathodic protection rectifiers. The pole may be omitted and the
rectifier mounted on a building wall or other available permanent structure, if
approved by the City of Houston or its designated representative. Install rectifiers at a
minimum height of 4 feet above final grade.

units as “Cathodic Protection Rectifier, Property of City of Houston, In Case of
Emergency Call 311.”
above grade.
2. Extend steel, rigid conduit 12 inches below grade.
such that the rectifier can be activated for test purposes. Leave the power off after
test.
final grade with a minimum separation of 12 inches from other underground
structures.
B. Above Grade Conduit: Enclose all positive and negative cables in rigid galvanized
steel conduit when above-grade.
1. Use insulating bushings at the ends of all conduit runs.
16641-11
C. Below Grade Conduit: Enclose all cable and wires in grey electrical PVC conduit
when below grade.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF JUNCTION TERMINAL BOXES
A. Location: Install junction terminal boxes immediately adjacent to the rectifier to

allow ready access for testing. Install at a minimum height of 3 feet above grade.
B. Concrete Pad: Set junction terminal boxes in a Portland cement concrete pad. The
concrete pad to be a minimum of 12 inches in diameter and no less than 24 inches
deep. Extend the concrete surface approximately 3 inches above grade.
C. Conduit: Enclose all cathodic protection wiring between the junction box and the
rectifier in rigid, galvanized steel conduit. Use insulating bushings at the ends of all
conduit to prevent damage to wire insulation.
3.05 NEGATIVE CABLE ATTACHMENT
A. Attach negative cables to the tank by thermite welding.
B. Clean and dry the tank surface to which the wires are to be attached.
C. Use a grinding wheel to remove all coating, mill scale, oxide, grease and dirt from an
area approximately 3 inches square. Clean the surface to bright metal.
D. Remove approximately 1 inch of insulation from each end of the wires to be thermite
welded to the chime of the tank exposing clean, oxide-free copper for welding.
copper sleeve crimped over the wire for all wires No. 12 AWG.
G. Place the thermite weld charge in the mold. Squeeze the bottom of the weld charge
container to spread ignition powder over the charge.
J. If the weld is secure, coat all bare metal and weld metal with Stopaq CZ Tape.
3.06 INSTALLATION TESTING OF THE CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEMS
16641-12
A. General: After the system has been installed, inspect, energize, and adjust as
necessary to achieve compliance with accepted corrosion control standard set forth by
AMPP, the cathodic protection system as soon as possible.
B. Energization: Perform the initial energizing of the cathodic protection system by a

Corrosion Engineer.
D. Method: The Corrosion Engineer shall:
1. Observe native state and polarized (Instant Off) tank-to-soil potentials to

ensure that cathodic protection is being provided to the tank bottom in
accordance with accepted AMPP criteria.
2. Record tank-to-soil potential measurements on the permanent reference

electrode and around the perimeter of the tank.
3. Determine if interference exists on nearby structures and, if so, take steps to

find a satisfactory solution to the problem.
E. Verification and Responsibilities
1. Correct, at contractor’s expense, any deficiencies in materials or installation

procedures discovered during the post-installation inspection.
2. Provide written documentation of any deficiencies discovered during the post

installation inspection.
F. Equipment: All cathodic protection testing instruments to be in proper working order

G. Report: Submit a written report in accordance with Section 1.05, Submittals. Include
all test data, resistance and geologic logs, rectifiers and cathodic protection system O
& M Manuals and the As-Built drawings.
END OF SECTION
16641-13
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR PLANT PIPING
SECTION 16642
CATHODIC PROTECTION FOR PLANT PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Requirements for cathodic protection systems on steel, ductile iron and concrete
cylinder pipe in water pipeline projects for using rectifiers and deep anode
groundbeds.
B. Requirements for sacrificial anode cathodic protection on steel, ductile iron, concrete
cylinder and metallic fittings in plastic pipe systems using zinc and/or magnesium
anodes.
C. Section 15640 – Joint Bonding and Electrical Isolation.
D. Section 15641 – Corrosion Control Test Stations.
1.03 UNIT PRICES
rectifier systems with deep anode groundbed and junction boxes, sacrificial anodes,
power feed hookups, and all excavation, backfill, field welding, connections,
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
B. ASTM A 518 - Standard Specification for Corrosion-Resistant High-Silicon Iron

Castings
C. ASTM B 418 - Standard Specification for Cast and Wrought Galvanic Zinc Anodes.
16642-1

for Wire and Cable
E. ASTM D 4239 – Standard Test Methods for Sulfur in the Analysis Sample of Coal
and Coke using High Temperature Tube Furnace Combustion Methods.
F. ASTM D 5192 – Standard Practice for Collection of Coal Samples from Core.
G. AWWA M9 Manual - Concrete Pressure Pipe
H. CSA – Canadian Standards Association, Standard C22.2, No. 66 and No. 107
I. City of Houston Electrical Code
J. NACE International SP0169 - Recommended Practice, Control of External Corrosion

on Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems.
K. NACE International SP0572 - Recommended Practice for Design, Installation,

Operation and Maintenance of Impressed Current Deep Groundbeds.
L. NEC 70 – National Electrical Code
M. NEMA TC6 - PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation.
N. NEMA TC9 - Fittings for ABS and PVC Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground
Installation.
O. NEMA 4 – Type 3R Enclosures
P. UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires
Q. UL 467 - Bonding and Grounding Equipment
R. UL 486A - Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors
S. UL 506 – Specialty Transformers
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submittals to conform to the requirements of Section 01330 – Submittal

Procedures.

Professional Engineer, registered in the State of Texas with a minimum of ten years
experience in cathodic protection design, all computations and drawings.
16642-2
manufacturer’s name on the catalog cuts. Provide sufficient information to show that
proposed.

Report results of this testing on a manufacturer's quality control form and include in
the operation manual. The rectifier manufacturer to reference each operating manual
by rectifier model number and individual serial number.
F. Report: Submit six (6) operating, monitoring and maintenance reports for the cathodic
protection systems. Include all test data as required by Section 3.08, paragraph H.
Include operating instructions, maintenance data, product data and test procedures in
the manuals.
G. Drawings: Maintain as-built drawings of the cathodic protection installation during

installation and construction. Revise drawings to show exact locations of all rectifiers,
anodes, wiring, connections and terminal boxes. Properly identify all items of
equipment and material. Submit the original as-built drawings to the City of Houston
representative.

scaled for exact locations unless scales are explicitly stated on the specific drawing.
Determine exact locations by field conditions and non-interference with other utilities
or mechanical and structural features. Note other existing utilities in the area and do
not damage these utilities during excavation. Repair any damaged utilities to the
16642-3
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SACRIFICIAL ANODES - MAGNESIUM
A. Magnesium Anodes: Use high potential magnesium anodes. Follow the metallurgical
composition of the magnesium anodes as listed below:

Manganese 0.50 to 1.3
Copper 0.02 Maximum
Nickel 0.001 Maximum
Iron 0.03 Maximum
Other - (each) 0.05 Maximum
Other - (total) 0.30 Maximum
Magnesium Balance
B. Magnesium Anode Current Capacity: Magnesium anodes require a current capacity

of no less than 500 amp-hours per pound of magnesium.
1. All galvanic anodes come prepacked in a backfill material conforming to the

following composition:
4. For standard cast magnesium ingots, the required weight of backfill follows:
16642-4

9 15 24
17 25 42
20 50 70
32 38 70
48 48 96
60 70 130
D. Anode Lead Wires:
1. Use a 20-foot length of No. 12 AWG solid copper wire equipped with TW or
THW insulation for standard lead wires for a galvanic anode.
2. Color code all anode lead wires green when terminated in test stations.
E. Lead Wire Connection to Magnesium Anode:
1. Cast magnesium anodes with a galvanized steel core with the weight of the
2. Recess one end of the anode to expose the core for the lead wire connection.
3. Silver-solder the lead wire to the core and fully insulate the connection by
filling the recess with an electrical potting compound.
A. Zinc Anodes: Use high purity zinc anodes. The metallurgical composition of the zinc
anodes conform to ASTM B 418, Type II and the following:

Iron 0.0014 Maximum
Lead 0.003 Maximum
Zinc Balance
B. Zinc Anode Current Capacity: Zinc anodes require a current capacity of no less than
1. All galvanic anodes come prepackaged in a backfill material conforming to

the following composition:
16642-5
4. For standard cast zinc ingots, the required weight of backfill follows:

30 40 70
45 55 100
60 70 130
D. Anode Lead Wires: For the lead wire for the zinc anodes, use a 20-foot length of No.
12 AWG solid copper wire equipped with TW of THW insulation.
1. Cast zinc anodes with a 1/4-inch diameter galvanized steel core.
2. Extend one end of the core beyond the anode for the lead wire connection.
3. Silver-solder the lead wire to the core and fully insulate the connection.

1. Anode Alloy: The anode consists of Durichlor 51, high silicon, chromium
iron. This alloy to be made in accordance with ASTM A 518, Grade 3 with
nominal percentages as follows:
Carbon 0.70 - 1.10
Manganese 1.50, max
Silicon 14.20 - 14.75
Molybdenum 0.20, max
Copper 0.50, max
16642-6

Tensile Strength (1/2" dia. bar) psi. ..........................................................15,000

Compressive Strength, psi ......................................................................100,000
Hardness, Brinell............................................................................................520
Density, gr/ml .................................................................................................7.0
Melting Point, °F..........................................................................................2300
Specific Resistance, micro-ohms-cm (20°C) ...................................................72
Coefficient of expansion, 32° to 212° F ............................................ 7.33 X 106
Weight OD Length
Type
(pounds) (inches) (feet)
TA-2 46 2.19 7
TA-3 63 2.66 7
TA-4 85 3.75 7
TA-5 110 4.75 7
1. Use a No. 8 AWG seven strand, copper conductor equipped with a fluorinated
2. Attach the anode lead wire at the center of the anode. Have a minimum pull-
out strength of one and one-half times the breaking strength of the No. 8
AWG lead wire or 788 pounds for the center connection.
C. Impressed Current Anode Backfill: Use SC3 calcined fluid petroleum coke as
manufactured by Loresco, Inc. to backfill impressed current anodes. Anode backfill
properties to be as follows:
1. Typical Chemical Analysis:

Ash 0.6 maximum
Moisture 0.05
16642-7
2. Physical Properties: Bulk density of 64 pounds/cubic foot.
3. Particle Analysis: Dust free with a maximum particle size of 1 mm.
2.04 VENT
atmosphere.
drilled on 6-inch centers in the area of the anodes. Do not use slotted vent pipe or drill
holes in the vent pipe above the anodes.
inverted manner.
2.05 RECTIFIERS

manufactured by Universal Rectifiers, Corrpower or approved equal, conforming to
NEMA MR-20-1958 and listed in CSA File No. 45382.
C. AC Input Ratings: Full rated DC output shall be obtainable with an AC input voltage
at 5% below the nominal value. Continuous AC input voltage at 10% above the
nominal value shall not damage the transformer, the diode bridge assembly, or exceed
any component rates. (Note: This shall apply provided that the rectifier has not been
unit.)
1. The Peak Inverse Voltage (PIV) of the diode shall be 300% of the maximum

16642-8


trip between 101 percent and 125 percent of rated load, and must trip at 125 percent
and above.

the AC input.


K. Enclosures:
1. Construct enclosures from a minimum 12 gauge wiped coat mill galvanized

steel, finished in 3 - 5 mils polyester fusion bonded powder coating.
3. Equip enclosures with a pad-lockable draw latch manufactured from 12-gauge

steel, finished in zinc-dichromate plating. A draw latch required to
4. Equip enclosures (or rectifier frame) with a grounding lug sized to

accommodate up to a No. 6 AWG conductor.
16642-9
7. Equip rectifier with slide-out chassis and hinged door for access to the front
and a minimum of one side of the cabinet.
8. Place stickers on sides that read “Danger, High Voltage, Keep Out.”
2. Meters to be a minimum of 3-1/2" size, with a minimum scale length of 2-

7/8".


accuracy of +0.25%.

the following:


of tap bars.
baking.
N. Potential Monitoring Connections: Provide two machine screw, washers and hex nut
connections on the front of the rectifier instrument panel. One to be labeled
“Reference” and one to be labeled “Structure”.
O. Miscellaneous:
16642-10
60 hertz AC input.



parameters:
c. AC power factor.
e. Output ripple.
2.06 ANODE JUNCTION BOX
A. Enclosure: Mount the anode junction box enclosure near the rectifier as shown on the
Drawings. Provide positive terminal, 0.01 ohm type RS Holloway shunts, and a
minimum 3/16” thick, NEMA Grade “XX” phenolic panel. For size and terminal
configurations, see Drawings.
B. Positive Cable: Use cable size #6 AWG, single conductor, seven strand, copper with
THHN insulation for the positive cable from the junction box to the transformer-
rectifier.
2.07 NEGATIVE CABLES
A. Cables: Use cable size #4 AWG, single conductor, seven-strand, copper with medium
density, HMW/PE insulation for the rectifier negative cables. The polyethylene to
conform to ASTM D 1248, Type I, Class C, Grade 5.
B. Test Lead: The test lead to be No. 12 AWG, solid copper wire with white, TW or
THW insulation and of sufficient length to extend from the protected structure to the
rectifier without splicing.
16642-11

B. Wire: Equip with No. 14 AWG stranded copper wire with blue HMW/PE
insulation of suitable length to extend from the pipeline to the rectifier without
splicing.
B. Limitation: For high strength steel pipelines, use only 15 gram Cadweld charges.
C. Weld Coating: Use Stopaq CZ tape to cover the welds.
2.10 AC POWER SERVICE
A. Products: All AC power components must meet local power company requirements.
B. Meter Base: Meter base to be 120/240-volt, single phase, 20-ampere.
C. Disconnect Switch: Provide fused disconnect switch in NEMA 1 enclosure. Mount on

rectifier stub pole.
D. Ground Rod: Ground rod must conform to the requirements of the utility company
having jurisdiction.
E. Ground Wire and Clamp: Ground wire to be bare, No. 6 AWG solid copper wire. Use
a bronze, bolt-on ground rod clamp.
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Location: Install sacrificial anodes at locations where the anodes will operate at
maximum effectiveness.
B. Placement: Install anodes in native soil, in a vertically augured hole as shown on the
drawings. If a vertical installation of the anodes is not feasible, the anodes may be
installed horizontally.
C. Backfilling: After the hole is augured, lower the packaged anode into the hole and
firmly tamp the soil around the package so that it is in intimate contact with the
package.
D. Lead Wire: Run lead wires from the anodes underground at a minimum depth of 36
inches. Connect the wires through a test station as indicated on the drawings.
16642-12
E. Handling: Handle galvanic anodes carefully to avoid damaging anode materials and
wire connections.

a minimum of 10 successful deep anode groundbed installations. The Contractor is
required to obtain and submit all applications for well drilling permits required by any
City, County or State agency.

other structures and utilities. Location of the anode groundbeds is approximate.
Determine and verify the exact placement in the field with a representative of the City
of Houston.
C. Anode Hole Drilling: The anode hole to be 8 inches diameter by 200 feet deep unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings. Perform drilling with rotary bit equipment
designed specifically for this purpose. Use standard techniques (i.e. trough and
vacuum truck) to capture and contain the drilling fluids, mud and cuttings at the top
of the hole. Select the type and consistency of drilling fluids to be consistent with soil
characteristics. Level the drilling rig to provide a round, straight and plumb anode
hole.
temporary well casings. Remove all temporary casings by the end of the job.
E. Anode Hole Geological Logs: As the hole is drilled, maintain a record describing the
depth and type of the geological formations encountered. Submit typed copies of the
log as required by Section 1.05.D.
minimum 12 volt DC current between the anode and a very well grounded structure
lead acid automobile battery. Lower the anode into the hole at ten foot increments,
hold in place, and measure the voltage and current output of the DC current source.
Record the data, type and submit as required under Section 1.05.D.
16642-13
allow drilling mud to enter in the vent pipe.
H. Anode Installation: The anode groundbed must contain ten (10) tubular cast iron
anodes spaced at 10 foot intervals on centers unless otherwise shown on the drawings.
Center the anodes in the hole using anode centralizers. Install the anodes by lowering
them individually into the hole. Mark the lead wires for the nominal anode depth.
Record the final depth with the first anode in the hole (i.e. the bottom anode)
identified as anode number one (1). Do not damage the anode lead during handling or
lowering into the hole. Under no circumstances, clamp or pinch the anode lead wires
around another object while lowering the anodes into the hole. If the insulation for
any anode lead wires are cut, broken, or nicked during this operation or at any other
time, reject the complete anode and remove from the job site immediately. Replace
all damaged anodes at no additional expense to the City of Houston.
the coke. Raise the pipe as the anode column is filled with coke. Remove the pipe
from the hole after the coke installation operation is completed. Use a sufficient
amount of backfill such that the coke breeze column extends a minimum of five feet
above the top of the uppermost anode. Install the coke backfill uniformly with no
voids around the anodes.
the hole, movement of soil strata, or collapsing of the hole during the progress of the
work. Should movement of soil strata or collapse of the drilled hole interfere with
proper completion of the anode groundbed, recover the wires, anodes and vent pipe
and ream or redrill the hole at no cost to the City of Houston.
all City of Houston, and local power company codes and standards.
16642-14
B. Mounting: Pole mount cathodic protection rectifiers. The pole may be omitted and the
rectifier mounted on a building wall or other available permanent structure, if
approved by the City of Houston or its designated representative. Install rectifiers at a
minimum height of 4 feet above final grade.

units as “Cathodic Protection Cabinet, Property of City of Houston, In case of
Emergency Call 311”.
above grade.
2. Extend steel conduit 12 inches below grade.
such that the rectifier can be activated for test purposes.
final grade with a minimum separation of 6 inches from other underground structures.
B. Above Grade Conduit: Enclose all positive and negative cables, and anode lead wires
in rigid galvanized steel conduit when above-grade.
C. Below Grade Conduit: Enclose all cable and wires in grey electrical PVC conduit
when below grade.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF ANODE JUNCTION BOX
A. Location: Install junction terminal boxes immediately adjacent to the rectifier to

allow ready access for testing. Install at a minimum height of 3 feet above grade.
B. Concrete Pad: Set junction terminal boxes in a Portland cement concrete pad. The
concrete pad to be a minimum of 12 inches in diameter and no less than 24 inches
deep. Extend the concrete surface approximately 3 inches above grade.
16642-15
C. Conduit: Enclose all cathodic protection wiring between the junction box and the
rectifier in rigid, galvanized steel conduit. Use insulating bushings at the ends of all
conduit to prevent damage to wire insulation.
3.06 NEGATIVE CABLE AND TEST LEAD ATTACHMENT
A. Attach negative cables and test leads to the pipe (for the dielectrically coated steel and
ductile iron pipe options) or to the “L” bracket (for the concrete cylinder pipe option)
by thermite welding.
B. Clean and dry the pipe to which the negative cables and test lead are to be attached.
C. Use a grinding wheel to remove all coating, mill scale, oxide, grease and dirt from the
pipe over an area approximately 3 inches square. Clean the surface to bright metal.
D. Remove approximately one inch of insulation from each end of the wires to be
thermite welded to the pipe, exposing clean, oxide-free copper for welding.
copper sleeve crimped over the wire for all wires No. 12 AWG size.
G. Remove the cap from the weld charge container. Pour the contents into the mold.
Squeeze the bottom of the weld charge container and spread ignition powder over the
charge.
I. Remove the thermite weld mold and gently strike the weld with a hammer to remove
the weld slag. Pull on the wire to assure a secure connection. If the weld is not secure
or the wire breaks, repeat the procedure.
A. Location: When not shown on the Drawings, locate the permanent reference cell near
the negative structure connection.
B. Placement: Remove the permanent reference cell from the shipping package and
place below the springline and one foot away from the pipeline. Make certain that the
reference electrode is completely surrounded by the special backfill material in the
geomembrane package. Fully saturate the geomembrane package with water.
C. Backfill the reference electrode with six inches of select, native soil and compact by
hand. Moisten the soil, if necessary, for good compaction.
16642-16
D. Wiring: Run continuous lengths of the blue reference cell wiring, and the white test
lead to the rectifier unit in the same trench as the negative cable. Do not nick or
otherwise damage the wire insulation.
3.08 POST INSTALLATION TESTING OF THE CATHODIC PROTECTION

SYSTEMS
A. General: Inspect, energize, and adjust the cathodic protection as soon as possible after
the equipment has been installed.
B. Energization: Perform the energizing of the cathodic protection system by a

Corrosion Engineer to achieve compliance with the referenced corrosion control
standards set forth by AMPP and/or AWWA.
C. Notice: Prior to native state, polarized potential testing, and final testing of the system
give a minimum of 48 hours notice to the City of Houston, Engineering to facilitate
observation of the tests by a City of Houston representative.
D. Method: The Corrosion Engineer to:
1. Measure native state pipe-to-soil potentials at all test stations, permanent

reference cells, electrical isolation devices, and locations of exposed pipe prior
to energizing the cathodic protection system.
2. Measure casing-to-soil potentials and foreign line potentials, prior to

energizing the cathodic protection system.
3. Energize the cathodic protection system and adjust the DC current output such
that the pipe-to-soil potentials near the cathodic protection current source
(either transformer-rectifier or sacrificial anodes) is approximately -1000
millivolts to a copper sulfate electrode (CSE). Record the DC voltage and
current of the power supply.
4. Allow sufficient time for the pipeline to polarize.
5. Using a current interrupter, cycle the power supply “On” and “Off”.
6. Record “On” and “Instant Off” potentials at all water pipeline test stations,
permanent reference cells, electrical isolation devices, locations of exposed
pipe, casings and foreign pipelines.
7. For steel and ductile iron pipe, adjust the cathodic protection power supplies
to satisfy the criteria of a minimum 100 millivolts of polarization or an
“Instant Off” potential at least as negative as -850 millivolts CSE.
8. For concrete cylinder pipe, adjust the cathodic protection power supplies to
achieve a minimum 100 millivolt of polarization without any “Instant Off”
potentials more negative than -1000 millivolts CSE.
16642-17
9. Record all final adjustments of the DC power supplies and individual anode
outputs.
10. Verify that all electrical isolation devices are operating properly including
flange isolators, and casing spacers.
11. Verify that interference does not exist with foreign pipelines. Perform joint
tests and mitigate any interference detected.
E. After initial energization and after rectifiers have been adjusted as necessary for
compliance with NACE RP-0169-2002, perform a walk-through inspection with City
of Houston Project Manager to verify that all corrosion control components have been
installed in accordance with project drawings and specifications.
F. Make a punch list of outstanding work identified during walk-through inspection.

Once Contractor has completed all work on punchlist, pipeline will be allowed to
polarize for 30 days before final testing. Perform final testing and adjustment after
30-day polarization period including “On” and “Instant Off” potentials. Repair
deficiencies discovered during final testing at Contractor’s expense and at no
additional cost to the City of Houston, Should additional testing be required after final
testing, cost of additional testing to be paid by contractor.
G. Equipment: All cathodic protection testing instruments to be in proper working order

H. Report: Submit a written report in accordance with Section 1.05, Submittals. Include
all test data, resistance and geologic logs, the rectifier and cathodic protection system
O&M Manuals and the As-Built Drawings.
END OF SECTION
16642-18
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR CLARIFIERS
SECTION 16644
CATHODIC PROTECTION FOR CLARIFIERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Requirements for sacrificial anode cathodic protection on internal metallic

components of clarifier units using zinc anodes.
1.03 UNIT PRICES
for the installation of the cathodic protection system, complete in place including zinc
anodes, field welding, cleanup, and other related work necessary for construction as
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM B 418 – Specification for Cast and Wrought Galvanic Zinc Anodes
B. NACE International SP0192 - Recommended Practice, Galvanic Anode Cathodic

Protection of Internal Submerged Surfaces of Water Storage Tanks
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submittals to conform to the requirements of Section 01330 - Submittals

Procedures
B. Catalog Cuts: Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts for each item. Include the
manufacturer's name on the catalog cuts. Provide sufficient information to show that
proposed.
C. Certificate of Compliance: Provide a Certificate of Compliance from the anode

foundry documenting the heat numbers and chemical analysis of the high purity zinc.
16644-1
D. Clarifier Manufacturer Attestation: The clarifier manufacturer to review the cathodic

protection anode placement and provide a written statement that the anodes will not
interfere with the operation of the clarifier.
E. Drawings: Maintain as-built drawings of the cathodic protection installation during

installation and construction. Revise drawings to show exact locations of all anodes.
Submit the original as-built drawings to the City of Houston representative.

scaled for exact locations. Determine exact locations by field conditions and non-
interference with mechanical and structural features.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Zinc Anode: Use zinc anodes, Model GA-BTZ-27, as manufactured by Galvotec

Alloys, Inc. or approved equal.
B. Zinc Anode Metallurgy: Use high purity zinc anodes. The metallurgical composition
of the zinc anodes conform to ASTM B 418, Type II and the following:

Iron 0.0014 Maximum
Lead 0.003 Maximum
Zinc Balance
C. Zinc Anode Current Capacity: Zinc anodes require a current capacity of no less than
D. Specify diameter of rod.
PART 3 EXECUTION
16644-2
A. Location: Install sacrificial anodes at the approximate locations shown on the

Drawings in accordance with the Anode Schedule which designates the number of
anodes to be placed in each area.
B. Preparation: Remove the galvanizing from rod core of the anode at the point of
connection to the clarifier. Clean the clarifier member to bright metal.
C. Weld: Weld a minimum of 1-1/2” on each end of the core to the clarifier components
as shown on the drawings.
D. Coating Repair: After welding, repair the coating in the weld area.
E. Galvanized Mechanisms: Do not install anodes if clarifier components are

galvanized.
3.02 PROJECT COMPLETION
A. Inspection: Contact the City of Houston or its designated representative to inspect the
installation following attachment of all anodes.
B. Deficiencies: Correct any deficiencies in materials or installation discovered during

the inspection.
C. Drawings: Submit as-built drawings to the City of Houston or its designated

representative as required under Section 1.05, Submittals.
END OF SECTION
16644-3
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR WET WELLS
SECTION 16645
CATHODIC PROTECTION FOR WET WELLS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Requirements for sacrificial anode cathodic protection on internal metallic

components of wet well units using zinc anodes.
1.03 UNIT PRICES
for the installation of the cathodic protection system, complete in place including zinc
anodes, field welding, cleanup, and other related work necessary for construction as
1.04 REFERENCES
B. NACE International SP0196 - Recommended Practice, Galvanic Anode Cathodic

Protection of Internal Submerged Surfaces of Water Storage Tanks.
C. NACE International SP0176 - Corrosion Control of steel fixed offshore platforms

associated with petroleum production.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submittals will conform to the requirements of Section 01330 – Submittal

Procedures.
B. Catalog Cuts: Manufacturer’s catalog cuts will be submitted for each item. The
catalog cuts will include the manufacturer's name and will provide sufficient
information to show that the materials meet the requirements of the drawings and
specifications. Where more than one item or catalog number appears on a catalog cut,
clearly identify the item proposed.
16645-1
C. Certificate of Compliance: Provide a Certificate of Compliance from the anode

foundry documenting the heat numbers and chemical analysis of the high purity zinc.
A. Provide manufacturer's certification that all components of the cathodic protection

system meet the requirements of the drawings and specifications. The certification
will reference the applicable section of the specifications and the applicable standard
detail.
B. All materials, fabrication and installations are subject to inspection and testing by the
C. The drawings for the cathodic protection system are diagrammatic and will not be
scaled for exact locations. Field conditions, non-interference with mechanical and
structural features shall determine exact locations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SACRIFICIAL ANODES – ZINC
A. Zinc Anodes: Zinc anodes will be Model HZ-30 as manufactured by Galvotec Alloys
Inc.
B. Zinc Anode Metallurgy: High purity zinc anodes will be used. The metallurgical
composition of the zinc anodes shall be conform to ASTM B-418, Type II and the
following:

Iron 0.0014 Maximum
Lead 0.003 Maximum
Zinc Balance
C. Zinc Anode Current Capacity: Zinc anodes will have a current capacity of no less
than 335 amp-hours per pound of zinc.
D. Anode Lead Wires: The standard lead wire for a galvanic anode shall be a 20 foot
length of No. 12 AWG solid copper wire equipped with TW or THW insulation.
1. Zinc anodes will be cast with a galvanized steel core with the weight of the
16645-2
2. One end of the anode will be recessed to expose the core for the lead wire
connection.
3. The lead wire will be silver-soldered to the core and the connection fully
insulated by filling the recess with an electrical potting compound.
Materials required for thermite welding and coating of the welds are described in the
following sections.
A. Charges and Molds: Weld charges and mold size will be specified by the
manufacturer for the specific surface configuration. Care will be taken during
installation to be sure correct charges are used. Welding charges and molds will be
the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of such materials.
B. Weld Coating: Coat all bare metal and weld metal with Stopaq CZ tape or coat with
epoxy coating, applied to piping.
C. Protections: Cover anodes to keep coating applied to piping from covering anodes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Location: Sacrificial anodes will be installed at the approximate locations where the
anodes will operate at maximum effectiveness.
B. Placement: Each anode will be installed horizontally on the concrete floor of the wet
well as shown on the drawings.
C. Handling: Galvanic anodes will be handled to avoid damaging anode materials and
wire connections.
3.02 PROJECT COMPLETION
A. Inspection: Contact the City of Houston or its designated representative to inspect the
installation following attachment of all anodes.
B. Deficiencies: Contractor will correct, at the Contractor’s expense, any deficiencies in

materials or installation discovered during the inspection.
END OF SECTION
16645-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION COMMUNICATIONS CONDUIT
SECTION 16709
COMMUNICATIONS CONDUIT
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Communications conduit with inner ducts.
A. Unit Prices.
1. This item will be measured by the linear foot of “Communications Conduit”

installed. Each linear foot shall include: conduit (HDPE and Rigid Steel),
inner duct, tracer wire, pull tape, marking tape / posts and all incidentals.
Conduit shall be measured horizontally along the surface from center of
communications service box to center of communications service box or other
terminating point. Risers shall be measured as the amount of conduit
extending from the ground surface.
this item will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Communications Conduit.”
The price shall be full compensation for furnishing and installing conduit; for
trenching, boring, excavating, furnishing and placing backfill, replacing
pavement structure, sod, riprap, curbs or other surfaces; for marking location
of conduit (when required); for furnishing and installing all fittings, junction
boxes, special radius sweeps, and expansion joints, conduit straps; and for all
labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 882 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting
B. ASTM D 2103 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Film and Sheeting
C. ASTM D 2261 - Standard Test Method for Tearing Strength of Fabrics by the Tongue
(Single Rip) Procedure (Constant-Rate-of-Extension Tensile Testing Machine)
PART 2 PRODUCTS
16709-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Provide new materials that comply with the details shown on the plans and the
requirements of this specification.
B. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Conduit
1. Conduit for fiber optic cable shall be Schedule 80 HDPE conduit having a 4
inch internal diameter. The outer HDPE conduit provides a shell of high
tensile and compression strength. The outer conduit is orange in color.
Conduit shall terminate without bends if possible.
2. Bends shall be rigid steel conduit; having a minimum radius of 10 times the
nominal diameter of the conduit (30 degree maximum bends - 90 degree
bends are prohibited unless approved by City of Houston Engineers). The
exterior of the steel bends shall be double wrapped with 10-mil PVC tape.
3. HDPE conduit shall be joined by solvent-weld method in accordance with the

conduit manufacturer’s recommendation. No reducer couplings shall be used
unless specifically indicated on the drawings.
4. All riser conduit shall be Rigid Metal Conduit.
C. Inner duct
1. All HDPE Conduit shall be installed with four (4) one inch (1”) polyethylene
inner ducts. These inner ducts shall be smooth on both the inside and outside
to facilitate pulling the inner duct into the conduit and pulling future fiber
optic cable into the inner duct. Each inn duct has a designated purpose and
shall be provided in each of the following colors:
a. blue (City traffic operations)
b. yellow (public safety)
c. red (City IT)
d. green(other)
2. A minimum of one foot of the inner duct shall extend beyond the end of the
conduit inside of the communications service box. All inner duct shall have
1,250 lb. pull tape.
D. Marking Tape / Posts
1. Underground marking tape will be used in all areas where trenching is utilized
to install underground conduit. Use marking tape in conjunction with marking
posts and marking discs.
16709-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. The technical specifications of underground marking tape are identified

below, along with applicable testing methods necessary to establish that a
cable submitted for approval meets these specifications.
THRESHOLD
TEST PROPERTY SPECIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
Standard Weight ASTM D2103 20 lbs/100 feet
Thickness – Overall ASTM D2103 4 mil
3 in. Tensile Break – MD ASTM D882 35 lbs/ft
3 in. Tensile Strength – MD ASTM D882 4 kpsi
3 in. Tensile Break – TD ASTM D882 38 lbs/ft
3 in. Tensile Strength – TD ASTM D882 5 kpsi
Elongation – MD – MD ASTM D882 530 %
Elongation – TD – TD ASTM D882 660 %
Tear Strength ASTM D2261 1.5 lbs/ft
3. Underground marking tape will be a 3-inch wide, tear resistant, corrosion

resistant elastic PVC orange tape, imprinted with the legend “CITY OF
HOUSTON BURIED CABLE – CALL TRAFFIC OPERATIONS at 311”.
This legend will be printed every three (3) feet in black letters.
4. Underground cable marking posts are required and will be installed

everywhere feasible and practical in all areas where fiber optic cable is
installed in underground conduit. This is the preferred method of marking,
since it is very visible. Marking posts should be placed every 500 feet in urban
area, and every 1000 feet in suburban areas, as well as at every intersection
corner and every change in direction. Exception would be locations like
downtown where all surfaces are paved, where discs would be more practical.
5. Use marking discs set in concrete or pavement where the use of marking posts
is not feasible and practical, i.e., areas such as downtown where everything is
paved and for aesthetics.
6. Technical specifications of underground marking posts are identified below.
a. Line Markers will be made from ultraviolet-stabilized High Density

Polyethylene (HDPE)
b. Minimum 3-1/2" O.D. tubular design
c. Text will be hot-stamped into the fittings with an extra u-v clear coat.
d. Crossing casing vents will be used to help maintain atmosphere

conditions.
e. Line markers will require no maintenance after installation
16709-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. General
1. Place conduit in accordance with the lines, grades, and details shown on the
plans or as directed. Conduit shall be buried a minimum of 30 inches deep
underground unless otherwise shown on the plans. Fit conduit and inner duct
terminations with bushings or bell ends.
2. Prior to installation of inner duct/cables, pull a spherical template of at least

75% of the inside diameter of the conduit/inner duct through the conduit/inner
duct to ensure that it is free from obstruction. Cap or plug empty conduit
places for future use.
3. Conduit shall have 30 degree sweeps into communications service boxes or

cabinets. Conduit bends shall have a minimum radius of 18 inches.
4. When installing the multi-duct conduit, the outer shell and inner duct shall be
continuous (without splices) up to 800 feet from communication service box
to communication service box.
5. Where existing surfacing is removed for placing conduit, repair by backfilling

with material equal in composition and density to the surrounding areas.
Immediately repair any damaged infrastructure including sidewalks,
driveways, riprap, etc. to equivalent conditions prior to construction.
6. Any obstructions to the trenching / boring operation such as utilities,

structures, sprinkler systems, etc. are to be protected from damage by the
contractor during construction and until the work is completed. In the event of
damage, the contractor shall be responsible for the repair / replacement at the
contractor’s expense with materials and methods which leave the damaged
items in as good or better condition than original. Immediately after
installation of conduit, backfill pits, excavation or trenches.
B. Trenching
1. No trenching shall be allowed within 5 feet of a tree. Where the depth of

conduit changes, the trench bottom shall have a slope of 3 / 1 (horizontal /
vertical) to accommodate the depth change.
C. Boring / Jacking / Directional Drilling
1. Boring shall be the preferred method of excavation unless specified otherwise

in the plans. When indicated on the plans, conduit crossing existing pavement
shall be placed by jacking and boring methods. The boring and jacking
method used shall be approved by the Engineer prior to commencing work.
16709-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Excavate suitable pits for conducting boring operations (clearly mark/protect

excavation to avoid injury by public). Pits shall be kept 2 feet clear outside of
the pavement edge. Install conduit so there is no interference with street
operation or no structure is weakened or damaged.
3. Unless otherwise specified in the plans, the method and equipment used in
jacking casing or pipe shall be optional with the contractor, provided that the
proposed method is approved by the Engineer. Heavy duty jacks suitable for
forcing pipe through the embankment shall be provided by the contractor.
Uniform pressure shall be applied from all jacks. Pressure shall be transmitted
evenly around the ring of the pipe through an approved jacking head.
4. Once boring / jacking operations have begun, the boring / jacking shall be
continuous, without interruption, insofar as practicable, to prevent the pipe
from becoming firmly set in the embankment.
5. Material excavated ahead of the pipe shall be removed through the pipe.
Jetting will not be permitted except as approved by the Engineer. The
diameter of the excavation shall conform as closely as practicable to the
outside diameter and circumference of the pipe being jacked.
D. Tracer Wire
1. One (1) No. 6 AWG Green, unspliced THW/XHHW wire shall be installed in
each conduit. The tracer wire shall be pulled inside of the fiber optic conduit
in the voids outside of the inner ducts. All tracer wire shall be continuous –
tied together inside communication service boxes with wire nuts. Lubricants
used in pulling the tracer wire shall be water soluble. A minimum of 5-feet of
wire shall be coiled, taped, labeled, and secured in the communications
service box. The ends of all tracer wire, within a communications service box,
shall be connected to a common lug to allow for locating multiple segments of
conduit run with one setup of the detection equipment. For transition between
underground and overhead cabling, coil the wire in the communications
service box closest to the riser. Access fittings shall be used on risers without
adjacent communication service boxes.
E. Pull Tape
1. Pull tape is required in all inner ducts. No pull ropes, twine, or pull strings will
be used for the purpose of installation. Further, if the plans and specifications
indicate pull tape for future use do not substitute pull ropes, twine or pull
strings for pull tape.
2. Pull tape will be prefabricated woven polyester tape made from low friction,
high abrasion resistant yarns providing a low coefficient of friction. Pull tapes
will be prelubricated. Pull tapes will be printed with sequential footage
markings for accurate measurement. Pull tapes will be ½ inch wide and have a
minimum tensile strength of 1,250 pounds.
16709-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
F. Sealing
1. After installation of cables and wires the conduits shall be sealed / plugged
with a suitable compound so as to prevent the entrance of moisture or gases.
END OF SECTION
16709-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION PULL BOXES
SECTION 16710
PULL BOXES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Pull boxes of the various types and sizes required complete with lids.
A. Unit Prices
1. Payment for this item will be measured as each ground box and or extension
by type, complete in place. Concrete aprons, if required, will be measured as
each pull box with concrete apron, complete, in place.
this item will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Pull Boxes” of the various
types and sizes specified. The price shall be full compensation for excavating
and backfilling; for constructing, furnishing and installing the pull boxes and
concrete rings when required; for concrete and reinforcing steel; and for all
3. Refer to Section 01270 – Measurement and Payment for unit price

procedures.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 2444 – Standard Practice for Determination of the Impact Resistance of

Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings by Means of a Tup (Falling Weight)
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) must be attached in a weather tight vessel on
each order.
B. A certified copy of all test reports shall be signed and sealed by a registered State of
Texas Professional Engineer and submitted prior to receipt of shipment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
16710-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
2.01 MATERIALS
B. All pull boxes shall be constructed of polymer concrete consisting of sand and
aggregate bound together with a polymer resin. Internal reinforcement may be
provided by means of steel, fiberglass, or a combination of both. Chopped fiberglass,
polyethylene, or polystyrene are not allowed for internal reinforcement.
C. The material used to shall have the following minimum allowable properties:
Compressive Strength: 10,000 psi

Flexural Strength: 7,000 psi
Tensile Strength: 1,500 psi
D. Pull boxes and extensions shall be furnished in the following nominal sizes (Width X
Length X Depth):
Type Purpose Dimensions

A Detector Loops & Hardwire Interconnect 13” x 18” x 24”
B Standard traffic signal pull box, but also used 17” x 30” x 24”
for detector loops where multiple 17” x 30” x 12” (Extension)
loops enter the pull box
C Standard pull box used for most 26” x 38” x 24”
communications applications, or where a 26” x 38” x 12 (Extension)
larger pull box is needed due to multiple
conduits
E. Each enclosure shall be designed and constructed flush to grade with the cover fitting
flush to the box.
F. All pull box covers shall be equipped with a minimum of two stainless steel
lockdown mechanisms. Multiple piece covers shall be equipped with a means of
interlocking with each other, or each section shall be secured with two stainless steel
lockdown mechanisms. Tools to unlock the covers shall be furnished. A minimum of
one (1) tool shall be furnished with each ten (10) pull boxes supplied. All covers shall
have a logo recessed into the cover with the legend, “TRAFFIC SIGNAL” in two-
inch minimum height letters, or other as specified by the City of Houston.
G. All covers shall have a recessed access point to allow removal of the cover with a
special lifting tool. One lifting tool shall be furnished with each ten (10) pull boxes.
The access point shall be located and designed to allow the maximum amount of
leverage and safety possible.
H. Pull boxes shall be designed and suitable for installation and use through a
temperature range of –40 degrees C to 60 degrees C.
16710-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
I. All pull boxes and covers shall be rated for a static vertical design load of 15,000
pounds, minimum. All pull boxes must pass a minimum static vertical load test of at
least 22,500 pounds. A physical description of the testing methods shall be included
with the test reports. Load versus deflection curves shall be provided.
J. All pull boxes shall be capable of supporting a lateral load, design bearing pressure,
of 600 pounds per square foot. Lateral load testing shall be applied to the longest
dimension. The load shall be transmitted by a flat, rigid plate 24 inches wide by the
depth dimension of the enclosure, bearing against any suitable medium which will
conform to the shape and angle of the enclosure sidewall to achieve uniform loading.
K. Pull box Vertical Load Testing: The 15,000 pounds design load and 22,500 pounds
testing load shall be distributed over a 5 inch by 10 inch area. All covers shall be
tested, installed on a typical pull box. The loading pad shall be centered on the part of
the cover that will produce the maximum deflection under load. A deflection-
measuring device shall be used to measure deflection. Deflection under design load
shall not exceed:
1. Cover ½ inch
2. Pull box ¼ inch per foot of pull box length.
L. Permanent deflection of the cover or pull box shall not interfere with the placement or
removal of the cover.
M. All covers shall be skid resistant and should have a minimum coefficient of friction of
0.50 on the top surface of the cover.
N. Any point on the cover must be able to withstand a 70 foot-pound impact with a 12-
pound weight having a “C” Tup (ASTM D-2444) without puncturing or splitting.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Installations shall be in commercial and residential sidewalks and behind

curbs where no deliberate traffic is planned.
2. Each enclosure shall be suitable for installation in either direct or buried

native soil, embedded in concrete or embedded in asphalt surfacing. A
concrete collar shall be furnished for each installation in asphalt, or where
called for on the plans.
3. All enclosures shall withstand shipping and installation practices without

chipping, cracking, or structural damage. Any pull box damaged, or cracked,
during installation shall be replaced by the Contractor.
16710-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
4. Installation of the pull boxes shall be in conformance with the details shown
on the plans. When shown on the plans, a concrete ring or apron shall be
provided.
3.02 CONDUIT ENTRANCE TO PULL BOX
A. Hydraulic conduit entrance punchout tools or equivalent shall be used to provide

necessary entrances to pull boxes leaving a clean surface area for the insertion of
conduit.
END OF SECTION
16710-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONDUIT
SECTION 16711
TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONDUIT
PART 1 GENERAL
A. All traffic signal conduit installed above ground shall be rigid steel, hot-dipped,
galvanized conduit. Underground conduit installed in unpaved areas may be either
rigid steel, hot- dipped galvanized conduit or Schedule 80 polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
conduit, unless specified on the plans. Underground conduit installed under paved
roadways and shoulders shall be rigid steel, hot-dipped galvanized conduit.
B. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, all conductors shall be in conduit except
when in metal poles. All conduits and fittings shall be of the sizes and types shown on
the drawings. Each section of conduit shall bear evidence of approval of
Underwriter's Laboratories.
C. The Contractor may, at the Contractor’s own expense, use conduit of larger size than
specified on the drawings providing that the larger size is used for the entire length of
the conduit run.
A. Unit Prices
1. Measurement: This Item will be measured by the linear foot of the various
sizes and types of conduit installed based on the type of surface as indicated in
the bid item. Conduit shall be measured horizontally along the surface from
center of pullbox to center of pullbar or foundation. Risers shall be measured
as the amount of conduit extending from the ground surface.
2. Payment: The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this
Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the
unit price bid for “Conduit” of the various types and sizes specified. The price
shall be full compensation for furnishing and installing conduit; for directional
drilling, boring, excavating, furnishing and placing backfill, replacing
pavement structure, sod, riprap, curbs or other surfaces; for marking location
of conduit (when required); for furnishing and installing all fittings, junction
boxes, special radius sweeps, and expansion joints, conduit straps; and for all
16711-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ANSI C80.1-2020 – American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit
B. National Board of Fire Underwriters - Rules and Regulations
C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code
D. NPFC - WW-C-581 - Conduit, Metal, Rigid, and Intermediate; and Coupling, Elbow,
and Nipple, Electrical Conduit: Steel, Zinc Coated
E. UL-6 – Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Steel
F. UL-1242 – Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit - Steel
G. Underwriters' Laboratories - Specifications
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Electrical PVC Conduit - The use of Electrical PVC conduit will be allowed as long
as all guidelines set forth in the NEC (National Electrical Code) book are followed.
Schedule 80 Electrical PVC will only be used in pertinent applications. In locations
above the ground, rigid metal conduit will be used. All grounding procedures set forth
in the NEC shall be followed.
1. PVC conduit shall be joined by solvent-weld method in accordance with the

conduit manufacturers recommendation. No reducer couplings shall be used
unless specifically indicated on the drawings.
B. Rigid Steel, Hot-Dipped, Galvanized Conduit
1. All conduit shall be of mild steel piping, galvanized inside and outside, and
shall conform in all respects to UL-6 and UL-1242.
2. Trade Names - Conduit manufactured by Clifton, Pittsburg-Standard, Triangle

or Youngstown conforms to the provisions of this specification. Other brands
of rigid steel, hot dipped, galvanized electrical conduit may be approved by
the engineer provided samples and engineering data submitted by the bidder
equal the provisions of this specification.
3. Protective Coating - The galvanized coat of zinc shall be of uniform thickness,

not less than 0.0008 inch, applied by the hot-dipped process to not only the
inside and outside surfaces of the conduit, but also to the threads of the
conduit.
16711-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
4. Threading and Reaming - Each piece of conduit shall be straight, free from
blisters and other defects, cut square and taper reamed, and furnished with
coupling in 10 ft. lengths threaded each end. The interior threaded surface of
each coupling shall be galvanized to insure 100% galvanic protection when
coupled together with lengths of hot-dipped rigid conduit with hot-dipped
galvanized threads.
5. Rigid Elbows - Rigid standard and special radius elbows shall be made from
the same grade of mild steel piping as rigid steel conduit. They shall be
galvanized so that not only the exterior and interior surfaces shall have a
galvanized coating but also the threaded area, thereby insuring 100% galvanic
protection on all surfaces.
6. Chemical Test for Coating - The hot galvanized coating shall be of such
quality and uniformity that a sample of hot-galvanized conduit will not show a
fixed deposit of copper after four (4) immersions or dips in a standard copper
sulfate solution.
7. Bending Test - The hot-galvanized coating on the inside and outside surfaces
shall be sufficiently elastic to prevent cracking or flaking when a sample of
finished conduit is bent 90 degrees, at a minimum bend of 60 degrees inner
edge of the bend of six (6) times the inside diameter of the conduit. For
conduits two (2) inches in diameter, or smaller, special eighteen (18) inch
minimum radius sweeps shall be furnished and installed by the contractor.
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. General
1. 1. The contractor shall familiarize himself with the provisions of the General
and Special Conditions in regard to permits, codes, laws and ordinances, and
these provisions shall be controlling factors, except as specifically noted
otherwise or supplemented herein.
2. All work shall be done in accordance with the latest rules and regulations of
the National Board of Fire Underwriters, the National Electrical Safety Code
and all local ordinances.
B. Coordination
1. The work shall be carefully coordinated with work of other trades. Wherever
work covered under this item, the order of work shall be carefully scheduled
and coordinated to secure the completion of the various portions in the best
possible manner. The rights of the various interests and the sequence when in
dispute, shall be established by the Engineer and the Engineer’s instructions as
to priority and scheduling shall be final and binding.
16711-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Placement
1. All joints in conduit shall be cut square, reamed smooth and drawn up tight.
Concealed conduit shall run in as direct a manner as practicable, with
maximum radius bends. All bends shall be free from dents or flattening. Not
more than the equivalent of three quarter bends (two hundred seventy degrees)
shall be used in any run between terminals, outlets and junction or pull boxes.
Conduit joints shall be made with approved couplings and unions; where
conduit cross expansion joints, expansion fittings shall be installed. Conduit
runs underground shall be installed a minimum of 24 inches below finished
grade, except where it is impossible or impractical. The Engineer or approved
designer shall be the sole judge of the permissible depth of conduit
installation. The conduit shall be installed as shown on the plans or as directed
by the Engineer. Each conduit run shall be swabbed after installation, and a
No. 9 galvanized steel pull wire shall be inserted in each conduit and folded in
a manner making it easy to retrieve from each end. The conduit ends shall be
capped or plugged until cabling and wiring operations commence.
2. Upon request of the Engineer, the contractor shall draw a full-time metal
brush, attached by swivel joint to a pull tape through "metal conduit" and a
special template having a diameter not less than 75 percent of the inside
diameter through PVC conduits to insure that the conduit is clean and free
from obstructions. A nylon or non-metal pull tape shall be used in pulling
cable and conductors through PVC conduit. Metal tapes will not be permitted
in PVC conduit. The conduits shall be placed as shown on the drawings or as
directed by the Engineer.
3. Conduit placed for concrete encasement shall be secured and supported in

such a manner that the alignment will not be disturbed during placement of
the concrete. No concrete shall be placed until all of the conduit ends have
been capped and all box openings closed.
4. PVC conduit which is placed under existing pavement, sidewalks, and

driveways shall be placed by first providing a void through which the PVC
conduit shall be inserted. Boring is required for placing conduit under
pavements. Metal conduit which is to be placed under existing pavement,
sidewalks, and driveways shall be placed by boring.
5. Existing conduit which has been placed in position on the job site by others
for this installation shall be checked to see that there are no obstructions in the
conduit prior to threading the wire through. Any such obstructions shall be
cleared without damage to the conduit, prior to installing cable.
6. Conduit runs shall be installed in such a manner as to minimize the

accumulation of moisture at low points and pockets.
16711-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
7. The components parts of conduits systems shall, in general, be of like

material. Where dissimilar metals are used together, suitable provisions shall
be made to prevent galvanic action.
8. The ends of all conduit runs shall be closed immediately after installation to
prevent the accumulation of water, dirt and other foreign material. Conduit
shall be swabbed out where necessary before conductors are pulled in. Bends
may be either factory or field made. All 2 inch conduits shall be placed with
special radius sweeps with a minimum radius of 18 inches. Standard bends
shall not be allowed with 2 inch conduits.
D. Bonding
1. A No. 8 solid soft bare copper bond wire shall be installed in each conduit.
This bond wire shall be firmly attached to the grounding rod installed in each
pull box and cabinet. The bond wire shall create a continuous grounding
system for the entire conduit system. All conduits, including rigid metal, shall
be bonded together with a No. 8 solid bare copper wire and have continuity to
every ground rod installed at each signal installation.
E. Pull Rope
1. A 5/16 inch nylon pull rope shall be installed in each conduit installed. A
minimum of three feet of pull rope shall be coiled in each pullbox and cabinet.
F. Sealing
1. After installation of cables and wires the conduits shall be sealed with a
suitable compound so as to prevent the entrance of moisture or gases.
END OF SECTION
16711-5
CITY OF HOUSTON SOLAR POWERED SCHOOL
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION ZONE FIELD EQUIPMENT
SECTION 16712
SOLAR POWERED SCHOOL ZONE FIELD EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
A. The purpose of this specification is to provide details of Solar School Zone Flashing
Beacon Field Equipment for new installations and replacement parts for existing
installations.
B. Field Equipment Includes: cabinets, battery chargers, batteries, solar panels, flashers,
and other incidentals required for Solar Powered School Zone Field Equipment.
B. Section 16715 - Vehicle Signal Heads (Polycarbonate) (Adjustable, Expandable

Type)
A. Unit Prices
1. Solar Flashing Beacon Assembly, Complete, in Place – This Item will be

measured on the basis of EACH assembly complete in place, tested, and
accepted. This item shall include one pole with cap and base, one cabinet
assembly, two beacons, solar panel, battery, battery charger, flasher, time
switch* and terminal strips, and all conductors, and incidentals necessary to
provide a complete functional Solar Flashing Beacon assembly. * Time switch
optional to be supplied as single unit or integrated with communications
component as part of the RSBMS.
2. Solar Flashing Beacon, Assembly, Complete, Parts – This item shall include
one pole with cap and base, one cabinet assembly, two beacons, solar panel,
two batteries, battery charger, flasher, and terminal strips. This item will be
measured on the basis of EACH complete assembly furnished and accepted.
3. Flashing Beacon Cabinet Assembly – will be measured as EACH unit

furnished and accepted.
4. Automatic Battery Charger – will be measured as EACH unit furnished and

accepted.
5. Batteries, 12 VDC, Furnished – will be measured as EACH unit furnished and

accepted.
16712-1
6. Solar Panel Array, Furnished – will be measured as EACH unit furnished and
accepted.
7. Signal Beacons, Furnished – will be measured as each PAIR of beacons

furnished.
8. Solar Flashing Beacon Assembly, With Time Switch*, Complete, in Place –

This Item will be measured on the basis of EACH assembly complete in place,
tested, and accepted. This item shall include one pole with cap and base, one
cabinet assembly, one programmable flashing beacon time-switch, two
beacons, solar panel, battery, battery charger, flasher, and terminal strips, and
all conductors, and incidentals necessary to provide a complete functional
Solar Flashing Beacon assembly.
* Time switch optional to be supplied as single unit or integrated with as part

of the RSBMS.
9. Remote School Beacon Monitoring System (RSBMS) – will be measured as

EACH unit furnished, tested, and accepted. This item shall include a Remote
School Beacon Management System Field Device (RSBMSFD) consisting of
a school beacon timer and a cellular modem, either as individual components
or an integrated unit, software subscription and configuration, 10-year
connectivity and support plan, school zone flasher back panel, and incidentals
necessary to provide a complete functional Remote School Beacon
Monitoring System.
10. The work performed, and materials furnished shall be measured as indicated
in this Section and will be paid for at the unit price bid for each item, as
specified in the bid form. This price shall be full compensation for
excavating, backfilling, for constructing, furnishing, installing, and testing
Solar Powered School Zone Equipment. This price shall also be full
compensation for; concrete and reinforcing steel; electrical conductors,
connections, grounding rods, galvanized pipe, fittings, pole caps, pole bases,
straps, foundations (concrete or screw-in, as specified), anchor bolts, anchor
plates (when required) and any other incidentals necessary to complete the
work.
11. Refer to Section 01270 – Measurement and Payment for unit price procedure.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 153 – Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware
B. TxDOT Special Specification Item 4004 – Screw-In Type Anchor Foundations
1.05 WARRANTY
16712-2
A. All equipment, except batteries, shall be warranted free from defects in Material and
workmanship for minimum three (3) years from date delivered to the City of Houston
warehouse. Batteries shall be warranted as specified in the Battery for Solar Powered
Flashing Beacons section of this specification.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Cabinet Components
1. General: The cabinet door shall be constructed from 5052H32-sheet alloy and
shall have a thickness of .125 inch. There shall be no vertical seams in the
cabinet shell. All External welds shall be made using the Heliarc method,
whereas the wire welding method shall make internal welds. All welds shall
be neatly formed and free from cracks, blowholes and other irregularities. The
nominal outside dimensions shall be 26-inch (h) x 15.25-inch (w) x 15.75-
inch (d). There shall also, be a lip over-hang cross the top of the cabinet
covering the top of the door to help in preventing moisture from getting into
the cabinet. The cabinet will be designed to protect internal equipment from
rain, dust, vandalism and other conditions found in harsh environments.
2. The cabinet door opening shall be double flanged around all sides to form a
uniform surface. This is to assure maximum contact with the door gasketing
material.
3. All inside and outside edges of the cabinet shall be free of burrs.
4. All single position door restraint shall be provided to hold the door open at a
maximum 90-degree angle. This is to prevent door movement in wind
conditions.
5. Eight (8) louvered vents (4 per side) shall be provided for adequate ventilation
of internal components.
6. Door and Hardware:
a. The Door will be a minimum of 80% of the front surface area and shall
be hinged on the right side when facing the cabinet.
b. The door shall be furnished with a gasket ½” x 2” closed celled

neoprene that shall form a weather tight seal between the cabinet
flange and the door. A 3/8” x 5/8” retainer shall be used to hold gasket
in place.
c. The door gasketing shall be sprayed with silicone lubricant so that it

does not adhere to the cabinet body-sealing surface.
16712-3
d. The hinge shall be continuous and shall fasten to the cabinet and door
by ¼-20 carriage bolts, washers and nylok nuts. The hinge will be
made of .90-inch-thick stainless steel and shall have a .25-inch
diameter stainless steel hinge pin.
7. The Latching Mechanism shall be a three-point draw type and shall have the
following characteristics:
a. The center catch and cam shall be fabricated from .1875-inch-thick

steel and zinc plated.
b. The latching rods shall not make direct contact with the inside of the
cabinet surface, rather this mechanical interface shall be made by a
nylon roller on each of the latching rod ends.
c. The lock shall be a Corbin #2 lock. Two keys will be furnished with
each lock.
d. On the front side of the door a cover shall be provided over the key
slot to prevent debris from getting into the lock. This device shall be
attached so that it can provide easy access for unlocking the cabinet.
e. The latching handle shall have a provision for padlocking in the closed
position. The padlocking position shall be at the extreme end of the
latching handle to preclude the use of pipe by vandals to force the
locking mechanism open.
8. An Operating Handle shall be furnished and shall have the following

characteristics:
a. The handle will be stainless steel with a .750-inch diameter shank.
b. The latching handle shall have a provision for padlocking in the closed
position. The padlocking position shall be in the bottom middle of the
latching handle to preclude the use of pipe by vandals to force the
locking mechanism open.
c. There shall be no exposed hardware of any type mounting the latching

handle to the door.
d. The handle shall have a lock hasp to allow the securing of the cabinet
with a padlock.
9. Cabinet Layout
16712-4
a. Top Shelf: Top Shelf shall be removable for easy access to battery on
the bottom. The shelf shall have predrilled holes to attach the control
panel these holes will be ¼ inch in diameter and shall be centered 7
inches apart 3 inches from the front of the shelf. The top shelf shall
have a minimum depth of 9 inches and shall span the entire width of
the cabinet. In the back center of the top shelf a half moon shape hole
with a diameter of 2 inches shall be in place for ease of bringing cables
up to the controller panel. The front lip of the shelf shall be turned up a
minimum of ¼ inch and shall be free from sharp edges and burrs. In
addition, ¼ x ¾ inch bolts with wing nut shall be supplied for
attaching control panel to shelf. The top shelf shall be removable but
made rigidly mounted with the use of simple tools.
b. The cabinet shall be provided with a battery shelf fabricated from

5052H32 aluminum having a thickness of .125 inch. The shelf shall be
welded into the cabinet for maximum rigidity. A ½ inch of Styrofoam
shall be supplied to cover the bottom, sides and back of the cabinet
where the battery will sit.
10. Cabinet Finish: Unless otherwise specified, the outside surface of the cabinet
shall have a smooth, uniform, polish aluminum finish.
B. Solar Panel
1. The Photovoltaic Module shall provide 12 VDC and be capable of recharging

the system to full capacity, after 6 hours of continuous operation, in three (3)
hours +/- .5 hours during optimum sun conditions in December. The minimum
acceptable wattage output of the solar panel will be 100 watts. Solar Array
sizing calculations and the parameters used shall be required. Each solar cell
shall be bypass diode protected to prevent power loss if a module is
temporarily shaded. The crystalline silicon solar module shall consist of cells
that are permanently encapsulated between a tempered glass cover and layers
of ethylene vinyl acetate (EVA) pottant with a polyvinyl fluoride (PVF) and
aluminum foil back sheet to provide a moisture free environment. Units
without foil back sheets must have Underwriter Laboratory (UL) approval.
The module frame shall be made from extruded aluminum alloy and
adequately sized to attach the desired number and size of solar panels. The
mounting bracket shall use tamper proof hardware to secure the PV module to
the frame. An ultraviolet (UV) resistant, weatherproof junction box providing
wire termination for up to #8 AWG wiring shall be provided with the PV
module.
C. Battery for Solar Powered Flashing Beacons
16712-5
1. The Battery shall have a nominal voltage of 12 VDC. The battery shall be
sized to allow four (4) days of autonomy and provide sufficient power to
support remote support remote communications at an increased power
consumption rate of 1 ampere hour per day. The battery shall conform to the
following criteria:
a. Operating temperature range:
(1) Discharge: -26 degrees F to + 140 degrees F.
(2) Charge: -4 degrees F to +122 degrees F.
b. Vents: Pressure relief vents permanently attached Sealed Construction:

Will not spill or leak.
c. Flag Terminals: Hold clearances for ¼” bolt.
2. Battery shall be housed in the cabinet specified in the above specification.

The battery shall carry two (2) year replacement warranty from date of
delivery to the City of Houston, and a prorated warranty up to five (5) years.
3. Programmable Control Unit – Programmable time-based control units, when

required shall be as listed in the bid items.
D. Battery Charger
1. The Charging Unit shall be 100% solid state and be designed for use as a
battery charger in photovoltaic (solar) energy systems. The charger shall be
mounted on the control panel.
a. The charger shall supply maximum solar panel current to the battery
until battery is fully charged (trickle charge will not be accepted).
Battery voltage will be used to determine when charging is to resume.
The resumption threshold shall compensate for temperature. The
charge current must be tested at least one (1) time per hour.
b. The charger shall supply a charging current of up to 10 Amps DC to

the batteries.
c. The charger shall be a modular design and shall be easily replaced

with the use of simple tools. There shall be no terminal strip
connections on the charging unit it must be a plug-in design. Any
meters being used shall be housed in the charging unit.
d. Metering devices used shall be for checking the battery voltage and
solar panel input voltage. One meter built into the charging unit will be
used for both operations, an external switching device shall be used to
check both measurements.
16712-6
e. No terminal strip connections are to be on the front of the control

panel, all connections will be made on the back of the control panel.
f. Charger shall incorporate a low voltage disconnect that shall prevent

battery damage due to extreme discharge.
E. Flashing Unit
1. The Flashing Unit shall be a modular design with a plug being utilized for
connecting to the external flashing outputs. The external outputs shall be made
on the back of the control panel. The flasher shall be easily replaced with the
use of simple tools.
a. The flasher shall be a 12-volt DC charger and shall operate in a range

+/ -volts.
b. The flasher shall have a minimum 2 circuits and shall be rated for a
minimum of 50 watts per circuit.
c. The operating temperature range shall be from -20 C to + 75 C.
d. The flasher shall be capable of working both Halogen or LED lamp

units.
e. The physical size of the flasher unit shall be no larger than 5.50” (L) x
3” (W) x 2” (D).
f. The housing shall be a minimum 18 Ga. Steel.
g. The flasher shall have a programmable flash rate from 50-70 flashes
per minute.
F. Signal Beacons
1. The School Zone Beacon Assembly shall operate with two (2) signal beacons.
The beacons shall flash alternately (bouncing ball type). The beacons (signal
heads, visors and LED lamp units) and mounting hardware shall be supplied
as part of this bid.
2. All Flashing Beacons shall be 12” polycarbonate yellow housings with tunnel
visor hood and use band on mounting or approved equal. The housing, door
and visor shall meet the applicable portions of City of Houston Specification
Section 16715 – Vehicle Signal Heads (Polycarbonate) (Adjustable,
Expandable Type).
3. Lamp Unit Modules shall be LED (yellow) - 12VDC. All lamp unit modules
shall meet the ITE VTCSH-LED Circular Signal Supplement over the full
temperature range of -40 degrees C to +74 degrees C and shall meet or exceed
the latest ITE uniformity specifications.
16712-7
4. Signal Beacon Mounting Hardware shall consist of supports for side-of-pole

mounting of the signal head in a vertical position shall be 1-1/2" standard pipe
bracket arm, attached to the top of the signal head with pipe nipple, threaded
cross fitting with adequate closure caps and collared / cast nipples and band-
on pole plate. Pole plate shall be provided with a cable guide. The mounting
assembly shall consist of one standard pipe sections extending 12-3/4" from
and at right angles to the axis of rotational adjustment of the signal head. The
supports shall have running threads at least 1-1/4" long at the pole connection
end. The signal head shall be adjustable, by rotation of the various signal faces
about their vertical axis, throughout a radial angle of 360 degrees and shall be
capable of being rigidly clamped in any position through the range of
adjustment. The wiring from the signal head shall be able to be enclosed in the
top support. A closure cap shall be provided for the bottom opening of the
signal head housing.
G. Two-Way Network Programmable Time Switch
1. A time switch shall be provided as an individual component or integrated with

the Remote School Beacon Monitoring System. The time switch unit shall
have the following general characteristics as defined in detail under the
Remote School Beacon Monitoring System Field Device Requirements:
a. The time switch shall support Ethernet and cellular communications.
b. The time switch unit shall have a two-way network transceiver able to
receive programs and commands generated by a central computer and
transmit its programming data back to the central computer upon
demand.
c. The time switch shall be capable of receiving and running the

following programs via the two-way network: override plan, time set,
setup time switch, day plan programming, default week plan and
annual plan programming as described in the Remote School Beacon
Monitoring System Interface Requirements.
d. The time switch shall be housed in an aluminum or stainless-steel

enclosure with a means for mounting to a suitable back plane.
e. The time switch shall be capable of operating on either 12 VDC +/-

2VDC or an AC power source between 95 and 135 VAC.
f. The AC and DC power supply must be an integral part of the time

switch circuit board due to the fact that many flasher cabinets do not
have AC power outlets.
g. A separate power supply module, similar to those used for calculators

and battery chargers, is not acceptable.
16712-8
h. Battery backup memory shall be provided to maintain timekeeping and

all programming when the line power source is lost. This backup
memory shall maintain timekeeping and all programming for not less
than 60 days and shall go online automatically upon failure of the
power source. Upon resumption of power source, the unit shall
automatically resume normal operation.
i. When the time switch is operating on the backup system, the indicators
and relay output shall be off to conserve backup power.
j. The time switch shall have a minimum of four (4) LED indicators to
display the following:
(1) When the time switch has power and is operating.
(2) When the time switch is receiving two-way network signal.
(3) When the time switch is receiving GPS signal.
(4) When the output relay is energized or de-energized.
(5) Other may include setting error, program running, etc.
k. The time switch shall have the option of receiving Global Positioning
Satellites (GPS) signals from a receiver designed for this function. The
GPS receiver may be provided as a separate unit or integrated as part
of the RSBMS. The GPS receiver shall reset the time-of-day in the
time switch continuously when locked onto at least 3 satellites and
shall automatically adjust for time zones and daylight savings time.
The time switch must provide the capability of automatically resetting
time switch time-a-day from the GPS receiver in the absence of two-
way communications.
l. The timer switch shall be capable of operating with AC and DC

environments. The relay outputs should be rated at 15-16A.
m. The unit shall consume no more than .250 W at rest and .600 W with
relays energized.
H. Remote School Beacon Monitoring System
1. Overview
The Remote School Beacon Monitoring System (RSBMS) must allow for the
a. Display of the real-time fault status of the school beacons, including

loss of AC power, beacon failure, battery failures and solar charge
status.
16712-9
b. Issue real time alerts via SMS and email to the appropriate response
personnel immediately after a fault occurs.
c. Setting up the schedules and holidays of school beacon operation

remotely and downloading the schedules to the school beacons.
d. Having manual override of individual or groups of school beacons to

be able to turn them immediately on or off to meet early school
release, and other unexpected school events.
e. The timer switch shall not require any peripheral attachments.
f. The timer switch shall be capable of being programmed locally via a

mobile device interface.
g. Key performance indicators must be maintained by the system and

available for report at any predefined frequency. Reports must
illustrate the operational availability of school beacons. The report
shall include details of the beacon health condition of the battery’s,
solar chargers and lamps.
h. The timer switch shall be capable of monitoring rapid flashing

beacons, this includes battery voltage, solar panel, AC and the number
of button presses.
i. The timer switch shall be capable of operating with AC and DC

environments.
j. The overall system must be capable of integration to a Smart City

Management platform.
k. The hardware shall be under warranty for as long as the devices have a
connectivity and support license and connected to the Remote Beacon
Monitoring System.
2. Remote School Beacon Monitoring System Client User Interface

Requirements
The RSBMS software user interface shall provide, as a minimum, features to

meet the following requirements:
a. General:
(1) The user interface shall be web based and be able to be viewed
using a browser. Internet Explorer, Chrome and Firefox
browsers shall be supported, as well as Safari on an iPad.
Systems that use remote desktop or similar to view a thick-
client user interface will not be acceptable.
16712-10
(2) The RSBMS shall require a user name and password to log on.
(3) The RSBMS systems shall be mobile friendly and operators

shall be able to open the system on a mobile phone to access
the data and control the school beacons. The web-based system
shall be viewable on any modern web browser on a mobile
phone and automatically sized for the screen.
(4) The RSBMS shall provide user “permissions” that can be

assigned to each user by an administrator. Permissions should
include at a minimum, a “read-only” level, administrator level,
and the ability to give access to any or all of the following:
Read/Write Locations, Manual ON/OFF locations, override
group scheduling, change/create group scheduling, edit users,
and create/edit groups and locations.
b. Map Display:
(1) The RSBMS shall include a scrollable, zoomable map display,

with the school beacons shown as representative icons on the
map. The map display must have option to select either satellite
view or normal street map view, as well as a street view option.
(2) The alarm status of the school beacon shall be clearly indicated
on the icon on the map, so that the user can see at a glance
which school beacons are in alarm. There should be unique
icons to identify different type of beacon statuses.
(3) The status of all beacons shall include if the beacon is currently
on and if the beacon has a schedule mismatch.
(4) The map display shall also include a list of school beacons,
with the number and priority of alarms indicated on the list.
School beacons in high priority alarm shall be moved to the top
of the list, followed by medium priority, low priority and then
finally by school beacons not in alarm.
(5) The icons shall change to be able to clearly indicate if a school

beacon is offline.
(6) Clicking on the icon on the map shall expose a box with the
current parameters of the school beacon shown.
(7) The default map display position and zoom shall be

configurable by user, so that the user’s view will default to
show the school beacons that the user is responsible for
managing.
16712-11
(8) The map display shall allow for multiple preset zoom layers, so
users can select preset zoom layers to zoom into different areas
of the map.
(9) The map display shall allow operators to turn on and off layers.
Layers shall include the ability to display the device names of
every beacon on the map and include the option to
automatically zoom into any selected device.
(10) The map should display a list of recent communication issues,

sorted by the most recent failure to communicate.
c. Regional School Beacon Grouping:
(1) The RSBMS shall provide for school beacons to be logically

and regionally grouped with no less than two levels of
grouping for convenient managing, sorting and selecting.
(2) The RSBMS user logon shall be configurable in such way that
users can customize their default view and have visible only
the school beacons that belong to the group they are authorized
to view.
(3) Users shall also be able to save the map zoom level for their
individual log in.
(4) Users shall be able to select multiple preset zoom options to

zoom into different areas of the maps.
d. School Beacon Detail Display:
(1) It shall be possible to access detailed device information for the

school beacon from the map icon or the device list including as
a minimum the following parameters:
(a) The alarm status, if any alarm present, with priority

indicated and a text description of the alarm.
(b) The time since the last communication with the device
(c) The following parameters (real time now values,

minimum for the day values, maximum for the day
values, and average for the day values)
I. The AC mains voltage (value)
II. The battery voltage (value)
III. The battery back-up voltage (value)
16712-12
IV. The solar charge voltage (value)
V. The presence of AC power (OK or Fail)
VI. The status of the school beacon (On or off, and

whether under manual or schedule control)
VII. Beacon failure state (One beacon failure or both

beacon failure)
VIII. The cabinet door status (Open or Closed)
IX. Whether the school beacon is in local or remote

manual override control
(d) It shall be possible to view real time graphs of each of

the value parameters in graphical form, over the recent
one-to-two-week period including real time graphs of:
I. The AC mains voltage
II. The battery voltage
III. The battery back-up voltage
IV. The solar charge voltage
V. The beacon failure state (one beacon failure or

both beacon failure or okay
VI. The status of the school beacon state (schedule

on, schedule off, manual on, manual off, local
override on, local override off).
e. School Beacon Individual Remote Override:
(1) From the browser user interface, it shall be possible to

remotely override the state of the beacon and place the beacon
into state “manual on” or “manual off”.
(2) The beacons shall change state within 30 seconds of the

command being issued.
(3) The user interface shall update within 60 seconds to show the
actual state of the beacon, so that the user can readily confirm
that the remote manual override was successfully executed by
the beacon.
16712-13
(4) The graphical display of the beacon state shall be updated to

“manual on” or “manual off”, as applicable, to acknowledge
when the remote manual override command was issued.
(5) The remote manual override command shall be recorded in the

user log.
f. School Beacon Scenario Remote Override:
(1) It shall be possible to create Remote Scenarios in preparation

for unexpected events that typically occur for school beacons.
This includes being able to group school beacons, and then turn
the grouped beacons on or off; or back to schedule using a
single click on the user interface.
(2) Setting up and then using these scenarios shall facilitate to

change the school beacons for weather events, early release and
other short-term changes to the scheduled operation of the
beacons.
g. School Beacon Remote Scheduling:
(1) It shall be possible to create scheduled events for the school

beacons and publish these schedules to the field controller. The
field controller will then store locally in non-volatile memory
and use the schedule to operate the school beacon at the correct
time.
(2) The field controller will update its internal time clock from the
server and/or GPS to ensure that the field controller’s clock
remains accurate to within 1 minute of the actual time.
(3) It shall be possible to schedule the school beacon plans to turn

the beacon on or off by time of day; by day of week and by
month of year.
(4) It shall be possible to include holidays and exception

schedules. These holidays should automatically turn the school
beacon off during holidays. It shall also be possible to create
exception days that switch to a different schedule on that
specific day. Holidays and exception days shall have a calendar
pop out to select the specific date.
(5) It shall be possible to publish the schedule to one beacon or a

group of beacons simultaneously.
16712-14
(6) The schedule shall display in summarized form the time, day(s)
of week and month(s) of the year that the schedule is to operate
in a summary form, so that it is easy to read the list of
schedules.
(7) On the detailed display, the user interface shall display the
date, time, and operation for the next seven scheduled events,
to allow understanding of the planned operation of the schedule
that is currently published to the device.
(8) The next scheduled event information should consider holiday

and exception days as well as schedule delays due to weather
events.
(9) Scheduling shall include the option to delay, advance or cancel

the schedule due to weather events. This schedule delay will
only affect the selected days schedule and the following day
the schedule will revert back to normal. Users shall have the
option to select today, tomorrow or any selected date. User
shall also be able to select to only delay the morning schedule
or the afternoon schedule or both.
(10) Only users with access rights will be able to change beacon
schedules and holiday.
(11) The system must have the ability to determine if there is a

“schedule mismatch”. This means the schedule that is stored in
the central is different to the schedule in the devices. The
system must indicate which devices have a schedule mismatch
and users can see what caused this. Once an operator
downloads the correct schedule these mismatches must clear.
(12) The system shall prohibit the scheduling of

multiple/incompatible calendar programming data to a single
group of flashers.
(13) Scheduling shall also do error checking to determine if the

operator has made any errors while making the schedule. This
includes overlapping holidays and exception days as well as
consecutive on or off commands.
h. Diagnostics and Log Display:
(1) From the device level detail, it shall be possible to obtain the
raw data, error logs, and the communications logs to allow a
technician to fault-find problems on the RSBMS.
(2) It shall be possible to filter the logs by device, by device type

and/or by group as well as date ranges.
16712-15
(3) It shall be possible to print these selected logs to a local printer

or a PDF file.
(4) It shall be possible to export these logs to Excel on the local

computer.
i. Alarms:
(1) The RSBMS shall have a comprehensive alarm generation

capability to view/troubleshoot within the software and to
enable the response personnel to be notified when an abnormal
situation has occurred.
(2) It shall be possible to configure alarms to be generated on any

parameter becoming out of tolerance, including analog values,
digital values and enumerated values.
(3) Alarm capabilities should monitor the following components

with these parameters:
(a) Solar Voltage – Solar voltage levels shall be

continuously monitored and updated regularly on the
RSBMS. Data should be displayed graphically in 15-
minute intervals, illustrating anomalies in the solar
charging cycle and providing valuable information
about the solar power and surrounding solar
environment.
(b) Load Status – continuously monitors load terminals and

issues an alert the RSBMS and selected users via text/e-
mail if the solar regulator disconnects the load voltage
to the system.
(c) Up to 3 LEDs/DC lamps – continuously monitors

LED/lamp terminals and sends an alert if an LED or
DC lamp burns out or vandalized in certain ways.
(d) Battery – battery voltage levels are continuously

monitored and updated regularly in the RSBMS. The
data is displayed graphically in 15-minute intervals,
illustrating the relationship between the solar and
battery voltages. An alert is issued to the RSBMS and
selected users via text/e-mail if the monitored battery
voltage falls below a user-set level. An alert is also
issued in the case of battery theft.
(e) AC Power – continuously monitors for interruptions or

loss in AC power and sends an alert in such
circumstances.
16712-16
(f) AC Lamps – continuously monitors AC lamps and

sends an alert if an AC lamp burns out or is vandalized
in certain ways.
(g) Time Switch – continuously monitors the internal time

switch voltages and issues an alert if the time switch
loses power.
(h) Door – when a door switch is present, continuously

monitors the status of the cabinet door and issues an
alert indicated when the door is open.
(4) Alarms shall be configurable to be of different priority levels

and distinguish each level by color and/or code.
(5) The current active alarms shall be accessible for view via an
expandable window, to see which alarms are active and when
the alarm occurred. The highest priority alarms shall rise to the
top of the list.
j. Alerts:
(1) The RSBMS shall have comprehensive alerting capability to

enable the response personnel to be notified when an abnormal
situation has occurred.
(2) When alerts are received via RSBMS, e-mail, or text, the
specific type of alert should be described along with the time
the alert was detected.
(3) It shall be possible to configure alerts to one or more personnel

for each alarm. This will cause, as selected, a text message
and/or an email to be sent to the person when an alarm occurs.
(4) User recipients of text/e-mail alerts should be able to configure

time periods of the day in which they would or would not like
to receive alerts, such as evenings or periods in which they may
be on call.
(5) The alert shall be configurable to send via email and/or via text
message a message when an alarm clears.
(6) The current active alarms shall be accessible for view to see
which alarms are active and when the alarm occurred.
(7) The RSBMS shall communicate the alerts to the user in near
real time. The text message and email shall be issued within 30
seconds of the occurrence of an event.
16712-17
k. Reports:
(1) It shall be possible to view reports on the screen, in the browser

of the RSBMS, and if desired, download CSV files for
importing into Excel, print the report to a printer or save as a
PDF file.
(2) Alarm Activity Report
(a) The RSBMS shall include a report which shows the

alarms activity for a defined period and specific
location(s).
(b) The Alarm Report shall indicate the time the alarm
occurred, priority/type of the alarm; whether it is still
active; and if not active then the time when the alarm
stopped being active.
(c) It shall be possible to filter the alarms by device type,

by device and/or by device group, and by date time to
be able to access a large alarm list to view the alarm
activity for a school beacon over a pre-defined period.
(3) User Activity Report
(a) The RSBMS shall include a report which shows user

activity for a given period, to enable an audit of a user’s
response to an alarm to be made.
(b) The report shall log access and changes by a user and
show which actions the user initiated.
(4) Response Time for Fault Repair Report
(a) The RSBMS shall include a report which shows the

response time to clear faults, for a given time frame.
(b) This report will allow the user to determine the number
of faults, and the total and average time to clear the
fault.
(c) This report will allow the response times by region to

be compared.
l. Field Device Requirements
16712-18
(1) The Remote School Beacon Management System Field Device

(RSBMS) shall consist of a School Beacon Timer and a
Cellular Modem, either supplied as individual components or
an integrated unit, to operate into existing school beacon
cabinet assemblies:
(2) The Remote School Beacon Management System Field Device

(RSBMSFD) / School Beacon Timer and Cellular Modem shall
include:
(a) A small field controller capable of working in

conjunction with or have integrated a cell modem. All
other inputs and outputs required for the correct
operation of the system.
(b) Local Scheduling via a laptop using an internet

browser.
(c) The same unit should be able to operate with either AC

or DC power.
(d) Monitoring signals such as AC, battery voltage, solar

charge voltage and integrated battery backup voltage.
(e) A local override switch to place the beacon in on, off,

or schedule control.
(f) Monitor the lamp current to determine if both lamps are

working or if only one lamp is working.
(g) Capable of monitoring the door status of the cabinet.
(h) The unit shall include 2 relay outputs so that it can

control 2 flasher controller units.
(i) The RSBMSFD unit shall include an extended

warrantee for the entire time it is connected to the
Remote School Beacon Management System.
(j) The RSBMSFD warrantee shall also include replacing

the cellular modem if the cellular technology changes.
Such as 2G-3G, 4G-5G or future higher levels.
(3) The RSBMS Field Device (RSBMSFD) shall conform to the

(a) The RSBMSFD shall function correctly between -37

degrees C and +74 degrees C.
16712-19
(b) The RSBMSFD shall be designed to assure the field

controller’s clock remains accurate to within 1 minute
of the actual time and be capable of working in
conjunction with or have integrated a cell modem.
(c) The RSBMSFD shall be capable of operating with a

replaceable SIM card.
(d) The configuration of the RSBMSFD shall be

accomplished by accessing the internal web server with
a browser. It shall be possible to configure the
RSBMSFD without any special software.
(e) The RSBMSFD shall utilize field-initiated

communications. This allows for low cost cellular data
plans to be used, with infrequent polling. However,
when an abnormal event occurs and is detected by the
RSBMSFD, then the RSBMSFD will immediately
initiate the transfer of a data packet to the RSBMS to
enable real-time alerting of response personnel to take
place.
(f) The timer switch shall be capable of operating with AC

and DC environments. The relay outputs should be
rated at 15-16A.
(g) In the event that the cell service is interrupted or is not

available, the RSBMSFD shall store any events that
occur in internal memory and forward these events
automatically to the RSBMS when the cell service is
restored. In this way, a complete record of events at the
device can be maintained even if cell service is
interrupted for a period. This backup memory shall
maintain timekeeping and all programming for not less
than 60 days.
(h) The RSBMSFD shall utilize HTTP and HTTPS

protocols, and XML data structures, for
communications with the RSBMS. In this way the data
will be open for future expansion and competition. The
use of secret proprietary protocols is not permitted.
(i) The RSBMSFD shall support Ethernet and cellular

communications.
I. Pole Assembly
16712-20
1. The pedestal pole assembly is required for support of the Solar Powered
School Zone Field Equipment. Refer to Standard Detail 02582-04 for details
of assembly items.
2. Pole shaft shall be one-piece galvanized steel pipe.
3. Screw-in type anchor assembly shall meet the requirements of TxDOT Special
Specification Item 4004, and details shown in Standard Detail 02582-04.
4. Breakaway pole base shall be the type as shown in Standard Detail 02582-04.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION
A. Cabinet Mounting
1. The cabinet shall be arranged for side of pole mounting. Two sets of holes
shall be predrilled to accommodate two Pelco SE 1100, or equal, mounting
brackets. The top set shall accommodate the wire inlet to the cabinet. These
mounting brackets shall be supplied as part of the complete cabinet package.
B. Back Panel
1. The control panel shall be 12 inches high by 14 inches wide and have a 4-inch
lip at the bottom for the purpose of fastening to the upper shelf. The panel will
set up for the charging unit and flashing unit to mount on the panel, also
mounted on the panel will be the time switch.
C. Solar Panel Mounting Hardware
1. The photovoltaic (PV) module mounting assembly shall be constructed of

galvanized steel (ASTM A-153 Class A) or aluminum, of adequate design and
strength to provide a means of securely attaching the PV module frame to a
pole at a permanent angle of 45 to 50 degrees. The pole mounting hardware
shall accommodate a steel 4.5-inch O.D. pole. The bracket at an inscribed
angular position about the pole. Mounting Hardware may mount on the side
of the pole or on the top of the pole as long as the bracket is of adequate
strength to withstand the weight and wind stresses.
D. Physical and Electrical Interface
1. A Physical and Electrical Interface needs to be maintained for the connection

of the controller unit. This interface will need to be a terminal strip on the rear
of the control panel. This terminal strip will be where the harness will hook up
for the controller unit. The terminal Strip will need to be clearly labeled
DC+,DC-, Earth Ground, Relay N/O, Relay Common.
16712-21
2. A Physical and Electrical Interface will have to be maintained between the

solar panel, batteries, and signals; both can be utilized on (1) terminal block to
save space. All labeling shall be silk-screened.
E. Hosting And Connectivity Service – The RSBMS shall include a 10-year connectivity
and support plan. Option to extend the operation for a further 5 years of the
Connectivity and Service agreement of the RSBMS shall be provided. The
Connectivity and Service agreement shall include at a minimum:
1. Cellular Connectivity
2. Upgrade the cellular modem if the technology is not supported by the cellular
networks.
3. Telephone and email support
4. No cellular overage charges
5. Extended warranty on the hardware for the period of the Connectivity and
Service Agreement
6. Over-the-air software updates
7. Over-the-air security updates
8. Future Connected Vehicles Service
3.02 Testing
A. Solar Powered School Zone Beacons Assemblies shall meet or exceed all applicable
Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices and /or Institute Transportation
Engineers standards and these specifications. In addition to testing of pre-shipment
samples, complete testing of school zone beacon assemblies may be required at any
time prior to acceptance ITE specified signal lamp intensity shall be maintained.
16712-22
B. Remote School Beacon Monitoring System – The apparent low bidder shall be
required to supply a complete working system to the agency for testing and
evaluation. This working system shall include a workstation or laptop preloaded with
the remote interface, six-field time switch units (RSBMSFD), and any other
equipment or supplies necessary for the agency to adequately test and evaluate the
system. The bidder shall setup the RSBMSFD at a location identified by the City of
Houston. The bidder will successfully demonstrate the CRC error-checking feature to
the City of Houston personnel by simulating a time switch receiving a normal
message and a corrupted message. The bidder will train City of Houston personnel on
how to program and operate the Remote School Beacon Monitoring System. The test
and evaluation will take up to 60 days at which time the equipment may be picked up
by the bidder or shipped to the bidder freight collect. Upon telephone or written
notification, the bidder must deliver this equipment to the agency within 14 calendar
days. Failure to comply with the above requirement will render the bid non-
responsive.
3.03 Training
A. Training requirements are listed below. The City shall furnish the training classroom
and the Project Manager shall schedule the training sessions.
B. Assembly. One (8) hour training class on field assembly training shall be provided as
requested by the city Project Manager, for the City’s installation contractors and City
of Houston’s, Houston Public Works - Transportation and Drainage personnel. The
instructional training shall be for up to twenty (20) persons at the request of the
Project Manager.
C. Maintenance. One training class consisting of eight (8) hours of Maintenance training
shall be provided for up to twenty (20) persons, as requested by the city Project
Manager.
3.04 Certification
A. Certification. A Vendor Representative shall provide to the City’s Project Manager in

writing that the City’s Installation Contractors have been trained to successfully
assemble, program, and operate the beacon assemblies in accordance with
manufacturer’s specifications and operating manual.
3.05 Documentation
A. Each Solar Powered School Zone Assembly both complete and as parts, shall be
provided with the following documentation:
1. Complete accurate schematic diagrams
2. Complete parts list including names and part numbers for vendors, for parts
not identified by universal numbers.
16712-23
3. Operating and Maintenance Manual including simple programming

instructions and a programming guide.
END OF SECTION
16712-24
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION PRE-FORMED LOOPS
SECTION 16713
PRE-FORMED LOOPS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Materials and installation of Pre-Formed Loops.
1.03 SUBMTTALS
A. Contractor shall submit a list of intended suppliers and products to be used for loop
and lead-in assembly and splice enclosure. City reserves the right to request actual
product samples prior to approval.
A. Unit Prices
1. Measurement: This item will be measured as each loop installed, per size
specified in the drawings and made fully functional and tested in accordance
with this Section or as directed by the Engineer.
2. Payment: Payment for installation of pre-formed loop will be on the basis of

each loop installed.
3. The price is full compensation for furnishing and installing the pre-formed
loops. Cost of associated lead-in assembly and splice enclosure will not be
paid for directly but is to be included in the unit price bid for installation of
each pre-formed loop.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Provide a loop, lead-in cable and splice enclosure that meets the following
requirements.
B. General Requirements.
16713-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. The loop / lead-in assembly shall be suitable for applications in which the
loop / lead-in assembly will be overlaid with hot asphalt or embedded in
concrete.
C. Loop Cable: Provide a loop cable that has the following features:
1. The loop Cable shall be a four-conductor, double-jacketed cable with a

nominal outer diameter of 0.360”.
2. The individual conductors shall be #18 AWG wire (formed from seven
strands of #26 AWG copper wire) with a 0.020” thick layer of cross-linked
polyethylene (XLPE) insulation.
3. The inner jacket shall be 0.040” thick cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE).
4. The void between the conductors and the inner jacket shall be spiral wrapped
with a clear, moisture resistant binder tape and filled with anamorphous water-
block compound.
5. The outer jacket shall be 0.035” thick cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE).
D. Lead-in Cable: Provide a lead-in cable that has the following features:
1. The lead-in cable shall be a two-conductor, double-jacketed cable with a

nominal outer diameter of 0.360”.
2. The individual conductors shall be #16 AWG wire (formed from nineteen
strands of #28 AWG copper wire) with a 0.020” thick layer of cross-linked
polyethylene (XLPE) insulation.
3. The inner jacket shall be 0.040” thick cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE).
4. The void between the conductors and the inner jacket shall be spiral wrapped
with a clear, moisture resistant binder tape and filled with an amorphous
water-block compound.
5. The outer jacket shall be 0.042’ thick cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE).
E. Cross-linked Polyethylene (XLPE) Insulation
1. The cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulation used for wire insulation and
cable jacketing shall be capable of withstanding temperature up to 426°
Fahrenheit.
F. Splices and Enclosure: Splices and enclosure that encapsulates the spliced
connections shall have the following additional features:
16713-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Splices between the individual loop cable conductors and the splices between
the loop cable conductors, and the lead-in cable conductors shall be soldered,
sealed, and waterproofed.
2. The enclosure that encapsulates the spliced connections shall be fabricated

from a high impact glass impregnated plastic with a minimum thickness of
0.240”.
3. The two halves of the splice enclosure shall be sealed with a water resistant
gasket material.
4. The interior cavity of the splice enclosure shall be completely filled with an
amorphous water block compound.
5. The splice enclosure shall be submerged in a saltwater solution for three (3)
days.
6. At the end of this three days period, the electrical integrity of these splices
shall be verified by using a 500 Volt DC MegOhm meter to ensure that the
resistance between either lead-in conductor and the saltwater solution is 200
Mega Ohms or greater.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 LOOP INSTALLATION
A. General.
1. Provide equipment that utilizes the latest available techniques for design and
construction with a minimum number of parts to maximize standardization.
B. Loop Installation – Asphalt Overlay
1. Place the Pre-formed loop in the proper position and orientation on the asphalt
base lift.
2. Route the lead-in cable to the desired termination point.
3. Cut the fiberglass backed mastic tape into 2”x4” or 3’x4” strips. Use the
mastic tape (and optional corner brackets) to hold the loop and lead-in cable in
place.
4. Apply the top lift, make certain that the loop cable does not get pulled into the
augers in the paving machine.
C. Loop Installation – Poured Concrete
16713-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Place the Preformed Loop in the proper position and orientation on top of the
concrete reinforcing steel.
2. Route the lead-in cable to the desired termination point.
3. Cut an appropriate number of ½” poly tees. Cut an equal number of lengths of

3/8” rebar.
4. Use the tees, rebar and nylon cable ties to hold the loop cable in place at least
2” above the concrete reinforcing steel. The lid-in cable can be tied directly to
the concrete reinforcing steel.
5. Poor the concrete making certain not to disturb the loop cable.
END OF SECTION
16713-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION VEHICLE SIGNAL HEADS
SECTION 16715
VEHICLE SIGNAL HEADS (POLYCARBONATE)

(ADJUSTABLE, EXPANDABLE TYPE)
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Polycarbonate Vehicle Signal Heads with mounting attachments and light emitting
diode (LED) lamp indications, louvered back plates, and Geometrically Programmed
Louvers (GPL).
B. Section 16718 - Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Heads – Light Emitting Diode (LED)
Circular Signal Supplement
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for Vehicle Signal Heads will be measured by each vehicle signal
head assembly required with specified mounting hardware. Vehicle Signal
Heads shall consist of one (1) or more sections with visor(s), mounting
hardware, LED indication color(s) specified and louvered back plates. The
Vehicle Signal Head housings, doors and visors shall be Federal Highway
Yellow.
2. Payment for Geometrically Programmed Louver (GPL) and adjustable full-

circle visor will be measured as each unit required.
this item will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Vehicle Signal Head”, of
the various configurations complete with LED indication(s) and mounting
hardware and louvered back plates as specified.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ITE Specification for Traffic Control Signal Heads: LED Circular Signals
B. ITE Specification for Traffic Signal Heads: LED Arrow Signals
C. ITE Specification for Pedestrian Traffic Control Signals: LED Pedestrian Signals
16715-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. The traffic control signal heads shall be in accordance with the latest revision of ITE
Specifications for Traffic Control Signal Heads: LED Circular Signals, Traffic
Control Signal Heads: LED Arrow Signals and Pedestrian Traffic Control Signals:
LED Pedestrian Signals.
B. Each traffic signal face shall consist of one or more signal sections rigidly fastened
together as per manufacturer’s recommendations in such a manner as to present a
continuous pleasing appearance.
C. The electric and optical system of the signal head shall, unless otherwise specified, be
designed for operation from a power supply of 115 volt, single phase, 60 Hz
alternating current and LED displays.
D. Polycarbonate shall be used in fabricating the vehicle signal heads described herein.
Structural requirements for polycarbonate materials are described in Paragraphs. 2.02
and 2.03.
E. All material for the mounting attachments shall be metal.
2.02 HOUSINGS
A. The polycarbonate vehicle signal head housing cases shall be a one-piece

polycarbonate resin material with sides, top, and bottom integrally molded. The
housing shall be injection molded from ultraviolet and heat stabilized flame retardant,
permanently colored polycarbonate resins. The housing shall be a minimum of 0.125
inches (3.18 mm) thick measured anywhere on the housing and shall be internally
ribbed so as to produce the strongest possible assembly consistent with lightweight.
The terminal block shall either be securely mounted or integrally molded into the
housing.
B. Provision shall be made for accommodation of the particular type of mounting

specified and attachment of doors, optical units, and other such accessories as may be
specified for the particular installation. All traffic signal housing cases, together with
doors, lenses, and mounting attachments, shall comprise a dust and moisture proof
housing for the optical units, connecting wiring, and terminal block. The housing
cases shall be of such construction as to assure permanent alignment of the lens in the
traffic signal face. Design of door, housing, and visor shall be such that no light is
visible in the profile view of the traffic signal face.
16715-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Vehicle Signal Head housing cases shall be of the sectional, adjustable, expandable
type. The assembled housings for each signal face shall consist of three or more
individual dual sections, each designed for housing a single complete optical unit.
Individual signal sections shall be rigidly attached to form a single head either with at
least four machine screws between each section or by the bolt-and-washer conduit
method. Complete signal heads shall provide positive locked positioning when used
with serrated brackets, mast arm, or span wire fittings.
D. Portions of cases providing for attachment to supporting arms shall be molded with
large bosses for the supporting arms. Each housing case shall be so attached to its
supporting arm that it will be adjustable by rotation about its vertical axis in such a
manner that any pair of adjacent cases may be adjusted individually to give
indications in two directions as close as 15 degrees apart and may be rigidly clamped
in any position throughout the range of adjustment. Provision shall be made for
carrying the traffic signal leads enclosed in the mounting attachment.
E. Both the top and bottom of each traffic signal housing case shall be provided with an
opening of two inches (50 mm) in diameter to accommodate 1-1/2" (38 mm) pipe
brackets. A locking ring shall be integrally cast or molded around the bottom
opening. Around the top opening shall be either an integrally cast or molded locking
ring or a separate splined locking ring designed to fit into notches. The locking rings
shall have a minimum of 72 evenly spaced teeth and shall be so designed that the top
and bottom rings will mate to provide a perfectly aligned signal head with flush
connection between the outer circumference of the sections.
F. Any open end of an assembled signal housing shall be plugged with an ornamental
cap and gasket of an approved type.
2.03 HOUSING DOOR
A. The housing door of each traffic signal housing shall be a one one-piece
polycarbonate resin material with an approximate 12-inch (300 mm) diameter circular
opening for the lens as specified. The housing door shall be a minimum of 0.125
inches (3.18mm) thick measured anywhere on the housing door. The door shall be
attached to the housing by means of two stainless steel hinge pins.
B. Two stainless steel wing screws shall be installed on the side of the door to provide
for opening and closing the door without the use of special tools. Wing screws shall
have a flat-bearing surface or stainless steel flat washer to prevent gouging of the
housing door by the wing screws. Wing screws shall remain captive in the housing
door when the door is open.
2.04 VISORS
16715-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Each traffic signal housing door shall be equipped with an easily detachable standard
tunnel visor (unless requested otherwise). The visor shall be a polycarbonate resin to
match the housing and door. The visor shall be rigidly attached to the door with rust-
resistant connections in a manner that will prevent the leakage of light and moisture
throughout the periphery of attachment.
B. Unless requested otherwise, the visor on the front of each door shall:
1. Be circular in section
2. Have a downward tilt of 2 to 8 degrees
3. Encompass approximately 300 degrees of the lens
4. Extend outward from the face of the lens a minimum of 9-1/2" (240 mm) for
12inch (300 mm) diameter lens, (measured at its outer visible circumference)
5. Be of such design that the encircled portion of the lens will not be visible in
the profile view of the traffic signal face
6. Be open at the bottom so as to prevent the accumulation of snow, dirt, and

rain.
C. Visors shall be easily removed and replaced without damage to visor or signal head.
D. The four (4) tabs used to mount the visor to the signal shall be slotted. It shall not be
necessary to completely remove the mounting screws to remove or replace the visor.
2.05 OPTICAL SYSTEM
A. The Vehicular Light Emitting Diode (LED) Indications to be furnished with the
Vehicle Signal Head shall meet the requirements of Specification Section 16718 -
Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Heads – Light Emitting Diode (LED) Circular Signal
Supplement.
2.06 TERMINAL BLOCKS AND ELECTRICAL
A. Terminal blocks shall be either two or seven position and be double row, with each
section consisting of two 8-32 x 5/16-in. binding screws and a conducting metal strip
between the screws.
B. The terminal blocks shall be a one-piece molded construction using phenolic

materials, rated for a minimum 20 amps, 250 volt service
16715-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Each LED module shall be wired to a two position terminal block located in that
signal section. A seven position terminal block shall be furnished in the outermost
signal section of any 3 or more section vehicle signal head assembly. All sections of
the vehicle signal head assembly shall be wired to the seven position terminal block.
All terminal blocks shall be securely mounted in an accessible position and shall be of
weatherproof-molded construction, equipped with identified terminals. Binding
screws shall be provided for the field and interior wires.
D. Maintain throughout the vehicle signal head the color coding for wires from the LED
Module to the main terminal block as shown below:
Indication Color Code

Red Ball / Arrow Red
Yellow Ball Yellow
Green Ball Green
Yellow Arrow Yellow with Blue or White Tracer Green
Arrow Green with Blue or White Tracer Neutral White
2.07 MOUNTING ATTACHMENTS
A. All mounting attachments shall be aluminum. Provision shall be made for carrying
the signal leads enclosed in the mounting attachment. The mounting attachment,
together with supporting arms and assembled housings, shall comprise a dust-and-
moisture-proof enclosure for optical units and lead wiring. Mounting attachments
shall be of one of the following types as specified for the particular vehicle signal
head required.
1. Span-Wire Mounting. The span-wire mounting attachment shall consist of a

cable clamp to receive a suspension cable of 3/8" (10 mm) diameter together
with a suitable connection to the signal head. The mounting shall provide a
"balance adjuster" between the signal head and span wire capable of
permitting freedom of movement with reference to the point of suspension.
The signal head shall be adjustable by rotation about its vertical axis in a
horizontal plane and the mounting attachment shall be so constructed that the
head may be firmly clamped in any position throughout the range of
adjustment. The mounting shall provide a suitable outlet for wiring from the
signal head tilted downward and so constructed as to effectively seal the
interior of the head from dust and moisture and prevent undue abrasion of
signal wiring. Mountings for signal head units not balanced at the point of
support shall be provided with a suitable compensating device to insure that
the signal head will assume a normally vertical position. The mast-arm vehicle
signal head mounting hardware shall be Astro-Brac Atlas Large Capacity
Cable Mount assembly, or approved equal.
2. Mast-Arm Mounting. The mast-arm vehicle signal head mounting hardware

shall be Astro-Brac Atlas Large Capacity Tenon Mount assembly, or
approved equal.
16715-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
3. Side-of-Pole Mounting. Supports for side-of-pole mounting of the signal head

in a vertical position shall be 1-1/2" standard pipe bracket arms, attached to
the top and bottom of the signal head with pipe nipples, serrated elbows and
collared / cast nipples and band-on pole plates. Pole plates shall be provided
with a cable guide. The mounting assembly shall consist of two standard pipe
sections extending 12- 3/4" from and at right angles to the axis of rotational
adjustment of the signal head. Both supports shall have running threads at
least 1-1/4" long at the pole connection end. The signal head shall be
adjustable, by rotation of the various signal faces about their vertical axis,
throughout a radial angle of 360 degrees and shall be capable of being rigidly
clamped in any position through the range of adjustment. The wiring from the
signal head shall be able to be enclosed in the top or bottom support.
2.08 LOUVERED VEHICLE SIGNAL HEAD BACK PLATE
A. The back plate shall be attached to all new vehicle signals. Back plate shall be
continuously louvered around its perimeter.
B. Back plates shall be vacuum formed ABS plastic or aluminum.
C. Vacuum formed ABS plastic back plates shall contain ultraviolet inhibitors and
stabilizers for protection against UV degradation
D. The back plate shall extend around the periphery of the signal face a distance of five
(5) inches for faces with twelve (12) inch lenses, and shall have a 3” corner radius.
E. ABS vacuum formed back plates shall be black and color consistent throughout the
entire piece without varying shades and tones.
F. The louvers shall be evenly spaced around the back plate, including the top and
bottom. The number of louvers adjacent to the vehicle signal head shall be nine (9)
per signal section per side. Both the top and bottom back plate sections shall have
nine (9) louvers each. The louvers shall be at least 3-1/2” long by 5/8” wide with an
opening of at least ¼”. The back plate shall be pre-drilled to fit the vehicle signal
head for which it is designed.
G. ABS vacuum formed back plates shall have a minimum thickness of .125”. All
outside edges shall be formed with a ½” to 5/8” flange (inside dimension) turned
away from the front surface. The back plate shall have a haircell finish on the front
side and smooth finish on the back side.
H. Aluminum back plates shall be fabricated from anodized sheet aluminum and be
painted dull black.
I. Stainless steel hardware for attaching the back plate to the vehicle signal head shall be
provided.
2.09 GEOMETRICALLY PROGRAMMED LOUVER (GPL)
16715-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. The louver shall have the following capabilities:
1. Fit all manufacturers’ 12” vehicle signal heads.
2. Retrofit into existing 12” vehicle signal heads.
3. Provide a full round ball display, with minimum slat effect, throughout the
selected view range.
4. Provide an absolute exact visual cut-off.
5. Allow the view angle within each signal section to be adjusted to a designated
area.
6. Have minimum glow outside the view range.
7. Allow for controlling either the horizontal or vertical view range within the
signal visor.
B. The louver housing shall consist of a two-piece assembly injection molded from black
UV inhibited ABS plastic. Two (2) brass inserts shall be molded into the bottom half
allowing the assembly to be fastened together with two (2) stainless steel screws.
C. The louver housing O.D. shall be 11-1/2” and have spherical contour which allows
the light beam from the signal section to be directed up to 10-degrees in all directions
from the centerline of the visor/lens system.
D. The inside surface shall have a multiplicity of grooves for positioning light directing
baffles. The remaining inside surface shall be grooved to prevent surface reflections
of light.
E. Two (2) sponge neoprene O-rings shall be positioned in grooves on the outside
surface to prevent light leakage between the housing and the visor.
F. The louver housing design shall allow the baffle positions to be changed in order to
adjust the view angle.
G. The baffles shall be molded from flat black, 10% glass filled UV inhibited virgin
polycarbonate.
H. Each baffle shall be thin opaque disc with a multiple of parallel evenly spaced
apertures (openings). Each structural member forming the aperture shall have a cross
section which allows for good stiffness and structural integrity, but shall have a thin
edge to prevent reflection (glow) outside the desired viewing range.
I. All baffles shall be identical in design and interchangeable within the housing. The
plane of each baffle shall be 90-degrees to the centerline axis of the housing.
16715-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
J. The louver shall be supplied with the necessary self-threading screw hardware to
attach the louver to the vehicle signal head visor.
K. The louver shall include an installation kit that includes installation instructions,
adjustment tool, visor marking template, and all incidentals necessary for attachment
and positioning of the louver.
END OF SECTION
16715-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL HEADS
SECTION 16716
PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL HEADS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Pedestrian Signal Heads with mounting attachments, and countdown pedestrian signal
module with light emitting diode (LED) lamp indications.
B. Section 16719 – Countdown Pedestrian Signal Module
A. Unit Prices.
B. Pedestrian Signal Heads will be measured by each pedestrian signal head assembly
required with specified mounting hardware. Pedestrian Signal Heads shall consist of
each pedestrian signal housing assembly with mounting hardware, and countdown
pedestrian signal module with LED indications. The Pedestrian Signal Head housing
shall be Federal Highway Yellow.
C. Payment for the work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this item
will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Pedestrian Signal Head Including
Countdown Module”. This price shall be full compensation for furnishing,
assembling, and installing the pedestrian signal head and countdown pedestrian signal
module complete with LED indications; and for all mounting hardware, labor, tools,
equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete the Work as specified.
D. Refer to Section 01270 – Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ITE - Adjustable Face Pedestrian Head Standard
B. TxDOT - Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (TMUTCD)
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
16716-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Manufacturers/suppliers furnishing these items shall be experienced in design and

construction of such items and shall furnish evidence of having supplied similar
items, which have been in successful operation for not less than three (3) years.
B. The lamp units shall be a single, self-contained device, not requiring on-site assembly
for installation into an existing traffic signal housing. If proper orientation of the lamp
units is required for optimum performance, prominent and permanent directional
markings, i.e., UP ARROW or the word UP or TOP, for correct indexing shall be
clearly marked on each unit as to configuration and mounting orientation.
2.02 GRID TYPE PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL – LED
It is the intent of this specification to describe minimum acceptable design and

operating requirements for an LED illuminated grid type pedestrian signal.
A. General Design Requirements
1. Design, material and construction of LED pedestrian signal heads shall be in

accordance with requirements set forth in "Adjustable Face Pedestrian Head
Standard", of the Institute of Transportation Engineers and the "Texas Manual
on Uniform Traffic Control Devices", latest revision.
2. The general construction shall include a single-piece cast aluminum housing,

a solid state LED indication, message lens, a single-piece cast aluminum
swing down door frame, a blank out Z-crate type sun visor, and appropriate
other hardware. The design shall optimize performance per unit of energy
consumed.
3. Optically, the pedestrian signal shall be capable of displaying brightly and

uniformly, while being subject to strong ambient light conditions, the alternate
symbol messages "HAND" and countdown numbers in Portland orange, and
"WALKING PERSON" in lunar white. Under the same strong ambient light
conditions, the messages shall blank out when signal is not energized.
4. The maximum overall dimensions of the signal housing shall be 19 inches

wide, 18- 3/4 inches high, and 9-1/2 inches deep including the Z-crate type
sun visor and hinges.
B. Mechanical Construction
1. The housing shall be one-piece, corrosion-resistant, die-cast aluminum alloy.
2. The housing shall be designed in such a way that all components and wiring
are readily accessible by means of a hinged door and legend cover plate of the
full size of housing face.
3. Gasketing material suitable to maintain weather, dust-tight seal about door

and cover plates shall be used.
16716-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
4. The door frame shall be a one-piece, corrosion-resistant aluminum alloy die

casting, complete with two-hinged lugs at the bottom and two-latch slots cast
at the top of each door. Hinge pins shall be corrosion-resistant material. Two
stainless steel wing nuts and washers shall be attached to the top of the cast
with the use of stainless steel spring pins. Latching or unlatching of the door
shall require no tools.
C. Z-Crate Visor
1. The face of the signal shall be furnished with suitable Z-crate visor baffle
designed to prevent false indications, due to sunlight or other reflections,
without the use of hoods.
2. The visor baffle shall have a high-grade, flat black finish.
D. Optical System-LED Pedestrian Signals
1. The LED indications to be furnished with the Pedestrian Signal Heads shall
meet the requirements of Specification Section 16719 - Countdown Pedestrian
Signal Module.
E. Wiring
1. All wiring shall be Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) approved for voltages

involved. Terminals for field wiring shall be suitable for #14 AWG wire.
2. Barrier type terminal block, minimum twelve (12) terminal plates with two (2)
binding screws each, shall be mounted in each housing.
F. Mounting Attachments
1. Side-of-Pole Mounting: Supports for side-of-pole mounting of the signal head

in a vertical position shall be 1-1/2" standard pipe bracket arms, attached to
the top and bottom of the signal head with pipe nipples, serrated elbows and
collared / cast nipples and band-on pole plates. Pole plates shall be provided
with a cable guide. The mounting assembly shall consist of two standard pipe
sections extending 12-3/4" from and at right angles to the axis of rotational
adjustment of the signal head. Both supports shall have running threads at
least 1-1/4" long at the pole connection end. The signal head shall be
adjustable, by rotation of the various signal faces about their vertical axis,
throughout a radial angle of 360 degrees and shall be capable of being rigidly
clamped in any position through the range of adjustment. The wiring from the
signal head shall be able to be enclosed in the top or bottom support.
G. Painting
1. Pedestrian signal housing and mounting attachments shall be available in two

finishes. If no color is indicated, a yellow coating, as specified below, shall be
furnished.
16716-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Federal Highway Yellow Finish: Signal housing and mounting attachments

shall be primed and electrostatically finished with a yellow coating, except for
baffle with paint finish. Finish shall be cured for minimum of twenty (20)
minutes at 350 degrees F.
3. Flat Black Finish: Signal housing and mounting attachments shall be primed
and finished with a flat black paint finish. Finish shall be cured for a minimum
of twenty (20) minutes at 350 degrees F.
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
16716-4
CITY OF HOUSTON VEHICLE TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNAL HEADS
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION LED CIRCULAR SIGNAL SUPPLEMENT
SECTION 16718
VEHICLE TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNAL HEADS –

Light Emitting Diode (LED) Circular Signal Supplement
PART 1 GENERAL
A. The purpose of this specification is to provide the minimum performance

requirements for a 300 mm (12 in) Light Emitting Diode (LED) vehicle traffic signal
module while in service. This specification is not intended to impose restrictions upon
specific designs and materials that conform to the purpose and the intent of this
specification. This specification is not restricted to any specific LED technology.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Catastrophic Failure: The total loss of visible illumination from an LED Light source.
B. Chromaticity: The color of the light emitted by a module, specified by the x, y

chromaticity coordinates on the 1931 Commission Internationale d’Eclairage (CIE)
chromaticity diagram.
C. Conditioning: Energizing a LED Signal Module at a specified ambient temperature

for a specified period of time, to cause any early electronic component mortality
failures to occur and to detect any component reliability problems.
D. Duty Cycle: The amount of time during a specified time period that a module is
energized, expressed as a percent of the specified time period.
E. Hard Coat: A surface coating or film to provide front surface abrasion resistance.
F. LED Light Source: A single light emitting diode (LED) or an array of LEDs.
G. LED Signal Module (module): A signaling unit comprised of an array of LEDs and
related power supply, and any required lenses, which, when connected to appropriate
power, provides a circular signal indication.
H. Luminance: The luminous flux emitted or reflected from a surface, in a given

direction, per unit solid angle, divided by the area of the surface, expressed as cd/m2.
I. Luminous Intensity: The luminous flux emitted in a given direction from a source, per
unit solid angle, expressed in candelas (cd).
J. Minimum Maintained Luminous Intensity: The minimum Luminous Intensity a

module is required to provide throughout service as a traffic control signal.
16718-1
K. Nominal Operating Voltage: The AC RMS voltage, 120 VAC, at which photometric
performance and Power Consumption are specified.
L. Power Consumption: The electrical power in Watts consumed by a module when

operated at Nominal Operating Voltage and ambient operating temperature range.
M. Power Factor: The Power Factor equals Watts divided by Volt-Ampere or the ratio of
Power Consumption in Watts to Volt-Amperes.
N. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): THD is the ratio of the root-mean-square (RMS)
value of the harmonics to the amplitude of the fundamental component of the AC
waveform.
O. Translate: To move an object along a linear vector, such that the orientation of the
object does not rotate relative to the original frame of reference.
P. Turn OFF Time: The amount of time required after removal of the Nominal
Operating Voltage for the LED Signal Module to show no visible illumination.
Q. Turn OFF Voltage: The voltage below which the LED Signal Module emits no
visible illumination.
R. Turn ON Time: The amount of time required for the LED Signal Module to reach
90% of full illumination.
S. Volt-Amperes: The product of the root-mean-square (RMS) line voltage and RMS
line current, measured with true RMS meters.
T. Diffused: Lens must be designed to diffuse the light form the LED array over the
surface of the lens.
A. All exposed components of a module shall be suitable for prolonged exposure to the
environment, without appreciable degradation that would interfere with function or
appearance. As a minimum, selected materials shall be rated for service for a period
of a minimum of 72 months.
B. A module shall be rated for use throughout an ambient operating temperature range,
measured at the exposed rear of the module, of -40°C (-40°F) to +74°C (+165°F).
C. A module shall be protected against dust and moisture intrusion, including rain and
blowing rain.
D. The module lens shall not crack, craze or yellow due to solar UV irradiation after a
minimum of 72 months in service.
1.04 REFERENCES
16718-2
A. Federal Communication Commission (FCC) Title 47, Subpart B, Section 15
B. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code
C. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J576 – Plastic Materials for Use in Optical
Parts
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. LED SIGNAL MODULE
1. A module shall be capable of replacing the existing optical components or

signal module in a signal housing, or shall provide a complete replacement of
the signal head.
2. The module lens shall be Hard Coated or otherwise made to comply with the
material exposure and weathering effects requirements of the Society of
Automotive Engineers (SAE) J576.
3. The module lens supplied shall be covered by transparent film or materials

with similar color and transmissive characteristics.
4. The module lens may be a replaceable part, without the need to replace the
complete LED Signal Module. Removal of lens will be with simple hand tools
and such that no inclusion of additional adhesive, sealants, etc., will be
required to provide replacement of lens.
5. Materials used for the lens and module construction shall conform to ASTM
specifications for the materials, where applicable.
6. Lens must diffuse the LED array over the entire surface of the lens.
7. LED Modules used for arrows must meet same photometric and Chromaticity
requirements as circular modules. (optional)
8. Enclosures containing either the power supply or electronic components of the

signal module shall be made of UL94 flame retardant materials. The module
lens is excluded from this requirement.
2.02 MODULE IDENTIFICATION
A. Each module shall be identified on the backside with the manufacturer’s name,
model, operating characteristics and serial number. The operating characteristics
identified shall include the Nominal Operating Voltage and stabilized Power
Consumption, in watts and Volt-Amperes.
16718-3
B. Modules and removable lenses shall have a prominent and permanent vertical
indexing indicator, i.e., UP Arrow, or the word UP or TOP, for correct indexing and
orientation in the signal housing.
C. Modules conforming to all non-optional requirements of this specification may have

the following statement on an attached label: “Manufactured in Conformance with the
COH LED Circular Signal Supplement.”
2.03 PHOTOMETRIC REQUIREMENTS
A. Luminous Intensity, Uniformity & Distribution.
1. Minimum Maintained Luminous Intensity: When operated under the

conditions defined in Sections 1.03.B and 2.04.B.1, the Luminous Intensity
values for modules shall not be less than the values calculated using the
method described below for a minimum period of 72 months.
2. Calculate the vertical intensity factor (f(IVert)) for the range from 12.5 degrees
up (+12.5) to 27.5 degrees down (-27.5), using the appropriate equation:
For θVert > -2.5 degrees:
For θVert :S -2.5 degrees:
where: θVert is the angle measured above or below a horizontal plane

perpendicular to the face of the module lens. (Note: angles above the
horizontal plane are positive, while angles below the horizontal plane are
negative.)
3. Calculate the horizontal intensity factor (f(IHoriz)) for the range from 27.5
degrees left to 27.5 degrees right:
where: θHoriz is the angle measured from a vertical plane to the left or right,
16718-4
perpendicular to the face of the module lens.
4. Select the appropriate peak Minimum Maintained Luminous Intensity value

for the specified module size and color:
Peak Minimum Maintained Luminous Intensity values, at θVert = –2.5 deg and
θHoriz = 0 deg [I(-2.5,0)], by size and color of the module are:
I
Color (-2.5, 0)
200m 300m
Red 165 cd 365cd
Yellow 410 cd 910 cd
Green 215 cd 475 cd
5. Multiply the vertical intensity factor times the horizontal intensity factor (for
the selected pair of angles). Round the result to two significant figures, and
multiply the combined angular intensity factor times the peak Minimum
Maintained Luminous Intensity value for the appropriate signal size and color:
I(θvert, θhoriz, size, color) = [f(IVert)*f(IHoriz)]*I(-2.5,0)
The resultant value of the Luminous Intensity shall be rounded to the nearest
whole number.
Example: What is the Minimum Maintained Luminous Intensity value for a

green, 300 mm LED signal light at 5 degrees down and 10 degrees left?
I(-5, 10, 300, Green) = [f(IVert=-5)*f(IHoriz=10)]*475 cd

I(-5, 10, 300, Green) = [0.953*0.678]*475 cd
I(-5, 10, 300, Green) = 0.65*475 = 309 cd
16718-5
6. Table 1 located at end of spec., provides the Minimum Maintained Luminous

Intensity values, over the required angular range, at 5-degree increments. Note
that the horizontal limitations vary for various vertical angles (e.g.: at θVert =
+12.5 degrees, requirements are only specified from 7.5 degrees right to 7.5
degrees left, while at θVert = -12.5 degrees, the horizontal limitations are from
27.5 degrees right to 27.5 degrees left). Table 2 located at end of specification,
provides the Minimum Maintained Luminous Intensity values, over the
required angular range, at 2.5-degree increments. Tables 1 and 2 are provided
to illustrate the minimum required values at certain specific angles within the
required angular range of performance (i.e. while testing for light output
compliance of a module in a laboratory, an agency may use Table 1, and/or
other specific pairs of vertical and horizontal angles of its choosing within the
required angular range.) One must use the procedure outlined above for
determining the Minimum Maintained Luminous Intensity values at any
specific pairs of vertical and horizontal angles within the required angular
range.
7. Maximum permissible Luminous Intensity: When operated within the

temperature range specified in Section 1.03.B, the actual Luminous Intensity
for a module shall not exceed three times the required peak value of the
Minimum Maintained Luminous Intensity for the selected signal size, and
color.
8. Luminance uniformity: The uniformity of the signal output across the entire
module lens shall not exceed a ratio of 10 to 1 between the maximum and
minimum Luminance values (cd/m2).
B. Chromaticity
1. Color regions: The measured Chromaticity coordinates of modules shall

conform to the following color regions, based on the 1931 CIE Chromaticity
diagram (see Figure 1):
Red: y = 0.308; y = 0.953 – 0.947x; y = 0.290:
Red
Point
X Y
1 0.692 0.308
2 0.681 0.308
3 0.700 0.290
4 0.710 0.290
16718-6
Yellow: y = 0.151 + 0.556x; y = 0.972 – 0.976x; y = 0.235 + 0.300x:
Yellow
Point
X Y
1 0.545 0.454
2 0.536 0.449
3 0.578 0.408
4 0.588 0.411
Green: y = 0.655 - 0.831xx = 0.150; y = 0.422 - 0.278x:
Green
Point
X Y
1 0.005 0.651
2 0.150 0.531
3 0.150 0.380
4 0.022 0.416
2. Color uniformity: The dominant wavelength for any individual color

measurement of a portion of the emitting surface of a module shall be within
±3nm of the dominant wavelength for the average color measurement of the
emitting surface as a whole.
2.04 ELECTRIC
A. All wiring and terminal blocks shall meet the requirements. Two secured, color
coded, 600V, jacketed wires, a minimum of 20 AWG and at least 1 meter (39 in) in
length, conforming to the NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, and rated for service at
+105°C, shall be provided.
B. Voltage Range
1. LED Signal Modules shall operate from a 60±3 Hz AC line power over a
voltage range from 80 to 135 VAC RMS.
2. Fluctuations in line voltage over the range of 80 to 135 VAC shall not affect
Luminous Intensity by more than ±10 percent.
3. The module circuitry shall prevent flicker of the LED output at frequencies
less than 100 Hz over the voltage range specified in Section 2.04B.1.
4. Low Voltage Turn OFF: There shall be no visible illumination from the LED
Signal Module when the applied voltage is less than 35 VAC.
5. Turn-ON and Turn-OFF Time: A module shall reach 90% of full illumination
(turn-ON) within 75 msec of the application of the Nominal Operating
Voltage. The signal shall cease emitting visible illumination (turn-OFF)
within 75 msec of the removal of the Nominal Operating Voltage.
16718-7
C. Transient Voltage Protection
1. The on-board circuitry of a module shall include voltage surge protection, to

withstand high-repetition noise transients and low-repetition high-energy
transients.
D. Input Protection (optional)
1. At the point of entry to the module for each input provide two 0.5-Ohm, 10-
watt wire- wound power resistors with 0.2 micro Henries inductance (one on
the AC+ Line & on the AC- Line). Provide one 20 Joule surge arrestor
between AC+ to AC-. A 0.68 microfarad capacitor must be placed between
AC+ & AC – (between the resistor & arrestor).
E. Electronic Noise
1. The LED signal and associated on-board circuitry shall meet the requirements
of the Federal Communication Commission (FCC) Title 47, Subpart B,
Section 15 regulations concerning the emission of electronic noise by Class A
digital devices.
F. Power Factor and AC Harmonies
1. Modules shall provide a Power Factor of 0.90 or greater when operated at

Nominal Operating Voltage, and 25ºC (77ºF).
2. Total Harmonic Distortion induced into an AC power line by a module at

Nominal Operating Voltage, and at 25ºC (77ºF), shall not exceed 20%.
G. Controller Assembly Compatibility
1. The current draw shall be sufficient to ensure compatibility and proper

triggering and operation of load current switches and conflict monitors in
signal controller units.
2. Off State Voltage Decay: When the module is switched from the On state to
the Off state the terminal voltage shall decay to a value less than 10 VAC
RMS in less than 100 milliseconds when driven by a maximum allowed load
switch leakage current of 10 milliamps peak (7.1 milliamps AC).
H. Failed State Impedance
1. The module shall be designed to detect catastrophic loss of the LED load.
Upon sensing the loss of the LED load, the module shall present a resistance
of at least 250 kn across the input power leads within 300 msec. The LED
Light source will be said to have failed catastrophically if it fails to show any
visible illumination when energized according to Section 2.04B.1 after 75
msec.
16718-8
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PHYSICAL & MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. General
1. Modules shall fit into existing traffic signal housings built to the VTCSH
Standard without modification to the housing, or shall be stand-alone units
that incorporate a housing meeting the performance and design requirements
of the VTCSH Standard.
2. Installation of a module into an existing signal housing shall not require the
use of special tools. The module shall connect directly to existing electrical
wiring system.
3.02 CONSTRUCTION
A. A module shall be a self-contained device, not requiring on-site assembly for

installation into an existing traffic signal housing. The power supply for the module
may be either integral or packaged as a separate component. The power supply may
be designed to fit and mount inside the traffic signal housing adjacent to the LED
Signal Module.
B. Assembly and manufacturing processes for a module shall be designed to assure all
internal LED and electronic components are adequately supported to withstand
mechanical shock and vibration due to high winds and other sources.
Table 1
Table 1 provides the Minimum Maintained Luminous Intensity values for the Section
16718 COH SPEC. LED Circular Signal, for the range from 12.5 degrees above to
22.5 degrees below the horizontal plane, and from 27.5 degrees left to 27.5 degrees
right of the vertical plane, at 5 degree increments.
Minimum Maintained Luminous Intensity Values—Section 16718 COH SPEC LED

Circular Signal
Luminous Intensity (candela)

Vertical Horizontal
200m (8-inch) 300 mm (12-inch)
Angle Angle
Red Yellow Green Red Yellow Green
2.5 17 41 22 37 91 48
+12.5
7.5 13 33 17 29 73 38
2.5 31 78 41 69 173 90
+7.5 7.5 25 62 32 55 137 71
12.5 18 45 24 40 100 52
2.5 68 168 88 150 373 195
+2.5
7.5 56 139 73 124 309 162
16718-9

Vertical Horizontal
200m (8-inch) 300 mm (12-inch)
Angle Angle
12.5 38 94 49 84 209 109
17.5 21 53 28 47 118 62
22.5 12 29 15 26 64 33
2.5 162 402 211 358 892 466
7.5 132 328 172 292 728 380
12.5 91 226 118 201 501 261
-2.5
17.5 53 131 69 117 291 152
22.5 28 70 37 62 155 81
27.5 15 37 19 33 82 43
2.5 127 316 166 281 701 366
7.5 106 262 138 234 582 304
12.5 71 176 92 157 391 204
-7.5
17.5 41 103 54 91 228 119
22.5 21 53 28 47 118 62
27.5 12 29 15 26 64 33
2.5 50 123 65 110 273 143
7.5 40 98 52 88 218 114
12.5 28 70 37 62 155 81
-12.5
17.5 17 41 22 37 91 48
22.5 8 21 11 18 46 24
27.5 5 12 6 11 27 14
2.5 23 57 30 51 127 67
7.5 18 45 24 40 100 52
-17.5
12.5 13 33 17 29 73 38
17.5 7 16 9 15 36 19
22.5 3 8 4 7 18 10
2.5 17 41 22 37 91 48
7.5 13 33 17 29 73 38
-22.5
12.5 10 25 13 22 55 29
17.5 5 12 6 11 27 14
2.5 12 29 15 26 64 33
-27.5
7.5 8 21 11 18 46 24
Note 1: Luminous Intensity values for equivalent left and right horizontal angles are
the same. Note 2: Tabulated values of Luminous Intensity are rounded to the nearest
whole value.
Table 2
Table 2 provides the Minimum Maintained Luminous Intensity values for the Section
16718 COH SPEC LED Circular Signal, for the range from 12.5 degrees above to
22.5 degrees below the horizontal plane, and from 27.5 degrees left to 27.5 degrees
right of the vertical plane, at 2.5 degree increments.
16718-10
Minimum Maintained Luminous Intensity Values—Section 16718 COH SPEC LED

Circular Signal

Vertical Horizontal
200m (8-inch) 300 mm (12-inch)
Angle Angle
0.0 18 45 24 40 100 52
2.5 17 41 22 37 91 48
+12.5
5.0 17 41 22 37 91 48
7.5 13 33 17 29 73 38
0.0 23 57 30 51 127 67
2.5 23 57 30 51 127 67
+10.0
5.0 21 53 28 47 118 62
7.5 18 45 24 40 100 52
0.0 31 78 41 69 173 90
2.5 31 78 41 69 173 90
5.0 28 70 37 62 155 81
+7.5
7.5 25 62 32 55 137 71
10.0 21 53 28 47 118 62
12.5 18 45 24 40 100 52
0.0 46 115 60 102 255 133
2.5 45 111 58 99 246 128
5.0 41 103 54 91 228 119
+5.0
7.5 36 90 47 80 200 105
10.0 31 78 41 69 173 90
12.5 25 62 32 55 137 71
0.0 69 172 90 153 382 200
2.5 68 168 88 150 373 195
5.0 63 156 82 139 346 181
7.5 56 139 73 124 309 162
10.0 46 115 60 102 255 133
+2.5
12.5 38 94 49 84 209 109
15.0 30 74 39 66 164 86
17.5 21 53 28 47 118 62
20.0 17 41 22 37 91 48
22.5 12 29 15 26 64 33
0.0 106 262 138 234 582 304
2.5 102 254 133 226 564 295
5.0 96 238 125 212 528 276
7.5 84 209 110 186 464 242
10.0 71 176 92 157 391 204
0.0
12.5 58 144 75 128 319 166
15.0 45 111 58 99 246 128
17.5 33 82 43 73 182 95
20.0 25 62 32 55 137 71
22.5 18 45 24 40 100 52
16718-11

Vertical Horizontal
200m (8-inch) 300 mm (12-inch)
Angle Angle
0.0 165 410 215 365 910 475
2.5 162 402 211 358 892 466
5.0 150 373 196 332 828 432
7.5 132 328 172 292 728 380
10.0 112 279 146 248 619 323
12.5 91 226 118 201 501 261
-2.5
15.0 71 176 92 157 391 204
17.5 53 131 69 117 291 152
20.0 38 94 49 84 209 109
22.5 28 70 37 62 155 81
25.0 20 49 26 44 109 57
27.5 15 37 19 33 82 43
0.0 157 390 204 347 865 451
2.5 153 381 200 339 846 442
5.0 142 353 185 314 783 409
7.5 125 312 163 277 692 361
10.0 107 267 140 237 592 309
12.5 86 213 112 190 473 247
-5.0
15.0 66 164 86 146 364 190
17.5 50 123 65 110 273 143
20.0 36 90 47 80 200 105
22.5 26 66 34 58 146 76
25.0 20 49 26 44 109 57
27.5 15 37 19 33 82 43
0.0 130 324 170 288 719 375
2.5 127 316 166 281 701 366
5.0 119 295 155 263 655 342
7.5 106 262 138 234 582 304
10.0 89 221 116 197 491 257
12.5 71 176 92 157 391 204
-7.5
15.0 56 139 73 124 309 162
17.5 41 103 54 91 228 119
20.0 30 74 39 66 164 86
22.5 21 53 28 47 118 62
25.0 17 41 22 37 91 48
27.5 12 29 15 26 64 33
0.0 89 221 116 197 491 257
2.5 86 213 112 190 473 247
5.0 81 201 105 179 446 233
-10.0
7.5 71 176 92 157 391 204
10.0 59 148 77 131 328 171
12.5 48 119 62 106 264 138
16718-12

Vertical Horizontal
200m (8-inch) 300 mm (12-inch)
Angle Angle
15.0 38 94 49 84 209 109
17.5 28 70 37 62 155 81
20.0 20 49 26 44 109 57
22.5 15 37 19 33 82 43
25.0 12 29 15 26 64 33
27.5 8 21 11 18 46 24
0.0 50 123 65 110 273 143
2.5 50 123 65 110 273 143
5.0 46 115 60 102 255 133
7.5 40 98 52 88 218 114
10.0 35 86 45 77 191 100
12.5 28 70 37 62 155 81
-12.5
15.0 21 53 28 47 118 62
17.5 17 41 22 37 91 48
20.0 12 29 15 26 64 33
22.5 8 21 11 18 46 24
25.0 7 16 9 15 36 19
27.5 5 12 6 11 27 14
0.0 30 74 39 66 164 86
2.5 30 74 39 66 164 86
5.0 28 70 37 62 155 81
7.5 25 62 32 55 137 71
10.0 20 49 26 44 109 57
-15.0
12.5 17 41 22 37 91 48
15.0 13 33 17 29 73 38
17.5 10 25 13 22 55 29
20.0 7 16 9 15 36 19
22.5 5 12 6 11 27 14
0.0 23 57 30 51 127 67
2.5 23 57 30 51 127 67
5.0 21 53 28 47 118 62
7.5 18 45 24 40 100 52
10.0 17 41 22 37 91 48
-17.5
12.5 13 33 17 29 73 38
15.0 10 25 13 22 55 29
17.5 7 16 9 15 36 19
20.0 5 12 6 11 27 14
22.5 3 8 4 7 18 10
0.0 20 49 26 44 109 57
2.5 20 49 26 44 109 57
-20.0
5.0 18 45 24 40 100 52
7.5 17 41 22 37 91 48
16718-13

Vertical Horizontal
200m (8-inch) 300 mm (12-inch)
Angle Angle
10.0 13 33 17 29 73 38
12.5 12 29 15 26 64 33
15.0 8 21 11 18 46 24
17.5 7 16 9 15 36 19
0.0 17 41 22 37 91 48
2.5 17 41 22 37 91 48
5.0 15 37 19 33 82 43
7.5 13 33 17 29 73 38
-22.5
10.0 12 29 15 26 64 33
12.5 10 25 13 22 55 29
15.0 7 16 9 15 36 19
17.5 5 12 6 11 27 14
0.0 15 37 19 33 82 43
2.5 13 33 17 29 73 38
-25.0
5.0 13 33 17 29 73 38
7.5 12 29 15 26 64 33
0.0 12 29 15 26 64 33
2.5 12 29 15 26 64 33
-27.5
5.0 10 25 13 22 55 29
7.5 8 21 11 18 46 24
Note 1: Luminous Intensity values for equivalent left and right horizontal angles are
the same.
Note 2: Tabulated values of Luminous Intensity are rounded to the nearest whole
value.
16718-14
Figure 1
Color Regions for LED Traffic Control Signal Lights:
Figure 1 illustrates the acceptable color regions for traffic control signal lights using LED
emitters as the light source.
16718-15
Figure 1a: Color Region for Red Traffic Control Signal Lights
Figure 1 (cont’d)
16718-16
Figure 1b: Color Region for Yellow Traffic Control Signal Lights
Figure 1 (cont’d)
16718-17
Table 1 a. – Minimum Maintained Luminous Intensity
Vertical Horizontal Red 8" Yellow 8" Green 8" RED 12" Yellow 12" Green 12"
Angle Angle Min. 160% Min. 110% Min. 135% Min. 160% Min. 110% Min. 135%
2.5 17 27 41 45 22 30 37 59 91 100 48 65
12.5
7.5 13 21 33 36 17 23 29 46 73 80 38 51
2.5 31 50 78 86 41 55 69 110 173 190 90 122
7.5 7.5 25 40 62 68 32 43 55 88 137 151 71 96
12.5 18 29 45 50 24 32 40 64 100 110 52 70
2.5 68 109 168 185 88 119 150 240 373 410 195 263
7.5 56 90 139 153 73 99 124 198 309 340 162 219
2.5 12.5 38 61 94 103 49 66 84 134 209 230 109 147
17.5 21 34 53 58 28 38 47 75 118 130 62 84
22.5 12 19 29 32 15 20 26 42 64 70 33 45
2.5 162 259 402 442 211 285 358 573 892 981 466 629
7.5 132 211 328 361 172 232 292 467 728 801 380 513
12.5 91 146 226 249 118 159 201 322 501 551 261 352
-2.5
17.5 53 85 131 144 69 93 117 187 291 320 152 205
22.5 28 45 70 77 37 50 62 99 155 171 81 109
27.5 15 24 37 41 19 26 33 53 82 90 43 58
2.5 127 203 316 348 166 224 281 450 701 771 366 494
7.5 106 170 262 288 138 186 234 374 582 640 304 410
12.5 71 114 176 194 92 124 157 251 391 430 204 275
-7.5
17.5 41 66 103 113 54 73 91 146 228 251 119 161
22.5 21 34 53 58 28 38 47 75 118 130 62 84
27.5 12 19 29 32 15 20 26 42 64 70 33 45
2.5 50 80 123 135 65 88 110 176 273 300 143 193
7.5 40 64 98 108 52 70 88 141 218 240 114 154
12.5 28 45 70 77 37 50 62 99 155 171 81 109
-12.5
17.5 17 27 41 45 22 30 37 59 91 100 48 65
22.5 8 13 21 23 11 15 18 29 46 51 24 32
27.5 5 8 12 13 6 8 11 18 27 30 14 19
2.5 23 37 57 63 30 41 51 82 127 140 67 90
7.5 18 29 45 50 24 32 40 64 100 110 52 70
-17.5 12.5 13 21 33 36 17 23 29 46 73 80 38 51
17.5 7 11 16 18 9 12 15 24 36 40 19 26
22.5 3 5 8 9 4 5 7 11 18 20 10 14
2.5 17 27 41 45 22 30 37 59 91 100 48 65
7.5 13 21 33 36 17 23 29 46 73 80 38 51
-22.5
12.5 10 16 25 28 13 18 22 35 55 61 29 39
17.5 5 8 12 13 6 8 11 18 27 30 14 19
2.5 12 19 29 32 15 20 26 42 64 70 33 45
-27.5
7.5 8 13 21 23 11 15 18 29 46 51 24 32
END OF SECTION
16718-18
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION COUNTDOWN PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL MODULE
SECTION 16719
COUNTDOWN PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL MODULE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Countdown Pedestrian Signal Module and appurtenances.
B. Section 16716 – Pedestrian Signal Heads
A. Unit Prices.
1. No separate payment will be made for countdown pedestrian signal modules

under this section. Include cost in unit price Work as specified in Section
16716 – Pedestrian Signal Heads.
2. Refer to Section 01270 - Measurements and Payments for unit price

procedures.
A. Furnish LED countdown pedestrian signal modules that conform to the following:
1. TxDOT - Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (TMUTCD)
2. ITE – Pedestrian Traffic Control Signal Indicators – Light Emitting Diode

(LED) Signal Modules (PTCSI)
3. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Title 47, Subpart B, Section 15

on the Emission of Electronic Noise
B. The items furnished and installed under this contract shall be new, unused of the
latest product in production to commercial trade, and shall be of the highest quality as
to materials used and workmanship. Manufacturers furnishing these items shall be
experienced in design and construction of such items and shall furnish evidence of
having supplied similar items which have been in successful operation. The bidder
shall be an established supplier of the items bid.
1.05 REFERENCES
16719-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. ANSI/NEMA 250-2020 – Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts

Maximum)
B. ANSI/ASQ Z1.4 – Sampling Procedures and Tables for Inspection by Attributes
C. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Title 47, Subpart B, Section 15 on the

Emission of Electronic Noise.
D. ITE – Pedestrian Traffic Control Signal Indicators – Light Emitting Diode (LED)
Signal Modules (PTCSI)
E. NEMA TS 2-2021 - Traffic Controller Assemblies with NTCIP Requirements
F. NFPA 70, National Electric Code
G. TxDOT – Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (TMUTCD)
from them of a detailed description concerning any point, shall be regarded as
meaning that only the best commercial practice is to prevail and that only material
and workmanship of the finest quality are to be used. All interpretations of these
specifications shall be made on the basis of this statement. The bidder shall be an
established supplier of the items bid.
1.07 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Suppliers/manufacturers shall furnish with their bid a complete description and cost
of any special test equipment that is necessary to install, operate, or maintain its
equipment.
1.08 SUBMITTALS
A. Upon request, one schematic wiring diagram and installation manual shall be
provided with each LED module.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. A minimum guarantee for both materials and workmanship shall be provided by the
Contractor for the products bid as specified. The guarantee (warranty) period shall
begin the day the City officially accepts the item. Any guarantee work is to be
completed within 15 days after receipt of notice of material deficiencies.
B. Warranties and Guarantees
16719-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. All material, workmanship and labor furnished shall be covered by

Supplier(s)/Manufacturer(s) guarantee and/or warranty for a minimum period
of sixty (60) months. Warranty period shall begin the day the LED signal
module is received by the City of Houston, either as new order or warranty
repair. Bidder shall also be required to have resources to complete any
required warranty work within fifteen (15) days after receipt of found
defective LED signal module. The City of Houston’s preference is for all non-
warranty service to be charged a singular flat-rate. Successful bidder will
include flat rate repair cost, if available in bid document for all non-warranty
covered repairs. If flat rate repair charge is not available, then
Supplier(s)/Manufacturer(s) will provide current hourly labor rate, along with
any associated minimum charges that may apply.
2. Successful bidder shall bear all expenses connected with return of any
material which the City deems necessary to return for adjustments during
guarantee period. Any work done by the City will be at a rate of $40 per labor
unit.
3. Modules which exhibit luminous intensities less than the minimum values
specified within the first 36 months, of the date of delivery, shall be replaced
or repaired.
4. The City of Houston reserves the right to withhold payments which may be
due, should it be discovered that material does not meet specifications and/or
claims of bidder.
5. Supplier(s)/Manufacturer(s) shall make all engineering data, diagrams,

software changes or improvements, which increases performance of
equipment purchased under this bid, available to the City of Houston at no
additional cost.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Countdown Pedestrian Signal Module
1. The message-bearing surface of the module shall be supplied with a fully

populated “HAND” and “MAN” symbol, overlapping, that comply with
PTCSI Standard for these symbols for a message-bearing surface of the size
specified.
2. The LED module shall display a solid Portland orange hand and lunar white
man and two Portland orange countdown numbers.
3. The numbers 00 to 99 on the numerical display shall have 2 rows of LEDs,

that are side by side, not offset, and a minimum height of 9 inches.
16719-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
4. The LED countdown pedestrian signal module shall be a single, self-

contained device.
5. Portland Orange (amber hand and countdown numbers) LEDs shall be

“AlInGaP” (Aluminum Indium Gallium Phosphorus) technology or equal, and
rated for 100,000 hours or more of continuous usage at 25ºC and 20 mA.
White LEDs shall be InGaN (Indium Gallium Nitride) technology.
6. The assembly and manufacturing process for all internal LED and electronic
components shall be adequately supported to withstand mechanical shock and
vibration from high winds and other sources.
7. The signal module shall be made of UL94VO flame-retardant materials. The

lens is excluded from this requirement.
8. The lens of the LED pedestrian and countdown signal modules shall be
polycarbonate UV stabilized.
9. The exterior of the lens of the LED countdown pedestrian signal module shall
be uniform and frosted to reduce sun phantom effect.
10. Each individual LED traffic module shall be identified for warranty purposes
with the manufacturer’s trade name, serial number and operating
characteristics, i.e., rated voltage, power consumption, and volt-ampere.
11. LED countdown pedestrian signal modules shall fit into traffic housings built
to the VTCSH Standard without any modification to the housing.
12. Lens must diffuse the LED array over the entire surface of the lens.
B. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
1. The LED pedestrian and countdown signal modules shall be rated for use in
the ambient operating temperature range of -40ºC to +60ºC (-40ºF to +140ºF).
2. The LED pedestrian and countdown signal modules, when properly installed
with gasket, shall be protected against dust and moisture intrusion per
requirements of ANSI/NEMA Standard 250-2020 for type 4 enclosures to
protect all internal LED, electronic, and electrical components.
C. ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
1. The secured, color coded, 914 mm (36 in) long, 600V, 20 AWG minimum,
jacketed wires, conforming to the National Electrical Code, rated for service
at +105ºC, are to be provided for electrical connection.
16719-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. The LED pedestrian and countdown signal module shall operate from a 60 ±3
Hz AC line over a voltage range of 80 to 135 volts rms. Variations in the
voltage range shall have a minimal impact, less than 10%, on the luminous
output of the module. Rated voltage for all measurements shall be 120 ±3
volts rms.
3. The LED circuitry shall prevent perceptible flicker over the voltage range
specified above.
4. Transient Voltage Immunity: The modules shall be tested for transient

immunity, at minimum amplitude of 2000 volts, using the procedure described
in, NEMA Standard TS 2-2021.
5. Catastrophic failure of one LED light source in Man & Hand Symbol shall not
result in the loss of more than the light from the one display segment.
6. The LED pedestrian and countdown module shall be operationally compatible

with the currently used controller assemblies. The LED pedestrian and
countdown module shall be operationally compatible with conflict monitors.
7. The LED pedestrian and countdown module including its circuitry must meet
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Title 47, Subpart B, Section 15
regulations concerning the emission of electronic noise.
8. The LED pedestrian and countdown module shall provide a power factor of
.90 or greater when operated at the nominal operating voltages, and 25
degrees C (77 degrees F).
9. Total harmonic distortion (current and voltage) induced into an AC power line
by an LED pedestrian and countdown module operated at the nominal
operating voltages, and 25 degrees C (77 degrees F), shall not exceed 20
percent.
D. INPUT PROTECTION (optional)
1. At the point of entry to the module for each input provide two 0.5-Ohm, 10-
watt wire- wound power resistors with 0.2 micro Henries inductance (one on
the AC+ Line & on the AC- Line). Provide one 20 Joule surge arrestor
between AC+ to AC-. A 0.68 microfarad capacitor must be placed between
AC+ & AC – (between the resistor & arrestor).
E. PHOTOMETRIC REQUIREMENTS
1. Luminance
a. For a minimum period of 60 months, the maintained minimum

luminance values for the modules under the operating conditions
defined in Article 2.01.B.1, when measured normal to the plane of the
icon surface, shall not be less than:
16719-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
Walking person: 2,200 cd/m2

Hand: 1,400 cd/m2
b. The luminance of the emitting surface, measured at angles from the

normal of the surface, may decrease linearly to a value of 50% of the
values listed above at an angle of 15 degrees.
c. The light output requirements in this specification apply to pedestrian

signal heads without any visors, hooded or louvered (egg-crate).
Addition of such visors may affect the light output of the signal head,
and the purchasing agency may wish to consult the issue with the
manufacturer.
2. Uniformity and Distribution
a. The uniformity of the walking person and hand icons’ luminance shall
meet a ratio of not more than 1 to 5 between the minimum and
maximum luminance values, as measured in 12mm (0.5 in) diameter
spots.
b. When operating within the temperature range specified in Article

2.01.B.1, the average luminance of the module shall not exceed three
times the maintained minimum luminance of the modules, as defined
in Article 2.01.E.1.
3. Chromaticity
a. The standard colors for the LED Pedestrian Signal Module shall be
White for the walking person and Portland Orange for the hand icon.
The colors for these icons shall conform to the following color regions,
based on the 1931 CIE chromaticity diagram:
(1) Walking Person—White:
Blue boundary: x = 0.280

1st Green boundary: 0.280 ≤ x < 0.400
y = 0.7917•x + 0.0983
2nd Green boundary: 0.400 ≤ x < 0.450
y = 0.4600•x + 0.2310
Yellow boundary: x = 0.450
1st Purple boundary: 0.450 ≤ x < 0.400
y = 0.4600•x + 0.1810
2nd Purple boundary:0.400 ≤ x < 0.280
y = 0.7917•x + 0.0483
16719-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
White
Point x y
1 0.280 0.320
2 0.400 0.415
3 0.450 0.438
4 0.450 0.388
5 0.400 0.365
6 0.280 0.270
(2) Hand—Portland Orange:
Yellow boundary: y = 0.390

White boundary: 0.600 ≤ x ≤ 0.659
y = 0.990 – x
Red boundary: y = 0.331
Portland Orange
Point x y
1 0.6095 0.390
2 0.600 0.390
3 0.659 0.331
4 0.669 0.331
4. Color Uniformity
a. The uniformity of the emitted colors shall be such that any color
measurement within a 12mm (0.5 in) spot on the emitting surface shall
fall within the following regions around the average measured color of
the entire emitting surface:
(1) Walking Person—White:
(a) Where Δx and Δy are the differences in the

chromaticity coordinates of the measured colors to the
coordinates of the average color, using the CIE 1931
Chromaticity Diagram and a 2 degree Standard
Observer.
(2) Hand—Portland Orange:
(a) The dominant wavelength for all individual color

measurements shall be within ±3 nm of the dominant
wavelength for the average of all the individual color
measurements.
F. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
16719-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Basic Operation
a. The control and regulation module shall allow for the countdown
displays to be automatically adjusted with the programmed intervals of
the traffic controller.
2. Operating Modes: The module shall operate in one mode:
a. Clearance Cycle Countdown Mode – The module will start counting

when the flashing clearance signal turns on and will countdown to “0”
and turn off when the steady “Don’t Walk” signal turns on.
3. Power Failures
a. The equipment must maintain a consistent countdown during short

power failures (<1 second). A longer failure or an absence of signal
superior to one (1) second must turn off display and trigger a restart
system remembering the last sequence, as it is done for the NEMA
traffic controller.
2.02 UNIT IDENTIFICATION
A. Units shall be clearly marked on the back surface of the unit in a permanent manner
showing information required for warranty and long term performance. Information
to be shown shall include manufacturer name, date of manufacture, electric power
requirements, model type, and serial number.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PRODUCT TEST AND INSPECTION
A. Upon final delivery The City of Houston will randomly select two modules of each
type and deliver City of Houston approved testing laboratory. Said modules shall be
subjected to testing according to Article 2.01.C.4 with all associated costs including
shipping to be born by supplier. Any quality issues resulting from these tests will
result in rejection of whole shipment.
A. The City of Houston may perform random sample testing on all shipments. Random
sample testing will be completed within 45 days after delivery. Optical testing shall
be performed with the LED module mounted in a standard pedestrian signal unit. The
number of modules tested shall be determined by the quantity of each shipment. The
Traffic Operations Division shall determine the sampling parameters to be used for
the random testing. Acceptance or rejection of the shipment shall conform to
ANSI/ASQ Z1.4 for random sampled shipments.
16719-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Supplier(s)/Manufacturer(s) shall have field engineers or technicians available on

request to assure satisfactory initial operation, and to consult with City Traffic
Engineer, or City Traffic Engineer’s representative, on any special circuitry that may
be required in certain applications.
END OF SECTION
16719-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION TRAFFIC SIGNAL CABLE
SECTION 16720
TRAFFIC SIGNAL CABLE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. This specification describes minimum requirements for traffic signal control cable
and/or wire used in City of Houston traffic signal installations. A digital copy of
IMSA specifications can be obtained by contacting the City of Houston - Traffic
Operation and Maintenance at 2200 Patterson Street, Houston, Texas 77007.
that only the best commercial practice is to prevail and that only material and
workmanship of the finest quality are to be used. All interpretations of these
A. Unit Prices
1. Measurement: This item will be measured by the linear foot of traffic signal
cables, as per the various sizes and types shown on the drawings.
Measurement will not be made for cable inside signal heads and controllers
and cable coiled pull boxes, in pole bases and coiled on span wires.
item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the
unit price bid for “Traffic Signal Cables” of the various types and sized
specified. This price shall be full compensation for furnishing and installing
all materials, and for all, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to
complete the work.
1.05 REFERENCES
A. International Municipal Signal Association (IMSA) Specifications
16720-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Manufacturer furnishing these items shall be experienced in design and construction

of such items and shall furnish evidence of having supplied similar items which have
been in successful operation. The bidder shall be an established supplier of the items
bid.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. The items furnished shall be new, unused of the latest product in production to
commercial trade, and shall be of the highest quality as to materials used and
workmanship.
B. The cables shall conform to specification requirements of the International Municipal

Signal Association (IMSA) for the specific type cables included in the bid form, and
THW wire shall conform to industry standards. These specifications and standards are
included in this specification by reference.
2.02 INSULATION
A. Insulation compound and thickness for each conductor shall conform to the
specification requirements as specified for each item of the bid form.
2.03 JACKET
A. Jacket compound and thickness for multi-conductor cable shall conform to the
specification requirements as specified for each item of the bid form.
2.04 VOLTAGE RATING
A. All cables and/or wire furnished shall be rated at 600 Volts.
2.05 CONDUCTORS
A. Copper used to form the conductors shall be soft or annealed copper and shall be
formed as solid or stranded conductor(s) as specified for each item of the bid form.
2.06 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION AND CABLE MARKER
A. Each conductor shall be identified by color-coding conforming with specification

requirements specified for each item of the bid form. Each cable shall be identified at
maximum 2-foot intervals with manufacturers name and year of manufacture.
16720-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Test and Test Methods: All cables and/or wires shall be sampled and tested at the
factory to determine their compliance with specification requirements as specified for
each item of the bid form.
END OF SECTION
16720-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION EMERGENCY VEHICLE PREEMPTION (EVP)
SECTION 16724
EMERGENCY VEHICLE PREEMPTION (EVP)
PART 1 GENERAL
A. The system employs optical communication to identify the presence of designated

emergency vehicles and causes the traffic signal controller to advance to and/or hold
a desired traffic signal display selected from phases normally available. The matched
set of components which make up the system will cause the existing traffic controller
to be manipulated upon recognition of the signal from the vehicle. This
communication is effective to the optical detectors at or near the intersection over a
line-of-sight path of up to 1800 feet.
B. The system requires no attention of the vehicle operator other than a simple emitter
"ON" switch located in the vehicle which is to remain "ON" until the end of the
emergency run. The system shall operate on a first-come, first-served basis. The
system is capable of overriding lower priority systems of similar nature while
yielding priority to activity such as railroad, drawbridge, etc. The system shall
interface with existing traffic signal controllers without compromising normal
operation or existing safety provisions.
C. The Emergency Vehicle Preemption (EVP) consists of optical emitter assemblies,

optical detectors, optical detector cable, phase selectors, preempt module and card
rack. The EVP Intersection Components are the optical detectors, optical detector
cable, phase selectors, preempt module and card rack. Emitter assemblies will be
supplied by the Contractor only when specifically called out on the plans.
from them of a detailed description concerning any point, shall be regarded as
meaning that only the best commercial practice is to prevail and that only material
and workmanship of the finest quality are to be used. All interpretations of these
A. Unit Prices.
16724-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. This item will be measured by each intersection of the required optical

detectors, optical detector cable, phase selectors, preempt module and card
rack complete in place.
2. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this item and
measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price
bid for “Emergency Vehicle Preemption”. This price shall be full
compensation for furnishing, installing and testing the system; and for all
A. Manufacturer(s) furnishing these items shall be experienced in design and

construction of such items and shall furnish evidence of having supplied similar items
which have been in successful operation.
B. The bidder shall be an established supplier of the items bid.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. A minimum guarantee for both materials and workmanship shall be provided by the
Contractor for the products bid as specified. The guarantee (warranty) period shall
begin the day the City officially accepts the item. Any guarantee work is to be
completed within 15 days after receipt of notice of material deficiencies.
1. Warranties and Guarantees
a. Any and all equipment furnished shall be covered by manufacturer's

guarantee or warranty for a period of twelve (12) months commencing
on final acceptance date with respect to parts, workmanship, and
performance of the product.
b. The Contractor shall bear all expenses connected with the return of
any equipment which the City deems necessary to return to the
Contractor for proper adjustment or repairs during the guarantee
period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. The items furnished and installed under this contract shall be new, unused of the
latest product in production to commercial trade, and shall be of the highest quality as
to materials used and workmanship.
2.02 MATCHED SYSTEM COMPONENTS
16724-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. The City of Houston EVP is comprised of four basic matched components. To ensure
system integrity, operation and compatibility, the four basic components (optical
emitter, optical detector, detector cable, phase selector) shall be from the same
manufacturer. The bidder shall supply and install the optical detector(s), detector
cable, and phase selector for each intersection called for on the plans.
B. The bidder of the Emergency Vehicle Preemption equipment shall provide with the
bid written certification from the manufacturer that the system components were
designed, manufactured and tested as a system of matched components and will meet
or exceed the requirements of this specification and work with the existing City of
Houston optical emitters.
2.03 SYSTEM OPERATION
A. Priority control phase selection shall be activated by an optically transmitted signal of

14.035 HZ or 9.639 HZ, or upon the activation of a test switch.
B. The traffic controller shall receive inputs from the preempt module upon activation of
the appropriate signal from the phase selector.
C. The system shall provide power for up to three optical detectors for each priority
channel. The system shall maintain continuous communication between the optical
emitter equipped vehicle and the traffic controller.
D. The system shall allow the traffic signal controller to resume normal timing operation
after the optical signals cease for an appropriate period.
E. The system shall not attempt controller manipulation nor retain priority vehicle calls
during periods of "intersection flash" or "railroad preempt" operations.
2.04 SYSTEM COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS
A. Optical Emitter Assembly
1. The assembly shall include an optical energy emitting unit for mounting to the
exterior of the vehicle, an emitter control switch for mounting to the interior
dash or instrument panel, and all necessary wiring and hardware for a typical
installation.
2. The optical emitter assembly shall operate over an ambient temperature range
of -30 degrees F (-34 degrees C) to up to 140 degrees F (+60 degrees C).
3. The optical energy emitting unit shall contain an internal regulated power
supply to convert 12 VDC (positive or negative ground) vehicle battery power
to high voltage required for the flashtube and meet the following electrical
requirements:
a. Operational at 10 volts DC to 15 volts DC,
16724-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
b. Have internal protection for a sustained input voltage of up to 25 volts

DC,
c. Deliver sufficient optical energy to activate the optical detector from a

distance of 1800 feet, and
d. Consume no more than 40 watts.
4. The optical energy emitting unit shall weigh not more than 4.5 pounds.
5. The optical energy emitting unit shall not exceed the following physical
dimensions:
a. Length - 5.25 inches,
b. Width - 7.0 inches, and
c. Height - 6.63 inches.
6. The optical energy emitting unit shall be capable of producing precisely-timed

pulses of high intensity light in response to a low voltage trigger signal from
the crystal controlled emitter control switch.
7. The optical energy emitting unit shall be controlled by a single ON/OFF

switch which requires no warm-up, setting, or adjustments by the vehicle
operator. An indicator located adjacent to the ON/OFF switch shall identify
that the crystal controlled timing circuitry is energized.
8. The emitter control switch shall produce crystal controlled low voltage trigger
pulses to the optical energy emitting unit. For high priority/Class II
applications, the frequency of the trigger pulses shall be 14.035 +/-0.255 HZ.
For low priority/Class I applications, the frequency of the trigger pulses shall
be 9.639 +/-0.119 HZ.
B. Optical Detector
1. The optical detector shall be a lightweight, weatherproof device capable of

sensing and transforming pulsed optical energy into electrical signals for use
by the phase selection equipment.
2. The unit shall be high impact polycarbonate construction with stainless steel
and/or brass hardware.
3. The unit shall be designed for mounting at or near an intersection on a mast

arm, pedestal, pipe, or span wire.
4. The unit shall accept optical signals from two directions and provide a single
electrical output signal.
16724-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
5. The unit shall include a design feature to allow aiming of the two optical
sensing inputs for skewed approaches or slight curves.
6. The unit shall have a built-in terminal strip to simplify wiring connections.
7. The unit shall receive power from the phase selector and have internal voltage
regulation to be operational from 16 to 40 volts.
8. The unit must be responsive to the optical emitter at a distance of 1800 feet.
9. The unit must deliver the necessary electrical signal to the phase selector via
up to 1000 feet.
10. The unit shall employ a replaceable circuit board assembly and photocells to
facilitate repair.
C. Optical Detector Cable
1. The cable must guarantee delivery of the necessary quality signal from the
optical detector to the phase selector over a non-spliced distance of 1000 feet.
2. The cable must guarantee sufficient power to the optical detector over a non-
spliced distance of 1000 feet.
3. The cable must be of durable construction to satisfy the following installation

methods:
a. Direct burial,
b. Conduit and mast arm pull, and
c. Exposed overhead, supported by messenger wire.
4. The weight shall not exceed .04 lbs/ft.
5. The outside diameter shall not exceed 0.3 inches.
6. The insulation rating shall be 600 volts minimum.
7. The temperature rating shall be 80 degrees C minimum.
8. The cable shall have three conductors of AWG #20 (7x28) stranded,
individually tinned copper, color coded insulation as follows:
a. Orange for delivery of optical detector power,
b. Blue for optical detector power return, and
c. Yellow for optical detector signal.
16724-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
9. The conductors shall be shielded with aluminized polyester and have an AWG
#20 (7x28) stranded and individually tinned drain wire to provide signal
integrity and transient protection.
10. The shield wrapping shall have a 20% overlap to ensure integrity following
conduit and mast arm pulls.
D. Phase Selector
1. All phase selectors shall be digitally controlled and be capable of providing

high and low priority operations.
2. The unit shall be a plug-in, two-channel, dual priority device intended to be

installed directly into a card rack wired into the traffic signal cabinet.
3. The unit shall be powered from 115 volts, 60 HZ mains and contain an
internal, regulated power supply to support optical detectors.
4. The unit shall be capable of recognizing the following pulse rates as delivered
by the optical detectors:
a. 9.639 HZ +/-.119 HZ as low priority (Class I), and
b. 14.035 HZ +/-.255 HZ as high priority (Class II).
5. The primary optical detector inputs and power outputs shall be on the card
edge. Two additional detector inputs, per channel, shall be provided via a
front panel connector.
6. One opto-isolated NPN output per channel shall be delivered to the

appropriate channel pin on the card edge connector as follows:
a. HZ +/-.02 HZ 50% on duty square wave in response to a Class I call,

and
b. A "Steady On" in response to a Class II call.
7. The unit shall utilize crystal control timing and optical pulse rate recognition
circuitry to assure:
a. Accurate optical signal recognition for dual priority,
b. Synchronous logic,
c. Precise output pulse, and
d. Accurate call dropout time.
8. The unit shall have six recessed range controls per channel, three for low
priority and three for high priority, to adjust optical sensitivity (emitter range).
16724-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
9. The unit shall have a solid state "Power On" indicator.
10. The unit shall have a "Class I" and "Class II" solid state indicator for each
channel which performs as follows:
a. Flash during call validation, and
b. Be steady-on during valid call and test switch operations.
11. The unit shall have a test switch for each channel to deliver Class I or Class II
signal pulse rates to verify proper function at both optical emitter flash rates,
first-come, first-served operation, and Class II override capability.
12. The unit shall have a selectable call dropout time of 5 seconds or 10 seconds.
13. The unit shall properly identify a high priority (Class II) demand with any
combination of up to 10 high and low priority emitter signals being received
simultaneously and asynchronously on either channel.
14. The unit shall not exceed the following physical dimensions:
a. Length (including handle) - 7.91 inches,
b. Width - 1.11 inches, and
c. Height - 4.50 inches.
E. Traffic Controller Preemption Module
1. A traffic controller preemption module shall be supplied in addition to the

four basic matched components. This module shall interface between the
phase selector(s) and the traffic signal controller to provide dual priority
preempt operation.
2. The preempt module shall be a plug-in, microprocessor controlled, 4 input, 13

output, dual priority device.
3. The preempt module shall recognize steady-on (high priority) over-pulsing

(low priority) inputs from the phase selector and assign control on first-come,
first-serve and, high priority over low priority basis.
4. The preempt module shall recognize input signals from one or two dual
priority phase selectors for up to four separate channels of emergency vehicle
preemption.
5. The preempt module shall have a delay timer adjustable from 0 to 15 seconds
in one second increments. The delay timer, when properly set, will guarantee
a minimum green time for the phase or phases being served prior to initiating
the preempt operation.
16724-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
6. The preempt module shall use the standard input functions available on any
NEMA type traffic signal controller and shall not cause the controller to
abbreviate its programmed yellow or all red clearance times.
7. When the phase selector deactivates its output, the preempt module shall place
vehicle calls on all phases of the traffic signal controller and then allow the
controller to resume its regular phase sequence.
8. The preempt module shall provide a separate output for "coordination free" to
release the traffic signal controller from coordination control during the
operation of the Emergency Vehicle Preemption.
9. The preempt module shall have a separate input that when active shall cause
the preempt module to turn off all outputs to allow for railroad or drawbridge
operation.
F. Card Rack
1. The card rack shall be a shelf-mounted device designed to accommodate two

phase selectors and a preempt module.
2. The rack shall be constructed of 5052 aluminum of .062" thickness and shall
not exceed 7.38" W x 4.71" H x 7.13" L. All of the aluminum components
consisting of the sides, top, bottom, and front panel shall be clear anodized.
3. The optical detector cable shall terminate on two terminal strips, 4-position,
feed- through solder type. The color code and function of each wire shall be
clearly silk screened adjacent to each terminal.
4. The front panel of the card rack shall be hinged to provide easy access to the
inside of the rack. Machine screws shall be used to secure the front panel
when in the closed position.
5. The card rack shall be equipped with a quick disconnect type connector and 6'
harness, wired to accommodate the installation of the card rack in a traffic
signal cabinet.
END OF SECTION
16724-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION DYNAMIC MESSAGE SIGN (DMS)
SECTION 16725
DYNAMIC MESSAGE SIGN (DMS)
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Furnish and install amber colored Light Emitting Diode (LED) Dynamic Message
Signs (DMS) with a full matrix display capable of displaying 3 rows of nominal 12-
38 inch characters, 12 characters per line. Furnish a sign capable of displaying
graphics and character fonts approved for DMS use by the Manual on Uniform
Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD), latest revision and its accompanying reference
documents. The sign shall be of front access design providing serviceability to
internal sign components. Furnish, install integrate, and test the equipment including
cabinets, operating software, cabling and communications.
A. Unit Prices.
1. Measurement: This Item will be measured by each “Arterial LED DMS Field
Equipment” of the size specified, furnished, installed, and tested; and by
Lump Sum for “DMS Master Controller and Software” installed, fully
functional, and tested.
Item and measured as provided under “Measurement,” will be paid for at the
unit price bid for “Arterial LED DMS Field Equipment,” of the size specified,
and “DMS Master Controller and Software” installed, fully functional, and
tested. This price is full compensation for furnishing, placing, and testing
materials and equipment; for tools, labor, equipment, hardware, operational
software packages, supplies, support, personnel training, shop drawings,
documentation, and incidentals.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. AASHTO Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires, and
Traffic Signals, latest edition
B. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Title 47, Sub Part B, Section 15;
Regulations Concerning the Emission of Electronic Noise
16725-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. ISO 9001 - Quality Management Systems Requirements
D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1, 000 Volts Maximum), latest
edition
E. NEMA TS-2 - Traffic Controller Assemblies with NTCIP Requirements, latest

edition
F. NEMA NTCIP 2001:1996 - National Transportation Communications for ITS

Protocol (NTCIP) Class B Profile (Formerly TS 3.3-1996)
G. NEMA TS 3.6 - Object Definitions for Dynamic Message Signs (DMS), 1997 edition
H. NEMA TS-4 - Hardware Standards for Dynamic Message Signs (DMS) with NTCIP
Requirements, latest edition
I. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
J. TxDOT Special Specification 6005 - Testing, Training, Documentation, Final

Acceptance, and Warranty
K. TxDOT Special Specification 6006 - Electronic Components
L. TxDOT Special Specification 6026 National Transportation Communications for ITS

Protocol for Dynamic Message Signs, 2004 edition
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. Central Controller - Central control computer server and software being run at the
TMC or on another computer which communicates with the sign controller to obtain
status or manipulate and provide the operation of the DMS.
B. Display - The visible face of the sign.
C. DMS - The display and the housing surrounding the display.
D. DMS Control Software - Software used in the sign controller to control the display.
E. Dynamic Message Signs (DMS) - Enable the display of text, consisting of strings of
alphanumeric and other characters, and approved graphics in the LED DMS.
Assemble the required components from a common set of modules.
F. Message - The text or graphical information displayed to the motorist. Messages may
be more than one page of information.
G. Module - A matrix of equally spaced pixels.
H. Neutral State - When the sign is blank or a predefined message is displayed.
16725-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
I. Pitch - Distance measured from center to center of adjacent pixels. This distance can
be measured both horizontally and vertically.
J. Pixel - A cluster of LED’s which form a dot.
K. Sign Controller - A device located in close proximity to the DMS which controls the
text messages being displayed. The sign controller receives NTCIP commands via
Ethernet port. The sign controller manages the operation of the DMS and will utilize
solid state hard drive.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. The sign manufacturer must submit 3 references, successfully operating a multi-unit,

multi-line State arterial, permanently-mounted, overhead dynamic message sign
systems supplied by this manufacturer under the current corporate name, for a
minimum period of 5 years.
B. Include current name and address of organization and the current name and telephone
number of an individual from the organization who can be contacted to verify system
operation for the reference data, as well as date of system installation. Provide this
information before documentation submittal. Failure to furnish the above references
will be sufficient reason to reject the supplier’s equipment.
C. The sign manufacturer must submit at least three references from at least three
different State or City transportation agencies showing successful operation of
permanent multi-line LED DMS systems as described above. These references must
demonstrate the manufacturer’s capability of meeting the operational requirements
listed above. Include in the reference data the current name and address of
organization, and the current name and telephone number of an individual from the
organization who can be contacted to verify system operation, as well as date of
system installation.
D. All information required in this section must be included in the submittal package.
Failure to furnish the above references will be sufficient reason to reject the supplier's
equipment.
A. Manufacturer Requirements / Qualifications.
1. The manufacture shall meet the following requirements:
a. Have been in the business of manufacturing (and under the same

corporate name) outdoor permanently mounted roadway LED DMS,
which are used to manage vehicular roadway traffic, for a minimum of
ten (10) years prior to contract bid date.
16725-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
b. Have in operation a minimum of fifty (50) outdoor permanently

mounted roadway LED DMS, which are used to manage vehicular
roadway traffic. Each of these shall have successfully operated for a
minimum of three (3) years prior to contract bid date.
c. Have in operation five (5) State or City transportation owned and

operated LED DMS systems. Each shall use NTCIP as their primary
communications protocol and be communicating over wireless or fiber
optic cable networks.
d. Utilize a documented in-house or certified program (such as the

International Organization for Standardization - ISO 9001) quality
management system that has been in place for no less than three (3)
years prior to the contract bid date.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Furnish solid state display elements and modules. No mechanical or

electromechanical elements or shutters will be accepted. Ensure the DMS are suitable
for operations in exposed outdoor locations.
B. General Requirements. Furnish new, corrosion resistant materials. Furnish, assemble,

fabricate, and install materials as shown on the plans, in the requirements of this item,
and in the pertinent most recent requirements of the following:
1. TxDOT Special Specification 6026, “National Transportation

Communications for ITS Protocol for Dynamic Message Signs”, 2004
Specification.
2. TxDOT Special Specification 6006, “Electronic Components”
3. TxDOT Special Specification 6005, “Testing, Training, Documentation, Final

Acceptance, and Warranty”
4. NEMA TS-2 Section 2 (environmental requirements), latest edition
5. NEMA TS-4, latest edition
6. NEMA Enclosure Standard 250 (NEMA Type 3R outdoor enclosures)
C. Furnish and install the vendor diagnostic software to 10 City of Houston maintenance
laptops. Furnish and install the following equipment for each DMS field site as shown
on the plans.
1. LED DMS sign
16725-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Sign controller
3. DMS mounting brackets and hardware
4. Cabling
5. Field equipment cabinet
6. Central controller software and diagnostics
D. General Construction. Furnish a completed sign that presents a clean and neat
appearance. Poor workmanship is cause for rejection of the sign. Protect equipment
until it is accepted. Make the exposed connectors watertight.
1. Design the sign to withstand sustained AASHTO wind loadings without

permanent deformation. Calculate maximum wind loadings at 100 mph with
gusts up to 120 mph unless otherwise shown on the plans.
2. Utilize the latest available techniques to minimize the number of different

parts, subassemblies, circuits, cards, and modules to maximize standardization
and commonality. Design equipment for ease of maintenance with a front
access to ensure component parts are readily accessible for inspection and
maintenance.
3. Provide and label test points for checking essential voltages. Use connectors
for external connections. Key and label connectors to preclude improper
hookups.
4. Ensure sign performance and clarity is not impaired due to continuous

vibration, UV exposure, and other environmental conditions including
chemicals associated with the transportation environment, and methods
commonly used for cleaning traffic devices (steam, power washing
detergents).
E. Sign Housing. Sign housing shall be of all aluminum construction. Construct the back
panel display construct the sign back panel and display boarder with 1/8-in. thick
5052-H32 aluminum alloy or approved equivalent. Use aluminum alloy 6061-T6 or
6063-T5 for framing structural members. The housing shall provide front access
design for serving internal maintenance items. The front access panels shall utilize
vertical hinges with gravity braces to hold the panel open at 90 degrees.
1. The sign housing shall have a forced air ventilation system with filtered air
intakes and weatherproof exhaust panels. The ventilation shall be controlled
automatically by an internal temperature sensor or by communicated
commands. The ventilation system shall be able to keep the sign and housing
operating within the specified environmental requirements. Other variations of
housing may also be acceptable upon review and approval of the engineer.
F. Electronic Components.
16725-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Ensure the system and associated circuitry conform to the requirements in

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Title 47, Sub Part B, Section 15;
Regulations Concerning the Emission of Electronic Noise.
G. Mechanical Components. Provide stainless steel external screws, nuts, and locking
washers. Do not use self tapping screws unless approved. Provide corrosion resistant
materials which are resistant to fungus growth and moisture deterioration. When
dissimilar metals are used, separate them with an inert dielectric material. For
pertinent components submit an independent laboratory certification of compliance
with associated sections of NEMA TS 2 and TS 4 standards.
H. Message. Ensure characters displayed adhere to MUTCD and AASHTO DMS

standards. Ensure the brightness of the characters displayed on the sign provide
optimum legibility during every lighting condition.
I. Pixel Optical Characteristics.
1. Each pixel consists of Aluminum Indium Gallium Phosphide-type (AlInGaP)

amber LEDs emitting a wave length of 592 nano-meters (amber). Ensure
every pixel has the same pitch (horizontal and vertical) across the display.
Ensure pixel size to be 1.75x1.75 inches.
2. Ensure the optical characteristics comply with NEMA TS4 requirements in

every aspect including: Contrast ratio, Luminance, Chromaticity, 30o Cone of
Vision, etc.
3. Ensure the pixels in this project have equal color and on-axis intensity.
Furnish proof through submission of LED bin and batch information.
4. Automatic control pixel brightness to compensate for differences in ambient

light level, i.e. daytime, night.
J. Pixel Status Monitoring
1. Pixel Test. Test the full operational status of each pixel and report the status to
the local sign controller. Upon request from central, identify a list of modules
with defective pixels. The pixel test may briefly disturb the displayed message
for less than 0.5 sec.
2. Pixel Read. Report back to the local controller which pixels are on/off. Upon
request from central, provide a list of which pixels are on/off. Ensure pixel
read does not interfere with the displayed message.
K. Display Modules (Full-Matrix): Assemble display modules to form a continuous full

matrix message display. Provide each display module with a connector for power and
a connector for controls and data.
16725-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Each display module at a minimum must include an LED display circuit board
containing LED pixels arranged into a 27X48 matrix and displaying minimum
12 in. high character. Each pixel should consist of 1.75x1.75 inches. All
display modules provided by one manufacturer must be interchangeable
throughout that manufacturer’s sign system and not require any address
switches or adjustment when interchanged or placed in service. Module
addressing, where required, must be accomplished in the connector. Ensure
the LED DMS consists of sufficient modules to provide the number of lines
and rows of characters as shown on plans. Ensure the replacement of a
complete display module is possible without the use of any tools. Interconnect
modules through keyed connectors only to preclude improper hookups. The
maximum horizontal and vertical pixel pitch spacing on each module shall be
1.70 inches (+/- 0.10 in.).
L. Photoelectric Sensor Devices. Provide photocells that cause automatic light intensity
adjustment. Install 3 photocells on the sign. Install 1 photocell to measure the “DAY”
and “NIGHT” threshold. Install the other 2 on the front of the sign to measure the
“OVERBRIGHT” threshold.
1. Enable the brightness to be manually adjustable from the local sign controller
in 1% increments. Enable the brightness control to be returned to automatic
from the sign controller, laptop, or the central controller.
M. Sign Display Dimensions. Sign display panel size is not to be larger than 144” wide
and 72” high. Display dimension may vary only by approval of the engineer.
1. For distance between characters and line, follow NEMA TS4 requirements for
full matrix as appropriate.
N. Display Border. Provide the DMS with an 8 in. minimum matte black border.
Position the border such that the front surface is flush with the display and the display
edge does not interfere with installation or removal of the display modules.
O. Surface Finish. Finish the other traffic facing surfaces with a matte black, licensed
factory applied KYNAR 500 Resin, fluoropolymer based coating system. Submit the
certification from the licensed factory KYNAR 500 coater. Alternatives to KYNAR
500 will not be accepted. Provide a natural aluminum mill finish on the other exterior
metal surfaces. No painted surfaces will be permitted.
P. Environmental Behavior. Furnish signs and associated field electronics that operate
without any decrease in performance over the NEMA TS2 temperature range of –
40°F to + 165°F with a relative humidity of up to 95%. Need ventilation system
temperature controls, fan, etc.
Q. Main Power Supply and Energy Distribution.
1. Design the sign and its controller for use on the following:
16725-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
a. Power Line Voltage - 120/240 (±10%) VAC Nominal, single-phase

power, protected by one 40 A circuit breaker(s)
b. Frequency – 60 Hz ±3 Hz
2. Sign Power. Furnish a power supply with a minimum efficiency of 80% when
operated at 50% to 100 % of maximum load. Furnish a power supply with a
power factor of 0.95 or greater at operating voltage from 50% to 100% of
maximum load.
3. Including voltage surge protection to withstand the following:
a. Primary Input Power Interruption. Use material that meets the

requirements of “Power Interruption” section of the NEMA Standard
TS2, latest revision.
b. Power Service Transients. Use material that meets the requirements of

“High Repetition, Low-Energy Transients” section of NEMA Standard
c. Power Service Transients. Use material that meets the requirements of

“Low Repetition, High-Energy Transients” section of NEMA Standard
d. Provide Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFI) devices to protect each

service outlet.
e. Ensure exposed cables are Type XHHW and sized as required by the
NEC.
R. Field Equipment Cabinet. Mount a NEMA 3R single-door enclosure, of sufficient

size to house the electronic equipment, to the support structure unless otherwise
shown in the plans. Provide a minimum of one empty fold down 10 in. X 10 in. shelf.
Provide a shelf capable of supporting a 20 lb. load.
1. Provide the following items in the field equipment cabinet:
a. Power-on indicator
b. Room for communication devices called out in the plans.
c. Remote communications port – Ethernet plug-in connector for remote

communications with sign controller
d. Local communications port – Ethernet plug-in connection for the

laptop computer to communicate locally with sign controller
e. One Ethernet cable, a minimum of 4 ft. long, to connect the laptop

computer to the local communications port
16725-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
f. Waterproof local/remote switch and LED indicator
g. A minimum of one GFI protected duplex outlet
h. Power protection/distribution panel
2. Construct the field equipment cabinet using 0.125 in. thick unpainted sheet
aluminum. Continuously weld the exterior seams for cabinets and doors.
Smooth the exterior welds.
3. Furnish the cabinet with one full size door to provide access to the cabinet.
Provide the door with 3 hinges, or a full length stainless steel piano hinge,
with stainless steel pins spot welded at the top. Mount the hinges so that it is
not possible to remove them from the door or cabinet without first opening the
door. Brace the door and hinges to withstand a 100 lb. per vertical ft. of door
height load applied vertically to the outer edge of the door when standing
open. There must be no permanent deformation or impairment of any part of
the door or cabinet body when the load is removed.
4. Fit the cabinet door with a number 2 Corbin lock. Provide 2 keys for each
cabinet. Provide cabinet doors that are also pad lockable.
5. Double flange the door opening on all four sides.
6. Provide a gasket to seal the cabinet door facing, use a closed-cell neoprene
gasket material that maintains its resiliency after exposure to the outdoor
environment. Ensure the gasket does not show sign of rolling or sagging.
7. Submit shop drawings of the cabinet for approval by the Engineer before
installation.
8. Silk-screen the markings and identification on the power protection panel and
seal with a clear sealer, acrylic, or as approved.
S. Main Power Supply and Energy Distribution.
1. Design the sign and its controller for use on the following:
a. Power Line Voltage - 120/240 VAC Nominal, single-phase power,

protected by one 40 A. two-pole (common trip) main circuit breaker.
The system must operate within a voltage range of 95 VAC to 135
VAC.
b. Frequency – 60 Hz. ±3 Hz.
2. Under normal operation, the drop in voltage between no load and full load of
the sign and its controller must not exceed 10% of the nominal voltage.
16725-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
3. Protect the system by two stages of transient voltage with solid state surge
protection suppression devices on the incoming power line. If enabled by the
central controller, tripping of both stages of surge protection must prevent
power from reaching any components of the sign. Tripping of each stage of
the surge protection must cause the sign controller to call central and report
the error condition (for dialup operation) or report the error condition to
central on the next poll (for multi-drop operation). Also low voltage surge
protection suppression for copper cables for signal distribution entering or
exiting the cabinet shall be provided.
4. Provide power protection by a thermal magnetic circuit breaker associated

with a 5 mA ground fault circuit interruption (GFI) device. A GFI device must
protect all service outlets.
5. The sign must have a 100 A. 240/120 VAC, two-pole load center with 6-
circuit capability. Power each circuit in the sign from a separate circuit
breaker.
6. The power cables must be type XHHW and sized as required by the NEC for
acceptable voltage drop to supply AC power to the sign.
7. Uninterruptible Power. Provide an uninterruptible power supply to maintain

the controller and communications for 2 hr. The batteries must be sealed and
contained to protect the sign from damage should there be a leak.
T. Sign Controller. Provide a sign controller with resident software. Perform the
communication, control, and feedback functions for the DMS through the local sign
controller. Sign controller shall use solid state hard drive (no moving parts).
1. Send and receive messages from the sign controller through the
communication demarcation shown in the plans, via the remote
communications port housed in the field equipment cabinet.
2. Ensure the communications ports and the sign act in accordance with the
commands defined in the latest version of TxDOT’s Special Specification,
“National Transportation Communications for ITS Protocol for Dynamic
Message Signs.”
3. Modes of Operation. The mode of operation determines which level of control

governs the DMS message selection. Provide the following modes of
operation:
a. Master- the DMS master [central controller] or attached local laptop

determines the appropriate message or test pattern.
b. Local - the sign controller is used to determine the appropriate

message, test pattern, sign configuration, and diagnostics.
16725-10
CITY OF HOUSTON
c. Neutral - the rest/restore state for the display. Provide a neutral state
that is user programmable and set as blank as a factory default.
d. Test – the test patterns provided by the manufacturer to determine the

functional and non-functional pixels.
4. Use a hardware watchdog circuit to provide automatic reset of sign controller

in the event of failure.
5. Ensure the sign controller prevents improper information from being

displayed in the event of a system malfunction.
6. Operate the sign controllers such that malfunction of any sign controller
results in a rest in neutral state and does not affect the operation of any other
sign in the DMS system.
7. In the event of a communications failure with the DMS central controller,

ensure the local sign controller sets the sign to neutral after a defined number
of minutes, as shown on the plans, unless communications are restored within
this period.
U. DMS Master Controller and Software.
1. Software Requirements. Build the DMS Master Controller software as a 32-

bit Windows application to be run under the latest Microsoft Windows version
or the version as directed.
2. The DMS shall be compatible with current legacy TranStar operating software
and hardware and the 2004 (or latest) NTCIP for DMS.
3. Furnish software that is a graphical user interface based program designed for
DMS system integration, control, and automation.
4. Provide the server version of this software along with a Microsoft Windows
Server. Install the client version of this software must be installed on the
operator workstations as shown on the plans.
5. Design the DMS Master Controller software to be user friendly, have full
mouse support, and utilize window-driven color screens.
6. Furnish software capable of controlling a minimum of 250 dynamic message

signs. Furnish a DMS Master Controller capable of controlling at least 8
dynamic message signs per channel. Reference the signs by 19 character
minimum text names. Sign numbers or cryptic abbreviations will not be
allowed.
7. Provide asynchronous communication with the signs compatible with NTCIP

1203(DMS) over Ethernet.
16725-11
CITY OF HOUSTON
8. Provide a user selectable communications data rate.
9. Furnish DMS Master Controller software that drives signs of different sizes
up to 4 lines of characters, with a maximum of 30 characters per line.
10. Furnish DMS Master Controller software that checks each message entered
against the size of the sign. If the message size exceeds the limit for the sign,
ensure the DMS Master Controller rejects the message for storage or display.
In this case, ensure an error message displays on the DMS Master Controller
CRT and is logged in the log file for permanent record. If the operator has font
access privileges, ensure the software offers the option of compressed fonts or
reduced character spacing before canceling the request and recording an error.
11. Furnish DMS Master Controller software that polls each connected sign for
status retrieval at user specified time intervals, or once every 60 seconds by
default.
12. Furnish DMS Master Controller software that polls the sign controllers for the
status of the LED power supply voltages. When a low voltage message is
received, ensure the sign is be blanked by the sign controller and that this
error message is displayed on the DMS Master Controller CRT and logged in
the log file for permanent record.
13. Furnish DMS Master Controller software that includes a function to view the
status and current display of the connected signs as retrieved at the last
polling, in both system and sign-by-sign modes. Include in the DMS Master
Controller software a pixel test to view the operational status of each pixel and
display the status as a function of the pixel's location for each individual sign.
The operational pixel status will specify 5 different states for each pixel - fully
operational, half out, fully out, half stuck on, or fully stuck on. On the DMS
Master Controller CRT, ensure the operational pixel status is displayed in a
graphical, pixelated, "WYSIWYG" format of the sign face showing each and
every pixel and its associated status by showing each pixel state in a different
color. Initiate the pixel test once a day and on command.
14. Ensure a list of defective pixels is logged in the log file for permanent record
and printed on command, listing pixel status, sign number, module number,
column number, and pixel number.
15. Furnish DMS Master Controller software that includes a function to view the
operational status of the fans and displays each individual fan number and the
corresponding fan status for each sign in the system. Initiate a fan test on
command and once a day. Ensure that failure of a sign fan generates an error
message displayed on the DMS Master Controller CRT and logged in the log
file for permanent record.
16725-12
CITY OF HOUSTON
16. Furnish DMS Master Controller software that polls the sign controllers for the
temperature readings from the temperature sensors in each individual sign.
Ensure that a temperature reading greater than a programmable level causes a
blanking message to be sent to the sign and an error message to be displayed
on the DMS Master Controller CRT and logged in the log file for permanent
record. Furnish DMS Master Controller software that polls the sign controller
for errors and failures, including:
a. Data channel availability and Data transmission error
b. Communications failure recovery
c. Power recovery
d. Pixel status
e. Fan status
f. Temperature status
g. Power supply status
17. Furnish DMS Master Controller software that polls the sign controller for the
following information:
a. Actual message that is visibly displayed on the sign on an individual

pixel basis
b. Current sign illumination level
c. Local Control Panel switch position (Master or local)
d. Error and failure reports
e. Temperature readings
f. Power supply voltage levels
g. Heater status
h. Uninterruptible power supply status if available
18. Furnish DMS Master Controller that receives calls from sign controllers for
any of the following conditions at each sign:
a. AC power failure
b. AC power recovery
16725-13
CITY OF HOUSTON
19. Ensure any malfunction of a connected sign is recorded in the log file and a
printout is made.
20. Provide a DMS Master Controller software system that is easily

programmable to support any type of printer.
21. Furnish DMS Master Controller software that permits access by a minimum
of 16 users, with each user identified by a name, password, and access rights.
22. To gain access to the system, require each user to enter a name and password
which is recorded in the log file.
23. Make access rights fully programmable by levels for each user, enabling the
user to access only those functions which the user is cleared to access.
24. Ensure that each event, including log on attempts by non-authorized users, is
recorded in a log file and, if a printer is connected, printed. Include in the
record: The event number, date/time, sign name/user name, and event
description. Store status logs in a database.
25. Furnish DMS Master Controller software that displays and prints any log file
on the system sorted by user’s login, sign event, date/time, sign name, or any
combination of the above.
26. Furnish DMS Master Controller that creates, modifies, and stores sign
libraries consisting of up to 640 messages on hard disk. Store the messages by
12 character (minimum) text names. Message numbers or cryptic
abbreviations are not allowed.
27. Logically group the messages into libraries, allowing the software to control
signs of different sizes and types. Furnish a DMS Master Controller capable
of assigning messages to multiple libraries to minimize program set-up time
and repetitive data entry.
28. Furnish a DMS Master Controller that displays on a sign an existing message,
a modified message, a new message, or an immediate message.
29. Furnish a DMS Master Controller that shows messages in a graphical,

pixelated, "WYSIWYG" format of what will actually be displayed on the sign
face before a message is manually downloaded to the sign controller. Enable
new messages and editing of messages to also be performed in this graphical
"WYSIWYG" format.
30. Include in the central software a display window which accurately reflects the
message, in graphical, pixelated "WYSIWYG" format, as it is visibly
displayed on the sign, including different colors for pixels which are on, half-
on and off. Also include in this graphical, pixelated, "WYSIWYG" format,
flashing and alternating displays.
16725-14
CITY OF HOUSTON
31. Furnish a DMS Master Controller that normally displays single stroke (5 x 7)
characters with double-column spacing between characters on the signs.
Furnish a DMS Master Controller that is also able to display compressed (4 x
7), expanded (6 x 7), or double-stroke (7 x 7) character fonts or is able to
change the default spacing between characters on the signs. Provide spacing
options that are one, two, or three pixel columns. Ensure each font is fully
customizable, and that the DMS Master Controller is capable of downloading
any modifications to the sign controller at any time without any software or
hardware modifications.
32. Furnish a DMS Master Controller capable of displaying a self-updating time,

temperature, and date display on the signs.
33. Furnish a DMS Master Controller that includes a window which can modify
any character of any font by using the mouse to turn on and off pixels of a
graphical, pixelated, "WYSIWYG" character. Ensure the DMS Master
Controller then downloads the revised font to the sign controllers.
34. Furnish a DMS Master Controller that includes a window which shows the
characters of any font in a graphical, pixelated, "WYSIWYG" format.
35. Furnish a DMS Master Controller that has time of day schedules for any or all
signs in the system.
36. Furnish a DMS Master Controller that creates or modifies 32 scenarios. A

scenario consists of display definitions attached to signs. Start the displays on
the respective signs either manually from the keyboard or as part of the time
of day schedule. The display definitions may include messages, blanks, static,
alternating, or flashing messages.
37. Furnish DMS Master Controller software that provides a function to

automatically change the time on the DMS Master Controller and in each
local sign controller due to changes for daylight savings time. Ensure the
software then automatically advances the clock 1 hour, and sets back the clock
1 hour when the exact time to start and end daylight savings time is reached,
respectively. Also, ensure the function automatically adjusts for leap years.
38. Furnish a DMS Master Controller that includes a window to easily customize
the brightness table of any sign controller and downloads this new table into
the nonvolatile memory of the sign controller.
39. Furnish DMS Master Controller software that allows remote terminals to
communicate with the DMS system. Provide communication with the DMS
Master Controller through dedicated, Ethernet, or dial-up lines.
16725-15
CITY OF HOUSTON
40. Furnish DMS Master Controller software that checks each message entered
for spelling errors and prompts to the attention of the user any misspelled
words for editing and confirmation. In addition to spelling, ensure the
software checks the message against an approved/disapproved words list.
Ensure the operator is notified of any disapproved words found and the
disapproved message is recorded in the log. Ensure messages containing
disapproved words are not displayed on the signs.
41. Furnish DMS Master Controller software that automatically logs off any
operator after a user specified time of keyboard inactivity.
42. Provide each function of the DMS Master Controller with a context sensitive
help screen.
43. Furnish a DMS Master Controller able to utilize any Ethernet port for any
function, including remote terminal communications, and that supports
simultaneous communication with at least 3 remote terminals on dial-up or
dedicated lines.
44. Message Display Time. For each message, enable the operator to define either
a display time in hours and minutes (maximum 99 hours and 59 minutes), or
an unlimited display time.
45. Furnish a DMS Master Controller capable of performing the following

functions:
a. Display a message on the signs, including:
(1) Static messages
(2) Flashing messages
(3) Alternating messages
46. Ensure it is possible to separately vary the flashing and alternating

frequencies.
47. Provide flashing messages with the following adjustable timing:
a. Message time on, 0.5 to 5.0 seconds in 0.1 second increments
b. Message time off, 0.5 to 5.0 seconds in 0.1 second increments. Ensure
it is possible to flash any character or set of characters in a static
message
48. Provide alternating messages with the following adjustable timing:
a. Primary message time on, 0.5 to 5.0 seconds in 0.1 second increments
16725-16
CITY OF HOUSTON
b. Primary message time off, 0 to 5.0 seconds in 0.1 second increments
c. Alternate message time on, 0.5 to 5.0 seconds in 0.1second increments
d. Alternate message time off, 0 to 5.0 seconds in 0.1second increments
49. Ensure it is possible to flash any character or set of characters in an alternating

message at the adjustable frequencies listed above for flashing messages. In
this case, make the flashing period submultiples of the alternating on time it is
associated with.
50. Furnish software capable of programming events, enabling the user to select a
specific preprogrammed event to display multiple and different types of
messages on multiple and different types of DMS. Ensure this software is able
to hold a minimum of 956 pre-programmed events.
V. Vendor Diagnostic Software. Install in the City of Houston maintenance laptops

Vendor Diagnostic Software that provides the following capabilities as a minimum:
1. DMS startup
2. Onsite maintenance which includes complete diagnostic of the sign, with

screens and commands similar to the DMS master controller software
3. Remote Terminal functions, with screens and commands identical to the DMS
master controller software to maintain operator familiarity
4. Display any message stored in the sign controller PROM
5. Create a new message to display on the dynamic message sign
6. Start a "test pattern" display to check and verify each individual pixel of the
sign
7. Create a non-volatile activity log, for later transfer to the DMS Master
Controller, in order to maintain a complete historical record if the DMS
Master Controller is unable to do so.
8. Communications with the DMS Master Controller and provide remote access
to the DMS Master functions.
16725-17
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. The equipment covered by this Specification shall be subjected to design approval

tests and factory demonstration tests (FDT) at the Contractor-provided facility in the
Houston area to determine conformance with all the Specification requirements. The
Engineer may accept certification by an independent testing lab in lieu of the design
approval tests, to verify that the design approval tests have previously been
satisfactorily completed. The Contractor shall arrange for and conduct the tests in
accordance with the testing requirements stated herein. Unless otherwise specified,
the Contractor is responsible for satisfying all inspection requirements prior to
submission for the Engineer’s inspection and acceptance.
B. The Engineer reserves the right to have the Engineer’s representative witness all
design approval tests and factory demonstration tests. The results of each test shall be
compared with the requirements specified herein. Failure to conform to the
requirements of any test shall be counted as a defect, and the equipment shall be
subject to rejection by the Engineer. Rejected equipment may be offered again for a
retest, provided that all non-compliance’s have been corrected and retested by the
Contractor and evidence thereof submitted to the Engineer.
C. The tests on all or one type of equipment must be completed within 5 days. Any
delays in performing all these tests will result in the Contractor paying the additional
costs of providing the Engineer's representatives for the additional testing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Perform tests in accordance with TxDOT Special Specification 6005, “Testing,

Training, Documentation, Final Acceptance, and Warranty.” Additional testing
requirements are as follows:
1. Verification of NTCIP Compliance. The City of Houston will verify, through

use of the NTCIP Tester (supplied by the vendor or contractor). The shell
equipment complies with the requirements of NEMA NTCIP 2001:1996
NTCIP Class B Profile and TS 3.6-1997 NTCIP Object Definitions for DMS.
2. System Tests. Conduct approved DMS system tests on the field equipment
with the central equipment. The tests must, as a minimum, exercise all remote
control functions and display the return status codes from the controller for a
minimum of 72 hr. Complete and submit approved data forms as the basis for
review and for rejection or acceptance. If system tests fail because of any
components in the subsystem, correct or substitute the particular components
with other components and repeat the tests. If a component has been modified
as result of the system test failure, prepare a report and delivered it to the
Engineer before retesting.
16725-18
CITY OF HOUSTON
3. If technical data are not considered adequate for approval, samples may be
requested for testing by the Engineer. The contract period will be not extended
for time lost or delays caused by testing prior to final City of Houston
approval of any items.
B. Final inspection and acceptance of equipment shall be made after installation at the
designated location as shown on the plans, unless otherwise specified herein.
C. Test Procedures. The Contractor shall provide 5 copies of all design approval, factory
demonstration, stand-alone and subsystem test procedures and data forms for the
Engineer's approval at least 60 days prior to the day the tests are to begin. The test
procedures shall include the sequence in which the tests will be conducted. The test
procedures shall have the Engineer's approval prior to submission of equipment for
tests.
1. The Contractor shall furnish data forms containing all of the data taken, as
well as quantitative results for all tests. The data forms shall be signed by an
authorized representative (company official) of the equipment manufacturer.
At least one copy of the data forms shall be sent to the Engineer.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing the test fixtures and test
instruments for all the tests.
D. Design Approval Tests. Design approval tests shall be conducted by the Contractor
on one or more samples of equipment of each type, as approved by the Engineer, to
determine if the design of the equipment meets the requirements of this Specification.
The test shall be conducted in accordance with the approved test procedures as
described in above.
1. The Engineer shall be notified a minimum of 30 calendar days in advance of

the time these tests are to be conducted. The design approval tests shall cover
the following:
a. Temperature and Condensation. The field equipment described in

Articles 2., 4. and 5. specified for the Factory Demonstration Tests
(FDT) shall be successfully performed under the following conditions
in the order specified below:
(1) The equipment shall be stabilized at –30°F (-25°C). After

stabilization at this temperature, the equipment shall be
operated without degradation for 2 hours.
(2) Moisture shall be caused to condense on the equipment by

allowing it to warm up to room temperature in an atmosphere
having relative humidity of at least 40% and the equipment
shall be satisfactorily operated for 2 hours while wet.
16725-19
CITY OF HOUSTON
(3) The equipment shall be stabilized at 165°F (65°C). After

stabilization, the equipment shall be satisfactorily operated for
2 hours without degradation or failure.
b. Primary Power Variation. The sign controller equipment shall meet the
specified performance requirements when the nominal input voltage is
120 VAC ± 12 VAC. The equipment shall be operated at the extreme
limits for at least 15 min. during which the operational test of the FDT
shall be successfully performed.
c. Relative Humidity. The equipment shall meet its performance

requirements when subjected to a temperature of 165°F (65°C) and a
relative humidity of 90%. The equipment shall be maintained at the
above condition for 48 hours. At the conclusion of the 48-hour soak,
the equipment shall meet the requirements of the operational test of the
FDT within 30 minutes of beginning the test.
d. Vibration. The equipment (excluding cabinets) shall show no

degradation of mechanical structure, soldered components, or plug-in
components and shall operate in accordance with the manufacturer's
equipment specifications after being subjected to the vibration tests as
described in “Vibration Test” section of the NEMA standard TS2,
latest edition.
e. Consequences of Design Approval Test Failure. If the unit fails the

design approval test, the design fault shall be corrected and the entire
design approval test shall be repeated. All deliverable units shall be
modified, without additional costs to the City of Houston, to include
design changes required to pass the design approval tests.
E. Demonstration Test. The Contractor shall be responsible for conducting

demonstration tests on all units at a Contractor-provided facility within the Houston
area. These tests shall be performed on each unit supplied. The Engineer shall be
notified a minimum of 30 calendar days before the start of tests.
1. All tests shall be conducted in accordance to requirements of article 2.02. The

contractor shall write the test procedure for approval by the engineer. Each
equipment shall have passed the following individual tests:
a. Examination of Product. Each equipment shall be examined carefully

to verify that the materials, design, construction, markings and
workmanship comply with the requirements of the Specification.
b. Continuity Tests. The wiring shall be checked to determine

conformance with the requirements of the appropriate paragraphs in
the Specifications.
16725-20
CITY OF HOUSTON
c. Operational Test. Each equipment shall be operated long enough to

permit equipment temperature stabilization, and to check and record an
adequate number of performance characteristics to ensure compliance
with the requirements of this Specification.
2. The status of each sign pixel shall be tested and reported to the local sign
controller upon request from central. The test shall identify a list of modules
with defective pixels and a list of which pixels are not operating properly.
3. Consequences of Demonstration Test Failure. If any unit fails to pass its

demonstration test, the unit shall be corrected, and another unit substituted in
its place and the test successfully repeated.
4. If a unit has been modified as a result of a demonstration test failure, a report

shall be prepared and delivered to the Engineer prior to shipment of the unit.
The report shall describe the nature of the failure and the corrective action
taken.
5. If a failure pattern develops, the Engineer may direct that design and
construction modifications be made to all units without additional cost to the
City of Houston or extension of the contract period.
F. Stand-Alone Test. The Contractor shall conduct an approved stand-alone test of the
equipment installation at the field site. The test shall, as a minimum, exercise all
stand-alone (non-network) functional operations of the field equipment with all of the
equipment installed as per the plans, or as directed by the Engineer.
1. Approved data forms shall be completed and turned over to the Engineer as
the basis for review and rejection or acceptance. At least 30 working days'
notice shall be given prior to all tests to permit the Engineer or Engineer’s
representative to observe each test.
2. Consequences of Stand-Alone Test Failure. If any unit fails to pass its stand-
alone test, the unit shall be corrected, or another unit substituted in its place
and the test successfully repeated.
3. If a unit has been modified as a result of a stand-alone test failure, a report

shall be prepared and delivered to the Engineer prior to the retesting of the
unit. The report shall describe the nature of the failure and the corrective
action taken.
4. If a failure pattern develops, the Engineer may direct that design and
construction modifications be made to all units without additional cost to the
City of Houston or extension of the contract period.
16725-21
CITY OF HOUSTON
G. System Integration Test. The Contractor shall conduct approved DMS system tests on
the field equipment with the master equipment. The tests shall, as a minimum,
exercise all remote control functions and display the return status codes from the
controller for a minimum of 72 hours. Approved data forms shall be completed and
turned over to the Engineer as the basis for review and for rejection or acceptance.
1. Consequence of System Test Failure. If system tests fail because of any

component(s) in the subsystem, the particular component(s) shall be corrected
or substituted with other component(s) and the tests shall be repeated. If a
component has been modified as a result of the system test failure, a report
shall be prepared and delivered to the Engineer prior to retesting.
H. Seventy-two Hour and 90-Day Test Periods. After the installation of the DMS system
is completed and the successful completion of the System Test, the Contractor shall
conduct one continuous 72-hour full operating test prior to conducting a 90-day test
period. The type of test to be conducted shall be approved by the Engineer, and shall
consist primarily of exercising all control, monitor and communications functions of
the field equipment by the master equipment.
1. The 90 days test period shall commence on the first day after the successful
completion of the approved 72-hour continuous full operating test period.
2. During the 90 days test period, downtime, due to mechanical, electrical and/or
other malfunctions, shall not exceed 5 working days. The Engineer may
extend the 90 days test period by a number of days equal to the downtime in
excess of 5 working days.
3. The Engineer will furnish the Contractor with a letter of approval stating the
first day of the 90 days test period.
I. Provide documentation, training, final acceptance and warranty in accordance with

TxDOT Special Specification 6005, “Testing, Training, Documentation, Final
Acceptance, and Warranty.” In addition, provide the following technical assistance
and references:
1. Require the manufacturer's representative presence to assist the Contractor's

technical personnel at each sign installation site to provide technical assistance
in following areas:
a. Sign to structure installation
b. Field equipment cabinet installation
c. Sign to controller cabling
d. Do not execute the initial powering up of the signs without the

permission of the manufacturer's representative.
16725-22
CITY OF HOUSTON
END OF SECTION
16725-23
CITY OF HOUSTON TRAFFIC SIGNAL
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION SAW-CUT LOOP DETECTOR
SECTION 16727
TRAFFIC SIGNAL SAW-CUT LOOP DETECTOR
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Loop Detectors
1. This specification and detailed drawings describe the materials and

installation procedures necessary to install loop detectors in roadways in the
City of Houston. Basically, the inductive loop detector consists of a few turns
of wire embedded in the roadway pavement which are connected to an
electronic component mounted in a roadside cabinet. The detector is designed
so that the passage of a vehicle over the loop in the pavement modifies the
magnetic flux around the resonantly tuned loops of wire which is sensed by a
transistorized unit that transmits the vehicle presence or passage to the traffic
signal controller. Since traffic signal timing and sequencing are totally
dependent on the quality and placement of the loops, craftsman type skills
must be exercised on installation procedures. Loops may be adjusted by the
Engineer, as necessary.
B. Card Rack Amplifiers
1. These specifications define the minimum acceptable design, operational and

functional performance requirements for high performance, two-channel
inductive loop vehicle detector units and data acquisition software that can
provide binned traffic data and real- time traffic measurements on a vehicle-
by-vehicle basis. The system shall provide current measurements and vehicle
detection information on the last vehicle for use in local control, incident
detection and advanced traffic management systems.
A. Unit Prices.
1. Measurement: This Item will be measured by the linear foot of sawcut

containing loop wire and by each two (2) channel detector amplifier.
Deviation of the Contractor from the layout on the drawings will require prior
approval of the Engineer.
16727-1
2. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and
bid for “Loop Detector Sawcut” for the various sizes and types of loop
detectors specified on the drawings furnished and installed. This price shall be
full compensation for furnishing, installing and testing the loop detectors; and
for all labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
3. Loop detector amplifiers as measured under “Measurement” will be paid for

at the unit price bid for “Two Channel Detector Amplifiers” furnished and
installed. This price shall be full compensation for furnishing, installing, and
testing the loop detector amplifiers.
4. The City of Houston shall not be required to pay for software and/or hardware
related modifications or changes and/or for associated labor that is required to
correct errors.
5. The City of Houston shall be required to pay for any software and/or
hardware- related modifications or changes and/or for associated labor that
result from requested options, features or enhancements.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. IMSA Spec. No. 51-5-1985 – Loop Detection Wire
B. International Municipal Signal Association, Specification #50-2
C. NEMA TS2-2021 – Traffic Controller Assemblies with NTCIP Requirements
D. Texas Department of Transportation Traffic Signal Work Typical Detail/Traffic

Signal Barricade and Signs
E. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices, latest revision
F. UL 510 - Standard for Safety for Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber
Insulating Tape
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Detectors shall be warranted against defects in workmanship or materials for five (5)
years from date of purchase.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 LOOP DETECTOR MATERIALS
A. Flexible embedding sealer shall meet the following minimum specifications:
16727-2
1. The flexible embedding sealer shall be designed to enable vehicular traffic to

pass over the properly filled saw cut immediately after installation without
tracking or stringing of the material. The flexible embedding sealer shall form
a surface skin allowing exposure to vehicular traffic within 30 minutes at 75
degrees F. And completely cure to a tough, rubber-like consistency in two to
seven days after installation.
2. Properly installed and cured flexible embedding sealer shall exhibit resistance
to effects of weather, vehicular abrasion, motor oils, gasoline, anti-freeze
solution, brake fluid, deicing chemicals and salt normally encountered, in such
a manner that the performance of the vehicle detector loop wire is not
adversely affected.
3. Flexible embedding sealer shall be applicable to both Portland cement

concrete and asphalt concrete pavements.
4. The flexible embedding sealer shall exhibit minimal shrinkage during or after
its installation, and in no manner affect the performance characteristics of the
material.
5. The flexible embedding sealer shall be designed to permit clean-up of material

and application equipment with non-flammable solvents such as l.l.l.
trichloroethane or Scotch-Grip Brand Solvent No. 4 (Prior to curing of
flexible embedding sealer)). Should any flexible embedding sealer material be
allowed to cure in the application nozzle, it shall be able to be pulled our as a
solid plug.
6. The flexible embedding sealer shall have a minimum 12 month shelf life in
undamaged original containers when stored in a cool, dry environment.
7. The flexible embedding sealer shall be designed for roadway installation when
the surface temperature is between 40 degrees F and 140 degrees F.
8. The flexible embedding sealer shall have the following physical properties in
its uncured and cured states.
a. Physical Properties of the uncured (wet) flexible embedding sealer:
Property Requirement Test Procedures

Weight 10.1 lbs/gal (+/- 0.5 lbs) Weight/Gallon
Viscosity 10,000-85,000 CPS Viscosity
Drying Time 24 hrs. (max) Tack-Free Time
Skinning Time 6 hrs.
b. Physical Properties of the cured flexible embedding sealer:
16727-3
Property Requirement Test Procedure

Hardness (Indentation) 65-85 Rex Hardness
Tensile Strength 700 psi (min.) Tensile & Elongation
Elongation 250% Tensile & Elongation
B. Loop wire shall be IMSA Spec. No. 51-5-1985, #14 AWG, copper, stranded, single
conductor pvc/nylon-with tube jacket. The maximum O.D. of the entire cable shall be
0.260 inches.
2.02 CARD RACK DETECTOR AMPLIFIER
A. General Design Requirements
1. A communication link shall provide remote access to the detector for reading
unit configuration settings, for fault identification and verification, for real-
time system monitoring and data collection on up to two channels of
detection. It shall include password security to the detector to change
configuration settings. The communication link shall provide for party line
communication on up to eight units using 4-bit hardwired addresses to the
card edge connector and/or 127 software programmable addresses in
EEPROM memory.
2. The interface and data acquisition software shall be organized by application

and facilitate setup, real-time traffic monitoring and collection of binned count
and occupancy data. A vehicle log shall provide a means for logging of
vehicle speed, vehicle length, loop-to-loop travel time and detection duration.
Optional modes of operation shall include a vehicle travel direction detection
setup capability using overlapped 6-foot by 6-foot loops, a long-loop count
mode to provide turning movement counts and a microloop mode selection
when channels are connected to microloop sensors.
3. The successful bidder or contractor shall supply data acquisition and interface
software and vehicle detectors that meet all the operational and functional
performance requirements in accordance with the terms and conditions of this
specification.
4. The bidder or contractor shall be responsible for any testing, rework and/or re-
testing of equipment delivered under this contract that may be required to
meet these specifications, at no expense to the City of Houston.
5. The bidder’s documentation shall indicate the manufacturer's name, address,

model numbers, and include the shipping address for warranty repair work, as
required in these specifications.
6. The City of Houston shall have the option to request and provide the
communication protocols to a professional engineering consultant or OEM for
integrating the data acquisition and interface software into its advanced traffic
management system.
16727-4
7. Serial numbers shall be clearly legible and permanently placed on each

inductive loop detector unit.
B. General Hardware - Standards and Performance Requirements
1. The inductive loop detector units shall be fully interchangeable, whether used
for system counting, occupancy measurement, speed and length measurement,
directional detection, binned data collection, remote data acquisition in
advanced traffic management systems or for local intersection control
(including long-loop counting).
2. Detector configuration data shall be entered using special interface and data
acquisition software. A communication interface shall provide for remote
connection and configuration of detectors, real-time activity monitoring and
data acquisition via modem to remote devices.
3. Inductive loop detector units shall meet the latest edition of the National
Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standard TS2-2021 for Type 2
controller and cabinet assemblies plus the functional and performance
requirements of this specification. The detectors shall be configured as plug-in
devices which meet the requirements for NEMA TS2-2021, actuated Type 2
A2 operation and Type 1 A1 operation in 44-pin input files.
4. Detectors shall comply with NEMA TS2-2021 for four-channel rack mount
type units, NEMA designation “D,” except that Delay and Extension Timing
shall be provided on two channels in lieu of NEMA TS2- 2021 requirements.
5. Detectors shall also be suitable for use in California/New York TYPE 170/179
and ATC cabinets with 22-pin input files.
6. Detectors shall detect and hold the presence of all licensable motor vehicles
(including small motorcycles). This shall be accomplished, without detecting
traffic in the adjacent lane (beyond 36 inches from the loops except as noted
below), on the following loop configurations with 100 up to 1000 feet of
homerun cable.
a. One to six series connected, 6-foot by 6-foot square loops with three
turns of #14 AWG wire.
b. One to six series connected, 6-foot by 6-foot square loops with four
turns of #14 AWG wire.
c. A 6-foot wide by 30-foot long loop with two or three turns of #14
AWG wire (when set to detect small motorcycles, may detect adjacent
lane traffic).
d. A 6-foot wide by 20-foot to 60-foot long quadrupole loop with a

winding two- four-two turns of #14 AWG wire. When sensitivity is set
to detect small motorcycles, adjacent lane traffic shall not be detected.
16727-5
e. Single, double and triple microloop probe sets.
7. The detection performance described above shall be accomplished when using

lead-in/homerun cable lengths of from 50 feet to over 1,000 feet of #14 AWG
conductor homerun cable, i.e., International Municipal Signal Association,
Specification #50-2.
8. A pushwheel switch shall be provided to allow selection of the

threshold/sensitivity setting which will detect and hold presence of all
licensable motor vehicles (including motorcycles), without detecting vehicles,
moving or stopped, in the adjacent lane (36 inches from the loop connected to
this channel, except as noted in Article 2.02.B.6.
9. Each channel shall automatically self tune with full sensitivity, to any loop
and lead-in combination resulting in a total inductance of 20 to 2500
microhenries, with a Q factor of five or greater, within four seconds after
application of power.
10. Detectors shall track changes in inductive loop or lead-in electrical

characteristics that take place when environmental changes occur, which
affect inductive loops installed in undamaged pavement, to insure that units
operate properly without producing a false indication, a loss of detection or a
change in sensitivity due to weather changes.
C. Special Features and Functional Performance Requirements
1. Detectors shall be microprocessor controlled and shall be configurable with

manual switch settings and via software settings in EEPROM memory.
2. Detectors shall include eight sensitivity settings (thresholds), in 2:1 steps.

Threshold settings shall directly relate to nanohenries of inductance change
(Delta L). Detection output shall be based on a response to a change in the
inductance which exceeds the Delta L threshold selected. For a given loop
type, such as a 6- foot by 6-foot, three-turn square loop, it shall not be
necessary to readjust the sensitivity setting to detect a specific vehicle type
and/or to get consistent occupancy measurements using a range of lead-in or
homerun cable lengths that vary from 100 feet up to 3500 feet.
3. Each detector shall have a single, switched oscillator system to sequentially

excite and measure each channel to prevent crosstalk between channels within
a unit.
4. Each detector shall have a three-position toggle switch to manually select one
of three operating frequencies to reduce crosstalk between detector units.
These three frequencies shall also be software selectable.
5. Each detector shall have two serial ports, a front panel RS232 port and
transmit/receive pins on the card edge connector, to facilitate serial
communication.
16727-6
6. Each serial port shall have a multi-drop mode and be capable of party line
communication with up to eight detectors on the party line.
7. The detector unit shall be designed to accommodate the addition of an

optional plug-in communication module to allow expansion of the multi-drop
capability to 32 devices on a common serial port bus and convert the rear port
into an independent port. With the optional module installed, communication
with a PC through the front port shall not interfere with system
communication on the rear serial port.
8. Baud rates shall be selectable at 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200 BPS using
the interface software. With the communication module installed, the baud
rates shall be independently settable for the front and rear serial ports.
9. The unit shall be designed to accommodate either an optional plug-in

communication module or a plug-in memory module to expand the memory
used for on-board count and occupancy binning.
10. The front panel serial port shall have EIA-232 electrical characteristics and
shall terminate with a front panel 6-pin circular Mini-DIN connector.
11. A communication cable with a DB-9 female connector (for a computer serial
port connection) and a 6-pin Mini-DIN male connector (for the front panel
serial port connection) shall be provided with the interface and data
acquisition software. The communication cable shall enable direct
communication with a remote reporting device or a PC running Windows 10
or latest version and shall be compatible with the City's controller and system
software..
12. Units shall have software settable addresses from 128 to 254. Address 255
shall be assigned as a "wildcard" to be used only when connected to the front
panel port to establish connection and read the correct address from the
device.
13. Units shall have 4-bit back panel hardwired addressing capability to allow
selection of one of 16 hard-wired addresses. Back panel addressing shall be
enabled via the interface software.
14. An external 24VDC Green control input shall be provided to control the
output timing. If True (ground level = 0 to +8VDC), the Green input shall
disable Delay and enable Extension Timing; and if False (+16 to +30VDC or
Open), the Green input shall disable Extension and enable Delay Timing.
Software shall provide for an option to disable Green Gating so that Delay or
Extension Timing is provided unconditionally.
15. Detector units shall have a Presence or Pulse mode output option. Selection
shall be via front panel switches or software settable options.
16727-7
16. Each channel shall have a pushwheel sensitivity switch to enable manual
selection of the output mode and sensitivity (threshold) settings as follows:
a. The pushwheel switch shall have an OFF mode position indicated by

an “X” marking. This position shall disable each channel's output and
front panel Detect and Fault indicators.
b. The pushwheel shall have seven Presence mode sensitivity settings.
c. The pushwheel shall have eight Pulse mode sensitivity settings. Pulse
mode settings shall use a square-wave marking over the channel
sensitivity numeral to differentiate from Presence mode settings.
17. Each increase in Presence or Pulse mode settings shall double the sensitivity
(reduce the threshold) from the previous setting.
a. The highest sensitivity (smallest change) setting shall have a Delta L

threshold value of eight nanohenries.
b. The lowest sensitivity setting shall have a Delta L threshold of 1024

nanohenries.
18. Presence output shall hold vehicle detection for at least four minutes
minimum for small licensed motor vehicles (100cc. motorcycles) and for at
least 60 minutes for automobiles before tuning-out vehicles (dropping
recognition of vehicle presence) over a 6-foot by 6-foot square loop with three
or four turns of wire.
a. The presence output shall not tune out when vehicle motion exists
(defined as vehicle entry and departures continue every few minutes
and vehicles remain present in the sensing zone) for at least 60
minutes.
19. In Fast Recovery mode the channel shall recover to full sensitivity within 750
milliseconds after all vehicles leave the inductive loop sensing zone.
20. Pulse mode shall provide a single, 118±5 millisecond, output pulse in
response to an 18-foot long vehicle traveling over a 6-foot by 6-foot loop at
eight miles per hour, and for successive vehicles traveling over the same loop
at speeds ranging from ten to 100 miles per hour, with a one second headway.
Pulse width shall be programmable from interface software.
a. If a vehicle remains over the loop, further detection shall be inhibited

for a 1.9- second re-phase delay. Then full sensitivity shall return
immediately regardless of continued presence of the vehicle. Pulse re-
phase shall be programmable from interface software.
16727-8
21. Detector units shall have optically-isolated FET outputs to provide fail-safe
solid state operation (loss of power to the detector will provide a constant call
to the controller--if it has power).
22. Loop detector channels shall continue to function with a single point to
ground on the loop/lead-in system.
23. Each channel shall have loop measurement capability to continuously verify
loop system integrity. The loop detector shall be capable of detecting and
displaying current and historical faults (a short to ground, an open circuit or an
inductance change  25%) in the inductive loop or lead-in system.
24. Each channel shall have two LED indicator lights on the front panel; a green
"Detect" LED and a red "Fault" LED.
25. The green "Detect" indicator shall indicate detection output status and output
timing in process.
26. It shall indicate an Extend flash while the call output is actuated following a
directional detection.
27. The green "Detect" indicator shall flash during Delay and Extension Timing
to provide a visual indication of timed output.
a. Delay and Extension flash rates shall differ by at least four times the
other's rate. Delay shall be four flashes per second and Extension shall
be 16 flashes per second.
28. The green "Detect" indicator shall be ON continuously during a fault

condition unless fail-safe for a particular condition is disabled using the
interface software.
a. During a fault condition on a channel, the channel shall display a

continuous call indication on its green “Detect” LED and generate a
continuous, fail-safe, output on the primary output, regardless of the
Pulse or Presence operating mode selected.
29. A status output shall provide a serial coded message to external devices
(controllers) that are capable of using the serial information in accordance
with NEMA conventions described in TS2-2021.
30. A red "Fault" LED shall indicate current or historical channel fault condition
(status) and type. The Fault indicator shall flash a coded message during an
open loop condition, a shorted loop system condition and a  25% change
of inductance condition. The associated channel’s red “Fault” LED shall
provide visual indication of fault type and status as follows:
a. OFF state indicates no faults (current or historical).
16727-9
b. ON for one second and one .25 second short pulse indicates a current
open loop fault.
c. A one second ON and two .25 second short pulses indicates a current
shorted loop fault.
d. ON for one second and three short pulses indicates a current greater
than 25% change in inductance fault.
e. A long pulse (six second) followed by a short pulse (.25 second)

indicates a historical open.
f. A long pulse followed by two short pulses indicates a historical

shorted loop.
g. A long pulse followed by three short pulses indicates a historical

greater than 25% change in system inductance fault.
31. A fault indication shall be enabled for as long as the fault remains, except by
turning the channel OFF in software or by selecting the “X” setting on the
sensitivity switch.
32. If the fault heals or is corrected, the affected channel shall immediately retune
and be capable of normal detection. The visual fault indication shall remain
active until reset by a momentary change in the mode or sensitivity setting, a
momentary interruption of power or by pressing a reset switch.
33. Call output for each detector channel shall provide detect durations in
response to an automobile over a three or four turn 6-foot by 6-foot square
inductive loop to enable accurate speed, length and occupancy measurements
by external devices.
a. The detector with a 100 microhenry loop/lead-in attached to each

channel shall, for any negative inductive change which exceeds its
sensitivity threshold, generate a ground true logic level output
response within 13 milliseconds for a sensitivity setting of 128
nanohenries.
b. The detector with a 100 microhenry loop/lead-in attached to each

channel shall, for any negative inductive change which exceeds its
sensitivity threshold, generate a ground true logic level output
response within 20 milliseconds for a sensitivity setting of 64
nanohenries.
34. The output shall become open within the same time limits when such an
inductive change is removed.
35. Loop detectors shall have a multi-position switch to Reset all channels and to
provide Normal and Fast Recovery modes of operation.
16727-10
a. The Fast Recovery setting shall cause the detector to adapt instantly to
large changes of apparent inductance in the non-call direction.
b. The Normal Recovery mode shall cause the detector to adapt, at a

default rate of 0.5 thresholds per second, to apparent changes of
inductance in both directions.
36. Loop detectors shall have a Remote Reset input pin on the card edge
connector. The unit shall reset and establish a new reference for each loop that
is turned ON, when voltage on Pin C is less than eight volts DC for a period of
greater than 17 milliseconds.
37. Delay Timing shall be adjustable from zero to 31 seconds, minimum, in

increments of 1.0 seconds in lieu of NEMA TS2-2021 increments. When
Green Gating is enabled (using the interface software) delay timing shall only
occur if the green input is false.
38. Extension Timing shall be adjustable from zero to 7.75 seconds, minimum, in
increments of 0.25 seconds in lieu of NEMA TS2-2021 increments. When
Green Gating is enabled (using the interface software) extension timing shall
only occur if the green input is true.
39. Setting the Delay or Extend DIP switches on the printed circuit board to OFF
or selecting 0.0-seconds shall disable timing for that channel unless the
override switch is off and Configuration Source is selected to be EEPROM
using the interface software.
40. Each channel shall be capable of being assigned a Long-loop Count mode
using the software.
a. Each channel enabled for Long-loop Count mode shall count each
individual vehicle moving onto or over a single inductive loop which
has a length greater than 20 feet, regardless of previous vehicles being
stationary on, moving over or leaving the detection zone.
b. Each channel shall be configurable for Long-loop Count mode via the
serial communication ports.
c. The Long-loop Count shall be readable via the serial ports.
d. The call output in the Long-loop Count mode shall be a Presence

output.
41. Two channels (channels 1 and 2) shall be capable of being assigned to

Directional Detection mode using the software.
a. The two channels shall be capable of detecting the direction of travel

of a vehicle over two 6-foot by 6-foot overlapping loops.
16727-11
b. The leading edge to leading edge spacing of the overlapping loops

shall be three feet.
c. The directional count shall be stored in the detector and shall be

accessible via the serial ports.
d. The directional count shall be stored in the second channel that detects
the vehicle in the direction of the vehicle’s travel. A call output shall
be generated by the second channel that detects the vehicle in the
direction of the vehicle’s travel.
42. The vehicle detector unit shall be capable of collecting and storing counts and
occupancy in time bins for each channel.
a. The time bin interval of the vehicle detector shall be configurable from
the serial port using the software.
b. The memory of the vehicle detector shall be capable of storing count

and occupancy data in 15 minute time bins for all four channels for 36
hours.
c. The vehicle detector shall be designed to accommodate a plug-in

memory module to expand the on-board memory used for storing the
count and occupancy time bins.
d. With optional memory module, the vehicle detector shall be capable of

storing count and occupancy data in 15-minute time bins for all four
channels for 335 hours.
e. The count and occupancy stored in the time bins shall be retrievable
remotely using the serial ports.
D. Connector Pinout Configuration
1. The following input-output connector pin terminations shall be provided on

input file connectors as well as detector edge connector in accordance with
NEMA TS2-2021 requirements.
2. The detector’s edge connector pinout is specified in the table below and is
shown looking into the front of a detector card rack or input files. Pin-1 is at
the top of the component side of the detector and Pin-A is at the top of the
non-component side of the detector.
16727-12
FUNCTION / SIGNAL PIN PIN FUNCTION / SIGNAL

CH 1 GREEN DC+ 1 A DC GND
CH 2 GREEN DC+ 2 B POWER (+10.8 to 37VDC)
DET ADDRESS 3 3 C REMOTE EXTERNAL RESET
LOOP IN CH 1 4 D LOOP IN CH 1
LOOP IN CH 1 5 E LOOP IN CH 1
DET ADDRESS 0 6 F CH 1 OUT +
STATUS OUTPUT CH 1 7 H CH 1 OUT -
LOOP IN CH 2 8 J LOOP IN CH 2
LOOP IN CH 2 9 K LOOP IN CH 2
DET ADDRESS 3 10 L CHASSIS GROUND
NO CONNECTION 11 M NO CONNECTION
NO CONNECTION 12 N NO CONNECTION
NO CONNECTION 13 P NO CONNECTION
NO CONNECTION 14 R NO CONNECTION
DET ADDRESS 2 15 S NO CONNECTION
NO CONNECTION 16 T NO CONNECTION
NO CONNECTION 17 U NO CONNECTION
NO CONNECTION 18 V NO CONNECTION
DATA TRANSMIT 19 W CH 2 OUT +
STATUS OUTPUT CH 2 20 X CH 2 OUT -
DATA RECEIVE 21 Y NO CONNECTION
NO CONNECTION 22 Z NO CONNECTION
E. Interface Software Requirements (for setting up communication and data collection,

configuring binning, logging, travel direction detection, viewing diagnostics, fault
monitoring and parameter setting features)
1. The detector unit shall be capable of remote configuration, system diagnostic

measurements and real-time data collection. A communication link shall
provide remote access to the detector, for reading its configuration, for fault
identification and verification, for real-time monitoring and data collection on
two channels. The link shall provide optional password protection to change
unit configuration settings. Interface software shall display and report current
loop inductance measurements, current or last (historical) fault information,
and information specific to the last vehicle detected and vehicle counts.
Vehicle information shall include vehicle change of inductance, speed, length
and time over loop.
2. A Windows™ based interface and data acquisition software program shall be

provided to perform these functions via a remote reporting device running
under Windows 10 or latest version and shall be compatible with the City's
controller and system software..
3. The software shall establish and maintain the communication link to a remote
reporting device via a field modem or by direct connection to one of the serial
ports on the detector.
16727-13
4. The software shall be organized by application to simplify setup and

monitoring of channel activity measurements, traffic counting, long-loop
count, logging of vehicle speed and vehicle length, loop to loop travel time,
detect durations, binning of count and occupancy, and sensing of vehicle
travel direction with directional detection and call duration.
5. The software shall allow selection of PC’s communication port and baud rate,
and allow selection of English or metric measurements.
a. Baud rate options shall be 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200 BPS.
b. Direct communication shall be via PC’s serial port or with telephone

modem communications using one of the PC’s COM ports.
6. The software shall include a phone book and dialing utility.
7. The interface and data acquisition software shall provide a Read from Device
command on the File menu.
a. It shall also provide for a unit address to be selected and allow the
selection of a “wildcard” address to establish remote communication.
8. The Initial screen shall open with a Settings icon, a Real-Time Vehicle
Logging icon and a Traffic Data Binning icon. After communications have
been established with a detector, the other icons shall appear. These shall
include the Real-Time Activity Monitoring icon, Force ALL Outputs and
LEDs icon, a Reset icon and the Scan-Time icon.
9. A Settings window shall be divided into nine tabs to organize the detector
settings by functional application.
10. A General tab shall allow selection of the configuration source to be either
from EEPROM or switches, the oscillator frequency for the unit, the vehicle
count period and channel sensitivity and mode. When the interface software
reads settings from a unit, whichever configuration source is currently active
shall determine which settings are displayed in boldface type (EEPROM or
switch settings).
11. A Communications tab shall provide for the setting of a field modem
command string, transmit delay, selection of the communication baud rates on
the front and rear ports, for setting a programmable address and to enable a
backpanel address. There shall be provisions to establish, cancel and change a
password.
16727-14
a. If password protection is set up in a detector, the unit shall not respond

to any requests to perform a reset or change settings until the correct
password has been issued. After a verified password has been issued
the detector shall respond to all requests for reset or settings changes
for 60 minutes. After 60 minutes the unit shall revert back to password
protected mode until the password has been issued.
12. Reset shall cause immediate reinstatement of password protection. Most

setting changes initiate a reset.
13. A Timing tab shall provide for setting the Delay or Extend Time options and
the timing increments for each channel. There shall be an option to select
“Enable” Green gating to condition the timing functions to green inputs.
14. A Microloop tab shall provide for selecting microloop mode of operation and
setting some of the parameters that are unique to the performance of
microloop sensors in special applications.
15. A Long-loop tab shall provide for selecting the option to count vehicles over
long loops set to operate in Presence mode. Setup options shall be included to
allow for calibrating the algorithm to improve count accuracy on loops of
from 20 feet long to 60 feet long. Vehicle counts shall be available over the
serial communication ports.
16. A Directional tab shall provide the option of setting up travel direction sensing
on channel pairs 1 & 2. With the paired channels connected to 6-foot by 6-
foot loops that are overlapped by three feet, vehicles shall be counted in both
directions. The directional detection call output shall be assigned to the last
loop a vehicle crosses when traveling in the direction that is to be detected.
Call Duration shall be selectable for the directional output on the trailing
channel of the paired sets.
17. An Output tab shall provide for the option to enable the Status Output for
NEMA TS2 Type controllers. Software provision shall also exist to disable
the "fail-safe" Call Output for unique system sampling applications.
18. A Noise Immunity tab shall provide for selecting several noise options
including a power line filter which can be enabled.
19. An Adapt tab shall provide for selecting the adaptation parameters for the
detector unit, to modify default operation.
20. A Real-Time Vehicle Logging icon shall provide for setting up channels to
perform vehicle speed and length measurements.
16727-15
a. Facilities shall be provided to insert a loop description (ID label), a

loop type (configuration) and a calibration utility to select effective
magnetic field loop sizes to improve measurement accuracy. The
utility shall also provide for setting up loop assignments and leading
edge distances from loop to loop to calculate vehicle speeds. This
information shall be saved in the detector’s EEPROM.
b. Facilities shall be included to activate and view the log with channel
IDs, the loop descriptions, dates, times, speeds, lengths, durations,
loop to loop times displayed in real-time. Provisions shall be made to
save the log to a file and print the log.
21. Traffic Data Binning icon shall open a window to setup and collect binned
count and occupancy data from the detector.
a. A tab shall provide for setting up the channels to be binned, the start
date and time, the end date and time, and the binning intervals.
b. The software shall inform the user when the detector will run out of
memory based on the setup information provided. If continuous
binning is selected the data shall “wrap-around” so that the oldest data
will be overwritten with the latest entries.
22. A Real-Time Activity window shall be provided to display all current

detection information pertaining to each channel, including current
measurements, last fault (or historical fault) information, plus information
specific to the last vehicle detected and traffic counts.
a. Measurements shall include: loop inductance, loop frequency,

reference frequency, green input state and loop status.
b. Last Fault shall include fault type, time and date.
c. Last Vehicle data shall include Delta L in nanohenries, detect duration,

detect time, and detect date.
d. Count shall display total count or directional count and the count
period remaining.
23. The Activity window shall include a freeze capability to capture the current
activity information and hold it for analysis while the software continues to
display the most recent changes.
24. A utility window shall be included to verify the operation of a detector’s

outputs and LEDs and confirm the wiring of a control cabinet to issue the call
output to a device or controller. This utility shall allow selection of specific
Detect LEDs, Call Outputs, Fault LEDs, and channel Status Outputs to be
“forced” ON or OFF for testing the system.
16727-16
25. A utility window shall be included to remotely reset a detector. It shall be

possible to select specific channels, all channels or the entire unit.
26. A utility window shall be included to provide a real-time view of the

detector’s self-measured scan-time. This interactive utility shall continuously
read and display the detector’s scan-time and display the theoretical detection
performance based on user-selectable parameters such as loop to loop spacing,
effective field lengths, channel sensitivity settings, and the effects of any noise
immunity options selected.
27. The software shall allow printing of settings, activity measurements, and
binned and logged vehicle data.
28. A comprehensive ON-LINE Help utility shall be included with detailed

descriptions of unit features and setup information. The Help text shall include
hyperlinks to all subjects related to applications or setup sequences. Help
screens shall include a print function to print the page.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 LOOP DETECTOR INSTALLATION
A. Each loop and its lead-in wires shall be separate and independent from any others. A
minimum of twelve (12) inches shall be maintained between adjacent, parallel
sawcuts. The Contractor shall be responsible for a good mechanical and electrical
installation of the loop itself and the two lead-wires to and through the curb to the
adjacent pull box or hand-hole. This responsibility shall remain with the Contractor
until such time as the City can hook up, tune and test the loop for satisfactory
operation.
B. Saw Cut: The sawed slot shall be 3/8 inch in width and a minimum of 2 inches in
depth for concrete and asphalt. Sawcut shall be deep enough to provide one full inch
of sealant above the installed loop wire(s). A sawed slot(s) must be continued from
the nearest side or corner of the loop to the conduit thru the curb for the twisted lead-
in wires to the adjacent pull box or junction point. The slots shall be brushed and
cleared of any debris. Dry moisture-free compressed air shall be used to clear away
the remaining dirt, dust and moisture. A one inch hole shall be drilled at each corner
to eliminate sharp bends and damage to wire. Contractor shall remove sharp corner as
illustrated on detail 3900-08 . Sawcuts shall overlap a sufficient distance to provide
continuous full depth of the sawcut. There shall be no angle cuts for corners.
1. It is the City’s desire that loops are not installed across pavement joints. If a
proposed loop would cross an existing pavement joint, the Contractor shall
request confirmation from the Engineer. With prior approval from the
Engineer, City shall pay for additional sawcut to divide the proposed detection
area into separate loops which cover the same effective area without crossing
pavement joints.
16727-17
C. The number of turns of loop wire shall be as shown on the drawings, or as follows:
Loop Perimeter, feet Number of Turns

< 20 feet 4
<= 30 feet 3
> 30 feet 2
D. Positioning Wire: One continuous, unbroken, and unspliced length of wire shall be
used to form the loop and its lead-in wires. This wire shall be of sufficient length for
the required number of turns plus the distance to the adjacent pull box. The lead-in
portion (pair of wires forming ends of loop) shall be twisted a minimum of five (5)
turns per linear foot before insertion into slot. The twisted turns shall continue
through the conduit at the curb and on to the pull box. Use a blunt tool to push wires
into slot. The wires shall be held in place with rubber wedges or sections of
insulation.
1. The sawcut, and loop wire installation shall be inspected by the City’s
Inspector prior to placement of sealant. Failure to obtain inspection prior to
placement of sealant will be reason to require the Contractor to completely
reinstall the loop.
E. Sealing: Before and after sealing wires in roadway, test the pair of wires at the pull
box for continuity and resistance with an ohm meter. In addition, the integrity of the
insulation shall be checked by applying a megger between each end of the loop lead-
in and the nearest reliable electrical ground (e.g., street light, hydrant, etc.). In the
event that no available ground exists, a suitable ground shall be established for the
measurement (e.g., driven metal spike). A resistance of less than ten (10) megohms to
ground indicates a faulty installation and must be corrected. Final readings on each
detector shall be given to the Inspector or Engineer on the job.
F. Sealer: Use embedding sealer as per manufacturer's instruction or as directed by

Engineer. Loop sealant shall be allowed to cure for a minimum of three (3) hours
prior to opening the lane for traffic.
G. Conduit: Wires from curb to pull box must be enclosed in conduit as indicated on
plan set (1 in. min.) and twisted a minimum of five (5) turns per foot. The conduit
shall be rigid in place.
H. Contractor shall set up an adequate and safe traffic control based upon the Texas
Department of Transportation Traffic Signal Work Typical Detail/Traffic Signal
Barricade and Signs, I-82-8011 BTS and the Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic
Control Devices, latest revision.
I. Contractor shall draw all loop outlines on pavement for approval by the Engineer,
prior to beginning sawcut.
16727-18
J. As a minimum requirement, Contractor shall use a self-propelled power saw with

diamond blade or abrasive saw blades for sawing the pavement to the length, depth
and width as shown on the intersection layout plan and the typical detail drawings.
The power saw must be equipped with a depth measurement device, water valve and
guide.
K. Contractor shall locate water supply (hydrant or water truck) to cool the blade and to
clean out slots. Hydrant can only be used if proper permission has been obtained and
water meter is used.
L. Contractor shall have an air compressor for the cleaning and drying out the sawed
slots on site.
M. Drill hole through pavement for conduit to pull box.
N. Contractor shall obtain megger and ohm meter for checking integrity of loop
insulation and the continuity and resistance of the wired loop.
1. Wire must have a megger reading before installation (on reel);
2. Megger reading after installation (before being sealed);
3. Megger reading after being sealed and splices made;
4. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to obtain these readings and have

them available for the signal inspector upon request.
O. Splicing kit materials and equipment for splicing the two #14 wires to the shielded
balanced pair cable in the pull box. Only soldered connections are acceptable. All
splices must be watertight. The drain wire of the loop lead-in cable shall be grounded
to earth ground only at the controller or detector cabinet. The resistance from the
drain wire to the ground rod shall be less than one (1) ohm, at the cabinet.
P. The loop wire shall be held in place every two (2) feet with strips of rubber, neoprene
flexible tubing or polyethylene foam sealant, one (1) inch in length. These strips shall
be left in place and slot filled with loop sealant.
Q. All wires shall be tagged to identify the loop number and lane. The tag identification
shall correlate with the electrical schedule shown on the project plans. The tags shall
be furnished and installed by the Contractor. Each tag shall be wrapped around the
conductor twice. Wire marking tags shall be made of flame retardant reinforced
epoxy tape 5.5 mils in thickness and ¼ inch minimum width. The tape shall be
flexible and resistant to oil and water, and have a pressure sensitive acrylic adhesive
backing. The adhesive shall be a high tack adhesive with good adhesion to clean
neoprene, hypalon, nylon and PVC insulation materials. The film material shall
conform to the flame retardant requirements of UL 510 and be rated at 150 degrees
Centigrade. Appropriate numbers and letters shall be printed on wire tags for
conductor identification.
16727-19
END OF SECTION
16727-20
CITY OF HOUSTON INTELLIGENT TRANSPORTATION SYSTEM
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION (ITS) CONTROLLER CABINET ASSEMBLY
SECTION 16730
INTELLIGENT TRANSPORTATION SYSTEM (ITS) CONTROLLER CABINET

ASSEMBLY
PART 1 GENERAL
A. This specification defines the minimum detailed requirements applicable to traffic

signal controller cabinets. The intent of specification is to set forth the minimum
acceptable electrical and mechanical design and requirements within which all
equipment operates satisfactorily and reliably, and the means by which the equipment
shall be tested to determine whether it shall so operate.
B. These specifications describe the materials necessary to provide Intelligent

Transportation System (ITS) traffic signal controller cabinets for use with Type 2070
Advanced Transportation Controller (ATC). The Type 2070 Controller Unit to be
furnished with the ITS Controller Cabinet Assembly shall meet the requirements of
Specification Section 16731.
B. Section 16731 – Model 2070 Controller Unit
A. Unit Prices.
1. Measurement: Each ITS Controller Cabinet Assembly shall include a Model

2070 Controller Unit (Section 16731) and other components as specified in
Table 2 of article 2.10.B of this specification. This Item will be measured as
each controller cabinet assembly by type furnished.
2. The materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as

provided under “Measurement” as each specified type assembly furnished.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. Abbreviations and Acronyms
1. Terms and Abbreviations. Wherever the following terms or abbreviations are

used, the intent and meaning is interpreted as follows:
16730-1
a. A: Ampere
b. AC: Alternating Current
c. AC+: 120 Volts AC, 60 hertz ungrounded power source
d. AC- :120 Volts AC, 60 hertz grounded return to the power source
e. ANSI: American National Standard Institute
f. ASCII: American Standard Code for Information Interchange
g. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
h. AWG: American Wire Gage
i. C: Celsius
j. C Language: The ANSI C Programming Language
k. CPU: Central Processing Unit
l. CTS: Clear To Send
m. DAT Program: The CITY OF HOUSTON’s Diagnostic and

Acceptance Test Program
n. Db: Decibel
o. dBa: Decibels above reference noise, adjusted
p. DC: Direct Current
q. DCD: Data Carrier Detect (Receive Line Signal Detector)
r. DIN : Deutsche Industrie Norm
s. EG: Equipment Ground
t. EIA: Electronic Industries Association
u. EMI: Electro Magnetic Interference
v. EPROM: Ultraviolet Erasable, Programmable, Read Only Memory

Device
w. EEPROM: Electrically Erasable, Programmable, Read Only Memory

Device
x. ETL: Electrical Testing Laboratories, Inc.
16730-2
y. FPA: Front Panel Assembly
z. HEX: Hexadecimal
aa. Hz: Hertz
bb. IC: Integrated Circuit
cc. I.D.: Identification
dd. IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
ee. ISO: Isolated
ff. KB: Kilobytes
gg. LCD: Liquid Crystal Display
hh. LED: Light Emitting Diode
ii. LOGIC: Negative Logic Convention (Ground True) State
jj. LSB: Least Significant Byte
kk. Lsb: Least Significant Bit
ll. MB: megabyte
mm. MSB: Most Significant Byte
nn. msb: Most Significant Bit
oo. m: Milli
pp. MCU/MPU/ IMP: Micro Controller Unit, Microprocessor Unit, or

Integrated Multiprotocol Processor
qq. MIL: Military Specifications
rr. MODEM: Modulation/Demodulation Unit
ss. MOS: Metal-Oxide Semiconductor
tt. MOV: Metal-Oxide Varistor
uu. MS: Military Standards
vv. N: Newton: SI unit of force
ww. N.C.: Normally closed contact
16730-3
xx. N.O.: Normally open contact
yy. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
zz. NETA: National Electrical Testing Association, Inc.
aaa. N: nano
bbb. NLSB: Next Least Significant Byte
ccc. Nlsb: Next Least Significant Bit
ddd. NMSB: Next Most Significant Byte
eee. Nmsb: Next Most Significant Bit
fff. PCB: Printed Circuit Board
ggg. PDA: Power Distribution Assembly
hhh. PLA/PAL: Programmable Array Logic Device
iii. Ppm: Parts per million
jjj. PWM: Pulse Width Modulation
kkk. RAM: Random Access Memory
lll. RF: Radio Frequency
mmm. RMS: Root-Mean-Square
nnn. ROM: Read Only Memory Device
ooo. RTS: Request to Send
ppp. R/W: Controller Unit Read/Write Control Line
qqq. RxD: Received Data
rrr. SCI: Serial Communications Interface
sss. SDLC: Synchronous Data Link Control
ttt. S: Logic State
uuu. s: second
vvv. SRAM: Static Random Access Memory Device
www. SW: Switch
16730-4
xxx. TB: Terminal Block
yyy. TOD: Time Of Day Clock
zzz. TTL: Transistor-Transistor Logic
aaaa. TxD: Transmitted Data
bbbb. u: Micro
cccc. UL: Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.
dddd. VAC: Voltage Alternating Current (root mean square)
eeee. VDC: Voltage Direct Current
ffff. VME: Versa Module Eurocard, VMEbus Standard IEEE P1014/D1.2
gggg. x: Number Value
hhhh. XX: Manufacturer's Option
B. Reference Standards
1. ANSI/IEEE C62.41 – Surge Voltages in Low Voltage Power Circuits
2. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked

Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar
3. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy

Sheet and Plate
4. ASTM B 633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc

on Iron and Steel
5. ATC 2070, v01.05 – Advanced Transportation Controller (ATC) Standards
6. DIN 41612 – Standard for Electrical Connectors
7. EIA/TIA 485 - Electrical Characteristics of Generators and Receivers for Use

in Balanced Digital Multipoint Systems
8. Federal Specification QQ-P-416C - Plating, Cadmium (Electrodeposited)
9. ISO/IEC 3309 - Information Technology - Telecommunications and

Information Exchange Between Systems - High-Level Data Link Control
(HDLC) Procedures – Frame Structure
10. MIL–P-13949G - Plastic Sheet, Laminated Metal Clad (For Printed Wiring
Boards)
16730-5
11. MIL–PRF-55110J – Printed Wiring Board, Rigid
12. MIL-PRF-22684 - Resistors, Fixed, Film (Insulated)
13. MIL-W-16878E - Wire, Electrical, Insulated
14. NEMA TS2 – Traffic Controller Assemblies with NTCIP Requirements
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. Assembly: A complete machine, structure or unit of a machine that was manufactured

by fitting together parts and/or modules
B. Cabinet: An outdoor enclosure generally housing the controller unit and associated
equipment
C. Certificate of Compliance: A certificate signed by the manufacturer of the material or

the manufacturer of assembled materials stating that the materials involved comply in
all respects with the requirements of the specifications
D. Channel: An information path from a discrete input to a discrete output.
E. City of Houston: The City of Houston director, acting either directly or through
properly authorized agents, such agents acting within the scope of the particular
duties delegated to them.
F. Component : Any electrical or electronic device
G. Contractor: The person or persons, Manufacturer, firm, partnership, corporation,

vendor or combination thereof, who have entered into a contract with the CITY OF
HOUSTON, as party of the second part or legal representative
H. Controller Unit: That portion of the controller assembly devoted to the operational
control of the logic decisions programmed into the assembly
I. Devices: Comply to function, pin out, electrical and operating parameter

requirements, access times and interface parameters of the specified device
J. DRAM: Dynamic random access memory. Random access means that the processor
can access any part of the memory or data storage space directly rather than having to
proceed sequentially from some starting place. DRAM is dynamic in that it needs to
have its storage cells refreshed or given a new electronic charge every few
milliseconds.
K. Equal Connectors: Comply with physical dimensions, contact material, plating and
method of connection.
L. Firmware: A computer program or software stored permanently in PROM, EPROM,

ROM or semi-permanently in EEPROM
16730-6
M. FLASH: A +5 VDC powered IC Memory Device with nonvolatile, electrically

erasable, programmable, 100K read/write minimum cycles and fast access time
features
N. Jumper : A means of connecting/disconnecting two or more conductive by

soldering/desoldering a conductive wire or by PCB post jumper
O. Keyed: Means by which like connectors can be physically altered to prevent improper
insertion.
P. Laboratory: The established laboratory of the CITY OF HOUSTON or other

laboratories authorized by the CITY OF HOUSTON to test materials involved in the
contract
Q. Module: A functional unit that plugs into an assembly
R. Motherboard: A printed circuit connector interface board with no active or passive

components
S. NA: Presently Not Assigned. Cannot be used by the Manufacturer for other purposes
T. Power Conditions: 16.7 ms (one 60 Hertz cycle) reaction period is allowed to be

included in the 50 milliseconds timing or added to (67 milliseconds duration). The
hysteresis between power failure and power restoration voltage settings must be a
min. of 5 VAC with a threshold drift of no more than 0.2 VAC.
U. Power Failure: A Power Failure is said to have occurred when the incoming line
voltage falls below 92 +/- 2 VAC for 50 milliseconds. See Power Conditions.
V. Power Restoration: Power is said to be restored when the incoming line voltage
equals or exceeds 97 +/- 2 VAC for 50 milliseconds. See Power Conditions.
W. Second Sourced: Produced by more than one Manufacturer
X. Triac: Silicon-Controlled Rectifier which controls power bilaterally in an AC

switching circuit
Y. Thumb Screw Device (TSD ): A retractable screw fastener with projecting stainless
steel screw, spring and natural aluminum knob finish. (TSD No.2 must be flat black.)
1. TSD No.1 - 8-32 SOUTHCO #47-62-301-20 or equal.
2. TSD No.2 - 8-32 SOUTHCO #47-62-301-60 or equal.
3. TSD No.3 - M3 SOUTHCO #47-82-101-10 or equal.
Z. WDT (Watchdog Timer): A monitoring circuit, external to the device watched, which
senses an Output Line from the device and reacts
1.06 WARRANTY
16730-7
from date of delivery.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Manuals. Two copies of Manual Documentation must be supplied for each item
purchased. The manual must be bound in durable covers made of either 65-pound
stock paper or clear plastic. The manual must be printed on paper measuring 8-1/2 in.
by 11 in., with the exception that schematics, layouts, parts lists and plan details may
be on sheets measuring 11 in. by 17 in., with each sheet neatly folded to a size of 8-
1/2 in. by 11 in. A minimum of Times New Roman or Arial 10 point font must be
used for all manual text, excluding drawings and schematics. Drawing text may use a
smaller font size.
1. Cabinet Wiring Diagrams. Two copies of Cabinet Wiring Diagrams must be

included in each cabinet. Cabinet Wiring Diagrams must be on non-fading,
minimum 22 in. x 34 in., sheets.
a. Manual Contents. Each manual must utilize the following outline, to

the extent possible:
(1) Table of Contents
(2) Glossary
(3) Manufacturer Contact Information
(a) Address
(b) Telephone Number
(c) Fax Number
(d) General Email Address
(4) General Description
(5) General Characteristics
(6) Installation
(7) Adjustments
(8) Theory of Operation
(a) Systems Description (include block diagram).
(b) Detailed Description of Circuit Operation.
(9) Maintenance
16730-8
(a) Preventive Maintenance.
(b) Trouble Analysis.
(c) Trouble Shooting Sequence Chart.
(d) Wave Forms.
(e) Voltage Measurements.
(f) Alignment Procedures.
(10) Parts List (include circuit and board designation, part type and
class, power rating, component manufacturer, mechanical part
manufacturer, data specification sheets for special design
components and original manufacturer's part number).
(11) Electrical Interconnection Details & Drawings.
(12) Schematic and Logic Diagram
(13) Assembly Drawings and a pictorial diagram showing physical

locations and identification of each component or part.
(14) The date, serial numbers, model numbers and revision numbers
of equipment covered by the manuals must be printed on the
front cover of the manuals.
b. Manual Pouches. Manuals for the cabinet must be furnished in a

weatherproof plastic pouch placed in the cabinet.
c. Draft Manual. A preliminary draft of the manual must be submitted,

when required, to the CITY OF HOUSTON for approval prior to final
printing.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HADLING
A. Packaging. Each item delivered must be individually packed in its own shipping
B. Delivery. Each item delivered for testing must be complete, including manuals, and
ready for testing.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
16730-9
1. Aluminum. Aluminum sheets must be Type 3003-H14 or Type 5052-H32

ASTM Designation B209 aluminum alloy. Rod, Bar and Extruded must be
Type 6061-T6, or equal.
2. Stainless Steel. Stainless Steel sheets must be annealed or one-quarter-hard

complying with the ASTM Designation: A666 for Type 304, Grades A or B,
stainless steel sheet.
3. Cold Rolled Steel. Cold Rolled Steel sheet, rod, bar and extruded must be
Type 1018/1020.
a. Plating. All cold roll steel must be plated. All plating must be either
cadmium plating meeting the requirements of Federal Specification
QQ-P-416C, Type 2 Class l or zinc plating meeting the requirements
of ASTM B633-85 Type II SC4.
B. Mechanical Hardware. All bolts, nuts, washers, screws, hinges and hinge pins must
be stainless steel unless otherwise specified.
C. Electrical Isolation. Within the circuit of any device, module, or Printed Circuit Board
(PCB), electrical isolation must be provided between DC logic ground, equipment
ground and the AC- conductor. They must be electrically isolated from each other by
500 Megohms, minimum, when tested at the input terminals with 500 VDC.
D. Daughter Boards. Keyboards and LCD/LED Displays are considered daughter

boards. Daughter boards must be mechanically secured with a minimum of four
spacers/metal screws. Connectors must be either Flat Cable or PCB Headers.
Components are allowed to be mounted under the daughter board.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A. General. All components must be second sourced and be of such design, fabrication,
nomenclature or other identification as to be purchased from a wholesale distributor
or from the component manufacturer, except as follows:
1. When a component is of such special design that it precludes the purchase of

identical components from any wholesale distributor or component
manufacturer, one spare duplicate component must be furnished with each 20,
or fraction thereof, components used.
2. The electronic circuit design must be such that all components of the same
generic type, regardless of manufacturer, function equally in accordance with
the specifications.
B. Electronic Components.
1. No device to be socket mounted unless specifically called out.
16730-10
2. No component to be operated above 80% of its maximum rated voltage,

current or power ratings. Digital components must not be operated above 3%
over their nominal voltage, current or power ratings.
3. Components must have been kept in the original packaging and stored in a
proper environment, according to the manufacturers instructions. The design
life of all components, operating for twenty-four hours a day and operating in
their circuit application, must be ten years or longer.
4. Components must be arranged so they are easily accessible, replaceable and

identifiable for testing and maintenance. Where damage by shock or vibration
exists, the component must be supported mechanically by a clamp, fastener,
retainer, or hold-down bracket.
5. The Manufacturer must submit detailed engineering technical data on all

components at the request of the CITY OF HOUSTON. The Manufacturer
must certify that the component application meets the requirements of this
standard.
C. Capacitors. The DC and AC voltage ratings, as well as the dissipation factor, of a

capacitor must exceed the worst-case design parameters of the circuitry by 150%.
Capacitor encasements must be resistant to cracking, peeling and discoloration. All
capacitors must be insulated and be marked with their capacitance values and
working voltages. Electrolytic capacitors must not be used for capacitance values of
less than 1.0 microfarad and be marked with polarity.
D. Potentiometers. Potentiometers with ratings from 1 to 2 watts must meet Military

Type RV4 requirements. Under 1 Watt potentiometers must be used only for trimmer
type function. The potentiometer power rating must be at least 100% greater than the
maximum power requirements of the circuit.
E. Resistors. Fixed carbon film, deposited carbon, or composition-insulated resistors

must conform to the performance requirements of Military Specifications MIL-PRF-
22684. All resistors must be insulated and be marked with their resistance values.
Resistance values must be indicated by the EIA color codes, or stamped value. The
value of the resistors must not vary by more than 5% between -37 degrees C and 74
degrees C.
1. Special ventilation or heat sinking must be provided for all 2- watt or greater
resistors. They must be insulated from the PCB.
F. Semiconductor Devices.
1. All transistors, integrated circuits, and diodes must be a standard type listed by
EIA and clearly identifiable.
2. All metal oxide semiconductor components located in a sub-assembly must

contain circuitry to protect their inputs and outputs against damage due to high
static voltages or electrical fields.
16730-11
3. Device pin "1" locations must be properly marked on the PCB adjacent to the
pin.
G. Transformers and Inductors. All power transformers and inductors must have the
manufacturer's name or logo and part number clearly and legibly printed on the case
or lamination. All transformers and inductors must have their windings insulated, be
protected to exclude moisture, and their leads color coded with an approved EIA
color code or identified in a manner to facilitate proper installation.
H. Triacs. Each triac with a designed circuit load of greater than 0.5 Amperes at 120
VAC must be mounted to a heat sink with thermal conductive compound or material,
in addition to being mechanically secured.
I. Circuit Breakers. Circuit breakers must be listed by UL or ETL. The trip and frame
sizes must be plainly marked (marked on the breaker by the manufacturer), and the
ampere rating must be visible from the front of the breaker. Contacts must be silver
alloy and enclosed in an arc quenching chamber. Overload tripping must not be
influenced by an ambient air temperature range of from -18 degrees C to 50 degrees
C. The minimum Interrupting Capacity must be 5,000 Amperes, RMS when the
breaker is secondary to a UL approved fuse or primary circuit breaker and both
breakers in concert provide the rated capacity. For circuit breakers 80 Amperes and
above, the minimum interrupting capacity must be 10,000 Amperes, RMS. Circuit
breakers must be the trip-free type with medium trip delay characteristic
(Carlingswitch Time Delay Curve #24 or equal).
1. Load Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Internal Switches. The Load Circuit Breakers
located on the PDA that are used to control Output Assembly Model 200
Switch Packs must have auxiliary switches. The auxiliary switches must
“open” when the load breaker has tripped and the system will transfer the
power from the Main Contactor to the Flash or Blank condition.
J. Fuses. All Fuses that are resident in a bayonet style fuse holder must have the fuse
size rating labeled on the holder or on the panel adjacent to the holder. Fuses must be
easily accessible and removable without use of tools.
K. Switches.
1. Dip. Dual-inline-package, quick snap switches must be rated for a minimum

of 30,000 operations per position at 50 milliamperes, 30 VDC. The switch
contact resistance must be 100 milliohms maximum at 2 milliamperes, 30
VDC. The contacts must be gold over brass.
2. Logic. The switch contacts must be rated for a minimum of 1 Ampere

resistive load at 120 VAC and be silver over brass (or equal). The switch
must be rated for a minimum of 40,000 operations.
3. Control. The switch contacts must be rated for a minimum of 5 Amperes

resistive load at 120 VAC or 28 VDC and be silver over brass (or equal). The
switch must be rated for a minimum of 40,000 operations.
16730-12
4. Power. Ratings must be the same as CONTROL, except the contact rating
must be a minimum of ten Amperes at 125 VAC.
L. Terminal Blocks. The terminal blocks must be barrier type, rated at 20 Amperes and
600 VAC RMS minimum. The terminal screws must be 0.3125 in. minimum length
nickel plated brass binder head type with screw inserts of the same material. Screw
size is called out under the associated file, panel or assembly.
M. Screw Lug and Cam Driven Connectors. Provided the connectors mate, screw lug
cam driven devices or crimp pin connectors must be allowable if the interface is part
of a harness. For field termination, screw lug and cam driven assemblies are
interchangeable for field wiring termination, provided they both accommodate 22-
gauge wire on the inputs and 22-gauge wire on the outputs.
N. Wiring, Cabling and Harnesses.
1. Harnesses must be neat, firm and properly bundled with external protection.
They must be tie-wrapped and routed to minimize crosstalk and electrical
interference. Each harness must be of adequate length to allow any conductor
to be connected properly to its associated connector or termination point.
Conductors within an encased harness have no color requirements. Printed
circuit motherboards are to be used where possible to eliminate or reduce
cabinet wiring.
2. Wiring containing AC must be bundled separately or shielded separately from

all DC logic voltage control circuits.
3. Wiring must be routed to prevent conductors from being in contact with metal
edges. Wiring must be arranged so that any removable assembly may be
removed without disturbing conductors not associated with that assembly.
4. All conductors, except those that can be readily traced, must be labeled.
Labels attached to each end of the conductor must identify the destination of
the other end of the conductor.
5. All conductors must conform to MIL-W-16878E/1 or better and have a

minimum of 19 strands of copper. The insulation must be polyvinyl chloride
with a minimum thickness of 10 mils or greater. Where insulation thickness is
15 mils or less, the conductor must conform to MIL-W-16878/17.
6. Conductor color identification must be as follows:
AC- circuits - white

Equip. Ground - solid green or continuous green color with 1 or more yellow
stripes.
DC logic ground - continuous white with a red stripe.
AC+ circuits - continuous black or black with colored stripe
DC logic ungrounded or signal - any color not specified
16730-13
O. Indicators and Character Displays. All indicators and character displays must be
readily visible at a radius of up to 1.2 m (4 feet) within the cone of visibility when the
indicator is subjected to 97,000 lux (9,000 foot-candles) of white light with the light
source at 45 degrees (+/-2 degrees) to the front panel.
1. Indicators. All indicators and character displays must have a minimum 90

degrees cone of visibility with its axis perpendicular to the panel on which the
indicator is mounted. All indicators must be self-luminous. All indicators
must have a rated life of 100,000 hours minimum. Each LED indicator must
be white or clear when off. Indicators supplied on equipment requiring
handles must be mounted such that a horizontal clearance is provided.
2. Character Displays. Liquid Crystal Displays (LCD) must be readable at

temperatures of -20 degrees C to +70 degrees C.
P. Connectors. Connectors must be keyed to prevent improper insertion of the wrong

connector where equipment damage or operator injury may result. The mating
connectors must be designated as the connector number and male/female relationship,
such as C1P (plug or PCB edge connector) and C1S (socket).
1. Type T. Type T connector must be a single row, 10 position, feed through

terminal block. The terminal block must be a barrier type with 6-32, 0.25 in.
or longer, nickel plated brass binder head screws. Each terminal must be
permanently identified as to its function.
2. Plastic Circular and Type M. Pin and socket contacts for connectors must be
beryllium copper construction subplated with 1.27 microns nickel and plated
with 0.76 microns gold. Pin diameter must be 0.0618 in. All pin and socket
connectors must use the AMP #601105-1 or #91002-1 contact insertion tool
and the AMP #305183 contact extraction tool.
3. Card Edge and Two-Piece PCB.
a. Edge connectors must have bifurcated gold-plated contacts. The PCB

receptacle connector must meet or exceed the following:
Operating Voltage: 600 VAC (RMS)

Current Rating: 5.0 Amperes
Insulation Material: Diallyl Phthalate or Thermoplastic
Insulation Resistance: 5,000 Megohms
Contact Material: Copper alloy plated with 0.00005 in. of
nickel and 0.00010 in. of gold
Contact Resistance: 0.006 Ohm maximum
b. The two-piece PCB connector must meet or exceed DIN 41612.
(1) The PCB 22/44 Connector must have 22 independent contacts

per side; dual sided with 0.156 in. contact centers.
16730-14
4. Wire Terminal. Each wire terminal must be solderless with PVC insulation
and a heavy duty short-locking spade type connector. All terminal connectors
must be crimped using a Controlled-Cycle type crimping tool.
5. Flat Cable. Each flat cable connector must be designed for use with 26 AWG
cable; have dual cantilevered phosphor bronze contacts plated with 0.00015 of
gold over 0.00005 in. of nickel; and have a current rating of 1 Ampere
minimum and an insulation resistance of 5 Megohms minimum.
6. PCB Header Post. Each PCB header post must be 0.025 in. square by 0.3425
in. high from the plane of the PCB to the end of the pin; be mounted on 0.10
in. centers; and be tempered hard brass plated with 0.00015 in. of gold over
0.00005 in. of nickel.
7. PCB Header Socket. Each PCB header socket block must be nylon or diallyl
phthalate. Each PCB header socket contact must be removable, but crimp-
connected to its conductor. The Manufacturer must list the part number of the
extraction tool recommended by its manufacturer. Each PCB header socket
contact must be brass or phosphor bronze plated with 0.00010 in. of gold over
Q. Surge Protection Device. The surge suppression device must comply with
ANSI/IEEE C62.41 (100 Kilohertz Ring Wave, the 1.2/50 microseconds – 8/20
Combination Wave and the EFT Burst) at voltages and currents specified at
“Location Category B2” and at “Test Severity” level III (i.e. up to 4.0 Kilovolts,
open-circuit).
2.03 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Assemblies. All assemblies must be modular, easily replaceable and incorporate plug-
in capability for their associated devices or PCBs. Assemblies must be provided with
two guides for each plug-in PCB or associated device (except relays). The guides
must extend to within 0.75 in. from the face of either the socket or connector and
front edge of the assembly. If Nylon guides are used, the guides must be securely
attached to the file or assembly chassis.
B. Locking Devices. All screw type fasteners must utilize locking devices or locking
compounds except for finger screws, which must be captive.
C. PCB Design and Connectors. No components, traces, brackets or obstructions must

be within 0.125 in. of the board edge (guide edges). The manufacturer's name or
logo, model number, serial number, and circuit issue or revision number must appear
and be readily visible on all PCBs.
D. Model and Serial Numbers.
16730-15
1. The manufacturer's model number and circuit issue or revision number must
appear on the rear panel of all equipment supplied (where such panel exists).
In addition to any assignment of model numbers by the manufacturer, the
TYPE number must be displayed on the front panel in bold type, at least 0.25
in. high.
E. Workmanship. Workmanship must conform to the requirements of this specification

and be in accordance with the highest industry standards.
F. Tolerances. The following mechanical tolerances must apply, except as specifically

shown on the plans or in these specifications:
TYPE DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCE

Sheet Metal +/-0.0525 in.
PCB +0 in., - 0.010 in.
Edge Guides +/-0.015 in.
*Note: These dimensional tolerances do not apply to material gauge or thickness.
2.04 CABINET OVERVIEW
A. The cabinet utilizes concepts from both the NEMA and Model 170 traffic signal
equipment. From the Model 170 it takes the concept of rack-mounted subassemblies.
From NEMA, it borrows the basic serial connections between the controller and
subassemblies.
B. The cabinet provides the communications paths between the various subsystems, as
well as a system to monitor their operation. The cabinet provides power supplies
suitable for the various electronic subassemblies mounted throughout the cabinet.
The ITS cabinet is an extension of the original cabinet used for the Model 170
controller in that it is based upon the EIA/TIA standard 19 in. equipment rack. In this
rack, the subsystems that comprise the field controller assembly are mounted in a
manner so as to facilitate user access. The controller and other subassemblies are also
similar in concept to the Model 170 system in that they are essentially
interchangeable circuit cards or device cages. This does not preclude other cabinet
constructs that may be proposed for inclusion in this standard at some later date. An
example might be that retrofitting to existing NEMA TS1 and TS2 type cabinets or
other more specialized cabinets might one day be accommodated, so long as the
architecture of the serial buses are maintained.
C. Each of the subassemblies is connected to the controller using a serial bus, similar to
that used in the NEMA TS2 Type 1 specification. Using a serial interconnection
between subassemblies allows for easy system expansion. The system supports up to
twenty-eight switch packs (also known as solid state load switches) in six and
fourteen switch pack increments and ninety-six detector channels in twenty-four
channel increments. This serial bus may also be extended using inexpensive fiber
optic transceivers, as an example, insomuch as multiple remote switching/data
collection cabinets can be supported from a single controller.
16730-16
D. The ITS Cabinet is essentially a platform within which modular components may be
added to serve a variety of ITS applications.
E. Cabinet Subsystems. The major subsystems that may be installed in a cabinet housing
are:
1. Controller.
2. Input Assemblies.
3. Output Assemblies.
4. Power Distribution Assemblies.
5. Fiber Optic Termination Panel.
6. Service Panel Assembly.
7. DC Power/Communications Assembly & Extension.
8. RAW/CLEAN AC Power Assembly & Extension.
9. Cabinet Monitoring System.
F. The cabinet is constructed in a modular manner with power distribution and serial
connectors conveniently located throughout the cabinet to facilitate a wide variety of
configurations and future expansion. Each of these subassemblies is discussed below.
A separate standard describes the controller.
G. Input Assembly. The input assembly provides services for the typical inductive loop
detectors currently in use, as well as other more advanced systems that might provide
the controller with serial data instead of the typical contact closure. Each assembly
accommodates one Serial Interface Unit (SIU) to communicate with the controller.
The rack has space for twelve two-channel detector units or six four-channel detector
units. The system can address (i.e. the Serial Bus addressing structure supports) up to
four of these assemblies.
16730-17
H. The detectors in the assembly can communicate to the controller in the form of either
a contact closure or use of serial data strings. The back plane of this assembly
includes a serial bus to transmit data to and from detectors. This serial data is then
transmitted to the controller by Serial Bus 1, which is described below. This allows
for the use of “smart”
detectors that can pass
additional information such
as vehicle classification,
Automatic Vehicle
Identification/Location
information, speed
information directly to the
controller unit. Each slot
provides general purpose
power and input/output
signals and a serial interface.
I. The input “slots” can also

accommodate the standard
collection of Model 170 or
Input Assembly
NEMA TS2 type cards,
including preemption
devices, and isolation modules, using the contact closure interface.
J. Output Assembly 6 and 14 Pack. The output assembly handles the switching of 120
VAC power to the signal heads. There are two versions of this assembly, one to
accommodate six switch packs and one for fourteen switch packs. It also has an SIU
and an Auxiliary Monitor Unit (AMU). The AMU is described in more detail in a
following section. The output assembly includes provisions for managing cabinet
flash with Flash Transfer Relays and flash configuration jumpers.
16730-18
K. To support the AMU function of current monitoring, the output assembly includes
current monitoring transformers for each switch pack. These current monitor
transformers enable the detection of a “no-load” condition on a signal without having
to wait for the signal to cycle.
L. The system can address (i.e. the Serial Bus addressing structure supports) ten
combinations of six switch and fourteen switch assemblies. For a maximum
configuration the system can address two fourteen switch pack modules for a total of
twenty-eight switch packs or physical channels, plus four virtual channels for a total
of thirty-two logical channels.
M. The field wires can also be connected to the back of this unit using plug-in type
connectors. The field wires are terminated in these connectors, which are then be
plugged into the back of the Assembly. This facilitates the change out of the
assembly or the whole controller and housing assembly.
N. Power Distribution Assembly (PDA 5 IP or EP). The PDA provides protected power
distribution to the various devices and subassemblies within the cabinet. This
assembly also houses Emergency Flasher Units, control relays, signal power
contactor, and the Cabinet Monitor Unit (CMU).
O. The PDA IP houses two low voltage DC power supplies. One provides power to 24
VDC devices, the other to 12 VDC devices. Each of these power supplies is
packaged as a slide-out subassembly.
16730-19
P. The PDA EP provides

protected power distribution
to the various devices and
subassemblies within the
cabinet. This assembly also
houses Emergency Flasher
Units, control relays, signal
power contactor, and the PDA 5 IP with internal Power Supplies
Cabinet Monitor Unit
(CMU).
Q. The PDA EP requires an

external rack mounted low
voltage DC power supply
for power to 24 VDC
devices such as detectors
and switchpacks. Dual Rack
Cabinets may require an PDA 5 EP with Rack Mount Power Supplies
additional 12 VDC Supply if
more than 3 Input
Assemblies are required. Figure 1
Each of these power PDA 5 IP and EP
supplies is packaged as a
rack mount assembly.
R. Modular Buses. The modular buses are assemblies that are mounted on the rack rails
in the back of the cabinet and provide a pluggable interconnection of the Assembly
units to the controller unit and power. These assemblies control and protect the
wiring between these key subsystems, provides additional shielding from
electromagnetic interference. Their biggest benefit is to simplify cabinet assembly.
S. The cabinet may have any combination of these bus units depending upon the
particular application. For example, a cabinet designed as a communications hub
may only have a Modular Power Assembly unit. A small pole mounted cabinet
(proposed but not included in this standard) may not have any of them and those
installed in Cabinet Housing 2 would not use the extensions.
16730-20
T. Raw/Clean AC Power Assemblies. The Raw/Clean AC Power Assembly attaches to

the right rear rack rail. This assembly is internally wired to provide 120 VAC “clean
power” to the controller, output assemblies and auxiliary devices needed within the
Cabinet, as well as Signal and flasher power from the PDA is distributed by P1 and
S1 to S4 to the Output Assemblies. The Raw/Clean Bus Assemblies are available in
two configurations, a four socket and a two socket version. With the advent of the 14
Pack Output Assembly the two socket version provides adequate power distribution
for most applications and with the additional clean power sockets it will eliminate the
need for the extension. Extension Bus Assemblies are provided for additional clean
power service when needed
and room permits. A AC Clean
Modular Assembly is used to
power the left hand rack in
Housing 3. This assembly is
primarily meant for those
cabinets without output
assemblies or for use in the
dual rack system.
U. DC Power
/Communications Assembly
and Extension. This modular
bus assembly provides 12
VDC and 24 VDC power to
cabinet assemblies. It also
houses the wiring for the serial
buses 1 and 2 communications
between the SIUs, CMUs,
AMUs and the ATC Controller
Unit. The Extension provides
Modular DC Power/COMM Raw/Clean additional DC Power when
AC Clean Modular
Assembly Assembly
AC Power
Assembly
needed.
4 Socket
2 Socket
16730-21
V. Cabinet Monitoring System.

The cabinet monitoring
system provides a fail-safe
mechanism for the entire
collection of subassemblies. ATC
The system for the ATC is a Serial Bus #1
EIA 485
departure from its
predecessors in that it has
been split into sub CMU #1
components, the Cabinet Data Key
Monitor Unit (CMU) and the Output File AMU #1
Auxiliary Monitor Unit
(AMU). The adjacent Serial Bus #3
diagram illustrates the Output File AMU #2 EIA 485
architecture.
W. The real power of this Cabinet Monitoring System

architecture is that it allows
the user a much greater degree of flexibility in cabinet configurations than previously
possible. This diagram shows the control system for a single intersection. The use of
serial communications to the CMU is a very powerful concept. Serial
communications to multiple CMUs allow for the response to a conflict at a single
intersection and not impact other intersections/ramps/etc. operated by the same
controller. Therefore, one intersection could go to flash independently of the others,
provided that each cabinet (or each independent output assembly) has a PDA within
which a CMU is installed.
X. Cabinet Monitor Unit (CMU). The CMU is housed in the PDA. There should only be
one of these installed in each cabinet, or each grouping of output assemblies. It is the
main processor unit of the cabinet monitoring system. It monitors main cabinet
functions, such as the condition of cabinet power, door status, and status of the
flasher. It communicates with the AMUs located in the output assemblies and
compares requested actions (from the controller) with the actual cabinet operation
(switch pack outputs) to detect errors, conflicts, and other anomalies. It can then
direct the cabinet to a flashing or fail-safe condition.
Y. The exception here is the Cabinet Housing 3, which could contain two separate
groupings of input, output and power distribution assemblies for two separate
intersections all controlled by a single controller.
Z. The configuration and operational characteristics of the CMU is determined by

software. This programming may be customized to user needs and desires. There is
also a specific reporting format, in order to address the minimum mandatory
functionality of this unit. The minimum functionality is at least that provided by the
NEMA TS2 Malfunction Monitoring Unit.
16730-22
AA. To allow full programmability of the CMU, without a massive number of physical
jumpers, the Model 210 and NEMA diode based conflict programming board is
replaced by a serial memory key. This serial memory key contains all information to
configure the monitoring system as well as other cabinet configuration information.
BB. The CMU might carry an address so that multiple CMUs could be used to provide
multiple intersection control assemblies controlled by a single controller. The CMU
addressing is accomplished through address jumper programming on the rear of the
PDA. A maximum of four CMUs are allowed.
CC. Auxiliary Monitor Unit (AMU). The AMU is housed in each output assembly. This
unit does the basic monitoring of the output of the switch packs and reports their
status to the CMU. It is essentially a device that monitors the output voltage and
current of each circuit of each switch pack. This module communicates to the CMU
via Serial Bus 3. Having this unit as a separate module from the CMU allows greater
modularity of the cabinet. The cabinet can contain any grouping of between one and
four output assemblies. However, the grouping of output assemblies and associated
CMU connected via a single Serial Bus 3 would remain as an associated grouping and
not be split to different cabinets.
DD. Serial Memory Key. This key is essentially a non-volatile computer memory device.
There are two of these devices in the system, one in the controller and one in the
CMU. It contains all the specific information to define unit operations and
malfunctions. In general, the key in the CMU replaces the Model 210 and NEMA
Conflict Monitor Programming Card, plus any information previously programmed
into those units. The CMU serial memory key does not contain the controller
operating and application software. Start-up processes
within the cabinet allow the CMU, and the controller, to
verify a compatible configuration before starting normal
operation.
EE. Cabinet Communications Systems. The controller

communicates with the various cabinet subassemblies via a
serial bus arrangement. There are three separate serial
Serial Memory Key
buses employed. These buses are similar to those used in
the NEMA TS2 specification and communicate using a
Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) protocol. The Cabinet Block Diagram
illustrates how this system is configured. The electrical characteristics of this
communications circuit are defined by EIA/TIA 485 specifications.
FF. Serial Interface Unit (SIU). The SIU functions as the cabinet communications and
control unit. The SIU communicates with the ATC Controller Unit through Serial
Bus 1 and Serial Bus 2 via the Modular Bus Assembly. In the case where the input
and/or output assembly is mounted remotely, communications would be over a data
grade interconnect cable. This cable might be a fiber optic cable because of its high
noise immunity and reliability.
16730-23
GG. A SIU is needed for each input assembly and each

output assembly connected to the ATC Controller Unit.
Controller
HH. Serial Bus 1. This bus communicates real time
Input
information required to operate the system. It handles the
Assembly highest priority, time sensitive data exchange between the
SIUs in the input and output assemblies, controller unit and
the CMU. An example would be the commands to the switch
Serial Bus 3
Input
Assembly Serial Bus 1 & 2 packs to change signal color or data from detection inputs.
Serial Bus 1 is designed for a communications rate of 614,400
Output bits per second.
Assembly
II. Serial Bus 2. This bus communicates less time critical
Output information between the SIUs in the input and output
Assembly assemblies, and the controller unit. An example would be
servicing requests for general program information as might
Output be requested from a central computer system. Serial Bus 2 is
Assembly designed for an allowable communications rate of 614,400
Power
bits per second.
Distribution
Assembly JJ. Serial Bus 3. This bus is dedicated to communications
between the AMUs and the CMU. It is used to allow the
Cabinet Monitor System
Block Diagram
CMU to monitor the various voltages, operating conditions,
and currents in the output assemblies to determine actual
switch pack conditions. Serial Bus 3 has an operating
communications rate of 153,600 bits per second.
KK. Service Assembly. The service assembly houses critical modules used within the rack
system. Each assembly accommodates three Serial Interface Units (SIU), three
Auxiliary Monitor Units (AMU), and one Cabinet Monitor Unit (CMU).
LL. Standard Cabinet Assemblies. There are three different cabinet assemblies, which
consist of a specific collection of the subassemblies described above. Each of these
assemblies is installed in a cabinet that is designed for a particular group of
applications and is sized to hold the equipment required. The cabinets have doors
both on the front and the back. The equipment is mounted on a standard EIA 19 in.
rack that is fitted inside each cabinet.
MM. Each cabinet includes at least the following common features:
• Enclosure • Gasketing
• Doors • Police Panel
• Latches/Locks • Ventilation and Air Filtration
• Hinges and Door Catches • Assembly Supports and Mounting
16730-24
NN. Cabinet Housing 1. This Cabinet Housing is very similar to the Type 332 series of
cabinet used for the Model 170 Controller system. It is a single rack cabinet with
sufficient capacity to operate a full eight-phase traffic signal. Dimensions are width
24.25 in., depth 30.25 in., and height 66.78 in.
OO. Cabinet Housing 2. This shorter version of Cabinet Housing 1 is very similar to the
Type 336S series of cabinet used for the Model 170 Controller system and is meant
for applications that require less space for inputs and outputs. This cabinet might be
found at small two through eight-phase traffic signals, ramp meters, data stations and
similar less space demanding applications. Dimensions are width 24.25 in., depth
20.25 in., and height 46.25 in.
PP. Cabinet Housing 3. This is a large two rack, four door cabinet with bottom details and
a bolt pattern similar in size to the NEMA P cabinet. It is meant for installations
requiring a lot of equipment. An example application may be a traffic signal
controller with a communications hub or a ramp meter, or perhaps additional
input/output assemblies. Dimensions are width 44.50 in., depth 26.00 in., height
66.38 in.
2.05 CABINET REQUIREMENTS
A. All furnished equipment must be new and unused. Vacuum or gaseous tubes and
electro-mechanical devices (unless specifically called out) will not be used.
1. References. Reference is made to the following documents:
a. ATC 2070 v01.05, Advanced Transportation Controller (ATC)

Standard for the Type 2070 Controller, dated March 29, 2001
2. Interchangeability. Assemblies and their associated devices must be

electrically and mechanically interchangeable at both the assembly and device
levels:
16730-25
ASSEMBLIES ASSOCIATED DEVICES

Input Assembly Model 222, 232 & 224 Sensor Unit
Model 242 and 252 Isolator Unit
Type 218 Serial Interface Unit (SIU)
Output Assembly Model 200 Switch Pack Unit

Model 205 Transfer Relay Unit
Model 214 Auxiliary Monitor Unit
Type 218 SIU Unit
PDA ITS Model 204 Flasher Units

Model 212 Cabinet Monitor Unit
Model 216-12 & 216-24 Power Supply
Units
Service Assembly Type 218 Serial Interface Unit (SIU)

Model 214 Auxiliary Monitor Unit (AMU)
Model 212 Cabinet Monitor Unit (CMU)
2.06 ENGINEERING
A. Human Engineering. The equipment must be engineered for simplicity, ease of

operation and maintenance.
1. Knobs must be a minimum of 0.5 in. in diameter and a minimum separation of

0.5 in. edge to edge.
2. PCBs must slide smoothly in their guides while being inserted into or
removed from the frame and fit snugly into the plug-in PCB connectors.
PCBs must require a force no less than 5 pounds-force or greater than 50
pounds-force for insertion or removal.
B. Design Engineering. The design must be inherently temperature compensated to

prevent abnormal operation. The circuit design must include such compensation as is
necessary to overcome adverse effects due to temperature in the specified
environmental range. The design must take into consideration the protection of
personnel from all dangerous voltages.
C. Generated Noise. No item, component or subassembly must emit an audible noise

level exceeding the peak level of 55 dBa when measured at a distance of one meter
away from its surface, except as otherwise noted. No item, component or
subassembly must emit a noise level sufficient to interfere with processing and
communication functions of the controller circuits.
2.07 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
16730-26
A. Design, Fabrication and Mounting.
1. All contacts on PCBs must be plated with a minimum thickness of 0.00003 in.
gold over a minimum thickness of 0.000075 in. nickel.
2. PCB design must be such that when a component is removed and replaced, no
damage is done to the board, other components, conductive traces or tracks.
3. Fabrication of PCBs must be in compliance with Military Specification MIL-

P-13949, except as follows:
a. NEMA FR-4 glass cloth base epoxy resin copper clad laminates
0.0625 in. minimum thickness must be used. Inter-component wiring
must be by laminated copper clad track having a minimum weight of
0.2 ounces per square foot with adequate cross section for current to be
carried. All copper tracks must be plated or soldered to provide
complete coverage of all exposed copper tracks. Jumper wires to
external PCB components must be from plated-through padded holes
and as short as possible.
b. All PCBs must conform to Section 3.3 of Military Specification MIL-

P-13949G Grade of Pits and Dents, and be of Grade B quality (3.5.1.3)
or better. The class of permissible bow or twist must be Class C
(Table V) or better. The class of permissible warp or twist must be
Class A (Table II) or better.
c. Sections 4.2 through 6.6 of Military Specification MIL-P-13949G

(inclusive) must be omitted except as referenced in previous sections
of this specification.
d. The mounting of parts and assemblies on the PCB must conform to the
following:
(1) Semiconductor devices that dissipate more than 250 milliwatts

or cause a temperature rise of 10 degrees C, or more, be
mounted with spacers, transipads or heat sinks to prevent
contact with the PCB.
(2) When completed, all residual flux must be removed from the
PCB.
(3) The resistance between any two isolated, independent

conductor paths must be at least 100 Megohms when a 500
VDC potential is applied.
(4) All PCBs must be coated with a moisture resistant coating.
16730-27
(5) Where less than 0.25 in. lateral separation is provided between
the PCB (or the components of a PCB) and any metal surface,
a 0.0625 in. (+/-0.0005 in.) Thick Mylar (polyester) plastic
cover must be provided on the metal to protect the PCB.
e. Each PCB connector edge must be chamfered at 30 degrees from

board side planes. The key slots must also be chamfered so that the
connector keys are not extracted upon removal of board or jammed
upon insertion. The key slots must be 0.045 in. (+/-0.005 in.) for 0.1
in. spacing and 0.055 in. (+/-0.005 in.) for 0.156 in. spacing.
B. Soldering.
1. Automatic flow soldering must be a constant speed conveyor system with the
conveyor speed set at optimum to minimize solder peaks or points. The
temperature must be controlled to within +/-8 degrees C of the optimum
temperature. The soldering process must result in the complete coverage of
all copper runs, joints and terminals with solder except that which is covered
by an electroplating process. Wherever clinching is not used, a method of
holding the components in the proper position for the flow process will be
provided.
2. If exposure to the temperature bath is of such a time-temperature duration as

to come within 80% of any component's maximum specified time-temperature
exposure, that component must be hand soldered to the PCB after the flow
process has been completed.
C. Definitions. Definitions for the purpose of this section on PCBs must be taken from
MIL-PRF-55110J Section 3.3 and any current addendum.
D. Jumpers. Jumpers are not allowed unless called out in the specifications or approved
by the CITY OF HOUSTON.
A. Components. All components must be lot sampled to assure a consistent high

conformance standard to the design specification of the equipment.
B. Subassembly, Unit or Module. Complete electrical and environmental compliance

testing must be performed on each module, unit, printed circuit or subassembly.
Housing, chassis, and connection terminals must be inspected for mechanical
sturdiness, and harnessing to sockets must be electrically tested for proper wiring
sequence. The equipment must be visually and physically inspected to assure proper
placement, mounting, and compatibility of subassemblies.
C. Pre-delivery Repair.
16730-28
1. Any defects or deficiencies found by the inspection system involving

mechanical structure or wiring must be returned through the manufacturing
process or special repair process for correction.
2. PCB flow soldering is allowed a second time if copper runs and joints are not
satisfactorily coated on the first run. Under no circumstances will a PCB be
flow soldered more than twice.
3. Hand soldering is allowed for printed circuit repair.
2.09 ELECTRICAL, ENVIRONMENTAL AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. The framework of this section, along with the specific test requirements contained
herein, is excerpted with modifications from NEMA TS2-2003 - Section 2 by
permission of NEMA. Excerpt © 2002 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA.
B. General. This section establishes the limits of the environmental and operational
conditions in which the Cabinet Assembly will perform. This section defines the
minimum test procedures that may be used to demonstrate conformance of a device
type with the provisions of the standard. These test procedures do not verify
equipment performance under every possible combination of environmental
requirements covered by this standard. Nothing in this testing profile must be
construed as to relieve the requirement that the equipment provided must fully
comply with these standards/specifications under all environmental conditions stated
herein.
1. The City of Houston may wish to extend the testing profile or introduce
additional tests to verify compliance. (Authorized Engineering Information).
C. Inspection. A visual and physical inspection must include mechanical, dimensional

and assembly conformance to all parts of this standard.
D. Testing Requirements.
1. A complete quality control / final test report must be supplied with each item.
Quality control procedures must be submitted to the City of Houston prior to
production. The test report must indicate the name of the tester and be signed
by a responsible manager.
2. The quality control procedure and test report format must be supplied to the
City of Houston for approval upon request. The quality control procedure
must include the following, in the order shown:
a. Design Acceptance testing of all supplied components.
b. Physical and functional testing of all modules and items.
c. Environmental testing reports for all equipment.
16730-29
d. Physical and functional testing of all items.
3. Separate certifications must be provided for Design and Production. Design

Acceptance testing must be performed with a fully loaded and functional
Cabinet Assembly. Production testing must be performed as part of the City
of Houston’s procurement delivery procedures and that testing should be
performed at the Major Unit level. (Authorized Engineering Information).
4. Certain portions of the test procedures contained in this standard my cause

damage to the unit (e.g. protection devices may be aged) and are not
recommended for routine Production testing. (Authorized Engineering
Information)
E. Definitions of Major Units of the Cabinet Assembly. For the purpose of this section,
"Major units of the Cabinet Assembly” must include the Controller Unit, Application
Software for implementing the desired functionality, Cabinet Monitor Unit (CMU),
Auxiliary Monitor Unit (AMU), Serial Interface Units (SIUs), Power Distribution
Unit (PDA), Switch Packs, Flasher(s), and Detector(s).
F. Environmental and Operating Requirements. The requirements (voltage, temperature,

etc.) of this section must apply in any combination.
1. Voltage and Frequency.
a. Operating Voltage. The nominal voltage must be 120 VAC, unless

otherwise noted.
b. Operating Frequency. The operating frequency range must be 60 hertz

(+/-3.0 hertz), unless otherwise noted.
2. Transients, Power Service. The Test Unit must maintain all defined functions
when the independent test pulse levels specified below occur on the
alternating-current power service.
3. Nondestructive Transient Immunity Requirements.
a. The Test Unit (with protection in place and operational) must be

capable of withstanding a high energy transient having the following
characteristics repeatedly applied to the alternating current input
terminals (AC power applied) without failure of the test specimen:
(1) Amplitude: 2000 Volts (+/-5 percent), both positive and

negative polarity.
(2) Energy Source: Capacitor, oil filled, 15 microfarads (+/-10

percent), internal surge impedance less than 1 ohm.
(3) Repetition: Applied to the Test Unit once every 2 seconds for a
maximum of three applications for each polarity.
16730-30
(4) After the foregoing, the Test Unit must perform all defined
functions upon the application of nominal alternating current
power.
b. This test is considered to be a minimum test requirement for the Test

Unit complying with ANSI/IEEE C62.41 (100 Kilohertz Ring Wave,
the 1.2/50 microseconds – 8/20 Combination Wave and the EFT
Burst) at voltages and currents specified at “Location Category B2”
and at “Test Severity” level III (i.e. up to 4.0 Kilovolts, open-circuit).
Regional conditions may warrant additional testing as described in
ANSI/IEEE C62.41. (Authorized Engineering Information)
4. Transients, Input-Output Terminals.
a. The Test Unit (without protection in place or operational) must

maintain all defined functions, when the test pulse occurs on selected
input-output terminals.
(1) Amplitude: 300 Volts, both positive and negative polarity.
(2) Pulse Source: 1000 ohms nominal impedance.
(3) Repetition: 1 pulse per second, for a minimum of 5 pulses per

selected terminal.
(4) Pulse rise time: 1 microsecond.
(5) Pulse width: 10 microseconds.
b. This test is considered to be a minimum test requirement for the Test

Unit complying with ANSI/IEEE C62.41. Regional conditions may
warrant additional testing as described in ANSI/IEEE C62.41.
(Authorized Engineering Information)
5. Temperature and Humidity. The Test Unit must maintain all programmed
functions when the temperature and humidity ambients are within the
specified limits defined herein.
a. Ambient Temperature.
(1) The operating ambient temperature range must be from -37

degrees C to +74 degrees C. The storage temperature range
must be from -45 degrees C to +85 degrees C.
(2) The rate of change in ambient temperature must not exceed 18

degrees C per hour, during which the relative humidity must
not exceed 95 percent.
b. Humidity.
16730-31
(1) The relative humidity must not exceed 95 percent non-

condensing over the temperature range of -37 degrees C to +74
degrees C.
(2) Above +46 degrees C, constant absolute humidity must be

maintained. This will result in the relative humidity shown in
Exhibit 3-1 for dynamic testing.
Table 1
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE VERSUS RELATIVE HUMIDITY
AT BAROMETRIC PRESSURES (29.92 In. Hg.) (NON-CONDENSING)
Ambient Temperature/ Relative Humidity Ambient Temperature/

Dry Bulb (in degrees C) (in percent) Wet Bulb (in degrees C)
-37.0 to 1.1 10 -17.2 to 42.7
1.1 to 46.0 95 42.7
48.8 70 42.7
54.4 50 42.7
60.0 38 42.7
65.4 28 42.7
71.2 21 42.7
74.0 18 42.7
G. Test Facilities. All instrumentation required in the test procedures, such as voltmeters,
ammeters, thermocouples, pulse timers, etc. must be selected in accordance with good
engineering practice. In all cases where time limit tests are required, the allowance
for any instrumentation errors must be included in the limit test.
1. Variable Voltage Source: A variable source capable of supplying 20 amperes

from 100 VAC to 135 VAC.
2. Environmental Chamber: An environmental chamber capable of attaining

temperatures of -37 degrees C to +74 degrees C and relative humidity given in
Table 1.
3. Transient Generators: Transient generators capable of supplying the transients

outlined above.
H. Test Procedure: Transients, Temperature, Voltage, and Humidity
1. Test A: Placement in Environmental Chamber and Check-Out of Hook-Up
16730-32
a. Place the test unit in the environmental chamber. Connect the test unit
AC input circuit to a variable voltage power transformer, voltmeter,
and transient generator. The transient generator must be connected to
Temperature
Chamber AC Power
Communications Variable
Test Device ITS Cabinet
Voltage
ATC/2070 Source
Minimum
25 feet
Input File Transient

Generator
Voltmeter Output File Minimum
10 feet
Power Storage
Power Distribution Control Scope &
Relay Voltmeter
Power
Interrupter
Connection to Signal Loads

or dummy loads for
maximum heat dissipation
Timing Chart External Time

Recorder Reference
the AC input circuit at a point at least 25 feet from the AC power

source and not over 10 feet from the input to the test unit.
b. Connect test switches to the appropriate terminals to simulate the

various features incorporated into the test unit. Place these switches in
the proper position for desired operation.
c. Verify the test hook-up. Adjust the variable-voltage power

transformer to 120 VAC and apply power to the test unit. Verify that
the test unit goes through its prescribed startup sequence and cycles
properly in accordance with the operation determined by the
positioning of test switches in item b.
d. Upon the satisfactory completion and verification of the test hook-up,

proceed with Test B.
2. Test B: Nondestructive Transient Immunity:
a. Turn off the AC power input to the test unit from the variable-voltage
power source.
b. Apply the following high-energy transient to the AC voltage input

terminals of the test unit (no other power connected to terminals):
(1) Amplitude: 1000 V, both positive and negative polarity.
16730-33
(2) Peak Power Discharge: Capacitor, oil-filled, 15 microfarads.
(3) Maximum Repetition Rate: Applied to the Cabinet Assembly

once every 2 seconds for a maximum of three applications for
each polarity.
c. Upon completion of the foregoing, apply 120 VAC to the test unit and
verify that the test unit goes through its prescribed startup sequence
and cycles properly in accordance with the programmed functions. The
first operation of the over-current protective device during this test is
not considered a failure of the test unit.
NOTE—Test C through G follow the profile indicated in Figure 2 to demonstrate the ability of
the test unit to function reliably under stated conditions of temperature, voltage, and humidity.
Figure 2
Test Profile
NOTES:
1. The rate of change in temperature must not exceed 18 degrees C per hour
2. Humidity controls must be set in conformance with the humidity given in Exhibit 3-1
during the temperature change between Test D and Test E.
3. If a change in both voltage and temperature are required for the next test, the voltage
must be selected prior to the temperature change.
16730-34
3. Test C—Low-Temperature Low-Voltage Tests
a. Definition of Test Conditions
(1) Environmental Chamber Door: Closed.
(2) Temperature: -37 degrees C.
(3) Low Voltage: 100 VAC.
(4) Humidity Control: Off.
b. Test Procedure: While at room temperature, adjust the input voltage to

100 VAC and verify that the test unit is still operable.
(1) With the test unit cycling through normal operations, lower the
test chamber to -37 degrees C at a rate not exceeding 18
degrees C per hour. Allow the test unit to cycle for a minimum
of 5 hours at -37 degrees C with the humidity controls in the
off position. Then operate the test switches as necessary to
determine that all functions are operable.
(2) Remove power from the test unit for a minimum period of 5
hours. Upon restoration of power, the test unit must go
through its prescribed startup sequence and then resume
cycling.
(3) With the test unit at -37 degrees C and the input voltage at 100
VAC, evaluate the following items against the respective
standards:
(a) Power Interruption Tests
c. On satisfactory completion of this test, proceed with Test D.
4. Test D—Low-Temperature High-Voltage Tests
(1) Environmental Chamber Door: closed.
(2) Low Temperature: -37 degrees C.
(3) High Voltage: 135 VAC.
(4) Humidity Controls: Off.
16730-35
b. Test Procedure: While at -37 degrees C and with humidity controls off,
adjust the input voltage to 135 VAC and allow the test unit to cycle for
1 hour. Then operate the test switches as necessary to determine that
all functions are operable.
VAC (humidity controls off), evaluate the following items
against the respective standards:
c. On satisfactory completion of this test, proceed to Test E.
5. Test E—High-Temperature High-Voltage Tests
(2) High Temperature: +74 degrees C.
(3) High Voltage: 135 VAC.
(4) Humidity Controls: In accordance with the humidity given in

Table 1.
b. Test Procedure—With the test unit cycling, raise the test chamber to
+74 degrees C at a rate not to exceed 18 degrees C per hour. Verify
the input voltage is 135 VAC.
(1) Set the humidity controls to not exceed 95 percent relative

humidity over the temperature range of +1.1 degrees C to +46
degrees C. When the temperature reaches +46 degrees C,
readjust the humidity control to maintain constant absolute
humidity; +42.7 degrees C wet bulb that results in the relative
humidity shown in Table 1. Verify that the test unit continues
to cycle satisfactory during the period of temperature increase
and at established levels of relative humidity.
(2) Allow the test unit to cycle for a minimum of 15 hours at +74
degrees C and 18 percent relative humidity. Then operate the
test switches as necessary to determine that all functions are
operable.
(3) With the test unit at +74 degrees C and 18 percent relative
humidity and the input voltage at 135 VAC, evaluate the
following items against the respective standards:
16730-36
c. On satisfactory completion of this test, proceed to Test F.
6. Test F—High-Temperature Low-Voltage Tests
(2) High Temperature: +74 degrees C.
(3) Low Voltage: 100 VAC.
(4) Humidity Controls: 18 percent relative humidity and +42.7

degrees C wet bulb.
b. Test Procedure: Adjust the input voltage to 100 VAC and proceed to
operate the test switches to determine that all functions are operable.
With the test unit at +74 degrees C and 18 percent relative humidity,
+42.7 degrees C wet bulb, and the input voltage at 100 VAC, evaluate
the following items against the respective standards:
(1) Power Interruption Tests
c. On satisfactory completion of this test, proceed to Test G.
7. Test G—Test Termination
a. Program the test unit to cycle.
b. Adjust the input voltage to 120 VAC.
c. Set the controls on the environmental chamber to return to room

temperature, +20 degrees C (+/-5 degrees C), with the humidity
controls in the off position. The rate of temperature change must not
exceed 18 degrees C per hour.
d. Verify the test unit continues to cycle through normal operations

properly.
e. Allow the test unit to stabilize at room temperature for 1 hour.

Proceed to operate the test switches to determine that all functions are
operable.
8. Test H—Appraisal of Equipment under Test
a. A failure is defined as any occurrence that results in other than normal

operation of the equipment. (See item 2 for details.) If a failure
occurs, the test unit must be repaired or components replaced, and the
test during which failure occurred must be restarted from its
beginning.
16730-37
b. The test unit is considered to have failed if any of the following occur:
(1) If the test unit skips normal program intervals/steps or portions

thereof when in normal operation, places false inputs, presents
false outputs, exhibits disruption of normal sequence of
operations, or produces changes in parameters beyond
specified tolerances, or
(2) If the test unit fails to satisfy the requirements of Tests A to G,

inclusive.
c. An analysis of the failure must be performed and corrective action

taken before the test unit is retested in accordance with this standard.
The analysis must outline what action was taken to preclude additional
failures during the tests.
d. When the number of failures exceeds two, it must be considered that

the test unit fails to meet these standards. The test unit may be
completely retested after analysis of the failure and necessary repairs
have been made in accordance with item c.
e. Upon completion of the tests, visually inspect the test unit. If material
changes are observed which will adversely affect the life of the test
unit, the cause and conditions must be corrected before making further
tests.
I. Power Interruption Test Procedures. Conduct the following power interruption tests at
low input voltage (100 VAC) and high input voltage (135 VAC) at -37 degrees C, and
+74 degrees C.
1. Short Power Interruption. While the Test Unit is cycling through normal
operations, remove the input voltage for a period not to exceed 475
milliseconds. Upon restoration of the input voltage, check to insure that the
Test Unit continues normal operation as though no power interruption has
occurred. Repeat this test three times.
2. Voltage Variation. All circuits of the Test Unit must be subjected to slowly
varying line voltage during which the Test Unit must be subjected to line
voltage that is slowly lowered from a nominal 120 VAC line voltage to 0
VAC at a rate of not greater than 2 Volts per second. The line voltage must
then be slowly raised to 100 VAC at which point the Test Unit must resume
normal operation without operator intervention. Perform this test at both -37
degrees C and +74 degrees C, at a nominal 120 VAC line voltage. Repeat this
test three times.
16730-38
3. Rapid Power Interruption. Subject the Test Unit to rapid power interruption
testing of the form that the power is off for 350 milliseconds and on for 650
milliseconds for a period of 2 minutes. Perform power interruption through
electromechanical contacts of an appropriate size for the load. During this
testing, the controller must function normally and continue normal sequencing
(operation) at the conclusion of the test. This test must be performed at both -
37 degrees C and +74 degrees C, at a nominal 120 VAC line voltage. Repeat
this test three times.
2.10 AUXILIARY CABINET UNITS
A. General Requirements.
1. Models 200 and 204 General.
a. The unit chassis must be made of metal suitable to meet rigid support
and environmental requirements. Where electrical isolation is the only
requirement, plastic insulation material may be used in lieu of metal.
b. The unit control circuitry and switches must be readily accessible by

the use of a screwdriver or wrench. Only one type of screw head end
(Slotted or Phillips) to be used.
c. The unit must be constructed so that no live voltage is exposed. A

handle must be attached to the front panel for insertion or removal
from the unit mating connector.
d. The unit must be so constructed that its lower surface must be no more
than 2.06 in. below the centerline of the connector and no part extend
more than 0.9 in. to the left or 1.1 in. to the right of the connector
centerline.
e. Continuous edge guides must be provided on the unit.
f. Each switch must be capable of switching any current from 0.050

Amperes to 10.0 Amperes (AC) load with power factor of 0.85 or
higher.
g. Unit indicators must be vertically centered on the front panel with

indicators positioned no more than 1 in. from said center.
2. Model Plug Connectors. Model plug connectors must be:
a. Model 200 BEAU P 5412 - LAB or approved equal.
b. Model 204 BEAU P 5406 - LAB or approved equal.
B. Model 200 Switch Pack Unit.
16730-39
1. General.
a. The Model 200 Switch Pack Unit must be a modular plug-in device
containing three solid-state switches. Each switch must open or close
a connection between applied power and external load.
b. A Ground True Controller Unit Input (0 VDC to 6 VDC) must cause

the switch to conduct (ON) and a Ground False (16 VDC or more)
must cause it to not conduct (OFF), State transition must occur
between 6 VDC and 16 VDC. The input must not sink more than 20
milliamperes or be subjected to more than 30 VDC. The input must
have reverse polarity protection.
c. With all switches ON, the unit must not draw more than 60
milliamperes at +16 VDC or more from the +24 VDC cabinet power
supply.
d. Each switch must have an OFF state dv/dt rating of 100 Volts per
microsecond or better. Each switch must provide isolation between
inputs and outputs of at least 2000 Vdc and at least 100 megaohms
resistive.
e. The unit front panel must have an indicator on the input to each
switch. The indicator must be labeled or color-coded “Red”-top
switch, “Yellow”-middle switch, and “Green”-bottom switch. The
middle switch indicator must be vertically centered on the unit front
panel with the other indicators positioned 1 in. above and below.
f. The resistance between the AC+ input terminal and the AC+ output
terminal of each switch must be a minimum of 15K Ohms when the
switch is in open (OFF) state. When the switch is in the OFF state, the
output current through the load must not exceed 10 milliamperes peak.
C. Model 204 Flasher Unit and Model 205 Flash Transfer Relay Unit.
1. Model 204 Flasher Unit.
a. The FLASHER UNIT must be a modular plug-in device containing a

flasher control circuit and two solid-state switches. The unit’s
function is to alternatively open and close connections between
applied power and external load.
b. The unit must generate its own internal DC power from the AC Line.
c. The unit must commence flashing operation when AC power is

applied providing 50 to 60 flashes per minute per switch with a 50 %
duty cycle.
16730-40
d. Each switch must have an OFF state dv/dt rating of 200

V/microsecond or better. The resistance between the AC+ input
terminal and the AC+ output terminal of each switch must be a
minimum of 15K Ohms when the switch is in open (OFF) state. When
the switch is in OFF state the output current must not exceed 10
milliamperes peak.
e. An indicator showing each switch output state must be provided. The

two indicators must be centered with 1 in. minimum spacing.
f. Each circuit must be designed to operate in an open-circuit condition

without load for 10 years minimum.
g. A surge arrestor must be provided between AC (pin 11) and Flasher

Output (pins 7 &
(1) The arrestor must meet the following requirements:
(a) Recurrent Peak Voltage 212 Volts
(b) Maximum Energy Rating 50 Joules
(c) Average Power Dissipation 0.85 Watts
(d) Peak I for pulses less than 6 microseconds 2000

Amperes
(e) Standby I less than 1 Ma
2. Model 205 Flash Transfer Relay Unit. Each switch must be designed for a
minimum of 100,000 (reference is a 10-year lifespan) operations while
switching a tungsten load of 1000 Watts at 70 degrees C. Switch isolation
between DC input and AC output circuit must be at least 10,000 Megohms at
2000 VDC.
a. The Flash Transfer Relay Unit must be of electromechanical type,

designed for continuous duty.
b. Each unit must be enclosed in a removable, clear plastic cover. The

manufacturer’s name, electrical rating, and part number must be
placed on the cover. They must be durable, permanent and readily
visible.
16730-41
c. Each unit must be provided with DPDT contacts. The contact points
must be of fine silver, silver alloy or a superior alternate material.
Contact points and arms must be capable of switching 20 Amperes or
1 Kilowatt Tungsten Load at 120 VAC per contact at least 100,000
operations without contact welding or excessive burning, pitting or
cavitation. The points and arms must be able to withstand 10 Gs, 10 –
55 Hertz without contact chatter.
d. The relay coil must have a power consumption of 10 Volt - Ampere

maximum.
e. Each relay must withstand a potential of 1500 VAC at 60 Hertz

between insulated parts and between current carrying or non-carrying
parts. Each relay must have a one cycle surge rating of 175 Amperes
RMS and pickup and drop out within 20 milliseconds.
D. Model 212 ITS Cabinet Monitor Unit (CMU).
1. General. The CMU is the principle part of the ITS Cabinet Monitoring
System. It is resident in the Power Distribution Assembly. The role of the
CMU is to query various cabinet conditions and, if the application requires
action, the CMU will transfer control from the ATC Controller Unit to a safe
control mode, examples include Signalized Intersection, Ramp Metering or
other applications. Some applications may not require any action, only data
gathering and report back to the ATC Controller Unit.
2. The CMU is composed of a microprocessor, memory devices including non-

volatile memory, communications circuitry to interface with Serial Buses #1
and #3, front panel indicators, front panel communication connector and a
serial memory key device. The Operating Program must be resident in the
Non-volatile memory. The serial memory key Memory must possess the
conditions and function selections of the Unit.
3. Traffic Control Application. The Model 212 is intended for traffic control
applications.
4. Failed State Action (FSA). Only Unit Reset must reset the CMU from a
LATCHED FAILED STATE ACTION (LFSA). Only a Unit Reset or a CMU
Power Fail must reset a LATCHED RESETTABLE FAILED STATE
ACTION (LFSA-R).
a. A NONLATCHED FAILED STATE ACTION (NFSA) must be reset

if the fault conditions causing the NFSA have been removed. An
NFSA must last for the programmed Minimum Flash time at a
minimum.
b. Only one LFSA, LFSA-R or NFSA fault state must be set at any time.
16730-42
5. Unit Reset. The CMU must be reset from a FSA as a result of the front panel
reset button or the EXTERNAL TEST RESET input. This reset command
must be a one-time event, such that a continuous reset command does not
prevent the CMU from operating. The EXTERNAL TEST RESET input must
be isolated from the AC+ Raw circuitry.
a. The EXTERNAL TEST RESET input must be True when the voltage
is less than 8 VDC. The EXTERNAL TEST RESET input must be
False when the voltage is greater than 16 VDC. A minimum True
pulse width on the EXTERNAL TEST RESET input of 100
milliseconds is required for a Unit Reset.
6. Exit From Failed State Action. Prior to the CMU transferring the Output
Relay contacts from the Fault state to the No Fault state, a transition period of
500 milliseconds must occur. During the transition period the Output Relay
contacts must be in the Fault state and the CMU must set the Start-Up Flash
Call bit in the Type 189 Frame to 1. At all other times the Start-Up Flash Call
bit of the Type 189 Frame must be set to 0.
7. Monitor Functions.
a. Cabinet Power Supply. The CMU must sense the Cabinet +24 VDC
and +12 VDC power supply sources to +/-5% accuracy. The CMU
must also sense the Cabinet +24 VDC state in each Output Assembly
as reported by each AMU. Voltages equal to or greater than +22 VDC
and +11 VDC respectively must NOT cause a LFSA. Voltages at or
less than +18 VDC and +9 VDC for 500 milliseconds or longer must
cause a LFSA. If the sensed voltage is less than +22 VDC or +11
VDC for 200 milliseconds or less, the CMU must NOT cause a LFSA.
All other timing or voltage conditions may or may not cause LFSA. A
+24 VDC failure or +12 VDC failure during the programmed
Minimum Flash time or during a CMU Power Failure must not cause a
LFSA. The CMU must report the value of the +24 VDC and +12
VDC power supply sources in the Type 189 response frame.
(1) There must be programming in the serial memory key to

disable +12 VDC power supply monitoring.
16730-43
b. Conflicting Channels. For purpose of conflict determination, an active

signal on either of the Green/Walk or Yellow inputs associated with
any of the thirty-two channels must be considered as that channel
being active. The serial memory key must contain the permissive
channel pair programming. When any conflicting channels are
detected as concurrently active for less than 200 milliseconds the
CMU must not cause a LFSA. When any conflicting channels are
detected as concurrently active for 500 milliseconds or more, the CMU
must cause a LFSA. When any conflicting channels are detected as
concurrently active for more than 200 milliseconds but less than 500
milliseconds, the CMU may or may not cause a LFSA. The time
interval between the beginning of the concurrently conflicting
channels and the transfer to the LFSA must not exceed 500
milliseconds.
c. Serial Bus Error. The CMU communicates with both Serial Bus (SB)
#1 and #3. In SB #1 the CMU is a Secondary, polled by the ATC
Controller Unit Primary. On SB #1, the CMU must respond to the
Serial Bus #1 Address defined by the ADDRESS 0 and ADDRESS 1
pins. In SB #3 the CMU is the Primary, polling each AMU
Secondary.
(1) Serial Bus #1 Error. The CMU must cause a FSA when a Type
61 or Type 67 Frame has not been received from the ATC
Controller Unit for greater than 1000 milliseconds. The first
and second failures in a 24-hour period must be a NFSA. The
third failure in a 24-hour period must be a LFSA-R. If a CMU
Power Fail resets the LFSA-R, the SB #1 timeout count must
be reset to 2 such that the next SB #1 timeout results in a
LFSA-R.
(a) A SB #1 timeout failure during the programmed

Minimum Flash time or during a CMU Power Failure
must not cause a FSA. The SB #1 Timeout function
must be disabled if the SB #1 DISABLE input is at a
True (Low) state.
(b) The SB #1 DISABLE input must be True when the

voltage is less than 8 VDC. The SB #1 DISABLE input
must be False when the voltage is greater than 16 VDC.
The SB #1 DISABLE input must be isolated from the
AC+ Raw circuitry.
16730-44
(2) Serial Bus #3 Error. The CMU must cause a FSA when a Type
129 or Type 130 Frame has not been received from each AMU
for greater than 300 milliseconds. The first and second failures
in a 24-hour period must be a NFSA. The third failure in a 24-
hour period must be a LFSA-R. If a CMU Power Fail resets
the LFSA-R, the SB #3 timeout count must be reset to 2 such
that the next SB #3 timeout results in a LFSA-R. A SB #3
timeout failure during the programmed Minimum Flash time or
during a CMU Power Failure must not cause a FSA.
d. Type 62 – Send to Local Flash Command Message. If the “N” bit is

set in a Type 62 – Send to Local Flash Command message, the CMU
must react by causing a NFSA. The NFSA must remain until the
receipt of a Type 62 – Send to Local Flash Command message with
the “N” bit cleared or until the CMU is reset by a Unit Reset or CMU
Power Fail. The NFSA must last for the programmed Minimum Flash
time at a minimum. If the “L” bit is set in a Type 62 – Send to Local
Flash Command message, the CMU must react by causing a LFSA.
e. Diagnostics.
(1) Diagnostics Error. The CMU must be provided with a resident

series of self-check diagnostic capabilities. The CMU must
contain provisions to verify all memory elements on power-up.
When a fault is detected, the LFSA-R must be set and the
DIAGNOSTIC indicator illuminated.
(2) RAM Diagnostic. This test must verify that all RAM elements
are operating correctly at power-up or following a Unit Reset.
Patterns must be written to RAM. Each write must be followed
by a read to verify that it contains the written pattern.
(3) Nonvolatile Diagnostic. This test must verify that the

nonvolatile ROM(s) contain the proper program. The routine
must perform a check on each ROM and make a comparison
with a preprogrammed check value. This test must be
performed at power-up and at a minimum rate of 1024 bits per
second during operation.
(4) Serial Memory Key Memory Diagnostic. This test must verify
whether the non-volatile serial memory key contains valid data
and that the data has not changed since the last write. The
routine must perform a check on each nonvolatile memory
element at power-up and whenever read and make a
comparison with a preprogrammed check value. The serial
memory key not present must cause a LFSA if the DOOR
SWITCH FRONT input is sensed as not active (door closed).
16730-45
(5) Internal MPU Monitor. The CMU must monitor the operation
of its microprocessor with an independent circuit. At a
minimum, the monitoring circuit must receive logic state
transitions at least once every 50 milliseconds from the
microprocessor. When the logic state transition is not received
for 500 milliseconds the monitor circuit must force a LFSA-R
and illuminate the DIAGNOSTIC indicator.
f. Multiple Input. The CMU must be capable of monitoring for the

presence of an active signal on two or more inputs of a channel. When
the presence of an active signal on two or more inputs of a channel is
detected for less than 200 milliseconds, the CMU must not cause a
LFSA. When the presence of an active signal on two or more inputs to
a channel is detected for 450 milliseconds or more, the CMU must
cause a LFSA. When the presence of an active signal on two or more
inputs to a channel is detected for more than 200 milliseconds but less
than 450 milliseconds, the CMU may or may not cause a LFSA.
Multiple Input monitoring must be disabled when the MAIN
CONTACTOR COIL STATUS input is not active. There must be
programming in the serial memory key to disable Multiple Indication
monitoring on a color combination basis (G+Y, Y+R, G+R).
g. Lack of Signal Inputs. The unit must detect the absence of any
required signal voltage OR signal current (CSU) on the inputs of a
channel. For voltage purposes a required signal on the Green or
Yellow or Red inputs associated with a channel must be considered as
that channel being active. When an absence of an active channel is
detected for less than 700 milliseconds, the CMU must not cause a
LFSA. When an absence of an active channel is detected for 1000
milliseconds or more, the CMU must cause a LFSA. When an absence
of an active channel is detected for more than 700 milliseconds but
less than 1000 milliseconds, the CMU may or may not cause a LFSA.
Lack of Signal Input monitoring must be disabled for all channels
when the MAIN CONTACTOR COIL STATUS input is not active.
There must be programming in the serial memory key to disable Lack
of Signal Input monitoring on a per channel basis.
(1) Lack of Signal Input monitoring must also be disabled for any
channel which has the DARK CHANNEL MAP bit set to "1"
in the serial memory key programming for the DARK
CHANNEL MAP addressed by the DARK CHANNEL MAP
SELECT bits in a Type 61 message. The CSU monitor
function is hardwired to twenty-eight physical channels, thus
Virtual Channels do not have CSU monitoring capability. The
CSU monitor function must be disabled for any physical
channel that has an input remapped to a Virtual Channel.
16730-46
h. Yellow Clearance. The CMU must verify that the Yellow Change
interval is at least 2.7 seconds (+/-0.1 seconds). When the minimum
Yellow Change interval is not satisfied, the CMU must cause a LFSA.
The CMU must report a Skipped Yellow Clearance when the Yellow
Change interval is less than 100 milliseconds. The CMU must report a
Short Yellow Clearance when the Yellow Change interval is less than
2.7 seconds (+/-0.1 seconds) and greater than 100 milliseconds.
(1) Minimum Yellow Change interval monitoring must be disabled

when the MAIN CONTACTOR COIL STATUS input is not
active. There must be programming in the serial memory key
to disable Minimum Yellow Change interval monitoring on a
per channel basis.
i. Yellow Plus Red Clearance. The CMU must verify that the Yellow
Change plus Red Clearance interval between the end of an active
GREEN signal and the beginning of the next conflicting GREEN
signal is at least 2.7 (+/-0.1 seconds). When the minimum Yellow
Change plus Red Clearance interval is not satisfied, the CMU must
cause a LFSA. Minimum Yellow Change plus Red Clearance
monitoring must be disabled when the MAIN CONTACTOR COIL
STATUS input is not active. There must be programming in the serial
memory key to disable Minimum Yellow Change plus Red Clearance
interval monitoring on a per channel basis.
j. Local Flash Status. The CMU must monitor the LF STATUS input.
When this signal is sensed as not active for greater than 500
milliseconds, the CMU must cause a NFSA. When this signal is
sensed as not active for less than 200 milliseconds, the CMU must not
cause a NFSA.
(1) Local Flash Status Recovery. Recovery from Local Flash

Status NFSA must occur when this signal is sensed as active
for greater than 500 milliseconds. When this signal is sensed
as active for less than 200 milliseconds, the CMU must not
cause recovery from Local Flash Status NFSA.
k. Circuit Breaker Trip Status. The CMU must monitor the CB TRIP
STATUS input. When this signal is sensed as not active for greater
than 500 milliseconds, the CMU must cause a LFSA. When this
signal is sensed as not active for less than 200 milliseconds, the CMU
must not cause a LFSA.
16730-47
l. Flasher Unit Output Failed. The CMU must monitor the FLASHER 1-
1, FLASHER 1-2, FLASHER 2-1, and FLASHER 2-2 voltage states
reported by each AMU. These inputs must be considered active when
the input voltage exceeds 89 Volts RMS. These inputs must not be
considered active when the input voltage is less than 70 Volts RMS.
Signals between 89 Volts RMS and 70 Volts RMS may or may not be
considered active. When a transition from the inactive state to the
active state or a transition from the active state to the inactive state is
absent for greater than 2500 milliseconds, the CMU must set a status
bit in the Type 189 frame. This alarm condition must not cause a FSA.
It should cause the appropriate response in the ATC Controller Unit.
This status is non-latching, such that once a status bit has been set, the
sensing of five valid transitions of the input must clear the status bit.
m. CMU Power Failure. The CMU must monitor the AC+ Raw input and
the NRESET and POWERDOWN cabinet control inputs to determine
a CMU Power Failure response. The POWERDOWN signal in the
low state indicates loss of AC+ Raw in the Controller Unit. A CMU
Power Failure must be recognized when both the POWERDOWN and
NRESET signals are active low for greater than 100 milliseconds or
the AC+ Raw voltage is less than 82 Volts RMS (+/-2 Volts RMS).
n. AC+ Raw Level Sense. The CMU must monitor the AC+ Raw input
and AC+ Raw inputs reported by each AMU. When any AC+ Raw
voltage is less than 82 Volts RMS (+/-2 Volts RMS) for greater than
650 milliseconds (+/-100 milliseconds) the CMU must cause a NFSA.
Once NFSA has been set, the POWERDOWN and NRESET signals
must not be monitored until all AC+ Raw voltages have exceeded 87
Volts RMS (+/-2 Volts RMS).
o. Power Interrupt. The CMU must disable monitoring of the +12VDC

and +24VDC power supply inputs when either the POWERDOWN or
NRESET input is low. When the POWERDOWN and NRESET
signals are both low the CMU must cause a NFSA.
p. Power Recovery. When the POWERDOWN input is high and the

NRESET signal goes from low to high the CMU must begin timing the
programmed Minimum Flash Interval. During the Minimum Flash
Interval the CMU must be in NFSA.
q. Power Up. Following initial application of AC+ Raw voltage the CMU
must maintain a NFSA until the POWERDOWN input is high and the
NRESET signal goes from low to high. The CMU must then begin
timing the programmed Minimum Flash Interval. During the
Minimum Flash Interval the CMU must be in NFSA.
16730-48
r. Minimum Flash Interval. The CMU must be in NFSA during the

Minimum Flash Interval. The Minimum Flash Interval must be
programmed in the serial memory key between the limits of 6 seconds
to 16 seconds with an incremental adjustment of 1 second. The CMU
must not set a FSA during the Minimum Flash Interval.
8. Field Output Check.
a. Field Check Mode. The CMU must compare the active states of the
field signals with the states reported by the ATC Controller Unit in the
Type 61 frame. When a mismatch is detected for less than 700
milliseconds the CMU must not cause a LFSA. When a mismatch is
detected for 1000 milliseconds or more, the CMU must cause a LFSA.
When a mismatch is detected for more than 700 milliseconds but less
than 1000 milliseconds, the CMU may or may not cause a LFSA.
Field Output Check monitoring must be disabled when the MAIN
CONTACTOR COIL STATUS input is not active. There must be a
programming in the serial memory key to disable Field Output Check
monitoring on a field input basis.
b. Field Check Status. The CMU must compare the active states of the
field signals with the states reported by the ATC Controller Unit in the
Type 61 frame. When a mismatch is detected while a Conflict, Lack
of Signal, or Multiple fault is timing, Field Check Status must be
reported with the fault to indicate the faulty channel(s) and color(s).
Field Output Check monitoring must be disabled when the MAIN
CONTACTOR COIL STATUS input is not active. There must be a
programming in the serial memory key to disable Field Output Check
monitoring on a field input basis.
9. CMU Temperature. The CMU must measure the temperature at the CMU and
report this value in the Type 182 frame. Temperature accuracy must be +/-6
degrees C over the operating temperature range of the CMU.
10. Input Signals.
a. Field Signal Inputs. A Green or Yellow signal input must be sensed

active when it exceeds 25 Volts RMS and must not be sensed active
when it is less than 15 Volts RMS. A Green or Yellow signal between
15 Volts RMS and 25 Volts RMS may or may not be sensed active.
There must be a programming in the serial memory key to disable the
Yellow input for each physical channel. A Red signal input must be
sensed active when it exceeds 70 Volts RMS and must not be sensed
active when it is less than 50 Volts RMS. A Red signal between 50
Volts RMS and 70 Volts RMS may or may not be sensed active.
16730-49
b. Switch Pack Current. A channel must be sensed active when the load
current exceeds 105% of the Channel Current Sense Threshold
programmed for that channel in the serial memory key. A channel
must not be sensed active when the load current is less than 95% of the
Channel Current Sense Threshold programmed for that channel in the
serial memory key. A load current value between 95% and 105% of
the Channel Current Sense Threshold may or may not be sensed
active.
c. PDA Control Signal Inputs.
(1) Local Flash Status. This input must be internally connected to

the CMU Output Relay COM pin. This input must be
considered active when the input voltage exceeds 89 Volts
RMS. This input must not be considered active when the input
voltage is less than 70 Volts RMS. Signals between 89 Volts
RMS and 70 Volts RMS may or may not be considered active.
Operation of the cabinet in AUTO mode must place AC+ on
this input. Operation of the cabinet in FLASH mode must be
open circuit on this input. The CMU must report the state of
this input in the Type 189 frame.
(2) Main Contactor Coil Status. The MAIN CONTACTOR COIL

STATUS input must be connected to the AC+ Raw side of the
main contactor signal bus relay coil. An active signal on this
input indicates the Signal Bus should be powering the Switch
Packs. This input must be considered active when the input
voltage exceeds 89 Volts RMS. This input must not be
considered active when the input voltage is less than 70 Volts
RMS. Signals between 89 Volts RMS and 70 Volts RMS may
or may not be considered active. The CMU must report the
state of this input in the Type 189 frame.
(3) Main Contactor Secondary Status. The MAIN CONTACTOR

SECONDARY STATUS input must be connected to the output
side of the main contactor signal bus relay. This input must be
considered active when the input voltage exceeds 89 Volts
RMS. This input must not be considered active when the input
voltage is less than 70 Volts RMS. Signals between 89 Volts
RMS and 70 Volts RMS may or may not be considered active.
The CMU must report the state of this input in the Type 189
frame.
16730-50
(4) FTR Coil Drive Status. The FTR COIL DRIVE STATUS input
must be connected to the FTR COIL DRIVE signal in the AC
SIGNAL POWER BUS. This input must be considered active
when the input voltage exceeds 89 Volts RMS. This input
must not be considered active when the input voltage is less
than 70 Volts RMS. Signals between 89 Volts RMS and 70
Volts RMS may or may not be considered active. The CMU
must report the state of this input in the Type 189 frame.
(5) Circuit Breaker (CB) Trip Status. The CB TRIP STATUS input
must be connected to the Auxiliary Switch output of the circuit
breaker unit. This input must be considered active when the
input voltage exceeds 89 Volts RMS. This input must not be
considered active when the input voltage is less than 70 Volts
RMS. Signals between 89 Volts RMS and 70 Volts RMS may
or may not be considered active. The CMU must report the
state of this input in the Type 189 frame.
(6) Front/Rear Door Switch. The CMU must monitor the DOOR
SWITCH FRONT and DOOR SWITCH REAR inputs. These
inputs must be considered active (door open) when the input
voltage exceeds 89 Volts RMS. These inputs must not be
considered active (door closed) when the input voltage is less
than 70 Volts RMS. Signals between 89 Volts RMS and 70
Volts RMS may or may not be considered active. The CMU
must report the state of these inputs in the Type 189 frame.
(7) Monitor Interlock. The MONITOR INTERLOCK input must

be connected to VDC GROUND within the CMU.
(8) CMU Address Inputs. The Address Select input pins

ADDRESS 0 and ADDRESS 1 define the Serial Bus #1
address of the CMU. The pins are left open for a logical False,
and are connected to VDC GROUND for a logical True.
ADDRESS 1 ADDRESS 0 SB #1 Address

False False 0x0F
False True 0x10
True False 0x11
True True 0x12
11. Power and Circuit Requirements.
16730-51
a. AC+ Raw. The CMU must be operational over the voltage range of 80
Volts RMS to 135 Volts RMS. It must be capable of insertion and
removal while AC power is applied to the cabinet. Surge current on
AC+ Raw must be less than 2 Amperes peak.
(1) +24VDC Power Supply. The CMU must not use the Cabinet
+24VDC Power Supply to run any of its internal circuitry. The
+24 VDC MONITOR and +12 VDC MONITOR input circuits
must be optically isolated from the AC+ Raw circuitry. The
maximum current into the +24 VDC or +12 VDC Monitor
inputs over the voltage range of 0 VDC to 30 VDC must be
less than 20 milliamperes.
(2) Failed State Output Circuit. The Output relay of the CMU must
have one set of isolated Form C contacts. These relay contacts
must be rated for a minimum of 3 Amperes at 120 Volts RMS
and 100,000 operations. Contact opening/closing time must be
30 milliseconds or less. The relay coil must be energized in the
No Fault state and de-energized in the FSA state.
12. Front Panel Devices.
a. Indicators. All indicators must be clear LEDs. Clear LEDs must not
depend on a reflector or diffusion as part of its design. Clear LEDs
must only show the die and not appear to be ON when exposed to
ambient light. The following indicators must be provided (Top to
Bottom).
b. Power. A green POWER indicator must illuminate to indicate AC+

Raw voltage is proper. It must flash at a 2 Hertz rate when the
NRESET or POWERDOWN input is True. It must remain off when
the voltage is less than 80 Volts RMS (+/-2 Volts RMS).
c. 24 VDC Fail. A red 24VDC FAIL indicator must illuminate when the
CMU is in FSA as a result of a 24VDC cabinet power supply fault.
d. 12 VDC Fail. A red 12VDC FAIL indicator must illuminate when the
CMU is in FSA as a result of a 12VDC cabinet power supply fault.
The 12VDC FAIL indicator must flash at a 2 Hertz rate when the 12
VDC monitor function is disabled.
e. Conflict. A red CONFLICT indicator must illuminate when the CMU

is in FSA as a result of a Conflicting Channels fault.
f. Lack of Signal. A red LACK OF SIGNAL indicator must illuminate

when the CMU is in FSA as a result of a Lack of Signal Inputs fault.
g. Multiple. A red MULTIPLE indicator must illuminate when the CMU

is in FSA as a result of a Multiple Inputs fault.
16730-52
h. ATC/Local Flash. A red ATC/LOCAL FLASH indicator must

illuminate when the CMU is in FSA as a result of a Type 62 – Send to
Local Flash Command from the ATC Controller Unit, the LOCAL
FLASH STATUS input sensed inactive, or CB TRIP STATUS active.
i. Clearance. A red CLEARANCE indicator must illuminate when the

CMU is in FSA as a result of a Yellow Clearance or Yellow Plus Red
Clearance fault.
j. Field Check. A red FIELD CHECK indicator must illuminate when

the CMU is in FSA as a result of a Field Output Check fault. The
indicator must flash at a 2 Hertz rate when the CMU is in FSA with
Field Check Status as a result of Conflict, Lack of Signal, or Multiple
fault.
k. SB #1 Error. A red SB #1 ERROR indicator must illuminate when the

CMU is in FSA as a result of a Serial Bus #1 fault.
l. SB #3 Error. A red SB #3 ERROR indicator must illuminate when the

CMU is in FSA as a result of a Serial Bus #3 fault.
m. Diagnostic. A red DIAGNOSTIC indicator must illuminate when the

CMU is in FSA as a result of a Diagnostic fault. The DIAGNOSTIC
indicator must flash at a 4 Hertz rate if the serial memory key is not
present and a FSA state does not exist.
n. SB #1 Rx. A yellow indicator must illuminate for 40 milliseconds (+/-

5 milliseconds) each time the CMU correctly receives a frame on
Serial Bus #1.
o. SB #3 Rx. A yellow indicator must illuminate for 40 milliseconds (+/-

5 milliseconds) each time the CMU correctly receives a frame on
Serial Bus #3.
13. Serial Bus #3 Terminations. The Serial Bus #3 RxD+ input must be
terminated on the CMU to the Serial Bus #3 EIA-485 supply voltage through
a 560 Ohm resistor. The Serial Bus #3 RxD- input must be terminated on the
CMU to AC Raw- through a 560 Ohm resistor. A 120 Ohm resistor must be
connected on the CMU between RxD+ and RxD-. The CMU Serial Bus #3
TxD drivers must remain in the mark state with drivers enabled when the
CMU is not transmitting a command frame. Note: A 120 Ohm resistor must
be connected between TxD+ and TxD- on the Serial Bus #3 cable assembly in
the last Output Assembly installed in the Serial Bus #3 daisy chain.
14. Terminal Port. An EIA-232-E Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) interface and
connector must be provided for interconnecting to a personal computer.
Where differences occur between the EIA-232 standard and this document,
this document must govern.
16730-53
a. Physical. The connector must be mounted on the front panel and must
be a 9-position subminiature D-type connector with metal shell. The
connector must utilize female contacts with 15 millionths of an inch
gold plating in the mating areas.
Pin # Function I/O

1 Reserved -
2 RxD I
3 TxD O
4 Reserved -
5 Signal Ground -
6 Reserved -
7 Reserved -
8 Reserved -
9 Reserved -
b. Receive Data (RxD). The RxD input must contain the serial data input
to the CMU.
c. Transmit Data (TxD). The TxD output must contain the serial data
output from the CMU.
d. Signal Ground. All signals must be referenced to Signal Ground and

must be optically isolated from the CMU.
e. Data Link Layer. Transmission must be in asynchronous start/stop

mode. The format must be 8 bit data, 1 stop bit, even parity, and 9600
bits per second (+/-2%) at a minimum. The CMU must be capable of
full duplex operation. Flow control must use XON/XOFF procedures.
15. Monitor Unit Serial Memory Key. The CMU must have a Datakeytm model
KC4210 Keycepticletm socket or equivalent serial memory key receptacle,
which will intermate with the Datakeytm model LCK4000-RED, mounted on
the front panel. The CMU must be provided with a Datakeytm model
LCK4000-RED serial memory key or equivalent. The serial memory key
must be rated for –40 to +80 degrees C operation. Note: Datakeytm and
Keycepticletm are registered trademarks of Datakey, Inc.
16730-54
a. Monitor Unit Serial Memory Key Interface. The CMU must not
provide the capability to program the serial memory key. Writing to
the serial memory key may be accomplished through the use of a serial
memory key writer. The serial memory key must be used as a read
only device. The 16 bit Frame Check Sequence (FCS) procedure
defined in clause 4.6.2 of ISO/IEC 3309 must be used to verify the
integrity of the read data. Failure to read the serial memory key
correctly must result in LFSA. Interface circuitry to the device must
utilize the LOFO switch on the serial memory key socket to ensure the
device is removed and inserted with no power applied to the interface
pins (i.e. dead socket).
b. Serial Memory Key Data. All bytes and bits marked as “reserved”
must be set to “0”.
Byte # Contents Description

1 0x01 Serial Memory Key Version
2 Ch 1-9, …, 1-2 Permissive Programming for channels 1-32:
3 Ch 1-17, …, 1-10 A bit set to “1” programs a channel pair to the
4 Ch 1-25, …, 1-18 permissive state. In the event the CMU has
5 Ch 2-3, …, 1-26 fewer than 32 channels, the bit positions
6 Ch 2-11, …, 2-4 corresponding to the nonexistent channels
7 Ch 2-19, …, 2-12 must be 0.
8 Ch 2-27, …, 2-20
9 Ch 3-6, …, 2-28 Default programming must be 0.
10 Ch 3-14, …, 3-7
11 Ch 3-22, …, 3-15 The Contents parameter contains on channel pair
12 Ch 3-30, …, 3-23 per bit position. For example, the contents of byte
13 Ch 4-10, …, 3-31 #5, “Ch 2-3, …, 1-26”, is as follows:
b0 = channel pair 1-26
14 Ch 4-18, …, 4-11
15 Ch 4-26, …, 4-19
16 Ch 5-7, …, 4-27
17 Ch 5-15, …, 5-8
18 Ch 5-23, …, 5-16 b5 = channel pair 1-31
19 Ch 5-31, …, 5-24 b6 = channel pair 1-32
20 Ch 6-13, …, 5-32 b7 = channel pair 2-3
21 Ch 6-21, …, 6-14 If b1 is set, then channel 1 is permissive with
22 Ch 6-29, …, 6-22 channel 27.
23 Ch 7-12, …, 6-30
24 Ch 7-20, …, 7-13
25 Ch 7-28, …, 7-21
26 Ch 8-12, …, 7-29
27 Ch 8-20, …, 8-13
28 Ch 8-28, …, 8-21
29 Ch 9-13, …, 8-29
30 Ch 9-21, …, 9-14
16730-55

31 Ch 9-29, …, 9-22
32 Ch 10-15, …, 9-30
33 Ch 10-23, …, 10-16
34 Ch 10-31, …, 10-24
35 Ch 11-18, …, 10-32
36 Ch 11-26, …, 11-19
37 Ch 12-14, …, 11-27
38 Ch 12-22, …, 12-15
39 Ch 12-30, …, 12-23
40 Ch 13-19, …, 12-31
41 Ch 13-27, …, 13-20
42 Ch 14-17, …, 13-28
43 Ch 14-25, …, 14-18
44 Ch 15-16, …, 14-26
45 Ch 15-24, …, 15-17
46 Ch 15-32, …, 15-25
47 Ch 16-24, …, 16-17
48 Ch 16-32, …, 16-25
49 Ch 17-25, …, 17-18
50 Ch 18-19, …, 17-26
51 Ch 18-27, …, 18-20
52 Ch 19-22, …, 18-28
53 Ch 19-30, …, 19-23
54 Ch 20-26, …, 19-31
55 Ch 21-23, …, 20-27
56 Ch 21-31, …, 21-24
57 Ch 22-29, …, 21-32
58 Ch 23-28, …, 22-30
59 Ch 24-28, …, 23-29
60 Ch 25-29, …, 24-29
61 Ch 26-31, …, 25-30
62 Ch 28-30, …, 26-32
63 Ch 31-32, …, 28-31
64 Ch 8:1 Lack of Signal Input Enable:
65 Ch 16:9 A bit set to “1” enables the Lack of Signal
66 Ch 24:17 Input monitoring function for that channel.
This bit must be set to “0” for any channel
that has an input mapped to a virtual channel.
In the event the CMU has fewer than 32
67 Ch 32:18
channels, the bit positions corresponding to
the nonexistent channels must be 0. Default
programming must be 1.
68 Ch 8:1 Dark Channel Map #1
69 Ch 16:9 A bit set to “1” disables the Lack of Signal
16730-56

For channels that are set to 0, Lack of Signal
Input Enable programming must determine
71 Ch 32:18
Lack of Signal Input operation. Default
75 Ch 32:18
79 Ch 32:18
83 Ch 32:18
84 Ch 8:1 GY Multiple Channel Enable:
85 Ch 16:9 A bit set to “1” enables the Green/Yellow
86 Ch 24:17 Multiple Channel monitoring function for that
channel. This bit must be set to “0” for any
channel that has had a Green or Yellow input
remapped to a virtual channel. In the event
87 Ch 32:18 the CMU has fewer than 32 channels, the bit
positions corresponding to the nonexistent
channels must be 0. Default programming
must be 1.
88 Ch 8:1 YR Multiple Channel Enable:
89 Ch 16:9 A bit set to “1” enables the Yellow/Red
16730-57

channel that has had a Yellow or Red input
must be 1.
92 Ch 8:1 GR Multiple Channel Enable:
93 Ch 16:9 A bit set to “1” enables the Green/Red
channel that has had a Green or Red input
must be 1.
96 Ch 8:1 Minimum Yellow Change Enable:
97 Ch 16:9 A bit set to “1” enables the Minimum Yellow
98 Ch 24:17 Change monitoring function for that channel.
channels, the bit positions corresponding to
99 Ch 32:18
the nonexistent channels must be 0. Default
100 Ch 8:1 Minimum Yellow Change Plus Red Clearance
101 Ch 16:9 Enable:
102 Ch 24:17 A bit set to “1” enables the Minimum Yellow
Change Plus Red monitoring function for that
channel. In the event the CMU has fewer
103 Ch 32:18 than 32 channels, the bit positions
corresponding to the nonexistent channels
must be 0. Default programming must be 1.
104 Ch 8:1 Yellow Input Disable:
105 Ch 16:9 A bit set to “1” forces the Yellow input to the
106 Ch 24:17 OFF state for that channel. In the event the
CMU has fewer than 28 physical channels,
the bit positions corresponding to the
107 Ch 28:25
nonexistent channels must be 0. Default
108 Ch 8:1 Current Sense Enable:
109 Ch 16:9 A bit set to “1” enables the Lack of Indication
110 Ch 24:17 current monitoring function for that channel.
16730-58

This bit must be set to “0” for any channel
that has an input mapped to a virtual channel.
111 Ch 28:25
physical channels, the bit positions
corresponding to the nonexistent channels
must be 0. Default programming must be 1.
112 Ch 4:1 Current Sense Full Scale Parameter
113 Ch 8:5 These bits must define the Full Scale (FS)
114 Ch 12:9 parameter for the Current Sense circuit for
115 Ch 16:13 each channel. Default programming must be
116 Ch 20:17 00.
117 Ch 24:21 b1,b0 = channel n
b3,b2 = channel n+1
b5,b4 = channel n+2
b7,b6 = channel n+3
118 Ch 28:25 00 = 0.25 Amperes
01 = 0.33 Amperes
10 = 0.50 Amperes
11 = 1.0 Amperes
119 Channel 1 Channel Current Sense Threshold
120 Channel 2 The threshold value for channel current sense
121 Channel 3 must be programmed in percent (0 to 95) of
122 Channel 4 full scale (FS). This value should be set in
123 Channel 5 accordance with minimum accuracy
124 Channel 6 tolerances defined in AMU section 3.8.5.1,
125 Channel 7 AC RMS CURRENT SENSING. Default
126 Channel 8 programming must be 25 (25% of 1.0 Amp
127 Channel 9 full scale = 250 milliamperes).
128 Channel 10
129 Channel 11
130 Channel 12
131 Channel 13
132 Channel 14
133 Channel 15
134 Channel 16
135 Channel 17
136 Channel 18
137 Channel 19
138 Channel 20
139 Channel 21
140 Channel 22
141 Channel 23
142 Channel 24
143 Channel 25
16730-59

144 Channel 26
145 Channel 27
146 Channel 28
147 Red Ch 8:1 Field Output Check Enable:
148 Red Ch 16:9 A bit set to “1” enables the Field Output
149 Red Ch 24:17 Check monitoring function for that input.
150 Red Ch 32:25 This bit must be set to “0” for any input that
151 Yellow Ch 8:1 has been remapped to a virtual channel. In
152 Yellow Ch 16:9 the event the CMU has fewer than 32
153 Yellow Ch 24:17 channels, the bit positions corresponding to
154 Yellow Ch 32:25 the nonexistent inputs must be 0. Default
155 Green Ch 8:1 programming must be 1.
156 Green Ch 16:9
157 Green Ch 24:17
158 Green Ch 32:25
Minimum Flash Time
Values of 0 thru 5 must result in 6 seconds of
159 Minimum Flash Time
minimum flash. Maximum value is 15.
Default programming must be 6.
+12 VDC Power Supply Monitor Enable
Bit 0 set to 1 must enable the +12 VDC Power
160 +12 VDC Enable
Supply monitor. Default programming must
be 0x01.
161 Ch 29 Red Virtual Channel Assignment
162 Ch 29 Yellow Channels that have not been assigned must be
163 Ch 29 Green set to 0. Default programming must be 0.
164 Ch 30 Red Bits 4:0 specify the physical channel
165 Ch 30 Yellow number (1 to 28)
166 Ch 30 Green Bits 6:5 specify the physical input
167 Ch 31 Red 01 = Red
168 Ch 31 Yellow 10 = Yellow
169 Ch 31 Green 11 = Green
170 Ch 32 Red Bit 7 = reserved
171 Ch 32 Yellow
172 Ch 32 Green
173 AMU Position 1 AMU Configuration
174 AMU Position 2 The number of Switch Pack positions in each
175 AMU Position 3 output Assembly position must be
16730-60

programmed in each byte. CMU channel
numbers must be assigned sequentially
starting with AMU position #1. Default
programming must be 14,0,0,0.
0: Position not used
176 AMU Position 4
6: Six Pack Output Assembly
14: Fourteen Pack Output Assembly
The 14 Pack is valid only for position #1
(#1=14, #2=0) and #3 (#3=14, #4=0).
All other values are reserved.
Monitor ID
A packed 40 character ID must be stored in
ASCII format. Allowable characters are 020h
177:216 ASCII string
through 07Eh. If less than 40 characters are
used, the unused locations must be set to 00h.
Default programming must be 00h.
User ID
A packed 40 character ID must be stored in
ASCII format. Allowable characters are 020h
217:256 ASCII string
through 07Eh. If less than 40 characters are
used, the unused locations must be set to 00h.
Default programming must be 00h.
257:510 0x00 Reserved for future use.
511 FCS lsb 16 bit Check Value
FCS Polynomial calculation of bytes #1
512 FCS msb
through #510.
16. CMU Connector. The CMU Connector must be a DIN 4161264 Header Type.
The CMU Connector pin assignments must be as shown on drawing 4-11-5.
17. Serial Bus #1 Frames.
a. Type 60 Command – Module ID.

a. 60 Frame Type
b. Type 188 Response – Module ID.

1 188 Frame Type
2 CMU address Serial Bus #1 Address
16730-61
c. Type 61 Command – Switch Pack Drivers. The destination for this

frame must be the CMU. The Channel numbers in the Description
column below refer to the channel numbers of the CMU. The ATC
Controller Unit must include a definition, via program entry, of the
CMU Channel to ATC Controller Unit signal driver group utilization.
The Dark Channel Map Select bits must select a preprogrammed mask
in the CMU serial memory key that disables Lack of Signal Input
monitoring for the selected channels.

1 61 Frame Type
2 Channel 8:1 Red Switch Pack Status
3 Channel 16:9 Red A bit set to 1 indicates the Switch Pack output is set
4 Channel 24:17 Red ON.
5 Channel 28:25 Red
6 Channel 8:1 Yellow
10 Channel 8:1 Green
14 Map Select Dark Channel Map Select
Bit 1 and bit 0 must select one of four Dark Channel
Maps programmed in the serial memory key that
disables Lack of Signal Input monitoring for a selected
channel. Bits 2 thru 7 are reserved.
00 = Mask #1
01 = Mask #2
10 = Mask #3
11 = Mask #4
d. Type 61 Response – CMU Status. If the CMU is in FSA (byte #2,

Fault Type not equal to 0), then all bytes of the information field of
this frame except Control Status 1, Control Status 2, and Output
Assembly Flasher Status must contain an exact image of the signals
that were applied to the CMU at the point in time of the detection of
the failure. Control Status 1, Control Status 2, and Output Assembly
Flasher Status must always reflect current status. If a channel block is
not used (AMU not present) the Channel Fault Status bits, Channel
Input Status bits, and Channel Input Voltage values bits for that block
must be set to 0.
16730-62
Byte
Contents Description
#
1 189 Frame Type
2 Fault Type Enumerated fault code
00 = No Fault
01 = CMU/AMU +24 VDC
02 = CMU +12 VDC
03 = Conflict
04 = Serial Bus #1
05 = Serial Bus #3
06 = ATC LFSA Flash (Type 62)
07 = ATC NFSA Flash (Type 62)
08 = Diagnostic
09 = Multiple
10 = Lack of Signal Input
11 = Short Yellow Clearance
12 = Skipped Yellow Clearance
13 = Yellow + Red Clearance
14 = Field Output Check
15 = Serial Memory Key absent
16 = Serial Memory Key FCS error
17 = Serial Memory Key Data error
18 = Local Flash
19 = CB Trip
20 = CMU/AMU AC+ Raw Fail
21 = NRESET Active
22:127 = Reserved
128:255 = Spare
3 Channel Fault Status 8:1 Channel Fault Status
4 Channel Fault Status 16:9 Channel Fault Status bits must be set to 1 for channels
5 Channel Fault Status 24:17 that were detected in fault for fault types 03, 09, 10, 11,
6 Channel Fault Status 32:25 12, 13, and 14.
For fault type 01, 05, and 20 a bit must be set in

Channel Fault Status 8:1 for each enabled AMU that
failed. Bit 0 must be set if the CMU detected a failure:
b0 = CMU
b1 = AMU #1
b2 = AMU #2
b3 = AMU #3
b4 = AMU #4
For all other fault types the Channel Fault Status bits
must be set to 0.
7 Channel Red Status 8:1 Channel Color Status
8 Channel Red Status 16:9 Channel Color Status bits must be set to 1 for channels
9 Channel Red Status 24:17 that are sensed active. For channel inputs that have
16730-63
Byte
#
10 Channel Red Status 32:25 been remapped to a virtual channel (29-32), the
11 Channel Yellow Status 8:1 Channel Fault Status bits must be set to 0. For virtual
12 Channel Yellow Status 16:9 channel (29-32) inputs that have not been assigned to a
13 Channel Yellow Status 24:17 physical output, the Channel Fault Status bits must be
14 Channel Yellow Status 32:25 set to 0.
15 Channel Green Status 8:1
19 Channel Red Status 8:1 Field Check Status
20 Channel Red Status 16:9 Field Check Status bits must be set to 1 for channels
21 Channel Red Status 24:17 that are sensed with field check status. For channel
22 Channel Red Status 32:25 inputs that have been remapped to a virtual channel
23 Channel Yellow Status 8:1 (29-32), the Field Check Status bits must be set to 0.
24 Channel Yellow Status 16:9 For virtual channel (29-32) inputs that have not been
25 Channel Yellow Status 24:17 assigned to a physical output, the Field Check Status
26 Channel Yellow Status 32:25 bits must be set to 0.
31 Control Status #1 Control Status #1
b7 = Start-up Call (1=Exit from Flash)
b6 = Flasher Output Fail (1 = Fail)
b5 = Rear Door (1=Open)
b4 = Front Door (1=Open)
b3 = MAIN CONTACTOR Coil (1=Active)
b2 = MAIN CONTACTOR Secondary (1=Active)
b1 = FTR Coil Drive (1= Active)
b0 = Output Relay Transfer (1=Fault)
b7 = Reserved
b6 = Reserved
b5 = Reserved
b4 = Reserved
b3 = Reserved
b2 = Reserved
b1 = Reserved
b0 = Configuration Change
This bit set to 1 indicates the configuration
programming has changed since the last poll of
message 65. It must also be set to 1 when the CMU is
exiting flash (Start-up Call bit changes from 0 to 1)
and at CMU power-up.
16730-64
Byte
#
33 AC+ Raw Voltage CMU AC+ Raw Voltage
34 Assembly #1 AC+ Raw Assembly AC+ Raw Voltage
Voltage
35 Assembly #1 AC+ Raw
Voltage
Voltage
Voltage
38 Channel 1 Red Voltage Channel Input Voltages
39 Channel 2 Red Voltage The Channel input voltages must be the most recent
40 Channel 3 Red Voltage values reported from the AMUs. For channel inputs that
41 Channel 4 Red Voltage have been remapped to a virtual channel (29-32), the
42 Channel 5 Red Voltage Channel Voltage value must be set to 0. For virtual
43 Channel 6 Red Voltage channel (29-32) inputs that have not been assigned to a
44 Channel 7 Red Voltage physical output, the Channel Voltage value must be set to
45 Channel 8 Red Voltage 0.
46 Channel 9 Red Voltage
70 Channel 1 Yellow Voltage
16730-65
Byte
#
102 Channel 1 Green Voltage
16730-66
Byte
#
134 Channel 1 Scaled Channel Load Current
135 Channel 2 The value reported must be the measured current in
136 Channel 3 Amperes times 256 divided by the Full Scale (FS)
137 Channel 4 parameter.
138 Channel 5 For 1 primary turn, FS=10 (range is 0 to 10 Arms)
139 Channel 6 For 2 primary turns, FS=5 (range is 0 to 5 Arms)
140 Channel 7 For 3 primary turns, FS= 3.3 (range is 0 to 3.3 Arms)
141 Channel 8 For 4 primary turns, FS=2.5 (range is 0 to 2.5 Arms)
142 Channel 9
143 Channel 10
144 Channel 11
145 Channel 12
146 Channel 13
147 Channel 14
148 Channel 15
149 Channel 16
150 Channel 17
151 Channel 18
152 Channel 19
153 Channel 20
154 Channel 21
155 Channel 22
156 Channel 23
157 Channel 24
158 Channel 25
159 Channel 26
160 Channel 27
16730-67
Byte
#
161 Channel 28
162 Binary Seconds CMU Time and Date
163 Binary Minutes
164 Binary Hours (0:23)
165 Binary Date
166 Binary Month
167 Binary Year
168 Voltage * 4 24 VDC Supply Voltage
169 Voltage * 8 12 VDC Supply Voltage
170 degrees F + 40 CMU Temperature (Fahrenheit)
171 Channel 8:1 Channel Current Sense Status
172 Channel 16:9 Status bits must be set to 1 for channels that are sensed
173 Channel 24:17 active. Status bits must be set to 0 for channels that have
174 Channel 28:25 the Current Sense monitor function disabled.
175 Assembly 2:1 Output Assembly Flasher Status (1=Fail)
176 Assembly 4:3 b0 = Assembly #1 (#3) FL1-1
b1 = Assembly #1 (#3) FL1-2
177 Reserved
178 Reserved
e. Type 62 – Send to Local Flash Command – SET FSA.
Byte
#
1 62 Frame Type
2 FSA mode Set Failed State Action
b0 = Set LFSA (L)
b1 = Set NFSA (N)
b2:7 = reserved
f. Type 190 Response – Send to Local Flash Response – Set FSA.

1 190 Frame Type
16730-68
g. Type 65 Command – Get CMU Configuration. The ATC Controller

Unit must request the serial memory key programming using this
message and validate that the CMU Permissive Program settings are
equal or less permissive than the ATC Controller Unit programming,
and that the AMU Configuration programming is consistent with
Output Assembly SIU assignment. If the programming of the CMU is
not proper, the ATC Controller Unit must issue a Type 62 frame with
the L bit set causing a LFSA in the CMU. This check must be
performed at initialization and when the Type 189 or Type 195
Control Status 2, Configuration Change bit is set to 1.

1 65 Frame Type
h. Type 193 Response – CMU Configuration.

1 193 Frame Type
2:513 Bytes #1 thru #512 Serial Memory Key Contents
i. Type 66 Command – Time and Date Command.

1 66 Frame Type
2 0x01:0x0C Month
3 0x01:0x1F Day
4 0x00:0x63 Year
5 0x00:0x17 Hour
6 0x00:0x3B Minutes
7 0x00:0x3B Seconds
8 0x00:0x3B Tenth Seconds
(1) This frame must be transmitted from the ATC Controller Unit
once every second. The destination address must be the All
Station Address of 255 (0xFF). No response from secondary
devices is allowed to the All Station Address. The
transmission of this frame must begin within +/-100
milliseconds of the ATC Controller Unit real time contained
within the frame.
16730-69
j. Type 67 Command – Switch Pack Drivers. The format of this

command frame must be identical to Message 61 but requests a short
status response from the CMU. This frame may be used as an alternate
to Message 61. The destination for this frame must be the CMU. The
Channel numbers in the Description column below refer to the channel
numbers of the CMU. The ATC Controller Unit must include a
definition, via program entry, of the CMU Channel to ATC Controller
Unit signal driver group utilization.
(1) The Dark Channel Map Select bits must select a

preprogrammed mask in the CMU serial memory key that
disables Lack of Signal Input monitoring for the selected
channels.

1 67 Frame Type
2 Channel 8:1 Red Switch Pack Status
3 Channel 16:9 Red A bit set to 1 indicates the Switch Pack output is set
4 Channel 24:17 Red ON.
5 Channel 28:25 Red
14 Map Select Dark Channel Map Select
Bit 1 and bit 0 must select one of four Dark Channel
Maps programmed in the serial memory key that
disables Lack of Signal Input monitoring for a selected
channel. Bits 2 thru 7 are reserved.
00 = Mask #1
01 = Mask #2
10 = Mask #3
11 = Mask #4
k. Type 195 Response – CMU Short Status. If the CMU is in FSA (byte
#2, Fault Type not equal to 0), then the Channel Color Status bytes
must contain an exact image of the signals that were applied to the
CMU at the point in time of the detection of the failure. Control Status
1, Control Status 2, and Output Assembly Flasher Status must always
reflect current status.
16730-70
(1) If a channel block is not used (AMU not present), the Channel
Fault Status bits and Channel Color Status bits for that block
must be set to 0.
Byte
#
1 195 Frame Type
2 Fault Type Enumerated fault code
00 = No Fault
01 = CMU/AMU +24 VDC
02 = CMU +12 VDC
03 = Conflict
04 = Serial Bus #1
05 = Serial Bus #3
06 = ATC LFSA Flash (Type 62)
07 = ATC NFSA Flash (Type 62)
08 = Diagnostic
09 = Multiple
10 = Lack of Signal Input
11 = Short Yellow Clearance
12 = Skipped Yellow Clearance
13 = Yellow + Red Clearance
14 = Field Output Check
15 = Serial Memory Key absent
16 = Serial Memory Key FCS error
17 = Serial Memory Key Data error
18 = Local Flash
19 = CB Trip
20 = CMU/AMU AC+ Raw Fail
21 = NRESET Active
22:127 = Reserved
128:255 = Spare
16730-71
Byte
#
3 Channel Fault Status 8:1 Channel Fault Status
Channel Fault Status bits must be set to 1 for
channels that were detected in fault for fault types
03, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14.
For fault type 01, 05, and 20 a bit must be set in

Channel Fault Status 8:1 for each enabled AMU that
failed. Bit 0 must be set if the CMU detected a
failure:
b0 = CMU
b1 = AMU #1
b2 = AMU #2
b3 = AMU #3
b4 = AMU #4
For all other fault types the Channel Fault Status bits
must be set to 0.
4 Channel Fault Status 16:9
7 Channel Red Status 8:1 Channel Color Status
Channel Color Status bits must be set to 1 for
channels that are sensed active. For channel inputs
that have been remapped to a virtual channel (29-
32), the Channel Fault Status bits must be set to 0.
For virtual channel (29-32) inputs that have not been
assigned to a physical output, the Channel Fault
Status bits must be set to 0.
8 Channel Red Status 16:9
11 Channel Yellow Status 8:1
b7 = Start-up Call (1=Exit from Flash)
b6 = Flasher Output Fail (1 = Fail)
b5 = Rear Door (1=Open)
b4 = Front Door (1=Open)
b3 = MC Coil (1=Active)
16730-72
Byte
#
b2 = MC Secondary (1=Active)
b1 = FTR Coil Drive (1= Active)
b0 = Output Relay Transfer (1=Fault)
b7 = Reserved
b6 = Reserved
b5 = Reserved
b4 = Reserved
b3 = Reserved
b2 = Reserved
b1 = Reserved
b0 = Configuration Change
This bit set to 1 indicates the configuration

programming has changed since the last poll of
message 65. It must also be set to 1 when the CMU
is exiting flash (Start-up Call bit changes from 0 to
1) and at CMU power-up.
21 Assembly 2:1 Output Assembly Flasher Status (1=Fail)
22 Assembly 4:3
23 Reserved
24 Reserved
E. Model 214 ITS Auxiliary Monitor Unit (AMU).
1. General. The AMU must reside in each of the Output Assemblies. The AMU
must interface to the CMU via Serial Bus #3. An AMU must operate in a
fourteen-channel mode (14 Pack) or a six-channel mode (6 Pack) depending
on the Address Select inputs.
a. AMU Addressing. The Address Select input pins ADDRESS 0,

ADDRESS 1, and ADDRESS 2 must define the Serial Bus #3 address
of the AMU and the number of channels reported. The pins must be
left open for a logical False, and are connected to ADDRESS
COMMON for a logical True.
16730-73
SB #3
Mode / Position ADDRESS 2 ADDRESS 1 ADDRESS 0
ADDRESS
14 Ch/1 and 2 False False True 0x01
14 Ch/3 and 4 False True True 0x03
6 Ch/1 True False True 0x05
6 Ch/2 True True False 0x06
6 Ch/3 True True True 0x07
6 Ch/4 True False False 0x04
b. A 14 Pack Output Assembly configured in position 1 and 2 must

respond as AMU #1 with AMU #2 reserved. A 14 Pack Output
Assembly configured in position 3 and 4 must respond as AMU #3
with AMU #4 reserved.
c. The 6 Pack Output Assembly must have ADDRESS 2 permanently

connected to ADDRESS COMMON on the assembly.
2. AC Voltage Sensing. All AC RMS voltage measurements must be made over

an RMS period of 33.3 milliseconds (two AC Line cycles). All AC signals
must be sampled at a minimum of 1920 samples per second. A True RMS
voltage measurement must be made regardless of phase or wave-shape,
including both positive and negative half wave sinusoids, over the voltage
range of 0 Volts RMS to 135 Volts RMS. AC voltage measurements must be
accurate to +/-2 Volts RMS.
3. Field Signal Sensing. Three inputs must be provided for each of fourteen
channels (36 total) to permit the monitoring of voltages at the Green, Yellow,
and Red signal field terminals. The AMU must be designed so that unused
Green, Yellow, or Red signal inputs are not sensed as active signals. The
AMU must sense an input at less than 15 Volts RMS when connected to AC
Line through 1500 picofarads. Each field input voltage must be reported in
the Type 129 or 130 frame.
4. AC Line Sensing. The AMU must include the capability of monitoring the AC
Line voltage applied to its AC+ Raw input. The AC Line voltage must be
reported in the Type 129 or 130 frame.
5. Flasher Input Sensing. Four inputs must be provided for sensing of voltages at
the FLASHER #1-1, FLASHER #1-2, FLASHER #2-1, and FLASHER #2-2
signal input terminals of the Output Assembly. Each FLASHER input voltage
must be reported in the Type 129 or 130 frame.
16730-74
6. +24 VDC Sensing. The AMU must sense the state of the +24 VDC
MONITOR input. Voltages at, or greater than, +22 VDC must be considered
proper for Assembly operation. Voltages at, or less than, +18 VDC must be
considered not proper for Assembly operation. The +24 VDC MONITOR
state must be reported in the Type 129 or 130 frames. The +24 VDC
MONITOR voltage section must be electrically isolated from the AC- Raw
referenced circuitry.
7. Current Sensing.
a. AC RMS Current Sensing. All AC RMS current measurements must

be made over a period of two AC Line cycles (33.3 milliseconds). A
True RMS current measurement must be made regardless of phase or
wave-shape, including both positive and negative half wave sinusoids.
AC current measurements must be accurate to +/-35%.
b. Switch Pack Current Sensing. The AMU must sense the total output
current of each Switch Pack. Each Switch Pack output current must be
reported in the Type 129 or 130 frames.
(1) The input impedance of the COIL+ input with respect to the
COIL-input must be 1000 Ohms. Full-scale current is set by
the number of primary turns through the transformer and must
be a maximum of four turns. Unless specified otherwise, one
turn must be provided.
c. Current Transformer Parameters. The Switch Pack current sensing

transformers must meet the following requirements:
Linearity 25% from 10 milliamperes to 1Ampere (single

primary turn)
Accuracy +/-25% (Rin = 1000 Ohms)
Primary Current 10 Amperes maximum
Minimum hole size 0.25 in. diameter
Insulation Resistance 100 Megohms at 500 VDC
(1) The transformer must output a voltage of 1.0 Volts RMS (+/-
5%) across 1K Ohms when driven by 1.0 Arms sinusoidal
current through one primary turn. Sufficient secondary turns
must be provided to compensate for differences in core
material and losses to produce the 1.0 Volts RMS output.
8. Diagnostic Error. The AMU must be provided with a resident series of self-
check diagnostic capabilities. At a minimum, the AMU must contain
provisions to verify all memory elements on power-up and Reset. When an
error is detected, the AMU must illuminate the DIAGNOSTIC indicator and
disable the Serial Bus #3 port.
16730-75
a. RAM Diagnostic. This test must verify that all RAM elements are
operating correctly at power-up. Patterns must be written to RAM.
Each Write must be followed by a Read to verify that it contains the
written pattern.
b. Nonvolatile Memory Diagnostic. This test must verify that the

nonvolatile ROM(s) contain the proper program. The routine must
perform a check on each ROM and make a comparison with a
preprogrammed check value. This test must be performed at power-up
and at a minimum rate of 1024 bits per second during operation.
c. Internal MPU Monitor. The AMU must monitor the operation of its
microprocessor. At a minimum, the monitoring circuit must be
triggered at least every 100 milliseconds. The microprocessor must be
reset and the DIAGNOSTIC indicator illuminated if the monitoring
circuit has not been triggered for a maximum of 1000 milliseconds.
9. Power Requirements. The AMU must generate its own power supply voltage
from the AC+ Raw input using no more than 5 Watts. It must be capable of
insertion and removal while AC power is applied to the cabinet. Surge current
on AC+ Raw input must be less than 2 Amperes peak.
a. Operating Voltage Range. The AMU must be operational over the

voltage range of 80 Volts RMS to 135 Volts RMS. The AMU must be
fully functional within 500 milliseconds following AC+ Raw voltage
exceeding 80 Volts RMS or Reset.
b. Power Supply Holdup. During the loss of AC+ Raw voltage for 700
milliseconds or less the AMU must continue to operate.
10. AMU User Interface. All indicators must be clear LEDS. Clear LEDs must
not depend on a reflector or diffusion as part of its design. Clear LEDs must
only show the die and not appear to be ON when exposed to ambient light.
The following indicators must be provided (Top to Bottom).
a. AC Power Indicator. A green POWER indicator must be provided.

The indicator must be illuminated when the AC+ Raw input is 80
Volts RMS (+/-2 Volts RMS) or greater. This indicator must be
labeled POWER.
b. Serial Bus #3 Indicator. A yellow Serial Bus #3 indicator must be

provided. The indicator must pulse ON for 40 milliseconds each time
the AMU correctly receives a frame with its address on the Bus #3
input. This indicator must be labeled SB #3 RX.
c. Diagnostic Indicator. A red DIAGNOSTIC indicator must be

provided. The indicator must be ON when an internal diagnostic error
is detected. This indicator must be labeled DIAGNOSTIC.
16730-76
d. Reset Button. A recessed RESET switch must be provided which

applies a direct reset to the microprocessor device on the AMU. All
voltage and current data must be initialized to 0 following Reset. The
access hole must be 0.25 in. in diameter.
e. AMU Connector. The AMU connector must be a DIN 4161296

Header Type. Pins A31 (Equipment Ground), B32 (AC-Raw), and
C32 (AC-Raw) must pre-mate before all other pins. The AMU pin
assignments must be as shown on drawing 4-11-6.
11. Bus #3 Profile.
a. Electrical. TxD+, TxD- and RxD+, RxD- must consist of two interface
links conforming to the requirements of the Electronic Industries
Association EIA-485, Standard for Electrical Characteristics of
Generators and Receivers for use in Balanced Digital Multipoint
Systems, dated April 1983. Where differences occur between the EIA-
485 standard and this document, this document must govern.
(1) All voltage potentials on the Bus #3 TxD+, TxD-, RxD+, and
RxD- interface links must be referenced to AC- Raw.
b. Data Link Layer. The data link layer protocol is based on a subset of
HDLC as defined by ISO/IEC 3309. Each frame must consist of the
following fields:
(1) Flag byte = 0x7E
(2) Address byte = 0x01 through 0x07
(3) Control byte = 0x13 (U Format)
(4) Information field = defined below in section, Frame Types
(5) Frame Check Sequence = 16 bit FCS procedure defined in

clause 4.6.2 of ISO/IEC 3309.
(6) Flag byte = 0x7E
(7) Transmission must be in start/stop mode with basic

transparency defined by clause 4.5.2.2 of ISO/IEC 3309
applied. The format must be 8 bit data, 1 stop bit, no parity,
and 153,600 bits per second (+/-2%). Only asynchronous half
duplex operation must be permitted.
16730-77
c. Procedures. Frames transmitted by the CMU must be referred to as

command frames and frames transmitted by the AMU must be referred
to as response frames. Command frames must be transmitted only to
those AMUs that are present, as determined by the programming
entries made in the CMU. Response frames must only be transmitted
as a result of correctly receiving a command frame. The first eight bits
in each information field must contain the frame Type number. There
must be a maximum of 64 different command frame types and 64
different response frame types. Additionally, there must be 64
different command frame types reserved for special application use
and 64 different response frame types reserved for special application
use, as outlined below.
FRAME TYPES FUNCTION

1-63 Command frame defined by this standard
0, 64-127 Command frame reserved
128-191 Response frame defined by this standard
192-255 Response frame reserved
Reserved bits must always be set to zero by the transmitting station.
d. Service Time. The AMU must begin its response to command frames
from the CMU within a designated period of time following the
correct reception of a complete command frame including the closing
flag. This period must be known as the Service Time and must have a
maximum value of 500 microseconds. The AMU TxD link output
must be in its high impedance state outside of the interval defined by
the Service Time plus Response Time.
e. Response Time. The AMU must complete its transmission of the

response frame including the closing flag within a designated time
known as the Response Time, depending on the number of bytes
transmitted in the response frame. The AMU TxD link output must be
in its high impedance state a maximum of 200 microseconds following
the transmission of the closing flag. The Response Time period must
have a maximum value of (1.2)*(# of bytes in information field
+6)*(10/153600). Note that due to the transparency mechanism, any
occurrence of the flag byte (0x7E) or control escape byte (0x7D) in the
information field adds a second byte to the count. Thus, the number of
bytes in the information field could be doubled if all characters are
0x7E or 0x7D.
f. Dead Time. Following the transmission of each command frame, there

must be a Dead Time during which the CMU does not transmit. This
Dead Time must be a minimum of the Service Time plus the Response
Time.
12. Frame Types.
16730-78
a. Type 1 Command Frame. This frame must be transmitted from the

CMU to each AMU-6 at least once every RMS period (33.3
milliseconds, two AC Line cycles, averaging time for RMS
measurement). Its purpose is to request the status from an AMU-6.
Polling the AMU-6 more often than the RMS period may result in the
same response frame being repeated.

1 01 Frame Type
b. Type 129 Response Frame. This AMU-6 Status frame must be

transmitted only if a Type 1 command frame has been correctly
received from the CMU. The AMU-6 must report the data for the
most recent RMS period calculated when the Type 1 command is
received. The Type 1 command frame polling rate must not affect the
accuracy or RMS period of the data.

1 129 Frame Type
2 AMU Status 6 Pack AMU Status
b0 = set to 1 if +24 VDC MONITOR input is
Low
b1:4 = reserved
b5 = set if AMU has reset since last poll
b6 = set if last RMS period data was not
transmitted
b7 = diagnostic failure
3 0-135 AC+ Raw voltage
4 Channel 1 Red Channel RMS Voltages
5 Channel 2 Red
6 Channel 3 Red
7 Channel 4 Red
8 Channel 5 Red
9 Channel 6 Red
10 Channel 1Yellow
11 Channel 2 Yellow
12 Channel 3 Yellow
13 Channel 4 Yellow
14 Channel 5 Yellow
15 Channel 6 Yellow
16 Channel 1 Green
17 Channel 2 Green
18 Channel 3 Green
19 Channel 4 Green
20 Channel 5 Green
16730-79

21 Channel 6 Green
22 Flasher #1-1 Flasher RMS Voltages
23 Flasher #1-2
24 Flasher #2-1
25 Flasher #2-2
26 Channel 1 Channel Load Current
27 Channel 2 The current value reported must be the
28 Channel 3 measured current in Amperes times 255
29 Channel 4 divided by the Full Scale (FS) parameter.
30 Channel 5 For 1 primary turn, FS =1.0 (range is 0 to 1.0
31 Channel 6 Arms)
For 2 primary turns, FS =0.5 (range is 0 to 0.5
Arms)
For 3 primary turns, FS = 0.33 (range is 0 to
0.33 Arms)
For 4 primary turns, FS =0.25 (range is 0 to
0.25 Arms)
32 0 Reserved
33 0 Reserved
c. Type 2 Command Frame. This frame must be transmitted from the

CMU to each AMU-14 at least once every RMS period. Its purpose is
to request the status from an AMU-14. Polling the AMU-14 more
often than the RMS period may result in the same response frame
being repeated.

1 02 Frame Type
d. Type 130 Response Frame. This AMU-14 Status frame must be

transmitted only if a Type 2 command frame has been correctly
received from the CMU. The AMU-14 must report the data for the
most recent RMS period calculated when the Type 2 command is
received. The Type 2 command frame polling rate must not affect the
accuracy or RMS period of the data.

1 130 Frame Type
2 AMU Status 14 Pack AMU Status
b0 = set to 1 if +24 VDC MONITOR input is
Low
b1:4 = reserved
b5 = set if AMU has reset since last poll
b6 = set if last RMS period data was not
16730-80

transmitted
b7 = diagnostic failure
3 0-135 AC+ Raw voltage
4 Channel 1 Red Channel RMS Voltages
5 Channel 2 Red
6 Channel 3 Red
7 Channel 4 Red
8 Channel 5 Red
9 Channel 6 Red
10 Channel 7 Red
11 Channel 8 Red
12 Channel 9 Red
13 Channel 10 Red
14 Channel 11 Red
15 Channel 12 Red
16 Channel 13 Red
17 Channel 14 Red
18 Channel 1Yellow
19 Channel 2 Yellow
20 Channel 3 Yellow
21 Channel 4 Yellow
22 Channel 5 Yellow
23 Channel 6 Yellow
24 Channel 7Yellow
25 Channel 8 Yellow
26 Channel 9 Yellow
27 Channel 10 Yellow
32 Channel 1 Green
33 Channel 2 Green
34 Channel 3 Green
35 Channel 4 Green
36 Channel 5 Green
37 Channel 6 Green
38 Channel 7 Green
39 Channel 8 Green
40 Channel 9 Green
41 Channel 10 Green
42 Channel 11 Green
43 Channel 12 Green
44 Channel 13 Green
16730-81

45 Channel 14 Green
46 Flasher #1-1 Flasher RMS Voltages
47 Flasher #1-2
48 Flasher #2-1
49 Flasher #2-2
50 Channel 1 Channel Load Current
51 Channel 2 The current value reported must be the
52 Channel 3 measured current in Amperes times 255
53 Channel 4 divided by the Full Scale (FS) parameter.
54 Channel 5 For 1 primary turn, FS =1.0 (range is 0 to 1.0
55 Channel 6 Arms)
56 Channel 7 For 2 primary turns, FS =0.5 (range is 0 to 0.5
57 Channel 8 Arms)
58 Channel 9 For 3 primary turns, FS = 0.33 (range is 0 to
59 Channel 10 0.33 Arms)
60 Channel 11 For 4 primary turns, FS =0.25 (range is 0 to
61 Channel 12 0.25 Arms)
62 Channel 13
63 Channel 14
64 0 Reserved
65 0 Reserved
e. Type 128 Response Frame. This frame must be transmitted from the
AMU to the CMU as a Negative Acknowledge response frame if the
AMU correctly receives a command frame with an invalid parameter.

1 128 Frame Type (Negative Acknowledge)
2 Status AMU SB #3 Error Type
b0 = set to 1 if invalid frame type received
b1:7 = reserved
F. Model 216-12 & 216-24 ITS Power Supply Units.
1. General Requirements.
a. The unit chassis must be vented. The power supply cage and
transformers must be securely braced to prevent damage in transit.
When resident in the PDA ITS, the units must be held firmly in place
by its stud screws and wing nut.
16730-82
b. Two units, 216-12 and 216-24 must provide +12 and +24 VDC,
respectively, to the cabinet assemblies. They must be of ferro-resonant
design. They must have no active components and conform to the
requirements of this section.
(1) Line and load regulation must meet the two power supply
ranges for +24 VDC (23.0 VDC to 26 VDC) and +12 VDC
(11.65 VDC to 13.35 VDC). This includes ripple noise; from
90 VAC to 135 VAC at 60 Hertz, plus an additional 1.6% for
each additional 1.0% frequency change; and current range from
1 Ampere to 5 Amperes with a maximum temperature rise of
30 degrees C above ambient.
(2) Design Center Voltage must be +24 VDC (+/-0.5 VDC) and
+12 VDC (+/-0.5 VDC) at full load, at 30 degrees C, and with
115 VAC incoming after a 30-minute warm-up period.
(3) Full Load Current must be 5 AMPERES each for +24 VDC
and +12 VDC, minimum.
(4) Ripple Noise must be 2 Volts peak-to-peak and 500 millivolts

RMS at full load.
(5) Line Voltage must be 90 VAC to 135 VAC.
(6) Efficiency must be 70% minimum.
(7) Circuit capacitors must be rated for 40 Volts minimum.
c. When supplying only one 216-24, supply terminal pins 13 and 14 must
be jumpered together.
d. The front panel must include AC and DC fuses, power ON light and
banana clip test points for monitoring the output voltages. The unit,
including terminals, must be protected with a 1K Ohm, 0.5 watt,
resister to prevent accidental contact with energized parts.
G. Type 218 – Serial Interface Unit (SIU).
1. General. The SIU must be capable of processing fifty-four Input/Output pins

and four Optical Input pins. When installed in an ITS Input Assembly, it
processes twenty-four detector outputs (pins F and W), twenty-four detector
status outputs, and provides six detector rest signals (per two slots). In
advanced detectors, the status outputs may be converted to per channel resets.
When installed in an ITS 14 Pack Output Assembly, the SIU controls fourteen
Switch Pack Units (forty-two Outputs) and four Optical Inputs through the
CDC socket.
16730-83
2. Power Requirements. The SIU requires a nominal supply voltage of 24 VDC

(+/-2 VDC). A voltage of 16 VDC or less must be considered loss of power
and a voltage of 18 VDC or greater must be considered adequate for
operation. The SIU must not require more than 300 milliamperes over the
voltage range of 16 VDC to 30 VDC and the power surge must be limited to a
maximum of 1.25 Amperes from initial application of DC power. The SIU
must not be damaged by insertion to, or removal from, powered input or
output assemblies. The SIU operates normally for 700 milliseconds after
power loss.
3. Microprocessor. The SIU Controller Unit must include a

microprocessor/controller unit together with all required clocking and support
circuitry.
4. Memory. Operational software necessary to meet housekeeping and functional

requirements must be provided resident in socketed firmware or internal Flash
memory.
5. Control Signals. The SIU uses NRESET lines for SIU shut down/turn on
operations matching the ATC Controller Unit CPU. The SIU must be fully
initialized and providing specified operation upon NRESET Line going HIGH
(Power Up). In the ATC Controller, the NRESET operation must cause the
SIU program restart. No prior message operation data retention is required.
The Request Module Status Response may report this restart as either a Power
On or Watchdog. ATC Controller Unit LINESYNC is used as a system time
reference. The microprocessor/controller unit is reset by any of the following:
a. Pushbutton Reset
b. NRESET Signal
c. +5 VDC out of regulation
d. Microprocessor/controller unit watchdog
6. Time Reference. The SIU includes a 1 Kilohertz Time Reference to provide

system response time stamps. The 1 Kilohertz Time Reference must maintain
a frequency accuracy of +/-0.01% (+/-0.1 counts per second).
7. Watchdog. A watchdog circuit must be provided. The SIU must power up

with the watchdog enabled. Within the first watchdog time period, the
watchdog value must be set to 200 milliseconds +/-100 milliseconds. The
watchdog state must be reported in the SIU status byte as an indication that a
watchdog has occurred, which will remain until cleared in the Request
Module Status command. Failure of the SIU to reset the watchdog timer must
result in hardware reset.
16730-84
8. Millisecond Counter. A 32-bit Millisecond Counter must be provided for

“time stamping.” Each 1 Kilohertz reference must increment the Millisecond
Counter.
9. Buffers. A Transition Buffer must be provided capable of holding a minimum

of 1024 recorded entries. The Transition Buffer must default to empty. There
must be two entry types: Transition and Rollover. The inputs must be
monitored for state transition. At each transition (if the input has been
configured to report transition, a transition entry must be added to the
Transition Buffer. If multiple inputs change state during one input sample,
these transitions must be entered into the Input Transition Buffer by
increasing input number. The Millisecond Counter must be monitored for
rollover. At each rollover transition ($xxxx FFFF - $xxxx 0000), a rollover
entry must be added to the Transition Buffer. For rollover entries, all bits of
byte 1 are set to indicate that this is a rollover entry. A new entry must be
discarded when storage is not available for the new entry. Transition Buffer
blocks are sent to the ATC Controller Unit upon command. Upon
confirmation of their reception, the blocks must be removed from the
Transition Buffer. The entry types are as follows:
Input Transition Entry

Description msb lsb Byte Number
Transition Entry Identifier S Input Number (I0 – I59) 1
Timestamp NLSB x x x x x x x x 2
Timestamp LSB x x x x x x x x 3
Millisecond Counter Rollover Entry

Rollover Entry Identifier 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Timestamp MSB x x x x x x x x 2
Timestamp NMSB x x x x x x x x 3
10. Power Up Initialization. At Power Up, the SIU loss of communications timer
must indicate loss of communications until the user program sends the
Request Module Status message to reset the “E” Bit and a subsequent set
output command is processed.
11. Interrupts. All interrupts must be capable of asynchronous operation with

respect to all processing and all other interrupts. The SIU includes three
interrupt sources as follows:
a. MILLISECOND Interrupt. MILLISECOND Interrupt must be

activated by the Time Reference. A timestamp rollover flag set by
Millisecond Counter (MC) rollover must be cleared only on command.
16730-85
b. LINESYNC Interrupt. The LINESYNC signal must be generated by

the controller power supply. LINESYNC Interrupt must be generated
by both the 0-1 and 1-0 transitions of the LINESYNC signal. The
LINESYNC interrupt must monitor the Millisecond Counter interrupt
and set the Millisecond Counter error flag if there has not been an
interrupt from the 1 Kilohertz source for 0.5 seconds (≥60 consecutive
LINESYNC interrupts). The LINESYNC interrupt must synchronize
the 1 KHz time reference with the 0-1 transition of the LINESYNC
signal once a second. A LINESYNC error flag must be set if the
LINESYNC interrupt has not successfully executed for 0.5 seconds or
longer (≥500 consecutive millisecond interrupts).
c. Line Frequency Reference. The Line Frequency Reference input pin

must receive a square wave signal from the cabinet power supply for
the purposes of synchronizing SIU outputs with the AC line. Line
Frequency Reference Interrupt must be generated by both the 0-1 and
1-0 transitions of the Line Frequency Reference signal. The Line
Frequency Reference interrupt must monitor the Millisecond Counter
interrupt and set the Millisecond Counter error flag if there has not
been an interrupt from the 1 Kilohertz source for 0.5 seconds (≥60
consecutive Line Frequency Reference interrupts). The Line
Frequency Reference interrupt must synchronize the Time Reference
with the 0-1 transition of the Line Frequency Reference signal once a
second. A Line Frequency Reference error flag must be set if the Line
Frequency Reference interrupt has not successfully executed for 0.5
seconds or longer (≥500 consecutive millisecond interrupts). The
electrical characteristics of the Line Frequency input are as follows:
(1) A voltage between 0 and 8 volts must be considered the LOW

state, and must occur when the AC line is in the positive half
cycle.
(2) A voltage between 16 and 26 volts must be considered the

High state, and must occur when the AC line is in the negative
half-cycle.
(3) The Line Frequency Reference input must exhibit a nominal

impedance of 10K (+/-10%) to the +24 VDC input and must
not have more than 1000 picofarads of load capacitance.
(4) The rise and fall time of the signal connected to this input must
not exceed 50 microseconds.
16730-86
(a) The SIU/BIU input must be used by the SIU to

determine the AC timing source. If the SIU/BIU input
is grounded, LINESYNC must be used as the interrupt
source. If the SIU/BIU input is pulled up, Line
Frequency Reference must be used as the interrupt
source.
d. Communication Service Routine. A low-level communication service

routine must be provided to handle reception, transmission, and EIA-
485 communication faults. The communication server must
automatically:
(1) For Transmission:
(a) Generate the opening and closing flags
(b) Generate the CRC value
(c) Generate the abort sequence (minimum of 8

consecutive ‘1’ bits) when commanded by the
Microprocessor Unit
(d) Provide zero bit insertion
(2) For Reception:
(a) Detect the opening and closing flags
(b) Provide address comparison, generating an interrupt for

messages addressed to the SIU, and ignoring messages
not addressed to the SIU
(c) Strip out inserted zeros
(d) Calculate the CRC value, compare it to the received

value, and generate an interrupt on an error
(e) Generate an interrupt if an abort sequence is received
12. Communication Processing. The task must be to process the command

messages received from the ATC Controller Unit, prepare, and start response
transmission. The response message transmission must begin within 4
milliseconds of the receipt of the received message. The SIU must complete
the execution of each command within 70 milliseconds of the end of each
response message transmission.
13. Input Processing. This task must process the raw input data scanned in by the
1 milliseconds interrupt routine, perform all filtering, and maintain the
transition queue entries.
16730-87
14. Inputs and Outputs. The SIU must have four Optically Coupled Inputs, fifty-
four Parallel Input/Outputs and four Serial Ports.
a. Optically-Coupled Inputs.
(1) Opto Common. The Opto Common input must be the common
reference pin for four Opto Inputs.
(2) Opto Inputs. The Opto Inputs are intended to provide optical
isolation for Pedestrian Detection, internal cabinet functions,
Remote Interconnect or other auxiliary inputs. The Opto
Inputs are intended to connect through external 27K Ohm, 1-
Watt resistors for 120 VAC operations, and are intended for
direct connection to 12 VAC for Pedestrian Detector
applications. These inputs may also be used for low-true DC
applications when the Opto Common pin is connected to -24
VDC. These inputs may function in the place of 242/252
isolator modules.
(a) The Opto Inputs must provide electrical isolation of 10

Megohms minimum resistance and 1000 VAC RMS
minimum breakdown to all connector pins except the
Opto Common pin, at a maximum breakdown leakage
current of 1 milliamperes RMS.
(b) These inputs must exhibit nominal impedance to the

Opto Common pin of 5000 Ohms, +10% to the Opto
Common input.
(c) The Opto Inputs must not recognize 3 Volts RMS (AC
sinusoid or DC) or less relative to the Opto Common
input.
(d) The Opto Inputs must recognize 8 Volts RMS (AC

sinusoid or DC) or more relative to the Opto Common
input.
(e) Any steady state voltage applied between an Opto Input

and the Opto Common must not exceed 35 VAC RMS.
(f) Opto Inputs must not be acknowledged when active for

25 milliseconds or less, and must be acknowledged
when active for 50 milliseconds or more.
(g) The first Output Assembly assignments must be

dedicated as follows:
16730-88
PIN 1st OUTPUT ASSEMBLY APPLICABLE HOUSING TYPE
Opto Input 1 Manual Control Enable All

Opto Input 2 Interval Advance All
Opto Input 3 Stop Time All
Opto Input 4 Manual Flash All
Opto Input Comon AC- All
b. Parallel Inputs and Outputs. SIU must control fifty-four input/output

lines using ground-true logic.
(1) Input Section. Each input must be read logic "1" (ON) when
the input voltage at its field connector input is less than 8 VDC,
and must be read logic "0" (OFF) when the input voltage
exceeds 16 VDC. Each input must have an internal pull-up to
+24 VDC of 11K Ohms maximum, and must not deliver
greater than 10 milliamperes to a short circuit to ground.
(2) Output Section. Each output written as a logic "1" (ON) must
have a voltage at its field connector output of less than 4.0
VDC. Each output written as logic "0" (OFF) must provide an
open circuit (1 Megohm or more) at its field connector output.
Each output must consist of an open-collector capable of
driving 40 VDC minimum and sinking 100 milliamperes
minimum. Each output circuit must be capable of switching
from logic "1" to logic "0" within 100 microseconds when
connected to a load of 100K Ohms minimum. Each output
circuit must be protected from transients of 10 microseconds
(+/-2 microseconds) duration, +/-300 VDC from a 1K Ohm
source, with a maximum rate of 1 pulse per second. Each
output must latch the data written and remain stable until either
new data is written or the active-low reset signal. Upon an
active-low reset signal, each output must latch a logic "0" and
retain that state until a new writing. The state of all output
circuits at the time of Power Up or in Power Down state must
be OFF. It must be possible to simultaneously assert all
outputs within 100 microseconds of each other. An output
circuit state not changed during a new writing must not glitch
when other output circuits are updated.
(3) Input/Output Function. Each parallel Input/Output function

contains all of the functions listed below of both the Input
Function and Output Function.
16730-89
(4) Input Section Function. Input scanning must begin at I0 (bit 0)

and proceed to the highest numbered input, ascending from
LSB to MSB. Each complete input scan must finish within 100
microseconds. Once sampled, the logic state of an input must
be held until the next input scan. Each input must be sampled
1,000 times per second. The time interval between samples
must be 1 milliseconds (+/-100 microseconds). The
Millisecond Counter must be sampled within 10 microseconds
of the completion of the input scan.
(5) Input Data Filtering. If configured, the inputs must be filtered

by the SIU to remove signal bounce. The filtered input signals
must then be monitored for changes as noted. The filtering
parameters for each input must consist of Ignore Input Flag and
the ON and OFF filter samples. If the Ignore Input flag is set,
no input transition entries must be placed into the Input
Transition buffer. The ON and OFF filter samples must
determine the number of consecutive samples an input must be
ON and OFF, respectively, before a change of state is
recognized. If the change of state is shorter than the specified
value, the change of state must be ignored. The ON and OFF
filter values must be in the range of 0 to 255. A filter value of
0, for either or both values, must result in no filtering for this
input. The default values for input signals after reset must be
as follows:
Filtering: Enabled
On and off filter values must be set to: 5
Transition monitoring: Disabled
(Timestamps are not
logged)
(6) Output Function. Simultaneous assertion of all outputs must

occur within 100 microseconds. Each output must be capable
of being individually configured in state to ON, OFF, or a state
synchronized with either phase of LINESYNC. The condition
of the outputs must only be "ON" if the SIU continues to
receive active communications from the ATC Controller Unit.
If there is no valid communications with the ATC Controller
Unit for 2.0 seconds, all outputs must revert to the OFF
condition, and the SIU status byte must be updated to reflect
the loss of communication from the ATC Controller Unit. The
data and control bits in the ATC Controller Unit-SIU frame
protocol must control each output as follows:
16730-90
Output Bit Translation

Output Output
Case Data Control Function
Bit Bit
A 0 0 Output in the OFF state
Output is a square wave, synchronized to the LINESYNC signal.
B 1 1 When LINESYNC is ON (1), the output is OFF, and when
LINESYNC is OFF (0), the output is ON.
Output is a square wave, synchronized to the LINESYNC signal.
C 0 1 When LINESYNC is ON (1), the output is ON, and when
LINESYNC is OFF (0), the output is OFF
D 1 0 Output is in the ON state.
(a) In Case A above, the corresponding output must be

turned OFF if previously ON and if previously OFF
remain OFF until otherwise configured. For half-cycle
switching (cases B and C), all outputs to be changed
must be changed within 50 microseconds after the
corresponding LINESYNC transition and must remain
in the same state during the entire half cycle. In Case D
above, the corresponding output must be turned ON if
previously OFF and if previously ON remain ON until
otherwise configured. All outputs must never change
state unless configured to do so.
(7) Serial Ports. The SIU must have a minimum of four serial
ports, identified as SIU Ports 1-4. Serial Ports 1 and 3 are
connected to the SIU microprocessor/controller unit, while
Serial Ports 2 and 4 provide a buffered communications path
from the ATC Controller Unit to the detectors, and are not
connected to the microprocessor/controller unit.
Communications circuitry must be capable of 614.4 Kilobits
per second of data pass through.
(a) SIU Port 1 Operation. Port 1 must interface the SIU to

Serial Bus 1 of the ITS cabinet Modular Bus
Assemblies. All communications circuitry and protocol
must match Serial Bus 1 requirements. The SIU must
function as the “LOCAL” command node for this
network responding with appropriate action. See ATC
Controller Unit specification, CPU Field I/O, for
protocol and requirements. The SP5 SDLC frame
address assignments (Command/Responses) are as
follows:
16730-91
SIU ADDRESS
SYSTEM
Address
ASSEMBLY / UNIT
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0
0 Reserved
1 14 Pack in position 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
2 Reserved
3 14 Pack in position 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
4 6 Pack in position 4 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
5 6 Pack in position 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
6 6 Pack in position 2 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
7 6 Pack in position 3 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
8 Reserved
9 Input #1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
10 Input #2 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
11 Input #3 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
12 Input #4 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
13 Input #5 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
14 Reserved
15 CMU #1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
16 CMU #2 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
17 CMU #3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
18 CMU #4 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
19 CPU 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
20 FI/O 2A or 8 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
21 to 254 Reserved
255 Broadcast All 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Note 1: A0 to A3 are Input to SIU with DC ground as common.
Note 2: 0 = open or ground false. 1= closed or ground true (shunted)
(b) SIU Port 2 Operation. SIU Port 2 must interface to

Serial Bus 2 of the ITS cabinet Modular Bus
Assemblies providing a communications path to the
ATC Controller Unit for block data retrieval. No
connection exists between SIU Port 1 and SIU Port 2.
Similarly, no connection exists between SIU Port 2 and
the microprocessor/controller unit. All data transfers
between SIU Ports 1 and 2 must be accomplished by
the ATC Controller Unit. For example, data sent back
may include monitor diagnostic status and
communication status; input diagnostics status (detector
sensor or isolator); and processed channel inputs data
such as rate counts, occupancies, average speeds, speed
classification and incident/presence.
16730-92
I. Synchronous Operation. If the ATC Controller

Unit is communicating via Logical Port SP3S,
SIU Port 2 must communicate in SDLC format
and protocol, and the hardware requirements
must match Serial Bus 2 (synchronous TX/RX
using TxC from the ATC Controller Unit CPU
for common clocking).
II. Asynchronous Operation. If the ATC Controller

Unit is communicating via Logical Port SP3,
SIU Port 2 must communicate in an
asynchronous START BIT/STOP BIT format
and protocol.
(c) SIU Port 3 Operation. The SIU Port 3 must be provided

for communication to a personal computer via a front
panel 9-position subminiature D-type connector and
EIA-232 logic. Its purpose is to upload diagnostic
information, and to download the SIU program. The
SIU Port 3 protocol must be defined by the vendor, and
operate with vendor-supplied software. The pin
assignments of SIU Port 3 must match that of ATC
Controller Unit C60 port.
(d) SIU Port 4 Operation. SIU Port 4 consists of Detector

Rack signal INBUS TxD, INBUS RxD, INBUS TxC,
and INBUS RxC, and must conform to the electrical
standards of EIA-485, single-ended. In this scheme, the
RxD- and RxC- inputs of the EIA-485 receivers are
connected to 2.5 Volts, while the TxD- and TxC-
outputs of the EIA-485 drivers are not used. SIU Port 4
receivers must withstand +/-25 Volts, suitable for
reception of EIA-232 bipolar signals. All four INBUS
signals must be terminated at each receiver with
impedance of 6,800 Ohms (+/-5%), connected from
signal to +5V Ground on the SIU. The detector vendor
must define the SIU Port 4 messages. The detector
vendor must define the SIU Port 4 protocol. The SIU
provides one inversion to ensure a controller MARK
equates to a detector MARK. The SIU must provide an
LED indicator for TxD and RxD, such that is
illuminated during a MARK (START Bit, for example)
and extinguished during a SPACE (STOP Bit, for
example). SIU Port 4 provides the buffering to SIU
Port 2, allowing the ATC Controller Unit to
communicate directly to the detectors, as follows:
16730-93
I. Synchronous Operation. If the ATC Controller

Unit is communicating to detectors via Logical
Port SP3S, the SIU Port 4 buffers must convert
SIU Port 2 TxD+ and TxD- to EIA-485 which
must then be transmitted to the detectors via
INBUS TxD. Likewise, the SIU Port 4 buffers
must convert SIU Port 2 TxC+ and TxC- to
EIA-485, which must then be transmitted to the
detectors via INBUS TxC.
II. If the ATC Controller Unit is communicating to

detectors via Logical Port SP3S, the SIU Port 4
buffers must convert INBUS RxD from EIA-
485, which must then be transmitted to the ATC
Controller Unit via SIU Port 2 RxD+ and RxD-.
Likewise, the SIU Port 4 buffers must convert
INBUS RxC from EIA-485, which must then be
transmitted to the ATC Controller Unit via SIU
Port 2 RxC+ and RxC-.
III. Asynchronous Operation. If the ATC Controller

Unit is communicating to detectors via Logical
Port SP3, the SIU Port 4 buffers must convert
SIU Port 2 TxD+ and TxD- to EIA-485 which
must be transmitted to the detectors via INBUS
TxD.
IV. If the ATC Controller Unit is communicating to

detectors via Logical Port SP3, the SIU Port 4
buffers must convert INBUS RxD is from EIA-
485, which must be transmitted to the ATC
Controller Unit via SIU Port 2 RxD+ and RxD-.
V. Asynchronous operation must not use Port 2

TxC+, TxC-, RxC+, RxC-, nor Port 4 INBUS
TxC, or INBUS RxC.
VI. Assembly Address Output. The SIU must sense

the rack address block and generate a square
wave on the ASSEMBLY ADDRESS signal as
follows:
16730-94
ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY ADDRESS

ADDRESS FREQUENCY (Hertz)(+/-15%)
1 60
2 30
3 15
4 7.5
5 3.75
VII. INBUS RTS Input. The INBUS RTS line must

be pulled to +24 Volts via a 10K Ohm resistor
on the SIU. In systems using legacy detectors
that do not use INBUS RTS, this line must not
be used (no connection). Detectors equipped
with INBUS RTS must drive this line low when
transmitting data from that detector to the SIU
via INBUS. When not transmitting data, this
line must not be driven low and is pulled to
+24V via the 10K Ohm resistor.
VIII. Serial Bus 2 Control. The controller transmits a

message on Serial Bus 2 which must be received
by each detector via the SIU INBUS TxD and
INBUS TxC. If the detector is asynchronous,
INBUS TxC must be ignored. Each detector
must compare the address field of the message
with its own slot address and assembly address.
If the address matches, that detector must
respond with data on INBUS RxD and INBUS
RxC. If the detector is asynchronous, INBUS
RxC must not be used. The SIU of the
responding detector must enable its EIA-485
line drivers to transmit the response from
INBUS to SB2. This driver must be enabled by
any of the three following conditions:
i. Activity on INBUS RxD
ii. Activity on INBUS RxC
iii. INBUS RTS at low (true)
IX. This driver must be disabled by either of the

following two conditions:
i. Lack of activity on both INBUS RxD

and RxC for 1.5 milliseconds
16730-95
ii. Inbus RTS transitions from low (true) to

high (false)
15. Data Communications Protocol. All communication with the ATC Controller
Unit must be SDLC-compatible command-response protocol, support 0-bit
stuffing, and operate at a data rate of 614.4 Kilobits per second. The ATC
Controller Unit must always initiate the communication and should the
command frame be incomplete or in error, no SIU response must be
transmitted.
a. Frame Type. The frame type must be determined by the value of the
first byte of the message. The command frames type values $70 - $7F
and associated response frame type values $F0 - $FF are allocated to
the Manufacturer diagnostics. All other frame types not called out are
reserved. The command-response Frame Type values and message
times must be as follows:
Frame Types
Module I/0 Module Minimum Maximum
Description
Command Response Message Time Message Time
49 177 Request Module Status 250 microseconds 275 microseconds
50 178 MILLISECOND CTR. 222.5 microseconds 237.5 microseconds
Mgmt.
51 179 Configure Inputs 344.5 microseconds 6.8750 milliseconds
52 180 Poll Raw Input Data 317.5 microseconds 320 microseconds
53 181 Poll Filtered Input Data 317.5 microseconds 320 microseconds
54 182 Poll Input Transition 300 microseconds 10.25 milliseconds
Buffer
55 183 Command Outputs 405 microseconds 410 microseconds
56 184 Config. Input Tracking 340 microseconds 10.25 milliseconds
Functions
57 185 Config. Complex 340 microseconds 6.875 milliseconds
Output Functions
58 186 Reserved --- ---
59 187 Reserved --- ---
60 188 SIU Identification 222.5 microseconds 222.5 microseconds
61-62 189-190 Reserved (note below) --- ---
63 191 Reserved --- ---
64 192 Reserved --- ---
65 193 Reserved (note below) --- ---
66 --- Reserved (note below) --- ---
67 195 Reserved (note below) --- ---
16730-96
b. Messages 61/189, 62/190, 65/193, and 67/195 must be for ITS Cabinet
Monitor Unit. See ITS Cabinet Monitor System Serial Bus #1 for
Command and Response Frames. Message 66/No Response is a
Broadcast Message to Address 255 containing the current time. Any
device may receive and process this message if it has the software
capacity.
c. Request Module Status. The Command must be used to request SIU

status information response. Command/Response frames must be as
follows:
Request Module Status Command

(Type Number = 49) 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 Byte 1
Reset Status Bits P E K R T M L W Byte 2
Request Module Status Response

(Type Number = 177) 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 Byte 1
System Status P E K R T M L W Byte 2
SCC Receive Error Count Receive Error Count Byte 3
SCC Transmit Error Count Transmit Error Count Byte 4
MC Timestamp MSB MC Timestamp MSB Byte 5
MC Timestamp NMSB MC Timestamp NMSB Byte 6
MC Timestamp NLSB MC Timestamp NLSB Byte 7
MC Timestamp LSB MC Timestamp LSB Byte 8
d. The response status bits are defined as follows:
P - Indicates SIU hardware reset

E - Indicates a communications loss of greater than 2 seconds
M - Indicates an error with the Millisecond Counter interrupt
L - Indicates an error in the LINESYNC
W - Indicates that the SIU has been reset by the Watchdog
R - Indicates that the EIA-485 receive error count byte has rolled
over
T - Indicates that the EIA-485 transmit error count byte has
rolled over
K - Not Used
e. Each of these bits must be individually reset by a '1' in the

corresponding bit of any subsequent Request Module Status frame,
and the response frame must report the current status bits. The SCC
error count bytes must not be reset. When a count rolls over (255 - 0),
its corresponding roll-over flag must be set.
16730-97
f. Millisecond Counter Management. The Millisecond Counter

Management Frame must be used to set the value of the Millisecond
Counter. The 'S' bit must return status '0' on completion or '1' on error.
The 32-bit value must be loaded into the Millisecond Counter at the
next 0-1 transition of the LINESYNC signal. The frames must be as
follows:
Millisecond Counter Management Command

(Type Number = 50) 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 Byte 1
New MC Timestamp MSB x x x x x x x x Byte 2
New MC Timestamp NMSB x x x x x x x x Byte 3
New MC Timestamp NLSB x x x x x x x x Byte 4
New MC Timestamp LSB x x x x x x x x Byte 5
Millisecond Counter Management Response

(Type Number = 178) 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 Byte 1
Status 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 S Byte 2
g. Configure Inputs. The Configure Inputs command frame must be used

to change input configurations. The command-response frames must
be as follows:
Configure Inputs Command

(Type Number = 51) 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Byte 1
Number of Items (n) n n n n n n n n Byte 2
Item # - Byte 1 E Input Number (I0 – I59) Byte 3(I-1)+3
Item # - Byte 2 Leading edge filter (e) Byte 3(I-1)+4
Item # - Byte 3 Trailing edge filter (r) Byte 3(I-1)+5
NOTE: In the case of an invalid parameter error, the entire message must be rejected.
Configure Inputs Response

(Type Number = 179) 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Byte 1
Status 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 S Byte 2
h. Block field definitions must be as follows:
16730-98
E- Ignore Input Flag. "1" = do not record transition entries for this
input, "0" = record transition entries for this input
e- A one-byte leading edge filter specifying the number of
consecutive input samples which must be "0" before the input
is considered to have entered to "0" state from "1" state (range
1 to 255, 0 = filtering disabled)
r- A one-byte trailing edge filter specifying the number of
consecutive input samples which must be "1" before the input
is considered to have entered to "1" state from "0" state (range
1 to 255, 0 = filtering disabled)
S- return status S = '0' on completion or '1' on error
i. Poll Raw Input Data. The Poll Raw Input Data frame must be used to
poll the SIU for the current unfiltered status of all inputs. The
response frame must contain 8 bytes (Inputs 0-63) of information
indicating the current input status. The frames must be as follows:
Poll Raw Input Data Command

(Type Number = 52) 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 Byte 1
Poll Raw Input Data Response

(Type Number = 180) 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 Byte 1
Inputs I0 (lsb) to I7 (msb) x x x x x x x x Byte 2
Inputs I8 to I53, I56 to I59 x x x x x x x x Bytes 3 to 9
MC Timestamp MSB x x x x x x x x Byte 10
MC Timestamp NMSB x x x x x x x x Byte 11
MC Timestamp NLSB x x x x x x x x Byte 12
MC Timestamp LSB x x x x x x x x Byte 13
j. Poll Filtered Input Data. The Poll Filtered Input Data frame must be
used to poll the SIU for the current filtered status of all inputs. The
response frame must contain 8 bytes (Inputs 0-63) of information
indicating the current filtered status of the inputs. Raw input data must
be provided in the response for inputs that are not configured for
filtering. The frames must be as follows:
Poll Filter Input Data Command

(Type Number = 53) 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Byte 1
16730-99
Poll Filter Input Data Response

(Type Number = 181) 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Byte 1
Inputs I0 (lsb) to I7 (msb) x x x x x x x x Byte 2
Inputs I8 to I53, I56 to I59 x x x x x x x x Bytes 3 to 9
k. Poll Input Transition Buffer. The Poll Input Transition Buffer frame
must poll the SIU for the contents of the input transition buffer. The
response frame must include a three-byte information field for each of
the input changes that have occurred since the last interrogation. The
frames are as follows:
Poll Input Transition Buffer Command

(Type Number = 54) 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 Byte 1
Block Number x x x x x x x x Byte 2
Poll Input Transition Buffer Response

(Type Number = 182) 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 Byte 1
Block Number x x x x x x x x Byte 2
Number of Entries = N x x x x x x x x Byte 3
Item # S Input Number (I0 – I59) Byte 3(I-1)+4
Item # MC Timestamp NLSB x x x x x x x x Byte 3(I-1)+5
Item # MC Timestamp LSB x x x x x x x x Byte 3(I-1)+6
Status 0 0 0 0 C F E G Byte 3(I-1)+7
MC Timestamp MSB x x x x x x x x Byte 3(N-1)+8
MC Timestamp NMSB x x x x x x x x Byte 3(N-1)+9
MC Timestamp NLSB x x x x x x x x Byte 3(N-1)+10
MC Timestamp LSB x x x x x x x x Byte 3(N-1)+11
l. Each detected state transition for each active input is placed in the
queue as it occurs. Bit definitions are as follows:
16730-100
S- Indicates the state of the input after the transition, bit is 1 if the
Input is ON after the transition, bit is 0 if the Input is OFF after
the transition
C- Indicates the 255 entry buffer limit has been exceeded
F- Indicates the 1024 buffer limit has been exceeded
G- Indicates the requested block number is out of monotonic
increment sequence
E- Same block number requested, E is set in response
m. The entries provided within the Transition Buffer Poll response must
be ordered from the start of the reply as the oldest to newest. The very
first access provides the oldest entry. The SIU device must initialize,
upon Power Up or Reset, its last Block Number received value to
0xFF in order to facilitate suppression of the G Bit response when the
ATC Controller Unit program starts and uses 0x00 as the first Block
Number. Subsequent responses are subject to the old-buffer purge
mechanism stated below.The ATC Controller Unit program
monotonically increases the Block Number after each command issued
to purge the old buffer. When the SIU Module receives this command,
it must compare the associated Block Number with the Block Number
of the previously received command. If it is the same, the previous
buffer must be re-sent to the ATC Controller Unit and the 'E' flag set
in the status response frame. If it is not equal to the previous Block
Number, the old buffer must be purged and the next block of data sent.
If the block number is not incremented by one, the status G bit must be
set. The block number received becomes the current number (even if
out of sequence). The Block Number byte sent in the response block
must be the same as that received in the command block. The Block
Number counter rollover (0xFF becomes 0x00) must be considered as
a normal increment.
n. Set Outputs. The Set Outputs frame must be used to command the SIU
to set the Outputs according to the data in the frame. If there is any
error configuring the outputs, the 'E' flag in the response frame must be
set to '1'. If the LINESYNC reference has been lost, the 'L' bit in the
response frame must be set. Loss of LINESYNC reference must also
be indicated in system status information. These command and
response frames are as follows:
16730-101
Set Outputs Command

(Type Number = 55) 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 Byte 1
Outputs O0 (lsb) to O7 (msb) Data x x x x x x x x Byte 2
Outputs O8 to O54 Data x x x x x x x x Bytes 3 to 8
Outputs O56 to O63 Data (reserved) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Byte 9
Outputs O0 (lsb) to O7 (msb) Control x x x x x x x x Byte 10
Bytes 11 to
Outputs O8 to O54 Control x x x x x x x x
16
Outputs O56 to O63 Control (reserved) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Byte 17
Set Outputs Response

(Type Number = 183) 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 Byte 1
Status 0 0 0 0 0 0 L E Byte 2
o. Configure Input Tracking Functions. The Configure Input Tracking

Functions frame must be used to configure the definition for an output
that responds to transitions on a particular input. The maximum
number of active definitions is 8. Refer to ‘Tracking Functions
Overview’ for additional details.
p. Please note that Configure Input Tracking Functions is not intended

for use with Traffic Signal Control Applications. (Authorized
Engineering Information)
(1) Command and Response Frames. The command and response

frames for Input Tracking Functions must be as follows:
Configure Input Tracking Functions Command

(Type Number = 56) 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 Byte 1
Number of Items Number of Items Byte 2
Output Number (O0 –
Item # - Byte 1 E Byte 2(I-1)+3
O54)
Item # - Byte 2 I Input Number (I0 – I59) Byte 2(I-1)+4
Number of Items: 0-16 Tracking Definitions are contained in this message.
16730-102
Field Definitions:
E '1’ - Enable Input Tracking function for this Output
'0' - Remove Input Tracking function for this Output
I '1' - Output is OFF when Input is ON, ON when Input
OFF
'0' - Output is ON when Input is ON, OFF when Input is
OFF
Output Number: 0 - Maximum Output Number for the SIU device type.
Input Number: 0 - Maximum Input Number for the SIU device type.
Configure Input Tracking Functions Response

(Type Number = 184) 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 Byte 1
Status 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 V Byte 2
Field Definitions:
V '1' - Maximum number of configurable outputs will be
exceeded.
'0' - No error
(2) Timestamp. The timestamp value must be sampled prior to the

response frame.
(3) Output Updates. Outputs, which track inputs, must be updated

no less than once per millisecond. Input to output signal
propagation delay must not exceed 2 milliseconds.
(4) Tracking Functions Overview. A maximum of eight different

Output numbers may be activated by specifying eight
definitions.
(5) One complete definition for an Output that tracks an Input

consists of two bytes containing four parameters: 1) the
instruction to install or to remove the definition, 2) the Output
Number, 3) the relationship of the state of the Output to the
Input and 4) the Input Number.
16730-103
(6) Each definition specifies the controlling Input number for that
unique output number. More than one output definition may
specify the same Input controlling source. [That is, the same
input may be used as the control source for more than one
Tracking Output.]
(7) A complete definition is called an Item in the Command

Message frame. The ‘Number of Items’ byte specifies the
quantity of complete definitions contained in the Command
Frame. If the value is 0, all existing active Input Tracking
definitions must be removed.
(8) The transmission of a definition may:
(a) install a new active Tracking definition.
(b) remove an existing active Tracking definition. When an

Input Tracking definition is removed, the output is set
according to the most recently received Set Outputs
Command.
(c) convert an active output definition from Complex or

Square Wave definition to Tracking. Conversion
removes the existing definition and assigns the
Tracking definition without a transition through the
‘output is set according to the most recently received
Set Outputs Command’ state. The most recent state of
the output remains until the new function changes it.
(d) redefine an existing Tracking definition.
(9) If a command frame to be processed by the SIU would result in

having more than the maximum number (8) of definitions
activated, the entire command frame must be rejected. The
response V bit must be set to 1.
(10) The V bit response is based on counting the current active

quantity plus the projected Enable definitions after accounting
for Remove definitions and invalid Output numbers.
(11) The V bit response evaluation takes the currently active

definition quantity, adds the projected Enable definitions,
subtracts the Remove definitions, ignores invalid Input and
Output numbers and compares the result to the Maximum
Number of active Tracking definitions allowed. If the quantity
of Active definitions would become greater than the Maximum
Number of active Tracking definitions, or if there are more
Remove definitions than existing active definitions, the V Bit
must be set in the response.
16730-104
(12) While processing an Enable request, an Out of Range Input

number must preclude processing for that definition.
(13) The Out of Range Output and Input numbers must not affect
the active definition count. No error response is returned.
(14) The rest of the message must be processed.
(15) The “Number of Items” field is valid from 0 to 16 because the

longest message may contain 8 Enable and 8 Remove
definitions.
(16) The Input state always comes from the Filtered Input Data
source.
(17) Valid Input and Output Number Ranges:
ITS SIU device types: Inputs 0 - 53 & 56 - 59, Outputs 0 – 54
q. Configure Complex Output Functions. The Configure Complex Output

Functions frame must be used to configure the definition for an output
that provides a complex operation. The maximum number of active
definitions is 8. Refer to ‘Complex Output Functions Overview’ for
additional details.
(1) Please note that Configure Complex Output Functions is not

intended for use with Traffic Signal Control Applications.
(2) Command and Response Frames. The command and response

frames must be as follows:
Configure Complex Output Functions Command

(Type Number = 57) 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 Byte 1
Number of Items Number of Items Byte 2
Item # - Byte 1 0 Output Number (O0 – O54) Byte 7(I-1)+3
Item # - Byte 2 Primary Duration (MSB) Byte 7(I-1)+4
Item # - Byte 3 Primary Duration (LSB) Byte 7(I-1)+5
Item # - Byte 4 Secondary Duration (MSB) Byte 7(I-1)+6
Item # - Byte 5 Secondary Duration (LSB) Byte 7(I-1)+7
Item # - Byte 6 0 Input Number (I0 – I59) Byte 7(I-1)+8
Item # - Byte 7 P W G E J F R L Byte 7(I-1)+9
(a) Number of Items: 0-16 Complex Output Definitions are

contained in this message.
16730-105
(b) Output Number: 0 - Maximum Output Number for the

SIU device type.
(c) Primary Duration: MSB & LSB form a 16 bit Hex

numerical value 0x0000 - 0xffff.
(d) Secondary Duration: MSB & LSB form a 16 bit Hex

numerical value 0x0000 - 0xffff.
(e) Input Number: 0 - Maximum Input Number for the

SIU device type.
(3) Field Definitions:
P '1' - The output is configured for single-pulse operation.

Once complete, the complex output function must be
disabled.
'0' - The output is configured for continuous oscillation.
W '1' - It is triggered by the specified input. Triggered
complex output must commence within 2 milliseconds
of the associated trigger recognition.
'0' - Operation must begin within 2 milliseconds of the
command receipt.
G '1' - Operation must be gated active by the specified
input.
'0' - Gating is inactive.
E '1' Enable complex output function for this output
'0' Remove complex output function for this output
J '1' During primary duration, the output must be written
as a logic '1'.
During secondary duration, the output must be written
as a logic '0'.
'0' - During primary duration, the output must be
written as a logic '0'. During secondary duration, the
output must be written as a logic '1'
F '1' - The trigger or gate must be acquired subsequent to
filtering the specified input. The raw input signal must
be used if filtering is not enabled for the specified input.
'0' - The trigger or gate must be derived from the raw
input.
R '1' - For triggered output, the output must be triggered
by an ON-to-OFF transition of the specified input and
must be triggered immediately upon command receipt
if the input is OFF. For gated output, the output must
be active while the input is OFF.
'0' - For triggered output, the output must be triggered
by an OFF-to-ON transition of the specified input and
must be triggered immediately upon command receipt
16730-106
if the input is ON. For gated output, the output must be

active while the input is ON.
L '1' - The LINESYNC based clock must be used for the
time ticks.
'0' - The Millisecond Counter must be used for the time
ticks.
Configure Complex Output Functions Response

(Type Number = 185) 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 Byte 1
Status 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 V Byte 2
MC Timestamp (MSB) x x x x x x x x Byte 3
MC Timestamp (NMSB) x x x x x x x x Byte 4
MC Timestamp (NLSB) x x x x x x x x Byte 5
MC Timestamp (LSB) x x x x x x x x Byte 6
(4) Field Definitions:
V '1' - Maximum number of configurable outputs will be

exceeded.
'0' - No error
(5) Sampling Rate. Controlling input signals must be sampled at

least once per millisecond.
(6) Complex Output Functions Overview. A maximum of eight

different Output numbers may be activated by specifying eight
definitions.
(a) One complete definition for a Complex Output consists

of seven bytes containing fourteen parameters:
1) the Output Number,

2, 3) Primary Duration: MSB & LSB form a 16 bit
Hex numerical value,
4, 5) Secondary Duration: MSB & LSB form a 16 bit
Hex numerical value,
6) the Input Number,
7) Bit P: One Pulse or Continuous Oscillation,
8) Bit W: Output Operation is Edge Triggered by
Input or Not Triggered by Input,
9) Bit G: Output Operation is Gated by Input or is
Continuous Oscillation,
10) Bit E: Enable Definition or Remove Definition,
11) Bit J: Defines Primary/Secondary Duration
relationship: ON/OFF or OFF/ON,
12) Bit F: Input from Filtered or Raw Data,
16730-107
13) Bit R: Selects Edge for Triggered by Input ON

to OFF or OFF to ON. Bit R: Selects State for
Gated to be active by Input OFF or by Input
ON, 14) Linesync edges or Millisecond
Counter provides tick timing.
(b) Each definition specifies the controlling Input number

for that unique output number. The Input is a
functional control only when the operation is specified
as Triggered (W=1) or Gated (G=1). Otherwise, the
Input number is ignored. More than one output
definition may specify the same Input controlling
source. [That is, the same input may be used as the
control source for more than one Complex Output.] If
both W=1 and G=1 are set in the definition, the G=1
must be used as if W=0.
(c) The primary duration is the first timed interval of a

pulse or the first portion of a continuous oscillation.
The first portion follows acquisition of a Trigger or
Gated Input. If not Triggered or Gated, the first portion
follows the activation of the definition.
(d) The secondary duration follows the Primary duration.
(e) A complete definition is called an Item in the

Command Message frame.
(f) The ‘Number of Items’ byte specifies the quantity of

complete definitions contained in the Command Frame.
If the value is 0, all existing active Complex Output
definitions must be removed.
(g) The transmission of a definition may:
I. install a new active Complex Output definition.
II. remove an existing active Complex Output

definition. When a Complex Output definition
is removed, the output is set according to the
most recently received Set Outputs Command.
16730-108
III. convert an active output definition from

Tracking or Square Wave definition to Complex
Output. Conversion removes the existing
definition and assigns the Complex Output
definition without a transition through the
‘output is set according to the most recently
received Set Outputs Command’ state. The
most recent state of the output remains until the
new function changes it.
IV. redefine an existing Complex Output definition.
(h) If a command frame to be processed by the SIU would

result in having more than the maximum number (8)
definitions activated, the entire command frame must
be rejected. The response V bit must be set to 1.
(i) The V bit response evaluation takes the currently active

definition quantity, adds the projected Enable
definitions, subtracts the Remove definitions, ignores
invalid Input and Output numbers and compares the
result to the maximum number of active Complex
definitions allowed. If the quantity of active definitions
would become greater than the maximum number of
active Complex Output definitions, or if there are more
Remove definitions than existing active Complex
Output definitions, the V Bit must be set in the
response.
(j) While processing an Enable request that requires

Triggered or Gated operation, an Out of Range Input
number must preclude processing for that definition.
(k) The Out of Range Output and Input numbers must not
affect the active definition count. No error response is
returned.
(l) The rest of the message must be processed.
(m) The “Number of Items” field is valid from 0 to 16

because the longest message may contain 8 Enable and
8 Remove definitions.
(n) The Input state comes from the Filtered or Raw Input
Data source as specified by the Bit F value.
(o) Valid Input and Output Number Ranges:
16730-109
(p) ITS SIU device types: Inputs 0 - 53 & 56 - 59, Outputs

0 – 54
(q) The LINESYNC based clock must used both the rising
and falling edges providing a nominal 8.33 millisecond
time tick.
r. Module Identification. The SIU Identification command frame must be

used to request the SIU Identification value for ITS Cabinet SIUs and
CMUs. Reply message must use the following addresses: ATC
Controller Unit Field I/Os must respond with address 20. SIUs
respond with their own address ranging from 0-14. CMUs respond
with their own addresses, ranging from 15-18.
(1) The command and response frames must be shown as follows:
I/O Module Identification Command

(Type Number= 60) 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 Byte 1
I/O Module Identification Response

(Type Number= 188) 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 Byte 1
SIU I D byte x x x x x x x x Byte 2
16. Address Select Inputs. The Address Select input bits must define the logical
position of each SIU. No connection must be logical False, while a
connection to Logic Ground must be a logical True. There must be sixteen
unique address positions selected with a binary code, using bit 0 as least
significant and bit 3 as most significant.
17. SIU/BIU Input. The SIU must contain one input that must be read directly by
microprocessor. When not connected, this input must be logical False, while
a connection to Ground must be a logical True.
18. Hardware Requirements.
a. Size. The SIU Module must be physically composed of a printed

circuit board, 4.5 in. high by 6.5 in. long, a front panel 2.25 in. wide by
4.5 in. high with a DIN 96-pin connector on the connector end
(opposite the front panel).
b. SIU Insertion and Extraction. A “U” handle must be mounted on the

front panel for insertion/extraction.
c. LED Indicators. Six LED indicators must be provided on the front

panel, as follows:
16730-110
SIU Active SIU Power Serial Bus 1 TxD

Serial Bus 2 TxD Serial Bus 1 RxD Serial Bus 2 RxD
(1) The Serial Bus 1 indicators must be sensed on the

microprocessor/controller pins. Serial Bus 2 indicators must be
sensed on the Port 4 (EIA-485) signal lines. The SIU Power
LED must indicate that the +24 VDC power supply is within
regulation. The SIU Active LED must be controlled via SIU
I/O 55.
d. Push Buttons. The SIU front panel must provide a RESET pushbutton
that must provide a hardware RESET to the microprocessor/controller
unit.
e. 9-position Subminiature D-type Connector. A 9-position subminiature

D-type connector must be mounted on the front panel for Port 3 entry.
The connector pin assignment is Pin 2- RxD, Pin 3- TxD and Pin 5-
Signal Ground.
f. SIU Input Connector. The SIU Input Connection pin assignments must
be as shown in drawing 4-11-8.
19. SIU Input and Output Assignments.
SIU Set Output Command Type 55 Raw Input Data Response Type 180
I/O 0 BYTE 2 BIT 0 BYTE 2 BIT 0
16730-111
I/O 16 BYTE 4 BIT 0 BYTE 4 BIT0
I/O 24 BYTE 5 BIT0 BYTE 5 BIT 0
16730-112
Active LED (O54) BYTE 8 BIT6
Opto Input 1 (I56) BYTE 9 BIT 0
A000 BYTE 9 BIT 4
A001 BYTE 9 BIT 5
A002 BYTE 9 BIT 6
A003 BYTE 9 BIT 7
A000 to A003 must be the address of the SIU.
20. Block Diagrams.
a. SIU Structure. Each SIU must contain 54 Input/Outputs and each must
be connected as follows:
Figure 3
SIU Input/Output Connections.
16730-113
b. When the SIU is powered, all outputs must be initialized OFF and
fifty-four inputs must be available. Without jumpers or firmware
changes, the Controller software must be able to turn ON any of the
fifty-four outputs. Each output must be able to be read back as an
input in order to check integrity.
c. Existing CALTRANS-style Detectors.
Figure 4
Legacy CALTRANS-style Detector Inputs/Outputs.
d. In Figure 5, twelve legacy CALTRANS-style detectors may be

installed in the Input Assembly. The twenty-four CALLS must be
read by twenty-four SIU inputs, while detectors must be able to be
reset by six SIU outputs, two detectors at a time.
e. Existing NEMA-style Detectors.
Figure 5
Legacy NEMA-style Detector Inputs/Outputs.
16730-114
f. In Figure 6, twelve legacy NEMA detectors may be installed in the

Input Assembly. The twenty-four CALLS must be read by twenty-
four SIU inputs, while the twenty-four STATUS must be read by
another twenty-four SIU inputs. The detectors must be able to be reset
by six SIU outputs, two detectors at a time, same as NEMA.
g. Existing Detectors with Serial Ports.
Figure 6
Legacy Detectors with Serial Ports Input/Output Connections
h. Circuitry shown in Figure 7 must be included in each SIU, providing a

direct serial connection from the controller to each individual serial
detector. This serial connection must be in addition to all of the
NEMA CALL and STATUS lines shown in Figure 6.
i. Future Advanced Detectors.
16730-115
Figure 7
Future Advanced Detector Inputs/Outputs.
j. Status information must be retrieved from each detector via Serial Bus
2 as described in Figure 7, eliminating the need for the NEMA
STATUS inputs. The NEMA STATUS inputs must become
individual RESTART outputs from the SIU. The RESET and
RESTART outputs differ as follows. RESET must be connected
directly to the microprocessor RESET pin of each detector, generating
a “hard” reset, used as a last resort to recover stalled detectors.
RESTART must be a “soft” signal to the detector to clear all tuning
and programming for that individual detector channel, without
affecting others.
k. Switch Packs.
Figure 8
Switch Pack Outputs.
16730-116
l. Figure 8, 42 SIU outputs must be used to control fourteen Switch

Packs, with enough outputs remaining to control four more. Each
output must be able to be read back by the controller.
H. Cabinet Details.
Table of Contents
Model 200 Switchpack & 204 Flasher Units Figure 9

Model 212 Cabinet Monitor Unit (CMU) Figure 10
Model 214 Auxiliary Monitor (AMU) Figure 11
Model 216 ITS Cabinet Power Supply Unit Figure 12
Model 216 EP Cabinet External Power Supply Figure 13
Model 218 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) Figure 14
Transfer Relay Wiring and Outline Dimension Figure 15
Detector Sensor Units and Isolators Figure 16
16730-117
Figure 9
Model 200 Switchpack & 204 Flasher
Units
16730-118
Figure 10
Model 212 Cabinet Monitor Unit (CMU)
16730-119
Figure 11
Model 214 Auxiliary Monitor (AMU)
16730-120
Figure 12
Model 216 ITS Cabinet Power Supply Unit
16730-121
Figure 13
Model 216 EP Cabinet External Power Supply
16730-122
Figure 14
Model 218 Serial Interface Unit (SIU)
16730-123
Figure 15
Transfer Relay Wiring and Outline Dimension
16730-124
Figure 16
Detector Sensor Units and Isolators
16730-125
2.11 DETECTOR SENSOR UNITS, ELEMENTS AND ISOLATORS
1. The sensor and isolator channels must be operationally independent from each
other.
2. Each sensor unit or AC isolator channel must draw no more than 100
milliamperes from the +24 VDC cabinet power supply and must be insensitive
to 700 millivolts RMS ripple on the incoming +24 VDC line.
3. The sensor unit or isolator front panel must be provided with a hand pull to
facilitate insertion and removal from the Input Assembly.
4. All control switches, gain dials and channel indicators must be mounted on
the front panel. Each sensor unit or isolator channel must have an indicator to
provide visual indication of detector or incoming signal.
5. Each sensor unit or isolator channel output must be an opto-isolated NPN

Open Collector capable of sinking 50 milliamperes at 30 VDC. The output
must be compatible with the controller unit inputs.
6. A valid channel input must cause a channel Ground True Output to the
controller unit of a minimum 100 milliseconds in duration. An onboard
physical switching mechanism must be provided to disable this feature when
the mechanism is in an OPEN position. Said switching mechanism must
eliminate the minimum timing requirement.
7. The output transistor must switch from OFF to ON state or ON to OFF state in
20 microseconds or less.
8. Onboard protection must be provided to enable the sensor unit or isolator to

comply with ANSI/IEEE C62.41 (100 Kilohertz Ring Wave and the EFT
Burst) at voltages and currents specified at “Location Category A1” (i.e. up to
2.0 Kilovolts, 0.07 Kiloampheres for the 100 Kilohertz Ring Wave) and at
“Test Severity” level I (i.e. up to 1.0 Kilovolts, open-circuit) for the EFT
Burst.
9. Detector Sensor Units and Isolators must have a front panel mounted test
switch for each channel to simulate valid input. The test switch must be a
single-pole double-throw, three position CONTROL test switch: The position
assignment must be UP = Constant ON; MIDDLE = Normal Operation; and
DOWN = Momentary ON.
B. Model 222 & 224 Loop Detector Sensor Unit.
16730-126
a. The sensor unit channel must produce an output signal when a vehicle
passes over or remains over loop wires embedded in the roadway. The
method of detection must be based upon a design that renders the
output signal when a metallic mass (vehicle) enters the detection zone
causing a change of 0.02% minimum decrease in inductance of the
circuit measured at the input terminals of the sensor unit.
b. An open loop must cause the sensor unit channel to output a signal
indicating a non-detect situation.
c. Each sensor unit channel must be capable of detecting all types of

licensed motor vehicles when connected to the loop
configuration/lead-in requirements.
d. The sensor unit must comply with all performance requirements when
connected to an inductance (loop plus lead-in) from 50 to 700 micro
Henries with a Q-parameter as low as 5 at the sensor unit operating
frequency.
e. Loop inputs to each channel must be transformer isolated.
f. Each individual channel must have a minimum of 4 switch selectable

operating frequencies.
g. The sensor unit channel tuning circuits must be automatic and must be
so designed that drift caused by environmental changes or changes in
applied power must not cause an actuation.
h. A switch or switch position must be provided on the front panel to

disable each channel output.
2. Mode Selection Requirements. Each sensor unit channel must have PULSE
and PRESENCE selectable modes.
a. Pulse Mode.
(1) In the PULSE MODE, each new vehicle presence within the
detection zone must initiate a sensor unit channel output pulse
of 125 milliseconds (+/-25 milliseconds) in duration.
(2) Should a vehicle remain in a portion of the detection zone for a

period in excess of 2 seconds, the sensor unit channel must
automatically “tune out” the presence of said vehicle. The
sensor unit channel must then be capable of detecting another
vehicle entering the same detection zone. The recovery time to
full sensitivity between the first vehicle pulse and channel
capability to detect another vehicle must be 3 seconds
maximum.
16730-127
b. Presence Mode.
(1) In the PRESENCE MODE, the sensor unit channel must

recover to normal sensitivity within 1 second after termination
of vehicle presence in the detection zone regardless of the
duration of the presence.
(2) The channel sensitivity settings must provide presence

detection of a vehicle in the detection zone for a specified time
period and inductance change(s). The conditions are as
follows:
MINIMUM TIME DETECTOR INPUT

DURATION IN MINUTES INDUCTANCE CHANGE
SETTING 6 3 0.02% or more

10 0.06% or more
SETTING 2 4 1.00% or more
3. Sensitivity.
a. This section and included subsections contain example inductive loop

detector configurations with which Loop Detector Sensor Units must
properly function. Reference is made to California Standard Plan ES-
5A & B Loop Configurations described in the California Department
of Transportation Standard Plans. The configurations described herein
are meant to be representative examples of inductive loop detector
configurations.
(1) Single Type A, B, Q or Round Loop with a 250 foot lead-in

cable.
(2) Single Type A, B, Q or Round Loop with a 1000 foot lead-in

cable.
(3) 4 Type A, B, or Q Loops connected in series/parallel with a

250 foot lead-in cable.
(4) 4 Type A, B, Q or Round Loops connected in series with a

1000 foot lead-in cable.
(5) One 50 foot Type C Loop with a 250 foot lead-in cable.
b. Each sensor unit channel must be equipped with 7 selectable

sensitivity setting(s) in presence and pulse modes to accomplish the
following under operational and environmental requirements of this
specification:
16730-128
(1) Each sensor unit channel must respond while in Setting 2 to a

nominal change in inductance between 0.15% to 0.4% (median
sensitivity of 0.32%) while connected to the loop
configurations described in this specification.
(2) Each sensor unit channel must respond while in Setting 6 to an

inductance of 0.02% while connected to the loop
configurations described in this specification.
(3) All sensitivity settings must not differ +/-40% from the
nominal value chosen.
(4) Each sensor unit channel must not detect vehicles, moving or
stopped, at distances of 3 feet or more from any loop perimeter,
in all configurations listed in this specification.
4. Response Time. Response time of the sensor unit channel for Sensitivity
Setting 2 must be less than 5 +/-1 millisecond at an approximate loop
frequency of 40 Kilohertz. That is, for any decreased inductive change that
exceeds its sensitivity threshold, the channel must output a ground true logic
level within 5 millisecond (+/-1 millisecond). When such change is removed,
the output must become an open circuit within 5 millisecond (+/-1
millisecond).
5. Beginning of Normal Operation. The sensor unit channels must begin normal
operation within 2 seconds after the application of power or after a reset signal
of 30 microseconds.
6. Tracking Rate. The sensor unit must be capable of compensating or tracking

for an environmental change up to 0.001% change in inductance per second.
7. Tracking Range.
a. The sensor unit must be capable of normal operation as the input

inductance is changed from +/-5.0% from the quiescent tuning point
regardless of internal circuit drift.
b. The sensor unit must be capable of normal operation as the input

resistance is changed from +/-0.5% from the quiescent tuning point
regardless of internal circuit drift.
8. Temperature Change. The operation of the sensor unit must not be affected by
changes in the inductance and/or capacitance of the loop caused by
environmental changes, with the rate of temperature change not exceeding 1
degree C per 3 minutes. The opening or closing of the controller cabinet door
with a temperature differential of up to 18 degrees C between the inside and
outside air must not affect the proper operation of the sensor unit.
C. Magnetic Detector Requirements.
16730-129
1. The Model 232 Two-Channel Magnetic Detector Sensor Unit must provide 2
channels of detection. When resident in an energized cabinet Input Assembly,
and each channel connected to its associated Model 231 Magnetic Detector
Sensing Element(s), the channel must produce a continuous output signal to
the controller unit when a voltage is induced in the sensing element by a
vehicle passing over the sensing element.
2. Each channel must detect vehicles passing within 6 feet of the Model 231
Sensing Element with 1000 feet of lead-in cable, at all speeds between 3 and
80 miles per hour.
3. A single control knob for adjusting the sensitivity of each channel must be
mounted on the front panel and must be readily adjustable without the use of
tools.
4. A momentary switch or switch position must be provided to place a call on

each channel, on an individual basis.
D. Model 242 Two-Channel DC Isolator.
a. The Model 242 Two-Channel DC Isolator must contain 2 isolation

channels which provide isolation between electrical contacts external
to the module and the controller unit input. The method of isolation
must be based upon a design which must provide reliable operation.
b. The isolator must have an internal power supply supplying 20 VDC

(+/-4 VDC) to the field input side of the isolation channels. The
isolator must not draw more than 2.5 Watts of AC power. No current
must be drawn from the cabinet power supply.
c. A channel contact closure input of 5 milliseconds or less must not

cause an output (ground true) to the controller. An input of 25
milliseconds or greater must cause an output to the controller. An
input of duration between 5 and 25 milliseconds may or may not cause
an output to the controller. The channel circuitry must be able to react
to a new input closure within 25 milliseconds of an input opening.
d. Each isolation channel field input must be turned ON (TRUE) when a

contact closure causes an input voltage of less than 8 VDC, and must
be turned OFF (FALSE) when the contact opening causes the input
voltage to exceed 12 VDC. Each input must deliver no less than 15
milliamperes, nor more than 40 milliamperes, to an electrical contact
closure or short from the power supply.
E. Model 252 Two-Channel AC Isolator.
16730-130
a. The Model 252 Two-Channel AC Isolator must contain 2 isolation

channels which provide isolation between external 120 VAC input
circuits and the controller unit input circuits. The method of isolation
must be based upon a design that provides reliable operation.
b. A channel input voltage “Von” of 80 VAC (+/-5 VAC) applied for a

minimum duration of 120 milliseconds (+/-10 milliseconds) must
cause an output (Ground True) to the controller unit.
c. A channel input voltage “Voff” (Von minus 10 VAC) applied for a

minimum duration of 120 milliseconds (+/-10 milliseconds) must
cause an output (Ground False) to the controller unit.
d. A two-post jumper must be provided to select inverted output states

for Von and Voff. When in CLOSED position (Grounded), Von must
cause a Ground False output. An indicator must be provided on the
front panel labeled ‘RR” which must indicate a Voff input, Ground
True output.
e. The input impedance of each channel must be between 6,000 - 15,000

Ohms at 60 Hertz.
f. The minimum isolation must be 1000 Megohms between the input and
output terminals at 500 AC applied voltage.
2.12 CABINET SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. General.
1. The Intelligent Transportation System (ITS) Serial Interconnected Cabinet

Family is a group of cabinets designed to fulfill a variety of applications. This
chapter describes the functional and physical requirements of said cabinets.
2. There are common parts to all cabinets, such as Modular Bus and Power
Assemblies, ATC Controller Unit, Power Distribution Assembly (PDA ITS),
Input and Output Assemblies and Service Assemblies.
3. The ATC Controller Unit is serially connected to the Cabinet via two serial
synchronous ports located at the Field I/O C12 Connector or the CPU-1B C13
Connector (Serial Bus 1 only). These two communication links use EIA-485
Drivers/Receivers and Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) Protocol to
interface with Serial Bus #1 and #2.
B. Cabinet Model Number and Consistency.
1. The ITS Cabinets must consist of a package of items needed to carry out a
specific Application. Cabinet Versions provided here are EXAMPLES of
possible cabinet configurations. A Product Implementation Conformance
Statement is provided as an Annex to this standard:
16730-131
a. Cabinet Traffic Signal Application - Series 340
340 - 4 Door Cabinet with “P” Base Ground Mount

342 - 2 Door Cabinet with “170” Base Ground Mount
346 - 2 Door Cabinet with ”170” Base, Adaptor Mount
b. Cabinet Traffic Management Application - Series 350
354 - 2 Door Cabinet with “170” Base Ground Mount

356 - 2 Door Cabinet with “170” Base Adaptor Mount
16730-132
Table 2
Example Cabinet Configurations
Package Items 340 342 346 Drawings
1 Housing #1 /Cage #1 - 1 - 6-5-4
2 Housing #2 /Cage #2 - - 1 6-5-4
3 Housing #3 (2) Cage #1 1 - - 6-5-4
4 “J” Panel Cage #1 4 2 - 6-5-8
5 “J” Panel Cage #2 - - 2 6-5-9
6 Service Panel Assembly w/ AC/EG Bus 1 1 1 6-5-11
7 Raw/Clean AC Power Assembly 2 socket 1 1 1 6-5-15A
8 Raw/Clean AC Power Assembly 4 socket - - - 6-5-15
9 Raw/Clean AC Power Extension - - - 6-5-15
10 AC Clean Module Assembly 1 - - 6-5-14
11 DC Power/ COMM Assembly 2 1 - 6-5-17
12 DC Power/ COMM Extension - - - 6-5-17
13 Cabinet Shelf Assembly - - - 6-5-10
14 Drawer Assembly 2 1 1 6-5-10
15 Input Assembly** 3 2 1 6-5-35/38
16 Service Assembly*** 1 1 1 Figure 62,63
17 Six Pack Output Assembly** 1 1 - 6-5-23/28
18 Fourteen Pack Output Assembly** 1 1 1 6-5-23/28
19 PDA5 IP w 12 and 24V DC Power Supplies - - - 6-5-19
20 PDA 5 EP with rack mount power supply 1 1 1 6-5-19A
21 Rack Mount 24V Power Supply 1 1 1 4-11-7A
22 Rack Mount 12V Power Supply 1 - - 4-11-7A
23 Fiber Optic Termination Panel 1 1 1 6-5-42
24 Input Terminal Panel (Optional 342*) - * - 6-5-13
25 Manual Advance Pushbutton Cable 1 1 1 6-5-32
26 Field Input Panel with Mounting Brackets 2 - - FIGURE 21A, 21I
27 FIGURE 21E, 21I
Field Output Panel with Mounting Brackets 2 - -
**Field Wire Support Bracket required with each Assembly
***Service Assembly to be rack mounted below output file(s)
C. Special Equipment and Materials
1. Provide each major assembly with the following:
a. 14 Pack Output Assembly:
(14) Model 200 Switch Pack Units

(6) Model 205 Flash Transfer Relay Unit (FTRs) (these relays must be
designed for continuous operation in the energized position)
16730-133
(12) Red Flash Program Blocks

(4) White Flash Program Blocks
(1) Type 218 Serial Interface Unit
(1) Type 214 Auxiliary Monitor Unit
(1) Serial Bus 3 cable
(1) Control Serial Bus (SB1/SB2) Cable
(1) Address Block (Output Assembly)
b. 6 Pack Output Assembly:
(6) Model 200 Switch Pack Units

(3) Model 205 Flash Transfer Relay Unit (FTRs) (these relays must be
designed for continuous operation in the energized position)
(6) Red Flash Program Blocks
(2) White Flash Program Blocks
(1) Type 214 Auxiliary Monitor Unit
(1) Serial Bus 3 cable
(1) Address Block (Output Assembly)
c. Input Assembly Number One (1):
(4) Type 222 – Loop Detector Sensors Unit

(2) Type 242 Two Channel DC Isolator Units
(2) Type 252 Two Channel AC Isolator Units
(1) Address Block (Input Assembly)
d. Input Assembly Number Two (2):
(4) Type 222 – Loop Detector Sensors Unit

(2) Type 242 Two Channel DC Isolator Units
e. Input Assembly Number Three (3):

f. Power Distribution Assembly must be PDA #5 EP with:
(1) Rack Mountable Model 216-24 Power Supply (pins 13 and 14

jumpered at supply terminal for single unit assembly)
16730-134
(2) Model 204 Flasher Units

(1) Model 212 Cabinet Monitor Unit w/ 2 program keys
(1) Address Block (CMU)
(1) CC Harness
(1) Serial bus 3 Cable
(1) DC Power Harness (DCP)
g. Power Distribution Assembly must be PDA #5 IP with:
(1) Model 216-24 Power Supply

(1) Model 216-12 Power Supply
(2) Model 204 Flasher Units
(1) Model 212 Cabinet Monitor Unit w/ 2 program keys
(1) Address Block (CMU)
(1) CC Harness
(1) Serial bus 3 Cable
(1) DC Power Harness (DCP)
h. Service Panel Assembly:
(1) EDCO SHA-1250, or approved equal
i. Service Assembly:
(3) Type 218 Serial Interface Units

(3) Type 214 Auxiliary Monitor Units
(1) Model 212 Cabinet Monitor Unit
j. Field Wire Support Brackets.
(1) Cage 1 units require one deep support bracket for each Input
and Output Assembly if field panels are not supplied.
(2) Cage 2 Units require one shallow support for each Input and
Output Assembly.
k. Hardwire Copper Interface
(1) Cabinets shall be wired to accept and implement 120 volt

hardwire interconnect systems.
(2) Standard color sequence for wires in positions 1-8 shall be:
White/Blue/Red/Green/Yellow/Black/White Black/Blue Black
(3) Install two (2) 8-position slider link blocks labeled SB1, 1-8
and SB2, 1-8 rated (250V / 20 amps) on the J-Panel.
16730-135
(4) Install one (1) 8-position fuse block labeled FB, 1-8 rated
(250V / 20 amps) with 8-3amp AGU fuses (250V) on the J-
Panel adjacent to SB1 and SB2.
(5) Input file connections will be performed in the field.
(6) Install #12 AWG jumpers between line side of FB1 to line side
of SB1 corresponding terminals 1 through 8. Jumper wires
shall be identified according to the standard color sequence.
(7) All labels shall be machine printed, clearly readable, and of

material that shall resist fading, cracking, discoloration, or
detaching with age.
l. Series 340 Cabinet (Housing 3) must be provided with the following:
(1) Two (2) Field Input Termination Panels in accordance with

Drawings and mounted at the bottom of the rack. They must
be attached to the rack with an angle bracket and each panel
attached to the angle bracket with captive thumb-screws. A
total of twenty four (24) EDCO MRA–6lC–6.
(2) Two (2) Field Output Termination Panels in accordance with

Drawings and be mounted at the bottom of the rack. They
must be attached to the rack with an angle bracket and each
panel attached to the angle bracket with captive thumb-screws
as shown in the drawings.
D. Cabinet Cage Configuration Drawings.
Model 340 Cage 1 (Dual) Assembly Requirements Figure 17

Model 340 Cage 1 Input w/ Controller Drawer Assy (Dual) Assy Reqmnt Figure 18
Model 340 Cage 1 Outputs (Dual) Assembly Requirements Figure 19
Model 340 Cage 1 Outputs w/ Controller Drawer Assy (Dual) Assy Reqmnts Figure 20
Model 340 Cages (Dual) Cable Assembly Requirements Figure 21
Field Input Panel Figure 21A
Input Assembly Assignment to Field Panels Figure 21B
Field Input Panel #1 Terminal and Labeling Figure 21C
Field Input Panel #2 Terminal and Labeling Figure 21D
Field Output Panel Figure 21E
14 and 6 Pack Serial Output Assembly Wiring Assignment Figure 21F
Field Output Wiring Diagram Output Files Phases 1 Thru 7 Figure 21G
Field Output Wiring Diagram Output Files Phases 8 Thru 14 Figure 21H
Termination Angle Brackets Figure 21I
Model 342 Cage 1 Assembly Requirements Figure 22
Cage 2 Assembly – Modified Drawer Loc. Figure 23
16730-136
Figure 17
Model 340 Cage 1 (Dual) Assembly Requirements
16730-137
Figure 18
Model 340 Cage 1 Input w/ Controller Drawer Assy (Dual) Assy Requirements
16730-138
Figure 19
Model 340 Cage 1 Outputs (Dual) Assembly Requirements
16730-139
Figure 20
Model 340 Cage 1 Outputs w/ Controller Drawer Assy (Dual) Assy Requirements
16730-140
Figure 21
Model 340 Cages (Dual) Cable Assembly Requirements
16730-141
Figure 21A
Field Input Panel
16730-142
Figure 21B
Input Assembly Assignment to Field Panels
16730-143
Figure 21C
Field Input Panel #1 Terminal and Labeling
16730-144
Figure 21D
Field Input Panel #2 Terminal and Labeling
16730-145
Figure 21E
Field Output Panel
16730-146
Figure 21F
14 and 6 Pack Serial Output Assembly Wiring Assignment
16730-147
Figure 21G
Field Output Wiring Diagram Output Files Phases 1 Thru 7
16730-148
Figure 21H
Field Output Wiring Diagram Output Files Phases 8 Thru 14
16730-149
Figure 21I
Termination Angle Brackets
16730-150
Figure 22
Model 342 Cage 1 Assembly Requirements
16730-151
Figure 23
Cage 2 Assembly – Modified Drawer Loc.
16730-152
Figure 24
16730-153
Figure 25
16730-154
E. Serial Bus # 1 System.
1. Serial Bus #1 must function as a distributed real-time cabinet control and

communications bus. The Bus Commands are generated in the ATC
Controller Unit. They must be passed to the assembly Model 218 SIU Units
and Model 212 CMU Monitor Unit using EIA 485 COMM/SDLC Protocol
Frame Address/Message Packets. The SIU Units must read the Address
Connector for Assembly Address Number. The CMU must read the Address
Connector of the PDA. The AMU units must read address information as part
of the Output Assembly address connector.
2. The following Address Frame numbers must be assigned to the assemblies

and monitor as:
ADDRESS
SYSTEM
Address ASSEMBLY SIU AMU
/ UNIT
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 A2 A1 A0
0 Reserved 0 0 0
14 Pack in
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
position 1
2 Reserved
14 Pack in
3 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
position 3
6 Pack in
4 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1* 0 0
position 4
6 Pack in
5 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1* 0 1
position 1
6 Pack in
6 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1* 1 0
position 2
6 Pack in
7 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1* 1 1
position 3
8 Reserved
9 Input #1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
10 Input #2 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
11 Input #3 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
11 Input #4 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
13 Input #5 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
14 Reserved
15 CMU #1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
16 CMU #2 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
17 CMU #3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
18 CMU #4 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
16730-155
ADDRESS
SYSTEM
Address ASSEMBLY SIU AMU
/ UNIT
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 A2 A1 A0
19 CPU 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
20 FIO 2A or 8 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
21to 254 Reserved
255 Broadcast All 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
*A2 Jumpered on Assembly
3. If the Command Address Frame matches the Unit, the Unit must read the
message for processing and response. The Message First Byte must be the
message name. The Unit must set the Response Packet First Byte to
Command Message plus 128 and the appropriate data.
F. Serial Bus #2 System.
1. Serial Bus #2 must be dedicated to gathering preprocessed data from the

Cabinet Smart Input Devices resident in the input assemblies. This serial bus
must be for off-line use in operations with the ATC Controller Unit
controlling data collection. Serial Bus #2 must be designed to operate
Asynchronous EIA 485 lines at selected data rates up to 19,200 bits per
second. See section on SIU Port 2 Operation for communication, interface
and message protocol.
2. Typical Command/Response Messages must use similar message format as

Serial Bus #1, collecting Operational Status, Detection Speed reports,
Occupancy reports, Counts, etc.
G. Cabinet Control/Emergency Override System (CCEOS).
1. System Description. The Control and Emergency Override System is

composed of the Police Panel Switches, Door Switches, ITS Power
Distribution Assembly with resident Cabinet Monitor Unit, Serial Bus #1,
Modular Bus Assemblies and cables, and the Output Assemblies with
Transfer Relays Program Block Connectors and AMU Units. The purpose of
the Emergency Override system is to transfer control from the ATC Controller
Unit to the Cabinet Monitoring System. The Emergency Override system
may also be manually controlled by switches either on the ITS PDA Assembly
or Police Panel. The action taken depends upon the application. The Transfer
Relays in the Output Assemblies, when de-energized, must transfer from
Switch Pack Control to the EOS control. When the Cabinet is in the
SIGNALS OFF condition the Main Contactor must be OFF and the FTR’s are
energized. If the intersection is FLASH Mode when in the Ramp Metering
application, the display is NO INDICATION or BLANK Mode.
16730-156
2. Cabinet Monitoring System. The Cabinet Monitoring System must use two
serial Bus systems for the interface; Serial Bus #1, links the ATC Controller
Unit via a Serial Bus Harness to the DC Power/Communications Assembly.
A Serial Bus Harness plugged into the DC Power/Communications Assembly
must connect to the 212 Cabinet Monitor Unit with application serial memory
key resident in the PDA ITS.
3. Serial Bus #3 Harnesses must provide the interconnection between the Output
Assembly’s 214 Auxiliary Monitor Units and the CMU. The Bus Harnesses
must be daisy chained between the Output Assemblies and the PDA ITS. See
sections CMU and AMU sections for operations, functions, protocol, Message
frames and bit rate.
H. Housings.
1. Housing Package. The housings must include, but not be limited to, the
following:
a. Enclosure & Doors
b. Gasketing
c. Lifting Eyes & External Bolt Heads
d. Door Latches & Locks
e. Ventilation
f. Cage Supports & Mounting
g. Door Hinges & Catches
h. Police Panel
i. Aluminum Surfaces
j. Light fixtures
2. Housing Construction. The housing must be rainproof. It must have front and
rear doors, each equipped with a lock and handle. The enclosure top must be
crowned to prevent standing water. The aluminum surface must be either
coated with a Mill Finish or Anti-Graffiti Paint.
16730-157
a. Material Thickness. The enclosure, doors, lifting eyes, gasket

channels, police panel door, spacer supports and all supports welded to
the enclosure and doors must be fabricated of 0.125 in. minimum
thickness aluminum sheet. The filter shell, filter trough, fan support
and police panel enclosure must be fabricated of 0.080 in. minimum
thickness aluminum sheet. The spacer supports must have the option
to use 0.059 in. minimum stainless steel sheet.
b. Welds. All exterior seams for enclosure and doors must be

continuously welded and must be smooth. All edges must be filled to
a radius of 0.03125 in. minimum. Exterior cabinet welds must be done
by gas Tungsten arc TIG process only. ER5356 aluminum alloy bare
welding electrodes conforming to AWS A5.10 requirements must be
used for welding on aluminum. Procedures, welders and welding
operators must conform to the requirements and practices in AWS
B3.0 and C5.6 for aluminum. Internal cabinet welds must be done by
gas metal arc MIG or gas Tungsten arc TIG Process.
c. Aluminum Surface Protection. ALUMINUM SURFACE

PROTECTION must be either MILL FINISH or ANTI-GRAFFITI
Paint.
(1) Anti – Graffiti Paint. The aluminum surface must be cleaned,

etched and rinsed. The cleaning and etching procedure must be
to immerse in inhabited alkaline cleaner at 71 degrees C for
five minutes (Oakite 61A, Diversey 909 or equivalent in mix of
the 6 to 8 ounces per gallon to distilled water). Rinse in cold
water. Etch in a sodium solution at 66 degrees C for 5 minutes
90.5 ounce sodium fluoride plus 5 ounces of sodium hydroxide
mix per gallon to distilled water. Rinse in cold water. Desmut
in a 50% by volume nitric acid solution at 20 degrees C for 2
minutes. Rinse in cold water. Dry surfaces by preheating in an
oven for 15 minutes at 400 degrees F. Remove and coat the
surfaces using TCI Wheel Silver # 9811- 0110 with a minimum
film build of not more than 2 mils total thickness. Place back
into preheated oven for 10 minutes minimum at 360 degrees F
to gel the base coat. Remove and coat the surfaces using TCI
Anti-graffiti Clear # 9810-0231. Place back into oven and
fully cure at 380 degrees F for 40 minutes.
d. Enclosure Door Frames and Door Seals. The enclosure door frames
must be double flanged out on all four sides and must have strikers to
hold tension on, and form a firm seal between, the door gasketing and
the frame. The dimension between the door edge and the enclosure
external surface when the door is closed and locked must be 0.156 in.
(+/-0.08 in.).
16730-158
3. Gasketing. Gasketing must be provided on all door openings and must be

dust-tight. Gaskets must be 0.25 in. minimum thickness closed cell neoprene
or silicone (BOYD R- 108480 or equal) and must be permanently bonded to
the metal. A gasket top and side channels must be provided to support the top
gasket on the door to prevent gasket gravitational fatigue.
4. Cage Mounting Supports. Cage mounting supports must be provided on either

side, level with the bottom edge of the door opening, for horizontal support
and bolt attachment; side cage supports provided for the bracket cage
supports; and bracket cage support attachments.
5. Lifting Eyes and Exterior Bolt Heads. The housing must be provided with 2
lifting eyes for placing the cabinet on its foundation. Each eye opening must
have a minimum diameter of 0.75 in.. Each eye must be able to support the
weight load of 1000 lbs. All bolt heads must be tamperproof type.
6. Door Latches and Locks. The latching handles must have provision for
padlocking in the closed position. Each handle must be 0.75 in. minimum
diameter stainless steel with a minimum of 0.50 in. shank. The padlocking
attachment must be placed at 4 in. from the handle shank center. An
additional 4 in. minimum gripping length must be provided.
a. Latch/Lock Mechanism. The latching mechanism must be a three-

point draw roller type. The pushrods must be turned edgewise at the
outward supports and have a cross section of 0.25 in. thick by 0.75 in.
wide minimum. Rollers must have a minimum diameter of 0.875 in.
with nylon wheels and steel ball bearings. When the door is closed
and latched, the door must be locked. The lock and lock support must
be rigidly mounted on the door. The lock must be mounted in the
upper quadrant, above the handle when in it’s full open position. In
the locked position, the bolt throw must extend a minimum of 0.25 in.
(+/-0.03125 in.) into the latch cam area. A seal must be provided to
prevent dust or water entry through the lock opening.
b. Lock and Keys. The locks must be Corbin 2 type. One key must be
supplied with each lock. The keys must be removable in the locked
position only. The locks must have rectangular, spacing loaded bolts.
The bolt must have a 0.281 in. throw and must be 0.75 in. wide by
0.375 in. thick. Tolerance is 0.035 in.. A swing away cover must be
placed over the key entrance to protect the lock mechanism.
c. Cam. The center latch cam must be fabricated of a minimum thickness

of 0.188 in. aluminum, or 11 gauge steel. The bolt surface must
horizontally cover the cam thickness. The cam must be structured to
only allow the door to open when the handle is moved toward the
center of the door.
16730-159
7. Housing Ventilation. Housing Ventilation must including intake, exhaust,

filtration, and continuous running fan assembly, or a thermostat controlled
fan.
a. Intake & Filter. The louvered vent depth must be a maximum of 0.25
in.. A removable and reusable air filter must be housed behind the
door vents. The filter filtration area must cover the vent opening area.
A filter shell must be provided that fits over the filter providing
mechanical support for the filter. This shell must be louvered to direct
the incoming air downward. The shell sides and top must be bent over
a minimum of 0.25 in. to house the filter. The filter resident in its shell
must be held firmly in place with a bottom trough and spring loaded
upper clamp. No incoming air must bypass the filter. The bottom
filter trough must be formed into a waterproof sump with drain holes
to the outside housing. The filter must be 16 in. wide by 12 in. high by
0.875 in. thick. The filter must be an ECO-AIR Product E35S or
equal. The intake (including filter with shell) and exhaust areas must
pass a minimum of 60 cubic feet of air per minute for Housing #1; 120
cubic feet of air per minute for Housing #3; and 26 cubic feet of air per
minute for Housing #2.
b. Fan. Each electric fan must be equipped with ball or roller bearings
and must have a minimum capacity of 100 cubic feet of free air
delivery per minute. The fan must be mounted within the housing and
protected with a finger guard.
8. Hinges. Stainless Steel hinges (Two-bolts per leaf) must be provided to bolt
the enclosure to the doors. Housing #1 & Housing #3 must have four hinges
per door and Housing #2 must have three hinges per door. Each hinge must
be 3-1/2 in. minimum length and have a fixed pin. The pin ends must be
welded to hinge and ground smooth. The pins and bolts must be covered by
the door edge and not accessible when the door is closed. A ground strap
between the door and the main cabinet housing must be required when 120
VAC components are mounted on the door.
9. Door Catches. Front and rear doors must be provided with catches to hold the
door open at both 90 and 165 (+/-10 degrees). The catch minimum diameter
must be 0.375 in. aluminum rods. The catches must be capable of holding the
door open at 90 degrees in a 60 mph wind acting at an angle perpendicular to
the plane of the door.
16730-160
10. Police Panel. A police panel assembly must be provided to allow the limited
control access. The panel door must be equipped with a lock and master
police key. The front and back of the panel must be enclosed with a rigid
metal covering so that no parts having live voltage are exposed. The panel
assembly must have a drain to prevent water from collecting within the
assembly. The drain must be channeled to the outside. The series 35X
Cabinets must have one switch provided and labeled "SIGNALS ON - OFF ".
The series 34X Cabinets must have one switch labeled "FLASH/AUTO". The
MANUAL CONTROL ENABLE ON-OFF switch and a receptacle for the
INTERVAL ADVANCE cord must be provided. A 12 VAC transformer
must be provided in advance of the INTERVAL ADVANCE receptacle. An
INTERVAL ADVANCE cord, six feet in length, must be provided.
11. Housing Lighting. Fluorescent light fixtures must be provided inside the top
portion of the housing. The fluorescent fixtures must be suitable for use in the
housing environment when placed in the field. The fixtures must utilize an
F15T5-CW fluorescent lamp. A minimum of four (4) fixtures will be
provided for 340 housings, and a minimum of two (2) fixtures will be
provided for all other housings.
I. Rack Cage. A Standard Rack Cage must be installed inside the housing for mounting
of the ATC Controller Unit and cabinet assemblies. The EIA rack portion of the cage
must consist of four continuous, adjustable equipment mounting angles. The
mounting angle nominal thickness must be 11 gauge plated steel. The mounting
angles must be tapped with 10-32 threads with EIA universal spacing. The mounting
angle must comply with standard EIA-310-B and must be supported at the top and
bottom by either welded or bolted support angles to form a cage. The mounting
angles must provide holes to mount the “J” panels.
1. Clearance Between Rails. Clearance between rails for mounting assemblies

must be 17.75 in..
2. Cage Connection. The cage must be bolted to the cabinet at 4 points via the
housing cage supports and 4 points via associated spacer brackets (top and
bottom).
3. Cage Location. The cage(s) must be centered within the cabinet door
opening(s).
J. Cabinet Assemblies.
1. General.
a. Cabinet Assemblies. The cabinet assemblies must be completely

removable from or installable in the cabinet cage without removing
any other equipment and using only a Standard Slotted or Phillips
Screwdriver.
16730-161
b. Visible and Accessible Devices. All fuses, circuit breakers, switches

(except Police Panel Switches and Fan Fuse) and indicators must be
readily visible and accessible when the cabinet front door is open.
c. Labels and Marker Strips. All equipment in the cabinet must be clearly
and permanently labeled. The marker strips must be made of material
that can be easily and legibly written on using a pencil or ballpoint
pen. Marker strips must be located immediately below the item they
are to identify and must be clearly visible with the items installed.
d. Resistor/Capacitor Suppression. Suppression must be provided at all

relay sockets (across relay coil), except for the Transfer Relays (TR) in
the output assemblies where one suppression device may be common
for all.
e. PDA, Output and Input Assemblies. PDA, Output and Input

Assemblies Depth must include terminal sockets, plug-in units and
strain relief bar (Field Wire Support Bracket). The Width must be
17.5 in. maximum including side screws. The maximum Depth,
including connectors, must not exceed 14.0 in. The assembly housing
top and bottom must be slotted for vertical ventilation. Assembly
Thickness - Side ends must be fabricated of 0.080 in. minimum
thickness aluminum sheet. All other surfaces must be fabricated of
0.0625 in. minimum thickness aluminum sheet. The aluminum metal
surface must be treated with clear chromate.
f. Connector Sockets. Flasher and Switch Pack Unit sockets must be

mounted with their front face 7.50 in. from the assembly front panel.
g. Nylon Guides. Guides (top and bottom) must be provided for assembly
Plug-in units (Power Supply Units guide on bottom only). The guides
must begin 0.50 in. from the assembly front panel face.
2. “J” Panel Assemblies. The “J” Panels must be mirror images of each other
when mounted in the cabinet cage. They must be bolted to the cage with the
matching shelf unit bolted to the panel. Two ten position minimum AC- Raw
& Equipment Ground Copper Bus Bars must be provided on the lower right
position of the J Panel when viewed from the rear door for interconnect to the
Service Panel and provide the termination of AC- Raw and Equipment
Ground wiring within the Cage and Cabinet.
16730-162
a. Input Termination Panel Assembly. An optional Input Termination

Panel must be provided that uses ten twelve-position terminal blocks
and 4 copper bus bars. Eight of the twelve position terminal blocks
and the four copper bus bars must be used for termination of field
inputs. Two of the twelve position terminal blocks must be used for
termination of the CDC interface. Input transient protection devices
may be used for input termination. Terminal blocks one through four
provide termination for Input Assembly #1 and terminal blocks five
through eight provide termination for Input Assembly #2. A ground
lug must be provided on the panel assembly to terminate an 8 AWG
green wire that is attached to the Equipment Ground copper bus bar on
the “J” panel assembly. The Input Termination Panel must be
mounted on the left side of the Rack Assembly, when viewing from
the rear.
3. Cabinet Shelf Assemblies. A Shelf Assembly must be provided unless

otherwise called out in the contract special provisions. One alternative is a
shelf/drawer assembly.
4. Service Panel Assembly.
a. General Requirements. A Service Panel Assembly must be provided.

The assembly must function as the entry point for AC Power to the
cabinet including main and secondary circuit breakers, cabinet
transient and voltage surge protection, clean power filtering, Raw and
Clean AC Power Source.
b. Location. The assembly must be located on the lower right J Panel

when viewed from the back door.
c. Service Terminal Block. The terminals of the Block must be labeled

AC+, AC- and EG and must be covered with a clear insulating
material to prevent inadvertent contact. The Terminating Lugs must
be large enough to accommodate # 2 conductors.
d. AC+ Raw, AC- Raw and Equipment Ground Bus Termination. This
assembly must provide two 8 in. #8 gauge wire extensions for AC-
Raw and Equipment Ground, for attachment to the AC- and Ground
busses mounted on the “J” panel.
e. The DC Ground and Equipment Ground Bus must be electrically

isolated by 500 Megohms when tested at 250 VDC.
f. The AC- copper terminal bus must not be grounded to the cabinet or
connected to logic ground. Nylon screws with a minimum diameter of
0.25 in. or nylon spacers must be used for securing the bus to the J
Panel.
16730-163
5. Raw/Clean AC Power Assembly. This Assembly must be provided in each

cabinet. It must provide Six Clean AC Power Receptacles for assemblies and
cabinet units; Raw AC Power to the Output Assemblies; and both logic and
power to the Fan and Light system, door opening circuitry and logic interface
(all via CCIN and CCOUT Connectors).
a. Raw/Clean AC Power Extension. The Extension must provide a

minimum of five additional NEMA 5-15 receptacles with harness plug
connector for plugging into the main assembly. The extension may be
an option in Housing #1, and must be required in Cage 2 of the
Housing #3.
6. DC Power/Communications Assembly. This assembly must function as the

DC Power bus, providing Six VDC BEAU S5404-SB Receptacles and
communications interface between the ATC Controller Unit and other
assemblies. This assembly must interface with ATC Controller Unit Logic
Lines (Power Down, NRESET and LINESYNC) and Seven System Serial
Bus signals via DB-25S Connectors.
a. DC Power/Communications Extension. The Extension must provide

additional Serial Bus Connectors and DC Receptacles. The extension
may be an option.
b. Terminator Unit. A Serial Bus #1 and #2 Terminator Unit must be

provided and plugged into the DC POWER / COMMUNICATIONS
ASSEMBLY DB 25S End Connector. The Terminator Unit must
provide a 150 ohm termination resistor between the RxD+ and RxD-,
the TxD+ and TxD-, the RxC+ and RxC-, and the TxC+ and TxC-
pairs for both Serial Bus #1 and Serial Bus #2.
(1) The Terminator Unit must also provide 1K ohm DC bias

resistors from +5VDC ISO to the RxD+, the RxC+, the TxD+,
and the TxC+ of both Serial Bus #1 and Serial Bus #2. The
Terminator Unit must provide 1K ohm DC bias resistors from
ISO GND to the RxD-, the RxC-, the TxD-, and the TxC- of
both Serial Bus #1 and Serial Bus #2.
7. Power Distribution Assembly ITS.
a. The Power Distribution Assembly ITS is an EIA-310B rack mounted

assembly that provides for the protection and distribution of AC power
and DC power. The following must be included:
(1) Logic control circuits, including a Main Contactor for control

of the load circuits;
(2) Fault sensing field Circuit Breakers, eight for Traffic

applications and four for Traffic Management systems.
16730-164
(3) Production and distribution of DC power, using +12VDC and

24VDC pluggable power supplies.
(4) A resident Cabinet Monitor Unit (CMU).
(5) Maintenance service, consisting of a circuit breaker in line with

GFI equipment power receptacles.
(6) Two Model 204 Flasher Units, protected by a ganged two pole
20 A Circuit Breaker when operating in a Traffic Signal
application.
(7) A 25 Pin D Socket must be provided for communication with

the ATC Controller Unit. This Socket must be mated with an
18in. Communications Cable. This Cable must be attached to
the Assembly by slotted 4:40 screws. See Serial Bus
Harnesses Detail 6-5-39.
(8) A four position Address Socket and plug must be provided to

provide addressing to the CMU.
b. A CDC Connector must be provided on the rear panel of the Output

Assembly for isolated signal outputs from the police panel. The CDC
Socket is a 9 Pin “D” connector that contains the Manual Control
Enable, Stop Time, Interval Advance, and Manual Flash switch
signals. The Manual Control Enable and Manual Flash switch signals
must be a 120 VAC signal in series with a 27K Ohm resistor. The
Interval Advance and Stop Time switch signals must be 12 VAC
signals from a transformer located in the PDA. The secondary output
of the 12 VAC transformer must be tied to AC- RAW. CDC pin 5
Common must be referenced to AC- RAW. CDC pins 8 must provide
an interface for the external reset signal and 9 must provide an
interface for DC Ground.
c. The PDA must be provided with eight field load circuit breakers and
two Model 204 Flasher Units with ganged circuit beaker protection.
The Load Circuit Breakers located on the PDA that are used to control
the Output Assembly Model 200 Switch Pack Units must have
auxiliary switches. The auxiliary switches must “open” when the load
breaker has tripped and the system will transfer the power from the
Main Contactor to the Flash or Blank condition.
d. The Amperage Rating of breakers must be shown on the face of the

breaker or handle. Breaker function must be labeled below the
breakers on the front panel. Ganged Circuit Breakers must be
assembled by the circuit breaker manufacturer and certified that their
circuit breakers must gang trip.
16730-165
e. The maintenance equipment circuit must include a 15-Ampere Circuit

Breaker in line with GFCI receptacles on both the front and back of
the assembly. The back receptacle must be the first with GFCI
Protection device as defined in the National Electrical Code. Circuit
interruption must occur on 6 milliamperes of ground fault-current and
must not occur less than 4 milliamperes of ground-fault current. The
front receptacle must be attached to the load side of the GFCI device.
f. The AUTO/FLASH Switch when placed in FLASH position must de-

energize the Main Contactor and the Transfer Relays (TR) Coils.
When the switch is placed in the AUTO position must energize the
Main Contactor and the TR Coils. The switch must be a SPST Control
Switch.
g. The DC Power must be brought to the back panel using a BEAU

S5404-SB Receptacle. An 18 in. DC Power (DCP) Harness, with
sheath, consisting of 4 #18 cables, with a BEAU P5404-LAB
Connector on each end, must be provided with the Assembly. The
harness must be plugged in to an adjacent plug on the DC/COMM
Assembly. See detail 6-5-40 of this specification.
h. Three 36 in. minimum length #8 gauge wires, one black for AC+, one
white for AC- and one green or green/yellow for Equipment Ground,
must be attached to the rear of the assembly at the AC Raw Power
Terminating Block. The cables must be routed between the Service
Panel Assembly AC+ terminal, the AC-Bus and the Equipment
Ground Bus.
(1) The PDA Assembly must have a resident 18 in. ACP Harness
with sheath and strain relief. The other end must contain a
BEAU P5412-CCE connector. This harness must be plugged
into the P1 connector on the Raw/Clean AC Power Assembly.
The ACP harness must provide Flasher input and AC power to
the Switch Packs.
(2) An 18 in. long CC Harness must be provided with sheath and

strain relief. When plugged into the Raw/Clean AC Power
Assembly (CC IN) this harness must provide AC Raw voltage
and control logic between the ITS PDA Assembly and the
Police Panel control switches.
(3) An 18 in. long ACCP power cord with strain relief and a
NEMA 5-15 plug must provide AC Clean power to the PDA
ITS Assembly when plugged into the Raw/Clean Power
Assembly.
i. A capacitive load of 1 microFarad at 400 VAC must be provided

across each Flasher Unit Output.
16730-166
8. Input Assembly.
a. The Input Assembly must be an EIA-310B rack mounted assembly

providing twelve slots of 22/44 pin PCB sockets. A Model 218 Serial
Interface Unit (SIU) must be provided in its location mated to a DIN
96-Pin Connector. The SIU must provide interface and control
between the ATC Controller Unit and the input units via System Serial
Bus #1 and #2. See Section Model 218 SIU for System Operation and
Interface. A 25 Pin D Socket must be provided for communication
with the ATC Controller Unit. This Socket must be mated with an 18
in. Communications Cable. This Cable must be attached to the
Assembly by slotted 4:40 screws. See Serial Bus Harnesses Detail.
b. The input assembly must be wired to accept Model 222 and 224 ILD
Sensor Units, Model 232 Magnetic Sensor Unit, Model 242 and 252
Isolator Units and Slot mounted NEMA Detectors. Each slot
connector is a PCB 22/44 Pin Socket type wired for 2 and 4 channel
devices. The F and W Unit Output pins must provide the 24 Inputs to
the SIU Channel 1 (Serial Bus #1). In addition, NEMA Status inputs
must be provided on pins 7 and 20. INBUS must be provided on pin
19 and 21 with four slots address lines matching NEMA pin outs.
c. The SIU Unit must provide 6 detector RESET Outputs, one for every
two slots and should the NEMA Status not be required, a RESTART
Output from the SIU to the sensor units as a soft reset per channel via
pins 7-20. See Input Assembly Wiring Diagram 6-5-37.
d. The INBUS must interface with the SIU Channel 2 to provide

communications between “Smart Input Units” and Serial Bus #2. The
SIU functions as a hardware driver interface only between the ATC
Controller Unit and Input Units installed in the Input Assembly. See
Type 218 SIU section 4.
e. A 25 Pin DB Connector must be provided on the left assembly side

(rear panel) to interface the assembly (SIU) to the DC/COMM
Assembly Serial Bus #1 and #2. A 32 Pin DB (Socket) must be
provided for the Test Function. For Test Connector wiring, see Input
Wiring Diagrams 6-5-37.
f. Four special function Inputs must be provided via 9-position

subminiature D-type connector to the SIU. These are electrically
isolated and may handle 12V DC/AC inputs and are referenced to a
separate isolated ground. Note: In the ITS Cabinet interface wiring
120 VAC inputs must be routed to the Isolated SIU inputs through a
27K Ohm, 1 watt, resistor located in the PDA ITS Assembly.
g. The assembly height must be 5.25 in. (3 U).
16730-167
h. An 18 in. harness cable, with strain relief and sheath and terminated
with a BEAU S5404-SB connector, must be supplied for interconnect
of +24/+12VDC power.
i. Pins D, E, J, K, and L on each PCB Connector slot must be routed to

their associated field terminal, i.e. FT1-12 Additionally, an Equipment
Ground Lug must be provided on the back panel for termination of a
#8 AWG conductor.
j. Each Input Assembly must contain a 4-bit address code plug and
socket. The Input Assembly address must be provided by a plug with
jumpers installed to produce a binary code 1, 2, 4, and 8. The address
receptacle must be installed on the back panel of the Input Assembly,
Ground True Logic must be used with Ground True equaling Logic
“1”. See instructions on Input Assembly Connectors detail 6-5-38.
k. Securing PDB Connectors. All connectors mounted on the PCB must

be mechanically secured to the chassis or frame of the unit or
assembly.
9. Output Assembly.
a. The Output Assembly must be an EIA-310B rack mounted assembly

delivered in six Switch Pack or fourteen Switch Pack configurations.
This assembly may provide eighteen load circuits or forty-two load
circuits. Either configuration is designed to interface with a plug in
Model 200 Switch Pack Unit. The SIU must be provided resident in
its connector to provide interface and control. In addition, a Model
214 AMU Unit must be provided in its connector to sense voltage and
current for the CMU. A 25 Pin D Socket must be provided for
communication with the ATC Controller Unit. This Socket must be
mated with an 18 in. Communications Cable. This Cable must be
attached to the Assembly by slotted 4:40 screws. See Serial Bus
Harnesses Detail 6-5-39.
b. The Model 205 relay units and Program Blocks must be provided to
select control and color state of the Emergency Override State (red,
yellow, or no indication output). The programming connectors must be
Molex Type 1375 or equal. The relay units and program blocks must
be mounted on the rear of the Output Assembly. Program Block Pins
must be crimped and soldered. The Model 205 transfer relays must be
accessible on the rear of the Output Assembly without the use of tools.
c. An Address Plug and Socket must be provided on Output Assembly

for defining the Serial Bus #1 and #3 addressing. See 6/14 Pack
Output Assembly Connectors Detail.
16730-168
d. Transformers must be provided on the incoming AC source for each

Switch Pack to measure the load current. See AMU Current Sensing.
e. Field Termination must be provided on the rear panel of the assembly

consisting of six-position sockets and plugs.
f. Transient suppression must be provided at the field terminals, for the

protection of the Switch Packs, on rear panel of the assembly
consisting of three nine-position sockets and plugs for a 6 Pack Output
Assembly. A 14 Pack Output Assembly requires seven nine-position
sockets and plugs. Each socket must provide protection for two
Switch Packs. Protection devices must be terminated to Equipment
Ground.
g. A Serial Bus #1 DB25 female connector must be provided on the

upper left rear panel of the Output Assembly for serial interconnection
to the DC Power/Communication Assembly. This Socket must be
mated with an 18 in. Communications Cable. This Cable must be
attached to the Assembly by slotted 4:40 screws. See Serial Bus
Harnesses Detail.
h. A CDC Connector must be provided on the rear panel of the Output

Assembly for signal interconnection to the unit. The CDC Socket is a
9 Pin “D” connector. These inputs are electrically isolated and may
handle 120 VAC signals when wired to the PDA ITS Assembly and 12
VAC inputs that are referenced to a separate isolated ground. This
Cable must be attached to the Assembly by slotted 4:40 screws.
i. Two RJ-11S Connectors must be provided on the rear panel of the

Output Assembly for signal interconnection of Serial Bus #3.
j. An Equipment Ground Lug must be provided on the rear panel for

termination of a #8 green wire.
k. The 6-Pack Output Assembly height must be 5.25 in. (3 U) and the 14-
Pack Output Assembly must be 10-1/2 in.
10. Cabinet Harnesses. Cabinet Harnesses are supplied with each cabinet
configuration. See Serial Bus and DCP Harness Details.
11. Fiber Optic Termination Panel. A Fiber Optic Termination Panel shall be
supplied with each cabinet configuration. See Fiber Optic Termination Panel
Details.
16730-169
12. The Service Assembly must be an EIA-310B rack mounted assembly

providing seven slots of sockets. Three (3) Model 218 Serial Interface Units
(SIU) must be provided in their locations mated to DIN 96S-Pin Connectors.
Three (3) Model 214 Auxiliary Monitor Unit (AMU) must be provided in
their locations mated to DIN 96S-Pin Connectors. One (1) Model 212
Cabinet Monitor Unit (CMU) must be provided in its location mated to a DIN
64S Connector.
K. Cabinet Details.
Cabinet Housings # 1 and # 2 Figure 26

Cabinet Housing # 3 – Detail 1 Figure 27
Cabinet Housing # 3 – Detail 2 Figure 28
Cabinet Cages # 1 and # 2 Figure 29
Cabinet Cage to Housing # 1 and # 2 Supports Figure 30
Cabinet Cage to Housing # 3 Supports Figure 31
Cabinet Housing # 2/Adapters and Shipping Pallet Figure 32
“J” Panels – Cage 1 Figure 33
“J” Panels – Cage 2 Figure 34
Controller Shelf/Drawer Support Assembly Figure 35
Service Panel Assembly Cage 1 and 2 Figure 36
Service Panel Assembly Schematic Figure 37
Input Termination Panel Housing #1 Figure 38
AC Clean Module Assembly and Harness Figure 39
Raw/Clean AC Power Assembly and Extension 4 Socket Figure 40
Raw/Clean AC Power Assembly and Extension 2 Socket Figure 41
Raw/Clean AC Power Assembly Wiring Diagram 4 Socket Figure 42
Raw/Clean AC Power Assembly Wiring Diagram 2 Socket Figure 43
DC Power/Communications Assembly and Extension Figure 44
DC Power/Communications Assembly Wiring Diagram Figure 45
PDA 5 IP ITS – Front View Figure 46
PDA 5 EP ITS – Front View Figure 47
PDA 5 IP/EP ITS – Rear View Figure 48
PDA 5 IP ITS/Cabinet – Wiring Diagram Figure 49
PDA 5 EP ITS/Cabinet – Wiring Diagram Figure 50
PDA 5 IP/EP ITS – Connectors Figure 51
6/14 Pack Output Assembly – Front View Figure 52
6/14 Pack Output Assembly – Rear Views Figure 53
6/14 Pack Output Assembly – Wiring Diagram Figure 54
6 Pack O/A – CB/Flasher Diagram and Assignment Note Figure 55
14 Pack O/A – CB/Flasher Diagram Figure 56
6/14 Pack Output Assembly Connectors Figure 57
AMU to Output Assembly Interconnect Figure 58
Serial Bus #1 and #2 Terminator Unit Figure 59
Bus Assembly and Shelve Attachment Detail Figure 60
CDC Harness/Manual Advance Push Button Cable Figure 61
Service Assembly 1 Figure 62
Service Assembly 2 Figure 63
16730-170
Input Assembly – Front View Figure 64

Input Assembly – Rear View Figure 65
Input Assembly – Wiring Diagram Figure 66
Input Assembly – Connectors Figure 67
Serial Bus Harness Figure 68
DC Power/Police Panel Harnesses Figure 69
Field Wire Support Bracket/Transient Protector Assembly Figure 70
Fiber Optic Termination Panel Figure 71
Police Panel and CC Schematic (CMU Bypass) Figure 72
Police Panel and CC Schematic General Figure 73
16730-171
Figure 26
Cabinet Housings # 1 and # 2
16730-172
Figure 27
Cabinet Housing # 3 – Detail 1
16730-173
Figure 28
Cabinet Housing # 3 – Detail 2
16730-174
Figure 29
Cabinet Cages # 1 and # 2
16730-175
Figure 30
Cabinet Cage to Housing # 1 and # 2 Supports
16730-176
Figure 31
Cabinet Cage to Housing # 3 Supports
16730-177
Figure 32
Cabinet Housing # 2/Adapters and Shipping Pallet
16730-178
Figure 33
“J” Panels – Cage 1
16730-179
Figure 34
“J” Panels – Cage 2
16730-180
Figure 35
Controller Shelf/Drawer Support Assembly
16730-181
Figure 36
Service Panel Assembly Cage 1 and 2
16730-182
Figure 37
Service Panel Assembly Schematic
16730-183
Figure 38
Input Termination Panel Housing #1
16730-184
Figure 39
AC Clean Module Assembly and Harness
16730-185
Figure 40
Raw/Clean AC Power Assembly and Extension 4 Socket
16730-186
Figure 41
Raw/Clean AC Power Assembly and Extension 2 Socket
16730-187
Figure 42
Raw/Clean AC Power Assembly Wiring Diagram 4 Socket
16730-188
Figure 43
Raw/Clean AC Power Assembly Wiring Diagram 2 Socket
16730-189
Figure 44
DC Power/Communications Assembly and Extension
16730-190
Figure 45
DC Power/Communications Assembly Wiring Diagram
16730-191
Figure 46
PDA 5 IP ITS – Front View
16730-192
Figure 47
PDA 5 EP ITS – Front View
16730-193
Figure 48
PDA 5 IP/EP ITS – Rear View
16730-194
Figure 49
PDA 5 IP ITS/Cabinet – Wiring Diagram
16730-195
Figure 50
PDA ITS/Cabinet (EP) Wiring Diagram
16730-196
Figure 51
PDA 5 IP/EP ITS – Connectors
16730-197
Figure 52
6/14 Pack Output Assembly – Front View
16730-198
Figure 53
6/14 Pack Output Assembly – Rear Views
16730-199
Figure 54
6/14 Pack Output Assembly – Wiring Diagram
16730-200
Figure 55
6 Pack O/A – CB/Flasher Diagram and Assignment Note
16730-201
Figure 56
14 Pack O/A – CB/Flasher Diagram
16730-202
Figure 57
6/14 Pack Output Assembly Connectors
16730-203
Figure 58
AMU to Output Assembly Interconnect
16730-204
Figure 59
Serial Bus #1 and #2 Terminator Unit
16730-205
Figure 60
Bus Assembly and Shelve Attachment Detail
16730-206
Figure 61
CDC Harness/Manual Advance Push Button Cable
16730-207
Figure 62
Service Assembly 1
16730-208
Figure 63
Service Assembly 2
16730-209
Figure 64
Input Assembly – Front View
16730-210
Figure 65
Input Assembly – Rear View
16730-211
Figure 66
Input Assembly – Wiring Diagram
16730-212
Figure 67
Input Assembly – Connectors
16730-213
Figure 68
Serial Bus Harness
16730-214
Figure 69
DC Power/Police Panel Harnesses
16730-215
Figure 70
Field Wire Support Bracket/Transient Protector Assembly
16730-216
Figure 71
Fiber Optic Termination Panel
Provide P/N 616SMSC
16730-217
Figure 72
Police Panel and CC Schematic (CMU Bypass)
16730-218
Figure 73
Police Panel and CC Schematic General
16730-219
2.13 LEGACY DEVICE IMPLEMENTATION
A. A prototyping effort was conducted along with the development of this ITS Cabinet
Standard. During the early stages of the prototyping effort, there were no SIU, AMU,
and CMU devices available. As a result, a C1 and C11 interconnect list was
developed to establish a method for using legacy 2070 controller applications. The
list was developed with the Caltrans Model 332 and Model 336 Housing 2 Cabinets
in mind. ITS Cabinet Housing #3 (with two internal racks) was the target prototype
model being deployed in Harris County Texas, Housing 1 and Housing 2 ITS
Cabinets have been deployed in small numbers.
B. The Input Assemblies and Output Assemblies are equipped with “Test Connectors”
that are tied to the Detector Pins F and W on the Input Assembly and to the DC
Switch Pack drives on the Output Assembly. While not specifically prototyped, the
NEMA “A,” “B,” and “C” connectors could be assigned in-lieu of the C1 and C11
connectors to provide an interconnection of legacy NEMA devices within the ITS
Cabinet.
END OF SECTION
16730-220
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION MODEL 2070 CONTROLLER UNIT
SECTION 16731
MODEL 2070 CONTROLLER UNIT
PART 1 GENERAL
A. This specification defines the minimum detailed requirements applicable to the Type
2070 Advanced Transportation Controller (ATC) unit. The Advanced Transportation
controller (ATC) is a general purpose programmable controller that is intended for
continuous unattended operation in harsh environments.
B. This specification defines specific, interchangeable modules that are combined to

form a Type 2070 ATC that is capable of running control software that might be
provided from a variety of providers. This specification defines several module
options that can be arranged in a variety of composition configurations to meet the
needs of the user.
C. The Type 2070 version of the ATC is designed such that all components are fully
standardized and are therefore interchangeable.
1.03 MEASUREMNT AND PAYMENT
A. Unit Prices.
1. Measurement: This Item will be measured as each traffic signal controller unit
furnished, or furnished and installed complete and in place.
Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" as each specified
controller unit furnished or furnished and installed, and made fully functional
and operational and tested in accordance with the requirements in this
specification.
1.04 REFERNCES
A. Advanced Transportation Controller (ATC) Standard, version 5.2b
B. Advanced Transportation Controller (ATC) 5202 – Model 2070 Controller Standard
16731-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. API 5401, Application Programming Interface (API) Standard for the Advanced
Transportation Controller (ATC)
D. ANSI/IEEE C62.41 – Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits
E. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic

Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar
F. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and
Plate
G. ASTM B633 – Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron

and Steel
H. IPC-J-STD-001 - Requirements for Soldered Electrical and Electronic Assemblies
I. IPC-2221B – Generic Standard on Printed Board Design
J. Military Specification MIL-P-13949G – Printed Wiring Board
K. Military Specification MIL-PRF-55110 – Printed Wiring Boards, (Single, Double and

Multilayer)
L. Military Specifications MIL-R-11G – Resistors Fixed Composition
M. Military Specification MIL-PRF-22684 – Resistors Fixed Film
N. Military Specifications MIL-W-16878E/1 – Wire, Hook up
O. Military Specifications MIL-W-16878/17 – Stranded Tinned Copper Plated

Conductors
P. NEMA TS1 – Traffic Control Systems
Q. NEMA TS2-2021 - Traffic Controller Assemblies with NTCIP Requirements
1.05 WARRANTY
from date of delivery.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Manuals: A manual for each piece of equipment shall be provided to the City of
Houston upon request in PDF format. The City of Houston reserves the right to make
copies of these manuals for internal use only. A minimum of Times New Roman or
Arial 10 point font must be used for all manual text, excluding drawings and
schematics. Drawing text may use a smaller font size.
16731-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Manual Contents. Each manual must include the following sections in the
order listed:
a. Table of Contents
b. Glossary
c. Manufacturer Contact Information:
(1) Address
(2) Telephone Number
(3) Fax Number
(4) General Email Address
d. General Description
e. General Characteristics
f. Installation
g. Adjustments
h. Theory of Operation:
(1) Systems Description (include block diagram)
(2) Detailed Description of Circuit Operation
i. Maintenance:
(1) Preventive Maintenance
(2) Trouble Analysis
(3) Trouble Shooting Sequence Chart
(4) Wave Forms
(5) Voltage Measurements
(6) Alignment Procedures
j. Parts List (include circuit and board designation, part type and class,
power rating, component manufacturer, mechanical part manufacturer,
data specification sheets for special design components and original
manufacturer's part number).
16731-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
k. Electrical Interconnection Details & Drawings
l. Schematic and Logic Diagram
m. Assembly Drawings and a pictorial diagram showing physical

locations and identification of each component or part
n. The date, model numbers and revision numbers of equipment covered

by the manuals must be included on the front cover of the manuals
B. A complete quality control / final test report must be supplied with each item. Quality
control procedures must be submitted to the City of Houston prior to production. The
test report must indicate the name of the tester and be signed by a responsible
manager.
C. The quality control procedure and test report format must be supplied to the City of
Houston for approval upon request. The quality control procedure must include the
following, in the order shown:
1. Design Acceptance testing of all supplied components.
2. Physical and functional testing of all modules and items.
3. Environmental testing reports for all equipment.
4. Physical and functional testing of all items.
D. Separate certifications must be provided for Design and Production.
A. Components. All components must be lot sampled to assure a consistent high

conformance standard to the design specification of the equipment.
B. Subassembly, Unit or Module. Complete electrical, environmental and timing

compliance testing must be performed on each module, unit, printed circuit or
subassembly. Components will be tested as a complete controller assembly. Housing,
chassis, and connection terminals must be inspected for mechanical sturdiness, and
harnessing to sockets to be electrically tested for proper wiring sequence. The
equipment must be visually and physically inspected to assure proper placement,
mounting, and compatibility of subassemblies.
C. Pre-delivery Repair:
1. Any defects or deficiencies found by the inspection system involving

mechanical structure or wiring must be returned through the manufacturing
process or special repair process for correction.
16731-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. PCB flow soldering is allowed a second time if copper runs and joints are not
satisfactorily coated on the first run. Do not flow solder a PCB more than
twice.
3. Hand soldering is allowed for printed circuit repair.
A. Packaging: Each item delivered must be individually packed in its own shipping
B. Delivery: Each item delivered for testing must be complete, including manuals, and
ready for testing.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONTROLLER DESCRIPTIONS
A. Controller Housing. The Type 2070 controller defines a controller housing that is
intended to fit an EIA 19 in. rack mounted form commonly found in the Type 332
and ITS family of cabinets. A NEMA base module is defined for those NEMA TS1
and TS2 shelf mounted applications.
B. CPU Module. The CPU module consists of the main CPU, memory, software and
interfaces to the remainder of the controller. The Type 2070-1C configuration is
intended to interface with the "engine board" specified by the ATC v5.2 standard.
C. Field I/O Module. The Field I/O Module provides a mechanism for input and output
interfaces. The Type 2070-2A Modules are intended to provide a parallel I/O
interface with the Type 332 family of cabinets using the C1S and C11S connectors,
and a serial I/O interface to the ITS cabinet family. The Type 2070-2B Module is
intended to provide a serial I/O interface to the NEMA interface to TS1 cabinets
(2070LN).
D. Front Panel Module. A controller Front Panel usually contains a keyboard and display
that comprise the user field interface. The Type 2070-3B Front Panel includes a small
character (8 lines of 40 characters) LCD.
E. Power Supply Module. A power supply module is used to convert 120 volt power to
voltages required to operate the electronics inside the Type 2070 controller unit. This
power supply must meet certain minimum electrical characteristics defined herein for
its intended use. The Type 2070-4B identifies a 3.5 ampere power supply. Power cord
to be supplied with the module should have a minimum length of 4 feet.
F. Communications Module. The Type 2070-7 series of modules are for serial
communications.
16731-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
G. NEMA Interface. This standard includes requirements for an optional module to

interface with the NEMA TS1 cabinets. The Type 2070-8 NEMA Field I/O Module is
an external module that attaches to the bottom of the 2070 and provides for the
typical "A", "B", "C" and "D" NEMA connectors.
2.02 CONTROLLER REQUIREMENTS
A. General. All furnished equipment must be new and unused. Vacuum or gaseous tubes
and electro-mechanical devices (unless specifically called out) must not be used.
B. Controller Configurations are specified in section 2.08.
2.03 COMPONENTS
A. General. All components must be second sourced and must be of such design,
fabrication, nomenclature or other identification as to be purchased from a wholesale
distributor or from the component manufacturer. When a component is of such
special design that it precludes the purchase of identical components from any
wholesale distributor or component manufacturer, one spare duplicate component
must be furnished with each twenty, or fraction thereof, components used. The
electronic circuit design must be such that all components of the same generic type,
regardless of manufacturer, must function equally in accordance with the
specifications.
B. Electronic Components:
1. No device to be socket mounted unless specifically called out.
2. No component to be operated above 80% of its maximum rated voltage,

current or power ratings. Digital components must not be operated above 3%
over their nominal voltage, current or power ratings.
3. No component to be provided where the manufactured date is three years

older than the contract award date. The design life of all components,
operating for twenty- four hours a day and operating in their circuit
application, must be ten years or longer.
4. Components must be arranged so they are easily accessible, replaceable and

identifiable for testing and maintenance. Where damage by shock or vibration
exists, a clamp, fastener, retainer, or hold-down bracket must support the
component mechanically.
5. The Manufacturer must submit detailed engineering technical data on all

components at the request of the City of Houston. The Manufacturer must
certify that the component application meets the requirements of this standard.
16731-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Capacitors. The DC and AC voltage ratings as well as the dissipation factor of a

capacitor must exceed the worst-case design parameters of the circuitry by 150%.
Capacitor encasements must be resistant to cracking, peeling and discoloration. All
capacitors must be insulated and must be marked with their capacitance values and
working voltages. Electrolytic capacitors must not be used for capacitance values of
less than 1.0 microfarad and must be marked with polarity.
D. Potentiometers. Potentiometers with ratings from 1 to 2 watts must meet Military

Type RV4 requirements. Less than 1 Watt potentiometers must be used only for
trimmer type function. The potentiometer power rating must be at least 100% greater
than the maximum power requirements of the circuit.
E. Resistors. Fixed carbon film, deposited carbon, or composition-insulated resistors

must conform to the performance requirements of Military Specifications MIL-R-
11G or MIL-PRF-22684. All resistors must be insulated and be marked with their
resistance values. Resistance values must be indicated by the EIA color codes, or
stamped value. The value of the resistors must not vary by more than 5% between -37
degrees C and 74 degrees C.
1. Special ventilation or heat sinking must be provided for all 2- watt or greater
resistors. They must be insulated from the PCB.
F. Semiconductor Devices:
1. All transistors, integrated circuits, and diodes must be a standard type listed by
EIA and clearly identifiable.
2. All metal oxide semiconductor components must contain circuitry to protect

their inputs and outputs against damage due to high static voltages or
electrical fields.
3. Device pin "1" locations must be properly marked on the PCB adjacent to the
pin.
G. Transformers and Inductors. All power transformers and inductors must have the
manufacturer's name or logo and part number clearly and legibly printed on the case
or lamination. All transformers and inductors must have their windings insulated, be
protected to exclude moisture, and their leads color coded with an approved EIA
color code or identified in a manner to facilitate proper installation.
H. Triacs. Each triac with a designed circuit load of greater than 0.5 Amperes at 120
VAC must be mounted to a heat sink with thermal conductive compound or material,
in addition to being mechanically secured.
16731-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
I. Circuit Breakers. Circuit breakers must be listed by UL or ETL. The trip and frame
sizes must be plainly marked (marked on the breaker by the manufacturer), and the
ampere rating visible from the front of the breaker. Contacts must be silver alloy and
enclosed in an arc-quenching chamber. An ambient air temperature range of from -18
degrees C to 50 degrees C must not influence overload tripping. The minimum
Interrupting Capacity must be 5,000 amperes, RMS when the breaker is secondary to
a UL approved fuse or primary circuit breaker and both breakers in concert provide
the rated capacity. For circuit breakers 80 amperes and above, the minimum
interrupting capacity must be 10,000 amperes, RMS. Circuit breakers must be the
trip-free type with medium trip delay characteristic (Carlingswitch Time Delay Curve
#24 or equal).
1. Load Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Internal Switches. The Load Circuit Breakers
used to power Switch Packs must have auxiliary switches. The auxiliary
switches must "open" when the load breaker has tripped and the system will
transfer the power from the Main Contactor to the Flash or Blank condition.
J. Fuses. All Fuses that are resident in a bayonet style fuse holder must have the fuse
size rating labeled on the holder or on the panel adjacent to the holder. Fuses must be
easily accessible and removable without use of tools.
K. Switches:
1. Dip. Dual-inline-package, quick snap switches must be rated for a minimum

of 30,000 operations per position at 50 milliamperes, 30 VDC. The switch
contact resistance must be 100 milliohms maximum at 2 milliamperes, 30
VDC. The contacts must be gold over brass.
2. Logic. The switch contacts must be rated for a minimum of 1-ampere resistive
load at 120 VAC and must be silver over brass (or equal). The switch must be
rated for a minimum of 40,000 operations.
3. Control. The switch contacts must be rated for a minimum of 5 amperes

resistive load at 120 VAC or 28 VDC and be silver over brass (or equal). The
switch must be rated for a minimum of 40,000 operations.
4. Power. Ratings must be the same as CONTROL, except the contact rating
must be a minimum of 10 amperes at 125 VAC.
L. Terminal Blocks. The terminal blocks must be barrier type, rated at 20 amperes and
600 VAC RMS minimum. The terminal screws must be 0.3125 in. minimum length
nickel- plated brass binder head type with screw inserts of the same material. Screw
size is called out under the associated file, panel or assembly.
M. Screw Lug and Cam Driven Connectors. Provided the connectors mate, screw lug
cam driven devices or crimp pin connectors must be allowable if the interface is part
of a harness. For field termination, screw lug and cam driven assemblies are
interchangeable for field wiring termination, provided they both accommodate 22-
gauge wire on the inputs and 22-gauge wire on the outputs.
16731-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
N. Wiring, Cabling and Harnesses:
1. Harnesses must be neat, firm and properly bundled with external protection.
They must be tie-wrapped and routed to minimize crosstalk and electrical
interference. Each harness must be of adequate length to allow any conductor
to be connected properly to its associated connector or termination point.
Conductors within an encased harness have no color requirements. Printed
circuit motherboards are to be used where possible to eliminate or reduce
cabinet wiring.
2. Wiring containing AC must be bundled separately or shielded separately from

all DC logic voltage control circuits.
3. Wiring must be routed to prevent conductors from being in contact with metal
edges. Wiring must be arranged so that any removable assembly may be
removed without disturbing conductors not associated with that assembly.
4. All conductors, except those that can be readily traced, must be labeled.
Labels attached to each end of the conductor must identify the destination of
the other end of the conductor.
5. All conductors must conform to MIL-W-16878E/1 or better and have a

minimum of 19 strands of copper. The insulation must be polyvinyl chloride
with a minimum thickness of 10 mils or greater. Where insulation thickness is
15 mils or less, the conductor must conform to MIL-W-16878/17.
6. Conductor color identification must be as follows:
a. AC- circuits - white
b. Equip. Ground - solid green or continuous green color with 1 or more

yellow stripes
c. DC logic ground - continuous white with a red stripe
d. AC+ circuits - continuous black or black with colored stripe
e. DC logic ungrounded or signal - any color not specified
O. Indicators and Character Displays:
1. All indicators and character displays must be readily visible at a radius of up

to 4 feet within the cone of visibility when the indicator is subjected to 97,000
lux (9,000 foot-candles) of white light with the light source at 45 degrees (+/-
2 degrees) to the front panel.
16731-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. All indicators and character displays must have a minimum 90 degrees cone
of visibility with its axis perpendicular to the panel on which the indicator is
mounted. All indicators must be self-luminous. All indicators must have a
rated life of 100,000 hours minimum. Each LED indicator must be white or
clear when off. Indicators supplied on equipment requiring handles must be
mounted such that a horizontal clearance is provided.
3. Liquid Crystal Displays (LCD) must be readable at temperatures of -20

degrees C to +70 degrees C. All controller unit functions are required to
operate at temperatures of -37 degrees C to +74 degrees C.
P. Connectors. Connectors must be keyed to prevent improper insertion of the wrong

connector where equipment damage or operator injury may result. The mating
connectors must be designated as the connector number and male/female relationship,
such as C1P (plug or PCB edge connector) and C1S (socket).
1. Type T. Type T connector must be a single row, 10 position, feed through

terminal block. The terminal block must be a barrier type with 6-32, 0.25 in.
or longer, nickel plated brass binder head screws. Each terminal must be
permanently identified as to its function.
2. Plastic Circular and Type M. Pin and socket contacts for connectors must be
beryllium copper construction subplated with 1.27 microns nickel and plated
with 0.76 microns gold. Pin diameter must be 0.0618 in. All pin and socket
connectors must use the AMP #601105-1 or #91002-1 contact insertion tool
and the AMP #305183 contact extraction tool or equal.
3. Card Edge and Two Piece PCB:
a. Edge connectors must have bifurcated gold-plated contacts. The PCB

receptacle connector must meet or exceed the following:
(1) Operating Voltage: 600 VAC (RMS)
(2) Current Rating: 5.0 Amperes
(3) Insulation Material: Diallyl Phthalate or Thermoplastic
(4) Insulation Resistance: 5,000 Megohms
(5) Contact Material: Copper alloy plated with 0.00005 in. of

nickel and 0.000015 in. of gold
(6) Contact Resistance: 0.006 Ohm maximum
b. The two-piece PCB connector must meet or exceed the DIN 41612.
c. The PCB 22/44 Connector must have 22 independent contacts per

side; dual sided with 0.156 in. contact centers.
16731-10
CITY OF HOUSTON
4. Wire Terminal. Each wire terminal must be solderless with PVC insulation
and a heavy-duty short -locking spade type connector. Crimp terminal
connectors using a Controlled-Cycle type crimping tool.
5. Flat Cable. Each flat cable connector must be designed for use with 26 AWG
cable; have dual cantilevered phosphor bronze contacts plated with 0.00015
in. of gold over 0.00005 in. of nickel; and have a current rating of 1 Ampere
minimum and an insulation resistance of 5 Megohms minimum.
6. PCB Header Post. Each PCB header post must be 0.025 in. square by 0.3425
in. high from the plane of the PCB to the end of the pin; be mounted on 0.10
in. centers; and be tempered hard brass plated with 0.00015 in. of gold over
7. PCB Header Socket. Each PCB header socket block must be nylon or diallyl
phthalate. Each PCB header socket contact must be removable, but crimp-
connected to its conductor. List the part number of the extraction tool
recommended by its manufacturer. Each PCB header socket contact must be
brass or phosphor bronze plated with 0.0015 in. of gold over 0.00005 in. of
nickel.
Q. Surge Protection Device. The surge suppression device must comply with
ANSI/IEEE C62.41 (100 Kilohertz Ring Wave, the 1.2/50 microseconds - 8/20
Combination Wave and the EFT Burst) at voltages and currents specified at
"Location Category B2" and at "Test Severity" level III (i.e. up to 4.0 Kilovolts,
open-circuit).
A. Assemblies. All assemblies must be modular, easily replaceable and incorporate plug-
in capability for their associated devices or PCBs. Assemblies must be provided with
two guides for each plug-in PCB or associated device (except relays). The guides
must extend to within 0.75 in. from the face of either the socket or connector and
front edge of the assembly. If Nylon guides are used, attach the guides securely to the
file or assembly chassis.
B. Locking Devices. All screw type fasteners must utilize locking devices or locking
compounds except finger screws, which are captive.
C. PCB Design and Connectors. No components, traces, brackets or obstructions are to

be within 0.125 in. of the board edge (guide edges). The manufacturer's name or logo,
model number, serial number, and circuit issue or revision number must appear and
be readily visible on all PCBs.
D. Model and Serial Numbers:
16731-11
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. The manufacturer's model number, and circuit issue or revision number must
appear on the rear panel of all equipment supplied (where such panel exists).
In addition to any assignment of model numbers by the manufacturer, the
TYPE number must be displayed on the front panel in bold type, at least 0.25
in. high.
2. A permanent label must be affixed to the inside near and center floor of the
Type 2070 unit chassis when viewed from the front. The label must display
the unit's serial number and be permanent and easy to read.
3. Workmanship. Workmanship must conform to the requirements of this

specification and be in accordance with the highest industry standards.
4. Tolerances. The following tolerances must apply, except as specifically shown

on the plans or in these specifications:
a. Sheet Metal +/-0.0525 in.
b. PCB +0 in., - 0.010 in.
c. Edge Guides +/-0.015 in.
d. Note: These dimensional tolerances do not apply to material gauge or

thickness
2.05 ENGINEERING
A. Human Engineering. The equipment must be engineered for simplicity, ease of

operation and maintenance.
1. Knobs must be a minimum of 0.5 in. in diameter and a minimum separation of

0.5 in. edge to edge.
2. PCBs must slide smoothly in their guides while being inserted into or
removed from the frame and fit snugly into the plug-in PCB connectors. PCBs
must require a force no less than 5 pounds-force or greater than 50 pounds-
force for insertion or removal.
B. Design Engineering. The design must be inherently temperature compensated to

prevent abnormal operation. The circuit design must include such compensation as is
necessary to overcome adverse effects due to temperature in the specified
environmental range. The design must take into consideration the protection of
personnel from all dangerous voltages.
C. Generated Noise. No item, component or subassembly is to emit an audible noise

level exceeding the peak level of 55 dBa when measured at a distance of one meter
away from its surface, except as otherwise noted. No item, component or
subassembly is to emit a noise level sufficient to interfere with processing and
communication functions of the controller circuits.
16731-12
CITY OF HOUSTON
2.06 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
A. Design, Fabrication and Mounting:
1. All contacts on PCBs must be plated with a minimum thickness of 0.00003 in.
gold over a minimum thickness of 0.000075 in. nickel.
2. PCB design must be such that when a component is removed and replaced, no
damage is done to the board, other components, conductive traces or tracks.
3. Fabrication of PCBs must be in compliance with Military Specification MIL-

P- 13949, except as follows:
a. NEMA FR-4 glass cloth base epoxy resin copper clad laminates
0.0625 in. minimum thickness must be used. Inter-component wiring
must be by laminated copper clad track having a minimum weight of
0.2 ounces per square foot with adequate cross section for current to be
carried. All copper tracks must be plated or soldered to provide
complete coverage of all exposed copper tracks. Jumper wires to
external PCB components must be from plated- through padded holes
and as short as possible.
b. All PCBs must conform to Section 3.3 of Military Specification MIL-

P- 13949G Grade of Pits and Dents and be of Grade B quality (3.5.1.3)
or better. The class of permissible bow or twist must be Class C (Table
V) or better. The class of permissible warp or twist must be Class A
(Table II) or better.
c. Omit Sections 4.2 through 6.6 of Military Specification MIL-P-

13949G (inclusive) except as referenced in previous sections of this
specification.
d. The mounting of parts and assemblies on the PCB must conform to

IPC-2221B, except as follows:
(1) Semiconductor devices that dissipate more than 250 milliwatts

or cause a temperature rise of 10 degrees C or more must be
mounted with spacers, transipads or heat sinks to prevent
contact with the PCB.
(2) When completed, remove all residual flux from the PCB.
(3) The resistance between any two isolated, independent

conductor paths must be at least 100 Megohms when a 500
VDC potential is applied.
(4) All PCBs must be coated with a moisture resistant coating.
16731-13
CITY OF HOUSTON
(5) Where less than 0.25 in. lateral separation is provided between
the PCB (or the components of a PCB) and any metal surface,
a 0.0625 in. (+/- 0.0005 in.) Thick Mylar (polyester) plastic
cover must be provided on the metal to protect the PCB.
e. Each PCB connector edge must be chamfered at 30 degrees from

board side planes. The key slots must also be chamfered so that the
connector keys are not extracted upon removal of board or jammed
upon insertion. The key slots must be 0.045 in. (+/-0.005 in.) for 0.1
in. spacing and 0.055 in. (+/-0.005 in.) for 0.156 in. spacing.
B. Soldering:
1. Hand soldering must comply with J-STD-001.
2. Automatic flow soldering must be a constant speed conveyor system with the
conveyor speed set at optimum to minimize solder peaks or points.
Temperature must be controlled to within +/- 8 degrees C of the optimum
temperature. The soldering process must result in the complete coverage of all
copper runs, joints and terminals with solder except that which is covered by
an electroplating process. Wherever clinching is not used, provide a method of
holding the components in the proper position for the flow process.
3. If exposure to the temperature bath is of such a time-temperature duration, as

to come within 80% of any component's maximum specified time-temperature
exposure, that component must be hand soldered to the PCB after the flow
process has been completed.
C. Definitions. Definitions for the purpose of this section on PCBs must be taken from
MIL-PRF-55110 and any current addendum.
D. Jumpers. Jumpers are not allowed unless called out in the specifications or approved
by the City of Houston.
2.07 ELECTRICAL, ENVIRONMENTAL AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. The framework of this section, along with the specific test requirements contained
herein, is excerpted with modifications from NEMA TS2-2021 - Section 2 by
permission of NEMA. Excerpt © 2002 AASHTO / ITE / NEMA. In the case where
these requirements differ from the testing requirements in ATC Standard 5.2b, then
apply ATC Standard 5.2b requirements ONLY to 1C modules.
16731-14
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. General. This section establishes the limits of the environmental and operational
conditions in which the Controller Assembly will perform. This section defines the
minimum test procedures that may be used to demonstrate conformance of a device
type with the provisions of the standard. These test procedures do not verify
equipment performance under every possible combination of environmental
requirements covered by this standard. Nothing in this testing profile must be
construed as to relieve the requirement that the equipment provided must fully
comply with these standards/specifications under all environmental conditions stated
herein. The City of Houston may wish to extend the testing profile or introduce
additional tests to verify compliance. (Authorized Engineering Information).
C. Inspection. A visual and physical inspection must include mechanical, dimensional

and assembly conformance to all parts of this standard.
D. Testing Certification.
1. Design Acceptance testing must be performed with a fully loaded and

functional Cabinet Assembly. Production testing must be performed as part of
the City of Houston's procurement delivery procedures and that testing should
be performed at the Major Unit level. (Authorized Engineering Information)
2. Certain portions of the test procedures contained in this standard my cause

damage to the unit (e.g. protection devices may be aged) and are not
recommended for routine Production testing. (Authorized Engineering
Information)
E. Definitions of Major Units of the Cabinet Assembly. For the purpose of this section,
"Major units of the Cabinet Assembly" must include the Controller Unit, Application
Software for implementing the desired functionality, Cabinet Monitor Unit (CMU),
Auxiliary Monitor Unit (AMU), Serial Interface Units (SIUs), Power Distribution
Unit (PDA), Switch Packs, Flasher(s), and Detector(s).
F. Environmental and Operating Requirements. The requirements (voltage, temperature,

etc.) of this section must apply in any combination.
1. Voltage and Frequency.
a. Operating Voltage. The nominal voltage must be 120 VAC, unless

otherwise noted.
b. Operating Frequency. The operating frequency range must be 60 hertz

(+/-3.0 hertz), unless otherwise noted.
2. Transients, Power Service. The Test Unit must maintain all defined functions
when the independent test pulse levels specified below occur on the
alternating- current power service.
a. High Repetition Noise Transients
16731-15
CITY OF HOUSTON
(1) The test pulses must not exceed the following conditions:
(a) Amplitude: 300 Volts, both positive and negative

polarity.
(b) Peak Power: 2500 watts.
(c) Repetition: 1 pulse approximately every other cycle

moving uniformly over the full wave in order to sweep
across 360 degrees of the line cycle once every 3
seconds.
(d) Pulse Rise Time: 1 microsecond.
(e) Pulse Width: 10 microseconds.
(f) This test is performed without protection in place or

operational.
(g) This test is considered to be a minimum test

requirement for the Test Unit complying with
ANSI/IEEE C62.41. Regional conditions may warrant
additional testing as described in ANSI/IEEE C62.41.
b. Low Repetition High Energy Transients.
(1) The test pulses must not exceed the following conditions:
(a) Amplitude: 600 Volts (+/-5 percent), both positive and

negative polarity.
(b) Energy Source: Capacitor, oil filled, 10 microfarads

(+/-10 percent), internal surge impedance less than 1
ohm.
(c) Repetition: 1 discharge every 10 seconds.
(d) Pulse Position: Random across 360 degrees of the line

cycle.
(e) This test is performed with protection in place and

operational. This test is considered to be a minimum
test requirement for the Test Unit complying with
c. Nondestructive Transient Immunity.
16731-16
CITY OF HOUSTON
(1) The Test Unit (with protection in place and operational) must
be capable of withstanding a high energy transient having the
following characteristics repeatedly applied to the alternating
current input terminals (no other power connected to terminals)
without failure of the test specimen:
(a) Amplitude: 1000 Volts (+/-5 percent), both positive and

negative polarity.
(b) Energy Source: Capacitor, oil filled, 15 microfarads

(+/-10 percent), internal surge impedance less than 1
ohm.
(c) Repetition: Applied to the Test Unit once every 2

seconds for a maximum of three applications for each
polarity.
(d) After the foregoing, the Test Unit must perform all
defined functions upon the application of nominal
alternating current power.
(e) This test is considered to be a minimum test

ANSI/IEEE C62.41 (100 Kilohertz Ring Wave, the
1.2/50 microseconds - 8/20 Combination Wave and the
EFT Burst) at voltages and currents specified at
"Location Category B2" and at "Test Severity" level III
(i.e. up to 4.0 Kilovolts, open-circuit). Regional
conditions may warrant additional testing as described
in ANSI/IEEE C62.41. (Authorized Engineering
Information)
d. Transients, Input-Output Terminals.
(1) The Test Unit (without protection in place or operational) must

maintain all defined functions, when the test pulse occurs on
the input- output terminals.
(a) Amplitude: 300 Volts, both positive and negative

polarity.
(b) Pulse Source: 1000 ohms nominal impedance.
(c) Repetition: 1 pulse per second, for a minimum of 5

pulses per selected terminal.
(d) Pulse rise time: 1 microsecond.
(e) Pulse width: 10 microseconds.
16731-17
CITY OF HOUSTON
(f) This test is considered to be a minimum test

e. Temperature and Humidity. The Test Unit must maintain all

programmed functions when the temperature and humidity ambients
are within the specified limits defined herein.
(1) Ambient Temperature.
(a) The operating ambient temperature range must be from

-37 degrees C to +74 degrees C. The storage
temperature range must be from -45 degrees C to +85
degrees C.
(b) The rate of change in ambient temperature must not

exceed 18 degrees C per hour, during which the relative
humidity must not exceed 95 percent.
(2) Humidity.
(a) The relative humidity must not exceed 95 percent non-

condensing over the temperature range of -37 degrees C
to +74 degrees C.
(b) Above +46 degrees C, constant absolute humidity must

be maintained. This will result in the relative humidity
shown in Table 1 for dynamic testing.
Table 1
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE VERSUS RELATIVE HUMIDITY AT BAROMETRIC
PRESSURES (29.92 In. Hg.) (NON-CONDENSING)
Ambient Temperature/ Dry Bulb Ambient Temperature/ Wet Bulb
Relative Humidity (in percent)
(in degrees C) (in degrees C)
-37.0 to 1.1 10 -17.2 to 42.7
1.1 to 46.0 95 42.7
48.8 70 42.7
54.4 50 42.7
60.0 38 42.7
65.4 28 42.7
71.2 21 42.7
74.0 18 42.7
16731-18
CITY OF HOUSTON
f. Test Facilities. All instrumentation required in the test procedures,

such as voltmeters, ammeters, thermocouples, pulse timers, etc. must
be selected in accordance with good engineering practice. In all cases
where time limit tests are required, the allowance for any
instrumentation errors must be included in the limit test.
(1) Variable Voltage Source: A variable source capable of

supplying 20 amperes from 100 VAC to 135 VAC.
(2) Environmental Chamber: An environmental chamber capable

of attaining temperatures of -37 degrees C to +74 degrees C
and relative humidity given in Table 1.
(3) Transient Generators: Transient generators capable of

supplying the transients outlined above.
G. Test Procedure: Transients, Temperature, Voltage, and Humidity
1. Test A: Placement in Environmental Chamber and Check-Out of Hook-Up
a. Place the test unit in the environmental chamber. Connect the test unit
AC input circuit to a variable voltage power transformer, voltmeter,
and transient generator. The transient generator must be connected to
the AC input circuit at a point at least 25 feet from the AC power
source and not over 10 feet from the input to the test unit.
b. Connect test switches to the appropriate terminals to simulate the

various features incorporated into the test unit. Place these switches in
the proper position for desired operation.
c. Verify the test hook-up. Adjust the variable-voltage power transformer

to 120 VAC and apply power to the test unit. Verify that the test unit
goes through its prescribed startup sequence and cycles properly in
accordance with the operation determined by the positioning of test
switches in item b.
d. Upon the satisfactory completion and verification of the test hook-up,

proceed with Test B.
2. Test B: Transient Tests (Power Service)
a. Program the test unit to dwell. Verify the input voltage is 120 VAC.
b. Set the transient generator to provide high-repetition noise transients

as follows:

negative polarity.
16731-19
CITY OF HOUSTON
(2) Peak Power: 2500 watts.
(3) Repetition Rate: One pulse every other cycle moving uniformly
over the full wave in order to sweep once every 3 seconds
across 360 degrees of line cycle.
(4) Pulse Rise Time: 1 microsecond.
(5) Pulse Width: 10 microseconds.
c. Apply the transient generator output to the AC voltage input for at

least 5 minutes. Repeat this test for at least two conditions of dwell for
the test unit. The test unit must continue to dwell without malfunction.
d. Program the test unit to cycle through normal operations. Turn on the
transient generator (output in accordance with item 2) for 10 minutes,
during which time the test unit must continue to cycle without
malfunction.
e. Set a transient generator to provide high-repetition noise transients as

follows:

negative polarity.
(2) Source Impedance: Not less than 1000 ohms nominal

impedance.
(3) Repetition: One pulse per second for a minimum of five pulses
per selected terminal.
(4) Pulse Rise Time: 1 microsecond.
(5) Pulse Width: 10 microseconds.
(6) Program the test unit to dwell. Verify the input voltage is 120
VAC.
f. Apply the transient generator (output in accordance with item 5)

between logic ground and the connecting cable termination of selected
Field I/O input/output terminals of the test unit. A representative
sampling of selected input/output terminations must be tested. The test
unit must continue to dwell without malfunction.
g. Program the test unit to cycle. Turn on the transient generator (output
in accordance with item 5) and apply its output to the selected Field
I/O input/output terminations. The test unit must continue to cycle
without malfunction.
16731-20
CITY OF HOUSTON
h. Reinstall protection and set a transient generator to provide low-

repetition high-energy transients as follows:

negative polarity.
(2) Energy Discharge Source: Capacitor, oil-filled, 10 microfarads.
(3) Repetition Rate: One discharge each 10 seconds.
(4) Pulse Position: Random across 360 degrees of line cycle.
i. Program the test unit to dwell. Verify the input voltage is 120 VAC.
j. Discharge the oil-filled 10-microfarad capacitor ten times for each

polarity across the AC voltage input. Repeat this test for at least two
conditions of dwell. The test unit must continue to dwell without
malfunction.
k. Program the test unit to cycle through normal operations. Discharge

the capacitor ten times for each polarity while the test unit is cycling,
during which time the test unit must continue to cycle without
malfunction.
l. During the preceding transient tests, the test unit must continue its
programmed functions. The test unit must not skip normal program
intervals/steps or portions thereof when in normal operation; place
false inputs or produce false outputs while in dwell; disrupt normal
sequences in any manner; or change parameters.
m. Nondestructive Transient Immunity:
(1) Turn off the AC power input to the test unit from the variable-
voltage power source.
(2) Apply the following high-energy transient to the AC voltage

input terminals of the test unit (no other power connected to
terminals):
(a) Amplitude: 1000 V, both positive and negative polarity.
(b) Peak Power Discharge: Capacitor, oil-filled, 15

microfarads.
(c) Maximum Repetition Rate: Applied to the Cabinet

Assembly once every 2 seconds for a maximum of
three applications for each polarity.
16731-21
CITY OF HOUSTON
(3) Upon completion of the foregoing, apply 120 VAC to the test
unit and verify that the test unit goes through its prescribed
startup sequence and cycles properly in accordance with the
programmed functions. The first operation of the over-current
protective device during this test is not considered a failure of
the test unit.
NOTE-Test C through G follow the profile indicated in Figure 1 to demonstrate the ability of the
test unit to function reliably under stated conditions of temperature, voltage, and humidity.
Figure 1
Test Profile
NOTES:
1. The rate of change in temperature must not exceed 18 degrees C per hour.
2. Humidity controls must be set in conformance with the humidity given in Table 1 during
the temperature change between Test D and Test E.
3. If a change in both voltage and temperature are required for the next test, the voltage
must be selected prior to the temperature change.
n. Test C-Low-Temperature Low-Voltage Tests
(1) Definition of Test Conditions
(a) Environmental Chamber Door: Closed.
16731-22
CITY OF HOUSTON
(b) Temperature: -37 degrees C.
(c) Low Voltage: 100 VAC.
(d) Humidity Control: Off.
(2) Test Procedure: While at room temperature, adjust the input

voltage to 100 VAC and verify that the test unit is still
operable.
(a) With the test unit cycling through normal operations,

lower the test chamber to -37 degrees C at a rate not
exceeding 18 degrees C per hour. Allow the test unit to
cycle for a minimum of 5 hours at -37 degrees C with
the humidity controls in the off position. Then operate
the test switches as necessary to determine that all
functions are operable.
(b) Remove power from the test unit for a minimum period
of 5 hours. Upon restoration of power, the test unit must
go through its prescribed startup sequence and then
resume cycling.
(c) With the test unit at -37 degrees C and the input voltage
at 100 VAC, evaluate the following items against the
respective Power Interruption Tests standards.
(d) On satisfactory completion of this test, proceed with

Test D.
o. Test D-Low-Temperature High-Voltage Tests
(a) Environmental Chamber Door: closed.
(b) Low Temperature: -37 degrees C.
(c) High Voltage: 135 VAC
(d) Humidity Controls: Off.
(2) Test Procedure: While at -37 degrees C and with humidity

controls off, adjust the input voltage to 135 VAC and allow the
test unit to cycle for 1 hour. Then operate the test switches as
necessary to determine that all functions are operable.
16731-23
CITY OF HOUSTON
VAC (humidity controls off), evaluate the following items
against the respective Power Interruption Tests standards.
(4) On satisfactory completion of this test, proceed to Test E.
p. Test E-High-Temperature High-Voltage Tests
(b) High Temperature: +74 degrees C.
(c) High Voltage: 135 VAC.
(d) Humidity Controls: In accordance with the humidity

given in Table 1.
(2) Test Procedure-With the test unit cycling, raise the test
chamber to +74 degrees C at a rate not to exceed 18 degrees C
per hour. Verify the input voltage is 135 VAC.
(3) Set the humidity controls to not exceed 95 percent relative

humidity over the temperature range of +1.1 degrees C to +46
degrees C. When the temperature reaches +46 degrees C,
readjust the humidity control to maintain constant absolute
humidity; +42.7 degrees C wet bulb that results in the relative
humidity shown in Table 1. Verify that the test unit continues
to cycle satisfactory during the period of temperature increase
and at established levels of relative humidity.
(a) Allow the test unit to cycle for a minimum of 15 hours

at +74 degrees C and 18 percent relative humidity.
Then operate the test switches as necessary to
determine that all functions are operable.
(b) With the test unit at +74 degrees C and 18 percent

relative humidity and the input voltage at 135 VAC,
evaluate the following items against the respective
Power Interruption Tests standards.
(4) On satisfactory completion of this test, proceed to Test F.
q. Test F-High-Temperature Low-Voltage Tests
16731-24
CITY OF HOUSTON
(b) High Temperature: +74 degrees C.
(c) Low Voltage: 100 VAC.
(d) Humidity Controls: 18 percent relative humidity and

+42.7 degrees C wet bulb.
(e) Test Procedure: Adjust the input voltage to 100 VAC

and proceed to operate the test switches to determine
that all functions are operable. With the test unit at +74
degrees C and 18 percent relative humidity, +42.7
degrees C wet bulb, and the input voltage at 100 VAC,
evaluate the following items against the respective
Power Interruption Tests standards.
(f) On satisfactory completion of this test, proceed to Test

G.
r. Test G-Test Termination
(1) Program the test unit to cycle.
(2) Adjust the input voltage to 120 VAC.
(3) Set the controls on the environmental chamber to return to

room temperature, +20 degrees C (+/-5 degrees C), with the
humidity controls in the off position. The rate of temperature
change must not exceed 18 degrees C per hour.
(4) Verify the test unit continues to cycle through normal

operations properly.
(5) Allow the test unit to stabilize at room temperature for 1 hour.
Proceed to operate the test switches to determine that all
functions are operable.
s. Test H-Appraisal of Equipment under Test
(1) A failure is defined as any occurrence that results in other than

normal operation of the equipment. (See sub-section item b.
below for details.) If a failure occurs, the test unit must be
repaired or components replaced, and the test during which
failure occurred must be restarted from its beginning.
(2) The test unit is considered to have failed if any of the following
occur:
16731-25
CITY OF HOUSTON
(a) If the test unit skips normal program intervals/steps or

portions thereof when in normal operation, places false
inputs, presents false outputs, exhibits disruption of
normal sequence of operations, or produces changes in
parameters beyond specified tolerances, or
(b) If the test unit fails to satisfy the requirements of Tests

A to G, inclusive.
(3) An analysis of the failure must be performed and corrective

action taken before the test unit is retested in accordance with
this standard. The analysis must outline what action was taken
to preclude additional failures during the tests.
(4) When the number of failures exceeds two, it must be

considered that the test unit fails to meet these standards. The
test unit may be completely retested after analysis of the failure
and necessary repairs have been made in accordance with item
3).
(5) Upon completion of the tests, visually inspect the test unit. If
material changes are observed which will adversely affect the
life of the test unit, the cause and conditions must be corrected
before making further tests.
(6) Upon satisfactory completion of all of the tests described, test

the unit in accordance with Vibration Test.
t. Vibration Test.
(1) Purpose of Test. This test is intended to duplicate vibrations

encountered by the test unit (individual major components)
when installed at its field location.
(a) Fasten the test unit securely to the vibration test table
prior to the start of the test.
(2) Test Equipment Requirements.
(a) Vibration table with adequate table surface area to

permit placement of the test unit
(b) Vibration test consists of:
I. Vibration in each of three mutually

perpendicular planes.
II. Adjustment of frequency of vibration over the

range from 5 hertz to 30 hertz.
16731-26
CITY OF HOUSTON
III. Adjustment of test table excursion (double

amplitude displacement) to maintain a 'g' value,
measured at the test table, of 0.5g; as
determined by the following formula:
g = 0.0511df2
where
d = excursion, inches
f = frequency, hertz
(3) Resonant Search
(a) With the test unit securely fastened to the test table, set
the test table for a double amplitude displacement of
0.015 inch.
(b) Cycle the test table over a search range from 5 hertz to
30 hertz and back within a period of 12.5 minutes.
(c) Conduct the resonant frequency search in each of the

three mutually perpendicular planes.
(d) Note and record the resonant frequency determined

from each plane.
I. In the event of more than on resonant frequency

in a given plane, record the most severe
resonance.
II. If resonant frequencies appear equally severe,

record each resonant frequency.
III. If no resonant frequency occurs for a given

plane within the prescribed range, 30 hertz must
be recorded.
(4) Endurance Test
(a) Vibrate the test unit in each plane at its resonant

frequency for a period of 1 hour at amplitude resulting
in 0.5g acceleration.
(b) When more than one resonant frequency has been

recorded, the test period of 1 hour must be divided
equally between the resonant frequencies.
(c) The total time of the endurance test must be limited to 3

hours, 1 hour in each of three mutually perpendicular
planes.
16731-27
CITY OF HOUSTON
(5) Disposition of Equipment under Test
(a) Examine the test unit to determine that no physical

damage has resulted from the vibration tests.
(b) Check the test unit to determine that it is functionally

operable in all modes of its prescribed operation.
(c) The test unit may be removed from the test table. Upon
satisfactory completion of the vibration test, proceed
with the shock (impact) test.
u. Shock (Impact) Test
(1) Purpose of Test. The purpose of this test is to determine that

the test unit is capable of withstanding the shock (impact) to
which it may reasonably be subjected during handling and
transportation in the process of installation, repair, and
replacement. It is to be noted that the test unit is not, at this
time, in its shipping carton.
(a) Fasten the test unit firmly to the specimen table. In each
of its three planes the test, drop the unit from a
calibrated height to result in a shock force of 10g.
(2) Test Equipment Requirements
(a) Shock (impact) test fixture equivalent to that suggested

by the simplified sketch shown in Figure 2.
(b) The test table must have a surface area sufficient to

accommodate the test unit.
(c) Calibrate the test table and the items tested as indicated.
This shock test defines the test shock to be 10g (+/-1g).
I. Measure calibration of the test equipment for

these shock tests by three accelerometers having
fixed shock settings of 9g, 10g, and 11g. They
must be Inertia Switch Incorporated ST-355, or
the equivalent. Attach these devices rigidly to
the test table.
16731-28
CITY OF HOUSTON
Figure 2
Shock Test Fixture
II. Calibration of the fixture for each item to be tested is

as follows:
i. Place a dummy load weighing within 10

percent of the test unit on the table.
ii. Reset the three accelerometers and drop the

test table from a measured height.
16731-29
CITY OF HOUSTON
iii. Observe that the accelerometers indicate the

following: Activate the 9g accelerometer; the
10g unit may or may not be actuated; the 11g
unit must not be actuated.
III. Repeat calibration test (a) and (b) adjusting the

height of the drop until, on ten successive drops, the
following occurs:
i. The 9g unit is actuated ten times.
ii. The 10g unit is actuated between four to eight

times.
iii. The 11g unit is not actuated on any of the ten

drops.
(3) Test Procedure
(a) The calibration height of the drop for the particular item
under test as determined in Test Equipment Requirements
must be used in this procedure.
(b) Secure the test unit to the test table surface so that the test
unit rests on one of its three mutually perpendicular planes.
(c) Raise the test table to the calibrated height.
(d) Release the test table from the calibrated height, allowing a
free fall into the box of energy absorbing material below.
(e) Repeat the drop test for each of the remaining two mutually
perpendicular planes, using the same calibrated height for
each drop test of the same test unit.
(f) The observations of the accelerometer for the three tests of

the test item are:
I. The 9g unit is actuated for all three tests. (Repeat the

calibration if the unit is not actuated.)
II. The 10g unit may or may not be actuated in these

tests.
III. The 11g unit is not actuated on any drop. (If the unit
is actuated, repeat the calibration only if the test unit
has suffered damage.)
(4) Disposition of Test Unit

16731-30
CITY OF HOUSTON
(a) Check the test unit for any physical damage resulting from
the drop tests.
(b) Check the test unit to determine that it is functionally

operable in all modes of its prescribed operation.
(c) Satisfactory completion of all environmental tests, including

the shock (impact) is required.
v. Power Interruption Test Procedures. Conduct the following power

interruption tests at low input voltage (100 VAC) and high input voltage
(135 VAC) at -37 degrees C, and +74 degrees C.
(1) Short Power Interruption. While the Test Unit is cycling through
normal operations, remove the input voltage for a period of 475
milliseconds. Upon restoration of the input voltage, check to insure
that the Test Unit continues normal operation as though no power
interruption has occurred. Repeat this test three times.
(2) Voltage Variation. All circuits of the Test Unit must be subjected to
slowly varying line voltage during which the Test Unit must be
subjected to line voltage that is slowly lowered from a nominal 120
VAC line voltage to 0 VAC at a rate of not greater than 2 Volts per
second. The line voltage must then be slowly raised to 100 VAC at
which point the Test Unit must resume normal operation without
operator intervention. Perform this test at both -37 degrees C and
+74 degrees C, at a nominal 120 VAC line voltage. Repeat this test
three times.
(3) Rapid Power Interruption. Subject the Test Unit to rapid power
interruption testing of the form that the power is off for 350
milliseconds and on for 650 milliseconds for a period of 2 minutes.
Perform power interruption through electromechanical contacts of
an appropriate size for the load. During this testing, the controller
must function normally and continue normal sequencing (operation)
at the conclusion of the test. This test must be performed at both -37
degrees C and +74 degrees C, at a nominal 120 VAC line voltage.
Repeat this test three times.
2.08 TYPE 2070 CONTROLLER UNIT
A. General
1. Module Descriptions. The Controller Unit is composed of the Type 2070 Unit
CHASSIS, along with other modules and assemblies. The following is a list of
Type 2070 versions, their interface rolls and composition:
16731-31
CITY OF HOUSTON
Unit Version Description

Type 2070LX Unit LITE Unit mates to the 170 & ITS cabinets. It consists of:
Type 2070LN Unit UNIT CHASSIS, 2070-1C CPU, 2070-2A (2B if
NEMA CABINET), FI/O, 2070-3B FRONT PANEL
and 2070- 4 B POWER SUPPLY
2. Unit Configuration. The Type 2070 Controller Unit Version defines the module
composition to be delivered as follows:
No Composition
Item Description
. 2070LN 2070LX
1 - Unit Chassis Y Y
2 2070-1C CPU Module Y Y
3 2070-2A Field I/O Module for 170 type cabinet - Y
Field I/O Module for ITS & NEMA type
7 2070-2B Y -
cabinets
5 2070-3B Front Panel Display Y Y
6 2070-4B Power Supply 3.5 AMP Y Y
7 2070-7A Serial Communication Y Y
3. Metalwork. The CHASSIS Top and Bottom, Internal Structure Supports, Back
Plane Mounting Surface, Module Plates, Power Supply Enclosure, and Front Panel
must be made of 63-gauge minimum aluminum sheet. The CHASSIS Side panels
must be 80-gauge minimum sheet.
4. Power Fail and Power Restoration Operation. It is noted that the Power Failure
Power Restoration operations of this unit are specific to the requirements of the
user. All associated modules are to comply to said operations.
5. Power Limitations. 2070 UNIT module / assembly power limitations are as

follows:
16731-32
CITY OF HOUSTON
Types +5VDC +12VDC ISO +12VDC ser -12 VDC ser

750
MCB ----- ----- -----
milliamperes
750
TRANS BD ----- ----- -----
milliamperes
2070-1C 1.0 amperes 250mA ----- ----
250 750
2070-2A FI/O ----- -----
milliamperes milliamperes
250 500
2070-2B FI/O ----- -----
milliamperes milliamperes
500 50 50
2070-3B FPA -----
milliamperes milliamperes milliamperes
250 50 50
2070-7 All Comm -----
milliamperes milliamperes milliamperes
B. Type 2070-1 CPU Module
1. Type 2070 - 1C Configuration. The TYPE 2070-1C CPU must be a single board
module meeting the 2X WIDE board requirements. The module must be furnished
normally resident in MOTHERBOARD Slot A5. The module must meet the
following minimum requirements:
a. The Model 2070-1C Module shall be provided with an Application

Program Interface (API) compliant to the latest published ASHTO/ITE
ATC API Standard. A copy of this API standard shall be provided
separately at no additional cost upon request. At the time of this writing the
latest published standard is API 5401 v2.17.
b. ATC 5.2b, except / in addition to where noted below:
(1) A processor with a minimum MIPS of 400 calculated using the

Dhrystone v2.1 benchmark at 25°C.
(2) A minimum of 64 megabytes (MB) of DRAM or equivalent volatile

memory for application and OS program execution.
(3) A minimum of 128 MB of FLASH for storage of OS Software and

user applications.
(4) Prior to 1 May 2017 a minimum of 1 MB of SRAM memory for

nonvolatile parameter storage; starting 1 May 2017 a minimum of
2 MB minimum of SRAM memory for non-volatile parameter
storage.
(5) The 1C card shall provide the standby power required for
supporting the SRAM and RTC.
16731-33
CITY OF HOUSTON
(6) A Utility Program shall be provided that would allow the user to
upgrade (re-flash) the Boot Image for the Linux Kernel.
(7) A re-flash utility and the procedures for its use in PDF form.
(8) All Linux Software, except for loadable modules, shall comply with
the GPL license as published by the Free Software Foundation.
(9) One USB 2.0 or greater compliant port.
(10) Two 10/100 Ethernet ports; Ethernet Ports shall be marked port 1
and port 2.
c. Host Board:
(1) Single board module meeting Caltrans 2x WIDE board

requirements.
(2) Provides two DIN sockets and mounting standoffs for the
connection of the 2070-1C engine Board.
(3) Not less than two Ethernet ports used to route ENET1 and ENET2
signals from Engine Board to the front panel.
(4) Datakey receptacle capable of housing 3.3 VDC 5.0.
(5) USB 2.0 or greater full speed port for memory.
d. Front panel:
(1) 2070 Standard 1x module.
(2) USB port.
(3) Data key socket.
(4) 256 bytes or greater SPI EEPROM.
(5) Two RJ45 Front Panel Ethernet jacks.
(6) 25 pin D Socket Type port.
e. Standard Features:
(1) Open source U-boot loader.
(2) ATC 5.2b standards compliment CPU Engine Board.
(3) Full support for all required ATC 5.2b software drivers.
16731-34
CITY OF HOUSTON
(4) Compatible with the latest Caltrans QPL approved 2070E hardware.
At the time of this writing the latest approved hardware
specification is TEES 2009. Note: this does not require the 1C
module to be on the Caltrans QPL, it requires that the 1C module be
compatible with the other hardware on the Caltrans QPL.
(5) Compatible with legacy 2070s (TEES 2002 to present). The City of
Houston operates 2070 controllers in NEMA TS1, 332 type, ITS,
and other type cabinets.
(6) Capable of running multiple independent applications.
(7) Board - support toolchain package with all necessary libraries for
3rd party software development. A copy of this toolchain package
shall be provided separately at no additional cost upon request.
(8) Standards based API library which allows applications to share

front panel and field I/0 resources.
(9) Support SD card memory and provided with an industry standard

SD card socket.
f. Operating system:
(1) Compliance with the ATC Standards v5.2b.
(2) Must be able to download software by USB.
(a) A dual option to download from Windows software over

Ethernet is acceptable.
(3) SD card communication shall be addressed using SP4 for

consistency with ATC standard 6.24.
C. Type 2070-2 Field I/O Module (FI/O)
1. Type 2070-2A Module. This module shall comply with the requirements in
Specification ATC 5202 v03.04 section 3.10.
D. Type 2070-3 Front Panel Assembly
1. The Type 2070-3 Front Panel Assembly (FPA) shall comply with specification
ATC 5203 section 3.11 selecting option 3B.
E. Type 2070-4 Power Supply Module
1. The Type 2070-4A Power Supply Module shall comply with standard ATC 5202
v03.04 section 3.12.
16731-35
CITY OF HOUSTON
F. Unit Chassis
1. General
a. The Chassis consists of the metal housing, Serial Motherboard, Back-plane

Mounting Surface, Power Supply Module Supports, slot card guides,
Wiring Harnesses, and Cover Plate(s).
b. All external screws must be countersunk and be Phillips flat head stainless
steel type.
c. The housing must be treated with clear chromate and the slot designation
labeled on the back-plane mounting surface above the upper slot card
guide.
d. The Chassis must be cooled by convection only. The top and bottom pieces
of the housing must be slotted for vertical ventilation.
2. Serial Motherboard. Serial Motherboard must function as support for its

connectors, A1 to A5 and FP, and as the interface between the CPU and the
dedicated modules/Front Panel carrying both serial communications, logic, and
power circuits. The PCB must be multi-layered, with one layer plane assigned to
DC Ground.
a. A wiring harness PS2 must be provided between the Type 2070-4 Power
Supply and the Motherboard PCB (provide strain relief). Test points must
be provided on the FPA side of the Motherboard for PS2 lines.
b. A wiring harness FP must be provided, linking the Motherboard with the

FPA.
G. Details: reference standard ATC 5202 v03.04 Appendix A for figures and pinouts on 2070
modules.
2.09 TYPE 2070 PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
A. General Notes:
1. The 2070-7x modules must provide circuitry to disable its Channel 2 and EIA- 232
control lines (TX, RX, RTS, CTS, and DCD) when a ground true state is present at
Connector A1, Pin B21 (C50 Enable). The disable lines must be pulled up on this
module.
2. Line drivers/receivers must be socket mounted or surface mounted.
3. Isolation circuitry must be opto- or capacitive-coupled isolation technologies. Each

module's circuit must be capable of reliably passing a minimum of 1.0 megabits
per second.
16731-36
CITY OF HOUSTON
4. The communications modules must be "Hot" swappable without damage to

circuitry or operations.
B. Type 2070-7A Async Serial Communications Module
1. Circuitry. Two circuits, designated CIRCUIT #1 and CIRCUIT #2, must be

provided. Their functions are identical, except for the CPU Serial Communications
Port and external connector (CIRCUIT #1 to SP1 [or SP3] and Connector C21S
and CIRCUIT #2 to SP2 [or SP4] and Connector C22S).
2. 2070-7A. Each circuit must convert its EIA-485 signal lines (RX, TX, RTS, CTS
and DCD) to / from board TTL Level Signals; isolate both signal and ground; and
drive / receive external EIA-232 devices via C21 / C22 Connectors. Connectors
must be DB-9S type.
3. Indicators. Each circuit signal TX and RX line must have an LED Indicator
mounted on the front plate and labeled to function.
2.10 NEMA MODULE
A. The 2070-8 module shall comply with standard ATC 5202 v03.04 section 3.20.
2.11 METALS
B. Aluminum. Sheet must be 63 gauge American Standard (0.060-in.) minimum thick Type
3003-H14 or Type 5052-H32 ASTM Designation B209 aluminum alloy. Rod, Bar and
Extruded must be Type 6061-T6, or equal.
C. Stainless Steel. Sheet must be annealed or one-quarter-hard complying with the ASTM
Designation: A666 for Type 304, Grades A or B, stainless steel sheet.
D. Cold Rolled Steel. Sheet, Rod, Bar and Extruded must be Type 1018/1020.
1. Plating. All cold roll steel must be plated. All plating must be either cadmium
plating meeting the requirements of Federal Specification QQ-P- 416C, Type 2
Class l or zinc plating meeting the requirements of ASTM B633-85 Type II SC4.
2.12 MECHANICAL HARDWARE
A. All bolts, nuts, washers, screws, hinges and hinge pins must be stainless steel unless
otherwise specified.
2.13 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION
16731-37
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Within the circuit of any device, module, or Printed Circuit Board (PCB), electrical
isolation must be provided between DC logic ground, equipment ground and the AC-
conductor. They must be electrically isolated from each other by 500 megohms, minimum,
when tested at the input terminals with 500 VDC.
2.14 DAUGHTER BOARDS
A. Keyboards and LCD/LED Displays are considered daughter boards. Daughter boards must
be mechanically secured with a minimum of four spacers/metal screws. Connectors must
be either Flat Cable or PCB Headers. Components are to be mounted under the daughter
board.
END OF SECTION
16731-38
CITY OF HOUSTON UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION SYSTEM FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL CABINETS
SECTION 16732
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) SYSTEM FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL

CABINETS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Furnish, install, and make fully operational an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
system at designated locations as shown on the plans and as detailed in accordance
with these specifications. Use the same manufacturer and model for each
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS). The Uninterruptible Power Supply provides
reliable power to a traffic signal intersection (vehicle and pedestrian) in the event of
utility failure or interruption. The UPS system shall also act as a power conditioner
and/or voltage regulation device.
B. Section 16130 – Advanced Transportation Controller (ATC) Cabinet Assembly
C. Section 16730 – Intelligent Transportation System (ITS) Controller Cabinet

Assembly
A. Unit Prices
1. This item will be measured as each unit furnished, installed, made fully
functional and tested in accordance with these special specifications or as
directed by the Engineer. The UPS system will include, but is not limited to an
automatic bypass switch, power transfer relay, an inverter/charger, batteries,
battery charge management device, wiring, external cabinet, all mounting
hardware, manufacturer’s operation manual, required testing results,
manufacturers technical specification, and the cost of all materials, training,
warranty, equipment, and all accessories necessary to the complete installation
of the unit.
this item will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Uninterruptible Power
Supply”. This price will include all equipment described under this item with
automatic bypass switch, power transfer relay, an inverter/charger, batteries,
battery charge management device, wiring, external cabinet, mounting
hardware; all documentation and testing and will also include the cost of
furnishing all labor, materials, software, warranty, training, equipment, and
incidentals.
16732-1
1.04 REFERENCES
A. IEEE/ANSI C.62.41- Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and

less) AC Power Circuits
B. TXDOT Special Specification 6006 – Electric Components
C. UL 1449 – Surge Protective Devices
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided. The operation manual shall
include a block diagram schematic of all systems hardware components. The manual
shall include instructions for programming and viewing software features. The
manual shall include all uploading/downloading (communications protocol)
requirements via R232 port and Ethernet port.
B. Board level schematics shall be provided when requested.
C. Board level schematics shall be provided when requested.
D. Manufacturers’ cut sheets / specifications and software for all equipment proposed
under these specifications shall be submitted to the City of Houston’s Traffic
Operations Division’s ITS Group located at Houston TranStar (713-881-3179) prior
to construction.
A. TESTING
1. City of Houston reserves the right to do testing on UPS systems to ensure

quality assurance before installations and random sampling of units being
provided to the City. UPS systems that fail will be removed from the
Prequalified Products List (QPL).
2. City of Houston QPL testing procedures will include the following:
a. UPS system shall comply with all the criteria of this specification.
b. Event logging for fault/alarm conditions.
c. System will demonstrate one or more of the operation methods

described in Article 2.01.H.
d. UPS system will operate at 700 watt load (minimum 4 hours), system
will transfer to flash mode and operate at 350 watt load (minimum 2
hours) under battery power and at ambient temperature +251zC, total
length of test 6 hours.
16732-2
e. All component of the system shall be tested in environmental chamber

(temperature ranges from -301zC to 741zC).
B. EXPERIENCE REQUIREMENTS
1. Meet the following requirements, as a minimum, for Contractor or designated

subcontractors involved in the installation and testing of the UPS system:
2. Three years’ experience in the installation of UPS equipment. Two installed

systems where UPS systems are installed and the systems have been in
continuously satisfactory operation for at least two (2) years. Submit as proof,
photographs or other supporting documents, and the names, addresses and
telephone numbers of the operating personnel who can be contacted regarding
the system.
3. Provide necessary documentation of subcontractor qualifications pursuant to

contract award.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. All components of the UPS system will be warranted by the manufacturer for five
years following the acceptance of the system by City of Houston. The warranty will
include the specific installation characteristics for the geographic region and project
limits.
B. Batteries shall be warranted for full replacement for 5 years. Batteries shall be defined
as bad, if they are not able to deliver 80% of battery rating.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
Provide an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) unit that meets the following
requirements.
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. The UPS system shall be capable of operating a signalized intersection (700

watt load) for 4 hours of full runtime when utility power is disabled and under
ambient temperature of 251zC. The UPS system shall switch the intersection
to flash mode when approximately 40% of the battery charge is remaining, via
relay contact connection points on the front panel of the unit. The UPS system
shall operate the intersection in the flash mode of the operation (350 watt
load) for an additional 2 hours. Depending on the type of traffic signal
cabinet, the UPS system shall be rated for a minimum load capacity of:
a. 1,100 watts for an ATC Cabinet 356 version, or
16732-3
b. 2,000 watts for an ATC Cabinet 350 version, unless the City specifies
otherwise.
construction with a minimum number of parts, subassemblies, circuits, cards,
and modules to maximize standardization and commonality.
3. Design the equipment for ease of maintenance. Provide component parts that
are readily accessible for inspection and maintenance. Provide test points that
are for checking essential voltages and waveforms.
B. DISPLAYS, CONTROLS, DIAGNOSTICS AND MAINTENANCE
1. The UPS system shall include a front panel display. All applicable
programmable functions of the operational methods described in this
specification shall be viewable through the front panel display.
2. All events described in Operations Section shall be viewable from the front
panel display.
3. The UPS system software shall be programmable from the front panel of the
inverter/charger by means of a keyboard or momentary buttons allowing the
user to step through menu driven software.
4. A 10/100 Ethernet port shall be provided on the front panel of the

inverter/charger.
5. UPS system software shall be provided for the operational needs of the UPS
system. The user/operator shall be able to access all system software via the
Ethernet port and RS232 port on the front panel of the inverter/charger. The
user shall be able to read logged events and/or change programmable
parameters from the keyboard, laptop, or local area network via Ethernet port.
6. System software shall be upgradable via the RS232 and Ethernet ports on the
front panel of the inverter/charger.
7. All upgrades for software shall be provided for hardware components for the
duration of the warranty period at a minimum.
C. INVERTER/CHARGER
Provide an inverter/charger that has the following features:
1. When utility line voltage is out of normal operating range (typical 100V AC
to 135V AC), the inverter/charger shall provide voltage regulation and/or
power conditioning to the inverter line voltage using one or more of the
methods described in Article 2.01.H of this specification. When utility line
voltage is present, it shall act as a charging device for the batteries.
16732-4
2. Operating temperature range for both the inverter/charger unit and power
transfer relay shall be -34oC to 74oC.)
3. When battery power is used, the UPS system output voltage shall be between
110V AC and l25V AC, pure sine wave output, :S 3% THD, 60Hz + 3Hz.
4. As a minimum the inverter/charger shall be rated for either 1,100 watts or

2,000 watts, depending on the UPS system selected, of continuous power from
the unit.
D. AUTOMATIC BYPASS SWITCH
Provide an automatic bypass switch that has the following features:
1. The automatic bypass switch shall be provided as a separate unit external to

the inverter/charger unit. The automatic bypass switch shall be 2 position and
rated at a minimum of 240V AC/30 amp. A UPS supply breaker rated at 240V
AC/30 amps shall be provided for the 120V AC input to the inverter/charger.
2. When the automatic bypass switch is in the “on” position and the supply
breaker is “on”, the UPS system is connected to utility line voltage and its
output is connected to the cabinet service panel. If the utility line voltage is
deactivated, the UPS system will automatically switch over to battery power.
3. When the automatic bypass switch is in the “off” position, and the supply is
“on”, utility line power is provided to the cabinet service panel and the
inverter/charger allowing equipment to be tested without interrupting power to
the traffic signal load.
4. When the automatic bypass switch is “off” and the supply breaker is “off”, the
utility line voltage will feed power directly to the traffic signal cabinet service
panel and power to the inverter/charger will be deactivated allowing the user
to service UPS equipment.
E. BATTERIES
Provide batteries for the Uninterruptible Power Supply System that have the
following features:
1. Individual batteries shall be 12V type rated for at least 165 minutes of
runtime, and shall be easily replaced and commercially available for purchase
as common off the shelf equal.
2. Batteries shall be sized and rated to operate at 700 watt load for 4 hours
(normal operation) followed by a 350 watt load (flash operation) for 2 hours.
3. Battery configurations shall consist of 12V batteries arranged in one of the

following arrangements: 48V, 60V, 72V, 84V, 96V.
16732-5
4. Batteries shall be deep discharge sealed prismatic valve regulated acid

(VRLA) AGM or Gel cell batteries.
5. Batteries shall operate over a temperature range of -34oC to 74oC.
6. Batteries shall not be charged when battery temperature exceeds 50oC + 3oC.
7. Batteries shall indicate maximum recharge data, recharging cycles, and

manufacture defaults on the inverter. Batteries shall not allow the recharging
process to exceed the batteries maximum values.
8. Battery interconnect wiring shall connect to the inverter unit via modular
harness with red and black cables. Harness shall have battery ring lug at the
battery end of the cables that are .40” in diameter and connect to batteries
using a ¼” – 20 UNC bolt that is ¾” in length.
9. Batteries shall have maintenance free threaded inserts sized to fit a ¼” – 20

UNC bolt that ¾” in length.
10. Insulated covers shall be provided at the connection points of the batteries to
prevent accidental shorting.
11. Battery harness and cabling shall be a minimum of 6ft in length
12. Batteries weighing more than 50 pounds shall be provided with a handle or
hand strap allowing the user to carry or move the battery without the use of
other equipment.
F. BATTERY MONITORING SYSTEMS
Provide a temperature compensated battery charging system and a temperature sensor

that have the following features:
1. The UPS system shall use a temperature compensated battery charging

system. The charging system shall compensate over a range of 2.5 to
4mV/1zC per cell.
2. The temperature sensor shall be used to monitor the temperature and regulate
the charge rate of the batteries. Unless required otherwise by the plans the
temperature sensor wire shall be as follows:
a. Temperature sensor wire shall be a minimum of 8 feet in length.
b. Should the temperature sensor fail, the inverter/charger shall not allow
the UPS system to overcharge the batteries. The UPS system shall
provide an alarm should the temperature sensor fail.
c. Recharge time for the batteries to 80% or more of full battery charge
capacity shall not exceed 20 hours at 701zF.
16732-6
d. Batteries shall not be charged when the battery temperature exceeds

501zC + 31zC.
e. The UPS system shall monitor battery strings within a system and set a
fault indicator if the battery voltage falls below normal operating
voltages.
G. EXTERNAL UPS SYSTEM CABINET1
Applicable only to the ATC Cabinet 356 version - Provide an external cabinet to
house all of the UPS system components that has the following features:
1. The external cabinet shall be NEMA Type 3R all aluminum with stainless
steel hardware, or equal, approved by the City of Houston Traffic Signal
Maintenance Shop. The external cabinet shall be sized to house all of the UPS
system components including batteries and designed to mount to the side of
the traffic signal cabinet. Dimensions of the external cabinet shall not exceed
56” height x 26” width x 18” depth. The cabinet shall be mounted in a manner
that does not obstruct pedestrian travel on adjacent sidewalk.
2. The cabinet shall be provided with one door in front that will provide access
to the cabinet. The door shall be provided with three hinges with non-
removable stainless steel pins, or a full-length piano hinge with stainless steel
pins spot welded at the top of the hinge. The hinges shall be mounted so that it
is not possible to remove them from the door or cabinet without first opening
the door.
3. The cabinet door shall be fitted with a Number 2 Corbin lock and a cast
aluminum or chrome plated steel handle with a 16mm (minimum) diameter
shaft (or equivalent cross-sectional area for a square shaft) and a three point
latch. The lock and latch design shall be such that the handle cannot be
released until the lock is released. One key shall be provided for each cabinet.
A gasket shall be provided to act as a permanent dust and weather resistant
seal at the cabinet door facing. The gasket material shall be of a nonabsorbent
material and shall maintain its resiliency after long term exposure to the
outdoor environment. The gasket shall have a minimum thickness of 6.25mm.
The gasket shall be located in a channel provided on the cabinet or on the
door(s). An “L” bracket is acceptable in lieu of this channel if the gasket is
fitted snugly against the bracket to insure a uniform dust and weather resistant
seal around the entire door facing. Any other method is subject to written
purchaser approval during inspection of an order.
1
For the ATC Cabinet 350 version, the UPS system components (including batteries) shall be housed in, facing the
front, the right rack cage of the traffic cabinet housing. Refer to Specifications Section 16730 – Intelligent
transportation System (ITS) Controller Cabinet Assembly and Section 16130 – Advanced Transportation Controller
(ATC) Cabinet Assembly.
16732-7
4. The intake for the vent system shall be on the lower section of the cabinet
front door and filtered with a washable, metal air filter. The filter shall be
securely mounted so that any air entering the cabinet must pass through the
filter. The cabinet opening for intake of air shall be large enough to use the
entire filter. The air intake and exhaust vent shall be screened to prevent entry
of insects. The screen shall have opening no larger than 8.1mm². The total free
air opening of the exhaust vent shall be large enough to prevent excessive
back-pressure on the fan.
5. The external cabinet must contain a fan mounted in the top of the cabinet. The
fan must be 48Vdc and thermostat controlled. It must turn on when the inside
temperature of the cabinet reaches or exceeds 49oC (120oF) and turn back off
once the inside temperature of the cabinet returns to 32oC (89oF).
6. The external UPS system cabinet shall include a red LED mounted on the top
of the cabinet that is visible from the street. This indicator shall be connected
to light the LED “on” to allow maintenance to know when the intersection is
running off UPS power. When the intersection is operating on utility line
voltage the LED will be “off” (not illuminated).
H. OPERATION
The UPS system shall operate in one or more of the following methods:
1. Line Interactive (Buck and Boost) Method
a. When the buck and boost functions are enabled they shall set the upper
and lower control limit allowable for the utility line voltage. If the
utility line voltage fails within the parameters set by buck and boost,
then the UPS system shall continue to operate the intersection under
utility line power. If the utility line voltage fluctuates above or below
the buck and boost values, the UPS system shall raise or lower the
voltage by approximately 10%-15% of the utility line voltage in an
attempt to bring the voltage back into the upper and lower control
limits set by buck and boost. Buck and boost shall have preset
manufacturer defaults.
b. If the utility line voltage falls above or below the functional

capabilities of buck and boost, then the UPS system shall transfer
power from the utility line voltage and the inverter/charger shall
operate the intersection from battery power converting DC voltage to
AC.
2. Continuous Operating Mode, Double Conversion Method
16732-8
a. Using the continuous operating mode buck and boost functions are
disabled and the UPS system operates continuously converting the
utility line voltage, 120V AC, to DC voltage, then back to 120V AC,
supplying the cabinet with inverter line power. Should the utility line
voltage fail, the UPS system will continue to supply inverter line
power to the cabinet via the UPS system.
3. General Operation Requirements
a. The UPS system shall be capable of providing 1,100 watts or 2,000

watts active output capacity, with a minimum of 80% inverter
efficiency. The inverter/charger shall be capable of operating at a
1,100 watt or 2,000 watt continuous load, depending on the
intersection needs.
b. When the batteries are fully charged, ensure the UPS system provides
power to run an intersection and all peripherals for a minimum of 4
hours of semi- actuated runtime (700 watt load), then switch to flash
mode for a minimum of 2 hours of flash runtime (350 watt load).
c. When the system is running on battery power, the UPS system shall
allow the user to select a voltage (typically 48V) at which the
transition from normal operating loads (700 watts) to flash mode (350
watts) will occur via a set of relay contacts or connection points on the
front panel of the inverter/charger.
d. The transfer time allowed, from disruption of normal utility line

voltage to stabilized inverter line voltage from the batteries, shall be
less than 65 milliseconds. The same allowable transfer time shall also
apply when switching from inverter line voltage to utility voltage.
e. The UPS system shall bypass utility line voltage, whenever the utility
line voltage is outside the manufacturer’s defaults or a user
programmed voltage range + 5V AC.
f. When the utility line power has been restored to a normal operating
voltage for more than 30 seconds, the UPS system shall transfer from
battery back to utility line mode. The UPS shall be equipped to prevent
a malfunction feedback to the cabinet or from feeding back to the
utility service.
g. The UPS system shall be compatible with ATC/ITS models, NEMA,

and Model 170/2070, controller and cabinet components for full
runtime operation.
16732-9
h. For an ATC Cabinet 356 version, the UPS system shall be shelf
mounted within its own side mounted external cabinet. For an ATC
Cabinet 350 version, the UPS system shall be housed in the traffic
signal cabinet. The bypass switch can be mounted inside the traffic
signal cabinet or in the side mounted external cabinet along with the
batteries.
i. The interconnection cables shall be no less than 10 feet in length.

Relay contact wiring for relay contact closures shall be no less than 6
feet long of #10 AWG wire. Wire size shall be sized accordingly to
manufacturer recommendations for any cable lengths greater than 10
feet.
j. The UPS system shall have lightning surge protection compliant with
IEEE/ANSI C.62.41, latest revision and meeting all current UL 1449
standards.
k. The UPS system and batteries shall be easily replaced and provided
with all needed hardware and software. The UPS system shall not
require any special tools for installation.
l. The UPS system shall operate with an automatic “fail safe” mode.
Should a breaker trip on the inverter/charger and/or the power transfer
relay, the unit will automatically default to utility line power and
bypass the UPS system.
m. The UPS system shall be capable of logging up to 100 events. Events

shall date and time stamp faults with the AC line voltage and UPS
battery voltage. At a minimum, the following conditions shall be
recorded as an event:
(1) The UPS system shall record utility line voltage occurrences
whenever the line voltage falls above or below the upper and
lower control limits or manufacturer preset defaults. When this
condition occurs, it shall be record as an event.
(2) Whenever the UPS system automatically switches to battery

power this shall be recorded as an event.
(3) Whenever the UPS system returns to utility line power from
battery power, this shall be recorded as an event.
(4) The UPS system shall be capable of self-monitoring and record

failure of any UPS system components as an event.
I. ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS
1. Provide this item in accordance with TXDOT Special Specification 6006 –

Electric Components.
16732-10
J. MECHANICAL COMPONENTS
1. Provide external screws, nuts and locking washers that are stainless steel; no
self-tapping screws will be used. Provide parts made of corrosion resistant
material, such as plastic, stainless steel, anodized aluminum or brass. Protect
materials from fungus growth and moisture deterioration. Separate dissimilar
metals by an inert dielectric material.
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Manufacturer Services
1. Ensure that a manufacturer's technical representative is available on site to

assist the technical personnel at each installation site and with UPS equipment
installation and communication system configuration.
2. Do not execute the initial powering up of the UPS equipment without the
END OF SECTION
16732-11
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FIELD HARDENED ETHERNET SWITCH
SECTION 16733
FIELD HARDENED ETHERNET SWITCH
PART 1 GENERAL
A. This Item governs the furnishing and installation of a Hardened Ethernet Switch
(HES):
1. At designated locations as shown on the plans, a0073 detailed in accordance

with these specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
2. With various port configurations based on 10/100 mbps and Gigabit Ethernet
standards for both copper and fiber optic connectivity.
3. Including at least two (2) fiber ports and six (6) copper ports.
A. No separate payment will be made for Hardened Ethernet Switch. Include payment in
related unit price work.
B. Refer to Section 01270 – Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. Electromagnetic Interference Standards
B. EN 55022 – EMC Standard
C. EN 60950-1 – Information Technology Equipment
D. EN 61000-4-2 – Test Standard for Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Immunity
E. EN 61000-4-3 – Immunity to Radiated, Radio-frequencies.
F. EN 61000-4-4 – Electrical Fast Transient (EFT)/Burst Transients Immunity
G. EN 61000-4-5 - Testing and Measurement Techniques – Surge Immunity Test
H. EN 61000-4-6 – Immunity to Conducted Disturbances, Induced by Radio Frequency

Fields
16733-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
I. EN 61000-4-8 – Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity Test
J. EN 61000-6-2 – Generic Standards – Immunity for Industrial Environments
K. Federal Communications Commission Standards
L. IEC 60068-2-6 – Sinusoidal Vibration Testing
M. IEC 60068-2-27 – Shock Testing
N. IEC 60255-21-1 - Electrical relays - Part 21: Vibration, Shock, Bump and Seismic
Tests on Measuring Relays and Protection Equipment - Section One: Vibration Tests
O. IEC 60255-21-2 - Electrical relays - Part 21: Vibration, shock, bump and seismic tests
on measuring relays and protection equipment - Section Two: Shock and bump tests
P. IEC 60950-1- Information Technology Equipment, Safety
Q. IEEE 802.1D – Spanning Tree Protocol
R. IEEE 802.1p – Quality of Service (QOS)
S. IEEE 802.1Q – Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN)
T. IEEE 802.1w - Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
U. IEEE 802.1x – Port-based Network Access Control (PNAC)
V. IEEE 802.3u – Ethernet
W. IEEE 802.3x – Flow Control
X. NEMA TS2 – Traffic Controller Assemblies with NTCIP Requirements
Y. NFPA 70 – National Electric Code
Z. RFC 783 – TFTP Protocol
AA. UL 508 – Standard for Safety for Industrial Control Equipment
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
1. Provide:
a. All HES of the same manufacturer.
16733-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
b. All new equipment in strict accordance with the details shown on the
plans and in the specifications.
c. High-performance and hardened Ethernet switch supporting standard

OSI Layer 2 and 3 functionality.
d. Support to directly connect to existing networks configured in ring and

mesh fault tolerant topologies enabling applications to operate reliably,
and with low latency.
e. All equipment licenses, where required, for any software or hardware

in the system.
f. Ensure compatibility between routers along same corridors regardless

of brand name
g. Ensure software parameters and settings stay retained in the event of

power disruption
B. Adherence to Standards.
1. The Ethernet Switch shall support the following protocols and regulatory
standards: Product Safety:
a. UL508, EN60950-1, IEC60950-1
b. EMI
c. FCC Part 15, Class A
d. EN55022
2. IMS:
a. EN61000-6-2
b. EN61000-4-2 (ESD Standards)
c. EN61000-4-3 (Radiated RFI Standards)
d. EN61000-4-4 (Burst standards)
e. EN61000-4-5 (Surge Standards)
f. EN61000-4-6 (Induced RFI Standards)
g. EN61000-4-8 (Magnetic Field Standards)
3. Environmental Test Compliance:
16733-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
a. IEC60255-21-1/IEC60068-2-6 Fc (Vibration Resistance)
b. IEC60255-21-2/IEC60068-2-27 Ea (Shock)
c. NEMA TS2 Environmental Requirements for Traffic Control

Equipment
d. IEEE 802.3u 100 Megabit Ethernet
e. IEEE 802.3x Flow Control
f. IEEE 802.1Q Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) Tagging & MSTP
g. IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Algorithm
h. IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Algorithm
i. IEEE 802.1p Quality of Service (QOS), 8-level transmission priorities
j. IEEE 802.1x Security
4. Protocols:
a. a – Ring for High Speed Redundancy Recovery <15ms
b. Telnet with SSH
c. IP Multicast Filtering through Internet Group Management Protocol

(IGMP) Snooping V1 (RFC 1112), V2 (RFC 2236)
d. IGMP Snooping allows Multicast Packets Filtering
e. Subscribed packets are forwarded to the subscriber
f. Unsubscribed packets are dropped at the switch
g. NTP support
h. Data Storm Control
5. Miscellaneous Standards:
a. IEEE 802.3: 10BASE-T
b. RFC783: TFTP
c. FCC
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Physical Design / Installation Requirements.
16733-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
Supply all HES with a physical design that conforms to the following requirements:
1. Must be compatible for DIN-Rail (Top hat type 35mm), Rack Mount, or Wall
Mount.
2. Provide a minimum of two built-in 100 MB full-duplex switched single-mode

fiber ports as indicated on the plans.
3. Provide a minimum of six switched 10/100 MB copper (RJ 45) ports,

independently auto negotiating.
4. Designed with an operating system that allows individual ports to be

configured for port mirroring, speed, duplex, auto-negotiation, and flow
control. Design the operating system to provide for broadcast storm frame
filtering with user defined thresholds.
5. Designed with an operating system allows for the collection of statistics on a

per port basis and provides for full support of RMON statistics, history,
alarms, and event groups.
6. Designed with an operating system that provides port security to prevent

unknown devices from gaining access to the network. In case of unauthorized
attempts to access the network, shutdown the port for a period of time and
SNMP trap and generate an alarm.
B. Electrical and Mechanical Requirements. Provide the following functionality and

features:
1. Port Configurations
a. 8 Ports 10/100TX + 2 Port 1000SX/LX, MM/SM
b. 6 Ports 10/100TX + 2 Ports 100FX, MM/SM +2 Port 1000SX/LX,

MM/SM
2. Drives up to 100 m of Category 3, 4, or 5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cable

at 10 Mbps; or 100 m of Category 5, 5e or 6 UTP cable at 100 Mbps
a. 100FX Ports
3. Drives up to:
a. Minimum of 8K Media Access Control (MAC) addresses
4. Frame buffer memory: 160 packet buffers, 1536 bytes each (240 Mbits)
5. Port Mirroring
6. MAC Based Port Trunking (2 Groups Allowed)
16733-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
7. Group 1 Up To 4 Ports FE, and Group 3 Up To 2 Ports GE
8. Switching method store-and-forward
9. Non-blocking full wire speed forwarding rate
a. 14,880 pps @ 10 Mbps
b. 148,800 pps for 100 Mbps
c. 1,488,000 pps for 1000 Mbps
10. Provide RJ-45 ports that auto-negotiate operation at 10 Mbps and 100Mbps
11. Packet-Processing
a. Switching Latency: < 15 microsecond (100Mbps)
b. Priority queues: 2
c. Ring sizes: Up to 80 switches
12. Port Configuration Specifications
a. Port configuration information may be obtained from the NMS.
b. 10/100 T/TX ports (Copper Twisted Pair)
c. RJ-45 female connector
d. Automatic and user-selectable speed setting (10/100 mbps)
e. Automatic and user-selectable half/full duplex setting
f. Rate Controlled 2Mbps to 100Mbps @ 0.5 Mbps Increments
100 Mbps Fiber Optic Port Specification Table

Typical Nominal Fiber
Connector
Distance * Wavelength Type
2km 1300 nm Multi-Mode** SC or LC with SFP
20 km 1310 nm Single Mode SC or LC with SFP
40 km 1310 nm Single Mode SC or LC with SFP
* Distance numbers are standard designations used by the Ethernet industry and should
not be used as factors in fiber optic network design. Optical budgets are minimum
guaranteed values that should be used for network design.
** Multi-Mode fiber optic cable may be 62.5 or 50 micron core diameter.
16733-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
2.03 UNIT MANAGEMENT CAPABILITIES
A. Hyper Text Transport Protocol (HTTP)/Web Browser device configuration interface
B. Command Line Interface (CLI)
C. Telnet device configuration interface (CLI)
D. Access through SSH Encryption Protocol Optional by Enabling it via CLI
E. Allow multiple simultaneous management sessions or automatically terminate

existing session when a new session is requested
F. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) version 1, 2 & 3 device status,

diagnostic, and alarm monitoring and remote configuration
G. Remote Monitoring (RMON) network monitoring in compliance to standard

RFC2819: RMON MIB
H. LED indicators: One LED for power, three LEDs per port for link, Tx, and Rx
activity.
2.04 POWER SUPPLY
A. The Ethernet Switch shall be designed to operate with the following power
requirements:
1. Terminal Block voltage between 12 VDC and 48 VDC
2. External Universal Power Supply Optional
3. Input Voltage: 85 to 240 VAC (auto-ranging).
4. Input Frequency: 47 to 60 Hz (auto-ranging).
5. Power Consumption: 20 watts (max).
6. Fast Transient Protection / Burst Standards: Compliant with IEEE C37.90.1 or

EN61000- 4-4
2.05 MECHANICAL
A. Enclosure must meet or exceed 20-gauge steel or IP30 aluminum casing suitable for:
1. Stand-alone
2. Shelf
3. Pedestal
16733-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
4. Wall mounting.
B. Permanently and clearly identify the enclosure with:
1. Name
2. Model number
3. Serial number
4. Any information required to facilitate equipment maintenance.
C. Dimensions shall not exceed the following maximums:
1. Height: 3” (76.2 mm)
2. Width: 8” (203.2 mm)
3. Depth: 10” (254 mm)
4. Weight: 5 lb. (2.27 kg)
2.06 WIRING
A. Meet all requirements of the National Electric Code for all wiring external to the HES
switch.
B. Cut all wires to proper length before assembly. Do not double back any wire to take
up slack.
C. Neatly lace wires into cable with nylon lacing or plastic straps.
D. Secure cables with clamps.
E. Provide service loops at all connections.
2.07 TRANSIENT SUPPRESSION
A. Provide diodes or other protective devices across the coils of all DC relays, solenoids
and holding coils for transient suppression.
2.08 POWER SERVICE PROTECTION
A. Provide readily accessible, manually resettable or replaceable circuit protection

devices (such as circuit breakers or fuses) for equipment and power source protection,
such that no wire, component, connector, PC board or assembly is subjected to
sustained current in excess of their respective design limits upon the failure of any
single circuit element of wiring.
2.09 FAIL SAFE PROVISION
16733-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. The equipment shall be designed such that it does not cause or contribute toward the
failure of any other unit of equipment.
2.10 CONNECTORS AND HARNESSES
A. Make external connections by means of connectors.
B. Provide keyed connectors to preclude improper hookups.
C. Color code and / or appropriately mark all wires to and from the connectors.
D. Provide connecting harnesses of appropriate length and terminated with matching

connectors for interconnection with the HES switches.
E. Uniquely color code patch fibers with mixed connectors for easy identification.
F. Plate all pins and mating connectors with not less than 20 microns of gold.
G. Cover all connectors utilizing solder type connections with a piece of heat shrink
tubing securely shrunk to insure that it protects the connection.
A. The Ethernet Switch shall be designed to operate in the following environmental

conditions and shall meet or exceed:
1. -40ºC to 75ºC operating temperature range
2. -40ºC to 85ºC storage temperature range
3. 10% to 95% operating relative humidity (non-condensing)
4. Altitude: Operating 10,000 ft, Storage 15,000 ft
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Provide equipment that utilizes the latest available techniques for design and
construction with a minimum number of parts, subassemblies, circuits, cards, and
modules to maximize standardization and commonality. The equipment shall be
designed for ease of maintenance, with all component parts being readily accessible
for inspection and maintenance. Provide test points for checking essential voltages
and waveforms.
1. Provide external screws, nuts and locking washers that are made of corrosion
resistant material, such as plastic, stainless steel, anodized aluminum or brass.
2. No self-tapping screws.
16733-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
3. Protect materials from fungus growth and moisture deterioration.
4. Separate dissimilar metals by an inert dielectric material.
END OF SECTION
16733-10
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FIBER OPTIC SPLICE ENCLOSURE
SECTION 16735
FIBER OPTIC SPLICE ENCLOSURE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Fiber Optic splice enclosures.
A. Unit Prices.
1. This item will be measured by each “Fiber Optic Splice Enclosure” installed,
connected and tested.
this item and will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Fiber Optic Splice
Enclosure”. This includes testing; connecting; and for materials, equipment,
mounting hardware, labor, tools, documentation, warranty, training and
incidentals.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM G 21 – Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric

Materials to Fungi
B. ASTM G 155 - Standard Practice for Operating Xenon Arc Lamp Apparatus for
Exposure of Materials
C. Bellcore GR-769-CORE – Requirements for Fiber Optic Splice Closures and

Terminals
D. National Electric Safety Code
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide all submittals identified in these specifications no later than two (2) weeks
following award of contract.
B. Documentation. Submit manufacturer’s cut sheets to ensure that the specifications are
met.
16735-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Description. Furnish and install underground and aerial splice enclosures. The
enclosures shall meet the size and capacity requirements of the project plans.
B. Materials. Ensure materials and construction methods conform to the current NEC
and National Electrical Safety Code.
1. Splice Trays.
a. General Requirements. Accept single mode fibers and meet the

(1) Completely re-enterable
(2) Accommodate up to eight buffer tubes, expandable to 24 buffer

tubes
(3) Hold up to 48 splices expandable to 288 splices
(4) Hold buffer tubes in place with channel snaps
(5) Stackable tray design
b. Technical Requirements. Splice Tray organizer will be made of

molded polycarbonate plastic with a clear PVC cover. The tray
retainers, inserts, and fiber tube will be made of polypropylene/EPDM.
Test splice tray, tray cover, cable ties, splice inserts, and tube
according to Bellcore GR-769-CORE one day chemical resistance test.
2. Optical Fiber Organizers.
a. Store splice trays in such a way as to protect and support cable splices
within an environmentally protected area, an outside plant entrance
point within a basement junction box, etc. Store splices in all
configurations for up to four cables. Accept a minimum of four splice
trays and offer bonding and grounding hardware as required from
project to project. Use a one piece cable strapping system for easy
storage.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
A. Use Locations
16735-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Underground vault
2. Communications Service Box
3. Manhole
4. Aerial mounted on messenger
5. Hub building
B. Design Requirements. Aerial application requires proper mounting hardware and

shall be mounted using messenger cable. Ensure re-entry does not cause damage to
drop cables or their jackets. Splice enclosures must withstand the most severe
conditions of moisture, vibration, impact, cable stress and flex temperature extremes.
If requested by the Engineer, provide the factory test procedures and their results of
the minimum specifications listed below, which are the minimum requirements for
any underground or aerial splice enclosure. Splice Enclosures shall be compatible and
securely mounted in Communications Service Boxes used by City of Houston.
1. Allow for cable entry or re-entry in butt configuration, using mid-span cable
breakout and splicing methods. Only one (1) cable per entry port is allowed.
Use cable addition kits when all existing ports in butt configuration are in use.
No inline cable entry into splice enclosure is allowed. Enclosure to meet the
a. Rigid non filled case,
b. Withstand compression up to 200 pounds,
c. Made of molded plastic,
d. Two entrance ports on each end, and
e. Port plugs allowing for in-line or butted splices.
16735-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
3.02 TESTING REQUIREMENTS FOR SPLICE ENCLOSURES.
TEST PROCEDURE RESULTS

No loss in material
UV Resistance ASTM-G155 for 740 hours
strength
Fungus
ASTM-G21 Zero rating
Resistance
Water
20 foot depth for 7 days No water intrusion
Immersion
Ten 28 hour freeze/thaw cycle from No loss in material
Freeze/Thaw
104 F (40 C) to 158 F (70 C) strength
Environmental
No damage to metallic
Requirements Salt Fog 30 days
parts
Acidified 90 days in a salt/sulfuric acid bath No damage to metallic
Saltwater (sulfuric acid, 0.2N sodium hydroxide) parts
No loss in material
Chemical
24 hours at 100 F in Kerosene strength
Immersion
(Closure Body Material)
Gasket Sulfuric acid, 0.2N sodium hydroxide, Weight change less than
Material gasoline, wasp spray 10%
Compression
100 C for 22 hours <22%
Set
No mechanical damage
100 ft-lb at 104 F (40 C) and 0 F (18 C)
Impact Torsion No mechanical damage or
10 twists at 104 F (40 C) and 0 F (18 C)
loss of seal
Mechanical No mechanical damage or
Bending 25 bends at 104 F (40 C) and 0 F (18 C)
Requirements loss of seal
Drop from 30 inches at 104 F (40 C) and
Drop 0 F (18 C) No mechanical damage
Compression 300 lbf for 15 min. at 104 F (40 C) No mechanical damage
and 0 F (18 C)
Cable Pullout 100 lbf for 30 min. No cable movement
No damage to
Current Surge 300 amps/10 secs.
Electrical bonding hardware
Requirements Bond Clamp
20 lbf for 1 min. No bond clamp movement
Retention
END OF SECTION
16735-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FIBER DISTRIBUTION UNIT
SECTION 16736
FIBER DISTRIBUTION UNIT
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Primary Fiber Distribution Units (PFDU) and Secondary Fiber Distribution Units
(SFDU)
A. Section 01270 – Measurement and payment
A. Unit Prices
1. Measurement. This Item shall be measured by the number of primary or

secondary fiber distribution units furnished and installed.
2. Payment. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this
Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” shall be paid.
a. “Primary Fiber Distribution Unit” Per Unit
b. “Secondary Fiber Distribution Unit” Per Unit
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Documentation
1. Submittals of catalog sheets, engineering drawings and specifications for all

hardware items to be used on a project shall be provided to the Engineer for
approval prior to commencement of work.
2. Submittal includes catalog sheets, engineering drawings and specifications for

all hardware items for engineer’s approval.
B. Provide the Engineer with all submittals identified in these specifications no later than
two (2) weeks following award of the contract.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
16736-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Primary Fiber Distribution Units
1. PFDU. Utilize hardware within the primary hubs in support of the hub
distribution system and the primary network. This point in the system allows
the distribution of signals directly to the network electronics via a jumper
cord/patch cord cable management system.
2. The PFDU is characterized by a modular, medium density construction.
3. Termination method for PFDU shall be field termination of all inbound cable
and patch cord connectivity to all outbound cables and network electronics.
4. PFDU shall be mountable within a 19-inch rack or bay and have a typical
dimension of 8-inch high by 19-inch wide by 18-inch deep.
5. PFDU hardware shall be easily adaptable for bay routing of patch cords and
cable. Design hardware to allow for the side-by-side termination of all fibers
without violating minimum bend radius requirements.
6. Each PFDU connector capacity shall be 144 for SC connections, or 72 for ST

connections if specified on plans.
7. All adapters used within the Network shall be compatible with single mode
SC connectors unless otherwise specified on the plans. Fiber Optic Adapters
shall be SC type unless otherwise specified in the plans. No plastic adapters
shall be allowed.
8. All PFDU hardware that shall be accessible by unauthorized personnel shall

be lockable with an interior key lock.
9. All PFDU Housing’s shall be made with front and rear locking options.
B. Secondary Fiber Distribution Unit
1. Typically, the final distribution point within the network and located in the
Controller Cabinet. These shall be modular junction panels capable of being
mounted on top of the pre-installed power strips in the cabinet.
2. The SFDU shall be a modular design, 1 unit tall, 19-inch mountable, with 16
pre-drilled adapter ports minimum. The SFDU shall have twelve pre-installed
SC bulkheads, and a minimum of 4 open holes.
3. The SFDU shall be capable of being mounted on top of the pre-installed

power strips in the cabinet. The left side power strip occupies 3/8” between
the racks. The right side power strip occupies 7/8” between the racks.
4. All adapters used within the Network shall be compatible with single mode
SC connectors, unless otherwise specified on the plans. No plastic adapters
shall be allowed.
16736-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Furnish and install Primary Fiber Distribution Units (PFDU) and Secondary Fiber
Distribution Units (SFDU) in the individual traffic cabinets and communications
closets within buildings as shown on plans.
END OF SECTION
16736-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION COMMUNICATION SERVICE BOX
SECTION 16737
COMMUNICATION SERVICE BOX
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Standard, off-street buried communication service boxes with lids and aprons to be
utilized for support of communications cable installations.
A. Section 01270 – Measurement and payment
A. Unit Prices
1. Payment for this item will be measured by each “Communication Service

Box” installed.
this item will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Communication Service
Box” of the type and size specified. This price is full compensation for
excavating and backfilling; constructing, furnishing, and installing the
communication service boxes and concrete aprons when required; and
equipment, labor, materials, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the
work.
3. Refer to Section 01270 – Measurement and payment for unit price procedures.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 497 – Standard Test Methods for Concrete Pipe, Concrete Box Sections,
Manhole Sections or Tile
B. ASTM C 857 –Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for
Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures
C. ASTM D 543 - Standard Practices for Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics to

Chemical Reagents
D. ASTM D 570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
E. ASTM D 635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of
Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position
16737-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
F. ASTM D 790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and
Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials
G. ASTM D 2444 - Standard Practice for Determination of the Impact Resistance of

Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings by Means of a Tup (Falling Weight)
H. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials
I. ASTM E 662 - Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke
Generated by Solid Materials
J. ASTM G 21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric

Materials to Fungi
K. ASTM G 155 - Standard Practice for Operating Xenon Arc Lamp Apparatus for
Exposure of Materials
L. ASTM G 154 - Standard Practice for Operating Fluorescent Ultraviolet (UV) Lamp
Apparatus for Exposure of Materials
M. NFPA 70 – National Electric Code
N. Western Underground Committee Guide 3.6 – Non-Concrete Enclosures
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
1. Ensure the communication service box is capable of supporting burial in off-

street areas where occasional, non-deliberate heavy vehicle loads may be
experienced.
2. Sustaining light vehicle loads in applications such as parking lots or

driveways, and does not deteriorate when buried in various types of soils with
varying moisture content.
B. Functional Requirements.
Ensure that the communication service box is capable of the following applications:
1. Ensure box withstands 600 lb. per square foot applied over the entire sidewall
with less than ¼ -inch deflection per foot length of box.
2. Ensure box or extension is footed with a minimum of 1-1/4-inch flange.
16737-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
3. Ensure box and cover withstand a test loading of 20,000 lb. over a 10-inch by
10- inch area centered on the cover with less than ½-inch deflection. Meet
Western Underground Standards 3.6. Supply certification by an independent
laboratory or factory testing documentation witnessed and certified by a
professional engineer licensed in Texas.
4. Manufacture box and cover from polymer concrete reinforced with two layers
of continuous strands of woven or stitched borosilicate fiberglass cloth.
Construct the polymer concrete from catalyzed polyester resin, sand, and
aggregate. Ensure a minimum compressive strength of 11,000 psi. Polymer
concrete containing chopped fiberglass or fiberglass reinforced plastic is not
acceptable.
5. Pulling of fiber optic cable interconnected with conduit.
6. Provide cable racks for storage of cable service loops within minimum bend
radius limits of 10 inches (250mm).
7. Provide storage of splice enclosures.
8. Provide attachment bracket kit for splice enclosure mounting to prevent splice
enclosure from lying on the bottom of the communication service box.
9. Provide access to cable and equipment after installation to support

maintenance.
10. Accommodate a degree of security of cable and equipment from vandalism

and theft by requiring an access tool.
11. Provide modular additions of conduits through punchouts or other means from
four sides.
12. Provide protection of cable and devices from run-over by light vehicles and
non- deliberate heavy vehicles without damage to the communication service
box or enclosed cables and devices.
13. Support National Electrical Code requirements for grounding of shielded

metallic strength cables as deemed necessary by the communications
installation design.
14. Support water drainage of any invasive water.
C. Specifications. Communication service box material will comply with ASTM

standards. The following applicable ASTM specifications are defined below:
16737-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
Specification/
Title/Subject Applicability
Test Method
Load testing of Pipe and
ASTM C-497 Compliant
Conduit
Structural Loading for
ASTM C-857 Underground Precast Compliant
Structures
ASTM D-543,
Chemical Resistance Test Compliant
Section 7
ASTM D-570,
Section 5.0, 6.1,
Water Absorption Compliant
6.5
ASTM D-635 Flammability Test Compliant
ASTM D-790 Flexural Property Compliant
ASTM D-2444 Impact Resistance Test Compliant

Surface Burning
ASTM E-84 Compliant
Characteristics
Material Samples tested for
ASTM E-662 Specific Optical Density
Compliance
ASTM G-21 Fungus Growth
Compliance
Sunlight Exposure of Non-
ASTM G-155 Compliant
Metallic Materials
ASTM G-154 Sunlight Exposure
Compliance
D. Environmental Requirements.
1. Galvanic Corrosion. Ensure communication service box material does not

contain dissimilar metals which support galvanic corrosion nor any chemicals
which, when in contact with non-corrosive metals used in the splice enclosure
construction would cause metal deterioration.
2. Ice and Snow. Ensure communication service box will not be damaged by ice
covering the lid at a thickness of two inches (50mm) nor a snow load of four
feet (1.2m) for a period of four weeks.
2.02 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
A. Human Safety.
1. Ensure communication service box is free from chemicals that are harmful to
humans and is not constructed with sharp edges.
16737-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Lid will have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.5. The lid will not be
constructed to cause slippage of a person walking across the covered
communication service box during wet conditions.
3. Lid installation and removal tools will comply with normally recognized
industry safety standards.
B. System Safety. Communication service box material will contain no chemicals that
may damage normal communications wire line, optical cable, splice enclosures or
other equipment normally used in outdoor communications network installation.
Also, communication service box will not reflect any light.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION
A. Requirements. Construct for in-ground installation ensuring a flush fitting with

sidewalks and grass areas, using light weight, high strength materials.
1. Lid Requirements. Ensure lid is exposed to the environment and in public

view.
a. Include locking devices which are non-corrosive and require removal

using a special access tool/key.
b. Include provisions for lifting and removal using a maintenance tool.
c. Lids shall be secured with tamper resistant standard Penta-Head

Stainless Steel bolts.
d. Traffic-bearing.
e. Blend into the environment, providing an acceptable appearance.
f. Perform its intended function without failure for a minimum of 20

years of exposure to the environment as defined in this specification.
2. General Requirements. Communications service box dimensions will be per

plan drawings. a. Knockouts. Locate and configured as shown on plan
drawings.
a. Provide two (2) conduit knockouts of minimum 4-inch size on each

wide dimension side of the communication service box close to the
bottom edge, allowing adequate material for structural integrity.
b. Provide one (1) knockout of 4-inch minimum on each shorter

dimension side of the communication service box for conduit
penetrations.
16737-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. Drainage. Construct communication service box without a bottom, allowing drainage

via a bottom trench fill of 6 to 8 inches of gravel or crushed rock.
C. Splice Enclosures and Mounting Kit. Include a kit for providing mounting for a splice
enclosure per plan drawing.
1. Design with sidewall mounting provisions on the longest width for a splice
enclosure.
2. Include brackets allowing attachment of a cylindrical splice enclosure using

nylon ties in the splice enclosure mounting kit.
3. Include in mounting provisions preformed holes for screw seat inserts with
inserts included as part of the mounting kit, or screw seats molded into the
communication service box sidewall.
4. Support of 18 pounds is required for splice enclosure brackets.
D. Concrete Apron. Provide a concrete apron (typically 10” wide x 6” to 8” deep)

surrounding the ground box. The apron shall include necessary reinforcing steel as
required in the City of Houston Communication Details.
END OF SECTION
16737-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION BLUETOOTH SPECIFICATION
SECTION 16739
BLUETOOTH SPECIFICATION
(Anonymous Wireless Address Matching Device)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish anonymous wireless address matching (AWAM) device as detailed in this

specification and as directed. Provide all equipment required to interface with an
existing/proposed infrastructure as subsidiary.
B. Ensure after the setup, there are no external tuning controls of any kind, which will
require an operator.
C. Furnish all new equipment and component parts of the latest proven design and
manufacture, and in an operable condition at the time of delivery and installation.
Provide all parts that are of high quality workmanship.
A. Unit Prices
1. Measurement. This Item will be measured as each unit furnished, installed,

and tested.
2. Payment. The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with
this Item measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the
unit price bid for “Bluetooth Equipment”.
3. The stand alone enclosure will be bid as a separate item if needed: AWAM
Device Enclosure.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. TxDOT Special Specification 6005 - Testing, Training, Documentation, Final

1.05 WARRANTY
16739-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Provide warranty in accordance with TxDOT Special Specification 6005, “Testing,

Training, Documentation, Final Acceptance, and Warranty”.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide all AWAM devices from the same manufacturer. At a minimum, this item
shall include:
1. AWAM Device
2. Antenna
3. Surge Protection
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Provide design to prevent reversed assembly or improper installation of connectors,

fasteners, etc. Design each item of equipment to protect personnel from exposure to
high voltage during equipment operation, adjustments, and maintenance.
B. Include licenses for all equipment, where required, for any software or hardware in
the AWAM system.
C. Ensure the AWAM device is a rack mount device and will plug into a NEMA TS1,
TS2, 170 or 2070 card rack assembly. The AWAM device shall draw power from the
edge connector of the card rack assembly. The AWAM device shall also have the
ability to function as a shelf mount unit with the addition of a stand alone enclosure.
D. The AWAM processor shall include the field software and accompanying use license
to enable direct collection of MAC addresses from passing vehicles containing
devices capable of being discovered by the process. It must communicate directly to
the host application on the TranStar network by Ethernet-based methods in a format
consistent with the existing travel time monitoring host software currently in use at
Houston TranStar. At a minimum, the field software should provide the timestamp
that the MAC address was read, the location of the device, and the MAC address
itself or an equivalent anonymized version of it. The AWAM device shall accept new
software revisions via BAT E-Z flash memory cards or equivalent. Software
configuration changes shall be able to be made both pre and post installation. The
AWAM device shall contain BAT reidentification algorithms and filtering or
equivalent.
16739-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
E. The Bluetooth discovery process shall operate in an asynchronous mode such that all
MAC addresses gathered are individually time-stamped when they are detected,
rather than operate in a batch process of discovery. The field processor and software
must provide the ability to anonymize MAC addresses using methods and format
consistent with the existing travel time monitoring host software currently in use at
Houston TranStar. The field software must produce individual, non-duplicative, MAC
addresses with ability to ‘push’ to the travel time monitoring server using User
Datagram Protocol (UDP) in near real-time. In addition, the controller must be
remotely accessible using secure IP networking (for example, SSH) for management
purposes. The management interface should allow for the setting of software
parameters, viewing system logs, starting and stopping the software and rebooting the
controller.
2.03 AWAM DEVICE PERFORMANCE
A. Ensure the AWAM device provides a minimum of 85% MAC address reads when
tested per the test procedure as outlined in this document.
2.04 AWAM DEVICE COMMUNICATIONS
A. Ensure the AWAM device is capable of communicating via Ethernet through the
existing city network.
2.05 PROCESSOR FEATURES
A. 200Mhz ARM9 CPU
B. 32MB SDRAM
C. PC/104 expansion bus
D. Compact Flash socket
E. 1 USB 2.0 ports
F. 10/100 Ethernet
G. 1 serial ports
H. 20 DIO Pins
I. Battery backed real-time clock
J. Debian Linux OS
2.06 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
A. Mechanical Specifications. Size: 8.3 in. x 4.5 in. x 1.2 in.
2.07 ELECTRICALSPECIFICATIOS
16739-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Power Requirements: 8-30VDC, 3 Watts
2.08 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
A. Environmental Specifications. Fanless Operating Temperature: -20°C to +75°C
2.09 BLUETOOTH SPECIFICATIONS
A. Ensure the Bluetooth adapter is integrated into the AWAM device as a separate
daughter board to the main processor board. External plug-in Bluetooth adapters will
not be accepted. Bluetooth adapter shall have at minimum the following features:
1. Bluetooth 2.0+EDR Class 1
2. Working distance 300m
3. USB 2.0 interface
4. Maximum transfer rate of 3 Mbps (EDR)
5. Frequency Range of 2.402~2.480GHz
6. Transmit Output Power of +19dBm (+6dBm EDR) E.I.R.P.
7. Antenna connector: RP-AMA
8. Bluetooth Profiles DUN, FAX, LAP, SPP, HID, HCRP, FTP,OPP, A2DP,
AVRCP, GAVDP, HSP, HFP,PAN, BIP
9. Regulatory Approvals: FCC, CE, TELEC, KCC, Bluetooth SIG
2.10 ANTENNA SPECIFICATIONS
1. Antenna shall have at minimum the following features:
2. Frequency: 2400-2500 MHz
3. Gain: 5dBiImpedance: 50 0.
4. Finish: Matte Black
5. Radiator Material: Copper
6. Polarization: Linear
7. Connector: N Male
8. VSWR: 1.9 : 1 Max
9. Radiate Pattern: Omni-directional
16739-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
10. Operating Temperature: -30° C to 90° C
2.11 SURGE PROTECTION SPECIFICATIONS
A. Surge protection shall have at minimum the following features:
1. Gas discharge tube
2. Bi-directional protection
3. Passes DC power
4. Body: Aluminum
5. Connector: N-female to N-female
6. Size: 3.2 in. x 1.6 in. x 0.8 in.
7. Frequency: 0-3 GHz
8. Max Discharge Current: 5 kA
9. Impedance: 50 0.
10. Operating Temperature: -55° C to 85° C
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 TESTING
A. Perform testing in accordance with TxDOT Special Specification 6005, “Testing,

Training, Documentation, Final Acceptance, and Warranty”.
B. AWAM device shall conform to the device performance requirements listed in

section 2.03. when subjected to the following test procedure:
1. 10 Trial Vehicle Runs
2. Sites Connected to Transtar Server to Verify Recordings
3. The vehicles used for the testing shall have 2 Bluetooth devices with
discovery mode enabled. The MAC addresses will be recorded at the server
connected to the AWAM device process controller prior to the
commencement of the test.
4. The passing percentage (%) shall be computed using the following formula to
find a weighted average percentage: ((Total Positive Readings from the
Antenna Runs (n) / Total runs (T)) x 100
16739-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
END OF SECTION
16739-6
CITY OF HOUSTON SINGLE MODE FIBER
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION OPTIC CABLE SYSTEM
SECTION 16740
SINGLE MODE FIBER OPTIC CABLE SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Single Mode Fiber Optic Cable System.
A. Measurement. This Item will be measured by the foot of cable furnished, installed,
spliced, connected, terminated, stored, and tested.
B. Payment. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item
and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid
for “Fiber Optic Cable System” of the type, and number of fibers as applicable. This
price is full compensation for furnishing and installing all cable (including patch
cables and Ethernet cables); for relocating or removing cables as required; for pulling
through conduit or duct; testing; for installing cable along messenger cable; for minor
relocation of messenger cable on poles; splicing; connecting; and for materials,
equipment, labor, tools, documentation, warranty, training and incidentals.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 – Standard for Optical Fiber Outside Plant Communications

Cable
B. ASTM D 210 – Standard Specification for Bone Black Pigment
C. ASTM D 882 – Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting

for Wire and Cable
E. ASTM D 2261 – Standard Test Method for Tearing Strength of Fabrics by the
Tongue (Single Rip) Procedure (Constant-Rate-of-Extension Tensile Testing
Machine)
F. GR-20-CORE (Bellcore (Telcordia)) Issue 10 – Optical Fiber and Optical Fiber Cable
16740-1
G. National Electric Safety Code
H. Rural Utilities Service (RUS), 7CFR 1755.900 – Filled Fiber Optics Cable
I. TIA 586 – Commercial Building Cabling for Telecommunications
J. TIA/EIA 598-B – Standard Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding
K. TIA 492-CAAA – Detail Specification for Class Iva Dispersion-Unshifted Single-

Mode Optical Fibers
L. TIA 604 – Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Documentation Submittal Checklist for Fiber Optic Specifications. This is a summary

of the submittals included in this Specification.
1. Fiber Optic Cable Technician Qualifications
a. Submit documentation to ensure that Fiber Optic Cable Technician

meets all requirements stated in Article 1.06.A.1.
2. Fiber Optic Cable Manufacturer
a. Manufacturer ISO-9001 and TL 9000 Certification. Proof of

compliance with Bellcore (Telcordia) GR-20-CORE, Issue No. 1 TL
9000. Documentation for each cable indicating that the cable is listed
by the Rural Utilities Service (RUS), 7CFR 1755.900 or PE-90 if in
transition to RUS. Manufacturing Site testing procedures and results.
3. Cable Documentation
a. Current Catalog Cut Sheet. Manufacturer’s production cable cross

section drawings. Manufacturer’s confirmation letter listing the optical
field cables. Current RUS “Listing Letter”. Letter of certification for
GR-20-CORETL 9000 compliance. Manufacturer’s installation
procedures and technical support information.
4. Packaging and Shipping of Fiber Optic Cable
a. Submit manufacturer’s test results documented in accordance with

GR-20-CORE Issue 10. Attenuation for each fiber in the cable in units
of dB/km at both 1310 nm and 1550 nm.
5. Optical Fiber Materials
a. Documentation that cable meets all requirements of Article 3.01.B.3

and manufacturer’s SOP for installation.
16740-2
6. Pull Tape
a. Manufacturer’s cut sheets for pull tape.
7. Underground Marking Tape
a. Manufacturer cut sheets and documentation necessary to ensure that

tape meets all specifications under Article 3.01.B.5.
8. Underground Cable Marking Posts and Discs
a. Manufacturer’s cut sheets for proposed posts and discs.
9. Fiber Optic Connectors
a. Manufacturer’s cut sheets for fiber optic connectors for proposed use.
10. Patch Cords
a. Submit catalog sheets, engineering drawings and specifications for

patch cords for approval.
11. Equipment Racks and Bays
a. Manufacturer’s cut sheets for equipment racks and bays for proposed
use.
12. Testing
a. Submit OTDR, Optical Power Meter, end-to-end attenuation, and ping

tests performed on as-built cable system.
B. Provide the Engineer all submittals identified in the specification no later than two (2)
weeks following award of the contract. Do not purchase cable for use on this project
prior to receiving written approval of submittals for fiber optic cable by the Engineer.
Additional details about submittals can be found in the specific equipment sections
below. Refer to Submittal Checklist for Fiber Optic Specifications at the end of this
specification.
C. Submittal Requirements for Fiber Optic Cable Manufacturers. Submit documentation

for the fiber optic cable manufacturer that documents, as a minimum, the following
information:
1. Manufacturer ISO-9001 and TL 9000 Certification.
2. “Proof of Compliance” with (Bellcore (Telcordia)) GR-20-CORE, Issue No. 2

TL9000.
16740-3
3. Documentation for each cable, indicating that the cable is listed by the Rural
Utilities Service (RUS), 7CFR 1755.900 or, if cable is in transition to RUS
and be fully compliant with ANSI/ICEA S-87-640.
4. Manufacturing Site Testing Procedures. The Engineer reserves the right to

require verification of any or all of the manufacturer’s test procedures and
those test results. When required by the Engineer, the cable manufacturer
issuing the test data as verification of testing will conduct this testing, and/or
the testing will be performed in the presence of the Engineer or Engineer’s
Agent.
D. Submittals for Fiber Optic Cable.
1. Documentation will consist of catalog sheets, engineering drawings, and

maintenance procedures for all fiber optic cables to be used on this project. As
a minimum, fiber optic cable submittals will include the following
information:
a. Current Catalog Cut Sheet
b. Manufacture’s production cable cross section drawings
c. Manufacture’s confirmation letter listing the optical fiber cable(s)
d. Current RUS “Listing Letter” for said cable manufacturer
e. Cable manufacturer’s installation procedures and technical support

information associated with the cable proposed for use.
2. Submit manufactures cut sheets for all fiber optic cable to be used.
E. Submit documentation for the optical fiber that sufficiently documents that, optical
fiber meets all criteria specified in Article 3.01.B. Provide the manufacturer’s
Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) for installation of this cable.
F. Submit manufacturer cut sheets for pull tape to be used on this project.
G. Submit manufacturer cut sheets and all applicable documentation necessary to

establish that the specifications are met for the underground marking tape to be used
on this project.
H. Submit manufacturer cut sheets for underground marking posts and discs to be used
on this project.
I. Submit manufacturer cut sheets for fiber optic connectors to be used on this project.
J. Submittals for Patch Cords
16740-4
1. Submit catalog sheets, engineering drawings and specifications for patch

cords for approval prior to commencement of work.
K. Submit all manufacturer’s cut sheets for equipment racks and bays.
L. Submittals for Fiber Optic Aerial Storage System
1. Submit catalog sheets, engineering drawings and specifications for a Fiber

Optic Aerial Storage System to the Engineer for approval prior to
commencement of work.
M. Submittals for Fiber Optic Technician Qualifications
1. Submit to the Engineer all documentation necessary to demonstrate that all

fiber optic technicians providing services on this contract meet the minimum
requirements established in Article 1.06.A.1, prior to the start of construction.
Written approval of the technicians submitted for review by the Engineer is
required prior to beginning any work on the fiber optic cable plant. Address
any deficiencies noted by the Engineer prior to beginning any work on the
fiber optic cable plant.
N. Test Procedures. Submit test procedures and data forms for the pre-installation, post-
installation, subsystem, and system integration test for approval. Test procedures will
require approval before performing tests. Submit one (1) copy of the data forms
containing data and quantitative results, as well as an authorized signature. Submit a
copy of the OTDR and Power Meter Test results as an electronic copy; supply
original software packages and PC for OTDR results interpretation.
O. Submittals for Installation
1. Submit documentation including all OTDR, optical Power Meter Tests, and
end-to- end attenuation tests performed on the as-built cable system. Submit
three (3) units each of the hardware components/equipment required for the
OTDR and the power meter tests to Engineer.
A. Training Requirements for Technicians
1. Fiber Optic Cable Technician Qualifications
a. Work To Be Performed By Fiber Optic Technicians
(1) Any task requiring the opening of the fiber optic cable jacket,
installation of fiber optic connectors, fusion splicing together
of two fibers, or the testing of any fiber optic cable, drop cable,
or patch cords will be performed by Fiber Optic Technicians
that have been pre-approved by the Engineer.
16740-5
b. Minimum Requirements for Fiber Optic Technicians
(1) Certifications – All fiber optic technicians will maintain Fiber

Optic Installer Certification by the Electronic Technical
Association (ETA) or approved equal. It should be noted that
approved fiber optic technicians will maintain all certifications
on their person at all times while working on the subject
project.
(2) Training – All fiber optic technicians will be able to

demonstrate their participation in at least one of the following:
c. Attendance and successful completion of at least one four day

“Installation of Fiber Optic Products School” conducted by a major
manufacturer of fiber optic products within one calendar year of the
commence work date of this project. Said course outline will be
submitted for review by the Engineer in order to determine if the
course content is adequate to address the work requirements
established in Article 1.06.A.1.a.
d. Demonstration of attendance and successful completion of an

independent generic four (4) day school that encompasses all aspects
of outside plant fiber optic technician certification within one calendar
year of the commence work date of this project. Said course outline
will be submitted for review by the Engineer in order to determine if
the course content is adequate to address the work requirements
established in Article 1.06.A.1a.
(1) Work History for Fiber Optic Technicians – All Fiber Optic
Technicians who will perform work on this project will be able
to demonstrate a minimum of three (3) years work experience,
with a minimum of eighteen (18) months continuous work
experience during this timeframe.
(2) Work experience will be any work activity involving those

work elements described in Article 1.06.A.1a.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General Requirements. Provide new corrosion resistant materials that comply with
the details shown on the plans and the requirements of this item.
16740-6
1. Provide splicing kits, fiber optic cable caps, moisture/water sealants,

connectors, patch cords, aerial cable storage systems, and accessories to
complete the fiber optic communication system. Furnish equipment for
installation, splicing, and testing.
B. Cable Requirements. Furnish fiber optic cable suitable for underground conduit and
aerial environment.
1. Do not purchase cable for use on this project prior to receiving written
approval of submittals for fiber optic cable by the Engineer, as established in
Section 1.05.
2. All fiber optic cable(s) supplied and utilized on this project will be from a
single manufacturer.
3. Optical fiber and cable manufacturer shall be vertically integrated.
4. The optical fiber shall be a matched clad design manufactured by the outside
vapor deposition process.
5. Manufacturers proposing to supply fiber optic cable for this project will be
Certified ISO- 9001 and TL 9000 Certified.
6. Fiber optic cable manufacturer proposed for this project will demonstrate, as a
prerequisite, engagement in the production of each and every fiber optic
cable(s) specified herein, for a continuous period of twenty years.
7. All cables supplied for this project will be produced utilizing the construction
processes noted herein and warranted by manufacturer. Ensure that all
proposed fiber optic cable is compatible with existing
equipment/infrastructure.
A. Perform tests in accordance with testing requirements in this Item. All optical fibers
within each cable will be factory tested by the manufacturer for continuity and to
establish the attenuation of each fiber prior to shipping. Testing will be conducted and
the results documented in accordance with GR-20-CORE (Bellcore (Telcordia)) Issue
10. This testing will be conducted immediately prior to shipping while the fiber is on
the reel and the results will be provided with each cable reel and affixed within the
reel wrapping. An additional copy of the test documentation will be provided to the
Engineer under separate cover. As a minimum, the results provided in these reports
will indicate attenuation for each fiber in the cable in units of dB/km at both 1310 nm
and at 1550 nm.
1. Test Methods.
16740-7
a. Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) Tests. Use the OTDR to

measure fiber optic cable for overall attenuation (signal loss dB/km),
fiber cable length, and identify fiber optic cable anomalies such as
breaks. Perform four (4) OTDR tests. They are as follows:
(1) Acceptance test
(2) Pre installation test
(3) Post termination test
(4) Final end to end test
2. OTDR Settings:
a. Use the file name of the fiber scan to indicate the location or direction
the test was run from, as well as the fiber number being tested.
b. Set the “A” cursor at the beginning of the fiber trace and set the “B”
cursor at the end of the fiber trace. The distance to cursor “B” indicates
the length of the fiber cable segment being measured.
c. Match the index of refraction to the index of the factory report.
d. Set the loss indicator to dB’s/km for the acceptance test.
e. The reflectance is automatically set internally by the OTDR.
f. Set the pulse width at a medium range. Change the pulse width to a
slow pulse width when an anomaly occurs on the fiber trace so that it
can be examined closely.
g. Set the average to medium speed. Change the average to slow speed
when an anomaly appears on the fiber trace to allow for closer
examination of the anomaly.
h. Set wavelength at 1310 nm and 1550 nm for singlemode cable so the

cable is tested at both windows for each type of cable.
i. Show all settings on test result fiber scans.
3. Optical Power Meter Test. Use the optical power meter test to check fiber
optic cable for fiber optic cable anomalies such as breaks causing dB loss.
a. Test single mode fiber optic cable at both 1310 nm and 1550 nm. In
order to evaluate results solely for the fiber optic cable, initially
calculate loss from connector to connector and subtract this value
when testing the fiber optic cable.
16740-8
4. Pre-Installation Tests. Test and record the fiber optic cable at the site storage
area prior to installation.
a. Test each optical fiber in the cable from one end with an OTDR
compatible with wavelength and fiber type. Check testing for length,
point discontinuity, and approximate attenuation. Record each
measurement by color, location, and type of fiber measured. Perform a
measurement from the opposite end of that fiber in case a
measurement cannot be made from one end. Wait for notification if
loss per km exceeds manufacturer’s test data by more than 0.5 dB/km
or point discontinuity greater that 0.2 dB.
b. Perform this test within three (3) days from receipt of the fiber optic
cable. Test overall attenuation (dB/km), total cable length, anomalies,
or cable problems. Test cable at both windows (1310 nm and 1550 nm
for single mode cable). Compare factory test results against test results
and return to manufacture if different. If identical, document the test
results. Deliver documentation for future reference.
5. Post Installation Tests. Immediately perform the post installation test after the
fiber optic cable has been installed. Re-test and re-record each optical fiber in
the cable after installation, before termination, for loss characteristics. Test
both directions of operations of the fiber.
a. Test cable for overall attenuation, cable segment length, and damage.
Use the same OTDR settings for Post Installation Test as the Pre-
Installation Test. Replace any cable segment that is damaged during
the test and document test results. Deliver tests results for future
reference.
6. Post Termination Test. Perform the post termination test as the cable is
terminated or spliced, whether there is termination of fiber cable to fiber cable
or fiber cable to equipment. Check attenuation, fusion or termination point
problems, and overall fiber cable segment. Determine if the attenuation and
quality of the termination meets the specification; if not, repeat the
termination until it meets specification requirements. Test the fiber segment
for attenuation and anomalies after termination acceptance. Document and
submit test results as stated in this Item after fiber segment acceptance.
a. Test the splices at 1310 nm for single-mode and provide printouts of

the splice tests. Take tests in both directions and record the average.
b. Use a launch reel of the same type of fiber to test the fusion splices on
pigtails.
16740-9
c. Use the same OTDR settings for Post Termination Test as the Post
Installation Test and Pre-Installation Test, except move the “B” cursor
to the middle of the termination or splice point. After the termination,
return “B” cursor to the end of the fiber segment and measure overall
length and attenuation. Conduct Power Meter Test after termination of
cable is completed.
7. Subsystem Tests. Perform Network Subsystem Tests after integration to the

fiber optic network. Test the capability of the fiber optic cable to transmit
video and digital information. Complete and submit approved data forms for
review and rejection or acceptance.
a. Correct and substitute components in the subsystem if the Subsystem

Tests fail and repeat the tests.
b. Prepare and submit a report if a component was modified as result of

the Subsystem Test failure. Describe in the report the failure and
action taken to remedy the situation.
8. Final End to End Test and ping test. Perform Final End to End Test on the
entire system with both the OTDR and Power Meter after fiber cable segments
of the system are terminated. Also, perform a ping test between all controllers
and switches on the system. A report of successful pings shall be submitted to
the City of Houston engineer / project manager. The City of Houston must be
present during the ping test.
a. Perform the Final End to End Test:
(1) Measure the overall fiber cable system length.
(2) Measure the overall system attenuation, and
(3) Check for anomalies.
b. Document and submit results as stated in this Item, after test

acceptance.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Description. Furnish and install single mode fiber optic cable as shown on the plans.
B. Materials.
1. Cable. Single Mode Fiber Optic Cable
16740-10
a. All fiber optic cable will be loose tube telecommunications grade

designed for high speed transmission of voice, data, and video
communications. The cable will combine a loose tube fiber with a UV
rated outer (MDPE) jacket and be designed for duct and aerial
installations. The maximum pulling tension shall be 2700 N (608 lbf)
during installation (short term) and 890 N (200 lbf) long term installed.
The cable shall withstand a minimum compressive load of 220 N/cm.
The Cable and fiber manufacturer shall be the same company to ensure
long-term reliability of the cabled fiber and to ensure the availability
of fully integrated technical support. Cable shall be Corning Cable
Systems part number U4-T_1_ _ D20.
b. Buffer Tube Requirements.
(1) Optical fibers shall be placed inside a loose buffer tube. The
nominal outer diameter of the buffer tube shall be either 2.5
mm or 3.0 mm. Each buffer tube shall contain up to 12 fibers.
The fibers shall not adhere to the inside of the buffer tube.
Each fiber shall be distinguishable by means of color coding in
accordance with TIA/EIA-598-B, "Optical Fiber Cable Color
Coding." The fibers shall be colored with ultraviolet (UV)
curable inks. Buffer tubes containing fibers shall be color
coded with distinct and recognizable colors in accordance with
TIA/EIA-598-B, "Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding." Buffer
tube colored stripes shall be inlaid in the tube by means of co-
extrusion when required. The nominal stripe width shall be 1
mm. The buffer tubes shall be resistant to external forces and
shall meet the buffer tube cold bend and shrinkback
requirements of 7 CFR 1755.900. Each buffer tube shall
contain a water-swellable yarn or water blocking element for
water-blocking protection. The water-swellable yarn or water
blocking element shall be non- nutritive to fungus, electrically
non-conductive, and homogeneous. It shall also be free from
dirt or foreign matter. This yarn or element will preclude the
need for other water-blocking material; the buffer-tube shall be
gel-free.
c. Cable Construction
(1) The central member shall consist of a dielectric, glass

reinforced plastic (GRP) rod (optional steel central member).
The purpose of the central member is to provide tensile
strength and prevent buckling. Tensile strength shall be
provided by the central member, and additional dielectric yarns
as required.
16740-11
(2) The central member shall be overcoated with a thermoplastic

when required to achieve dimensional sizing to accommodate
buffer tubes/fillers. Buffer tubes shall be stranded around the
dielectric central member using the reverse oscillation, or "S-
Z", stranding process. Water swellable yarn(s) shall beapplied
longitudinally along the central member during stranding.
Fillers may be included in the cable core to lend symmetry to
the cable cross-section where needed. Fillers shall be placed so
that they do not interrupt the consecutive positioning of the
buffer tubes. In dual layer cables, any fillers shall be placed in
the inner layer. Fillers shall be nominally 2.5 mm or 3.0 mm in
outer diameter. Two polyester yarn binders shall be applied
contrahelically with sufficient tension to secure each buffer
tube layer to the dielectric central member without crushing the
buffer tubes. The binders shall be non- hygroscopic, non-
wicking, and dielectric with low shrinkage. For single
layerables, a water swellable tape shall be applied
longitudinally around the outside of the stranded tubes/fillers.
The water swellable tape shall be non-nutritive to fungus,
electrically non-conductive, and homogenous. It shall also be
free from dirt and foreign matter. For dual layer cables, a
second (outer) layer of buffer tubes shall be stranded over the
original core to form a two layer core. A water swellable tape
shall be applied longitudinally over both the inner and outer
layer. The water swellable tape shall be non-nutritive to
fungus, electrically non-conductive, and homogenous. It shall
also be free from dirt and foreign matter. The dielectric yarns
shall be helically stranded evenly around the cable core.
d. Cable Jacket
(1) Non-armored cables shall be sheathed with medium density

polyethylene (MDPE). The minimum nominal jacket thickness
shall be 1.3 mm. For reduced diameter (RD) cables, the
minimum norminal jacket thickness shall be 1.4mm. Jacketing
material shall be applied directly over the tensile
strengthmembers (as required) and water swellable tape. The
polyethylene shall contain carbon black to provide ultraviolet
light protection and shall not promote the growth of fungus.
The MDPE jacket material shall be as defined by ASTM
D1248, Type II, Class C, Category 4 and Grades J4, E7 and
E8.The cable jacket shall contain no metal elements and shall
be of a consistent thickness.
e. Trunk Cable.
16740-12
(1) Single mode fiber optic trunk cable will be utilized to connect
the network data loop to all drop cables via the fusion splice
process. Each cable will have traceability of each fiber back to
the original fiber manufacturer’s fiber number and parameters
of the fiber. The optical fibers will meet all optical fiber
specifications as listed in Article 3.01.B.3.a.
(2) The fiber count for each trunk cable will be as indicated in the
project drawings.
f. Drop Cable.
(1) Single mode fiber optic drop cable will be utilized to connect
the trunk cable to field equipment via fusion splicing. Each
cable will have traceability of each fiber back to the original
fiber manufacturer’s fiber number and parameters of the fiber.
The optical fibers will meet all optical fiber specifications as
listed in Article 3.01.B.3.a.
(2) The fiber count for each drop cable will be as indicated in the
project drawings.
(3) A fan-out kit will be required within the Secondary Fiber

Distribution Unit (SFDU) on the terminal end of each drop
cable that is utilized for this project. The fan-out kit will be
installed in a climate controlled environment. Ensure that the
length of all drop cables, not indicated by drawings, is adjusted
for field conditions. Additional costs caused by failure to
establish the lengths of any and all drop cables in the field will
be at the Contractor’s expense.
(4) Color Coding of Buffer Tubes.
(5) Buffer tubes containing fibers shall be color coded with distinct
and recognizable colors in accordance with EIA-TIA-598-B,
“Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding ”.
g. Fiber Optic Cable Jacket Marking.
16740-13
(1) Cable jackets shall be marked with the manufacturer’s name,

month and year of manufacture, sequential meter or foot
markings, a telecommunication handset symbol as required by
Section 350G of the National Electrical Safety Code (NESC),
fiber count, and fiber type. The actual length of the cable shall
be within -0/+1% of the length markings. The print color shall
be white, with the exception that cable jackets containing one
or more coextruded white stripes, which shall be printed in
light blue. The height of the marking shall be approximately
2.5 mm.
(2) If the initial marking fails to meet the specified requirements

(i.e., improper text statement, color, legibility, or print
interval), the cable may be remarked using a contrasting
alternate color. The numbering sequence will differ from the
previous numbering sequence, and a tag will be attached to
both the outside end of the cable and to the reel to indicate the
sequence of remarking. The preferred remarking color will be
yellow, with the secondary choice being blue.
(3) All loose tube fiber optic cable, for each length of cable, will
be marked with the following legend:
(a) Manufacture Name
(b) “OPTICAL CABLE”
(c) Year of Manufacture.
(d) “CITY OF HOUSTON”
(e) Number of Fibers
(f) “SM FOC – CALL CITY OF HOUSTON 311”
2. Packaging and Shipping of Fiber Optic Cable.
a. Requirements.
(1) The cable will be packaged, wound on spools or reels. Each

package will contain only one continuous length of cable. The
packaging will be constructed so as to prevent damage to the
cable during shipping and handling.
16740-14
(2) When the cable length creates a reel weight exceeding 800
pounds, the manufacturer will be required to supply the cable
on a large wooden reel, the reel will be lagged with wooden
staves. The cable will be covered with a thermal wrap. The
outer end of the cable will be securely fastened to the reel head
so as to prevent the cable from becoming loose in transit. The
inner end of the cable will project a minimum of ten feet into a
slot in the side of the reel or into a housing on the inner slot of
the drum, in such a manner to make it available for testing. An
arbor hole of 1-1/2 inch minimum is required.
(3) Finally, end seals will be applied to each end of the cable to
prevent moisture from entering the cable.
(4) Reels will be permanently marked with an identification

number that can be used by the manufacturer to trace the
manufacturing history of the cable and the fiber.
(5) Each reel will be plainly marked to indicate the direction in

which it should be rolled to prevent loosening of the cable on
the reel.
3. Optical Fiber Materials. Optical fiber will be glass and consist of a germania-
doped silica core surrounded by concentric silica cladding. The fiber will be a
matched clad design manufactured by the Outside Vapor Deposition (OVD)
process. All fibers will be sufficiently free of surface imperfections and
inclusions to meet the optical, mechanical and environmental requirements of
these specifications.
a. The optical fiber utilized in the manufacture of all fiber optic cable for
this project will be produced by one manufacturer. The optical fiber
characteristics will be in accordance with Article 3.01.B.3.a.
b. Optical Requirements.
(1) Only dispersion unshifted single mode fiber as specified by

EIA 492-CAAA, Class 4a will be utilized in the manufacture
of all cable for this project.
(2) All fibers will be coated with a dual layer acrylate protective
coating. The coating will be mechanically or chemically
strippable without damaging the fiber.
(3) Each optical fiber will be proof tested by the fiber

manufacturer at a minimum of 100 kpsi (0.7 GN / m 2 ).
16740-15
(4) The required optical fiber grade will reflect the maximum
individual fiber attenuation, to guarantee the required
performance of every fiber in the cable at 23 5 C on the
original shipping reel.
(5) The optical fiber will comply with all optical and mechanical
requirements over a storage temperature range of –50 C to +70
C, an installation temperature range of –40 C to +70 C, and an
operating temperature range of-30 C to +70 C.
PARAMETERS SINGLE MODE

Type Step Index
Core Diameter 8.3 μm (Nominal)
Cladding Diameter 125 μm ± 1 μm
Core to Cladding Diameter 0.5 μm
Coating Diameter (OSP) 245 μm ± 5 μm
Cladding-Noncircularity 1.0%
Proof Tensile Test 100 kpsi (0.7 GN/m2)
Max Attenuation:
@ 1310 nm (SM) 0.4 dB/km
@ 1550 nm (SM) 0.3 dB/km
Chromatic Dispersion
Zero Dispersion 1302/1322 nm
Zero Dispersion Slope 0.089 ps/(nm2•Km)
<3.5ps/(nm2•Km) for 1285-
Maximum Dispersion 1330 nm
:S 18ps/(nm2•Km) for 1550
nm
Cut-Off Wavelength 1260 nm
c. Color Coding of Individual Optical Fibers. Individual optical fibers

will be color coded in accordance with EIA-TIA-598-B, “Optical Fiber
Cable Color Coding”. The fibers will be colored with ultraviolet (UV)
curable inks.
4. Pull Tape. Pull Tape is required. No pull ropes, twine, or pull strings will be
used on this project for the purpose of installation. Further, if the plans and
specifications indicate pull tape for future use do not substitute pull ropes,
twine or pull strings for pull tape.
16740-16
a. Requirements. Pull tape will be prefabricated woven polyester tape

made from low friction, high abrasion resistant yarns providing a low
coefficient of friction. Pull tapes will be prelubricated. Pull tapes will
be printed with sequential footage markings for accurate measurement.
Pull tapes will be ½ inch wide and have a minimum tensile strength of
1,250 pounds.
5. Underground Marking Tape. Underground marking tape will be used in all

areas where trenching is utilized to install underground conduit. Use marking
tape in conjunction with marking posts and marking discs.
a. Requirements. The technical specifications of underground marking

tape are identified below, along with applicable testing methods
necessary to establish that a cable submitted for approval meets these
specifications.
THRESHOLD
TEST PROPERTY SPECIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
Standard Weight ASTM D2103 20 lbs/100 feet
Thickness – Overall ASTM D210 4 mil
3 in. Tensile Break – MD ASTM D882 35 lbs/ft
3 in. Tensile Strength – MD ASTM D882 4 kpsi
3 in. Tensile Break – TD ASTM D882 38 lbs/ft
3 in. Tensile Strength – TD ASTM 882 5 kpsi
Elongation – MD – MD ASTM 882 530 %
Elongation – TD – TD ASTM 882 660 %
Tear Strength ASTM D2261 1.5 lbs/ft
b. Labeling Requirements for Underground Marking Tape. Underground

marking tape will be a 3-inch wide, tear resistant, corrosion resistant
elastic PVC orange tape, imprinted with the legend “SM FOC – CALL
CITY OF HOUSTON 311”. This legend will be printed every three (3)
feet in black letters.
6. Underground Cable Marking Post and Marking Discs. Underground cable

marking posts will be used everywhere feasible and practical in all areas
where fiber optic cable is installed in underground conduit. This is the
preferred method of marking, since it is very visible. Marking posts should be
placed every 500 feet in urban area, and every 1000 feet in suburban areas, as
well as at every intersection corner and every change in direction. Exception
would be locations like downtown where all surfaces are paved, where discs
would be more practical. Use marking discs set in concrete or pavement
where the use of marking posts is not feasible and practical, i.e., areas such as
downtown where everything is paved and for aesthetics.
a. Requirements. Technical specifications of underground marking posts

are identified below.
16740-17
(1) Line Markers will be made from ultraviolet-stabilized High

Density Polyethylene (HDPE)
(2) Minimum 3-1/2" O.D. tubular design
(3) Text will be hot-stamped into the fittings with an extra u-v
clear coat.
(4) Crossing casing vents will be used to help maintain atmosphere

conditions.
(5) Line markers will require no maintenance after installation.
7. Fiber Optic Connectors
a. Requirements.
(1) Fiber Optic Connectors will be field installed, SC compatible

for single mode applications or ST compatible if specified as
such on the plans. Ensure that all connectors are the same as
the manufacturer’s cable.
(a) Connectors will be compliant with TIA/EIA 604 and

have a tensile strength of 10 pounds, with 0.2 dB
change.
(b) Durability will be 0.3 dB change for 500 rematings per

FOTP – 21.
(2) Fiber Optic Connectors will not exceed the maximum loss
listed below for each connector type:
Connector Type Installation Max. Loss

SCTM Single Mode Field 0.50 dB (Insertion)
-40 dB (+18 C to +26 C)
SCTM Single Mode Field
Reflectance
Connector Type Installation Max. Loss

STTM Single Mode Field 0.50 dB (Insertion)
-40 dB (+18 C to +26 C)
STTM Single Mode Field
Reflectance
8. Fiber Optic Adapters
a. Requirements.
16740-18
(1) Fiber Optic Adapters will be SC type. If ST type adapters are

specified on the plans ensure compatibility with ST style
connectors.
SC
Body Parts Metal or ceramic
Sleeve Zirconia
Testing TIA/EIA 604 and TIA 586 B.3 compliant
ST
Body Parts Brass or Nickel Plated Brass
Body Construction Precision-machined
Sleeve Zirconia
Panel Thickness 0.06” minimum to 0.13” maximum
Withdrawal Force 200-600 grams
Testing TIA/EIA 604 compliant
Durability 2' 500 cycles per EIA 455-21
(2) Adapter unit will include Nut, lockwasher, and dust cap.
C. Patch Cords
1. Requirements. All fiber patch cords will meet National Electric Code (NEC)
jacketing requirements for this project’s application and will have outer jacket
coloration of yellow for single mode patch cords. All duplex patch cords will
be of a zip cord design and will have connector boots of two (2) colors,
namely white or off- white for one leg of the duplex cord (non-printed zip leg)
and red for the opposite leg (printed zip leg) or the duplex cord.
a. Connector losses will not exceed those established in Article

3.01.B.7.a.2).
b. No splices of any type are allowed within an assembly. Each assembly

is to be fully tested and those test results placed on a test tag for each
mated pair of connectors.
c. Connectors will then be attached to one end of each pair within the
assembly. Each assembly will be individually packaged within a
plastic bag with the submitted manufacturer’s part number marked
clearly on the outside of said bag. Label each installed patch cord as
directed by the Engineer.
D. Equipment Racks and Bays. Install equipment racks and bays at designated locations
as shown on the plans, as detailed in accordance with these specifications, and as
directed.
16740-19
1. Requirements. Provide all new equipment in strict accordance with the details
shown on the plans and in the specifications.
a. At the “head end” and hubs all distribution hardware, network

electronics, video equipment, VDS processors, and all controllers and
miscellaneous electronics will be mounted within a 7 feet high by 24
inch wide bay or cabinet for 19 inch wide mounting rack(s). Each
installed and populated individual rack segment will be identified as a
“bay”. The primary structure material of each rack will be factory
painted steel. Each rack will be field attachable to one another in a
modular configuration. The frames themselves will be equipped with
components that will allow for the field management of cables,
jumpers and pigtails as may or may not be used in the interconnect
system. All these components will be manufactured in such a way as
to meet all fiber bend radius requirements. Above and below each rack
will be an enclosed fiber management system allowing for proper field
cross connect management. All rack ends will be sealed with “end
caps” thus protecting any patch cords, cable, or pig tails which may be
routed at that location. Between each rack will be mounted jumper
management rings or loops that allow for the efficient management,
routing, and protection of all cable patch cords/jumpers, or pig tails
used within the rack system to interconnect the network electronics.
Additionally, management troughs will be mounted at the top and
bottom of each rack and ten made continuous as bays are attached.
E. Fiber Optic Cable Aerial Storage System. Install a Fiber Optic Cable Aerial Storage
System at designated locations as shown on the plans, as detailed in accordance with
these specifications, and as directed.
1. Requirements. Provide all new equipment in strict accordance with the details
shown on the plans and in the specifications.
a. Aerial Location. Used to store, and protect the minimum bend radius,
of a surplus length of fiber cable at splice points, or for future
expansion along aerial messenger span fiber optic cable installations.
(1) The storage units will be a snowshoe type, designed to

maintain the minimum bending radius of the fiber optic cable
indicated in the fiber optic cable specifications.
(2) The snowshoe storage units will be constructed of aluminum

with continuous welds at crossbars and ends.
(3) Each snowshoe storage unit will be double coated with a baked
on, polyester powder coat finish.
(4) Design snowshoe with 12” radius with a channel width (I.D.)
of 1.25”.
16740-20
(5) Tie eyelets will accommodate both stainless steel and tie wrap
securing methods.
(6) To counteract wind loading, aerial fiber optic cable storage

units should be installed as close to span support poles as
feasible.
(7) Do not install snowshoe above a roadway or driveway.
(8) All installation hardware including stainless steel mounting

bolts, stainless nuts and washers are included.
(9) Ensure quantity of fiber optic cable stored is per plan drawings.
3.02 CONSTRUCTION
A. Install fiber optic cable without changing the optical and mechanical characteristics of
the cables.
1. Perform all work in a workmanlike manner and meet the highest industry
standards, and in accordance with the requirements of the latest editions of the
NEC and National Electrical Safety Code.
B. Installation
1. Installation Methods
a. Install fiber optic cable and communication equipment in accordance

with the manufacturer’s recommended practices.
b. Install fiber optic cable on poles or in conduits as specified in the

plans. In conduits, if required, relocate existing cable to allow new
fiber optic cable routing in conduits. When pulling the cable, do not
exceed the bending radius. Ensure a minimum bend radius with no
load at 10 x fiber optic cable diameter. Minimum bend radius at
maximum stringing tension is 20 x fiber optic cable diameter. Use
rollers, wheels, or guides that have radii greater than the bending
radius. Provide separate grooved rollers for each cable when
simultaneously pulling multiple cables. Use a lubricating compound to
minimize friction. Use fuse links and breaks. Measure the pulling
tension. Do not exceed a pulling tension of 2700 N (600 lbf).
c. Seal conduits with a two (2) part urethane after installing cable.
d. Bury an approved copper tracer wire directly inside the conduit for the
entire length of the conduit as directed by the field engineer. Ensure
tracer wire is continuous between communication service boxes.
16740-21
2. Fusion Splicing
a. Fusion splicing is the only approved splicing method.
b. Fusion splicing consists of aligning the cores of two clean (stripped of

coating), cleaved fibers or a group of such fibers (mass splice) and
fusing the ends together with an electric arc. The fiber ends are
positioned under a microscope or a high resolution video monitor and
then aligned using various precision movement micro- positioners
(commonly stepping motors or piezoelectric devices). High voltage
electrodes contained in the splicer conduct an arc across the fiber ends
as the fibers are moved together, thus fusing the fibers together.
Optimum core alignment will be verified prior to splicing and splice
estimated devices and profile alignment algorithms. Fusion splicing
equipment will provide the operator with reference estimated splice
loss measurements. Further, it will automatically align fibers,
determine cleave quality and fuse the fibers. No splice will result in a
loss of more than 0.03 dB, as measured by an Optical Time Domain
Reflectometer (OTDR) bi- directionally.
c. Maintain records of the OTDR measurements and submit this

documentation to the City of Houston for review and final approval of
the fiber optic cable plant. Perform optical power meter test on the
single mode fiber at 1310 nm and 1550 nm. All testing requirements
are detailed in Article 2.02.A.
END OF SECTION
16740-22
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION VIDEO COLOR QUAD UNIT
SECTION 16741
VIDEO COLOR QUAD UNIT
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Furnish and install Video Color Quad Unit as shown on the plans, and as detailed in
this Specification.
A. Unit Prices
1. Measurement: This Item will be measured as each unit furnished, installed,

made fully operational and tested in accordance with these Specifications or
as directed by the Engineer.
Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the
unit price bid for “Video Color Quad Unit”. This price is full compensation
for furnishing all equipment described under this Item with all cables and
connectors, all documentation and testing; and shall include the cost of
furnishing all labor, materials, training, warranty, equipment, and incidentals.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70 – National Electric Code
B. TxDOT Special Specification 6005 - Testing, Training, Documentation, Final

C. TxDOT Special Specification 6006 - Electronic Components
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
16741-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. General Requirements. All materials furnished, assembled, fabricated, or installed

under this Item will be new, corrosion resistant, and in strict accordance with the
details shown on the plans and in this Specification.
B. Functional Requirements. Furnish and install, at the locations shown on the plans,
Video Quad Unit to combine four (4) analog video inputs into a single screen video
display output.
1. Provide the video color quad unit that allows up to 4 video camera signals to
be displayed simultaneously on a single monitor screen divided into 4 blocks.
Ensure each of 4 images in the quad display mode are refreshed and appear in
real time with no motion loss due to multiplexed display images. Ensure the
quad unit is able to use virtually any 2:1 interlace type camera. Ensure the
quad unit allows sequential display of quad page and each camera at full
screen on live display monitor port. Ensure the unit supports remote control of
functions through an RS-232 serial port.
a. Ensure the Color Quad Video Generator meets the following minimum
requirements:
(1) Operating power may be 120 V AC or 12 V DC with adapter
(2) Operating temperature range from 32 - 110°F
(3) Video input four 1.0 V p-p composite video
(4) Monitor output 1.0 V p-p composite video
(5) Monitor output DB-15 SVGA
2. Wiring and Connectors. Ensure coaxial cable is used for making video
connections between devices in the Traffic Signal Controller. Ensure the
cables are the RG-59 type with a nominal impedance of 75 ohms. Ensure all
cables have a polyethylene dielectric with copper braid shield having a
minimum of 95% shield coverage and not greater than 3.4 dB attenuation per
100 ft. at 100 MHz. Video connectors shall be BNC die crimp type. Ensure
coax braid is neatly trimmed before crimping the connector to insure no
possibility of contact between braid and inner connector. Ensure there are no
nicks in the center conductor. Ensure crimps are mechanically secure and
made in such a way that no braid is left exposed or protrudes from the
connector. Ensure the center pin is gold plated and installed with the tip of the
center pin flush with the front edge of the connector.
16741-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
a. Ensure cables are neatly dressed and bundled with nylon cable ties.
Ensure each cable is marked with a unique identification number at a
point 6 in. from each end of the cable. Ensure numbering is done by
applying adhesive plastic tape with machine printed black figures on
white background. Thermal, or inked ribbon, computer printed labels
are not satisfactory. Ensure identification is read upright when holding
the cable horizontally with the connector to the left. Ensure the
finished identification number is protected with a piece of clear
shrinkable tubing shrunk tightly over the label and extending at least
1/4 in. either side of the label. Ensure each cabinet or rack contains a
typed list showing the cabinet identification and the numbers,
description, source and destinations of all cable in that cabinet. Ensure
the cable list is heat laminated to protect it from moisture and dirt.
Ensure the system schematic is clearly identify all cables by number.
3. Interconnect Harness and Accessories. Provide all interconnect harnesses and

accessories needed for a completely integrated system. Ensure these
cables/harnesses are properly labeled on either end of the cable assemble.
Provide cables which consist of but not be limited to:
a. RS232 cables
b. Video coaxial cables with BNC connectors
2.02 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Power Requirements. Ensure the Video Quad Unit meets all of its specified
requirements when the input power is 115 ± 20 volts AC, 60 ± 3 Hz. Ensure the
maximum power required does not exceed 600 watts.
1. Ensure the equipment operation is not be affected by transient voltages,

surges, and sags normally experienced on commercial power lines.
B. Wiring. Ensure all wiring meets the requirements of the National Electric Code.
Ensure all wires are cut to proper length before assembly. Ensure no wire is doubled
back to take up slack. Ensure wires are neatly laced into clamps. Ensure cable slack is
provided to facilitate removal and replacement of assemblies, panels and modules.
C. Transient Suppression. Ensure all DC relays, solenoids, and holding coils have diodes
across the coils for transient suppression.
D. Power Service Protection. Ensure the equipment contains readily accessible,

manually resettable or replaceable circuit protection devices (such as circuit breakers
or fuses) for equipment and power source protection.
E. Fail Safe Provision. Ensure the equipment is designed such that the failures of the
equipment will not cause the failure of any other unit or equipment.
16741-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Connector and Harness. Ensure all external connections are made by means of
connectors. Ensure the connectors are keyed to preclude improper hookups. Ensure
all wires to and from the connectors are color coded and appropriately marked.
Ensure pins and mating connectors are corrosion resistant.
2.04 ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Ensure the equipment meets all its specified requirements during and after subjecting
to any combination of the following conditions:
1. Ambient temperature range of 32ºF to 110ºF.
2. Relative humidity up to 90% non-condensing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Ensure the equipment design and construction utilizes the latest available techniques
with a minimum number of parts, subassemblies, circuits, cards, and modules to
maximize standardization and commonality.
B. Ensure the equipment is designed for ease of maintenance. Ensure all component
parts are readily accessible for inspection and maintenance. Ensure test points are
provided for checking essential voltages and waveforms.
C. Electronic Components. Ensure all electronic components comply with TxDOT

Special Specification 6006, "Electronic Components.”
D. Mechanical Components. Ensure all external screws, nuts, and locking washers are
stainless steel. Ensure no self-tapping screws are used unless specifically approved.
1. Ensure all parts are made of corrosion resistant material, such as plastic,
stainless steel, anodized aluminum or brass.
2. Ensure all materials used in construction are protected from fungus growth
and moisture deterioration.
3. Ensure dissimilar metals are separated by an inert dielectric material.
3.02 TESTING, TRAINING, DOCUMENTATION AND WARRANTY
A. Perform testing, training and provide documentation, warranty in accordance with

Article 2, TxDOT Special Specification 6005, “Testing, Training, Documentation,
Final Acceptance, and Warranty.”
END OF SECTION
16741-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION VIDEO DETECTION SYSTEM
SECTION 16742
VIDEO DETECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
A. This specification sets forth the minimum requirements for a Video Imaging Vehicle
Detection System (VIVDS) that monitors vehicles on a roadway via processing of
video images and provides detector outputs to a traffic controller or similar device.
B. A video detection system for a single intersection shall consist of the following
components: variable focal length color camera, VIVDS processor(s), and all
associated equipment required to setup and operate in a field environment including
one color video monitor, connectors, communication cable, and camera mounting
hardware.
C. The system software shall be able to detect either approaching or departing vehicles
in multiple traffic lanes. A minimum of 4 detector outputs per video processor
module card and each output shall have a minimum of 48 detection zones. Each zone
and output shall be user definable through interactive graphics by placing lines and/or
boxes in an image on a video monitor. The user shall be able to redefine previously
defined detection zones.
A. Unit Prices
1. Measurement. This item shall be measured by each intersection including four

(4) color cameras, mounted including fittings, conductors, brackets,
appurtenances, video processor(s), cables, cabinet & communication
interfaces, programming, communications software, and other associated
equipment required for installation.
2. Payment. This item shall be paid by each installation at an intersection.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. MIL-C-26482 – Military Specification: Connectors, Electrical, (Circular, Miniature,

Quick Disconnect, Environment Resisting), Receptacles and Plugs
16742-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. NEMA TS1 - Traffic Control Standards
C. NEMA TS2 – Traffic Controller Assemblies with NTCIP Requirements
D. NEMA TS4 – Hardware Standards for Dynamic Message Signs (DMS) with NTCIP
Requirements
E. NFPA 70 – National Electric Code
1.05 WARRANTY
A. All material, workmanship and labor furnished shall be covered by

Supplier(s)/Manufacturer(s) guarantee and/or warranty for a minimum period of
twenty-four (24) months. Warranty period shall begin the day the video detection
system is activated by the City of Houston, either as new order or warranty repair.
The City of Houston's preference is for all non-warranty service to be charged a
singular flat rate.
B. Successful bidder shall bear all expenses connected with return of any material,
which the City deems necessary to return for adjustments during warranty period.
C. Successful bidder shall bear all labor cost associated with warranty items and
maintenance in a timely manner; the quality of timely service is determined by the
City's Traffic Engineer and shall not exceed twenty-four (24) hours from the Time of
Notification (TON) to initial field response by the successful bidder or their
representative. In essence, the successful bidder shall provide maintenance and field
service (i.e. trouble calls) during the warranty period.
D. Supplier(s)/Manufacturer(s) shall make all engineering data, diagrams, software

changes or improvements, which increases performance of equipment purchased
under this bid, available to the City of Houston at no additional cost.
E. Supplier(s)/Manufacturer(s) shall have field engineers or technicians available on

request to assure satisfactory initial operation, and to consult with City's Traffic
Engineer, or City’s Traffic Engineer representative, on any special circuitry that may
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. VIVDS PROCESSOR AND RACK-MOUNTED INTERFACE UNIT
1. The VIVDS processor is an electronic unit that converts the video image
provided by the cameras, generates vehicle detection for defined zones and
collects vehicular data as specified.
16742-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. The VIVDS processor may be housed in either the cabinet or camera housing.
While not required, the City of Houston prefers that the VIVDS processor unit
to fit inside each camera housing. The processor can fit directly into NEMA
TS1 and TS2 type racks as well as Type 170/2070 input files. The video
output from the unit shall be in color with active detection zones overlaid on
full motion video.
3. The VIVDS processor unit shall be designed to operate reliably in the adverse
environment found in the typical roadside traffic cabinet. It shall meet the
environmental requirements set forth by the latest NEMA (National Electrical
Manufacturers Association) TS1 and TS2 standards as well as the
environmental requirements for Type 170, Type 179 and 2070 controllers.
Operating temperature shall be from -25°F to +160°F at 0% to 95% relative
humidity, non-condensing.
4. The VIVDS shall have a modular electrical design. The VIVDS shall be
powered by 89- 135 VAC, 60 Hz single-phase. Power to the VIVDS shall be
from the transient protected side of the AC power distribution system in the
traffic control cabinet in which the VIVDS is installed. If the VIVDS
processor is located in the controller cabinet, then, the system shall be
powered by 12-24 VDC and draw less than 2 amperes.
5. The field communications wiring between each camera and the traffic
controller cabinet shall be either 18 AWG, 6 twisted-wire-pair with an overall
shield or coaxial cable. While not required, the City prefers the twisted-wire-
pair.
6. The VIVDS Processor System (VPS) at each intersection shall be able to be

networked using a 2-TWP interconnect back to the Master Cabinet for future
communication to, Houston TranStar, the traffic management center.
7. Serial communications to the field setup computer shall be through an RS-232

serial port. This port shall be able to download the real-time detection
information needed to show detector actuations. A connector on the front of
the VIVDS processor unit shall be used for serial communications.
8. The VIVDS processor unit software and/or the supervisor software shall
include diagnostic software to allow testing the VIVDS functions. This shall
include the capability to set and clear individual detector outputs and display
the status of inputs to enable setup and troubleshooting in the field.
B. VIDEO DETECTION CAMERA
1. The video detection system shall use medium resolution, color image sensors
as the video source for real-time vehicle detection. The cameras shall be
approved for use with the VIVDS processor unit by the supplier of the
VIVDS. As a minimum, each camera shall provide the following capabilities:
16742-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
a. Images shall be produced with a Charge Coupled Device (CCD)

sensing element with horizontal resolution of at least 380 lines and
vertical resolution of at least 350 lines. Images shall be output as a
video signal conforming to RS 170A or CCIR.
b. Useable video and resolvable features in the video image shall be

produced when those features have luminance levels as low as 0.1 lux
at night.
c. Useable video and resolvable features in the video image shall be

produced when those features have luminance levels as high as 10,000
lux during the day.
2. The camera and lens assembly shall be housed in an environmental enclosure

that provides the following capabilities:
a. The enclosure shall be waterproof and dust-tight to the latest NEMA-4

specifications.
b. The enclosure shall allow the camera to operate satisfactorily over an

ambient temperature range from -25°F to +160°F while exposed to
precipitation as well as direct sunlight.
c. The enclosure shall allow the camera horizon to be rotated in the field
during installation.
d. The enclosure shall include a provision at the rear of the enclosure for
connection of power and video signal cables fabricated at the factory.
The input power to the environmental enclosure shall be nominally
120 or 240 VAC 50/60 Hz and the power consumption shall be 35
watts or less under all conditions.
e. A thermostatically controlled heater shall be at the front of the

enclosure to prevent the formation of ice and condensation, as well as
to assure proper operation of the lens's iris mechanism. The heater
shall not interfere with the operation of the camera electronics, and it
shall not cause interference with the video signal.
f. The enclosure shall be light-colored or unfinished and shall include a

sun shield to minimize solar heating. The front edge of the sunshield
shall protrude beyond the front edge of the environmental enclosure
and shall include provision to divert water flow to the sides of the
sunshield. The amount of overhang of the sun shield shall be
adjustable to block the view of the horizon to prevent direct sunlight
from entering the lens. Any plastics used in the enclosure shall include
ultra violet inhibitors.
g. The total weight of the image sensor in the environmental enclosure

with sunshield shall be less than 20 lbs.
16742-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
h. When operating in the environmental enclosure with power and video

signal cables connected, the image sensor shall meet FCC class B
requirements for electromagnetic interference emissions.
3. The video output of the cameras shall be isolated from earth ground. All video
connections for the cameras to the video interface panel shall also be isolated
from earth ground. Connections for both video and power shall be made to the
image sensor using waterproof, quick disconnect connectors.
4. Camera mounting hardware shall allow for vertical or horizontal mounting to

the camera enclosure.
5. Each camera enclosure shall be equipped with a water-proof connector

mounted to the rear bulkhead of the camera enclosure. The connector on the
rear of the camera enclosure and the mating connector on the end of the cable
shall conform to the MIL-C-26482 Series 1 standard. To guarantee that the
cable connector and backshell form a waterproof connection, each backshell
shall be filled with an epoxy-potting compound. After the potting compound
has set up, the backshell shall be covered with a shrink tubing boot that
extends down about 2 inches onto the outer jacket of the cable and filled with
epoxy potting compound, also. After the potting compound has set up, the
shrink boot shall be heated to form a 100% waterproof connection between
the cable connector and the cable.
2.02 FUNCTIONAL CAPABILITIES
A. VIVDS Processor Unit
1. The VIVDS shall provide real-time vehicle detection (within 112 milliseconds
(ms) of vehicle arrival). The VIVDS processor unit shall be capable of
simultaneously processing information from various video sources, including
CCTV video image sensors and video tape players. The video sources may be,
but are not required to be, synchronized or line- locked. The video shall be
processed at a rate of 30 times per second by the VIVDS processor unit.
2. The system shall be capable of providing twenty-four (24) or more detector

outputs from up to eight (8) camera/video processor units. The VIVDS
processor system should provide compressed color video through the DB-9
RS-232 data stream with active detection zones overlaid.
16742-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
3. Detection zones shall be provided that are sensitive to the direction of vehicle
travel. The direction to be detected by each detection zone shall be user
programmable. The VIVDS processor unit shall compensate for minor camera
movement (up to 2% of the field of view at 400 ft.) without falsely detecting
vehicles. The camera movement shall be measured on the unprocessed video
input to the VIVDS processor unit. The camera shall operate while directly
connected to VIVDS Processor Unit. Once the detector configuration has been
downloaded or saved into the VIVDS processor unit, the video detection
system shall operate with the monitoring equipment (monitor and/or laptop)
disconnected or on-line.
4. The camera/processor unit shall be provided with count, presence, directional

presence, speed, stopped vehicles, and queue types of detection zones. An
adjustable cycle timer shall be available for dealing with stopped vehicles.
The Windows software shall be able to display the traffic parameters on the
screen of an SVGA monitor on a per vehicle basis for each detection station
by lane. It shall also be possible to view and sort the stored data for selected
time intervals. When the monitoring equipment is directly connected to the
VIVDS processor unit, it shall be possible to view vehicle detections in real-
time as they occur on the field setup computer's color VGA display or the
video monitor.
B. Vehicle Detection
1. The video detection system shall provide flexible detection zone placement
anywhere within the combined field of view of the image sensors. Preferred
presence detector configurations shall be lines or boxes placed across lanes of
traffic or lines placed in-line with lanes of traffic. A single detector shall be
able to replace one or more conventional detector loops. Detection zones
shall be able to be fully overlapped. In addition, detection zones shall have the
capability of implementing "AND" and "OR" logical functions including
presence, extension and delay timing. These logical functions may be
excluded if provisions are made to bring each detector separately into the
controller and the controller can provide these functions.
2. Placement of detection zones shall be by means of a graphical interface using

the video image of the roadway. The monitor shall show images of the
detection zones superimposed on the video image of traffic while the VIVDS
processor is running.
3. The detection zones shall be created by using the mouse or keypad to draw
detection zones on the monitor. The detection zones shall be capable of being
sized, shaped and overlapped to provide optimal road coverage and detection.
It shall be possible to save the detector configurations on disk to download
detector configurations to the VIVDS processor unit and to retrieve the
detector configuration that is currently running in the VIVDS processor unit.
16742-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
4. The mouse or keypad shall be used to edit previously defined detector

configurations so as to fine-tune the detection zone placement size and shape.
Once a detection configuration has been created, the system shall provide a
graphic display of the new configuration on its monitor. While this fine-tuning
is being done, the detection shall continue to operate from the detector
configuration that is currently called for.
5. When a vehicle occupies a detection zone, the detection zone on the live video
shall indicate the presence of a vehicle, thereby verifying proper operation of
the detection system. With the absence of video, the card shall have an LED
that will indicate proper operation of the detection zones.
6. Detection zones shall be provided that is sensitive to the direction of vehicle

travel. The direction to be detected by each detection zone shall be user
programmable.
7. The video detection system shall reliably detect vehicle presence in the design
field of view. The design field of view shall be defined as the sensor view
when the image sensor is mounted 24 ft. or higher above the roadway, when
the camera is adjacent (within 15 ft.) to the edge of the nearest vehicle travel
lane, and when the length of the detection area is not greater than 10 times
the mounting height of the image sensor. Within this design field of view, the
VIVDS processor unit shall be capable of setting up a single detection zone
for point detection (equivalent to the operation of a 6 ft. by 6 ft. inductive
loop). A single camera, placed at the proper mounting height with the proper
lens, shall be able to monitor up to and including 5 traffic lanes
simultaneously.
8. Detection accuracy of the video detection system shall be comparable to

properly operating inductive loops. Detection accuracy shall include the
presence of any vehicle in the defined detection zone regardless of the lane,
which the vehicle is occupying. Occlusion produced by vehicles in the same
or adjacent lanes shall not be considered a failure of the VIVDS processor
unit, but a limitation of the camera placement. Detection accuracy (a
minimum of 95%) shall be enforced for the entire design field of view on a
lane by lane and on a time period basis.
9. Equipment failure, either camera or VIVDS processor unit, shall result in

constant vehicle detection on affected detection zones.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The cabling shall comply with the National Electric Code, as well as local electrical
codes. Cameras may acquire power from the luminaire if necessary.
16742-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
B. The video detection system shall be installed by supplier factory certified installers
and as recommended by the supplier and documented in installation materials
provided by the supplier. Proof of factory certification shall be provided.
A. The supplier shall maintain an adequate inventory of parts to support maintenance

and repair of the video detection system. These parts shall be available for delivery
within 30 days of placement of an acceptable order at the supplier's then current
pricing and terms of sale for said parts.
B. The supplier shall maintain an ongoing program of technical support for the video
detection system. This technical support shall be available via telephone, or via
personnel sent to the installation site upon placement of an acceptable order at the
supplier's then current pricing and terms of sale for on site technical support services.
C. A factory-authorized representative shall provide installation or training support.
D. All product documentation shall be written in the English language.
E. The supplier of the video detection system shall supervise the installation and testing
of the system. A factory certified representative from the supplier shall be on-site
during installation. Up to 2 days of training shall be provided to personnel of the City
of Houston in the operation, setup and maintenance of the video detection system.
Instruction and materials shall be provided for a maximum of 20 persons and shall be
conducted at a location selected by the City.
END OF SECTION
16742-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION VIDEO MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
SECTION 16746
VIDEO MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and install video management software that provides display, selection, and
control functions for a camera system and video encoders/decoders as shown on the
plans and as detailed in the specifications.
1.02 RELATED SECTION
A. The work performed, materials furnished, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals
will not be measured or paid for directly, but will be considered subsidiary to bid
items of the Contract.
B. Refer to Section 01270 – Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures
1.04 REFERENCES
A. TxDOT Special Specification 6005 - Testing, Training, Documentation, Final

Acceptance and Warranty
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Client Manual. Provide a client manual that clearly outlines the steps necessary to
operate the software. Include in the Client Manual screen captures taken directly from
the software to illustrate the instructions. Include in the Client Manual a table of
contents and an index.
B. Server Manual. If a server is utilized, provide a Server Manual that clearly outlines
the steps necessary to configure the software. Include in the Server Manual screen
captures taken directly from the software to illustrate the instructions. Include in the
Server Manual a table of contents and an index.
C. Driver Application Notes. Provide each device driver with Driver Application Notes
that document configuration and operation of the driver and its devices. Provide
Driver Application Notes that clearly outline the steps necessary to configure the
software. Include in the Driver Application Notes screen captures taken directly from
the software to illustrate the instructions. Include in the Driver Application Notes a
table of contents.
16746-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATETRIALS
A. General Requirements. Furnish and install only new, materials under this Item in
strict accordance with the details shown on the plans and in the specifications.
1. Provide software that is a graphical user interface based program designed for
CCTV camera system integration, control, and automation. If a server is
required, provide the server version of this software along with a Microsoft
Windows Server. Install the client version of this software on the operator
workstation as shown on the plans.
2. Design the software system for ease of future expansion by providing the
capability to support a minimum of 100 CCTV cameras, including associated
video encoders and a minimum of 16 decoders. Provide software with the
capability of recognize and support the different data protocols of future video
input and transmission, of multiple manufacturers.
B. Functional Requirements. Design the Video Management software system so as to

provide the following:
1. Operating System. Provide software that operates on Windows 2003 Server

and Windows XP Professional.
2. Architecture.
a. Components. Provide software comprised of the following

components: server application (if required), client application, and
device driver applications (including camera PTZ and encoder/decoder
control).
(1) Ensure the various software components are able to be started

in any order.
(2) Provide software that allows clients, servers, and device drivers
to be added at any time during or after initial configuration.
(3) Provide software that allows equipment from different

manufacturers to be combined.
(4) Ensure that the unexpected or unplanned termination of a

component does not cause any other component to fail.
(5) Client application shall run on existing TranStar HP z600

workstations. It shall utilize external video decoder for all
video display, and shall not utilize software video decoding.
16746-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
(6) If servers are required, they shall be provided under this item
and shall conform to TranStar specifications. TranStar servers
are HP DL380 G5 or 6, with Win 2003 Enterprise, or Standard
OS.
b. Support Applications - Furnish a configuration interface that provides

the ability to add, remove, and modify devices controlled by any
configured device driver. Ensure the software provides a configurable
arbitration system that eliminates CCTV resource conflicts and allows
users to take exclusive control of specific devices.
(1) Furnish software that provides user-definable on-screen labels

for each device.
(2) Furnish a client application that provides multi-monitor

support.
c. Common Interface. Ensure the same interface is used to control

equipment from different manufacturers. Ensure the same interface is
also used to retrieve archived video from different devices, no matter
what type of device the video was recorded on.
(1) Ensure a particular custom window is capable of displaying IP

and analog video, and ensure the client interface is capable of
displaying IP and analog video simultaneously in different
custom windows.
(2) Ensure support of IP video encoders/decoders supported by

Houston TranStar.
(3) Ensure support of PTZ protocols supported by Houston

TranStar.
d. Device Driver Applications. Provide device drivers capable of

communicating with any device via direct serial, IP, or modem pool.
Provide multiple device drivers that are able to share all or a portion of
a modem pool.
(1) Ensure each device driver is unique to the type of equipment it

controls.
(2) Allow the addition of a new device driver with no require

modification to the client or server application.
(3) Provide device drivers that can run anywhere on the network,
not necessarily located where the server is installed.
(4) Provide device drivers that have the capability of running as a

Windows Service or as an executable.
16746-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
e. CCTV Equipment. Provide device drivers for proposed cameras,

encoders and decoders, to be installed as part of this project.
(1) Make camera advanced functions such as on-screen displays,

patterns, and presets available through the driver interface.
f. Encoders/Decoders. Provide device drivers for proposed video

encoders and decoders.
2.02 DOCUMENTATION, TRAINING, TESTING AND WARRANTY
A. Provide documentation, testing, training and warranty in accordance with the TxDOT
Special Specification 6005, “Testing, Training, Documentation, Final Acceptance and
Warranty.”
END OF SECTION
16746-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION PERMANENT COUNT STATION
SECTION 16747
PERMANENT COUNT STATION

Radar Vehicle Sensing Device (RVSD)
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Description: Furnish and install overhead radar vehicle sensing device (RVSD)
system as shown in the plans, as detailed in the special specifications and as directed.
B. Ensure after the setup, there are no external tuning controls of any kind, which will
require an operator.
C. All equipment provided shall be compatible with existing City of Houston

infrastructure.
A. Unit Prices
1. Measurement. This Item will be measured as each unit complete in place.
2. Payment. The work performed and material furnished in accordance with this
unit price bid for “Radar Vehicle Sensing Device.” This price is full
compensation for furnishing all equipment described under this Item with all
cables, connectors, mounting assemblies, interface devices; all documentation
and testing; all labor, materials, tools training, warranty, equipment, and
incidentals.
3. Refer to Section 01270 – Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures
1.04 REFERENCES
A. Federal Communications Commission (FCC), CFR 47, Part 15, section 15.245
B. Federal Communications Commission (FCC), CFR 47, Part 15, section 15.249
C. MIL-C-26482 – Military Specification – Connectors, Electrical, (Circular, Miniature,

Quick Disconnect, Environment Resisting), Receptacles and Plugs
D. NEMA 250 – Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum)
16747-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
E. NEMA TS2 – Traffic Controller Assemblies with NTCIP Requirements
F. NFPA 70 – National Electric Code
G. TxDOT Special Specification 6005 - Testing, Training, Documentation, Final

Acceptance and Warranty
H. TxDOT Special Specification 6006 - Electronic Components
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide necessary documentation of contractor or subcontractor qualifications

pursuant to contract award.
B. Documentation Requirements. Provide documentation in accordance with TxDOT

Special Specification 6005, “Testing, Training, Documentation, Final Acceptance,
and Warranty”.
1. Provide documentation ensuring emissions from the RVSD equipment are not
harmful to the public.
2. Provide additional test reports, for each of the following requirements:
a. NEMA 4X Testing. The RVSD enclosure must conform to test criteria

set forth in the NEMA 250 Standard for Type 4X enclosures. Provide
third party enclosure test results for each of the following specific
Type 4X criteria:
(1) External Icing (NEMA 250 Clause 5.6)
(2) Hose-down (NEMA 250 Clause 5.7)
(3) 4X Corrosion Protection (NEMA 250 Clause 5.10)
(4) Gasket (NEMA 250 Clause 5.14)
b. NEMA TS2-1998 Testing. The RVSD must comply with the

applicable standards stated in the NEMA TS2-1998 Standard. Provide
third party test results for each of the following specific tests:
(1) Shock pulses of 10g, 11 ms half sine wave
(2) Vibration of .5 Grms up to 30 Hz
(3) 300 V positive/negative pulses applied at 1 pulse per second at

minimum and maximum DC supply voltage
(4) Cold temperature storage at -49°F for 24 hours
(5) High temperature storage at +185°F for 24 hours
16747-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
(6) Low temp, low DC supply voltage at -30°F and 10.8 VDC
(7) Low temp, high DC supply voltage at -30°F and 26.5 VDC
(8) High temp, high DC supply voltage at 165°F and 26.5 VDC
(9) High temp, low DC supply voltage at 165°F and 10.8 VDC
A. Experience Requirements. The contractor or subcontractor involved in the installation

and testing of the RVSD must, as a minimum, meet the following experience
requirements:
1. Two years continuous existence offering services in the installation of RVSD

systems.
2. Two installed RVSDs where systems have been in continuously satisfactory

operation for at least 1 year. Submit as proof, photographs or other supporting
documents, and the names, addresses and telephone numbers of the operating
personnel of the business or agency owning the system who can be contacted
by the City of Houston regarding the system.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Provide a warranty in accordance with TxDOT Special Specification 6005, “Testing,

Training, Documentation, Final Acceptance and Warranty.”
1.08 MAINTENANCE
A. Performance Maintenance. Provide RVSD that does not require cleaning or

adjustment to maintain performance. Ensure it does not rely on battery backup to
store configuration information. Ensure the RVSD, once calibrated, does not need
recalibration to maintain performance over entire operational temperature range
unless the roadway configuration changes. Provide remote connectivity to the RVSD
to allow operators to change the unit’s configuration, update the unit’s firmware
programming and recalibrate the unit automatically from a centralized facility.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL
16747-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Ensure the RVSD will automatically configure the maximum number of lanes shown
on the plans by determining lane boundaries, concrete or metal barriers and detection
thresholds. Ensure sensor will automatically configure the number of lanes in the
presence of barriers, medians and work zones. Ensure sensor will automatically
calibrate vehicle speed, detection levels, sensitivity, and vehicle direction. Ensure the
RVSD detects vehicle volume, speed occupancy, and direction in all weather
conditions without performance degradation. Ensure the RVSD is remote accessible;
provides multiple connectivity options for integration into the existing system, and
supports the communications protocols identified in article 2.01.K “Communication”.
B. Provide the RVSD that automatically tunes out stationary objects, such as traffic
barriers and retaining walls, prior to completing the configuration. Provide
documentation on the auto- configuration and auto-calibration processes.
C. Provide an RVSD that does not cause interference or alter the performance of any
known equipment.
D. Furnish all new equipment and component parts in an operable condition at the time
of delivery and installation.
E. Provide design to prevent reversed assembly or improper installation of connectors,

fasteners, etc. Design each item of equipment to protect personnel from exposure to
high voltage during equipment operation, adjustments, and maintenance.
F. Include licenses for all equipment, where required, for any software or hardware in
the RVSD system.
G. Provide all RVSD from the same manufacturer.
H. Provide RVSD firmware that is upgradeable by external local or remote download.
I. Sensor Performance. Ensure the RVSD provides accurate, real-time volume, average
speed, occupancy, and vehicle direction data. Ensure the RVSD provides user
configurable settings for a collection interval from 20 sec. to 15 min. and polling
intervals from 20 sec. to 1 hr. Ensure the detections are correctly categorized into a
minimum of 8 user definable length-based classifications. Ensure vehicle detections
occur at a range of 9 ft. to 250 ft. simultaneously from the RVSD. Ensure the RVSD
unit or accompanying field equipment provides a minimum of 3 hours of local
storage for detection interval settings of 20 seconds to 15 minutes in local storage to
reduce data loss during communications outages.
1. Ensure the RVSD operates in side-fire mode. When operating in side-fire

mode, a single RVSD must simultaneously detect traffic in the maximum
number of lanes as shown on the plans.
16747-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Ensure the RVSD maintains accurate performance in all weather conditions,

including rain, freezing rain, snow, wind, dust, fog and changes in temperature
and light. Ensure RVSD operation continues in rain or snow up to 4 in. per
hour, and the device will not experience degraded performance when encased
in 1/2 in. of ice.
3. Ensure volume data is accurate within 5% of actual for any direction of travel
in nominal conditions. Ensure individual lane accuracy is within 10% of
actual during nominal conditions. Nominal conditions exist when traffic is
flowing at speeds greater than 10 miles per hour, with less than 10% truck
traffic per lane and at least 30% of each vehicle visible above roadway
barriers for true sensor detection.
4. Ensure per vehicle speed data is accurate within 5 MPH for 90% of
measurements. Provide true speed detection via dual radar speed trap without
the requirement to enter average vehicle lengths for the speed calculation.
5. Ensure occupancy data is accurate within 20% of the actual occupancy for any
lane when occupancy is less than 30%. For example, if the actual occupancy
in a lane is 20%, the measured occupancy must be between 16% and 24%.
6. Ensure classification data is accurately determined for 90% of detected

vehicles.
7. Ensure the RVSD automatically configures vehicle direction and that vehicle
direction is accurately determined for 90% of wrong-way vehicles. This data
shall be available simultaneously and in addition to other data as called for in
this specification.
8. Provide test data, using methods required in article 3.03.A., demonstrating or

proving performance.
J. Cabling. Supply the RVSD with a connector cable of the appropriate length for each
installation site.
1. Ensure the connector meets the MIL-C-26482 specification. Provide an

environmentally sealed shell backshell that offers excellent immersion
capability, and is designed to interface with the appropriate MIL-C-26482
connector. Encase all conductors that interface with the connector in a single
jacket and ensure the outer diameter of this jacket is within the backshell’s
cable O.D. range to ensure proper sealing. Ensure the backshell has a
clampbar style strain relief with enough strength to support the cable slack
under extreme weather conditions. Provide the MIL-C-26482 connectors that
provide contacts for all data and power connection.
2. If communication is conducted over the RS-485 or RS-232 bus, the

communication cable must be Belden 9331, or an equivalent cable with the
following specifications:
16747-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
a. Shielded, twisted pairs with a drain wire
b. Nominal Capacitance Conductor to Conductor @ 1Khz <= 26pF/Ft
c. Nominal Conductor DC Resistance @ 68°F <= 15 ohms/1000Ft
d. Single continuous run with no splices allowed
e. Terminated only on the two farthest ends of the cable
K. Communication. Ensure that the RVSD provides communication options that include
RS- 232, RS-485 or TCP/IP. Provide a RVSD which has the ability to support a
variety of baud rates from 9600 to 115200.
1. Ensure the RVSD provides built in RS-232, RS-485 and an internal serial
communication port. Each communication port must support all of the
following baud rates: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200. Additionally,
the RS-232 port must be full-duplex and must support true RTS/CTS
hardware handshaking for interfacing to various communication devices.
2. Data Packets. The RVSD must produce interval data packets containing, as a
minimum:
a. One or more detection zones
b. Collection interval durations
c. Sensor ID
d. 32-bit time stamps indicating end of collection interval
e. Total volume by detection zone
f. Average speed in each detection zone during the collection interval.

Speed value units must be selectable as either miles per hour or
kilometers per hour
g. Occupancy in each detection zone during the collection interval,

reported in 0.1% increments
h. A minimum of 8 vehicle classifications reported as number of vehicles

of each classification identified in each detection zone during the
collection interval
i. Volume in up to 15 user-defined speed bins
j. Volume for both directions of traffic
k. Average headway in seconds
16747-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
l. Average gap in seconds
m. 85th percentile speed in either miles per hour or kilometers per hour
n. Vehicle count for correct and wrong-way vehicles in separate correct

and wrong-way bins
3. Data Packets. The RVSD must produce event (per vehicle) data packets
containing, as a minimum:
a. Sensor ID
b. Lane Assignment
c. Per vehicle speed value in either miles per hour or kilometers per hour.
Wrong-way vehicles shall show a negative speed value
d. Vehicle length
e. Classification using up to 8 user defined classes
f. 32-bit time stamps indicating end of collection interval
g. Range
L. Operating System Software. Provide the RVSD to also include graphical user
interface software that displays all configured lanes and provides visual
representation of all detected vehicles. The graphical interface must operate on
current City of Houston core operating system software. The software must
automatically select the correct baud rate and serial communication port from up to
15 serial communication ports. The software must also operate over a TCP/IP
connection and support a dial-up modem connection.
1. The software must give the operator complete control over the configuration
process.
2. The operator must have the ability to save the configuration information to a
file or reload the RVSD configuration from a file using the graphical user
interface software.
3. Using the installation software, the operator must be able to:
a. change the baud rate on the sensor by selecting baud rates from a drop-
down list
b. add response delays for the communication ports to allow for

communication stabilization.
c. switch between data pushing and data polling, and
16747-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
d. change the RVSD’s settings for Flow Control from none to RTS/CTS
and vice versa.
4. The operator must be able to upload new firmware into non-volatile memory
of the RVSD over any supported communication channel including TCP/IP
networks.
M. Software. Provide any and all programming and software required to support the
RVSD system. Install the programming and software in the appropriate equipment at
the time of acceptance testing. Complete and pass acceptance testing using a stable
release of the programming and software provided.
1. Provide software update(s) free of charge during the warranty period.
N. Manufacturing Requirements. Ensure the assembly of the units adheres to industrial

electronic assembly practices for handling and placement of components.
1. The RVSD must undergo a rigorous sequence of operational testing to ensure

product functionality and reliability. Include the following tests:
a. Functionality testing of all internal subassemblies
b. Unit level burn-in testing of 24 hours duration or greater
c. Final unit functionality testing prior to shipment
2. Provide test results and all associated data for the above testing, for each
purchased RVSD by serial number. Additionally, maintain and make available
manufacturing data for each purchased RVSD by serial number.
3. Externally, the RVSD must be modular in design to facilitate easy

replacement in the field. Ensure the total weight of the RVSD does not exceed
5 lbs.
4. Ensure all external parts are protected against corrosion, fungus growth and
moisture deterioration.
O. FCC. Ensure the RVSD has Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

certification. Display the FCC-ID number on an external label. Ensure each RVSD is
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) certified under CFR 47, Part 15, section
15.245 or15.249 as a field disturbance sensor. Display this certification on an external
label on each device according to the rules set out by the FCC.
1. Provide the RVSD system that is FCC certified under Part 15, Subpart C,
Section 15.245 or 15.249 for low-power, unlicensed, continuous radio
transmitter operation. Assure that the RVSD system will not cause harmful
interference to radio communication in the area of installation. If the operation
of the RVSD system causes harmful interference, correct the interference at
the Contractor’s expense.
16747-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Provide the RVSD that transmits in the 10.50 – 10.55 GHz or 24.00 – 24.25
GHZ frequency band and meets the power transmission and frequency
requirements specified under sections15.245 and 15.249 of CFR 47 across the
operating temperature of the device and over time as the sensor ages.
3. Provide documentation proving compliance to all FCC specifications.
P. Power Requirements. Provide the RVSD that operates either at 12 VDC to 28 VDC
or at 12 VAC to 24 VAC from a separate power supply to be provided as part of the
bid item and ensure it does not draw more than 10 watts of power each.
1. Provide the separate power supply or transformer that operates from 115 VAC
±10%, 60 Hz ±3 Hz.
2. Provide equipment operations that are not affected by the transient voltages,
surges and sags normally experienced on commercial power lines. Check the
local power service to determine if any special design is needed for the
equipment. The extra cost, if required, must be included in the bid of this item.
Q. Wiring. Provide wiring that meets the requirements of the National Electric Code.
Provide wires that are cut to proper length before assembly. Provide cable slacks to
facilitate removal and replacement of assemblies, panels, and modules. Do not
double-back wire to take up slack. Lace wires neatly into cable with nylon lacing or
plastic straps. Secure cables with clamps. Provide service loops at connections.
R. Transient Suppression. Provide DC relays, solenoids and holding coils that have
diodes or other protective devices across the coils for transient suppression.
S. Power Service Protection. Provide equipment that contains readily accessible,

manually resettable or replaceable circuit protection devices (such as circuit
breakers or fuses) for equipment and power source protection.
1. Provide and size circuit breakers or fuses such that no wire, component,
connector, PC board or assembly must be subjected to sustained current in
excess of their respective design limits upon the failure of any single circuit
element or wiring.
T. Fail Safe Provision. Provide equipment that is designed such that the failures of the
equipment will not cause the failure of any other unit of equipment. Ensure automatic
recovery from power failure will be within 15 sec. after resumption of power.
U. Mechanical Requirements. Enclose the RVSD in a Lexan polycarbonate, ultraviolet

resistant material. The unit must be classified as watertight according to the NEMA
250 Standard.
1. Provide the RVSD that will withstand a drop of up to 3 ft. without

compromising its functional and structural integrity.
16747-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Do not use silicone gels or any other material for enclosure sealing that will
deteriorate under prolonged exposure to ultraviolet rays. Ensure the overall
dimensions of the box, including fittings, do not exceed 14 in. x 11 in. x 4 in.
Ensure the overall weight of the box, including fittings, does not exceed 5 lbs.
3. Coat all printed circuit boards with a clear-coat moisture and fungus resistant
material (conformal coating).
4. Ensure external connection for telecommunications and power be made by

means of a single military style multi-pin connector, keyed to preclude
improper connection.
a. Modular Design. Provide equipment that is modular in design to allow

major portions to be readily replaced in the field. Ensure modules of
unlike functions are mechanically keyed to prevent insertion into the
wrong socket or connector.
(1) Identify modules and assemblies clearly with name, model

number, serial number and any other pertinent information
required to facilitate equipment maintenance.
b. Connectors and Harnesses. Provide external connections made by

means of connectors. Provide connectors that are keyed to preclude
improper hookups. Color code and appropriately mark wires to and
from the connectors.
(1) Provide connecting harnesses of appropriate length and

terminated with matching connectors for interconnection with
the communications system equipment.
(2) Provide pins and mating connectors that are plated to improve
conductivity and resist corrosion. Cover connectors utilizing
solder type connections by a piece of heat shrink tubing
securely shrunk to insure that it protects the connection.
c. Environmental Requirements. Provide RVSD capable of continuous

operation over a temperature range of –35°F to +165°F and a humidity
range of 5% to 95% (non- condensing).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Provide equipment designed and constructed with a minimum number of parts,

subassemblies, circuits, cards, and modules to maximize standardization and
commonality.
16747-10
CITY OF HOUSTON
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting and Installation. Install the RVSD according to manufacturer’s

recommendations to achieve the specified accuracy and reliability.
1. Verify, with manufacturer assistance, the final RVSD placement if the RVSD
is to be mounted near large planar surfaces (sound barrier, building, parked
vehicles, etc.) that run parallel to the monitored roadway.
2. Include, at a minimum, radar detector unit, enclosures, connectors, cables,

junction box, mounting equipment and hardware, controller interface boards
and assemblies, local and remote software, firmware, power supply units and
all other support, calibration, and test equipment for the RVSD system.
3. Furnish the RVSD with bracket or band designed to mount directly to a pole
or overhead mast-arm or other structure. Ensure the mounting assembly has
all stainless steel, or aluminum construction, and supports the load of the
RVSD. Incorporate for the mounting assembly a mechanism that can be tilted
in both axes, then locked into place, to provide the optimum area of coverage.
Ensure the mounting bracket is designed and installed to prevent sensor re-
positioning during 80 mph wind conditions.
4. Proper placement, mounting height and orientation of the RVSD systems must
conform to the manufacturer's published requirements for the system
provided. Install the RVSD units as shown on the plans. Analyze each
proposed pole location to assure that the RVSD installation will comply with
the manufacturer’s published installation instructions. Advise the Engineer,
before any trenching or pole installation has taken place, of any need to move
the pole from the location indicated in the plans in order to achieve the
specified detector performance. Confirm equipment placement with the
manufacturer before installing any equipment.
5. Ensure alignment, configuration and any calibration of the RVSD takes less
than 15 minutes per lane once mounting hardware and other installation
hardware are in place. Install RVSD units such that each unit operates
independently and that detectors do not interfere with other RVSD units or
other equipment in the vicinity.
B. Electronic Components. Provide electronic components in accordance with TxDOT

Special Specification 6006, "Electronic Components".
16747-11
CITY OF HOUSTON
C. Mechanical Components. Provide external screws, nuts and locking washers that are
stainless steel. Provide parts made of corrosion resistant material, such as plastic,
stainless steel, anodized aluminum or brass. Protect materials from fungus growth and
moisture deterioration. Separate dissimilar metals by an inert dielectric material.
A. Testing. Perform testing in accordance with TxDOT Special Specification 6005,

“Testing, Training, Documentation, Final Acceptance, and Warranty.” Test all RVSD
to ensure that they comply with all FCC specifications.
1. Ensure the RVSD meets functional performance requirements of article 2.01.I

(Sensor Performance) by the following methods:
2. Verify volume accuracy by performing a manual count on each lane of

detection. When compared to the manual counts, the sensor counts must meet
performance requirements as stated in article 2.01.I.
3. Verify speed accuracy with laser speed gun. Vehicle speeds should be
collected and compared to the per vehicle speed measurement generated by
the RVSD. When compared to the speeds collected via laser, the sensor speed
data must meet performance requirements as stated in article 2.01.I.
4. Verify direction accuracy by ensuring that all lanes are configured with the
correct directionality. Following this configuration, reverse the direction on
one lane and verify that the number of vehicles detected in that lane are
correctly placed in the wrong-way detection bin. When compared to the
manual counts for this lane, the wrong-way sensor counts must meet the
performance requirements as stated in article 2.01.I.
B. Support. Ensure installers and operators of the RVSD are fully trained in the
installation, auto-configuration and use of the device.
1. The manufacturer must train installers and operators to correctly perform the
tasks required to ensure accurate RVSD performance. The amount of training
necessary for each project will be determined by the manufacturer (not less
than 4 hours) and must be included, along with training costs, in the
manufacturer’s quote. In addition, provide technical support to provide
ongoing operator assistance.
C. Technical Assistance. Ensure that a manufacturer's technical representative is

available on site to assist the Contractor's technical personnel at each installation site
and with RVSD equipment installation and communication system configuration.
1. Do not execute the initial powering up of the RVSD without the permission of
the manufacturer's representative.
D. Training. Provide training in accordance with TxDOT Special Specification 6005,

“Testing, Training, Documentation, Final Acceptance and Warranty.”
16747-12
CITY OF HOUSTON
END OF SECTION
16747-13
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION SYSTEM INTEGRATION
SECTION 16748
SYSTEM INTEGRATION
PART 1 GENERAL
A. This Item governs the integration of all furnished equipment as shown on the plans,
as detailed in the Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer. This work consists
of furnishing, installing, testing, terminating, interconnecting and integrating existing
and proposed 2070 Traffic Signal Controllers to a Fiber Optic Ethernet Network.
A. Unit Prices
1. Measurement. This Item will be measured as a lump sum unit.
2. Payment. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this
unit price bid for “System Integration”. This price shall be full compensation
for the preparation, furnishing, and installing all materials, equipment and
incidentals.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. National Transportation Communications for Intelligent Transportation Systems

(ITS) Protocol (NTCIP)
B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code
PART 2 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
16748-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION SYSTEM INTEGRATION
A. Install, interconnect, configure and test the equipment as required to achieve a

complete and fully operational Traffic Signal Ethernet Interconnect system as shown
on the plans, as detailed in the Specifications, as directed by the Engineer, and in
accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and NTCIP.
3.02 INTEGRATION
A. Provide an integrated system that encompasses: 1) installation and integration of new

and existing Traffic Signal Controllers to the proposed Fiber Optic Ethernet network;
installation, configuration and integration of all communications equipment such
asbut not limited to: Ethernet switches, servers, and Fiber Optic Cable necessary for
communicating with the new and existing Traffic Signal Controllers.
B. Install, test and make operational the proposed route (fiber) prior to switching
operations from the existing interconnect system to the proposed Ethernet network.
C. Perform all necessary work to achieve a fully functional and operational system
including all fiber optic routing, terminations, connections, splicing and assignments.
Install and integrate all field and communications components. Provide items not
specifically mentioned or addressed in this specification necessary for a complete and
operational system as described herein. These will not be paid for directly but will be
considered incidental to this Item.
END OF SECTION
16748-2
CITY OF HOUSTON ACCESIBLE PEDESTRIAN
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION PUSH BUTTON STATION
SECTION 16750
ACCESSIBLE PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTON STATION
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Accessible Pedestrian Push Button Station Assembly with control unit and mounting
hardware. The assembly shall be the 2-Wire Navigator Push Button Station and 2-
Wire Navigator Central Control Unit (CCU) as manufactured by Polara Engineering,
Inc.
B. Section 02582 - Traffic Pole Assemblies (Steel)
A. Unit Prices.
1. Payment for pedestrian push button station assemblies is on a unit price basis
for each pedestrian push button assembly.
2. Payment for pedestrian push button station central control units is on a unit
price basis for each central control unit.
3. The price shall be full compensation for furnishing, assembling, installing,

made fully operational and testing the unit, as well as all mounting
attachments, labor, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete
the work.
4. Pedestrian push button station poles including foundation are paid separately
according to Section 02582 - Traffic Pole Assemblies (Steel).
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASQ Z1.4 - Sampling Procedures and Tables for Inspection by Attributes
B. TxDOT - Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (TMUTCD)
1.05 WARRANTY
16750-1
A. A minimum guarantee for both materials and workmanship shall be provided for the
products bid as specified. The guarantee (warranty) period shall begin the day the
City officially accepts the item. Any guarantee work is to be completed within 15
days after receipt of notice of material deficiencies.
B. All material, workmanship and labor furnished shall be covered by

Supplier(s)/Manufacturer(s) guarantee and/or warranty for a minimum period of
thirty-six (36) months. Warranty period shall begin the day the item is received by the
City of Houston, either as new order or warranty repair. Bidder shall also be required
to have resources to complete any required warranty work within fifteen (15) days
after receipt of found defective item. The City of Houston's preference is for all non-
warranty service to be charged a singular flat-rate. Successful bidder will include flat
rate repair cost, if available in bid document for all non-warranty covered repairs. If
flat rate repair charge is not available, then Supplier(s)/Manufacturer(s) will provide
current hourly labor rate, along with any associated minimum charges that may apply.
C. Successful bidder shall bear all expenses connected with return of any material which
the City deems necessary to return for adjustments during guarantee period. Said
work shall be done by manufacturer's representative at no cost to the City.
D. The City of Houston may perform random sample testing on all shipments. Random
sample testing will be completed within 45 days after delivery. The number of
modules tested shall be determined by the quantity of each shipment. The Traffic
Operations Division shall determine the sampling parameters to be used for the
random testing. Acceptance or rejection of the shipment shall conform to ANSI/ASQ
Z1.4 for random sampled shipments.
E. The City of Houston reserves the right to withhold payments which may be due,
should it be discovered that material does not meet specifications and/or claims of
bidder.
F. Supplier(s)/Manufacturer(s) shall make all engineering data, diagrams, software

changes or improvements, which increases performance of equipment purchased
under this bid, available to the City of Houston at no additional cost during guarantee
period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
2.02 ACCESSIBLE PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTON STATION
A. The assembly and manufacturing process for all internal electronic components shall
be adequately supported to withstand mechanical shock and vibration from high
winds and other sources.
16750-2
B. Weather-proof speaker protected by vandal proof screen.
C. Central Control Unit (CCU) for the pushbutton detector unit that resides in the Traffic
Signal Controller Cabinet capable of controlling a minimum of 12 units using no
more than one pair of wires for each phase. The CCU must be capable of controlling
up to 4 phases and all inputs and outputs shall have Transient Voltage Protection.
1. Pedestrian Walk / Don’t Walk inputs: optically isolated 80-150 Volts AC/DC
5 mA maximum.
2. General purpose outputs and pedestrian outputs: optically isolated 36 Volts

AC/DC peak 0.3A solid state fused contact closure.
3. Fault Output: normally open and closed relay contacts 125 Volts AC/DC 1A
maximum.
4. A, B, C, D PBS power outputs: nominal 22 Volts DC, short circuit protected –

auto recovering.
5. General Purpose Inputs: 10-36 Volts AC/DC peak 10 mA maximum, optically

isolated.
6. Environmental: operating and storage -30˚F (-34˚C) to 165˚F (74˚C) 0-100%

humidity non-condensing.
D. Each unit will contain a vibrating tactile arrow to provide a tactile representation of
the status of the WALK indication. The arrow shall contrast with the background.
E. Confirmation of button push via latching LED, sound, and vibrotactile bounce.
F. Vibrating tactile arrow shall be able to be adjusted for directional indication.
G. Pedestrian push buttons shall be at least 2 inches in diameter or width, contrast

visually with the housing, and require 5 lbf (pound force) maximum force.
H. The pushbutton assembly shall be die-cast aluminum, powder coated from aluminum
alloy 319 or equivalent.
I. The unit shall be fabricated free of voids, pits, dents, molding sand and excessive
foundry grinding marks. All design radii shall be smooth and intact. Exterior surface
finish shall be smooth and cosmetically acceptable by being free of molding fins,
cracks and other exterior blemishes.
J. Assembly color shall be yellow.
K. Mounting bolts shall be brass or stainless steel.
16750-3
L. Push button unit shall have an actuation indication which will activate upon
depression of the push button. If actuation indication is a light then it shall remain on
until the next walk cycle.
M. All push button assemblies shall be mounted to the poles by drilling and tapping.
Stainless Steel ¼ - 20 bolts shall be used to mount the push button assemblies to
poles. Self-tapping screws shall not be used. Stainless steel strapping shall not be
allowed.
N. Attached crossing signs shall be 9" x 15" R10-3e, as per the Texas Manual on
Uniform Traffic Control Devices (TMUTCD).
O. The back panel portion of the push button assembly shall be designed to
accommodate pole diameters from 4" to 14".
2.03 AUDIBLE INDICATIONS
A. A push button locator tone shall sound at each push button.
B. Locator tones should be audible 6 to 12 feet from the push button or to the building
line, whichever is less.
C. Locator tones shall have a duration of 0.15 seconds or less, and shall repeat at 1-
second intervals.
D. Automatic volume adjustments in response to ambient traffic sound level shall be

provided up to a maximum of 89 dB. Locator tone and verbal messages shall be no
more than 5 dB louder than ambient sound.
E. All sounds must automatically adjust to ambient noise levels over a 60 dB range.
F. Standard locating tone during Don’t Walk (and clearance if desired) and cuckoo,
chirp, or standard voice message during walk.
G. Standard locating tone, custom sound, or verbal countdown during PED clearance.
H. Most sounds can have minimum and maximum volume independently set.
I. Extended button push can turn on, boost, volumes, and/or mute all sounds except
those on activated crosswalk.
J. The tone or voice volume, measured at 36 inches from the APS, should be 2dB
minimum and 5 dB maximum above the ambient noise.
K. Cuckoo - 1250 Hz and 1000 Hz.
L. Chirp - 2700 Hz and 1700 Hz.
16750-4
M. Substituting Cuckoo and Chirp sounds with "walk" and "don't walk" audible sounds
is optional.
N. Push button locator tone different from cuckoo or chirp.
O. Extended button press which can be used to request a louder WALK signal and
locator tone for subsequent clearance interval.
P. System shall allow for independent volume control for locate tones, clearance, and
walk tones.
Q. All sounds shall be synchronized to reduce sound clutter.
R. Custom message and sound options definable by customer include:
1. Custom locating tone
2. Informational Message
3. Custom walk sounds/message
4. Custom clearance sound
5. Multiple languages (up to three, selectable by user)
6. Street name in Braille on the sign
A. The Accessible Pedestrian Push Button Station Assembly (pole unit and central
control unit) shall be rated for use in the ambient operating temperature range of -
40°C to +65°C (-40°F to +150°F).
B. Push button shall be rated for minimum of 20 million operations with >2 lb. actuation
force.
2.05 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The Accessible Pedestrian Push Button Station Assembly shall operate over a voltage
range of 95 to 130 VAC, 60 Hz. E. TRANSIENT
2.06 VOLTAGE PROTECTION
A. The on-board circuitry of a module shall include voltage surge protection, to

withstand high-repetition noise transients and low-repetition high-energy transients.
2.07 INPUT PROTECTION
16750-5
A. At the point of entry to the module for each input, provide two 0.5-Ohm, 10-watt
wire-wound power resistors with 0.2 micro Henries inductance (one on the AC+ Line
& one on the AC- Line). Provide one 20 Joule surge arrestor between AC+ to AC-. A
0.68 microfarad capacitor must be placed between AC+ & AC- (between the resistor
& arrestor).
2.08 POWER FAILURES
A. Whenever there is a loss of power to the "Walk" or "Don't Walk" for a period greater
than 2.0 seconds, the sound shall be deactivated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Supplier(s)/Manufacturer(s) shall have field engineers or technicians available on

request to assure satisfactory initial operation, and to consult with City Traffic
Engineer, or City Traffic Engineer’s representative, on any special circuitry that may
END OF SECTION
16750-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION CCTV FIELD EQUIPMENT
SECTION 16780
CCTV FIELD EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Furnish and install closed circuit television (CCTV) field equipment.
A. Unit Prices
1. Measurement: This Item will be measured as each unit furnished, installed,

and tested.
2. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and
bid for “CCTV Field Equipment”. This price is for equipment, cables and
connectors; documentation and testing; and labor, materials, warranty,
training and incidentals.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. IEC 60529 - Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code)
B. NEMA TS2 - Traffic Controller Assemblies with NTCIP Requirements
C. TxDOT Special Specification 6005 - Testing, Training, Documentation, Final

D. TxDOT Special Specification 6006 - Electronic Components.
A. Perform documentation, testing and training in accordance with TxDOT Special

Specification 6005, “Testing, Training, Documentation, Final Acceptance, and
Warranty”.
16780-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Prior to delivery and installation of "CCTV Field Equipment", sample units will be
delivered to TranStar for evaluation by TranStar IS personnel to confirm
compatibility with TranStar systems.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Provide new, corrosion resistant materials in accordance with the details shown on
the plans and this item.
1. Provide CCTV field equipment including, but not limited to, the following:
2. Color video camera units.
3. Camera lenses, filters, control circuits and accessories.
4. Camera housings.
5. Medium duty pan and tilt units.
6. Camera control receivers.
7. Video and camera control and power cable harnesses, connectors and coaxial
cable.
8. Source ID Generator.
9. Surge protection equipment.
B. Functional Requirements. Provide color, PTZ CCTV Cameras in accordance with the
plans and specifications.
1. Provide field equipment that operates in all weather conditions and able to
withstand a wind load of 120 mph without permanent damage to mechanical
and electrical equipment, unless otherwise shown on the plans.
2. Provide equipment from the same manufacturer at each field location. All
equipment shall be compatible with existing City of Houston and Houston
TranStar infrastructure.
C. Electrical and Mechanical Requirements.
1. Video Camera Unit. Provide color video cameras of solid state design, and
that meet the following requirements:
a. Top of pole mount or outdoor mini-dome type, as indicated on the

plans for each location
16780-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
b. Color Image: solid state 1/4" Exview HAD or interline transfer CCD
sensor
c. Resolution: 520 horizontal TV lines minimum
d. Sensitivity: 0.1 fc or less at 1/60 second shutter (color mode).
e. Signal to Noise Ratio: 50 dB minimum (AGC off)
f. White Balance: Continuous automatic
g. Physical mounting: Either “Top of Pole” or “Environmental Dome” as

indicated for each location on the plans.
h. Video Interface: EIA-170A, 75 Ohm, BNC connector.
i. PTZ control Interface: Ethernet, RS-232 or RS-422 using one of the

TranStar supported protocols (see section below).
j. Title: On Screen display with a minimum of 16 characters.
k. Weatherproof enclosure conforming to IP66 (IEC 60529 standard) or

better.
l. Sun shield to reduce heating from direct sunlight.
m. Pan: 360 degrees continuous rotation. Variable speed with at least

80 deg/sec maximum. No dead zone.
n. Tilt Range: -90 degrees to +90 degrees from level.
o. Ambient Operating Conditions: -29.2F to 165F (-34C to 74C) Per

NEMA TS2, para. 2.1.5.1, using fig. 2.1 test profile.
2. Camera Lens. Provide an integral lens assembly for each camera with the
following features:
a. When coupled with the imaging sensor in the camera, the wide angle
position shall have a horizontal view of fifty-five (55) degrees or more,
and the telephoto position shall have a horizontal view of two (2)
degrees or less.
b. There shall be no change in focus when zooming from full wide angle
to full telephoto. For the purposes of this requirement, the viewing
angle shall be determined by the lens only, and shall not include the
use of any available digital zoom capability.
c. An auto iris shall be provided to maintain white levels at 100% over

the normal range of lighting changes, from full sunlight down to the
maximum nighttime sensitivity of the camera.
16780-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
d. Minimum F-stop no greater than: F1.4 (wide), F4.2 (telephoto)
e. The lens shall not introduce any measurable chromatic aberation or

distortion at the maximum camera resolution.
f. Provide a lens with capabilities for remote control of zoom, focus and
iris operations. Provide mechanical or electrical means to protect the
motors from overrunning in extreme positions. The lens and control
system must be capable of both auto iris, and remote manual iris
operation.
3. Camera Housing. Furnish and install an environmental resistant and

tamperproof housing pressurized to 5 psi dry Nitrogen with Schrader purge
fitting and 20 psi relief valve for each camera.
a. The internal humidity of the housing must be less than 10%, when
sealed and pressurized. Securely place desiccant packs inside the
housing to absorb any residual moisture and maintain internal
humidity at 10% or less.
b. Construct the viewing window in such a way that unrestricted camera

views can be obtained at all camera and lens positions.
c. Provide a sun shield to shield the entire housing from direct sunlight
and vertical rainfall. Construct it in such a way as to allow the free
passage of air between the housing and the shield, but it must not form
a “sail” to place an excessive load on the pan/tilt unit in high winds.
d. Provide with an internal 18 Watt low temperature heater with its own
thermostat control in each housing.
e. Provide lightning protection as shown on the plans in each housing.
4. Pan-Tilt Zoom.
a. The PTZ control protocol shall be one of the following protocols

supported by the TxDOT LoneStar software used at Houston TranStar:
(1) American Dynamics
(2) Cohu
(3) Cohu 382x, and 383x
(4) Cohu 3855
(5) CohuiDome2lcu
(6) CohuiDomeLCU
16780-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
(7) CohuMPC111
(8) PelcoD
(9) QC
(10) VC-C50i
(11) Vicon
b. The contractor shall submit a sample unit to the City project manager
so that compliance with this requirement can be verified by Houston
TranStar IS.
5. Camera Control. Provide camera and pan/tilt/zoom functions that are operable
via RS- 232 serial communications. Provide remote control functions that
meet the following specific requirements:
a. Camera remote control functions: Provide units with, as a minimum,

control and drive circuits for the following functions:
(1) DSP Functions: Zoom, Long-Term Exposure, Auto-Focus,

Auto/Manual focus Control, and I.D. Generator Operation.
(2) Pan/Tilt Position preset.
(3) Pan Left.
(4) Pan Right.
(5) Tilt Up.
(6) Tilt Down.
(7) Zoom and focus position preset.
(8) Zoom In.
(9) Zoom Out.
(10) Focus
(11) Manual and Auto Iris control.
(12) Iris Open.
(13) Iris Close.
16780-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
b. Power Supplies: Provide power supplies required to operate the

camera, pan/tilt, and lens movements and include them with the
housing, camera control receiver, and pan/tilt unit.
c. Communications Interface: Provide an RS-232 interface for control of

camera Pan / Tilt / Zoom. Use a minimum 9600 Baud data rate. Data
must be sent asynchronously as either 8 bit with no parity, or 7 bit with
parity. Supply complete hardware interface and protocol description to
the City of Houston as part of the required documentation.
d. Power Input: 115 VAC plus or minus 10%, 60 Hz ± 3 Hz, 50 W.

Maximum.
e. Connectors: Provide and install connectors which are compatible with

the communications equipment interface. Use Connectors for
connections at the pan/tilt mechanism. Make connections through a
pigtail with a connector on it coming out of the bottom center of the
pan/tilt unit. Provide the connector on the pigtail that is an AMP type
connector. Provide connections down to the pole to the transmission
cables to this connector. Supply mating connectors. Provide connector
pins and mating connectors that are plated to ensure good electrical
connection and resist corrosion. Use pressure tight multi-conductor
MS-type cable connectors for camera connections.
6. Source ID Generator: Provide the built-in ID Generator that inserts camera ID

over each of the camera generated videos.
a. Submit a list of proposed camera identification text to the Engineer for

approval before the ID is programmed.
b. Once programmed, the programmed ID must automatically be

displayed with its associated video signal.
c. The source ID generator shall automatically “pass through” video in

case of equipment failure.
7. Surge Protection.
a. All conductors (except for grounding) to the camera, pan/tilt/zoom,

communications equipment, and ground or pole mounted cabinet, shall
have surge protection at both ends of the conductor.
b. The surge protection device shall be located as close as practical to the

point where the wiring enters the enclosure, or for devices with no
enclosure, where the wiring terminates at the device.
c. For devices where there is no room in the enclosure (such as a

camera), a separate external weather proof enclosure may be added for
the surge protection devices.
16780-6
CITY OF HOUSTON
d. Any external surge protection enclosure shall be located in such a

manner as to minimize the length of the wiring between the surge
protectors and the protected device.
e. Each device shall utilize a primary stage Gas Discharge Tube (GDT),
and a secondary stage Silicon Avalanche Diode (SAD) as the active
protection medium, and a series solid- state resettable fuse (PTC).
Clamp voltages for each device shall be appropriate for the voltages on
the conductor that they protect.
f. The surge protection devices shall be grounded to a #6 solid copper

wire that connects each device to a common ground rod point.
g. Protection devices within a common enclosure may be grounded by a

short wire to a common point in the enclosure, which in turn is
connected to a wire that connects to the ground rod.
h. Devices not in the same enclosure shall each have a separate ground
wire that connects to the ground rod.
i. Devices outside an enclosure shall not share the same ground wire
with devices in an enclosure. In general, ground wires should be kept
as short as possible.
j. Ground wires inside metal conduits (or metal poles) shall be bonded to
the conduit (or pole) at each end.
k. The ground rod shall be driven into the ground a minimum of ten (10)
feet.
8. Power Requirements. Provide CCTV field equipment that meets its specified
requirements when the input power is 115 VAC ± 10%, 60 Hz ± 3 Hz. The
maximum power required must not exceed 350 W.
a. Provide equipment operations that are not affected by the transient

voltages, surges and sags normally experienced on commercial power
lines. Check the local power service to determine if any special design
is needed for the equipment. The extra cost, if required, must be
included in the bid of this item.
9. Primary Input Power Interruption. Provide CCTV field equipment that meets
the requirements in Section 2.1.4. “Power Interruption” of the NEMA
Standard TS2 for Traffic Control System.
10. Power Service Transients. Provide CCTV field equipment that meets the
requirements of Section 2.1.6., “Transients, Power Service” of the NEMA
Standard TS2.
16780-7
CITY OF HOUSTON
11. Wiring. Provide wiring that meets the requirements of the National Electric
Code. Provide wires that are cut to proper length before assembly. Do not
doubled-back wire to take up slack. Lace wires neatly into cable with nylon
lacing or plastic straps. Secure cables with clamps. Provide service loops at
connections.
a. Provide coaxial cable between the camera and the communications

equipment interface that is of the RG-59 type with a stranded center
conductor and 100% shield coverage
b. Provide coaxial cable that has a cellular polyethylene dielectric.
12. Transient Suppression. Provide DC relays, solenoids and holding coils that
have diodes or other protective devices across the coils for transient
suppression.
13. Power Service Protection. Provide equipment that contains readily accessible,
manually resettable or replaceable circuit protection devices (such as circuit
breakers or fuses) for equipment and power source protection.
a. Provide and size circuit breakers or fuses such that no wire,

component, connector, PC board or assembly must be subjected to
sustained current in excess of their respective design limits upon the
failure of any single circuit element or wiring.
14. Fail Safe Provision. Provide equipment that is designed such that the failures
of the equipment must not cause the failure of any other unit of equipment.
15. Modular Design. Provide CCTV field equipment that is modular in design to
allow major portions to be readily replaced in the field. Identify modules and
assemblies clearly with name, model number, serial number and any other
pertinent information required to facilitate equipment maintenance.
16. Connectors and Harnesses. Provide external connections made by means of

connectors. Provide connectors that are keyed to preclude improper hookups.
Color code and/or appropriately mark wires to and from the connectors.
a. Provide connecting harnesses of appropriate length and terminated

with matching connectors for interconnection with the
communications system equipment.
b. Provide pins and mating connectors that are plated to improve

conductivity and resist corrosion. Cover connectors utilizing solder
type connections by a piece of heat shrink tubing securely shrunk to
ensure that it protects the connection.
D. Environmental Design Requirements. Provide equipment that meets its specified

requirements during and after subjecting to any combination of the following
conditions.
16780-8
CITY OF HOUSTON
1. Ambient temperature range of -29.2F to 165F (-34C to 74C)
2. Temperature shock not to exceed 30°F per hour during which the relative
humidity must not exceed 95%.
3. Relative humidity range not to exceed 95% over the temperature range of
40°F to 110°F.
4. Moisture condensation on exterior surfaces caused by temperature changes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION
A. General. Provide equipment that utilizes the latest available techniques for design and
construction with a minimum number of parts, subassemblies, circuits, cards, and
modules to maximize standardization and commonality.
B. Electronic Components. Provide electronic components in accordance with TxDOT

Special Specification 6006, “Electronic Components”.
C. Mechanical Components. Provide external screws, nuts and locking washers that are
stainless steel; no self-tapping screws will be used. Provide parts made of corrosion
resistant material, such as plastic, stainless steel, anodized aluminum or brass. Protect
materials from fungus growth and moisture deterioration. Separate dissimilar metals
by an inert dielectric material.
END OF SECTION
16780-9
CITY OF HOUSTON
2023 STANDARD SPECIFICATION GPS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
SECTION 16785
GPS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Furnish, install, and make fully operational a GPS Serial Communications Module at
designated locations as shown on the plans and as detailed in accordance with these
specifications. Use the same manufacturer and model for each GPS Serial
Communications Module. The GPS Serial Communications Module provides a
reliable and independent GPS time reference for 2070 controller applications.
A. Unit Prices
1. Measurement: This item will be measured as each unit furnished, installed,

made fully functional and tested in accordance with these special
specifications or as directed by the Engineer. A unit will include one (1) GPS
Serial Communications Module meeting all specifications, standards and
requirements contained herein, antenna and antenna cabling back to module,
all mounting hardware, manufacturer’s operation manual, required testing
results, manufacturers technical specification, and the cost of all materials,
training, warranty, equipment, and all accessories necessary to the complete
installation of the unit.
2. Payment: Payment for the work performed and materials furnished in

accordance with this item will be paid for at the unit price bid for “GPS
Communications Module.” This price will include all equipment described
under this Item with all antenna, cables and connectors; all documentation and
testing and will also include the cost of furnishing all labor, materials,
software, warranty, training, equipment, and incidentals.
1.04 REFERNCES
A. TxDOT Special Specification 6006, "Electronic Components”
1.05 SUBMITTALS
16785-1
CITY OF HOUSTON
A. Manufacturers’ cut sheets / specifications and software for all equipment proposed
under these specifications shall be submitted to the City of Houston’s Traffic Signal
and Operations branch at Houston TranStar (713-881-3172) prior to construction.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. All equipment, materials and other appurtenances will be warranted by the

manufacturer for five years following the acceptance of the system by City of
Houston. The warranty will include the specific installation characteristics for the
geographic region and project limits.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Provide a GPS Serial Communications Module unit that meets the following
requirements.
B. General Requirements.
1. Provide only equipment that is new, corrosion resistant and in strict

accordance with the details shown on the plans and in the specifications.
Provide a GPS Serial Communications Module that is fully compatible with
the 2070 controller.
C. GPS Serial Communications Module.
1. Provide a GPS Serial Communications Module unit that has the following
2070 controller interface features:
a. GPS receiver operates in SP3 or SP1 slots in the back of the 2070
controller.
b. Microwave OS-9 clock update application included (operates with any

2070-1A or - 1B CPU Module)
c. Communicates to 2070 via Din 95P connector
d. Tracking LED that indicates GPS satellite acquisition status
D. GPS Antenna
1. Provide a GPS Serial Communications Module unit with a GPS Antenna that
has the following features:
a. 28dB gain
b. 3m Cable
16785-2
CITY OF HOUSTON
c. SMA Male
E. C22S Serial Port
1. Provide a GPS Serial Communications Module unit with a C22S Serial Port
that has the following features:
a. DB9 Female
b. up to 38,400 bps
c. Electrically-isolated
d. 2070 SP2/SP4
e. Full modem control when used as SP2 (RTS/CTS/DCD)
F. Additional Features.
1. Provide an Ethernet Media Converter unit that has the following additional
features:
a. Visual Indicators to display status of the following:
(1) GPS satellite acquisition
(2) Transmitting (TX)/Receiving (RX) for GPS connections
(3) Transmitting (TX)/Receiving (RX) for C22S serial connections
G. Dimensions.
1. Provide an Ethernet Media Converter with dimensions that do not exceed the
following maximums:
a. Height: 5 in.
b. Width: 1 6/8 in.
c. Depth: 8 3/4 in.
d. Weight: 2 lb.
H. Power.
1. Provide a GPS Serial Communications Module that meets the following

power specifications:
a. 125mA @ 12V
16785-3
CITY OF HOUSTON
b. LED power status indicator
I. Environmental.
1. Provide a GPS Serial Communications Module that is designed to operate in

the following environmental conditions:
J. -40ºC to 85ºC operating temperature range

Operation.
1. Once the GPS Communication Serial Module acquires satellite

communication (as shown by LED indicator), the GPS unit shall then operate
as follows:
a. It shall have the operating software of the 2070 controller interface

with the GPS Communication Module to sync the date of the 2070
controller once per minute.
b. It shall have the operating software of the 2070 controller interface

with the GPS Communication Module to sync the time of the 2070
controller once per minute.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION
A. General.
construction with a minimum number of parts, subassemblies, circuits, cards,
and modules to maximize standardization and commonality.
B. Electronic Components.
1. Provide this item in accordance with TxDOT Special Specification 6006 -

"Electronic Components".
C. Mechanical Components.
1. Provide external screws, nuts and locking washers that are stainless steel; no
self-tapping screws will be used. Provide parts made of corrosion resistant
material, such as plastic, stainless steel, anodized aluminum or brass. Protect
materials from fungus growth and moisture deterioration. Separate dissimilar
metals by an inert dielectric material.
16785-4
CITY OF HOUSTON
D. Documentation Requirements.
1. Provide one (1) copy of the manufacturer’s operation manual at each

installation location. Deliver 10 additional paper copies of the manufacturer’s
operation manual, plus an electronic copy (in either .doc or .pdf format) to the
Engineer prior to the first GPS Serial Communications Module installation.
E. Testing.
1. City of Houston reserves the right to do testing on GPS Serial

Communications Modules to ensure quality assurance before installations and
random sampling of units being provided to the City. GPS Communication
Modules that fail will be removed from the Prequalified Products List (QPL).
City of Houston’s QPL testing procedures will include the following:
a. GPS Serial Communication Module will meet all criteria of the

specification.
b. GPS unit shall demonstrate all of the operations described in 2.01.J

section this specification.
c. GPS Communication Serial Module and all of its component will be

tested in an environmental chamber (temperature ranges from -40 ºC
to 85 ºC).
F. Experience Requirements.
1. Meet the following requirements, as a minimum, for Contractor or designated

subcontractors involved in the installation and testing of the GPS Serial
Communication equipment:
2. Three years experience in the installation of GPS equipment.
3. Two installed systems where GPS Communications Modules are installed and
the systems have been in continuously satisfactory operation for at least two
(2) year. Submit as proof, photographs or other supporting documents, and the
names, addresses and telephone numbers of the operating personnel who can
be contacted regarding the system.
4. Provide necessary documentation of subcontractor qualifications pursuant to

contract award.
G. Technical Assistance.
1. Ensure that a manufacturer's technical representative is available on site to

assist the technical personnel at each installation site and with GPS equipment
installation and communication system configuration.
16785-5
CITY OF HOUSTON
2. Do not execute the initial powering up of the GPS equipment without the
END OF SECTION
16785-6

2023 Division 02-16 - Standard Construction Specific

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2023 Division 02-16 - Standard Construction Specific

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2023 Division 02-16 - Standard Construction Specific

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2023 Standard

• 02871 – Bike Racks • 16743 – Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)

• 02221 Removing Existing Pavements, Structures, New Standard Details:

New Specifications: New Standard Details:

• 02445 – Jack and Bore/Jack and Mine/Pilot Tube • None

Specifications with major updates: • None

• 02441 – Microtunneling Standard Details Retired/Deleted:

• 02447 – Augering Pipe and Conduit

New Specifications: New Standard Details (Continued):

Specifications with major updates: Standard Details with major updates:

• 02082 – Precast Concrete Manholes • 02091-01 – Non-Metallic Frame and Cover

• 02751 - Concrete Paving • 02741-01 - Hot-Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement

DIVISION 02-16 SPECIFICATIONS

Section Title Pages

DIVISION 2- SITE WORK

EXCAVATION AND FILL

SUBGRADE AND ROADBED

TUNNELING, BORING AND JACKING

FOUNDATION AND LOAD BEARING ELEMENTS

02526 WATER METERS...................................................................................................................13

ELECTRICAL AND COMMUNICATION STRUCTURES

CULVERTS AND MANUFACTURED CONSTRUCTION

BOUND BASE COURSES

02711 HOT MIX ASPHALT BASE COURSE....................................................................................9

CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS

SITE IMPROVEMENTS AND AMENITIES

SHRUB AND TREE TRANSPLANTING

LAWNS AND GRASS

SITE RESTORATION AND REHABILITATION

03315 CONCRETE FOR UTILITY CONSTRUCTION ..................................................................17

04061 MORTAR. .................................................................................................................................5

05501 METAL FABRICATIONS ........................................................................................................5

09901 PROTECTIVE COATINGS ....................................................................................................32

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13111 CATHODIC PROTECTION FOR WATER TANK INTERIORS ...........................................7

15640 JOINT BONDING AND ELECTRICAL ISOLATION............................................................9

16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................................4

*Bold Specifications have technical revisions or are new.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MANHOLES

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

1.02 REALTED SECTIONS

A. Section 01270 – Measurement and Payment

B. Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures

C. Section 02090 – Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers

D. Section 02317 – Excavation and Backfill for Utilities

E. Section 02321 – Cement Stabilized Sand

F. Section 02533 – Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers

G. Section 02911 – Topsoil

H. Section 02921 – Hydro Mulch Seeding

I. Section 02922 – Sodding

J. Section 03315 – Concrete for Utility Construction

K. Section 04061 – Mortar

1.03 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

3. Payment for pile-supported concrete foundation used for unstable subgrade

C. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.

D. ASTM C 923 - Standard Specifications for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced

G. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of

I. ASTM D 2996 - Standard Specification for Filament-wound Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber-

J. ASTM D 2997 - Standard Specification for Centrifugally Cast Fiberglass (Glass-

L. ASTM F 2510 – Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced